IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


4^ 


4^ 


1.0     ^12^  1^ 

itt  122 


I.I 


S  I&   120 


^ 


// 


'/ 


FhotogFaphic 

^Sdaices 

Corporation 


1 


v 


k*^' 


5V 


<> 


23  WIST  MAIN  STRHT 

VtflBSTeR,N.Y.  MStO 

(716it71-4S03 


'^ 


r 


A. 


\ 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHIVI/ICIVIH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historicai  IVIicroreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  da  microraproductions  historiques 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notaa/Notas  tachniquaa  at  bibllographiquaa 


Tha  Inatltuta  haa  attamptad  to  obtain  tha  baat 
original  copy  availabia  for  filming.  Faaturaa  of  thia 
copy  which  may  ba  bibllographically  uniqua, 
which  may  altar  any  of  tha  imagaa  in  tha 
raproduction.  or  which  may  aignif  icantly  changa 
tha  uaual  mathpd  of  filming,  ara  chackad  balow. 


D 


Colourad  covara/ 
Couvartura  da  coulaur 


I      I   Covara  damagad/ 


D 


Couvartura  andommagAe 


Covara  raatorad  and/or  laminatad/ 
Couvartura  raataurte  at/ou  pallicul6a 


n   Cover  titia  missing/ 
La  tit 


re  de  couverture  manque 


r~y  Coloured  maps/ 


D 
D 
D 
D 

D 


D 


Cartes  gAographiques  en  couieur 

Coloured  inic  (I.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 
Encre  de  couieur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 


Coloured  plates  and/or  illustrations/ 
Planches  et/ou  illustrationa  en  couieur 


Bound  with  other  material/ 
ReilA  avac  d'autres  documenta 

Tight  binding  may  cause  shadowa  or  distortion 
along  interior  margin/ 

La  re  liure  aarrie  paut  cauaar  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
diatortion  la  long  de  la  marge  intirieurn 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  ae  paut  que  certaines  pagea  blanches  ajouttes 
lors  d'une  restauration  apparaiaaant  dana  la  taxte, 
mala,  lorsque  cela  Atait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
paa  AtA  filmAea. 

Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  supplAmentalres; 


L'Institut  a  microfilmi  la  mailleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  4t6  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  details 
da  cet  exemplaire  qui  sont  peut-Atre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique.  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  mAthode  normale  de  filmage 
aont  IndiquAs  ci-daaaoua. 


I      I   Coloured  pagea/ 


D 


Pages  de  couieur 

Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagias 

Pagea  restored  and/oi 

Pages  restaurAea  et/ou  pelliculAea 

Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxe< 
Pages  dAcolorAes,  tachettes  ou  piquAas 

Pages  detached/ 
Pages  dttachtes 

Showthrough/ 
Transparence 

Quality  of  prir 

Quality  inAgala  de  I'impreaaion 

Includes  supplementary  materii 
Compreiiu  du  material  auppiimantaira 

Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Edition  diaponibia 


r~n  Pages  damaged/ 

I     I  Pagea  restored  and/or  laminated/ 

r~T  Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 

I      I  Pages  detached/ 

rry  showthrough/ 

I      I  Quality  of  print  varies/ 

I      I  Includes  supplementary  material/ 

|~~|  Only  edition  available/ 


Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
alips,  tissuaa.  etc.,  have  been  ref limed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pacias  totalament  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata,  une  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  it6  filmtes  A  nouveau  de  fa^on  A 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


Thaeo 
to  the 


Thelm 
posslbl 
of  the 
filming 


Orlgini 
beginn 
the  las 
aion.  o 
other  fl 
first  pi 
alon.  ai 
or  illus 


The  las 
ahall  c< 
TINUEI 
¥vhlcha 

Mapa,  I 
differei 
entirely 
beginni 
right  ai 
require 
metho< 


This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  film*  su  taux  de  reduction  indiquA  ci-deaaous. 

10X  14X  18X  22X 


26X 


30X 


y 

12X 


16X 


20X 


24X 


28X 


32X 


lair* 
I  dAtails 
|u«s  du 
It  modifier 
ig*r  una 
a  filmaga 


Tha  copy  fllmad  har*  haa  baan  raproduead  thanka 
to  tha  ganaroalty  of: 

Library  Oiviiion 

Provincial  AicMvtt  of  Britiih  Columbia 

Tha  imagaa  appaarino  Hara  ara  tha  iMat  quality 
poaalbia  eonaMarlno  tha  condition  and  lagibillty 
of  tha  original  copy  and  in  kaaping  with  tha 
filming  contract  apaelfleationa. 


L'mamplalra  f  ilm4  f  ut  raproduit  grica  i  la 
g4n4roaltA  da: 

Library  Division 

Provincial  Archiva*  of  British  Columbia 

Laa  Imagaa  auhrantaa  ont  4t*  raproduitas  avac  la 
plua  grand  aoir,  compta  tanu  da  la  condition  at 
da  la  nattatA  da  I'axamplaira  filmA.  at  an 
conformity  avac  laa  conditions  du  contrat  da 
filmaga. 


iu6es 


Original  copias  in  printad  papar  covara  ara  fllmad 
baglnning  with  tha  front  covar  and  anding  on 
tha  laat  paga  with  a  printad  or  lilustratad  impras- 
sk>n.  or  tha  back  covar  whan  appropriate.  All 
othar  original  copias  ara  filmed  beginning  on  the 
f  irat  page  with  a  printed  or  illuatratad  impres- 
•ion.  and  anding  on  the  lest  paga  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


Les  eNempiairas  origlnaux  dont  la  couvarture  an 
papier  est  ImprimAe  sont  filmte  en  commen^ent 
par  la  premier  plat  at  en  terminent  salt  par  la 
darniire  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'Impression  ou  d'illustratlon.  solt  par  la  second 
plat,  salon  ie  cas.  Tous  les  eutres  exemplaires 
origlnaux  sont  filmte  en  commenpant  par  la 
prami4re  paga  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'Impression  ou  d'illustration  at  en  terminent  per 
la  darniAre  paga  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  eech  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  — ^  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  tha  symbol  ▼  (meaning  "END"). 
whichever  applies. 


Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparattra  sur  la 
darniire  imege  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  Ie 
cas:  la  symbols  — »•  signifie  "A  SUiVRE".  Ie 
symbols  ▼  signifie  "FIN". 


sire 


Meps.  pletes.  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  end  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  es 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


Les  certes.  plenches.  tableeux.  etc.,  peuvent  Atre 
filmAs  A  des  taux  de  reduction  diffArents. 
Lorsque  Ie  document  est  trop  grend  pour  Atre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clichA.  il  est  film*  A  partir 
de  I'angle  supAriaur  gauche,  de  gauche  i  droite. 
et  de  t  ..^ut  en  bes.  en  prenant  la  nombra 
d'images  nAcessaira.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
illustrent  la  mAthoda. 


by  errata 
ned  to 

lant 

una  peiura. 

fa^on  A 


1 

2 

3 

32X 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

UNITED  STATES 


EXPLORING  EXPEDITION. 


M.u 


UNITED   STATES 


EXPLORING  EXPEDITION. 


DURING  THE  YEARS 


1838,  1839,  1810,  1811,  1812. 


UNDKR  TIIK  CoMMANr)  n  i' 


CHARLES  WILKES,   U.S.N. 


ETHNOGRAPHY  AND  PHILOLOGY. 


nv 


HORATIO     HALE, 


PHILOLOGIST  OF  THE  EXPEDITION. 


i'nn,.u)Rr,i'Hi.\: 

LEA     AND    B  L  A  N  C  H  A  R  D 

1846. 


/    ^ 


CONTENTS, 


PAGE 

ALPHABET „ 

ETIIXOGIIAIMIK'AI,  PART. 

OCEA.NirA 3 

TOI.VNKSIA 4 

MEl.ANKSIA ^■, 

VITI,  OH  THE  KKEJEE  GROUP.. 17 

MIfllO.NESIA fiS, 

TOBI.OR  WRD  NORTH'S  ISLAND 77 

BANARE.  OH  ASCENSION  ISLAND HO 

MILLE,  OR  THE  MUU'.RAVE  ISLANDS 87 

TARAWA,  OR  THE  KI.NGSMILL  ISLANDS      go 

HarL'MA,  OR  GRANVILLE  ISLAND. 103 

AUSTRALIA lOf, 

MIGRATIONS  OK- THE  OC-EAMC  .  RIBES. 117 

POLYNESIA 1,7 

TAHITI  121 

NVKUIilVA ,gg 

HAWAH Iff 

B 


47493 


yI  <;  (»  n  r  K  N  T  s. 

HAWrroNliA \» 

MANliAKKVA 139 

IIAI'A HI 

TIIK  Al  STKAl.  IKI.ANim Ml 

I'ArMirn  i« 

NKW  ZKAI,AN1) »<• 

CHATHAM  WI.A.M) I« 

FAKAAH) I« 

VAITll'l' IM 

(;k>k.iiai.  ii.i.i  sniATioNS i«W 

.MO.N'I'HS 100 

WIXDS ni 

.NIIMKIIAIX 17« 

MTI   \M>  III.V^A 174 

riKoi'lA IM 

TAHAWA 187 

SV.V)l'Mim)K  MIXKD  LANtlUACJES IM 

OHIIil.N  OK  THE  HJLVNESIA.NS liM 

NORTIIWESTKHN  AMEUICA I'J7 


PIIILOLOCUAL  PART. 

COMPAKATIVK  tillAMMAK  Of  THE  l-OLV.NKSrAN  DIALECW tt* 

E8f<AY  AT  A  LEXICON  OK  THE  H)LVNE8IA.N  LANGUAGE »91 

CNUUSII  AND  l-OLVNfSIAN  VOCAIiULAKV 341 

DIALECT  OE  EAKAAKO  AND  VAITUPl' 347 

GKAMMAKOK  THE  VITIAN  LANGUAGE 305 

VITIAN  DICTIONAHV 391 

VOCABULARY  OF  THE  DIALECT  OK  TOBI 40 

VOCABULARY  OK  THE  DIALECT  OK  MILLE 431 

OUTUNKKOK  A  GRAMMAR  OF  THE  TARAWAN  LANGUAGE 43S 

VOCABULARY  OF  THE  TARAWAN  LANGUAGE 44S 

A0TE8  0N  THE  LANGUAGE  OK  ROTUMA 489 

THE  LANGUAGES  OK  AUSTHAUA 479 


i 

I; 


C  O  N  T  K  N  T  8. 


VII 


rtoii 
Tin:  I.ANOIIAOI'at  OK  NOKTIIWI'XrKKN  AMCHK'A B33 

HVNUPHIH  AND  VOCABUI.AHIlUt tM 

TIIK  "JAWMtN'   OH  THADK'tANUUAdK  01' OHIXHIN (136 

PATAUONIA Oai 

HOUTIICHN  AI'HICA M7 


C'llAIIT  OK  OCKANIC  MKiHAirONH,  TO  FACE  PAGE I 

TITAIA'8  CIIAHT.  TO  KACE  PA(iE |j3 

(rniNOtiKAPIIirAL  map  or  GKtXiON.  TO  FACE  PAC;E |tf7 


A  L  V  11  A  H  i:  T. 


N  rnrmitiK  iIm!  alphalict  whioh  win  in  lie  iiwil  in  tliiii  work,  Ihi'  (iriiiripli'  vax*  a<li>|ili'd 
Ihni  rnrh  kliii|>l<-  aoiinil  alioiilil  Ix'  inviiriiilily  ri-|>n'iH'nlr<l  liv  onr  unci  lli<-  Milium  I'liiiriirlrr. 
Thi>  bnii*  uflho  nytlrni  in  tliiit  |irnpom><l  by  Mr.  i'ickcriiiK  in  liit  well-known  Ktmiy,  |inb> 
linlircl  in  ihi-  Mrmoini  oflhi)  Anicriciin  Arnilciny  of  ArlH  iinil  Scii'iic-i'i,  Soini^  nlturnlicmi 
hnvi>  \tn'U  nuide,  liul  iiirli  nn  iiri-  ii;jn'«'nlili'  to  llio  |irin<'i|iles  ihiTP  IiikI  ilnwii.  The  liiU 
luwin((  are  tin'  uniy  |ie<-uliarili('!i  nt'lhc  nl|iliaM  wliirh  ruiiniro  cxplnnnlion. 

I.  Th«  vowrU  haw  the  iinini'  ){fn<Tal  iiounds  at  in  Ihr  (icrnmn,  Spunixh,  nml  lliili:iM 
lunijuiigra.  .1  is  Miundiil  iin  in  Julhrr,  v  like  a  in  jUte,  i  ns  in  nuuhnir,  n  ii<i  in  luilr,  u 
aa  in  ru/f,  nr  liko  oo  in  coo/.  Twii  othor  charnrlurs,  i)U|{)j;f«le(l  liy  Mr.  I'irkcring,  have 
bii'n  loiinil  niif.Hsnry — ihc  one  (.t)  Ici  rcpn-senl  the  miund  of  it  in  IkiI/,  the  olhrr  (")  for 
lh<-  (kiund  oI'k  in  Iml,  Tlieitc  dii  not,  indiHil,  (■(iiiipriw  all  ihediHtini'tionN  nrmiunil  whirh 
hnvo  lieen  found  to  exist.  The  l-'rench  ii  iind  (iermnn  «  were  hi'nril  in  wttiw  of  ihi"  ilia* 
lects.  it  hiis  MWRKil  Ix'Nt,  however,  in  order  to  avoid,  a»  far  n»  imasible,  llio  niiiltipliea> 
lion  of  rlmraolers,  to  be  contented  with  noting  the  exiHteiiec  of  these  iiiinur  shades  uf 
•oiind  in  the  lanj{ua^eI  in  whieh  they  oceur. 

U.  The  emisonants  I),  </,  /,  /<,  k,  /,  m,  n,  ji,  r,  s,  I,  v,  u;  //>  •,  l>'>vc  tlu  ir  usual 
Kiiglith  MiuniU.  (i  is  always  hard,  as  in  i!ii,  get.  (/  (c  with  a  crdilla)  has  been  used 
for  the  sound  of  s/<  in  iJiiiU.  J  is  sounded  as  in  Freiieh,  or  like  :  in  plmirr.  IJ  is  u.sed 
for  a  very  harsh  guttural,  pronounced  deep  in  the  throat,  which  occurs  in  some  of  the 
Indian  languages. 

U.  Tlic  new  consonantal  characters,  which  it  has  been  found  necessary  to  introduce, 
have  been  mostly  taken  from  the  Gret.'k.  Thcia  (0),itella  (f)  are  employed  to  represent 
Iho  difTerent  articulations  of  hard  and  son  Ih,  as  heard  in  the  words  thigh  and  thij, — each 
being  the  sounds  which  these  two  characters  have  in  modern  IJreek.  For  the  latter  (0> 
a  capital  letter  (^)  has  been  formed  mom  nearly  resembling  it  than  the  awkward  triangle 
of  the  Uroek  alphabet.     To  represent  tho  hard  guttural,  common  to  the  S|ianish  and  Cicr- 

c 


ppaMMwJMr' ' '  ^-in^HiiiPp 


A  LP  II  A  nET. 


! 


miin  (in  Ihc  former,  /, — in  the  Inllor,  c/i),  the  Orrck  rhi  (x)  nnlurnlly  suggrslotl  itself;  it 
hns,  however,  been  somewlmt  nitercil,  for  j^n-nlrr  (•onvrnionco  in  writing,  Hnd,  oa  here 
used  (/.)  nppronchoK  to  the  onlinary  j',  which  had  formerly,  in  Spnnish,  Ihc  anme  Hoiind 
OS  the_;.  For  the  sort  giittund  (the  Germiin  e  iK'lween  two  vowels),  the  (Jrrt^k  namma, 
which  hns  this  sound  in  •In-  modern  Inngnngr,  hns  lieen  adopted,  but  with  n  different 
cnpitnl  (C).  The  niisnl  ;/i.',  iis  henrd  in  the  word  »*//^'<«ir,  is  of  frequent  occurrence  in 
the  Oceanic  dialects,  nnd  is  met  with  ns  orten  at  the  beginning,  as  in  the  middle  of 
words.  For  this  element  a  jicculinr  chnracter  ({>),  compounded  of  the  two  Unglish 
letters,  has  been  adopted. 

The  introduction  .)f  these  letters  has  been  rendered  necessary  by  the  principle  on 
which  the  alphabet  is  constructed,  and  could  not  have  lieen  avoide<l  without  great  incon- 
venience nnd  the  uscof  mnny  dincriticnl  points.  It  is  possible  that  characters  prefemble, 
in  some  respects,  to  those  sclecte<i,  might  •«  suggested.  These,  however,  have  been 
tested  by  use,  and  found  sutficicnt  for  their  purpose.  And  it  should  be  remembered  that 
any  new  characters  whatsoever  must,  nt  first,  from  their  very  strangeness,  have  nn 
uncouth  and  somewhat  repulsive  ap|iearaiioo, 

4.  The  combinations  of  these  chnrncters  will  be  readily  understood.  Tha  sound  of  ok 
in  iuitd,  is  expressed,  of  course,  by  an  ;  that  of  i  in  pinr  by  ai ;  that  of  u  in  pure  by  iit, 
iic.  7J-  stands  for  the  sound  of  cA  in  church ;  dj  for  thot  o(j  and  dg  in  jm/gr.  Tf.1  is 
a  combination  of  very  frequent  occurrence  in  the  Indian  nnd  South-Alricnn  languages. 
It  is  not  so  difficult  as  it  may  appear  nt  tir^'  sight,  boing  merely  a  tl  pronounced  in  the 
side  of  the  mouth,  with  n  strong  impulsion  of  tin,  '.reath. 

>i.  The  only  diacritical  marks  employed  are  the  usual  signs  of  quantity,  (~)  and  (  ), 
and  the  acute  accent  (')•  The  first  two  arc  used  for  distinguishing  two  shades  of  sound 
in  each  of  the  vowel  i.  A  is  pronounced  as  in  purt,  and  rt  ns  in  jmt ;  c  as  a  in  niatf, 
nnd  f  ns  in  met  ,•  i  as  in  machine,  and  i  as  '\n  pin  ;  o  as  in  the  English  word  i:olp,  nnd 
()  as  in  the  same  word  in  French  ;  m  as  oo  in  ^xjV,  and  «  as  in  piilt ;  S  as  a  in  hull,  and 
A  as  rt  in  what,  or  o  in  not ;  n  as  ii  in  murmur,  or  nearly  os  the  French  eu,  and  0  ns  n 
in  mutter.  These  marks  are  nn-ly  applied  except  to  the  vowels  of  accented  syllables,^ 
that  is,  of  those  syllables  on  which  the  stress  of  voice  falls.  Thus,  in  one  of  the  Austra- 
lian dinlects,  mugin  means  blind,  nnd  tniigin,  niusquito; — in  both  words  the  accent  or 
emphasis,  is  on  the  last  syllable.  The  unaccented  vowels  are  rarely  sufliciently  distinct 
to  require  this  discrimination.  The  snmc,  moreover,  is  frequently  the  ease  even  with  the 
emphasized  vowel,  which  sometimes  hns  a  medium  sound,  neither  long  nor  short,*  nnd 
sometimes  is  inditlcrently  pronounced  with  either  quantity.  In  such  cases,  the  oblique 
mnrk  (  )  is  employed  to  denote  the  syllable  on  »hicl'   the  ircent  or  emphasis  should  be 


•  Tlifw  tthiHt>8  in  the  vowel  aoiindi  inif^Ilt  Ih-  ah  projn  dy  licsif'iinti'ii  hy  tlie  ti'fllH  hrond  anil  x/rm/fr, 
or  oprn  mill  elmr,  nit  by  tliodo  here  useil  The  iiainefl,  li'iwevei ,  are  uniiii|H>rttint,  provideil  tlie  dintiiiction 
be  rijrhtly  underHtood. 


ALPIIABKT. 


XI 


lilnccd, n»,    miisn",   Mnti,   tiokwo.     Someiinips,   however,  it  is  used  nioiig  with   the 

other  innrks,  iis  in  JJiuhiIm;  in  which  the  first  syllable  is  cinplmsizud,  ami  the  third   is 
pronounnul  long. 

The  I'ollowiny  is  Ihi-  niplmliet,  in  the  order  which  hns  been  adopted  for  the  vociiliuliirics 
contained  in  this  volume.  It  consists  ol'  thirty-two  letters,  which,  with  llio  marks  ol' 
(]iinntity,  express  thirty-nine  elementary  sounds. 


m 


xtt 


A 
A 
B 

D 

E 

F 

G 

G 

H 

I 

J 

K 

X 

L 

M 

N 

n 
o 
p 
Q 

R 

s 

T 
& 
U 

u 

V 

w 

Y 

z 


a 
a 
b 

f 
d 

6 

e 

f 
9 

y 

h 
i 

J 
k 

/ 
/ 

m 
n 

V 

0 

P 

fl 
r 

s 

t 

d 

u 

u 

V 
TV 

y 

Z 


ALPHABET. 


as  in  mart,  mat. 
as  a  in  hall,  what. 

as  sh  in  shine. 

as  the  soft  th  in  thy. 

as  a  in  fate,  and  e  in  met. 

always  hard,  as  in  go,  give. 

soft  guttural,  as  in  the  German  Tage. 

as  in  machine,  pin.' 
as  z  in  glazier. 

hard  guttural,  as  ch  in  the  German  loch. 


nasal  ng,  as  in  singing,  hanger. 


very  har.'sh  guttural. 


the  hard  or  hissing  th,  as  in  thin. 
as  in  rule,  pull. 
as  M  in  burn,  but. 


■-."^•wr..v^!V.'-Si 


.-t  (.;«ita.^-t»tt-^ ,  ,  f,  K,'*4#  %-nir.--' 


-■  t^'i^fitia^^'a.-,  V-Jiv:^'«i(_?^'%^^''' 


ifTT 


'«      \ 


.y^ 


Mftlr 


i.r;*.     M  «  t  «  P    '    Ji  K  S  ^  A,*,*,. 


*    P'.  . ' 


^    ::.i>< 


««; 


il'itiii 


,  •^'S.'-..r 

'  »♦,    ,,.  ^      ■        I.,,., 


— -Vh 


VAJ(   lltKUCKK   \  \ 


I 


^    _    I-  ?t..- 


v\ 


4    ■      .\ 


#■ 


-J. --^ 

'    .• 

1     •  • 

,..»...^..-\  V        '■-"ir '"'<•.    " 

■  IT  ILU.«l.r, 


I,s;t8.;il).  II).  II  iV  l->. 


'    V    'I  .1 


1        I        1' 


\.>  \ 


UAKgt'KNAN  '    •    «  m-KI-HIVA 
Jilhtititit  .  ^/VfAfAmi 
I'       .  » 


..tltUttllil  ^•••Tl 


■  Hunnii 


k:: 


r/iirr  A/n/M       \J 

llnj -ui  (•Unrt* 


■^^Hbiriabiifl 


i&i 


^V 


' 


ETHNOGRAPHY 


Ml  mr,'iii|wi3iiffi|».M*li-i 


in1>ili>-  i-,r.i  itti-,,'. 


E  T  H  N  0  Ct  R  A  P  H  Y. 


OCEANIC  A. 

The  term  Oceantca  is  now  commonly  applied  to  the  land  included 
in  tliat  portion  of  the  f^lobe  which  lies  between  the  coasts  of  Asia  anil 
America.  Besides  the  i^reat  island  or  continent  of  New  Holland,  it 
comprises  the  extensive  insular  masses  fornini^  wliat  is  called  the 
East  Indian  Archipelago,  and  the  countless  smaller  clusters  scattered 
over  the  surface  of  the  Pacific  Ocean.  The  latest  writers,  particularly 
the  French  voyagers  and  geographers,  have,  with  much  propriety, 
subtlivided  this  region  ii\to  five  minor  departments,  distinguished  from 
one  another  both  l)y  their  natural  features,  and  by  the  character  of 
their  inhaliitants.  These  are  Malaisia,  Melanesia,  Au.stralia,  Micro- 
nesia, and  Polynesia,  all  of  which  have  been  visited  and  examined,  to 
a  greater  or  less  extent,  in  the  course  of  our  voyage.  The  first  of  these 
names  is  applied  to  tlie  islands  in  the  East  Indian  seas  occupied  by 
the  yellow  Malay  race, — the  principal  of  which  are  Sumatra,  Java, 
Borneo,  Celebes,  the  Moluccas,  the  Sooloo  Group,  and  the  Philippine 
Islands.  The  peninsula  of  Malacca  and  the  island  of  Formosa  are 
also  inhabited,  in  great  part,  by  people  of  this  race. 

Melanesia  comprises  that  part  of  Oceanica  inhabited  by  a  dark- 
skinned  race,  with  woolly  or  frizzled  hair ;  it  includes  New  Guinea 
and  the  adjacent  islands  of  Arroo,  Mysol,  and  Waygeoo,  to  the  west. 


4  ETII  N()(iR  A  I'll  Y. 

iiiiil  New  nritiiiti,  Nuw  Ireljiiid,  tliu  Soluinoii  Islands,  and  tlu<  New 
Ili'briilcs,  ti)  llio  oast.  Australid  \n  uiiothor  nainti  Ibr  New  Molluiid, 
tlie  alH)ri^iiii>s  of  wliicli  are  reiiiurkal)le  tor  prosoiiliii^  the  singular 
i-(itnl)iiiatiuii  of  a  cornplexioii  as  dark  as  tliat  of  the  African  nu^roes, 
with  soft  and  strait^lit  liair,  as  in  the  wliite  race.  Mirnmesia  is  n  term 
a|i|)hod  to  tlie  lon^f  raiij^e  of  little  groups  and  strips  of  eoral  rock,  wiiich 
are  scattered  over  the  Pacific  to  the  nortli  of  the  e<inator,  and  east  of 
tlie  lMiili|)pini's, — the  most  important  of  wiiich  are  the  I'elew  and 
Marian  (or  Ladrone)  Islands,  UanalH),  the  Uailack  Ciiain,  and  the 
Kinirsniill  (^iroup.  t^inally,  the  name  I'olijnesia  has  l)een  lon^  used 
to  designate  the  islands  in  the  L'last  Pacitic,  inhabited  i>y  liKhl-coloured 
trii)es,  allied  to  the  Malaisian,  and  all  sjieakinir  dialects  of  one  general 
language.  Tliis  being  the  division  which  was  first  and  longest  under 
our  observation,  will  be  first  described. 


I'OLYXKSIA. 


The  principal  grou|>sof  Polynesia,  with  their  native  names  and  the 
estimated  numl«'rs  of  their  inhabitants,  are  as  tollows  : 

1.  The  Navigator  Islands.  This  group  is  situated  between  1(59'^ 
and  173°  of  west  longitude,  anil  between  13°  and  l5°of  south  latitude. 
It  consists  of  four  large  islands,  Saimii,  Upolu,  'I'utuila,  and  Manila ; 
and  four  small,  Manoiio,  Apolima,  Orosem/a,  and  Ofu.  Savaii,  the 
largest  and  most  westerly,  is  almutone  hundred  miles  in  circuit.  The 
native  name  for  the  whole  grou|)  is  Samoa.  The  po|)ulation  is  esti- 
mated by  the  missionaries  at  tifty-si.v  thousand  si.v  hundred,  of  which 
four-fifths  belong  to  the  two  large  islands  of  Savaii  and  Upolu. 

2.  The  Friendly  Islands.  These  lie  south-.southwest  of  the  pre- 
ceding, between  the  meridians  of  173°  anil  176°  E.,  and  the  paral- 
lels of  l!s°  and  22°  S.  The  group  consists  of  three  distinct  clusters, 
that  of  Tonga,  that  of  Habai,  and  that  of  Uafulti  Hau.  The  first 
named  is  the  southernmost,  and  consists  of  two  large  islands,  Tonya 
and  Eua,  and  several  small  ones.  Tonga  is  the  largest  island  of  the 
Friendly  Group,  for  which  its  name  is  commonly  use<l  as  a  general 
appellation,  the  island  itself  being  distinguished  by  the  epithet  of /m&m, 
or  sacred.  It  is  rather  more  than  sixty  miles  in  circuit,  and  contains 
about  one  hundred  and  fifty  si^uare  miles.  It  is  a  low,  fiat  island,  of 
coral  formation,  elevated  but  a  few  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and 
covered  with  a  rich  soil  of  vegetable  mould  two  or  three  feet  deep. 


I'  O  I.  ^  N  E  S  I  A. 


Under  proper  rultivnlion  it  would  bo  capalile  of  supporting  a  dciine 
population.  Kua  in  a  iii^di  inland,  about  half  tiic  si/.o  of  'roiii;a.  Tiio 
Habai  chmter,  sixty  miles  north-nortlicast  of  Ton^a,  consists  of  a  ^roat 
number  of  small  coral  islands,  of  wliicli  tbe  principal  are  Lifiikn  and 
s\<imuh(i.  There  are  also  two  hi^li  islands,  Ktin  and  'I'li/'iiu ;  on  the 
latter  of  which  is  a  volcnno.  Sixty  miles  further  to  the  north  is 
Ilafulu  Ilau,  which  ronsists  of  the  larij;e  hi;;h  island  of  Vnrnii,  and  a 
number  of  small  coral  islands.  The  population  of  the  whole  Friendly 
or  Ton^ja  Group  is  probably  about  eij,ditecn  thousand,  of  which  nearly 
half  belon;.?  to  the  island  of  Ton^n. 

3.  New  Zealand  is  an  extensive  insular  territory,  eight  hundred 
miles  in  Icn^rth  from  northeast  to  southwest,  and  avorai^inj^  eighty 
miles  in  width.  It  isdivi<led  into  nearly  ecpial  parts  by  Cook's  Strait, 
a  channel  forty  miles  wide, — and  a  similar  passage  separates,  at  its 
southern  end,  a  smaller  division  called  Stewart's  Island.  The  whole 
group  is  supposed  to  contain  not  less  than  seventy  thousand  stpiare 
miles.  The  natives  have  no  general  name  for  it,  and  those  given  by 
Cook  for  the  two  principal  divisions  are  only  partially  applicable. 
Te  \'(ii  Pouiinmn  means,  "The  Water  of  Jade,"  and  is  properly  the 
name  of  a  lake  in  the  northern  island,  near  which  this  stone  is  found. 
He  ahi  no  Maui  means,  "The  Oll'spring  of  Maui,"  and  is  sometimes 
employed  by  the  natives  in  allusion  to  the  prevalent  belief  that  their 
island  was  produced  by  the  gwl  Maui.  The  population  is  supposed 
not  to  exceed  one  hundred  and  fifty  thousand,  of  which  nearly  all  are 
on  the  northern  island. 

4.  The  Society  Islands.  This  is  a  group  composed  of  two  clusters, 
of  which  the  eastern  was  originally  termed  the  Georgian,  and  the 
western  the  Society  Islands.  They  are  both  commonly  included,  at 
present,  under  the  latter  name.  The  eastern  cluster  comprises  Tahiti, 
and  the  smaller  islands  of  Aimeo  (of  Moorea),  Tetuaroa,  Tapuaemami, 
and  Metia.  In  the  western  are  Htuihitie,  Raiatea,  Tahaa,  and  Pora- 
pora,  all  of  nearly  the  same  size,  besides  three  or  four  smaller  islands. 
The  longitude  of  Tahiti,  the  island  from  which  the  whole  group  some- 
times takes  its  name,  is  149°  30'  W.,  and  its  latitude  17°  30'  S.  It  is 
one  hundred  and  eight  miles  in  circumference,  and  contains  about 
eight  thousand  inhabitants.  The  population  of  the  whole  group  is 
estimated  at  eighteen  or  twenty  thousand. 

5.  The  Hervey  Islands  are  situated  ten  degrees  from  the  Society 
Group,  in  a  west-southwest  direction,^-or  between  155°  and  160°  of 
west  longitude,  and  19°  and  22°  of  south  latitude.     They  are  seven 

a 


e  KTIIN«)<i  It  A  I'll  Y. 

ill  mimlKT.  Unrotoiii/ii,  the  luru«'st  niiil  iiiont  woNtorly.  Ik  nlH>ut  thirty 
miloH  in  circiinili'mici', — Aliii,  MiiiHjiiiii,  nixl  Ailiilnhi,  iiro  racli  ulxmt 
twenty;  tlu- dIIhts,  Mniih,  .Mitinni.  i\\u\  .U//;//^//,  iirr  of  infonsitltTiildi' 
extent.  'I'lic  |)<i|)ululi(in  of  the  whole  is  estimated  liy  Mr.  WilUunm  at 
fourteen  thousand,  ol' wliieli  alHUit  liall'heloii)^  to  Karotont^n. 

0.  Tlie  Austral  Islands  are  a  ranu;e  of  small  elevated  islands,  Hcat- 
tered  aloiiy;  tiie  southern  tropie,  nUmt  live  dei;rees  south  of  'i'ahiti. 
'I'hey  nrn — he)Tiniiiiit(  from  tlie  west — Hinidtuni.  liiinitii,  I'li/iutii, 
and  Hdininii, — to  wiiich  lin/in  may  he  added,  though  it  is  sitnate<l  at 
some  distanee  southeast  of  the  others,  and  dilVers  from  them  in  many 
respects.  'I'liey  are  all  of  nearly  tlio  same  si/e,  varyiii^^  from  twelve 
to  twenty  miles  in  eireumfereneo.  The  niimher  of  inhahitants  has 
l)een  greatly  reduced  of  lato  years,  and  does  not  probahly  e.xceed  a 
thousand. 

7.  The  Ciamhicr  Group  is  a  small  cluster  of  hitrh  islands,  partly 
enclosed  hy  an  extensive  reef  'I'liey  lie  east  of  the  Austral  Islands, 
in  latitude  ^3°  S.,  and  lon^'ilude  133"  W.  The  native  name  of  the 
larjff^st  is  Miiiiijdret'd,  which  is  about  twelve  miles  in  circumference: 
the  next  in  si/e  are  Al:eii<i,  AhiiiKini.  ami  I'tiniirari.  The  popula- 
tion is  stated  at  a  little  more  than  two  thousand. 

*^.  The  Low  or  Dannerous  Archipelago  is  the  name  commonly 
•^iven  to  a  multitude  of  small  islantls,  of  coral  formation,  which  cover 
the  ocean  between  the  Society  and  ( Jambier  liroups — or  between  136^ 
and  150°  of  west  loii^'iludc,  and  1  r  and  t»3"  of  .south  latitude.  There 
are  nearly  seventy  whose  existence  and  position  are  ascertained,  of 
wliicii  about  a  tilth  are  uninhabited.  The  most  important  are  Unirua, 
or  Prince  of  Wales'  Islanil,  which  is  an  oval  rin^  of  small  islets, 
enclosinjj  a  lai^oon  a  hundred  and  lifty  miles  in  circuit, — Anna,  (or 
more  properly  Sguiui,)  known  as  Chain  Island, — Makrmu,  or  Phillips' 
Island, — and  llau,  or  Bow  Island.  The  population  is  siipposeil  not 
to  exceed  eight  thousand,  of  which  more  than  half  belong  to  Anaa. 
The  native  name  of  the  whole  range  is  Pukiimotii,  or  in  Tahitian. 
Paumotii. 

9.  The  Marquesas  lie  between  138°  and  141°  of  west  longitude, 
and  between  7°  and  11°  of  south  latitude.  A  channel  about  sixty 
miles  in  width  divides  tlu^m  into  two  clusters,  each  containing  three 
large  islands  and  .several  small  ones.  In  the  southeastern  cluster,  the 
principal  islands  are  Hivttoa,  Tahitata,  and  Fatuhica ;  in  the  north- 
western, sometimes  called  the  Washington  Group,  are  Xiikiihiva, 
Uahuka,  an..  Lujhju.     Nukuhiva,  which  is  the  largest  island  of  the 


IM)|,  V  N  KSI  .\. 


^roiip,  hnH  n  rirrumfcroiicc  of  ulM)iit  sixty  milc^.  f'dticorninjr  tlic 
mitiilK'r  ol  iiiliiilMtiiiits  on  tlic  iNliinilM,  tlic  most  contritiliitory  iieroiiiitH 
aro  ^ivi'ii, — lint  it  tlot-H  not,  prolialily,  uxfccd  twi-iity  tliousniul. 

10.  Tlio  Santlwicli  Islanils,  tln^  most  norlliorly  uroup  ol"  I'olynt'Mift, 
nru  inclndcil  between  tlu;  nieridiitns  of  ITtl^  luitl  KiT'  \V  ,  and  the 
pariillelH  of  Is"  niiil  'i-i°  N.  'I'ln;  inlialiited  islands  are  ei^lit  in  iinni- 
ber, —  llfiirtiii,  tbo  larijeht  and  most  sonllierly,  coveiiny;  a  ynater 
extent  than  all  tbo  rest  iniited.  It  is  aliont  two  Immlred  and  litty 
niiles  in  circuit,  nnd  contains  upwards  ol'lliree  tliousand  live  hundred 
N(|uare  niilcs.  Miiiii,  (hihii.  and  I'liiini,  are  the  next  in  size ;  and 
'I'tihonlanr,  Lanni,  Mn/otui,  nnd  yiiliait,  aro  coinparalivly  uniin- 
{Mirtunt.  The  |M)pulation  is  about  ono  hundred  thousand,  whereot 
rather  muro  than  ii  third  are  on  the  island  of  Hawaii. 

Desides  the  «{ronps  before  described,  there  arc  many  smaller  clus- 
ters nnd  siuKlo  islands  which  re((uiro  to  bo  mentioned.  Five  deijrees 
due  north  of  the  Nnvi^jators  are  three  coral  islets,  tlio  lart^est  of  wliich 
was  on  no  chart  until  surveyed  by  our  Kxpedition,  thoui,'h  it  iiad 
been  previously  seen  by  a  whaler.  It  was  called  by  the  natives 
Faktidfo,  and  was  named  by  us  Howdilch  Island ;  the  others,  which 
lie  west  of  it,  are  Xitkuiiono,  and  (hitafii,  known  as  the  Duke  of  York's 
nnd  the  Duke  of  Clarence's  Islands.  The  name  of  the  Union  Ciroup 
was  given  to  the  three.  Tlie  population  docs  not  probably  exceed 
one  thousand. 

Ten  degrees  west  of  these  is  a  similar  group  of  three  coral  islets, 
which,  though  previously  known,  were  first  surveyed  by  our  vessels. 
Their  names  are  Vaitiipu,  or  Tracy's  Island,  i\u/>iifil(in,  (tr  Dcpey- 
ster's  Island,  and  Fimufuti,  or  Kllice's  Island.  The  largest  is  about  ten 
miles  in  circumference.  The  natives  were  numerous,  but  we  had  no 
means  of  forming  any  estimate  of  the  entire  population. 

North  of  the  Friendly  Group,  in  latitude  15°  50'  S.,  longitude  174"^ 
W.,  are  two  small  high  islands,  discovered  by  Schouten,  and  named 
by  him  Cocoa  and  Tmitor's  Islands.  They  are  each  eight  or  ten  miles 
in  circumference,  and  are  separated  by  a  channel  about  a  league  in 
width.  The  native  name  is  AV«rt,  one  of  them  being  distinguished 
by  the  epithet  tabu,  or  sacred.  Ten  degrees  farther  west  is  Good 
Hope  Island,  also  discovered  by  Schouten,  and  called  by  the  natives 
yh'.u  Foil,  or  New  Niun.  At  the  same  distance  from  this,  in  a  north- 
west direction,  are  the  Horn  Islands,  another  discovery  of  the  same 
navi;tator.  The.se  al.so,  if  our  information  is  correct,  are  included  in 
the  general  appellation  of  Nina.     On  the  map,  the  name  of  Allii  Fatti, 


8 


ET  UNOO  RA  I'll  V. 


(probably  Liia  Fatit,  the  Two  Rocks,)  is  sometimes  given  to  them. 
Liite  the  first  meiitioned,  they  are  small  in  extent,  bnt  lofty,  and  sepa- 
rated by  a  narrow  channel.  The  number  of  inhabitants  on  these 
islands  is  unknown,  but  it  cannot  exceed  three  or  four  thousand. 

North  of  the  Niua  Croup,  and  west  of  the  Navigators,  in  \'\°  26' 
of  s"uth  latitude,  and  about  176°  of  west  lonjijitude,  is  Uea,  or  Wallis's 
Island,  whicii  is  a  compact  cluster  of  tme  high  and  several  coral  islets. 

Tif,()/)iii.  in  latitude  12°  SO'  8.,  longitude  169°  E.,  is  the  most 
westerly  i.-.land  now  known  to  be  inhabited  by  people  of  the  Polyne- 
sian race.  It  is  seven  or  eight  miles  round,  with  a  population  of 
about  live  hundred. 

Fotniia  (or  Erronan)  and  Nina  (or  I/ntner)  are  two  small  hilly 
islands,  a  few  miles  east  of  Tanna,  one  of  the  New  Hebrides. 
Though  so  near  to  ami  constantly  communicaling  with  the  dusky 
inhabitants  of  this  group,  the  natives  retain  the  physiognomy  and 
language  of  the  Polynesian  race. 

Chatham  Island,  twelve  degrees  east  of  New  Zealand,  is  peopled 
by  a  few  hundred  natives,  who  are  said  to  have  the  customs  and 
speak  the  dialect  of  the  New  Zealanders. 

Savage  Island  lies  about  four  degrees  east  of  the  Friendly  Group; 
it  is  small  in  extent,  moderately  elevated,  and  has  but  a  scanty  popu- 
lation. 

Pcnrhyn  Island  is  the  name  given  to  a  small  ring  of  coral  islets  in 
latitude  9°  S.,  longitude  158°  VV.,  or  midway  between  the  Mar- 
quesas and  Union  Groups.  The  inhabitants  were  found  to  be  nume- 
rous in  proportion  to  the  size  of  the  island. 

Easter  Island,  or  Vaihu,  the  most  easterly  of  the  Polynesian 
islands,  is  situated  in  latitude  27°  S.,  longitude  109°  50'  W.  It  is 
about  thirty  miles  round,  and  is  supposed  to  have  not  far  from  two 
thousand  inhabitants. 

From  the  foregoing  enumeration  it  will  appear  that  the  entire 
population  of  Polynesia  does  not  reach  half  a  million.  There  is, 
perhaps,  no  people  which,  in  proportion  to  its  numbers,  has  been  the 
subject  of  so  much  interest  and  of  such  minute  investigation.  This 
may  be  ascribed  in  part  to  the  character  of  the  natives,  in  itself  more 
pleasing  and  attractive  than  that  of  most  savages,  but  principally  it  is 
due  to  the  peculiai  position  of  the  islands  which  they  inhabit,  scat- 
tered over  a  vast  ocean,  which  has  been,  tor  the  last  hundred  years, 
ploughed  by  the  keels  of  every  maritime  power.  In  the  course  of 
our  voyage  we  visited  six  out  of  the  ten  principal  groups,  namely,  the 


I'  ()  I,  V  N  I".  S  I  A.  9 

Naviirator,  Frioiully,  Society,  and  Sandwich  Islands,  tiic  Low  Archi- 
pclajfo,  and  Now  Zealand,  and  sovcral  of  tlio  sniallor  islands.  Of 
most  iM"  those  which  wo  did  not  see  we  obtained  iiil'orniation,  cither 
throuixh  inti'lliifent  persons  wl\o  liad  resided  on  them,  or  through  the 
natives  tliemselves,  whom  we  met  at  otlier  j^roups.  This  was  the 
case  with  reirard  to  all  the  islanils  named  in  the  preceding?  list,  except 
only  Tikopia  and  Master  Island,  i'or  which  we  must  rely  on  the 
accounts  of  precedinff  navij^ators.  A  tteneral  view  of  the  results  of 
these  observations,  as  respects  the  physical  and  mental  characteristics, 
and  what  may  be  tern>ed  the  national  peculiarities  of  the  Polynesians, 
will  be  useful  for  the  purpose  of  comparing  them  with  other  branches 
of  the  human  family,  and  especially  with  the  other  races  of  Oceanica. 


IMI  YSICAI,    TR.VITS. 

As  a  race,  the  Polynesians  are  superior  to  most  others  in  physical 
endowments.  They  are  somewhat  above  the  middle  height,  averaging 
five  feet  nine  or  ten  inches,  and  are  commonly  well  formed,  with 
finely  developed  limbs  and  muscles.  The  women  are  inferior  in  this 
respect  to  the  other  sex,  being  too  short  and  stout  t'or  graceful  propor- 
tion ;  yet  most  of  them  when  young  are  not  without  a  kind  of  pretti- 
ness,  and  occasionally  one  is  seen  who  might  be  termed  handsome. 

Their  colour  varies  from  a  light  to  a  dusky  brown,  with  a  slight 
tinge  of  yellow.  It  is  remarkable  that  the  lightest  shixdes  should  be 
found  nearest  the  equator,  growing  darker  as  we  recede  from  it  on 
either  siilo.  The  fairest  in  complexion  that  we  saw  were  the  natives 
of  Fakaafo,  in  latitude  9°  S. ;  next  came  the  people  of  the  Manjuesas, 
the  Navigator,  the  Society,  and  Friendly  CI  roups,  while  the  natives 
of  New  Zealand  and  the  Sandwich  Islanils  are  a  shade  deeper  in  hue 
than  the  rest.  The  latter  (the  New  Zealanders  and  Hawaiians)  are, 
as  a  body,  inferior  to  the  others  in  stature  and  beauty  of  form  ;  a  fact 
which  will  be  readily  referred  to  their  less  abundant  food  and  more 
laborious  life.  Perhaps  the  same  circumstances  will  account  for  the 
diU'orence  of  complexion,  which  may  have  less  direct  relation  to  the 
heat  of  the  climate  than  is  c^ominonly  su|)posed. 

The  Polynesians  have  the  hair  generally  thick,  strong,  and  black, 
with  a  slight  tendency  to  curl,  dillering  in  this  respect  from  the 
coarse  lank  hair  of  the  American  Indians.  In  some  cases  we  have 
seen  it  of  a  lighter  hue,  brown  or  chestnut,  but  this  is  not  common. 
The  beard  is  scanty,  and  does  not  usually  make  its  appearance  till 

a 


10 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


F  t 


middle  age.  They  have  little  hair  on  their  bodies,  and  take  pains 
to  eradicate  it  from  the  armpits  and  breasts,  under  a  notion  of 
cleanliness. 

Almost  as  great  a  variety  of  physiognomy  is  observable  in  Poly- 
nesia as  among  any  people  of  Europe.  Perhaps  the  only  general 
characteristic,  besides  the  complexion  and  hair,  is  the  slight  spread  of 
the  nostrils  at  the  base,  as  though  the  nose  had  been  a  little  depressed. 
The  eyes  arc  black,  but  neither  large  nor  very  bright;  we  obscrvcid  a 
few  individuals  in  whom  they  were  set  oblicpiely,  like  those  of  the 
Chinese,  but  in  general  their  direction  is  rectilinear.  The  forehead 
varies  very  much  in  height  and  angle  of  direction,  but  is  usually 
well  developed.  The  cheek-bones  project  slightly,  rather  more  for- 
ward than  laterally.  The  nose  is  commonly  short  and  straight,  but 
in  certain  tribes,  and  in  some  individuals  of  all  tribes,  it  is  long  and 
aquiline, — always  appearing,  however,  to  be  slightly  depressed  and 
widened  at  the  lower  part  The  mouth  is  commonly  the  best  feature 
in  the  face,  the  lips  being  moderately  full,  and  the  teeth  white,  even, 
and  well  set.  The  chin  is  short  and  seldom  prominent.  The  ears 
are  large,  standing  out  from  the  head.  The  whole  contour  of  the 
face  is  oval,  and  the  leatures,  though  not  strongly  marked,  are  often 
so  regularly  disposed  as  to  be  truly  handsome. 

The  form  of  the  head  is  not  such  as  accords  with  our  ideas  of 
elegance.  It  is  short  and  broad,  the  transverse  diameter  just  above 
the  ears  being  nearly  as  great  as  the  longitudinal,  from  the  middle  of 
the  forehead  to  the  occiput.  It  is,  at  the  same  time,  rather  more 
elevated  than  usual  among  barbarous  races,  rising  highest  at  tlie 
coronal  region.  The  head  is  remarkably  flat  behind,  a  peculiarity 
that  is  most  striking  in  the  women,  from  its  contrast  witli  the  long, 
graceful  oval,  which  we  are  accustomed  to  admire  in  the  female  head. 

The  foregoing  general  description  is  applicable  to  all  the  tribes  of 
Polynesia.  But  there  are  certain  minor  peculiarities  which  distin- 
guish the  inhabitants  of  the  diiierent  groups  from  one  another,  and 
which  require  to  be  noticed. 

The  natives  of  the  Samoan  and  Tongan  Islands  are  a  fine-looking 
people.  They  are  generally  tall  and  well-pniportioned,  with  full, 
rounded  faces  and  limbs,  but  without  that  grossness  and  la.vity  of 
fibre  common  in  the  Taliitians.  Their  features,  though  not  always 
regular,  are  generally  pleasing;  and  in  j,.i.ticular,  the  forehead  is 
remarkable  for  its  ample  developeinent,  which,  with  the  breadth 
between  the  eyes,  gives  to  the  countenance  an  expression  of  noble- 


P  O  r,  Y  N  E  S  T  A. 


11 


ness  and  dignity.  The  people  of  Tonga  are  perhaps  a  little  darker  in 
colour,  and  of  rather  more  hardy  make  than  their  northern  neigh- 
bours, whom  they  otherwise  closely  resemble. 

Of  the  New  Zealanders,  the  following  description  is  taken  from  our 
notes  made  on  the  spot : — They  are  a  fine  race,  evidently  of  the  pure 
Polynesian  stock,  but  inferior,  as  might  be  expected,  to  the  indolent 
natives  of  the  tropical  islands  in  the  regularity  and  elegance  of  their 
physiognomy.  They  have  neither  the  round,  swelling  muscles,  nor 
the  soft  contour  of  face,  which  distinguish  the  Tahitians  and  Samoans; 
but  they  are  strongly  formed,  with  hard,  sinewy  tiesh,  and  bold,  well- 
defined  features.  In  complexion  they  are  a  shade  darker  than  the 
islanders  before  mentioned.  The  forehead  is  often  high,  but  slopes 
backward ;  the  eyes  are  rather  small,  black,  and  piercing ;  the  nose, 
which  is  their  most  distinguishing  feature,  is  frequently  aquiline,  and 
so  prominent,  that  its  ridge  forms  a  straight  line  with  the  receding 
forehead.  Altogether,  a  New  Zealander,  in  complexion,  form,  and 
profile,  comes  very  near  a  North  American  Indian. 

Some  voyagers  have  believed  that  they  saw  in  the  natives  of  New 
Zealand  at  least  two  distinct  races  of  men,  of  which  one  approached 
the  yellow  Polynesian,  and  the  other  the  black  Papuan  family.  The 
latter,  they  say,  are  distinguished  by  their  shorter  stature,  darker  com- 
plexion, and  frizzled  hair.  Our  observations  did  not  confirm  the 
correctness  of  these  statements.  It  appeared  to  us  that  the  physical 
differences  were  no  greater  than  are  seen  in  every  country  between 
different  classes  of  people, — between  the  well-fed,  luxurious  idler,  and 
the  half-starved,  ill-clad  labouring  man.  We  saw  many  stinted  forms 
and  dark  complexions  among  them,  but  no  instance  of  what  could 
properly  be  termed  frizzled  or  woolly  hair. 

The  natives  of  the  Society  Islands  are  a  handsome,  but  effeminate 
people.  The  difference  between  the  higher  and  tiie  lower  classes  is 
particularly  remarkable  in  the  taller  stature  and  bulkier  forms,  fre- 
quently overloaded  with  fat,  of  the  former.  The  forehead  is  of  good 
height,  but  retreats,  and  narrows  towards  the  top. 

The  inhabitants  of  the  Low  Archipelago  arc  a  very  dark-skinned 
race,  with  harsh,  irregular  features,  sometimes  short  and  thick,  and 
sometimes  aquiline  and  bold.  Their  forms  usually  indicate  strength 
and  activity,  and  the  expression  of  their  countenances  is  stern  and 
fierce. 

The  Marquesans  have  the  reputation  of  being  the  iiandsomcst  of 
the  Polynesian  tribes;  and  if  we  may  judge  from  some  individuals  of 


13 


E  T  n  N  O  G  U  A  P  H  Y. 


both  sexes  whom  we  saw  at  Oahii,  this  reputation  is  not  undeserved. 
Thev  were  of  the  middle  size,  elcsjantly  proportioned,  with  small  and 
ro!j;idar  features.  Tiioy  laekcd,  however,  the  intellectual  expression 
given  by  the  expanded  and  lofty  brow  of  the  Samoans. 

The  Sandwich  Islanders  resemble  the  Tahitians,  though  of  darker 
hue.  The  difference,  also,  between  the  chiefs  and  common  people,  is 
still  more  strongly  marked,  the  former  being  generally  large,  and 
loaded  with  flesh,  while  the  latter  are  commonly  rather  small  and 
meagre.  The  head,  in  this  people,  as  well  as  in  the  other  tribes 
of  Eastern  Polynesia,  although  broad  behind,  diminishes  in  width 
towards  the  frontal  region,  and  appears  as  though  compressed  at  the 
temples.  But  the  characteristic  which  distinguishes  the  Hawaiians 
from  all  the  other  islanders  of  the  Pacific,  is  a  slight  projection  of  the 
mouth,  which  produces  or  is  accompanied  by  a  hollowness  in  the 
lower  part  of  the  cheek,  and  a  peculiar  pouting  expression  of  the  lips. 
We  have  not  found  this  trait  especially  noted  by  any  observer,  with 
the  exception  of  M.  P.  E.  Botta,  (son  of  the  celebrated  historian,)  who 
visited  these  islands  as  naturalist  on  board  the  ship  Le  Heros,  and  has 
published  his  observations  in  the  Annales  des  Voyages  for  1831.  He 
says,  "  The  mouth  is  large,  and  presents  in  the  form  of  the  lips  a  cha- 
racter which  would  enable  me  to  distinguish  a  Sandwich  Islander 
among  any  people  on  the  earth.  The  upper  lip,  instead  of  being 
arched,  as  with  Europeans,  seems  square.  The  line  which  it  traces 
rises  straight  up  from  the  corner  of  the  mouth,  and  then,  turning  at  a 
right  angle,  becomes  horizontal.  It  is,  moreover,  very  near  the  nose, 
which  is  commonly  flat  and  broad."  In  the  course  ot  >>\\r  voyage  we 
saw,  at  most  of  the  Polynesian  groups.  Sandwich  Islanders,  who  had 
left  vessels  on  board  of  which  they  had  served,  and  taken  up  their 
residence  among  the  natives,  adopting  their  habits  and  mode  of 
dress; — yet  we  were  always  able  to  distinguish  them  at  first  sight 
from  the  rest. 

The  people  of  the  Union  Group  (Fakaafo,  &,c.,)  resembled  very 
closely  those  of  Samoa,  except,  as  has  been  before  remarked,  that 
they  were  of  a  sonicwiiat  ligiiter  hue,  a  fact  the  more  remarkable,  as 
they  live  on  a  low  flat  coral  island,  only  nine  degrees  from  the  equator. 
They  are  of  good  size,  well  formed,  with  smooth  skins  and  little  beard. 
Their  hair  also,  for  some  reason,  seemed  to  be  thinner  than  usual,  and 
some  of  them  were  partially  imld.  This  circum.stance  may  serve  to 
account  for  the  fact  that  among  the  articles  which  they  brought  ofl" 
for  sale  were  several  packages  of  false  hair,  neatly  put  up  for  wearing. 


POLYNESIA. 


13 


At  Dcpcyster's  Group,  ten  degrees  farther  west,  are  found  people 
speakiiifr  ,hc  same  language  with  those  of  the  last-mentioiied  islands, 
but  of  very  different  personal  appearance.  In  colour,  they  are  as 
dark  as  tlio  New  Zealanders.  Their  hair  is  thick  and  bushy,  and  in 
some  slightly  frizzled.  They  differ  from  all  tlie  other  Polynesians  in 
having  iihundant  beards.  Their  skin  also  is  rough  to  the  touch,  as  in 
the  Molaucsiaus.  For  reasons  which  will  be  hereafter  given,  we 
are  inclined  to  believe  that  some  admi.vture  from  the  neigiibouring 
negro  tribes  has  given  rise  to  these  pccuharities. 


ClIARACTEn.* 

Tiie  trait  with  which  a  stranger  is  first  struck,  in  his  intercourse 
with  the  Polynesian  islanders,  is  a  general  gaiety  and  good  humour, 
a  desire  to  please,  and  a  willingness  to  be  amused,  which  are  not  only 
in  themselves  attractive,  but  which  gratify  us  the  more  when  we  re- 
member tlie  cold  gravity  of  the  American  aborigines,  or  the  sullen- 
ness  and  irritable  pride  of  the  natives  of  Australia.  On  the  other 
hand,  we  find  in  the  natives  of  the  Caroline  Archipelago,  or  at  least 
of  some  groups  in  it,  the  same  degree  of  good  humour,  accompanied 
by  a  real  gooil  nature  and  kindliness  of  heart,  of  which  it  is  too  often, 
among  the  Polynesians,  but  a  deceptive  indication. 

Connected,  perhaps,  with  this  is  an  extreme  fickleness  in  their 
passions  and  purposes,  a  great  susceptibility  to  new  impressions,  and 
a  readiness  to  adopt  new  customs  and  new  modes  of  tiiinking, — in 
which  last  characteristic  they  differ  strikingly  from  most  savage  and 
many  civilized  nations. 

'  Xdtliini:  is  iiiorc  common  In  the  \vritinj,'s  of  many  voyagers  tlian  such  phrases  as 
Ihc  lullowini; :— "  These  natives,  like  all  siivaiies,  are  cruel  anil  treacherous  ;" — "  The 
levity  anil  lieklcness  ol'lhe  savage  cliiracter  ;"— "  The  tendency  to  suiierstition,  which  is 
(Innid  anions;  „11  uncivilized  tribes;" — "The  parentnl  allbctions  which  warm  the  most 
savage  hi^art,"  \:c.  These  expressions  are  evidently  loinidcd  on  a  locsc  idea  that  a  cer- 
tain sameness  uC  character  prevails  among  harharous  races,  and  especially  that  some 
passion.-i  and  leelings  arc  found  strongly  developed  in  all.  .\  little  considersilion  will 
show  that  this  view  must  W-  erroneous.  It  is  civilization  which  produces  \iniforTiiity. 
The  yellow  and  lilack  races  of  the  I'acific,  iidiahitiug  contiguous  islands,  dillir  more 
wid<ly  from  each  other  than  do  any  two  nations  of  I'AiroiH'.  The  juiints  of  resemblance 
Mwei  11  the  negroes  of  .\frica  and  the  Indians  of  .\merica,  even  under  the  same  lati- 
tudes, are  very  few.  In  delineating  the  characters  of  the  ditlerent  races  of  the  Pacific, 
an  attempt  will  Ik'  iiiade,  by  contrasting  them  with  one  another,  to  show  more  clearly 
the  distinguishing  characteristics  of  each. 


14 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


They  are  unquostionnbly  a  people  of  good  intellectual  endowments. 
Perhaps  no  savages  have  ever  shown  such  a  capacity  and  such  a  dis- 
position for  improvement.  Indeed,  it  is  easy  to  see  tiiat  before  they 
were  visited  by  whites  they  had  attained  a  grade  of  civilization  nearly 
as  high  as  tlieir  circumstances  would  permit.  A  few  thousand  people, 
crowiled  together  in  a  small  island,  without  metals,  with  no  large  ani- 
njals  for  labour  or  transportation,  and  no  neighbours  from  whom  they 
can  by  commerce  supply  their  deticiencics,  must  find  their  progress 
beyond  a  certain  point  barred  by  iiisurmouutablo  obstacles ;  and  this 
point  there  is  gcxxl  reason  to  believe  that  the  Polynesians  had  nearly 
reached  long  before  their  intercourse  with  foreigners  commenced. 
They  are,  however,  more  remarkable  for  quickness  of  apprehension, 
and  the  readiness  with  which  they  accpiire  mechanical  arts,  than  for 
their  powers  of  reasoning.  A  sustaineii  application  soon  wearies 
them ;  and  the  levity  of  their  disposition  influences  their  intellectual 
efforts,  as  well  as  their  passions  and  feelings.  Their  taste  and  inge- 
nuit}'  appear  to  advantage  in  the  carving  of  their  canoes  and  weapons, 
in  tiieir  tattooing,  and  the  colouring  of  their  cloths  and  mats.  Their 
idols,  which  are  made  after  an  established  pattern,  and  intended  merely 
to  inspire  fear,  give  no  proper  idea  of  their  abilities  in  this  respect. 
Their  poetical  compositions  show  that  they  are  not  deficient  in  imagi- 
nation.— though,  in  this  respect,  they  appear,  strangely  enough,  to  be 
interior  to  their  savage  neighbours  of  the  F.eejee  Group. 

A  disposition  for  enterprise  and  bold  adventure  characterizes  all  the 
Polynesian  tribes.  They  are  a  race  of  navigators,  and  often  under- 
take long  voyages  in  vessels  in  which  our  own  sailors  would  hesitate 
to  cross  a  harbour.  Their  insular  situation  will  not  alone  account 
for  this  disposition.  The  inhabitants  of  the  Melanesian  islands,  in 
circumstances  precisely  similar,  are  remarkable  for  their  unwilling- 
ness to  wander  from  their  homes.  Captain  Cook  found  that  the 
natives  of  Erromango,  one  of  the  New  Hebrides,  had  apparently  no 
knowledge  of  Sandwich  Land,  the  next  island  to  the  north,  distant 
about  sixty  miles.  On  the  contrary,  not  only  is  a  constant  communi- 
cation kept  up  among  the  different  islands  of  each  group  of  Polynesia, 
but  perilous  voyages  of  many  days  between  different  groups  are  fre- 
(juent.  The  natives  may  be  said  to  be  cosmopolites  by  natural  feel- 
ing. Accordingly,  no  sooner  do  ships  make  their  appearance  in  the 
Pacific  than  we  find  the  islanders  eager  to  engage  on  board  of  them, 
for  no  purpose  but  to  gratify  their  roving  disposition,  and  their  desire 
of  seeing  foreign  countries.     And  it  is  a  remarkable  fact,  that  on  most 


POLYNESIA. 


a 


of  tlio  <f roups,  natives  of  the  highesi  rank,  enjoying  all  the  comforts 
and  ploiisurL's  wiiich  arbitrary  power  could  aflbrd,  have  voluntarily 
renouncfd  tlieso  advantages,  for  the  purpose  of  visiting  distant  regions 
and  int-reasing  their  knowledge  of  the  world. 

The  Polynesians  are  fond  of  fighting,  and  di.splay  in  their  wars  a 
cruel  and  ferocious  disposition.  Indifi'erence  to  human  suffering  is, 
indeed,  one  of  their  worst  characteristics.  It  is  exhibited  not  only  in 
war,  but  in  their  ill-treatment  of  the  sick,  the  weak,  and  the  aged, — 
the  oppression  of  their  slaves, — and  the  customs  of  infanticide  and 
liuiuan  sacrifice.  Nor  can  wo  suppose  that  cannibalism  would  exist 
among  any  but  a  sanguinary  people. 

Another  well-known  trait  in  their  character  is  a  gross  licentious- 
ness,— the  more  remarkable  as  it  contrasts  strongly  with  the  opposite 
disposition  in  the  different  races  by  whom  they  are  surrounded  on  all 
sides. 

The  weakness  of  the  domestic  affections  in  these  islanders  has  often 
excited  the  surprise  of  their  visiters,  who  have  observed  their  ordina- 
rily gootl-humoured  and  social  temperament.  The  conjugal  tie  is 
every  where  lax.  Parents  have  little  authority  over  their  children, 
even  when  young ;  and  in  their  old  age  are  generally  treated  with 
neglect,  and  often  left  to  perish.  Parental  affection,  which  we 
rarely  see  wanting  in  any  state  of  society,  is  in  this  race  one  of  the 
feelings  which  e.xert  the  least  influence.  In  some  of  the  principal 
groups,  as  the  Society  and  Sandsvich  Islands,  infanticide,  public  and 
systematic,  was  practised  without  compunction  or  excuse,  to  an  extent 
almost  incredible.  In  Now  Zealand  and  the  Marquesas,  though  not 
so  general,  it  is  still  frequently  committed,  and  not  considered  a  crime. 
At  Tonga,  a  father,  when  suffering  from  disease,  seldom  hesitates  to 
sacrifice  his  cliild  to  appease  the  anger  of  the  gods.  It  is  not,  of 
course,  to  be  understood  that  cases  of  strong  attachment  among  mem- 
bers of  a  family  do  not  occur, — but  they  attract  attention  as  exceptions 
from  the  general  rule. 

A  lack  of  conscientiousness  is  another  unpleasing  characteristic  of 
the  Polynesian  islanders.  Lying,  hypocrisy,  and  theft,  are  hardly 
regarded  by  them  as  faults ;  and  there  are  very  few  who  will  not  be 
guilty  of  them  on  a  very  trifling  temptation,  and  often  on  none  at  all. 
In  this  point,  the  Australians,  stupid  and  unamiable  as  they  are,  have 
a  great  advantage  over  them, — and  so,  to  a  certain  degree,  have  the 
American  aborigines. 

Cupidity  is  a  universal  trait  in  this  people.     The  hope  of  plunder. 


16 


ETIl  NOO  K  A  P  II  V. 


and  of  acquiring  new  possessions,  is  the  motive  of  most  of  tlieir  wars; 
and  it  Ims  invariably  been  found,  that  after  the  natives  of  any  newly 
discovered  group  or  island  liave  recovered  from  the  first  emotions  of 
fear,  with  wiiich  they  regarded  their  unknown  visiters,  their  imme- 
diate impulse  has  been  to  attack  and  destroy  them  for  the  purpose  of 
seizing  upon  their  i)roperty. 

The  Polynesians  are  not  naturally  treacherous.  This  is  by  no 
means  from  a  horror  of  deception,  but  aj)parently  from  a  mere  ina[)ti- 
tude  at  dissembling.  Their  wars  arc  rarely  carried  on  like  those  of 
our  Indians,  by  surprises  and  ambushments,  but  by  fair  fighting  in 
open  fields.  If  they  have  sometimes  resorted  to  treachery,  in  their 
attacks  upon  vessels,  it  is  only  when  they  have  learned  by  experience 
the  utter  iuelTiciency  of  their  ordinary  mode  of  warfare  when  opposed 
to  the  weapons  of  the  whites.  And  in  almost  every  case  where  ships 
have  been  cut  off,  it  is  worthy  of  remark,  that  those  on  board  have,  in 
some  way  or  other,  either  by  direct  disclosure,  or  from  the  bearing 
and  conduct  of  the  natives,  had  previous  warning  of  their  intention. 
They  seem  nearly  incapable  of  keeping  a  secret.  The  perpetrator  of 
a  crime  is  almost  certain  to  be  discovered  by  his  own  indiscretion  and 
inability  to  keep  silent  about  it ;  jjolitical  conspiracies  are  divulged 
almost  as  soon  as  formed,  not  through  treachery  but  heedlessness. 
When  their  usual  air  of  frankness  and  gaiety  is  suddenly  succeeded 
by  an  access  of  ferocity,  we  are  not  to  conclude,  in  most  cases,  that 
the  former  was  assumed  to  conceal  the  latter ;  each  exhibition  of  feel- 
ing is  natural  to  them,  and  not  less  so  is  the  rapid  transition  from  one 
to  the  other. 

But  of  all  the  qualities  that  distinguish  this  race,  there  is  none 
which  exerts  a  more  powerful  influence  than  their  superstition,— or, 
perhaps,  it  would  be  more  just  to  say,  their  strong  religious  feeling. 
When  we  compare  them  with  the  natives  of  Australia,  who,  though 
not  altogether  witiiout  the  idea  of  a  God,  hardly  allow  this  idea  to  in- 
fluence their  conduct,  we  are  especially  struck  with  the  earnest  devo- 
tional tendencies  of  this  people,  among  whom  the  whole  system  of 
public  polity,  and  the  regulation  of  their  daily  actions,  have  reference 
to  the  supposed  sanction  of  a  supernatural  [)ower;  who  not  only  have 
a  pantheon  surpassing,  in  the  number  of  divinities  and  the  variety  of 
their  attributes,  those  of  India  and  Greece,  but  to  whom  every  striking 
natural  phenomenon,  every  appearance  calculated  to  inspire  wonder 
and  fear, — nay,  often  the  most  minute,  harmless,  and  insignificant 
objects,  seem  invested  with  supernatural  attributes,  and  worthy  of 


POLYNESIA. 


17 


adoration.  It  is  not  the  mere  grossness  of  idolatry,  for  many  of  them 
have  no  images,  and  those  wlio  have,  look  upon  them  simply  as  re- 
presentations of  their  deities,  but  it  is  a  constant,  profound,  absorbing 
sense  of  the  ever-present  activity  of  divine  agency,  which  constitutes 
the  peculiarity  of  this  element  in  the  moral  organization  of  this 
people. 

The  character  here  described  is  that  of  the  Polynesians  as  a  nation. 
But  there  are  certain  traits  by  which  the  inhabitants  of  the  different 
groups  are  distinguished  from  one  another  morally  as  well  as  physi- 
cally. And  in  most  cases  it  is  easy  to  see  that  these  diversities  of 
character  have  their  origin  cither  in  some  natural  peculiarities  of  the 
countries  which  they  inhabit,  or  in  their  form  of  government.  The 
New  Zealanders,  the  Maniuesans,  and  the  natives  of  the  Paumotu 
Group,  are  remarkable  for  their  ferocious  temper  and  addiction  to 
war.  In  the  first-named,  the  great  extent  of  the  country,  with  the 
scarcity  of  food,  has  caused  a  separation  of  the  inhabitants  into  nume- 
rous petty  tribes,  independent  of  one  another;  among  these,  constant 
occasions  of  dissension  arise,  which  inflame  to  an  extraordinary 
degree  the  naturally  bloodthirsty  and  cruel  disposition  of  the  race  to 
which  they  belong.  In  the  Marquesas,  each  of  the  large  islands  has 
a  high  steep  riiige  of  mountains  running  through  it ;  from  this  ridge, 
lateral  spurs,  hardly  less  elevated,  and  almost  precipitous,  descend  to 
the  seashore,  thus  formiyg  several  dee[)  valleys,  walled  in  on  every 
side,  except  towards  the  sea,  by  a  natural  fortification.  The  conse- 
quence is,  the  existence,  as  at  New  Zealand,  of  numerous  separate 
tribes,  who  are  continually  at  war,  and  hence  the  fierce,  sanguinary, 
and  untameable  character  of  the  pco[)le.  In  the  Paumotu  Archi- 
pelago, it  is  easy  to  see  that  each  of  the  fifty  or  sixty  islands  which 
compose  it  would  be  inhabited  by  a  small  but  independent  people, 
and  that  the  same  result  would  follow. 

Again, — on  those  groups  which  are  situated  nearest  the  equator, 
where  the  heat  which  rela.xes  the  human  frame  culls  into  existence, 
with  little  or  no  aid  from  human  labour,  the  fruits  which  serve  to 
support  life,  we  expect  to  find  the  inhabitants  a  soft,  listless,  and 
indolent  race  ;  while  a  severer  clime  and  ruder  soil  are  favourable  to 
industry,  foresight,  and  a  hardy  temperament.  These  opposite  effects 
are  manifested  in  the  Samoans,  Nukuhivans,  and  Tahitians,  on  the 
one  side,  and  the  Sandwich  Islanders  and  New  Zealanders  on  the 
other.  In  the  two  physical  causes  noted  in  this  and  the  preceding 
paragraph,  we  see  the  source  of  the  combined  ferocity  and  sensuality 


ii'Viimim^w  »»w'..,u 


■J!1«:>1^^^ . 


18 


ET  UN  or.  RAP  II  Y. 


of  the  Marqucsans ;  traits  in  whidli  they  surpass  all  the  other  Poly- 
nesians, and  wliich  liavo  hitherto  rendered  every  attempt  to  civilize 
them  unavailing. 

The  inllucnce  of  the  political  state  of  the  islanders  upon  their  cha- 
racter, will  be  exhibited  in  treating  of  the  various  governments  of 
Polynesia. 

IIELKJION— THK    TABU. 


It  is  not  intended  to  give  iiere  a  complete  account,  or  even  a  general 
outline  of  the  institutions  and  customs  of  the  Oceanic  islanders;  only 
those  will  be  mentioned  wiiich  seem  peculiar  to  the  ditl'orcnt  races, 
and  which  serve  to  distingui-sh  them  from  one  another.  I'nder  this 
head  must  be  ranked  the  institution  of  the  tiihu,  whidi  seems  to  be 
confined  to  the  Polynesian  race,  except  in  those  instances  where  it  has 
been  borrowed  from  them  l)y  some  of  the  neighbouring  tribes.  The 
word  tdbu,  or  tapu,  is  u.sed,  like  mo.st  words  of  tliis  language,  either  as 
a  noun,  an  adjective,  or  a  verb.  It  may  be  defined  as  a  law,  or  restric- 
tion, wliich  derives  its  sanction  from  religion.  The  latter  particular 
constitutes  the  only  singularity  of  the  system.  Many  of  the  tabus,  or 
social  regulations,  arc,  no  doubt,  strange  enough, — but  not  more  so 
than  we  find  among  most  savage  and  many  civilized  nations.  It  is 
the  circumstance  that  these  regulations,  so  multifarious  and  min  "te, 
are  observed  not  merely  as  laws  but  as  religious  ordinances,  and  t. 
their  tran.sgression  i^3  considered  a  sin  as  well  as  a  crime,  that  tjives  to 
the  institution  its  remarkable  character.  We  are  not  altogetiier  with- 
out examples  of  similar  laws  in  our  own  code.  Those  which  relate  to 
disturbances  of  the  Sabbath,  and  to  the  sanctity  of  the  marriage  tie, 
are  instances  of  the  force  which  human  enactmeuts  derive  from  the 
precepts  of  religion.  Nor  are  the  Polynesians  the  only  people  who 
have  been  governed  by  sucli  regulations.  The  laws  of  Muses,  ema- 
nating from  a  divine  authority,  have  drawn  from  tliat  source  a  vitality 
which  has  preserved  them  in  full  vigour  to  this  day.  Among  the 
Jews  it  is  tabu  to  eat  certain  kinds  of  meat,  or  to  oiler  in  sacrifice  any 
thing  that  has  a  blemish, — or  to  touch  certain  animals  termed  un- 
clean, &,c.  The  Mahometan  code,  tlie  work  of  an  earthly  lawgiver, 
derives  from  its  suppo.sed  divine  origin  a  force  superior  to  tliat  of  any 
ordinary  laws; — to  those  who  submit  to  its  injunctions  it  is  tabu  to 
eat  pork  and  drink  wine, — or  to  omit  certain  ablutions, — or  to  take 
food  during  a  certain  month  from  sunrise  to  sunset,  &c.     The  institu- 


P  ()  I,  Y  N  K  H  I  A. 


10 


tioiis  of  Tiyc.urKtis  nro  nnofhor  example,  owinp;  their  nuthority  loss  to 
their  own  excellence,  or  to  the  rank  of  the  le^rislator,  tlinn  to  the 
solemn  oath  hy  whicii  he  enforced  their  observance,  and  to  the  mys- 
tery of  iiis  death.  With  the  Fiacedeinonians  it  was  tabu  to  use  silver 
money,  to  wear  certain  clothes,  to  eat  certain  dishes,  ami  the  like. 

These  examples  may  (five  us  a  clue  to  the  probable  ori;j[in  of  the 
tabu-system.  If  the  individual  to  whom  the  Polynesians  owe  their 
present  civil  and  religions  code,  for  such  in  fact  it  is,  was  one  who 
claimed  to  conunuiiicate  with  divine  powers,  or  to  possess  superna- 
tural attributes,  his  |)rocepts  would  have,  in  the  eyes  of  a  i)eo[)lo  so 
strongly  indtued  with  religious  feeling,  an  authority  infuiitely  supe- 
rior to  that  which  they  could  derive  from  any  other  source.  That 
such  was  actually  the  case,  would  seem  probable  from  certain  pecu- 
liarities in  the  language  and  cust«ins  of  the  natives.  In  most  of  the 
groups,  the  word  iiliki,  (or  ariki,  ali'i,  ariU,  &c.,)  is  the  usual  word 
for  chief  In  the  dialect  of  New  Zealand,  however,  which  has  retained 
many  features  of  the  original  Polynesian  tongue  that  have  been  else- 
where lost,  the  term  (niki  is  a|)[)lied  to  an  individual  in  a  tribe  who  is 
considered  to  have  received,  by  hereditary  descent,  a  pecidiar  rank 
and  .sanctity,  entitling  him  to  certain  ob.servances  which  are  rendered 
to  no  others,  and  making  his  person  inviolate  in  war.  lie  has,  how- 
ever, no  authority  what.soever  over  the  other  freemen  of  a  tribe.  In 
Lee's  vocabulary,  xriki  is  rendered  "  a  representative  of  God, — a 
priest,"  and  wakariki,  "  making  an  ariki  or  priest.''  Thi.s,  though 
not  strictly  correct,  is  perhaps  as  gooil  a  translation  as  could  be  given. 
In  Samoan,  d/i'i  is  chief,  and  lui'ti/i'i,  priest;  it  seems  likely  that  the 
latter  was  originally  the  same  word  with  the  former,  and  that  the  par- 
ticle I'd  has  lieen  i)refixed  for  the  sake  of  distinction. 

In  short,  we  may  suppose  that  the  author  of  the  tabu-code  was  a 
person,  who,  in  the  originsil  seat  of  the  Polynesian  race,  united  the 
power  of  a  ruler  and  lawgiver  to  the  dignity  of  a  chief-priest,  and  per- 
haps of  an  inspired  being.  From  the  latter  circumstance,  his  laws  or 
tabus,  whether  promulgated  as  divine  commands  or  not,  would  be 
received  and  obeyed  as  such,  and  would  retain  their  force,  from  this 
cause,  long  after  the  legislator  was  forgotten,  llis  descendants,  lind- 
ing  the  duties  of  their  religious  office  less  to  their  taste  than  the  enjoy- 
ments of  civil  power,  miglit,  like  the  Tjastern  caliphs,  devote  them- 
selves chielly  to  the  latter,  while  retaining  the  name  {aliki),  and 
perhaps  much  of  the  homage  belonging  of  right  to  the  former.     Such 


80 


ET  II  NOti  It  A  \>  II  V. 


BCPms  to  liiivt'  Im'oh  nciicriilly  tlio  cnso.  In  Now  Zortlniid,  iiloiio,  the 
civil  mitliority  lias  Ikhmi  lost,  and  only  tlu<  rolitrioiis  (liu;nity  rctaiiu'd. 
Ill  Samoa,  a  sciiaralion  lias  also  Ih-imi  I'tli'dcd  boUvciMi  tlio  two  olliccM, 
mid  a  nmv  word  t'oniu'd  to  dcsiiriiato  tho  Hacerdotal  class.  In  all  the 
otluT  <][roii|)s  llicrii  is,  [(ropcrly  spcakin^x.  n"  iiricslliotKl.  'riicru  arc 
certain  individuals  to  wlioin  llu'  naiiif  ol'  tii/iiiit/n.  (or  tiiliitijii,  tti/iiiyti, 
tahuiiit,  tiiliiKi,  iVc.,)  is  jriven,  who  take  cliarni'  ol  llic  loinpUis  and 
inia^ri's,  pi-rrorin  ri'lijrions  ritt^s,  conimuniiato  with  the  deities,  &o. 
Except  when  enu'a^cd  in  the  exercise  of  these  Iniictions,  they  are  not 
regarded  as  persons  of  peculiar  sanctity,  anil  enjoy  no  consideration 
whatever  lii^yond  that  which  sprinj^s  from  their  personal  rank  and 
wealth,  or  their  inllweiice  with  the  chiefs.  'I'lu)  word  hy  which  Ihoy 
arc  called  sij^nilies  an  artisan,  or  one  who  follows  a  particular  profes- 
sion ;  a  house  or  canoe  builder,  a  carver,  a  tattooer,  a  director  of  funeral 
ceremonies,  iVc,  are  all  called  by  this  name,  as  well  as  a  priest.  Those 
of  the  latter  class  must,  therefore,  be  considered  merely  as  persons 
appointed  by  the  real  priests, — i.  e.,  the  i//i/ii,  or  chiefs, — to  j^o  throuf^h 
the  drutlj^eries  of  their  ollice,  with  which  they  are  unwilling  to  be 
troubled. 

But  in  refusing  to  exercise  the  ordinary  functions  ol  the  priestly 
station,  the  chiefs  have  been  careful  not  to  renounce  the  dignity  and 
immunities  connected  with  it.  The  extraordinary  personal  respect 
evinced  towards  them  cannot  bo  accounted  for  from  their  civil  rank 
alone,  since  it  is  nearly  as  profound  among  those  democratic  tribes, 
who,  like  the  Nukuhivans,  pay  little  regard  to  their  authority,  as 
under  the  despotic  governments  of  Tahiti  and  Hawaii.  It  is  tabu  lor 
a  common  man  to  enter  without  permissiontlie  liou.se  of  a  chief,  or  to 
wear  a  garment  belonging  to  him,  or  to  stantl  in  his  presence  at  cer- 
tain times,  or  to  do  other  acts  savouring  of  undue  familiarity  and  dis- 
respect. The  penalty  does,  indeed,  vary  accoriling  to  the  nature  of 
the  government.  In  the  Manpiesas,  the  otl'ender  would  be  mulcted 
of  some  of  his  jiroperty,  by  way  of  expiation;  in  Tonga,  this  would 
be  accompanied  by  .severe  [ler.sonal  chastisement;  while  under  the 
iron  rule  which  jirevailed  in  the  Sandwich  Islands,  death  was  the 
only  atonement. 

A  strong  argument  in  favour  of  this  view  of  the  origin  of  the  tabu, 
is  found  in  the  fact  that  on  nearly  if  not  (piite  all  the  groups,  there 
have  been,  at  a  very  late  period,  men  who  have  been  regarded  by  the 
natives  as  partaking  of  the  divine  nature, — in  short,  as  earthly  gods. 


I'OI,  V  NEHI  A. 


31 


At  the  Nnvipnfor  TNlandN  two  hiicIi  iiidividiinlH,  fiithor  mid  son,  l)y 
nariu",  'l'iiniiif(iiii(/fi,  liad,  lor  many  yi^irs,  down  to  tlio  period  of  tlm 
first  arrival  of  tlio  iniMKioimrios,  lii-ld  tin;  iiilialiitaiitH  in  alavi!<h  awn, 
and  ruled  them  at  their  will,  by  tlio  dread  of  their  NUpernaturnl 
power.  At  the  'roiiy[a  [slands,  tlioii^li  it  is  not  known  that  any 
porsoti  is  actually  worshipped,  as  elsewhere,  there  are  two  high 
ehiefs,  whose  ollicial  lilies  are,  'I'ltiloiKja  and  Wnii,  and  a  woman, 
called  the  'VmiKihu  who  are  believed  to  \w  descended  from  ^(kIs,  and 
are  treated  with  reverence  on  that  account  by  all,  not  excepting  the 
king,  who  regards  them  as  his  superiors  in  rank.  In  New  Zealand 
the  great  warrior-chief,  llongi,  claimed  for  himself  the  title  of  a  god, 
and  was  so  called  by  his  followers.  At  the  Society  Islands  Tamatoa, 
the  liist  heathen  king  of  Ilaiatea,  was  worshipped  as  a  divinity.  At  the 
Manpiesas  there  are,  on  every  island,  several  men,  who  arc  termed 
atua,  or  gotls,  who  receive  the  same  adoration,  and  are  believed  to 
possess  the  same  powers  as  other  deities.  In  the  Sandwich  Islands, 
that  the  reverence  shown  to  some  of  the  chiefs  bordered  on  religious 
worship,  is  evident  from  a  passage  in  a  speech  of  John  li,  (formerly  a 
priest,  !uid  now  one  of  the  best  informed  of  the  native  orators,)  deli- 
vered in  1841,  and  published  in  the  Polynesian,  for  May  1,  of  that 
year,  in  which  ho  gives  an  account  of  some  of  their  ancient  supersti- 
tions, lie  says:  "Here  is  another  sort  of  tabu  that  I  have  seen, 
namely,  that  relating  to  high  chiefs,  and  e-pecially  to  the  king. 
They  were  called  gmls  by  some,  because  tlii-ir  houses  were  sacred, 
and  every  thing  that  pertained  to  their  persons."  At  Depeyster's 
Group,  the  westernmost  cluster  of  Polynesia,  we  were  visited  by  a 
chief,  who  announced  himself  as  the  atua  or  god  of  'he  islands,  and 
was  acknowledged  as  such  by  the  other  natives. 

This  singular  feature  in  tho  religious  system  of  the  Polynesians, 
appearing  at  so  many  distant  and  unconnected  points,  must  have 
originated  in  some  ancient  custom,  or  some  tenet  oi  their  primitive 
creed,  coeval,  perhaps,  with  the  formation  of  their  present  state  of 
society.  There  is  certainly  no  improbability  in  the  supposition  that 
the  lawgiver,  whose  decrees  have  come  down  to  us  in  the  form  of  the 
tabu  system,  was  a  character  of  this  sort, — a  king,  invested  by  his 
subjects  with  the  attributes  of  divinity.  It  is  worthy  of  remark,  that 
in  all  the  ca>  in  which  we  know  of  living  men  having  been  thus 
deified,  they  nwi  chiefs  of  high  rank,  and  not  ordinary  priests 
{Itijinja),  or  persuius  performing  the  sacerdotal  functions. 


22 


ET  11  N  OGR  A  r  II  V. 


M  YTJrOI.On  Y. 


The  religious  belief  of  the  Polynesians  reminds  us  of  the  classical 
mythology.  There  is  a  small  numljer  of  gods  of  the  first  class,  com- 
monly not  more  than  ten,  who  have  various  attributes.  One  is  the 
creator  of  the  islands,  another  the  god  of  war,  another  of  thieving, 
another  the  ruler  of  the  region  of  departed  spirits,  &,c.  After  these 
come  a  multitude  of  inferior  deities,  gods  of  the  sea  and  the  winds ; 
tutelar  divinities  of  islands,  towns,  and  families,  with  malignant 
sprites  haunting  the  woods,  caves,  and  desert  places,  whose  delight  it 
is  to  torment  and  annoy  the  human  race.  Many  of  the  gods  are  said 
to  have  been  men  deified  after  death,  or  sometimes,  perhaps,  during 
life.  The  first  rulers  of  a  country  frccpiently  received  divine  honours. 
This  'vns  the  case  with  'Oro  at  Raiatea,  Taugiia  at  Rarotonga,  and 
Atea  at  the  Sandwich  Islands. 

With  one,  or  perhaps  two  exceptions,  tiiere  was  no  deity  who  was 
the  object  of  worship  tiiroughout  the  greater  part  of  Polynesia.  The 
gods  of  Samoa  were  unlike  those  of  New  Zealand,  nor  did  the  latter 
country  have  the  same  objects  of  worship  as  the  Society  Islands.  The 
eastern  groups,  however,  (Tahiti,  Rarotonga,  Hawaii,  &,c.,)  had  several 
of  their  gods  in  common.  Tane,  Tu,  Rongo,  (Rono  or  lloo,)  were  wor- 
shipped in  most  of  them,  and  appear  to  have  been  of  Tahitian  origin. 

The  exception  alluded  to,  is  in  the  case  of  Tangaloa,  (or  Tarawa, 
Tanaloa,  Taaroa,)  who  is  worshipped  in  all  the  islands,  except,  per- 
haps, New  Zealand.  He  is  regarded  as  self  existent,  and  as  the  creator 
of  the  earth,  or  at  least  the  islands  of  the  sea,  and  of  the  human 
race.  His  usual  epithet  at  Samoa  is  Tangaloa  layi,  heavenly  Tanga- 
loa. At  Tahiti  and  Rarotonga  he  is  termed  Taaroa  or  Tangaroa  nut, 
great  Taaroa.  At  the  little  newly  discovered  island  of  Fakaafo,  the 
natives  spoke  of  him  with  great  awe,  as  "  Tangaloa  i  litnga  i  tc  langi,'' 
Tangaloa  above  in  the  heavens.  At  Depeyster"s  Group  the  natives 
at  first  refused  to  pronounce  the  name,  and  then  said  that  Tangaloa 
was  sacred  or  taini  on  their  island.  It  seems  likely  that  this  was  the 
original  deity  of  the  Polynesians,  perhaps,  before  tliey  left  their  pris- 
tine seat  in  the  East  Indian  Archipelago.  In  the  Tongan  traditions, 
he  is  represented  as  living  at  liulolu,  a  kind  of  terrestrial  paradise, 
situated  far  to  the  northwest,  and  sending  thence  his  two  sons  to 
people  the  islands.      » 


i^ 


POLYNESIA. 


23 


Another  name,  more  generally  tliffused  than  common,  is  that  of 
Maui  or  Moui.  At  the  FrieniUy  Islands  this  is  the  god  that  supports 
the  earth,  and  is  the  cause  of  earthquakes.  Another  name  given  to 
him  is  Mafuil-e,  and  by  this  appellation  {MafiWe  or  Mafu'e,)  he  is 
known  at  the  Navigator  Islands  as  the  god  of  earthquakes ;  but  the 
deity  on  whom  the  islands  rest  is  called  Ti'iti'i  Aiahnrja.  At  Tahiti 
iMaui  is,  or  rather  was,  another  name  for  Taaroa,  and  was  applied  to 
him  in  the  capacity  of  the  god  of  earthquakes.  He  also,  according  to 
one  story,  created  the  sun  and  the  islands  of  the  sea;  the  latter,  by 
dragging  after  him,  through  the  seas,  from  east  to  west,  an  immense 
rock,  {papa,)  from  which  fragments  were  broken  off'  and  formed  the 
islands ;  after  which  he  left  the  great  land  to  the  east,  where  it  still 
exists.*  In  the  mytliology  of  New  Zealand,  Maui  holds  the  same 
place,  as  principal  deity  and  creator  of  the  world,  which  is  given  to 
Tangaloa  elsewhere.  The  natives  often  speak  of  two  Mauis,  the 
elder  and  the  younger,  Maui-mua  and  Maui-potiki,  who  are  sometimes 
reprpsented  as  the  gods  who  created  mankind,  and  sometimes  as  the 
first  men.  At  Hawaii  one  of  the  ancient  kings  is  said  to  have  had 
four  sons,  whose  names  were  Maui-mua,  Mcui-hope,  Maui-tiitii,  and 
Maui-aUihma.  The  latter  succeeded  him  on  the  throne,  and  the 
history  .says,  that  "  He  went  to  the  sun  and  chased  his  beams,  be- 
cause they  flew  so  rapidly  ;  also,  that  he  dragged  with  a  hook  these 
islands  from  Maui  to  Taula,  towing  them  after  him  in  a  canoe ;  and 
had  those  in  the  canoe  landed  safe  at  Hilo,  on  Hawaii,  then  all  the 
islands  in  the  group  would  have  been  united  in  one,  but  one  of  the 
party  looking  behind  him,  the  hook  broke,  and  the  expected  union 
failed  of  its  consummation. "f  Here  is  an  extraordinary  confusion  of 
the  names  and  traditions  of  the  three  last-mentioned  groups.  Maui- 
mua  and  Maui-hope  correspond  precisely  in  meaning  to  the  two 
Mauis  of  New  Zealand;  Maui-tiitii  and  Maui-atalana,  present,  in  the 
last  term  of  each,  the  compound  name,  Tiitii-atalaja,  of  Samoa  (the 
j(  always  becoming  m  in  Hawaiian).  Fiuallj,  the  traditions  respect- 
ing the  last-named  Maui  are  evidently  derived  from  those  which  pre- 
vail in  Tahiti.  Of  the  probable  origin  of  this  confusion  we  shall  have 
occasion  to  speak  hereafter. 

'riki  or  Ti'i  is  another  term  of  general  prevalence,  variously  ap- 


•  Sec  l''i)vslrr'.s  "Olisrrvatioiis  mndc  during  a  Voyngc  roiiml  the  World,"  p.  341 ;  also, 
lillis'.s  l'i)lyiic'sinii  licsciirclii's,  vol.  i.  idiiip.  v. 

f  Mo'oololo  lluwaii,  in  llic  llawaiiiin  SpectnlDf,  vol.  ii.  p.  'JIS. 


24 


E  T  II  N  O  G  R  A  I'  H  V. 


plied.  Ellis  says  tiiat  the  Tahitians  considered  Tii  and  Taaroa  to  be 
one  and  the  same  being,  but  that  Taaroa  dwelt  in  the  region  of  chaos, 
and  Tii  in  the  world  of  light.  In  other  traditions  of  the  same  people, 
Tii  is  given  as  the  name  of  the  first  man.  Tii  was  also  tiie  usual 
word  for  idol  or  image  ;  perhaps,  because  the  first  images  that  were 
made  were  those  of  this  deity,  or  of  Taaroa,  under  this  form.  In 
Rurotonga  Tiki  was  the  name  of  the  first  man,  who  v.r.o  **upposed, 
after  death,  to  have  received  dominion  over  the  region  of  departed 
spirits  ;  a  person  who  died  was  said  to  have  "gone  to  Tiki."  Tiki  in 
Nukuhivan  and  Tii  in  Hawaiian  signify  an  image.  In  the  dialect  of 
New  Zealand,  hei  signifies  an  ornament  suspended  from  the  neck, 
and  the  compound  term  hei-tiki  is  applied  to  the  little  distorted  images 
of  jade  which  are  thus  worn.  It  has  been  seen  that  the  reduplicate 
form,  Tiitii,  in  Samoan,  signifies  the  god  who  supports  the  islands, 
like  Moui,  in  Tonga. 

It  seems  probable  that  the  Polynesians  originally  recognised  but 
one  deity,  who  had  dilferent  appellations,  according  to  his  different 
attributes  and  oflUces.  As  the  creator  of  the  world,  he  was  termed 
Tangaloa ;  as  the  sustainer  of  the  earth,  (or,  perhaps,  originally,  as 
the  preserving  power,)  he  was  called  Maui,  and  in  the  form  in  which 
he  revealed  himself  to  man,  he  had  the  name  of  Tiki.  The  meaning 
and  application  of  these  names  has,  however,  been  much  confused, 
and  undergone  various  alterations.  The  inferior  divinities,  who  vary 
from  one  group  to  another,  are  generally  supposed,  by  the  natives 
tiiemselves,  to  have  been  merely  deified  men. 


u 


COSMOGONY. 


Two  stories  are  prevalent  among  the  Samoans  with  regard  to  the 
creation  of  the  world,  or,  at  least,  of  their  islands.  Both  attribute  the 
work  to  their  great  god,  Tangaloa.  According  to  one  account,  while 
the  god  was  fishing,  his  hook  caught  in  the  rocks  at  the  bottom  of  the 
sea,  and  in  drawing  it  up,  he  raised  with  it  the  whole  group  of  Samoa. 
The  other  story  represents  him  as  forming  the  land  by  throwing 
down  large  stones  from  the  skies,  from  whicii  his  daughter,  Tuli, 
(snipe,)  made  the  different  islands.  She  afterwards  planted  them 
with  vegetables,  one  of  which  was  a  kind  of  vine,  from  whose  stem  a 
god,  named  ^'gui,  tbrmed  the  first  man,  by  marking  out  the  body  and 
members  of  a  human  being. 

In  Tonga  the  first  of  the.se  stories  is  the  one  generally  received. 


POLYNESIA. 


8S 


They  add  to  the  Samoan  account  that  when  the  god  Tangaloa  had 
raised  tlie  islands  to  tlieir  present  altitude,  his  hook  broke  and  left 
them  ill  that  situation ;  otherwise,  they  would  have  continued  to  rise 
until  tliey  formed  one  great  land.  The  New  Zealanders  and  Tahi- 
tians  have  the  same  account  ot'  their  islands  having  been  drawn  up 
by  a  god  while  fishing,  and  both  give  to  this  god  the  name  of  Maui, 
which,  as  we  have  before  shown,  is  but  another  appellation  for  Tan- 
galoa.  The  Tahitians  have,  besides,  other  stories,  one  of  which, — to 
the  effect,  that  the  islands  are  fragments  broken  off  from  an  immense 
rock, — has  been  already  given.  The  word  for  rock  is  jjapa,  which  is 
also  the  name  of  the  wife  of  Taaroa,  and  from  this  source  some  con- 
fusion may  have  arisen,  as  some  of  the  traditions  relate  that  the 
islands  were  born  of  Taaroa  and  Papa.*  The  Hawaiians,  according 
to  the  Mo'o-olelo,  before  quoted,  have  the  same  story,  that  the  islands 
were  born  of  Papa,  the  wife  of  Atea,  the  progenitor  of  the  human  race. 

The  belief,  so  generally  prevalent,  of  the  islands  having  been  raised 
by  a  divinity,  from  the  bottom  of  the  sea,  will  appear  natural  enough 
if  we  consider  the  circumstances  and  character  of  the  people.  The 
situation  of  their  islands,  mere  specks  of  land,  surrounded  by  what 
must  have  appeared  to  the  inhabitants  an  interminable  ocean,  and  the 
fact  that  the  Polynesians  are  emphatically  a  nation  of  fishermen, 
would  be  sufficient  to  suggest  the  idea.  When  the  priests,  to  whom 
the  religion  and  mythology  of  the  race  were  especially  committed, 
were  called  upon  to  account  for  the  formation  of  the  land  which  they 
inhabited,  they  would,  of  course,  refer  it  to  their  great  god  Tangaloa, 
or  -Maui,  and  no  other  mode  would  be  so  likely  to  occur  to  them  as 
that  by  which  they  themselves  had  frequently  drawn  up  fragments  of 
coral  rock  from  the  bottom  of  the  sea. 

The  fact  that  two  or  more  stories  are  sometimes  current  on  the 
same  group,  shows  in  what  light  they  are  regarded  by  the  natives, — 
not  as  articles  of  their  religious  creed,  which  they  are  bound  to  be- 
lieve, but  merely  as  traditions  handed  down  from  their  fathers,  which, 
though  respectable  for  their  antiquity,  may,  after  all,  not  be  true. 
Their  opinions  on  this  subject,  therefore,  differ  widely  from  those 
which  they  hold  with  regard  to  the  existence  and  power  of  tlieir  gods, 
of  which  none  of  them  entertain  a  doubt. 


Pulyiicsian  Kcsearches,  vol.  i.  p.  a60,  Am.  edit. 


26 


ETH.N  OU  II  A  !•  II  V. 


W  O  II S  II 1  P. 


If  we  may  judge  from  what  appears  in  the  eastern  groups,  the 
original  form  of  worship  of  the  Polynesians  was  no  less  simple  than 
their  theology.  In  Samoa,  Tonga,  and  New  Zealand,  their  divinities 
are  regarded  as  spiritual  beings,  and  approached  only  by  prayers, 
invocations,  penances,  offerings  of  first  fruits,  libations,  and  similar 
forms.  They  have  neither  temples  nor  altars,  nor,  properly  speaking, 
either  idols  or  sacrifices.  In  Samoa,  indeed,  tiiey  had  a  few  inani- 
mate objects  of  reverence,  which  were  worshipjied  by  a  small  portion 
of  the  population.  Mr.  Heath  says,  "  A  branch  of  bamboo,  set  up- 
right, with  a  bunch  of  cocoa-nut  fibres  tied  at  the  top,  was  worshipped 
by  part  of  Manono,  a  sacred  stone  by  another  district,  and  some 
families  had  roughly-carved  wooden  idols,  as  representations  of  de- 
ceased chiefs,  to  whom  they  paid  religious  homage.'*  In  the  latter 
custom,  of  preserving  the  effigies  of  deified  chiefs,  we  probably  see 
the  origin  of  the  idolatrous  worship  which  prevails  in  eastern  Poly- 
nesia. In  Tonga  they  have  a  few  images  as  in  Samoa,  but  the  chief 
peculiarity  in  their  system  is  a  certain  kind  of  human  sacrifice,  which 
differs  from  that  of  the  Tahitians  in  its  mode  and  object.  On  the 
sickness  of  a  chief,  it  is  usual  to  strangle  an  infant  belonging  to  the 
same  family, — sometimes  his  own  child, — who.se  death  it  is  supposed 
will  be  accepted  by  the  gods,  in  lieu  of  that  of  the  sick  person.  In 
New  Zealand  there  are  no  idols  of  any  description,  and  the  only 
approach  to  human  sacrifice  is  the  custom  of  immolating  several 
slaves  at  the  death  of  their  master;  which,  liowever,  is  done  rather 
out  of  respect  to  him,  and  to  provide  him  with  attendants  in  his 
future  existence,  than  for  the  purpose  of  appeasing  the  gods. 

In  the  eastern  groups  we  meet  with  a  wholly  different  form  of 
worship,  with  sensual  and  shocking  rites.  In  Tahiti  and  Rarotonga 
the  word  marae,  which  in  the  Navigator  and  Friendly  Islands  signi- 
fies merely  the  public  place  or  lawn  in  the  centre  of  a  village,  is  ap- 
plied to  certain  .sacred  enclosures  of  stone,  containing  two  or  three 
houses,  where  are  deposited  the  hideous  idols  which  they  worship, 
and  in  or  before  wliich  their  sacrifices  are  performed.  In  the  Sand- 
wich Islands  similar  enclosures  exist,  bi\t  with  the  name  of  heiau. 
In  the  Marquesas  the  maae  is  merely  a  grove,  containing  idols,  and 


•  Polynesian,  vol.  i.  No.  IS. 


1'  ()  I,  Y  N  K  S  I  A. 


27 


not  surrounded  by  an  enclosure.  In  all  these  groups  human  sacri- 
fices were  coniinon.  Tlio  individuals  selected  were  men  of  low  rank, 
who  had  made  themselves  obnoxious  to  the  chiefs  or  priests,  and  who 
were  put  to  death  as  much  to  glut  the  vengeance  of  their  oppressors 
as  to  propitiate  the  favour  of  tiic  divinity. 

The  native  superstitions  on  the  subjects  of  sorcery,  inspiration, 
omens,  apparitions,  the  worship  of  animals,  and  other  similar  matters, 
are  not  so  j)eculiar  and  distinctive  as  to  require  a  notice  here.  Their 
ideas,  however,  with  respect  to  a  future  state,  merit  attention.  At  the 
Navigator  Islands  dilferent  opinions  prevail.  All  believe  in  the 
existence  of  a  large  island,  situated  far  to  the  northwest,  called  Piil6tu, 
which  is  the  residence  of  the  gods.  Some  suppose  that  while  the 
souls  of  common  people  perish  with  their  bodies,  those  of  the  chiefs 
are  received  into  this  island,  which  is  described  as  a  terrestrial  ely- 
sium,  and  become  there  inferior  divinities.  Others  hold,  (accordi  ig 
to  Mr.  Heath,)  that  the  spirits  of  the  departed  live  and  work  in  a  dark 
subterraneous  abode,  and  are  eaten  by  the  gods.  A  third,  and  very 
common  opinion  is,  that  the  souls  of  all  wlio  die  on  an  island,  make 
their  way  to  the  western  extremity,  where  they  plunge  into  the  sea; 
but  what  then  becomes  of  them  is  not  stated.  The  rock  fronj  which 
they  leap,  in  the  island  of  Upolu,  was  pointed  out  to  us;  the  natives 
term  it  "  Fatu-asofia"  which  was  rendered  tlie  "jumping-off  stone.'' 

Some  one  or  other  of  ti^ese  three  opinions  prevails  in  every  part  of 
Polynesia.  At  the  Friendly  Islands,  that  which  relates  to  the  i.sland 
lying  to  the  westward,  called  by  them  Buh'itu,  is  the  mo.st  common. 
In  New  Zealand  the  dei)arted  spirits  are  supposed  to  proceed  to  the 
northern  end  of  the  island,  where,  from  a  rock,  called  ReiiKja,  they 
descend  into  the  sea,  and  pass  through  it  till  they  reach  the  islands  of 
the  Three  Kings,  a  small  cluster,  about  thirty  miles  from  the  North 
Cape,  on  which  is  placed  the  elysium  of  the  islanders.  At  the 
Society  Islands,  according  to  Mr.  Ellis,  they  supposed  that  the  soul, 
on  leaving  the  body,  was  conducted  to  the^o,  or  place  of  night,  where 
it  was  eaten  by  the  gods, — not  at  once,  but  by  degrees, — and  after  it 
had  three  times  undergone  this  operation,  it  acquired  the  rank  and 
attributes  of  a  divinity.  They  also  believe  in  the  existence  of  a  para- 
dise, termed  by  them  Rohutu  noanoa,  or  sweet-scented  llohutu,  which 
was  the  abode  of  the  gods  and  of  deified  spirits.  It  was  situated  near 
a  high  mountain,  called  Tamahani  nnauna,  glorious  Tamahani,  on 
the  northwest  side  of  the  island  of  Ilaiatea.  Rohutu  may  be  a  cor- 
ruption of  Purotu.     Tlie  Rarotongans,  says  Mr.  Williams,   "  repre- 


28 


ETIINOGR  A  I'll  Y. 


■^1*! 


seiitcd  their  paradise  as  a  very  lonsr  house,  encircled  with  heantifid 
slirubs  and  llowors,  wliich  never  lost  their  bloom  or  fraj^rauce,  and 
whose  inmates  enjoyed  iinwitlieriii<if  beauty  and  unfading  youth." 
Tile  name  ot"  tiie  presidiny;  deity  of  tiiis  abode  was  Tiki.  At  the 
Sandwich  Islands  the  natives  held  opinions  very  nearly  the  same  as 
tiiose  of  the  Society  Islanders ;  the  s|)irits  of  the  dead  either  went  to 
the  jm,  or  place  of  nij^ht,  and  were  eaten  by  the  gods,  or  they  de- 
scended to  the  regions  below,  where  Atea  and  Milu,  the  first  sove- 
reigns of  Hawaii,  had  their  kingdom.  It  should  be  observed,  that  in 
the  dialects  of  all  tlie  islands,  except  New  Zealand,  the  words  Mow, 
koranl,  and  uestirard,  are  synonymous.  Those  accounts,  therefore, 
which  rei>resent  the  abcxle  of  spirits  as  a  subterranean  hades,  and 
those  which  make  it  a  terrestrial  paradise,  lying  to  the  westward, 
have  probably  a  common  origin,  and  owe  their  dilference  to  the  dif- 
ferent acceptations  of  the  same  word. 


H  J 


CIVIL    POLITY. 

A  very  simple  form  of  society  exists  in  all  the  Polynesian  islands. 
There  are  usually  three  classes  or  ranks, — chiefs,  landholders,  and 
common  people.  In  New  Zealand,  however,  the  first  is  wanting, 
and  in  the  Sandwich  Islands  the  second.  The  relative  powers  of 
the  three  classes  also  vary  at  tiie  dirterent  groups.  On  this  subject  it 
will  be  necessary  to  enter  into  some  particulars. 

At  the  Navigator  Islands  the  government  is  nominally,  and  in  part 
actually  in  the  hands  of  the  whole  bo<ly  of  alii,  or  chiefs.  But  tlieir 
power  is  not  arbitrary.  The  householders  {(nhifaks)  of  a  district  are 
the  recognised  councillors  of  the  chief,  and  he  seldom  takes  any  im- 
portant step  without  consulting  them.  It  i*;  not  uncommon  for  a 
chief,  whose  course  is  displeasing  to  the  people  of  his  district,  to  be 
deposed  by  the  united  action  of  the  landholders  and  the  neighbouring 
chiefs,  and  another  appointed  to  his  ollice.  The  common  people  are, 
in  general,  the  relatives  and  dependants  of  the  tulafaks,  and  have  no 
direct  influence  in  the  government. 

Of  chiefs  there  are  three  grades,  not  distinguished  by  particular 
titles,  but  by  the  terms  which  are  used  in  speaking  of  or  to  them 
Two  or  three  of  the  highest,  whose  influence  extends  over  the  whole 
group,  are  of  the  first  rank.  Their  near  relatives,  and  the  rulers  of 
large  districts  tbrm  the  second.  The  third  comprises  the  petty  chiefs 
of  single  towns,  whose  power  will  vary  of  course  with  the  number  of 


POLYNESIA. 


29 


their  people.  As  an  example  of  the  difference  of  language  ahove- 
mentioned,  the  expression  "to  come"  may  be  adduced.  Speaking  of 
a  common  man,  they  would  say  iia  alu  mat,  he  has  come;  of  a 
tuUifale,  u(i  alaln  mat  ;  of  a  petty  chief,  tia  maliii  mat ;  of  one  of  the 
second  class,  tta  suxii  mat ;  while  for  one  of  the  highest  rank,  it  would 
be  tia  a/in  viai,  and  the  same  expression  is  also  used  in  speaking  of 
a  god. 

There  is  reason  to  believe  that  at  some  former  period  a  monarchical 
government  prevailed  in  this  group.  The  title  of  tiipn,  or  sovereign, 
is  still  given  to  a  chief  who,  in  rank,  wealth,  and  influence,  is  superior 
to  the  rest — but  more  as  a  mark  of  respect,  than  as  conveying  any 
additional  authority.  Nor  is  it  now  hereditary,  whatever  it  may  for- 
merly have  been.  The  government  is  carried  on  after  a  regular 
system,  somewhat  like  that  of  a  representative  republic.  The  chief 
and  householders  of  every  town  and  inferior  district  meet  frequently 
in  council,  (or,  as  it  is  called,  afotio,)  to  decide  on  all  matters  of  public 
interest  within  their  limits.  The  large  districts  are  in  like  manner 
regulated  by  the  governing  chief,  the  petty  chiefs,  and  principal  land- 
holders ;  and  any  matter  affecting  the  entire  group  is  determined  in 
a  general  assembly,  or  fono,  of  the  high  chiefs,  each  of  whom  is  at- 
tended by  a  tiilufale,  who  acts  as  his  advi.ser,  and  usually  as  his  orator. 
The  decision  is  not  by  voting,  but  by  general  consent,  the  discussion 
being  prolonged  until  some  conclusion,  satisfactory  to  the  greater  part, 
and  particularly  to  the  most  influential,  is  arrived  at.  Their  deci- 
sions are  termed  tulafono,  or  acts  of  council.  One  of  the  principal 
prerogatives  of  the  tupti  seems  to  be  that  of  convoking  these  assem- 
blies; though,  should  he  refuse  to  do  so,  when  circumstances  seemed 
to  recjuire  it,  they  would  undoubtedly  meet  without  him. 

As  might  be  expected  in  a  government  partaking  of  a  republican 
form,  parties  exist  in  Samoa,  which,  if  not  based  on  such  important 
principles  as  tho.se  of  civilized  countries,  do  not  yield  to  them  in  vio- 
lence. That  party  which  has  the  ascendency  is  termed  the  mal6,  or 
strong ;  the  other  is  the  vaivai,  or  weak — answering  nearly  to  our 
"administration"  and  "oppo-sition."  The  general  government  of  the 
country  is,  in  fact,  conducted  entirely  by  the  former,  though  the  chiefs 
of  the  latter  generally  retain  their  power  in  their  respective  districts. 
The  head-quarters  of  one  party  are  in  the  populous  di.strict  of  Aana, 
or  the  eastern  coast  of  the  island  of  Upolu ;  those  of  the  other,  on  the 
small  island  of  Manono,  which  is  only  divided  from  this  district  by  a 
channel  about  three  miles  broad.     The  two  stand  to  each  other  very 

8 


30 


E  T  II  N  O  G  R  A  P  II  Y. 


much  in  the  relation  of  Athens  and  Sparta  in  ancient  Greece.  The 
adherents  of  both  are  scattered  over  every  part  of  the  group.  The 
inhabitants  of  one  town  will  belong  to  the  Aana  party,  and  those  of 
the  next  adjoining  to  tiiat  of  Manono.  The  superiority  of  one  party  to 
the  other  depends  upon  its  superior  strength  ;  and  this  is  determined, 
not  at  the  polls,  but  on  the  field  of  battle.  The  last  great  "  struggle 
of  parties"  took  place  in  1830.  Tamalhinga,  the  chief  who  has 
already  been  mentioned  as  pretending  to  the  attributes  of  a  god,  he- 
longed  to  Manono,  or,  at  least,  to  that  party.  Relying  upon  his  sacred 
character,  he  was  guiliy  of  many  acts  of  oppression  and  brutality 
towards  the  people  of  Aana,  who,  at  last,  outraged  beyond  endurance, 
rose  upon  him  and  put  him  to  death.  A  general  war  ensued  between 
the  adherents  of  Aana  and  Manono,  which,  after  continuing,  with 
various  fortune,  for  several  months,  resulted  in  the  overthrow  of  the 
former;  since  which  time  they  have  been  considered  the  vaioai, 
or  weak  party.  The  use  which  the  victors  made  of  their  newly 
acquired  power  was  appalling.  The  whole  district  of  Aana,  more 
than  thirty  miles  in  length,  was  ravaged  and  depopulated.  Large 
fires  were  kindled  into  which  the  prisoners  were  thrown — women  and 
children  as  well  as  warriors — and  burned  to  death.  The  con(|nered 
district  remained  without  an  inhabitant  till  1836,  at  which  time  the 
other  party,  having  become  converts  to  Christianity,  removed  the  in- 
terdict, and  allowed  the  fugitives  to  re-occupy  their  lands.  It  then 
became  apparent  that  the  form  of  government  under  which  they  live 
is  not  without  its  advantages.  Had  the  people  of  Aana  been  an  inde- 
pendent tribe,  they  would  probably  have  been  exterminated,  as  has  fre- 
quently been  the  case  in  New  Zealand — or,  at  the  very  least,  reduced 
to  slavery.  But  from  the  nature  of  their  political  relations,  it  hap- 
pened that  nearly  every  person  of  note  among  the  conquered  party 
had  some  kinsman  or  friend  in  the  ranks  of  the  mal(') ;  with  the.se  they 
took  refuge  after  their  defeat,  and,  except  those  who  were  captured 
and  destroyed  in  the  first  (lush  of  victory,  very  few  were  put  to  death. 
When  we  visited  these  islands,  only  three  years  after  the  return  of  the 
expelled  party  to  their  homes,  Aana  was  the  most  populous  district  in 
the  group,  and  few  traces  remained  of  their  defeat,  except  their  politi- 
cal inferiority. 

Another  striking  advantage  of  their  system  of  polity  is  found  in  the 
freedom  from  taxation,  and  the  general  mildness  of  the  government. 
The  chiefs  of  the  opposition  dare  not  oppress  their  subjects,  for  fear 
of  an  appeal  to  the  ?nald  j  while  those  of  the  latter  are  withheld  from 


P  O  L  V  N  E  S  I  A. 


31 


an  arbitrary  exercise  of  their  power  by  the  great  variety  of  interests 
whidi  exists  amonjr  them,  and  by  tlie  fear  of  rendering  some  of  their 
adherents  disaffected,  and  thus  strengthening  the  opposite  party. 
Accordingly  we  found  nowhere  in  the  Pacific  such  a  general  diffusion 
of  the  means  of  subsistence  and  enjoyment,  or  so  httle  difference  in 
point  of  comfort  and  ease  of  life  lietween  tlie  higher  and  lower  classes. 

In  Tonga  tlie  system  of  government  is,  at  present,  not  unlike  that 
of  Samoa.  When  the  islands  were  visited  by  Cook,  Mumui  was 
king,  and  possessed  great,  though  not  arbitrary,  power.  His  son  and 
successor,  Tuku  Alio,  was  put  to  death  for  his  tyranny  by  one  of  his 
subordinate  chieftains, — since  which  time  the  political  power  remains 
in  the  hands  of  the  principal  chiefs,  thougli  the  kingly  title  is  still 
given  to  a  son  of  Tuku  Alio.  This  title  is  Tui-Kana-kabolo,  or  Lord 
of  Kana-kabolo,  the  district  in  which  he  is  crowned.  It  is  not 
directly  hereditary,  for  the  person  who  liolds  it  can  only  obtain  it  by 
the  suffrages  of  the  chiefs ;  but  they  usually  elect  some  one  of  the 
family  to  which  the  last  king  belonged — either  a  brother,  a  son,  or  a 
nephew.  The  whole  i.sland  of  Tonga  is  divided  into  districts,  each 
of  which  has  a  chief,  who  is  nominally  appointed  by  the  king;  but 
this  appointment  must  be  made  according  to  certain  received  usages, 
and  must,  moreover,  he  confirmed  by  the  whole  body  of  the  chiefs. 
The  official  titles  of  these  lordships  are  sometimes  derived  from  the 
name  of  the  district,  as,  Tui-lklehaki,  Lord  of  Belehaki ;  but  more  fre- 
quently they  are  distinct  appellations,  of  unknown  origin, — asT  ««/,  the 
official  title  of  the  chief  of  Iluuma  (wlio.se  proper  name  was,  in  1840, 
Loloa) ;  Ata,  for  the  district  of  Hihifo,  Lavaka  for  that  of  Bea,  &c. 
In  one  view,  the  government  may  be  considered  as  a  kind  of  "  family 
compact," — for  the  persons  holding  the  offices  and  titles  above-men- 
tioned address  one  another  by  the  names  of  father,  son,  uncle,  grand- 
father, and  the  like,  without  any  reference  to  their  real  relationship. 
Thus  Taufahau,  in  1840,  notwithstanding  his  great  power  and  influ- 
ence, as  sovereign  of  Habai  and  Vavau,  was  considered  as  a  mere 
youth,  a  "  grandson,"  by  the  haughty  office-bearers  of  Tonga,  and  in 
a  /iY/«a-party  was  obliged  to  seat  himself  at  the  foot  of  the  ring,  among 
the  common  people  and  chiefs  of  low  rank. 

Next  to  the  chiefs  are  the  matabiifes,  who  are  the  same  class  as  the 
tuhifaks  of  Samoa.  Their  power,  however,  is  less,  as  that  of  the 
chiefs  is  greater,  than  in  the  latter  group.  The  lower  orders  con.sist 
of  miias  and  tuas  (meaning  literally,  those  before  and  those  behind). 
The  former  are  the  relatives  of  matabuks,  who  may  succeed  them  in 


32 


K  T  II  N  O  li  R  A  V  II  Y. 


their  rank  and  possessions ;  the  iiitter  fire  the  frrcnt  muss  of  tlio  pco|)lo, 
who  hiive  no  political  ri<;hts.  The  condition  of  this  class  is  as  much 
worse  than  in  the  Navigator  Islands  as  the  government  is  stronger  and 
i)otter  organized  for  the  purposes  of  oppression.  It  is,  however,  milder 
than  that  of  Tahiti,  and  infinitely  |)referahle  to  the  debasing  despotism 
which  existed  in  the  Sandwidi  Islands. 

Habai  and  Vavau,  which  were  formerly  tributary  to  Tongatabii,  are 
united  under  an  independent  government,  with  the  same  classes  of 
chiefs  (viki),  landholders  {matabuk),  and  common  people  [muu  and 
tiia). 

New  Zealand. — According  to  the  information  derived  from  the 
natives,  the  inhabitants  of  the  north  island,  which  contains  nearly  all 
the  population  of  the  group,  are  divided  into  one  hundred  and  four 
tribes.  These  tribes  are  das.sed  by  them  under  four  general  designa- 
tions. The  Xtjfipii/ii,  comprising  thirty-tive  tribes,  possess  the  north- 
ern peninsula,  down  to  the  isthmus  of  Manukao.  The  population  of 
this  part  of  tiie  island  has  been  very  much  reduced  by  ilisease,  and 
the  devastating  wars  carried  on  since  the  intrmluction  of  tire-arms. 
The  SgiitinKiru — fourteen  tribes — inhabit  the  coast  from  the  isthmus 
to  the  KastCape,  including  the  Kiver  Thames  and  the  Bay  of  IMcnty. 
The  Nf/iiti/i(ili/hi(/ii/iii,  tlie  most  numerous  of  all,  including  forty-nine 
tril)es,  |)ossess  the  whole  eastern  coast,  from  the  Cape  to  the  entrance 
of  Cook's  Strait.  This  is  the  most  [)opidous  part  of  New  Zealand, 
and  that  which  lias  been  least  visited.  Finally,  the  Ngaiiriiiinui, 
comprising  only  nine  tribes,  are  thinly  scattered  along  the  shores  of 
Cook's  Strait,  and  the  western  coast  of  the  island,  as  far  north  as  the 
isthmus  of  Manukao.  Of  most  of  these  tribes  the  names  begin  with 
\(jiiti,  Sijai,  or  jVyr/,  as  SyatireiKju,  y!<j(iti(ni'(i,  IS'fjaifantd,  Myutipu. 
It  seems  probable  that  these  are,  in  fact,  clans  descended  from  a  com- 
mon ancestor,  anil  that  the  names  stand  for  nga  tumaiti  a  liciif/ii,  &c., 
the  children  of  Rcnyii,  Awa,  'i'ama,  'J'ipii.  In  expressing  this  opinion 
to  *he  natives  from  whom  our  information  was  obtained,  they  agreed, 
after  some  discussion  among  themselves,  that  it  was  likely  to  be  cor- 
rect. On  another  occasion,  a  native  whom  we  cpiestioned  as  to  the 
country  from  which  the  New  Zealanders  were  derived,  declared  that 
they  came  from  no  other  place,  but  belonged  to  the  land,  like  trees 
and  stones.  He  said,  moreover,  that  the  first  man  (tiipuna,  ancestor) 
was  Taivake.  This  was  at  the  Bay  of  Islands ;  and  on  referring  to 
the  list  of  tribes,  it  appears  that  that  which  inhabits  the  town  of  Koro- 
rareka,  on  the  south  side  of  that  buy,  is  called  Ngaitawake ;  it  was 


POLYNESIA, 


33 


l)roh!il)ly  to  tliis  that  the  man  Ijelon^^od,  and  liis  assertion  was  true  as 
regarded  the  |)articular  clan  of  which  he  was  a  mcrnhcr.  The  names 
of  some  of  tiic  trihes  hcgin  with  waniiu,  meaning  "  oll'spring :"  as  the 
Witntni-d-Hudtdiiparr,  oH'spring  of  Hviatanpare,  at  Tokamaru  Bay, — 
the  WiiiKiu-a-Uoiifjolxulii,  at  Tnranga,  or  Poverty  Hay. 

At  present,  the  various  triljes  or  chins  are  entirely  independent  of 
one  another,  nor  does  any  peculiar  connexion  appear  to  exist  hetween 
those  which  constitute  the  principal  divisions,  though  this  may  formerly 
have  been  the  case,  li  is  possible  the  arikis  once  had  a  civil  power 
united  witii  their  religious  raidt,  and  that  in  some  cases  this  authority 
may  have  extended  over  a  large  territory, — though  we  find  no  positive 
indications  of  such  a  state  of  things  beyond  the  general  designations 
applied  to  a  number  of  tribes,  and  the  fact  that  the  reverence  paid  to 
the  ariki,  as  a  sacred  personage,  extends  frequently  beyond  the  limits 
of  the  tribe  to  which  he  belongs. 

Not  only  is  every  tribe  independent  of  all  the  others,  but  every 
freeman  or  rauyatim  in  a  tribe  considers  hitnself  equal  in  rank  to  the 
rest.  The  class  of  chiefs,  properly  speaking,  does  not  exist.  But  as, 
in  every  society,  there  will  be  some  one  who,  for  his  superior  wisdom, 
elociuence,  prowess,  wealth,  or  family  connexions,  will  be  acknow- 
ledged as  the  head  and  ilirector,  and  as  the  representative  of  the  rest 
in  their  public  transactions,  we  find,  in  New  Zealand,  that  every  tribe 
has  its  rdiigatini  rdhi,  a  title  which  is  sometimes  rendered  "  high 
chief,"  but  of  which  the  more  exact  translation  would  be  "chief 
citizen,"  or  "  head  freeman."  The  office  is  not  hereditary,  though  it 
will  be  easily  understood  that  many  circumstances  will  usually  com- 
bine to  retain  it  in  a  particular  family.  Besides  the  raiujdtiras,  the 
only  class  is  that  of  slaves  (tdurekareka).  These  are  persons  taken 
captive  in  war,  or  the  descendants  of  such.  They  are  considered  to 
be  the  property  of  their  masters,  who  may  dispose  of  them  at  will, 
and  put  them  to  death  without  interference.  This  is  frequently  done, 
not  merely  in  anger,  but  ofteii  from  pure  wantonness,  or  to  indulge 
their  cannibal  propensities.  On  the  other  hand,  the  rdugatiras  do  all 
the  fighting,  the  slaves  merely  accompanying  them  in  their  expedi- 
tions, to  carry  their  arms  and  prepare  their  food. 

The  effect  of  this  form  of  society  on  the  character  of  the  New  Zea- 
landers  reiiuires  to  bo  noted.  It  has  already  been  said  that  their 
division  into  numerous  tribes,  and  the  continual  wars  which  result 
from  it,  have  tended  to  render  them  ferocious  and  bloodthirsty.  The 
general  equality  of  rank  among  the  freemen,  and  the  absence  of  a 

9 


84 


KT  II  N  ()(■  II  A  I'  II  Y. 


! 


goveriiiii(j  nutlioritv,  uivos  tluMii  «  stroiii;  soiiso  of  |)orsonal  iiuh'peii- 
(liMice ;  wliilo  tin-  Imbit  of  (lomiiieoriiiix  at  will  (ivit  tlu'ir  hIiivos  is 
calciiliiti'd  to  roiuU-r  tlioiii  liauij;lity.  'I'lii'so  coiiiliitii'd  traits  arc  all 
strikiiij^ly  appurnit,  ami  they  lu'aiiy  ovonoiiu!  tlui  (iiNpositioii  to 
fraiikiiesN  and  ^oud  hiiiiiour  w  liicli  is  a  ircncral  cliaractcriHtio  of  llio 
Polynesian  race.  'I'iie  New  Zeaiander  approaelies  in  eliaracter,  as 
in  appearance,  to  the  American  Indian,  lie  is  exceedingly  proml, 
ot'ten  sullen,  and  always  (|nick-leinpered.  We  have  seen  a  common 
raiigutini  excited  to  tiiry  hy  a  little  teasin;",  inti'iided  in  perfect  p;ood 
nature,  and  w  hich,  nt  any  other  island,  would  only  have  called  forth 
lauffhter  and  repartee. 

In  the  Society  Islamls,  the  three  classes  of  arii  or  chiefs,  rantira 
or  landholilers,  and  nitiiKihiiiif  or  common  people,  exist,  as  at  the 
Samoan  liroup.  There  is  also  a  head  chief,  arii  ru/ii,  who  is  com- 
monly termed  the  king,  but  who  hears,  in  fact,  the  same  relation  to 
the  other  chiefs,  as  does  the  raiKjulira  rahi  of  New  Zealand  to  the 
other  freemen.  His  power  varies  acconling  to  circumstances,  and 
depends  much  upon  his  personal  character.  It  is  never  purely  arbi- 
trary, and  is  sometimes  almost  null.  Tiie  inlluenceof  the  high  chiefs, 
as  well  as  that  of  the  landliolders  in  the  government,  is  always  very 
great,  and  the  king  seldom  ventures  to  take  any  step  in  opposition  to 
their  united  sentiments.  The  most  remarkable  feature  in  the  govern- 
ment of  this  country  is  the  rule  which  re(|uires  not  only  the  king,  but 
every  chief  and  landholder,  immediately  on  the  birth  of  an  heir,  to 
resign  to  him  his  rank  and  possessions,  and  retain  merely  tlie  regency 
(in  case  of  the  king)  or  the  temporary  control,  until  the  heir  has 
attaineil  the  proper  age  to  assume  the  management.  Mr.  Ellis  sup- 
poses that  the  object  of  this  regulation  is  to  secure  the  succession  in  a 
family,  and  to  guard  against  the  confusion  and  di.ssensions  which  fre- 
((uently  follow  the  death  of  a  chief  in  the  other  groups. 

At  Ilarotonga  there  are,  according  to  Mr.  Williams,  four  classes; 
the  ariki  or  high  chiefs,  the  jniiltiiiipo  or  governors  of  districts,  the 
raiKjutiia  or  landholders,  and  the  uiKja  or  tenants.  The  class  of  dis- 
trict chiefs,  however,  exists  in  all  the  groups,  and  though  forming  a 
|)eculiar  grade  of  nobility,  is  not  properly  to  be  considered  a  distinct 
class  from  the  other  chiefs. 

The  natives  of  the  Paumotu  Archipelago  gave  us  the  names  of 
sixty-two  islands  belonging  to  it,  of  which  thirteen,  lying  chietly  on 
the  southern  and  southeastern  border,  were  said  by  them  to  be  unin- 
habited.    The  inhabited  islands  may  be  classed,  politically,  under 


1M>  I,  Y  N  KHI  A. 


US 


two  iliviNiouM,  onstcru  arid  wostorn.  'V\w  fornior  incliKli^s  Ifaii,  or 
Dow  Island,  mid  idl  to  tlio  I'liHt  of  it;  tlio  liiiter,  tlioso  lyiii^  in  tlio  wust 
ot  this  isliiiid,  tiiirty-iiiiiu  in  number  'I'lic  inliultitants  of  tlio  former 
are  independent,  and  still  in  their  siivii^e  stiite,  Imviiijui  little  comma- 
niciition  with  one  another.  TIioho  of  tlie  latter  arc  under  the  sway  of 
iWjdiKi,  or  AiKiti,  commonly  called  Chain  Island.  This  supremacy  is 
of  modern  date,  and  has  been  gained  by  coiKpiest.  WIkmi  the  other 
islands  were  first  visited  by  sliips,  they  were  found  inlialnted  by  a 
numerous  and  warlike  population.  About  the  beginning  of  the 
present  century,  the  natives  of  Ngani'i  began  to  accpiire  a  superioritj 
in  arms  over  the  rest.  They  attacketl  one  island  after  another,  de- 
stroying most  o*"  llio  people,  and  carrying  the  remainder  captives  to 
their  own  island,  where  they  became  the  slaves  of  their  coiKiuerors. 
In  this  way,  thirty-eight  of  the  I'auinolus  were  comi>lctely  depopu- 
lated. On  the  introduction  of  Christianity,  which  took  place  about 
twenty-five  years  ago,  through  the  agency  of  native  'i'ahilian  mis- 
NionarieB,  many  of  the  captives  were  allowed  to  return  to  their  several 
islands, — remaining,  however,  under  the  dominion  of  Ngana,  which 
they  consider  the  metropolis.  The  number  upon  each  of  the  subject 
islands  is  very  small,  while  on  Chain  Island  there  are  said  to  be  three 
or  four  thousand.  How  it  happened  that  this  peoph?  should  have 
originally  obtained  this  superiority  in  war,  cannot  easily  be  explained. 
Their  island  is  surpassed  in  size  by  several  others.  It  has,  however, 
a  shallow  lagoon,  abi)unding  in  fish,  which  gives  them  a  gootl  supply 
of  food,  and  the  island  is  said  to  bo  a  grove  of  cocoa-nut  trees  from 
one  end  to  the  other.  The  probability  is,  that  it  hud  always  a  some- 
what larger  population,  in  proportion  to  its  size,  than  the  others,  and 
being  situated  at  some  distance  from  the  rest  of  the  group,  it  was  less 
exposed  to  sudden  attack,  and  its  people  were  more  enterprising.  A.s, 
moreover,  they  have  always  kept  up  a  fretpiont  communication  with 
Tahiti,  they  were  probably  supplied  with  firearms  sooner  than  the 
peo|)le  of  the  other  islands. 

The  Chain  Islanders  acknowledge  no  king,  but  have  several  chiefs, 
who  owe  their  iniluenco  to  various  circumstances  of  birth,  valour, 
reputed  wisdom,  &c.  The  state  of  society  bears  a  general  resem- 
blance to  that  which  prevails  in  New  Zealand.  The  Paumotus  are 
generally  considered  as  under  the  Tahitian  government,  but  the  sub- 
jection is  merely  nominal.  The  Society  Islanders,  in  fact,  stand  in 
some  dread  of  their  fierce  and  warlike  neighbours. 

At  the  Marquesas  there  is  less  distinction  of  rank  than  at  any  other 


rtrr 


<  ill 


36 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


group.  There  are  certain  persons  to  whom  the  title  of  aiki  (or,  more 
commonly,  hakaiki)  is  given,  but  it  procures  them  no  power  or 
influence  beyond  wliat  they  would  otherwise  possess.  All  that  they 
derive  from  this  distinction  consists  in  certain  tokens  of  respect  which 
are  paid  to  thein,  in  accordance  with  the  regulations  of  the  tabu- 
system.  The  rest  of  the  people  are  landiiolders,  or  their  relatives  and 
tenants.  A  general  feeling  of  equality  and  personal  independence 
prevails,  as  in  New  Zealand.  There  is,  however,  this  difference,  that 
the  slave-class  being  for  the  most  part  wanting,  the  pride  of  superi- 
ority is  not  felt.  The  jNlanjuesans  have  all  the  ferocity  and  all  the 
free  spirit  of  the  New  Zeaianders,  and  are  far  more  sensual  and  dis- 
honest ;  but  the  sullen  hauteur  which  we  find  in  the  latter  is  very 
rare  among  the  former.  Tliey  are,  on  the  contrary,  a  frank,  social, 
light-liearted  people,  very  agreeable  in  a  brief  intercourse,  but  with 
few  good  qualities  1o  attract  on  a  longer  intimacy.  Besides  the 
hakaiki,  there  is  usually,  in  every  tribe,  a  toa,  or  chief  warrior,  whose 
business  it  is  to  lead,  or  rather  precede  them  to  battle.  But  even 
there  his  authority  extends  but  little  beyond  the  right  of  advising,  and 
every  man  fights  or  runs  away  according  to  his  individual  notions  of 
propriety.  In  the  naval  branch  of  their  service  the  same  democratic 
principle  prevails.  Their  war-canoes  arc  large,  and  composed  of  a 
number  of  pieces ;  each  piece  frecjuently  lias  its  separate  owner, 
whose  consent  must  bo  ol)tained  before  the  whole  can  be  put  together. 
In  the  Sandwich  Islands,  before  the  adoption  of  their  present  written 
constitution,  a  peculiar  form  of  government  prevailed,  differing  from 
the  rest  in  the  absence  of  a  mid<lle  class  of  land-proprietors.  All  the 
land  in  the  group  was  the  property  of  the  king,  and  leased  by  him  to 
inferior  cliiofs  {hatu-aina,  literally  "landlords"),  who  underlet  it  to 
the  people.  As  the  king,  however,  though  absolute  in  theory,  was 
aware  that  his  power  depended  very  much  on  the  co-operation  of  the 
high  chiefs,  they  became,  to  a  certain  degree,  partakers  in  his  autho- 
rity. The  power  thus  lodged  in  the  liands  of  the  king  and  chiefs  was 
as  despotic  as  could  well  be  imagined.  Any  man,  from  the  heads  of 
districts  to  the  lowest  of  the  people,  might,  at  a  word,  be  stripped  of 
all  his  possessions,  and  driven  out  a  houseless  wanderer.  The  conse- 
([ucnce  was,  a  degree  of  op|)ression  to  which  nothing  similar  was 
known  in  any  other  part  of  Polynesia.  It  was  a  grinding  tyranny, 
by  \\»liich  every  morsel  of  food,  beyond  what  was  necessary  lor  the 
existence  of  the  labourer,  was  wrung  from  iiim  to  support  the  chiefs 
and  tlieir  numerous  attendants  in  a  life  of  idleness  and  profusion.    In 


POLYNESIA. 


37 


no  other  group  was  the  difference  so  striking  between  the  nobles  and 
the  common  people.  The  former  were  above  the  middle  height,  and 
of  enormous  bulk.  They  became  large,  fat,  and  sleek,  like  prize  oxen, 
and  by  the  same  process  of  idleness  and  huge  feeding.  The  latter 
were  small  and  thin,  with  a  coarse  outline  of  form  and  feature.  Not 
less  contrasted  were  the  manners  of  the  two  clas.ses.  Tlie  deportment 
of  the  chiefs  was  haughty,  bold,  and  commanding;  that  of  their  sub- 
jects humble,  timid,  and  mean.  The  chiefs  were  heartless  and  cruel 
from  luxury,  and  the  habit  of  undisputed  sway,  and  their  subjects, 
from  misery,  and  the  results  of  long  oppression.  The  former  sacri- 
ficed human  beings  by  hundreds  to  atone  for  a  broken  tabu,  and  the 
latter  murdered  their  own  children  to  escape  the  trouble  of  supporting 
them.  In  short,  it  was,  perhaps,  as  bad  a  government  as  could  have 
been  devised.  The  root  of  the  evil  was  undoubtedly  the  system  by 
which  the  title  to  all  the  land  was  vested  in  the  king.  According  to 
the  native  account,  this  feature  in  their  polity  was  the  result  of  a 
voluntary  renunciation  of  their  rights  by  the  people  themselves.  In 
the  "  Moo-oleb  IlaiVdii"  it  is  stated,  that  "  in  the  reign  of  an  ancient 
king  of  Hawaii,  by  name  Pui-atalani,  his  subjects  were  freciuently 
accusing  each  other,  and  he  was  occupied  in  adjusting  their  difficul- 
ties. At  length  he  became  weary  of  his  burden,  and  said  to  his 
people,  '  I  am  tired  of  ruling  over  the  land,  and  will  no  longer  have 
the  care  of  it.  It  will  be  better  for  you,  my  subjects,  to  look  after 
your  own  lands,  in  a  way  to  suit  yourselves ;  and  I  will  take  care  of 
my  own.'  They  therefore  managed  their  own  affairs,  but  not  long; 
for,  perceiving  that  the  country  did  not  prosper  under  this  arrange- 
ment, they  restored  it  to  their  former  ciiief  In  this  way,  perhaps, 
the  land  became  the  chief's."* 

CANNIBALISM. 

The  Polynesians  may,  without  injustice,  be  called  a  race  of  can- 
nibals. In  New  Zealand,  the  Ilervey  Group,  the  Gambler  Islands, 
the  Paumotu  Archipelago,  and  the  Marquesas,  the  practice  is  or 
was  universal,  and  is  confessed  by  the  natives  with  no  apparent  feel- 
ing of  shame.  In  the  Navigator,  friendly.  Society,  and  Sandwich 
Islands,  though  not  common,  it  was,  in  former  days,  occasionally 
practised,  and  (what  is  the  most  important  point)  was  not  regarded 


*  Hawaiian  Sixjctator,  vol.  ii.,  p.  438. 
10 


i: 


38 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


with  any  great  horror.  By  some  it  has  been  supposed  that  this 
custom  originated  in  the  fury  of  revengetul  hostihty ;  by  others,  in 
the  cravings  of  Ininger  during  seasons  of  famine.  But  the  natives  of 
New  Holland,  who  are  quite  as  ferocious  as  the  Polynesians,  and  who 
frequently  sutier  severely  from  the  want  of  food,  are  not  cannibals. 

There  is,  in  the  minds  of  most  men,  savage  as  well  as  civilized,  a 
certain  notion  of  sanctity  attached  to  the  dcuid  body  of  a  human  being, 
— a  feeling  of  dread  and  repugnance  at  the  idea  of  touching  or  dis- 
turbing a  corpse, — which  no  effort  can  altogether  vanquish.  This 
feeling,  however,  appears  hardly  to  exist  among  the  people  of  these 
islands,  as  is  apparent  in  several  of  their  customs.  It  will  be  sufficient 
to  mention  two.  The  Polynesians  do  not,  usually,  like  many  savage 
tribes,  torture  their  prisoners  to  death,  nor  are  they  wont,  as  a  general 
thing,  to  preserve  any  part  of  the  body  of  a  slain  enemy  as  a  trophy, — 
though  this  is  sometimes  done.  But  it  is  their  chief  object,  and  espe- 
cial delight,  to  secure  the  corpse,  tor  the  purpose  of  practising  upon  it 
every  horrible  disfigurement  which  the  imagination  can  devise.  Mr, 
Ellis*  relates  several  of  the  modes  in  use  among  them,  and  remarks 
that  some  are  too  revolting  to  be  described.  No  other  race  of  savages 
has  evinced  this  disposition  to  the  same  e.vtent. 

The  other  custom  relates  to  the  disposal  of  their  dead.  With  most 
barbarous  tribes,  as  well  as  civilized  nations,  the  natural  repugnance 
to  the  presence  of  a  corpse  is  shown  in  the  desire  to  put  it  awiiy,  as 
soon  as  possible,  "out  of  their  sight."  The  Polynesians  have  little  or 
none  of  this  feeling.  In  .some  islands,  as  Tahiti  and  Nukuhiva,  the 
bodies  of  the  dead  are  (or  were)  exposed  on  stages  near  the  ihvellings 
of  the  living;  in  others,  as  at  the  Navigator  and  Sandwicii  Islands, 
they  are  buried  either  near  or  in  the  houses  of  their  friends,  and  the 
skulls,  and  sometimes  other  bones,  afterwards  taken  \\\)  and  preserved 
as  relics.  At  New  Zealand,  the  body  is  placed  on  the  ground  in  a 
sitting  or  crouching  posture,  and  enclose  d  within  the  two  halves  of  a 
canoe ;  this  is  set  in  the  midst  of  their  villages,  which  are  often  made 
unapproachable  to  a  tbreigner  by  tlie  scent  of  [)Utrefaction. 

To  a  people  like  this,  in  whom  the  salutary  awe  of  death  is  so  com- 
pletely e.vtinct,  who  are  naturally  of  a  bhwdtliir.sty  disposition,  and 
whose  religious  belief  has  nothing  of  a  moral  or  (elevating  tendency, 
there  is,  evidently,  no  restraint  but  that  of  custom  to  deter  them  from 
cannibalism.     The  practice  may  have  commenced  in  some  access  of 

*  I'olynusian  Ucscarclics,  vui.  i.,  cluip.  xi. 


POLYNESIA. 


39 


revenge,  or  in  a  season  of  famine ;  but  it  is  now  continued  purely  for 
the  gratification  of  a  depraved  appetite.  On  this  point  the  testimony 
of  the  natives  tliemselves  is  distinct  and  positive,  and  as  they  are 
aware  of  the  abhorrence  with  which  the  act  is  regarded  by  the  whites, 
there  can  he  no  good  reason  for  disbelieving  them. 

Of  the  four  Oceanic  races,  the  Polynesians  and  Melanesians  are, 
generally  speaking,  addicted  to  cannibalism,  while  among  the  natives 
of  Australia  and  Micronesia  it  is,  so  far  as  we  are  informed,  unknown. 


TATTOOING. 

The  custom  of  tattooing  is  not  peculiar  to  the  Polynesians,  but  it 
deserves  mention,  as  affording  a  means  of  distinsjuishina;  the  natives 
of  the  different  groups  from  one  another.  The  word  tau,  or  tatau. 
from  which  "tattoo"  is  derived,  is  applied  to  it  mi  most  of  the  islands; 
in  New  Zealand,  however,  moko,  meaning  properly  "lizard,"  or  ".ser- 
pent," is  used, — perhaps  in  reference  to  the  peculiar  curves  and 
spirals  of  which  their  tattooing  consists.  The  mode  in  which  it  is 
performed  is  nearly  the  same  everywhere.  The  colouring  matter  is  a 
mixture  of  soot,  or  powdered  charcoal,  with  water  or  oil.  This  is 
struck  into  the  skin  by  means  of  a  small  implement  of  bone,  resem- 
bling a  piece  of  line-toothed  comb,  fixed  transversely  to  the  end  of  a 
short  handle,  after  the  fashion  of  an  adze.  In  New  Zealand,  instead 
of  a  toothed  instrument,  a  sharp  chisel  is  used,  which  renders  the 
operation  much  more  painful. 

We  can  hardly  doubt  that  the  custom  was  originally  adopted  from 
a  sense  of  decency.  The  usual  dress  of  the  Navigator  Islanders  is  a 
mere  apron  of  leaves,  tied  around  the  middle  of  the  body,  which  it 
covers  only  in  front.  The  tattooing  is  applied  also  to  the  middle  of 
the  body,  from  near  the  wui.st  behind,  down  to  the  knees.  In  front, 
however,  the  abdomen  is  free  from  it,  except  only  a  small  patch  over 
the  navel.  W'lien  asked  why  this  spot  was  tattooed,  they  replied,  that 
as  it  was  the  part  which  was  connected  with  the  womb  before  birth, 
they  were  ashamed  to  leave  it  uncovered, — showing  clearly  the  feel- 
ing which  had  given  origin  to  the  custom.  The  general  effect,  at  a 
little  distance,  is  to  give  the  person  the  appearance  of  being  dressed 
in  short,  dark-blue  drawers. 

The  Tonga  tattoo  is  tiie  same  with  the  Samoan ;  for  though  their 
usual  dress,  which  is  a  wrapper  of  bark-cloth,  entirely  conceals  it, 


nwi 


40 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


yet  in  rainy  weather,  or  when  at  sea,  or  obliged  to  wade  in  the  water, 
they  wear  the  titi  or  leaf-apron  of  the  other  group. 

At  New  Zealand  the  climate  generally  requires  the  body  to  be 
covered,  and  the  face  is  therefore  the  only  place  on  which  the  tattoo- 
ing would  be  commonly  seen.  As  it  is  not  needed  for  the  purposes 
of  decency,  it  is  applied  merely  for  ornament.  The  style  which  they 
prefer  consists  of  numerous  sf.iral  and  curving  lines,  drawn  with  great 
exactness,  care  being  taken  to  make  the  marking  of  one  side  of  the 
face  correspond  to  tliat  of  the  otiier.  The  breast  and  thighs  are  fre- 
quently tat'iooed  in  a  similar,  though  less  elaborate  manner. 

At  the  Society  Islands  also,  the  tattoo  serves  merely  for  ornament. 
The  body,  from  the  waist  to  the  knee,  is  covered  by  the  ^wrew  or 
wrapper.  It  is,  therefore,  above  and  below  this  that  the  marking  is 
most  elaborately  applied.  This  varies  a  good  deal,  at  the  pleasure  of 
the  person  tattooed.  Perhaps  the  most  distinctive  mark  is  a  number 
of  parallel  curving  lines,  which  spread  out  on  each  side  of  the  spine, 
as  the  leaflets  of  a  palm  from  the  stem.  Heavy  masses  of  black  are 
also  iin|)rinted  on  the'  thighs  and  nates,  though  these  are  covered  by 
the  dress, — referring  us,  at  once,  to  the  Samoan  origin  of  tlie  custom. 

The  Rarotongans,  we  were  told,  cover  the  body  witii  che(iuer-work 
and  cross-lines,  somewhat  like  those  of  a  Guernsey  frock. 

Tlie  people  of  the  Low  Archipelago  seem  to  have  different  fashions. 
Some  were  tattooed  like  those  of  Tahiti.  Tlie  men  of  Anaa  or  Chain 
Island  were  thickly  covered  over  the  body,  but  not  the  face,  with 
lines  crossing  one  another,  similar  (according  to  a  note  made  at  the 
time)  "to  the  cliecked-shirfs  worn  by  sailors,"— consequently  not 
unlike  tlie  mode  of  Uarotonga.  The  people  of  the  eastern  or  inde- 
pendent islands  (as  Clermont  Tonnerre,  Searle's,  and  the  Disappoint- 
ment Islands)  had  no  tattooing  or  marking  of  any  description. 

Tlie  Manjuesaiis  are  tattooed  from  head  to  loot,  some  of  the  elder 
men  being  completely  blackened  by  the  abundance  of  the  adornment. 
The  most  common  style  is  that  of  broad  heavy  stripes  across,  or  par- 
tially crossing,  tiie  face  and  body,  with  small  intervals  between  them. 
But  scpiares,  circles,  and  various  fantastic  figures  are  also  used. 

The  Sandwich  Islanders  tattoo  comparatively  little,  and  in  a  per- 
fectly arbitrary  style.  It  is  common  for  individuals  to  have  figures 
of  animals  or  inanimate  objects  imprinted  on  some  part  of  the  body, 
but  tliis  is  not  universal.  In  former  times  peivsons  frequently  had 
themselves  tattooed  as  a  token  of  mourning  at  the  death  of  a  friend  or 


11 


POLYNESIA. 


41 


a  chief;  and  some,  by  way  of  evincing  their  extreme  sorrow,  applied 
it  to  the  tip  of  the  tongue,  in  which  case  the  operation  must  have  pro- 
duced great  pain. 

The  women,  at  most  of  the  islands,  use  this  ornament  very  spar- 
ingly. The  back  of  the  hand  is  frequently  marked  so  as  to  resemble 
an  open-worked  glove.  Sometimes  the  feet  arc  similarly  imprinted, 
and  at  New  Zealand  the  lips  are  so  completely  covered  as  to  have 
the  appearance  of  being  painted  blue. 

MANUFACTURE    OF    CLOTH. 

Many  tribes,  in  various  parts  of  the  world,  have  the  art  of  making 
a  kind  of  cloth  from  the  bark  of  a  tree.  That  which  is  peculiar  in 
the  Polynesian  custom,  is  merely  the  mode  adopted,  which  is  common 
to  all  the  islands  e.vcept  New  Zealand.  It  consists  in  peeling  off 
strips  of  the  bark  of  the  paper-mulberry  or  of  the  breadfruit-tree, 
which  are  divested  of  the  outer  cuticle,  and  after  being  soaked  for  a 
time  in  water,  are  laid  upon  a  smooth  plank,  and  beaten  out,  by 
repeated  blows  of  a  mallet,  to  a  substance  not  unlike  thick  but  flexi- 
ble paper;  sometimes,  however,  it  is  so  fine  as  to  resemble  gauze. 
The  strips  are  united  by  overlaying  their  edges  and  beating  them 
together.  The  mallet  used,  called  every  where  ike  or  it,  is  a  stick 
rather  more  th^in  a  foot  in  length,  and  five  or  six  inches  in  circum- 
ference,— either  square,  or,  in  some  islands,  nearly  round,  and  creased 
or  channelled  with  parallel  grooves  from  one  end  to  the  other.  At 
New  Zealand,  where  these  trees  are  not  found,  and  where,  moreover, 
a  better  defence  from  the  rigour  of  the  climate  is  retiuired,  the  people 
braid  their  mats  from  the  leaves  of  a  flax-plant  indigenous  to  the 
country  (phormium  tenax),  and  also  manufacture  from  it  a  ivind  of 
yarn  or  thread,  of  which  they  weave,  by  liand,  mantles  or  blankets, 
which  bear  some  resemblance  to  the  products  of  a  loom. 


CANOES. 

The  usual  form  of  the  Polynesian  canoe  is  well  known.  Its  pecu- 
liarities are  the  outrigger — a  slender  log  of  wood  lying  in  the  water 
parallel  to  the  canoe,  to  which  it  is  fastened,  to  prevent  it  from  upset- 
ting,— and  the  triangular  sail  of  matting,  broad  at  top,  when  it  is 
drawn  up  to  the  mast,  and  narrowing  to  a  point  at  the  bottom  where 
it  is  fastened  to  the  prow.     New  Zealand  again  constitutes  an  excep- 

11 


48 


E  T  II  N  O  G  R  A  P  H  y. 


tioa,  the  canoes  there  having  no  outriggers,  a  peculiarity  which  is 
explained  by  the  circumstance  that  the  great  size  of  the  trees  on  this 
island  enables  the  natives  to  make  their  canoes  of  sufficient  breadth 
of  beam  not  to  require  this  contrivance.  At  the  Gambier  Group  it  is 
remarkable  tliat  canoes  are  unknown ;  their  place  is  poorly  supplied 
by  rafts,  made  of  logs  and  ytolea  lashed  together,  and  propelled  by 
paddles  or  sails. 

At  the  Friendly  Islands,  the  proper  Polynesian  canoe  is  rarely 
used.  They  have  instead  a  kind  differing  in  one  very  important 
respect,  namely,  in  being  made  to  sail  with  either  end  foremost. 
When  a  Samoan  or  Tahitian  voyager  desires  to  change  his  course,  or 
"  tack,"  he  shifts  the  sail  from  one  side  of  his  vessel  to  the  other,  and 
that  which  was  before  the  windward  side  becomes  the  leeward.  But 
a  Friendly  Islander  carries  his  sail  from  one  end  of  his  canoe  to  the 
other,  and  that  which  was  before  the  prow  becomes  the  stern, — the 
same  side  remaining  always  to  windward.  The  Tonga  people  say 
that  they  borrowed  this  model  from  the  Feejee  Group,  where  it  is  the 
only  one  in  use.  It  is  also  found  throughout  the  Micronesian  Archi- 
pelago, and  it  is  doubtful  to  which  of  the  two  western  races  the 
invention  is  properly  to  be  ascribed.  Many  of  the  canoes  are  very 
large,  especially  the  double  ones,  which  are  sometimes  eighty  or 
ninety  feet  long,  and  capable  of  carrying  two  hundred  men. 

WEAPON  s. 

The  arms  principally  employed  by  the  Polynesians  are  the  club, 
the  spear,  and  the  sling.  The  club  is  generally  made  of  some  hard 
wood,  and  is  about  four  feet  long.  In  New  Zealand  only,  smaller 
clubs  or  maces  made  of  stom-  are  common.  The  spear  is  used  either 
for  thrusting  or  darting,  in  the  latter  of  which  exorcises  the  natives 
are  very  expert,  though  they  make  use  of  no  artificial  means  for 
increasing  the  impetus  of  the  ca.sl,  like  the  throwing-stick  of  the  New 
Hollanders,  or  the  knotted  string  of  the  natives  of  Mallicollo.  It  is 
remarkiible  that  on  none  of  the  islands  of  Polynesia  is  the  bow  in- 
cluded by  the  people  among  their  weapons  of  war,  though  they  make 
u.se  of  it  in  their  sports. 

K  .V  V  A  -  D  R  I N  K I N  G. 

The  only  other  custom  'ipon  which  we  shall  touch,  as  distinctive  of 
this  race,  is  the  use  of  a  beverage  termed  /cava  or  'ava,  a  name  given 


V   ' 


MELANESIA. 


43 


also  to  the  plant  from  which  it  is  obtained.  This  plant  is  known  to 
botanists  as  the  piper  methysticum,  and  is  found  on  all  the  high  islands 
of  the  Pacific  within  the  tropics.  The  liquor  is  an  infusion  of  the 
root  prepared  after  u  manner  any  thing  but  consonant  with  our  ideas 
of  cleanliness.  It  is  first  chewed,  several  persons  being  usually 
engaged  at  the  same  time  in  this  part  of  the  operation.  The  morsels, 
as  they  are  masticated,  are  placed  in  a  shallow  wooden  bowl,  and 
when  a  sufficient  quantity  has  been  thus  prepared,  water  is  poured 
upon  it ;  after  which  the  infusion  is  strained  through  a  mesh  of  the 
fibres  which  form  the  husk  of  the  cocoa-nut,  and  it  is  then  ready  for 
drinking.  The  immediate  effects  are  narcotic  and  stupifying.  When 
drunk  to  excess,  it  is  destructive  to  both  the  bodily  and  mental  powers. 
The  individual  becomes  afflicted  with  a  general  weakness  and  hebe- 
tude; the  mind  is  obscured,  the  flesh  gradually  wastes  away,  and,  in 
this  last  stage,  the  skin  becomes  covered  with  a  white  scurf  repulsive 
both  to  the  sight  and  the  touch.  It  is  not  known  that  any  persons 
die  from  this  cause  alone ;  but  many  are,  no  doubt,  carried  off",  while 
in  this  weak  condition,  by  diseases  from  wiiich,  under  ordinary  cir- 
cumstances, they  would  have  recovered. 

The  li(iuor,  however,  may  be  drunk  in  moderation,  without  pro- 
ducing these  injurious  effects.  In  Samoa  atid  Tonga,  the  "  kava- 
parties,"  or  assemblies  of  chiefs  for  drinking,  are  occasions  of  much 
state,  and  many  ceremonies  are  practised  in  preparing  and  serving 
the  drink.  In  the  eastern  groups,  this  formality  is  dispensed  with, 
but  the  beverage  is  still  considered  one  peculiarly  appropriated  to  the 
chiefs,  for  whom  the  plant  is  usually  sacred  or  tabu. 


MELANESIA. 


The  race  of  Oceanic  negroes,  either  pure,  or  mi.ved  with  other 
races,  occupies  the  large  island  of  New  Guinea,  with  Arroo,  Waygeoo, 
Mysol,  and  the  interior  of  the  Moluccas  on  the  west,  and  New  Bri- 
tain, New  Ireland,  the  Louisiade,  the  Solomon  Isles,  the  New  He- 
brides, and  New  Caledonia  on  the  east.  The  western  portion  of  this 
region  forms  a  part  of  the  East  Indian  Archipelago,  bordering  upon 
the  large  islands  inhabited  by  the  Malay  race.  The  result  of  the 
constant  and  long-continued  intercourse  here  maintained  between  the 
two  races,  has  been  to  people  this  portion  of  Melanesia  with  a  hybrid 


44 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


variety  called  Papuas.*  They  are  true  mulattoes,  of  a  reddish-brown 
complexion,  with  abundance  of  twisted  and  frizzled  hair,  which  has 
procured  them  the  epithet  of  mop-headed.  They  inhabit  not  only 
Waygeoo,  Arroo,  and  Mysol,  but  also  the  eastern  extremity,  and  most 
of  the  northern  coast  of  New  Guinea.  All  the  vocabularies  which 
have  been  taken  of  the  dialects  spoken  by  this  people,  show  a  greater 
or  less  infusion  of  words  of  Malay  origin,  generally  much  altered  and 
disfigured. 

The  southern  coast  and  eastern  extremity  of  New  Guinea,  and  the 
islands  which  lie  near  it,  are  inhabited  by  real  negroes.  The  only 
one  whom  we  had  an  opportunity  of  seeing,  was  a  native  of  Erro- 
mango,  who  had  been  brought  by  a  trading  vessel  from  that  island  to 
Tonga,  when  quite  young,  and  had  forgotten  his  native  language. 
His  name  was  Noai,  and  he  called  his  island  (or  perhaps  his  town) 
Malekini.  He  was  about  five  feet  high,  slender,  and  long-limbed.  He 
had  close  woolly  hair,  a  retreating  arched  forehead,  short  and  scanty 
eyebrows,  a  small  snub  nose,  thick  lips  (especially  the  upper),  a 
retreating  chin,  and  that  projection  of  the  jaws  and  lower  part  of  the 
face,  which  is  one  of  the  distinctive  characteristics  of  the  negro  race. 
His  limbs  and  body  were  covered  with  short  fine  hairs,  made  conspi- 
cuous by  their  light  colour.  On  his  left  side  were  many  small  round 
cicatrices  burnt  into  the  skin,  which  he  said  was  a  mode  of  marking 
common  among  his  people.  Placed  in  a  crowd  of  African  blacks, 
there  was  nothing  about  him  by  which  he  could  have  been  distin- 
guislied  from  the  rest. 

There  is,  however,  considerable  difference  among  the  various  tribes 
of  Eastern  Melanesia,  cau.sed  perhaps,  in  part,  by  physical  influences, 
and  in  part  by  a  mixture  with  their  Polynesian  neighbours.  In 
Tanna,  an  island  southeast  of  Erromango,  we  find  a  larger  and 
stronger  race,  with  a  skin  not  quite  so  dark.  On  this  island  two 
languages  are  spoken,  and  we  were  assured,  by  good  authority,  that 
one  of  them  was  like  that  of  Erromango,  and  the  other  similar  to  the 
dialect  of  the  Friendly  Islands.  About  five  miles  distant  from  the 
east  coast  of  Tanna  is  the  small  island  of  Niua,  or  Immer,  inhabited 
by  a  yellow  race,  of  the  pure  Polynesian  stock.  This  name  of  Niua 
is  the  same  as  that  given  to  the  group  of  Coca's,  Good  Hope,  and  Horn 
Islands,  about  fourteen  degrees  to  the  east-northeast,  from  whence  it  is 


*  See  Dr.  Pritchnrd's  Pliysicol  Hi-story  of  Man,  page  22,  for  an  excellent  description 
of  this  variciv  of  the  human  race. 


MELANESIA. 


45 


possible  that  the  population  of  the  small  island  was  derived.  If  so, 
the  Polynesians  are,  in  this  case,  returning  back  nearly  in  the  direc- 
tion from  which  they  are  supposed  to  have  originally  proceeded. 

The  external  resemblance  which  is  found  between  the  negroes  of 
the  Pacific  and  those  of  Africa,  renders  the  contrast  of  their  charac- 
ters more  striking.  The  latter  are  gay,  frank,  social,  quick  of  appre- 
hension, but  deficient  in  steadiness  and  resolution,  and  prone  to 
sensuality.  The  Melanesians  are,  in  every  respect,  the  reverse  of 
this  description, — sullen,  shy,  treacherous,  indocile,  stubborn,  and  of 
a  cold  temperament.  A  constant  suspicion,  the  offspring  of  a  continual 
fear  of  treachery,  is  displayed,  not  only  in  their  dealings  with  stran- 
gers, but  between  members  of  the  same  tribe,  and  even  of  the  same 
family.  The  Polynesians  rarely  carry  arms,  except  in  time  of  war; 
a  Fecjeean  (the  most  civilized  of  the  Melanesians)  is  rarely  without 
them.  A  lack  of  enterprise,  or  rather  a  strong  aversion  to  quitting 
their  homes,  is  a  universal  characteristic.  Although  the  Feejee 
Group,  the  New  Hebrides,  and  the  Solomon  Isles,  have  been,  during 
the  last  forty  years,  frequently  visited  by  ships,  we  know  of  no  in- 
stance in  which  a  native  has  voluntarily  entered  on  board  one  as  a 
sailor. 

We  shall  only  notice  here  a  few  of  the  arts  and  customs  which  are 
peculiar  to  the  Melanesians,  reserving  other  particulars  for  the  de- 
scription of  the  Feejee  Islands. 

It  is  remarkable  that  the  use  of  the  bow,  as  a  weapon  of  war,  should 
be  confined  to  this  race  among  the  islanders  of  the  Pacific.  The 
others  sometimes  employ  it  in  their  sports,  but  never  in  fighting. 
This  is  one  of  those  facts  which  seem,  at  first  sight,  unaccountable, 
and  can  hardly  be  explained  on  the  ground  of  long-established  usage 
alone. 

The  manufactory  of  a  kind  of  pottery  is  an  art  common  to  nearly 
all  the  tribes  of  this  race,  and  peculiar  to  them.  The  material  is  a 
fipe  blue  clay,  which  is  mixed  with  sand,  and  moulded  by  hand  to 
the  required  shape.  It  is  varnished  with  the  juice  of  a  certain  nut, 
and  hardened  in  the  fire.  The  most  common  form  is  that  of  a  large 
oval  pot  or  jar,  with  a  small  circular  mouth.  This  is  set  in  a  slanting 
position  on  a  hearth,  and  used  for  boiling  their  food  They  have  also 
water-jars  and  small  drinking  vessels  of  the  same  material. 

Tattooing  is  seldom  resorted  to  by  this  people,  as  the  darkness  of 
their  skins  would  render  the  marking  nearly  invisible.  Instead  of  it, 
they  are  accustomed  to  make,  on  the  breast  and  arms,  weals,  or  raised 

12 


46 


E  T  II  N  O  O  R  A  I'  II  Y. 


cicatrices,  generally  produced  by  burning  the  parts  with  a  pointed 
stick.  Sometimes  these  appear  as  long  unsightly  scars,  distributed 
witiiout  regularity ;  in  others,  there  are  rows  of  small  circular  spots, 
in  which  the  design  of  ornament  is  more  apparent.  A  similar  mode 
of  marking  prevails  to  a  much  greater  extent,  among  the  tribes  of 
central  and  southern  Africa. 

One  circumstance,  connected  with  the  distribution  of  this  race 
among  the  islands  of  the  Pacific,  deserves  notice.  The  Polynesians 
are  a  stronger  and  bolder  people  than  the  blacks  (not  including  the 
Feejecans),  and  greatly  their  superiors  in  warfare.  Wo  find  them  in 
possession  of  three  islands,  Fotuna  (or  Erronan),  Niua  (or  Immer),  and 
Tikopia,  which  seem,  from  their  situation,  properly  to  belong  to  the 
Melanesians;  and  we  arc  naturally  induced  to  inquire,  how  it  is  that 
the  yellow  race,  after  getting  possession  of  these  islands,  has  advanced 
no  farther,  though  other  conquests,  not  more  diflTicult,  so  far  as  regards 
the  number  and  force  of  the  inhabitants,  would  seem  to  invite  it. 

The  reason  is  probably  to  be  found  in  the  fact,  that  in  all  (or  at 
least  all  the  easternmost)  of  the  islands  inhabited  by  blacks,  the  cli- 
mate is  fatal  to  the  races  whose  different  organization  is  marked  by  a 
lighter  skin.  D'Urville  endeavoured  in  vain  to  induce  some  of  the 
natives  of  Tikopia  to  accompany  him  to  Vanikoro,  an  island  only 
thirty  leagues  distant,  with  which  they  were  well  acquainted.  They 
were  afraid  that  the  air  would  kill  them.  The  experience  of  that 
navigator  proved  that  their  fears  were  but  too  well  founded.  Within 
three  weeks  after  his  arrival  at  Vanikoro,  forty  of  his  men  were 
attacked  by  the  fever,  and  several  died.  In  18;J0,  a  vessel  from  the 
Sandwich  Islands,  with  nearly  two  hundred  natives  on  board,  visited 
Erromango  for  the  purpose  of  cutting  sandal-wood.  They  remained 
there  five  weeks;  and,  so  rapid  and  powerful  were  the  etfects  of  the 
poisonous  miasmata,  that  only  twenty  returned  to  Oahu.* 

It  is,  no  doubt,  to  this  peculiarity  of  their  climate  that  the  Melane- 
sians are  indebted  for  the  unmolested  possession  of  many  of  their 
islands.  Fotuna,  Niua,  and  Tikopia  are  not  affected  by  the  noxious 
influences,  whatever  these  may  be.  They  are  small,  high  islands, — 
mere  mountains  rising  out  of  the  water, — and  thus  exposed,  in  every 
part,  to  the  constant  and  salubrious  winds  of  the  tropical  seas, — a  fact 
which  may  account  for  this  exemption. 

*  Jarvis'a  History  of  the  Sandwich  Islands,  p.  290. 


11 


MELANESIA. 


47 


V  I  T  I,    OR    THE    F  B  R  J  F.  R    CJ  R  O  I!  P. 


This  group  is  an  arcliipelago  of  islands  of  various  sizes,  about  one 
hundred  of  which  are  inhabited.  Two  of  them  are  so  much  larger 
than  the  rest,  that  the  natives  do  not  apply  to  them  the  term  "island" 
(rt«M),  but  call  them  by  that  which  signifies  "land"  or  "continent" 
{vanua).  These  are  Viti-levn  (great  F'eejee),  and  Vanua-levu  (great 
land).  They  are  nearly  equal  in  size,  containing  each  about  two  thou- 
sand five  hundred  square  miles.  Viti-lcvu  has,  however,  the  greatest 
extent  of  habitable  land,  and  is  the  seat  of  the  mo.st  powerful  states, 
most  of  the  other  islands  being  more  or  less  subject  to  it.  Next  to 
these  two,  in  size  and  im[iortance,  though  far  inferior  in  both  respects, 
are  Vnna  and  Kundavu,  the  former  situated  to  the  east  of  Vanua-levu, 
and  the  latter  to  the  south  oi  Viti-lcvu.  They  contain  between  one 
hundred  and  fifty  and  two  hundred  square  miles  each.  The  eastern 
part  of  the  group  con.sists  of  an  extensive  chain  of  small  islands,  lying 
in  a  direction  from  north-northwest  to  south-southeast.  The  principal 
are  VaUxi,  Oitggfa,  Vnldngi,  Kambara,  Namiiku,  MMhe,  Lakhnba, 
Nainii,'  Thithia,  Tumilha,  Mango,  Vani'ia-mbal6ou,  Kanathia,  Nai- 
tomba,  Kambia,  and  Rambe.  Most  of  tliese  are  surrounded  by  ex- 
tensive reefs.  In  the  interior  sea,  between  this  chain  and  the  two 
large  islands,  are  several  of  considerable  size,  of  which  the  most  im- 
portant are  Koro,  Mokungal,  Omlau,  Moluriki,  Mbutiki,  Nainaf, 
Ngtiit,  Modla,  Totfiia,  and  Mati'tkn.  Between  Viti-levu  and  Kandavu 
are  Mbeiigga,Nami'tka,ixnd  Vatnlek,  the  first  of  which  is  celebrated  in 
the  mythology  and  history  of  the  group.  Finally,  west  and  north- 
west of  Viti-levu  extends  tlie  Asaua  chain,  composed  of  numerous 
islands,  the  largest  of  which  are  Asaua,  Naviti,  Vitva,  Waia,  and 
Malolo.  This  Viwa  must  not  be  confounded  with  another  and 
smaller  island  of  that  name  olT  the  east  coast  of  Viti-levu,  and  the 
Namuka  near  Mbengga  must  be  distinguished  from  that  near  La- 
kemba. 

Concerning  the  number  of  inhabitants  in  the  group,  the  estimates 
differ  considerably,  owing  chielly  to  the  diverse  accounts  as  to  the 
population  of  the  interior.  The  lowest  computation  makes  about  one 
hundred  and  thirty  thousand  souls,  of  which  the  two  large  islands  are 
supposed  to  have  forty  thousand  each,  and  the  remainder  to  be  distri- 
buted throughout  the  smaller  islands,  nearly  in  proportion  to  their 
relative  sizes.     If,  however,  the  interior  of  the  large  islands  is  as 


48 


ETIINOOR  APII  V. 


densely  inhabited  tis  some  suppose,  the  sum  total  would  be  increased 
by  thirty  or  forty  thousand. 


I'M  Y  sir  A  I,    TH  All  S. 

Tiie  Feejeoans  are  a  people  of  the  medium  stature,  with  nearly  as 
great  variety  of  figure  as  is  found  in  nations  of  the  Caucasian  race. 
Tlie  cliiefs  are  usually  tall  and  wcll-forinod,  owing  probably  to  the  care 
taken  of  their  nurture,  and  to  the  inlluonct!  of  blootl.  The  common 
people  are  somewhat  inferior,  yet  tliere  are  fewer  small  and  ungainly 
figures  among  them  tiian  among  the  lower  order  of  Europeans. 
On  the  other  hand,  tlio  Feejeeans  contrast  very  unfavourably  with 
their  neighbours  of  the  Polynesian  stock.  They  lack  the  full,  rounded 
limbs  and  swelling  muscles  which  give  such  elegance  to  the  forms  of 
the  Friendly  and  Navigator  Islanders.  They  arc  generally  large- 
jointed,  and  the  calf  is  small  in  proportion  to  the  thigh.  The  neck  is 
also  too  short  for  due  proiwrtion,  and  the  whole  figure  wants  elegance 
and  softness  of  outline.  Their  movements  and  attitudes  are,  conse- 
quently, less  easy  and  graceful  than  those  of  the  Polynesians.  They 
are  nevertheless  a  strong  race ;  their  war-clubs  are  ponderous,  and  are 
wielded  with  great  power,  and  they  can  carry  very  heavy  burdens. 

The  Feejeean  physiognomy  dilfers  from  that  of  the  Polynesians,  not 
so  much  in  any  particular  feature,  as  in  a  general  debasement  of  the 
whole,  and  a  decided  appro.xinmtion  towards  the  forms  characteristic 
of  the  negro  race.  The  head  is  usually  broad  in  the  occipital  region 
(which  they  consider  a  great  beauty),  and  narrows  towards  the  top 
and  in  front, — the  forehead,  though  often  of  good  height,  appearing 
compressed  at  the  sides.  The  eyes  are  black  and  set  rather  deep,  but 
never  obliquely.  The  nose  is  not  large,  and  is  generally  a  good  deal 
flattened ;  the  nostrils  are  often  larger  laterally  than  forwards,  and  the 
nose  is  then  much  depre.s.xed  at  the  upper  part  between  the  eyes. 
The  mouth  is  wide,  and  the  lips,  particularly  the  upper  one,  thick. 
The  chin  varies,  but  is  most  commonly  short  and  broad.  The  jaws 
are  larger,  and  the  lower  part  of  the  face  far  more  prominent  than  in 
the  Malay  race.  The  cheek-bones,  also,  project  forwards  as  in  the 
negro,  and  not  laterally,  as  in  the  Mongol  variety ;  notwithstanding 
which,  the  narrowness  of  the  forehead  at  the  temples  gives  a  greater 
width  to  the  face  at  the  malar  region  than  elsewhere.  The  whole 
face  is  longer  and  thinner  than  among  the  Polynesians. 

The  hair  is  neither  straight  nor  woolly,  but  may  be  properly  desig- 


M  K  I,  A  N  K  H  I  A. 


40 


nated  as  fri/./lcd.  Wlien  allowed  to  ^tow  without  iiitcrfcrciico,  it 
appears  in  miincrous  spiral  locks,  cii^lit  or  ten  iiielii's  in  leii>,'tii, 
spreadinjr  out  on  all  sides  of  the  head.  Sometimes  these  curls  arc 
seen  much  lon<;er,  falling;  down  to  the  middle  of  the  hack.  It  is, 
however,  very  scjidom  allowed  to  i^row  naturally.  The  younj^  hoys 
have  it  cut  very  close,  and  sometimes  shavetl  to  the  skin,  like  the 
Tahilian.s.  In  ^irls,  heforo  marriajre,  it  is  allowed  to  fi[row  long,  and 
is  coloured  white  hy  washinjj;  it  with  a  solution  of  lime,  except  a 
portion  around  the  crown,  which  is  plastered  with  a  black  pi<,'ment. 
After  marria^'o,  it  is  either  cut  to  the  length  of  one  or  two  inches,  or 
friz/led  out  like  that  of  the  men  ;  in  hoth  cases  it  is  frequently  soaked 
in  colouring  liquids,  either  red  or  black.  The  men  in  general  have 
their  hair  dressed  so  as  to  form  an  immenso  semi-globular  mass, 
covering  the  top,  back,  and  sides  of  the  head.  The  arrangement  of 
this  cliereliar  is  performed  for  the  chiefs  by  professional  barbers,  and 
is  a  work  of  great  labour.  Six  hours  are  sometimes  occupied  in  dress- 
ing a  head,  and  the  process  is  rej)eated  at  intervals  of  two  or  three 
weeks.  It  is  probably  to  guard  against  disarranging  this  work,  that 
the  piece  of  bamboo  which  is  placed  under  the  neck  in  sleeping  is 
employed,  instead  of  the  ordinary  pillow.  I'or  the  same  purpose,  the 
natives  usually  wear,  during  the  day,  a  sa/a  or  kerchief  of  very  thin 
gauze-like  paper-cloth,  which  is  thrown  over  the  hair  and  tied  closely 
around  the  head,  so  as  to  have  very  much  the  appearance  of  a  turban. 
The  colour  of  the  Feejeeans  is  a  chocolate-brown,  or  a  hue  midway 
between  the  jet-black  of  the  negro,  and  the  brownish  yellow  of  the 
Polynesian.  There  are,  however,  two  shades  very  distinctly  marked, 
like  the  blonde  and  brunette  complexions  in  the  white  race,  besides 
all  the  intermediate  gradations.  In  one  of  these  shades  the  brown 
predominates,  and  in  tlie  other  the  copper.  They  do  not  belong  to 
distinct  castes  or  classes,  but  are  found  indiscriminately  among  all 
ranks  and  in  all  tribes.  The  natives  are  aware  of  the  distinction,  and 
call  the  lighter-coloured  people  \'iti  ndamiiiiihimii,  "red  Fcejeeans," 
but  they  do  not  seem  to  regard  it  as  any  thing  which  requires  or 
admits  of  explanation.  These  red-skinned  natives  must  not  be  con- 
founded with  the  Tongu-Viti,  or  individuals  of  mixed  Tongan  and 
Feejeean  blood,  of  whom  there  are  many  on  some  parts  of  the  group. 


CHAK.VCTIMI. 


It  is  not  a  little  remarkable  that  though  the  Feejeeans  are  an  in- 
genious, shrewd,  quick-witted  people,  surpassing  the  Polynesians  in 


18 


50 


ETHNOORAIMI  V. 


tlicir  kuowledife  of  various  arts,  and  having  a  more  regular  and  arti- 
ficial system  of  government,  tliey  are  yet  spoken  of  by  all  voyagers 
as  savages,  and  uniformly  treated  as  such,  w  liile  the  Polynesians  are 
regarded  ratlier  as  a  semi-civilized  race.  Nor  can  there  be  any  doubt 
that  this  liistinction,  so  \inivcrsally  and  involuntarily  made,  is  a  just 
one.  Yet  it  is  dillicult  to  perceive,  at  the  lirst  view,  tlie  grounils  on 
wjiicli  it  rests.  ^\  e  shall  be  told  tiiat  civilization  belongs  to  the 
character  more  than  to  the  intellect ;  but  granting  this  to  be  correct, 
we  may  still  be  at  a  loss  to  discover  in  what  respect  the  Feejceans 
are  inferior  to  the  Polynesians.  The  portrait  which  we  have  had  to 
draw  of  the  latter  is  by  no  means  prepossessing.  If  the  Feejeeans  are 
ferocious  in  war,  without  natural  alfection,  parricides  and  cannil)als, 
there  are  few  of  the  Polynesian  tribes  to  whom  tlie  same  description 
will  not  apply.  Tliat  proneness  to  sensuality,  moreover,  wliicli  is 
common  among  the  latter  is  wanting  in  the  former,  and  the  domestic 
lies  are  more  sacred  among  them. 

The  truth  })erhaps  is,  tiiat  tiie  ililferenco  in  the  character,  as  in  the 
piiysiognoniy  of  the  two  races,  lies  not  so  much  in  any  pafticular 
trait,  as  in  a  general  debasement  of  tlie  whole, — a  lower  graile  of 
moral  feeling,  and  a  greater  activity  of  the  evil  passions.  Tlie  Poly- 
nesians seem  to  be  cruel,  dishonest,  and  selfish,  rather  because  they 
have  always  been  so,  and  no  better  path  lias  ever  been  opened  to 
them,  than  from  any  violent  pmpensity  to  those  vices.  The  proof  of 
this  is  found  in  the  fact  that  a  very  brief  intercourse  with  foreigners 
has,  in  most  cases,  been  suilicient  to  induce  them  to  lay  aside  their 
worst  practices,  and  adopt  many  of  the  im|)rovements  of  I'ivilization. 
But  the  Feejeeans  are  by  nature  and  inclination  a  bloodthirsty, 
treacherous,  and  rapacious  peojile.  Their  evil  (jualities  do  not  lie 
merely  on  the  surface  of  the  character,  but  have  their  roots  deep  in 
their  moral  organizaticm.  In  Ibrty  years  of  intercourse  with  tiiesame 
class  of  civilized  men  to  whom  the  Polynesians  were  indebted  for 
their  earliest  instructions  in  many  valuable  arts,  they  have  learned 
from  them  notliinti  but  the  use  of  lirearms. — and  though  no  visiter 
can  have  tailed  to  e.vpress  his  horror  at  tlie  customs  of  eaniiibalism, 
infanticide,  and  human  sacrilice,  not  the  slightest  etfect  has  iil-en  pro- 
duced upon  the  natives.  The  Feejeean  may  be  said  to  dilfer  from 
tlie  Polynesian  as  the  wolf  from  the  dog;  both,  when  wild,  are  per- 
haps eijually  fierce,  but  the  ferocity  of  the  one  may  be  easily  subdued, 
while  that  of  the  other  is  deep-.seated  and  uiitameable. 

One  (juality,  however,  for  which  the  Feejeeans  are  eminently  distin- 


M  E  L  A  N  E  S  t  A. 


61 


ffuishetl,  and  in  which  they  differ  widely  from  the  Polynesians,  is  their 
disposition  to  treachery,  and,  connected  with  it,  their  cai)acity  for  dis- 
simulation. During  our  intercourse  with  them,  we  iiad  continually 
occasion  to  observe  this  trait  in  their  dealings  with  us  and  with  one 
another.  They  live  a  life  of  constant  suspicion,  no  one  daring  to  trust 
even  the  members  of  his  own  family.  A  native  never  leaves  his  home 
unarmed ;  and  the  people  in  every  town  are  constantly  on  the  watch 
against  a  sudden  invasion  from  tiio  neighbouring  tribes,  however 
apparently  peaceful.  Their  internal  history,  as  related  by  them- 
selves, is  full  of  instances  of  perfidy  and  treason.  The  group  is 
divided  into  a  number  of  independent  states,  connected  among  them- 
selves by  peculiar  relations,  somewhat  as  in  the  little  republics  of 
ancient  Greece.  Among  these  states  constant  intrigues  and  niiichina- 
tions  are  carried  on,  and  that  with  a  degree  of  shrewdness  and  craft 
that  frequently  e.xcited  our  astonishment.  All  the  arts  of  that  baser 
species  of  state  policy  which  we  are  accustomed  to  look  upon  as  the 
growth  of  a  corrupt  civilization,  are  thoroughly  understood  and  con- 
tinually practised  by  tjiis  extraordinary  race  of  savages.  To  weaken 
a  rival  state  by  secretly  exciting  its  dependencies  to  revolt, — to  stir 
up  one  class  of  society  against  another,  in  order  to  take  advantage 
of  their  dissensions, — to  make  an  advantageous  treaty  with  a  powerful 
foe,  by  sacrificing  a  weak  ally, — to  corrupt  the  fidelity  of  adiierents, 
by  bribing  them  with  the  anticipated  spoil  of  their  own  master, — to 
gain  a  battle  before  it  is  ibught,  by  tampering  with  the  leaders  of  the 
opposing  force, — all  these,  and  many  other  tricks  of  the  Machiavelian 
school,  are  perfectly  familiar  to  the  s\ibtlc  chieftains  of  Viti.  In  treat- 
ing of  the  system  of  government  which  prevails  in  the  group,  we  sh;ill 
have  occasion  to  show  more  distinctly  the  inllucnce  which  this  trait 
in  the  native  character  has  upon  their  political  relations. 

1)  i:i.  KilON. 


The  Feejeeans,  though  not  perhaps  so  strongly  influenced  bv  the 
devotional  sentiment  as  their  eastern  neighbours,  are  vet  much  atlaciied 
to  their  religiovis  observances.  Many  of  these  seem  to  have  been  Ixir- 
rowed  from  the  Polynesians,  es[)ecially  the  tahit,  (or,  as  they  term  it, 
the  tamhu,)  which  has  the  same  force  amoi\g  them  as  with  tlie  others, 
though  it  is  not,  perliaps,  of  such  \iniver.sal  ap[)lication.  Much  of  the 
Vitian  mythology  aj)pears  to  be  also  of  Tongan  derivation. 


E  T  II  N  O  O  R  A  P  U  V. 


According  to  the  universal  belief  of  the  natives,  the  supreme  deity, 
and  governor  of  their  island-world,  is  a  being  termed  Ndeiigi'i.  He  is 
represented  as  having  the  form  of  a  serpent  in  the  head  and  one  side 
of  the  body,  while  the  rest  is  made  of  stone,  by  which  he  is  rendered 
immortal.  His  residence  is  in  a  cave,  in  the  mountiiins  of  Viti-levu, 
at  a  place  called  Nakauvandra,  nearly  opposite  to  Mbua,  or  Sandal- 
wood Bay.  Earthipiakcs  are  supposed  to  be  ])roduced  by  the  gotl 
shifting  his  position, — and  one  of  tlie  Ihivibis,  or  distichs,  which  the 
natives  frequently  sing  in  their  dances,  refers  to  this  belief: — 


Viikii'iiki  ko  Ndeyei, 
lacala  a  vaniia. 


Ndengei  turns  over. 
The  earth  trembles. 


The  natives  say  that  an  earthquake  is  invariably  followed  by  a  season 
of  fertility ;  and  they  believe  that  when  Ndengei  is  prevailed  upon,  by 
their  prayers,  to  put  an  end  to  a  famine,  he  does  so  by  turning  himself 
over,  and  thus  causing  the  earth  to  shake.  Scarcities  they  suppose  to 
be  produced  by  tlie  malign  interference  of  the  inferior  deities,  who 
pray  to  Ndengei  for  food,  until  the  trees  are  stripped  of  their  fruits  to 
supply  them. 

No  one  knows  the  origin  of  Ndengei.  He  was  first  seen  on  the 
beach  at  Ra,  in  the  form  of  a  man,  dressed  in  the  native  girdle  of  masi, 
or  piiper-cloth,  with  long  trains  of  it  hanging  to  the  earth,  as  is  the 
custom  among  the  chiefs.  Not  being  recognised  and  worshipped  at 
that  place,  he  went  to  Mbcngga,  where  he  was  fir.st  discovered  to  be 
a  god.  Rut  the  land  was  stony,  and  he  did  not  like  it.  He  looked 
towards  Kandavu,  but  would  not  dwell  there.  He  then  went  over 
to  Rewa,  and  took  up  his  abode  in  that  district.  Soon  after  this,  a 
powerful  god,  by  name  Wairua,  came  from  Tonga  to  llcwa,  and  to 
him  Ndengei  resigned  the  government  of  that  town,  on  condition  of 
always  receiving  for  himself  the  ciioicest  parts  of  all  kiiuls  of  food 
(such  as  the  head  of  the  i)ig  and  tortoise,  &c.)  After  living  awhile  in 
this  situation,  Ndengei  hud  an  attack  of  leprosy,  and  determined  to 
remove  to  Verata,  which  has  ever  since  been  considered  impregnable. 
Here  he  resolved  to  be  no  more  .seen  by  men,  and  for  this  purpose 
took  the  form  of  a  serpent,  as  before  related. 

According  to  one  account,  the  natives  hold  that  Ndengei  created 
the  first  man  and  woman,  though  of  what  materials  they  do  not  say. 
This  story,  however,  is  directly  opposed  to  the  general  belief  that  the 


MELANESIA. 


53 


god  did  not  make  his  appearance  till  after  the  islands  were  peopled, 
and  that  he  first  ruled,  in  human  shape,  over  some  of  the  towns, — a 
story  which  reminds  us  of  the  Cretan  Jove. 

Thus  far  the  creed  of  all  the  islanders  is  the  same.  All,  likewise, 
hold  that  Ndengei  has  a  son,  who  stands  at  the  door  of  his  cave  to 
receive  the  pra3'ers  which  are  addressed  to  his  father,  and  to  act  as 
mediator  hetween  him  and  the  suppliants.  But  i'..d  name  given  to 
this  sou  varies  in  every  important  district.  In  llewa  it  is  Maittti ;  in 
Mbau,  Komui-NHDiil/ten'then' ;  in  Ovolau,  Ritlxuooiiu ;  in  Mathuata, 
Rathinathina ;  in  Somusomu,  Komai-natarusara ;  and  in  Lakemha 
there  are  supposed  to  be  two, — Tokai-ranihe  and  Tui-Lahemha.  In 
fact,  except  in  the  circumstance  of  there  being  a  single  supreme  ruler 
over  the  whole  groi'p,  the  celestial  governnient  of  the  Feejee  Islands 
appears  to  be  modelled  after  the  terrestrial.  Each  principal  state  has 
its  own  presiding  deity,  who  is  usually  a  sou  of  Ndengei.  The  infe- 
rior districts  are  ruled  and  protected  by  subordinate  deities,  who  are 
commonly  grandchildren  of  the  god ;  while  every  village  has  its  own 
tutelar  spirit,  who  is  perhaps  a  still  more  distant  descendant  of  the 
supreme  divinity,  though  this  is  not  certain.  Furthermore,  the  same 
political  relations  which  prevail  between  the  different  states,  are  also 
found  among  their  governing  deities.  Thus,  Somusomu,  though  to  a 
certain  degree  independent,  owns  a  kind  of  inferiority  to  Mbau,  and 
may  be  termed  a  tributary  ally.  This  the  natives  ascribe  to  the  fact 
that  at  some  former  period  the  great  spirit  of  Somusomu  (whose 
polysyllabic  name  need  not  be  repeated)  met  the  great  spirit  of  Mbau 
half-way  between  their  resj)ective  dominions,  fought  with  him,  was 
concpiered,  and  thereui)on  proceeded  to  the  mbure,  or  temple,  of  his 
antajjonist,  and  made  over  to  him  'le  town  of  Somu.somu.  jjivins  him 
the  tama,  or  salute,  as  a  superior.  This  tratlition  probably  refers  to 
some  victory  gained  in  early  times  by  the  naval  forces  of  Mbau  over 
those  of  Somusomu. 

Besides  the  gods  of  districts  and  towns,  they  have  others  who  are 
the  deities  of  particular  classes  or  professions,  as  Rokoht,  the  god  of 
carpenters,  Rakacomi,  of  lishcrmen.  They  have  also  mischievous  and 
malignant  spirits,  who  are  supposed  to  be  the  cause  of  the  petty  evils 
which  alllict  men.  On  Lakemba,  according  to  Mr.  Cargill,  there  is 
an  individual  known  as  Mata-kalou,  god-seer,  whose  business  it  is  to 
discover  and  thwart  the  machinations  of  these  spirits.  The  office  is 
held  by  but  one  person  at  a  time,  and  is  hererlitary.  Tiie  natives  also 
pay  divine  honours  to  disembodied  souls,  particularly  those  of  their 

14 


04 


ETIIIVOa  R  A  PHY. 


ancestors;  and  certain  animals,  as  the  shark,  land-crab,  serpent, 
hawk,  &c.,  are  considered  sacred,  and  reverenced,  not  as  being 
themselves  divine,  bnt  as  the  property  of  divinities. 

Tliere  arc  still  other  deities  whose  oflices  and  attributes  are  con- 
nected with  tlic  native  belief  respeo1in<r  the  future  state  of  the  soul. 
The  most  important  of  these  is  one  who  a[)proaches  to  the  vulixar  idea 
of  the  de .  d.  lie  is  called  by  such  as  worship  iiini,  wiio  are  not  mr.ny, 
Ratit-mhdti-nilnn,  or  the  one-tootlied  lord  ;  others  spesdc  of  him  as  the 
kdlou  kiiiui,  devouring  god,  or  hihu  t/ui,  evil  deity  ;  and  in  Lakemba 
he  is  commonly  termed  Saniu-idlo,  or  destroyer  of  sovds.  ile  lias  the 
form  of  ii  man,  wltii  wings  in  ])lace  of  arms,  provided  with  claws  to 
snatch  his  victims,  lie  has  a  tooth  so  large  that,  as  the  natives  say. 
when  he  is  lying  in  his  iiouse  it  goes  over  the  roof  He  Hies  tlirough 
the  air,  emitting  sparks  of  fire,  like  a  meteor.  He  is  said  to  roast  in  a 
fire  and  oat  the  souls  of  men  who  are  delivered  over  to  him  by  tiic 
supreme  divinity.* 

Tile  general  belief  of  the  Feejeeans  seems  to  be  that  the  soul  pa.sses 
through  two  states  or  conditions  of  future  existence  before  it  under- 
goes its  final  destiny, — annihilation.  The  first  of  these  is  a  residence, 
for  an  indelinite  period,  in  some  placid  njion  the  earth,  (termed  tliimhn- 
thimbu,)  which  i.i  a  kind  of  terrestrial  elysium.  Nearly  every  island 
and  large  district  has  its  own  place  of  souls.  From  tlience  the  spirit 
descends  to  the  M/mlit,  or  infernal  regions,  situated  beneath  the  earth, 
where  it  remains  until  its  e.Ktiuction.  In  some  [)laces  it  would  appear 
that  the  second  stage  is  omitted,  and  in  others  it  is  placed  beneath  the 
sea.  It  is  possible,  however,  that  in  these  instances  our  information 
was  imperfect,  a.s  we  were  assured  that  the  natives  generally  believe 
in  both  the  earthly  elysium  and  the  subterranean  hades. 

At  Rewa  the  word  lol/iia  was  given  to  us  as  the  term  for  annihila- 
tion, or  the  doom  to  which  the  spirit  is  finally  subjected.  At^  La- 
kemba, according  to  Mr.  Cargilt,  Lothia  is  the  name  of  the  soverei.;n 
of  Mbulu,  under  whom  the  .souls  undergo  this  destiny. 

The  people  of  Vanua-levu  believe  that  the  spirits  of  the  dead  repair 
to  a  point  of  land  near  Sandal-wood  Bay,  termed  Thombathondja, 
from  whence  they  pass  down  into  the  sea,  where  they  are  received  by 
the  two  canoes  of  Rokona  and  Kokola.  When  it  is  stormy  weather, 
with  thunder,  rain,  and  high  winds,  the  natives  say  that  their  canoes 

*  Tlie  iili'ii  ol'  iliis  lu'liig  has  oviilpiilly  Ix'fii  giallid  by  llic  l''fi.'j<;oaiis  on  llio  I'olviicsimi 
mythology,  ill  whiili  llicri!  is  iioiliiiig  oltliu  sort.  Sec  elsewhere  the  account  givtfii  ofthu 
evil  spirit,  us  iiiiagiiicd  by  the  Australian  aborigines. 


MELANESIA. 


55 


are  getting  under  way.  Tlieir  destination  was  not  stated  ;  but  it  is 
presumed  to  be  a  "city  of  sj)irits,"  which  is  said  to  exist  beneath  the 
water,  in  what  is  called  the  Great  Channel  (Ndaveta-levu),  between 
Moturiki  and  Mbau.  It  is  governed  by  a  god  called  Tui-Ndaveta- 
levu.  When  the  natives  pass  tiirough  this  channel,  they  take  off 
their  turbans  [sala)  in  token  of  reverence,  and  scrupulously  avoid 
throwing  any  filth  into  the  water.  Many  of  their  traditions,  of  which 
they  have  an  immense  number,  refer  to  this  passage. 

A  very  extraordinary  jiart  of  the  Vitian  creed,  is  that  wliicli  gives 
not  only  to  the  lower  animals  (or  at  least  to  sucli  as  consort  with  n:'?n), 
but  also  to  inanimate  objects,  a  future  existence.  Tims  they  iiave 
their  thimbathimha  id  kiili,  in  viiuhi,  ni  niii,  or  elysiums  for  dogs,  pigs, 
cocoa-nuts,  &c.  These  are  usually  on  some  inaccessible  or  desert 
rock  or  island.  Persons  who  pass  near  the  places  appropriated  to  the 
animals  pretend  to  hear  the  cries  of  the  ghostly  herds ;  sometimes 
they  will  say — "  There  is  a  great  feast  in  such  a  place ; — don't  you 
hear  the  squeaking  of  the  pigs  that  arc  killed  and  are  coming  to  the 
thimbathimha  ?"  The  paradise  of  cocoa-nuts  for  the  island  of  llewa  is 
at  the  village  of  Longla,  the  chief  of  which  frequently  complains  that 
he  cannot  sleep  at  night  when  there  is  a  feast  on  the  island,  for  the 
noise  made  by  the  cracking  of  the  fruit. 

One  of  the  most  important  of  the  native  traditions  relates  to  what  is 
called  the  Waltiou  levii,  or  great  flood,  of  which  the  following  account 
was  given  by  Veindovi  (the  chief  captured  at  llewa),  and  confirmed 
from  other  sources.  After  the  islands  had  been  peopled  by  the  first 
man  and  woman,  a  great  rain  came,  and  the  waters  began  to  rise. 
Then  there  came  two  enormous  double  canoes,  commanded  one  by 
Rokona,  the  god  of  carpenters,  and  the  other  by  his  head  workman, 
llokola.  They  picked  up  a  number  of  the  people,  and  kept  them  on 
board  until  the  flood  subsided,  when  they  deposited  them  again  on 
the  islands.  One  account  gave  the  whole  number  that  were  saved  as 
only  eight,  and  stated  that  they  landed  first  on  the  island  of  Mbengga, 
the  people  of  which  entertain  a  high  opinion  of  their  own  rank  and 
lineage,  as  direct  descendants  of  the  survivors.  Veindovi  said  that  in 
former  titaes  the  Feejeeans  always  kept  large  canoes  laid  up  in  readi- 
ness against  another  flood,  and  it  is  only  of  late  that  the  custom  has 
been  discontinued.* 


*  This  statement  (wliicli  wo  licnrd  I'rom  others  in  the  same  terms)  mny  induce  us  to 
inquirc'whethcr  there  niiyht  not  have  Ixjon  some  occurrence  in  the  acluiil  liistory  of  <he 
islands  to  {iive  rise  to  this  tradition;  anil  the  custom  liere  mentioned.  On  the  7th  of  No- 
vember, 1837,  the  Pacific  Ocean  wa.>)  traversed  from  east  to. west  by  an  immense  wave, 


56 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


Another  story,  which  has  been,  no  doubt,  derived  from  their  Poly- 
nesian neighbours,  refers  to  the  existeiico  of  an  island  called  M/mrMii, 
situated  somewhere  in  the  ocean,  but  in  what  direction  they  do  not 
know.  It  is  represented  as  a  terrestrial  paradise,  in  which  every 
species  of  fruit  is  produced  without  cidtivation.  Tliey  do  not,  how- 
ever, like  the  people  of  Samoa  and  Tonga,  represent  this  island 
{Pii/'ilii)  as  the  abode  of  their  gods,  or  the  place  from  whence  their 
islands  were  peopled. 

There  is  no  rcgidar  hierarchy  in  this  group.  Every  town  has  its 
mlx'fe  or  priest,  whose  business  it  is  to  consult  the  gods  when  required, 
and  to  perform  various  religious  ceremonies.  In  the  capital  towns 
there  is  usually  a  mhcte  km,  or  high  priest,  but  it  does  not  appear 
that  he  has  any  peculiar  authority  over  the  rest.  Neither  is  the  ollicc 
hereditary,  or  contined  to  any  particular  class.  When  a  priest  dies, 
some  individual  who  possesses  more  than  ordinary  shrewdness,  and 
desires  to  lead  an  easy,  indolent  life,  determines  to  succeed  him.  He 
puts  on  a  heavy,  melancholy  air,  and  pretends  to  dream  of  an  event 
whicii  is  shortly  to  occur.  He  tells  his  dream,  and  if  the  event  turns 
out  accordingly,  the  chiefs  and  people  begin  to  consider  him  a  priest. 
By  way  of  trying  him,  tiiey  bring  him  a  bowl  of  kava  (or  anygi'oia) 
after  the  usual  form,  and  desire  him  to  consult  the  gods  about  some 
business  in  which  they  are  engaged.  If  he  goes  through  the  cere- 
mony to  their  satisfaction,  and  the  oracle  proves  correct,  he  is  forth- 
with installed  in  the  vacant  mhurt. 

The  usual  form  of  invocation  is  as  follows.  When  a  chief  wishes 
to  supplicate  a  god  for  the  recovery  of  a  sick  friend,  or  the  return  of 
a  canoe,  or  any  desired  object,  he  takes  a  root  of  kcnju  and  a  whale's 
tooth  to  the  temple,  and  offers  them  to  the  priest.  After  the  kava  has 
been  brewed  and  drunk,  the  priest  takes  the  whale's  tooth  in  his  hand, 
turns  it  over,  gazes  steadily  at  it,  and  then  appears  to  be  seized  with  a 

wliicli,  taking  its  rise  with  tlie  shock  of  mi  I'mlhciuiikc  in  Chili,  wns  lull  n.s  liir  as  iho 
Bdiiiii  Islands.  At  the  Samlwii-h  Ishiniis,  accorilin;^  tu  thi;  account  given  by  Mr.  Jarvis 
in  his  History,  p.  »!.  the  water  rosi',  on  tlio  east  coa.st  of  Hawaii,  twenty  Ccet  above 
high-water  mark,  inundatcil  the  low  lands,  swept  uway  several  villages,  and  destroyed 
many  lives.  Similar  nndulations  have  been  e.\perienccd  at  these  islands  on  several 
occasions.  If  we  suppo.sc  (what  is  no  way  ini|irol)able)  that,  at  some  time  within  the  last 
thru'  or  (olir  thousand  years,  a  wave  ol'  twice  this  height  crossed  the  ocean,  and  swept 
over  the  Vitian  Islands,  it  must  have  suhniergeil  the  w  hole  alluvial  plain  on  the  east  side 
of  Viti-levu,  the  most  populous  part  ol'  the  group.  jMultiludes  would  no  doubt  be 
destroyed.  Others  would  escajM-  in  their  canoi's,  and  as  Mbengga  is  u  mountainous 
island,  in  the  neighbourhood  of  this  district,  it  would  naturally  be  the  place  of  refuge  for 
man  v. 


MELANESIA. 


57 


spasm,  accompanied  by  tremblings  and  involuntary  motions.  In  this 
state  of  ecstasy  he  is  supposed  to  be  possessed  by  the  deity,  and  what 
he  says  is  looked  upon  as  the  direct  response  of  the  god  to  his 
prayers. 

A  priest  frequently  pretends  to  receive  some  communication  from 
the  gods  in  iiis  dreams,  and  then  the  people  assemble  to  hear  the 
message.  By  this  device  he  obtains  a  drink  of  kava,  and  often  a  pro- 
pitiatory present,  if  his  dreams  are  ominous  of  evil. 

All  the  people  of  a  town  frequently  unite  in  offering  a  sacrifice  to 
their  tutelar  divinity,  to  secure  his  favour  and  protection,  more  espe- 
cially from  sickness.  On  such  occasions  the  chief  convenes  his 
townsmen,  and  says  to  them,  "  Let  us  make  a  feast  to  the  god,  that 
we  may  not  die."  A  tamhu  is  immediately  laid  upon  pigs,  turtle, 
and  some  other  provisions,  to  preserve  them  for  the  ceremony.  On 
the  day  appointed,  every  man  brings  his  pig  or  other  offering,  with  a 
whale's  tooth,  if  he  has  one,  to  the  temple.  Here  the  chief  advances 
and  offiers  his  prayer  in  behalf  of  all,  while  the  rest  present  their 
gifts.  The  priest  takes  the  whale's  tooth  from  the  chief,  and  answers 
" Ke ndatou  mbtila  vakmidua," — We  shall  all  live  as  one,  i.e.,  without 
exception.  He  then  supplicates  the  divinity  to  be  propitious  to  the 
people,  after  which  they  return  to  their  homes,  leaving  the  provisions 
to  be  distributed  at  the  pleasure  of  the  priest. 

Human  sacrifices  are  frequently  offered  by  the  high  chief.  They 
are  generally  prisoners  taken  in  war.  Sometimes,  however,  they  are 
slaves  procured  by  purchase  from  other  tribes.  As  these,  like  other 
sacrifices,  are  to  be  eaten  by  the  priests  and  people,  they  are  usually 
kept  for  some  time,  and  fed,  till  they  are  thought  to  be  in  good  condi- 
tion. The  victim  is  bound  hand  and  foot,  and  roasted  alive  on  heated 
stones,  after  the  usual  fashion  of  cooking.  The  body  is  then  taken 
out,  painted  as  for  a  festival,  and  carried  to  the  temple  to  be  presented 
to  the  god,  after  which  it  is  cut  up  and  distributed  to  the  people. 
These  horrible  offerings  are  made  on  many  occasions,  and  frequently 
out  of  vainglory  on  the  pf  rt  of  some  chief.  At  those  festivals  when 
ordinary  persons  are  expected  to  l)ring  a  pig,  Tanoa,  the  old  king  of 
Mbau,  always  presents  a  human  victim.  When  he  launches  a  new 
canoe,  ten  or  more  men  are  slaughtered  on  the  deck,  that  it  may  be 
soaked  with  human  blood.* 


•  From  tlic  Rev.  David  Cargill's  necount. 
15 


59 


E  T  II  N  O  (J  R  A  I'  H  V. 


O  O  V  E  R  N  M  E  N  T. 


From  these  atrocities  wo  \villiii<j;ly  turn  to  a  ooiisicleratiou  of  the 
system  of  civil  poHty  wliicli  prevails  in  these  islands.  We  find  here 
the  same  three  orders  as  in  most  of  the  Polynesian  groups, — those  of 
chiefs  {turaiitjii),  landholders  (mataniramia),  and  common  |)cople 
[ficii  .ii).  The  distinction  between  these  has  nothinjf  of  the  rit^idness 
of  caste,  and  there  are  many  jjcrsons,  such  as  the  chililreu  of  chiefs 
by  women  of  low  rank,  who  cannot  properly  be  included  in  either  of 
the  three  classes.  The  chiefs  are  at  the  head  of  alfairs,  but  \\h'  real 
streuj^^th  and  influence  of  a  state  reside  in  the  mataiiiranna,  who  are 
frequently  spoken  of  as  the  "true  owners  of  the  land,"  {tatiki  ndiiia 
ni  raiiita.)  Of  the  kai  si,  some  arc  slaves,  wlio  have  become  so  by 
the  fortune  of  war,  but  the  greater  number  arc  artisans  and  labourers, 
who  work  for  the  chiefs  and  landholders,  and  are  supported  by  them. 

'I'he  f^roiii)  is  not  under  a  single  government,  but  is  divided  into 
.several  states,  which,  tliough  independent,  are  yet  closely  connected 
by  various  relations  of  alliance  and  policy,  some  of  which  arc  of  a 
novel  and  peculiar  naturer  The  most  important  of  these  states  are 
MlniK,  Rewii,  Suitasiri,  and  Verata,  on  the  east  side  of  Viti-levu. 
Mba  on  the  western  end,  Mathuata  on  the  north  side  of  Vanua-levu, 
and  SumuxDtim  on  the  island  of  Vuna.  They  are  not  properly  speak- 
ing provinces,  but  towns,  or,  as  the  white  men  resident  on  the  islands 
term  them,  "  chief  cities."  Each  of  them  has  under  it  dependent 
towns  and  islands,  which,  in  their  tuiu,  exercise  sway  over  subject 
districts  and  hamlets.  From  this  state  of  things,  a  system  of  politics 
has  grown  up,  bearing,  as  already  remarked,  a  striking  similarity,  in 
many  jioints,  to  tliat  .'hich  jjrevailed  among  the  Grecian  republics. 
Mbau,  Rewa,  and  >  ai.asiri,  are  the  Sj)arta,  Athens,  and  Thebes  of 
Viti.  They  are  alternately  in  close  alliance  and  at  war.  In  the 
latter  case,  the  policv  v)f  each  belligerent  is  to  e.vcite  the  dependencies 
of  its  opponent  to  rebellion,  either  by  bribery,  or  by  holding  out  the 
prospect  of  relief  from  oppression.  A  similar  course  is  pursued  by 
each  city  towards  the  important  districts  wliicli  are  subject  to  it.  If 
these  grow  too  powerftd,  and  begin  to  aspire  to  independence,  the 
governing  power  .secretl\-  foments  rebellion  among  the  inferior  towns 
of  the  dependent  state.  Thus  Ovolau,  which  is  one  of  the  largest 
islands  subject  to  Mbau,  is  under  the  government  of  the  chief  of 


KI  G  I.  A  N  E  H  I  A. 


69 


Leinika,  the  principal  town  upon  it.  As  this  lias  an  excellent  harbour, 
it  hiis  of  late  been  much  freciuented  by  shii)pin;f,  anil  has  become  the 
residence  of  many  whites  who  have  tiiken  \\\y  their  abode  among  the 
natives.  The  chiefs  of  Mi)au  imve  watched  with  much  uneasiness 
the  increase  of  wealth  and  pov.er  which  their  subordinate  has  derived 
from  this  source,  and,  afraid  to  attack  him  openly,  so  long  as  the  re- 
quired tribute  is  regularly  paid,  are  constantly  employed  in  intrigues 
with  the  chiefs  of  the  smaller  towns  and  districts  on  the  island,  to 
induce  them  to  take  up  arms  against  their  legitimate  ruler,  in  which 
case  they  would  call  in  the  intervention  of  Mbau,  and  thus  give  to  the 
latter  an  opportunity  of  weakening  the  strength  of  their  too  powerful 
subject. 

A  like  game  is  played  with  Somusomu,  which,  though  itself  a 
"chief  city,"  owns,  as  we  have  before  stated,  a  certain  subordination 
to  Mbau,  and  is  said  to  be  spiritually  subject  {yguli  kalou).  The  real 
cause  of  its  inferior  rank  is,  of  course,  its  inability  to  cope  with  the 
forces  of  its  spiritual  superior.  This  iuai)ility,  however,  has  been 
diminished  of  late  by  an  unfortunate  step  on  the  part  of  the  present 
king  of  Mbau,  whose  name  is  Tanoa.  About  ten  years  since  he 
became  unpopular  with  the  most  powerful  chiefs  in  the  capital,  and  a 
rebellion  broke  out,  headed  by  members  of  his  own  family.  The 
king  was  compelled  to  Uee,  and  took  refuge  in  Somusomu,  where  he 
was  received  and  defended  with  much  loyalty,  and  thus  enabled,  in 
the  end,  to  overpower  the  revolted  party,  and  reassume  his  govern- 
ment. In  retjuital  for  this  great  service,  he  made  over  to  the  chiefs 
of  Somusomu  the  cluster  of  windward  islands,  of  which  Lakemba  is 
the  principal,  which  had  previously  been  subject  directly  to  Mbau. 
This  great  accession  of  power  has  so  strengthened  the  government  of 
Somusomu,  that  its  allegiance  to  Mbau  lias  become  very  precarious. 
While  we  were  in  the  group,  a  quarrel  broke  out  between  Somusomu 
and  the  town  of  Vuna,  which  is  one  of  its  tributaries.  Tanoa  instantly 
seized  the  opportunity  to  join  in  the  contest,  taking  part  with  the 
rebellious  town,  in  ho|)es  of  humbling  his  formidable  dependency. 
Somusomu  thereupon  called  in  the  assistance  of  Mathuata,  and  the 
contest  was  raging  when  we  left  the  islands.* 


*  Ciiplniii  Wilkes  inlorms  mo  thiit  lie  lids  sirico  rweivod  iiilormnlion  tlint  Tnndii,  find- 
ini;  liis  ntk'nipt  ni^iiinst  Soiiuisomii  likely  to  be  iinsiiecessrul,  .sudiloiily  made  pence  with 
it,  luid  lell  with  nil  his  iiiroe.s  on  the  nlly,  'l\ii-.Mathuiit;i,  burned  several  of  his  '.owns,  and 
ravaged  a  great  part  of  his  dominions.  This  notable  piece  of  generalship  will  give  a  good 
idea  of  the  character  of  Feejcean  policy. 


■^ 


60 


E  T  H  N  O  (i  R  A  I>  II  Y. 


Besides  the  relations  of  actual  subjection  and  spiritual  inferiority, 
there  is  3'ot  niiotlier,  termed  mhati,  which  is  that  of  i\  dependent  ally 
to  a  protectiiifj  power, — such,  for  example,  as  that  which  the  Confede- 
ration of  the  Rhine  held  to  the  French  empire,  and  some  of  the  elates 
of  India  hold  to  Knjjlaiid.  Uakiraki,  a  populous  town  and  district 
on  tiie  iiortli  coast  of  Viti-levn,  is  thus  mbali  to  Mbau, — recruitiujf 
its  forces  in  time  of  war,  and  receiving  its  protection  when  attacked. 

Another  relation  between  tlie  dilVerent  governments  is  that  supplied 
by  the  intermarriages  of  the  head  chiefs.  A  chief  in  one  town,  wiiose 
motlier  is  a  member  of  the  ruling  family  of  another  town,  is  said  to  be 
vusii  (literally,  nephew)  to  the  latter.  Thus  Tauoa's  mother  was  the 
daughter  of  a  king  of  Uewa,  and  he  is  therefore  a  oasv  to  that  city. 
The  influences  and  privileges  which  accompany  this  relation  are  very 
great.  A  rum  has  nearly  as  much  power  in  the  state  to  which  his 
mother  belonged  as  in  his  own.  In  case  of  war  with  another  power, 
he  is  sure  of  the  assistance  of  his  connexions,  not  precisely  from  the 
influence  of  family  feeling,  but  in  accordance  with  a  long-established 
rule,  which  renders  such  iissistance  an  imperative  obligation.  More- 
over, should  hostilities  break  out  between  two  states,  in  one  of  which 
is  a  chief  who  is  iiasu  to  the  other,  ho  can  pass  between  the  two  with 
perfect  safety,  and  is  received  in  the  hostile  town  with  as  much 
respect  and  confidence  as  in  time  of  peace.  It  is  evident  that  such 
a  relation,  singular  as  it  is,  must  contribute  greatly  to  lighten  the  evils 
of  war  among  this  quarrelsome  and  sanguinary  people. 

Another  relation,  somewhat  similar  to  that  of  msn,  though  of  less 
importance,  is  that  of  taii-rii.  It  has  been  before  stated  that  nearly 
every  district  and  town  in  Viti  has  its  own  guardian  divinity.  In 
some  caises,  however,  it  happens  that  two  towns  are  under  the  protec- 
tion of  the  same  god.  A  citizen  of  one  is  said  to  be  luii-ni  to  those 
of  the  other, — whicii  may  be  rendered  fellow-worshipper.  This  con- 
nexion gives  many  of  the  same  privileges  as  that  of /'«.««. 

A  knowledge  of  the  internal  divisions  of  the  several  states  is  also 
important  to  a  right  understanding  of  the  intricacies  of  Vitian  politics. 
There  are  usually  in  each  large  town  two  or  more  classes,  or  rather 
parties,  among  the  iidiabitants.  Thus  in  Mbau  these  are  the  Kai- 
vale-levu  (literally,  people  of  the  great  house  or  palace),  who  form  the 
king's  party,  and  are  especially  attached  to  his  service.  The  Mhati- 
tomhi  are  the  adherents  of  the  family  of  that  name,  who  formerly 
possessed  the  supreme  power,  of  which  they  were  deprived  by  the 
grandfather  of  the  present  king.     Tlie  Kai-Mbau  are  the  independent 


M  R  I,  A  N  E  a  I  A. 


61 


chiofN  and  laiulliolders,  wlio  are  not  especially  do  voted  to  either 
family,  and  act  rather  for  the  j^ooil  of  the  Htate, — or,  in  other  words, 
for  their  own  interest,  which  would  be  affeoted  by  either  of  the  hos- 
tile families  obtuinin;^  the  undisputed  pre-eminence.  Finally,  the 
lasikdH  are  a  body  of  lishermen,  who  were  brou(»ht  to  Mbau  from  a 
small  island  near  Kandavu,  in  order  to  keep  the  capital  supplied  with 
fish.  Althouf,'h  they  have  no  chiefs  amon>{  them,  their  numbers  and 
their  close  union  ^'ive  them  considerable  inllueuce.  Each  of  these 
IkkUcs  has  interests  which  are,  in  some  decree,  opposed  to  those  of  the 
others,  and  it  is  by  their  mutual  counteraction  that  the  goveri\ment  is 
preserved  from  def][eneratinj?  into  a  despotism.  The  other  states,  in 
making  war  upon  Mbau,  usually  seek  to  tamper  with  one  of  these 
parties,  and  the  attempt  is  often  successful.  Nearly  all  the  principal 
towns  have  these  internal  divisions. 

Owing  probably  to  this  state  of  things,  the  form  of  government 
approaches  nearer  to  the  republican  than  the  monarchical.  The 
respect  \yak\  to  the  chiefs  is  great,  but  it  is  not  servile.  A  head-chief 
will  seldom  venture  to  take  any  step  contrary  to  the  wishes  of  the 
great  body  of  landholders,— otherwise  he  will  run  the  risk  of  being 
deposed,  or  at  least  of  a  disaffection  which,  in  case  of  a  war,  may  lead 
to  serious  results.  It  is  also  tlie  j)olicy  of  the  interior  chiefs  and 
matanivanua  to  divide  the  supreme  [wwer  as  much  as  possible. 
There  is  generally  an  olHcer,  who  is  termed  the  Vu-ni-iialu  (head  of 
war),  who  is  generalissimo  of  tlie  land  and  sea  forces,  and  commands 
in  battle,  even  though  the  king  be  present.  This  oitice  is  commonly 
conferred  on  a  high  chief  of  a  different  family  from  that  of  the  king, 
and  one  whose  interests  would  lead  him  to  oppose  any  attempt  on  the 
part  of  the  latter  to  acquire  supreme  power. 

In  the  organization  of  labour,  and  the  division  of  the  various  occu- 
pations, the  Feejeeans  are  much  farther  advanced  than  any  of  the  Po- 
lynesian tribes.  In  every  large  district  there  are  towns  inhabited  by 
people  devoted  to  a  particular  trade  or  profession.  In  one  all  the 
citizens  will  be  warriors  {tamalai-iHilu),  in  another  fishermen  [tunin- 
dau),  in  another  carpenters  {matui-sau),  &c.  They  are  all  considei^ed 
to  be  under  the  direction  of  the  head-chief,  who  can,  if  he  pleases, 
order  the  warriors  to  assist  the  carpenters,  or  the  latter  to  fight,  and 
so  of  the  rest.  Besides  the  principal  professions,  several  others  are 
practised  by  individuals.  There  are  physicians  {cu-ni-wai),  and  mid- 
wives  {mbni-ni-ynne),  who  are  said  to  possess  consitierable  skill,  and 
to  understand  many  of  the  arts  and  specifics  employed  among  civilized 

16 


..  I 


69 


E  T  11  N  O  <i  R  A  I'  II  Y. 


nations.  Hair-ilrcNsers  {rii-ni-ii/ii)  nro  nuniiTous,  niul  fiiul  coiiNtnnt 
employment  in  nrrnn^ing  the  nmtti-d  inasH  wiiich  oovcrH  the  lieiwls  of 
the  chief's.  Tiio  niiiniif'actiire  of  pottery  is  u  himiness  followed  only 
by  women,  wlio  nre  ternunl  liii'd  haiimlnu. 

Hetvveea  the  (liferent  towns  belon^ini;  to  the  sumo  stnte,  iis  well  na 
between  the  dilVerent  states  and  islands  of  tht'  ^^ronp,  ii  eonlinuni 
trutfic  is  maintained.  Some  articles  of  food  can  only  be  produced  in 
certain  districts;  other  places  are  famed  for  particular  nuinnfactures. 
The  interchanjje  of  these  articles  creates  an  active  commerce,  which, 
next  to  war,  is  the  favourite  business  of  the  Feejeeans,  who  are  no 
less  covetous  than  bloo<lthirsty.  In  the  pro.serution  of  this  traflic,  tho 
necessity  of  a  medium  of  exchansre  has  been  perceived  and  sup|)!ied, 
otVeriiifi  another  evidence  of  the  advain^e  which  this  people  has  maile 
in  civilization.  This  medium  is  furnished  by  tho  teeth  ot  the  whale, 
and  is  the  chief  cau.sc  of  the  hi<,'h  factitious  value  which  is  j,nven  to 
them.  In  former  times,  tho  teeth  wore  obtained  from  whales  which 
were  stranded  on  the  numerous  reefs  in  and  about  tho  K""""!'-  ^^ 
present  they  are  procured  from  whalers,  who  find  in  them  a  idieap 
and  convenient  means  of  supplying?  their  ves.sol8  with  provisions. 
The  number  lately  brouj^ht  in  has  .somewhat  lowered  their  value,  but 
a  siiimde  tooth  will  still  purchase  a  thou.sand  yams,  and  with  fdty  a 
man  is  considered  wealthy.  As  these  teeth  (called  by  tho  natives 
laniliihi)  are  coniparatively  light,  will  not  lose  by  attrition,  and  n»ay 
be  cut  into  handsome  ornaments,  they  have  many  of  the  advantages 
of  the  precious  metals,  and  arc  no  doubt  as  good  a  substitute  as  could 
be  found  for  them  in  the  islands. 

A  largo  proportion  of  the  commerce  of  the  group  is  carried  on  by 
the  Leouku  people,  who  are  said  to  be  of  Tongan  descent.  These 
were  the  original  inhabitants  of  the  island  of  .Mbau,  many  generations 
back.  While  most  of  their  warriors  were  absent  on  a  trading  voyage 
to  Lakcmlia,  a  party  from  the  island  of  Moturiki  made  a  descent  >ipon 
Mbau,  and  having  obtained  possession  of  it,  expelled  tho  former  occu- 
j)ants  entirely.  The  Kai-Levuka  are  now  a  sort  of  "  broken  clan,'" 
living  scattered  about  among  the  various  islands,  and  employed  by 
the  ciuefs  as  sailors  and  traders.  They  have  a  chief  of  their  own. 
who  resides  on  the  island  of  Lakemba,  but  he  is  not  looked  upon  by 
the  Feejeeans  as  belongiiii^  to  the  real  aristocracy  of  the  islands. 
When  a  Levuka  man  visits  Mbau  he  is  still  treated  with  the  best  o( 
every  thing,  as  a  sort  of  acknowledgment  of  his  just  right  to  the  soil. 
This  people,  also,  and  those  of  Kamba,  a  promontory  of  Viti-lovu, 


M  R  L  A  N  R  8  I  A. 


03 


nenr  Mbaii,  aro  tlioHO  by  wliotn  tlio  coromniiy  of  inaiiKurntiii^  the 
hend-diiel' of  tlint  town  imist  bo  pcrformi'd.  and  in  i'onMtM|iienco,  lie 
(loos  not  take,  an  niiglil  1)«  exjwctod,  tho  titio  of  'I'lii-Mhaii,  but  is 
known  an  'Viii-Kamba  and  'rni-Levuka. 

Tho  forc^oinj^  obNcrvatiohH  will  Huftico  to  j^ivo  a  (roncral  idoa  of  the 
political  organization  of  tho  Foojceans.  Wo  shall  next  advert  to  some 
of  their  most  roniarka))le  cUNtoms,  and  espeeially  to  hucIi  as  display 
the  peculiar  character  of  the  people.  The  institution  of  the  tambit, 
which  has  already  been  noticed,  as  well  as  tlm  ceremonies  connected 
with  tho  drinking  of  /cami,  although  among  those  which  first  attract 
attention,  from  their  frecpient  occurrence,  aro  yet  no  similar  to  what 
they  aro  in  tho  Polynesian  islands,  (and  especially  in  Samoa  and 
Tonga,)  that  a  particular  account  of  them  is  not  necessary.  Tattoo- 
ing (which  is  called  ygla)  is  another  custom  to  which  tho  same 
observation  will  apply  ;  but  it  is  remarkable  that  whilt!,  among  the 
Polynesians,  it  is  tho  men  who  are  chiefly  tattooi'd,  in  these  islands, 
on  the  contrary,  the  women  only  are  subjected  to  the  operation,  and 
tho  men  arc,  with  few  exceptions,  entirely  exempt.  The  marks  are 
imprinted  in  a  broad  band  around  the  loins  and  thighs.  As  they  are 
almost  entirely  covered  by  the  ii/iii  or  cincture,  and  as  tho  colour  is 
hardly  perceptible  on  their  dusky  skins,  it  is  ditlicult  to  comprehend 
the  object  of  the  custom.  The  tattooers  are  always  females,  who 
make  it  a  regular  profession  (le>va  vei-ygla),  and  are  paid  for  their 
labour. 

The  immolation  of  women  at  the  burial  of  a  chief  has  been  thought 
to  adbrd  an  evidence  of  connexion  between  these  islands  and  some 
Asiatic  nations.  However  this  may  be,  the  fact  itself  is  suflicioutly 
striking.  The  reason  assigned  for  the  custom  by  tiie  natives  is  con- 
nected with  their  belief  concerning  the  destiny  of  the  soul.  As  the 
disembodied  spirit  of  the  chief  is  supposed,  before  it  linally  descends 
to  the  Mbulu  or  hades,  to  dwell  for  a  time  in  the  Ihimhalhimlxi,  which 
is  usually  some  di.strict  or  island  near  his  original  home,  anil  to  be 
there  engaged  in  occupations  similar  to  those  which  he  followed 
during  life,  the  natives  consider  that  the  wife,  in  accompanying  him 
to  this  residence,  is  merely  doing  her  duty  towards  her  companion, 
who,  without  her,  would  be  living  a  lonely  and  cheerless  existence. 
The  following  account  of  tho  ceremonies  at  the  burial  of  a  chief  was 
received  from  Mr.  Cargill,  who  had  been  an  eye-witness  to  them  a 
few  months  before  our  arrival. 

When  a  dying  man  is  near  his  end,  his  friends  place  in  his  hands 


64 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


a  whale's  tooth,  which  he  will  need  to  throw  at  a  tree  standing  in  the 
way  to  the  regions  of  the  dead ;  and  they  believe  that  to  hit  this  tree 
is  an  omen  of  future  happiness.  As  soon  as  the  breath  is  departed, 
the  friends  and  attendants  of  the  deceased  fill  the  air  with  cries  and 
lamentations.  The  grave-diggers  are  sent  for  to  wash  the  body,  they 
being  the  only  persons  who  can  touch  it  without  being  subjected  to  a 
tamhu  for  several  months.  When  washed,  it  is  laid  out  on  a  couch 
of  mats  and  cloth,  and  carefully  wiped,  after  which  they  proceed  to 
dress  and  decorate  it  as  for  a  festival.  The  corpse  is  first  anointed 
with  oil,  and  then  the  upper  part,  including  the  face,  the  arms  down 
to  the  elbows,  the  neck  and  breast,  is  daubed  with  a  black  substance 
resembling  soot.  A  white  bandage  of  paper-cloth  is  wound  round 
the  head,  and  tied  on  the  temple  in  a  graceful  knot.  A  club  is  put  in 
the  hand  and  laid  acro,ss  the  breast,  that  he  may  appear  as  a  chief 
and  warrior  in  the  next  world. 

The  body  being  thus  equipped  and  laid  on  a  new  bier,  the  friends 
of  the  deceased,  and  the  chiefs  of  the  different  tribes  or  clans  in  the 
town  as.semble  around  it;  each  tribe  presents  a  whale's  tooth,  and  the 
chief  or  spokesman,  holding  it  in  his  hand,  says : — "  This  is  our 
offering  to  the  dead  ;  we  are  poor,  and  cannot  find  riches."  All  the 
persons  present  then  clap  their  hands,  and  the  king  or  a  chief  of  rank 
replies,  "  At  mumuiidi'i  ni  mute,'''  (the  end  of  death), — to  which  the 
people  respond,  "  Mana,  e  mlina  .'"'  (Amen  !  it  is  true  !) 

'I'he  female  friends  then  approach  and  ki.ss  the  corpse ;  after  which 
any  one  of  his  wives  who  wishes  to  die  with  him  hastens  to  her 
brother  or  nearest  relative,  and  says, — "I  desire  to  die,  that  I  may 
accompany  my  husband  to  the  land  of  spirits;  love  me,  and  make 
haste  and  strangle  me,  that  I  may  overtake  him."  Her  friends 
apph'.ud  her  resolution,  and  aid  her  to  adorn  her  person  to  th",  best 
advantage.  She  is  then  seated  in  the  lap  of  a  woman,  while  another 
holds  her  head  and  stops  her  nostrils,  that  she  may  not  breathe 
through  tliem.  The  noose  is  then  put  round  her  neck,  and  four  or 
five  ^rong  men  pulling  at  each  end  of  the  cord,  her  struggles  are  soon 
over.  The  noose  is  then  tied  fast,  and  remains  so  until  the  friends  of 
her  hu.sband  present  a  whale's  tooth  to  her  brother,  saying — "This  is 
the  untying  of  the  cord  ot  strangulation."  The  knot  is  then  slipped, 
and  the  cord  '  'it  loose  around  her  neck. 

The  ifrave-(ii<r<rers  now  commence  their  labour.  The  first  earth 
taken  ui»  is  called  "  sacred  earth,"  and  laid  on  one  side.  When  the 
grave  is  completed,  the  corpse  of  '.he  chief  is  laid  in  it,  with  the 


MELANESIA. 


65 


bodies  of  two  of  his  wives,  one  on  each  side,  their  right  and  left 
hands  respectively  being  laid  upon  his  breast.  All  three  are  then 
wrapped  up  together  in  numerous  rolls  of  native  cloth,  and  the  grave 
is  filled  in  upon  them.  The  "  sacred  earth"  is  laid  upon  the  top,  and 
over  this  a  stone  (usually  a  small  block  of  basalt)  is  set  up  to  mark 
the  spot. 

The  custom  of  voluntary  suicide  on  the  part  of  the  old  men,  which 
is  among  their  most  e.vtraordinary  usages,  is  also  connected  with  their 
superstitions  respecting  a  future  life.  They  believe  that  persons  enter 
upon  the  delights  of  their  elysium  with  the  same  faculties,  mental 
and  physical,  that  they  possess  at  the  hour  of  death,  in  short,  that  the 
spiritual  life  commences  where  the  corporetil  e.xistence  terminates. 
With  these  views,  it  is  natural  that  they  should  desire  to  pass  through 
this  change  before  their  mental  and  botlily  powers  are  so  enfeebled  by 
age  as  to  deprive  them  of  the  capacity  for  enjoyment.  To  this  motive 
must  be  added  the  contempt  which  attaches  to  physical  weakness 
among  a  nation  of  warriors,  and  the  wrongs  and  insults  which  await 
those  who  are- no  longer  able  to  protect  themselves.  When,  therefore, 
a  man  finds  his  strength  declining  with  the  advance  of  age,  and  feels 
that  he  will  soon  be  unequal  to  discharge  the  duties  of  this  life,  and 
to  partake  in  the  pleasures  of  that  which  is  to  come,  he  calls  together 
his  relations,  and  tells  them  that  he  is  now  worn  out  and  useless,  that 
he  sees  they  are  all  ashamed  of  him,  and  that  he  has  determined  to 
be  buried.  Thereupon  they  hold  a  consultation,  and  if  they  think 
proper  to  comply  with  his  recjuest,  they  fi.^c  a  time  for  the  ceremony, 
which  is  always  preceded  by  a  farewell  feast  {mbiirua). 

When  the  day  arrives,  he  attends  the  bancjuet,  and  then  walks  to 
the  spot  where  he  desires  to  bo  buried,  and  marks  out  his  grave. 
When  they  are  digging  it,  he  paints  himself,  puts  on  a  clean  girdle 
and  turban,  and  svhen  it  is  ready,  is  assisted  by  the  workmen  into  his 
last  resting-place.  His  wife,  if  he  has  one,  is  strangled  and  buried 
beside  him.  His  friends  and  relatives  tlien  raise  loud  lamentations, 
weeping  and  cutting  themselves  as  at  a  funeral,  and  all  go  to  him  in 
succession  to  give  him  a  last  kiss.  He  is  then  covered  up  with  rolls 
of  cloth,  which  are  laid  loosely  over  his  face,  so  that  he  may  not  be 
immediately  smothered.  Then  they  tiirow  in  the  earth,  which  they 
stamp  down  every  where,  except  over  his  head.  He  is  not  buried  so 
deep  but  that  they  can  sometimes  hear  him  speak,  although  they 
cannot  distinguish  the  words.  They  then  retire,  and  are  tnmbu  for 
some  time,  as  usual  after  a  burial.     The  following  night,  his  son  goes 

17 


66 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


n 


if. 


privately  to  the  grave  and  lays  on  it  a  piece  of  kava-root,  which  is 
ca)led  the  vei-tata,  or  farewell. 

This,  it  should  be  observed,  is  not  the  only  occasion  when  the 
natives  resort  to  suicide.  Spite  in  the  men,  and  disappointed  love  in 
the  women,  frequeutly  excite  tiiem  to  destroy  their  lives.  A  precipi- 
tous rock  near  the  town  of  Lcvuka,  on  Ovolau,  had  the  same  refuta- 
tion with  the  famed  steep  of  Leucadia,  as  a  last  resource  of  despairing 
lovers.  The  love  of  life  seems  to  be  weaker  than  common  in  the 
minds  of  these  islanders.  A  slight  disgust, — a  momentary  offence 
taken  at  the  conduct  of  another  person, — often  suflice  to  make  them 
weary  of  existence.  "  It  is  easier  to  die  tlian  to  bear  this,"  is  an 
expression  frequently  heard,  and  not  seldom  followed  by  the  threat- 
ened act. 

Another  singular  custom  which  wc  find  in  these  islands,  is  that  of 
cutting  off  one  of  their  fingers,  either  as  a  token  of  mourning  at  the 
loss  of  a  friend,  or  to  propitiate  the  wrath  of  a  superior.  In  the  former 
case,  the  mutilation  is  in  general  less  an  evidence  of  grief  than  of 
covetousness ;  every  one  who  thus  maims  himself  e.xpects  to  receive, 
ill  return,  from  the  friends  of  the  deceased,  a  considerable  present, 
which  is  called  rukamamathd  >ii  iidra, — the  drying  of  blood.  For 
this  reason,  parents  frequently  cut  off  the  little  fingers  of  their 
children,  much  against  the  will  of  the  latter. 

When  a  cliief  is  otVended  with  any  among  his  subjects,  and 
threatens  them  with  punishment,  they  sometimes,  if  he  proves  inex- 
orable to  their  j)rayers,  have  recourse  to  the  sii-.gular  expedient  of 
cutting  off  tlicir  little  fingers  (and  sometimes  the  tliird),  which  they 
stick  all  together  in  tiic  cleft  of  a  bamboo,  and  present  it  to  him. 
This  extraordinary  offering  usually  has  tlie  desired  efTect. 

The  ceremonies  at  tlio  Inrth  of  a  cliild  have  little  that  is  remarkable, 
though  they  partake  of  the  peculiarities  which  characterize  most  of 
their  customs.  As  soon  as  tlie  child  is  born,  a  (juantity  of  protisions 
is  cooked  and  distributed  among  the  friends  of  the  family.  At  tlie 
end  of  four  days  the  friends  coinc  to  kiss  t!ie  cliild,  ai.d  a  feast  (called 
rahtmhoiKjirn)  is  made  for  them  by  the  parents.  At  the  end  of  ten 
days,  another  feast  {rahiimliniiijitini)  is  made,  and  the  matter  is  over. 
The  child  is  namiid  imnioilialely  after  birth,  eitlier  liy  the  father,  or 
by  the  prie.st.  If  this  is  not  done,  the  mother  becomes  disgusted  with 
it,  and  strangles  it, — .sayinir  that  it  is  a  /iiniiifik  (outcast). 

Xaines,  which  are  always  signiti(  alive,  are  f"re(iueiitly  changed,  and 
an  individual  sometimes  has  several  in  the  course  of  his  life.     With 


MELANESIA. 


67 


the  ctiiefs,  these  new  names  answer  for  so  many  titles  of  nobility. 
Tanoa  (Afft"a-bo\vl)  was  the  original  name  of  the  present  king  of 
Mbau.  He  afterwards  acquired  that  of  Ndrendre-ni-ale,  literally,  diffi- 
cult to  throw  away, — which  was  explained  from  the  fact  that  in  one 
of  his  warlike  expeditions  he  slew  so  many  of  his  enemies  that  his 
people  had  some  dilliculty  in  disposing  of  the  dead  bodies.  Ilis  third 
name  was  obtained  in  an  attack  upon  Verata,  in  which  he  destroyed 
many  of  their  canoes  by  fire,  and  was  thenceforward  known  as  Viso- 
wangga,  or  canoe-burner.  A  chief  or  landholder  frc([ucutly  receives 
his  title  from  the  name  of  his  house,  as  noble  families  in  Europe  are 
named  from  their  estates.  Thus  a  chief  of  Mbau,  whose  pro})er  ap- 
pellation was  Veikoso,  having  had  a  house  called  Ngf/ara-ni-kii/i  (lite- 
rally, dog's  cave),  was  usually  spoken  of  under  the  respectable  title  of 
Ko-mai-na-uggara-ni-kuli , — lie  of  the  dog's  cave. 

The  taking  of  a  certain  fish  or  sea-slug,  is  attended  with  some  sin- 
gular rites,  and  is  important  as  connected  witli  the  diversions  of  tlic 
year,  not  only  in  this  group,  but  also  in  some  of  the  Polynesian 
islands.  This  animal,  which  is  called  mhal6lo,  is  described  as  some- 
what resembling  in  shape  a  large  centiiiede,  being  about  three  inches 
long,  with  a  soft  and  gelatinous  body,  and  innumerable  legs.  It  is 
taken  only  on  a  single  day  in  the  year,  usually  in  the  latter  part  of 
November,  whep  it  makes  its  ai)pearance,  at  a  certain  period  in  ihe 
last  quarter  of  the  moon,  and  at  the  time  of  "young  llood"  in  the 
morning.  The  fish  come  out  in  dense  swarms  from  holes  in  the 
coral,  and  spread  out  on  the  surface  of  the  water.  A  bushel  or  more 
are  sometimes  caught  from  a  single  hole,  by  scooping  them  up  as  they 
ascend.  As  they  will  keep  but  a  low  days,  they  unist  be  eaten  with- 
out delay,  and  the  day  of  tlieir  appearance  is  the  commencement  of  a 
general  feast  at  tho.se  places  where  fhey  are  taken.  For  four  days  no 
warfare  is  carried  on,  anil  a  tambii  is  laid  to  [)revent  noise  or  distur- 
bance of  any  kind.  No  labour  must  be  done,  and  no  person  must  be 
seen  outside  of  his  house.  In  Ovolau,  the  ceremony  begins  as  soon 
as  the  vi/hi/i'i/o  is  brought  in,  by  a  mataiiirdinia  ascending  a  tree,  and 
invoking  the  kalou  iii  laiigi  (spirit  of  the  skies)  to  be  favourable  to 
them  throughout  the  year, — grant  them  fine  weather,  fair  winds,  &c.. 
— ending  his  prayer  with  the  words  sit  uti !  sa  iili !  set  oti !  (it  is 
finished.)  Thereupon  a  tremendous  clatter,  with  drumming  and 
shouting,  is  raised  by  all  the  people  inside  of  the  houses  for  about  half 
an  hour,  and  tlien  a  dead  i[uiet  ensues  for  four  days,  during  which 
they  are  feasting  on  the  mbali'ilo.     If  in  any  dwelling  a  noise  is  made. 


68  ETHNOGRAPHY. 

as  by  a  child  crying,  a  forfeit  (on")  is  immediately  exacted  by  the 
chief, — usually  some  article  of  food  to  be  eaten  at  the  council-house. 

Besides  the  appearance  of  the  mbaldlo,  the  natives  have  few  means 
of  determining  with  exactness  the  progress  of  time.  Indeed,  they 
pay  little  attention  to  this,  and  we  were  unable  to  obtain  from  several 
to  whom  we  applied,  the  names  of  the  months  in  their  regular  series. 
The  following  are  those  which  are  given  by  the  missionaries  us  in 
use  at  Lakemba,  but  several  of  them  are  unknown  in  other  parts  of 
the  groun. 

Scsi-ni-iigasau-lailai,     .     .     February,     .     .     (jc-wi-wgoiaM,  flower  of  the  reed.) 
Scsc-ni-v<:<isau-lcvii,       .     .     Miircli. 

Viilni-mlioliiDitiota,     .     .     .     April,      .     .     .     (mliola,  to  sliare  out,  distribute.) 
Viilai-kclikcU,       ....     May,        .     .     .     (keli,  to  di;;.) 

Viilai-tremfcre, (mie,        .     .     .     {urrc,  to  till  the  groiuui.) 

Kauakatntiiii'irr, luly. 

Kturatiaka-liiiUii,     .     .     .     August. 
Ktnmvaka-lrru,  ....     September. 
Mlnilolo-Uiiliii,      ....     Octoljcr. 

MIhiIoIo-Icvu Xovciiiber. 

Niinga-lailai,       ....     Docrmlicr,    .     .     (.V««g((,  a  kind  of  fish.) 
y^un!.'a-/ev>i, .lanuary. 


f    r 
:    I 


1 


ii 


The  Feejeeans  know  nothing  of  astronomy,  and  have  not  even 
names  for  the  most  important  constellations.  They  call  the  morning 
and  evening  stars  volu-siiiija  and  voki-mhongi ,  literally,  marking-tlay, 
and  marking-niglit ;  but  they  do  not  distinguish  between  the  planets 
and  the  fixed  stars.  Their  ignorance  on  this  subject  is  probably  to 
be  ascribed  to  the  fact  that  they  never  undertake  voyages  beyond  the 
limits  of  their  group.  Though  good  sailors,  they  are  bad  navigators, 
in  the  technical  sen.se  of  the  term.  In  this  respect  they  are  far  sur- 
passed by  the  Polynesians,  though  the  latter  (with  the  exception  of 
the  Tongans,  who  have  learned  the  art  from  the  Feejeeans)  are  inferior 
to  them  ill  tlie  construction  and  size  of  their  canoes. 

These  natives  are  somewhat  remarkable  for  their  industry.  The 
desire  for  the  actiuisition  of  properly  which  is  so  conspicuous  a  trait 
in  their  character,  induces  them  to  give  more  attention  to  the  means 
b\"  whicii  tills  may  be  iiccomplished  tiian  is  usual  among  the  careless 
and  light-hearted  Polynesians.  They  also  pay  much  attention  to 
cleanliness,  being  accustomed  to  bathe  frequently,  and  rub  their 
bodies  with  cucoa-iiut  oil,  u  practice  which  has  a  beneficial  elfect,  in 
that  climate,  by  cliecking  the  perspiration  wliich  would  otherwise  be 


M  I  C  R  O  N  E  S  I  A. 


69 


excessive  and  clebilitatintr.  Tlio  following  order  of  daily  avocations 
is  pretty  regularly  observed. 

When  tiioy  rise  in  tiie  morning,  wliich  is  commonly  before  the  sun, 
the  men  first  repair  to  the  vihitie  (town-iiousc  or  temple)  to  drink 
kavn.  'riiey  eitlier  wash  tlicniselves  all  over,  or  at  least  rinse  tiioir 
mouths,  before  they  join  in  the  drinking,  'riuiy  tlien  go  to  their 
plantations  of  yams  and  taro,  or  to  any  otlier  work  in  wliich  they  may 
be  engaged,  and  remain  there  until  the  sun  becomes  loo  hot  for  com- 
fort, when  Ihcy  return  home  and  take  their  first  meal,  called  IxdtdUut ; 
this  is  usually  abo\it  nine  or  ten  o'clock.  During  the  heat  of  the  day 
they  lounge  about,  doing  liglit  jobs,  talking  or  sleeping.  Towards 
night,  if  they  feel  industrious,  they  return  to  tiieir  plantations.  Other- 
wise they  dress  in  a  clean  girdle,  wash  and  oil  themselves,  powder 
their  hair  witli  ashes,  and  stroll  about  the  village,  chatting  with  their 
friends  until  the  dusk  of  the  evening,  whicii  is  the  usual  time  of 
retiring. 

Sometimes  in  the  afternoon  they  repair  to  the  r(ira  iii  melr,  public 
j)lace  for  dancing, — and  join  in  a  tlance  ;  or  lo  the  rara  iii  tiiujija, — 
place  of  games, — which  is  an  oblong  level  space,  two  hundred  yards 
long  by  ten  wide,  where  they  play  at  the  game  called  tinrifia, — some- 
thing between  ([uoits  and  cricket.  It  is  played  by  two  parties,  one 
against  the  other.  The  implement  used  is  a  stiff  reed,  between  three 
and  four  feet  long,  having  on  its  head  a  heavv  knob  of  iron-wood. 
This  is  darted  heatl  foremost,  iVom  one  end  of  the  rum  towards  the 
other,  the  object  being  to  throw  it  to  the  greatest  possible  distance. 
It  is  not  siMit  all  the  way  through  the  air,  but  slides  ami  bounds  along 
the  ground.  'Y\w  game  is  a  very  e.vciting  one.  Several  towns  some- 
times engage  in  it  at  once,  the  vancpushed  of  one  day  being  bound  to 
fuul  provisions  for  tlic  next.  The  [jassions  of  the  c(ind)atants  are 
sometin\es  wrongiit  up  .so  liighly  tliat  ([vuuTols  anil  bloodshed  ensue. 
A  good  player,  {ndau-tingcj'i,)  enjoys  almost  as  much  estimation 
thronjjhout  the  islands  as  a  irreat  warrior. 


M  I  C  H  0  X  K  S  I  A. 

This  "  region  of  small  islands,''  as  it  is  very  a])propriately  desig- 
nated, extends  between  the  meriilians  of  13'i^  K,  and  17S°  \V.,  and 
between  the  parallels  of  '21°  N.  and  f)"  S.  The  greatest  number  lie 
in  a  range  between  the  i)arallels  of  5°  and  10°  X.,  scattered  as  con- 

18 


70 


ETHNOr.R  A  PlI  Y. 


fnsedly  along  the  ocean  as  seed  strewn  in  a  furrow.  There  arc  about 
a  hundred  groups,  if  this  name  may  be  apphed  to  the  coral  rings,  or 
lagoon  islands,  which  consist  of  numerous  small  patches  of  rock,  dis- 
posed in  a  circular  or  oval  form  and  connected  by  reefs.  Of  all  the 
groups,  only  si,\  belong  to  the  class  of  high  islands,  and  these  are  all 
surrounded  by  extensive  reefs.  They  are  the  Pelew  Islands,  the 
Ladroncs,  Yap,  Ilogoleu,  Banabe,  and  Ualau.  These,  though  among 
the  smallest  of  their  class  in  the  I'acific,  are  important  wlien  com- 
pared witli  the  coral  clusters,  all  of  which  put  together  would  not 
probably  give  t'lrce  hundred  stpiare  miles  of  dry  land.  If,  however, 
the  reels  and  lagoons,  from  which  tlic  natives  derive  a  grout  part  of 
their  subsistence,  be  taken  into  consideration,  the  estimate  will  be 
greatly  enlarged. 

The  information  which  we  possess  concerning  most  of  these 
islands  is  principally  derived  from  the  works  of  former  voyagers,  par- 
ticularly Duperrey,  DT'rville,  Kotzebue,  and  Liitke,  and  we  shall 
therefore  enter  into  no  furtlier  particulars  respecting  them  than  will 
be  necessary  to  illustrate  tiie  account  \\  liich  we  have  to  give,  from 
other  sources,  of  a  few  of  tiie  groups.  For  this  purpose  tiie  situation 
of  the  wliole  archipelago  must  be  particularly  noted.  It  ap[)roaclies 
within  twenty  degrees  of  Japan  and  Loo  Clioo  on  tlie  north,  witbin 
five  (It^grees  of  the  Philippines  on  tlie  west,  has  New  (Juinea  and  the 
other  Melanesian  islands  at  the  same  distance  on  the  south,  and  the 
Polynesians  about  as  far  otV  to  the  southeast.  It  happens,  moreover, 
that  winds  are  common  over  this  region  from  alltiiese  points.  The 
soutiieasl  trades  blow  from  tiie  Navigators  to  the  Kingsmill  Islaiuis, 
and  e.xtcud  far  north  of  the  eijuator.  In  the  winter  the  northwest 
monsoon  comes  down  tVom  the  China  Sea,  frecpiently  shifting  round 
to  the  southwest,  in  which  direction  the  most  violent  hurricanes  occur. 
At  this  season  of  the  year  large  fir-trees,  sometimes  with  their  branches 
and  leaves  adhering,  are  driven  from  some  northern  region  to  the 
Kingsmill  Islands, — the  .southernmost  of  Micronesia, — while  the 
.southwest  storms  bring  bamboos  in  like  manner  from  a  tropical  clime 
to  the  same  place. 

These  oijservations  are  important  for  their  bearing  on  the  (juestion 
of  the  probable  source  or  sources  of  the  poi)ulation  of  these  islands. 
The  subject  is  one  wiiich  neither  our  space  nor  our  materials  will 
admitof  our  discussing  in  full,  and  it  remains  for  .some  future  iiupiirer 
to  trace  out,  by  a  comparison  of  language,  physical  traits,  customs, 
and  traditions,  the  origin  and  migrations  of  the  Micronesian  tribes. 


MICRONESIA. 


71 


That  tliis  may  be  done,  judifiiig  by  wbat  little  we  have  liccn  able  to 
effect  for  two  or  three  of  the  islands,  we  entertain  no  doubt.  And  it 
is  certain  that  few  more  important  fields  now  remain  open  for  ethno- 
gra|)liical  research. 

We  sometimes  speak  of  the  numerous  colonies  which  have  pro- 
ceeded from  Great  Britain  as  being  one  people,  inasmuch  as  they 
have  issuctl  from  a  single  source ;  and  in  this  sense  we  may  apply  the 
term  to  the  tribes  of  Polynesia.  We  also  speak  of  tlie  iidiabitants  of 
the  Koman  empire — at  least  alter  two  or  three  centuries  of  concpicst — 
as  forming  one  peo[)le,  inasmuch  as  the  various  nations  and  tribes  to 
which  they  belonged  had  been  cemented  and  fused  together,  by  the 
general  ascendency  and  intermi.vture  of  one  dominant  race, — and  in 
this  sense  alone  the  term  is  applicalile  to  tlie  natives  of  the  Microne- 
sian  islands.  Hence  it  will  be  seen  that  no  general  description  can 
be  given  of  the  latter,  which  shall  be  every  where  equally  correct,  and 
which  \\  ill  not  retpiire  many  allowances  and  exceptions. 

'I'lie  Micronesians,  as  a  people,  do  not  dilfcr  greatly  in  complexion 
from  their  neighbours  of  Polynesia.  Their  colour  varies  from  a  light 
yellow,  in  some  of  the  groujjs,  particularly  the  western,  to  a  reddish 
brown,  which  we  find  more  conuaon  in  the  east  and  southeast.  The 
features  are  usually  higii  and  bold, — the  nose  straight  or  a(piiline,  the 
cheek-bones  projecting,  the  chin  rounded  and  prominent.  The  nose 
is  commonly  widened  ai  Ihe  lower  part,  as  in  the  Polynesian  race,  but 
this  is  not  a  universal  trait  The  hair,  which  is  black,  is  in  some 
straight,  in  others  curly.  .'  i  e  beard  is  usually  scanty,  though  among 
the  darker  tribes  it  is  more  abundant,  and  these  have  often  w  hiskers 
and  mustacliios.  In  stature,  the  natives  more  often  fall  below  tliau 
exceed  the  middle  height,  and  they  are  naturally  slender.  That 
which  especially  characterizes  this  people,  is  the  great  elevation  of 
the  forehead,  and  indeed  of  the  whole  heail,  as  compared  with  its 
breadth.  This  was  general  in  those  wliom  we  saw,  and  is  apparent 
in  nearly  all  the  portraits  of  natives  which  have  been  given  by  dilfe- 
rent  voyagers. 

In  character,  the  Micronesians — at  least  those  of  them  who  belong 
to  the  lighter  coloured  tribes — will  compare  advantageously  with  any 
other  people,  whether  savage  or  civilized.  Their  most  pleasing,  and, 
at  the  same  time,  their  most  striking  trait,  is  a  certain  natural  kindli- 
ness and  goodness  of  heart,  to  which  all  their  visiters,  of  every 
country  and  character,  bear  the  same  testimony.  \\  ilson  at  the 
Pelew  Islands,    Kotzebue   at   Radack,   Dupcrrey  and   D'Lirville    at 


m 


i 


';( 


f' 


I 


M 


7a 


E  T  II  N  O  U  R  A  P  II  Y. 


Ualaii,  Liitke  and  Martens  at  all  the  western  islands,  O'Connel!  and 
every  other  visiter  at  Banabe,  Paul(lin<f  at  the  Mulj^ravo  tlronp,  and 
our  Ex|)edition  at  Makin,  have  had  occasion  to  remark  the  swoctncss 
of  tenii)er  and  the  absence  of  any  harsh  and  violent  feelin<4s,  which 
characteri/e  the  inhabitants.  This  is  especially  deservin<r  of  note, 
inasmuch  as  there  is  no  (|uality  more  rare,  or  about  the  existence  of 
which  scepticism  is  more  justilial)le,  than  that  of  real  benevolence 
among  savai;es.  In  this  case,  however,  tlio  stroni^  and  decided 
testimony  of  so  many  witnesses  can  leave  no  tloubt  that  the  natives 
of  the  Caroline  Islanils  are,  for  the  most  part,  a  kind,  amiable,  and 
gentle  race. 

There  are,  however,  as  before  remarked,  some  exceptions  to  bo 
made  in  any  general  description  of  this  people.  This  kindness  of 
heart  is  less  apparent  in  the  natives  of  those  small  isolated  coral 
islands,  where  the  supply  of  food  is  scanty,  and  where  the  fretpient 
pressure  of  actual  want  sometimes  produces  in  the  people  a  hard  and 
unfeeling  disposition.  'J'ho.se  tribes,  too,  among  whom  a  partial 
intermixture  of  the  Melanesian  race  shows  itself  in  the  features  and 
complexion,  will  also  be  found  to  partake,  more  or  less,  of  the  ferocity 
natural  to  that  race. 

They  are  also,  like  the  Polynesians,  a  social  and  an  enterprising 
people.  A  constant  communication  is  kept  up  among  the  various 
groups  and  islands.  They  are  excellent  navigators,  governing  their 
courses  by  the  stars  with  great  accuracy. 

As  might  be  expected,  wars  are  by  no  means  frecpient  among 
them.  Liitke  inlbrms  us  that  on  Ualau,  and  all  the  coral  islands  to 
the  west  of  it,  a  constant  peace  [jrevails.  On  some  yf  the  high 
islands,  where  the  po|)ulation  is  divided  into  sevcru!  tribes,  wars 
occasionally  occur.  They  are,  howe\cr,  seldom  very  destructive, 
and  in  all  cases  it  is  esteemed  nece.s.sary  for  a  party  which  is  about 
to  attack  another,  to  send  word,  by  a  heraUl,  of  their  intention,  in 
order  tliat  tlieir  ojjponcnts  may  be  prepared  to  meet  them.  This,  we 
are  ass'urcd,  is  the  case  in  IJanabe,  Ilogolen,  antl  the  Pelew  Islands. 

It  is  difhcult  to  say  whether  parental  all'ection  is  strongly  developed 
in  these  natives  or  not.  Some  circumstances,  which  will  be  hereafter 
mentioned,  would  lead  to  an  unfavourable  conclusion.  But  what  is 
especially  remarkable  is  the  unusual  consideration  which  is  awariled 
to  the  female  sex.  Tiic  women,  in  all  tiie  groups,  do  com])aratively 
little  luboiu",  and  that  only  of  the  lightest  kind.  Ill  treatment  of  a 
wife  by  her  hustjand  is  almost  unknown, — partly  from  their  naturally 


MICRONESIA. 


73 


good  (lisi)osition,  but  chiefly  because  he  would  be  certain  to  receive  ii 
severe  punishment  either  from  iier  rolntives,  or  from  the  other  women 
of  tlie  neif^hbourhood.  Tiiis  fact  is  curious  enough,  and  it  appears  to 
bo  universal.  By  all  accounts,  tiiis  sex,  in  the  Caroline  Islands, 
enjoys  a  perfect  ecpiality  in  pnblic  estimation  with  the  other. 

They  are  far  from  being  a  licentious  people.  The  modest  deport- 
ment of  the  women,  and  the  sacredness  of  the  marriage  tie,  have 
been  remarked  by  all  voyag(^rs,  who  have  contrasted  it  with  the 
contrary  trait,  so  conspicuous  in  the  natives  of  Polynesia. 

Their  respect  for  rank  is  remarkable,  and  the  more  so  as  it  does  not 
seem  to  be  founded  upon  any  superstitious  observance,  like  that  of 
the /(//>//.  Not  only  do  the  chiefs  enjoy  an  unquestioned  supremacy, 
but  the  distinctions  between  the  diflerent  clas.ses  of  po[)ulation,  of 
which  tliere  are  usually  two  or  more,  is  maintained'with  a  rigidness 
whicli  rennntls  one  of  the  in.stitution  of  ca.ste. 

They  sei-m  to  be  an  honest  people.  Among  themselves,  they  are 
said  to  be  decidedly  so.  They  sometimes,  however,  steal  from  ve.ssels, 
in  which  case,  it  would  appear  that  iho  greatness  of  the  tempta- 
tion overcomes  their  better  feelings.  Their  woril,  it  is  said,  may 
generally  ho  relied  upon. 

They  are  very  iiilelligeiit.  The  same  observation  has  been  made 
concerning  the  natives  of  Polynesia,  but  a  distinction  is  observable 
betwecii  the  two  m  this  res|u'ct.  The  latter  are  (luick  in  their  per- 
ceptions, iniiT-nidus.  and  prompt  in  acquiring  a  new  art.  The  Caro- 
line islanders,  on  the  other  hanil,  ere  a  considerate  and  reflecting 
people,  acute  in  reasoning,  and  desirous  of  understanding  the  meaning 
of  any  uovei  appearance. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  character  here  given  is  little  more  than  a 
catalogue  of  good  (|iialities.  Sueli  as  it  is,  bowe\t'r,  it  is  an  e.xact 
stati'meiil  of  the  impressions  derived  from  personal  observation,  as 
well  as  from  the  accounts  of  others.  There  can  be  no  doubt  that 
these  natives  arc  a  liiiclv  endowed  race,  in  whom  the  moral  feelings 
and  the  intellect  generally  [iredominate  over  the  more  violent  pas- 
sions. That  there  are  occasional  exceptions,  has  been  betbre  re- 
marked, and  some  of  them  Mill  be  hereafter  noticed. 

The  dilference  of  character  in  the  three  Oceanic  races  is  most 
clearly  displayed  m  the  recf!ption  which  they  have  given  to  their 
earliest  civilized  visitors.  With  the  black  tribes,  a  strong  disposition 
has  generally  been  evinced  to  get  rid  of  the  strangers  as  soon  as 
possible,  and  to  avoid  coinmunicution  with  them.     The  Polynesian 

19 


74 


KTIINOr.  R  A  1'  M  V. 


islntulcrs,  on  the  other  hand,  Imvo  almost  always  received  thctn  with 
a  chitnorous  wekonio  and  apjjarent  l'rien(isiii|),  and  tlien  made  an 
attempt  to  got  possession,  by  I'orce  or  fraud,  of  their  vessel,  or  some  of 
their  property.  While  the  natives  of  Micronesia,  though  scmetimcs 
shy  at  first,  have  seldom  failed,  in  the  end,  to  establish  and  maintain 
an  intercourse  of  uninler'-upted  friendship  and  mutual  confidence. 
The  only  exceptions,  and  those  not  numerous,  have  been  in  the  cases 
before  noticed,  where  hardship  and  want,  or  an  iiitermi.\ture  of  foreign 
blood,  have  deteriorated  tiieir  character. 

In  treating  of  the  Polynesians,  wo  have  had  occasion  to  remark  that 
they  liad  probably  attained,  before  their  discovery,  to  as  high  a  grade 
of  civilization  as  the  ciicumstances  in  which  they  were  placed  would 
permit.  The  same  remark  may  be  made  concerning  the  natives  of 
Micronesia,  but  with  this  difference,  that  while  the  former  appear  to 
have  risen  from  a  lower  condition  to  their  present  state,  the  latter 
seem,  on  the  contrary,  to  have  descended  from  a  higher  grade  which 
had  been  attained  in  some  more  favourable  situation.  As  this  view 
(which  is  that  of  Les.sou,  and,  in  part,  of  Liilke,)  is  somewhat  im- 
portant, it  is  proper  to  state  the  considerations  on  wliich  it  is  fouiuled. 

1.  Although  the  Caroline  islanders  arc  not  more  ingenious  or  more 
enterprising  than  the  Polynesians,  and  altiiough,  on  the  whole,  tiiey 
seem  to  enjoy  no  more  of  the  comforts  of  life,  yet  in  many  of  the  arts, 
and  what  may  be  termed  sciences,  they  are  decideilly  superior.  Those 
relating  to  navigation  deserve  particular  notice.  The  latter  of  the 
two  races,  in  their  voyages,  are  usually  guided  by  tlie  winds,  and  pay 
little  attention  to  the  heavenly  b(Klies.  The  Micronesians,  on  the 
other  hand,  sail  altogether  by  the  stars,  with  which  they  are  well 
acfpuiinted.  'J'iiey  divide  the  horizon  into  twenty-eight  points,  instead 
of  the  thirty-two  of  our  compasses,  giving  to  each  a  name.  The  Po- 
lynesians, on  the  contrary,  have  no  special  names  even  for  the  four 
cardinal  points.  East  and  jresl  they  c.\'[)ress  by  phrases  signifying 
sunrise  and  sunset ;  north  and  soiil/i  usually  by  the  names  for  certain 
winds,  or  by  the  words  ritjlit  IkiikI  and  left.  Hut  even  these  e.vprcs- 
sions  arc  rarely  used.  The  canoes  of  the  Caroline  islanders  are  made 
to  sail  with  either  end  foremost,  resembling  in  that  resi)ect,  those 
which  are  in  use  at  the  Feejeo  Islands,  and  which  the  natives  of 
Tonga  have  borrowed  from  thence.  Whether  this  motlel  belongs 
properly  to  the  black  race  or  the  Micronesian  is  uncertain  ;  but  from 
its  universiility  among  the  latter,  we  should  be  inclined  to  ascribe  it 
to  them.     Those  who  inhabit  the  high  islands  have  also  the  art  of 


MICRONESIA. 


75 


coatin^r  the  outHido  of  their  canocH  with  a  shining  varnish.  They 
make,  bcsidt^s,  by  burning  the  coral  rock,  a  fine  lime,  which  is  ini.vcd 
witii  cocoa-nut  oil,  and  used  to  whitewasii  the  inside  of  their  canoes 
and  render  them  water-tight.  Neither  of  these  arts  is  known  to  the 
Polynesians. 

2.  Some  of  their  manufactmes  evince  a  skill  which  seems  to  l)o  tlio 
ofispring  of  civilization.  This  is  particularly  the  case  with  their 
cinctures,  or  sushes,  which  are  made  of  the  fd)rous  filaments  of  the 
banana  plant.  They  are  not  braided  by  hand,  like  the  fine  mats  of 
Polynesia,  but  woven  in  a  simple  loom.  The  shuttle  resembles  very 
closely  in  appearance,  as  in  use,  that  of  our  weavers.  These  sashes 
have  attracted  much  notice  and  admiration  from  foreigners,  for  the 
elegance  of  their  to.xturc,  and  the  beauty  and  regularity  of  the  colours 
which  are  inwoven.  Another  of  tiieir  ornaments  deserves  notice,  not 
so  much  for  any  skill  displayed  in  its  manulacture,  as  because  it 
seems  to  bo  universal  among  the  islanders  of  Micronesia  and  peculiar 
to  them.  It  consists  of  a  string  of  alternate  wooden  and  shell  beads, 
if  this  term  may  bo  applied  to  them.  The  "  beads"  are  in  the  shape 
of  a  sixpence  witli  a  hole  through  its  centre,  or  more  nearly  like  the 
"button-moulds"  of  our  dress-makers.  They  are  made  of  fragments 
of  cocoanut-shell  and  sea-shells,  which  are  broken  or  cut  nearly  to  the 
re(iuired  shape,  and  then  filed  down  together  till  they  are  smooth, 
even,  and  e.vactly  of  equal  size.  Those  of  sea-shell  are  white,  and 
those  of  cocoa-nut  black.  The}'  are  strung  alternately  upon  a  small 
cord,  and  appear  like  a  round  tle.xible  stick,  half  an  inch  in  diameter, 
marked  with  alternate  white  and  black  rings.  They  are  worn,  not 
round  the  neck,  but  round  the  waist,  and  only  by  the  men.* 

•  Siiico  this  Hiis  wiilti'ii,  my  attcntiuu  1ms  been  drawn  to  a  passngo  in  Cliamisso's 
voliiinc,  npiiciKlcil  to  Kotz<'luic's  voyiigc  round  tlip  world,  (Von>  wliitli  tlio  orif^in,  mid 
proljjilily  tlio  real  niitinc,  of  this  supposed  ornimicnt  may  be  iiili'trcd.  In  speaking  of 
the  natives  of  tlie  Liidroiie  Islands,  ho  i-eniarks: — "Wo  hnvo  discovered  among  their 
untii|iiilirs  sonii'thing  which  seems  to  show  n  great  ndvaiico  made  in  civilization  beyond 
any  of  the  other  islanders  of  the  great  ocean.  We  speak  of  the  invention  of  money.  .  .  . 
Disks  of  tortoiso-sliell,  of  the  slinpo  of  button-moulds,  but  thin  as  p.iper,  and  made  ex- 
tremely smooth  by  rubbing,  are  strung  close  togetlier  on  a  thick  cord  of  cocoa-nut  sinnet. 
The  whole  tonus  a  (lexiblo  cylinder  of  the  thickness  of  a  linger,  and  several  feet  in 
length,  'riiese  disk.s  were  in  circulation  as  a  medium  of  exchange,  and  only  a  few  of 
the  chiefs  had  the  right  to  make  and  issue  them." — Chiimisiin's  Wtrkc,  Leipzig,  1830, 
vol.  ii.  p.  142.  This  "  money"  is  evidently  the  same  with  the  "  Ix^ads"  of  the  Kings- 
mill  Islanders,  except  that  the  latter  use  other  shells  instead  of  that  of  the  tortoise.  From 
various  slight  circunistinicos  uliieh  arc  now  called  to  mind,  it  seems  likely  that  these 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0    ^^  Ui 

^E    la  11,2   |22 


Hiotographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


-'^ 

'  <» 


33  WIST  MAIN  STMIT 

WnSTM,N.Y.  I4SM 

(7l6)t73^S03 


^^    ^\  ^r\\ 


i 


76 


K  TUN  (MS  «  A  I'll  V. 


3.  The  Caroline  islanders  tattoo  tliemsolves  not  out  of  motives  of 
decency,  nor  nltdgotlicr  tor  ornament,  liut  as  a  means  of  distin^uish- 
injr  tlieir  families  ami  clans,  and  of  retainin(r  tlie  memory  of  persons, 
olijects,  and  events.  Liitke  found  on  one  of  the  coral  islamis  a  man 
wIk)  liail  murks  tattcH>e(i  upon  iiim  tn  represent  all  the  islands  of  the 
arciiipehiy;().  At  IJanatie.  tiie  wife  lias  tattooed  upon  lier  tlie  marks 
standini;  for  the  names  of  her  imsliand's  ancestors.  'I'he  natives  of 
this  ijjroup,  lookiiif^  over  an  lOnj^lish  book,  took  it  to  Ite  the  white 
man's  tattoo,  hut  could  not  understand  the  object  of  the  frequent  repe- 
tition of  the  same  characters,  sayinj^  that  it  was  useless.* 

4.  \\  hile  the  system  of  "lovernment  in  most  of  the  Polynesian 
groups  is  of  a  very  simple  character,  that  of  the  Caroline  islanders  is, 
on  the  contrary,  unusually  complex.  Not  only  is  the  whole  popula- 
tion, in  many  of  the  islands,  divided  into  distinct  classes,  which  never 

notivi'S  dill  artiially  niiploy  llic  lriiikiiilnrit<liirn,  ii.s  llicy  Irrnu'd  llictn,  (i>r  ii  nii'cliiiiii  it< 
trmlo;  they  bronchi  thciii  nil'  in  ;;ri'.'it  ((iiiiiitltics,  wuiii'  iiidividiiiilH  hiiviii);  iiiiiiiy  liilliomM 
lioil  nriiiind  ihi-  wiiisl,  iiiid  im  iirlii'lr  i>rir.'iirii'  ln'siilcs.  It  is  iioiid  in  my  jmirnal,  thai  on 
llic  lirst  ilay  at  Ta|iiite<iiK'a,  IkIciii'  W"  liiiiili'd,  innn'  than  holl'  a  linslnl  nrihc  Ix'ads  were 
ohtaincd.  ih\  ini{iiiriMg  (il'olhcr.s  whu  wcri'  ninrc  (ii;:a;;i'd  lliaii  niysill'  in  Ixirti'rin;!  uilh 
llio  natives,  I  find  that  llii'ir  rri'iijlcciidns  ac-iiinl  Willi  my  nwri.  Tiny  an'  dis|His<d  In 
think  that  the  o|iini<in  alx>vo  i'\|>n'SN4'd  uith  n-^^ard  In  the  iisr  ol'  th(.>  artiidcs  in  ijia'slioii 
is  rorm-t,  and  that  wi-  wen;  mistaken  at  llic  tinio  in  iiii|)|Hi.Hing  tlicin  to  Ix-  mcn'ly  oriio> 
inonls, — ihiMiyh  Ihry  may  havi'  Ik'cii  wnrii  as  .sm-h,  as  snnw  f  Ihr  .Snnlh  Aini'rirnn 
soldirrs  have  thrir  arcoiilrcnii'iits  niNrnd  willi  silver  I'niiis.  ,\s  the  materials  dI' which 
the  disks  are  made  an'  vitv  eiimiiicm,  the  value  must  .'irise  rnmi  Ihe  lalMnir  nei'es.snry  to 
rut  and  |M>lish  them  li>  their  |irii|H'r  >ha|ie,  »hi<'h,  liir  the  numlor  eoiilained  in  a  string, 
must  Im"  very  gri'iit. 

Hut  ihe  iiiU'reiioes  whieh  may  Ik'  di'diiced  iVom  the  general  dilPisinn  of  this  sp<Tie»  of 
circulaling  medium  ainiaig  llie  Canilino  islaiulers,  arc  very  iiii|iortant.  The  most 
common  Chines'  coins,  as  is  well  known,  havi!  a  hole  through  Ihe  centn-,  an' siriing 
upon  strings,  and  disposed  ol'  hy  lengths.  In  He<i'hey's  "  Voyage  to  Ihe  I'acilic,"  p.  31)3, 
(.\m.  edit.,)  s|«'aking  ol'  ilii'  asserlion  that  llie  |«'opIe  of  I/k(  CIhm)  have  no  money,  h<! 
says,  "Our  meeting  willi  this  |K'asiinl,  however,  disclosed  Ihe  Irulli,  as  he  had  a  string  of 
-oi/i  (iiniall  Chinese  money)  8US|H'ndi'd  to  his  girdle,  in  )!■"  innnner  adopted  hy  llio 
Chinese-."  In  a  note  hi^  adds,  "  These  coins,  being  of  small  value,  are  strung  together 
in  hundn'ds,  ami  have  a  knot  at  each  end,  so  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  count  them."  I 
uni  ilisposed  lo  consider  this  I'ai't  as  one  of  the  most  important  evidences  that  Ihe  Micro- 
nesians,  or  at  lea.st  the  dominant  class  among  them,  derive  tlioir  origin  from  I'^astem 
Asia,  and  from  a  civilizetl  |H'ople.  It  has  lusn  Ihnuglit  Ix'st  to  let  ihv  remarks  in  llio 
text  stand  as  lirst  written,  in  order  to  show  the  im|Nirt<incc  which  Ihe  universal  pn^va- 
lenrc  and  |ieculiar  chararter  of  the  Nup|HiM(>d  orimiiN-nt  Icil  us  to  allach  to  it  when  its 
probable  origin  and  natnn-  were  iinsus|iectixl. 

•  O'Connell's  .Nurruiive,  p.  103. 


1 


M  I  C  R  O  N  E  H  I  A. 


77 


intermarry,  but  tlic  rank  of  the  chicfH,  unci  tlio  succession  to  aiithority, 
are  regulated  according  to  a  very  intricate  system,  wliich  lias  evi- 
dently been  the  residt  of  desijin  and  study.  t)f  tliis  we  shall  have 
occasion  to  (five  s(»me  examples, 

5.  'I'iie  religion  of  the  MiiTonesians  carries  us  at  once  to  Eastern 
Asia.  It  is  the  worship  of  the  s|)irits  of  their  ancestors.  They  are 
called  at  the  I^adrones,  anili,  at  the  Kinjismills,  atili,  at  tlie  Mul- 
graves,  nuit  and  iiiiis,  at  llanahe,  hnni  or  itiii,  at  Falalou,  haiio,  A:c. 
Prol)al)ly  the  ijuris  of  Lord  North's  Island,  sit^iiifyiii)^  divinity,  is  the 
same  word,  as  the  ciiaiij^e  of  n  to  r  is  universal  in  these  dialects. 
They  have  neither  temples,  imatfcs,  nor  sacrifices.  Their  worship 
consists  merely  in  prayiiii^  and  perfonninif  certain  ceremonies, — 
amoii'4  others  the  oH'crin;^  of  a  j)ortion  of  their  foo<l  to  the  spirits.  It 
docs  not  appear  that  a  real  tahu-system  exists  on  any  of  the  groups. 
Voyagers  have  found  words  signifyini;  sacred  or  forbidden,  which 
they  have  a.ssimilated  with  the  Polynesian  tabu,  but  they  give  us  no 
hint  of  a  cotle  of  laws  and  social  regulations  deriving  their  validity 
from  a  religious  .sanction.  There  is  certainly  nothing  of  the  kind  in 
the  Kiiigsmill  (iroup. 

On  the  whole,  we  may  venture  to  say  that  the  semi-civilization  of 
the  Polynesians  has  been  attained  by  bringing  to  perfectit)n  the  rude 
arts  and  institutions  natural  to  the  savage  state;  while  that  of  the 
Micronesians  has  resulted  from  simplifying,  and  adapting  to  more 
restricted  circumstances,  the  inventions  and  usairps  of  civilization. 

\\'e  now  proceed  to  notice  some  of  the  single  grou[)s  and  islands, 
concerning  whose  inhabitants  we  have  it  in  our  power  to  give  some 
information. 


I  Mil  I,    It  li     l.tilil)    NO  I!  Ills    I  s  I.  A  N  n 

This  island,  whicii  forms  the  southwestern  extremity  of  the  Micro- 
iiesian  range,  is  situated  in  altout  latitude  3°  '2'  N.,  and  longitude 
131°  4'  K.  It  is  a  small,  h)w  islet,  about  three  miles  in  circumfe- 
rence, with  a  population  of  between  three  and  four  hundred  souls. 
Our  information  concerning  it  is  derived  from  an  American,  by  name 
Horace  Ilolden,  who,  with  eleven  companions,  after  sufl'ering  ship- 
wreck, reached  the  island  in  a  boat,  iiid  was  taken  captive  by  the 
natives,  lie  was  detained  by  them  two  years,  from  December  0, 
1832,  to  November  '27,  1831,  when  he  made  his  escape  and  returned 
to  America,  where  he  published,  in  a  small  volume,  an  interesting 

80 


1 


7S 


KTII  XCXi  It  A  I'll  V. 


narrative  of  his  advoiiturcs  and  sniU'riiiiis,  with  a  (h'scripliini  of  the 
island  and  its  inhal)itants.  Appended  to  the  lHH)k  is  a  vocahnlary  of 
tlic  laiiLMiauo,  drawn  iip  witli  eare  liy  tlio  lion,  .loiin  I'iekerinjf  ol 
Hostoii.  wliose  name  is  a  sullieient  t;naranlee  lor  its  eorreetness. 

I  met  Mr.  lloldi-n  at  Hoston.  two  years  alter  his  return,  and  in 
Rcveral  conversations  witii  liiui  olitaiiied  sonic  inlorination  on  points 
not  noticed  in  his  pulilished  narrative,  together  witii  an  addition  to 
the  voeahulary  ol"  a  nnniher  of  wonis  wliieh  lie  was  alile,  from  time  to 
time,  to  call  to  mind.  It  has  seemed  to  me,  therel'ore,  that  a  i)rief 
account  of  the  natives  of  this  island  would  not  Im;  out  of  place  here, 
more  esj>ecially  as  it  will  serve  to  prove  liie  sirikinif  similarity  of 
traits  and  customs  wiiich  prevail  from  one  extremity  of  the  Caroline 
Islands  to  the  other. 

••The  complexion  of  tlie  natives,"  says  llolden  in  his  narrative,  "is 
a  liirht  coppi-r  colour. — mucii  li|j[hter  than  tliat  of  the  Malays  or  the 
I'eiew  islanders,  which  last,  however,  they  resend)le  in  tiie  hreadlh 
of  their  faces,  hit;h  (•heek-hones,  ;iii<l  liroad  llattened  no.ses.""'*  Hero 
we  ol)si>rve,  what  lias  heen  l>efore  remarked  of  the  i'olynesian  trihes, 
that  the  li^jhtest  comjile.vioii  is  founil  among  those  who  are  neari'st  the 
ei|ualor. 

The  natives  worshij)  a  thnty  wlmm  they  term  //»/;•/.«,  in  which  we 
perhaps  see  the  anili  or  atiia  of  tlie  lia<lrone  and  ilaihu^k  Islands.! 
Accordinif  to  the  native  traditinns,  a  pi'rs(ina;fe,  hy  name  i'iln-ld'il  (or 
I'eeter  Kart),  of  copper  colour  like  themselves,  "came  many  years 
aL'o  from  the  island  of  Ternate  (one  of  the  Moluccas),  and  t;ave  them 
their  reh'j;ion,  and  such  simple  arts  as  they  possessed."!  It  is  proha- 
bly  to  him  that  we  are  to  attribute  some  jieculiarities  in  their  modt  of 
worship,  such  as  their  temple,  with  rude  imatn's  to  represent  liie 
divinity.  "  In  the  centre,  suspended  Irom  the  roof,  is  a  sort  nf  altar, 
into  which  they  suppose!  their  deity  comes  to  hold  converse  witii  the 
priest."  The  temple  is  called  n  n  i/nris.  or  spirit-house.  In  this 
word  /•(/•(  we  recou;nise  tim  l'olynesianyi//f'  or  y^//*',  house,  (V'ltian, 
rnk,)  used  here  only  in  this  cnnne.vion, — the  ordinary  word  for 
dwelling'  lieing  i/it)i,  the  i/ii  of  the  other  Carolim*  Islands.     So,  too. 


•  S|K>.ikiiii.'  <>t'  111''  I'riiw  isliiiuliT'i,  lie  .siiys: — " 'I'lii'ir  ciiiiiiilc.Niciii  is  n  light  cdpixT. 
I'liiir  iiiis<^  uri'  siiiiii  hIiiiI  IIiiI,  IhjI  imt  so  ll:il  .•!■<  lliosi'  ol'  ilic  Arni'uiis,  nor  hit  tlnir  lips 
>'i  lllH-k."      \.iri:ili\i',  |>.    l". 

t  'I'll''  ('li!iii;;f  1111111  iiiiis  111  V""*'  "imlil  I*'  .•icrnrilinu'  I"  ill''  •■iist.ini  of  the  (liulirl, 
Thii^  «i   liMn-  1)1111)  tor  iir-i  (ll/iii),  Mill;  man  lor  umanc,  man,  iVo, 

i  .\|i|»iiili\  In  Narrulivc,  p.  Vi;i. 


Mli'UOX  KSI  A. 


79 


tlic  i\ativos  wear  the  Polynesian  <„nr(llc  of  l)ark-clnth,  wliicli  llirv  call 
by  tlit^  wi'll-kiiowii  naiiio  of  lopn.  Tlu'v  liavc,  too,  thi!  won!  lahii, 
si^riiityini,'  a  .sacrt'ij  |ilac('.  'I'licso  facts  are  valiinblo.  as,  combincil 
witli  many  other  indications  whicii  will  lie  hereafter  n(ite<l,  they  seem 
to  show  that  tiieori'^inal  iniialiitantsof  the  Molnccas(who  are  distinct 
from  the  intrndinjj  Malay  con(|iierors)  wt-re  a  race  more  nearly  allied 
to  the  I'olvnesians  than  the  other  trilK>s  of  Malaisia. 

"'I'lieir  ini|ilenients  of  war  are  sjiears  and  chilis;  they  have  no 
Ijows  and  arrows.  Their  spears  are  made  of  the  wo()<l  of  the  cocoa- 
nnt  tree;  the  points  of  them  are  set  with  rows  of  sharks'  teeth;  and 
heiiiLf  at  the  same  lime  very  heavy,  and  trom  ten  to  twenlv  feet  lonu, 
they  art)  formidalile  \vea|ions."  'I'luse  spears  armed  with  sharks' 
teeth  are  I'onnd  thronnhont  the  Mii  ionesi;in  groups,  and  may  he 
termed  the  national  weapon,  as  the  how  is  of  the  Mack  race;  for 
thoMirh  they  were  not  entirely  nnknown  to  the  I'olynesians.  they 
were  yet  so  rare  that  we  saw  hut  three  or  fonr  in  the  course  of  our 
voyaiic  and  those  only  at  the  Naviiiator  am!  lln;  Depeyster  (iroup. 

'I'he  houses  of  the  natives  are  hndt  of  small  trees  and  pmIs,  and 
thatclu'il  svith  leav(<s.  They  have  two  stories,  a  ^'ronnd  lloor  and  a 
loft,  which  is  entered  liy  a  hole  or  scuttle  throu>|h  the  horizontal  jiar- 
tilioii.  or  upper  lloor. 

For  ornament,  they  .sometimes  wear  in  their  ears,  which  are  always 
hored,  a  folde<l  leal';  and  round  their  necks  a  necklace  made  of  the 
shell  of  the  cocoa-nut  and  a  small  w  hile  sea-siicll.  These  last  are  no 
doulit  the  circular  "heads"  before  de.scrilied,  althoiiL'h  the  iiiikU' of 
wearini?  them  is  unusual. 

They  live  principally  on  cocoa-nuts,  witii  a  few  taro  roots,  which 
ihey  raise,  with  1,'real  dilliciilty,  in  trenches  duix  in  the  sand.  Their 
sn|iply  o|  fish  is  small,  and  only  live  turtle  were  taken  while  Hold 


en 


as  on  tlu^  island. 


Thes(!  constitute   the   slender   me; 


if  tl 


leir 


support ;  and  they  are  thus  barely  kv\\i  from  actual  death  by  famine, 
but  on  the  very  veri^e  of  starvation."  It  is  to  this  state  of  misery  in 
which  thev  are  constantly  kepi  that  we  must  attriliule  the  cruel  dis- 
position whicli  they  inanilcsl.  'I'he  unfortunate  captives  were  treated 
with  u'lvat  harshness,  and  compelled  to  toil  in  the  severest  drudixery, 
with  barely  sutlicient  food  to  support  life.  In  tin'l.  some  t  'them  ilied 
of  the  sull'eriiiLjs  thus  inllicted.  It  is  remarkable  that  tiic  women 
were  more^active  in  this  ill-treatment  than  the  men.  We  shall  have 
occasion  to  note  a  similar  fact  in  the  Mulgrave  Island.s,  at  the  other 


4 


80 


KTIINOO  RAl'H  Y. 


extremity  of  this  region.  The  men,  on  Tohi,  perform  much  of  the 
(loniostic  hiboiir  which  is  olspwliere  left  to  the  women. 

The  hcnhps  of  tlio  dead,  except  of  very  young  children,  are  laid  in 
a  cano<',  nn<l  comnutted  to  the  ocean.  The  reason  of  tliis  <'ustom 
lldldcn  did  not  know.  It  seems  likely,  from  what  will  he  stated  in 
another  place,  that  the  canoe  is  intended  to  convey  the  deceased  to 
the  hind  of  spirits,  and  that  yinni'^  children  are  not  sent  hecanse  they 
are  esleerncd  iiicnpaliie  of  guiding  it. 

It  should  he  mcntiuiicd  that  the  relea.sc  of  the  four  Americans  who 
survived  (two  of  whom  t,'ot  free  a  short  time  after  their  cajjlure)  was 
voluntary  on  the  part  of  llic  natives,  a  fact  which  shows  that  the  heel- 
ings of  h\imanity  were  not  altogether  extinct  in  their  hearts.  Indeed, 
allht)uuh  tlie  sufferings  of  the  cajitivcs  were  very  great,  it  does  not 
appear  that  ihcy  were  worsts  relatively  to  \\\v.  condition  in  which  the 
natives  themselves  lived,  than  they  would  have  been  on  any  other 
i.slanil  of  the  Pacilic.  Men  who  were  actually  dying  of  starvation, 
like  the  people  of  'I'uhi,  c(udd  not  lie  expected  to  exercise  that  kind- 
ness towards  others  which  nature  refused  to  them. 

IIAN  MU:   nit    ASi    KNSlu.N    Isr.ANU,   O  li     Till:    SKMAVIM;    (ilKH   i*. 

This  island,  one  of  the  largest  of  tlie  Carolines,  is  situated  in  lati- 
tude 7"  .\.,  longitude  l")i»'^  !•).  Admiral  liiitke,  though  not,  properly 
speaking,  the  discoverer,  was  the  fust  to  make  known  its  existence  to 
the  world,  so  late  as  the  ye;ir  I'^'.J'^.  lie  did  not  land,  and  the  only 
communication  which  hi'  had  with  tlie  natives  was  through  two  or 
three  canoes  which  came  off  to  the  ship.  The  men,  m  appearance 
no  less  than  in  language,  seemeil  to  him  (piite  distinct  from  the  other 
natives  of  Micronesia,  and  he  compares  them  to  the  Papuans.  But 
he  observes  that  those  whom  he  saw  .seemed  to  be  all  of  the  lower 
clas.ses. 

Had  the  Hu.ssian  navigator  been  able  to  land,  he  wouhl  jirobably 
have  had  an  o])portunity  of  rescuing  from  captivity  seven  English 
seamen,  who  had  shortly  before  reached  the  island  in  a  boat,  after 
their  slii[)wreck  on  a  reef  near  I  alau.  One  of  these,  by  name  James 
O'C'oniiell,  alter  living  five  years  on  the  island,  escaped  in  November, 
I'^'M,  and  two  yciirs  alterwards  ri'aclied  the  I'liiled  States.  He  jjub- 
lished.  at  Hoston,  an  account  of  his  adventures,  writien  for  him  by  a 
gentleman  of  that  city,  and  containing  much  valuable  information. 


i 


M  I  (•  U  O  NISI  A. 


81 


In  I'^^l  I  l)ecamo  aciiimmtwl  witli  liiin,  niid  snw  him  fre(|upnlly,  for 
the  |)ur|Hiso  of  tiikiii!^  down  snrh  ii  vocahuhiry  of  the  liiiiuiiaj^e  iis  ho 
fould  furnish, — whirii,  notwithstaiKliiij,'  his  lorii^  ri-sideiicf,  iuid  iiis 
general  iiitflli^fi'iHc,  was  very  scanty.  Me  was  one  of  those  wlio 
seem  to  have  a  iiattiral  incapacity  fur  ac(iuirini^  foreiifn  toiiirues; 
hut  with  th(!  usages  and  institutions  (tf  the  ishunh-rs  lie  a|)|)eared 
perfectly  famiUar,  and  was  al»lo  to  render  a  clear  and  satisfactory 
account,  the  ^:eneral  correctness  of  whicli  has  since  heeii  fully  con- 
firmed. 

In  June,  1835.  the  London  whale-ship  Corsair  was  lost  on  a  reef  off 
Drummond's  Island,  and  one  of  her  hoats,  with  six  men,  aiul  the  sur- 
ffeon  of  the  ship,  Dr.  Smith,  reached  Ascension,  after  a  passage  of 
seventeen  days,  durinjf  which  they  underwent  extreme  sulfering. 
'riic  journal  of  Dr.  Smith  came  into  my  hands  at  Oahu;  it  contains 
some  inlerestiuff  notices.* 

At  Oahu,  I  became  acipiainted  with  Mr.  G.  W.  I'linchard,  who 
had  resided  ahoiit  a  year  on  Banabe,  and  from  him  I  obtained  some 
additional  inibrmation.  At  that  time  wc  expected  to  visit  tlu^  island, 
and  sailed  from  Oahu  with  that  object ;  but  contrary  winds,  and  the 
delay  cau.sed  l)y  ttie  survey  of  the  Kiu<jsmill  (J roup,  which  was  found 
to  be  much  more  extensive  anil  important  than  we  had  anlicijiated, 
made  it  neces.sary  to  renounce  this  part  of  our  cruise.  The  descrip- 
tion which  follows  has  been  drawn  chiefly  from  the  sources  above 
mentioned. 

Concerning  the  name  of  the  i.sland,  there  is  so  great  a  disrrepancv 
in  the  dilferent  accounts,  that  it  is  dillicult  to  arrive  at  u  satisfactory 
conclusion.  Mr.  Punchard  ])ronounced  it  lininhf :  OConnell  writes 
it  Botialwe ;  Dr.  Smith,  litniinjlxiij :  Liltke,  I'oiii/ni/xt :  Duperrey, 
from  the  accounts  of  natives  of  other  islands,  I'oii/onjxi  :  Cantova, 
Chamisso,  and  Liitke,  from  similar  accounts,  Faliipit,  Faiiope.  and 
Faounoitpel.  liana, — which  in  the  dialects  of  western  Micronesia, 
would  assume  the  various  forms  of  Fa/ia,  Fara,  and  Fafa, — seems  to 
form  a  part  of  the  names  of  many  groups  in  this  archipelago.  Thus 
we  have   Fatia-non  or  Fala-luu,  Fara-lis,    Fana-di/,;    (little   Tana.) 

•  On  n  .siil)S<'<|iicnt  voyage  oCDr.  Smilli  to  .New  (icorjjiii, I'  llic  Solnnioii  Ciroiip, 

twelve  liiiiiilrcd  miles  I'list.soutlieiist  of  IJriiiiiiiioiKrs  Uliiiul,  he  laniled  on  ii  sinnll  neigli- 
iHiiiriiig  i.slet,  enlled  Kililysione,  (liy  the  natives  Monclovent-,)  mid  »h«  conducted  hy  the 
eliii'I'to  the  top  III'  n  inoiiMtiiiii,  uliere  he  louiid  the  tiuure-head  of  the  Corsair.  U  had 
drilled  to  the  Island,  and  iKt'n  curried  hy  the  natives  up  the  niuuntiiin, 

'i\ 


89 


K  Til  >'(>(!  RA  l>ll  V. 


Fold-lep  (groat  Fnlu),  Ace*  I  urn  inrliiied  to  think  timt  Haimlie  or 
Uanolic  will  coino  nearest  to  the  |>ro|H>r  native  protuinriation. 

The  Krniip  ot'  HannlH)  consistN  nt°  the  Mingle  hi^^h  iNland  ot°  that 
name,  with  many  low  isletN  sitnated  on  an  extensive  eoral  helt  which 
surronnds  it.  The  high  island  was  supposed  Ity  Mr.  I'unehard  to  be 
nlM)nt  forty  miles  in  lireumlerence,  and  he  estimated  the  po|)ulation 
at  fifteen  thousand, — though  others  rciluee  it  to  half  this  nundtur. 
l)'('onnell,  however,  saw,  on  one  occasion,  the  warriors  of  one  triluj 
collected  to  the  nund)er  of  fifteen  hundred  men.  As  there  are  five 
tribes  on  the  island,  this  would  seem  to  show  that  Mr.  I'unchard's 
estimate  is  not  Iim)  high. 

The  natives  are  divided  into  three  classes  or  castes,  chiefs,  gentry 
(or  freemen),  and  slaves,  or  rather  serfs.  The  first  two  belong  to  the 
yellow  race,  proper  to  this  archipelago,  and  are  of  the  middle  sixe, 
with  light  complexions,  prominent  features,  and  smixilh  skins.  The 
others  are  termed  by  O'Comiell  a  negro  race,  and  Liitke  compares 
them  to  the  Papuans ;  he  says,  "  'I'hey  have  a  wide,  flat  lace,  with 
broad  depressed  noses,  thick  lips,  and  crisp  hair  [lea  c/teiru.ccr('/)iis)."\ 
O'Connell,  however,  says  that  they  have  straight  hair,|  meaning, 
perhaps,  that  it  is  not  woolly,  like  that  of  the  African  negro,  lie 
adds,  further,  (the  universal  characteristic  of  the  Melanesian  race,) 
that  "the  skin  is  rough,  and  very  unpleasant  to  the  touch."  Their 
colour  is  nut  black,  but  dark  brown;  Littke  calls  it  cheHtnut  {c/ui- 

'  It  must  I*'  n llti'Ifil  iliii  iliriHijiliDiil   Micri)nc>»i;i  ihc  Itltrrs  »/,  r,  iiml  /,  iin-  iisrd 

ilil('ri'liitii)!i'iilily,  U8  art'  ft  iind  k,j)  uiiil  />,  iiiiil  Hdiiii'tiiiics  /  ,■  llie  I  (irimc  diiiUvt  lieccniirN 
th  in  iinutlicr,  mid  3  in  ii  third.  Ilcnriii)!  iIm-su  cIiiiii|j;('.s  in  mind,  Wf  lind  niinM-r<iii.s  ri'- 
si-mblancrs  nincm^'  tlic  naiiiis  i>rislniids  and  );ri>ii|i!<.  yaiiiii  or  \iimo  \k  very  i-oinmoii  : 
«<!  havr  y<iniii,  yniiiii-iik  (little  .Naiiiii),  Ijiiiiiii-rik  (ditln),  yumii-tiiiik,  Xiiiiio.rdtissr, 
y<iiiiii-/iiiiiiir,  yiiiiio-iiiiiiito,  (sdullicrn  .Namu),  yiiinn-liji-iiilnii  (fftfni  nurllH'rn  .N.-imn), 
\i\  ISo  thrn'  nri'  twn  islands  named  /■(»(.«,  tttci  iianii'd  I'liini, — ijiiri'  art;  Jtii^ar  and 
liilfiili,  I'rh-lrii,  (ciiimnoidy  called  IWrir.)  and  IVIr-ltifi  ;  Lii^ii-niir,  yiijifi-nr,  and 
yiiku-nitii ;  Uti/ni,  Oi/ki,  L'lli.rik,  and  Uilin-nnliii,  Mufniir  and  Miikiii.  In  slmrt. 
Ihert'  sc'oin.s  to  lie  linrdly  an  islanil  in  we.itorn  .Mieronesia,  wliicli  has  not  oni'  in  thr 
eastern  juirt  of  the  arclii|H'la).'o  named  aOer  it.  It  should  Ih>  i>lKi«?rved  that  the  dillirenee 
in  many  ol'  the  names  <:iven  almve,  priKmils,  in  part,  Irom  the  dilli'iini  luoiles  ol'  ortho- 
({niphy  ndopled  hy  the  voya;jers  I'mui  uhoin  they  an'  taken, — Kotwliue,  I)u|(ern-y, 
Kicuri,  and  others.  'I'his  ri'semhlanee  in  mimes  is  one  ot'  the  clues  which  must  be  fol- 
lowed ill  Iraciii);  out  the  ini);rations  liy  »hich  these  islands  have  been  |ieo|iled, 

t  Kiiuri,  OcPBiiie,  vol.  ii.  p.  130. 

X  .Narrutive,  p.  l',"*. 


M  I  C  R  O  N  K  8  I  A. 


«*3 


laitfiie).  There  in  reason  to  Ix'licvo  tliut  these  two  rarcs  are  fouml  in 
conjunction  on  other  groups  of  Micronesia,  {especially  the  large 
elevated  cluster  of  llojifoleu,)  while  on  some,  us  Nanionlouk,  Nu(^uor, 
and  the  southern  Kingsniill  Islunils,  uii  amalgamation  seems  to  have 
taken  place. 

The  three  classes  are  called,  according  to  O'Connell,  Mooujohs 
{Miindjuh),  Jerijo/is,  (Tsherff/Jo)  and  i\i(/iirts  (yaikut).  The  general 
term  aroche  {arotf),  was  applied  to  the  lirst  two;  it  may  l)e  translated 
gentleman  or  Jmtnan.  These  two  classes  rarely  intermarry  with  one 
another,  and  never  with  the  third.  The  distinction  of  caste  is  main- 
tained with  great  strictness;  even  in  battle,  a  person  of  one  class 
never  attacks  one  of  another,  so  that,  says  O'Coimell,  "  it  is  like  the 
encounter  of  three  distinct  parties." 

All  the  land  in  the  group  is  parcelled  out  into  estates,  which  are 
the  property  of  the  chiefs  and  freemen.  The  serfs  are  consitlered  as 
affixed  to  the  soil.  These  estates  are  never  alienated,  and  pass  only 
by  succession ;  but  this  succession  is  not  directly  hereditary.  The 
system  of  descent,  lK)th  of  titles  and  property,  is  very  intricate  and 
difficult  to  understand.  Accoriling  to  the  account  received  from  Mr. 
Punchard,  every  chief  lias  u  distinguishing  title,  besides  his  own 
proper  appellation.  The  highest  rank  in  the  two  tribes  of  Matalalin 
and  C  is  IsltijMU,  who  is  usually  called  by  foreigners  the  king ;  then 
follow,  in  the  line  of  succession,  Watljai,  'Vak,  Xotsh,  Nanw,  and 
others  still  lower.  Before  a  chief  can  become  hhipan  he  must  rise 
through  all  these  grades  or  offices,  and,  of  course,  there  is  only  one 
in  each  tribe  holding  each  of  these  titles.  There  are  other  offices  or 
dignities,  the  holders  of  which  can  never  rise  to  be  Lhipaii .  but 
these,  also,  have  their  inferior  grades  in  regular  succession.  One  of 
these  is  Nnnigin,  a  kind  of  high  priest  of  the  Kiti  tribe.  The  son  of 
a  chief  is  never  a  chief;  this  distinction  is  derived  from  a  certain  class 
of  women,  called  //  'n'ttsh  (noble  women),  who,  by  law,  can  only 
marry  common  men;  their  rank  determines  that  of  the  offi*pring. 
This  account  differs,  in  some  particulars,  from  that  given  by  O'Con- 
nell, but  agrees  with  it  in  tlio  main.* 

Besides  the  divisions  of  caste  and  office,  there  is  another  of  tribes, 
of  which  there  are  five, — the  Maitilaliii,  who  occupy  the  east  or 


•  Sv  his  Nnrmlivo,  p.  f.'fi.  It  is  riirious  that  tlirrc  nl)Ii'  nnd  cxiMTicncrd  obsorvers, 
Ix->8.si)U,  D'lrvillc,  anil  I.Olkc,  in  dcsMTibing  lliu  sysU'ni  «r  rimk  and  caste  wliicli  prevails 
at  Ualau,  dillbr  so  widely  Irom  one  anullier,  that  their  accuunis  cannot  bo  reconciled. 


81 


F.TII  NOO  It  .\  l>  II  V. 


wiiidwiinl  side  of  the  isluiul ;  tin-  Kifi  «>ii  the  soiilli,  iiiid  tin'  lijikoils, 
Sill,  and  /on  the  northwest,  Mr.  IMnudiiird  thtnijjlil  that  tin-  tlireo 
hist-naincd  were  not  ori^inallv  distinct.  Tht's**  tnltcs  an-  ntiminally 
indojicndcnt,  and  make  war  iipoit  dtut  anotlicr,  hnt  tlu'v  aro  still  coii- 
ni'it<'il  toiicthrr.  like  thi'  (u'riinm  States  ni  the  middle  a^es.  hy  a 
eertain  u[eiieral  svstein  of  pohev.  with  which  even  their  wars  do  not 
interl'ere.  A  ehiel  ol  one  trilie  is  recoirnised  as  suidi  i)y  the  rest,  and 
takes  rank  atnon^  tiuMii  accordinu;ly.  In  eas<>  of  hostilities,  the 
atlackini;  party  is  lioinid  to  send  word  to  the  other  of  tin-  time  and 
place  tixed  upon  lor  tiie  conflict,  in  order  to  i{ive  opportunity  for 
pre|)aration.  Nothinj^  like  compicst  is  ever  attempted.  The  van- 
quished always  retain  their  lands,  the  victors  contenting  themselves 
with  the  spoil  of  their  villages.     The  fruit-trees  are  never  destroyed. 

The  priests,  according  to  OC'onnell,  have  consideraiile  inlluence. 
They  are  called  iiiionDt,  and  lielon^f  to  the  class  of  petty  chiefs; 
indeed,  this  word  is  fre(|nently  used  to  sijrnify  merely  r/iiif.  Their 
worship  is  very  simple.  It  consists  in  prayers  and  invocations 
addressetl  to  the  spirks  (/lani  or  ii/ii)  of  departed  chiefs.  They  have 
neither  tein[iles,  idols,  nor  otlerinifs.  Certain  animals,  also,  particu- 
larly lish,  are  esteemed  sacred  anion;^  them, — some,  as  eels,  Ikmiii;  so 
to  the  whole  people,  while  others  arc  merely  prohihited  to  jmrticular 
families.  OC.'onuell  supposes  this  to  proceed  from  some  rude  system 
of  metempsychosis,  connected  with  their  ri'liijious  helief  '* 

The  dead  are  wrapped  in  mats,  and  i)uried  about  three  feet  helow 
the  surface  of  the  earth.  If  a  male,  a  paddle  from  his  canoe  is  liuried 
with  him;  if  a  female,  her  spindle  or  distatV.  Over  the  };rave  a  cocoa- 
nut  tree  is  planted,  the  fruit  of  which  is  .^eldom  \(  ever  disturbed, 
and,  besides  the  paddle  buried  with  the  body,  they  sometimes  lay  one 
or  more  upon  the  ground  near  the  j^rave. 

The  well-known  drink  of  the  Polynesians,  termed  hy  them  kura 
or  am,  prepared  from  the  root  of  the  I'ijxr  tnrl/nj.stiriuii,  is  also  in 
use  here.  The  mmle  of  preparation,  however,  is  diirerent  and  more 
cleanly.  The  root,  instead  of  \m\\\r  chewed,  is  |>ounde(l  on  a  large 
stone,*  and  then  mi.ved  with  water,  which  is  afterwards  strained 
through  a  mesh  of  cocoa-nut  fibres.  It  is  served  out  at  their  public 
fea.sts  with  great  ceremony,  the  distinctions  of  rank  Iwing  carefully 
observed. 


•  'I'his  ohango,  it  will   !»•  obsorvcil,  is   prcfist-ly  lliut  whicli  a  rflincd  pccipli!  would 
maku  in  a(lu|1tlng  such  a  custmn. 


M  I  (•  It  M  v  i;s  I  A 


80 


Tl 


ui  niiinos  sniliiii,'  iilwavs  willi  llic  oiilriu'if'T  1"  wiiidwanl,   viir- 


iiislu'd  (III  tlir  oiilsiilc  ami  viiilcw allied  williiii;  tin'  \vca|Hiiis  ariiit'il 
Willi  sharks'  Icflii,  llic  slriiiijs  ol'  circular  licads,  and  tln^  saslu's 
wovt'ii  ill  a  Niiii|ilc  liioiii,  wliicli  liavit  liccii  clscwlicri!  tiiciitioiicd  as 
cliaracicrislic  ot'  the  Micnuicsiiiii  race,  arc  all  JMiind  licrc,  Sd  also  is 
till 


meal   hat,  iiiado  ui  cociia-iiilt   leaves,  vvliicli  is  eniiiiiioii  to  most 
ot  tlio  islands.     'I'lie  natives  liavo  a  variciv  oi  tlie  doi,',  tlie  llesli  of 


w 


liicli   is  considereil   a  delicacv. 


'I'll 


P 


irinciiial    vei;! 


'lalilt 


ircMiuc- 


tioiis  oC  tlie  island  aro  the  hread-triiit,  cocoa-niil,  liaiiana,  sii;rar-cani>. 


am 


.(■  1 1 
tin. 


ly 

'I' wo  other  customs,  which  we  learn  Irom  O'Coiiiiell,  deserve  to  ho 
luentioned  here.  'I'lie  lirsl  is  that  of  sendinii  messaui's  hy  means  of 
leaves  of  a  |iarticiilar  tree,  the  |)oiiils  of  which  are  folded  inwards  in 
(lillertMit  iikkIcs  to  express  ditrerciit  ineamnus.  "  Inclosed  in  a  plan- 
tniii-Kmf,  and  secured  hy  twine,  one  of  these  primitive  letters  acconi- 
paiiies  donations  of  presents,  and  demands  for  tli(Mi).— ilcdarations  of 
war  and  promises  of  siilimissioii, — in  short,  all  the  stat»!  despatches." 
'I'Ik!  t)tlier  is  that  of  voluntary  emiirration,  which:  he  says,  "  is  resorted 
to  when  the  pojinlation  becomes  too  denser  for  comfortahle  suhsistence. 
When  it  hecomes  certain  that  sucli  a  step  is  necessary,  a  nuiiiher  of 
tlie  natives,  with  their  wives  and  children,  take  to  their  canoes, 
victualled  as  liherally  as  the  hoats  w  ill  hear,  and  trust  to  chniice  for  a 
luirhour  or  a  laiidini;."  lie  adds  that  the  emiurants  are,  as  may  hu 
8U|iposed,  |iriiicipally  of  the  lower  orders. 

Another  lact  connected  with  this  island  lias  exciteil  much  attention 
and  curiosity.  It  is  the  existence  of  extensive  ruins  upon  a  low  llat 
islet,  un  the  south  side  of  liaiialie,  near  the  harliour  of  Matalalm. 
They  itrc  mostly  in  the  I'orm  of  enclosuri's,  of  various  extent,  some  of 
them  covering  more  than  a  hundred  sipiare  yards,  '{"he  walls  are 
nol  less  than  thirty  feet  in  lieiL^ht,  and  nearly  as  many  in  thickness. 
'I'hey  are  built  of  enormous  blocks  of  utoiie,  wliicli  seem,  from  the 
description,  to  bo  polyijoiial  prisms  of  basalt.  Some  of  them  are 
tweiity-five  feet  long  and  nearly  two  feet  in  diameter,  and  must 
weigh  several  tons.  Metweeu  the  enclosures  are  passages  which 
seem  once  to  have  been  streets  or  foot-ways,  but  which  are  now  filled 
with  water,  so  as  to  admit  canoes.  The  w  hole  island  is  overllowed 
at  high  tide,  except  the  jiarts  enclosed  hy  these  walls,  which  keep  the 
earth  from  being  washed  away.  Hut  in  some  places  the  walls  tlieiii- 
Melves  have  been  undermined  by  the  .sea,  and  falUm. 

The  natives  can  give  no  account  of  the  origin  of  these  structures, 


•Jf- 


Htt 


KT  II  N«ni  U  A  I'M  V. 


!■ 


attril)uliiiji  tln'iii  In  tlie  /itnii,  or  spirits.  'I'lu'  ijciicrul  i)|)iiiion  of 
(ori'ij,'iiors  who  liiivr  swii  tlifin  swiiis  to  lie  thtit  llu-y  wi-rr  tlio  work 
ot°  iinotlicr  riico  than  that  which  now  oc-iMipifs  tliis  i;ronp.  'I'licrc  is, 
howcvfr.  no  occasion  lor  iiavni;;  recourse  to  this  hvpollicsis.  On  tho 
island  of  I'alati,  liircc  Imniircil  miles  cast  ol'  Manaho,  similar  striic- 
lurcK  are  in  use  at  the  present  tiay.  Acconiiiiij  to  the  accounts  oC 
l.cs.son,  1)1  rvilie,  and  l.iitke,  as  ipioted  liy  Kieiiri.  all  tlii^  principal 
cliiels  ol'  I  alaii.  \\  itii  jireat  part  ol  the  popiilalion.  have  tli«'ir  residence 
on  a  small  low  islet,  called  Leilei  or  liclc,  siinaled  oil'  the  eastern 
shore  of  the  larm-  island,  and  aJMHit  loiir  miles  in  circiiml'crenco. 
I'Trvilie  says,  "in  approaching  the  shores  of  Leilci,  a  new  sctMio 
presented  itself  to  onr  eyes, — line  houses  surrounded  i»y  lii^h  walls, 
streets  well  paved,  Aic"  .  .  .  And  in  another  place, — "the  streets 
were  iMirdered  liy  eiiormoiis  walls  of  rock,  which  prove  lliat  tliutti! 
natives,  slight  and  I'eeiile  in  appearance,  are  iievortheless  capahle  of 

undertjoin^  severe  lahonr At  the  end  of  the  street,  a  wall 

still  more  considerahle  than  thos«!  wliiih  we  had  seen  excited  my  "d- 
niiralion.  It  was  not  less  than  twenty  feet  liiijh  l>y  ten  or  twelve  in 
thicknes.x.  and  forty  or  fifty  on  each  side.  One  cannot  well  conceive 
how  these  people,  without  the  aid  of  any  machine,  can  transport 
blocks  so  ponderous  as  those  which  enter  into  thesis  constructions, 
some  of  which  must  \veii;h  many  thousands  (plusienrs  inilliers).  It 
is  still  more  dilliciilt  to  ima<;ine  what  can  he  the  utility  of  these  hii^o 
masses.  All  that  I  could  discover  was  that  the  residences  of  the 
chiefs  were  always  accompanied  by  these  enormous  walls,  wliieh 
seemed  to  lie  one  of  the  attributes  of  their  dignity,  like  the  ramparts 
and  trenches  which  surrounded  the  castles  of  the  nobility  in  the 
middle  a<^es." 

[t  seems  evident  that  the  constructions  at  I  alau  and  Itanaho  are  of 
the  sanu!  kind,  an<l  built  for  the  same  purpose.  Hut  it  is  also  clear 
that  at  tiie  time  those  of  the  latter  were  raised,  the  islet  on  which  they 
stand  was  in  a  difl'ereiit  condition  from  wliat  it  now  is  At  |iresent 
they  are  actually  in  the  water;  what  were  once  paths,  are  now  pas- 
sajres  for  canoes,  and  O'Connell  says,  "where  the  walls  are  broken 
(low  n.  the  w;iter  enters  the  enclosures."  This  chant,'e  can  only  have 
proceeded  from  two  causes,  l-jither  the  sea  must  have  risen,  or  the 
land  have  sunk  since  the  walls  were  erected.  That  the  sea  has  risen, 
or,  in  other  words,  that  the  Itivel  of  the  entire  ocean  has  been  altered, 
will  not  bo  supposed.  IJut  that  the  land,  or  tho  whole  group  of  IJa- 
iiabe,  and  perhaps  all  the  iiuighbouring  groups,  have  undergone  a 


M  I  «•  KO  .\  KS  I  A. 


S7 


Mliirlit  (li'|irc!*si()ii,  is  no  way  im|ir<ili.ililc  It  if*  i-irliiiii,  iVoni  (ilistirvii- 
tioiiH  iiiuilc  liy  till!  i{i'(il(i!4iHt,  Mr  Dutia,  tliiit  tin*  Sandu  i<-li  (ir<iii|i,  on 
tliu  other  Nido  of  tlio  i'licilic,  Iiiim  lieeii,  nt  Hoini*  runner  [JoricMl,  lit'ted 
Ncvcrul  I't'et  ii1m)V(>  its  ori^iniii  liciyht,  and  tlicre  is  sonm  n-ason  to 
hflievi)  that  at  this  tiuio  it  is  ntidi'ri;oin<{  a  very  Kiadual  elevation.* 
It  is  possihle  that  a  eoniiterlialaiuiiiir  iiioveinent  in  the  o|i|i(iNitc 
ilireetion  may  he  takini;  pluet!  aiiKini;  the  ('arolint*  Islands, — or,  at 
least,  may  have  taken  place  not  mniiy  centuries  ami.  From  the  (U^- 
seri|ition  ^;ivoii  of  Leilei,  a  chunirt!  ot  luvel  of  one  or  two  feet  would 
riMider  it  uniiiliahitahle,  and  reduce  it,  in  a  short  time,  to  the  same 
stale  as  the  isle  of  ruins  ut  iianahe.  W  hen  the  natives  say  that  these 
structures  wore  raised  by  luiiii  or  aiiiman  (spirits),  they  may  Ih' 
merely  referring  them  to  the  divinities  wlmin  they  worship, — i.  e.  the 
spirits  of  their  ancestors,  the  actual  hii.ioers  On  iiuntionin^;  these 
viuwM  to  Mr.  Dana,  I  am  happy  to  tind  that  he  considers  the  opinion 
liere  expressed  hif^hly  probable,  and  confirmed  by  his  observations  in 
other  parts  of  the  i'acilic. 

.Mil. 1. 1:,  OK  riiK  Mri.iiiivvK  isi. an'ii>. 

In  January  of  IS24,  a  part  of  the  crew  of  the  American  whale-ship 
Globe  mutinied,  murdered  the  ofiicers,  and  sailed  for  the  (/'aroline 
Islands.  At  the  .Mulj^rave  Group,  the  i^reater  part,  including  those 
who  had  been  the  most  (guilty,  toifether  with  s(jnie  who  were  innocent, 
but  were  com|)elled  to  submit  to  the  direction  of  the  others,  landed 
and  remained.  They  were  received,  at  lirst,  with  the  utmost  kind- 
ness by  the  natives,  but  having  rou.sed  their  hostility  by  violent 
measures  and  harsh  treatment,  the  whole  party  was  suddenly  attacked 
and  put  to  death,  with  the  exception  of  two  individuals.  These,  by 
name  William  Lay,  and  Cyrus  M.  Ilussey,  were  Ijoth  mere  youths, 
i^nd  entirely  innocent  of  participation  in  the  mutiny.  M'hey  had  pre- 
viously ac(|uired  the  good-will  of  the  natives  by  their  kind  and 
prudent  conduct  towards  them,  and  though  detained  as  captives,  and 
obliged  to  labour  for  their  masters,  they  were  not  ill-treated.  In 
December  of  the  following  year  they  were  taken  off  by  the  (Initcd 
States  scluwner  Dolphin,  which  was  despatched  for  that  purpose, 
under  the  comnuuid  of  ("aptain  John  I'crcival. 

On  their  arrival  at  Oahu,  the  Kev.   xMr.  IJingham,  missionary  at 


•  Sec  llic  (jt-ologicol  l(e|iort  iifllic  Bx|ieditioii,  by  Mr.  J.  1).  Dana. 


I 


88 


KT  II  \()<;  K  A  I'  II  V. 


HoiKiIulu,  took  down  u  vocaljiilurv  ot  such  words  of  the  iiativo  laii- 
gnaiii-  as  tlii'v  could  rciiicmlicr.  'I'liis  is  now  |iul)lislKHl  Cor  llic  lirsl 
time,  and  it  siHMns  |iro|)cr  to  add  to  it  a  lew  rcniariis  respecting  tho 
isianil  and  its  inhabitants.  Our  inl'orniation  is  derived  from  a  lirief 
and  iin|irrten(iinif  narrative,  puhhslied  liy  Lay  and  llnssey  at  New 
I/ondiMi,  in  I'^'-Js.  and  t'nnn  llie  "Journal  of  the  (^rnise  of  the  United 
iStates  schooner  Dolphin  ainoiiij  the  islands  of  the  I'acilic,"  hy  Lieu- 
tenant llirani  I'auldinii,*  which  contains  many  interesting^  particulars 
related  in  a  clear  and  succinct  style. 

Mille  is  tlu'  soutlicrnniost  of  the  Katlack  (Jhaiii,  wliicli  consists  of 
twelve  coral  islets  or  clusters,  and  extends,  in  a  north-northeast  direc- 
tion, from  (^  to  I'^i-^of  lutrth  latitude,  and  from  10!)°  to  17-J°  of  east 
longitude.  Mille,  which  is  in  latitude  (t°,  loni^itudc  17"^^,  is  an  oval 
ring  of  small  islets,  coiuiectcd  hy  reefs,  and  -nclosing  an  inland  sea  or 
lagoon  one  hundred  and  l()rty  nules  in  cucumference.  'I'liere  are 
more  than  a  hundred  of  these  islets,  Ijut  all  of  them  together  do  not 
j)rohal)ly  comprise  more  than  lifleen  or  twenty  .scpiar*;  miles.  The 
population  is  lietween  I'wv  and  six  hundretl.  'l"he  people  are  of  a 
light  complexion,  fairer  tlian  those  of  the  Kingsmill  Group,  and  np- 
peared  to  Mr.  Paulding  a  dillerent  race,  'i  i.-v  are  of  the  middle 
staliuv  and  wfll-foriaed,  with  hanil.some  features.  With  a  few  ex- 
ceptions, tiiey  havi'  not  the  depressed  noses  and  thick  lips  which  are 


found  an 


long  the  l*olvne.-;i;ni 


tribes 


Thev  are  modest  and  manly  iu 


tl 


leir  deportment,  and 


alk  with  an  air  of  dignity.     Mr.  i'aulding 


rt'as  much   iileased   with  their  conduct  on  the  arrival  of  the  vessel. 


•r 


ley   gave   us  a   most    kind   and    hospitable   rece|)tion,   and   freely 


oflcred  whatever  any  of  \ 


IS  I'xpressed  a  wish  |..i. 


Notl 


ling  was 


stolen  by  them.     They   behaved  in  a  most  orderly  niaiiner,  looking 
round  the  deck  iinpiiriiiirly,  or  sc>ated  themselves  and  c 


itted  f 


IM!!- 


liarly  with  our  people,  taking  |)aiiis  to  make  themselves  understood. 
In  their  look  and  action  they  appeai-d  1o  be  lively  and  intelligent." 
Lay  and  lliis.sey  give  the  same  account  of  their  beliavioiir  towards 
the  mutineers,  before  their  anger  was  I'xcitetl  by  the  ill  conduct  of  the 
latter.  IJolli  of  the  cajitives,  moreover,  speak  of  the  kind  treatment 
which  they  ex|>erieiiced  from  the  iialnes.  The  hardsiiips  which 
they  uuderwenl  were  only  such  a.s  were  shared  by  their  captors. 
TIk!  island  is  sterile,  yiekling  but  a  scanty  sup|)ly  of  footl  even  lor  its 


limiti 


)pulati( 


Th 


u'  only  vegetable  productions  (it  to  eat  are 


l'iilili>lii(|  ,il  New  V.iik,  lpy  <!.  iV  ('.  \  II.  Can  ill,  1H;11. 


I 


MICRONESIA. 


89 


those  of  the  cocoa-nut,  bread-fruit,  and  pandanus  trees.  Seasons  of 
scarcity  sometimes  occur,  dur-ng  wliicli  the  natives  suffer  severely, 
and  arc  reduced  to  eating  the  tender  branches  of  trees  to  support 
life. 

There  is  one  high  chief  who  has  the  supreme  power;  but  in  his 
decisions  on  matters  of  importance  he  usually  conforms  to  the  opinion 
of  tho  whole  body  of  chiefs.  Mr.  Paulding  observes,  "They  have 
ditforcnt  grades  of  rank  in  their  society,  from  the  high  chief  down  to 
the  farthest  removed  from  royalty." 

Their  only  worship  consists  in  invocations  to  the  Anit,  said  by  Lay 
to  be  the  name  of  their  supreme  divinity  ;  but  it  seems  likely  that  it 
is  oidy  tlie  general  term  for  spirit.  'I'hus  Lay  tells  us,  in  his  narra- 
tive, that  the  natives  will  not  take  the  fruit  of  tlie  cocoa-nut  tree  which 
has  been  planted  near  a  grave,  "  for  fear  of  displeasing  their  god 
(atiif)."  But  Mr.  Paulding  says  (p.  180),  "I  war  walking,  back  of 
the  huts,  over  a  level  green  spot,  enclosed  by  cocoa-nut  trees,  when 
Lugoina  came  to  me  in  great  haste,  and  witli  a  disturbed  look  beck- 
oned me  to  come  away,  at  the  same  time  saying  to  IIus.sey  that  I  must 
not  go  there;  it  was  a  place  for  the  dead ;  my  presence  would  disturb 
them,  and  bring  spirits  round  the  huts."  And  again,  (p.  175),  "  If 
one  of  tlicm  has  wronged  another  who  lias  died,  he  never  eats  without 
throwing  away  a  portion  of  his  food  to  appease  the  ghost  of  the 
departed." 

When  a  person  dies,  the  body  i."  enclo.sed  in  mats  and  buried,  after 
which,  says  Mr.  Paulding,  "a  little  canoe  with  a  sail  to  it,  and  laden 
with  small  ])icces  of  cocoa-nut  or  otlier  food,  is  taken  to  the  sea-shore, 
or  the  leowaril  part  of  the  island,  and  sent  otf,  with  a  fair  wind,  to 
bear  far  away  from  the  island  the  spirit  of  the  deceased,  that  it  may 
not  afterwariis  disturb  tiie  living."  We  are  reminded  l)y  this  of  the 
manner  in  wliicli  tlie  natives  of  Tobi  ilispose  of  their  dead,  as  before 
described,  and  of  the  paddles  buried  with  them  at  lianabe.  After  the 
ceremony  of  iiitcrnuMil  is  completed,  two  cocoa-nut  trees  are  planted, 
one  at  tlie  head  and  the  other  at  the  foot  of  the  grave.  The  fruit  of 
these  is  never  ejiten  by  the  women,  anil  not  by  the  men  until  a  con- 
siderable time  has  elapsed  after  the  burial. 

Their  marriages  are  conductetl  with  little  ceremony,  but  the  mar- 
ried people  are  usuidly  kind  anil  faithful  to  one  another.  Lay  never 
knew  an  instance  of  separation  after  they  had  a  faniilv.  It  may  here 
be  noticed,  tliat  at  the  mas.sacre  of  the  inntiiicers,  to  which  the  natives 
were  e.vcited  chiefly  by  the  hi'.rshness  with  which  .some  of  the  whites 


90 


|;T  II  NO(i  R  A  I'll  Y. 


treated  the  females  whom  they  liail  taken  for  wives,  the  women  bore 
as  active  a  part  as  the  men. 

For  ornament,  they  pierce  the  lohe  of  tlie  ear,  and  having  greatly 
distended  the  i.perturc,  wear  in  it  a  folded  leaf  They  have  a'*'"  vhia 
Lay  calls  heads,  and  Mr.  I'anlding  shell-necklaces,  but  neither  do- 
scribes  them  particularly. 

The  canoes  have  one  side  Hat  or  perpendicular,  and  the  other 
inclined  ;  the  (lal  side  is  that  opposite  to  the  outrigger,  and  is  kept 
always  to  windward,  the  ("aiioes  sailing  with  either  enil  foremost. 

The  houses  have  two  apartments,  an  ui)per  and  a  lower,  which 
communicate  throuuh  a  scuttle  or  hatch.  The  lower  or  ground 
story  is  not  more  than  three  feet  high,  ami  tin  inmates  are  obliged  to 
remain  in  a  sitting  or  reclining  posture.  In  'he  upper  story  or  garret 
they  keep  their  movable  property,  and  in  wet  weather  sleep  there. 


A  It  A  W  .\,    OH     r  II  K    K  1  .\  (J  S  M  I  I,  I,    IS  I.  A  N  I)  S. 


Altliougli  it  is  not  certain  that  the  natives  have  any  general  ajjpel- 
lation  for  this  cliaiu  of  islands,  we  have  chosen,  for  several  reasons, 
to  designate  it  by  that  given  above.  It  is  the  name  of  two  islands, 
one  of  which  is  called  simply  'IVirinrti,  and  the  other  IVirinrii  hi 
Mu/:iii,  or  Tarawa  of  .Makin.  The  former  is,  according  to  our 
survey,  the  largest  i.sland  of  tiie  group,  or  tliat  which  has  the  most 
dry  land.  The  natives  are  numerous,  and  the  high  cliief  exercises 
sway  over  the  three  neiudibourimx  islands  of  Miiinnii,  Apia,  and 
MnniLi.  It  is  on  this  islaml  that  tlu'  inlialntants  of  the  rest  of  the 
group  place  the  elysium  of  departed  spirits,  which  may  be  consi- 
tlered  good  evidence  that  it  was  the  one  fu-st  settled,  and  the  source 
of  population  to  tlie  other  islands.  Finally,  Tiirawa  is  best  known  to 
the  i)eople  of  distant  groups.  Hoth  Kot/.cbue  and  Liitke  heard  of  it 
among  the  western  (.'aroline  Islamls.  under  the  names  of  'I't/nin  anil 
Tonifi.  and  ('<Hik  gives  it  in  the  list  of  islamls  of  which  hv  received 
information  at  Tonga. 

Our  knowledge  concerning  this  group  is  derived  in  part  from 
personal  examination,  made  during  twenty-four  days  spent  in  the 
survey,  and  in  j)arl  Irom  communications  of  two  Hritisb  seamen,  by 
name  .loim  Ivirby  and  Kobcrl  (irey,  whom,  at  their  own  retpiest,  we 
took  otr  from  the  islands  of  Kuria  and  .Makm.  They  had  (piitted 
voluntarily  the  vessels  to  which  they  belongeil,  and  taken  up  their 
residence  among  the  natives,  in  which  situation  the  first  had  re- 


M  re  RON  KS  I  A. 


91 


mainoci  three  and  the  second  five  years.  So  sli<rht,  liowcver,  is  the 
intercourse  between  tlie  two  portions  of  the  group,  that  they  liad 
reniauied  all  the  lime  in  ifjfiiorance  of  each  otlicr's  existence.  The 
information  thus  obtained  from  tliree  distinct  sources,  and  subjected 
to  careful  compari.son  and  scrutiny,  is  evidently  as  likely  to  be 
correct,  as  any  tiiat  lias  been  <fiven  concerning  a  barbarous  people. 

The  islands  which  constitute  tiie  group,  are,  according  to  the 
native  account,  seventeen  in  number,  extending  from  tlic  second 
degree  of  south  latitude  to  the  fourth  of  north,  and  from  173°  20'  to 
179°  of  east  longitude.  Their  names,  beginning  from  the  north,  are 
as  follows : — 


NATIVE  NAMK.  KNULIUII  NAMR.  I'OSITION. 

Tamirn  ni  Mnkin,  .     .     (I'liiliscovcreii),  ....     Ncirlli-iuirllicnst  ol'  .Makiii. 

5"'''"'      \      ■     .     ■     .     I'ill's  IslniuU, :tM(;    N.,  l-a°   Id'  F,. 

Junltin,  { 

Jfltii'iki, .Mnllhcws'  Isliin(t,     .     .     .  li"  .\.,  I*a^  15'  K. 

Apia ('liiirli)llc  Islmid, .     .     .     .  r   10'  .\.,  17:1°  R 

Ttiriiuii, KiKix's  Islimd,     ....  1"  ;!(»'  .\.,  17:1°  Iv 

MiiKim, Ilall'.s  Isldiid, 1°  N.,  na-'  K. 

Apuiiiuimi,      ....  Ilii|i|iir's  Islimd,  ....  0°  •J.'j'  .\.,  lH"  E. 

Kiina, Wdodlc's  l.slimd, .     .     .     .  (1°  |.")' \.,  173'' 'JO'  K. 

N<mi,iiki, Ilc-iidcrvillc's  Islund,      .      .  (1°  10'  .\.,  17:f  M.'j'  !•;. 

Niiiidiili, Sydcidiiuii's  Isliind,  .     .     .  d'  ,■).-('  S.,  171'  •.'.■>'  K. 

TupiitiOiii'i,     ....  I »iuinin()ii(rs  islimd,      .      .  1°  v!0'  S.,  171"  4.')'  Iv 

Niikiimiii, Hynm"s  Islimd,  (!)    .     .     .  1"  air  S.,  177"  40'  !■;. 

J't'ni, I';ii/.ii  Islimd,  (!)  .     .     .     .  -J"  S.,  176"  \). 

'J'ti/Kinii,  )                                                                                 .11.,, 

.,    ,  f                          ,,.            .   V                                    I  Ninth  anil  cast  ol  Driiin- 

Oiiiiiili),  >  .     .     .     .     (I  lUTrtain), i<    i  ,      i 

.        . .  C                                                                             (      """"'  'i  Islimd. 

Annul,  J 

The  first-named  island  is  on  no  chart,  and  has  probably  never  been 
visited.  Our  information  concerning  it  is  derived  from  the  natives  of 
Makin,  who  described  it  as  lying  aijout  two  days'  sail  (for  their 
canoes)  to  the  northeast,  and  as  inhid)ited  by  people  like  tbemsclves, 
with  whom  they  had  fro(|uent  communication.  The  last  five  were 
not  visited  by  our  scjuadron,  and  their  names  are  given  accoriling  to 
Kirby's  account.  Nuknnau,  he  thought,  was  Byron's  Island,  and 
Peru,  Eliza  or  llurd's  Island.  As  to  the  rest,  he  only  knew  that 
they  were  in  the  southern  part  of  the  group,  though  he  had  an  idea 
that  Arurai  was  sometimes  called  by  foreigners  Hope  Island.  The 
charts,  at  this  {loint,  are  confused,  and  none  of  them  have  so  inanv 


92 


E  T  H  N  O  O  R  A  I'  II  Y. 


islands  as  the  native  accounts  would  re(|iiiro.  Perhaps,  one  of  the 
nanips  may  apply  to  Ocean  Island,  situated  a  lew  degrees  to  the  west 
of  Tapntrouea,  and  inhahited,  as  I  was  assured  by  the  captain  of  a 
whaler,  at  Oahu,  by  a  similar  people. 

Tlie  group  may  be  subdivided  into  at  least  four  clusters,  between 
which  there  is,  at  present,  little  conunuiiicalion,  and  the  inhabitants 
of  wiiicli,  though  forming  but  one  people,  speaking  the  same  general 
language,  yet  dilfer  more  or  less  in  their  customs  and  institutions, 
and  sliglitly  in  (halcet.  The  northern  is  composed  of  the  three 
islands  of  Makiii,  (or  .l/.7/,/«,)  Taritari,  and  Tarawa  ni  Makin.  The 
first  two  are  diviiitd  only  l)y  a  strait  two  miles  in  width.  Taritari  is 
the  largest,  having  an  extensive  lagoon;  but  Makin,  though  small,  is 
compact,  with  a  good  deal  of  fertile  land,  and  is  considered  the  metro- 
polis. The  four  islands,  Maraki,  Apia,  Tarawa,  and  Maiana,  form 
another  cluster,  of  which  Tarawa  is  the  heail.  The  island  of  Apa- 
mama  has  connected  with  it,  both  locally  and  jjolitically,  the  smaller 
islands  of  Xonouki  and  Kuria.  While  Nonouti,  Ta|)uteouea,  Nuku- 
nau,  and  Peru,  and,  perhaps,  the  three  remaining  islands,  form  a 
fourth  division,  of  which  Tapuleouca  may  be  considered  the  chief, — 
unless  this  title  should  be  ilis|)uted  by  Byron's  Islanil,  of  which  we 
know  only  that  it  is  large  and  populous. 

According  to  the  observations  of  Mr.  Dana,  the  whole  group 
belongs,  physically,  to  the  same  cla.ss  with  Tongatabu — that  of  coral 
islands  slightly  elevateil  above  their  original  level.  The  elevation, 
which  is  oidy  of  two  or  three  feet,  is  not  ipiile  so  great  as  at  'I'on^a, 
but  is  suilicient  to  give  to  the  islands  a  larger  surface  of  ilry  land,  anil 
a  greater  depth  of  soil  than  they  would  otherwise  possess,  or  than  is 
pos.sess(Hl,  so  far  as  we  know,  by  any  of  the  other  coral  islands  of  Mi- 
eronesi;i.  The  rei'fs  and  shoals,  moreover,  have  tlii'ir  extent  much 
increased,  atlbnling  harbourage  to  many  varieties  and  great  numbers 
of  lish,  lobsters,  turtle,  shell-fish,  and  sea-slugs,  from  which  tiie  people 
draw  a  great  part  of  their  sustenance.  Hesides  the  fruits  of  the  cocoa- 
nut  and  pandamis,  of  which  they  havt;  an  abiiiidant  supply,  they  have 
orchards  of  bread-tVuit  trees  and  plantations  of  taro,  which  alford  them 
an  atrreeable  variety.  They  have  also  a  specii-s  of  purslain,  of  which 
we  made  a  salad  by  no  means  uiipalataiilc,  and  on  Makin  they  gather 
great  (juantities  of  a  nutritious  berry,  which  they  dry  and  make  into 
a  kind  of  sweet  cake,  considered  by  them  a  delicacy. 

This  abundance  of  I'ood  will  account  tor  the  large  population  of  the 
group,  so  much  greater  than  on  most  coral  islands.     At  Taputeouea 


M  I  C  R  O  N  R  S  I  A. 


03 


(Drurnmoiid's  Island),  the  first  wViich  we  visited,  we  were  astonished 
at  the  nutnhers  of  tlie  natives.  Alter  careful  and  repented  ol)servn- 
tions,  made  in  our  visits  to  the  sliore,  and  i)y  tiie  oHicers  en<;aged  in 
t!ie  survey,  tlie  estimates  varied  lietween  ten  and  fifteen  thousand. 
This,  however,  was  |)n>hal)!y  one  of  the  most  tliickly  inlialiited,  the 
island  appeurini^  like  a  continuous  villairo  from  oik*  end  to  tlie  other. 
Kirby  had  once  seen  all  the  warriors  of  the  tlin-e  islands  of  Apamama, 
Nonouti.and  Kuria  collected  loirether,  in  anticipation  of  an  attack  from 
the  southern  cluster,  lie  thouj^ht  tiie  nundicr  was  JM-tween  si,\  and 
seven  thousand.  Supiiosini;  this  amount  to  be  sonu'what  e.vaii^^e- 
rated,  we  can  hardly  allow  for  the  entire  |)opulation  of  the  three,  less 
than  twenty  thousand.  Finally,  C>rvy  estimated  the  people  of  '['ari- 
tnri  and  Makin  at  about  i'lvv  thousand.  We  should  thus  have  for  six 
islands  of  the  i^roup  (amcMiu;  which  two  of  the  largest,  'i'arawa  and 
Uyrons  Island,  an?  not  included)  a  total  of  thirty-five  thousand.  But 
allowint^  an  averajfc  of  only  live  thousand  to  an  islan<l,  it  would  still 
•five  us,  for  the  whole  seventeen,  not  less  than  eiirhty-live  thousand.* 

For  a  detailuil  descri|)tiou  of  these  islands  and  their  inhabitants,  the 
reader  is  referred  to  the  <feiieral  history  of  the  voyai^e.  Here  only 
those  traits  will  be  inentioiu'd  which  seem  es.seiitial  tor  deterniininii 
the  position  which  tiic  latter  hold  anion;.;  the  dillerent  races  of  the 
Pacific.  At  the  first  glance  it  is  evident  that  they  are  not  of  the  pure 
Micronesiaii  blood.  A  dark  complexion  and  curly  hair  would,  apart 
from  the  testimony  of  lan;|uagc,  iiulicate  the  intermixtun!  of  a  dilfe- 
rent  race.  'I'liis  inlnsion,  however,  for  some  reason  or  other,  is  much 
less  a|i|)areiit  anionjr  the  natives  of  the  Makin  cluster,  who  are  a  shade 
lighter  in  colour,  and  in  other  respects  physically  superior  to  the 
natives  of  the  southern  islands.  The  descriptions  which  follow  are 
taken  from  my  notes,  the  first  applying  to  the  people  of  Ta[)uteouea, 
and  the  second  to  those  of  Makin. 

"They  (the  natives  of  i)rumniond"s  Island)  are  generally  of  the 

•  'I'Iml  the  iitlicr  ishinds  (if  llic  ^'i |i  mv  as  dniscly  iiilialitrd  as  llir   six   al)>)Vi>-niiii- 

ikiiu'd,  may  Ih'  iiiloriod  rniiii  (lie  |l)llii\viiif;  <'\idiiirc.  (!r.  y  nlalrd,  tli.il  .'dxiiit  llini' 
yenrs  licliin'  lie  lamlcd  al  .Makin,  a  parly  of  almut  liliccii  liiiiiilnil  ii.ilivcs  airiM'd  llii'ii' 
ill  I'mxw's  Irciiii  .\|iia,  iVdrn  wliii-li  island  tlu'y  li.id  Uiii  drinii  h\  llir  warriors  ul'r.iniM  a. 
Licnlcnant  I'anldin';  liunid  al  Ityrnn's  Island  n  lar^^p  iiopulaliori.  lie  says  (.louriml,  p. 
9")),  '•  Ihu  isU'i  abrcaiil  ol'  us  wa.s  nil  nijjht  illinninalcd  wiih  niinicruiis  fin'.s,  nnd  the  air 
riinj;  with  l|ii>  sliouH  ol'  luindrcds  ..I"  people.  When  llie  day  ilnwnr'd,  llie  wlii.lc  ,H.'eaii 
was  wliitcncd  willi  the  lilljc  sails  iil"  nuux's  thai  were  seen  eoniinj.'  iVipin  ivery  direelion, 
and  sonii'  iiriliern  as  I'ar  as  llie  eye  eeuld  distinfinish  .so  small  an  obje<-t.  In  an  honr  not 
less  than  a  huiidivd  of  them  were  alongside,  niul  our  deck  wiu»  covered  with  iioople." 

24 


04 


KTII  NOO  R  AIMI  Y. 


;l 


mulclle  si/c,  well  made  ami  slender.  Their  colour  is  a  copper-brown, 
a  simde  darker  than  that  of  the  Tahitiaus.  The  hair  is  black,  glossy, 
and  line,  with  a  sliirht  tendency  to  curl.  The  features  are  small,  but 
high  and  well-marked  :  the  eye  large,  bright,  and  black, — the  nose 
straight  or  slightly  a(|uiline,  but  always  widened  at  the  lower  part, — 
the  mouth  ratiicr  large,  with  full  lips  and  small  teeth.  The  cheek- 
bones project  forward  so  much  as  to  give  the  eyes  the  apjiearance  of 
being  a  little  siuiken.  They  have  inustachios  and  beard  very  black 
and  line,  liketlieir  hair,  but  rather  scanty.  The  usual  hi'ighl  is  about 
five  feet  eight  or  nine  inches,  but  wo  saw  many  who  were  considerably 
below  this  standard.  There  are  none  of  those  burly  persons  among 
them  which  art;  so  conunon  in  die  Sandwich  and  Society  Islands,  and 
we  did  not  see  one  instance  of  obesity.  The  women  are  still  smaller, 
in  proportion,  than  the  men,  with  slight  figures,  and  small  delicate 
features.  Several  among  them  woulil  have  been  esteemed  pretty  in 
any  country." 

The  dilference  which  exists  between  these  natives  and  those  of 
Makin  will  be  seen  by  comparing  this  description  with  that  which 
follows  : — "  Having  understood  that  they  were  of  the  same  race  with 
the  other  islanders,  we  were  (piite  unprepared  for  the  extraordinary 
sight  that  was  uow  [jrcsented.  Instead  of  the  slender  forms,  sharp 
features,  and  steru  countenances  of  the  Drummond  islanders,  we  saw 
a  crowd  of  stout,  hearty  figures,  and  round,  jolly  faces,  which,  tliough 
dilferent  in  features,  recalled  to  our  minils  the  bulky  chieftains  of  Ta- 
hiti. They  were  also  lighter  in  complexion  than  the  southern  tribes, 
and  more  tattooed. 

"  One  t)f  the  first  who  came  on  board  was  a  perfect  mass  of  fill. 
Though  of  good  height,  he  appeared  really  short,  from  his  inuuense 
girtli.  As  he  walked,  the  llesh  of  his  cheeks  and  breasts  siiook  like  a 
jelly,  llis  limbs  were  of  enormous  sizt\  but  smooth  as  those  of  a  cliild. 
Ilis  face  was  round,  with  neatly-cut  whiskers  and  nnistachios,  and  bis 
fine  hair  in  idack  glossy  ringlets  fell  down  on  his  slioulders.  When 
he  snuled,  every  I'eature  was  dilated  with  joy,  and  an  even  row  of 
small  white  teeth  was  dis|)la\ed  which  a  lady  might  have  envied. 
There  were  several  others  on  board  of  littli!  inferior  si/e,  and  a  native 
in  a  (  anoe,  who  was  pointed  out  to  us  by  the  white  man  as  the  king 
of  tlie  island,  was  actually  so  fat  that  he  would  not  venture  to  ascend 
the  ship's  side.  The  greater  part  of  the  natives,  who  did  not  attain 
such  an  immoderate  bulk,  were  distinguished  by  finely-moulded 
forms  iiud  hand.some  faces.     The  outline  of  their  features  was  regular 


MICRO  N  ESIA. 


95 


and  pleasing',  tlu)U'j;Ii  all  hail  that  spread  of  tho  nostrils  wliicli  \vc  have 
ohsorved  in  tlic  soutlierri  islanders.  Tlie  profiles  of  some  were  really 
heautiful." 

'I'liis  dilference  in  looks  is  accompanied  by  as  <^reat  a  difTerence  in 
character.  Both  arc  iii<;hly  ini^enious,  as  is  shown  in  the  construction 
of  their  houses  and  canoes,  tho  manufacture  of  their  dres.ses  and 
armour,  and  by  the  numerous  comforts  and  conveniences  witti  which, 
under  very  unfavourable  circumstances,  they  have  manai.5ed  to  sur- 
round them.sclves.  On  the  other  hand,  the  natives  of  the  soutliern 
islands  arc  suspicious  and  irritable,  with  a  certain  wildness  and  fero- 
city in  their  manners,  which  is  in  stron;|  contrast  with  the  miltl  and 
kindly  disjiosition  of  tiie  people  of  Makin.  'I'he  latter  are  a  remark- 
ably soft  and  gentle  race,  not  without  a  tinuie  of  elfeminacy.  Of  their 
humanity,  a  high  idea  is  given  by  the  statement  of  (irey,  that,  during 
the  five  years  that  he  was  among  them,  only  one  man  was  put  to  death. 
Cannibalism,  moreover,  is  uidcnown  among  them,  except  by  tradition; 
whereas  on  the  southern  islands,  though  not  conmion,  it  is  occasion- 
ally practised,  and  is  not  regarde>l  with  any  particular  horror.  Kirby 
knew  of  five  men  being  killed  and  eaten  while  he  was  on  Apamama. 
It  is  said,  however,  that  the  southern  natives,  though  easily  oifended, 
are  as  readily  appeased ;  their  animosity  seldom  settles  into  a  long- 
continued  rancour.  From  this  statement  wo  must  except  certain 
cases  arising  out  of  jealousy  between  married  women,  who,  when 
they  conceive  themselves  aggrieved,  will  sometimes,  for  months 
together,  carry  about  with  them  a  small  weapon  of  sharks'  teeth 
concealed  under  their  dress,  and  watch  an  opportunity  of  attacking 
the  object  of  their  jealousy.  Desperate  fights  sometimes  take  jjlace 
between  these  fierce  Amazons  before  they  can  bo  parted.  JJut  ex- 
cepting such  instances,  Kirby  always  found  the  women  more  humane 
and  gentle  than  the  men. 

The  respect  paid  to  the  chiefs  varies  at  the  different  clusters.  At 
Drummond's  Island  we  remarked,  in  the  manners  of  the  natives,  a 
kind  of  saiicy  boldness  and  rude  imlcpendence,  which  would  hardly 
have  existed  among  ii  peoi)le  u.sed  to  submi.ssion  and  deference.  At 
Apamama  tho  chiefs  have  probably  more  respect  paid  them,  and  in 
Makin,  Grey  assured  us  that  a  strict  subordination  was  maintained, 
and  that  the  distinction  of  classes  was  strongly  marked  in  the  man- 
ners as  well  as  the  tisages  of  the  inhabitants. 

Generosity,  hospitality,  and  attention  to  the  aged  and  infirm,  are 
virtues  highly  esteemed  and  generally  practised  among  all  the  natives. 


T 


9fi 


E  T  H  N  O  (i  R  A  P  II  V. 


Kirby  knew  of  no  word  for  poor  man  except  that  for  shive.  Any 
porson  wlio  bus  land,  can  always  call  npon  his  friends  to  |)rovido  him 
witii  a  iiouso,  a  canoe,  and  the  other  necessaries  of  life;  while  one 
will)  lias  no  land  has  nothing  else,  and  is,  of  course,  a  slave. 

The  worst  stain  on  the  character  of  this  people  is  a  shockinj^  and 
cnit'i  practice,  whicii  Kot/ehue  found  also  anioiii^  the  people  of  Ua- 
dack,  and  DTrvillc  on  the  island  of  Tikopia.  It  is  that  of  destroying 
their  nidKiru  children,  after  the  second  or  third,  in  order  to  escape  the 
iiH-ouvenience  of  a  uiiiuerous  family.  This  is  the  reason  a.ssijjncd  hy 
tlie  natives;  the  general  arijiuuieut  tiiat  the  islands  would  el.se  become 
too  densely  peopled  for  tlieir  means  of  subsistence  seems  not  to  occur 
to  lliem.  To  the  honour  of  tlie  natives  of  Makin  it  should  be  recorded, 
that  this  eustoin  does  not  e.vist  ainonu;  them. 

The  women  are,  for  the  most  part,  better  treated  amonfj  them  than 
anions  uncivilized  people  in  j^eueral.  All  the  haril,  out-door  labour, 
is  pertbrmed  l)y  the  men.  They  build  the  houses  and  canoes,  catch 
the  lish,  collect  and  brint,'  home  the  I'ruits  which  serve  for  lixHl,  and 
do  most  til  the  cultivation.  Tin-  women  aid  them  to  clear  and  weed 
the  iinuind,  and  attend  to  the  domestic  iluties  which  naturally  fall  to 
them.  The  custom  also  recpiires  that  when  a  man  meets  a  female, 
be  sliall  [lay  her  the  same  mark  of  respect  as  is  rendered  to  a  chief, 
bv  turiuiiLr  aside  irom  the  path  to  let  her  pass.  This  courtesy,  how- 
ever, (lues  not  piTvade  ail  the  intercourse  of  the  sexes.  A  man,  if 
proviiked,  will  not  hesitate  to  strike  a  woman,  who  seldom  fails  to 
return  the  blow;  sometimes  .several  of  her  compaidons  will  come  to 
her  aid,  and  the  man  is  perhaps  ^Vm]  to  escape  well  bruised,  and 
covered  with  scratclies. 

Connected  with  tiie  suspicious  and  irritable  temper  which  cliarac- 
ten/.es  the  people  of  tiie  soulliern  clusters,  is  a  disposition  to  sul- 
leiiuess  and  des|)ondeiicy,  which  sometimes  leads  them  to  commit 
suicide.  Kirby  knew  five  instances,  on  his  own  island,  of  men  and 
women  destroviii'^  themselves,  and  of  several  others  who  attempted 
it  and  were  prevented  by  their  friends.  These  cases  of  self-murder 
arose  out  of  oHence  taken  at  the  conduct  of  some  person  whom  fear  or 
afrection  made  them  uuwillinir  to  injure;  the  mingled  s[)ite,  mortili- 
cation,  and  <frief  [)roduceil  a  dejection  which  led  at  last  to  an  act  con- 
sidered by  them  a  certain  reineily  for  their  sulferings,  and  j)erhaps  a 
severe  reven;fe  upon  those  who  had  ill-treated  them.  We  have  heard 
betbre  of  a  similar  trait  in  the  character  of  the  Feejeeans. 

The  word  manda  siynilies  among  them  a  man  thoroughly  accom- 


M  I  C  R  O  N  E  S  I  A. 


97 


pliHhcd  in  all  tlieir  knowledj^c  (ind  arts,  and  versed  in  every  noble 
excri-ise  :  a  good  dancer,  an  al)le  warrior,  one  wlio  has  seen  life  at 
home  and  ahroiul,  and  enjoyed  its  liighest  exfitenients  and  deli^jhts, 
— in  short,  a  coniplete  man  of  the  world.  In  their  estimation,  this  is 
the  proudest  eliaracter  to  which  any  person  can  attain,  and  sucli  a 
one  is  fully  prepared  to  enter,  at  his  death,  on  the  highest  enjoyments 
of  their  elysium. 


u  li  1, 1  (;  lox. 


In  the  dusters  of  Apamaina  and  Tarawa,  three  kinds  of  divinities 
are  worship|)etl.  'I'lie  lirst  class  consists  of  proper  deities,  of  whom 
there  are  several,  such  as  Tii/inrriki,  llirini,  lliliiiipiu,  Aurit-iie,  iVc. 
Of  these  the  lirst-named,  called  also  Wi'iiiif/niii,  is  the  greatest,  not  as 
being  superior  in  his  attributes  to  liie  ri'st,  hut  merely  from  having 
the  greatest  n\iinl)er  of  worshippers.  About  two-thirds  of  the  people 
pray  to  him  as  their  tutelary  divinity ;  the  rest  do  not  acknowledge 
his  authority,  but  address  their  prayers  to  other  deities,  or  to  the 
spirits  of  their  ancestors,  or  to  certain  kinds  of  tish.  which  constitute 
the  other  two  classes  of  divinities.  Tabueriki  is  worship|)ed  under 
the  form  of  a  tlat  coral  stone,  of  irregular  shape,  about  three  teet  long 
by  eighteen  inches  wide,  set  up  on  one  end  in  the  open  air.  It  is 
tied  round  with  leaves  of  the  cocoa-nut  tree,  which  considerably  in- 
crease its  size  and  height.  These  are  changed  every  month,  to  keep 
them  always  green.  The  worship  |)aid  to  the  god  consists  in  repeat- 
ing prayers  belore  this  stone,  and  laying  beside  it  a  portion  of  the  food 
prepared  by  tiie  natives  for  their  own  use.  This  is  done  at  their  daily 
meals,  at  festivals,  and  whenever  they  particularly  wish  to  pro[)itiate 
his  favour.  The  first  fruits  of  the  season  arc  always  oHered  to  the 
god.  Every  family  of  distinction  has  one  of  these  .stones,  which  is 
considered  rather  in  the  light  of  a  family  altar  than  as  an  idol. 

At  .Makin,  according  to  Cirey,  the  names  of  Tabi/tri/,!,  Itiriiii.  and 
the  other  deities,  are  unknown,  and  the  only  spirits  which  the  natives 
worship  are  tho.se  of  their  ancestors.  When  a  chief  dies,  a  stone,  simi- 
lar to  those  dedicated  in  the  other  islantis  to  Tiifiinri/ii,  is  set  up,  and 
dressed  in  the  same  manner  with  leaves.  The  reverence  oHered  to  it 
is  exactly  the  same,  being  a  presentation  of  footl  accompanied  with 
prayers.  Hence  there  can  be  little  doubt  that  the  deities  worshipped 
in  the  southern  clusters  were  oidy  deilied  chiefs,  the  memory  of  whose 
existence  has  been  lost  in  the  lapse  of  time.     The  reverence  paid  to 

25 


98 


KTII  MXi  R  A  I'll  V. 


cortiiiii  kii\(ls  of  fisli  itiny  '>nvc  it*  origin  here,  as  at  Danalw,  in  some 
riule  idea  ol"  n  iiictfiii psychosis. 

The  ancestors  of  chiefs  are  rrprcseiitcil  (so  to  speak)  by  tljeir  skulls, 
which  are  carefully  preserved  iiy  their  (lesceiidaiits.  When  their 
spirits  are  to  he  invoked,  these  skulls  are  taken  down,  placed  on  a 
mat,  and  anointed  with  cocoa-nut  oil;  the  lirows  arc  bound  with 
leaves,  and  food  is  set  before  the  (leshless  jaws.  The  ^eneral  term 
li)r  spirit  anil  divinity  is  (inli. 

.\t  Makin  there  are  no  priests,  and  the  invocations  are  usually 
niiide  by  the  head  of  tin-  family,  or  by  each  indiviibial  for  himself 
On  Tarawa  and  Apamama  every  family  which  has  a  tutelar  divinity 
has  also  a  priest,  whose  duty  it  is  to  perform  the  rites  of  worship,  and 
whose  per(|uisites  consist  in  the  I'ihhI  otfcred  to  the  <jod,  which,  after 
rcmaininir  a  short  time,  is  taken  away  by  him  and  eatoti  in  his  own 
house.  These  priests  are  called  ilmiiijii  or  tlliuiujn*  They  do  not 
constitute  a  distinct  class  connected  by  any  l)on(l  of  union  ainonnf 
themselves;  but  any  younf^  man  of  free  birth,  who  is  apt  at  reciting 
prayers,  may  become  a  priest. 

The  mode  in  which  the  priest  receives  the  oracles  of  the  jjchI  is  as 
follows.  On  the  sandy  beach,  at  the  weather  side  of  the  island,  are 
several  houses,  called  bn-ni-inala,  or  bata  ii'a/iti  (spirit-houses).  They 
are  of  the  usual  size  and  shape  of  dwelling-houses,  but  the  walls  are 
of  coral  stone,  and  they  have  no  loft,  or  upper  division.  The  door- 
way is  always  in  the  west  end,  because  the  Kohiakaki,  or  country  of 
spirits,  lies  in  that  direction.  In  the  middle  of  the  house  a  sort  of  altar, 
or  stout  pillar  of  coral  stone,  is  built  up  to  the  height  of  three  feet  and 
a  half,  having  in  the  centre  a  hollow  about  ten  or  twelve  inches  in 
diameter.  To  this  hollow  the  [jriest  applies  his  ear,  and  is  supposed 
to  receive  from  thence  the  instructions  of  his  divinity.  The  building, 
it  should  be  observed,  is  not  considered  essential,  and  the  ])illar  .some- 
times stands  uncovered  on  the  beach. 

'I'he  true  signification  of  diiti  seems  to  be  ilcr /in!  spirit.  The  usual 
expression  for  soul  is  tciminu'  or  tdmrv,  meaning  properly  shadow. 
They  believe  that  as  soon  as  a  person  dies,  his  spirit  or  shade  ascends 
into  the  air,  and  is  carried  about  for  a  time  by  the  winds  wliitherso- 


*  ll  was  ollcn  ini|><i.ssilili',  in  uiiliii;;  iIhhii  wdnls  iVdin  llir  |iroiiiiiiriati(>ii  <>(  Kirliy  (uul 
firi'V  lo  ilcliTinini',  wIh-ii  thrv  l»';;aii  svilli  I,  wlnllicr  lliis  Idler  »iis  n  purl  of  tlio  word, 
(ir  mcp'ly  llic  pnTixid  article  tr.  In  llii.s  ciuse  «u  nt  first  sii|i|piiseil  tli.il  li/niiiaii  was  a 
contruclion  of  /«•  i/niiuit ;  it  may,  Imwcver,  U-  iiwrcly  n  corruption  of  llic  Polynesian 
word  liijiiiifia, — tlie  /  JHjcoming  l>  in  thi'  Tariiwan  langnayo. 


M  k;  u<».n  ksi  a. 


90 


ever  they  may  chance  to  blow.  At  last  it  is  supposed  to  arrive  at  llie 
Kdiiitilaiki,  w  sort  of  elysinin,  wlicrit  the  spirits  pass  their  time  in 
feastinsr,  daneiri^,',  and  whatever  occupations  were  most  a>,'reealiU'  to 
them  in  their  iMxIily  existence.  'I'his  elysium  is  placed  l)V  the  natives 
on  the  island  of  Tarawa.  On  this  there  are  several  mounds,  or  rai.sod 
areas,  of  various  sizes,  the  largest  \w\\\^  about  a  mile  loiin  by  half  a 
mile  in  breadth.*  None  of  these  exccfd  twenty-four  feet  in  hei<j;ht 
above  the  surrounding  soil,  but  even  so  slight  an  elevation  is  enough 
to  make  them  conspicuous  in  one  of  these  islands.  Kach  of  these 
mounds  is  supposed  to  be  the  site  of  a  Kiiinii/,v/,i  or  paradise,  which 
is,  of  course,  invisible  to  mortal  eyes.  'l"he  ground  is  consiikrcd 
sacred,  and  though  usually  overgrown  with  trees,  no  native  will  ven- 
tJirc  to  cut  them  down.  When  a  tree  falls,  it  is  taken  away,  and 
another  )ilanted  in  its  place,  if  the  persons  wiio  die  are  ohi  and 
feeble,  their  shades  are  carried  to  the  Kaiiidhiki  by  the  spirits  ol 
those  who  have  died  before  them.  I'he  souls  of  infants  are  received 
by  the  shades  of  their  female  relatives,  and  nursed  and  brought  up, 
till  they  are  able  to  take  care  of  them.selves.  Only  those  who  are  tat- 
tooed (being  chiefly  persons  of  tree  birth)  can  expect  to  reach  the 
KaiHukaki.  All  others  arc  intercepted  on  their  way,  and  devoured 
by  a  monstrous  giantess,  called  liaiiie. 

On  Makin,  this  belief  respecting  the  Kninakaki  did  not  |)revail,  and 
Grey  thought  (though  his  knowledge  on  such  points  was  very  limited) 
that  the  natives  suppo.sed  the  s[)irits  of  the  dead  to  remain  near  the 
places  where  they  resided  in  life,  and  sometimes  to  ap[)ear  in  dreams 
to  their  friends  and  relatives. 

The  funeral  ceremonies  are  among  the  most  remarkable  of  their 
customs.  At  Apamama,  when  a  man  dies,  his  body  is  taken  to  the 
maniapa,  or  council-house  of  the  town,  where  it  is  washed  and  laid 
out  on  a  clean  mat.  Here  it  remains  for  eight  or  ten  days,  during 
which  the  people  express  their  grief  by  wailing  and  singing  songs  in 
praise  of  the  dead,  aiul  what  is  rather  singular,  by  dancing.  They 
esteem  it,  moreover,  a  great  weakness  to  shed  tears  at  such  times. 
Every  day,  at  noon,  the  bmly  is  taken  out  into  the  sun,  and  washed 
and  oiled.  When  the  mourning  is  ended,  the  corpse  is  sewed  up  in 
two  mats,  and  sometimes  buried  in  the  house  of  the  nearest  relatives, 
the  head  being  always  turned  towards  the  east, — sometimes  stowed 


•  'I'lii.i,  it  imist  Ik;  rcinenilx^n'd,  was  ilie  Inroriiialioii  wliich  Kirby  received  ironi  natives 
ofApamnma;  he  hod  never  visited  Tarawa. 


100 


K  TIINCXi  R  A  I'll  Y. 


awiiy  in  the  l()l\  of  tlio  bniKliii^.  WIipii  tho  IIchIi  Ik  iioiirly  ffowv,  the 
skull  i!4  tiikcii  otf,  anil  liiivin^'  Ih'cii  ciirofiilly  cluiuiMed,  itt  |irt>N«>rvt'<l  an 
oil  olijtvt  of  worsliip.^ir  mtlu-r  iim  n'prt'wiitiiii^  the  Hpirit  of  tin-  dc- 
ceasi'il,  whicli  Ims  lu'i-oiiic  ii  divinity. 

In  the  iiortiiorii  i-liiMtcr,  ii  Mtiit  slranutT  ciiNtoni  provaili*,  and  one 
wliit'ii  it  costs  an  t'llorl  to  iK'licvc.  Ai'cordiiiif  to  (Jh'v'm  nccoiiiit, 
nflcr  ill)'  first  t-ci'ciiioiiics  of  waiiini;,  tlic  ImmIv  is  waslu'd  and  laid  out 
upon  a  lu-w  mat,  wliicli  is  spread  on  a  lar({i)  ol)loii<r  plate,  made  of 
8ev(>ral  tortoiso-sliclls  sewed  together.  From  two  to  six  persons, 
necordinix  to  llu-  si/.e  of  llie  corpse,  seal  tluMiiselves  opposite  one 
another  on  the  ll(N)r  of  the  house  (commonly  the  dwellin<r  of  the  de- 
ceased) niul  hold  the  plate,  with  tlu^  IknIv  of  their  friend,  upon  their 
knees.  \\  lien  tired,  they  are  relieved  i>y  others,  ami  in  this  wav  tlio 
service  is  kept  up  for  n  space  of  time,  varyiny  with  the  rank  of  the 
decea.scd,  I'rom  four  months  to  two  years!  All  persons,  \\hetiier  free- 
horn  or  sl;i\i's,  recciNc  these  peculiar  honours  after  death.  Diirinj^ 
the  time  tiic  ciir|)se  is  thus  lyiii;;  in  state,  a  fire  is  kept  up  day  and 
liii.dit  in  the  house,  and  its  extinction  would  he  reiriU'ded  as  a  most 
unlnckv  omen.  At  the  end  of  the  period,  the  remains  are  soinetimes 
wrapped  in  mats,  and  deposited  in  the  loft  of  the  house;  hut  more 
commonly  they  are  huricd  in  a  piece  of  ground  set  apart  for  the  pur- 
pose, and  the  i;rave  is  marked  iiy  a  stone  erected  at  the  head,  another 
at  the  foot,  and  a  third  laid  horizontally  across  these  two,  'I'lii)  skulLs 
of  the  chiefs  are  preserved  and  treated  with  the  same  marks  of  reve- 
rence as  at  the  other  islands. — 'I'o  our  impiiry  how  the  people  coiikl 
afford  to  spend  their  time  ill  tliis  preposlerou.s  manner,  (irey  replied 
at  once, — "  One  halt'  of  them  have  iiothin;;;  else  to  do," — a  statement 
whicli,  from  wluit  little  we  saw  of  the  islands  and  the  peo[ile,  we  could 
very  well  believe. 

(io  v  i:  11  s  At  i;  NT. 


From  what  wc  learned,  it  is  likely  that  the  form  of  iiovernincnt 
dill'ers  to  some  e.xteiit  on  each  of  the  liuir  clusters  into  which  the 
•fidiip  is  divided.  We  have,  however,  no  iletinite  inlormatioii  e.vcejit 
in  rctfard  to  llio.se  of  Apamama  and  .Makin.  On  the  l()rmer  we  find 
a  svsteni  of  civil  policy  similar  to  that  which  prevails  in  Polynesia. 
Society  is  divided  into  three  ranks,  chiefs  or  nobles  {ii/a  ox  naiwiUi), 
landholders  {katukd),  and  "  immoii  people  or  serfs  [kawa).  The 
immutu  are  the  tree  and  well-born  natives,  who  possess  the  i^jreater 


M  I  ( -  R  ()  N  R  H  I  A. 


101 


partoftlio  lanil,  niul  nil  tlio  |H)liticnl  niithurity.  The  hctuU  of  fnmiliRM 
an-  riillcd  iii'ti,  ikiul  tlio  oldt'Ht  ma  olii  town  is  tlio  |•r^!Ni^lill^  cliicC  {mil 
n  ti  n/Hi,  lilcrally.  I'roiit  ot  tlio  luiul).  The  kulohi  uro  |mti«)ii«  not 
(iriyiiiallv  "f  iiolilo  liirtli,  who,  cilht-r  l>v  \\w  liivoiir  of  their  i-hief,  or 
hy  ^(mmI  rtirtiiiie  in  wiir,  hiive  iu'(niire<l  luiul,  iiiiil  with  it  l'ree<loin, — 
Itiit  who  hnve  yet  no  voire  in  the  puhlic  rounril,  in  which  nil  inutterK 
of  ifeiieral  iiiipnrl  ;ire  deterniined.  Tiiese  nre  helrl  in  ii  iar^je  Iidhhp 
e.idleil  llie  mniiinp'i,*  ol  sullifieiit  wi/.e  to  contaiii  all  the  men  of  the 
plne.e.  In  this,  every  noble  tainily  has  lis  own  seat  alontr  the  Hides  of 
the  houst> ;  the  niiddli*  is  open  to  the  slaves  and  /,<itokas,  who  have  no 
voice  in  the  conneil.  When  any  alfair  renders  a  meeting  necessary, 
the  oldest  or  presiding  chief  sendH  ont  messengers,  who  Hiimmon  the 
|)eople  l»y  the  sonnd  of  conchs.  The  assemhiy  Iniing  convened,  tlie 
chief  proposes  the  (|uestion,  and  any  noliU^  who  chooses  to  speak  rises 
and  (leliverH  his  opinion.  The  discnssions  are  sonietimc>s  very  ani- 
mated, and  violiMit  ipiarrels  occasionally  take  place  hetwi-en  ditferent 
Mpeakers,  who  are  with  ddlictdty  prevented  from  coming  to  blows. 
Although  no  regular  vote  is  taken,  the  sense  of  the  majority  is  soon 
apparent,  and  determines  tlie  restdt.  In  some  of  the  islands  and 
clusters,  certain  chiefs  hav(^  obtained,  by  success  in  war,  a  superiority 
over  the  rest  of  the  nobles,  and  made  themselves  sovereigns  of  their 
respective  countries.  Kirby  hiid  understocnl  that  there  was  a  king  on 
Taputeouea,  but  if  so,  his  authority  is  not  unipiestioned,  for  two  par- 
ties wi-re  at  war  on  the  island  when  we  visited  it.  There  is  a  king 
on  the  group  of  Apamama,  and  another  on  that  of  Tarawa,  both  of 
whom  have  acipiired  their  powisr  very  lately. 

On  Makin  there  is  also  a  sovereign  chief,  but  the  system  of  govern- 
ment is,  in  some  respects,  ditlerent.  There  are,  according  to  (Jrey, 
three  ninks,  ii'muitii  or  royal  chiefs,  liniiuita  or  gentry,  and  rang  or 
common  people.  The  first-named  viere  originally  of  the  same  class 
with  the  second.  About  a  hundred  years  ago,  Teouki,  the  graiul- 
fatlier  of  the  reigning  king,  anil  a  mighty  warrior,  succeedeil  in  con- 
centrating in  his  own  hands  tiie  sovereign  power,  which  was  before 
Uxl^'^ed  with  the  whole  Ixuly  of  the  gentry  or  petty  chiefs.  His 
descendants  constitute  the  inmata,  and  share  among  them  the  supre- 
macy, thongii  there  is  one  that  retains  especially  the  title  of  head-chief 
Besides  these,  there  is  a  bu-ni-matuuy,  or  chief  judge,  as  Grey  termed 


•  This  word  WHS  sn  written  nt  the  titnc ;  we  hnvo  since  thuiighl  thai  it  should  |)orliii|)s 
be  uma-ni-apu,  literally,  house  of  the  town,  or  loun-liousr. 

36 


102 


E  T  11  N  O  0  R  A  P  H  V. 


him,  who  seems  to  be  a  sort  of  prime  minister,  and  really  has  ihe. 
direction  of  the  government.  As  regards  tlieir  system  of  descent  we 
could  ieain  bnt  little.  At  the  time  wo  were  there,  the  king  was  a 
young  man,  and  his  father  was  still  living;  though  hardly  past  the 
prime  of  life,  and  in  tlie  full  vigor  of  his  faculties,  he  had  resigned  his 
power  to  his  son, — but  whether  of  his  own  accorti,  or  in  obedience  to 
some  established  law,  Grey  could  not  inform  us. 

TATTOOTXr;. 

There  is  nothing  peculiar  or  striking  in  the  tattooing  of  these 
natives.  It  is  mostly  in  short,  ol)li(|ne  lines,  about  an  eighth  of  an 
ilich  apart.  These  are  arranged  in  per|HMidicular  rows,  of  which 
there  are  four  or  five  down  the  back,  on  each  side  of  the  spine ;  with 
a  similar  marking  in  front,  beginning  just  below  the  collar-bone.  The 
legs  also  are  imprinted,  but  not  the  arms  or  face.  The  women  are 
tattooed  in  the  same  manner,  but  not  so  much  as  the  men.  There 
arc  professional  taltooers,  whose  prices  are  so  high  that  slaves  cannot, 
in  general,  afford  to  be  thus  ornaincnteil,  but  there  is  no  law  against 
it.  On  the  dark-skinned  race  of  the  so\ithern  clusters,  the  marking 
does  not  show  very  clearly,  and  at  a  little  distance  would  hardly  bo 
observed  ;  but  on  the  natives  of  Makin  it  is  (piite  distinct. 


uousics,  CANOKS,   irn\ 

The  dwelling-houses  iiave  two  stories,  a  ground  lloor  and  a  loft,  or 
garret,  sep^iriitixl  by  a  horizontal  partition  of  slender  sticks  laid  upon 
joists.  iVccording  to  Kirby,  this  mode  of  building  was  adopli-d  in 
order  to  escape  the  ravages  made  by  the  rats,  which  swarm  in  the 
islands,  As  the  loft  is  only  connected  with  the  ground  by  the  four 
corner  posts,  the  lower  part  of  the  house  being  oj)en  all  arountl,  these 
animals  cannot  reach  the  food,  mats,  and  other  articles  which  are 
kept  in  it.  It  is  curious  enough  that  an  animal  so  insignificant 
should  thus  alfect  the  architecture  of  a  numerous  people.  On  the 
Ai)anuuna  cluster,  and  the  islands  south  of  it,  the  loft  is  raised  but 
three  or  lour  feet  above  the  groun  1,  and  of  course  the  iiunates  on  the 
lower  floor  must  be  constantly  in  a  sitting  or  reclining  posture.  On 
Tarawa,  however,  the  houses  were  larger,  and  some  had  two  upper 
stories,  the  second  lloor  being  laid  about  three  feet  above, the  first. 
On  Makin,  where  the  supply  of  timber  is  abundant,  the  houses  are  of 


MICRONESIA. 


103 


still  ffrcatcr  sizo,  and  the  partition  is  made  of  siiflicient  lioitjlit  to 
cnal)lo  the  poopio  to  stand  uprij^ht  iiiiiler  it. 

The  ronncil-houscs  iiavo  no  lofts,  and  are  of  great  size.  That  at 
the  town  of  Ltiroa,  on  Tapiiteouea,  was  a  hundreil  and  twenty  feet 
lonir,  l)y  forty-five  wide,  antl  about  forty  liif^h  at  tiie  ridj;e-i)ole.  On 
the  islands  to  the  nortli  they  are  still  larijer,  and  from  the  descriptions 
of  the  two  siN-inien,  as  well  as  from  the  tii.stant  view  which  we  had  of 
them,  must  he  enormous  structures. 

Their  canoes  resend)le  very  nearly,  in  model,  construction,  and 
riuf,  those  of  the  Feejeeans.  They  are  not  llat  on  one  side,  like  those 
of  the  iMulj^rave  islanilers,  hut  have;  the  shape  of  a  lon;r  and  narrow 
boat.  'I'he  larj^est,  which  are  found  at  Makin,  arc  not  less  than  sixty 
feet  in  leii<^th,  by  si.v  in  width.  They  sail  very  near  the  wind,  and 
move  with  a  rapidity  which  has  ac(piired  for  them  the  name  of 
"  (lyiuff  proas." 

The  dress,  ornaments,  and  arms  of  the  natives  do  not  differ  mate- 
rially from  those  which  have  been  described  as  proper  io  the  people 
on  the  low  islands  of  this  archipelaifo.  The  delensive  armour,  how- 
ever, intended  to  protect  the  body  from  the  formidal)le  edi^es  of  the 
sharks-teeth  weapons,  is  probably  peculiar  to  them.  It  consists  of  a 
jacket  and  trousers  of  a  very  thick,  close  network,  braided  of  cocoa- 
nut  sinnet,  and  u  cuirass  made  likewise  of  this  cord,  but  woven  so 
compactly,  am!  in  so  many  thicknesses,  as  to  form  a  solid  board,  half 
an  inch  throujfh,  which  would  torin  a  tolerable  defence  even  a|j;ainst 
the  blow  of  a  sword.  Its  shape  is  nearly  that  of  the  ancient  cuirass, 
except  that  a  .s(|uare  j)i<.'ce  rises  up  behind  to  protect  the  head  from  a 
side  blow.  They  have  al.so  caps  or  helmets,  inu;eniously  made  of  the 
skin  of  the  porcui)ine-fish,  (-ut  oil  at  the  head  and  then  exteniled  to 
the  proper  size.  It  becomes  stiff  and  hard  in  drying,  and  the  spines 
protruiling  on  every  side  aid  in  warding  off  the  blows  of  the  dreaded 
weapons. 


R  O  T  U  M  A,    I)  K    ti  It  .\  N  V  I  I,  I.  V.    I  S  I,  A  N  O. 

This  island  is  situated  in  12°  30'  of  north  latitude,  and  177°  15'  of 
east  longitude.  It  is  three  hundred  miles  distant  from  any  other 
land,  and  cannot  properly  be  included  in  either  one  of  the  three 
ethnographical  regions  of  the  Pacific.  Its  inhabitants  more  resemble 
the  Caroline  islanders  in  their  appearance  and  character,  but  their 
customs  assimilate  them  rather  to  the  Polynesians.     Their  dialect  is 


104 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


a  mixture  of  Polynesian  words,  very  much  corrupted,  with  those  of 
some  other  huiguage,  unlike  any  which  has  been  elsewhere  found. 
They  show,  also,  in  some  of  their  usages,  and  some  words  of  their 
language,  traces  of  communication  willi  their  Feejeean  neighlwurs  to 
the  south. 

During  our  brief  stay  at  Tongafabu,  in  April  of  1840,  several 
natives  of  Rotuma  came  on  board  our  vessel,  and  I  took  that  oppor- 
tunity to  obtain  the  vocabulary  which  is  given  in  another  place. 
The  one  to  wiioin  I  was  principally  indebted  was  an  elderly  man,  by 
name.  'Viii-Rotiimd.*  a  petty  chief,  who  had  been  two  voyages  in  a 
whaler,  and  had  thus  ac(|uired  some  knowledge  of  Knglisli.  With 
him  was  a  young  chief  of  high  rank,  by  name.  'Vokmiiiia,  to  whom 
the  other  seemed  to  act  as  guardian.  They  had  left  their  island 
about  two  years  before,  with  several  attendants,  in  a  whale-ship,  for 
the  purpose  of  visiting  tlie  Friendly  Islands,  and  seeing  something  of 
the  world.  Unfortunately,  since  their  arrival,  Tui-Uotuma  had  be- 
come blind,  and  war  having  broken  out  on  Tonga,  between  the 
Christian  and  heathen  parties,  their  situation  had  become  uncom- 
fortable. The  old  councillor,  in  particular,  was  desirous  of  getting 
away,  giving  as  his  rea.son,  that  the  young  chief,  his  companion, 
would  one  day  be  king,  and  that  theretbre  it  would  not  be  well  for 
him  to  be  at  Tonga  during  the  civil  dis.sensions ;  he  would,  as  Tui- 
Rotuma  expressed  it,  "see  too  much  fight." 

The  Uotumans  resemble  the  Polynesians  in  form  and  complexion, 
but  their  features  have  more  of  the  Euro|)ean  cast.  They  have  large 
noses,  wide  and  prominent  cheek-bones,  full  eyes,  and  considerable 
l)eard.  Tliey  are  tattooed  in  large  ma.sses  over  the  middle  of  the 
body,  from  tiie  navel  nearly  to  the  knee ;  on  the  breast  and  arms  they 
have  light  marks,  varying  .somewhat  in  shape,  but  generally  like  a 
row  of  arrow-heads. 

The  expression  of  their  countenances,  which  is  mild,  intelligent, 
and  prei)o.s.sessing,  corresponds  with  their  character,  which  is  superior 
in  many  respects  to  that  of  the  Polynesians.  Like  the  Caroline 
islanders,  they  are  good-natured,  confiding,  and  hospitable.  No 
instance,  I  believe,  of  any  difficulty  between  them  and  their  foreign 
visitors  has  ever  occurred.  They  are  distinguished,  moreover,  for 
their  forethought  and  consideration.     Tlieir  island,  having  a  popula- 


•  This  name,  in  tlic  Toii^a  dinlrct,  siwnilies  "  Ijird  of  Kcituiiia ;"  it  Unci,  however,  no 
siiih  nieaniiig  in  tin-  langungi-  of  this  islnnil,  but  was  simply  an  a|)|M'llativc. 


MICRONESIA. 


100 


tion  of  four  or  five  thousand,  with  a  circuit  of  only  twenty-five  miles, 
and  a  hilly  surface,  does  not  always  produce  a  sufficient  supply  of 
food  for  its  inhabitants.  There  are,  therefore,  many  of  the  poorer 
classes  who  are  eager  to  engage  as  seamen  on  board  whale-ships, 
where  they  remain  until  they  have  accumulated  sufficient  property, 
in  tliose  articles  which  are  estcemeil  valuable  among  liieir  country- 
men, to  enable  them,  on  tlieir  return,  to  purcliase  land  and  live  com- 
fortably for  the  rest  of  their  days.  TIk^v  make  excellent  sailors,  and 
are  biglily  prized,  not  only  for  their  intelligence  and  docility,  but  also 
for  their  prudence  and  regular  conduct. 

Tlifir  system  of  government  is  peculiar  and  singular.  The  island 
is  divided  into  twenty-four  districts,  cacli  under  a  high  chief  [nijnii- 
gntsli(i).  Each  of  these  chiefs,  in  rcguhir  rotation,  holds,  for  the  space 
of  twenty  months,  the  sovereignty  of  the  island,  during  which  time 
he  presides  in  the  councils,  and  receives  tribute  from  the  rest.  To- 
kanina  belonged  to  this  clas.s.  Tlie  official  title  of  the  head  chief  is 
riamhau,  but  they  use  also  the  Vitian  word  tidii,  meaning  kiiuj.  Ne.xt 
to  the  high  chiefs  come  the  councillors  or  elders  (/««/«//»«/ or  w/rt/Aw/), 
who  correspond  to  the  matitbuks  of  Tonga.  The  mass  of  the  people 
are  called  lluMnuri  {da-muri),  answering  to  the  ti'uis,  or  lower  class  of 
the  Friendly  Islands. 

Of  their  religion  I  could  obtain  but  little  information.  The  word 
for  god  is  oitii  or  aitii,  which  is  probably  the  same  with  the  Samoan 
aitu,  spirit.  Hi  faka-oiti;,  spir:t-house,  is  the  word  for  temple,  and 
hanua  on  aitu,  land  of  spirits,  is  their  term  for  heaven,  or  the  resi- 
dence of  the  gods.  But  wliether  these  spirits  are  pro|)er  divinities, 
my  informant,  wiiosc  knowledge  of  English  was  limited  to  the  most 
ordinary  terms,  could  not  explain.  The  dress,  manufactures,  and 
arts  of  these  islanders  have  a  general  resemblance  to  tiiose  of  the 
Friendly  and  Navigator  islands.  Some  of  their  customs,  however, 
appear  to  be  of  Feejeean  origin.  Thus,  one  of  the  men  who  came  on 
board  had  iiis  hair  disposed  in  frizzled  masses  aroiuid  his  head  ;  and 
the  young  girls  are  said  to  colour  tlieir  locks  of  a  dingy  white  by 
washing  them  with  lime-water. 

It  is  remarkable  that  the  Hotumans  reckon  by  periods  of  six 
months,  or  moons,  instead  of  the  full  year.  Living  as  tliey  do,  on  a 
small  island  near  the  equator,  at  a  distance  from  any  e.vtensive  land, 
tlie  changes  of  temperature  must  be  slight,  and  the  difference  of 
seasons  iiardly  perceptible.  The  westerly  winds  which  blow  from 
October  to  April  do,  no  doubt,  .serve  to  distinguish  this  period  of  the 

37 


106  ETHNOGRAPHY. 

year;  but  they  cannot  materially  affect  the  course  of  vegetation.  At 
the  Kingsmill  Group,  situated  directly  under  the  equator,  the  natives 
reckon  by  j)criods  often  months,  a  number  evidently  adopted  for  con- 
venience of  counting,  and  with  no  reference  wiiatever  to  any  natural 
seasons.     The  names  of  the  Ilotuman  montlis  are — 

Oi-pnpa, Mnrcli  (nnil  September). 

l^ijldji, April  (iinii  October). 

liana, M'ly,  <S;i'. 

Kiwipi, Iiiiio. 

I'usiiiiltaii, Inly. 

AOapiidija .\iigusl. 


AUSTRALIA. 


■ 


r 


This  land,  of  which  we  know  not  whether  the  proper  designation 
be  an  island  or  a  continent,  is  known  as  a  region  of  singularities.  Not 
the  least  of  these  are  the  combinations  of  wliat,  judging  from  precon- 
ceived ideas,  may  well  he  termed  ccntrtirielies,  in  the  physical  traits, 
moral  ([ualities,  customs,  and  language  of  the  itborigincs.  Thus  they 
have,  at  once,  tlie  liusky  hue  and  elongated  visage  of  the  negro,  with 
the  fine,  straight  hair  of  the  European  ;  they  are  excessively  super- 
stitious and  yet  almost  devoid  of  religious  (or  devotional)  feelings; 
witii  the  strongest  attaciiment  to  their  native  district,  they  can  rarely 
be  brought  to  spend  more  than  three  days  in  one  spot ;  and  tlio  ,di 
tlieir  idiom  abounds  in  comple.v  iiillcctions,  like  tlioseof  the  Atnernaii 
Indians,  it  litis  less  facility  of  composition  than  the  English.  During 
our  stay  in  New  South  Wales,  wo  liad  good  ojiportuiiities  for  ac- 
quiring information  concerning  tliis  singular  variety  of  tiic  hunititi 
species.  At  Sydney,  Hunter's  River,  tiiid  Wellington  Vtilley,  we 
found  natives  from  all  parts  of  tiio  colony,  from  Morcton  Bay  on  the 
norlii,  to  tiie  Muruya  Uiver  on  tiie  soutli,  and  from  the  coast  to  ;i 
distance  of  three  hundred  miles  into  the  interior.  The  result  of  our 
exaiiiiiialion,  and  of  the  comjiarison  of  dialects,  w;is  a  conviction  that 
all  tiie  natives  of  that  jiart  of  New  Iloliand  were  of  one  stock. 
Furtiier  comparisons  induce  us  to  extend  tiiis  remark  to  the  entire 
continent,  though,  before  coining  to  any  positive  conclusion  on  the 
subject,  it  will  be  necessary  to  pos.sess  some  more  accurate  knowledge 
than  we  now  have,  of  the  dialects  spoken  in  Northern  Australia,  more 
especially  of  their  grainmiUical  characteristics. 


.J_,  -..^.  ..:jL».    . 


AUSTRALIA. 


107 


The  number  of  the  aborigines  is  very  small  in  proportion  to  the 
extent  of  territory  which  tliey  occupy.  It  cannot  be  rated  higher 
than  two  hundred  thousand  for  the  whole  of  Australia.  Some  esti- 
mates reduce  it  as  low  as  seventy-live  thousand.  These  calculations, 
of  course,  suppose  that  the  unexplored  region  does  not  differ  mate- 
rially, as  respects  the  density  of  the  population,  from  that  which  is 
known. 

PHYSICAL    TRAITS. 


The  natives  of  Australia  arc  of  the  middle  height,  few  of  the  men 
being  above  six  or  under  five  feet.  They  are  slender  in  make,  with 
long  arms  and  legs,  and  when  in  good  condition,  their  forms  are 
pretty  well  proportioned.  Usually,  however,  their  wandering  life,  irre- 
gular habits,  and  bad  food  keep  them  extremely  meagre,  and  as  this 
thinne.ss  is  accompanied  by"  a  protuberance  of  the  abdomen,  it  gives 
to  their  figures  a  distorted  and  hardly  human  appearance.  The  cast 
of  the  face  is  a  medium  between  the  African  and  the  Malay  types. 
The  forehead  is  narrow,  sometimes  retreating,  but  often  high  and 
prominent;  the  eyes  are  small,  black,  and  deep-set;  tlie  nose  is  much 
depressed  at  the  upper  part  between  the  eyes,  and  widened  at  the 
base,  but  with  tliis,  it  frequently  has  an  aquiline  outline.  The  cheek- 
bones are  prominent.  The  nioutii  is  large,  with  tiiick  lips  and  strong 
well-set  teeth.  The  jaws  project,  but  the  chin  is  frequently  retracted. 
The  head,  wliich  is  very  large,  with  a  skull  of  unusual  thickness,  is 
placed  upon  a  short  and  small  neck.  Their  colour  is  a  dark  cluH-olate 
or  reddish-black,  like  that  of  the  Guinea  negro,  but  varying  iii  shade 
so  mucii  that  individuals  of  pure  blood  are  sometimes  as  light- 
coloured  as  mulattoes.  That  which  distinguishes  them  most  decidedly 
from  other  dark-skinned  races  is  their  hair,  which  is  neitiier  woolly, 
like  that  of  the  Africans  and  Melancsians,  nor  frizzled  like  tiiat  of  the 
Feejeeans,  nor  coarse,  still",  and  curling,  as  witli  the  Malays.  It  is 
long,  line,  and  wavy  like  that  of  Europeans.  \Vhen  neglected,  it  is 
apt,  of  course,  to  become  busiiy  and  matted,  but  when  [jropcr  care  is 
taken  of  it,  it  appears  as  we  have  described.  It  is  .sometimes  of  a 
glossy  black,  but  the  most  common  hue  is  a  deep  brown.  Most  of 
the  natives  have  thick  beards,  and  their  skins  are  more  hairy  than 
those  of  whites. 


1^ 


108 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


r  H  A  R  A  C  T  E  R. 

It  is  doubtful  what  grade  of  intellectual  capacity  is  to  be  assigned 
to  this  people.  Several  wlio  have  been  taken  from  the  forest  when 
young,  and  received  instruction,  have  shown  a  readiness  in  acquiring 
knowledge  and  a  (piickness  of  appreiiension  which  have  surj)rised 
their  teacliers.  Most  of  the  natives  learn  the  Kngiish  language  with 
greiit  facility,  and  the  children  who  wen^  inider  the  instruction  of  the 
missionary  at  Wellington  Valley  evinced,  in  his  opinion,  a  greater 
aptitude  for  music  tiian  most  white  children.  AVith  all  this,  it  must 
be  saitl,  that  the  imi)ression  produced  on  the  mind  of  a  stranger,  by 
an  iiitercovirse  \\ith  the  aborigines,  in  their  natural  state,  is  that  t)f 
great  mental  obtuseness, — or,  in  plain  terms,  an  almo.st  brutal  stu- 
pidity. They  never  count  beyond  four,  or,  in  some  tribes,  three;  all 
above  this  numljer  is  expressed  by  a  term  equivalent  to  many. 
Their  reasoning  powers  seem  to  be  very  imperfectly  developed. 
The  arguments  which  are  addressed  to  them  by  the  white  settlers, 
for  the  purpose  of  convincing  or  persuading  them,  are  often  such  as 
we  should  use  towards  a  child,  or  a  partial  idiot.  Their  superstitions 
evince,  for  the  most  part,  this  same  character  of  silliness.  Some  are 
so  absurd  as  to  e.vcite  at  once  laughter  and  amazement.  The 
absurdity,  it  should  be  remarked,  is  not  the  result  of  an  e.Ktravagant 
imagination,  as  with  some  portion  of  the  Hindoo  mythology,  but 
downright  childistiness  and  imljccility.  One  in.stance,  given  on  tlie 
authority  of  Mr.  Threlkeld,  missionary  at  Lake  Maccpiarie,  will 
probably  be  sulHcient.  In  a  bay,  !it  the  northwest  e.vtremity  of  that 
lake,  are  many  petrilactions  of  wood,  whicii  the  natives  believe  to  be 
fragments  of  a  large  rock  tiiat  formerly  fell  from  heaven  and  ile.stroyed 
a  number  of  people.  The  author  of  this  catastrophe  was  an  enormous 
lizard  of  celestial  origin,  who  collected  the  men  together,  and  then 
caused  the  stone  to  fall.  His  anger  had  been  excited  again.st  them 
by  the  impiety  which  they  had  evinced  in  killing  vermin  (lice),  by 
roasting  them  in  the  (ire.  Those  who  had  killed  them  by  cracking 
were  speared  to  death  by  him  with  a  long  reeil  w  hicli  he  had  brought 
from  the  skies.  When  all  the  olfenders  were  destroyed,  the  lizard 
reascended  to  heaven,  where  he  still  remains. 

It  is  evident  that  the  chief  interest  svhich  can  be  taken  in  such  a 
people  will  arise  from  the  singularities  that  distinguish  them  from 
the   rest   of  the   human    race.      These   singularities   are   especially 


\ 


■MMI 


I 


AUSTRALIA. 


loe 


remarkable  in  their  moral  qualities.  Althoiifrh  living  constantly  in 
what  appears  to  us  a  most  degraded  state,  and  frequently  suffering 
from  actual  want,  they  are  nevertheless  extravagantly  proud.  The 
complete  personal  independence  to  which  they  are  accustomed  gives 
to  their  ordinary  demeanor  an  air  of  hauglitiness  and  even  of  inso- 
lence. Nothing  will  induce  them  to  acknowledge  any  human  being 
(of  their  own  age)  their  superior,  or  show  any  mark  of  deference. 
At  Weliinglon  Valley,  the  missionary,  Mr.  Watson,  was  ;he  only  one 
to  whom  they  gave,  in  speaking,  the  title  of  Mr.,  and  that  merely 
from  iiabit  acquired  in  youth ;  all  others,  of  whatever  rank,  they 
addressed  by  their  names  alone, — as  Jack,  Tom,  Wright,  Walker. 
This  docs  not  ])roceed  from  ignorance  on  their  part,  as  they  under- 
stand the  distinctions  of  rank  among  the  whites,  and  are  continually 
witnesses  of  the  subservience  and  respect  exacted  by  one  class  from 
the  other.  They  appear  to  have  a  sense — or  it  may  almost  be  termed 
an  instinct — of  independence,  which"  disposes  them  on  all  occasions 
to  assert  their  e([uality  with  the  highest.  They  frequently  observe, 
on  being  asked  to  work,  "  white  fellow  works,  not  black  fellow ;  l)lack 
fellow  gentleman."  On  entering  a  room,  they  will  not  remain  stand- 
ing, out  of  respect,  but  generally  seat  themselves  immediately. 

They  are  not  great  talkers,  and  liislike  to  be  much  spoken  to, 
particularly  in  a  tone  of  raillery.  A  gentleman  told  me  that  he  was 
once  amusing  himself  by  teasing  a  native,  in  perfect  good  humor, 
when  the  man  suddenly  seized  a  billet  of  wood,  threw  it  at  him,  and 
then  rushed  tor  his  spear  in  a  state  of  fury.  When  he  was  pacilied, 
and  made  to  see  that  no  insult  was  intended,  he  begged  that  they 
would  not  talk  to  him  again  in  that  manner,  or  he  might  be  unable  to 
restrain  his  temper. 

They  are,  in  general,  silent  and  reserved,  and  appear  to  look  uj)on 
the  whites  with  a  mi.xture  of  distrust  and  contempt.  To  govern 
them  by  threats  and  violence  is  impossible.  They  immediately  take 
to  the  "  bush,"  resume  their  wandering  habits,  and  retaliate  by  spear- 
ing the  cattle  of  tlieir  persecutors,  and  sometimes  murdering  the  men. 
'I'hey  ii'Mer,  iiowever,  carry  on  any  .systematic  warfare,  and  their 
dread  of  the  whites  is  so  great  tiiat  large  parties  of  them  have  been 
dispersed  liy  tiie  resistance  of  a  few  resolute  herdsmen. 

Though  constantly  wandering,  they  are  not  great  travellers,  usu- 
ally conlining  themselves  to  a  radius  of  fifty  miles  from  the  place 
which  they  consider  more  peculiarly  their  residence.  If  ever  they 
venture  beyond  this,  as  they  sometimes  do,  in  company  with  a  party 

•J8 


r 


110 


i;t  II  X  ()(i  u  A  r  n  v. 


of  whites,  tluv  iilways  betray  tlio  greatest  fear  of  falling  in  with  any 
nidial,  or  stranijo  blacks,  who,  they  take  it  for  frrantod,  woulii  |)iit 
tliein  to  death  immeiliatoly.  This  extreme  timidity  is,  indeed,  one 
cause  of  the  lerocity  whicli  tlio  natives  sometimes  display.  If  a  party 
of  blacks  in  the  interior,  who  are  unactiuainted  with  white  men,  be 
approaclied  suildenly,  and  taken  by  surprise,  they  are  cominoidy 
seized  with  a  panic  whicli  deprives  them  of  reason.  Supposing'  that 
tlu'v  are  surrounded  anil  destined  to  death,  they  seize  tlieir  weapons, 
and  rush  forward  in  frenzy,  to  sell  their  lives  as  dearly  as  possible. 

H  i;  I,  I  (i  I  ON. 

The  lack  of  relii^ious  feeling  in  tlie.se  natives  has  already  been 
mentioned.  The  missionaries  iiave  found  it  impossible,  after  many 
years"  labor,  to  make  the  siiirjitest  impression  upon  them.  They  do 
not  ascril)e  this  to  any  attachment,  on  the  part  of  tlie  l)lacks,  to  their 
own  creed,  if  such  it  may  1)0  called,  for  they  appear  to  care  little 
about  it.  Some  of  their  ceremonies,  which  partook  of  a  reli;iious 
character,  have  been  lately  discontinued,  but  nothint;  has  been  sub- 
.-^titutcil  ill  tiieir  place.  It  is  not  true,  iiowever,  as  lias  been  freipiciitly 
a.sserteii,  tiiat  the  natives  have  no  idea  of  a  supreme  beini^,  altliou^h 
they  do  not  allow  tiiis  idea  to  intluciice  their  actions.  Tiie  \V"elliiiu;toii 
trilH'.  at  least,  lielieve  in  liie  e.\isteiice  of  a  deity  called  liuidiiKii,  who 
Hves  on  an  island  beyond  the  <freat  sea  to  the  east.  His  food  is  lish, 
wliiiii  come  u|)  to  him  from  tin;  water,  when  he  calls  to  tiiein.  Some 
of  tlie  natives  consider  him  the  maker  ot"  ail  tiiiiiij;s,  while  otiiers  attri- 
bute the  creation  of  the  world  to  his  son  liiminihiii.  They  say  of  iiim, 
tliat  Raiamai  spoke,  and  Uurambiii  came  into  existence.  When  tiic 
missionaries  first  came  to  Wellington,  the  natives  usi^d  to  assemble 
once  a  year,  in  the  month  of  February,  to  dance  and  sing  a  song  in 
honor  of  Haiamai.  This  song  was  brought  there  from  a  distance  by 
strange  natives,  who  ueiit  about  teaching  it.  Those  who  refiiseil  to 
join  in  the  ceremony  were  supposed  to  incur  tiie  disiileasure  of  the 
god.  For  the  last  tiirce  years  the  custom  has  been  discontinued.  In 
the  tribe  on  lluntur"s  Uivor,  there  was  a  native  famous  for  the  compo- 
sition of  these  songs  or  hymns,  which,  according  to  Mr.  Threlkeld 
were  passed  from  tribe  to  tribe,  to  a  great  distance,  until  many  of  tiic 
words  became  at  last  uiiinteili^iibie  to  tiiosc  who  sang  them. 

Dtininriri/'i/,  a  brother  of  Baiamai,  lives  in  the  far  west.  It  was 
he  who  lately  sent  the  small-po.v  among  the  natives,  for  no  better 


II     i 


A  V  s  r  n  A  1, 1  A. 


Ill 


reason  than  that  he  was  vexed  for  want  of  a  tomahawk.  But  now  he 
is  supposed  to  liave  obtained  one,  and  the  disease  will  come  no  more. 
Tlie  linlitmhtil  are  a  sort  of  anf^els,  wlio  are  said  to  be  of  a  white 
color,  and  to  live  on  a  mountain  at  a  great  distance  to  tlie  southeast. 
Tiieir  foot!  is  honey,  and  their  employment  to  do  good  "  like  mission- 
aries." 

It  is  possible  that  some  of  these  stories  owe  their  origin  to  inter- 
course with  the  whites,  though  tlie  great  unwillingness  which  the 
natives  always  evince  to  adopt  any  customs  or  opinions  from  them 
militates  against  such  a  sup|)osition.  But  a  being  who  is,  beyond 
(jueslion,  entirely  the  creation  of  Australian  imagination,  is  one  who 
is  called  in  the  Wellington  dialect  Wundoiicj,  though  the  luUives  have 
learned  from  the  whites  to  apply  to  him  the  name  of  devil.  He  is  an 
object  not  of  worship,  but  merely  of  superstitious  dread.  They 
describe  him  as  going  about  under  the  form  of  a  black  man  of  super- 
human stature  and  strength.  He  prowls  at  night  through  the  woods 
around  the  encampments  of  the  natives,  seeking  to  entrap  some 
unwary  wanderer,  whom  he  w ill  seize  upon,  and  having  dragged  him 
to  his  fire,  will  tiiere  roast  and  dcMuir  him.  They  attribute  all  their 
afllictioiis  to  his  malevolence.  If  they  are  ill,  they  say  Wantlong  has 
bitten  them.  No  one  can  see  this  being  but  the  nihjartjir,  or  foiiju- 
rors,wlio  a.ssert  that  they  can  kill  him,  but  that  he  always  returns  to 
life,  lie  may,  liowever,  be  frightened  away  iiy  throwing  lire  at  liim 
(though  this  statement  seems  inconsistent  with  that  respecting  his 
invisibility),  and  no  native  will  go  out  at  night  without  a  firebrand,  to 
protect  him  from  the  tleinon. 

There  is  some  dillerenco  in  the  accounts  given  of  this  character. 
By  the  tribe  of  Hunter's  River  he  is  called  Ko'ni  or  Kotn.  Some- 
times, when  the  blacks  are  asleep,  he  makes  his  appearance,  seizes 
upon  one  of  them  and  carries  him  oft".  The  person  .seized  endeavors 
in  vain  to  cry  out,  being  almost  strangled;  "at  daylight,  however,. 
Koin  disappears,  and  tiie  ma-i  linds  himself  conveyed  .safely  to  his. 
own  fireside."  From  this  it  would  appear  that  tiie  demon  is  here  a 
sort  of  personification  of  the  nigiitmare, — a  visitation  to  which  the 
natives,  from  tiieir  habits  of  gorging  themselves  to  the  utmost  when 
they  obtain  a  su[)|)ly  of  food,  must  be  very  subject. 

At  the  Muruya  River  the  devil  is  called  Tulugal.  He  was  de- 
scribeil  to  us,  by  a  native,  as  a  black  man  of  great  stature,  grizzled 
witli  age,  who  has  very  long  legs,  so  that  he  soon  overtakes  a  man, 
but  very  short  arms,  which  brings  the  contest  nearer  an  equality. 


rr" 


\\ 


t 
I 


112 


KTll  NO(i  R  A  I'll  V. 


This  frohlin  has  a  wife  who  is  mucli  like  iiimsolf,  but  still  more 
ffart'd,  Itciiii,'  of  ii  i-rnel  tiispositioii,  with  a  cannibal  Mp|)ctite,  cspc- 
ciallv  lor  yoiiii'f  cliildrcn.  It  would  liarilly  hv  wortli  while  to  dwell 
upon  thi'so  superslilions,  but  that  thoy  sei'in  to  characterise  so  dis- 
tinctly llie  pco|)I(',  at  once  timid,  ferocious,  and  stui)id,  who  have 
invented  tiiem. 

'i'iicir  opinions  witli  rcifard  to  tiie  soul  vary.  Some  assert  that  the 
whole  man  <lics  at  once,  and  nolliinir  is  lel't  ot  him.  Others  are  of 
opinion  that  his  spirit  sidl  survives,  but  u|)on  this  eartii,  either  as  a 
wanderiiiLt  ^tiost,  or  in  a  slate  of  metem|)sychosis,  aninnilinijf  a  bird  or 
otiier  inferior  creatnrt\  lint  the  most  sinifular  lielief  is  one  which  is 
foiuid  at  both  I'ort  Stephens  and  Swan  Hivi'r,  places  separated  i)y 
the  whole  breadth  of  the  Australian  continent.  'I'his  is,  that  wiiite 
people  arc  merciv  blacks  wiio  iiavc  died,  |iassed  to  a  distant  iM)unlry, 
and  haviujjt  there  undc'rirone  a  transformation,  have  returneil  to  liicir 
orii^inal  homes.  When  tlie  natives  see  a  white  man  who  strongly 
resembles  one  of  their  deceased  friends,  they  ijivc  him  \\w  name  of 
the  dead  person,  and  considiT  him  to  be  actually  the  same  being. 

s()(    IM.     I'OI.ITV. 


i 


'  '■•-  \ 


'l"he  Australians  have  notlnnir  which  I'an  be  called  a  i^ovcrnment. 
They  have  not  even  any  word,  In  the  W Cllintiton  diali'cl,  sii^nifyinj^ 
a  chief  or  superior,  or  any  proper  terms  for  the  expri'ssions  "fw«- 
1111111(1."  "dlinj,"  and  the  like.  I']ach  tamily,  beini;  the  source  of  all 
its  own  condbrts  and  providintf  Ibr  its  own  wants,  miudit,  liut  tor  the 
lovi^  of  com[ianionshi|),  live  apart  ;md  i.^ola^cd  trom  tlie  rest,  without 
sacriliciuir  any  advanta'^'c.  Their  wars,  religious  celel)rations,  and 
festive  asscnd)lies  are  tlie  only  occasions  wiicn  i'o-oi)tM"ation  is  reallv 
necessary  aiiioiiii  tliem,  and  cm'II  tlic.se  an^  rei^iilati'd  bv  diH'erent 
priiK  ipies  frmn  those  which  prevail  anions;'  otiier  savaijes.  'I'hey 
have  not,  ])roperly  speakiiiix,  any  disliiictioii  of  tribes.  Two  bodies 
of  men,  speakiiiu  tlie  same  diali'cl,  are  lrci|uciitlv  seen  drawn  up  in 
battle  ayainst  each  other;  and  tlios(!  who,  in  oiii"  war,  are  i'eliow- 
ct)inl)atants,  may,  a  few  davs  afterwards,  be  in  opposite  ranks. 

They  iiave,  however,  a  social  system  ol  their  own,  reij;iilated  by 
customs  of  whose  orij^nn  tliev  can  t^ive  no  account,  and  to  w  hich  they 
conform  apparently  because  they  have  no  idea  of  anv  other  mode  of 
life,  or  because  a  different  course  would  be  followeil  by  liu!  universal 
reprobation  of  their  fellows.     Of  these  customs,  svhich  partake  of  the 


A  r  S  T  H  A  I,  I  A. 


113 


sirii^ularilv  iliat  tlistiiiguislies  every  tiling  relaliiijj  to  lliis  people,  the 
riillmviii^  are  the  most  reinarkalilf. 

1.  'I'tio  i-rrcmoiiv  of  iriilialiDii.  When  llie  Ixns  arrive  at  theatre 
of  piih(M-tv  (or  al)itnt  t'oiirteeii),  the  elders  of  a  triln"  prepare  to  iiiitiato 
them  into  tlio  iluties  niid  privile;fes  of  manhood.  Suddenly,  at  ni;,'ht, 
a  dismal  cry  is  heard  in  the  woods,  which  the  hoys  are  told  is  the 
liri/ii'i  eallinLj  for  them.  'I'herenpon  all  the  mi'n  of  tiic  trihe  (or  rather 
ol'  the  nei^hhorliood)  set  oil"  for  some  secluded  spot  previously  lived 
u|)on,  takin^i  with  them  the  youths  who  ar(^  to  nndertio  the  ceremony. 
The  exact  nature  of  this  is  not  known,  except  thai  il  consists  of  super- 
stitious rites,  of  dances  repre.seiitiiiff  the  various  pursuits  iii  which 
men  are  en|.fai4ed,  of  sham-iii,'lits,  and  trials  desiiriu'd  to  prove  the  self- 
|)ossession,  coura>f»\  and  endiirama'  of  the  neophytes.  It  is  certain, 
however,  that  there  is  some  variation  iii  liie  details  «['  the  ceremonv, 
in  dillerent  places;  for  anionic  the  coast  trihcs,  one  of  these  is  the 
knockinif  out  of  an  upper  Iront  tooth,  which  is  not  done  at  W'el- 
liiifj;ton,  and  farther  in  the  interior.  Hut  the  nature  and  olijei  t  of  the 
institution  ajipeur  to  he  every  where  the  same.  Its  desiirn  umpu's- 
tionahly  is,  to  imprint  upon  the  mind  ol'  the  vounu;  man  the  rules  hy 
which  his  future  life  is  to  he  reijulated  ;  and  some  of  these  are  so 
striking',  and,  under  the  circumstances,  so  admiralile.  that  one  is 
inclined  to  aserihe  them  to  some  iii^hcr  stale  of  mental  cultivation 
than  now  prevails  amoiii;  the  natives.  'Thus,  liie  youiii;  men.  from 
the  time  they  are  initiated  till  they  are  married,  are  forliicMen  to 
approach  or  speak  to  a  female.  'I'liey  must  encamp  !il  a  distance 
from  them  at  niifht,  and  if  they  see  one  in  the  way,  must  make  a  lon<5 
detour  to  avoid  her.  Mr.  Watson  told  me  that  he  had  often  heen  put 
to  irnnit  inconvenience!  in  travelliiii^  throuu;h  the  woods  with  a  youii^ 
man  for  his  <(nide,  as  such  a  one  could  never  lie  iiuliiced  to  approach 
an  encampnu'iit  where  tlu^re  were  any  women.  The  moral  intent  of 
this  regulation  is  evident. 

Another  rule  rerpiires  the  youny;  men  to  pay  implicit  t)!)e(lience  to 
their  ciders.  As  there  is  no  distinction  of  rank  amoiiir  them,  it  is 
evident  that  some  authority  of  this  kind  is  recpiired  to  preserve  the 
order  and  harmony  of  social  intercourse, 

A  third  re<fulation  restricts  the  youth  to  certain  articles  of  diet. 
They  are  m)t  allowed  to  eat  lish,  or  egirs,  or  the  emu,  or  any  of  the 
finer  kinds  of  opossum  and  kani^aroo.  In  short,  their  fare  is  required 
to  be  of  the  coarsest  and  most  meairri!  description.  As  thev  grow 
older,  the  restrictions  are  removed,  one  after  another;  hut  it  is  not  till 
they  have  passed  the  period  of  midtUc  ago  that  they  are  entirely  uu- 


IT 


114 


irrir  noo  n  a  r  ii  v. 


rofttrniiiod  in  the  clinicc  of  food,  \\lirtlipr  ono  piiriinsc  of  lliis  law  lie 
to  iU'ciisluin  llu-  ymniv;  tni'ii  Id  ii  liiinlv  iind  siiiiplo  style  of  living;  iniiy 
be  doiilili'd  ;  hut  its  |iriiiu.'  Dliji-ct  and  its  result  eerliiiidy  are  In  pn*- 
vent  llie  yoiinii  <i"'ii  from  |iossessin<r  themselves,  i)y  their  superior 
htrennlh  and  ability,  of  all  the  more  desirable  arlieles  of  tood,  ami 
leaving,'  only  the  refuse  In  the  elders. 

'J.  The  eeremony  of  marriai,'e,  \viii<'ii,  amoii;;  most  nations,  is  con- 
sidered so  imporlanl  anti  interestinu',  is,  with  this  people,  oiie  of  the 
least  regarded.  The  woman  is  looked  upon  as  an  artiele  of  properly, 
and  is  sold  or  j^iven  away  by  her  relatives  « ithout  tim  slit(hlesl  eon- 


sideration  o 


f  her 


own    pleasure 


In  some  eases,  she  is  hetrotlu'd,  or 


ratiier  [iromised,  to  her  fulurt^  husiiand  in  tlu^  childhood  of  both,  and 
in  iliis  case,  iis  soon  us  they  arrive  at  a  proper  a^'c,  the  youu;^  man 


claims  iini 


I  re 


ceives 


her. 


ue  of  them  have  four  or  five  wives,  and 


in  sucii  a  ease,  they  will  t'ivc  one  to  a  friend  who  may  happen  to 
be  ilesliluto.  N'otwithstanduiu;  this  ajipariMit  la.xity,  they  are  very 
jealous,  and  resent  any  freeilom  taken  with  their  wives.  Most  of 
their  (luarri'ls  relate  to  women,     in  some  eases,  Iho  husband   wl 


10 


sus 


peels  .mother  native  of  seduciim  his  wife,  either  kills  or  sevtToIy 
injures  one  or  both  of  them.  Sonielimes  the  allair  is  taken  up  by  tho 
Ird)!',  who  intlici   punishment  alter  their  own  fashion. 


'I'i 


Ii'  manner 


of  this  is  another  of  llu'  sinifularilies  of  their  social  system. 

•i.  \\  hen  ii  native,  for  any  Iransi^ression,  incurs  tlio  displeasure  of 
his  tribe,  their  custom  obliiiiis  him  to  "  stau<l  pumshmeut,"  as  it  is 


called:— lliat  is,  lie  sti 


nils  \M 


th  a  shielil,  at  a  fair  distai 


ice,  w 


hil 


the 


whole  trii)e,  I'lther  simultaneously,  or  in  rapid  suceession,  cast  their 
spears  at  him.  'I'heir  expertuess  generally  eiiaiiles  those  who  are  e.\- 
jiosed  to  this  trial  1o  escape  without  serious  injury,  tlioimh  instances 


occasionallv  happen  of  a   latal   result. 


'I'll 


•re  IS  a  certain  propriety 


even  in  this  extraordinarv  |iiiiiislimeiit,  as  it   is  very  eviih'iit  Ih.'it  tho 
accuracv  ami   force  w  ith  which  the  weapons  are  llirowu  will  depend 
verv  much  U|ioii  the  opinion  eiilcrtaiiicd  of  the  enormity  of  the  olVenco. 
\\  hen   the   quarrel    is   bclween    lui)   persons  only,   and    tin;    tribi 


di 


lines  to   luterlerc,   it    is  sometimes  settled    hv   a  siny; 


iilar  kind  of 


(luclio. 


T 


le    |)arties    meet  III  presence  i 


if  their  kindred  and  friends. 


who  lonii  a  ( 


ircic  r 


iiiiiid  llinn  as  wilmsses  ami  iim|)ircs. 


'I"l 


lev  s 


taiKl 


up  opposite  one  another,  aimed  each  with  a  cliili  about  \\\o  feet  lon;^. 
The  in|iired  person  has  the  ni.'lit  of  slnkiiiif  the  lirst  blow,  to  receive 
wliicii  the  other  is  oi)liired  to  extend  his  head  forward,  with  the  side 
turned  partially  upwards.  'l"he  blow  is  indicted  with  a  Ibrcc  coin- 
mensurute  with  the  vindictive  feelinij  of  tin-  avenu'er.     A  white  iiiaii. 


A  r  H  T  n  A  I,  I  \ 


no 


Willi  nn  Driliiiiirv  cnniiiin,  wmilil   lie  Killed  (uitriylit;  Imt  owiiiij  to 


If   yrciit    tliickih'ss  ot   llii'ir   ^kiill.-,   iIii.h   xlilmii    li,i|>|iciis   with    llic 

cirlv  now  tiikcs  hiM  liini  to  ^ttrlkl',  miil  llio 


II 


lllltlNCS. 


'I'l 


II'  cim 


lli'i 


•«'''l 


oilier  isoliliueil  In  |il;u't'  himself  in  llie  >;iiiii'  poslure  o\  coiivi'nUMircv 
In  lliis  w.'iy  III!'  eoiiiliiit  is  I'oi.tiiiiicil,  with  ultiriiiile  liiilVels,  nntil  one 
ol    tlieiil  IS  >tliniieil,  or  the  e\|ilillloil  Is  eoiiMilereil  siitlshii'tory. 

•I.  \\  hal  are  called  wars  iiiiinnn  thein  iiimv  more  properly  lie  con- 
sidered duels  (if  this  wiird  may  lie  so  a|i|i|ied)  lietween  two  parties  ol' 
men.  One  or  more  natives  ol'  a  certain  part  ot  tlii^  country,  consi- 
»ieriiit(  themselvux  ai.'u'ri<'ved  iiy  the  ads  of  others  in  another  part, 
asseinlile  their  ni'iuhliors  lo  ronsiilt  w  illi   them  concerning  the  proper 


culirse  lo  he  lilirsiied 


'i'l 


le  i^enerai  opinion  haviiiir 


I'cil  declared  lor 


war,  a  me.ss(>ngor  or  amimssador  is  sent  to  aniioiiiice  their  iiitention  to 
These  inimediatelv  ii^seinlile  their  Iricnds  and 


le  o|i|iosile   iiarlv 


ilesl.      Ill 


some 


iiei;,'lihors,   and   all    prepare   lor   the   approachiiiLj   coi 

cases,  the  dav   is  lixeil   hy  the  messenoiT,  in  others  not;   Imt,  at  all 

('\eiits,  llii^  time  is  well  •  nderslood. 

The  two  armies  (nsnallv  Iroin  liity  to  two  hiiiulred  each)  m<u;l,  and 
al'ler  a  ynat  deal  of  mutual  Mtiiperatioii,  the  combat  ootniiienccs. 
From  their  siie^nlar  dexterity  in  avouliie^  or  |(arryinif  the  missiles  of 
llieir  adversaries,  llu^  enoaLU'inent  nsiiallv  conliniies  a  Ioiil;  timu  with- 
mit  any  fatal  result.  W  lieu  a  man  is  killed  (and  sometimes  liefore)  n 
cessation  lakes  place;  another  scene  o('  recrimination,  aim  e,  and  ex- 
planation ensues,  and  the  all'air  'ommonly  terminates.  iMI  .lostility  is 
al  an  end,  and  the  two  parties  mi.\  amicably  to;,'elher,  bury  the  dead, 
and  join  in  a  '^reneral  dance. 

T).  One  caiisi^  of  hostility  amonn  them,  both  public  and  privale.  is 
the  absurd  idea  which  lliey  enlerlain,  that  no  person  dies  a  natural 
death.  If  a  man  perishes  of  disease  al  a  distance  from  his  frii  nds,  Ins 
death  is  siippo.sed  to  have  been  caused  by  soiiK!  sorcerer  ot  anollier 
tribe,  whose  life  miisl  be  taken  lor  s;itisfactioii.  If.  on  tlie  other  h.iiid, 
he  dies  anion.!;  his  kindred,  the  iieaiisl  relative  is  held  responsible.    A 


native  of  the  tribe  at  Hunter's  Uivi 


who  si'rveil  me  as  a  <rnide,  liatl 


not  loiifjr  before  beaten  his  own  mother  nearly  to  death,  in  revenue  lor 
the  loss  of  his  brother,  who  died  while  under  lier  care.  This  was 
not  becau.se  he  bad  any  sus|ticions  of  her  conduct,  but  nierciy  in 
obedience  to  the  re(|uiremei    ^  of  ji  senseless  custom.* 


It  is  slii.l,  JKlWl'Vrr,  llilil   till.  Ii 


^<  uilli  wliiili  till'  Aii-ilniliun  Hiuiicn  urc  Iruutod 


l)y  llii'ir  liii>liiiiiili  Miincliini's  iiiduci'.s  ii    in  i.i  n.|aliiiic  j]'-  inixiiiu 


Willi  iIk!  liiod  uf 


tilt 


Tlic  ciislcini  rclirrcd  III  alu 


iiivc  iniiv  [huMlily  li.iM'  iinsiii   Iriiiii  tins  ciiu.si',  ii 


I  Ihi 


mid 


would  llmi  Ix.'  Hut  .-u  hIidIIv  iiiiitiisiui:iL>l 


('  !is  il  limy.  111  lirsi  sinlil,  ii|i|iinr. 


»! 


I 


"!»*"W>'^»"^w<i<»<i>t«"«>SEr~:^ac-ww" 


IIG 


KT  11  N  0(J  II  A  1'  II  Y. 


Tlie  fdrc^'oiniT  (losi'ri|)ti(iii  will  siillice  to  !j;ivo  ;i  rreneral  idea  of  the 
cliarai'tcr  and  customs  of  tliis  aiiiu;iilar  rac(!.  l''or  otlior  details  rela- 
tive to  their  lial)its  and  nsa;fes,  \\u'  reader  is  referred  to  tlie  j^eneral 
liistory  of  tlic  voya<j;o.  Wc  must,  however,  add  some  remarks  eon- 
ceriiiiiif  a  few  of  their  weapons,  which  deserve  notice  lor  their  peou- 
harity.  'I'iio  lirsl  is  the  spear  or  lance,  which,  in  its  shape  and  use, 
resiMnbles  that  of  the  I'oivncsians.  IJiit  it  is  thrown  by  means  of  an 
implement  called  a  inimnunt,  which  is  a  straii;ht  stick,  three  feet  in 
leiiij;tli,  terminatiiiir  at  one  end  in  an  upturned  socket,  into  which  the 
blunt  end  of  the  spear  is  fitted,  the  spear  itself  lieinjr  laid  flat  upon 
the  iraiunnia.  Moth  are  then  trrasped  in  one  hand  by  the  native, 
near  the  other  end  of  the  stick,  or  about  three  feet  from  the  end  of  the 
spear,  and  when  the  latter  is  discharired,  the  stick  is  retained  in  tho 
hand,  and  acts  as  a  lever  to  increase  its  velocity. 

'I'ho  ho'>vii'ranii,  or,  as  it  is  called  at  \\  ellin^'ton,  tho  hargmi,  is  per- 
iia|)s  the  most  curious  implement  ever  employed  in  warfare.  It  i.s 
shapcil  somewhat  like  a  saitre,  bcinif  a  (lat  stick,  three  feet  lonij;  and 
from  one  to  two  inches  in  breadth,  which  is  curved  or  crooked  at 
the  middle,  so  as  to  form  a  very  obtuse  aufrle.  Any  one  who  saw  it 
for  the  first  time  would  naturidly  set  it  down  for  a  clumsy  kind  of 
wooden  sword.  It  is,  however,  a  missile,  and,  in  the  haiuls  of  a 
native,  forms  a  tolerably  ellicient  weapon,  wiiit-h  is  used  not  only  in 
war,  but  in  taking  birds  and  other  small  animals.  It  is  i^ras|)eil  at 
one  end  by  the  ri<^ht  hand,  and  thrown  either  upwards  into  the  air,  or 
ol)liquely  downwarils,  so  as  to  strike  the  earth  at  sonii'  distance  from 
tlie  thrower.  In  the  former  case,  it  flics  with  a  rotary  motion,  as  its 
.shape  would  lead  us  to  e.xpcct.  After  ascendin<^  In  a  yreat  distance 
throuiili  the  air,  in  the  direction  lirsl  <^iven  to  it.  it  suddenly  re- 
turns in  an  elliptical  orbit,  to  a  spot  not  far  from  the  starling  point. 
Though  the  curve  thus  described  is  oiu;  which  ini;,dit  umpiestionably 
be  determined  by  inatiiematical  calculation,  we  must  sujipose  that  it 
was  accident  which  lirsl  taiiglil  the  use  of  this  extraordinary  weapon. 
When  thrown  towards  the  ground,  tiie  ela.sticity  given  by  its  curved 
shape  ciiuses  it  to  rt'boti.ul  and  lly  forwards;  it  continues  in  this 
direction,  touchinif  the  earlli  in  a  succession  of  rapid  leajis,  like  a  ball 
fireil  en  ricochet,  until  it  strikes  the  object  at  which  it  is  thrown. 


MIGRATIONS  OF  THE  OCEANIC  TRIBES. 


POLYNESIA. 


As  \\w  cxiiiniiiation  of  \\h\  nistdins  ami  idioms  of  llu'  Polynesian 
tribes  li-iives  no  room  to  doubt  tbiit  tliey  form,  in  fact,  but  a  sIiiltIc 
nation,  and  as  tlio  similarity  of  tlieir  dialects  warrants  tlic  su|)positiMn 
that  no  great  lenirtli  of  time  has  elapsed  since  their  dispersion,  we  are 
naturally  led  to  incjuirc  whether  it  may  not  be  possible,  by  the  com- 
parison of  their  idioms  and  traditions,  and  by  other  indications,  to 
determine,  with  at  least  some  deifree  of  probauility,  the  or-ginal  point 
from  which  their  separation  took  place,  and  the  manner  in  which  it 
was  elfected.  By  this  point  is  not  meant  the  primitive  seat  of  their 
race  in  the  Malaisian  Archipclairo,  thouLjh  we  may  hereufler  venture 
a  conjecture  with  regard  to  this,  but  merely  the  island  or  group  in  the 
Pacific  which  was  the  first  inhabited,  and  which  bore  to  the  rest  the 
relation  of  the  mother-country  to  its  colonies. 

The  first  result  of  ;i  careful  investigation  is  to  produce  the  convic- 
tion that  the  progress  of  emigration  was  from  west  to  east,  and  not 
in  the  contrary  direction.  This  conclusion  may  he  deduced  merely 
from  an  e.vaniination  of  the  comparative  grammar  and  vocabulary  of 
the  various  dialects.  We  see  in  those  of  the  western  groups  many 
forms  which  are  entirely  wanting  in  the  eastern  tongues;  others, 
which  are  complete  in  the  former,  are  iound  in  the  latter  defective, 
and  perverted  from  what  seems  evidently  their  original  meaning.  The 
reader  is  referred  to  H  40,  41,  54,  f)5,  of  the  Grammar,  with  respect 
es])ecially  to  the  desiderative  and  reciprocal  forms  of  the  verb,  the  i)as- 
sive  voice,  and  the  plural  of  the  possessive  and  tlemonstrative  pronouns. 

Other  comparisons  serve  to  confirm  this  general  deduction.  We 
find  in  the  west  a  comparatively  simple  mythology  and  spiritual 
worship,  which,  in  the  east,  is  perverteil  to  a  debasing  and  cruel 
idolatry.     The  fashion  of  tattooing,  whicli,  in  Samoa  and  Tonga,  is 

ao 


mm 


;    1 


i. 


118 


ET  II  .\  OG  R  A  I'  II  V. 


intended  to  answer  tlie  purposes  of  decency,  has  degenerated  elsc- 
wliere  into  a  mode  oi"  ornament.  Other  facts,  of  a  similar  nature, 
niiirht  be  mentioned,  l)ut  it  will  hardly  be  thought  necessary.  One 
circumstance,  liowevcr,  must  be  noted,  which  becomes  apparent  in 
this  investigation.  'I'lie  peo[)le  of  the  Tonga  or  Friendly  Group, 
though  lielonsiing  to  the  Polynesian  iamily,  form  a  class  apart  from 
the  rest.  This  is  seen  in  their  lani;uaire,  which  differs  strikii.^;,!"  in 
several  points,  from  the  others,  especially  in  the  article,  the  pronouns, 
anil  the  passive  voice  of  the  verb.  Several  of  their  customs  are,  more- 
over, peculiar,  such  as  that  of  infant  sacrifice,  of  cutting  off  a  finger 
to  appease  the  gods,  their  fashion  of  canoe-making,  &c.  It  is  evident 
that  these  islanders  have  re(;eived  modifications  in  their  language  and 
usages  from  a  source  which  lias  not  alfectcil  the  rest.  W't>  shall,  for 
the  present,  leave  this  group  out  of  the  ipiestion,  in  our  discussion, 
and  recur  to  it  herjafter. 

Before  [jroceeding  fartlier,  it  will  be  necessary  to  examine  the  only 
argument  of  importance  whicii  has  been  urged  against  the  migration 
of  the  eastern  isitinders  from  the  west.  This  is  the  supposed  preva- 
lence of  easterly  winds  witiiiu  the  tropics.  Against  this,  many 
voyagers  have  adduced  facts  serving  to  .show  that  the.se  winds  are  by 
no  means  constant,  ami  tliat  they  are  freciuently  interrupted  l»y  others 
from  the  contrary  direction  ;  and  somi-  have  suggested  the  connexion 
of  these  last  with  the  northwest  monsoon  of  the  China  and  Malayan 
Seas.*  The  observations  made  <luring  our  cruise  have  served  to 
confirm  this  opinion,  and  put  beyond  a  doubt  the  fact  that  during  the 
winter  months  of  our  hemisphere,  westerly  and  northwesterly  winds 
prevail  in  the  Pacihc  as  far  east  as  the  limit  of  the  Paumotn  Archi- 
[lelago,  and  perhaps  still  farther.  For  those  observations  the  reader 
is  referred  to  the  general  history  of  the  voyage.  We  will  only  men- 
tion here,  as  a  single  instance,  that  in  the  month  of  Fei)ruary,  181(1, 
we  were,  for  twenty  days,  kept  wind-bound  at  the  Navigator  Islands 
by  constant  and  strong  winds  from  the  northwest.  A  canoe  driven 
off  from  that  group  at  this  time,  would,  in  all  probability,  have 
lirought  up  on  some  one  of  the  Society  or  Ilervey  Islands.  It  is  at 
this  season,  and  with  this  wind,  moreover,  that  the  most  violent  gales 
are  experienced.     At  such  times  tlic  heavens  are,  for  days  togelher. 


*  S('c  Dillnn's  Voyngr.,  vol.  ii.  |i.  1"J4  :  Kiilzcliiio's  Vhviil'o  to  ilic  Smilli  l^i'ns  (l-'.iij.'. 
inins.),  vol.  ii,  p.  Vi'i  ;  Iti-irliiiy's  Vuyiijic,  p.  I(i4.  .\U.i  ('.  W.  Uoilhclcl.  in  Sillini/mV 
Aiiierican  .lournal  of  .SciLiico,  for  October.  IHtiJ,  p.  311'J. 


OCEANIC    MIGRATIONS. 


119 


obscured  by  clouds,  whicli  deprive  the  ishmd-voyager  of  his  only 
means  of  dotennininif  even  the  direction  in  which  he  is  driven. 

Mr.  Ellis,  whose  writinjrs  form  tlie  most  valuable  contribution  to 
tlie  stock  of  knowledire  which  we  possess  concerning  the  South  Sea 
Isliiuils,  observes  tliat  every  native  voyage  of  whicli  we  have  any 
account,  has  invariably  been  from  east  to  west.*  This,  tliough  it 
e.vi)resses  what  is  generally  true,  is  not  perfectly  correct.  The  greater 
number  of  such  voyages  are,  no  doubt,  in  that  direction,  because  the 
easterly  winds  blow  for  three-fourths  of  the  year,  and  it  is  chielly  at 
tliis  season  that  the  natives  put  to  sea  in  their  canoes.  But  not  to 
speak  of  instances  of  less  importance,  we  have  the  remarkable  case  of 
Kadu,  a  native  of  Ilea,  in  the  Caroline  Archii)elago,  who  was  found 
by  Kotzebue,  in  1817,  on  the  island  of  Aur,  one  of  the  lladack  Chain, 
to  which  he  had  been  driven  in  a  canoe  with  three  companions, — a 
distance  of  nearly  lifteen  hundred  miles  due  east.  Beechey,  in  like 
manner,  found  on  Barrow  Island,  in  the  Paumotu  Archipelago,  some 
natives  of  Chain  Island,  who  had  been  drifted  by  the  westerly  winds 
si.K  hundred  miles  to  the  eastward.  Though  the  distance  is  not  so 
great  in  this,  as  in  the  former  instance,  the  fact  is  hardly  less  impor- 
tant, from  the  circumstance  that  the  occurrence  took  place  near  the 
eastern  limits  of  I'olynesia. 

On  our  arrival  at  the  Navigator  Islands,  we  there  first  s;iw  tlie 
newly  published  work  of  the  Rev.  Joim  \\'illiams,  entitled,  '•  A  Nar- 
rative of  Missionary  Enterprise  in  the  South  Sea  Islands."  Of  the 
mass  of  information  which  it  contiiins,  I  was  especially  struck  with 
that  relatii;g  to  the  i)eopling  of  Karotonga,  tiie  inhabitants  t)f  \\  iiich 
consider  themselves  to  be  descended,  in  part,  from  emigrants  from 
tlie  Navigator  Grou[).  At  another  of  the  Ilervey  Islands,  Aitntiiki, 
the  inliaijitants  believe  that  their  ancestor  asceiuled  I'rom  a  region 
beneath,  termed,  Acailxi.\  This  account  called  to  mind  a  similar 
tradition  of  the  Mar(|uesans,  who  gave  to  the  lower  region  the  name 
of  llacailii.X  It  was  impossible  not  to  be  reminded,  at  the  same 
time,  of  the  Hatvui'i  of  the  Sandwich  Islands.  All  these  terms  are 
the  precise  Ibrnis  which  the  name  of  the  largest  of  the  Navigator 
Islands  {fiavdi'i)  would  assume  in  the  dill'erenl  dialects.     It  seemed 


*  I'lilyiii'si.'iii  l!csi'iu-clii>  (Am.  cilit.),  vol.  i.  p.  liiS. 

t  .Mi-i>i')ii;irv  Diili'rpi'iM',  p.  ."i7. 

|;  Strvv:ii-!'>  \ciyiigc  to  lliu  .Suulli  J^cas,  vol.  i.  p.  -yi-i 


"PW 


120 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


: 


111 


probable,  tlierefore,  tliat  by  foliowing  this  clue,  the  diflerent  tribes  of 
Polynesia  might  all  be  referred  back  to  their  original  seat.  On  com- 
municating the.se  views  to  Mr.  Williams,  (but  a  few  weeks  before  his 
lamented  death,)  he  informed  me  tiiat  he  had  long  entertained  the 
opinion  that  the  Samoan  Islands  were  the  source  of  population  to  the 
otlier  groups  of  Polynesia.  His  intimate  acquaintance  with  the  lan- 
guage and  traditions  of  tliree  of  the  principal  groups,  and  his  general 
information  on  this  subject,  gave  particular  weight  to  his  opinion. 
During  the  remainder  of  the  voyage  this  investigation  was  pursued, 
and  the  results  were  found  to  accord  perfectly  with  the  view  liere 
expressed.  In  the  writings  of  former  voyagers  many  statements 
were  found  incidentally  confirming  tiie  conclusion  thus  formed,  and 
the  more  valuable  as  they  were  made  with  no  reference  whatever  to 
such  a  supposition. 

Before  proceeding  farther,  a  word  of  e.vplanation  becomes  neces- 
sary, with  regard  to  the  name  of  the  island  above-mentioned. 
Throughout  Polynesia,  with  the  exception  of  .Samoa,  all  the  prin- 
cipal groups  are  known  to  tlie  people  of  the  other  groups  by  the 
name  of  their  largest  island,  used  in  a  general  sense,  as  we  commonly 
say  England  for  tlie  whole  group  of  British  Islands.  Thus  the 
Sandwich  Islands  are  termed  Hanaii, — tlie  Marcpiesas,  Nnlmhiva, — 
the  Society  Islands,  Tahiti, — the  Gambier  Group,  Ma/igareva,  and 
the  Friendly  Islands,  Tonga.  The  Navigators,  only,  have  a  distinct 
name  for  their  group.  This  word,  Samoa,  signifies  in  Malay  all;  it 
probably  had  originally  the  same  signification  in  this  dialect,  and  was 
applied  to  the  group,  as  we  use  the  word  "  Union,"  in  speaking  of  the 
United  States.  In  process  of  time  it  lost  its  general  meaning,  as  an 
adjective,  and  became  a  mere  appellative.  At  present,  the  only  term 
for  all,  in  this  idiom,  is  uma,  which  means,  properly,  finished,  com- 
plete. Before,  however,  the  name  Samoa  came  into  general  use, — or 
while  it  retained  its  primary  sense  of  all, — some  other  means  of 
designating  the  group  must  have  been  necessary,  particularly  for 
natives  of  other  islands.  It  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  the  same 
mode  was  adopted  here  as  elsewhere,  and  that  the  name  of  the  prin- 
cipal island  was  used  for  this  purpose. 

By  referring  to  the  table  of  dialectical  changes,  given  in  the  Com- 
parative Grammar,  \  2,  it  will  be  perceived  that  this  name  would, 
as  has  been  already  intimated,  undergo  certain  alterations  in  the 
various  idioms.  The  following  are  the  regular  forms  as  they  may 
be  deduced  from  the  table : 


OCEANIC    JI  I  G  11  A  T  I  O  .\  S.  121 

1.  Orii;iiinl  r(irrii, Siiriii/ci. 

'■1,  Siiiiiiiaii  illnk'Ot, Sifiii'L 

.').  'I'liliiliiiii, Jhivai'i. 

4.  Snmlwii'li  Isliiiiil, lliinni'i. 

5.  Kiii(>l()n;;im  mid  Mniij;nri.'vnii, Afdi/.i. 

0.  Nukuliiv.in, Ilaiaihi. 

7.  \i«  Zi'uliind, Hull  (tiki. 

It  will  be  found  that  this  is,  so  to  speak,  tlie  key-word,  wliich 
unlocks  the  mystery  of  the  Polynesian  migrations. 

T  A  II I  1'  I,  c)  It  T  II  i:  s  ()  (•  1 1:  r  v  i  s  i,  a  x  n  s. 


As  our  attention  was  not  drawn  to  this  subject  of  investigation 
(that  which  connects  the  Polynesians  with  Savaii)  until  after  we  left 
this  group,  we  are  unable  here  to  add  any  thing  to  what  has  been 
given  by  others.  Fortunately,  this  is  amply  sufficient  for  our  pur- 
pose, and,  as  already  remarked,  has  the  great  advantage  of  having 
been  obtained  and  published  without  the  possibility  of  a  reference  to 
any  hypothesis  like  that  now  advanced. 

Mr.  Ellis,  in  his  Polynesian  Researches  (vol.  ii.  p.  234,  American 
edition)  says; — "  Opon  is  the  most  remarkable  place  in  Raiatea;  of 
its  earth,  according  to  some  of  their  traditions,  the  first  pair  were 
made  by  Tii  or  Taaroa,  and  on  its  soil  they  fi.ved  their  abode.  Here 
0;o  held  his  court.  It  was  called  Hawaii ;  and  as  distant  colonies 
are  said  to  have  proceeded  from  it,  it  was  probably  the  place  at  which 
some  of  the  first  inhabitants  of  the  South  Sea  Islands  arrived."  As 
there  is  no  iv  in  the  Tahitian  langiiage  (at  least  in  the  usual  orthogra- 
phy), it  is  here  eviilently  written  instead  of  a  v.  In  another  part  of  the 
same  work,  (vol.  i.,  p.  105,)  the  author,  in  treating  of  the  origin  of  the 
Society  islanders,  inclines  to  refer  them  to  the  Sandwich  Islaiids,  his 
principal  reason  being  that  "in  some  of  their  [the  Tahitian]  tradi- 
tions Ilaivaii  is  mentioned  as  the  ancient  name  of  Opoa  and  Oro,  who 
is  by  some  described  as  both  god  and  man,  as  having  two  bodies  or 
forms,  or  being  a  kind  of  connecting  link  between  gods  and  men,  is 
described  as  the  first  king  of  Ilawiiii  or  Opoa  in  Raiatea."  -  The 
Tahitian  v  is  fre(|ueiilly  sounded  like  /r,  and  Mr.  Ellis  here  evidently 
chooses  the  latter  element  in  order  to  show  more  clearly  the  resem- 
blance or  rather  identity  of  the  name  with  tlic  Ilaivaii  of  the  Sand- 
wich Islands.  He  was  not,  at  that  time,  aware  of  the  e.^ci-stence  of  a 
Savaii  in  the  west;  had  he  been  so,  we  may  conclude  that  the  reason 

31 


133 


ETII  XOO  R  A  PH  Y. 


which  led  him  to  derive  the  Society  Islanders  from  the  nortiicrn 
group,  would  have  induced  liiin  to  refer  both  the  Ilawaiis  to  tiiat 
source. 

Cook,  in  the  history  of  his  first  voyage  (vol.  il'..,  p.  G9),  comparing 
the  New  Zealauders  with  the  South  Sea  (i.  e.  Society)  islanders, 
observes  that  "tiie^v  have  both  a  tradition  that  their  ancestors,  at  a 
very  remote  period  of  time,  came  from  another  country ;  and,  accord- 
ing to  the  tradition  of  both,  the  name  of  that  country  is  Ileawije." 
There  is  no  j  in  either  the  New  Zealand  or  Tahitian  language.  It 
may  be  a  mistake,  made  in  printing  or  copying,  for  </,  the  hard  sound 
of  which  is  frecjuently  given  by  the  Polynesians  to  their  k ;  in  this 
case  Hean'igi-  would  be  the  English  orthography  for  the  New  Zealand 
word  Hau'iiiki* 

But  the  most  important  testimony  is  that  furnished  by  a  chart 
drawn  by  Titpaia  (or  Ti/jMii/(t),  the  native  who  accompanied  Captain 
Cook  in  his  first  voyage, — and  i)ublishcd  by  J.  R.  Forster,  in  his  "  Ob- 
servations made  during  a  Voyage  round  the  World.''  It  contains  the 
names  of  all  the  islands  known  to  Tupaia,  either  from  having  visited 
them,  or  by  tradition.  The  extent  of  information  displayed  in  it  is 
sur|)rising.  We  find  every  important  group  of  Polynesia,  except  the 
Sandwich  Islands  and  New  Zealand,  laid  down,  though  not  accu- 
rately, yet  with  a  certain  attention  to  bearings  and  distances,  which 
enables  us  to  identify  them.  What  gives  its  cliief  value  to  the  chart, 
is  the  fact  that,  at  the  time  it  was  drawn,  more  than  half  the  islands 
which  it  contains  were  unknown  to  FJuropeans,  and  of  tiiose  which 
had  been  discovered  the  native  names  of  very  few  were  ascer- 
tained. Much  confusion  has  been  made  in  the  chart  by  a  mistake  of 
those  for  wiiom  Tupaia  drew  it.  Knowing  that  toeriu  in  Tahitian 
signified  the  north  (or  northwest)  wind,  and  toa  tlie  south,  they  con- 
cluded naturally  that  apatoerau  and  apatoa  were  names  applied  to  the 
corresponding  points  of  the  compass;  whereas  apatoerau  signifies,  in 
fact,  the  point  towards  which  the  north  wind  blows, — i.  e.  tlie  south, 
and  apatfxi,  for  the  same  reason,  the  north.  By  not  understanding 
this,  they  have,  so  far  as  these  two  points  are  concerned,  reversed  the 

*  Tin-  //,  111  the  iK'^rinniiijr  ,,|";i  word,  in  llic  diiili'cls  of  .\i,'W  Zcnlanil  and  Tidiili,  wliiii 
It  takes  (lie  pl;if('  of  tlio  Suinoan  s,  lius  ii  pocidinr  liissiiii;  sound,  which  some  hiivc^  rcpif. 
sciited  by  s/i,  others  by  rh,  others  liy  /ir,  or  /t\  or  simply  c.  Thus  the  word  Iwnifi,  from 
the  Samoan  so/igi,  meaning  to  salute  by  pix'.saing  noses,  has  l)een  s|)ellecl  by  dilliTent 
writers,  slioii^i,  ilnjiifii,  hroiigi,  h'oitgi,  and  congi.  This  is  evidently  llie  orifjin  ol"  tlie 
//(  in  till;  worii  Ilrnwijr. 


I^»- 


O  C  i:  A  .\  I  (•    M  I  (i  11  A  T  I  O  .N  S. 


123 


cliart  completely,  and  it  is,  in  laet,  printed  upside  down.  B<it  not 
content  witli  this,  it  is  apparent  tliat  tiiese  iriMitlcnien  ((-"aptain  Cook, 
Mr.  Banks,  and  Lientenanl  Piekerscrill,  wlioin  Forster  mentioned  ns 
liavin^;  obtained  the  eliarl)  overlooked  Tnpaia  while  he  was  drawing, 
and  siiiTirosted  corrections,  whicli  his  idea  of  their  superior  knowledge 
induced  him  to  receive  atrninst  his  own  convictions.  This  is  clear, 
from  the  fact  that  all  the  groups  and  i.slauds  with  which  the  Hnglish 
were  not  ac(piainted  are  laid  down  rightly,  according  to  the  real 
moaning  of  (ijxitom/ii  and  tipiitoa,  hut  wrong  acconling  to  the  mean- 
ing which  tho.se  gentlemen  ascrihed  to  the  words;  while  the  islands 
wliose  position  tiiey  knew  (the  Manpiesas  and  Paumotns)  arc  placed 
exactly  as  they  should  he,  according  to  this  mistaken  meaning,  but 
altogether  out  of  the  proper  hearings  when  these  are  rightly  under- 
stc.id.  This,  of  cour.se,  makes  great  confusion,  which  can  only  be 
rectified  when  its  origin  is  perceived.* 


•  A  Cdpy  of  this  cliarl  is  given  on  Ihi!  op|X)silc  \m<n;  rcdiiccil  lo  liiill'  the  origirmi  size. 
The  only  iilli'i'iilinri  niiidc  in  il  is  llic  ciniission  nl"  the  l')iij;lisli  imincs  assigned  liv  Korslcr 
to  some  iifllie  islands,  uliicli  are  generally  ernmecais.  Thus  he  sn|ip(i.ses  O-d/inti  (ii'ia), 
pro|HMly  Chain  Islanil,  lo  Ihj  Ihe  IVinre  of  Wales'  Island,  «hili'  l{<iiriki,  to  whirh  the 
Intler  name  nally  helimgs,  is  set  down  (iir  CarlslinlV;  llillr-piilln,  one  ol"  the  lliti  or 
Feejee  Cinnip,  is  marked  Snvnge  Island,  iVc.  It  will  lie  sec>n  that  while  the  north  and 
south  point.s  huvc  been  reversed,  the  east  and  west  are  eorrectly  given.  OjMl'Xjrrau  is 
liir  o  ii/uilorrHit,  meaning  .south,  and  Op'itiri  (iir  o  djitilim,  north.  TiitahaieUi.  (pro|ierly 
tatahiiitd)  is  "morning,"  and  Olir.'Va'ilirii  should  W'  ii  lii/i  o  tc  rit,  "the  rising  ol"  the 
sun."  Tiniili  is  lor  the  Intler  part  ol'  the  phrase  te  nitiiri  rait  i  tc  iri  a  tai,  lilerally, 
"the  sinking  (of  the  son)  lo  the  level  ol'  the  se;i."  'Dxitrra  is  for /<«  o  ^' /•«,  sunset. 
7V/VJ  Ijiuiilli'ii  (/(■  III  r  urnlin)  means,  "  Ihe  sun  is  at  lUHin."  Of  the  seventy-nine 
names  given  on  Ihe  chart,  forly-nine  (supposing  those  in  which  the  term  llitte  occurs  to 
l)elong  to  Ihe  Iv'cjec  Oroup)  can  Ik'  iileiitilied.  .\s  lo  Ihe  remainder,  the  uncerluinty 
prohnlily  proccn-ds,  in  most  cases,  from  ndslakes  on  Ihe  part  either  of  Tupaia  (who  gave 
the  names  and  hicalities  merely  I'rom  tradition)  or  of  those  to  whom  he  communicated  Ihe 
inli>rmation,  or,  fmally,  of  Forster  hims<>lf,  who  made  out  the  chart  from  two  copies,  dif- 
fering from  one  another  in  some  res|H'cts,  and  selected  the  names  from  liiiir  separate  lists. 
Of  these  he  remarks, — "  some  of  the  names  were  strangely  s\\c\\,  as  tliere  never  were 
two  pers(ms,  in  Ihe  last  and  former  voyages,  who  s|)elt  the  same  name  in  the  same 
manner,"  One  conse(|uence  of  this  discrepancy  in  Ihe  original  charts  anil  list:*  has  l)een 
thai,  in  making  his  selectiiuis,  I'orster  has,  in  some  cases,  given  the  same  island  twice. 
Thus  we  have  llailunuii  and  Hrrvanii,  both  for  Ixiiiiiivai ;  liiniiitnrrii  and  liimalema 
both  for  HiiiiiUiira  ;  Ailrilin  and  ^^'nlll■l■m,  Isith  probably  li)r  Atiii  (  Wimreen  for  O-AHii, 
tlie  r  and  /  iinving  been  conl'oun<l<'d  in  copying,  as  we  see  in  TT7/((/ci'rt  for  I'liiirava,  one 
of  the  I'aumotus).  Notwithstanding  these  errors  of  a  kind  unavoidable  in  such  n  per- 
formnnci',  Ihe  chart  is  a  most  valuable  one,  as  proving,  In'yond  a  doubt,  the  extensive 
knowledge  possessed  by  the  Tahitinns  of  liie  otiier  Polynesian  groups. 


124 


K  T  H  N  O  (J  R  A  1'  II  V. 


Tlie  westernmost  cffoup  on  tliis  oliart  consists  of  cij^ht  isliiruls,  with 
compound  namos,  all  bcy^innin^'  or  cudini;  with  hittc, — as  llitti-polto, 
Te-ciDi'iroo-liitte.  Sec.  Hid  is  \\\o  form  which  the  Samoan  won!  Fid 
(Fit'jci)  would  talic  in  Taliitian.  One  of  tlicso  islands,  Ohilcroa, 
answcrin;^  to  Viti-/rrit,  has  bciMi  removed  from  its  proper  place,  as 
M'ill  bo  shown  hereafter,  hy  llie  same  sort  of  "correction"  as  was 
applied  to  the  Manpiesas  and  I'lmmotu  Cirnups. 

To  the  east  of  tiiis  row  of  islets  is  another,  still  larfjier,  with  the 
names  Wre/ui,  Uofoonut,  Ifeiimti,  Oopnrrm,  Wouiroii,  ToDtomrrr,  and 
Oiiir/iffi.  These  are  evidently  ieo  (Wallis's  Island),  liotiiiiid,  Snmiii, 
I'polii,  'Viituila,  and  Viha  (one  of  the  Ilabai  cluster).  The  lirst  and 
last,  from  the  similarity  of  names,  seem  to  have  become  confused 
together,  and  Vavan  is  laid  down  out  of  its  place, — but  there  is 
reason  to  believe  that  it  was  formerly  considered  as  beloniring 
politically  to  the  Navigator  Group,  to  which  it  approaches  nearest 
of  any  of  the  Friendly  Islands.  It  should  be  observed  that  on  many 
of  the  principal  islands  Tupaia  made  brief  descriptive  observations, 
which  are  given  by  Forster.  Ueaoai  is  laid  down  five  or  six  times  the 
size  of  any  other  island,  and  Tupaia  slated  that  it  was  larger  than 
Tahiti, — adding  this  remarkable  observation, — "it  is  the  father  of  all 
the  islands." 

Combining  these  various  traditions,  we  shall  probably  be  thought 
justified  in  sup|)osing  that  the  first  settlers  of  the  Society  Islands 
came  originally  from  the  Samoan  Group,  and  landed  or  established 
themselves  first  at  the  place  now  called  Opoa,  on  Haiatea,  which  they 
named  Ilarati,  after  the  principal  island  of  their  native  country. 
'Oro  (or  more  properly  Koro)  may  have  been  their  chief  at  the  time 
of  the  migration.  Concerning  the  probable  period  at  which  this 
occurred,  we  shall  olfer  some  considerations  in  another  place. 

Additional  evidence  that  the  earliest  Taliitian  traditions  are  of 
Samoan  origin  may  be  derived  from  the  work  of  Mr.  Moerenhout 
(formerly  American  consul  at  Tahiti),  entitled,  "  Voi/iiijcs  rii/.c  I/es  dti 
Grand  Orfan,"  in  which  we  find  an  ancient  mythological  ode, — 
obtained  from  an  old  Taliitian  priest,  —  which  the  author  justly 
esteems  of  much  importance.  Its  value  is  perhaps  even  greater 
than  he  supposed.  It  relates  the  creation  of  the  world  and  of  the 
inferior  deities,  as  accomjilished  by  Taaroa.  The  first  part  informs 
us  that  Taaroa  existed  from  the  beginning,  and  that  he  formed  the 
world  from  his  own  sub.stance.     It  concludes  as  follows : 


OC  K  A  N  \r    SI  I  ti  a  A  T  I  ON  s. 


13ft 


MR.  M.  »  IIRTIIOIIRAI'IIV. 

TitiiriMi  It  jiiiiiri 
Jiinnii  Jitiimu  liod'ii  ; 

lnKt'ii   HfJtli  ftttt^ 

ei  JUKI  no  TiiniiKt, 
It  minri  rii  liiKiiid. 


NATIVK  <lKTIICl(IH\rilV. 

'I'liiiiixi  Ir  piiaii 


TRA>n|,\TI(>.N. 

'ranniii  llio  Hisc 


/iiiiiiii  JhiiKi  I  Inn  II  a  ;    |pri«lii(c(l  llii'  ImikI  lliiwiiii; 


lliiiiiin  iilii  run, 
I'i  pun  nil  Tnniiin, 
Iri  niinri  rn  Jiiiint, 


I  liiwiiii  ^I'l'iil  mill  siiri'i'il, 
IIS  II  slii'll  (Ixiilx )  lor  'rmiriiii, 
wliiMT(iilril(Mr  vivilii'il)  llii'ttiirld. 


'I'liaf,  l)y  himii,  Mr.  MocrcnliniU  mciins  tci  spell  (in  llin  Frcricli 
ortliojrrapliy)  huivaii,  is  I'vidnit  from  tlie  tact  tliiil  on  jiaifi!  r)")"^,  of 
this  volume,  lio  rf(|iiot>'s  tlio  passii;re  which  we  liave  {.fivcn  alxivo, 
anil  spells  this  word  iiIkiH,  and  on  puift^  '-2'21,  of  the  second  volume,  he 
remarks  thai  ()//«/7  is  the  name  of  the  largest  of  the  Sandwich 
Islands  [Ihiwmi).  Mr.  Mocrenhont  renders  ohaii  i>y  universe,  and  it 
is  likely  enoiijfh  that  this  may  he  the  ineaninu  now  attached  to  it  hy 
the  Tahitian  priests.  'I'he  second  part  of  the  ode  continues  the  work 
of  creation,  and  ends  with  the  line  "/pan  fenoim  no  lioti/r  (or,  i-  jxtu 
J'cHiKi  no  Itdirfiii), — (inislied  is  the  land  of  Hawaii.  The  third  part 
relates  the  oriifin  of  the  jijods  who  were  horn  of  Taaroa  and  his  wives, 
after  the  creation  of  oliii/i,  and  ends  with  "  t('i  moiia  iri  tr  utoiKi  Roo 
iirari  nti  i  iroto  /'pou  fininii  oiijiarou,"  which  should,  perhaps,  he  '■'tei 
vuKt  iri  tr  atiid  lion  a  rare  ii(t  ei  rotopii  Jiinaii  Uporu," — the  ifod  Uoo 
remained  in  front,  and  seeinij  that  which  was  within,  jjroduced 
Uporu.  This  version  is  ol)scure  and  may  not  he  altoLfcthcr  correct; 
but  fiiuiiii  oii/mroii,  like  /(///^///  /'iiioiifi  hoaii,  can  hardly  he  mistaken. 
Upolit  is  the  second  of  the  Samoan  Islands,  nearly  e(|ual  in  size  and 
importance  to  Savaii.  There  can  he  little  douht  that  this  is  an 
ancient  Polynesian  mythos,  relatin^f  to  the  supi)osed  orijfin  of  the 
Navi^iator  Islands,  and  that  it  was  hroui^ht  from  thence  hy  the  first 
emiifrauts  to  Tahiti,  where  it  has  [)robahly  underifone  only  such 
alterations  as  the  gratlual  change  in  the  language  rendered  nece.s.sary. 


NL'KI   IIIVA,  ()|{    Tin:    M  AUglKSAS    I  S  I,  A  N  0  S. 

That  which  lirst  strikes  us  in  this  groui),  i.s  the  number  of  dia- 
lectical dillerences  in  the  language  as  spoken  at  the  various  islands, 
and  even  between  diirerent  districts  of  the  same  island.  Mr.  Alex- 
ander says,*  "On  the  island  of  Nukuhiva,  the  iiihahitaiits  of  the  'ieii 
and  'I'liipi  districts  may  he  as  readily  distinguished  as  a  Scotchman 
and  a  Yankee,  while  a  Tahuatan  may  be  tlistinguished  from  them 

•  Huwailun  Sjicctator,  <iuv  .lammry,  Ha-*,  |i.  17. 


|){g  KT  II  \()(i  II  A  I' II  V. 

botli.  The  Tnipi,  like  tho  iiilmbitiints  of  Iho  Horvey  and  Friciully 
IslamlH,  list's  tlie  deep  miltural  nij  {}))  for  wliieli  the  'I'eii  uses  k,  niid 
tho  Tahiiatan,  hke  tlio  llawiiiiaii,  uses  n.  To  dlu.struto  thiH  a  few 
examples  will  siillico  : — 

TKII.  TAII-r.  rAIII   VIA, 

hiikiiikii,     ,     .     .  Imiiiiipi,     .     .     .  Iiiikiiiiiu,     .     .     .  I'litlli-. 

Iiiikd,     ....  /i(iii/;ii /iiiiiii,      ....  «(irk. 

matttki,       ,     .     .  niiiliinf!!,     ,     .     .  iini/iiiii,  ....  ttiiiil. 

iiimk'i,  ....  iiimiii:!!,      .     .     .  iiiixiiii II  mill." 

Hy  a  short  V(ical)iilary  of  tlie  laiiijiiaL'e  of  l-'uluhini,  ol)taiii('(l  from 
SI  native  at  Taiiiti,  it  appears  that  the  /'  is  in  use  in  tliat  island,  and 
prol)al)!y  in  the  rest  of  the  southern  ehistcr,  instead  of  the  k  which 
prevails  in  the  northern,*  as — 

F.\I'IIIIV\,  .MKIIIIVA. 

Jiijd, Ii'ili'i, inoiilli, 

Jiiit, hiiu sl.ir. 

filii Iiilii, scviri. 

lull, hull, Iiiw. 

'I'hore  is  also  a  wide  diirerenet^  in  tlie  mode  of  ennnieration  at  tho 
two  clusters,  hoth  in  the  words  used  ami  the  value  adi.vetl  to  them, 
for  which  sec  the  (irainmar,  '(31. 

There  is  no  other  jirou[)  of  Polynesia  in  which  variations  to  this 
extent  prevail,  an<l  it  is  impossihle  to  iicconiit  for  them  satisfactorily 
merely  from  the  division  of  tho  people  into  nninorous  tribes.  This 
cause  should  operate  mucli  more  stroiiiily  in  \ew  Zeidand  than  at 
the  .Mar(|uesas  Ishuids,  yet  tlie  same  laniruai^e  and  pron\inciation 
prevail,  Jis  we  were  assured  by  tho  missionaries,  with  so»;ie  trillinj^ 
exceptions,  from  C'ooU's  Strait  to  the  North  Cape.  The  most  natural 
solution  is  that  the  two  clusters  in  tho  Maniucsau  (iroup,  received 
their  population  orii,'inall3-  from  ditferent  sources,  and  that  tho  de- 
scendants of  the  first  colonist.s,  iuteriniii<^ling  in  various  pro[)ortions, 
have  formed  several  tribes,  which,  thou<fli  bearin;^  a  general  resem- 
blance to  one  another,  do  not  constitute  a  homogeneous  whole,  a.s  in 
the  other  groups  of  J'olynesia.  The  ditrorent  counties  of  England 
and  provinces  of  France  are  examples  of  the  same  etfect  pro<luced  by 
a  similar  cause.  It  has  been  found,  moreover,  that  much  of  the  social 
polity  and  many  of  the  customs  which  prevail  in  the  southern  cluster 
of  the  Marquesas,  are  unlike  those  of  the  northern. 

*  This  obscrvalioii  has  liccn  since  confirmed  from  Mr.  Crook's  MS,  grammar. 


OC  K  A  N  IC    M  I  (i  It  A  T  I  O.N  S. 


I -J? 


y 


Tlio  trailitions  of  tho  iintivcs  coiilirtn  tlio  opinion  hi-rn  c'X[)ri'xsc'(l. 
Mr.  Stuwiirt,  in  his  intcrcsliiii,'  "Visit  to  \\w  Soiitli  Sens,"  (vol.  i.  p. 
27.'J,)  fiivcs  lis  till' liclicC  of  llio  .Miinnicsims  (•oncoriiinLf  the oriijiu  of 
tlirir  islaiiils.  As  this  iiccoimt  is  derived  from  Mr.  Crook,  it  iioloiij^s 
in  nil  proU.'ihihly,  to  tiie  |)eop|(!  of  the  southern  ehistcr.  'I'hcy  Ix^lieve 
"  tliat  the  hind  coinposiny;  their  isiiiiids  wiis  oik'c  iocnteil  in  llnniihi. 
or  the  re^fions  lielow, — the  phiee  of  (U'parled  spirits, — and  lliat  tiiey 
rose  t'roin  tiieneii  tliroii:,di  tlie  ell'orlsufa  ^"m1  heneatii  them."* 

On  the  otiuT  hand,  Captain  I'orter,  in  liis  Voyaue  to  lliti  I'aeifu'. 
(vol.  li.  p.  20),  iid'orms  ns  tlial  the  natives  of  Nid<uhiva  liave  tiic 
tnitlition  that  "the  first  selth-rs  ettme  from  \'itnii),  iiii  island  under- 
neatli  Nidinidva." 

The  lan|,riiai^e,  so  far  as  our  materials  eiialile  ns  to  jmltie,  shows 
traces  of  ii  doid)le  origin,  such  as  miyht  lie  inferred  from  this  tradi- 
tion. Tho  ^roat  mass  of  ^t  is  'I'ahitian,  as  may  he  seen  in  the 
(Jomparative  N'oeaindary.  Theri!  iire,  however,  several  peenliarities 
in  whieh  it  ditl'ers  from  Ihi.;,  and  approaches  that  of  the  Friendly 
(iroup  to  which  Vnrmi  l)elon;,rs.  One  ot  tht^  most  striluiiLj  is  tiie 
omission  of  the /•  (or  raliier /)  which  is  universal  in  the  M;ir(|iiesan. 
and  freipicnt  in  the  'I'ongan,  uikI  which  is  uiduiuwii  in  the  other 
dialect.s,  as — 


MAIlm  Il.SAN. 

TliMl  AN. 

IMil.YNKSI.W. 

tm^ 

'/", 

.       .      ({/(I,      , 

til  lot.'iki 

itito  iir  I'/t'fif  , 

Olio,     , 

,       .      lintOy     . 

.     Ill  lir.ir. 

iiiiiiiiiiii, 

ItlOOtlfl, 

nm/iiiiiii^ 

.     Ii,-lil. 

iii/.i,  .     .     . 

.  <il.l,  .   . 

.     .     lilU.i,  .     .     . 

.      rllicl'. 

(i/.iiii,  Ici'ini, 

tiK'ltHy 

.       lohlDI,        .       . 

,      Irrr. 

iiiii,    .     .     . 

,      rtitly     .       . 

.     lino,    .      .     . 

.     Iiiriiicrii' 

There  are  also  several  wortis  in  the  Nukuhivuii  which  seem  to  he 
of  Ton^jan  oriifin,  its — 


MAlim  KSAN. 

Tt.NtiAN. 

TAUITIAS. 

ohiiiiii,    ,     . 

.      ohilllil,      . 

.     .     til  lit;  .     .     . 

,     .     Iiiisl>anil, 

o/h,     .     .     . 

offt. 

.     .     iirolm,     .     . 

,     .      love. 

IdlllKl,       .       . 

.     tilll'tll, 

.      .      lllllVlC,       .      . 

,     liiiva-lxml. 

hiiijio,     ,     , 

.       ItiltlK), 

.     iihii,    .     .     , 

,     .     unlive  cloth, 

liiliiimi,  .     . 

.     tii/inm,    . 

,       .       tlllllKI,        .       , 

,     .     nrtisnn. 

oiiultiiu,  .     .     , 

onif/ii/iif  , 

.     .     a/iiirii,     ,     , 

.     Ii-ii. 

tiktiu,  (\uk.) 

.     /</,a«,      . 

.     .    liikdu,     .     , 

.     twenty. 

•  In  Mr.  Crook's  Mnrqnesim  Diclionnry  wv.  liiid  llie  lollowinj^  (lefinillon :  '^  Ifavdiki 
or  Ilafiiii,  iIm;  ref^lons  Ih'Iow,  the  invisible  world  ;  liipii  luiviiii,  to  plunge  into  eternily ; 
ua  vi'ite  havaii,  lie  is  iib.solulily  ilenil,"  &c.  The  onii.ssion  ol'llie  k  in  these  expressions 
shows  that  they  are  to  he  relerred  to  the  southern  or  Tahualan  cluster. 


129 


E  T  n  N  O  O  R  A  P  H  Y. 


Tlio  natives  of  the  Frieiully  Islniuls,  ns  we  have  hefore  renmrkeJ, 
have  several  peculiar  customs,  which  they  have  derived,  apparently, 
from  their  Feejeeaii  neii^lihors.  Some  of  tlie  most  remarkahle  of 
these  are  found  also  at  Nukuliiva.  'L'luis  the  Feejeeans,  who  take 
ji;reat  pains  in  dressinir  their  hair  in  a  fri/zlcd  mass  resemhliiiu;  a  huge 
bushy  wiir,  are  aeeustonied,  in  order  to  preserve  lliis  from  injury,  to 
wt-ar  a  kinii  of  turlian,  or  head-wrapper,  of  very  line  while  paper- 
cloth.  'I'lie  Toiitia  |)eo|ile,  wlio  have  no  such  reason  for  tiie  custom, 
hav(i  yet  adopted  it  merely  for  ornanieiit,  and  we  fuid  it  also  amon;j; 
tiie  Mar(piesaiis.  'I'lie  description  which  I'orter  irives  of  the  tnrl)ans 
worn  l)y  the  latter,  miu;lit  stand,  wonl  for  word,  (except  oidv  tlic 
name,)  for  a  description  of  the  same  artii'le  -t  the  l-'cejee  (iroup. 
Aiiain,  the  Feeiecans  set  a  singnhu-  value  u|)on  the  teetii  of  the  whale, 
which  are  used  hy  them  for  ornaments,  and  also  as  a  kind  of  circu- 
latinuf  medium.  In  tiic  Friendly  Islands  they  are  eipially  prized,  hut 
only  as  ornaments, — and  the  same  is  the  case  at  the  Manpiesas.  The 
statement  of  (Japtain  I'orter,  that  a  ship  mis^hl  he  stocked  with  pro- 
visions at  this  yronp  (or  a  lew  of  these  teeth  is  ecpially  true,  at  this 
day,  of  the  Feejee  Isliuids.  Nothing  like  this  has  ever  hcen  known 
at  cither  'Tahiti  or  Samoa. 

0\\  tlie  wliol(>,  it  seems  prol)al)le  that  the  northern  portion  of  the 
Miu'ipicsan  (ironp  was  lirst  settled  l)v  emigrants  tVom  \  avau,  and  the 
soutliern  hv  otiiers  I'rom  'I'aliiti,  and  that  tlii'ir  ilescendants  havt>  vince 
graduallv  intermingled.  The  Tahitians  may  iiave  hi-en  the  most 
numerous,  and  |)erliaps  received  additions  from  time  to  time,  from 
their  parent  countrv,  whn-ii  is  only  seven  hundred  miles  distant, — 
which  uouhl  aci'ount  lor  tlieir  huigu;iL;c  having  liccome,  in  a  great 
mrasurc.  |ircdominant.  It  is  to  these,  also,  that  the  tradition  with 
regard  to  llavaiki  is  prol)ai)l\'  to  hv  referred. 

'I'hc  story  of  the  Niikiihivans,  as  ('ommodore  I'orter  rei-eived  it 
from  tlic  cliicf  (lattanewa  {Knifiiinii).  was  to  the  elfcct  that  Oiifaia, 
with  his  wife  Aii'iiioiiiin,  came  from  \  avail  ciyhty-eigiit  generations 
hack,  (reckoned  in  the  family  of  (iattaiicwa  himself,)  and  hrought  wilii 
them  iprcad-fniit  and  sugar-cane,  and  a  great  variety  of  other  plants. 
The\  had  forty  cliildreii,  who  were  ail  named  after  tlie  plants  which 
thcv  Icid  brought  with  them,  with  the  exception  of  the  lirst  son,  who 
was  called    I'o,  or  night.*     They  si'ttled   in  the  valley  of  Tieuhoy 


*  'riicrc  !•<,  |H'ili.i|is,  ;i  iin--liikc  line.  'I'Iuki'  ili\  iiiili'.'s.  In  olliir  nriiii|is,  nf  uliosc 
<ii'ij;iii  till'  iiiilivi'.s  riiii  ii'wr  iiii  iicioiml,  iiri'  s|Mikiii  nl"  li\  llirin  lis  /i(III(Iii-/ki, — "  l«ini  of 
iii::lil."      //'(//i(((  liii»  Ijulli  nil  iirliviMiiiil  II  iiiisslvc  ini'niiiiig,  iiiid  i.s  used   liir  "In  tiring 


■?l  '  v| 


\i 


OCEANIC    .MIGRATIONS. 


120 


(Tatohae),  but  soon  becoming  very  populous,  they  went  off  to  the 
other  parts  of  the  island.  Captain  Porter,  by  an  oversiglit  unusual 
with  him,  is  led  to  give  only  fifteen  or  sixteen  years  to  a  generation. 
He  says  (p.  49,  note),  "it  must  be  observed  that  a  man  is  here  a 
grandfather  at  the  age  of  fifty,  and  sometimes  much  less,  and  hence 
tiiree  generations  exist  within  tliat  period."  Now  it  is  not  uncommon 
for  men  in  any  country  to  l)e  grandfathers  at  fifty,  but  this  makes  only 
two  generations  of  twonty-five  years  eacli.  Moreover,  in  such  a  com- 
putation, we  are  not  to  consider  only  the  age  at  which  tiie  first 
children  arc  born,  l)ut  that  of  the  whole  nimiber.  On  this  point 
some  observations  will  be  oll'ered  in  treating  of  tlie  Sandwich  Islands. 
Allowing,  lor  the  |)resent,  the  ordinary  estimate  of  thirty  years  to  a 
generation,  it  will  give  us  two  thou.sand  six  hundred  and  forty  years 
since  the  arrival  of  Oataia  from  \'avau. 

It  seems  probable,  however,  that  the  first  part  of  the  royal  genea- 
logical list  iif  Nuknhiva  will  be  found,  like  that  of  Hawaii,  to  be 
merely  mythological ;  in  whidi  case,  the  foregoing  computation  will 
recjuire  a  corresponding  correction,  and  the  time  elapsed  since  the 
.settlement  of  the  island  will  be  considerably  diminished. 

w  A  w  .\  1 1,  ()  li    r  II  i;  s  A  .\  I)  w  i  c  ii  i  s  i,  a  .\  i>  s. 


No  one  who  has  carefully  compared  the  languages  and  customs  of 
the  two  groups,  has  ever  doubted  that  the  natives  of  the  Samlwich 
Islands  were  ilerived,  eitlier  directly  or  indirectly,  from  the  Society 
Group.  The  traiiilions  of  the  natives  seem,  at  tirst  sight,  to  confirm 
this  beLef,  for  they  generally  state  that  the  original  settlers  were  from 
Tahiti  (mai  taliili).  We  tind.  however,  on  further  in(|uiry,  that  lakiti, 
in  this  language,  mvxms  /biritjn,  (i/iroud.  In  the  Hawaiian  Vocabu- 
lary of  Mr.  Andrews,  it  is  rendered  "a  foreign  country;"  and  it  is 
uncertain  U'  the  natives  had,  when  they  were  first  visited  by  whites, 
any  knowledge  of  a  particular  islaiul  called  by  this  name;  while 
Niikiiliii'd  ami  Fdlii/iira,  two  of  the  .Manjue.sas  Islands,  are  mentioned 
in  their  traditionar\  songs,  as  among  the  places  visited  by  voyagers 
from  Hawaii  in  former  days.*  Nevertheless,  the  word  'I'ahiti  may, 
as  Mr.  Ellis  suggests,  have  been  originally  used  with  reference  to 
this  island.     \Ve  shall  have  occasion  to  remark,  in  the  terms  Aoaiki 

I'orlli,"  as  well  as  "to  Ix-  Imh-ii."     I'Hptaiii  I'ortor,  hi'aring  the  plirnsc  Imimu-jx)  applied 
to  Outaia  aiul  his  cDiisort  would  naturally  translate  the  word  in  its  active  sense. 
*  See  Ellis's  Tonr  round  llawiiii,  pp.  'JH7,  and  HI  a. 

33 


lyo 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


15 


and  Tonga,  similar  instances  of  the  changes  in  meaning,  from  a 
limited  and  relative,  to  a  general  and  absolute  sense,  which  proper 
names  undergo  at  the  second  remove.  In  this  manner,  it  seems  pro- 
bable that  the  meaning  given  in  Hawaiian  to  the  word  Tahiti,  may 
have  arisen.  The  Marquesans  have  been  shown  to  be  derived,  in 
part,  at  lea.st,  from  the  island  of  that  name,  and  they  have  always 
retained  a  knowledge  of  its  exi.stcnce.  If,  before  they  had  been  very 
long  settled  in  the  .Mar(|uesan  Group,  tiiey  sent  forth  a  colony  to  the 
Sandwich  Islands,  the  members  of  this  colony  would,  at  starting, 
have  the  knowledge  or  tradition  of  no  less  tiian  tiiree  different  places 
which  they  might  term  the  mother-country,  liamely,  Savaii  (or 
Havaih),  Tahiti,  and  Nukiihiva.  We  ma}'  suppose  that,  in  j)rocess 
of  time,  the  first  and  most  distant  was  wholly  forgotten;  the  second, 
only  retained  as  a  general  name  for  foreign  country,  and  the  third, 
remembered  more  distinctly,  though  not  perhaps  as  the  source  from 
vhence  they  were  derived. 

That  when  the  first  settlers  reached  the  Sandwich  Islands,  they 
retained  a  knowledjje  of  the  original  seat  of  their  race  in  tiie  Navi- 
gator Grou|),  see.ns  almost  certain,  from  the  fact  that  they  gave  to 
the  largest  island  of  their  new  country  the  name  of  the  largest  of  the 
Samoan  Islands,  to  whicii  it  bears,  in  shape  and  general  ap[)e:irance, 
a  striking  resemblance.  Moreover,  to  the  north  point  of  this  island 
they  gave  the  name  of  Upv/a,  tlie  second  island  of  the  Samoan  Group, 
and  a  small  rocky  islet  near  Xiihaii  was  called  Lehua,  being  that  form 
which  Lefuka,  the  name  of  one  of  tiie  islands  in  the  Friendly  Group, 
would  take  in  the  Hawaiian  language. 

Tiiese  names  may  serve  as  a  clue  to  the  manner  in  which  tiie 
migration  to  this  group  took  j)lace.  It  is,  prima  facie,  evident,  that 
this  could  hardly  have  been  by  a  canoe  driven  oil'  to  the  iiortliward, 
as  it  was  crossing  from  one  of  llie  .Marquesas  Islands  to  another. 
The  tlistance  is  nearly  two  thousand  miles,  and  a  canoe  would  not 
accompiisii  it  in  less  than  twenty  days,  with  a  constant.,'  fair  wind; 
but  a  southerly  wind,  for  that  K'ligth  of  time,  is,  in  tiiat  region,  some- 
thing une.vampled.  On  tliis  sup|)osition,  miireover,  they  would,  of 
course,  be  without  provisions  sullicicnt  for  sucii  a  voyage;  and,  in 
that  case,  it  is  inconceivable  that  dogs  and  |)igs  shoiUd  have  been 
kept  alive  till  their  arrival.  Yet  their  traditions  distinctly  state  that 
these  animals  have  been  on  the  islands  since  they  were  first  inhabited. 
This  is  confirmed  by  the  fai't  that  they  are  of  that  peculiar  breed 
proper  to  the  South  Sea  Islands.     But  if  we  suppose  that  a  party  of 


OCEANIC    MIGRATIONS. 


131 


Marquesans,  mostly  of  Tahitian  descent,  with  some  few  of  Vavaiian 
origin,  had  set  out  in  one  or  more  large  canoes,  well  provided  with 
necessaries  for  a  long  voyage,  to  revisit  the  countries  of  their  ances- 
tors,— the  Navigator  and  Friendly  Groups, — we  see  at  once  how  the 
involuntary  emigration  might  have  taken  place.  Proceeding  with 
the  regular  southeast  trades,  till  they  had  arrived  nearly  at  their 
destination,  they  were  struck  (we  may  suppose)  by  a  northwesterly 
gale,  such  as  has  been  before  described.  To  {)revent  being  driven 
directly  back,  the  natural  proceeding  would  be  to  haul  up  as  close  to 
the  wind  as  possible,  which  would  give  them  a  course  nearly  north- 
by-vvest.  If  the  gale  continued  several  days,  witli  cloudy  weather, 
they  would  lose  their  reckoning  entirely,  and  would  then,  in  accord- 
ance with  tiie  usual  custom  of  the  islanders,  proceed  onward  in  the 
same  direction,  till  they  reached  the  land.*  And  if,  as  we  have 
supposed,  they  were  then  in  search  of  the  island  and  group  of  Savaii, 
it  was  natural  enough  that  they  should  give  to  their  new  h'  me,  which 
resembled  it  in  many  respects,  the  same  name. 

Respecting  the  time  when  this  migration  took  place  we  can  form  at 
least  a  plausible  conjecture.  The  Hawaiians  have  a  ^nealogy  of  their 
kings  from  the  first  Tahitian  colonists  down  to  the  reigning  sovereign. 
It  comprises  sixty-seven  generations,  whose  names  are  given  in  full, 
in  the  Moo-olelo,  a  native  history,  before  referred  to.  It  might  be 
doubted  whetiier  the  natives  could  remember  with  accuracy  so  far 
back;  but  this  doubt  would  cease  on  hearing  one  of  them  recite  the 
genealogy  in  question.  As  given  in  the  History,  it  stands  as  follows 
(beginning  with  the  second  king,  the  son  of  Watea  and  lloohotuta- 
lani) : 


IIISIIANU. 

O  JIu/m, 
O  llitiitiia/f), 


WIKK. 

Jliii'.iiiiiuwii/i/ac, 
J  Ill/ill  lie, 

lltlUllllll, 


CHILD. 

O  Wtiui. 

O  Iliiianulo. 

O  Nanalehiti,  &c. 


But  in  the  native  recitation,  as  we  have  heard  it,  the  words  tone, 

*  One  re.isiin  of  the  j^rcnt  ilUtnncc  ti>  wliiili  these  cliiincc-voyngps  of  the  nntivcs 
pxtend,  is  foutiil  ill  llie  viigiio  a.ssiirnnce  wliicli  lliey  have,  tiiat  the  ocean  is  covoivd  with 
islands  in  every  direction.  Aceorihiijjly,  when  they  arc  driven  out  to  sea,  and  have  lost 
the  hearing  of  their  own  island,  they  do  not  erase  their  ed'orts  in  despair,  or  contimie  to 
Iwat  u|)  and  down  without  an  ohject, — hut,  selecting  some  cour.se,  they  sot  their  sail  and 
steer  holdly  onward,  husUinding  their  provisions  as  long  as  possihlc,  in  the  hope  of  at 
length  striking  upon  some  unknown  land.  Mr.  Williams  gives  several  instances  of  long 
voyages  made  in  this  way  by  canoes  running  before  the  trade-wind. 


I 


183 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


husband,  wahine,  wife,  and  tamaiti,  child,  are  introduced  after  each 
name  in  the  respective  columns ;  thus — 

O  Jhilixi  le  t(ini;         O  llhiamaiioiitiiiic  ta  iva/iine,     O  Wiiia  (e  tamaiti. 

O  H'aia  If  tunc,  O  lluhune  to,  u-uhine,  O  Jlinamilo  le  tamaiti,  iVc. 

This,  it  will  be  seen,  makes  of  it  a  species  of  verse,  with,  in  fact,  a 
greater  approach  to  rhytlim  than  most  of  the  native  poems.  Accord- 
ingly, the  recitation  is  made  in  a  kind  of  cliant,  to  a  regular  tune,  and 
any  person  who  can  retain  in  his  memory  a  song  of  a  hundred  lines 
can  liave  no  difhculty  in  remembering  this  genealogy.  There  is  no 
reason  why  it  shoidd  not  have  been  known  to  liundreds, — in  fact  to 
tile  whole  priesthood  of  Hawaii, — and  any  lapse  of  memory  in  one 
woultl  be  corrected  by  the  rest.  The  same  ol)servations  will  apply  to 
the  genealogies  preserved  in  the  other  groujjs  of  Polynesia. 

It  is  to  be  ob.served  that  this  is  not,  properly  s|)eaking,  a  li.st  of 
kings,  but  merely  of  generations.  In  tiiose  cases,  wiiicii  frequently 
happened,  where  two  or  more  brothers  succeeded  one  another  on  the 
throne,  tiieir  names  are  given  in  the  column  of  children.  Thus  Liloa, 
the  eleventh  in  aihrect  line  l)efore  Tameiiameha,  had  two  sons,  llatau 
and  Umi,  of  whom  the  first  succeeded  him,  but  was  depo.sed  for  his 
tyranny,  and  the  kingdom  transferred  to  Umi.  Both  tiie.se  names, 
witli  those  of  their  respective  mothers,  are  given  in  tlie  genealogy, 
but  the  former  only  among  tiie  children.  For  the  same  rea.sou 
Ti/rnldo  ami  'ralatiiopiiii,  who  immediately  preceded  Tameiiameha, 
are  not  given,  because  the  line  of  descent  is  not  traced  through  them, 
but  through  the  younger  brother  of  the  latter,  Tcoua  ;*  and  his  name 
is  tiierefoiv  in  the  list,  though  he  did  not  actually  reign.  'I'hese  ex- 
jilanatioiis  are  neces.sary,  becau.se  tlie  nuiiiber  of  years  to  be  allowed 
to  a  generation  will  be  at  least  double  that  which  we  should  assign  to 
a  reign.  Among  a  people  like  the  llawaiiaiis,  constantly  engaged  in 
wars,  in  which  the  chiefs  are  expected  to  take  an  active  part,  the  ave- 
rage duration  of  a  reign  can  hardly  be  estimated  at  more  than  fifteen 
years, — while  there;  is  no  reason  for  assigning  to  a  generation  a  shorter 
period  than  that  at  which  it  is  commonly  rated, — about  thirty  years. 
The  people  do,  indeed,  marry  younger  tiian  in  more  nortiiern  regions; 
but  this  consideration  is  coiinterbalancetl  by  the  fact,  which  appears 
from  the  genealogical  table,  that,  in  many  instances,  the  pedigree  has 

'  Tl<is  is  a  nniiii'  which  is  j;iv(ii  licri'  in  phici'  ol  the  unwichly  .appcMatioii  of  Talani- 
tupiKijiailu/aninid,  whiili  ii|i[)(nrs  in  ihi'  grnculngy. 


\ 


OCEANIC    JI  1  G  R  A  T  I  O  N  S. 


133 


been  reckoned,  not  through  the  eldest,  but  through  a  younger  sou. 
Allowing,  tlierefore,  thirty  years  to  a  generation,  and  supposing  the 
list  to  be  a  correct  one,  we  should  have,  for  the  time  which  has 
elapsed  since  the  settlement  of  the  Sandwich  Islands,  about  two  thou- 
sand years  (67  x  30=  2010). 

But  though  there  is  no  doubt  of  the  ability  of  the  natives  to  pre- 
serve a  genealogy  of  this  length,  several  circumstances  incline  us  to 
(juestion  its  entire  correctness,  and  to  douitt  whether  the  first  twenty- 
three  names  lie  not  entirely  supposititious.  In  the  first  place,  the  name 
of  the  king  at  the  head  of  the  list  is  OWatea,  which  is  precisely  the 
same  in  pronunciation  with  the  Outaia  of  the  Marquesans  (ante,  p. 
128),  the  ortliograpiiy  only  being  different.  The  name  of  his  wile  is 
PajM,  of  whom  it  is  said  "she  was  the  mother  of  these  islands."'  This 
is  the  same  name,  and  the  same  tradition  that  the  Tahitians  apply  to 
the  wife  of  their  great  deity,  Taaroa.  It  is  further  related  by  the 
Hawaiians  that  Walea  and  Papa  had  a  deformed  child,  whom  they 
buried,  ;uid  from  it  sprung  the  taro-plant ;  the  stalk  of  this  plant  was 
called  lia/o'i,  and  this  name  was  given  to  their  son  and  heir  who  suc- 
ceeded them.  This  fable  is  evidently  derived  from  the  Nukuhivan 
story  that  the  children  of  Oataia  were  named  after  the  various  plants 
which  he  had  brought  with  him  from  Vavau.  Thus  we  have,  in  the 
commencement  of  the  Hawaiian  history,  a  singular  mixture  of  Mar- 
ipiesan  and  Tahitian  traditions.  The  twenty-second  king  was  Atalana, 
being  the  name  of  the  god  who  supports  the  island  of  Savaii  (ante,  p. 
23).  He  had  four  chiklren,  all  of  wiiom  were  named  Maui,  with 
some  epithet  appropriated,  in  other  groups,  to  a  deity.  The  youngest, 
Mdiii-dtdhnui  succeeded  him,  and  to  him  are  attriijuted  the  same 
deeds  that  the  Tahitians  relate  of  tiieir  great  deity  Maui, — another 
name  or  manifestation  of  Taaroa.  He  was  succeeded  by  Nanamaoa. 
from  whom  the  real  history  of  the  islands  seems  to  commence. 

The  probability  is  that  the  Sandwich  Islands  were  first  peopled  by 
emigrants  from  the  Manjuesas,  of  the  mi.xcd  race  which  is  there 
found.  When,  after  a  time,  the  inhabitants  had  become  numerous, 
and  some  family  was  raised  to  the  supreme  power,  it  became  an 
object  to  trace  the  pedigree  of  the  sovereign  as  far  back  as  possible. 
After  ascending  as  far  as  their  recollections  would  carry  them, — per- 
haps to  one  of  the  first  settlers, — till  they  reached  an  ancestor  whose 
paternity  was  unknown,  they  made  him,  according  to  the  usual 
fashion  in  such  cases,  the  son  of  a  god,  Maui.  This  god  was  repre- 
sented as  the  son  of  another  deity,  Atalana,  and  not  satisfied  with  this, 

34 


134 


E  T  11  N  ()  r.  R  A  V  II  Y. 


t    i' 


they  added  on  as  many  names  as  they  could  recollect  of  the  genealogy 
of  the  Marquesan  kings,  mixed  with  Tahitian  deities  and  personified 
([nalities.  Tiius  the  first  name  is,  as  al)ovc  stated,  the  Niikuhivan 
Wdteti ;  the  fourth  is  Hinanah,  a  word  which  means  (feshe  in  all  the 
dialects  except  the  Hawaiian ;  the  tentli  is  Manatii,  which  means 
memory  in  the  Samoan  and  Tongau  languages ;  the  eleventh  is 
Td/iito,  or  ancient ;  the  twelfth  and  thirteenth  are  Luamm  and  7VV, 
two  of  tiie  principal  deities  of  Tahiti,  helonging  to  the  class  which 
they  term  lia/iaii-j)o,  "  born  of  night."  Moreover,  the  wives  of  the 
first  five  kings  are  said  not  to  have  been  different  persons,  "  but  oidy 
different  names  of  I'apa,  as  her  soid  inhabited  sundry  bmlies  by 
transmigration,"  which  suthciently  shows  that  this  part  of  the  gene- 
alogy was  looked  upon  as  merely  mythological. 

If  this  opinion  be  thought  correct,  it  will  be  necessary  to  deduct 
twenty-two  generations  from  the  list  (one  of  the  twenty-three  kings 
having  been  the  brother  of  the  preceding,)  which  will  leave  for  the 
whole  number  forty-five.  Mnltii)lying  this  by  thirty,  we  have  thir- 
teen hundred  and  fifty  years  from  the  commencement  of  the  Hawaiian 
records  (and  perhaps  from  the  settlement  of  the  country,  though  that 
is  uncertain),  to  the  accession  of  Tamehameha, — or,  reckoning  to  the 
Mresent  date,  about  fourteen  centuries. 

With  the  aid  derived  from  Mr.  Crook's  manuscripts  we  are  enabled 
to  determine  what  evidence  is  afTordod  by  tiie  language  of  the  two 
groups  that  the  Hawaiians  are  of  .Marcjuesan  origin.  The  most 
striking  similarity  is  that  of  the  numerals,  which  will  be  elsewhere 
displayed.  In  its  alphabet,  the  Taliuatan  idiom  agrees  in  most  points 
with  the  Hawaiian,  and  especially  in  using  the  n  instead  of  the 
regular  Polynesian  y  (or  ng),  which  the  Tahitian  omits  altogether. 
Thus  we  have — 


ri- 


t     ! 


(ILVNKSIAN. 

T.\IIITI.\N-. 

T.tin-ATAN. 

HAWAIIAN, 

saijif    . 

.      /("/,     .      . 

.     hotii,    .     . 

.     fio/ii,    .     . 

to  stilulr. 

;;!(/(/,  .     . 

.      till/,    .      . 

.     tiittu,  .     , 

.     tiiitii,    .     . 

lips,  Ix'uk  iil'a  l)ird. 

nuiuya,   . 

.     mniia,     . 

.     iiiiiiimi,    , 

.     viuii/ia,     . 

inouiitiiiu. 

iijoa,  .     . 

,     iai,    .     . 

.     i/i'xi,   .     . 

.     iiiiMi,    .     . 

IWllllO. 

pi' 1)0, 

.     pun,  .     . 

.    puna,  .     . 

.      pillKl,   ,      . 

ooriil. 

jj<ij)a/hja. 

.    ptipitria, 

.    piipuina, . 

.    papcditia. 

check. 

kupeija,  . 

.     'iijmi,     . 

.     'ii])ena,     . 

.     'u]>e/iti, 

net. 

In  the  original  draft  of  his  grammar,  Mr.  Crook  gave  two  forms  of 
the  indefinite  and  definite  articles,  a  and  ta,  e  and  te.  The  first  two 
are  used  before  nouns  commencing  with  a  consonant,  or  the  vowels 


•  «* 


OCEANIC    MIGRATIONS. 


135 


e  and  i, — and  the  last  two  before  the  vowels  a,  o,  and  u,  as  a  hoe,  a 
paddle,  a  ima,  a  hand ;  e  atu,  a  bouito  (fish),  e  upoko,  a  head  ;  and  in 
the  jame  manner,  ta  hoe,  the  paddle,  te  atu,  the  bonito,  &c.  Thirty 
years  later  (in  1829),  on  a  second  visit  to  Nukuhiva,  he  corrected  this 
draft  in  many  particulars,  and  among  others,  changed  the  a  and  ta, 
in  all  cases,  to  e  and  te,  as  in  the  Tahitian.  It  is,  however,  not  un- 
likely that  the  first  orthography  was  correct  for  the  southern  cluster 
of  the  Marquesas,  and  if  so,  we  have  the  origin  of  the  tsvo  articles  in 
Hawaiian,  ta  and  te, — the  former  being  the  most  common,  and  the 
latter  used  chiefly  before  nouns  beginning  with  t,  a,  and  o. 

The  Tahitian  uses  for  demonstrative  pronouns  tdua-riei,  and  taiia- 
ra,  as  taua  va'a  tiei,  this  canoe  ;  tana  taata  ra,  tiiat  man.  The 
Hawaiian  omits  the  ta,  and  has  simply  ua-nei  and  ua-la,  as  ua  iva'a 
nei,  ua  tauata  la.  The  Nukuhivan  has,  according  to  Mr.  Crook,  hua- 
nei  and  hua-na ;  as,  hua  vu'a  nei,  hua  anata  ua.  But  it  seems 
probable  that  the  h  here  is  superfluous.  Mr.  Crook  spells  the  name 
of  the  island  Uahuka,  "  Huahuga ;"  ohihape,  the  name  of  a  fish,  he 
spells  "  hui-ZvOppe."  However  this  may  be,  the  similarity  between 
this  and  the  Hawaiian  form  is  evident. 

The  Manjuesan  and  Hawaiian  are  the  only  dialects  which  use  the 
preposition  ?««  before  the  locative  adverbs,  as — 


r.viiu.vr.tN. 

II.\WAIIAX. 

TAHITIAN. 

mti-mim,     . 

.     nui-miui,     . 

.       Ici  III  till,       . 

.     iK'liiru. 

nid-iiiiii. 

.     iiiii-mitii,    . 

fci.  nitifi,    . 

.     bi'liind. 

nui.iiitti, 

.     md-liiiKi,     . 

.       tvi   llill. 

.        (ll)OVO. 

ma-Uii,  .     . 

.     iiKi.tiii,  .     . 

.     ii-tiii,     ,     . 

,     by  till"  son, 

scn-wai'd 

As  a  plural  sign,  to  denote  a  company  or  party,  the  Tahitian  has 
pue ;  the  Nukuhivan  (or  Tahuatan)  changes  it  lo  poe,  like  the  Ha- 
waiian. The  first,  to  express  "  the  party  of  artisans,"  would  have  "  te 
pue  tahua;"  the  second  tapoetuhuna ;  and  the  third,  ta  poe  tahuna. 

The  prohibitive  sigh  is,  in  Tahitian,  eiaha  (formerly  aua),  as  eiaha 
oe  e  amu,  eat  thou  not.  The  Tahuatan  uses,  instead  of  this,  moi,  fol- 
lowed by  the  conjunction  ia,  that;  as,  moi  ia  kai  oe,  beware  that  thou 
eat  not.  The  Hawaiian  abbreviates  this  to  mai,  as  viai  ai  oe,  eat  not 
thou. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  will  be  seen,  by  referring  to  the  Grammar, 
that  in  many  respects  the  Nukuhivan,  as  might  be  expected,  differs 
from  the  Hawaiian  and  resembles  the  Tahitian ;  and  in  a  few  parti- 


136 


ETIINOO  RA  1"  II  V. 


I 


culnrs  (such  as  the  omission  of  the  r  and  the  use  of  the  k),  it  is  unlike 
botli.* 

H.VR(n'(tN(i  A,   OR    Tin;    IIKIIVKY    ISLANDS. 

The  tradition  driven  by  Mr.  Williams  as  prevalent  in  Aitutaki,  one 
of  tiio  islands  of  this  t,'roiip,  has  already  been  noticed.  Beiiif^  desirous 
of  kn(nvin;f  wiiether  the  same  aceount  was  current  in  Rarotoiif^a,  I 
questioned,  on  the  subject,  a  very  intelligent  native  of  that  island 
whom  I  met  at  Upolu,  whither  he  had  accompanied  the  missionaries 
as  an  assistant.  lie  intormed  me  that  the  Raroton^ans,  like  the 
natives  of  Aitutaki,  considered  Acaiki  to  be  the  country  beneath,  iVom 
wliicii  the  tirst  man,  Mumuki,  ascended,  to  look  lor  food ;  and  that 
Aaitipi,  in  the  district  of  Aroroiigi,  was  the  place  where  he  came  up. 
But  whereabouts  this  lower  country  was,  or  how  the  ascent  was 
accomplished,  he  could  not  explain.  It  has  been  observed,  in  another 
place,  that,  with  all  the  islanders  of  the  Pacific,  wlio  live  between  the 
tropics,  the  .same  word  means  leeward,  irextward,  and  helow.  A  similar 
use  of  the  words  up  and  doirn,  with  reference  to  opposite  points  of  the 
compass,  is  common  to  most,  if  not  all  languaires.  The  trade-winds, 
at  the  Hervey  Islands,  blow  usually  from  the  southeast,  and  8avaii, 
which  lies  to  the  northwest,  is  tiierefore  as  lu^arly  as  j)ossible  "  below" 
them.  It  is  easy  to  .see  that  an  e.\[)ression  which  had,  at  first,  a  meta- 
pliorical  meaning,  came,  in  process  of  timt;,  to  be  taken  literally. 

But  the  most  valuable  and  detailed  account  which  we  possess  of 
the  peopling  of  any  i.sland  in  the  South  Seas,  is  that  given  by  Mr. 
Wiliiiims,  at  jjage  Ifi')  of  his  vohime.  The  chief  incidents  are  as 
follows:  Karika,  a  chief  of  an  island  to  the  westward,  calletl  Mitnnka, 
first  discovered  Rarotonga,  and  finding  it  uninhabited,  took  [)osse.ssion 
of  it.  Again  putting  to  sea,  he  encountered  Tangiia,  a  Tahitian  chief, 
who  was  fleeing  from  the  pursuit  of  an  enemy.  As  Karika  was  [)re- 
paring  to  attack  him,  Tangiia  made  submission,  and  acknowledged 
himself  the  vassal  of  the  other.  They  settled  the  land  together,  the 
former  on  tiie  north  (and  west)  side  of  tlie  island,  and  the  latter  on 

*  l'"iir  till'  ci|i|Mirliinily  nl'  I'diisulliiij;  the  .Mar(|ii('saii  (iriiiniiiiir  niiil  \  iK'iiliulary  of  Mr, 
t'riiMk,  I  am  iiulrbtod  to  llic  Kuv.  ('.  S.  .Stcwurl,  iil  llw;  I'liitid  .Siaifs  Navy,  Id  wliuiii  they 
wore  prcjifiilcd  by  tliu  author.  'J'lii!  iK-rniission  to  muko  llii.s  use  of  Iii.s  iniimi.srri|)t.>i  was 
pri'vioiisly  acconlc-d  by  .Mr.  ("rook,  whom  «<•  hail  tlic  plcasiirc  of  nn'cting  at  Sydney,  in 
.New  .Siuih  NVali.'s. 


r:.--f: 


i. 


I 


OCEANIC    MIGRATIONS. 


187 


the  east, — these  being,  it  will  be  remarked,  the  sides  facing  towards 
their  respective  countries.  To  this  day  the  people  of  the  former  divi- 
sion are  called  Ngati-Karika,  and  those  of  the  latter  Ngati  or  Nya- 
Tangiia.  We  have  seen  in  New  Zealand  (ante,  p.  32),  a  similar  use 
of  this  prefix,  ngati,  to  express  a  clan  descended  from  a  common 
ancestor. 

It  is  said  farther,  that  "  the  superior  chieftainship  is  still  vested  in 
the  Karika  family ;  for  although  \\\(i  Ngati-Karika  have  been  hraten 
many  times,  indeed  generally,  by  the  descendants  of  Tangiia,  yetithe 
conquerors  agree  in  allowing  them  the  sujiremacy  which  tiiey  have 
possessed  from  time  immemorial."  In  confirmation  of  this  account, 
it  is  stated  that  the  Tahitians  have  traditions  respecting  Tangiia,  his 
birth-place,  family,  &c.,  and  that  ho  was  a  great  traveller.  It  also 
appears  (p.  47),  that  in  former  times,  the  intercourse  between  Raro- 
tonga  and  the  Society  Group  was  very  fretiuent,  or,  as  the  natives 
express  it,  that  the  islands  were  joined  together.  Mr.  Williams  sup- 
poses that  Manuka  is  the  same  as  Manu'a,  one  of  the  Navigator 
Islands,  which  there  seems  no  reason  to  doubt. 

On  the  chart  of  Tupaia,  Rarotua  (the  Tahitian  pronunciation  of 
Rarotonga)  is  laid  down  to  the  soutiiwest  of  Tahiti,  amid  several 
other  islands,  the  names  of  wliich  cannot  bo  identified,  but  which  are 
probably  intended  for  the  rest  of  the  group.  Most  of  the  South  Sea 
Islands  have  two  names,  as  loreteu  and  Raiatea,  Aimco  and  Muorea, 
Sala/aii  and  Saimii,  and  some  of  those  given  by  Tupaia,  being  derived 
from  tradition,  may  be  at  present  out  of  use.  Adeeha,  however,  wliich 
is  laid  down  .somewhat  farther  to  the  east,  was  probab'y  intended  for 
Atiu. 

The  signification  of  the  word  Rarotonga  deserves  notice.  Raro 
means  below,  and  iience  leeward  and  n'estn-ard ;  tonga  means  south, 
and  from  its  position  must  be  here  an  adjective.  We  may  therefore 
render  it  the  "  southern  leeward  country,"  or  the  "  southwestern 
land,"  wliich  expresses  very  well  its  position  relative  to  Tahiti. 

It  is  proper  to  inquire  wiiether  the  language  of  the  llarotongaiis 
offers  any  evidence  to  confirm  this  duplex  origin  of  the  people.  What 
first  strikes  us,  in  looking  over  tiie  vocabulary,  is  the  peculiarity  of 
the  alphabet.  It  has  the  k  and  ng  (or  ij),  the  former  of  which  is 
wanting  in  both  the  Samoan  and  Tahitian,  and  the  latter  in  the  Tahi- 
tian alone.  But  there  is  every  reason  to  believe  that  the  rejection  of 
these  two  consonants  from  those  languages  is  a  matter  of  compara- 
tively late  occurrence.     On  the  other  hand,  the  Rarotongan  lacks  the 

35 


139 


KTII  N()(iHA  I'll  V. 


/nnd  tlic  h,  of  which  the  former  is  found  in  the  Samonn,  nnd  both  in 
the  Tahitian.  With  these  exceptions,  however,  wliich  atTect  neither 
the  substance  nor  the  form  of  the  lan<i;uairt',  but  only  its  pronuncia- 
tion, the  Harotonijau  is  ahnost  pure  Taliitiim.  Were  the  li  and  y 
dropped  from  liiu  former,  and  the  /'  and  1;  inserted  in  tlieir  projier 
places,  tiie  lan^ua<res  would  be  so  nearly  alike,  that  a  translation  of 
any  work  I'mni  one  into  the  other  would  probably  be  unnecessary. 

The  iiaroton^an  has,  however,  a  few  peculiarities,  in  which  it 
(lilVers  from  the  'i'ahitian  ;  and  in  tiiese  it  fi;enerally  atfrees  with  the 
Samoan.  'i'lins  the  latter  uses  tlie  nominative  siifu  'o  fre(pieu11y  and 
the  former  rarely ;  in  this  res|)ect  the  i{aroton<fan  accords  with  the 
Samoau.  'The  Samoan  has  two  adverbs  of  a  peculiar  character, 
which  are  atlixed  to  verbs  to  exjiress  facility  or  dilliculty,  ixs  fui-yo/ie, 
ea.sy  to  lio.  /'di-ytita,  hard  to  do.  '["lie  llarotonijan  lias  the  same,  as 
)(ivf-yui(',  easy  to  do ;  ratr-ytttd,  hard  to  do.  These  are  not  in  the 
Tahitian.  There  arc  also  .several  words  which  the  liarotoiii^an  seems 
to  have  derivcil  from  the  Samoan,  a.s — 


.■SA>IO.\N. 

B.\Rl>T(i.VUAN. 

TAIIITIA.N. 

Ji/i,  .       .       . 

.       .      (/•/,        .       .       . 

.       .       IlKllli,     .       . 

Ut  (•lMM)sr. 

Ji/oi,      .     . 

nai^ 

iiHiii, 

.      .     Ill  mix. 

liliiii,    ,     . 

.     riiini,.     .     . 

.     .     Ilillli,    .     . 

.     Ill  |iiiiir  mil 

'('  I'i,     .     . 

.     .     hi)  (ti,  .      .     . 

.     .     '(I  rni,    .     . 

.     hIiu  ! 

mmiKni^ 

(tLiUininm^ 

.    .    /if a,     .    . 

.       .       Ml  111'. 

Jlt\llut'(l^ 

fttftlVil, 

.      .      o'll,  .      .      . 

.       lilllLT. 

IIKDIIlill,       . 

tiltuinl^ 

JUtl'ofltj 

.     .     Imiidsonic. 

miniulii/n,  . 

iiiont/'fi,     . 

/llttth'Ut, 

.       .       I.IW. 

With  re<>ard  to  some  of  these  it  will  be  observed  that  the  ilarotonifan 
ditlers  from  the  Samoau  not  accordiiijf  to  the  usual  dialectical  ciiauf^es, 
but  irre;,nilarlv  ;  and  this  is  what  frequently  hap[iens  where  wortis  of 
one  lantruajfc  are  adopted  into  another  from  oral  communication, — as 
we  ob.serve  in  the  Norman  French  portion  of  our  own  tonj,'ue.  But 
as  the  'I'ahitian  is  itself  an  oll'sprinir  of  the  Hamoaii,  it  may  be 
thouirht  tiiattho  liarotongan  words  given  above  are  merely  old  and 
obsolete  Tahitian.  In  tliat  case,  we  should  probably  liiid  them  in  the 
Hawaiian,  which  is,  like  the  liarotongan,  of  Tahitian  derivation.  As 
we  do  not,  the  presumption  is  that  they  arc  some  of  the  words  which 
the  descendants  of  Taiigiia  have  learned  from  those  of  Karika. 

Mr.  Williams  inlbrms  us  (p.    109),    that  the  pre.sent  high  chief, 
Makea,  is  the  twentv-ninth  in  descent  from  Karika.     This  would 


o  c  K  A  N  k;   M  I  (i  n  a  T  I  O  N  8. 


139 


give,  nccordiiifr  to  our  computation  ('20  x  30  =  H70),  nearly  nine  hun- 
dred years  since  the  wotllement  of  the  llervoy  Islands. 


M  A  N  (i  \  u  !•;  V  A,  «)  It  T  ri  i:  n  a  m  It  1 1;  it   i  s  i,  a  n  n  s. 

In  the  manuscript  vocnl)uIary  of  tlio  Maiij^arovan  dialiict,  wiiicli  I 
owe  to  till!  kindness  of  M.  Mai^rret,  fdrmerly  missionary  to  tiiis  j^Toup, 
is  found  the  follmvinf^  di^finilion  :  "  Ar/iiAi, — lias,  en  l)as ;  /:o  ntnyn 
fciiei,  ko  (ir/ii/ii  tciut, — <;t'ci  est  lo  haut,  cela  est  le  has."  From  tiiis  it 
would  apjusar  that  vl/y»'/.7,  which,  in  the  llcrvey  Islands,  is  used  to 
sijTiiil'y  the  rejfion  l)eneatli,  has  conu!  to  diMiotc,  iii  tlu;  (iamhier  (Jrou[), 
simply  li(lon\  or  Ihdt  ir/iirli  is  hiloir.  I'lxamplcs  of  jsimiiar  chanires 
are  not  uncommon  in  the  other  dialects.  At  tlu;  Navi^'ator  {frou|), 
the  wind  which  hlows  from  tiie  direction  of  the  Tonifa  Islands  (i.  e. 
from  the  south)  is  called  tiie  'loiir/n  wind.  At  the  Ilervey  and  So- 
ciety Islands,  this  siunc  word  {tonga  and  ,  in)  is  used  as  the  ;^eneral 
term  lor  .south  wind. 

A  frciu'alo<fy  of  the  kiiiffs  of  Manijarina,  drawn  U[)  hy  a  native 
pupil  of  M.  Maiifret,  with  a  kw  of  the  trailitions  respect iiijj;  them, 
ofl'ers  some  points  of  coiisiderahle  interest.  The  iiumlier  of  kings 
whose  names  are  jfiven  is  twenty-.seven.  The  first  was  'J'ldtiitiitjiiiiit, 
a  name  which  means  "  Lord  of  the  Sea."  From  him,  the  history 
says,  "all  the  inhahitants  of  the  land  are  deseendcd.  He  had  no 
father,  or  perhaps  he  was  a  foreii^iicr."  I'rom  him  tlie  line  continues 
unhroken  till  the  ninth  kiuff,  Aiuta ;  he  was  ^succeede(l  hy  his  son-in- 
law,  'rorontjd,  the  name  of  who.se  father  is  not  known.  He  was  not. 
it  ajjpears,  ackiiowlcdtfed  hy  many  of  the  chiefs,  and  a  civil  war 
ensued.  One  of  the  principal  reliels,  named  Vinn,  was  worsted,  and, 
it  is  said,  "  took  refuse  on  the  sea,  and  lied  to  a  foreiirn  land." 
Afterwarils  Toronga  was  killed  hy  another  chief  who  eniieavourcd 
to  ohtain  his  liody  in  order  to  eat  it;  but  the  son  of  the  murdered 
king  secreted  his  father's  corpse  and  buried  it.  The  names  of  the 
son  and  grandson  of  Toronga  are  given,  hut  their  reigns  must  have 
been  very  short, — perhaps  merely  nominal, — for  one  of  the  chief  com- 
batants in  tlie  civil  war  succeeded  finally  in  gaiidiig  the  sujircme 
power.  His  name  was  A'«/,  the  thirteenth  on  the  list,  aiul  from  him 
the  reigning  sovereign  derives  his  authority.  His  principal  opponent, 
TcijMii,  lied  to  a  foreign  land,  or  abroad.  After  this  follows  an  account 
of  the  numerous  dissensions  which  took  place  in  tlie  different  reigns, 
and  the  annalLst  remarks,  "  formerly  they  fought  much  ;   formerly 


140 


KTIINOO  RA  I'ti  Y. 


they  ate  each  other."  The  tweiity-Kocoml  kiii>?,  Tenunigiii,  wnH  do- 
|k)8imI,  and  ohlij^cd  Id  flee  abroad.  'I'ho  UHiirper  'I'litioit  Mucceedod, 
but  "his  rei^ii  wiin  sliort  ;  he  was  roiu|iiered  Nuddeidy."  His 
inline,  it  slioidd  he  remarked,  does  not  appear  in  the  lint, — whieh 
Nhows,  will)  several  otiier  eircuniHtaiices,  that  it  is,  in  I'at-t.  a  ^ene- 
al()^;y,  and  not  a  coinpU'te  eniiineralion  of  all  who  have  held  tlu!  sove- 
reign power.  The  present  king,  Mapittrni,  is  the  I'ourteenth  in  a 
diri'ft  line  Ironi  Kan,  who  gained  the  snpreinaey  alter  the  death  ol' 
'i'oronga,  tlu^  .son-in-law  of  .Anna,  the  I'ighlh  in  dcseiMit  from  'I'eatu- 
nioana.  'i'he  son  and  grandson  of 'I'orongii  may  he  omitted,  ni  whieh 
ease  it  will  appear  that  twcnly-lhe  generations,  or  scm'ii  hnndrt'd  and 
fifty  years,  hiivi-  I'lapsed  since  the  arrival  of  the  (irst  culonisls.  'There- 
fore if  we  suppose,  as  all  the  eireumstauees  indieate,  that  they  eame 
from  IJarotonua.  they  must  have  left  tiiat  island  al)out  four  genera- 
tions, or  one  hundri'd  and  twenty  years,  alter  it  was  settled.  'I'his 
would  aeeount  for  some  of  the  peculiarities  in  the  dialect  of  Manga- 
revii.  The  only  points  ol'any  importance  in  which  it  dillers  from  the 
Harotongan  are,  lirsl,  in  the  use  of  latjn  instead  of  inja,  to  lorm  the 
partiei|)ial  noun,  as  ti  ojtr  nn/i/,  lor  /c  o/w  (nja,  the  act  of  finishing; 
and  secondly,  in  the  use  of  man  as  a  |)lural  prefix.  In  both  of  these 
points  it  resembles  the  'I'aliitian.  Now  if  the  Uarotongan  emigrants 
win  settled  in  .Mangareva  came,  as  is  most  proi)able,  from  that  side 
of  itaroloiiga  which  faces  towards  the  latter  group,  ^i.  e.,  the  eastern 
side,)  they  were  of  the  i\</iiti-'l'(int/ii>i,  or  Tahitiaii  party,  and  may,  a* 
that  time,  havi;  preserved  some  pecidiarities  of  their  original  tongue 
wliicii  were  afterwards  lost,  in  Harotoiiga,  on  a  more  complete  iiiter- 
nii.vture  with  the  Sijali-Kfiiihn,  or  iSamoaii  party. 

In  the  foregoing  traditions,  the  e.vistence  of  cannibalism,  at  a  very 
early  period,  will  be  noticed,  as  also  the  custom,  with  conipiered 
chiefs,  of  betaking  themselves  to  the  open  sea  to  escai)u  the  ven- 
geance of  their  tidversarics,  It  was  in  this  manner  that  'Viinoe,  or 
Crescent  Island,  a  coral  islet  which  lies  abo\it  thirty  miles  to  the 
soutlu-ast  of  the  (iaml)i(!r  (Jroup,  was  peopled  between  sixty  and 
seventy  years  ago,  .V  defeated  party,  lleeiiig  from  Mangareva,  were 
drifted  to  this  island,  and  remained  there,  w  ith  their  descendants,  till 
the  arrival  of  the  Catholic  missionaries,  who,  hearing  of  their  situation, 
sent  for  them  and  restored  them  to  th(!ir  original  homes.  This  well- 
authenticated  fact  shows  the  manner  in  which  most  of  the  South  Sea 
Islands  have  probably  receivcsd  their  first  inhabitants.  What  makes 
it    more   valuable,  as   an    illu-stratioii,   is  the  cireuiustancu  that  the 


()(■  K.\  N  !<•    .M  l(i  U  A  no  \M. 


141 


conrso  of  tlio  emiy;riiiits  herd  was  directly  CDiitrnry  to  that  of  the 
traili'-wiiids.  'rriic,  tlio  (listaiico  In  not  Kreut;  lint  it  nuist  lio  ri'nu'm- 
beroti  that  tlio  voyaijo  was  inailu  on  raits,  tho  only  nu'ans  of  IranH- 
porlation  possessed  hy  lliii  Mantiarevans, — l)earinj>  aliont  tin;  same 
relation,  as  rei,'ards  safely  and  speed,  to  a  canoe,  as  tho  latter  does  to 
a  steani-sliip. 

If  A  !■  A. 

This  island,  in  onr  •^eiwral  snnunary,  was  included  in  the  Austral 
Group,  thoii)^h  not,  ]ierhaps,  with  strict  |)ropriety,  as  it  in  situated 
four  decrees  apart  Ironi  llio  rest,  and  a  dill'erent  dialect  is  spoken  on 
it.  It  lii^s  lifteen  d('^'^ccs  southeast  of  tin-  llervey  Islands,  froni  which 
it  prohalily  ditrived  its  popidation.  I  obtained  at  Tahiti,  from  a  native 
of  Hapa,  a  brief  vocalndary  of  the  lan^'uaiie  spoken  there,  which 
turns  out  to  be,  with  a  few  verbal  <'xceplious.  pure  Itarotonjifan,  and 
this  in  its  minute  peculiarilies.  Tho  llarotonj,'an,  for  example,  uses 
nifi  for  the  directivi^  pMiticU*  sii^nifvini;  motion  towards  a  person, 
where  the  other  tlialccls  have  mtii :  the  Uapan  has  the  same.  The 
particle  ku  is  used  before  verbs  in  the  same  manner  by  both,  &c. 


TUi:    ATS  THAI.    I  SI    V  \  US— II  I  M  A  T  A  K  A,    11  I   II  I  Tl  ,   Tl   I' I' A  I, 
A  N  l>    HA  IV  AVAL 

These  islands  lie  south  of  tlie  Society  (J roup,  and  west  of  Karo- 
tonifa,  and  are  nearly  eipiidistanl  from  bulb.  The  probability  is  that 
they  were  settled  from  both  directions,  and  at  a  very  late  day.  Tho 
evidence  in  favor  of  this  view  is  the  following;.  Tupuai  is  situated 
between  Hurutu  and  llaivavai,  anil  about  eij^lity  miles  from  each. 
Mr.  Ellis  (Polynesian  Researches,  p.  SHI)  says:  "Tupuai  is  stated, 
in  the  introduction  to  the  Voyajfc  of  the  Dull',  to  have  been  at  that 
time  but  recently  peo|>led  by  some  natives  of  an  island  to  the  west- 
ward, probably  llimatara,  who,  when  sailinif  to  a  spot  they  were 
accustomed  to  visit,  were  driven  by  stront;  and  unfavorable  winils 
on  Tupuai.  A  few  years  after  this,  a  canoe  sailin<j  from  Uaiatea  to 
Tahiti,  conveying  u  chief  who  was  ancestor  to  Idia,  Pomare's  mother, 
was  drifted  on  this  island,  and  the  chief  admitted  to  the  supreme 
authority."  Mr.  Ellis  adds — "  The  subseijuent  visits  of  missionaries, 
with  tho  residence  of  native  teachers  amonjf  the  people,  have  fur- 
nished additional  evidence,  that  the  present  Tupuaian  population  is 
but  of  modern  origin,  compared  with  that  inhabiting  the  island  of 

M 


142 


KTII  N  0(i  U  A  I'  II  V. 


Raivavai  on  tlio  cast,  or  Ilurutu  and  Rimatara  on  the  west."  But 
tliat  an  island  twelvo  miles  in  circuit,  and  of  considerable  elevation, 
could  have  remained  long  undiscovered  in  the  midst  of  an  inhabited 
group,  is  quite  inconceivable.  We  should  be  compelled,  for  this 
reason  only,  to  sup|)ose  that  the  other  islands,  also,  had  not  been  very 
long  peopled. 

The  evidence  from  their  language  confirms  this  opinion.  Mr. 
Williams  (Missionary  Enterprises,  p.  449)  says:  "The  Austral 
islanders,  including  Ilurutu,  Raivavai,  Tupuai,  and  Rimatara,  have 
a  [dialectical]  distinction  of  tlieir  own,  but  have  been  taught  to  use 
the  Tahiliau  Scriptures,  which  they  read  fluently,  and  understanii  as 
well  as  if  written  in  their  own  tongue.*  The  peculiarity  of  this 
dialect  ai)pears  in  the  rejection  [from  the  Tahitian]  of  the  /'  and  A, 
without  supplying  any  substitutes  ;  and  trifling  as  this  may  appear, 
the  dillereiice  of  sound  it  occasions  is  amazing."  Now  this  peculiarity 
is  precisely  what  would  be  caused  by  the  union  of  some  emigrants 
from  Rarotonga,  who  would  not  be  able  to  pronounce  those  letters, 
with  others  from  Tahiti.  This  will  appear  clearly  from  the  following 
examples,  extracted  from  th^  same  author  (p.  451) : — 


IlOUS*'. 

(;oiiil. 

uninaii. 

iiiiiii. 

.■loth. 

to  ItC'IitA't". 

spiiil. 

Tiililliiiii  : 

./'"■'', 

ItKtlld'i, 

Vttliint; 

I'liilii, 

'llllll, 

Jll'llldO, 

riiniit. 

Itiii'iiliHii^tin 

(in; 

iiicUtdi, 

I'iihir, 

fdlin/il, 

kiikdii. 

tikiirui/o'! 

I'lirnm 

.Vnstial : 

iin; 

ififtt/'t^ij 

mini; 

titllllty 

\,„, 

(I'ltiim, 

iiiniii. 

It  will  1)0  observed  that,  by  striking  out  from  the  Taiiitian  lino  oft 
words  all  tlii^  Idlers  which  are  not  CDiitained  in  the  Rafotongan,  we 
obtain  the  words  of  the  Austral  dialect.  The  same  rcsull  will  follow 
nearly,  if  \v(>  strike  out  from  the  Rarotongan  the  letters  which  are 
not  contained  in  the  Tahitian.  'I'hcre  will  still,  howi^Ver,  be  a  slight 
ditTerence  in  some  of  the  words,  as  in  those  for  "good,"  "cloth,"  and 
"spirit."  The  Austral  dialect,  it  ap|)ears  from  this,  has  oniv  six  con- 
sonants, >ii,  N,  J),  r.  I,  and  v,  a  smaller  nund)cr,  proi)al)iy,  than  is  Ibund 
in  any  other  tongue.  The  guttural  catch,  marked  by  the  inverted 
comma,  should,  however,  be  added,  as  constituting  a  distinct  tilement. 

The  island  of  Ilurutu  is  laid  down  twice  on  Tnpaias  chart,  once 
under  its  proper  name  (Ururutu),  and  in  its  proper  |)lace,  according 
to  the  real  bearings  (see  p.  <>),  and  again  under  the  mistaken  name 
of  Ohitiroa  (Cireat  Feejee),  and  in  the  mistaken  position  which 
Tupaia's  English  friends  induced  him  to  assign  to  it.     The  error 

•  Tliis  cvi.'ii  llic  Itiimlungans  could  not  do.     Sw;  Williniiis,  |>.  10;). 


o  (•  i;  A  .\  I  (;  -M  I  <;  ii  a  r  i  o  \  s. 


143 


origitiateil  in  tlie  following  manner.  Tupaia  accompanied  Cook  in 
his  voyage  IVom  Taliili  to  New  Zealanii,  in  tlie  course  of  wiiich 
Ilurutii  was  discovered.  As  tliey  wore  approacliing  it,  Tupaia  in- 
formed them,  says  Parkinson,  "  thnt.  it  was  an  island  called  0/ieile- 
roah,  being  one  of  the  cluster  ot  nine  which  bore  tlie  title  of  Oheite 
added  to  them."  The  mistake  of  the  Tahitian  geographer  proi)ably 
arose  from  being  informed  by  his  friends,  wiio  could  only  have  com- 
municated with  him,  at  that  time,  in  his  own  language,  that  this 
island  lay  from  Tahiti  nearly  in  the  direction  of  Apatoa,  which  they 
sup|)oscd  to  mean  south,  when  it  really  signifn".  north,  or  northrresl. 
As  he  could  not  doubt  their  assurance,  he  would  probably  take  no 
pains  to  verify  the  fact  by  further  inquiries, — and  he  might  feel  that 
any  hesitation  in  giving  the  name  of  the  island  would  throw  some 
doubts  ujran  the  accuracy  of  the  geographical  knowledge  on  which 
he  had  prided  himself  However  this  may  be,  the  circumstance  of 
the  island  being  laid  down  in  another  place,  under  its  own  name,  in 
company  with  llimatara,  llaivavai,  and  tiie  Ilervey  Islands,  shows 
clearly  enough  thaj.  he  was  mistaken,  and  that  he  never  discovered 
the  island  to  be  really  that  which  he  knew  by  its  proper  appellation 
O  llurutu. 

On  the  whole,  if  we  admit  that  llarotonga  was  peopled  not  quite 
nine  hunched  years  ago,  and  Tupuai  only  about  a  century  before  its 
discovery,  we  cannot  suppose  that  more  than  two  or  three  centuries 
have  elapsed  since  the  other  Austral  islantls  received  their  first  inha- 
bitants. 

1' At. Ml)  11,  on    r  n  i;  i.  ow   a  uc  ii  1 1- 1:  i,  a  c;  o. 


Vd'itiiiolit  is  the  Tahitian  pronunciation  of  Valai-mot)!,  which  is  the 
proiKU'  native  ap[)ellatioM  of  the  archipelago.  This  very  term  m:\y 
serve  as  a  good  e.xemplitlcation  of  the  composition  of  the  dialect.  Its 
meaning  seems  to  be.  "  cloud  of  islands,"  for  /w/.-»  signities,  in  this 
language  (but  in  no  other  of  Polynesia),  d  cloud,  and  hiotii  signities 
here,  as  in  Tahitian,  (in  islnml.  Like  this  compound  name',  the 
whole  language  is  constituted  of  two  elements, — the  one  similar  to 
the  Tahitian,  tiie  otlu^r  peculiar,  and  unlike  any  that  we  lind  else- 
where. The  words  which  come  under  tin;  latter  description  are  not 
only  numerous,  but  they  are  such  as  are  usually  original  in  a  lan- 
guage, and  very  rarely  introduced  from  abroad, — s\ich  as  man, 
woman,  fire,  water,  gooci,  bad,  and  the  like.      They  seem  to  form 


144 


ET  II  NO(i  R  A  1>  II  Y. 


a  part  of  some  primitive  tongue,  which  has  been  corrnpted  and  par- 
tially destroyed  by  an  infusion  of  Tahitian.  This  intermixture  must 
have  talten  place  some  time  ago, — at  least  before  the  settlement  of  the 
Austral  Islands, — for  the  form  in  which  the  Tahitian  words  exist  is 
that  which  they  liad  before  the  disuse  of  the  k  and  ng,  which  has 
made  so  great  an  alteration  in  the  Innguage.  Many  of  the  Tahitian 
words,  moreover,  are  perverted  and  disfigured  as  they  would  be  in 
the  pronunciation  of  foreigners  (see  Grammar,  i  1).  The  gram- 
matical construction,  however,  so  far  as  we  are  able  to  determine  it, 
coincides  with  the  Tahitian;  as  we  find  in  the  Vitian,  tliougli  the 
mass  of  words  is  peculiar,  the  grammar  is  chiefly  Polynesian. 

From  what  source  this  foreign  element  which  is  here  apparent  was 
derived,  cannot  now  be  determined.  A  comparison  of  the  peculiar 
words  in  the  Paumotuan  with  the  corresponding  terms  in  various 
other  languages  of  Oceanica  has  led  to  no  satisfactory  result. 
Perhaps,  when  the  idioms  of  Melanesia  are  better  known,  the 
attempt  may  be  renewed  with  more  success.*  Future  inquirers, 
also,  among  the  natives  of  the  archipchigo,  may  possibly  obtain  some 
clue  to  their  origin ;  for  it  seems  certain  that  their  migration  cannot 
be  referred  to  a  very  early  peritxl.  If  they  inhabited  the  coral  islands 
before  the  arrival  of  the  Polynesian  colonists  at  Tahiti  and  Nukuhiva, 
how  did  it  happen  tliat,  being  not  oidy  the  best  warriors,  but  the  most 
skilful  navigators  of  that  part  of  the  ocean,  ttity  did  not  at  once  seize 
upon  these  and  the  otlier  high  i.slands  which  are  planletl  on  the  out- 
skirts of  the  Paumotus  on  every  side,  and  which  contrast  so  strongly, 
in  their  beauty  and  fertility,  with  tlio.se  bare  and  dismal  abodes  ' 
Had  they  once  been  in  po.ssession  of  any  of  these  larger  islands,  the 
half-starved  crews  of  a  few  wandering  Samoan  canoes  could  never 
have  succeeded  in  expelling  them. 

Another  evidence  that  their  migration  to  their  present  seat  is  not  of 
old  date  is  the  fact  that  they  have  not  yet  completed  the  settlement 


? 


•  Mr.  M<x>n'nlu)Ul,  «h<iso  (ipiM^rlunitios  tiir  nc-(|iiiriri;.;  u  kii(p»l('Jj;c  o!"  Ilie  customs  of 
llicse  isiuniirrs  have  btt-ii  |)cciiliarly  good,  stales  (Vnynges,  vol.  i.,  p.  1.5!()  that  their 
large  (loiil)lc'  ciinoi's  are  made  tu  sail  with  either  end  (lireiiiost,  and  that  in  taeking  they 
merely  sliilt  the  sail  and  rudder  from  one  end  to  the  oilier.  In  this  re.s|K  et  they  diller 
from  the  [iro|H'r  I'dlynesians,  am!  reseirdile  the  Keejeians  and  Caroline  islanders.  The 
fact  is  ai-so  important,  as  showing  that  their  melhoil  of  can(K>-htiilding  was  not  horrowed 
from  the  Tah'iians,  and  that  their  i.neeslors  had  thus  a  mean.^  of  transportation  such  as 
would  enable  diem  to  reach  these  islands  (nnn  a  great  distance,  without  the  necessity  of 
stiippiog  at  inlermeiliale  poin's. 


OCEANIC    AI  I  G  R  A  T  I  ')  N  S. 


145 


of  their  country.  All  the  westernmost  isltnds,  as  far  east  as  Hun,  or 
Bow  Island,  are  inhabited,  and  before  the  late  devastating  wars  of 
NganA,  their  population  was  tolerably  numerous.  As  we  advance 
towards  the  east  and  southeast,  we  find  islands  on  which  there  are  no 
inhabitants;  and  these  gradually  increase  in  number,  until  at  length 
the  eight  nearest  to  the  Gambler  Group  are  all  in  that  condition. 
Searlc's  Island,  when  discovered  by  Wilson  in  1797,  was  deserted, 
though  he  found  some  traces  to  show  that  it  iiad  been  visiiod. 
Thirty  years  later,  Beechey  found  there  a  scanty  population,  as  did 
we  in  1839.  They  could  not  have  exceeded  a  hundred  in  number, 
and  of  course  were  in  no  condition,  as  yet,  to  send  out  colonists  to 
the  vacant  islands  south  of  tliem. 

The  following  list  of  Paumotuan  words,  with  the  corresponding 
terms  in  Polynesian,  is  given  to  confirm  what  has  been  said  of  the 
difference  of  the  two  lanuruatres. 


I"\U.irOTl'.\N. 

I'OLYNKSIAX. 

kciiji, 

ivi, 

bone. 

pakii. 

no. 

cloud. 

ruki* 

jmitii. 

dark. 

iji/ikc, 

kuli, 

dog. 

ncki. 

(ifi. 

fi  re. 

P'irii, 

ikii. 

fish. 

nmmiui/i, 

Idnidliinr, 

girl. 

uiiK, 

Mfi,  iiKiitiiki, 

good. 

tnreii, 

lasi,  iiiii. 

great. 

pom, 

id  11,  iipoko. 

head. 

korerekii,   . 

ili,  riki. 

little. 

hdkoi. 

tunc. 

man  (vir). 

kdinike*  . 

miisiiiii,  miihuna, 

nioiin. 

loilr. 

till  or  iis<i. 

rain. 

tiikiiniri,  , 

liii,  moii/iit,     , 

sea. 

piko, 

mftr, 

to  sleep. 

niiniiK, 

(iklo. 

tongue. 

molioki. 

Idkiiii,    , 

tree. 

ko?iio. 

v<'i. 

water. 

rnliaki, 

DUildtji,  . 

wind. 

eriic, 

tdjiiw,     . 

woman. 

I'tiri^ 

ttisi. 

one. 

ill-,    . 

Ilia, 

two. 

yt-'i. 

tolii. 

three. 

opr,  . 

■        f", 

four. 

■  these  words  linve 

l)oen  lately  introiliieeil  into  thi 

■  Tahitian.     See  the  Com 

[mrntive  Grammar,  ^  f*l. 

37 


1 


146 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


PAUMOTUAN. 

F0LVNF.8IAN. 

pfXa, 

Umii, 

five. 

hene. 

Olio, 

six. 

hito, 

.        Jilu, 

seven. 

hnwti. 

viilu. 

eight. 

nipa. 

iva. 

nine. 

horiliori,    . 

J'ulu, 

ten. 

penu. 

lau. 

hundred 

NEW    ZEALAND. 


:i 


J* 


:1 


In  our  remarks  on  Tahiti,  we  have  had  occasion  to  quote  the  tradi- 
tion given  by  Cook  as  prevalent  among  the  New  Zealanders, — namely, 
that  their  ancestors  came,  like  those  of  the  Tahitians,  from  a  country 
called  Heawije.  During  our  stay  at  the  Bay  of  Islands,  the  opportu- 
nity was  improved  of  making  inquiries  of  the  natives  on  this  subject, 
and  the  replies  obtained  were  more  satisfactory  than  we  had  antici- 
pated. The  old  men  stated,  as  the  traditionary  belief,  that  the  iirst 
maori  (natives)  came  from  Hawaiki,  a  country  to  the  east.  The 
principal  men  who  arrived  were  Rongokako,  Tanetuturi,  Tanepepeke, 
Taneivitika,  Taneweka,  Ta\;tervaiura,  Tanenuiarangi ,  Kopaia,  and 
Koriuiupoko.  The  names  of  the  canoes  were  Tahi-nui  (or  Tai-nut), 
Tearawa,  Horouta,  and  Takittimu.  The  first  places  at  which  they 
established  themselves  were  Karvia,  on  the  west  coast,  Maketit,  near 
the  East  Cape,  Turanga  or  Poverty  Bay,  and  Ahuriri,  near  the  eastern 
entrance  of  Cook's  Strait. 

The  natives  have  also  an  account  of  the  arrival  of  a  party  from  the 
same  place,  Hawaiki,  at  a  very  late  date,  by  which  the  kumam,  or 
sweet  potato,  was  first  introduced  into  the  islands.  'I'iiis  party 
arrived  in  the  time  of  Teraraku,  the  great  grandfather  of  Pomare,  the 
present  chief  of  the  Bay  of  Islands,  or  about  a  hundred  years  ago. 
Tiie  name  of  the  chief  who  arrived  was  Pant,  with  his  sister  Ilinu- 
kakirirangi.  By  one  account  they  were  in  a  single  canoe,  made  of  a 
number  of  pieces  lashed  together,  whioli  is  the  mode  of  building  in 
the  Navigator  Islands.  But  another  native,  of  wliom  we  made  the 
inquiry,  said  that  they  iiad  several  canoes,  and  gave  the  same  names 
that  we  had  already  received  for  tho.se  belonging  to  the  first  emigrants. 
There  was  evidently  some  contusion  in  this,  and  it  seemed,  at  first, 
not  improbable  tliat  the  latter  account  was  the  correct  one,  and  that 
the   first  tradition  was  too  particular  and  detailed  to  apply  to  the 


OCEANIC    MIGRATIONS. 


147 


earliest  settlers  in  the  country.  Farther  inquiries,  however,  did  not 
support  this  view.  It  has  been  seen  that  the  name  of  one  of  the 
leaders  was  Rongokako,  and  one  of  the  places  first  settled  wa.s  Tu- 
ranga,  or  Poverty  Bay.  On  referring  to  our  list  of  tribes,  we  found 
that  that  which  occupies  this  bay  is  termed  Wanau-a-Rongokata, 
"offspring  of  Rongokata."  This  name  is  probably  the  same  as  that 
given  above.  In  taking  down  at  one  time,  several  hundred  appella- 
tives, (the  names  of  the  tribes,  their  localities  and  their  principal 
chiefs,)  it  was  impossible  to  avoid  .some  mistakes  in  spelling,  espe- 
cially as  the  pronunciation  of  the  natives  frequently  misleads,  the  k 
being  sounded  like  /,  the  r  like  d,  and  the  final  vowels  slurred  over. 
But  this  ancestor  of  one  of  the  largest  tribes  in  New  Zealand  could  cer- 
tainly not  have  been  a  foreigner  who  arrived  in  the  country  only  three 
generations  back,  when  it  was  fully  peopled.  This  circumstance, 
together  with  the  fact  that  Cook,  who  visited  New  Zealand  only  forty 
or  fifty  years  after  the  coming  of  the  party  with  the  kumaras,  and 
when  the  memory  of  it  was  still  recent,  heard  the  same  account  of  the 
origin  of  the  New  Zealanders,  seems  to  make  it  certain  that  the  tradi- 
tion, as  first  given,  is  substantially  correct. 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  natives  speak  of  Hawaiki  as  lying  to 
the  east.  This  may  be  explained  by  the  manner  in  which  the  migra- 
tion probably  took  place.  A  fleet  of  canoes,  of  the  large  kind  used  in 
war,  as  is  shown  by  tlie  fact  of  their  having  names,  set  sail  (we  may 
suppose)  from  Savaii  to  Tonga,  between  which  places  a  constant 
communication  has  been  kept  up  from  the  earliest  times.  Before 
they  reached  their  destination,  a  gale  in  the  direction  of  the  southeast 
trades  struck  them,  and  obliged  them,  in  order  not  to  be  driven 
towards  the  Feejce  Islands,  to  lie  up  to  the  southwest.  In  this  way 
they  were  carried  into  the  zone  of  westerly  winds  south  of  the  tropics, 
and  finally  brought  to  New  Zealand.  It  will  be  observed  that  this  is 
precisely  the  manner  in  which  we  have  been  led  to  suppose  that  the 
first  emigrants  reached  the  Sandwich  Islands,  in  the  opposite  direc- 
tion (ante,  p.  130).  The  last  bearing  which  they  could  have  had  of 
their  native  country,  before  they  lost  their  reckoning  entirely,  must 
have  been  when  Ihey  were  driven  off  to  the  westward,  and  it  is  there- 
fore not  surprising  tliat  they  should  consider  it  as  lying  to  the  east. 
Kotzebuc  informs  us  that  Kadu,  the  native  of  Ulca,  whom  he  found 
living  on  one  of  the  Radack  Chain,  fifteen  hundred  miles  east  of  Ulea, 
supposed  himself  to  be  to  the  west  of  that  island,  because  he  was  first 
driven  off  in  that  direction. 


148 


E  T  II  N  O  (i  R  A  1'  II  V. 


As  to  tlie  time  whicli  has  elapsed  since  tlieir  arrival,  our  conclu- 
sions, beinif  ioriiicil  on  frroiinds  of  a  va<rnc  and  general  character, 
must  bo  n)erely  approximative.  The  Now  Zealand  dialect  dilFers 
quite  as  widely  from  the  !!^amoan,  as  does  tlio  Tahitian,  althouLdi  tlie 
points  ol  ilitrerence  are  not  identical,  ivich  idiom  has  pursued  its 
peculiar  course  in  departinij  from  the  coniinon  type  ;  but  the  distance 
wiiich  both  have  attained  is  nearly  tiie  same,  .ludoinif  from  this  fact 
alone,  we  mit;ht  be  induced  to  suppose  that  the  emigrations  by  which 
New  Zealand  and  Taiiiti  were  peoiiled,  took  place  about  the  same 
time. 

Now,  as  reirards  the  latter  islanil,  we  have  seen  that  all  the  irroups 
of  eastern  Polynesia  (llarotonga,  Nukuhiva,  Hawaii,  <Scc.)  have  de- 
rived from  it,  either  entirt>ly  or  in  great  pa;t,  their  ])opulation,  lan- 
guage, customs,  and  mythology.  \N'e  observe,  moreover,  that  one 
general  stamp  pervades  them  all,  in  these  respects,  and  that  they 
ditfer  very  strikingly,  in  many  points,  from  the  natives  of  the  western 
grouj)  (iSamoa  and  Tonga).  It  seems  certain,  therefore,  that  between 
the  time  of  the  settlement  of  Taliiti  l)y  Samoan  emigrants,  and  the 
sending  forth  of  the  colonies  wiiich  peopled  the  surrounding  groups, 
suflicient  time  must  have  elapsed  for  llu;  language  to  have  undergone 
considerable  alteration,  and  for  tlieir  religious  belief,  tabu-system,  and 
much  of  their  social  polity  to  have  taken  a  new  antl  peculiar  form. 
If  the  Uarotongans  have  been  established  nine  centuries  in  their 
present  abode,  and  tlie  llawaiians  fourteen,  it  seems  impossible,  on 
any  calculation  of  probabilities,  to  allow  less  than  three  thousand 
years  to  the  Tahitian  people. 

(    M  AT  M  .\  M     1  S  t.  .\  N  l>. 


Our  information  concerning  this  island,  was  derived  from  an  Eng- 
lish sailor,  at  the  IJay  of  Isiantls.  He  said  tliat  he  had  lived  for  some 
time  upon  it,  and  found  the  natives  similar  to  'he  New  Zealanders, 
but  loss  civili/ed.  Thtjy  had  tiie  tradition  that  their  ancestors  were 
from  the  East  Cape  of  New  Zealand,  and  were  driven  in  their  canoes 
out  to  sea  by  a  northwest  gale.  In  this  condition  they  fell  in  with 
Chatham  Island,  and  established  them.sehcs  upon  it.  This  took 
place,  as  near  as  our  informant  could  learn,  about  ninety  years  ago. 
It  is  probalile  that  this  account  is  in  the  main  correct,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  the  time,  which  tliey  could  hardly  have  iiatl  the  means  of 
computiiiir  with  nuudi  accuracy.    These  original  inliabitaiits  of  Chat- 


OCEANIC    M  I  {}  RATIONS. 


149 


ham  Island  must  not  be  confounded  with  the  New  Zcalanders  who 
have  lately  l)o«ui  carried  thittier  by  tra(liii<j;  vessels,  and  who  are  now 
probably  in  possession  of  a  jf  reat  portion  of  tlie  island. 


!■•  A  K  A  A  r  <),  ()  R  r  i\  i:  r  n  i  (»  .n  (j  it  o  r  r. 

As  the  conclnsions  with  regard  to  the  origin  of  tlie  natives  of  this 
group,  and  those  of  Vaitupn,  are  based  upon  the  facts  stated  in  my 
journal,  it  has  been  thought  best  to  give  them  in  full,  as  written  at  the 
time  ;  and  as  these  two  groups  are  probably  the  only  ones  in  which 
the  Polynesian  race  is  now  lo  be  seen  in  its  |)rimitive  state,  these 
extracts  miiy  be  otherwise  interesting,  more  especially  as  showing  the 
grade  of  civilization  which  has  been  attained  by  such  small  and 
isolated  communities,  under  the  peculiar  disadvantages  arising  from 
the  nature  of  the  islands  which  they  inhabit. 

"Monday,  January  25,  1841.  At  daylight  we  were  in  sight  of  a 
low  island  which  is  laid  down  in  this  position,  with  the  name  of  the 
Duke  of  York's  Island.  It  was  so  called  by  Admiral  Byron,  who 
discovered  it  in  the  year  17G5,  on  his  way  to  the  Ladrones.  As  we 
approached,  its  appearance  brought  to  mind  another  of  Lord  Byron's 
discoveries,  the  largest  Disappointment  Island,  to  which  it  bore  a 
strong  resemblance.  It  was  an  oblong  ring  of  small  coral  islets,  linked 
together  l)y  reefs,  and  surrounding  a  lagoon.  Most  of  the  i.slands 
were  well  wootled,  and  one  in  particular  was  covered  with  a  dense 
forest  of  cocoa-nut  trees.  From  this  circumstance,  and  from  the 
small  number  of  birds  about  the  ship,  we  were  dispo.sed  to  believe 
that  the  island  might  prove  to  be  inhabited,  notwithstanding  the 
contrary  statement  of  its  discoverer.  \Ve  were  not,  therefore,  sur- 
prised, when  a  column  of  smoke,  ascending  from  one  of  the  islets, 
gave  evidence  of  the  presence  of  natives. 

"  The  vessels  took  their  stations  for  surveying,  and  we  were  slowly 
standing  along  the  island,  when  three  canoes  put  off  towards  the  ship. 
The  mizzen-topsail  was  backed,  to  allow  them  to  come  up  with  us, 
which  they  did  in  a  style  that  again  reminded  us  of  the  Disa[)point- 
ment  Islands;*  for  they  broke  out  into  an  uproarious  song  or  cantila- 

*  I'^vlracl  friim  joiiriml  Ht  the  I)isnp|K)intiii('nt  Isliinds :  "On  tlirowini;  a  sninll  pre«pnt 
intooiKMjfllic  raiiiM's  which  wns  al<)nj;siilo,  iho  j>ivcr  was  rcwanlcil  by  a  .sonj^  (irf;ratilinle, 
which  two  (>r  the  natives  initiuilialcly  commenced.  Il  was  a  monoldncHia  hut  not  iinmc- 
IihIIous  chant,  and  reminded  us  iil"  the  tones  of  the  ("nthidic  service."  Soiiio  natives  on 
shore  nrterwnrds  <'vinccd  tlieir  gratitude  in  the  same  manner. 

as 


150 


ETHNOOR  A  I'll  Y. 


tioii,  which  they  kept  up,  with  some  intervals  of  shouting  and  clamor, 
until  they  left  the  ship. 

"The  canoes  were  all  double,  and  of  course  had  no  outriggers 
They  were  made  of  pieces  of  wood  lashed  together,  like  those  of 
Samoa,  and  were  ornamented  with  a  few  shells  of  tlie  white  ovula, 
commonly  used  for  this  purpose  throughout  tiie  Friendly  Group.* 
Tiie  blades  of  their  paddles  were  not  oval,  as  in  Tonga  and  Feejee, 
but  oblong  and  slender,  like  those  of  the  Navigator  islanders. 

"  There  were  eight  or  ten  men  in  eacti  canoe,  and  as  they  drew  near, 
their  color  and  features  proclaimed  that  they  belonged  to  the  Poly- 
nesian race.  There  was  little  in  either  to  distinguish  them  from  the 
people  of  Samoa  and  Tonga.  They  wore  the  maro,  or  girdle,  made 
of  braided  matting,  like  tiiat  of  the  Paumotu  islanders.  Around  tlieir 
heads,  covering  the  forehead,  they  had  narrow  strips  of  the  same 
matting  tied,  and  one,  who  appeared  to  be  a  personage  of  note,  had 
stuck  in  it  several  of  the  long  red  feathers  from  the  tail  of  the  tropic 
bird.  Many  of  them  had  shades  or  eye-screens  of  thick  braid,  lied 
on  the  forehead,  very  similar  to  those  used  by  weak-sighted  people 
amonsr  us.  Their  hair  was  cut  an  inch  or  two  lon<j  all  over  the  liead. 
Some  of  them  wore  shells,  and  pieces  of  sponge  suspended  by  a 
string  to  the  neck,  aud  one  had  a  large  blue  bead  worn  in  a  similar 
manner, — showing  that  they  had  already  had  intercourse  with 
foreigners.  Indeed,  their  manners  left  no  doubt  on  this  point. 
Before  they  reached  the  ship  they  held  up  rolls  of  matting,  making 
signs  of  a  wish  to  barter.  In  one  canoe,  the  head  man  unrolled  his 
wares,  and  spread  them  out  to  our  view,  with  the  dexterity  of  a 
practised  auctioneer.  All  this  time  they  were  chanti.'g  their  noisy 
song,  without  intermission. 

"They  came  alongside  very  readily,  but  no  inducements  could  pre- 
vail upon  them  to  venture  on  board.  Our  interpreter  was  a  Samoan 
native,  whom  we  shipped  at  Oahu;  )u'.  though  it  was  soon  evident 
that  their  language  was  allied  to  his  own,  it  was  still  so  different  tiiat 
he  found   himself  frequently  at  a  los.i.f     Their  refusal  to  come  on 

*  The  tiTiii  Friendly  Islniids  wns  nt  tlinl  time  iisnl  hy  lis,  as  it  had  l)ceii  liy  mnnv 
voyngiTa,  to  drsiyiinle  tlio  whole  iirchipeliif^o  ol"  'I'oiifin,  Sainon,  Niun,  I'eii,  A:c.  h  has 
since  liecn  thoiijjht  hest  to  rcstrii't  it  tr)  the  tirst-nnmed  groii|i. 

•f  Tlie  chief  dilFeo'iu'c  is  the  use  lit  I't(kiiafi>  of  the  k,  which  the  Sninoan  dialect  omits. 
We  have  frequently  ohserved  that  a  very  slij;ht  ch;itig(!  of  Jir.lect  is  sudleient  to  confuse, 
at  lir.st,  a  native  of  one  of  these  isl.inds  ;  while  n  fon'if^ner,  who  has  a  j;eneral  smatlerins; 
of  one  dialect,  can  usually  accommodate  liim-sclf  without  dilhcully  to  such  alterations. 


il, 


OCEANIC    M  Hi  U  A  T  I  O  N  a 


151 


board  wns  canscil  by  a  sinf^iilar  apprehension  that  the  ship  would  rise 
and  bear  them  to  the  skies,  from  wliich  they  averred  that  we  had  de- 
scended. One  of  them,  who  had  an  ulcerated  arm,  had  tlie  courage, 
at  last,  to  climb  up  to  the  gangway,  and  offer  it  to  be  cured,  but  he 
could  not  be  prevailed  upon  to  advance  farther. 

"  A  brisk  trade  was,  in  the  mean  time,  carried  on  through  the  ports 
for  various  articles  of  their  manufacture.  Besides  matting,  they  had 
nets,  fish-'nooks  of  bone,  miniature  canoes  three  or  four  feet  long, 
wooden  boxes,  paddles,  &,c.,  but  no  articles  of  food.  A  few  of  them, 
in  their  eagerness  to  trall'io,  climbed  ui)  the  sides  of  the  sliip.  While 
matters  were  in  this  state,  a  signal-gun  was  fired  for  the  schooner. 
For  a  second  they  appeared  stupified,  and  then  such  a  hubbub  arose 
as  threw  all  their  previous  clamor  into  the  shade.  Those  who  were 
clinging  to  the  ship  leaped  directly  into  the  water,  and  scrambled  to 
their  canoes.  All  then  seized  their  paddles  and  started  for  the  land 
with  the  haste  of  desperation. 

"  In  a  few  minutes  the  boats  were  in  readiness  to  go  ashore,  and  we 
pusheil  off  towards  the  nearest  islet.  The  entrance  through  which 
the  canoes  had  disappeared  into  the  lagoon  was  some  distance  further 
on  ;  but  when  we  arrived  at  the  shore,  the  natives  were  already  on  the 
beach  prepared  to  receive  us.  They  had  recovered  from  their  terror, 
and  greeted  us  with  every  sign  of  friendship.  We  landed  with  some 
difficulty  on  a  slu^lf  of  coral  (such  as  surrounds  most  of  these  low 
islands)  on  which  a  slight  surf  was  breaking.  Before  we  reached 
the  dry  beach  we  were  met  by  ten  or  twelve  islanders,  who  testified 
by  various  signs  their  pleasure  at  our  visit. 

"  Their  deportment  evinced  a  singular  union  of  confiding  warmth 
and  respectful  fear.  Some  were  shy,  and  retreated  as  we  approached  ; 
others,  more  bold,  put  their  arms  round  our  necks,  and  urged  us  to 
accompany  them  to  their  village.  None  of  them,  however,  could 
remain  quiet,  and  their  agitation  was  evinced  frequently  in  their 
peculiar  motle, — by  singing.  Several  times,  while  asking  an  islander 
the  names  of  objects  in  his  language,  after  telling  me  three  or  four, 
he  would  burst  out  into  a  song,  which  nothing  could  induce  him  to 
stop.  This,  though  ludicrous  enough,  was  very  annoying.  At  other 
times  they  woulil  speak  for  several  minutes  with  surprising  volubility, 
(juite  regardless  of  its  effect  ujjou  us;  or  they  would  breakout  into 
hearty  laughter  without  the  least  apparent  cause.  Their  principal 
object  appeared  to  be  to  trade,  and  tliey  were  continually  repeating 
the  word  kajiloii,  which,  at  first,  we  supposed  to  be  the  name  of  some 


1A9 


ETHNOQB  A  I'll  Y. 


':  t 


nrticlo  tlint  they  pnrticulnrly  dosired.  Unt  ns  every  tluiifj  seemed  to 
be  indili'iTciitlv  kd/i/ou,  we  at  hist  ('(nicludetl  that  it  was  a  freiiernl 
dcsijjiiation  lor  pri)|K'rty  or  inercliaiidisf. 

"  At'tor  riMiiaiiiiiiif  an  lioiir  on  tlie  Immu-Ii,  we  complit'd  witli  tlieir 
iiivitalioii  to  visit  llieir  villai,'e.  Tliis  was  on  tlie  imiiT.  or  la^nioii  side 
of  the  islet.  It  was  cotiiposeii  of  twenty  or  tiiirty  lio\ises,  about  as 
larjfo  as  those  of  the  Sandwieh  ishmders,  of  oliloni,'  shape,  witli  eaves 
slopinjf  nearly  to  the  f>ronnd.  'I'hc  heiiflit  of  the  ridi^e-poie  was  from 
ten  to  fifteen  feet,  and  it  projected  at  each  end  about  a  foot  beyond 
the  walls  of  the  house,  being  eovered  over  the  whole  length  with 
thatch.  This  thatch  was  of  pandaiuis-loaves,  laid  on  so  loosely  that  a 
considerable  thickness  was  necessary  to  exclude  the  rain.  'l"he  inside 
of  the  houses  was  very  clean,  but  we  saw  no  furniture  in  any.  It  had 
probably  been  removed  on  our  coming  on  shore.  In  one  part  of  the 
town  was  a  small  open  s|)ace  streweil  with  sand  and  pebbles,  which 
they  called  the  mulai'.  When  I  asked  for  the  fale  iitiin  (house  of  tied) 
they  appeared  to  understand  me,  and  pointed  to  some  place  at  a 
distance. 

"  The  most  curious  structures  in  the  village  were  three  small  quays 
or  piers  of  coral  stone,  five  feet  wide  and  two  or  three  in  height,  built 
out  into  the  lagoon,  to  the  distance  of  about  ten  feet.  On  the  end  of 
each  was  a  small  house,  standing  partly  on  |iiles  over  the  water.  We 
could  not  letirn  if  they  were  intcniled  for  iamling-places,  though  this 
purpose  seemed  hardly  probable.  On  going  to  them,  wv  saw  the 
three  canoes  that  had  visited  the  ship  lying  off  aluiut  pistol-shot  dis- 
tance in  the  lagoon,  fdlcil  with  women  and  children.  The  natives 
hail  evidently  adopted  ihis  as  the  best  modi?  of  placing  their  treasures 
beyond  our  reach,  in  case  we  should  prove  hostile. 

"  We  saw  no  arms  among  the  peo[ile,  nor  in  any  of  their  houses, — 
neither  were  any  scars  visible  upon  their  naked  boilies ;  so  that  we 
have  some  grounds  for  believing  that  this  sim|)le  people  are,  as  yet, 
strangers  to  the  miseries  of  war.  When  we  asked  for  their  chief, 
some  pointed  to  an  old,  portly  man,  who  appeared  to  have  the  most 
consideration  among  them;  but  others  declared  that  there  was  none 
present,  and  that  the  great  chief  {alila)  lived  on  an  island  in  a  south- 
east direction,  but  whether  they  meant  merely  an  islet  on  the  other 
side  of  the  lagoon,  or  a  more  distant  island,  we  could  not  lietermine. 

"  Our  impre.s.sion  was  that  we  saw  the  entire  population  of  the  island. 
Those  who  came  off  to  the  ship,  twenty  in  niimber,  were  all  whom 
we  saw  on  shore,  and  it  seemed  likely  that  had  there  been  others  on 


OC  K  A  N  K;    M  l(i  It  a  t  I  on  m. 


\M 


(lifTerorit  piirts  of  tlio  island,  tlioy  would  have  inado  their  iippcaraiice 
beforti  wo  It'ft.  'i'lii-y  wito  so  licaltliy  and  well-conditioned,  that  wo 
must  suppose  thenfi  to  bo  woU  supplied  with  the  articles  of  food  on 
wiiieli  they  suhsist.  These  are  prohalily  nolhint;  more  than  fish  and 
cocoa-nuts;  ut  least,  wo  sasv  no  odihle  fruits  but  those  lust,  and  no 
fowls  or  hogs.  Three  young  pigs  which  we  had  on  board  were  left 
here,  and  the  natives  readily  took  charge  of  them,  but  did  not  evince 
that  surprise  which  might  have  been  expected  at  the  sight  of  an 
unknown  animal. 

"The  name  of  their  island  was  Oaltifu  (or  perhaps,  Atafu);  that  of 
the  island  where  the  high  chief  was  said  to  reside  was  t'akaajo.  I 
could  not  learn  that  they  know  of  any  country  but  their  own.  They 
re|)oated  after  mo  the  names  /?»«««  Samoa,  fa  nun  'Vongalahn,  faniia 
Viti,  and  asked  in  what  direction  they  lay,  and  if  we  came  from  thorn. 
Their  decideil  belief,  however,  was  that  we  came  from  above,  in  the 
sky,  and  were  divinities.  This  they  rep(!ated  to  us  froiiuenlly,  and 
we  could  not  convince  them  to  the  contrary.  Indeed  it  is  natural  to 
suppose  that  their  constant  singing  arose  merely  from  a  desire  to 
propitiatt!  our  favor,  according  to  their  simple  mode  of  worship. 
\Vhen  a  number  of  us  hud  collected  in  the  iiiatai',  the  two  oldest  men 
seated  themselves  on  a  mat,  and  taking  each  two  short  slicks,  began 
drumming  on  sinothcr  larger  one  which  lay  on  the  ground  before 
them,  at  tlio  same  time  chanting  a  song,  or  pc^rhaps  a  hymn.  Another 
wrapped  a  niiit  about  his  middle,  and  went  through  the  motions  of  a 
dance,  which  had  ii  resemblance!  to  those  of  New  Zc.land. 

"  As  we  were  about  to  ((uit  llie  j)lace,  a  hatchet  which  had  been 
brought  on  shore  was  missing,  and  was  supposed  to  be  stolen.  As 
soon  as  this  was  made  known,  a  tremendous  excitement  ensued.  Tlie 
old  chief  started  up  and  made  a  s[)eech,  delivered  with  amazing  volu- 
bility and  strength  of  utterance,  while  his  features  worked  with 
fearful  agitation.  We  could  guess  at  the  purport  of  his  argument 
from  what  followed,  for  his  peoiile  separated  in  all  directions,  and 
pre»ntly  afterwards  the  missing  article  was  retiu'ned. 

"The  natives  accompanied  us  in  a  body  to  the  landing-place,  and 
saw  us  safely  into  the  boat.  As  they  stood  around,  we  had  an  oppor- 
tunity ofob.serving  with  attention  their  physiognomy  and  proportions. 
They  were  a  well-formed  race,  of  a  yellow-copper  complexion,  with 
features  varying  considerably  in  stamp,  but  all  of  the  proper  Po- 
lynesian type,  particularly  as  seen  in  the  F'riendly  Islands,  with 
whose  inhabitants  they  might  readily  be  confounded.  Their  tattooing. 


lAt 


KTIINOO  II  A  I'll  V. 


however,  was  distinct  niul  poniliar,  sliowiiiK  that  tlicy  huvo  l)oeu  a 
st'paratf  lril«'  loii^j  oiiduj^li  to  have  alloreil  thi-ir  iMistoms  coiisidcralily 
ill  thin  rt'H|HH't.  The  priiicipal  mark  wiw  a  Kort  of'  triangle,  with  the 
apex  (Itiwiiwards,  iinpriiiteil  on  each  hauiu'h.  A  doiihle  row  of  hues, 
with  little  crosses  between,  was  drawn  down  ol)li(|uely  upon  (laeli 
clicek,  and  others  of  tlio  same  kind,  be^'iniiinvT  in  the  Nmall  of  thu 
I'ack,  eaine  nuind  to  the  l)reast.  'I'his  part  ol"  the  Ixidy  was  stamped 
also  witli  many  trian^nhir  spots,  of  wliich  the  hirj^est  were  ahont  an 
incli  lony;  and  soniu  of  them  had,  l)esi<les,  rn(U!  li^nres,  representin)j[ 
tortoises,  imprinted  on  tlie  Ijreast  and  sides.  'The  arms  down  to  the 
elbow  were  tattooed  in  tlie  same  manner  with  rows  of  small  triannles." 

I)uriiijf»the  three  following?  days  we  were  enifnged  in  workini;  past 
the  Duke  of  ('larenees  Island,  also  discovered  by  Byron,  and  lying 
to  the  southeast  of  the  preceiling.  No  inhabitants  were  seen  upon 
it,  though  we  afterwards  learned  that  it  was  well  peopled. 

"  Friday,  January  '29.  'I'he  night  was  cloudy,  and  so  dark  that 
objects  were  discovered  with  ditliculty  at  a  little  distance  from  the 
ship.  About  two  o'clock  the  noise  of  surf  was  distinguished,  and 
shortly  after  land  was  seen  about  a  mile  olF.  We  lay  to  till  morning, 
and  then  proceeded  to  examine  what  might  be  fairly  called  our 
discovery, — for,  though  we  afterwards  learned  that  it  had  been  visited 
by  a  whaler,  no  information  had  been  given  to  the  public  by  whi(;h  it 
could  be  placed  on  a  chart.  It  was  a  coral  island,  larger  than  any  of 
those  we  had  seen  since  we  left  Oahu, — (lerhaps  twelve  miles  in  cir- 
cumterence.  Its  form  was  that  of  a  bow,  or  rather  a  hollnw  crescent, 
the  interior  being  occupied  l)y  a  lagoon.  Alwut  half  the  circnmlercMice 
was  composed  of  coral  reef,  over  which  the  sea  beat ;  the  rest  was 
made  up  of  a  dozen  or  more  detached  islets,  varying  from  a  mile  to  a 
few  rods  in  lengt+i.  The  laud  appeared  to  be  higher  than  is  usual  on 
these  low  islands,  being  elevated,  in  some  parts,  as  much  as  twenty 
feet  above  the  sea.  Many  of  liie  islets  were  covered  with  groves  of 
cocoa-nut  trees. 

"  We  were  not  long  in  doubt  as  to  its  being  inhabited.  About«un- 
rise  a  lleet  of  eighteen  canoes,  carrying  t()ur  or  five  persons  each,  put 
otFfrom  one  of  the  islets,  antl  paddled  out  to  sea.  Their  object  seemed 
to  be  lisiiing,  and  we  were  much  surjirised  to  observi;  that  our  presence 
appeared  to  produce  no  excitement  among  them.  They  pursued  their 
occupation  w  ithout  taking  the  least  notice  of  us.  This,  however,  may 
have  been  merely  a  ru.se  to  gain  an  opportunity  of  (piietly  observing 
us.     The  canoes,  like  those  we  saw  at  Oatafu,  were  made  of  several 


or  K  A  N  IC    M  l(J  K  AT  I  ON8. 


1 M 


picti's  ol  wood,  j()iii(!il  totrotlicr  liy  lanhiii^H  of  Hiimot,  niul  resoiiildiid 
III  (ivi-ry  rt's[i('iM  tliosc  of  Siiimou. 

"Ah  tlu!  iiiitivt'H  nIiowoU  no  diNpoNitioii  to  corrio  iiiMir  im,  two  Imnts 
were  sent  to  o|i('ii  u  foiiiiiiiiiiicatioii  willi  tlicin.  At  first  tlicy  were 
sliy,  aiitl  kept  asvay,  until  solium  ot  our  Samlwii'li  i.slaixli'rs  strippi'd 
olf  tlifir  frocks,  to  display  tlicir  dusky  skins,  and  liaili-d  llioiii  in 
lliiwaiian.  'I'licy  tlu'ii  approai-licd,  and  entered  into  a  trade,  ox- 
clian^ini,'  itieir  mats  and  carved  l)oxes,  whicli  must  have  cost  tliein 
weeks  of  laltor,  for  a  tew  lisii-liooks  or  otlier  trifles.  When  the  l)oats 
pulled  towards  tlii^  ship,  they  li)llowed,  and  on  eomiiii,'  near  hej^an 
their  son^,  at  the  same  time  holding  up  mats  and  paddh^s,  and 
shoutin<,'  '  hijiliiii,  liimiitdu,' — truth;  Jish-liniiks.  They  svere  dressed 
exactly  like  the  natives  of  Oatafii,  and  reseml)led  tliem  in  personal 
appearance.  Their  fine  forms  and  manly  looks  were  suhjects  of 
^eiitTtd  lulmirution,  and  tlioir  hearty  laut,diter,  when  any  thiiii,'  struck 
them  as  ludicrous,  gave  an  im|tressioii  of  their  ;,foo<l  nature,  which 
was,  perliajts,  deceptive,  'i'lu^y  were  very,  eaj^t^r  tor  tradiii;^,  but 
could  nut  be  induced  to  venture  on  boaril. 

"  l'r(?parations  wert!  immediately  made  for  laiidinir,  and  we  pushed 
otr  in  three  boats  towards  a  knoll  at  the  southwest  point  of  the  island. 
Four  or  live  of  the  canoes  aciiompanied  us.  As  we  drew  near,  we 
found  a  surf  i)reakini;  on  tiie  reef,  so  heavy  that  wo  hesitattnl  to  enter. 
By  way  of  enconraginj^  us,  the  natives  jr^t  their  canoes  upon  one  of 
the  heaviest  rollers,  and  paddlinif  with  (freal  energy,  rotlo  safely  in  to 
the  lu^ach.  Finding  that  no  better  landing-place  was  to  be  had,  we 
followed  their  example,  and  met  with  as  good  success. 

"The  islet  was  pretty  high,  and  covered  with  a  grovo  of  cocoa-nut 
trees,  but  there  were  no  houses  on  it,  and  the  natives  gave  us  to 
understand  that  their  village  was  towartls  the  southern  end  of  the 
island,  some  distance  oil'.  In  answer  to  our  iiKjuiries,  it  appeared 
that  the  name  of  the  island  was  Fakaafo,  the  same  as  that  which  the 
natives  of  Oatafu  mentioned  as  the  residence  of  their  king.  The 
name  of  the  Duke  of  Clarence's  Island,  which  we  passed  yesterday, 
was  found  to  be  Niikunono.  The  natives  spoke  of  their  own  island 
under  the  title  of  I'uiiua  loa,  or  the  'great  land,'  thus  showing  that 
they  were  not  ac(iuainted  with  any  larger.  They  aj)peared,  indeed, 
to  know  the  names  of  Viti,  Tongatabu,  and  Samoa,  but  not  the 
ilirection  in  which  they  lay.  The  two  other  islands  of  their  group 
were  the  only  ones  with  which  they  had  any  intercourse. 

"  Their  chief,  who.se  name  was  Toupe,  was  said  to  be  at  the  village. 


156 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


The  principal  person  present  was  an  old  man,  whom  they  called 
TaufaiiKjn.  They  said  that  he  was  a  priest,  and  was  fakatajm 
(sacred),  or  yrt/irt*  o  r/fAo/o  (like  agod).  Tliis  word  debolo  surprised 
us,  being  nearly  tlie  form  of  the  Sandwich  Island  term  for  devil ;  hut 
our  UKiuiries  could  elicit  nothing  more  from  them  than  that  '  O 
Debolo'  was  an  ancient  god  {atua  tajito).  The  name  of  the  god  of 
the  island  was  Tu-To/,rlau,  or  Tiii-Tokefau,  and  his  residence  was  in 
the  si<ies.  Tlie  great  deity  of  Polynesia  was  also  mentioned  by  them, 
with  the  customary  addition,  '  'Vangaloa  i  lunga  i  te  laiigi,'  Tangaloa 
above  in  the  heavens.  Wc  were  supposed  to  have  come  from  the 
same  place,  and  they  could  not  be  convinced  that  we  were  not  deities, 
but  men  only  [tangata  lava). 

"  Notwithstanding  this  impression,  their  thievish  disposition  mani- 
fested itself  very  strongly.  Several  trifling  articles  were  pilfered, 
and  if  any  thing  was  dropped  by  accident,  or  suffered  to  be  out  of 
sight  for  a  moment,  one  of  the  natives  instantly  covered  it  with  his 
foot,  or  witii  the  branch  of  a  tree. 

"  At  length  they  began  to  move  towards  their  canoes,  siiying  that 
they  were  luingry,  and  must  go  to  the  town.  We  therefore  returned 
to  our  ship,  and  remained  on  board  until  the  following  day,  when  we 
again  started,  at  about  noon,  for  the  islet  on  which  the  town  is  situated. 
W'hcii  we  came  near,  a  crowd  of  natives  appeared  on  the  beach 
awaiting  our  a|)proach.  We  landed  with  some  dilliculty  from  the 
surf,  and  walked  towards  them.  Behind  a  little  pile  of  cocoa-nuts 
and  mats  were  seated  about  twenty  old  men,  and  tlie  rest  of  iiie  crowd 
(above  a  hundred  in  number)  stood  in  the  rear-ground,  all  singing, 
shouting,  and  gesticulating,  in  a  state  of  the  highest  excitement. 
As  we  came  up,  tliey  spread  inat.s  for  us,  and  insisted  U[)on  our  sitting 
down,  at  the  same  time  giving  us  to  understand  that  the  articles 
collected  tliere  were  a  present  to  us.  Their  chief,  who  was  seated 
foremost,  was  an  elderly  man,  with  a  grave  and  sickly  look, — his  legs 
much  swollen  with  the  elephantiasis.  He  was  very  pale,  and  trem- 
bled v.ith  fear  and  agitation,  which  could  not  bo  quieted  until  the 
captain  sat  down  y  him  and  succeeded  in  assuring  him  of  our 
peaceful  intentions;  and  even  then  he  continued  to  repeat  tremulously 
the  words  '  nofo  kilalo ;  maluku  an,'  sit  down  ;  I  am  afraid, — with 
others  which  we  could  not  understand.  Their  evident  desire  was 
that  we  should  take  the  presents  ai.  1  depart,  for  they  frequently 
pointed  to  the  sun,  which  was  now  past  the  meridian,  and  said  'wa 
/JO,' — it  is  night.     When  we  ex[)ressed  a  wish  to  go  into  the  town, 


J  ■■* 


O  C  K  A  N  I  C    M  I  (!  R  A  T  I  O  N  S. 


157 


■i  wm  * 


they  opposed  it,  sayinif  '  e  sa,'  it  is  sacred  or  prohibited.  After  u 
time,  however,  when  they  had  become  accustomed  to  our  presence, 
we  took  tlio  liberty  of  turuin<r  our  steps  in  that  direction,  and  they 
accoinpunied  us.  The  entire  islet  was  covered  with  cocoa-nut  trees, 
under  the  sliade  of  which  the  houses  were  scattered,  a  Tew  yards  from 
one  anotlier.  'I'hey  were  very  numerous,  the  village  being  quite  a 
large  one,  but  we  had  no  opportunity  of  counting  them.  They  were 
similar  in  construction  to  those  of  Oatafu,  but  larger  and  better  built. 

"  Near  the  centre  of  the  town  was  a  large  building,  which  they  called 
the  nidkir,  and  declared  to  be  the  house  of  their  god,  Tui-Tokekiu. 
They  wore  very  unwilling  that  we  should  enter  it,  but  yielded  at  last 
to  our  representations,  and  accompanied  us  in,  though  with  evident 
reluctance.  The  house  was  oblong,  about  forty  feet  by  thirty,  and  at 
the  ridge-pole  about  twenty  feet  in  height.  The  roof,  which  curved 
inward  somewhat  like  that  of  a  Ciiincse  [)agoda,  descended  at  the 
eaves  to  witliin  three  feet  of  the  ground,  below  which  the  house  was 
open  all  around.  The  circumference  was  supported  by  many  short 
stancliions,  small  and  roughly  hewn,  ])lac('d  a  few  feet  apart;  but  the 
ridge-jiole  rested  ujjon  throe  enormous  posts,  of  which  the  largest  was 
about  three  feet  in  diameter.  M'he  roof  was  loosely  thatched  with 
cocoa-nut  leaves,  not  disposed  with  that  neatness  for  which  the 
Samoans  are  distinguisliod.  Around  the  inside  of  the  eaves,  a  row 
of  mother-of-pearl  shells  was  suspended,  and  a  few  of  the  posts  were 
bound  round  with  sinnet,  which  were  the  only  attempts  at  ornament 
that  we  obseivod.  In  the  centre  of  the  house,  about  the  largest  post, 
were  piled  confusedly  together  a  dozen  massive  benches,  or  large 
stools,  two  feet  high,  as  many  l)road,  and  about  three  feet  long;  they 
were  of  clumsy  make,  very  thick  and  heavy,  each  one  being  appa- 
rently carved  from  a  single  block.  The  natives  called  them  'seats 
of  the  god,'  and  we  suppos,>d  that  they  might  be  for  tiie  elders  of  the 
village,  when  they  meet  in  council,  or  for  religious  celebration. 

"  At  the  foot  of  this  pile  of  benches  lay  a  piece  of  timber,  which  was 
recognised  as  the  windlass  of  a  vessel.  It  was  about  four  feet  long 
by  one  in  diameter,  and  was  much  worn,  as  though  it  had  been  ex- 
posed to  the  action  of  the  waves.  When  we  asked  from  whence  it 
came,  they  ro|)lietl,  from  the  sea;  and  in  answer  to  farther  iiuiuiries, 
related  that  a  few  years  ago  (three  or  four),  a  vessel  was  lost  in  the 
surf,  that  two  men  got  ashore,  one  of  whom  was  nameil  Fakaaukamea, 
(the  other's  name  we  omitted  to  write,)  and  that  both  have  since  died. 
On  examining  further  it  appeared  that  the  windlass  was  not  the  only 

10 


^jTU-r :  ^li:.ikAi,'.^^i^:^^.: 


loS 


E  Til  NOG  R  A  I'll  Y. 


relic  of  tii?  wreck.  Three  cross-beains,  aliout  twenty  feet  loii}?,  and 
six  inches  thicK,  wliich  were  fastened  to  the  centre-posts  ten  feet  from 
the  trround,  liad  cvideii'ly  been  cnt  and  planed  by  rejjf>ilar  tools,  and 
we  found,  on  in(iuiring,  that  they  were  also  from  the  vessel.  As  the 
names  of  the  two  sur'ivors  had  both  a  Polynesian  character,  it  oc- 
curred to  us  that  ihey  might  possibly  have  been  Sandwich  islanders, 
and  from  tl'.om  the  natives  may  have  obtained  the  word  dchali)  which 
so  much  |)u/.zled  us.  The  Ilawaiians,  being  Christians,  wovdd  natu- 
rally apply  the  word  to  the  native  gods  as  a  term  of  contempt,  and 
the  islanders,  not  understanihng  of  course  its  precise  force,  might, 
adopt  it  as  synonymous  witii  their  word  utiia,  deity. 

"Leaning  against  the  largest  post  of  the  house  were  several  spears 
or  clubs,  all  much  worn  and  battered,  which  the  natives  .said  were 
Iikewi.se  from  the  sea;  they  have  probably  drifted  here  IVom  Samoa 
or  the  Fetgee  Group.  It  is  remarkable  that  they  were  the  oidy  arms 
that  we  saw  on  the  island,  and  that  the  natives  appeared  to  have  no 
specific  name  for  these,  calling  them  simjjly  Inkaii  tana,  '  wood  of 
war.' 

"The.sc  were  the  '  nly  articles  of  c()nse(iuenco  within  the  nici/ue ;  but 
in  front  of  it  w;'.s  an  object  which  attracted  our  attention  from  its 
slia|)e,  and  from  the  fact,  which  wo  soon  learned,  of  its  being  the  god 
himself, — the  great  'Vui-'rokelau.  Whatever  may  have  been  inside 
was  ,so  thickly  covered  that  it  appeared  like  a  jjillar  of  matting,  ten 
feet  high  and  as  many  in  circumference.  The  natives  seemed  so 
unwilling  to  have  us  examine  it  closely,  that  we  did  not  choose  to 
indulge  our  curiosity  at  the  expense  of  their  feelings. 

■'At  a  little  distance  from  the  mdlac  was  a  well  about  tbiirteen  feet 
deep,  neatly  walled  up.  and  surrounded  by  a  high  fence.  There  were 
not  more  than  thirtv  inchas  of  water  in  it,  and  from  the  care  which 
was  evidently  taken  of  the  j)lace,  it  is  probable  that  the  pure!  element 
is  an  article  of  much  rarity  and  value  among  them.  Beyond  this, 
along  the  shore  of  the  lagoon,  was  a  row  of  canoe-houses,  [lerhaps 
fifty  in  number.  The  (kinoes  themselves  were  in  tiic  centre  of  the 
lagoon  filled  with  women  and  children.  All.  however,  had  not 
availed  themselves  of  this  refuge,  for  ni  some  of  the  houses  were 
fouiul  children  and  a  few  women,  some  of  the  \(iunger  ones  being 
remarkably  pretty.  The  old  (pieen,  herself,  was  discovered  hidden 
uiid(!r  a  mat,  and  betrayed  greal  terror  on  lieing  exposed  to  view. 

"In  one  part  of  the  village  we  found  two  tiniins,  one  of  them  being 
a  mere  trough  or  hollow  log,  like  those  of  the  Kriendly  Islands.     The 


m 


(OCEANIC    M  I(i  R  i»  T  I  O  N  S. 


159 


m 


other  was  a  cylindrical  frame  set  upright  on  the  ground,  with  a  piece 
of  shark's  skin  siretchcd  tightly  over  the  top.  Its  shape  reminded  us 
of  tiio  West  India  tomtom,  and  it  was  beaten,  like  our  drums,  with 
two  sticks.  As  soon  as  its  .sound  was  hearil,  a  few  of  the  natives 
commenced  a  dance,  ai)parcntly  to  divert  us,  for  they  laughed  heartily 
at  the  same  time.  The  motions  of  the  dance  were  similar  to  tiiose 
we  had  seen  at  the  other  islands,  hut,  like  their  singing,  more  varied 
and  pleasing. 

"  The  natives  appeared  to  be  still  anxious  for  our  departure,  and 
kept  urging  us  to  our  boats,  pointing  to  the  sun  with  the  words  iia po 
(it  is  night),  and  fre(|uently  repeating  Jiaiihi,  Jiuitia  hirn,  which  we 
interpreted  '  very  nuich  tired.'  At  the  same  time  they  continued  to 
bring  us  articles  for  trade,  which  they  e.x(;hangetl  for  any  tritlc  we 
chose  to  offer  them,  preferring,  however,  knives  and  fish-hooks.  Many 
of  their  manufactures  gave  evidence  of  considerable  ingenuity.  The 
principal  were  mats,  boxes,  lish-hocrhs,  tiles,  saws,  drills,  and  orna- 
ments for  the  per.son.  The  mats  were  of  two  kinds,  for  beds  and  for 
clothing;  the  former  were  three  or  four  feet  stjuare,  coarse,  and 
braided  of  cocoa-nut  and  pandanus-lcaves.  The  maros,  or  girdles, 
were  from  six  to  eighteen  inches  wide,  some  of  them  very  fine  in 
texture,  with  fringes  on  the  sides  and  ends.  Tlieir  lengtli  varied  from 
a  few  feet  to  five  or  six  yards.  The  cinctures  worn  by  the  women 
were  a  singular  fabric.  They  consisted  of  a  great  number  of  long 
leaves  (probably  pandanus)  tied  at  one  end  to  a  cord,  and  then  slit 
into  fine  strands.  The  leaves  were  dry,  and  appeared  to  be  kept  well 
oiled,  ])robably  to  render  them  llexible.  Th(>y  were  so  many,  and  .so 
closely  packed,  that  the  dress,  when  rolled  up,  formed  an  enormous 
bundle  of  straw,  of  a  weight  which,  one  would  have  thought,  must 
have  rendered  it  exceedingly  inconvenient. 

"The  boxes  were  cylindrical,  in  the  shape  of  small  buckets,  neatly 
hollowed  from  a  solid  piece,  and  of  different  ca[)acities,  from  a  gill  to  a 
half-gallon.  They  were  used  by  the  natives  in  their  canoes,  to  hold 
their  fishing-tackle  and  other  light  articles  that  they  wished  to  pre- 
serve from  the  wet.  'I'he  lids  were  made  to  lit  tight  with  a  rim,  like 
those  of  our  snulf-boxes.  The  fisli-hooks  were  of  bone,  shark's  teeth, 
and  shell,  many  of  them  as  small  as  our  trout-hooks,  and  made  with 
remarkable  neatness.  The  files  and  saws  were  of  shark's  skin, 
stretched  on  sticks, — its  roughness  being  sufficient  to  wear  down  the 
.soft  woo'l  and  bont>  to  which  it  is  applied.  The  construction  of  their 
drills  was  (juite  ingenious,  but  coukl  hardly  be  understood  without  a 


ixi 


■tx- 


160 


KTHNOG  R  A  !■  II  Y. 


drawing.  Tlicir  ornamenfs  wcro  necklaces  of  bone  and  shell,  ear- 
rings of  tlie  same,  and,  what  was  pcc\diar,  false  curls  tied  on  a  string 
to  he  bound  around  the  head.  I'erhaps  this  ornament  owes  its  origin 
to  the  circumstance  tliat  these  natives  have  thinner  hair  than  those  of 
other  islands,  and  appear  to  he  inclined  \o  haklness.  This,  and  the 
curling  of  their  hair,  may  result  from  tlieir  being  so  much  exposed, 
while  hshing,  to  alternations  of  sun  and  rain. 

"  The  CMly  edible  fnnts  which  the  island  produces  are  those  of  the 
cocoa-nut  and  tlie  pandanus;  and  the  fact  that  the  hard  and  dis- 
tasteful nuts  of  the  latter  are  eaten,  may  lead  us  to  believe  that  the 
natives  are  sometimes  sufferers  from  want  of  food.  The  rest  of  their 
sustenance  is  drawn  from  the  sea,  on  which  we  may  suppose  that  they 
s^jeiul  a  good  part  of  their  time.  Their  tine  athletic  forms  and  hearty 
looks  certainly  did  not  give  an  idea  of  famine;  and  it  would  be  an 
interesting  subject  of  inquiry  to  discover  the  causes  which  prevent  the 
population  from  increasing  so  as  to  press  too  closely  upon  the  means 
of  subsistence. 

"Judging  from  what  we  saw,  we  are  inclined  to  rate  the  inhabitants 
at  between  five  and  six  hundred.  The  nund)er  of  men  who  met  us 
on  the  heuch  was  not  far  i'roni  one  hundred  and  lifty,  which,  by  fair 
estimate,  would  give  the  aiwve  total.  This  little  spot  of  ground  may 
therefore  be  considered,  in  proportion  to  its  extent,  veiy  well  peopled, 
as  till'  whole  superlicies  of  dry  land  in  all  the  islets  cannot  exceed  two 
s(iuure  miles.  We  are,  moreover,  inclined  to  believe  that  the  natives 
w  iioin  we  saw  at  the  first  island  (Oatafu)  belonged  properly  to  this, 
ami  were  merely  temporary  residents  at  the  other.  This  impression 
proceeds  partly  from  their  own  declaration  that  they  had  no  chief 
w  itli  them,  and  partly  'rom  the  circumstance  that  they  had  none  but 
doidile  canoes,  which  are  best  adapted  fur  a  sea-voyage.  The  .scanti- 
ness of  their  numbers  would  also  favor  this  supposition,  and  from  it 
we  ma;,  luidtTstand  how  the  occasional  absence!  of  the  people,  on 
tiieir  rett.rn  to  Fakaafo,  might  have  cansetl  the  island  to  be  reported 
as  uniniiabited. 

"  At  length,  after  a  stay  of  about  three  hours,  it  was  determined  to 
gratify  the  increasing  impatience  of  tlie  natives  to  be  rid  of  us.  We 
thereupon  moved  towards  the  boats,  which  were  moored  just  outside 
the  coral  shelf,  in  the  surf  A^;  this  was  at  times  pretty  heavy,  we 
were  oliliged  to  wait  for  a  lull,  and  watch  our  opportunity  to  spring 
on  board.  The  natives  who  accomi)aiiie(l  us  were  assiduous  in  ren- 
dering assistance,  which  was  not  perfectly  disinterested,  for  they  took 


O  (;  K  A  N  I  C    .M  I  fi  R  A  T  I  O  N  S. 


161 


the  opportunity  of  our  confusion  to  run  away  witli  a  cutlass  and  some 
other  articles  bclon<,nn<;  to  the  men.  These  tliefts,  committed  in  tlie 
most  l)arefaced  and  audacious  style,  <rave  evidence  of  what  might  be 
anticipated  from  them  if  unrestrained  by  fear. 

"  In  pidling  off,  wo  had  an  opportunity  of  ohservinp;  the  large  piers 
or  moles  of  coral  stone,  eight  or  ten  feet  high,  and  from  twenty  to 
thirty  long,  extending  out  into  the  shallow  water  on  the  reef  Almost 
the  whole  of  the  islet  was  walled  uj)  in  this  manner,  but  for  what 
object  we  could  not  form  a  satisfactory  opinion." 


\ 


VAl'iri'l',    OR    THE    DKI'K  YSTi;  li    ISLANDS. 

"  March  14,  1841.  A  little  before  noon,  land  was  announced,  and 
by  two  o'clock  we  were  close  to  an  extensive  ring  of  low  wooded 
islets,  situated  on  a  coral  reef  surrounding  a  lagoon,  about  twenty-five 
miles  in  circuit.  When  we  arrived  within  a  league  of  the  largest 
islet,  two  canoes  were  jierceived  paddling  towards  us.  Our  anticipa- 
tions were  highly  excited,  for  we  expected  here  to  make  our  first 
acquaintance  with  the  jieculiar  race  which  inhabits  the  Caroline 
Islands,  and  which  was  to  be  the  sul)ject  of  our  examination  during 
the  rest  of  this  cruise. 

"  Only  one  of  the  canoes  came  to  the  ship.  It  was  about  twenty 
feet  long,  made  of  a  single  log  hollowed  o\it,  but  the  sides  were  raised 
by  two  narrow  planks  fastened  on  to  the  keel  with  lashings  of  sinnet. 
The  outrigger  and  paddles  did  not  differ  materially  from  those  we 
had  seen  in  other  islands.  'I'liere  were  five  men  in  the  canoe,  and 
they  came  alongside  with  a  confidence  winch  showed  that  they  were 
acciuainted  with  ships.  Thev  refused,  however,  to  come  on  board, 
but  held  up  cocoa-nuts,  mats,  rolls  of  sinnet,  and  other  articles, 
making  signs  of  a  wish  to  trade.  On  our  asking  them,  in  Samoan, 
the  name  of  their  islanil,  though  with  little  expectation  of  being  un- 
derstood, they  replit;d  iinmediatelv  Fi/m/f'itti.  Farther  ipiestioning 
soon  made  it  evident  that  they  spoke  a  Polynesian  dialect,  and  George, 
our  8amoan  native  (who  had  become  accustomed  to  the  slinht  chantte 
of  idiom  at  Fakaato),  easily  conversed  with  them. 

"  In  person  these  natives  were  interior  to  those  of  Samoa.  They 
were  of  middle  size,  with  skins  of  as  deep  a  brown  as  those  of  the 
Hawaii. ;ns.  The  features  were  also  more  like  those  of  the  latter 
people  than  any  other,  but  they  had  all  a  greater  luxuriance  of  beard 
than  we  have  .  een  elsewhere,  except  at  the  Feejcc  Islands.     Their 

11 


162 


ETHN  Oil  R  AV  II  V. 


liair,  also,  was  thick,  bushy,  and  taiiirled.  They  wore  it  pretty  long, 
and  one  of  thcni  had  it  par.ed  in  five  Uirsre  tufts  about  his  head. 

"Their  chitliin|f  consisted  of  a  strip  of  fine  matting  worn  as  a  maro, 
and  a  coarser  piece  tied  about  the  hips.  The  former  was  braided  of 
tlie  pandanus-leuf  It  was  about  ten  feet  long  by  eight  inclies  in 
width,  being  much  narrower  than  those  worn  at  Fakaafo.  It  had, 
however,  a  tiiick  fringe  on  eacii  side,  wliich  increased  its  breadth, 
and  made  it  more  serviceable  as  a  covering.  There  were  also  slips 
of  pandanus-leaf,  a  foot  long,  colored  red,  attached  to  the  girdle  by 
way  of  ornament,  and  having  much  the  appearance  of  ribbons. 

"  The  natives  liad  two  or  three  rolls  of  coarse  linnet,  which  they  sold 
us,  with  a  few  large  wooden  shark-hooks.  From  their  equipment  we 
presumed  that  they  iiad  set  out  with  the  intention  of  fishing,  before 
tiiey  perceived  our  ship.  Besides  these,  the  only  articles  they  pos- 
sessed were  their  weapons,  and  the  fact  tiiat  tliey  would  not  leave 
their  homes  unarmed  gives  reason  to  suppose  that  they  were  on  bad 
terms  with  some  of  their  fellow-islanders.  They  had  with  tliem  only 
.spears  and  knives.  The  former  were  merely  poles  of  cocoa-nut  wood 
sharpened  :it  one  end.  The  knives  were  also  of  wood,  in  the  shape  of 
a  short  sabre ;  along  each  side  was  a  row  of  .small  shark's-teeth,  fas- 
tened on  with  thread  and  gum.  From  the  ap[)earance  of  the  weapon, 
we  should  suppose  it  might  lie  very  formidable  among  a  naked  people 
like  these ;  Init  it  is  rather  fitted  to  inflict  ragged  and  dangerous 
gashes,  than  for  destroying  life. 

"One  of  the  men  declared  himself  to  be  a  chief,  and  was  treated  as 
such  by  his  comi)anions.  On  Ijeing  asked  how  many  houses  there 
were  on  shore,  he  answered  immediately  fifty  (e  lima  ynfi/lii).  This 
probably  referred  only  to  his  own  village,  for  the  circumstance  of 
their  being  sometimes  at  war  makes  it  likely  that  the  inhabitants  do 
not  live,  like  the  peaceful  natives  of  Fakaafo,  united  in  one  town. 

"  When  they  had  been  alongside  about  half  an  hour,  we  left  them, 
and  stood  on  to  meet  the  schooner,  which  had  pas.sed  to  the  other  side 
of  the  island.  By  nightfall  we  came  up  with  her,  and  both  vessels 
proceeded  on  their  course  lor  Depeysfer's  Island,*  situated  about  fifty 
miles  to  the  northwest.  After  being  delayed  three  days  by  baffling 
winds,  we  ut  length  reached  it,  on  the  morning  of  the  18th,  having, 

*  Tlif-'  inline  of  Dcpi'vslpr  was  i^ivi'ii  In  Ihi.-:  island  {XiikiifrtnK)  by  llio  iliscdvi'icr. 
We  liavc  I Mciidcil  ii  lo  ilic  whole  t'''<'"I'i  "'  vvI'lL'ti  VuUitjiii,  suiuoliim's  caliud  Tracy's 
Island,  is  till'  ]irinci|ial. 


i 


O  f  K  A  N  I  C    JI  I  r.  R  A  T  I  O  N  S. 


1G3 


r 


at  tlie  same  time  another  island  in  sight  to  the  northeast.  We  steered 
towards  tlie  former,  wliidi,  on  approaching,  proved  to  be  very  similar 
in  size  and  character  to  Eilice's  Cluster.  When  we  were  within  two 
miles  of  the  northeastern  shore,  some  canoes  put  off  towards  us. 
They  had  sails  of  the  usual  triangular  shape,  set  with  the  a[)cx  down- 
wards. When  they  were  near  the  sliip,  we  judged  from  the  features 
and  tattooing  of  the  crews  that  they  would  prove  to  be  of  the  same 
stock  with  the  people  of  the  last-visited  island, — a  conjecture  which 
was  soon  verified  by  their  speech,  and  by  the  information  which  they 
gave  us  in  answer  to  our  questions. 

"  In  color  they  were  as  dark  as  New  Zealanders.  They  were  mostly 
of  the  middle  size,  and  tolerably  well  sliaped,  but  we  observed  none 
of  those  models  of  manly  beauty  that  are  seen  among  the  Samoans. 
Their  most  striking  peculiarities  were  in  the  hair  and  skin.  The 
former  was  thick  and  bushy;  it  was  worn  in  various  fashions,  some 
of  which  reminded  us  of  the  Feejeeans.  One  individual  had  it 
twisted  in  a  great  number  of  small  ringlets,  which  hung  about  his 
head  in  mop-like  profusion.  Others  had  it  done  up  in  a  few  large 
locks,  eight  inches  long,  not  unlike  so  many  lb.\-tails.  Tiie.se  were 
either  worn  loosely,  or  tied  up  in  a  bunch  together,  on  the  crown  of 
the  head ;  and  though  the  natural  color  of  their  hair  was  black, 
these  locks,  probably  by  means  of  .some  dye,  had  been  brought  to  a 
reddish-brown  hue,  which  heightenfi  the  resemblance  above-noted. 
The  skin  was,  in  all,  remarkably  coarse  .isid  rough  to  the  touch,  but 
many  had  it  disligured  in  a  singular  faoi  ,.1.  In  some  it  was  covered 
with  a  scurf,  as  though  the  whole  cuticle  were  peeling  off;  in  others, 
where  the  process  seemed  farther  advanced,  the  scurf  had  disappeareil, 
and  left  the  skin  marked  with  circular  and  waving  lines,  like  an 
intricate  embroidcTy.  In  tho.se  individuals  who  were  thus  atl'ected, — 
perhaps  one-fifth  of  all  the  natives  we  saw — tiie  skin  was  of  a  much 
lighter  color  than  in  the  others,  with  a  jieculiar,  livid  hut;.  The 
natives  called  the  atfection  lafii,  tlie  name  which  the  Samoans  apply 
to  the  circular  marks  whicli  tiiey  burn  in  the  skin. 

"  It  is  ditlicult  to  understand  why  these  natives  should  be  so  well 
supplied  with  beanl,  beyond  what  we  have  seen  in  any  other  tribe  of 
the  Polynesian  race.  Kven  the  natives  of  Fakaafo,  to  whom  they 
appear  to  be  most  nearly  allied,  are  as  ill-furnished,  in  this  respect,  as 
the  Samoans,  We  should  be  temjjtcd  to  suppose  that  some  mi.vture  of 
races  had  taken  place,  l)ut  lor  the  fact  that  their  language,  so  far  as 
we  liad  an  opportunity  forjudging,  was  pure  Polynesian. 


KVt 


KTII  .\  ()(i  It  A  I'll  V. 


"  At  011(1  time  it  wiis  nmioniicod  tlint  a  wliito  man  was  in  a  canoe 
coiuiiiL!'  towards  tlio  sliip.  On  iioiiip;  at't,  wo  saw  liiin,  dressed  in  the 
native  style,  but  better  covered  than  tlie  rest,  sitting;  in  the  stern  of 
liis  canoe,  and  Lra/iiii»  iiuietly  at  tlie  sliip,  with  no  ap[)earanco  of 
exciti'iiKMit.  \\  hen  we  called  to  him,  he  answered  in  the  native 
tonLrne,  and  linally  came  near,  and  climbed  up  the  side  of  the  sliip. 
We  then  saw  that  he  was  an  albino,  but  that  our  mistake  was  liy  no 
means  s(ir[)risiii|^.  His  color  wr.s  a  ruddy  blonde,  his  hair  of  a  tlaxen 
white,  his  eyes  light  blue,  and  evidently  very  weak,  since,  besides 
beini^  screened  by  a  lar<fe  shaile,  they  were  constantly  half-closed. 
His  skill  was  also  (juite  tender,  which  oblij,'ed  him  to  wear  the 
additional  mat  over  his  shoulders,  and,  in  spite  of  this  precaution,  it 
was  spotted  with  larij;e  brown  speckles.  We  learned  that  he  had 
children  who  were  dark,  like  the  other  natives,  and  that  his  parents 
were  the  same. 

"  In  the  tattooing  of  the  natives  there  was  considerable  variety,  at 
least  in  the  parts  of  the  body  to  which  it  was  applied.  All  had  the 
arms  tattooed  more  or  less.  The  sides,  from  the  arm-pits  to  the 
waist,  were  also  marked,  yoine  had  lines  across  the  back,  and  on 
the  abtiomen,  ami,  in  many,  the  loins  and  thighs  were  tattooed  nearly 
down  to  the  knee.  The  markings  were  either  in  straight  lines,  or  in 
zigzai>-,  or  in  curved  figures  about  an  inch  or  two  long,  which  the 
natives  told  lis  were  intended  to  represent  |)igeons  [lupe). 

"  For  dress,  the  men  wore  three  kinds  of  mats,  all  braided  from  slips 
of  tile  paudaiius-leaf  'I'lie  first  was  the  maru  (or  nuilo)  which  has 
been  already  described.  The  second  was  a  ginllc  of  thick  fringe, 
iVoiii  six  iiiciies  to  ii  foot  in  breadth,  tied  about  tlie  loins,  so  as 
partially  to  cnnceal  liie  maro.  This  they  called  ((thai.  Tlie  third 
kind  were  mats  three  or  four  feet  wide,  and  live  or  six  lonti,  which 
w  ere  wrajiped  alxnit  the  body,  so  as  to  cover  it  from  the  waist  to  the 
ancle.  The  mats  were  dyed,  on  the  outside,  in  red,  yellow,  and  black 
colors,  dis|)o.seii  in  stpiares,  diamonds,  and  other  figures,  so  as  to  have 
a  very  pretty  eflVct.  They  appeared  to  be  reserved  for  state  occasions, 
as  the  only  person  who  wore  one  was  the  old  chief,  hut  many  were 
brought  off  for  .sale. 

"Theiroriianients  were  not  very  iiuiiurous.  They  all  had  the  lower 
rim  of  the  ear  pierced,  and  the  aperture  distended  to  the  size  of  an 
inch  in  diameter.  Around  the  rim  thus  separated,  they  had  half  a 
dozen  little  rings  of  tortoise-shell,  so  neatly  made  that  it  was  (liflicult 
to  dist-ern   the   point   of  juncture  where   the   ring  was  opened   when 


•    » 


M. 


O  (•  i:  A  N  I  C    .M  I  (i  II  A  T  I  ()  X  S. 


IfiO 


taken  f'nim  the  oar.  Some  had  iiint he r-ol- pearl  and  other  shells 
suspended  from  the  neck,  and  every  one  had  a  cocoa-nut  leaflet  also 
tied  around  the  neck,  which  we  snpposed  miLfJit  be  a  si'^ii  of  amity  ; 
for  in  a|)])roachin^  the  ship,  they  seemed  anxious  to  keep  it  in  view. 

"  Amonjf  our  \isiters  in  the  canoes  «as  one  woman,  who  refused  to 
come  on  hoard.  She  was  of  the  medium  si/e,  with  a  rather  jiretty 
face,  and  a  pleasiu'^  e.vprtwsion  of  countenance.  She  wore  a  very 
long  and  thick  cincture,  made  of  slips  of  pandanus-leaf  fastened  to  a 
cord.  It  miglit  he  called  a  (jirdle  of  frintfe  two  feet  in  width;  and  its 
appearance  was  that  of  a  dense  mass  of  slrasv  tied  about  the  body, 
coverinif  it  from  the  breast  to  the  knees.  The  native  name  for  this 
dress  was  JaK.  W  hat  cliielly  surpri.seil  ns  was,  to  observe  that  she 
was  tattooed,  like  the  men,  on  her  artns  and  sides.  In  this  respect, 
also,  these  people  differ  from  the  other  Polynesian  tribes,  among 
whom  the  women  are  tattooed  very  slightly,  if  at  all. 

"  Our  first  (juestiou  to  the  natives  was  about  the  name  of  their  island, 
which  we  found  to  be  .\ii/i'i>f'c/oii.  They  were  well  ac(piaintetl  with 
EUice's  Cluster  [Fiiiitifiiti);  indeed,  one  of  them  dedareil  himself  to 
be  the  son  of  a  chief  on  that  ishuid.  The  island  to  the  nf)rtheast  was 
also  known  to  them,  and  called  Vaitupu.*  \\'e  asked  them  if  these 
were  all  tlu^  lands  with  which  tiiey  were  aef|uaiiiteil,  when,  to  our 
surprise,  thev  pointed  to  the  east,  and  ^.aid  that  beyond  \'aitupu  there 
were  three  islands,  (hiinfu,  yui^imtnto.  ami  FdhiKifo.  I  incjuired  if 
this  was  all,  and  they  aOded.  nitli  some  hesitation,  the  nauie  of 
O  rotten  (Jit,  the  smallest  of  il**-  Navi<ialors;  hut  thev  knew  of  no  other 
island  ot  tliis  irrou[»,  uor  even  of  the  ncneral  term  Samoa. t  'J'hey 
appearixi  ti'  reiogni.^c  the  words  I'niKidtiiliK  and  llaji'/i,  and  liieir 
ac(|Uaniiilain—  with  Rotuina  was  nIiouh  in  an  accidental  iiiauiier. 
Some  iKinanns  were  han^Misj!'  at  the  stern  of  tlu-  ship,  which  on<'  of 
them  l)egL:ed  for,  calling  thein  /////  o  Ruhiinu,  bananas  of  Kotuiua. 


•  This  iiiimr  wn.s  orijiitmlly  sjiclh  li  by  us  0(iiti/j»i,  uliii'li  was  probnMy  ii  misnikc  (i>r 
'O  (,ri-  /.u)  M'./ihir  :!i.'  ■■•  .mil  c-  luiiii;  intcnli.in;;c':iliii'  in  lliis,  ;>s  in  nil  llic  iilliir  I'uly- 
iK'siun  iliiilrcls.  W'l'  (wanl  llii'  iiaim-  {iiMiiniiiii'iil  mily  uiici',  and  Tlmt  in  llir  midst  of 
nmrli  ni)iso  mid  ruMrnsinii.  Dillun,  w  lin  heard  iil' this  island  at  llcilinun,  «  I'ili-s  ihc  name 
Vi///i<M>/io,  and  CiKik  givi's,  in  the  list  of  islands  rcrcMvcil  lioni  Ihi'  nativis  cp|'  'I'diiga,  uno 
callrd  \'i//iK,/ifjii,  Vfh\rh  i.s  undunlili'dly  the  sanii'.  t'hi'  niiiru'  mrans  "  gniwin;;  water," 
and  has,  porhaps,  ,  ler'-nep  Id  the  viells  or  pits  nf  fresh  water,  which  are  su  important  im 
tlie.se  i-orid  islets. 

t  It  (till  licit  (lo.-iir  til  lis  til  use  tiic'  iiuine  Sdviiih  (I'n'-  Saitiin.  which  thev  would 
perhap^  have  recngnised. 

42 


Km 


KTllNOti  KA  I'M  V. 


At  Fakaiifo  wo  were  told  of  an  ishiiul  oxislinir  smnewliero,  called 
Viikdjiiihi : — llifse  |)oo|)l('  rcrci^nised  the  name  at  once,  and  assured 
1110  lliat  it  was  an  island  well  iidialiited.*  This  was  the  only  tiunu- 
mentioned  Ity  them  wliicli  we  were  not  able  to  identity. 

'•  \Ve  asked  who  was  the  ^od  of  the  island,  and  where  ho  lived 
They  told  ns  that  his  name  was  I'uilniji'.  iinii  that  ho  resided  on 
shore.  '\\^^  asked  if  Tiii-'t'o/tt/(iii  also  ii\('d  tiiere,  and  they  replied 
immediately  in  the  n("j;ative,  sayinjj  that  he  was  the  jrod  of  Fakaafo. 
\\  hen  the  name  of  'I'iin(/(i/iiii,  the  yreat  divinity  of  Polynesia,  was 
prononnccd,  they  apjieared  to  i)e  holh  sni(irised  and  annoyed  ;  at 
last,  one  of  lin'in  said  (hat  Tannaloa  was  a  ;^od  liihii  to  their  eonntry, 
and  refused  to  speak  further  altont  him. 

"They  informed  us  that  ten  vessels  had  visited  their  island,  and 
added  that  a  ship  of  iriiri  people  had  liitely  spent  some  davs  ahont 
the  island  in  fisliinu;.  As  the  term  iriiri  is  tiiat  a[)|)lii'd  by  the  New 
Zealanders  to  tlie  French  (from  their  word  of  aHirmationi),  we 
thought  it  jjrohahle  that  the  ease  nii^dit  ho  tht!  same  for  these  islands. 
It  is  known  that  French  whaliny;-ves.sels  re.sort  chietly  to  this  part  of 
the  Pacific  for  their  carijoes. 

"Tlie  only  eatables  which  the  natives  had  with  them  were  cocoa- 
nuts,  and  the  fruits  of  tlie  pandanus.  Uut  they  assured  ns  that  laro 
{Arum  escu/cntiim)  <frow  on  shore,  and  also  a  much  larger  root,  called 
puldhii  (probably  Arum  mnrnirltiziim).  Later  in  the  day,  a  root  of 
titro  was  broiight  oil  to  us,  proving  tlio  correctness  of  their  assertion; 
otherwise  we  might  rea.sonably  have  doubted  whether  a  plant,  which 
reipiires,  aliove  all  others,  a  ricii  nuiddy  soil  and  fresh  water,  could 
be  produced  on  one  of  tlie.se  low  rocky  islets.  Vams  and  bananas 
they  knew  by  name,  but  had  none ;  of  pigs,  they  said  there  was 
abundance  on  the  island  of  V'aitupu, — liut  they  had  no  knowledge  of 
fowls. 

"  As  we  sailed  by  one  of  tiie  isl(>ts,  a  considerable  town  was  .seen 
on   shore,    situated    on    an    open    space  between  the    trees  and  the 


*  'J'liirc  i-i  an  isliiml  dl'tliis  iiimic  in  llic  I'liuiiiulii  iir(lii|iclai;i>.  It  is  liiirilly  priilxiliie, 
lujwi'vi'r,  tli.'it  il  (Mil  Ih'  iI Ill'  ri'lcrnd  i... 

t  This  iiukIi;  (il'di'sii^jiiatidii,  lliiii|i;li  il  may  a|i|M'ar  wliiinsical  at  lirsl,  is  yet  that  wliicli 
was  ailiiplcci,  ill  roriiicr  liiiii's,  liy  llit-  I'Vcmli  lliiiiisilvrs,  as  H|i|icar.s  In  tlii!  a|ip<llaliiiiis 
iif  Lioiguc  lit-  tiiii  and  I^inuiii-  i/'it  i.'iviii  in  tlu'  iidrlliiin  ami  sdiillicrn  ilivisions  nf  llu  ir 
eonntry,  and  marking;  tlic  ilillirrncc  ol'  dialic  i  IkIwci'ii  llicin.  It  is  ncii  very  Hatlcrini'  to 
iiiir  national  pridr  In  know  that  ihc  ■\iiiciiraiis,  as  wrll  as  ihi'  l')n;;lish,  arc  dislin^nisli<;d, 
in  sdiih;  of  Ihc  i.slaii(ls,  by  .'i  name  derived  I'ruin  their  most  coininoii  iinpreealion. 


OCR  A  N  H;    M  I(i  IIATIONH. 


107 


beach.  As  well  ns  covilil  bo  jud'jod  from  n.  distfiiit  view,  tlio  lioiisos 
were  lapj;<',  l)iit  of  rude  (•(Histnictidii.  The  iialivrs  rrt'(|ii(!n1ly  |ioiiitpd 
on  slioro,  and  ur^ed  us  to  accompany  thcni  to  their  vilhi^'i!.  As  an 
opening  was  seen  into  tlie  la^'oon,  an  olTicer  was  sent  in  a  boat  to 
examine  it.  On  bis  return,  be  was  accompanied  l)y  an  old  chief, 
wlio  intro(bioed  himself,  in  phiin  terms,  as  tiie  iy(«/ of  tlie  ishmd.  lie 
was  a  hirge,  stout  man,  apparently  about  fifty,  with  good,  prominent 
features,  and  sliort  liair  nicely  l)rusbed  and  oiled.  Ilis  le^s  were 
mucli  swollen  with  the  elephantiasis.  Hesides  the  maro  and  girtlle. 
he  wore  a  large  coloroti  mat  around  his  waist.  Ilis  body  was 
anointed  with  co(H)a-nut  oil,  and  his  whole  appearance  sliowed  that 
be  had  come  on  a  visit  of  slate,  lie  iid'ormed  us  that  his  proper  name 
was  I'fiiliatia,  but  that  lie  was  also  the  veritable  Foiltipe,  the  great 
deity  uf  the  island.  After  n>mainiiig  a  few  minutes,  and  receiving 
some  presents,  he  pointeil  to  the  sun,  and  explained  that  ho  must  take 
his  leave,  in  order  to  arrive  at  the  island  before  night.  He  also  urged 
us  to  accompany  him,  but  finding  us  not  disposed  to  ac(^e|)t  the 
invitation,  he  put  oil  in  his  caiioc,  and  was  followed,  at  little  intervals, 
by  the  rest  of  thn  nativiis.  Many  of  us  were  struck  with  the  extra- 
ordinary likeiu'ss  which  this  personage  bore  to  the  head  chief  of 
Fakaafo;  it  was  so  plain,  that,  taken  in  connexion  with  other  circum- 
stances, the  opinion  of  a  family  relatimiship  between  the  two  sove- 
reigns seems  not  unreasonable. 

"  Wo  cannot  be  expected  to  form  any  very  near  estimate  of  the  num- 
ber of  inhabitants  on  the  island.  We  presume  it  to  be  pretty  densely 
peopleil.  The  village  which  wo  passed  was  cpiite  large,  and  houses 
were  observed  on  most  of  the  islets.  Perhaps  forty  canoes  visited  the 
ship  during  the  day,  having  about  two  hundred  persons  on  board,  all 
of  whom,  with  one  exception,  were  grown  men ;  so  that  we  are  justi- 
fied ill  assigning  at  least  a  thousand  inhabitants  to  the  island. 

"  The  resemblance,  or  more  jiroperly,  the  identity  of  the  dialect  of 
these  natives  with  tliat  of  the  I'nion  islanders,  leaves  little  room  to 
doubt  that  one  was  derivetl  from  the  other ;  and  the  fact  that  the 
people  of  Fakaafo  had  no  knowledge  of  these  islands,  while  on  the 
contrary  their  own  groui)  is  well  known  to  those  of  V'aitupu,  seems  to 
indicate  that  the  former  was  the  source  of  population  to  the  latter. 
At  the  same  time,  it  is  not  unlikely  that  the  Union  islanders  them- 
selves may  have  been  a  colony  from  Oroseiigti,  in  the  Samoan 
Group." 

To  the  foregoing,  which  was  written  immediately  after  leaving  the 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


// 


{/ 


^A^ 


1.0   V^  I2£ 

■tt  liU   ■2.2 

1.1   I.""'" 


^> 


Sciences 
Corporation 


23  WIST  MAIN  STRHT 

MltSTIR,N.Y.  MSM 

(716)  •73-4503 


les 


KT  II  N  tXi  It  A  I'll  V. 


ishinds,  iiotliiiijf  iiood  l)o  ndilcd  licro  willi  ro^nrd  to  llio  ori<i;iii  of  the 
nativos.  lint  some  ovidtHico  lias  since  bi'cii  found,  showinii  tliat  the 
sn|)|iositioii  wliicli  ultrilintfd  tlio  darker  complexion  and  more  aluni- 
daiit  heard  of  tlie  natives  of  Naitupu  to  a  mixture  witli  the  Mehuiesiaii 
trihes  in  their  vicinity,  was  well-founded.  Quiros,  who  visited  the 
island  of  'raumaco  in  the  year  1  (>!(».  toi.k  from  them  a  slave,  a  native 
of  the  island  ol  ('/itiiiifiiiiii,  which  lies  tour  days'  sail  from  Taumaeo, 
and  carried  him  to  Lima.  From  him,  when  lie  had  learned  to  con- 
verse in  Spanish.  C^uiros  obtained  much  information  concernin;^  the 
islands  in  the  neighborhood  of  Taumaeo.  Amon;j;  others  he  heard  of 
(ii/iii/topo,  un  island  which  Pedro  said  was  larijer  than  Chicayana. 
He  described  it  as  ly  in<r  two  days"  sail  from  the  latter  island,  and  three 
from  Taumaeo.  The  women  there  wore  a  veil  of  blue  or  iilack  called 
Jhdjm.  A  larife  vessel  from  ( i iirn/to/tf),  with  more  than  lifty  persons 
in  it,  sailini;;  to  an  island  called  Mcrtiijrdijhi  to  <ret  tortoise-shell,  of 
which  they  make  ear-rintjs,  and  other  ornaments,  was  driven  out  of 
its  course  and  carried  backward  and  forward  till  all  but  ten  died. 
These  arrived  at  'I'aumaco.  They  were  white,  rxcept  one  ir/io  tras  of 
a  iliirh-  co/or.  Likew  ise,  in  his  own  island  ol  Chicayana,  I'edro  had 
seen  arrive  from  thence  a  V(!ssel  of  two  hulls  (i.  e.  a  double  canoe) 
full  of  people  white  and  handsome.* 

There  can  be  no  doubt  that  (SiKiijIopo  is  Vuilupii  (or  Ko  M  aitiipu). 
Besides  the  similarity  of  n;une,  we  have  the  fad  of  the  men  wearinir 
ear-rini;s  of  tortoise-she"  (a  very  unusual  ornament  in  Polynesia),  and 
of  the  women  beini; dressed  in  a  veil  having;  tlie  nam(!  ot  /w/w,  which 
is,  no  doubt,  the  Vn\\i  friiiLMMif  pandanns-leaves  called  /iw,  which  they 
wear  at  this  day.  The  circumstance  of  the  dark-colored  man  beiiijf 
in  the  canoe  with  the  nine  white  (i  e.  ligiit-colored)  people,  shows 
that  the  natives  of  X'aitupn  had  then  blacks  liviiij;  anion;;;  them.  It 
is  very  probable  that  they  were  slaves  obtained  in  their  wars  « ith  the 
lu'iifhl)orinLr  islands,  and  if  sf>,  thev  would  jirobably  be  introduced  by 
few  at  a  lime,  and  might  thu;;  produce  no  I'hange  in  the  dialect  of  the 
group,  while,  by  intermarr:  '^e  with  the  natives,  they  might  never- 
theless L'ive  rise  to  some  peculiarities  in  tluMr  jihysical  characteristics, 
as  well  as  their  customs.  'l''ie  iiaiiu^  of  Miraijidijla.  the  island  to 
which  they  were  sailing,  may  be  a  mistake  in  co|)ying  or  iirinting 
from  Quiros's  manuscript.  We  heard  the  natives  of  Funafuti  speak 
frecjuently  of  a  place  called  yiiku-rainii,  or  Miikii-lailai,  which  we  at 


•  Itiirrii'v"^  \iiyiij!os,  vol.  ii.  p.  20H. 


OCEANIC    M  I  C.  R  A  T  I  O  N  S. 


169 


one  time  took  to  be  an  islet  in  their  cluster,  and  at  another,  in  that  of 
Nukufetau, — but  it  may  have  been  a  small  island,  which  we  did  not 
see,  at  a  little  distance  from  both. 


U  t:  \  E  K  A  L    I  M,  I'  S  T  R  A  T  1  O  N  S. 

Besides  the  particular  facts  with  respect  to  each  group,  which  we 
have  adduced  in  support  of  our  opinions  concerning  the  migrations 
of  the  natives,  there  are  othisrs  of  a  more  general  character,  which 
may  serve  to  illustrate  and  confirm  these  conclusions.  Those  which 
we  .shall  notice  here  are  the  names  of  the  months,  those  of  the  prin- 
cipal winds,  and  the  numerals. 


MONTHS. 


The  following  are  the  names  of  the  months  in  the  three  most  im- 
portant groups  of  Polynesia : 


SAMOAN. 

TAIIITIAN. 

HAWAIIAN 

. 

Fu'iuifu,     .     . 

.       l'\l'(l-ll/lll,       .       . 

.     Malii/ii, 

Ffbrunry. 

Lo 

^  J'ii'iri,  ) 
i  Tiiiioii,  J 

.      Dtr/o,   . 

March. 

Aiinmiu,    .     . 

AllMHIIIi,        .       . 

Tintiiin, 

April. 

iMimami, 

.     jtpiinjMi,       .     , 

.        SlIIKI,     . 

.Mny. 

I'liMo-miw,    , 

P/iioro-miin,     . 

.     Wi/o,    . 

June, 

r<tlolo-miili,    . 

.     Piinirn-tiiiiri,    . 

.     lliti,      . 

July. 

Muhfd,      .     . 

1  Mill- ill/ill,  i 
■  t  Ihiioii,      S 

.     TiKiomi, 

August. 

iMtiinyii,    .     , 

Iliuiii,    ,     .     . 

.     Ifiiiiiiu-ehfle, 

September. 

Tiiiimiifu.mwi, 

lima,     .     .     . 

.      TinmiliDT 

mna. 

Octol)er. 

Tdiimnjti.niiiii, 

.      Tirri,      .     .     . 

Tiinuilioe 

llOJJf, 

November. 

Uliirii'ii-mixi, 

.      niiii,      .     .     . 

.     I/iiii, 

, 

December. 

Uliivii'ti-muli, 

.     Aviirihii,      .     . 

.     WeMiu, 

.     . 

January. 

The  Samoans  and  Hawaiians  have  only  twelve  months  iu  their 
year;  the  Tahitians  reckon  thirteen.  Mr.  Ellis,  however,  (Polyne- 
sian Researches,  vol.  i.  p.  79),  informs  us  that  their  calculations  were 
not  very  exact,  and  that  they  omitted  or  added  the  additional  month, 
according  as  the  length  of  the  year  seemed  to  require.  In  general, 
very  little  attention  is  paid  by  the  South  Sea  islanders  to  the  division 
of  time,  and  as  we  draw  nearer  to  the  equator,  this  little  diminishes. 
Thus  at  Rotuma  they  have  a  year  of  six  months,  and  when  this  is 
completed  they  begin  to  number  over  again  ;  while  at  the  Kingsmill 

43 


170 


KTHNOC  II  A  P  II  Y. 


Islands,  which  lie  exactly  under  the  line,  the  months  had  no  name, 
but  were  merely  numbered  first,  second,  third,  and  so  on  up  to  ten, 
when  they  recommenced, — thus  losing  every  distinction  qf  seasons  or 
years. 

A  com|)arison  ol'  the  forejjoinjj;  lists  will  show  that  the  Tahitians 
derived  tlieir  names  lor  the  moitths  from  the  Samoans,  and  the  Ha- 
waiians  from  the  'I'iihitians.  Aj'ii,  in  Samoa,  means  "  |)erspiration,'" 
•,\\u\  J'aa-iifii  must  therefore  mean  "causing  to  perspire,"  a  name  suffi- 
ciently applicable  to  their  February,  which  answers  to  our  August. 
In  the  Sandwich  Islands,  however,  whether  because  the  meaning  in 
that  hemisphere  was  no  longer  suitable,  or  for  some  other  reastm,  it 
was  changed  to  Mtitnlii,  or  the  Pleiades,  by  whose  rising  the  natives 
of  Polynesia  determine  the  commencement  of  their  year.  Between 
Fii'Ki/iii  and  Annunii,  .Mr.  Ellis  gives  two  names,  I'ipiri  and  Taaoa. 
but  it  would  appear  that  the  latter  is  the  intercalary  month,  which 
is  in.serted  or  omitted  at  pleasure.  Forster,  in  his  list,  makes  it 
answer  to  August,  which  accords  with  the  Hawaiian  'i'aaoitu. — no 
iloubt  the  same  word. 

I'(i/i)/(),  in  Samoan,  is  the  name  of  a  kind  of  sea-worm  which  makes 
its  appearance  in  shoals  in  the  reefs,  at  a  certain  period  of  the  year, 
and  is  esteemed  a  great  delicacy  by  the  natives.  This  worm  is  not 
known  at  the  Society  Islands,  but  the  name  is  stdl  retained,  with  no 
meaning  whatever  attached  toil, — a  strilving  evidcuice  of  the  deriva- 
tion of  the  Tahitians  from  Samoa.*  The  word  Miiriaha  in  Tahitian 
is  an  alteration  of  Miirihn,  which  was  in  use  when  Forster  was  at 
Tahiti :  this  has  been  caused  by  the  custom  of  tf  pi,  for  whidi  see 
the  Comparative  (irammar,  \  81.  In  the  Hawaiian  we  observe  u 
number  of  corruptions.  Wihhu  is  evidently  the  same  as  the  Tahitian 
Aranliu ;  'J'amu/toe  is  probably  from  the  Samoan  'JaiotKiJci,  and  |)os- 


•  Tlicrf'  is  siniH'  cilisnirily  with  n^s|x>ri  tn  llic  iiw  ol'  this  icrm  in  Siiiiniiin.  'I'lw  two 
moiitlis  c'njliil  I'lilulii-fiiiKi  .-umI  J'lilijii-muli,  iiTf  .liiiii'  iiiiil  .Inly,  bill  tlii' (ininiiil  ili«'s  not 
make  iN  a|i|>i':ii'iiiiri'  lill  OiIhIkt  aini  .\ii\iiiiI«t.  In  tlic  I'njcf  l.slaiiils,  whin'  il  i.s  also 
liiiiiiiJ,  iIk'  lii.^t-iianiod  iniinth-^  an'  called  MluiliJii-liiilni  ami  ,W/«'/'V«./ri»,  or,  lillli' and 
ureal  Mliilijo.  It  seems  prolialile  thai  at  a  liiriner  ihtukI  the  name  I'liliJo  was  a|i|ilii>(l 
in  Samoan  to  tlicst-  innnlhs,  and  that  lor  some  iihknown  reason,  |M'rha|is  coniiroted  with 
their  sii|)i-rstitions,  the  trrni  was  shirted  to  another  part  ol'the  \e;ir,  and  its  |ilarc"  Kii|i|ilied 
hy  liiiiiiKiJii,  whiili  means  In  rut,  in  the  lanniia^i"'  a|i|iro|)rialid  to  chiefs.  This  must 
ha\e  liiili|Mned  Ix'liire  the  de|iarliiie  of  the  'rahiliaii  c-olonisls.  l-'nr  a  (h'seri|ilioii  of  the 
Mlnild/o,  anil  tlie  ccrenionifs  wliieh  lake  |iliu'o  on  its  apjiearance  ut  the  l-Wjci'  i  liaiidH, 
sec  (Mige  07. 


O  C  K  A  N  I  C    M  Hi  II  A  T  I  O  N  a 


171 


sibly  Ihin  (or  Ilutm)  for  Utiiraa.  'I'Iiosp  chiinge.s  are  of  a  kind 
unusual  in  tho  Polynesian  dialeils,  anil  are  an  I'vidcnce  of  what 
many  circMinistances  woultl  lead  us  to  suspect, — that  the  lirst  settlers 
of  Hawaii  were  people  of  low  rank,  and  iniptjrfeetly  versed  in  those 
branches  of  knowledge  which  are  usually  left,  in  these  islands,  to  the 
chiefs  and  priests. 

w  I X  »  s. 


We  have  already  had  occfision  to  speak  of  the  term  tonga  as  ap- 
plied in  tho  Sainoan,  New  Zealand,*  l{arotongan,  Tahitian  (/w/),  and 
Hawaiian  (tona),  to  the  south  wind.  It  must,  of  course,  have  been 
derived  from  the  first-named  group,  which  is  the  only  one  that  lies  to 
the  north  of  the  island  ('I'onga)  from  which  the  wind  is  named. 

Another  word  which  recjuires  to  bo  noticed  is  tokeinu,  (in  Samoan. 
to'eliiu,  in  Rarotongan,  lokirou,  in  Tahitian,  to'erait,  in  Nukuhivan, 
tokodii,  and  in  Hawaiian  tdolaii.)  In  Samoan  and  Tongan  this  word 
signifies  the  east  or  southeast  trades ;  in  Tahitian  and  Rarotongan  it 
is  the  northwest  monsoon;  in  Nukuhivan  it  is  the  north  wind  ;  and 
in  Hawaiian  it  is  the  name  given  to  the  north  or  northeast  side  of  an 
island,  opposite  to  tona,  or  the  southwest.  The  secret  of  the.se  changes 
of  meaning  is  probably  tu  be  found  in  the  concluding  syllable  A/m. 
wbicb  is  presumed  to  be  tlie  same  with  the  Malaisian  woril  hint, 
meaning  sea.  Throughout  the  .'ountries  occupied  by  this  race,  we 
find  this  term  a|)plied,to  the  wind,  or  the  point  of  the  compass,  in  the 
direction  of  the  open  sea.  Thus  in  Malay,  /aiff,  by  itself,  is  use<l  for 
the  northwest  wind,t  that  being  the  wind  which,  at  the  peninsula  of 
Malacca,  blows  from  the  open  sea,  or  across  the  Bay  of  Bengal 
Timor  in  Malay,  signifies  east,  and  liiiior-hiiit,  northeast, — the  wind 
from  this  direction  coming  down  the  China  Sea.  In  the  island  of 
Celebes  it  is  curious  that  the  liugis,  who  live  on  the  east  side,  have 
for  the  word  east  aha,  and  the  Macassars,  who  iidiabit  the  west  coa.st, 
have  a  similar  v;ord,  /'/««,  for  the  west  J  In  the  Philippines,  ha/as 
signifies  northeast  wind,  and  balac-laol .  northwest, v — that  being  the 
wind  from  the  North  Pacilic.»    In  all  these  cases,  the  proper  transla- 

*  hi  I'nili'ssnr  Ih'c's  V(nriitniliiry,  tnngn  is  i^ivoii,  by  iiiisliiki',  lu  llif  \v(ird  lor  I'JisI- 
wiiiil. 

t  Uii'ir/.i,  Oconnii',  vol.  i.  p.  »;). 

X  ('ni»riird's  Inclmii  .\rtliiiH'ln)»o,  vol.  ii.  p.  127. 

ij  liiiiiiU>l(it  un  the  Knwi,  vul.  ii.  p.  25U. 


17-2 


KTII  X«)«i  RAP  II  Y. 


tion  would  evidently  ho  "swft-wiiid,"  and  litis  is,  no  doubt,  tlio  truo 
mcnninu:  nf  tohluu.  At  tlio  Xiivijriitor  and  Tonfra  Ulands,  the  open 
wii  hfs  to  the  east;  at  Taliiti,  it  is  to  the  nortliwcst ;  at  the  Mar- 
(luosus  to  the  north,  and  at  the  Sandwicli  Islands,  the  natives  had 
traditions  of  the  existtMxe  of  islands  to  the  southeast,  south,  and  south- 
west ;  they  therefore  jfave  the  nanie  of  limltiu  to  the  opposite  portion 
of  the  hori/on.  The  first  part  of  the  word,  lukr  or  Iw,  in  most  of  the 
Polynesian  dialeets,  sii^nities  ailil  or  ihilliiKj.  In  New  Zealand  hau- 
tokr,  "  cold  air,"  is  iriiitcr.  'I'ltlit-luii  may  therefore  be  rendered 
"ecH)lness  from  the  sea,"  an  expression  which  applie8  very  well  to 
this  wind  at  all  the  islands. 

MuldiKjai  seems  to  be  the  proper  name  for  the  trade-wind.  This 
is  its  signitieation  in  Uaroton^an.  Man^arevan,  Tahitian,  and  Ha- 
waiian. In  the  first  two  it  becomes  tiKiningiii,  and  in  the  last  ma- 
ItiiKii.  The  Tahitian  had  formerly  iminiui,  which  has  Iteen  changed 
to  mtmiumu  by  a  sin>j;ular  principle,  for  which  see  the  Grammar, 
i  81.  In  Sainoaii  and  Tonyan  this  word  is  not  used,  its  place  being 
sujjplied  by  lokeUni.  In  New  Zealand,  where  there  are  no  trades,  it 
is  still  applied  to  the  wind  from  the  cast. 


N  V  M  E  R  \  I.  s. 

A  peculiarity  of  some  of  the  numerals  in  the  eastern  dialects  of 
Polynesia  supplies  us  with  a  stroni^  contirmalion  of  the  views  ex- 
pressed respecting  the  emigration  of  the  Ilawaiians  from  Tahiti,  by 
way  of  Nukuliiva.  Hy  reU-rring  to  the  Grammar,  ^  HI,  it  will  Ik) 
seen  that  several  of  the  higher  numbers,  such  as  Irkiiu,  r<ni,  maun, 
whiih  properly  signify,  ten,  liuni/iril,  t/ioitsaiu/,  have  ac<|uired,  in  the 
Tahitian,  Uarotongaii,  and  Maugarevan,  tiie  meaning  of  tnrnti/,  two 
huiulritl,  till)  thuusiind.  The  probable  origin  of  this  cliangt?  is  there 
explained,  and  need  not  be  repeated  here.  In  Hawaiian  all  these 
words  are  again  doubled,  and  stand  for  Jortij.  four  huuilred,  andy««r 
thniisiniil.  Tiinii"  is  the  unit  of  this  (piaternary  system,  and  may  be 
rendered  one  t/itadnip/r,  using  this  term  in  a  corresponding  sense  to 
roi/pff.  At  the  Manpiesas  th«.'re  are  dill'erent  methods  for  the  two 
clusters  which  compose  tii;»t  grou|).  In  tlie  southern  or  Tahuatan 
cluster,  in  counting  large  objects  they  begin  with  ta/ii,  one,  and  thence 
proceed  to  otio/iini,  ten.  taktiii,  twenty;  an,  two  humired,  \c.  For 
small  object.-:,  as  fish  and  mc  I  kinds  of  fruit,  they  In^gin  with  Initna, 
a  couple,  whence  tiikau,  ten  couples,  ««,  one  hundred  couples,  &.C., — 


OCEANIC    M  I  a  R  A  T  r  O  N  S. 


178 


Iwing  in  fact  the  same  as  the  formor,  with  the  omission  of  otwhuu. 
For  Itrcadfruit  they  reckon  l)y  pmin  (knots),  of  four  each,  in  wliiclj 
case  takaii  stands  for  leu  poiias  (i.  e.  forty,  as  in  Hawaiian) ;  an  should 
properly  l)e  one  hundred  poiias,  l)ut  for  some  unknown  reason  they 
have  inserted  a  term  tauaii  for  this  number,  and  use  an  to  express 
him  tfntnus,  i.  e.  eight  hundred  jxmas ;  mono  is  ten  nus  or  eif/ht  thou- 
sand /mnas.  From  this  it  will  l)e  seen  how  far  they  have  departed 
from  the  original  decimal  system.  In  the  northern  or  Nukuhivan 
cluster,  in  counting  all  objects,  large  or  small,  except  breadfruit,  they 
begin  with  tahi,  one,  anil  proceed  to  onnhnii,  ten, — takau,  (or,  accord- 
ing to  some,  tiliuu,)  twenty,  taufa  (or  tohii),  forty,  au,  four  hundred, 
mano,  four  thousand,  &c.  For  breadfruit,  they  use  the  pona,  or 
"knot,"  and  reckon  tuufA,  ten  knots,  au,  one  hundred  knots,  &c. 
The  Hawaiian  system  has  evidently  l)een  formed  by  combining  both 
of  the  Marquesan  methods.  It  takes  the  tauna  or  pair  of  the  Tahu- 
atari,  doubles  its  value,  and  makes  it  the  basis  of  enumeration,  like 
the  pona  used  for  breadfruit.  Ta\iu  (for  takau),  signifies  ten  tauna, 
or  forty,  and  is  used  in  counting  fish,  while  tanahti,  answering  to 
taufn,  is  used  for  the  same  number  in  counting  other  objects,  and 
al)ove  this,  all  the  numbers  are  the  same  as  in  Nukuhivan. 

The  Nukuhivan  numerals  also  afford  some  evidence  of  their  deriva- 
tion from  the  'I'ongan.  The  word  tor  ten,  onohuu,  is  the  form  which 
the  Tongan  ouf/ofu/u  would  take  in  this  dialect.  Tikau,  used  at 
Nukuhiva  instead  of  the  Tahur.tan  takau,  is  probably  a  corruption 
of  the  Tongan  tekau.  Langsdorf,  who  was  at  Nukuhiva  with  Kru- 
senstern.  in  1804,  gives  for  ten,  oiKjofuhi, — for  twenty,  itua-fulu, — for 
thirty,  toln-onfjofulu, — for  one  hundred,  tehau, — and  for  one  thousand, 
afei.  These  are  so  near  the  Tongan  ♦erms  that,  but  for  the  acknow- 
ledged accuracy  of  that  writer,  we  might  suspect  them  to  have  been 
derived  from  a  native  of  the  Friendly  Islands,  and  inserted  in  the 
Maniue.san  vocabulary  by  mistake.  The  use  of  the  /  is  also  a 
remarkable  circumstance,  for  though  the  Nukuhivans  sometimes 
employ  this  sound  (or  that  of  r),  yet  liangs<lorf  gives  no  other  example 
of  it  in  his  list  of  words.  It  is  possii)le  that  Cabri,  the  French  sailor, 
from  whom  he  derived  much  of  his  information,  had  previously  been 
at  Tonga,  and  accpiired  tlie  numerals  of  that  dialect;  and  finding 
them  so  nearly  like  those  of  the  Nukuhivan  as  to  be  readily  under- 
stood there,  had  not  taken  the  trouble  to  change  them. 

44 


I^ff 


mmm 


174 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


V  I  T  I     AND     TON  (i  A. 


i    I 


From  the  <lpRcription  which  has  been  given  of  the  natives  of  the 
Feejee  Group,  it  is  evident  that  they  cannot  properly  be  ranked  witli 
either  of  the  two  neiirlihorinj^  raees,  ahhon^rh  they  approach  nearest 
to  tliat  which  inliabits  the  ishuids  to  tlie  west  of  them.  In  color,  they 
are  neither  yellow  nor  black,  but  a  medium  between  the  two,  a  sort 
of  reddish  brown.  Their  hair  is  neither  w(K>lly  nor  straight,  but  long 
and  fri/./led.  In  form  and  feature  they  hold  the  same  undecided 
position,  and  however  it  may  be  in  reality,  in  appearance  they  canni't 
be  better  described  tlian  as  a  midattotrilie,  such  as  would  be  produced 
by  a  union  of  Mt'iariesiuiis  and  I'olynesians. 

In  character,  they  seem  to  have  inherited  tiie  intellect,  (piick, 
apprehensive,  and  ingeniou.s,  of  tlie  latter,  with  the  ferocity,  sus- 
picion, and  dissimulation  of  tlu;  former;  and  tiiey  have  one  advantagt; 
over  bt)th,  in  uniting  the  arts  proper  to  eacii.  Like  the  blacks,  they 
use  the  bow  in  war,  and  manufacture  pottery ;  whil(!  they  understand 
and  [iractise  tiie  I'olym-sian  mctluMis  of  making  paper-cloth,  culti- 
vating l(iro,  preparing  /iwii,  tattooing,  &c. 

'I'lu-  composition  of  tlie  language  not  only  supports  the  opinion  of 
their  hybrid  origin,  but  can  in  no  other  way  be  explained.  Four 
fifths  of  the  words  are  unlike  those  of  any  other  idioin  witii  which 
we  an;  acciuaiiited.*  TIk^  other  lifth,  with  most  of  the  grammatical 
peculiarities,  are  Polynesian.  Hut  of  tlie.se  words,  many  are  so  altered, 
according  to  certain  rules,  that  no  native  of  Polynesia  could  pro- 
nounce tliem.  Thus  the  p  is  almost  always  changed  to  the  double 
consonant  m/i,  as — 


UTIAN.  lM)I.VM:.'iI.»N. 

mhi, pa, 

mbiUulit, jMi/ii/n, 

tamlm Iiijiii, 

lumhu tiipii, 

mliurn'lii, jii//i,ln,     . 

The  /  frecjuently  becomes  ml,  as — 


linri'. 

II  kind  ol'si-a-Wdrm. 
Mucit'd, 
1(1  nri)W. 
Klv^<iutn. 


niltilo, /'//",   .  .  ...  nriim. 

niliiliijii, Iiilim', tlif  car. 

nilnnilonu,     ....  Iittnnu, xtruiglit. 

mliinii /««!/, wl. 

•  It  must  he  rt'mrmlKTril  llml  wu  liave  no  graiiiiiiar  or  c.xten.sive  vut-abulary  of  any 
proper  Mclancsian  langua);i.'. 


Il 


OCKANIC    M  Kilt  ATI  ON  H. 


170 


The  k  fwinctimes  becomes  ijg,  uh — 

VITIAN.  rill.rXKIIIAN. 

iriiiijfii fiikii, riiiio!, 

t)Hrlf, krir •iirlli,  rliiy. 

p/fiiiigii, kiikiiy  ...  Ill  KriiM|i,  Imld. 

The  r  (or  /)  is  soinelinics  clmnijcil  to  ndr  ([iropcrly  nr) ;  as 

iitiilrii "/'(, iiwiikf, 

iiilniru, Irjii, iiNJiiti. 

tii/riiii, /«(/, U'uf. 


Besides  the  words  so  nitcrcd,  a  fsir  greater  numlier  of  Polynesian 
terms  arc  found  in  tlie  \'iti:m  |icrftMtly  |iiiro,  and  many  of  these  are 
such  as  sijfnity  the  commonest  olijects ;  whih;  ttiey  are  straiii^ely 
intermixed  with  otiier  words  not  found  in  any  hinj^naire  of  tin;  Mahty 
family.  Thus  the  word  Wn  f'titlur  is  Polynesian,  and  that  for  .vw/  is 
not;  ei/e,  ear,  land,  wuhr,  liousr,  to  n/cip,  tit  i/ic,  are  all  expressed  by 
terms  of  Polynesian  origin  ;  while  toat/i,  longiu;  seu,Jire,  cloth,  to  eat, 
to  ijn,  are  from  some  other  source. 

That  the  inhabitants  of  this  n;ron|)  are  a  race  of  mi.xed  origin,  was 
a  conclusion  to  which  we  arrived  while,  on  tlu^  spot.  It  was  not, 
liowever,  till  some  time  after  our  return,  while  engaged  in  examining 
and  comparing  the  dialects  autl  traditions  of  the  Oceanic  tribes,  that 
an  opinion  was  formed  as  to  the  manner  in  which  the  intermixture 
may  have  taken  place.  As  tliis  opinion  is  a  novel  one,  and  may,  at 
first  sight,  seem  improbai)le,  it  will  be  proper  to  state,  in  their  order, 
the  observations  which  led  to  its  adoption. 

1.  In  drawing  up  the  Comparative  Cirammar  of  the  Polynesian 
dialects,  it  was  impossible  not  to  be  struck  with  the  numerous 
instances  in  which  the  Tongan  departed  from  the  rules  which  govern 
the  lest,  to  agree  with  the  \  itian.  Some  of  these  have  been  nottid 
in  the  Grammar,  H  Hi  ^^-  A  few  of  the  most  striking  may  l)e 
mentioned  here.  The  Polynesian  dialects,  in  general,  have  several 
sullixes,  terminating  mostly  in  ina  and  ia,  which  are  joined  to  verbs 
to  form  the  pa.ssive.  The  Vitian  has  the  sanu;  particles,  but  used  for 
a  ditferent  purpose,  vi/. :  to  mark  the  transitive  state  of  a  verb.  The 
Tongan,  in  this,  agrees  for  the  most  part  with  the  latter.  Again,  the 
regular  Polynesian  article  is  te  (or  in  Samoan  /c,  w  hich  is  probably  a 
modern  form).  That  the  Tongan  once  had  this  article  is  apparent 
from  the  fact  that  it  is  still  foiuid  jointMl  to  some  of  the  numerals,  as 
lekunii,  ten  (applied  to  fathoms),  j)l.  ijukumi,  tens;  teau,  hundred, 


!P* 


I 


BE 


170 


R  T  II  N  O  (i  R  A  I'  II  Y. 


pi.  yetm,  hiin<irecl8.  In  the  ^fiicriil  Hpccoli,  however,  lliis  nrtii-le  i* 
no  Idii^rtT  iisj'd,  its  pliioo  Ihmiijj  Hupplii'd  by  tlio  X'itiiin  ti.  As  rc^iirdti 
pronunciation,  in  the  ciiMtcrn  or  Lukomhii  diulect  of  tho  Vitian,  the  / 
before  i  in  pronounred  like  tf  (eh),  t)r  like  li  in  Chiislian.  It  in  the 
same  in  'I'onnaii,  but  in  no  otiior  ol'tht'  Polynesian  tonmies.  Finally, 
there  is  a  lar>;o  elass  ol'  words  in  which  the  \  itian  uses  tiie  soil  th  (W) 
or  the  .«,  and  the  Tonjjan,  which  wants  these  letters,  has  in  their  place 
an  /«,  while  the  Sainoan  and  all  the  Polynesian  dialects  have  nuthiiig 
whatever ;  as. 


VITIAN. 

rilNIIAM, 

HAllllAN,  KTI'. 

fake,       . 

.     .     h.tir,       . 

.     .     (ikr,  ii'f,  .     , 

ii|iwiir(N. 

*'tV<),  .      . 

.     .     hip,  .     . 

.     .     if",      .     .     . 

.     (liiwnwiinU. 

Vttit, 

.     .    pin,  .     . 

.     .    >.,      .     .     . 

.     Iiiiw  ninny  f 

ftimii. 

.     ,     htimit,     . 

.     lima,  ,     .     , 

.     (iiitrinniT. 

vote,  ,     . 

.     .    Julir,  .     . 

.     .    Jim;      .     .     . 

,     piKldlu. 

U(ll,    .      . 

.     .     ulia,  .     . 

.      .     Ull,       .      .      . 

,     rain. 

t'likini,     . 

.     .     luikiiii,    , 

.     iikau,  ii'iiii,  . 

.     nrf. 

unite. 

,     niii/ir. 

.     .     miir,    , 

.        Ici  Nlccp, 

sain,  .     . 

.     .     liiiJii,  . 

.     .     ii/ii,     . 

.        plllll. 

mi,    .     . 

.     .     Iiiii,    . 

.     .     ivi,     .     .     . 

.     bono. 

These  in.stance8  of  resemblance,  affecting  whole  classes  of  words, 
and  important  graminatical  characteristics,  cannot  be  explained  on 
the  supposition  of  an  ordinary  intercourse,  such  as  is  at  present  main- 
tained between  the  two  gro\ips.  Nothing  l)ut  an  intimate  cotinexion, 
and  some  intermixture,  would  have  availed  to  pnxluce  .>«uch  an  effect. 

2.  In  bringing  together  the  materials  for  the  Polynesian  Lexicon, 
the  meaning  of  the  words  Jiti  (or  rid*)  and  tomja  became  apparent. 
The  first  means  properly  to  rise,  ajipiied  to  the  sun.  The  second  is 
the  noun  formed  by  adding  the  sutli.v  ya,  to  the  verb  to,  which  signi- 
fies to  set,  as  the  sun.  The  first  is  found  in  the  dialect  of  Fakaafo  as 
/iti,  in  Nukuhivan  as  Jiti  or  hiti,  in  T.diitian  and  Hawaiian  it  is  hili, 
in  Harotongan  ili,  and  in  New  Zealand  triti, — in  all  with  the  same 
meaning.  'I'he  .secoml  (to)  occurs  with  the  sense  of /o  .vt/,  in  Tahi- 
tian,  Harotongan,  Paumotuan,  and  New  Zealand ;  and  in  other 
dialects  it  has,  though  not  the  same,  somewhat  similar  meanings.  In 
Taiiitian,  (which  omits  the  y,]  the  sulHx  ya  Iwcomes  a,  and  thus  we 
have,  in  the  tran.slation  of  the  New  Testament,  Matt.  xxv.  27,  "  ?nai 
te  hitia  o  le  ra  i  le  looa  o  te  ra,"  "  from  the  east  to  the  west," — literally, 

•  Tlic  I'liljno.sinn  /  becomes  invariably  r  in  llie  Viliun  language. 


nc  K  A  N  IC    M  KiU  ATr  O.NS. 


177 


from  llic  rising  of  the  niiii  In  the  si'ttiiii;  of  tlit?  kiiii,  [ah  orinilv  ail  mri- 
ilintim)*  It  ii|»p('itrN,  howovrr,  tliiit  in  tlio  first  fX|irfssioii  (liitiii) 
tilt'  Miidiix  (t  is  not  iifccHsiiry, — for  in  Matt  viii.  II,  we  liiiv*?  "  uitii  Iv 
hiti  I)  h'  III  >■  ff  tiHifi  o  Ir  in,"  "  frciii  tlu'  oust  and  tiio  wost," — litorally, 
from  tlit^  lisi-  of  tlio  snn,  ific.  It  slionlil  ho  ohsorvivi  tliat  the  doiihlo 
o  in  twill  is  written  hy  the  missionaries  to  iiistinu;\iish  it  from  Ion, 
sontli,  hut  the  pronunciation  of  botli  is  the  same,  and,  in  propriety, 
tile  Npeilin<^  slionld  he  alike.  Hestorin^  therefore  the  latter  phrase  to 
wliut  It  would  he  in  Sumoiin,  or  in  the  original  foriii.  wv  shall  havH 
"mat  le  Kin  »  le  la  e  te  TOiJA  o  te  la."  Hut  tiie  addition  "«  Ir  la"  in 
not  necessary  to  the  Hense.  In  Hawaiian  hiliiia  alone  is  tlie  regular 
term  for  vast. 

We  have,  therefore,  to  ncconiit  for  two  facts,  each  of  them  suflTi- 
ciently  stranj^e;  first,  that  two  (fronjis,  situated  four  hundred  miles 
apart,  an<l  inhahited  hy  dith'rent  races,  should  hear  names  which  arc 
plainly  correlative;  and  secondly,  that  these  names  should  he  the 
exact  opposite  to  what  their  meaiiinur  would  seem  to  recpiire, — the 
'l'on(/ii,  or  western  country,  lyiiif^  to  the  east,  and  the  I'lli,  or  uasteru 
land,  to  the  west. 

'I.  A  remarkahle  inylholotrical  tradition,  niven  hy  Mariner,  as  pre- 
valent in  tlie  Tonjiii  Isiand.s,  though  its  real  purport  appears  to  have 
heiMi  forgotten  in  the  la|)se  of  time,  atfords  a  cine  to  tiie  origin  and 
explanation  of  these  |ihenoinena.  It  is,  in  substance,  its  follows  : — 
Tangaloa  and  his  two  sons  dwelt  in  /Wo/w>  (or,  more  correctly,  liiilnlii). 
He  commanded  them,  saying,  "  (io  and  take  with  you  your  wives,  and 
dwell  in  the  world  at  Tonga;  iliriilr  llir  laiiil  into  Iwo  porlions,  iiiiil 
ihall  sviMiiiUhj friini  larli  nllur."  They  de|iarte(l  accordingly.  The 
name  of  the  eldest  was  'I'li/ii'i  {Tnlmii);  that  of  the  youngest  Vaka- 
akiiu  iili,  who  was  an  exceedingly  wise  young  man,  and  first  formed 
axes  and  invented  hejuis  and  cloth  and  looking-glas.ses.  The  other 
acted  ditVerently,  heing  very  indolent,  .sauntering  about  and  sleejiing, 
and  envying  the  works  of  his  younger  brother.  His  evil  disjiosition 
led  him,  at  last,  to  waylay  his  brother  and  kill  him.  Thereujion 
Tangaloa  came  from  Uulotu  with  great  anger,  and  after  rebuking  the 
murderer  for  his  crime,  called  together  the  family  of  his  younger  son, 
and  directed  them  to  launch  their  canoes,  and  sail  to  the  east  (ki 
tokelau,  toward  the  trade-wind),  to  the  great  land  there,  and  dwell 

•  "  From  Nunriw  until  siinsel. 
All  ciirlli  nlmll  liciir  Ihy  rmiir." 

Mtutiii/iii/'s  "Projiliecy  uj  C'opys.' 
45 


ITS 


KT  II  .\  i)(i  II  A  I'll  V. 


tli('r(<.  '*  ^'llll  hIiiiII  Ii«>  wliiti',  iiM  your  iiiiinl  Im  itinmI;  yixi  nIiiiII  iiIho  lie 
wiMC,  iiiakiiiu;  iixcm  iukI  nil  kiiidx  nf  valiiiililc  iIiiiium,  uikI  liir;{o  ciiiiin'n. 
Ill  llic  1111:111  tunc,  I  will  tell  the  wind  to  Mow  iViini  voitr  hiiiil  to 
'I'lini,'!!.  Ml  tliat  yoii  sliull  loini'  liitluT  to  trade.  Init  your  rldi-r  lirotluT 
mIiiiII  not  u*'  to  yon  with  hii*  Imd  raiKH's."  To  tin*  «-ldcr  lirv)lli«!r  lio 
Hind, — "  ^  (III  nIiiiII  Im>  lilack.  mm  your  iiiiiid  im  liad.  and  you  hIiuII  Im 
dfstitute  ;  lew  itckhI  tliin:(!t  hIiuII  you  liuvt<,  nor  sliall  you  i^o  to  your 
hrollu'r's  laud  to  Irailt'  "* 

'riic  natives  told  this  story  to  aeeoimt  fur  the  diHeri'iice  in  color 
mid  civili/.atioii,  lietweeii  tlu'inselves  and  their  l')uro|ieau  visitors, 
coiisideriiiir  thciiiselvos  to  bt*  the  deseendants  ol  the  elder  hrother, 
uiid  the  latter  ol  (he  \i>iinL;er.  ManiM-r  was  iiiuoh  struek  with  its 
siiiLTularity,  and  siisjiecteil  that  it  was  ot  tiuNleni  iiianuracture,  and  a 
corrupted  toriii  ol  the  seriptiiral  account  of  Cam  and  Ahel,  learned 
i'roni  some  of  their  fureiiju  visitors;  hut  he  says  "the  oldest  men 
atHrined  their  positivo  helief  that  it  was  an  ancient  traditionary 
record,  mid  IIkiI  it  irii.i  fniniihil  in  fnil/i."  There  is  rertaiiilv  no 
intelliLnhlc  reason  why  they  should  have  attem|iled  to  <l<>ceivc  hiiii 
on  the  point  of  its  antii|Uity,  or  Imcii  themselves  deceind.  Hut  }(  it 
wore  really  an  ancient  story,  it  «'oulil  not  have  referred  iiriijinnllif  to 
the  whites,  however  it  may  he  applied  to  them  at  present.  'I'lie 
proiiahility  is,  as  before  oliscrved,  that  it  is  an  ancient  mythos,  undi^r 
which  tiie  early  history  of  the  islanders  is  veiled,  though,  in  thu 
passuije  of  ci'iituries,  the  real  parts  have  Im-cii  for<{otl»'ii,  and  the  story 
has  received,  of  late,  a  new  ap|ilicatiou.  The  orij^inal  scene  is 
probulily  on  the  Feejee  liroup.  A  party  ol  Milaiu'sians,  nr  I'jipiianw, 
(the  elder  brother)  arrive  lirst  at  this  t;roup.  and  settle  principally  on 
the  extensive  alluvial  plain  which  stretches  aloui^  the  eastern  coast 
of  Viti-lirit.  Afterwards  a  second  conijj.iny  of  emi^'runts,  of  the 
Polynesian  race,  perhaps  from  some  island  in  the  Kast  Indies,  called 
Jiu/ofii,  make  their  appearance,  an<l  liiidinu  the  western  coast  (a 
inoiiiitaiiiDUs  and  comparatively  sterile  region)  unoccupied,  establish 
themselvus  upon  it.  The  two  thus  divide  the  land  between  them, 
and  are  known  to  one  another  as  eastern  peojile  and  western  people, 

•  .Si-i'  "  All  Ai'cimnt  urtlic  Nativi's  ol' tlir  'ri>n).'ii  I'-liiiiils,  c-iiiii|iilr(l  liy  J.  Martin,  M.  U., 

Irnin  til iiiiiiiiiiii'iiliiMis  III'  W'llliiini   M.iriiirr."     ( ^l||•.talll(■'^i  .Misii'llmiy,  vnl.  ii.  ji,  11^ 

ami  A|>|x'iiili.\,  p.  4(1,  wlirri'  il  is  j>ivt'ii  in  lln-  ••ii^iiial  I'liiigiiii, 


li'iili'-'tiMriiliiriiilMiiaiii^ill 


or  KA.N  If    M  Mi  It  ATM».\  H. 


17!» 


or  r»V/ ami  Tnm/ii*  AHi-r  ni'mtiiI  ucucriiliiniM,  tlir  Mucks  (or  Viti), 
jfiiliMis  III  till'  iiicrt-iiMML'  \\('<iltli  iiinl  |i(i\vfr  ol  tlicir  Ii'ms  liarliaroii!* 
iH'inlilMirn,  risr  n|i<iii,  ami  partly  by  tri'iiclii-ry,  partly  l»y  mipcrior 
iniiiilicrs,  snriTrd  in  oM'rpowi'riiii,'  llwin.  'I'Imim' of  tlir 'riMii.'n  wlio 
uro  not  made  prJNnm'rM,  laiiin'li  tlirir  raiiui'M,  and  lirtakr  IIu'iiihi'Ivi'm  to 
m*a,  altor  tlio  nMiial  cnstonror  vampiiNlii'd  trilics.  In  iIiih  way  tlicy 
rcacii  tlio  islands  of  the  Friendly  (ironp,  vvliidi  rcfcivc  t'nini  lliciii 
till-  iianio  o|''l"t)ni{a,lln'  larucsl  (llic  ••  yriMt  land")  licin^  ilistinyiiislit'd 
by  tlio  t'pitlu't  tdfm,  or  sacri'il  'I'lic  tradi'-wind  blows  directly  from 
this  uHMip  towanls  \'iti,  and  llic  iialucs  nf  ilic  latter  urniip  never  visit 
tlu"  Friendly  Islands,  exeepi  in  'rniiu;a  ea;ii>es,  by  w  liieli  alone  tlie 
intc'reoiirsu  liotween  the  Iwo^is  iii:iititain*Hl.  'I'lio  eonseipifiices  of 
tliis  eoiirse  ofovents  would  be  as  loliows  : 

I.  Dnriii;^  tlie  residence  ol  llie  two  races  on  tlie  same  uroiip,  the 
clone  connexion  wliicli  would  iiecessarily  exist  between  llieni  conid 
not  tail  to  liave  some  intliierice  on  tlie  laniriiu^e  ot  uneli  ;  ot' wliicli  wo 
see  the  truces  in  the  'roii;,'au  dialect. 

'2.  It  is  not  to  be  supposed  tliat  nil,  or  even  tlie  irreater  part  of  the 
ToiiLfa  people  would  be  able  to  make  their  escape.  Tliose  who 
remained  would  be  reduced  to  captivity,  iuid  the  women  would 
iHJCome  the  wives  of  the  compn!rors.  The  result  would  be  u  people 
of  mixed  race  and  l:in:;uaLre,  in  both  ol  which  the  Melanesiaii  element 
would  predominate.     Such  are  the  Feejeeans  at  tliis  day. 

;i.  The  words  luti  (or  ////)  and  fo/n/ti  would  no  loiiiri-r  be  a|iplicable 
as  ri'i^ards  their  siiiiiilicaLion  of  inst  and  nrst.  One  of  two  results 
would  nece.ssarily  follow.  Hither  the  words  would  cease  to  be 
employed  to  distiimuish  the  two  tribes,  or  they  would  lose  their 
proper  and  <iri<^iiial  meaiiiiiLT,  aiul  become  mere  a|ipellatives.  The 
latter,  as  mijflit  be  expecti'd,  has  occurred.  The  two  words  are 
unknown  in  the  \'ilian  and  'I'oiiL^aii  laii^ua<res,  (>xce|it  as  the  names 
of  the  tfroiips.t 

•t.  The  Samoan  people  are  so  near  tht!  others,  anil  maintain  so  con- 
stant u  communication  w  ith  them,  that  tii(>  .same  result  must  necessa- 
rily follow  in  their  dialect,  as  we  lind  to  1h!  liu^  case.  /'///  and  'I'oiiya 
are  used  in  it  only  as  proper  names.     Hut  it  is  de-servinj^  of  remark, 


•  So  ill  llic  lOiifjlisli  l|r|iliir('liy,  ^^^(A  iiikI  Wrssivx,  .Nnrlolk  ami  .SiiiHilk.  it  is  unrlliy 
III' nMii.'irk  llial,  iil  llir  pri'si'iii  iliiy,  llir  wrnli'm  i-iiiikI  ii|'  \'ili.|i'vii  iii  Itiinwii  liv  tlir  ^I'licrnl 
iiiiiiii' 111' y^',  11  wiiril  wliicli  |ini|M'rly  iiu'iiiis  /•/»«/,  iiml  liciirc  (likr  llir  I'lilyiieHiuii  liiio) 
Uruiiiil  mill  uistiranl. 

]  Till'  wiiril  .\(irmiiH  is  ii  striking  exum;ilo  ol'u  similar  I'liiuigi!  iirini'iiniiig. 


I 


., 


180 


E  T  il  N  O  (i  R  A  I'  II  V. 


tliiit  in  nearly,  if  not  (iiiiti",  nil  tlio  diiilects  derived  from  the  Sitnioaii, 
as  hefore  slated,  these  words  exist ;  oonseiiueiitly  the  |)eople  speakinjjr 
those  dialects,  (the  'rahitiaiis.  New  Zealaiulers,  Nukiihivaiis,  &.e.,) 
must  have  eniiu;rated  before  the  words  beeame  obsolete  in  Samoan, — 
eoiisei|iieiitly  before  tiie  'I'on^aiis  had  been  loiiy  settled  in  the  group 
vvhiih  they  now  oeeupy. 

5.  But,  on  the  other  hand,  it  has  been  several  times  remarked,  that 
tdUfia  in  Sanioan  sio;nities,  at  present,  the  south  (or  'I'omja)  wind, — 
and  tlie  vord  lias  tiie  same  meauini;  in  the  Tahitian,  New  Zealand, 
Rarotonifan,  &c.  Consequently,  the  emitjration  by  whieh  tlicse 
islands  were  people«l  must  have  taken  plaee  after  the  Friendly 
Islands  were  occupieil  by  the  Toni^a  people.* 

In  the  last  two  para;j[rapiis  are  jfiven  the  reasons  for  supposing  that 
Tidiiti  (and  perhaps  Nukidiiva  and  New  Zealand)  were  peo|)led 
shortly  after  the  (light  of  die  Tonga  people  from  Viti  and  tlieir  settle- 
ment in  their  present  seat.  This  deiluction  calls  'o  mind  the  infor- 
mation which  we  received  from  the  missionaries  at  the  iSamoaii 
Islamls,  that,  on  .some  of  the  hills  in  the  interior,  were  e.vtensive  walls, 
bearing  the  marks  of  great  antiquity.  The  traditionary  account 
which  the  natives  gave  of  them  was  that  they  were  fortilications 
erected  during  a  war  between  their  ancestors  and  the  'i'onga  people. 
It  certainly  is  noi  unlikely  that  this  war  resulted  from  the  settlement 
of  the  latter  in  the  I'Viendly  Islands,  'i'hese  islands  are  at  no  great 
distance  iVoni  tSamoa,  and  may  ha\e  been  shortly  hefore  coloni/ed 
from  thence,  and  considered  as  ile|tendencies.  A  fleet  of  large  canoes, 
such  as  are  used  by  the  'I'onga  and  \'iti  people,  sudilenly  arrives, 
bringing  an  army  of  fugitive,  but  i)rave  and  experienced  warriors, 
des|)i'rate  troiii  their  recent  losses.  The  iSamoan  colonists,  sur|)rised 
and  unused  to  war,  are  coiupiered  w  ithout  dilliculty.  Some  of  them 
seek  refuge  in  tiie  mother  coiintrv,  and  the  natural  coiiseipience 
ensues, — a  furious  contest  between  tiie  tSamoans  and  the  intruders  in 
the  Friendly  Islands.  The  latter,  though  probably  inferior  in  num- 
bers, would  l)e  (as  they  still  are)  far  better  navigators  and  more  skilful 
warriors  than  their  northern  neighbors.  'I'hey  would  naturally  be 
the  assailants,  and  might,  at  first,  commit  great  ravages,  and  perhajis, 
partially  con(|uer  some  of  the  hostiU?  islands.    Many  of  the  van({uished 

*  'I'liii.s  \vi'  I'liii  nri-oijiil  liir  iIk'  siii;;iilar  <  iri'iiiiistiino'  lliiil  Ian  in  Tiihilinii,  iiiiil  toijii  in 
|{iiniliiii;.'uii  sliiinld  siiinily  Ixilli  south  mid  insl.  In  Ihr  lutlcr  st  list-,  il  i.s  llir  imuil  of 
/«,  and  means  |iri>|i«'rly  siiiisrl  ,•  in  llic  liirincr,  il  is  Ironi  llic  island  of  7l>»^'a,  und  is 
drrivcd  IruMi  tlir  l^aniiian  uwol'lhi'  Irrin. 


()  (•  i;  A  \  1  ('    M  I  «i  R  A  T  I  O  N  8. 


191 


pcoplo,  as  iisnnl  in  shcIi  cases,  wnulil  take  to  tlu'ir  canoes,  ami  spread 
tli»^  {Siimoaii  rare  and  lanuua^e  (ucr  llie  dislaiit  islands  of  the  I'acific. 

W  th.!  'roiiira  lii^jiitives,  as  tlins  snppose<l,  I'onnd  \\\v  islands  in 
which  they  tot)k  rernij;e  already  parliidly  s(\ltled,  and  reduced  the 
inhabitants  to  suhjcctioii,  it  would  account  tor  the  fact  that  the  dis- 
tinction of  classes  or  I'astc  is  maintained  with  nnu'h  more  ri^or  anionfj 
them  than  on  any  of  tlie  other  ;;roups  of  Polynesia.  Besidt^s  the  three 
classes  of /7^/.  iiKildhitlf.  and  tinm,  (or  cliiefs,  conncillcs,  and  common 
|)eople.)  all  of  whom  arc  tree,  and  ca|)ahlc  of  hol(iin<4  land  and  otlice, 
there  is  a  fourth  class,  called  liia,  who  arc  serfs,  atlixed  to  the  soil, 
and  incapahle  of  risinir  ahove  their  actual  position. 

Aniither  peculiarity  in  the  social  sy.slem  of  the  Friendly  islanders 
may  be  explained  in  accordance  with  the  views  liere  e.\pressetl  con- 
cerniuir  their  early  mii>rations.  There  is  on  this  <^roup  a  chief  called 
'rni-/iiiif/(i,  who  is  esteemed  divine,  and  believed  to  he  descendeil  Irom 
a  fjoil  of  ilulotn.  lie  takes  .ank  l)etorc  all  the  other  chiefs,  the  kins' 
not  exce|)lcd,  and  receives  from  them  peculiar  marks  of  reverence, 
tlioui;h  his  actual  authority  is  less  than  that  of  niiuiy  others.  'J'lii- 
T(i/ii/ii  means  "  L<inl  of  Tonjfa."  'i'he  word  fiii  (lord)  •  •  seldom  used 
alone,  but  ^rencrally  with  the  name  of  a  place  followiiii^  it.  This 
place,  so  far  as  our  information  extends,  is  never  a  ii;rou|)  or  lari^e 
island,  but  always  some  depi-ndent  islet  or  district.  'I'hus  there  is  no 
Ttti-Vili.  'I'iii-\(iniii,  'I'lii-I  /Hi/it,  but  we  hav(>  'Vm-Sdrchrlv.  'I'lii- 
HiUiiuki.  'Viii-AdiKi, — these  bcin^  districts  on  the  larger  islands.  We 
may  suppose  that  while  Toiijfa  was  merely  a  district  of  \  iti-levu,  its 
chief  wodtl  be  tern\»>d  'I'lii-'I'Dinid, — and  he  woultl  most  probably  be 
a  (K'scendant  of  the  leader  under  whom  the  lirst  en\i;j;rants  came  from 
Bulotu.  In  the  <rreat  chauijes  which  wou'd  naturally  be  produced 
by  their  expulsion  and  llight  to  tht>  Friendly  Islands,  some  other 
chief  milfhl  sei/.e  the  supreme  power,  leaving;  to  the  disjiosses.sed 
.sovereiy;u  his  title,  raidx,  and  the  respect  which  he  wt)uld  derive  from 
his  sup|iosed  descent. 

A  fact  which  fjives  pri>bability  to  this  supposition  is  the  custom 
which  exists  of  straniflinjjt  the  wife  of  'I'ui-Ton^a,  at  the  burial  of  the 
latter.  'I'his  is.  as  has  been  stated,  the  regular  custom  amonji;  the 
Feejeeans  at  the  burial  of  a  chief,  anil  the  wife  considers  it  disjrracetul 
to  survive  her  husband.  If,  while  the  Tontfa  people  lived  on  the 
Feejee  Ciroup,  their  heaii-chief  was  accustomeil,  Irom  motives  of 
policy,  to  seek  the  allianc*^  of  hi.s  dusky  neiirhbors,  it  wovild  account 
for  the  custom  being  intrinlucod  into  his  family ;  and,  once  introduced, 

46 


X8S 


E  T  n  N  O  G  R  A  P  II  y. 


I  I 


i 


a  sentiment  of  reverence  for  his  high  rank  and  attributes  w  c'j''l  ""* 
allow  it  to  be  discontinued. 

But  if  the  Tonga  people  once  resided  on  the  Feejee  Islands,  we 
should  expect  to  find  some  evidence  of  the  fact  at  tbc  latter  group,  in 
the  names  of  places  and  the  traditions  of 'lie  people.  And  in  this  we 
are  not  disappointed.  Whether  the  Vitians  have  any  recollection  of 
the  war  of  the  two  races,  such  as  the  Tongans  retain  enibotlied  in 
their  mythology,  is  not  known.  The  views  which  are  now  advanced 
did  not  occur  to  us  until  after  our  return,  and,  of  course,  no  in(iuiries 
were  made  on  the  subject  while  wo  were  at  the  islands.  But  many 
facts  were  noted  bearing  incidentally  upon  it,  and  among  them  the 
following  may  be  cited,  as  strongly  confirmatory  of  these  opinions. 

1.  On  the  west  coast  of  Viti-levu,  exactly  at  the  place  where  our 
hypothesis  supposes  the  Tougans  to  have  first  established  themselves 
on  that  island,  is  a  large  district  called  Vci-Tmuja,  which  means  " /o 
Tonga,"  or  perhaps,  originidly,  to  irestivard.  We  did  not  visit  it,  nor 
learn  any  thing  concerning  its  inhabitants.  Nearly  opposite  to  this, 
on  the  east  coast  of  the  same  island  is  a  bay  called  Viti-levu,  which 
may,  in  like  manner,  have  been  the  pristine  seat  of  the  Melanesian 
emigrants,  from  which  the  name  has  finally  been  extended  to  the 
whole  island. 

2.  We  have  spoken  in  another  place  of  the  clan  or  tribe  called 
Lei^iikd.  the  original  inhabitants  of  the  island  of  Mbau,  who  are  dis- 
tinguisliod  from  the  other  Vitians  by  their  enterprise  and  intelligence, 
and  carry  on  mcst  of  the  trade  between  the  dillerent  islands.  They 
are  distinctly  stated  by  the  natives  to  be  of  Tongan  descent,  tiiough 
in  appearance  they  do  not  ditfer  from  the  other  islanders.  The  prin- 
cipal town  on  the  island  of  Ovolau  is  also  called  Leruka,  and  the 
people  are  e([ually  remarkable  for  their  intelligence  anil  good  dispo- 
sition. It  does  not  appear  that  there  is,  at  present,  any  connexion 
between  them  and  the  tribe  mentioned  above ;  but  the  identity  of 
name  and  similarity  of  character  woulil  lead  us  to  sus|)ect  thai  such  a 
connexion  may  have  formerly  existed.  Another  name  which  is 
equally  diHu.sed  in  \'iti  is  Mannt/at.  This  is  the  name  of  an  island 
in  the  western  part  of  the  group,  .south  of  Viti-levu,  of  another  in  the 
eastern  part,  near  Lakenii)a,  and  of  a  di.strict  tipon  tiie  last-named 
island,  to  which  the  sjiirits  of  the  dead  are  supposeil  to  repair  before 
they  descend  to  their  iinal  residence  in  the  Mbulu  or  Hades.  Both 
these  names  are  found  in  the  Tonga  Group,  where  they  are  applied 
to  the  two  largest  islands  of  the  Ilabai  Cluster  [Lefuka  and  Nainuka), 


OCEANIC    MIGRATIONS. 


1S3 


which  are,  politically,  next  in  importance  to  Tongatabu.  The  mere 
similarity,  or  rather  identity,  of  names  is,  of  itself,  suflSciently  re- 
markable, and  when  coupled  with  the  assertion  of  the  Feejeeans  that 
the  Levuka  people  are  of  Tongan  derivation,  will  be  admitted  to  need 
some  explanation.  If  we  suppose  that  these  appellations  were  those 
of  two  principal  divisions  of  the  Toiiffa  (or  western  people)  when  they 
resided  on  Viti,  we  can  understand  that  the  fugitives  would  be  likely 
to  preserve  the  same  names  in  their  new  homes,  while  those  of  tliem 
who  remained  in  Viti,  subject  to  their  dusky  eonijuerors,  would  natu- 
rally keep  together  as  mudi  as  possiijle,  and  in  this  way  their  mixed 
progeny  might  retain  .somewhat  more  of  Tongan  blood,  and  with  it 
more  of  the  bold,  enterprising  character  of  their  ancestors,  than 
the  other  natives.  England  offers  us,  in  the  province  of  Cornwall,  an 
example  of  a  people,  who,  though  they  have  forgotten  their  original 
tongue,  and  are  much  interndngled  with  their  Sa.xon  conijuerors, 
retain  yet  many  of  the  pecu!  aritics  of  the  Celtic  character. 

These  are  not  the  only  instances  of  similarity  in  names  between 
the  two  groups.  Mango,  Fotiia  (  Votnii),  and  Fiim  (  Viiru),  whicii  are 
the  names  of  islands  in  Tonga,  are  also  found  in  Viti.  The  ruling 
family  of  Tonga,  whose  name  is  Tiibou,  have  a  tradition,  as  one  of  the 
members  of  it  informed  us,  that  this  name  was  originally  derived 
from  Tumboii,  the  principal  town  on  the  island  of  Lakeniba. 

3.  The  mythological  history  oi  jSdeugei,  the  principal  deity  of  Viti, 
appears  to  refer  to  events  in  the  early  history  of  the  two  races.  The 
word  Ndengei  is  supposed  by  some  to  be  a  corruption  of  the  first  part 
of  the  name  Tatiga-loa  (great  'Vaiiga),  the  chief  divinity  of  Polynesia. 
He  is  represented  as  making  his  appearance  after  the  islands  were 
j)eopled.  He  was  first  seen  on  the  west  coast  of  \'iti-levu,  dressed  in 
the  malo, — a  girdle  worn  after  a  peculiar  fashion.  From  thence  he 
came  to  Mbengga,  and  from  Mbengga  to  llewa.  After  remaining 
there  for  a  time,  he  removed  to  Verata,  formerly  the  principal  town 
on  the  island,  leaving  Rewa  under  the  government  of  a  Tongan 
divinity,  callerl  Wainta.  Now  as  none  of  the  black  tribes,  except 
the  Vitians,  wear  the  7iialo,  which  .seems  to  be  peculiar  to  the  Poly- 
nesians, it  is  natural  to  sn|)pose  that  the  former  (the  Viti)  derived 
this  fa.shion  of  dress  from  the  latter.  Hence  this  mythos  may  be 
explained  as  follows.  After  the  Vitians  had  settled  upon  and  par- 
tially populated  Viti-levu,  another  people  appeared  at  lla,  on  the 
western  coast,  wearing  the  ma/o,  and  having  for  a  divinity  Tanga-ha. 
From  Ila  they  advanced  to  Mbengga,  and  from  Mbengga  to  llewa, 


184 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


L.i 


r 


in  .search  of  a  lietter  land  (for  it  is  expressly  stated  that  the  gtHl  would 
not  (Iwfll  at  MluMiiftfa  befmise  the  ground  was  stony).  Durinjj  their 
rcsidenco  at  Ucwa,  tin*  intercoiir.so  between  them  and  the  Viti,  wiiose 
head-iiiiarters  were  at  Verata,  was  naturally  much  greater  than  before ; 
and  it  resulted  in  the  latter  ado|)tin<;  the  religion  and  garb,  iw  well  as 
many  of  the  customs  of  their  more  civilized  neighlwrs, — a  fact  typi- 
fied in  the  removal  of  Ndengei  to  Verata,  leaving  Uewa  under  the 
ehiirm'  of  the  Tongan  deity  Wainiii.  There  is  no  such  gotl  as  this 
in  tlie  Tongan  pantheon,  and  no  such  word  in  their  vocabulary  ;  but 
in  tlie  dialect  of  .New  Zealand,  trtiin/a  signifies  a  spirit,  and  is  aj)- 
plied  to  all  divinities.  Such  may  have  formerly  been  its  meaning  in 
ToiKjan. 

Tiiat  the  Tonga  people  really  advanced  from  Ra  to  Mbengga  and 
Rewa.  is  indicated  by  .several  facts.  The  western  island  of  Namuka, 
of  wiiich  we  have  before  spoken,  is  situated  within  the  same  reef  as 
Mbengga,  and  is  |)olitically,  as  well  as  by  situation,  in  close  conne.\ion 
with  it.  .Vbout  three  miles  west  of  Rewa  is  an  e.xtensive  and  fertile 
tract  of  land,  enclosed  between  two  arms  of  the  Xy'ai/evu,  or  great 
river,  and  known  as  the  island  or  district  of  Tonga. 

The  adoption  by  the  Vitians  of  the  religion  and  some  of  the  arts 
of  their  Polynesian  coinitrymen,  probably  preceded  the  war  in  which 
tiie  latter  were  vaM(]Mished  and  partially  e.xpellcd  from  the  group. 
Of  course,  the  amalgamation  of  the  victors  and  the  comiuered  people 
would  greatly  contribute  to  the  civilization  of  the  former,  and  to  their 
improvement  as  a  race. 

It  lias  been  intinnited,  however,  that  the  black  settlers  on  the  Feejee 
(iroiip  were  not,  probably,  of  the  pure  Melanesian  or  negro  nicf-,  but 
Papuans, — that  is,  having  some  mi.vture  of  Malay  bliKnl,  as  is  .seen  in 
the  inhabitants  of  the  north  coast  of  New  Guinea,  'i'his  opinion  is 
founded  partly  on  the  fact  that  the  negro  tribes  rarely  have  canoes 
titted  for  a  long  voyage ;  and  partly  on  the  presence,  in  the  \'itian 
language,  of  several  words  of  Malaisian  origin,  which  are  either 
not  found  at  all  in  the  Polynesian,  or,  if  found,  are  in  a  dillbrent 
shape,  as — 


I 


VITI.»>. 

/iiko, 
rata,     . 
rulti, 

kurukuru, 
ttilra,    .     . 


.MAI.AI8I.%N.  I'OI.VXKIIH.X. 

/i(kii, '//",  hiule,   .     .      .  til  yo. 

mill, ii/iki,      ....  I'liit'l". 

truliiii,  hii/iiii,  ....  miisina,  malamn,  riinoii. 

yiij^ur,  gni!;iu^,  {\iu\\.)  JaluttJi,,     .  .  ihiimltT. 

i/anih,  (.Mill.)  r<i/i,  (Uali.)  lalo blood. 


O  C  E  A  .\  1  (•    .M  I  (!  R  A  T  I  O  N  S. 


185 


VITr>N. 

tll/nni,  , 

rti/i, 

Vdlll,       . 
lOSII, 

kut'o.      , 


MAl.tlHIAN. 

til/ill,  (lllljiis) 
fjiili,  (.lav.)  . 
Ixilds,  (.luv.) 

iingiiio,* 


i-<h.vm:sia.\. 

I'l/ft,  lit,  .     .     . 

.     siij!iir-riine 

Jii/.ti/iiii, 

.      Id  Imilr. 

Jilidi.    .     .      . 

.     ri'taliatiiiii. 

/'''/,    .     .     .     . 

.     viiicr. 

viikii,  iijx), 

.     town. 

Tlie  last  two  arc  perhaps  accidental  ooiiicidcnccs,  for  the  Malaisian 
words  are  of  Sanscrit  origin,  and  tiieir  introduction  into  the  Javanese 
is  supposed  to  1)C  comparatively  modern,  tiiough,  on  this  point,  wo 
have  no  certainty. f 

To  the  above  list  may  be  addid  the  afiixed  possessive  pronouns, 
which,  in  the  singular,  at  least,  are  plainly  of  Malaisian  origin. 

It  may  be  thought  that  if  the  Vitian  has  tiius  derived  some  of  its 
words  directly  from  the  .Malaisian,  it  may  owe  to  the  same  source  all 
those  which  we  have  considered  to  be  of  Polynesian  origin.  But  a 
little  reflection  will  show  that  this  supposition  is  altogether  impro- 
bable. The  A'itian  agrees  with  the  Polynesian,  not  only  in  many 
words  that  are  not  found  in  any  proper  Malaisian  dialect  with 
which  we  are  accpiainted,  but  also  iu  many  minute  grammatical 
peculiarities.  We  may  mention,  for  example,  the  use  of  the  nomi- 
native particle  ko  (Comparative  Grammar,  ';  17),  of  the  causative  and 
reflective  forms  (v  54),  of  the  passive  or  transitive  suffixes  ()  riG).  and 
of  the  relative  particle  (j  GO),  none  of  which  are  known  to  exist  in 
any  language  of  the  Indian  Archipelago.  The  argument,  moreover, 
from  the  composition  of  the  language,  is  otlercd  merely  to  prove  that 
the  Vitians  are  of  mixed  descent,  while  the  opinion  expressed  as  to 
the  probable  mode  in  which  this  mingling  of  races  has  been  efTeeted, 
rests  upon  the  peculiar  evidence  derived  from  the  native  traditions 
and  customs,  and  the  relative  meaning  or  similarity  in  the  names  of 
places  and  tribes. 

The  supposition  of  the  existence  of  people  of  distinct  races,  lijie  the 
Viti  and  Tonga,  in  the  same  group,  is  countenanced  by  facts  observed 
at  a  short  distance  frrtm  the  Feejee  Islands.  We  have  already  spoken 
of  the  island  of  Tiinna  in  the  New  Hebrides,  which  has,  about  five 
miles  from   its  coast,  two  islets  inhabited   by  Polynesians,  whose 


*  The  words  horc  given  in  the  various  Ktalaisinn  ilinlools  are  taken  iVoni  the  Conipa- 
mtive  Vix-nbuhiry  in  L'rawrord's  Indian  Archi|M'la};o,  vol.  ii. 

t  If  the  Vilian  word  fosn  \<c  really  from  the  .lavaneso  /»«<(,  it  will  then  Ix;  derived  from 
the  Sanscrit  Utas/ui,  which  is  also  the  original  of  the  Latin  ro.r,  and  the  tlnglisli  voice. 

47 


186 


KTII  NOORA  J'll  Y. 


InnjTunj^o  is  spoken  by  the  dusky  natives  of  Tannn,  alon}?  with  their 
own.  Sliould  tlio  latter  con(|iier  the  islets  in  (|uestion,  and  compel 
the  iniiabitants  to  coalesee  w  itli  them,  tlie  result  would  probably  lie 
a  progeny  of  mixed  race  and  language,  like  the  Feejeoans.  Again. 
Qniros,  who  discovered  the  island  of  Tanniako,  north  of  the  New 
Hebrides,  found  it  "  inhabited  by  |)eople  of  dilVerent  kinds.  Some 
were  of  a  light  copper  color,  with  long  hair,  some  were  mulattoes, 
and  some  black,  with  short,  frizzled  hair."*  It  is  evident,  more- 
over, that  if  on  any  group  we  might  expect  to  find  a  peo|)le  of  mixed 
lineage,  it  would  bo  on  that  which  lies  midway  between  the  two  races 
of  pure  blood. 

T  I  K  O  I'  I  A. 

A  similarity  of  names,  together  with  some  dialectical  peculiarities, 
has  led  to  what  may  1x3  considered  at  least  a  plausible  conjecture  with 
regard  to  the  origin  of  the  [jopulation  of  this  islet,  removed  so  far 
beyond  the  usual  limits  of  the  Polynesian  race.  An  island  in  the 
windward  chain  of  the  Feejee  Group  is  called  Tikombia,  a  name 
which,  according  to  the  usual  permutation  of  letters,  is  identical  with 
Tikopia.  In  the  "  Philology  of  the  Voyage  of  the  Astrolabe,"  vol. 
ii.  p.  101,  we  have  a  vocabulary  of  two  hundred  and  fitly  words  of 
the  language  spoken  by  this  people.  From  this,  it  appears  that  their 
dialect  approaches  nearer  to  the  Tongan  than  to  any  other,  but  yet 
differs  from  it  in  several  points  of  some  importance.  The  similarity 
appears  very  clearly  in  the  numerals,  as — 


TIKOI'IAN.  TliNO.\N. 

tiisit^ ttiha^ 

siva, Iiini, 

Ifttii, tniit, 

un  genu,      .     .     .     wi  i/riiii, 

torn  i/eitii,    .     .     .  tola  ijrnu. 


SAMO.tN,  KTr. 

.     Iiisi,  Itihi,      .     .     .     onr. 

iiii, iiiiK'. 

.     n/dii, mv  luiiulrcil. 

.     Iwt  1(114,   ....     two  huiulrcd. 
.     UJii  yd/iiu,    .     .     .     tliRH!  Imnilrcd, 


The  Tikopian  difTers  from  the  Tongan  in  using  the  s  where  the 
latter  has  li,  as  in  the  words  for  viic  and  nine  given  alwve,  and  in 
employing  the  definite  article  le,  which  has  become  obsolete  in  the 
Tongan. 

But  it  is  remarkable  that  in  this  brief  vocabulary  .several  words 

*  Burni.'j's  History  ofVoynges,  vul.  ii.  p.  aoo. 


: 


\ 


O  C  E  A  N  I  C    MI  (i  II  A  T  I  U  .V  S. 


1S7 


are  louiul  which  are  not  Polyiiosiiiii,  and  which  seem  to  be  of 
Vitian  origin,  an  unri,  to  give  (Vit.  xo/i);  yttstiii,  arrow  (Vil.  yasmi,  a 
reed,  hence,  an  arrow);  mtind,  to  speak  (Vit.  tlie  same);  tinniia, 
mother  (Vit.  tiiiana,  liis  mother);  J'liruii,  a  strani^er  (\  it.  viirti,  a 
visitor — viilayi,  a  stranger). 

These  pccuharities  may  bo  accounted  for,  by  suppositig  that  tlie 
ancestors  of  the  Tikopians  ])clonged  to  the  Polynesian  people  who 
formerly  inhabited  a  part  of  tiie  Feejee  (ironp.  They  may  have  been 
established  in  the  above-mentioned  island  of  Tikombia.  On  tlieir 
conqnest  and  expulsion  from  that  group,  instead  of  accompanying  the 
rest  of  the  fugitives  to  the  Friendly  Islands,  they  may  have  been 
separated  from  them  by  some  accident,  and  carried  by  the  southeast 
trades  to  the  island  which  they  now  occupy.  Of  course,  their 
dialect,  which  was  originally  the  same  as  tlie  Tongan,  would,  in 
time,  become  different  from  it,  chictly  by  not  underginng  the  euphonic 
alterations  to  which  the  latter  has  been  subjected. 

It  should  be  observed  that  tonga,  in  Tikopia,  signities  enst,  which 
may  be  accounted  for  from  the  fact  tiuit  the  natives  are  aware  of  the 
existence  of  the  Tonga  Islands,  and  their  position  relative  to  their 
own  country.  They  informed  Dillon*  that,  in  the  days  of  their 
ancestors,  their  island  was  invaded  by  a  fleet  of  live  largo  canoes 
from  Tongatabu,  the  crews  of  wliich  committed  great  ravages. 


T  A  R  A  W  A. 

Our  inquiries  into  the  migrations  of  the  Microuesian  tribes  have 
been  confined  to  the  groups  of  Tarawa  and  Banabe,  the  latter  being 
noticeil  only  so  far  as  it  is  connected  with  the  former.  The  account 
whicli  Kirby  (the  British  seaman  of  whom  some  account  is  given  on 
p.  1)0)  heard  from  the  people  of  Apamama  concerning  the  first  set- 
tlement of  the  Kingsinill  Islands  is  .so  plain  and  une.xaggerated  in  its 
details,  that  it  has  the  air  of  an  hi.storical  narrative.  They  assert  that 
tho  lirst  colonists  arrived,  in  two  canoes,  from  Jhi/iiji,  an  island  lying 
far  to  the  south  westward,  whence  they  were  obliged  to  betake  them- 
selves to  sea,  as  the  only  means  of  escaping  death  fruin  their  con- 
querors in  a  civil  war.  They  drifteil  u|)on  tlie.se  islands,  and  had 
just  commenced  their  settlement,  when  two  other  canoes  arriveil  from 
a  land  to  the  southeast,  called  Amui.     The  new-comers  were  lighter 


•i\ 


*  Voyage  fur  llio  Discnvory  of  La  I't-roiisi',  vol.  ii.  p.  IVi. 


18S 


ETIINO(iH.\  I'll  Y. 


in  color  and  hnncisonipr  thnn  tlioir  prodocpssors,  and  spoke  a  different 
lanuua;^''.  For  soiiu'  tinjo  the  two  parties  lived  tojiether  in  harmony; 
but  alter  two  or  tliree  generations  the  warriors  of  tlic  Hanep  party, 
indiic'iu'ed  In  tlie  beauty  of  the  Anioi  females,  rose  \ipon  and  killed 
the  iiiiii.  and  took  the  womkmi  for  wives.  From  this  source  ull  tlio 
inliai)itaiits  of  the  Kin^smill  (iroup  are  descended. 

Tlie  tradition  states  further  that  tlie  natives  of  Amoi  broujrbt  with 
them  the  breadfruit,  and  those  of  IJaiiep  the  taro  ;  l>ut  the  cocoa-nut 
and  pandanus  were  found  upon  the  islands. 

If  we  are  to  consider  this  account  as  an  historical  fact,  every  cir- 
cumstance points  to  the  iXavitjator  Islands,  (!Saini>a,)  as  the  source  of 
the  Anwi  people.  The  Tarawan  lanjjua^c  has  no  .«,  nor  any  substi- 
tute for  that  letter;  and  the  chanuje  from  Anion  io  Amoi  (or  rather, 
perhaps,  Amoe)  is  not  so  jrreat  as  proper  names  fre(iuently  undergo 
in  the  pronunciation  of  fnreisjners.  linnip  is  probably  Mie  same  as 
BniKi/iv :  for  the  direction  which  Kirby  assiifncd  to  it  wa.s  found  to  be 
a  mistake.  At  Makin  the  natives  knew  of  the  same  island,  and  de- 
scribed it  as  lying  to  the  northwest. 

The  evidence  of  language  confirms  this  tradition,  so  far  as  the 
means  of  c()m|)arison  e.xist.  For  the  Samoan  these  arc  ample,  and 
the  resemblance  of  many  of  its  words  to  the  corres|)onding  terms  in 
the  Tarawan  dialect  is  evident  oi;  the  most  cursory  inspection.  The 
following  are  a  few  instances.  It  must  be  recollected  that  the  Ta- 
rawan has  neither  /",  /,  s,  nor  r.  The  first  it  sometimes  omits,  and 
sometimes  sii[)plies  by  />  ,•  the  /  is  changed  to  ;•  or  // ;  the  ,v  is  dropped 
entirely,  and  the  /•  is  changed  to  ;/•.  The  concluding  vowel  was  fre- 
quently omitted  by  the  interpreters,  though  it  probably  is  not  by  the 
natives.  W  here  the  k  has  been  dropped  by  the  Samoan  from  a  word 
in  which  it  originally  existed,  the  Tarawan  sometimes  inserts,  and 
sometimes  omits  it. 


■i.\MO.kX. 

TAH.WVAN. 

iiino. 

(into. 

lornrryon  the  back. 

l"i(,  . 

Uiii, 

til  tnke. 

}>ii.    . 

l»i. 

the  cuiich-shcli. 

I'liii, 

liiiii. 

to  cry. 

pill, 

pou. 

|H>St. 

'ifi.    . 

i.(. 

liro. 

fii/im; 

tiiiir, 

womnn. 

lyifii, 

t)A  (l.  0.   tJIDl)  , 

fnthom. 

Jiinuii, 

ln'niiii,    . 

country. 

hil"j!tlii,    . 

buruburu, 

fur. 

O  i:  K  A  N  I  C    M  I  G  II  A  'I'  IONS. 


1S9 


■AMOAN, 

TARAU'AN. 

iyii,  . 

llill, 

till  11)11, 

tiirinii,  tiiniiin, 

miiliiln. 

miiriiiii. 

!■</<,    . 

iiiii, 

11 H,  . 

I'ili, 

Ill  in. 

"■III, 

tnttttt^ 

III  Ot, 

iiU;   . 

III. 

mil' III  Hi  (lor 

niiikiiltli ), 

itiiiiiii,  . 

'/';«(«/ (Tor /ii/Hoi/), 

kiiiiini,    , 

'«  (I'lir /./(■), 

/.((■. 

Tf  (lor  iki). 

. 

ikc. 

l'U|(. 

c'nr, 

soiK 

llMlt. 

lornrry  in  iIh'  iirniri. 

tU . 

to  liri'iik,  l>ri>ki'ii. 

liv.'r. 

eM. 

ml. 

niiit. 

malli't. 

This  list  nii(,'lit  be  lenj^tlirnod  to  two  or  tlirce  limnlrcd  words,  hut 
the  proccciiiiii  will  be  siidicient  to  show  the  chanties  which  ihc  Su- 
nionii  words  uiulergo  when  adopted  into  the  Taruwan. 

For  the  dialect  of  Hanalw,  the  other  supposed  constituent  of  tiiis 
tongue,  our  means  of  comparison  are  much  more  limited.  About  a 
hundreil  words,  obtained  from  O'Coiuiell  and  Mr.  Punciiard  (see  p. 
'^0),  both  of  whom  had  a  very  imperfect  knowled^^e  of  the  langua<^e, 
are  all  that  we  possess  wliich  can  be  relied  on.  These  wortls  are, 
no  doubt,  somewhat  altered  in  thciir  pronunciation  from  the  proper 
sound.  Tliis  is  especially  the  case  where  a  d  or  /  occur,  which  are 
frecpiently  chanifed  l)y  them  to  i/J  or  c/i  (/(•).  This  was  an  alteration 
very  often  made  by  Grey  and  Kirby,  at  the  Kin<,fsmill  Islands,  but 
the  knowledire  ac(piired  durinsf  our  int"rcourse  with  the  natives 
enabled  us  to  tletecl  it. 

It  hajipens  tiiat  mo.st  of  the  words  which  we  havi^  in  the  laniruai^o 
of  Banabe,  are  such  as,  in  the  'i'arawan,  have  been  derived  from  its 
Samoan  i)arent.  Tlu-re  are,  however,  a  few  e.vceptions.  In  the  Ta- 
rawan,  vn'i  sij^nilies  /hint  or  J'l/ri',  and  is  used  for  c/iirf]  in  which  case 
it  is  commonly  connected  with  djiii  (pronounced  by  Ivirby  ajj),  mean- 
ing land,  island,  town, — as,  mo-n  le  a/xi,  "chief  or  front  of  the  land." 
Both  the  inler|)reters  pronounced  this  nii'i/if^'tip  (or  mrmtshnp).  In 
lianabeun  the  word  for  high  cliief,  according  to  O'Connell,  is  infuiil- 
jab,  which  is  probably  the  same,  in  com[)osition  as  in  meaning,  with 
the  Tarawan  term.  Land,  or  country,  in  Banai)ean,  is  iljah ;  in 
Tarawan  it  is  te  npa,  pronounced  by  Ivirby  /<v//>.  I'lie  pronoun  /  in 
Tarawan  is  yai,  but  in  drey's  pronunciation  always  iiai :  in  the 
dialect  of  Banabe  it  is  also  iiai,  according  to  Mr.  I'uncharil.  An  old 
cocoa-nut  is  called  liy  the  natives  of  Taputeouea,  penu  :  Kirby  pro- 

48 


i 


190 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


iiouiuTil  it  pni,  and  Mr.  Puiiclinrd  tho  same  for  the  Dnnnltoan.  To 
think  is  in  Taruwaii  )iiiiiii,  in  Daimboaii,  nim.  In  the  latter  lanjjuage, 
acoonliiiR  to  O'Coimell,  edinmit  Hif^iiilies  i\  j)ric8t,  but  is  rre*|uently 
useil  lor  a  rliief  of  llie  lowe;  order.  In  Makin,  where  there  are  no 
priests,  the  tinnuit  are  tlie  (gentry  or  petty  cliiefs. 

'I'hese  examples  will  probably  be  siillicient  to  show  that  the  evi- 
dence of  language  favors  the  opinion  of  the  twofold  origin  of  iiiin 
people.  How  far  this  evidtMice  is  supported  by  thai  derived  from 
their  customs  and  character,  will  sutticiently  appear  from  the  descrip- 
tion given  of  them  elsewhere. 

The  fact  that  a  chance  commuincation  between  tho  Kingsmill 
Group  and  Ascension  Island  has  taken  place  very  lately,  though  in 
the  ojiposite  direction  to  that  here  supposed,  was  learned  from  M. 
Maigret,  French  missionary  at  the  Sandwich  Islands,  to  whom  we 
are  inilebted  for  muih  valuable  information.  During  his  stay  at 
Banabe.  in  1837,  he  saw  a  man  who  had  been  drifted  thither  in  a 
canoe  from  an  island  called  Mnruki,  and  who  informed  M.  Maigret, 
among  other  things,  that  his  people  were  accustomed  to  make  a  sweet 
drink  called  taknniir,  unlike  any  thing  to  be  found  at  Ascension. 
Mtinihi  is  one  of  the  Tarawan  group,  and  their  kdiace  (with  the 
article,  te  kiirave,)  is  a  beverage  made  of  the  sweet  juice  drawn  from 
the  spalhe  of  the  cocoa-nut  tree. 

But  an  examination  of  tho  Tarawan  vocabulary  has  led  to  other 
conclusions  not  less  unexpected  than  curious.  A  great  number  of 
words  in  this  dialect  are  found  to  have  an  evident  adinity  to  the  cor- 
responding terms  in  the  \'ilian, — tho  dilference  being  oidy  such  as 
would  be  produced  by  the  dillerent  pronunciation  of  the  two  lan- 
guages. Thus  the  t'  of  the  Vitian  is  changed  in  the  Tarawan  to  r ; 
the  c  to  H-  (or  it  is  omitted) ;  the  /  to  ;•  or  // ;  and  tho  compound  let- 
ters 7>ib,  11(1,  nilr,  are  reduced  to  the  simple  elements  b  ox p,  d  or  /,  and 
/•,  or  el.se  omitted  entirely,  thus — 


ITIAN. 

TAB.\«AN. 

8.\M<>.tX. 

Iii'i, 

tari. 

tri,      . 

lirotlior. 

lU'd, 

lira,   . 

iiirnl. 

imiiit'. 

t'tiimi, 

riiinii. 

lllllll, 

oiilrij;);i'r. 

Uflt'il, 

Orii,    . 

iiiaiii, 

low.|i(k'. 

rial. 

ifii,    . 

.        Jfi,    . 

Iiiiw  iiiiiiiy 

villi. 

viriini, 

iininniiKi,  . 

raiiiUiw. 

Off  I,   . 

It  unit, 

^itn'ini, 

tn  .swim. 

liiko. 

niiko. 

iilii,  sail,     . 

to  i^ii.ciiriie 

Ink  a. 

nuk,  . 

lllllll. 

surf. 

O  C  K  A  N  I  C    M  I  U  II  A  T  U)  N  a 


101 


vrriAN. 

TAKAW  tM. 

V'lli, 

iiinki, 

fttitiiu. 

to  riY-koii. 

klHI, 

kiiiiki, 

Jvinu, 

let  |iiiicli. 

kllHU, 

kiiiiii, 

'ni,    . 

Id  i-nl. 

k'li,  . 

kiiiii, 

—     . 

nntivc. 

/«.     . 

ri>,      . 

miilu. 

(|iiii't. 

tciikti, 

t/V/^(l, 

ii'ii,  . 

riM)t, 

k(iri. 

kttri\ 

mill. 

lo  i4crn|>i'. 

liikii. 

htkii. 

tW/ll, 

lu  Kliiy,  n-Hide, 

tiiiiu'm, 

kiui-niitiuii. 

iiiianiifi,     . 

yodltTiluy. 

llJOy     ICI      (il»l, 

r.i,      . 

oik;  . 

raiiiiiii'. 

iiiiiiiiari,  lliiii. 

miiiiidr. 

viiinii, 

wi'iik,  lifldf. 

timu. 

II  mu, 

nil,    . 

Iliy. 

Mil,     . 

till,    , 

Ii;      . 

Ciitiin"  purticlo 

ni,    . 

III,     . 

n, 

ciC. 

nilmi. 

Imi,    . 

lllfll. 

viTy. 

m/io, 

.          bo,      .          . 

i/l)il,/rtlli,  . 

to  liiicl,  mcc't. 

iiiUiiji, 

llOl),      . 

jx;    . 

lli^lll. 

ItlllllKI, 

tllpll. 

lusi,  . 

|l|llC'l'. 

mliiilii. 

hiiliirii. 

jKiii/i, 

iliirk. 

?nliii. 

till,     . 

JH-Iir/,), 

\\\Uv. 

ndiiiiK/iii, . 

tiii/iii, 

miiiii, 

|irrsinlly. 

mliiiiii, 

tOIIIII, 

III  ill, 

to  Niick. 

mloku. 

liikii,  . 

Jinjii, 

top. 

luiuku. 

Ilk II,  , 

tun,  . 

liiick. 

nilra. 

nirii. 

Iitin,  . 

blnO.I. 

aiDii/rr, 

iiiirii. 

j)iil>iilii. 

to  shine. 

Tills  list  could  be  greatly  cxtoiided,  hut  the  fDro^oiiicf  will  be 
suflicii'iit  to  show  that  the  Vitisui  aiul  I'arawau  have  derivcil  uiany 
of  their  words  from  u  common  source,  iitid  that  this  source  is  not  the 
Polynesian.  \Vc  have  no  means  of  determining  if  these  words  are 
found  in  the  lanj^uayc  of  Banabe,  but  it  certaiidy  is  not  improbable. 
Wc  have  seen,  in  the  description  \r\\c\\  of  the  natives  of  tliat  island, 
that  they  are  of  two  classes,  dilferin}^  so  much  in  color  and  features 
as  to  make  a  dilTerence  of  origin  hi<|;hly  probable.  Tiic  one,  which 
includes  all  the  chiefs  and  free  natives,  is  evidently  of  the  yellow 
Microiu'sian  race  ;  the  other  is  ascribed,  both  liy  Admiral  Liitke  and 
O'Connell,  to  the  Papuan  or  Melanesian.  At  present  thej-  speak  one 
languajfe,  which  is,  perhaps,  fornuxl  by  a  fusion  of  their  original 
idioms.  In  this  case,  a  part  of  the  Hanabean  tonirue  would  have  a 
cognsite  origin  with  the  greater  part  of  the  Vitiiin.  The  words  of 
Melunesiaa  origin,  in  the  former  tongue,  would  be  brought  by  the 


IM 


KT  II  MHi  K.\  I'll  V. 


emiKiTintH  to  tlio  Kiiijjsmill  riroiip,  iiiid  tlioro,  (N'rlmpH,  unil('r(»o  somo 
fartluT  iilttTiitioii  liy  a  inixtiirr  willi  the  Siummii. 

If  will  Ik*  ri'iiu'iiil)i'ro(l  lliiit  O'Coiiiu'll,  in  N|)onkin(f  of  llio  voluntary 
omi^'ratioim  which  take  place  IVciii  Haiialx'  (ante,  |).  Nft),  ohsorvps 
that  those  wiio  coni|>oso  them  are  nioMlly  ol  the  lower  elaMses,  (i.  e.  iho 
Si(juitx,  of  I'npiian  origin.)  Kroni  tiie  suinrior  inimbom  of  the  latter, 
it  would  prohahly  lio  the  same  with  a  I'liiiitive  war-party.  In  this 
way  we  may  account  for  the  hrowmsh  complexion,  midway  between 
tho  yellow  of  the  Polynesian,  and  the  dusky  hue  of  the  Fecjeean, 
which  distinguishes  the  natives  of  most  of  the  Kini^smill  Islands.  It 
is  evident,  moreover,  that  in  such  an  emigration,  the  strict  suhordina- 
tion  between  the  higher  castes  of  chiefs  and  gentry,  and  their  nume- 
rous serfs,  wonlil  not  Ix;  easily  maintain»"tl.  'I'he  former  would  bo 
com|)elled,  eith(>r  to  unite  and  become  confounded  with  the  latter,  a 
measure  abhorrent  to  all  their  prejudiceH,— or  to  separate  from  them 
entirely.  The  latter  course  is  certainly  that  which  they  would  l»c 
likely  to  pursue,  if  it  were  possible;  tind  we  may  thus  account  for 
one  cluster  of  the  Kini^smill  islands  (that  of  Makin)  bein^  inhabited 
by  people  t>f  a  li^fhter  hut;  than  the  rest,  with  many  cnsloms  and 
traits  of  character  distinu'uishiutr  them  from  the  southern  natives,  and 
assiinilatinjf  them  to  the  proper  Micronesian  race. 

It  will  be  observed  that  some  of  the  words  <riven  above,  as  common 
to  the  \'itian  and  Tarawau,  are  of  Malaisian  orij^in,  (thou;,'h  distinct 
from  the  Polynesian,) — as,  tari.  younyer  brother ;  iv(t,  name  ;  ninii, 
thy,  \.c.  This  is  readily  accounted  for  from  the  mixed  nature  o|'  (ho 
P;ipuan  laiij^ua^c,  as  elscwheri-  di'scribed  (p.  1*'!.)  In  this  way,  also, 
are  explained  some  i,'rainniatical  peculiarities,  such  as  the  allixeil 
pcssessive  pronouns  common  to  both,  and  evidently  from  the  same 
source ;  as, 


VITIAN. 

>tiillil, 
IdtHlhl)!!!, 

tdtnaiHii, 
tdiiiiimi. 


T»H\»  A\. 

hllllil, 

ttiiiian, 
III  Ilium  II, 
tiiiiiiiiiii,  . 


liillirr. 
my  liillnr. 
Iliy  liilliiT. 
Iiis  liillior. 


Of  the  time  which  has  rlap.spd  siiu'c  the  islands  were  peopled,  we 
have  no  means  of  forming  a  [uisitivc  judgment.  But  from  the  dis- 
tinctness with  which  the  native  account  of  this  event  is  detaileil,  with 
tlie  paucity  of  other  traditions,  and  from  viirious  concurring  circum- 
stances, ..  seems  probable  that  the  arrival  of  the  iirst  colonists  took 


()(•  K  A  N  II'    Ml  ti  It  A  T  I  O  N  H. 


io:» 


pliiro  at  a  coiiipiirativfly  iiuxlorii  ihtumI,  not  rnon-.  prrhnps,  than  fivi- 
or  NIX  leiilnrics  n^o.  'I'lu'  natives  say  llial,  a  ti-w  generations  back, 
the  iiuinher  of  peoph)  was  nmeli  U'sm  than  at  prexent,  wars  wero  Iuhh 
Ireipieiit,  and  the  eonimnnieation  l)et\v»;eii  the  iHhinils  whh  (roe  ami 
Nufe  Tilt'  ^raiKh'atlier  of  the  present  kiii^  of  Apainaina,  more  than 
II  hniiilreil  yearn  a^^o,  vJNited  uvery  island  ol'tlie  ^roiip,  tor  the  purpose 
olHeeinj;  wliat  lie  considered  the  world.  At  present,  Iroin  the  hostility 
which  prevails  hetweeii  tlio  dillerent  dusters,  such  nn  uiidertakin{|{ 
would  \h'  iiiipossihle.  We  huvu  elsewhere  (p  \'H))  ntutud  our  reasonH 
for  belioviiiK  that  the  name  Saniim,  for  the  Navit^utor  CJroup,  from 
which  amui  is  prohahly  derived,  is  of  late  adoption. 

One  word  of  the  'rarnwan  lanj^uatje,  c///,  may  be  noticed  as  an 
evidence  of  the  communication  which  exists  amoii'.^  the  tribes  of  the 
Pacific.  The  Feejee  Clroup,  Kotnina,  \  aitupii,  and  the  Kinj^smill 
Group,  are  situated  nearly  in  a  line  from  north  to  south,  with  inter- 
vals of  aitout  five  dej^rees  between  them.  'I'liey  are  inhabited  liv 
ditl'erent  races,  having  distinct  laii^;uaL'es  and  customs.  At  N'aitiipu. 
the  nativ(>s  called  some  liaiianas  which  we  had  on  board  (a  fruit  that 
docs  not  j,'row  on  their  island )y////  n  Hiituma,  or  bananas  of  llotuma, 
showinj,'  that  they  had  intercourse  with  the  latter  island,  'riiey  also 
called  an  iron  a.ve  toki  fill,  i.  e.  I'eejee  axe,  and  we  may  presume  that 
they  first  acipiired  a  knowledge  of  iron  at  Uotuma,  to  whidi  island  it 
had  been  brought  from  Viti.  From  Vaitupu  the  metal  was  probably 
carried,  in  like  manner,  to  the  Kinijsinill  Islands,  where  the  word  fih 
became  biti,  and  was  used  no  longer  as  an  epithet,  but  as  a  comnKui 
noun.* 

SYNOPSIS   OI'    MIXICI)    LANOfACfES. 

Tlie  table  and  formulte  which  follow  are  to  be  considered  merely 
as  expressing,  in  a  succinct  form,  the  conclusions  with  respect  to  the 
composition  of  some  of  the  Oceanic  languages  which  have  been  stated 
in  the  course  of  this  essav  as  the  result  of  our  investigations. 


*  S«"<'  what  IS  said  (pagfs  1U0,  13U,)  coiiccrniiiy  Iho  ehuiiji"'  iii  meaning  which  proper 
niinnos  undergo  at  lh«;  ikiohi/  ranuvt. 

49 


104 


KT  II  N  Oli  K  A  V  II  Y. 


I 


/' 


:i'  I'olviiesinn  liniiii-li, 


A.   Mnlnv  moo. 


II.  Molanosinn  rnoo.         ('.  Micronosian  race. 


_/^ 


n    Mnltiijiiaii  hranoli. 

I 

k / 


Pii|>im  (It+u  ) 


A- 


Viti(H+"+ii  ) 


ltniml).>(('+U  +  ii  ) 


./ 


_/ 


'rnrawa  (C-f  H+a'+a") 

In  this  table  the  Micronesian  race  is  regarded  as  j)erfectly  distinct 
from  the  otliers,  wliich  is  not  altogether  correct;  as  it  is  no  where  to 
he  found  (as  far  as  our  information  e.vtends)  in  a  pure  state,  hut 
always  with  a  greater  or  less  mixture  of  the  .Malay.  Moreover,  it 
must  he  l)orne  in  mind,  that  tiie  view  here  given  of  the  composition 
of  the  Banabean  tongue  rests,  in  part,  on  a  mere  a.ssumption,  which, 
though  probable,  is  not  to  be  regartled  as  proved. 

()  I!  I  (i  I  .\   <»  K    i  II  i:   r  (( I,  V  N  i:  s  i  .v  n  s. 

That  the  I'olynesians  belong  to  the  saiTie  race  as  that  which  peo- 
ples tlie  Ivist  Indian  Islamis  is,  at  present,  universally  adinitled.  If 
any  doubt  had  remained  on  this  jMunt,  the  labors  of  Win.  \'on  Hum- 
boldt and  Professor  Huschinan.  would  have  been  siilhcient  to  set  it  at 
rest.  Having  traced  all  the  principal  triiics  of  Polynesia  back  to  the 
8amoan  and  'Tongaii  (iroups.  it  lu^\t  becomes  a  cpiestion  of  interest, 
how  far  the  intormation  which  we  now  po.sscss  will  enable  us  to 
verify  the  sup;)osed  einit;ration  of  the  first  settlers  in  these  groups 
Irom  some  point  in  the  Malaisiaii  .Vrcliiprlago  I'rom  the  almost 
total  Ignorance  in  which  we  yet  remain  of  the  dialects  spoken  in  the 
eastern  part  of  this  archipelago,  our  means  of  forming  a  judgment  are 


OC  K  A  N  1  (■    Ml  (I  K  A   r  I  O  \  S 


1«5 


vory  limited.     Ntnortlu'lcss  \\v   may  vciitiirf  to  olVcr  a   conj urc, 

liascd  iipim  sticli  nil  amount  of  (•viiii'iicc  as  si-cms  to  briny;  it  at  least 
williiii  the  l)oiiiuis  ol  proliahility. 

I.  The  natives  of  'i'onjfii  and  Samoa,  as  has  been  betoro  slated, 
refer  the  oriij[in  of  their  race  to  a  lar^e  island,  situated  to  the  north- 
west, ealled  l)y  the  former  lii.lotii,  by  the  latter  I'lilnlti  and  Vurnlii 
As  the  /  and  ;•  are  used  indilVerently  in  tlieso  dialects,  it  would  be 
doubtful  which  was  the  proper  suelliny; ;  hut  the  Feejeeans.  who  dis- 
tin^uisli  i)etwei'u  these  two  elements,  have  borrowed  this  and  many 
other  traditions  from  iheir  eastism  neighbors,  and  call  the  island  in 
ipiestion  Mhitrntu.  Hence  we  may  conclude  that  liitroln  or  Viirntu 
is  the  correct  form.  Now  the  easternmost  island  inhabited  by  the 
yellow  Malaisian  race,  in  the  Kast  Indian  Archipelajro,  is  that  called 
on  our  maps  Ihniro  m  Hooro.  It  lies  west  ofCeram,  which  is  occu- 
pied in  the  interior  by  Papuans,  and  on  the  coast  by  Malays.  .Apart, 
therefore,  from  any  resemblance  of  name,  if  wc  derive  the  Polynesians 
from  that  onc^  of  the  Malaisian  Islai.ds  which  lies  nearest  to  them,  \\v 
should  refer  them  to  the  above-mentioned  lioi/ro. 

"2.  M.  de  llienzi  informs  us  (Oceanit%  vol.  iii.  p.  ;184,)  that  he  met. 
in  the  Hast  Indies,  a  iJoujrhis  captain,  w  iio  had  visiliid  the  Solomon 
Islands.  The  IJugis  are  a  tribe  of  ("elebcs,  of  the  .sanu^  race  and  the 
same  de^rec  of  civilization  with  the  natives  ()f  Houro.  The  Solomon 
[slands  are  at  nearly  two-thirds  of  the  distance  from  CAjlebes  and 
Bouro  to  Samoa. 

;j.  We  have  had  occasion  before  to  cite  the  description  i^iven  by 
Quiros,  of  Taumaco,  whose  inhabitants  are  "ol'dillerent  kinds,  yellow, 
black,  and  mulattoes."  One  item  of  information  which  he  has  re- 
cordeil  respcclinir  the  island  is  very  important.  He  sa\s  tin-  prisoner 
wh<M!i  lie  took  from  thence  iidbrined  him  tiiat  there  w.is  oi'  Taumaco 
a  mai\  "  who  had  brouglit  from  a  larij;e  co\intry  nanu'd  Pouro,  some 
arrows  pointed  w  ilh  a  metal  as  while  as  silvi-r."'*  This  man  «as  a 
native  of  Taumaco  and  a  yreat  pilot.  I'ouro  was  described  as  a  lar^c 
country,  very  popidous, — the  inhabitants  of  a  dark  color,  and  warlike 
Taumaco,  according'  to  the  position  assigned  to  it  by  Qmids,  as  well 
as  the  information  obtained  by  Dillon,  lii's  five  or  six  dcLjrecs  east  ol 
the  Solomon  Isles,  and  of  course,  st)  much  nearer  to  Samoa,  ll  seems 
most  likely,  that  the  native  j)ilot  here  mentioned  had  not  been  himsell 
to  the  Mast  Indies,  but  that  he  had  visited  the  Solomon  Isles,  and 
there  obtained  the  arrows  tipped  with  metal  which  had  been  l)rouylit 

*  liiiriu'v'.s  lli.sliiiy  ol' Voyiigi'S,  vol.  ii.  |).  IMS. 


196 


ET  IINOG  RA  1'  II  V. 


by  traders  from  Bouro.  These  places  miffht  easily  have  become  con- 
founded in  the  mind  of  the  captive,  who  was  not  himself  a  native  of 
Taumaco,  but  a  slave  brought  thither  from  another  island.  On  this 
supposition,  the  statement  that  the  natives  of  Pouro  (or  rather  of  the 
place  visited  by  the  Taumaco  pilot)  were  of  a  dark  color,  would  apply 
to  the  Solomon  Islands.  However  this  may  be,  the  arrows  must  have 
been  obtained  in  some  way  from  the  East  Indies,  and  they  were 
ascribed  by  the  natives  to  an  island  bearing  a  name  very  similar  to 
one  which  exists  there. 

As  to  the  meaning  of  the  terminal  syllable  tu,  in  the  Polynesian 
Purotii  (if,  adopting  this  hypothesis,  we  consider  it  an  affix,)  we  are, 
of  course,  left  to  conjecture.  Judging  from  analogy,  as  in  the  cases 
of  Tonga-tabu,  Nina-tabu,  it  may  iiave  the  force  of  "  sacred"  or 
"divine;"'  for  it  must  be  recollected  that  the  natives  of  Samoa  and 
Tonga  look  upon  this  island  not  only  as  the  country  of  their  progeni- 
tors, but  also  as  the  residence  of  their  gods.  The  syllable  tu  is  per- 
haps that  which  is  found  in  the  Samoan  aitu,  spirit,  and  the  otiia, 
atiia,  etna,  which,  in  the  different  Polynesian  dialects,  signify  divinity. 
Tuan  is  the  word  for  "  lortl'"  in  Malay,  and  himtu  for  "  spirit"  in 
Malay,  Javanese,  and  Bugis. 


1 


to 


to 


'.*■ 

»> 


"'(*• 


Tiihhiih  1 

IllkWII 

fc'fWW 

9^m^ 

KiliMiah.t 

Hhf 

&mmm 

r«itiiiiii  s.'iii.h 

Mlt-w 

(__  _-o 

SiihnpliM 

H.-.I 

MHB 

W;h|I.'1||hi 

flhtr 

m^mam 

T'liiiiiik 

t*iirf/* 

«qnM» 

h;tlii)iii\tt 

fin '-14 

i«2nf.'?,-* 

l.iknit 

Nn-wH 

49EJIUtir!3 

1  iiMi.niii 

ii>.n.,ti,t 

-—--J 

K'ni.v()c.i;.\i'iii('.\i.  XAi- 
jiJovyjiia-/>Ji:iJ»iij-riJOj'-/>j£VJiJiiia 


IIT  H  IIAI.r. 


» 


» 


«> 


NORTHWESTERN  AMERICA. 


In  the  long  and  narrow  section  of  this  continent  included  between 
the  Rocky  Mountains  and  the  Pacific,  and  extending  from  the  country 
of  the  Esquimaux  on  the  north  to  the  Californian  peninsula  on  the 
south,  there  are  found,  perhaps,  a  greater  number  of  tribes  speaking 
distinct  languages  than  in  any  other  territory  of  the  same  size  in  the 
world.  Not  only  do  these  tribes  differ  in  their  idioms,  but  also  in 
personal  appearance,  character,  and  usages.  For  convenience  of 
description,  however,  they  may  be  arraiiged  under  four  classes  or 
divisions,  each  of  which  includes  a  number  of  tribes  resembling  one 
another  in  certain  general  traits. 

1.  The  Northwest  dimsion.  The  tribes  of  this  class  inhabit  the 
coast  between  the  peninsula  of  Alaska,  in  latitude  60°,  and  Queen 
Charlotte's  Sound,  in  latitude  52°.  This  part  of  the  country  was  not 
visited  by  us,  and  the  information  obtained  concerning  it  was  derived 
chiefly  from  individuals  of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company.  They 
described  the  natives  as  resembling  the  white  race  in  some  of  their 
physical  characteristics.  They  are  fair  in  complexion,  sometimes 
with  ruddy  cheeks;  and,  what  is  very  unusual  among  the  aborigines 
of  America,  they  have  thick  beards,  which  appear  early  in  life.  In 
other  respects,  their  physiognomy  is  Indian, — a  broad  face,  with  wide 
cheek-bones,  the  opening  of  the  eye  long  and  narrow,  and  the  fore- 
head low. 

From  the  accounts  received  concerning  them,  they  would  appear 
to  be  rather  an  ingenious  people.  They  obtain  copper  from  the 
mountains  which  border  the  coast,  and  make  of  it  pipe-bowls,  gun- 
charges,  and  other  similar  articles.  Of  a  very  fine  and  hard  slate 
they  make  cups,  plates,  pipes,  little  images,  and  various  ornaments, 
wrought  with  surprising  elegance  and  taste.  Their  clothing,  houses, 
and  canoes,  display  like  ingenuity,  and  are  well  atlapted  to  their  cli- 
mate and  mode  of  life.  On  the  other  hand,  they  are  said  to  be  filthy 
in  their  habits,  and  of  a  cruel  and  treacherous  disposition. 

50 


198 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


2.  The  North-Oregon  dirhion-  All  the  tribes  nortii  of  the  Colum- 
bia, except  those  of  the  first  section,  and  some  of  the  WulUnvallas, 
belong  to  this  division,  as  well  as  three  or  four  to  the  south  of  that 
river.  It  includes  the  'rahkaU-Uiiikivd  family  (the  Carriers,  Qua- 
liojjuas,  Tlatskauies,  and  Unii^uas),  \\\v'VnihaiU-SeliKh  family  (Shoush- 
wap.s  Flathcads,  Chikoilish,  Cowelits,  and  Killamuks),  with  the 
ChiiKxih.i,  the  Ya/iones  (or  southern  Kilianiuks)  and,  in  part,  the 
Ca/apiii/(i.s.  The  Noulkas,  and  other  tribes  of  Vancouver's  Island, 
also  belonsjt  to  it. 

The  people  of  this  division  are  amon<f  tiie  ugliest  of  their  race. 
They  are  below  the  middle  size,  with  squat,  clumsy  forms,  very  broad 
faces,  low  foreheads,  lank  black  hair,  wide  nioutiis,  and  a  coarse  rouijh 
skin,  of  a  tanned,  or  dingy  copper  complexion.  This  description 
applies  more  particularly  to  the  tribes  of  the  coast.  Those  of  the 
interior  (tiie  Carriers,  Shousiiwaps,  and  Selish,)  are  of  a  better  cast, 
beint;  ;renerally  of  the  middle  heigiit,  with  features  of  a  less  exagge- 
rated harshness.  In  the  coast-tribes,  the  opening  of  the  eye  has  very 
fre(|nentlv  the  ol)li(iue  direction  proper  to  the  Mongol  physiognomy  ; 
but  in  the  others  tiiis  peculiarity  is  less  common. 

The  intellectual  and  moral  characteristics  of  these  natives  are  not 
more  pleasing  than  tlie  physical.  They  are  of  moderate  intelligence, 
coarse  and  dirty  in  their  iiabits,  indolent,  deceitful,  and  pa.ssionate. 
They  are  rather  superstitious  than  religious,  are  greatly  addicted  to 
gaml)linjj:.  and  grossly  libidinous.  All  these  disagreeable  ipialities 
are  most  conspicuous  in  the  tribes  near  the  mouth  of  the  Columbia, 
and  become  less  marked  as  we  advance  into  the  interior,  and  towards 
tlie  north.  It  is  also  at  the  same  point  (the  mouth  of  the  Columbia) 
that  the  custom  of  comi)ressing  the  head  prevails  to  the  greatest 
extent.  The  Chinooksarethe  most  distinguished  for  their  attachment 
to  this  singular  usage,  and  from  them  it  appears  to  have  spread 
on  every  side,  to  the  Chikailish  on  the  north,  tlie  U'allawallas  and 
Nez-perces  on  the  east,  and  tiie  Killamuks  and  Calapnyas  on  the 
south ;  tiie  degree  of  distortion  diminishing  as  we  recede  from  the 
centre. 

It  is  not  a  little  singular  that  all  the  tribes  of  this  division  (e.vcept 
the  Calapuyas,  who  seem  to  hold  a  middle  position,)  s[)eak  languages 
which,  thougli  of  distinct  families,  are  ail  remarkable  for  the  extreme 
harshness  of  their  pronunciation,  while  those  of  the  division  which 
follows,  are,  on  the  contrary,  unusually  soft  and  harmonious. 

3.  The  South-Oreyon  division.     To  this  belong  the  Sahaptin  family 


^  M 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


199 


Nez-pcrcos  and  Wallawiillas),  tlie  Wuitlnlpu  (Cayuse  and  Molele), 
tlie  Slioshnni  (Snakes,  Boiiiiaks,  &c.),  tlie  f.iitiinmi,  the  Shasties,  the 
Pulailix,  and  probaljly  olliur  tribes  towards  the  south  and  east.  They 
approach,  both  in  appearance  anil  in  character,  the  Indians  cast  of 
the  Rocky  Mountains,  thoui,di  still  inferior  tp  them  in  many  respects. 
They  are  of  the  middle  height,  slender,  with  long  faces  and  bold 
features,  thin  lips,  wide  cheek-bones,  smooth  skins,  and  the  usual 
tawny  complexion  of  the  American  tribes.  They  are  cold,  taciturn, 
high-tempered,  warlike,  fond  of  hunting  and  of  all  exercises  rerpiiring 
boldness  and  activity.  To  one  ascending  the  Columbia,  the  contrast 
presented  by  the  natives  above  and  below  the  Great  Falls  (the  Chi- 
nooks  and  Wallawallas)  is  very  striking.  No  two  nations  of  Europe 
differ  more  widely  in  looks  and  character  than  do  these  neighboring 
subdivisions  of  the  American  race. 

4.  'I'he  Califoniiun  division.  The  natives  of  this  class  are  chiefly 
distinguished  by  their  dark  color.  Those  of  Northern  or  Upper  Cali- 
fornia are  a  shade  browner  than  the  Oregon  Indians,  while  some 
tribes  in  the  peninsula  are  said  to  be  nearly  black.  In  other  res[)ects 
they  have  the  physiognomy  of  their  race,  broad  faces,  a  low  forehead, 
and  lank,  coarse  hair.  They  are  the  lowest  in  intellect  of  all  the 
North  American  tribes,  approaching  to  the  stupidity  of  the  Austra- 
hans.  They  are  dull,  indolent,  phlegmatic,  timid,  and  of  a  gentle, 
submissive  temper.  The  e.\[)erimcnt,  which  was  successfully  tried, 
of  collecting  them,  like  a  herd  of  cattle,  into  large  enclosures  called 
missions,  and  there  setting  them  to  work,  would  probably  never  have 
been  undertaken  with  the  Indians  of  Oregon, — and,  if  undertaken, 
would  assuredly  have  failed. 

GENERAL    O  H  S  E  R  V  .\  T  IONS. 


The  Indians  west  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  seem  to  be,  on  the 
whole,  inferior  to  those  east  of  that  chain.  In  stature,  streno;th,  and 
activity,  they  are  much  below  them.  Their  social  organization  is 
more  imperfect.  The  two  classes  of  chiefs,  those  who  preside  in  time 
of  peace,  and  those  who  direct  the  operations  of  war, — the  ceremony 
of  initiation  for  the  young  men, — the  distinction  of  clans  or  totems, 
— and  the  various  important  festivals  which  e.xist  among  the  eastern 
tribes,  are  unknown  to  those  of  Oregon.  Their  conceptions  on  reli- 
gious subjects  are  of  a  lower  cast.     It  is  doubtful  if  they  have  any 


200 


ETII  N  «)(i  H  A  I'  II  V. 


idea  of  a  supremo  beinp.  The  word  for  qml  was  one  of  those  origi- 
nally selected  for  the  vocabulary,  but  it  was  found  impossible,  with 
the  assistance  of  the  missionaries,  and  of  interpreters  well  skilled  in 
the  principal  languages,  to  obtain  a  proper  synonym  for  this  term  in 
a  single  dialect  of  Oregon.  Their  chief  divinity  is  called  the  wolf, 
and  seems,  from  their  descriptions,  to  be  a  sort  of  compound  being, 
half  beast  and  half  deity. 

In  comijaring  the  various  races  with  which  we  have  come  in  con- 
tact, it  is  impossible  not  to  be  siruck  with  a  certain  similarity  of 
character  between  the  American  aborigines  in  general,  but  more 
especially  the  natives  of  Oregon,  and  the  Australians, — the  latter 
appearing  like  an  exaggerated  and  caricatured  likeness  of  the  former. 
The  Indian  is  proud  and  reserved;  the  Australian  sullen  and  haughty. 
The  former  is,  at  once,  cautious  and  fierce ;  the  latter  is  cowardly  and 
cruel.  The  one  is  passionate  and  prompt  to  resent  an  injury ;  the 
other  is  roused  to  fury  by  the  slightest  imagined  insult.  The  super- 
stition of  the  Indian  is  absurd  ami  irrational;  that  of  the  Australian 
is  stupid  and  ridiculous.  The  Indian,  who  acknowledges  a  chief,  yet 
renders  him  such  deference  only  as  he  thinks  proper  ;  the  Australian 
owns  no  superior,  and  has  not  even  a  name  tor  such  an  office.  It 
might  be  a  point  of  some  interest  to  determine  how  far  this  similarity, 
in  many  respects,  between  two  races  otherwise  so  distinct,  has  arisen 
from  a  similarity  in  their  position  and  circumstances. 

The  mode  of  life  of  the  Oregon  Indiuns,  especially  those  of  the 
interior,  is  so  peculiar  that  it  is  difficult  to  determine  how  it  should 
be  characterized.  They  have  no  fi.xed  habitations,  \  yet  they  are 
not,  properly  speaking,  a  wandering  people.  Nearly  every  month  in 
the  year  they  change  their  place  of  residence, — but  the  same  month 
of  every  year  finds  them  regularly  in  the  same  place.  The  circum- 
stances which  have  given  rise  to  this  course  of  life  are  the  following : 

1.  The  territory  of  Oregon  abounds,  btiyond  e.xample,  in  esculent 
roots,  of  various  kinds,  which,  without  cultivation,  grow  in  sufficient 
quantities  to  support  a  considerable  population.  More  than  twenty 
species,  most  of  them  palatable,  and  obtainable,  generally,  with 
little  labor,  are  found  in  diffi^rent  parts  of  this  territory.  At  cer- 
tain seasons,  the  natives  subsist  almost  entirely  upon  them.  As 
the  diffi;rent  species  come  to  maturity  at  ditTerent  times,  the  people 
remove  from  one  root-ground  to  another,  according  to  the  time  when 
experience  has  taught  them  to  look  for  a  new  crop. 


N  (t  rrr  II  w  k  s  r  i;  it  .\  a  m  k  k  i  c  a. 


801 


•2.  ScviTal  kinds  of  fruits  ;itui  ix-rrics  iirc  fonnil,  at  <'('rtaiu  seasons, 
in  yroat  ahumlancc.  and  dIUt  anotlipr  cnust!  lor  a  temporary  cliaiige 
of  place. 

3.  At  a  particular  pericxl  of  the  year,  the  Nnliiioii  nncend  the  river 
to  deposit  ttu'ir  spawn,  and  tlieii  the  Indians  asscrnlile  in  u;ri'at 
numbers  on  the  banks  of  the  streams,  for  the  ()urpose  of  takiii),'  them 
Two  months  afterwards,  tlie  fish  appear  ajrain,  lloatinu;  in  an  ex- 
hausted condition  down  ttie  current,  and  though  liy  no  means  so 
ajireeable  for  food,  are  yet  taken  in  lar;,'e  (piantities,  principally  for 
winter  stores.  These  two  seasons  of  lisliin;^  are  the  occasion  of  two 
removals. 

4.  The  tribes  of  the  interior  depend,  in  part,  for  their  clothing,  on 
the  buffalo  skins  which  they  obtain,  either  by  barter  or  by  hunting. 
And  for  both  these  purposes  it  is  necessary  for  them  to  visit  the  region 
near  the  foot  of  the  l{ocky  Mountains,  frequented  by  that  animal. 
This,  however,  does  not,  except  with  some  of  the  Shoshonees,  give 
rise  to  a  general  removal  of  the  trilje,  i)ut  merely  an  cxpeilition  of  the 
principal  men,  their  families  being  left,  in  the  mean  time,  encamped 
in  some  place  of  safety. 

The  tribes  near  the  coast  remove  less  freipiently  than  those  of  the 
interior.  Some  of  them  spend  the  summer  on  the  sea-shore,  and  the 
winter  in  a  siieltered  nook  on  the  banks  of  an  inland  stream.  Others 
do  not  change  their  place  of  residence  at  all ;  but  at  the  approach  of 
summer,  they  take  down  the  heavy  planks  of  which  their  winter 
habitiitions  are  made,  bury  them  in  the  ground,  where  they  will  be 
outoftlie  way  of  injury,  and  having  put  up  a  temporary  dwelling  of 
bark,  brushwood,  and  matting,  feel  no  apprehensions  at  leaving  it  for 
two  or  three  weeks  at  a  time,  to  lish,  hunt,  collect  roots,  and  gather 
fruit. 

To  these  general  descriptions  it  will  be  proper  to  add  a  more 
particular  account  of  those  tribes,  of  whose  idioms  we  have  been  able 
to  obtain  vocabularies.  We  shall  take  them  in  the  order  in  which 
they  stand  in  the  Synopsis. 


1.     T  11  E    T  A  II  K  A  L  1  .  V  M  K  W  A    F  A  M  I  L  Y. 
A.    TAHKALl  OR  CARRIERS. 


The  country  of  the  Tahkali  (orTacuUies)  includes  the  region  north 
of  the  Oregon  Territory,  termed  by  the  English  New  Caledonia.     It 


51 


:H 


•20'2 


KT  M  N  0»i  K  A  I'  II  V. 


fxtfiids  rnuii  litlitiiiie  .VJ'  'MY,  wlurf  it  iMirdors  on  the  coiiiitry  i>f  tlic 
Slioiisliiijis,  to  liilitiitlc  r>iV ,  inoluilmt,'  Siuiiison's  Uivi-r. •  On  llu>  tnist 
art'  till-  IJockv  Mountains,  sc|iaratiii^  tlu'iii  I'roin  tlio  Siciiiii,  unci  on 
tlio  west  the  riii'm'il  chain  winch  runs  parallel  witli  tlu>  coast.  'I'lic 
country  is  well  watered  with  nnmcrons  streams  and  lakes,  most  of 
wliicli  discliar^re  themselves  into  l''ra/i'r's  Hivcr.  Our  inl'ormation 
with  respect  to  this  people  is  derived  from  a  u;entleman  comiectod 
with  the  llndson's  Hay  Company,  who  resided  several  years  ainont( 
them  in  cliar^,'o  of  u  fort;  it  will  he  tonnd  to  a^ree  t;i!nerally  with 
tlio  account  jfiven  hy  llarinon,  who  occui)ietl  the  same  situation 
hctwcen  the  years  IMM)  and  I'^lt). 

The  Tahkali  are  divided  into  eleven  clans,  or  minor  tribes,  whose 
names  are — begimiiiit,'  at  the  south — as  follows:  (I)  the  'Dn'itiii  or 
Td/koli/i  :  {'2)  the  'l'silk6tin  or  Cfiiirotiii  :  (H)  the  S(tski',lin  ;  (J)  the 
'r/ut/iiitiii  ;  (.'■))  the  Tsiilsm'ilin  ;  {(<)  the  Stilniuitin  :  ^7)  tht;  SlshdiiH- 
till  :  C^)  the  Sdllittiitin  :  (9)  the  Sikozliniitiii  ;  (10)  the  'Valshiniilin  . 
and  (11)  the  linhim  Indians.  'I"he  iiumher  of  persons  in  these  clans 
varies  from  fifty  to  three  hundred.  All  speak  the  same  laiigua^,'e, 
with  some  slight  dialectical  variations.  The  Sikiuii  (or  Secunnie) 
nation  has  a  language  radically  the  same,  hut  with  greater  dillerence 
oi  dialect,  passing  gradually  into  that  of  the  Heaver  and  Chippewyan 
Indians. 

The  Taidvali.  though  a  branch  of  the  m-eat  Chi|)pe\vyan  (or  Atha- 
pascan)! stock,  have  several  |)eculiarities  in  their  customs  and  cha- 
racter which  distinguish  thein  from  other  members  of  this  family. 
Ill  personal  aiipearaiice  they  resemble  the  tribes  on  the  l'|)[)er 
Columbia,  though,  on  the  whole,  a  better-looking  race.  They  are 
rather  tall,  witli  a  tendency  to  grossness  in  their  features  and  figures, 
particularly  among  tlie  women.  They  are  somewhat  lighter  in  coin- 
ple.vion  than  the  triijcs  of  the  south. 

Like  all  Indians  who  live  principally  upon  fish,  and  who  do  not 


'  I'or  llic  (Xiii't  liniils  1)1'  till-  liiriliirics  ik'cii|iiic1  Iiv  tlif  <Ii111tciiI  triU'.-i,  llic  rcailiT  is 
rcrcrrcd  In  IIk;  ai-corniiiiiiyin;;  l';tliiu);;ra|iliiriil  .Map,  which  has  liccn  con.structoil,  with 
iniK'h  cuH'  anil  hilmr,  from  iiirDniialiou  iloriMil,  in  most  I'asrs,  iVnni  ihi'  iiativci  thcni- 
Sf^lvcs,  mill  ffiiiHrmiMl  by  riiis.Mioiiarii  s,  hiuilrrs,  oH'iciTs  of  Ihi'  lliiilsiurs  lUiy  Coinpaiiy, 
.iiul  iilhiT.s  who  hail  hail  ;;imm1  n)i|inrtiiMilirs  llir  ai-i|iiiriii'_'  kiiiiwh  il;.'i'  mi  thin  siihjcct. 
'I'lii'  liiiiiiiilanrs  ari'  iisirilly  (li'trriiiiinil  liy  the  pliysiral  ruiiliirinalioii  ol'lho  roimlry,  ami 
arc  well  iuiiUtsIihiiI  ainmii,'  ihr  iialivis,  a  riniiiiislaiiri'  which  lias  riiahlrd  us  li>  lay 
llii-in  down,  llir  thi'  niosl  part,  with  ininiilriir-s  ami  prt'i'isinii. 

+  See  Mr.  llallalin's  "Synopsis  (ifllw  Indiuii  TrilK's,'"  p.  10. 


N  (»  II  T  II  \V  K  S  T  K  It  N    A  M  K  It  I  C  A. 


908 


ac(|uire  tlio  lialilts  of  activity  proper  to  llic  lnmlinn  trilmH,  they  ure 
exccssivclv  iiulolfiit  iiiul  lillliv,  and,  us  it  iiatiiriil  conriiiiiitiuit,  Imse 
niitlMt'pruvcd  in  I'lianictcr.  They  aro  liiiul  ol'  unt'tiioiis  Mihstiwict's, 
and  driiili  iinmciiso  (iimiilitios  of  oil,  wliii'li  they  ohtniii  from  fish  iinil 
wild  animals.  Thoy  also  licsmoar  tln-ir  iMKiics  with  tjrfaso  and 
colored  earths.  They  like  their  meat  putrid,  ami  often  lease  it  until 
its  stench  is,  to  any  hut  themselves,  insupportahle.  Salmon  roes  ure 
Hometiines  i)urie(l  in  the  earth  and  left  for  two  or  three  inontiis  to 
putrefy,  in  which  state  they  are  esteemed  a  delii'acy. 

The  natives  are  prone  to  sensuality,  and  chastity  amoin(  the  women 
is  unknown.  At  the  same  lime,  they  seem  to  i>e  almost  devoid  of 
natural  alfection.  Children  are  considered  hy  them  a  hurden,  and 
they  often  use  means  to  destroy  thorn  heforo  hirth.  Their  relijrious 
ideas  are  very  ^ross  and  coid'used.  It  is  not  ki  uvn  that  thtiy  have 
any  distinct  ideas  of  a  goil,  or  of  the  existence  of  tlie  soul.  They  have 
priests  or  "doctors,"  whose  art  consists  in  certain  mummeries,  in- 
tended for  incantations.  When  a  corpse  is  hiirned,  which  is  the 
ordinary  mode  of  disposinif  of  the  dead,  tlie  priest,  with  many  gesti- 
culations and  contortions,  pretends  to  receive  in  his  closed  hands, 
somethiiiij, — perhaps  tlu!  life  of  the  deceased, — which  he  communi- 
cates to  some  livin^f  person  hy  throwint^  his  hands  towards  him,  and 
nt  the  same  time  blowing  upon  him.  This  person  then  takes  the 
rank  of  the  deceaseii,  and  assumes  his  name  in  addition  to  his  own. 
Of  course,  the  priest  always  unil'i'staiids  to  whom  this  succession  is 
properly  due. 

If  the  deceased  had  a  wife,  she  is  all  hut  huriied  alive  with  the 
corpse,  heiiifj  compelled  to  lie  upon  it  while  the  lire  is  liniiled,  and 
remain  thus  till  the  heat  hecomes  hcyond  endurance.  In  I'ormer 
times,  when  she  attempted  to  hreak  u\\n\ .  she  was  pushed  back  into 
the  llaines  hy  tiic  relations  of  her  hrshand.  and  tiiiis  olten  severciv 
injured.  When  the  corpse  is  consumed,  she  collects  the  asiies  and 
deposits  them  in  a  little  basket,  which  s!  ■  always  carries  about  with 
her.  At  the  same  time,  she  I'fcoinrs  tiie  servant  and  drudifc  of  the 
relations  of  her  late  lui.sband.  \.ho  exact  of  h.-r  the  severest  lai)()r,  and 
treat  her  with  every  indiirnity.  This  lasts  for  two  or  three  years,  at 
the  end  of  which  time  a  feast  is  made  by  all  the  kindred,  and  a  l)road 
post,  liltcen  or  twenty  feel  hiiih,  is  sit  up,  and  covered  on  the  sides 
wit  1 1  rude  tiaubs,  repre.sentiii^r  tigures  of  men  and  animals  of  various 
kit  On  the  to[)  is  a  box  in  which  the  ashes  of  the  dead  are  |)laccd. 

and  allowed  to  remain  until  the  post  decays.     After  this  ceremony, 


11 

> . 


•20\ 


\:t  II  .\  ()»;  II  A  I'  II  Y. 


tlic  widow  is  ivlensoil  from  lior  state  of  servitude,  and  alloweil  \o 
marry  again. 

'I'lio  Carriers  arc  not  a  warlike  people,  thousjh  they  sometimes  have 
quarrels  with  their  neighhors,  particidarly  the  trihes  of  the  roast. 
Hut  these  are  ns\ially  appeased  without  much  dillieulty. 

The  Sikani,  though  speaking  a  language  of  the  same  family,  dider 
widely  from  the  'I'ahkali.  in  their  eharaeter  and  customs.  They  live 
a  wandering  life,  and  subsist  hy  the  ehase.  Tliey  are  a  brave,  hardy, 
and  aetive  people,  cleanly  in  their  persons  and  habits,  and,  in  general, 
agreeing  nearly  with  the  usual  idea  of  an  American  Indian.  They 
bury  their  dead,  and  have  none  of  the  customs  of  the  Tahkali  with 
respect  to  them. 


n.       a.    TL.VTSK.VX.M. 


b.    KWAMIIOQUA. 


These  are  two  small  isolated  bands,  neither  of  them  comprising 
more  than  a  hundred  individuals,  who  roam  in  the  mountains  on  each 
side  of  the  Columbia,  near  its  month,  the  former  on  the  north,  and 
the  latter  on  the  south  side.  They  are  separated  from  the  river,  and 
from  one  another,  by  the  Chinooks.  ^I'hey  build  no  permanent 
habitations,  but  wander  in  the  woods,  subsisting  on  game,  berries,  and 
roots.  As  might  be  e.xpei^ted,  they  are  somewhat  more  i)old  and 
hardy  than  the  tril)es  on  the  river  and  coast,  and,  at  the  same  time, 
more  wild  and  savage. 


C.       I'MKW.V,    OH    IMrmAS. 

The  Imhivd  inhabit  the  upper  i)art  of  the  river  of  that  name, 
having  the  Kalapuya  on  the  north,  the  Lntuami  (I'lamets),  on  the 
east,  and  the  ISainstkla  between  them  and  the  sea.  They  are  sup- 
posed to  number,  at  present,  not  more  than  four  hundred,  having 
been  greatly  reduced  by  disease.  'I'hey  live  in  houses  of  boards  and 
mats,  and  derive  their  subsistence,  in  great  part,  (Vom  the  river. 
Two,  whom  I  saw,  dill'ered  but  little  from  the  Kalapuya,  except  that 
they  had  not  the  heail  flattened.  One  of  them  had  reached  the 
Columbia  through  the  Tlatskanai  country,  and  it  appeared  that  a 
connexion  of  some  kind  existed  between  the  two  tribes. 


2.  It.     K  I  r  I'  .\  .\  !I  .\,    O  W    C  ()  I  'I'  .\  ,N  I  K  S,  O  U    F  L  A  T  -  H  O  W  S. 
This  is  a  small  tribe  of  about  four  hundred  people,  who  wander  in 


I 
\ 


N  O  |{  I'  II  W  K  S  T  K  U  N    A  M  K  K  I  C  A. 


SOS 


the  rniiiiccl  and  iiionntainous  tract  oiicloscd  lu'tweeii  the  two  nortlicrn 
forks  of  tlu'  Coluinl)ia.  The  Fhit-bow  River  and  Ijake  also  bchnijj; 
to  tliem.  They  are  great  liiinters,  and  furnish  large  quantities  of 
peltry  to  the  Ihidson's  Bay  Company,  la  former  days,  they  wore 
constantly  at  war  with  their  neighbors,  the  Jllackfoot  tribes,  by 
whose  incursions  they  suffered  severely.  In  appearance,  character, 
and  customs,  they  resemble  more  tlic  Indians  east  of  the  Rocky 
Mountains  than  those  of  Lower  Oregon. 

:t.    "1"  S  I  11  A  I  M  -  S  !•;  L  I  S  II    F  A  M  I  L  V. 

K.       .slIl'SIlWArUMSIl,    OK    SIllTSllWArS,    OR    AlNAllS. 

The  Shushwaps  possess  the  country  bordering  on  the  lower  part  of 
F'razer's  River,  and  its  branches.  From  the  vocabulary  given  by 
Mackenzie  of  the  dialect  spoken  at  Friendly  Village,  on  Salmon 
River,  in  latitude  50°  HO',  and  about  ninety  miles  from  the  sea,  it 
appears  that  tiie  natives  of  that  village  belong  to  this  tribe.  Beyond 
them,  according  to  Mackenzie,  a  dilTerent  language  is  spoken, — 
probably  t!;rit  of  the  llailtsa  Indians,  of  whom  some  mention  will  be 
made  hereafter. 

The  name  of  Atiiah  is  given  to  this  people  by  the  Tahkali,  in 
whose  language  it  means  stniiK/cr  or  forrigiwr.  The  Shushwaps 
differ  so  little  from  their  southern  neighbors,  the  Salish,  as  to  render 
a  particular  description  unnecessary.  By  a  census  taken  a  few  years 
since,  the  nund)er  of  men  in  the  tribe  was  ascertained  to  bo  about 
four  hundred.  The  whole  niunber  of  souls  at  present  may  be  rated 
at  twelve  hundred. 


K.    SELISU,  SALISll.  OR  FI.ATllIiADS. 

llow  the  name  of  p'lathead  came  to  be  ap|)lied  to  this  people  cannot 
well  be  conjectured,  as  the  distortion  to  which  the  word  refers  is  not 
practised  among  them.  They  inhabit  the  country  about  the  upper 
part  of  the  Columbia  and  its  tributary  streams,  the  Flathead,  Spokan, 
and  Okanagan  Rivers.  The  name  includes  several  independent  tribes 
or  biuuls,  of  which  the  most  important  are  the  Salisii  proper,  the 
Kullespelm,  the  Soayalpi,  the  Tsakaitsitlin.  and  the  Okinakan.  The 
number  of  souls  is  reckoned,  in  all,  at  about  three  thousand. 

The  Salish  appear  to  hold,  in  many  respects,  an  intcrinediate  place 


206 


E  Til  NOG  R  A  PU  V. 


I 


■  r 


.■ti     I 


between  the  tribes  of  the  coast,  and  those  to  the  south  and  east.  In 
stature  and  proportion  they  are  superior  to  the  Ciiinooks  and  Chikai- 
lish,  but  interior  to  the  8ahaptin.  Tlieir  features  are  not  so  regular 
nor  tlieir  skins  so  clear  as  those  of  the  latter,  while  they  fall  far  short 
of  tlie  grossuess  of  the  former.  In  bodily  strength  they  are  inferior  to 
the  whites. 

A  description  of  the  habits  of  this  tribe  will  give  a  good  idea  of  the 
life  of  systematic  wandering  peculiar  to  the  natives  of  Oregon.  They 
derive  their  subsistence  from  roots,  fish,  berries,  game,  and  a  kind  of 
moss  or  lichen  which  they  find  on  trees.  At  the  opening  of  the  year, 
as  soon  as  the  snow  disappears,  (in  March  and  April),  they  begin  to 
search  for  the  pohpoh,  a  bulbous  root,  shaped  somewhat  like  a  small 
onion,  and  of  a  peculiarly  dry  and  spicy  taste.  This  lasts  them  till 
May,  when  it  is  exchanged  for  the  spatlam,  or  "  bitter  root,"  which  is 
a  slender,  white  root,  not  unlike  vermicelli ;  when  boiled,  it  dissolves 
like  arrow-root,  and  forms  a  jelly  of  a  bitter  but  not  disagreeable 
flavor.  Some  time  in  June,  the  itivlta  or  camass  comes  in  .season, 
and  is  found  at  certain  well-known  "grounds"  in  great  quantities.  In 
shape  it  resembles  the  pohpoh,  and  when  baked  for  a  day  or  two  in 
the  iiround,  has  a  consistency  and  taste  not  uidike  those  of  a  boiled 
chestnut.  It  supplies  them  for  two  or  three  months,  and  while  it  is 
most  abundant — in  June  and  July — the  salmon  make  their  appear- 
ance, and  are  taken  in  great  numbers,  mostly  in  weirs.  This,  with 
these  people,  is  the  season  when  they  are  in  the  best  condition, 
having  a  plentiful  supply  of  their  two  prime  articles  of  food.  During 
this  period,  the  men  usually  remain  at  the  fishing-station,  and  the 
women  at  the  camass-ground,  but  parties  are  continually  passing  from 
one  to  the  other.  August,  during  which  the  sui)plies  from  both  these 
source.-  commonly  fail,  is  the  month  lor  berries,  of  which  they  some- 
times collect  enough  both  for  immediate  subsistence,  and  to  dry  for 
winter.  The  service-berry  and  the  choke-cherry  are  the  principal 
fruits  of  this  kind  which  they  .seek.  In  iSeptember,  the  "exhausted 
salmon,  '  or  those  which,  having  deposited  their  roes,  are  now  about 
to  perish,  are  found  in  considerable  numbers,  and  though  greatly 
reduced  both  in  fatness  and  flavor,  are  yet  their  chief  dependence, 
when  dried,  for  winter  consumption.  Should  they  be  scarce,  a 
famine  would  be  likely  to  ensue.  At  this  season,  also,  they  obtain 
the  mcsiiui,  an  inferior  root,  resembling  somewhat,  in  appearance,  a 
parsnip.  When  baked,  it  turns  perfectly  black,  and  has  a  peculiar 
taste,  unlike  that  of  any  of  our  common  roots.     This   lasts  them 


I 


N  O  R  T  H  W  K  S  T  E  U  N    A  M  E  R  I  C  A. 


207 


through  October,  after  which  they  must  depend  principally  upon 
their  stores  of  dried  food,  and  the  game  (deer,  bears,  badgers,  squir- 
rels, and  wild-fowl  of  various  kinds,)  which  they  may  have  the  good 
fortune  to  take.  Should  both  these  sources  fail,  they  have  recourse 
to  the  moss  before-mentioned,  which,  though  abundant,  contains 
barely  sufficient  nutriment  to  sustain  life.  Such  is  their  want  of 
forethought  and  prudence,  both  in  laying  up  and  in  consuming  their 
provisions,  that  there  are  very  few  who  do  not  suffer  severely  from 
hunger  before  the  opening  of  spring.  Indeed,  like  their  hor.ses,  they 
regularly  fatten  up  in  the  season  of  plenty,  and  grow  lean  and  weak 
before  the  expiration  of  winter. 

As  the  different  root-grounds  and  fishing-stations  are  at  some 
distance  from  one  another,  they  are  obliged  to  remove  from  one  to 
the  other  in  succession,  carrying  with  them,  on  their  horses,  all  their 
property.  This  is  easily  done,  as  their  articles  of  furniture  are  few 
and  light,  and  their  houses  consist  merely  of  rush-mats  and  skins, 
stretched  upon  poles.  In  winter  they  seek  out  some  sheltered  spot, 
which  will  supply  their  horses  with  food,  and  they  then  make  their 
dwellings  more  comfortable,  by  covering  the  mats  with  earth. 

The  Salish  can  hardly  be  said  to  have  any  regular  form  of  govern- 
ment. They  live  in  bands  of  two  or  three  hundred,  chielly  for  the 
sake  of  mutual  support  and  protection.  In  former  times  there  was 
much  fighting  among  these  tribes,  but  they  still  looked  upon  one 
another  as  portions  of  the  same  people.  At  present,  by  the  infiuence 
of  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company,  these  quarrels  have  been  sup])ressed. 
Intermarriages  between  tiiese  bands  are  frecjuent,  and  in  such  cases 
the  husband  commonly  joins  the  band  to  which  his  wife  belongs. 
This  proceeds,  perhaps,  from  the  circumstance  that  the  woman  does 
the  most  for  the  support  of  the  family,  and  will  be  better  able  to 
perform  her  duties  (of  gathering  roots,  fruit,  &c.,)  in  those  places  to 
which  she  is  accustomed.  In  fact,  although  the  women  are  required 
to  do  much  hard  labor,  they  are  by  no  means  treated  as  slaves,  but, 
on  the  contrary,  have  much  consideration  and  authority.  The  stores 
of  food  which  they  collect  are  regarded  as,  in  a  manner,  their  own, 
and  a  husband  will  seldom  take  any  of  them  without  asking  permis- 
sion. The  men,  moreover,  have  to  perform  all  the  arduous  labors  of 
the  fishery  and  the  chase. 

They  evince  strong  domestic  feelings,  and  are  very  affectionate 
towards  their  children  and  near  relatives.  Unlike  the  Sahaptin,  and 
some  other  tribes,  they  take  particular  care  of  the  aged  and  infirm, 


i  1 


208 


E  T  II  N  ()  (!  R  A  I'  II  Y. 


wlio  tisvially  faro  the  host  of  all.  Tliero  is,  however,  one  custom 
amonif  tlieui,  which  seems  to  evince  an  oi)posite  disposition.  When 
a  man  dies,  leaving  young  children  who  are  not  ahle  to  defend  them- 
selves, his  relations  come  in  and  .seize  \ipon  the  most  valuable 
property,  and  particularly  the  horses,  without  regard  to  the  rights  of 
the  children.  The  natives  acknowledge  the  inhumanity  of  the  prac- 
tice, and  only  defend  it  as  an  ancient  custom  received  from  their 
fathers. 

In  every  band  there  is  usually  one  who,  by  certain  advantages  of 
wealth,  valor,  and  intelligence,  acipiires  a  superiority  over  the  rest, 
and  is  termed  the  chief  But  his  authority  is  derived  rather  from  his 
personal  influence  than  from  any  law,  and  is  exerted  more  in  the 
way  of  persuasion  than  of  direct  command.  But  if  he  is  a  man  of 
shrewdne.ss  and  of  a  determined  character,  he  sometimes  enjoys 
considerable  power.  The  punishment  of  delinquents  is,  of  course, 
regulated  rather  by  circumstances  than  by  any  fixed  code.  Notorious 
criminals  are  .sometimes  punished  by  expulsion  from  the  tribe  or  band 
to  whicii  they  belong. 

They  hail  formerly,  it  is  thought,  a  vague  idea  of  a  Supreme  Being, 
but  tliey  never  addressed  to  him  any  worship.  Their  only  religious 
ceremonies  were  certain  mummeries,  performed  under  the  direction 
of  the  medicine-men,  for  the  [)urpose  of  averting  any  evil  with  which 
they  might  be  threatenetl,  or  of  obtaining  some  desired  object,  as  an 
abundant  supply  of  food,  victory  in  war,  and  the  like.  One  of  these 
ceremonies,  called  by  them  SuhhisIi,  deserves  notice,  lor  the  strangeness 
of  the  idea  on  which  it  is  founded.  They  regard  the  spirit  of  a  man 
as  distinct  from  tlie  living  principle,  and  hold  that  it  may  be  .separated 
for  a  short  time  from  the  body  without  causing  death,  or  without  the 
individual  being  conscious  of  the  loss.  It  is  necessary,  however,  in 
order  to  prevent  fatal  consequences,  that  the  lost  spirit  should  be  found 
and  restored  as  quickly  as  possible  The  conjuror  or  medicine-man 
learns,  in  a  dream,  the  name  of  the  per.son  who  has  suffered  this  loss. 
Generally,  there  are  several  at  the  same  time  in  this  condition.  He 
then  informs  the  unhappy  individuals,  who  immediately  employ  him 
to  recover  their  wandering  .souls.  During  the  next  night  they  go 
about  the  village,  from  one  lodge  to  another,  singing  and  dancing. 
Towards  morning  they  enter  a  .separate  lodge,  which  is  closed  up,  so 
as  to  be  perfectly  liark.  A  small  hole  is  then  made  in  the  roof,  through 
which  the  conjuror,  with  a  bunch  of  feathers,  brushes  in  the  spirits, 
in  the  shape  of  small  bit.s  of  bone,  and  similar  substances,  which  he 


N  f)  U  T  II  VV  E  S  T  K  II  N    A  M  K  R  I  C  A. 


209 


receives  on  a  piece  of  matting.  A  fire  is  then  li^lited,  and  the  con- 
juror proceeds  to  select  out  from  the  spirits  such  as  belong  to  persons 
already  deceased,  of  which  there  are  usually  several ;  and  should  one 
of  them  be  assitrned  by  mistake  to  a  living  person,  he  would  instantly 
die.  He  next  selects  the  particular  spirit  belonging  to  each  person, 
and  causing  all  the  men  to  sit  down  before  him,  he  takes  the  spirit  of 
one  (i.  e.  the  splinter  of  bone,  shell,  or  wood,  representing  it),  and 
placing  it  on  tiie  owner's  head,  pats  it,  with  many  contortions  and 
invocations,  till  it  descends  into  the  heart,  and  resumes  its  proper 
place.  When  all  are  thus  restored,  the  whole  party  unite  in  making 
a  contribution  of  food,  out  of  which  a  public  feast  is  given,  and  the 
remainder  becomes  the  perquisite  of  the  conjuror. 

Like  the  Sahaptin,  the  Salish  have  many  childish  traditions  con- 
nected with  the  most  remarkable  natural  features  of  the  country,  in 
which  the  prairie-wolf  generally  bears  a  conspicuous  part.  What 
could  have  induced  them  to  confer  the  honors  of  divinity  upon  this 
animal  cannot  be  imagined.  They  do  not,  however,  regard  the  wolf 
as  an  object  of  worship,  but  merely  suppose  that  in  former  times  it 
was  endowed  with  preternatural  powers,  which  it  e.verted  after  a  very 
whimsical  and  capricious  fashion.  Thus,  on  one  occasion,  being 
desirous  of  a  wife  (a  common  circumstance  with  him),  the  Wolf,  or 
the  divinity  so  called,  visited  a  tribe  on  the  Spokan  River,  and 
demanded  a  young  woman  in  marriage.  His  request  being  granted, 
he  promised  that  thereafter  the  salmon  should  be  abundant  with 
them,  and  he  created  the  rapids,  whicii  give  them  facilities  for  taking 
the  fish.  Proceeding  farther  up,  he  made  of  each  tribe  on  his  way 
the  same  request,  attended  with  a  like  result.  At  length  he  arrived 
at  the  territory  of  the  Skitsuish  ( Cmir  d'alene) ;  they  refused  to 
comply  with  his  demand,  and  he  therefore  called  into  existence  the 
great  Falls  of  the  Spokan,  which  prevent  the  fish  from  ascending  to 
their  country.     This  is  a  fair  sample  of  their  traditions. 


G.       SKITSUISH,  OR  C(EUR  d'aLENE  INDIANS. 

We  saw,  at  Fort  Colville,  the  chief  of  this  tribe,  whose  name  was 
Stalaam.  He  told  us  that  his  tribe  could  raise  ninety  men,  and  the 
whole  number  of  souls  in  it  may  therefore  be  estimated  at  between 
three  and  four  hundred.  They  live  about  the  lake  which  takes  its 
name  from  them,  and  lead  a  more  settled  life  than  the  other  tribes  of 
this  region.    As  the  salmon  cannot  ascend  to  their  lake,  on  account  of 

53 


t 


t     ! 


!i 


210 


KTHNOORAPII  Y. 


the  Falls  of  the  Spokan,  anil  as  these  natives  seldom  go  to  hunt  the 
buffalo,  their  principal  subsistence  is  derived  from  roots,  game,  and 
the  smaller  kinds  of  fish.  Some  of  them  have  lately  begun  to  raise 
potatoes,  and  it  seems  likely  that  the  arts  of  cultivation  will,  before 
long,  be  common  among  ihcm.  Being  out  of  the  usual  track  of 
traders  and  trappers,  their  character  has  been  less  affected  by  inter- 
course with  the  whites,  than  is  the  case  with  the  tribes  on  the  great 
rivers.  They  speak  a  dialect  of  the  Salish,  and  resemble  in  appear- 
ance the  other  natives  belonging  to  this  stock. 

The  origin  of  the  appellation  by  which  tiiis  tribe  is  known  to  the 
whites  deserves  to  be  noticed,  as  an  example  of  the  odd  circumstances 
to  which  these  nicknames  are  sometimes  due.  The  first  who  visited 
the  tribe  were  Canadian  traders,  one  of  whom,  it  appears,  was  of  a 
close,  niggardly  temper.  The  natives  soon  remarked  this,  and  the 
chief  at  length  gave  his  sentiments  upon  it,  Indian  fashion,  observing 
that  the  white  man  had  the  "  heart  of  an  awl,"  meaning,  a  contracted, 
illiberal  disposition — the  term  anl  being  used  by  them  as  we  some- 
times employ  the  word  jrin,  to  denote  a  very  trilling  object.  The 
expression  was  rendered  by  the  interpreter  literally,  "  tin  caiir 
(Tah'iie,"  and  greatly  amused  the  trader's  companions,  who  thence- 
forth spoke  of  the  chief  who  used  it,  as  "  the  ccaur  (Tulene  chief,"  a 
soubriquet  which  came  in  time  to  be  applied  to  the  whole  tribe.  It 
was,  perhaps,  by  some  similar  ''hicus  a  iio/t  lucoido'  process,  that  the 
very  inapplicable  names  of  Ti'tes-phUtes  and  iVer-^jera's  chanced  to  be 
given  to  the  Salish  and  Sahaptin,  of  whom  the  first  never  flatten  the 
head,  and  the  latter  rarely,  if  ever,  have  the  nose  perforated. 

H.       PISKWAUS  OR  PISCOUS. 

This  name  properly  belontr^  to  the  tribe  who  live  on  the  small 
river  which  falls  into  the  Columbia  on  the  west  side,  about  forty 
miles  below  Fort  Okanagan.  But  it  is  here  extended  to  all  the  tribes 
as  far  down  as  the  "  Priest's  Rapids,"  who  speak  the  same  dialect 
with  the  first-named.  This  whole  region  is  very,  poor  in  roots  and 
game,  and  the  natives  who  waniler  over  it  are  looked  upon  by  the 
other  Indians  as  a  miserable,  beggarly  people.  They  have,  besides, 
the  reputation  of  being  great  thieves,  which  our  experience  went  to 
confirm. 

It  would  appear,  from  the  following  list  of  their  months,  obtained 
from  the  chief  of  one  of  their  bands,  that  their  habits  are  much  the 


N  O  R  'I"  11  \V  E  S  T  E  II  N    A  M  E  R  I  C  A. 


211 


same  with  those  of  their  neighbors,  the  Salish, — for  the  names  of 
many  of  the  months  have  reference  to  some  of  their  most  important 
usages.  The  name  of  the  cliief  was  Sdkatatl-kiiiisam,  or  the  Half- 
Sun  (commonly  called  Le  grand  Jiiine  homme),  and  that  of  his  clan 
the  Sinakaidusish,  who  live  on  the  eastern  hank  of  the  Columbia, 
opposite  the  Piskwaus.  The  chief  from  whom  the  Salish  names 
were  obtained  was  called  Silim-hmitl-mil/ikahk,  or  the  Master-Raven, 
but  he  is  better  known  to  the  whites  by  the  appellation  of  Cornelius. 
His  tribe  is  the  Tsakait.sitli/i,  on  the  lower  part  of  the  Spokan  River. 
It  will  be  observed  that  one  of  the  chiefs  made  only  twelve  names, 
while  the  other  reckoned  thirteen.  Both  had  some  difficulty  in  call- 
ing to  mind  all  the  names.  In  several,  the  Piskwaus  chief  is  one 
moon  ahead  of  the  other,  which  may  arise  from  mistake,  or  possibly 
from  some  slight  difference  of  seasons  at  the  two  places. 


riSKU'AL'8.  SKLISII. 

Sz/irusiis,  .  .  Siisliktvii,          .         .         .         . 

Skiniianiiiii,  .  S<jifi/suji,r.M, 

Skiipn/skiltin,  .  S/.i/iiiamnn,  n  certain  herb, 

Shdsiilkii,  .  fikfijxilni,  .snow  gone, 

KiifsusiiiiitdH,  .  Spiil/iim,  l)itler-root,  . 

S/Siini,      .  .  S/agamdtiiis,  going  to  root-groun<l, 

Kii pii katuyflin, .  Itxu-n,  ciuniis.s-root,    . 

Sildmji,    .  .  Sddiilxlktiti^  hot, 

1\tj>o  mill  III,  .  Sitiiiii]),  gathering  l)erries,  . 

I'dii/uilx/iX''"'  •  .SX(/«f,s,  "exliausted  salmon," 

akuui,       .  .  Skiidi,  dry,        .... 

Kiitiii-i/\/iiteii,  hoiise-lmikling. 

Siisttku-n ,  .  Kcipndkualn,  snow,  . 


Dcceinlier  and  January, 
.lannnry  and  February, 
l-'ebniary,  &c. 
March. 
April. 
May. 
.lune. 
'.Inly. 
August. 
Septeniter. 
OctiilK'r. 

Noveiid)cr  and  December. 


I.     SKWALE  OR  NISQUALI.Y. 
K.   KAWELITSK  OR  COWELITS. 


J.    TSIH.VILISH  OR  ClllKAlLISlI. 
L.    NS1ETSH\WIIS  OR  KII.I.AMUKS. 


Of  these  four  tribes,  belonging  to  the  family  which  we  have  termed 
Tsihaili-Selish,  the  first  iidiabits  the  shores  of  Puget's  Sound,  the 
second  the  middle  of  the  penitisula  which  lies  west  of  this  sound  and 
north  of  the  Columbia,  tlie  third  is  settled  on  the  banks  of  a  small 
stream  known  as  the  Cowelits,  wliich  falls  into  the  Columbia  south  of 
Puget's  Sound,  and  the  fourth  is  apart  from  the  others,  on  the  sea- 
coast,  south  of  the  Cohnnbia.  They  differ  considerably  in  dialect, 
but  little  in  appearance  and  habits,  in  which  they  resemble  the 
Cliinooks  and  other  nciurhborinc  tribes.     Their  estimated  numbers 


212 


ETIINOGR  A  I'  II  Y. 


are  (or  rather  were  in  1H40)  for  the  Skwale,  (500,  the  TMihailisli,  2000, 
the  Kawolitsk,  UOO,  iiiul  \\w  Nsictsliawiis,  700.  Atiioii^  tlic  'I'siliui- 
lish  are  iiiclwcleil  tlio  Ivwaiiiiitl  iuul  the  Kweiiaiwitl  (corruptiHl  by 
tho  whites  to  Queen  llytlie),  who  live  near  the  coast,  tliirty  or  forty 
miles  soutli  of  Cape  Flattery,  and  wlio  have  each  a  peculiar  dialect. 


J.    s  A  II  .\  I'T  I  .\. 


M.      SAHAPTIN  OR  NEZ-PERCES. 


The  Sahaptin*  possess  the  country  on  each  side  of  Lewis  or  Snake 
River,  from  the  Peloose  to  tlie  Wapticacoes, — about  a  hundred  miles, 
— toifether  with  the  tributary  streams,  extending,  on  the  east,  to  the 
foot  of  the  Rocky  Mountains.  They  are  supposed,  by  the  mission- 
aries, to  number  about  two  thousand  souls.  In  character  and  appear- 
ance, they  resemble  more  the  Indians  of  the  Mis.souri  than  their 
neighbors  the  Salish.  They  have  many  horses,  and  are  good 
hunters,  being  accustomed  to  make  long  excursions,  in  summer,  to 
the  Rocky  Mountains,  for  the  purpose  of  killing  buffalo.  They 
formerly  had  blooiiy  wars  with  the  Shoshonees,  Crows,  Blackfoot 
Indians,  and  other  trii)es,  whose  hunting-grounds  were  in  the  same 
region ;  but  of  late  these  (piarrols  have  become  less  frequent. 

The  Sahaptin  are  the  tribe  who,  several  years  ago,  despatched  a 
deputation  to  the  United  States,  to  rc(iuest  that  teachers  might  be 
sent  to  instruct  them  in  the  arts  and  k-eligion  of  the  whites.  Their 
good  dispositions  have  been  much  eulogized  by  travellers,  and  there 
seems  to  be  no  reason  to  doubt  that  they  are  superior  to  the  other 
tribes  of  this  territory,  in  intellect  and  in  moral  qualities.  There  are, 
however,  certain  traits  in  their  character,  that  have  hitherto  neutral- 
ized, in  a  great  measure,  the  zealous  and  well-directed  efforts  which 
have  been  made  for  their  improvement.  The  first  of  these  is  a  feeling 
of  personal  independence,  amounting  to  lawlessness,  which  springs 
naturally  from  their  habits  of  life,  and  which  renders  it  almost  impos- 
sible to  reconcile  them  to  any  regular  discipline  or  system  of  labor, 
even  though  they  are  perfectly  convinced  that  it  would  be  for  their 
advantage.  Another  trait  of  a  similar  kind,  originating  probably 
in  the  same  cause,  is  a  certain  fickleness  of  temper,  which  makes 


•  There  is  some  doubt  ouicerning  the  projier  orthogmpliy,  as  well  as  the  meaning,  of 
this  term,  which  was  received  from  on  interpreter.  Tlii'  missionorie.s  ulwuys  spoke  ol" 
the  tribe  by  the  common  niime  of  Nvz-2>ercis. 


N  ()  U  T  It  VV  y.  S  T  K  II  N    A  .M  K  11  I  C  A. 


aiu 


them  liable  to  chiin'j;o  tlieir  opinions  and  policy  with  every  passing 
impulse.  These  (Icfects,  thougli  not  inconsistent  with  many  good 
qualities,  are  yet  exactly  of  the  kind  most  difficult  to  overcome. 
Until  the  Indians  can  be  brought  to  reside  in  fixed  habitations,  it 
is  evident  that  there  will  bo  little  opportunity  for  any  permanent 
improvement.  And  this  can  never  take  place  until  some  other  mode 
shall  be  adopted  by  them  for  procuring  their  clotliing,  than  that  to 
which  they  have  been  heretofore  accustomed,  namely,  the  chase,  and 
particularly  that  of  the  buffalo.  Cultivation,  though  it  may  supply 
them  with  fmxl,  only  solves  half  the  difficulty.  It  will  be  necessary, 
if  they  are  to  depend  on  their  own  resources,  that  they  should  be 
taught  to  raise  sheep,  and  manufacture  the  wool ;  but  to  do  this  will 
require  a  steadiness  of  application  altogether  alien  to  their  natural 
disposition. 


N.      WALAWAT.A. 
WAI.LAWALLAS,  PELOO.SE.S,  YAKE.MAS,  Kl.IKATATS,  ETC. 

The  territory  bordering  on  the  Columbia  for  some  distance  above 
and  below  the  junction  of  Lewis  River,  is  in  the  possession  of  several 
independent  bands  of  Indians,  who  all  speak  one  language,  though 
with  some  difference  of  dialect.  The  Wallawallas,  properly  so 
called,  are  on  a  small  stream  which  falls  into  the  Columbia  near  Fort 
Nez-perces.  The  Yakemas  (ladkenia)  are  on  a  large  stream  nearly 
opposite.  The  I'eloose  tribe  has  a  stream  called  after  it,  which 
empties  into  Lewis  River;  and  the  Klikatats  (T/.lokatat)  wander  in 
the  wooded  country  about  Mount  St.  Helens.  These,  with  other 
minor  bands,  are  supposed,  by  the  missionaries,  to  number  in  all, 
twenty-two  hundred  souls. 

They  resemble  the  Sahaptin,  to  whom  they  are  allied  by  language, 
but  are  of  a  less  hardy  and  active  temperament.  This  proceeds,  no 
doubt,  from  their  mode  of  life,  which  is  very  similar  to  that  of  the 
Salish.  Their  principal  fo(Kl  is  the  salmon,  which  they  take  chiefly 
in  the  months  of  August  and  September.  At  this  season  they 
assenible  in  great  numbers  about  the  Falls  of  the  Columbia,  which 
form  the  most  important  fishing  station  of  Oregon.  At  this  time, 
also,  tlu7  trade  with  the  Chinooks,  who  visit  the  Falls  for  the  same 
purpose. 

The  Sahaptin  and  Wallawallas  compress  the  head,  but  not  so 
much  as  the  tribes  near  the  coast.     It  merely  serves  with  them  to 

54 


314 


ETIINOaa  API!  Y. 


mnko  tlio  forehead  more  retrcatiiiir,  which,  with  the  n(niiline  nose 
common  to  tliese  natives,  gives  to  tliem,  occusionally,  a  pliysiof^nomy 
similar  to  that  represented  in  tlie  hieroglyphicnl  paintings  of  Central 
America. 

5.    w  A  1 1  r.  A  T  P  ir. 

O.      t'AILI-OUX,  OK  lAVl'SE. 

The  Wniihifpu  inhabit  the  country  south  of  the  Sahaptin  and 
Wallawalla.  Their  head-(iuarters  are  on  tlie  upi)er  part  of  the  Walla- 
walla  River,  where  they  live  in  close  connexion  with  a  band  of  Nez- 
perces,  whose  language  they  usually  speak  in  preference  to  their 
own,  which  lias  nearly  fallen  into  disuse.  They  are  a  small  tribe, 
not  numbering  five  hundred  souls,  but  they  are  nevertheless  looked 
upon  with  respect  by  the  tribes  around  them,  as  being  good  warriors, 
and,  what  is  more,  as  having  much  wealth.  As  their  country  affords 
extensive  pasturage,  they  arc  able  to  keep  large  droves  of  horses,  one 
of  their  chiefs  having  as  many  as  two  thousand.  They  arc  much  of 
the  time  on  horseback,  and  make  long  excursions  to  the  east  and 
south.  In  former  times,  they  waged  war  with  the  Shoshonees  and 
Lutuamis,  but  of  late  years  these  hostilities  have  been  suspended. 

I'.    MOI.KI.li. 

The  residence  of  the  Mokle  is  (or  was)  in  the  broken  and  wooded 
country  about  Mounts  Hood  and  Vanco\iver.  They  were  tiever  very 
numerous,  and  have  suffered  much  of  late  from  various  diseases,  par- 
ticularly the  ague-fever.  In  1841  they  numbered  but  twenty  indi- 
viduals; several  deaths  took  place  while  we  were  in  the  country,  and 
the  tribe  is  probably,  at  present,  nearly  or  quite  extinct. 

ti.   T  SHIN  i;  K. 

«.       WATI.AT.A,  OR  I'l'l'lCIl  (  IIINOOK. 

This  name  {Wut/.luhi)  properly  belongs  to  the  Indians  at  the 
Cascades,  al)out  one  hundred  and  fifty  miles  from  the  mouth  of  the 
Columi)ia  ;  but  for  want  of  a  general  appellation,  it  has  been  extended 
to  all  the  tribes  speaking  dialects  of  a  common  language,  from  Mul- 
tnoma  Island,  to  the  Falls  of  the  Columbia,  including  also  tliose  on 
the  lower  part  of  the  Willammet.     At  the  period  of  the  visit  of  Lewis 


> 


N  O  R  T  l»  \V  f;  H  T  r.  K  N    A  M  K  K  I  C  A. 


215 


and  Cliirk,  this  was  tlic  most  doiiscOy  pdimlatcd  piirt  of  tlio  whole 
Cohiinliiau  iT)j[i()ii,  ami  it  so  contiinuHl  until  tlie  fatal  year  IS'23, 
when  tlio  a^uo-fovi^r,  iK'tbro  unknown  west  of  the  Itoeky  Mountains, 
broke  out,  and  carried  ofl"  four-tilths  of  the  population  in  a  single 
summer.  Whole  villages  were  swept  away,  leaving  not  a  single 
inhabitant.  The  living  could  not  bury  iho  dead,  and  the  traders 
were  obliged  to  undertake  this  olfiec,  to  [jrevenl  a  new  |)estilenco  from 
completing  the  desolation  of  the  country.  The  region  below  the 
Cascades,  which  is  as  far  as  the  influence  of  the  tide  is  felt,  suffered 
most  from  this  scourge.  The  population,  which  before  was  estimated 
at  upwards  of  ten  thousand,  does  not  now  exceed  five  hundred.  Be- 
tween the  Cascades  and  the  Dalles,  the  sickness  was  less  destructive. 
There  still  remain  five  or  six  villages,  with  a  population  of  seven  or 
eight  hundred. 

They  were  formerly  considered  by  the  whites  as  among  the  "  orst 
of  the  Oregon  Indians,  and  were  known  as  a  rpiarrelsome,  thievish, 
and  treacherous  people  Their  situation,  on  the  line  of  communica- 
tion between  the  interior  and  the  coast,  gave  them  great  facilities  for 
trafficking  with  the  natives  of  each  for  tli<!  productions  peculiar  to  the 
other,  and  pretty  much  on  tlieir  own  terms.  Hence  it  happened  that 
they  superadded  to  the  turbulence  and  ferocity  natural  to  their  race, 
the  cupidity  and  trickiness  of  a  nation  of  traders.  They  levied  tribute, 
by  force  or  fraud,  on  all  who  passed  through  their  country,  and  tra- 
vellers were  generally  glad  to  be  ^uit  of  tlicm  for  a  few  thefts.  The 
great  reduction  of  their  numbers  by  the  epidemic  has  somewhat 
tameil  their  evil  propensities,  and  the  labors  of  the  missionaries  have 
not  been  without  a  good  effect. 


R.       LOWER  CHINOOK. 

Twenty  years  ago  there  were,  below  the  Multnoma  Island,  some 
five  or  six  thousand  people,  speaking  the  same,  or  nearly  the  same 
language.  The  principal  tribes  or  bands  were  the  Wakalkmn  (known 
as  the  Wahkyekum),  the  Katlamat  (Cathlamet),  the  'I'shinuk  (Chi- 
nook), and  the  Tlatsap  (Clatsop).  They  arc  now  reduced  to  a  tenth 
of  their  former  numbers,  and  the  remnant  will  probably  soon  dis- 
apiiear. 

This  people  may  be  considered  the  type  of  what  we  have  called 
the  North-Oregon  division,  being  that  in  which  all  the  peculiarities 
of  this  class  are  most  conspicuous.     Many  of  the  characteristics  of  the 


•no 


¥.T  II  N  uti  K  A  I'  II  V. 


IVtoiitjol  race  appear  in  tlii-ir  forms  aiul  loatiires.  Tlioy  nrc  .short  and 
Mipiarc-rraincil.  w  illi  hroad  laci's,  llal  noses,  and  ev't's  tiiriuHl  oliliipicly 
upward  at  tho  outer  lonuT.  Tlie  resemlilaiu'o  is  ucridoiitally  lieiylit- 
«iie<i  liy  llie  coiiieal  cap  wliieli  lliev  wear,  similar  to  that  of  tlie  ( 'lii- 
iiese,  and  whiidi  they  have  prohahly  adopted  as  u  ileleiice  aj^aiiisl  tlie 
lieavy  and  t'reipient  rains. 

It  is  amoii^  tliis  peopU>,  also,  that  tlie  eompressioii  of  the  skull  Ih 
(tarried  to  the  greatest  extent.  'I"he  ehdd,  s(M»n  after  birth,  is  laid 
upon  an  ohlon)^  pieco  of  wood,  .sometimes  ii  little  hollowed  like  a 
trou^li,  whieli  serves  for  a  cradle.  A  small  pad  or  eushion,  stutl'ed 
with  moss,  is  then  placed  upon  its  forehead,  and  fastened  ti^jjlitly,  at 
each  Hide,  to  the  hoard,  so  that  the  infant  is  unai)le  to  move  its  head. 
In  this  wr.y,  partly  hy  actual  compression,  and  partly  hy  preventin^r 
the  {growth  of  tho  skull  except  towards  tiie  sides,  the  desired  delormity 
m  |)riMluce(l.  A  profde  which  presents  a  straijrht  line  from  tho  crown 
of  tho  liead  to  the  t<ip  of  tho  no.se  is  considered  hy  them  tiie  acme  of 
beauty.  The  appearance  of  the  (diild  when  just  reloa.sed  from  this 
confinement  is  truly  hideous.  The  transvcrso  diameter  of  the  head 
alK>ve  the  ears,  is  then  nearly  twice  as  threat  as  the  lonifituilinal,  from 
tho  forehead  to  the  occiput.  The  eyes,  which  are  naturally  ileep-aet, 
become  protrudinj,',  and  appear  as  if  squeezed  |)artially  out  of  the 
head.  In  after  years  the  skull,  as  it  increa.ses,  returns,  in  some  det^ree, 
to  its  natural  shape,  and  tlu-  delormity,  thouijh  always  sulliciently 
remarkable,  is  less  shocking?  than  at  first.  Tho  children  of  slaves  are 
not  considered  lA  suHicieut  importance  to  undergo  Ibis  operation,  and- 
their  heads,  therefore,  retain  their  natural  form.  If  the  alteration  of 
shape  priHluced  any  important  ellect  on  the  intellectual  or  moral 
characteristics  of  the  peojile,  it  would  be  perce|)tible  in  the  ilitrerence 
lictsveen  the  slaves  and  tho  frooinen, — which  is  found,  however,  to  be 
very  slij^ht,  ai.  \  only  such  as  would  naturally  arise  from  the  distinc- 
tion of  cla.sscs.  The  slaves,  who  are  mostly  tie.scendaiits  of  prisoners 
taken  in  war,  are  of  a  tamer  and  less  (piarrelsonie  disposition  than 
their  masters,  whose  natural  |)ride  and  arrogance  is  increased  by  the 
habit  of  domineering  over  tluMn. 

'I'he  Chinooks  are  less  ingenious  than  the  natives  of  the  Northwest 
("oast,  but  are  far  superior  to  those  of  Calitoruia.  They  mak('  houses 
of  wide  and  tliick  planks,  whicli  they  chip  with  much  labor  from  the 
large  pines  with  which  their  country  al)ouiKls.  A  .single  trunk  makes 
one,  or,  at  the  nmst,  two  planks.  Tins  hou.ses  are  of  an  oblong  shape, 
with  two  lows  of  bunks  or  .sleeping-places  on  each  side,  one  above 


N  I »  U  T  II  W  K  S  r  i:  H  N    A  M  K  |{  I  ('  A. 


'in 


the  other,  like  IhtIIim  in  ii  Nliip.  TlitMr  cuikhis,  wliieh  iiro  nuule  ot 
hollowed  trees,  are  Moinetiiiies  of  yfretit  Ni/.e.  They  are  ol'  eley;iiiit 
slia|H!,  loh^r,  rmrrosv,  ami  Hharp,  and  are  li^'ht  oiiou^h  to  live  in  a 
roiif^h  Nea,  wliere  a  lioat  woidd  he  Hwainpoil;  h\it  they  re(|iiire  con- 
stant watehCnInesN,  to  miard  ajjainst  their  upsetting?.  The  hahits  of 
the  Cliinooks,  like  tliose  of  the  northern  eoasl-tri lies,  show  a  people 
aeeiistoined  to  derive  their  suhsistencc  from  the  sea,  and  averse  to 
wanderin^r  upon  land.  They  ditl'er  widely,  in  this  respect,  from  the 
Californiuns,  who  suhsist  u|ion  ucoriis  and  the  seeds  of  plants,  build 
temporary  huts  of  hrushwood  mid  straw,  and  are  constantly  on  the 
move  from  place  to  place. 

7.    K  A  I-  A  I'  I'  V  A. 


The  Kalaptiija  (or  Callapr-oyalm)  pos.scss  the  valley  of  the  Willam- 
mct*  above  the  Falls, — the  most  tortile  district  of  Oregon.  It  is 
included  between  the  two  ridges,  known  as  the  coast  range  and  the 
California  Chain,  and  is  watered  by  numerous  tributaries  of  the  main 
stream.  The  natives  were  formerly  numerous,  but  have  been  reduced 
by  sickness  to  about  five  hundred.  This  rapid  diminution  will  render 
nugatory  the  efforts  of  the  Ameri'-an  missionaries  to  improve  their 
condition,  in  which,  from  the  habits  and  character  of  tlie  natives, 
there  would  otherwise  have  been  some  reason  to  hope  for  success. 
The  Kidapuya,  like  the  lUnkwa.  hold  a  position  intermediate  between 
'the  wild  wandering  tribes  of  the  interior,  aud  the  debased,  filthy,  and 
(juarrelsome  natives  of  the  coast.  They  are  more  regular  and  quiet 
than  the  former,  aud  more  cleanly,  honest,  and  moral,  than  the  latter. 
They  shift  their  quarters  at  certain  seasons  for  the  purpose  of  pro- 
curing fotMj ;  but  could  their  wants  be  otherwise  supplied,  they  might 
easily  be  induced,  as  some  of  them  have  already  been,  to  adopt  a 
fixed  residence.  The  progress  of  disease,  however,  and  the  influx  of 
foreign  popidation  will  soon  supersede  the  necessity  of  any  further 
lalwrs  for  their  benefit. 


I 


•  As  this  word  has  Ukti  written  nnil  pronounced  by  foreigners  in  viirioii.s  ways,  it  may 
be  well  to  note  that  tlie  true  orlhogra|iby,  according  to  the  native  pronunciation,  would  br 
Wii/dmt,  in  two  syllables,  with  the  accent  on  the  la.Ht. 

55 


-S.ii^i':;idji'j^!Siii2::i^'i. . 


218 


ETHNOGRAPHY. 


S.T.     lAKON,  OK   YAKONES,   OK    SOtlTIIEKN    KlLLAMl'KS. 

A  small  tribe,  numbering  six  or  seven  hundred,  who  live  on  the 
coast,  south  of  the  Usietshawus,  from  whom  they  differ  merely  in 
language. 


Ih 


I 


9.  T.  LUTUAMl,  OK  T  L  A  M  A  T  L,  OK  CLAMET  INDIANS. 

The  first  of  these  names  is  the  proper  designation  of  the  people  in 
their  own  language.  The  second  is  that  by  which  they  are  known 
to  the  Chinooks,  and  through  them,  to  the  whites.  They  live  on  the 
head  waters  of  the  river  and  about  the  lake,  which  have  both  received 
from  foreigners  the  name  of  Clamet.  They  are  a  warlike  tribe,  and 
fre(]uently  attack  the  trading-parties  which  pass  through  their  country, 
on  the  way  to  California.  They  seem  to  be  engaged  in  constant 
hostilities  with  their  neighbors,  the  Shasties  and  Palaiks,  one  object 
of  which  is  to  obtain  slaves,  whom  they  sell  to  the  Waiilatpu,  and 
the  Indians  of  the  Willammet. 

10.  V.     .SASTE,    OK    SUA  STY. 
II.  W.     r  A  L  A  I  I!  .\l  II,    OK    I'ALAIKS. 

These  two  tribes  live,  the  former  to  the  southwest,  and  the  latter  to 
the  southeast,  of  the  Lutuami.  Little  is  known  of  them,  except  that 
they  lead  a  wandering,  savage  life,  and  subsist  on  game  and  fruit. 
They  are  dreaded  by  the  traders,  who  expect  to  be  attacked  in 
passing  through  tlieir  country.  Their  numbers,  however,  as  well 
as  ihose  of  the  Lutiiami,  have  been  of  late  greatly  diminished  by 
disease,  and  all  three  tribes  together  are  supposed  not  to  comprise 
more  than  twelve  hundred  individuals.  The  women  of  the  Saste, 
and  perhaps  of  the  other  tril)cs,  are  tattooed  in  lines  from  the  mouth 
to  the  chin.  In  Northern  California  the  same  fashion  exists,  amon" 
the  tribes  of  the  interior. 

Vi.     S  II  O  S  II  O  N  !•:  E  S,    OK    SNAKE    INDIANS. 
X.       SIIOSIIONI.  V.       WIIIINASHT. 

By  the  accounts  which  we  received,  this  is  a  very  widely  extended 
people.     The  SkosM/ii  and  I'dnasht  (Bonnaks)  of  the  Columbia,  the 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


219 


Yntas  and  Sampkhes  beyond  the  Salt  Lake,  tlie  Comanches  of  Texas, 
and  some  other  tribes  along  the  northern  frontier  of  Mexico,  are  said 
to  speak  dialects  of  a  common  language.  It  will  be  seen,  also,  that 
the  vocabulary  of  the  idiom  spoken  by  the  Netela  Indians  on  the  const 
of  California,  in  latitude  34^,  shows  evident  traces  of  connexion  with 
the  Shos!u')ni. 

The  country  of  the  Shoshonees  proper  is  south  of  Lewis  or  Snake 
River,  and  cast  of  the  Salt  Lake.  There  is,  however,  one  detached 
band,  known  as  the  Wihinaslit,  or  Western  Snakes,  near  Fort  Boirie, 
separated  from  the  main  body  by  the  tribe  of  Bonnaks.  The  Sho- 
shonees are  generally  at  war  with  the  Satsikaa,  or  Blackfoot  Indians, 
and  the  Upsaroka,  or  Crows.  The  usual  war-ground  of  the  three 
nations,  is  the  country  around  the  head  waters  of  the  Snake,  Green, 
and  Platte  Rivers.  Some  of  tlie  Shoshonees  have  horses  and  fire- 
arms, and  derive  their  subsistence  from  the  chase  and  from  fish. 
Others,  to  the  north,  have  no  horses,  are  armed  only  with  bows,  and 
live  on  acorns  and  roots;  tliese  the  hunters  call  Diggers,  and  consider 
the  most  miserable  of  the  Indians. 


i:».  Z.     S  A  T  S  1  K  A  A,    O  U    R  L  A  (J  K  F  O  O  T    INDIAN  S. 

This  is  a  well-known  confederacy  of  five  tribes,  occupying  an 
extensive  territory  in  and  near  the  Rocky  Mountains,  between  the 
head-waters  of  the  Missouri,  the  Saskatchawan,  and  the  Columbia. 
The  names  of  the  tribes  are  (1)  the  Satsikna  {Sutsi/:na),  or  Blackfeet 
proper;  (2)  ihv  Kriia  (in  the  singular  Kf/ie/iiiii),  ov  Blood  Indians; 
Qi)  tlio  Piekan  {Vielwii),  or  Pagan  Indians;  (1)  the  yJ/,v/«^/,  or  Fall 
Iniiians,  sometimes  called  Grox  Ventres  of  the  Prairie;  and  ("))  the 
Sarsi  (Svrsi),  or  Sussees.  The  name  of  the  coufeileracy,  as  given  to 
me,  was  Siks/ci'/.iKnia/i,  but  it  is  doubtful  whether  this  word  is  not 
derived  from  the  Cree  or  Knisteneau  language.  Of  the  five  tribes, 
the  first  three  speak  one  idiom ;  the  fourth  have  a  language  of  tiieir 
own,  of  which  we  possess  no  vocabulary  (except  the  very  scanty  one 
given  by  Umfreville),  and  the  fifth  speak  a  dialect  of  the  Chippe- 
wyan  (Athapascan),  allied  to  the  Tahkali.  Tiie  union  of  the  tribes 
is  a  matter  of  late  date,  within  the  memory  of  persons  now  living. 
The  Atsina  are  the  same  with  the  Arrapaluu^s,  and  formerly  lived  in 
the  plains,  but  have  been  driven  into  the  mountains  by  their  enemies, 
and  forced  to  ally  themselves  to  the  Blackfeet.     They  must  not  be 


220 


KTH  NO  (J  R  A  I'll  Y. 


confounded   with  the   "  Gros   Ventres  of  the   Missouri," — properly 
Minetari,  who  speak  the  Crow  lani^uage. 

A  few  years  since,  the  number  and  warlike  spirit  of  the  Blackfoot 
tribes  made  them  the  terror  of  all  the  western  Indians,  on  l)oth  sides 
of  tiie  mountiuns.  They  were  reckoned  at  not  less  than  thirty  thou- 
sand souls,  and  it  was  not  uncommon  to  hear  of  tliirty  or  forty  war- 
parties  out  at  once,  against  the  Flathead  (Salish),  the  Upsarokas  (or 
Crows),  the  Shoshonees,  and  the  nortiiern  Crees.  But  in  the  year 
J836,  the  small-pox  carried  off  two-thirds  of  their  whole  number,  and 
at  present  they  count  not  more  than  fifteen  hundred  tents,  or  about 
ten  thousand  people.  Their  enemies  are  now  recovering  their  spirit, 
and  retaliating  upon  the  weakened  tribes  the  ravages  which  they 
formerly  committed. 

NORTHERN    T  R  1  B  K  S. 

N  O  O  r  K  A. 

A  vocabulary  is  given  of  the  language  spoken  at  Newittee,  a  port 
much  frequented  by  fur-traders,  at  tiie  northern  extremity  of  Van- 
couver's Island.  It  proves  to  be  closely  allied  to  the  language  of 
Nootka,  of  which  we  have  about  a  iiundred  words  given  in  Jevvilt's 
narrative  of  his  captivity  among  that  people.  Nootka  is  about  a 
hundred  miles  southeast  of  Newittee.  By  Jewitt's  account,  it  appears 
that  the  same  language  is  spoken  to  the  southwest,  through  the  whole 
length  of  the  island,  and  also  by  "  the  Kla-iz-zarts,  a  numerous  and 
powerful  tribe,  living  nearly  three  hundred  miles  to  the  south." 
These  are  probably  the  Classets,  who  reside  on  the  south  side  of  the 
Straits  of  Fuca,  near  Cape  Flattery.  All  that  we  could  learn  of 
them,  and  of  their  eastern  neighbors,  the  CAalkms  (T/lalam)  was 
that  they  spoke  a  language  different  from  those  of  the  Chickailish 
and  Nis(jually  tribes.  We  might,  perliaps,  on  this  evidence,  add  to 
the  synopsis  and  map  the  Nootka  Familij,  comprising  the  tribes  of 
Vancouver's  Island,  and  those  along  the  south  side  of  Fuca's  Strait. 

S  U  K  W  A  M  K  S,    S  U  N  A  H  U  .M  E  S,    II  A  I  L  T  S    ETC. 

A  Canadian  trapper,  who  had  travelled  i)y  land  from  Fort  Nisqually 
to  the  month  of  Frazer's  River,  gave  me  the  names  of  the  tribes  that 
he  encountered  on  his  way.   They  were, — proceeding  from  the  south. 


I 


^ 


N  ()  R  r  II  W  !■;  S  'I"  E  R  N    A  M  E  H  I  C  A. 


SSI 


— the  Siikwdmes,  Sunahiimes,  Tshikdtstat,  Puinle,  and  tlie  KawHshin, 
which  last  are  upon  Frazer's  River.  He  said  that  there  appeared  to 
be  a  great  diversity  of  dialect  among  them,  a  statement  which  was 
afterwards  confirmed  from  other  sources.  But  of  their  affinities  with 
one  another,  and  with  the  surrounding  tribes,  we  could  obtain  no 
information.  From  this  point,  nothing  is  known  of  the  tribes  on  the 
coast,  until  we  arrive  at  Milbank  Sound,  in  latitude  52°.  A  brief 
vocabulary  of  the  language  spoken  by  the  Hailtsa  Indians  in  this 
sound  is  given,  as  furnished  by  a  gentleman  connected  with  the 
Hudson's  Bay  Company.  This  is  probably  the  tribe  which  Mac- 
kenzie met  after  leaving  Friendly  Village,  on  Salmon  River,  at  which 
point  he  remarked  that  a  different  language  commenced. 


' 


sou  T  H  E  U  N    T  R  I  n  E  S. 

The  statements  which  were  rf^eived  from  Indians  and  trappers 
concerning  the  tribes  south  of  the  Jakon  and  Umkwa  were,  in  general, 
consistent  as  regarded  their  names  and  positions,  but  differed  much 
with  respect  to  the  number  and  affinity  of  their  languages.  Imme- 
diately south  of  the  Jakon  are  the  Saitistkla,  upon  a  small  stream 
which  falls  into  the  sea  just  south  of  the  Umqua  River.  Next  to 
these  are  the  Ktltwdtshat,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Umqua,  and  higher  up, 
on  the  same  river,  the  TsalH.  South  of  the  Kiliwatshat  are  the 
Kdus  or  Kwokwnns,  on  a  small  river  called  by  their  name,  between 
the  Umqua  and  the  Clamet.  On  the  lower  part  of  the  Clamet  River 
are  the  Totutiine,  known  by  the  unfavorable  soubriquet  of  the  Rogue 
or  Rascal  Indians.  Beyond  these,  the  population  is  very  scanty, 
until  we  arrive  at  the  valley  of  the  Sacramento,  all  the  tribes  of  which 
are  included  by  the  traders  under  the  general  name  of  Kinkla,  which 
is  probably,  like  Tlnmatl,  a  term  of  Chinook  origin.  According  to 
one  account,  the  Saiustkla,  Kiliwatshat,  Tsalel,  and  Kaus,  speak  one 
language ;  according  to  another,  two ;  and  a  third  informant  gave  to 
each  tribe  a  peculiar  idiom.  This  will  serve,  as  one  instance  out  of 
many,  to  show  ttie  impossibility  of  arriving  at  any  certainty  concern- 
ing the  athnities  of  different  tribes,  without  an  actual  comparison  of 
vocabularies. 

The  next  point  at  which  we  have  any  distinct  information  about 
the  natives  is  on  tlie  plains  of  the  Sacramento,  about  two  hundred  and 
fifty  miles  from  the  mouth  of  that  river,  where  it  was  first  seen  by 
the  exploring  party  from  the  squadron,  on  their  way  from  the  Co- 

50 


222 


ETHNOG  R  A  V  U  Y. 


lunibia  to  San  Francisco.  This  was  about  sixty  miles  south  of  the 
Shasly  country.  Mr.  Dana,  to  whom  I  owe  tlie  vocabulary  which  is 
given  of  this  languajre,  observes,  in  his  note  to  me:  "The  natives 
seen  on  reaching  the  Sacramento  plains,  resemble  the  Shasty  Indians 
in  their  regular  features.  They  have  thick  black  hair  descending  low 
on  the  forehead,  and  hanging  down  to  the  shoulders.  The  faces  of 
the  men  were  colored  with  black  and  red  paint,  fancifully  laid  on  in 
triangles  and  zigzag  lines.  The  women  were  tattooed  below  the 
mouth.  They  were  a  mirthful  race,  always  disposed  to  jest  and 
laugh.  They  appeared  to  have  had  but  little  intercourse  with  fo- 
reigners. Their  only  arms  were  bows  and  arrows, — and  in  trading 
they  preferred  mere  trinkets,  such  as  beads  and  buttons,  to  the  blan- 
kets, knives,  and  similar  articles  which  were  in  request  among  the 
northern  Indians." 

Still  farther  south,  about  one  hundred  miles  above  the  mouth  of  the 
Sacramento,  Mr.  Dana  obtained  vocabularies  of  the  dialects  of  four 
tribes, — the  Puzhune,  Sekamne,  T.iamak,  and  Talatui.  He  says  of 
them : — "These  Indians  have  the  usual  broad  face  and  flattened  nose 
of  the  coast  tribes.  The  mouth  is  very  large,  and  the  nose  broad  and 
depressed.  They  are  filtliy  in  their  habits  and  stupid  in  look,  like 
the  Chiuooks.  Throughout  the  Sacramento  plains  the  Indians  live 
mostly  on  a  kind  of  breati  or  cake  made  of  acorns.  The  acorns,  after 
the  shell  is  removed,  are  spread  out  and  dried  in  the  sun,  then 
pounded  with  a  stone  pestle  to  a  fine  powder,  and  afterwards  kneaded 
into  a  loaf  about  two  inches  thick,  and  baked.  It  has  a  black  color, 
and  a  consistency  like  that  of  cheese,  but  a  little  softer;  the  taste, 
though  not  very  pleasing,  is  not  positively  disagreeable." 

Five  vocabularies  are  given  of  idioms  spoken  by  the  natives  of 
California,  who  were  formerly  under  the  control  of  the  Spanish  mis- 
sions. The  first  of  these  was  taken  at  San  Rafael,  on  the  north  side 
of  the  bay  of  San  Francisco,  in  about  latitude  38°  10'.  The  second 
is  of  La  Soledad,  near  the  coa.st,  in  latitude  36°.  The  third  of  San 
Miguel,  about  fifty  miles  to  the  southeast  of  the  last-mentioned.  The 
fourth  of  San  Gabriel  (the  KiJ),  in  latitude  34° ;  and  the  fifth  of  San 
,Iuan  Capestrano,  (the  Netela,)  twenty  miles  further  down  the  coast. 
The  "  missions"  are  large  s(piare  enclosures,  surrouniied  by  high 
walls  of  adobes  or  unburnt  bricks.  Around  the  inside  are  cells,  which 
.served  as  dormitories  to  the  natives.  The  latter  were  collected  at 
first,  partly  by  persuasion  and  partly  by  tbrce,  into  these  missions, 
and  employed  there  in  agriculture  and  various  simple  arts,  in  which 


t 


I 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


823 


i. 


they  were  instructed  by  the  priests,  and  the  artisans  who  were  at- 
tached to  the  establishments.  There  was  also,  to  each  mission,  a 
guard  of  soldiers,  who  had  the  double  duty  of  protecting  the  inmates 
from  the  attacks  of  hostile  Indians,  and  preventing  the  converts  from 
escaping.  When  the  debased  character,  limited  intelligence,  and 
wandering  habits  of  the  Californian  aborigines  are  considered,  it 
would  certainly  seem  that  this  plan,  of  confinement  under  constant 
superintendence,  was  the  only  one  which  could  have  been  adopted 
for  their  improvement,  with  any  chance  of  success.  It  nevertheless 
failed.  The  natives  did,  indeed,  acquire  some  knowledge  of  civilized 
arts,  and  even  of  letters,  but  the  great  change  in  their  habits,  and  the 
mode  of  life  so  alien  to  their  natural  disposition,  had  a  fatal  effect 
upon  their  constitutions.  Many  more  died  than  were  born,  and  it 
was  necessary  frecjuently  to  recruit  their  numbers  by  fresh  captures, 
or  by  purchasing  slaves  of  the  tribes  in  the  interior.  Within  the  last 
ten  years,  most  of  tiie  missions  have  been  broken  up,  partly  in  conse- 
quence of  the  political  changes  which  have  taken  place  in  the  country. 
Of  the  inmates,  some  fled  and  rejoined  their  savage  brethren,  but  the 
greater  number  linger  about  the  towns,  subsisting  on  charity,  or  by 
laboring  for  the  Mexican  settlers. 

These  five  languages  are  only  a  few  oP  those  which  are  spoken  in 
Upper  California.  It  is  a  remarkable  fact  that  while  the  interior  of 
the  country  west  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  is  occupied  by  a  few  ex- 
tensive families  (Tahkali,  Selish,  Sahaptin,  and  Shoshoni),  the  whole 
coast,  from  the  neighborhood  of  Behring's  Strait  to  Cape  St.  Lucas, 
is  lined  with  a  multitude  of  small  tribes,  speaking  distinct  idioms.  A 
few  of  these,  as  the  Tsihailish,  Kwalhio(iua,  and  Nsietshawas  are 
allied  to  the  families  of  the  interior,  but  tiie  greater  number  are  en- 
tirely unconnected,  both  with  these,  and  with  one  another. 

In  general  it  has  been  remarked  that  where  popular  report  has 
represented  a  barbarous  population  as  speaking  a  multitude  of  dissi- 
milar languages,  subsequent  researches  have  greatly  diminished  their 
number.  Instances  of  this  might  be  noted  particularly  in  Australia 
and  in  the  territory  east  of  the  Rocky  Mountains.  In  Oregon,  how- 
ever, the  contrary  has  occurred,  and  the  variety  of  idioms  has  been 
found  to  be  much  greater  than  was  anticipated.  Probably,  as  has 
been  before  remarked,  no  other  part  of  the  world  offers  an  example  of 
so  many  tribes,  witii  distinct  languages,  crowded  together  within  a 
space  so  limited. 

If  we  might  suppose  that  the  hordes,  which,  at  different  periods, 


:  ^,. 


224 


KT  II  NOU  K  A  I'  II  V. 


overran  the  Mexican  plateau,  had  made  their  way  through  this  terri- 
tory, wo  miirht  conclude  that  tlie  numerous  small  tribes  there  found 
were  the  scattered  remnants  of  these  wandering  nations,  left  along 
their  line  of  march,  as  they  advanced  from  the  frozen  regions  of  the 
north  into  the  southern  plains.  This  conjecture  ac(|uires  some  weight 
from  two  facts,  which,  though  of  a  dissimilar  character,  both  bear 
upon  this  point.  The  first  is,  that  such  a  progress  is  now  going  on, 
particularly  in  the  interior  plains,  where,  according  to  the  testimony 
of  the  most  respectable  traders  and  hunters,  all  the  tribes  are  slowly 
proceeding  towards  the  south.  The  Shoshonees  formerly  inhabited 
the  country  of  the  Blackfeet,  and  there  are  old  men  among  the  former 
who  are  better  acquainted  with  the  defiles  and  secret  passes  of  that 
country  than  the  Blackfeet  themselves.  At  the  same  period,  the 
territory  east  of  the  Salt  Lake,  now  occupied  by  the  Shoshonees, 
was  in  the  possession  of  the  Bonnacks,  who  have  been  thrust  by 
them  partially  into  the  southwestern  desert.  The  Shyennes,  the 
Kaiawas,  and  the  Comanches,  were  mentioned  as  another  instance  of 
the  same  kind.  This  movement  is  easily  explained  as  resulting  from 
the  superior  energy  and  prowess  of  the  northern  tribes,  together  with 
the  general  desire  of  attaining  a  more  fertile  country  and  genial 
climate. 

The  other  circumstance  alluded  to  is  the  singular  manner  in  which 
tribes  speaking  allied  languages,  are  dispersed  over  this  territory,  in  a 
direction  from  north  to  south.  Taking,  for  example,  the  Selish  family, 
we  have  the  Shoushwaps  on  Frazer's  River,  and  at  Friendly  Village, 
in  latitude  53°  30' ;  the  Flatheads  and  Pisiiuous  on  the  Upper  Colum- 
bia; the  Nisqually  about  Puget's  Sound  ;  the  Cowelits  and  Chikailish 
beyond  these ;  and  a  single  tribe,  the  Nsietshawas  or  Killamuks,  quite 
separate  from  the  rest,  south  of  the  Columbia,  below  45°.  A  yet  more 
striking  instance  is  found  in  what  we  have  termed  the  Tahkali-Umqua 
family.  The  Tahkali,  or  Carriers,  are  closely  allied  to  the  Chippe- 
wyans,*  who  are  spread  over  the  whole  northern  portion  of  the 
American  continent,  from  Hudson's  Bay  to  the  vicinity  of  Behring's 
Strait.     On  comparing  together  the  vocabularies  of  the  Oregon  tribes, 

*  These  must  not  Ijc  confounded  with  the  ('hi|){)cways,  or  Ojibwaig,  who  belong  to  a 
diflbreni  .slock.  Mr.  Gallatin,  in  hi.s  i;reut  work,  the  "Synopsis  ol"  thn  Indian  Tribes," 
has  assigned  to  the  (.'hip|>cwyaris  and  Carriers  the  general  name  ofAthupascas,  derived 
from  the  original  designation  of  a  lake  and  district  in  the  central  part  of  the  country  which 
they  occupy.  The  Tahkali-Umquft  must  therelbru  I/  regardc^d  as  u  subdivision  of  the 
.\lhnpascnn  family. 


f 

6 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


996 


it  became  apparent  that  the  languages  spoken  by  the  Kwalhioqun,  a 
small  band  who  live  in  the  wooded  country  north  of  the  Columbia, 
the  Tlatskanai,  a  similar  tribe  south  of  that  river,  and  the  Umquas, 
in  latitude  43°  N.,  must  all  be  referred  to  the  same  widely-extended 
family. 

The  hypothesis  which  is  offered  in  explanation  of  these  facts,  rilust, 
of  course,  be  considered  as  a  mere  speculation,  until  it  shall  be  con- 
firmed by  the  discovery  of  a  resemblance  between  the  languages  of 
Oregon  (or  some  one  of  them)  and  those  of  Mexico.  The  latter  are 
known  to  be  numerous,  and  about  twenty  have  been  reduced  to 
writing  by  the  Catholic  missionaries.  Of  the  grammars  and  dic- 
tionaries'which  they  have  composed,  several  have  been  printed,  but 
the  greater  number  are  still  in  manuscript.  Many  of  the  latter  are 
preserved  in  Europe,  either  in  public  libraries,  or  in  private  collec- 
tions. Our  own  materials  for  comparison  are  limited  to  a  few  pub- 
lished works,  in  six  of  the  principal  idioms,  between  which  and  the 
languages  of  Oregon,  no  similarity  is  apparent.  This  result,  however, 
need  not  discourage  any  one  from  pursuing  the  investigation  with 
regard  to  the  remaining  tongues,  especially  those  spoken  in  the  north 
of  Mexico.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that  future  inquirers,  with  better  oppor- 
tunities, and  more  extensive  materials,  may  be  able  to  arrive  at  some 
definite  conclusion  on  this  point,  which  must  be  considered  as  one 
of  the  most  interesting  questions  connected  with  the  history  of  the 
aboriginal  races  on  this  continent. 


57 


I 


PHILOLOGY 


PHILOLOGY. 


POLYNESIAN    GRAMMAR. 


A  COMPARATIVE  GRAMMAR  OF  THE  POLYNESIAN  DIALECTS. 


INTRODUCTORY  REMARKS. 


It  has  seemed  advisable,  for  several  reasons,  to  throw  the  mate- 
rials which  have  been  collected  for  the  purpose  of  elucidating  the 
structure  of  the  Polynesian  dialects  into  the  form  of  a  Comparative 
Grammar.  By  this  mode,  the  various  idioms  are  brought  together  in 
such  a  way  that  the  points  of  resemblance  and  of  distinction  among 
them  all  are  perceived  at  once.  The  changes,  also,  which  the  general 
language  undergoes,  in  passing  from  one  group  to  another,  are  thus 
made  apparent,  and  the  principles  which  govern  these  changes,  being 
once  discerned,  will  prove,  it  is  believed,  of  no  little  importance  to 
the  science  of  philology.  It  happens,  moreover,  in  many  cases,  that 
what  is  doubtful  and  obscure  in  one  dialect,  is  elucidated  by  a  com- 
parison with  others, — tlie  mere  ju.xtaposition  being  often  sufficient  for 
this  purpose.  Fkiidly,  by  this  form,  as  the  repetition  of  the  same 
rules  and  explanations  for  different  dialects  is  avoided,  the  whole  is 
brought  into  a  much  smaller  space  than  would  otherwise  be  possible, 
with  greater  convenience  of  reference,  and  no  loss  of  clearness. 

The  materials  Which  have  been  used  in  drawing  up  the  Grammar 
and  Lexicon  consist  (in  addition  to  the  collections  which  our  oppor- 
tunities enabled  us  to  make)  of  the  translations  made  by  the  mission- 
aries in  seven  of  the  principal  dialects,  namely,  the  Samoan,  Tongan, 

56 


■^IWIW 


2.10 


Pit  1 1,<)  I, on  V. 


Now  Zealand,  Karotongnn,  Mnn^arovaii,  Tahitian,  and  Hawaiian — of 
manu8crij)t  (grammars  and  vocabularies,  furniNlicd  to  un  also  by  the 
missionaries  in  some  of  tbe  islands — and  of  printed  workn  of  the  same 
kind,  relating?  to  four  of  tbe  dialects.  Of  the  MSS.,  the  most  irniior- 
tajit  are  a  brief  jjraininar  of  tbe  Sainoan  by  Mr.  Heath,  missionary  at 
tbe  Naviirator  Islands,  and  a  vocabulary  of  the  language  from  Mr. 
Mills,  of  the  same  group; — the  first  part  of  a  grammar  of  the  Tongan 
(as  tiir  as  tbe  pronouns)  from  Mr.  Ilalwne  of  Tongatabu,  a  vocabulary 
of  tbe  Nukubivan  from  Mr.  Armstrong  of  Honolulu,*  and  one  of  the 
Mangarevan  dialect  from  M.  Maigret,  formerly  missionary  nt  the 
Gambler  lsland,s,  pud  now  resident  at  Oahu.  Of  printed  works,  the 
only  ones  wbicb  have  been  of  much  service  are  the  Grammar  of  the 
Tahitian,  published  in  19*23,  by  the  missionaries  at  the  Society  Group, 
tbe  invaluable  Hawaiian  vocabulary  of  Mr.  Lorrin  Andrews,  and  the 
notes  on  tbe  peculiarities  of  this  language,  by  the  same  gentleman, 
in  the  Hawaiian  Spectator,  for  October,  1838.  These  publications, 
however,  have  i)een  rather  consulted  than  copied,  the  rules  and 
examples  given  in  the  following  pages  having  been  drawn  almost 
entirely  either  from  manuscript  notes,  or  from  the  translations.  Mar- 
tin's Vocabulary  of  tbe  Tongan,  and  Lee's  of  the  New  Zealand 
dialect  have  been  used  in  preparing  tbe  Lexicon.  All  that  is  given 
concerning  the  lang\iagesof  Fakaafo  and  the  Paumotu  Group  rests  on 
the  authority  of  tbe  writer,  as  likewise  the  remarks  upon  the  pronun- 
ciation of  tbe  various  dialects.  A  familiarity  with  the  general  struc- 
ture of  the  Polynesian  speech,  and  with  the  minuter  peculiarities  of 
some  of  the  dialects,  which  was  acquired  during  three  years  spent 
among  tbe  islands,  and  devoted  chiefly  to  this  study,  has  much 
facilitated  tbe  work  t)f  compiling  the  Grammar,  and  may,  perhaps,  be 
considered  as,  in  some  degree,  a  guaranty  for  its  general  correctness. 


*  hi  Ihn  first  draft  of  thu  Grammar,  this  voonbiiliiry,  with  one  obtained  at  Tahiti,  Crom 
n  iiiilivr  (iCraliiiata,  and  Ihr  article,  by  Iho  Kcv,  William  1'.  Alexander,  in  the  Hawaiian 
Siicciiiliir  (cir  .laiiiiary,  I'^MH,  enlilled  tlu!  "  .Mari|ii(siun  and  Hawaiian  DiaU^ot.s  Com- 
pared," liirnisbed  all  Iho  inliirniation  which  wc  |H>ssc.ssed  relative  U>  the  Nukuhivan 
dialect.  .More  ample  nmlerialM  liir  jjiviiii;  a  complete  accoimt  of  that  idiom  hove  since 
been  obtained  in  the  MSS.  of  Mr.  Crook,  refern'd  to  on  page  136  of  this  volume,  and  in 
the  "  lAltres  siir  Us  Iks  Miin/iiises,  par  le  I'.  .Mothius  G  *  *  *"  (Gracia  !),  published 
at  I'aris,  in  1843. 


GRAMMAR 


OF   THE    POLYNESIAN    DIALECTS. 


O  U  T  II  O  G  R  A  P  H  Y. 


5  i.  The  elementary  sounds  proper  to  the  Polynesian  languages 
are  fifteen  in  number,  namely,  the  vowels  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  and  ten  conso- 
nants, y;  k,  /,  vt,  n,  y,p,  .V,  t,  V. 

The  only  dialect,  so  far  ns  is  known,  in  which  all  these  letters  are  found  is  that 
spoken  in  the  two  groups  of  Fnknafo  and  Voitii|)U.  In  the  other  dialects,  some  of  these 
letters  ure  dropped  entirely,  and  others  changed. 

In  Snmonii,  the  k  is  dropped,  its  place  being  merely  indicated  by  a  hiatus  or  catching 
of  the  breath,  as  ali'i  for  lUiki,  'd'ano  for  kiikano. 

In  'riitigaii,  the  k  is  retained,  but  the  s  is  changed  to  h,  as  luihake  for  sasake,  alio  for 
aso.  The  t  in  this  dialect,  where  it  precedes  i,  has  a  sound  not  unlike  the  English  ch,  or 
like  li  in  Ckristian ;  the  missionaries  have  represented  this  sound  by  a  _;',  as  jiito  for 
tinu  (pron.  chinn). 

'I'he  .New  Zealand  dialect  changes  the  s  to  h,  the  /  to  r,  the  v  to  w,  and  the/,  before  a 
and  e  to  if,  beforn  o  and  u  to  /i,  and  liollire  i  commonly  to  w,  but  sometimes  to  h ;  as 
heke  for  sckc,  ivaka  for  viikn,  tvarv  for  fale,  vetCt  for  fitii,  hoc  for  foe,  huri  for  fuli,  witi 
for _/?<«,  and  hia  for  fia.  If  two  f's  occur  in  the  same  word,  preceding  an  a  or  an  e,  the 
first/is  usually  changed  to  iv,  and  the  second  to  h  ;  as  ica/ia  for  Jii/u,  iceltc  fiir  J'efe. 

The  dialects  of  Karotonga  and  Mangareva  lose  both  tlic/and  the  «  entirely,  and  have 
r  instead  o(  I ;  as  are  for  fale,  ae  (i)r  sue. 

The  Paumotuan  has  the  same  elements  ns  the  New  Zealand,  except  that  the/ is  some- 
times heard  in  place  of  the  w.  Many  of  its  words  assume  |)cculiar  forms  unlike  those  of 
any  otlier  dialect ;  as  mateu  for  matoit,  tnauiia  for  maua.  The  k  is  sometimes  intro- 
duced in  words  where  it  does  not  pro|wrly  belong,  as  reko  for  reo,  voice  j  kakicenei  for 
akuenei,  soon. 

The  Tahitian  dispenses  with  both  k  and  ;  ;  the  s  is  changed  to  h  ,•  the  /  before  a  and 


232 


P  H  I  I,0  LOG  V. 


f  is  rommonly,  Ihoiigli  not  always,  rrtnincd ;  l)etbrc  i,  o,  mill  u,  it  is  replaced  by  h ;  the 
r  also  is  used  inslcnd  of/;  as  <iri'i  lor  a/iki,  rat  for  lii)ji,/a'a  or  ha'a  for  ^(Art,  AoK 
for  foil. 

Ill  Hawaiian,  /'and  s  am  changed  to  h,  y  becomes  «,  v  is  used  for  v  (ihongh  the  sound 
is  |)ro|H^rly  internKMliate  betwei-n  the  two),  and  the  k  is  dropped,  as  in  Samoaii  niid 
Tahitian ;  as  hnle  I'lir/ulc,  lani  for  Itiyi,  wci'a  for  vaka. 

The  Nnkuhivnn  varies  in  dilTerent  islands,  and  even  in  different  districts  of  the  same 
island.  In  Tahiiata  and  the  other  sonthcrn  islands,  the  /  is  retained,  the  y  liecomes  «, 
and  the  k  is  fa-qucntly  oniilted.  In  Nukiihiva  and  the  rest  of  the  northern  cluster,  the 
/is  changed  to  //,  the  k  is  retained  (except  at  the  Ix'ginning  of  words,  when  it  is  omitted 
or  pronounced,  at  the  pleasure  of  the  speaker),  and  the  y  licconies  /-,  except  with  the 
people  of  one  district  (the  Taipis),  who  give  it  its  true  sound.  In  all  the  islands,  the  I 
(or  r)  is  omitte<l,  or,  at  least,  is  very  rarely  used.  Thus  wc  have,  in  Tahuata,  fili,  fiie 
(for  hae),  htina  (for  hatja),  and  /iiivai'i  (for  Stivaiki) ;  in  Niikuhiva,  hiti,  hie,  hnkii  (or 
with  the  Taipis  luiija),  and  luivaiki. 

)  2.  The  following  table  will  show  the  number  of  consonantal 
elements  in  each  dialect,  and  the  permutations  which  they  undergo 
in  passing  from  one  to  another.  The  hiatus  caused  by  the  omission 
of  tiie  /i  is  represented  by  an  inverted  comma.  An  omission  of  a 
letter  which  does  not  cause  a  hiatus,  or  sensible  break  in  the  pronun- 
ciation, is  denoted  by  a  dash. 


F 

F 

F      1 

V;  11 

— 

— 

Wot  F;  H 

F;  11 

H 

For// 

K 

» 

A- 

K 

A- 

A' 

K 

' 

1 

A' 

L 

L 

L 

R 

R 

R 

R 

R 

L 

R 

M 

M 

M 

M 

M 

HI 

M 

M 

M 

M 

N 

N 

N 

N 

N 

N 

N 

N 

N 

N 

n 

II 

n 

n 

n 

n 

n 

— 

y 

n  or  A'  or  .V 

p 

r 

For  B 

p 

r 

p 

p 

P 

p 

P 

s 

s 

11 

H 

— 

— 

11 

11 

11 

H 

T 

T 

T    ■ 

T 

T 

T 

T 

T 

T 

T 

V 

V 

V 

w 

V 

V 

For  IV 

V 

w 

V 

)  3.  Besides  the  regular  permutations  above-noted,  there  are  others 
which  occasionally  take  place  between  different  dialects. 

F  is  occasionally  commuted  to  i'  or  u- ;  as  fusi,  Sam.,  a  place,  becomes  in  Tahitian 
ViiJti,  and  in  Hawaiian  wiihi ;  and  sometimes  to/),-  as  Joe,  Tonga, /wr,  N.  Z.,  a  ball. 

The  /  is  .s<inietiines  changed  to  n;  as  nimii,  Tong.,  (or /i ma,  live;  nini,  Haw.,  and 
nit.  Tall.,  for  liiji,  to  pour ;  niinii,  Sam.,  for  li'i/i'i,  or  Uktliki,  siiiall. 

The  Tongan  fretpietitly  drops  the  /  altogether,  as  akau  for  liikau,  tree ;  ryu  for  lepa, 
turmeric  ;  aiki  for  tiJiki,  chief. 

The  Tongan  has  sometimes  an  h  where  the  other  Polynesian  dialects  have  no  corre- 


P  O  I,  V  N  E  S  I  A  N    G  R  A  M  SI  A  R. 


233 


spoiuliiif;  olompiil  ;  in  siioli  ciiaos,  the  Viti.m  liiis  oflrii  n  i"',  mid  the  Rotumnn  nil  s  ;  ns 
mo/ii;  'rong.,  mrx't;  KM,,  ?nose,  Rot.,  miie,  .Sum.,  et  cct.,  to  sleep. 

A'nnil  t  are  sometimcH  inlcrclinnged  ;  ns  tula.  Haw,,  kiiru,  Rar.,  to  drop;  wiki,  \. 
7.,,  U'iti,  Haw.,  quickly. 

\  4.  The  vowels  uiuiergo  but  few  changes,  and  those  chiefly  in 
consequence  oFtlie  permutations  of  the  consonants. 

The  syllnlilp./c,  wli<;;i  it  commonc?s  a  word,  and  is  unaccented,  is  changed  in  Hawaiian 
to  ho  ;  usfrtd,  star,  Ixu'omes  hotii ;  fcnu/i,  country,  hnntui. 

The  omission  of  tli(!  k  and  /  produces  some  changes,  lor  which  no  determinate  rule 
can  bo  given  ;  ns  mai\i,  Tah..  banana,  lor  nicika  ;  mcnc,  Nuk.,  sacred  place,  lor  marae. 

'Vhen  a  vowel  is  repeated  in  Samoan,  with  an  s  botwren  (as  nsa,  esc,  isi,  &c.),  or  in 
Toiigan  with  nn  h,  the  other  dialects  frequently  drop  the  interposed  consonant,  and 
contract  the  two  vowels  into  one  ;  as  'usa,  Sam.,  kulia,  Tong.,  burning,  becomes  in  Man- 
garcvan  ki,  and  in  Hawaiian  'rf  ;  'cse  or  kclic,  other,  becomes  in  N.  Z.  ke,  Tah.,  't,- 
viusu,  to  whi8|>cr,  becomes  mil,  &c. 

The  causative  prcfi.x,  which  in  Toiigan  is  fuka,  in  Samoan_/'(V;,  in  Tnhitian  J\Ca  and 
}uCa,  becomes  in  Hawaiian  h(Ca  or  lm\t,  most  commonly  the  latter. 

The  diphthong  ia  in  Tongan  frequently  becomes  ic,  and  uii  is  changed  to  uo  ;  as  Jie, 
to  desire,  for  Ji<i  ;  Itio,  a  pit,  for  Imi.  In  this  dialect,  also,  when  a  word  is  doubled,  nn 
alteration  frequently  tnkes  pince  in  the  vowel  of  the  first  part ;  aafdofoUi  for  Jbldfola. 

i  5.  No  Polynesian  dialect  makes  any  distinction  between  the 
sounds  of  b  and  j),  d  and  /,  g  and  k,  I  and  ;•,  or  v  and  w.  The  /,  more- 
over, is  freijuently  sounded  like  d,  and  the  /  like  k. 

The  missionaries  have,  in  general,  iiinde  use  of  the  mutes  k,p,  nnd  t,  instead  of  the 
corresponding  sonants.  In  the  Tongnn,  however,  the  l>  is  employed,  nnd  in  Tnhitian 
and  Rarotongan  the  letters  h  and  d  were  at  first  occosionally  used  ;  ns  medua  for  metua, 
rolo/iu  lor  rolopii,  &c. ;  nt  present,  we  Ix'lievc,  the  missionaries  have  decided  upon 
employing  only  the  p  and  t. 

The  sound  of/  is  rarely  heard  in  the  New  Zealand  pronunciation,  nnd  that  of  r  in  the 
Tongan  ;  in  all  the  other  dialects  both  these  sounds  are  used  indiscriminately.  The 
missionaries  have  adopted  the  /  in  Samonn  and  Hawaiian,  nnd  the  r  in  Tnhitian  and 
Rarotongan.     In  Vitiaii  and  Rotuman  I  and  r  are  distinct  sounds. 

The  sound  of  t'  is  most  usual  in  Samoan,  Tongan,  Rarotongan,  and  Tnhitian, — that  of 
ir  in  the  New  Zealand,  Pniimotunn,  and  Hawaiian. 

In  all  the  dialects  the  /  (or  r)  is  frt^quently  so  pronounced  as  to  have,  to  the  enr  of  a 
stranger,  a  sound  very  similar  to  d  ;  FaleiiUli,  the  nnme  of  a  town  in  Samoa,  is  gene- 
rally soumled  Faleaiiili ;  riri  in  New  Zealand  is  pronounced  didi  ;  raro  in  Tahitian 
has  the  sound  of  darn ;  and  HUo,  the  name  of  n  district  in  Hawaii,  is  usually  pronounced 

m/o. 

The  confusiim  in  the  pronunciation  of  ^  and  t  is  not  uncommon,  oven  in  those  lan- 
guages in  which  both  the  sounds  are  met  with  as  distinct  elements.  In  Fakaafo  <diti 
was  heanl  for  ii/iki,  and  in  New  Zealand  and  I'aumotu  arili.     In  Hawaiian,  the  natives 

50 


(J 


•^ 


pt 


234 


PHILOLOGY. 


ninkc  110  disliiiolion  l)otwccn  the  t  nnil  k,  and  tlic  niissionnrios  Imve  ndoptcd  tlio  latter, 
tlioufili  im|)ro|n'rly  (as  the  flcmcnt  is  really  tlu'  Polynesian  I),  in  the  written  langnngc. 

In  Kaknalb,  Paiiniotu,  and  Tahiti,  wo  occasionally  heard  the /changed  to  a  sound  like 
that  1)1"  irli  in  what ;  as  ir/iiiic  for  farr,  oirliaiiha  Cor  i>/d/ii,  \c.  This  may  serve  to 
show  llic  process  hy  which  Inith  the  ir  and  the  h  have  Ix'cn  substituted,  in  some  of  the 
dialects,  (or  llie  /,•  as  in  New  Zealand,  iviilni  t'or/n/u,  Arc. 

At  Fakaafo,  we  also  lVe(|uently  heard  the  s  pronounced  like  a  strongly  aspirated  /(, 
as  h'(i  lor  sa,  sacred.  A  similar  sound  is  scmietiines  given  to  the  h  in  New  Zealand  and 
Tahiti,  as  in  /loiji  or  hoi  (in  Sanioan  so}ji),  to  salute  hy  pressing  noses,  which  some  have 
supposed  to  be  pronounced  shoiji,  shoi.  In  tact,  the  Samoan  s  is  a  dental  letter,  ap- 
proaching, in  the  pronunciati<in  of  some  natives,  very  nearly  to  the  sound  of  ,s/«. 

In  Samoan  the  n  was  occasionally  eoiifoundi'd  wiili  the  ij,  particularly  where  both 
occuri'ed  in  the  same  word ;  thus  we  heard  nuuioiji,  iiunjoyi,  and  maijoni;  maniitdtji 
and  tiKniulinji,  \-c. 

In  Fakaafo  the  word  iijiJa  was  sometimes  heard  as  ikCii;  in  Nukuhivan,  os  has  been 
already  stated,  among  some  of  the  tribes,  this  change  of  ij  to  k  is  constantly  made. 

^  6.  In  all  the  Polyne.sian  dialects  every  syllable  must  terminate 
in  a  vowel ;  and  two  consonants  are  never  heard  without  a  vowel 
between  them. 

This  rule  ailmits  of  no  exception  whatsoever,  and  it  is  chiefly  to  this  peculiarity  that 
the  soilness  of  these  languages  is  to  be  attributed.  The  longest  syllables  have  only 
three  letters — a  consonant  and  a  diphthong — and  many  syllables  consist  of  a  single  vowel. 

J  7.     Most  of  the  radical  words  in  the  Polynesian  are  dissyllables. 

The  simple  prepositions,  the  articles,  and  a  very  few  other  words,  arc  monosyllables. 
Words  of  Ihrco  or  more  syllables  are  usually  derivatives  or  compounds. 

Ij  8.  The  accent  is  commonly  laid  on  the  penultimate  syllable;  in 
some  instances,  however,  it  is  found  on  the  antepenultimate,  and  in 
some  on  the  final  syllable.  These  cases  have  generally  been  noted  in 
the  vocabularies. 

When  a  syllable  is  postfixed  to  a  word,  the  accent  is  usually  shiflcd  forward ;  as  itc, 
to  know,  in  the  passive,  iciu;  toe,  to  remain,  toegu,  Kar.,  toiiia,  I  law.,  and  toea,  Tah., 
remainder. 

Sometimes  a  dilferencu  of  meaning  is  indicated  by  a  change  of  accent ;  as  nuuidva, 
Sam.,  the  belly,  and  mdnciva,  to  breathe ;  nuiraimi,  Rar.,  the  moon,  and  mdramti,  light. 
In  Hawaiian,  tatidtti,  man,  makes  in  the  plural,  na  tanala,  men. 

V  9.  The  following  examples  will  show  the  changes  which  words 
undergo  in  passing  from  one  dialect  to  another. 


POLYNESIAN    GRAMMAR. 


235 


FAK. 

foe 
JiU 

toga 

sinu 

vai 

lama, 

ika 

laiji 

soiji 

sakii 

vaka 
folc 

f'lf"- 
kupciju 

aliki 
Jaiiiiii 
ttijuija 


fnc 
Jiti 
loija 
sinu 
vai 
lama 
tV{ 
laiji 
soiji 
sa\i 
va'a 
faU 
fafa 
'iijioja 
Jininjalo 
aWi 
faniia 
luJUija 


T-  NO. 

foe 
fui 

toija 

hina 

vai 

lama 

ika 

hniji 
liaka 
vaka 
falc. 


N.  Z.  *  FAU.    RAR.  a.  MAN. 

hoe 
reiti 


totja 

ilia 

iiai 

rama 

ika 

raid 

hoiji 

tiaka 

uaka 

ware 

ivaha 
kiijieija     kupetja 
Jinaijalo  hiiiaijaro  inanaro 
eiki  nriki         ariki 

fimua      ueniia      ciiua 
tufiiija     tuhuija      tauya 


oe 

Hi 

ioija 

hina 

vni 

rama 

ika 

raiji 

oiji 

aka 

vaka 

are 

vaa 

kiijicna 


TAIL  HAW.  Nt'K. 

hoc  hoc  hoc 

hili  hiti  fui  or  hiti 

ioa  tona  toija  or  toka  or  lona 

hina  hina  hina 

vai  tvai  vai 

rama  lama  ama 

i\'  i'a  ika 

rat  lani  aiji  or  aki  or  ani 

hoi  honi  huki,  >Scc. 

ha^a  ha'a  haka 

va''a  tva'a  vaka 

fare  hale  fac  or  hoe 

vaha  icaha  fafa  or  halia 

''ujiea  'apena  kuprka,  &c. 

himniro  hinanalo hinaktm 

ariH  ali'i         aiki 

hciiiia  humui      hvnwi^  iVc. 

tahkaiV)  tahima    titlmka,  tuhuna 


ETYMOLOGY. 

^  10.  The  dialects  of  Polynesia  have,  properly  speaking,  no  gram- 
matical inflections.  The  only  changes  which  words  undergo  are  by 
affixed  particles,  or  by  the  reduplication  of  one  or  more  of  their 
syllables. 

Particli'S,  both  affixed  nnd  separate,  play  a  great  part  in  all  these  idioms.  They  may 
be  divided  into  three  classes, — particles  which  (piulily  nouns,  verbal  particles,  and  con- 
junctives.  In  the  former  are  included  the  articles,  certain  demonstratives,  the  signs  of 
case  and  of  nunibcr,^-of  the  first  of  which  we  i)rocecd  to  speak. 


T  H  i;    A  IITI  C  L  K. 

tj  11.  There  are,  in  most  of  the  dialects,  two  articles,  one  of  which 
is  definite,  and  at  the  same  time  singular,  and  the  other  indefinite, 
and  prefi.xed  either  to  the  singular  or  the  plural. 

In  the  dialect  of  Faknafo  the  definite  article  is  tc,  and  the  indefinite  se  or  he  {s  and  h 

being  used  indiscriminately) ;  as  ua  lelci  tc  tama,  good  is  the  boy;  sc  nuita,  an  eye ;  he 

iufitija  koe  f  art  thou  a  priest  ? 

In  Samiian,  the  articles  are  le  and  se;  le  tapata,  the  man ;  sc  taijata,  a  man. 

In  Tongnn,  there  appear  to  Ik;  but  two  articles,  a  and  lie.     The  former  is  used  before 

pro|>er  names  and  pronouns,  and  becomes  ae  (probably  for  a  he)  before  common  nouns  ; 

as.  Ilea  toki  lea  a  Jesu,  and  then  Jesus  said;  a  liano  tehina,  his  brother;  bea  tie  ttiku  ki 


236 


PHILOLOGY. 


1, 


iii  <ic  Idiititii,  niul  lio  plnccd  thoro  ihr  mnn.  This  ac,  when  joined  with  nnotiicr  pnrticle, 
ns  a,  of,  mi>,  iiiiil,  iVc,  Ixjcomos  simply  r,  ns,  lie  yaiie  ac  Mrsin,  the  works  of  tho  Mes- 
siah ;  ke  Ho  nc  Met  moc  Aovi,  to  know  jjood  niul  evil.  lie  properly  answers  to  sc  in 
Snnioaii,  but  it  has  also  the  meaning  of  the  dclinitc  article  in  Knglish,  as  in  one  of  tho 
examples  given  above. 

'rimt  on  article  tc  once  existed  in  this  dialect  we  may  infer  from  its  (ircscnce  in  some 
of  the  nuMiorals,  as  Icknu.,  one  score — mi  iin-kdu,  two  score  ;  te-kumi,  n  measure  often 
fathoms  [line  dizaine), — tola  iju-kiimi,  twenty  fathoms ;  iciiii,  a  hundred,— ;/«  genu,  four 
hundred,  to-. 

[The  missionaries  moke  two  definite  articles,  a  andr,  "the  former  used  l)efore  the 
nominative  when  the  verb  is  neuter  or  intransitive,  and  the  latter  where  it  is  active  or 
transitive."  This,  however,  is  an  error,  the  result  of  another  error,  namely,  the  failure 
to  distinguish  between  the  active  and  possive  states  of  the  verb.  The  e  is  merely,  as  in 
all  the  other  Polynesia<i  dialects,  the  pre|K)sition  hij  (Latin  a  or  a/))  before  the  ablative. 
The  sentence  licii  tahiuikii  akinnutnlu  c  lie  Otiia,  and  God  blessed  them,  means  properly, 
and  they  were  blessed  by  God.  Much  confusion  has  arisen  from  this  source,  in  the 
missidimry  translations  into  this  language.] 

In  llie  diolect  of  New  Zealand  the  orticlcs  are  te  and  lie;  in  those  of  Tahiti,  Rarotonga, 
Mangoreva,  and  Nukuhiva,  //•  ond  e. 

The  Hawaiian  has  for  its  indefinite  article  he;  for  the  definite,a  double  form,  te  and  ta. 
The  former  is  used  before  all  nouns  commencing  with  t,  ond  before  many  commencing 
with  ('  and  o;  some  olso  which  begin  with  p  have  te  for  their  article.  Other  nouns,  with 
some  few  exceptions,  hove  to.  No  noun  takes  both,  unless  with  some  change  of  mean- 
ing, which  makes  it  o  ditlerent  word,  as  tii  iiho,  sticks  for  thatching,  te  alio,  tho  breath. 

The  only  other  dialect  in  which  Ui  is  found  os  an  article  is  that  spoken  in  the  small 
island  of  Vino  or  Inmier,  one  of  the  New  Hebrides,  but  inhabited  by  a  Polynesian  tribe. 
In  a  brief  vocabulary,  obtained  by  the  Rev.  J.  Williams,  (on  his  last  cruise,  just  Iteforo 
li.s  nuirder  at  that  group,)  this  article  occurs  several  times,  ns  ta  kiini,  the  breadfruit ; 
tn  one,  the  earth  ;  tii  faiiuii,  the  country. 

In  New  Zealand,  n  is  frecjuently  used  before  pro|)er  names  and  |)ronouns ;  as  iitio  ka 
kite  a  Jcsii,  when  .lesus  saw  ;  akoe,  thou ;  aia,  he. 

In  Rarotoiigan,  the  a  also  occurs,  though  not  so  frequently  as  in  New  Zealand  j  as 
nnmiiti  alii  ru  a  Jesu,  Jesus  went  before;  aiii,  he. 

It  is  |)crha|)s  to  this  article  that  we  must  refer  the  a,  which,  in  all  the  dialects,  comes 
Ix'twecn  the  prepositions  At  and  i,  and  tlie  projwr  name  or  pronoun  following;  as  kia 
Piu,  to  I'ea ;  kia  ia,  to  him. 

In  .Mongarevon,  a  preceding  a  noun,  with  an  adverb  of  place  after  it,  is  UFcd  as  a 
demonstrative ;  it  is  perhaps  this  some  article; — nokii  a  tanuiriki  ara,  that  c'lild  {the  child 
t/irri)  is  mine ;  ii  mea  nci,  this  thing  (the  thing  here). 

[It  six-nis  likely  that  the  Polynesian  had  originally  thret;  articles,  namely,  te  for  the 
singular,  ija  for  the  plural,  and  sc  indefinite.  The  first  has  lxH!n  changed  in  .Snmoan  to 
/(',  in  Tongan  it  is  replaced  by  tho  particle  a,  eonnecteil  with  the  indefinite  he,  and  in 
Hawaiian  it  becomes  generally  ta.  These  changes  are  (icrhaps  the  result  of  a  desire  for 
euphony,  for  as  te  was  not  only  an  article,  but  a  relative  pronoun,  and  a  sign  of  tho 
futun;  tense,  its  fre(|uenl  re|X!tition,  particularly  in  public  s[H>aking,  was  likely  to  be 
olli-nsive  to  the  fastidious  audiences  of  Samoa,  Tonga,  and  Hawaii,  in  all  of  which  great 


P  O  I.  Y  N  E  S  t  A  N    G  R  A  M  M  A  R. 


'237 


nltcnlinn  is  pniil  by  \hv  liij;li.>r  rldsscs  to  I'l;?  nrls  nf  orntury.  In  Tahiti,  the  nttcn)pt  to 
avoiil  tliis  rcpoliiioii  has  led  nu'rely  to  the  l('iiij;lh(niiig  nf  thn  rchitivc,  wliidi  is  pro- 
noiiiiccil  Iri.  'J'hat  Ir  is  properly  an  article  of  iiiiily,  there  pan  Ik;  no  doubt.  It  never 
precedes  a  iionii  in  the  plural,  unless  where  this  lias  n  colleotivn  sense;  thus,  tc  tanald, 
in  Hawaiian,  may  mean  either  "the  man,"  or  "mankind,"  or  the  "  party  of  men," 
(spoken  of  before ;)  but  in  tiic  latter  case  it  would  usually  liavo  some  collective  particle 
nfter  it,  as  tii  man  taiKttii,  or  to  poc  ttuiatii.  It  is,  perhaps,  connected  with  the  numeral 
tahi,  one,  wliicli  in  Uoluniun  becomes  til,  and  in  Tarawan  Ir. — As  regards  the  <i,  in  the 
Tongan,  New  Xealand,  ami  Karolongan  dialects,  it  would  ixnhaps  Ik.'  more  proper  .0 
consider  it  not  an  article,  but  rather  a  particle  similar  to  the  nominative  sign  /o  (vide 
§  17),  and  used  when  that  cannot  be  employed,  viz. :  before  the  nominative,  when  it  is 
in  the  middle  of  a  sentence,  and  before  the  accusative  generally.] 

)  12.  Besides  the  two  articles  above-mentioned,  all  the  dialects 
have  other  words  which  may  bo  included,  though  with  less  propriety, 
in  the  same  class.  They  arc  mostly  such  as  are  commonly  termed 
in  English  indefinite  pronouns. 

In  tijamoan  these  are  sn,  some  one;  7usi,  some  (pi.);  siiin,  some  (partitive);  isi, 
other;  setasi,  one,  some  one  ;  Ictasi,  a.  certain  one,  another;  ctasi,  some,  several,  other; 
as  s(i  linjiitii,  some  man  ;  nisi  lininlii,  some  men  ;  siiia  rai,  some  water ;  Ictasi  alii,  a 
certain  chief;  ctttsi  ii/ii,  certain  chiefs. 

In  Tongan,  lui,  some  one,  any  one  ;  foe,  a  single  one ;  >ii/ii,  some  (pi.) ;  ettiha,  certain, 
other;  as  liii  tnijatn,  some  man  ;  J'lic  itiii,  i\  single  cocoa-nut  ;  ki  he  matatahi  elaha,  to 
the  other  side. 

Ill  the  New  Zealand  dialect,  titii/ii,  some  one,  a  certain  one,  another, — pi.,  ctiihi;  ua/ti 
or  tcifdiii,  some  (partitive). 

In  l{arolongan,  liliii,  some  one,  another, — pi.  clai;  triai  pac,  some,  a  portion  of. 

In  Maiigarevan,  Uii,  one,  other ;  ma,  some, — as  ma  vai,  some  water  (but  used  rather 
in  the  sense  •■'"    ^'ve  me  some  water"). 

In  I'aimiotuaii,  r  liumai  tc  wahi  kniiiu'  nnku,  bring  here  some  water  for  me. 

In  Tahitian, /('  htx\  some  one,  a  single  one  ;  ttahi,  one,  other, — \i\.ri'tahi;  ma  or  maa, 
some,  a  iiortion  of;  as  tvlim'  ri,  an  apple;  ria/ii  ea,  another  road;  maa  jnijie,  some 
water ;  maa  malai,  some  w iiid.  iSoineliines  this  last  has  another  article  before  it,  as 
liomai  elahi  a  If/ioc  maa  pajH',  give  me  some  water. 

[We  have  also  maa  henna,  a  piece  of  ground,  a  field, — in  Rarotongan  maija  enua. 
Maa  and  maija  mean  also  f<x)d.  The  origin  is  probably  from  the  Tongan  ma,  to  chew  ; 
hence,  a  mouthful,  a  morsel.  Thus  in  Tonga  they  say,  ynai  ma  kava,  give  me  some  kava, 
or  a  morsel  tif  kava.     In  I^iiglish  we  say,  in  like  inamier,  a  little  bit,  a  mere  morsel.] 

In  Hawaiian,  wo  have  Uilii  or  lilalii,  and  irahi ;  as  tahi  or  tetahi  tanata,  a  certain 
man;  nahi  laau,  some  iIiuIxt;  tr  in/hi  ttij)a,  some  cloth. 

In  Nukidiivan,/r/(i/i(,  some  one,  a  certain  one,  as  titahi  iiiii,  a  cocoa-nut ;  io?ia,  some 
one,  as  Itmii  a,  some  day. 

fin  the  liiregoing  list, /(•/(///(',  r/.v/zi,  &n.,  are  from  the  numeral  one ;  /or ,  Tong.,  Aoe, 
Tab.,  means  properly  a  mass,  lump,  or  tmll  (vide  vocab.  vc-rb.  toe) ;  icahi  is  from  fasi, 
Sam.,  to  divide,  and  means  a  division,  a  portion  :  pac  is  [«rhaps  a  corruption  of  the  same 
word.] 

60 


23S 


P  H  I  1.  O  l,0(i  V. 


Til  t;  sr  US  TV  \t  i  v  k. 


i  13.  Till'  <jroii(ler  is  clistini.niislietl  citlior  by  the  iisc  of  entirely 
dilJ'cront  words,  as  tomd,  Sam.,  t'atlior,  find,  inotliir;  or,  more  gene- 
rally, by  tlie  use  ol  words  signifying  male  and  female. 


iSani.    liipi'  liDir,  ix  cnck  |iigeoii 

Tun;;.  In/ixi  liuii\  a  ilrukc 

\.  Z.   tiipiiiKi  fiuic,  II  graiul  lilt  her 

\.  Z.    koi'iirr/ic  lixiriuni,  n  iiialc  lx.'nst 

Knr.     iiiitiiiiliinc,  a  liilhcr 

'("ah.    huiiiM  tune,  a  son-in-law 

Tall.    piiiKi  oiti,  a  boar 

Haw.   Liin  tunc,  a.  lio-goat 

Niik.    iiKiii  iiIkiiiii,  a  cock 

Niik.    })ii(ik(i  tixi,  a  ling 


/iijxj't'/itic,  a  lien  pigpoii 

tii/ini/ii/im;  a  duck 

tiipiiiiii  ir<i/ii/ic,  a  grnntlmotlicr 

hdrarrlif  itW(i,a  fi'inalc  boast 

iiiihid-viiinr,  a  niollicr 

liiDKxi  vii/iinc,  a  (laugliter-iii-Iaw 

jiiiiiu  iihd,  a  sow 

k(io  itiihiiic,  a  sli(;.goat 

moil  viihinv,  a  lien 

]>iiiil,ii  tijii,  a  sow 


^  14.  The  plural  is  frequently  left  witliout  any  mark  to  distin- 
guish it  from  the  singular.  In  this  case,  the  plurality  must  be 
inferred  from  the  general  course  of  the  conversation  or  narrative. 
When  it  becomes  necessary  to  mark  the  distinction,  there  are  several 
modes  of  doing  it; — 1st,  in  some  of  the  dialects,  by  an  indefinite  or 
demonstrative  or  [)ossessive  pronoun  prefi.xed,  as  )iisi  tmjuta,  Sam., 
some  men;  omt  toi,  liis  axes;  era  tvare,  N.  Z.,  those  houses;  '2dly,  in 
most  of  the  dialects,  by  the  form  of  the  adjective,  as  raaii  raiti,  Tah., 
large  tree,  pi.  raaii  rarahi,  large  trees;  3tlly,  by  .some  numeral  or 
adjective  signifying  number.  These  three  methods  will  be  further 
illustrated  hereafter.  Finally,  the  most  general  manner  of  denoting 
the  plural  is  by  means  of  particles,  most  of  which  have  a  collective 
sense,  prefixed  to  the  noun. 

Ill  I'akaalii  wu  heard  iii,  knu,  and  tiii  used  liir  this  |Hir[Nw;  as  >ii  no,  clouds;  kiiii 
j>u,  .shells  :  /(■  tiiifdlr,  the  houses. 

In  Saiiioaii  the  plural  signs  arc  «i,  an,  iiiou,  liti,  ijulu,  titii,  ijii.  Ai  is  also  u.scd  lor 
some,  as  )ii  a  oiiloit,  some  I'or  you  ;  but  it  morc  ollen  has  u  general  signilicalion,  na  e  le 
u/n  liii-ii  III  Idijiilti,  men  shall  not  li-e.  'i'his  panicle  dcK's  not  admit  an  article  ln'fore  it. 
Nai  is  used  in  ihe  same  way  lor  a  small  numlier,  as  iiai  in  dun,  two  fishes.  An  is 
useil  for  a  class  or  collictioii :  moil  and  Ini  lor  a  multitude;  tjnlu  lor  women  and 
ebildrc'ii  ;  lOu  is  only  used  beiiire  words  sigiiilyilig  country,  isl.and,  district,  and  the  I'kn,  as 
ti:  lUu  nun,  the  towns.  Ihi  is  found  onl_\  in  the  numerals,  as  srfula,  ten,  selaii,  lu.ndi-ed  : 
loll/  f/a/n/u,  thirty;  I'liii  ijii  /mi,  three  hundred.  It  should  bo  ob.served  that  the  words 
nil,  niou,  Ini,  ijiilii,  iifii,  are  considered  to  be  in  the  singular,  and  would  take  a  singular 
pronoun  ;  as  /n/iii  mini  injr/u,  his  angels  (properly,  bis  coiii|iony  of  angels)  :  iniii  iiihIo 
would  signify,  his  angels,  in  a  general  seli.se. 


.1 


1'  ( )  I,  \  N  K  S  I  A  N    (J  11  A  M  .M  A  It. 


239 


In  'I'ciiifiHii  we  Imvc  no'i,  iin/ii,  /:iiii,  liiim, Jiiiiii,  fitij'iii,  iitii.  Oijo  is  used  only  in  the 
ilu:il,  anil  in  liict  sii|)|ilii.s  the  |ilii<-<'  cil'  llii'  woril  Iwii,  lliiiiij;li  il  prcvtMli's  the  noun,  while 
till.'  niiniiTiil  MiMild  rolliivv;  iis /.«■  oijh  (//,■<(«,  the  mo  Ii'its.  Iliilii  is  tin:  niiist  i»i'iicrnl 
plunil  sijjii,  US  /,7*'  iKiliidkdiiy  Ihi;  irccs.  It  is  (|nrsliipniiMi'  wlicllicr  this  U?  di^rivcd  from 
thu  phu'iil  ai'ticli!  nn,  wliicli  wu  I'lnd  Iktci  only  in  cLTtiiin  nunitTiils,  us  imkiimi,  ijii/mu, 
pc<tu,  till!  plurals  ol' /il.iiini,  lihiiii,  and  tcau  (v.  anti!  §  11).  Kdii  has  the  same  moaning 
as  «/(  in  SiiMiDim,  as  bx'  /,iiii  fiifiimi,  ihe  wurknu'n  (i.  e.  ii  parly  cmpjoyt'd  tc)i;othnr).  It 
dues  nut  always  nial<c  the  wiird  to  which  it  is  |ircli.\i-'d  plural,  hut  sometimes  retains  its 
independent  siiinillc  alinn  of  <'ompany,  hand, — as  /.«•  /can  viihd,  the  erew  of  a  vessel. 
Tiiivi  has  a  similar  liirci^  I'aiyi  means  a  (lock  or  herd,  and  is  iis('d  only  of  the  lower 
animals  as  km'  fni/a  /iw.da,  a  herd  of  swine ;  koc  Jaijii  mitit,  a  (lock  of  (i)wls.  Fiiijui 
applies  only  to  hirds,  as  kiic  Jiiifiii  lu/ie,  a  (light  of  pigi.'ons.  Otii  is  the  sumo  with  alu 
in  SanKjan,  as  koi:  ulu  inolit,  the  islands.  Note.  Tumiilii,  child,  makes  liimaiki  in  the 
plural,  atid  Ultiiui,  younyer  brother,  Xma  futo  prefi.xed  to  it;  us,  ko  huku  Jhto  tehi/ia,  my 
youn;^er  hrolhers. 

N(.w  Zealand.  This  dialeet  has  hut  one  plund  sign,  ;w,  which  never  takes  un  article 
UMIire  il,  as  ki  yd  Inlui  o  yii  tiitini,  to  the  sif^ns  of  tlu^  times.  Kaii  is  used  in  some 
compounds,  as  Ic  kiiiniintiKi,  X\v\  ancestors,  the  ancients. 

'I'lie  Uurotongan  lias  pukr,  ijn,  (iroijii,  an,  iii,  and  di.  Puke  is  only  for  a  small 
niindjer,  nnd  chielly  in  iIk'  ilual,  as  Id  ididi  jutkc  kiqieijd,  their  (two)  nets;  >)(i  is  ulso 
for  a  limited  nnmher,  and  is  commoidy  used  with  a  numeral,  as  ya  tulnii  (iriiiic,  five 
talents;  it  never  has  the  article  heliire  it.  Amyd  and  dii  are  collectives  in  fre(|uent  use, 
— td  rdldii  iiriiyd  kiijii'yd,  their  (several)  nets  ;  Ic  aroyii  dyr/o,  the  angels ;  tc  rciiii  an 
tidiliid,  those  things.  Ui  is  a  collective  applied  to  persons,  us  tc  id  itriki,  the  princes  ; 
tv  III  liiiiija  viiniii,  the  chief  priests.  Ai  occurs  only  with  words  expressive  of  relation- 
ship, as  tdkii  di  tmhiii,  >iiy  parents;  lokii  ui  hiiii/ir,  my  sisters.  We  find  iirotjii  used 
also  independenlly,  as,  liiai  iiriiyd,  some;  /c  dioya  i  la,  those  who  killed. 

'I'he  only  plural  particle  ccailaiui'd  in  our  Maiii,'arevan  vocabulary  is  mini,  us  a  mini 
tayiild  lid,  alt  men  ;   hut  others,  no  doubt,  exi>t  in  the  laiiiiuage. 

The  Tahitian  has  iki,  mini.  Inn,  pnc,  and  hiii.  Sii  denotes,  in  general,  a  small 
plurality,  two  or  three,  as  iiu  miliiii,  the  parents,  fiither  and  mother ;  nil  tiiata,  the  men, 
a  small  number;  hut  il  muy  denote  a  great  numlxT,  when  it  is  unccrt.'iin.  Mini  is  an 
unlimiteil  plural,  us  iinif  tdiitii,  men;  mini  mrtiiii,  parents,  in  genernl.  Tun  denotes  a 
small  indelinile  plurality,  as  iiiln  ira  tun  liintii  lii,  hut  lew  men,  two  or  three.  Pnc  and 
/(('('  arc^  colb.rlives,  as  pni'  iiiii,  the  royal  family,  or  principal  chiefs;  ])iic  rniitira,  the 
body  of  subordinate  chiefs ;  hiii  nrii  and  hni  rdiitini  have  nearly  the  same  meaning ; 
hul  Ji  lie  hinfn  seems  an  exception,  us  being  mtn-e  limited;  hni  lioii  is  a  general  word  for 
friends,  [The  loroi;oing  is  extracted  from  the  Tahitian  (irummar  of  the  Knglish  mis- 
sionariis;  on  referring,  however,  to  the  translations,  by  the  same  authors,  we  find  the 
pnc  anil  nil  used  very  much  as  jnikr  and  iid  in  Karotongan,  as  tnojiili  jmi:  liiuln,  two 
men  ;  nn  lii/ciii  crinni,  live  lalenls.  Il  should  lie  observeil  that  mi  is  never  preceded  by 
the  article,  while  all  the  rest  admit  of  this  construction.] 

In  Hawaiian,  the  plural  signs  are  mi,  mini,  jioc,  pur,  unil  pnn,  JSii  is  the  most 
common,  and  expresstM  a  plural  indefinitely  large  ;  as,  na  nuinn  o  tti  k-uii,  the  birds  of 
the  air.  Mnn  does  not  apply  generally  to  a  great  number,  rarely  more  than  ten.  7'or 
restricts  the  noun  to  a  particular  company  or  set  of  |iersons  or  things  spoken  of,  as  ta 


240 


I'll  I  I.O  I.O(i  Y. 


poc  Iciti  sijjiiifios  oillipr  the  children  (bri'oro   mcntidncil),  or  cliildrpn,  ns  cnnlrniliRtiii- 


Ri« 


islicd  fruiii  adults. 


\(ir  nnci  jiiiii  nn"  tiscti  very  imicl 


jHir, 


but  more  srldcuii  ;  In 


pir  iiiiKi  0  J/iiiniii  mi  .siuiiilii  s  tin-  };riiii|i  of  llawiiiiiin  i^lniids.     AW,  iis  in  llic  Talii- 
ti.'ili,  (lillrrs  (Voin  llic  olliiT  |iiirliclrs  in  not  takinii  nn  iirticlc  U'liirr  it. 

rill  y»*'.     y<i  is  used  as  in  flawaiian,  ns 


III  Niiliiiliivan,  wi'  liiiil  nn,  /< 


III,  iitiiii  or  iiiiiii,  a 


)iii  kiiiuilii  iiiiiliii,  yuod  nii'ii ,'  liiii  is  a  jji'iirral  rollirlivi'  sij^ii,  as  /,</  iinii  If  Inn  hut  nir  Ic 
Inn  Inn',  hr\W' 


iilnlin.-li( 


mid  111 


Kill 


[ill 


iiltor 


ui 


mnn  IS  a|i|>lit'u  to  a  small 
rciuliTcd  liy  .Mr.  tVimk  a  pair,  as  r  iiinn  knhni,  n  pair  ol'  car-rings;  jhx  signifies  a  com- 
pany, as  Ir  juH'  Inliinin,  llic  artisans, 

['I'lic  partii'le  ijn,  as  lKli>ri'  riiDarknl,  appears  to  Ix-  the  proper  plural  article  or  prefix 
of  the  iVilynesian  dialects.  All  the  other  words  were  originally  collective  nouns.  Kiin 
(or  'an)  seems  to  mean  properly  a  parcel,  or  hunch.  It  is  probably  the  root  of  llie 
Tongnn  tckaii,  n  score.  Knn-nji  means,  according  to  Mariner,  a  parcel  of  yams,  twenty 
in  number.  Pnkc  or  pn'c  is  a  lienp,  or  hillock.  Mnn  has  perhaps  the  same  meaning, 
and  may  Ik-  the  root  of  the  word  mnntjtt,  moimlaiii  ;  indeed,  the  .Mangarevan  has  inoii, 
signifying  hill.  Tniin  is  from  In,  to  stand,  and  means  any  thing  whicli  stands,  and 
hence  any  thing  piled  up — a  heap,  n  innund.  I'nijni,  /mi,  ni,  are  from  the  ISamoon 
/mi  (or  more  commonly  /»»//('.<()  to  bind  in  a  bundle, — hence,  n  sheaf  or  bundle  of  any 
thing,  /'or,  in  Hawaiian,  seems  to  lie  from  tlie  Tongnn /«•,  a  mass,  lump,  or  ball, — from 
which  the  Tahilian  makes  both  its  article  le/nic  (ante  §  Iv!)  and  the  word  y)w,  pearl.  I'oc, 
in  New  Zealand,  means  a  ball,  I'n'n,  Haw.,  means  a  small  round  hill,  a  protuliemncc ; 
hnopn'ii  is  to  heap  up.  [Vide  Pnkn  in  Le.x.J  In  colloquial  I'lnglish,  the  words  knot,  lot, 
bunch,  are  not  unfri'<|Uenlly  used  in  a  similar  manner ;  and  in  some  parts  of  our  country, 
the  Word  heap  is  commimly  eniployeil  by  the  uneducated  with  this  sense.  In  Mexico,  n 
like  meaning  is  given  by  the  lower  classes  to  the  word  niiii/ni/ni  (machine);  as  mm 
tiidijninn  i/e  miilns,  de  cmhrs,  a  great  imml)er  of  mules,  carriages,  &c.  This  was 
explained  from  the  tact  tlint  the  only  machinery  of  conseiiuenco  used  in  (hat  country 
bi'ing  in  the  corn-iiiills,  the  name  oC  iiidi/niini  has  Ih^coiiu'  appropriated  to  them, — and  ns 
they  usually  contain  a  large  store  of  corn  and  meal,  the  word  has  undergone  a  further 
dcvialiiin,  and  is  employed  to  signify  a  great  ipiantity  or  mass  of  any  thing — and  hence, 
a  great  nuiuUr.  This  example  may  serve  to  show  the  dilViculty  of  tracing  to  their  origin 
nil  the  particles  employed  in  the  I'olynesin  >  dialects,  without  a  thorough  knowledge  of 
the  habits  and  miHles  of  thinking  of  the  natives.] 

i  IT),  A  plural  of  a  peculiar  kind  is  formed  in  the  dialects  of  New 
Zealand,  Tahiti,  .^nd  Hawaii,  by  the  particle  ma  appended  to  a  proper 
noun,  or  to  a  wo-d  si<rnifyini;  a  rational  beitiir.  It  gives  the  meaning 
of  company  or  associates  connected  witii  the  person. 

In  New  Zealand,  Ji'-iiji  mn,  is  Hongi  and  his  company,  or  those  with  him.  In  the 
vocative,  ii  ?«(//•«  ma!  ()  friends!  or  rather,  O  friend,  and  those  with  you!  So  c  hoa 
mil  !  friends ! 

In  Taliitiai),  Mnsr  mn,  Moses  and  those  with  him  ;   I'nofiii  mil,  I'aofai  and  his  party. 

In  Hawaiian,  7i(H/V('/«/(/(  w«/,  Tnuitiaoiili  and  his  associates;  I'lkmn,  liiv  goddess 
Pele  and  her  attendant  divinities.      In  this  dialect,  it  is  not  used  in  the  vocative, 

^  If).  The  distinctions  of  case  are  determined  either  by  the  collo- 
cations of  the  words,  or  by  tiie  use  of  particles.     In  all  the  dialects, 


i 


"^n- 


1'  ()  I,  V  N  K  S  I  A  N    (1  R  A  M  M  A  R. 


241 


if  the  substantives  come  toj^cther,  with  no  particle  to  mnrk  the  rela- 
tion between  them,  the  hitter  ni  the  two  is  considered  to  be  in  the 
genitive. 

Apii-liimi,  Sntn.,  |mlin  tiC  hnnd  ;  fule  nianu,  Tonj;.,  bird-cngo  (liousf^  of  bird)  ;  Itiu 
Uninld,  N.  '/..,  a  iimii's  scpidclirf  ;  ItJui-Uii,  Tuli.,  border  of  Iho  sea,  sca>coast ;  Uthiina 
I'c/i;  lliiw.,  priest  of  I'ele, 

The  Itiirotiiiignn  is  peculiar  in  lengthening  the  finni  vowel  of  the  preceding  word,  as, 
riiii  mi,  well  of  water;  kolii/d  kaiija,  divisiun  of  land.  This,  however,  a|i|)cars  to  lake 
place  only  with  the  vowel  ii. 

i  17.  The  Polynesian  languaj^es  have  a  peculiar  particle  to  mark 
the  nominative,  or  rather  the  airent,  in  a  sentence.  This  particle  is 
ko,  or,  in  Samoan,  Tahitian,  and  Hawiiiian,  Vi.  Its  use  varies  some- 
what ill  the  dirterent  dialects,  but  its  general  object  appears  to  be  to 
mark  the  governing  noun.  In  all,  it  is  used  to  reply  to  the  questions 
"  who  or  what  is  it?"  "  who  did  it  ?"  and  the  like. 

In  Snmoan  its  iiso  is  very  frequent.  When  prefi.xcd  to  common  nouns  in  the  singular, 
or  collective  plural,  it  usually  has  the  article  after  it,  as,  o  Ic  tinjiitti,  the  man  ;  o  le  tiipu- 
Itiyti  iimiildvii,  all  the  generations;  in  the  ordinary  plural,  however,  it  immediately  pre- 
cedes the  noun,  as,  o  ttimii  «iH((,  the  young  children.  With  proper  names  and  pronouns 
it  has  no  article,  as,  o  Vnviisii,  Vava.sa  ;  o  oiitoii,  ye.  It  dixjs  not  always  pri'cede  the 
nominative,  but  only  when  this  is  at  the  begiiming  of  the  sentence,  or  in  apposition  to  a 
preceding  noun  ;  as,  o  liniii.  lane,  o  Josrjii,  o  Ic  tdijtita  iipii-lrlei,  her  husband,  Joseph 
[U'ingJ  a  just  man.  It  is  also  used  independently  of  a  substantive,  as,  o  e  luj'txii  idle  (lu, 
wh(X'ver  shall  reject  me;  use,  who.s(K'ver. 

In  Tougan,  in  is  used  before  proper  names,  and  sonu^  of  the  pronouns,  and  koc  (for 
ko  he)  U'Core  common  nouns.  This  parti<de  never  occurs  in  the  middle  of  a  sentence, 
except  when  in  apposition  to  a  preci'ding  noun,  or  preceded  by  the  preposition  koeuhi  ; 
as,  koeuhi  kixni,  tecauso  of  me  (or  rather  koe  iihi  kmiu,  I  being  the  cause). 

In  the  other  dialects  this  particle  is  used  less  frequently  than  in  the  two  preceding. 
The  Ibllowing  are  the  principal  cases  in  which  it  is  found: — (1)  Ik-fore  proper  names, 
when  at  the  l)eginning  of  a  sentence  or  in  apposition,  as,  o  Petcro  oe,  Tah.,  thou  art 
Peter ;  Uma  tune  ko  Josepha,  Kar.,  her  husband  Joseph.  (2)  Before  most  of  the  per- 
sonal, demonstrative,  and  interrogative  pronouns  in  like  circumstances ;  ko  kotai  te 
maranid,  Rar.,  ye  are  the  light;  te  moii  ra,  koia  te  npega  o  teianei  dO,  Rar.,  the  harvest, 
that  is  the  end  of  this  world  ;  ko  tehea  o  koiilou,  N.  Z.,  which  of  you  ?  o  udi  lu  tu  mca 
o  oiitoii.  Haw.,  who  is  there  of  you  f  (3)  Before  common  nouns,  at  the  beginning  of  a 
sentence^  when  it  is  desired  to  emphasize  them,  it  is  generally  followed  by  the  singular 
article,  Ic,  or  by  the  plural  particle  ija  or  na.  As  the  propriety  of  rendering  an  expres- 
sion emphatic  will  ap|>ear  dillerently  to  dillerent  minds,  there  is,  in  all  the  dialects,  some 
uncertainty  about  its  use.  In  three  chapters  of  Matthew  (the  .^th,  0th,  and  7th)  the 
Samoan  uses  this  particle  fifty-six  times,  the  New  %aland  forty-nine,  the  Rarotongan 
forty-six,  the  Hawaiian  forty-three,  and  the  Tahitian  twenty-six.  The  latter,  in  general, 
makes  a  more  sparing  use  of  it  than  the  others.     In  the  verse  "  all  tilings  whatsoever  ye 

01 


24S 


I'M  I  !,(>  I. or.  Y. 


m 


f 


would  thai  others  should  do  unto  you,"  Sic,  the  Sanionn  hns  "o  mm  niiui,"  t\w  Now 
Zcnlnnd,  "  ko  >)ii  mm  kii/iid,"  the  Tiiliiliuii,  "  Ir  iiniii  mm  Imi"  the  |{iiri)liiri|{nii,  "  If  mi 
men  kiilixi"  iiiid  tlii"  lliiwiiiiaii,  "  n  mi  mm  n  /uiii,"  Hire  llii'  Itiinitonnnu  coincidi's 
with  the  'I'liliiliim,  bill  in  most  casi's  it  njirci'S  with  the  oilier  iliiilcrls.  In  llir  Nnilriiro 
" 'WiwswiVT  siiiill  Ik)  aii^iry,"  lln'  Siiiiionii  has  "  i>  /r  fininln,"  Ilir  New  Zealaiiil  and  llio 
Rnrotoiiijan,  "  kn  Iv  Imjiiln"  tlir  llavMiiiaii,  "otumra,"  aiul  the  Taliilian,  sim|ily,  "  tc 

tiKlltl." 

This  particle  is  also  prclixrd  to  adverbs  iiseij  siilislanlively,  or  without  n  vorli;  as  in 
tho  sentence  "  within  they  iire  raveiiini;  wolves,"  (i.e.  as  to  the  inside) — in  Iho  Sanioan  it 
is  0  tittniiii,  in  New  Zealand,  ko  mtn,  in  Taliilian,  o  riito.  So  ko  mini,  liar.,  Iieliire  j  ko 
rririi,  N.  '/.,,  then;  ko  riiijn  tviiri,ki>  nvniki  (inn,  Maii^.,  this  is  nl)ove  (or  the  ii|i|ier),  that 
is  below. 

[It  is  curious  that  in  Iho  Australian  dialect  spoken  by  the  tril)e  on  Hunter's  Kiver, 
(which  belongs  to  an  entirely  dillercnl  class  of  lannua};e»  from  the  I'lilynesian)  this  same 
particle  ko  is  used  lor  precisely  the  same  purpose, — namely,  that  of  marking  the  active, 
or  what  Mr.  Tlirelkeld  terms  the  a^ent  form  of  the  noun,  which  i"  jjenerally  the  uomiiin- 
live,  thoufjh  in  some  cases  it  rather  answers  to  the  ablative.  The  particle,  however, 
dillcrs  from  that  in  the  I'olynesian,  in  beinj;  postlixeil  to  the  noun.  Kure  is  man,  and 
koreko  is  the  same  word  wlien  used  us  the  nominative  to  a  verb,  or  in  answer  to  the 
question  "  who  did  it  ?"  It  thus  corres|)onils  precisely  to  ko  tr  tinjnlu.  This  tiwt  is 
mentioned  merely  as  an  interesting  eoincidence,  and  not  as  indicating  any  coimexion 
between  the  two  languages.] 

i  18.  The  genitive  is  formed  by  the  propositions  a  and  o,  both  of 
which  si<rnify  of.  There  is  a  sliorht  shade  of  dillVrenco  between  these 
two  prepositions,  wliicli  it  is  difficult  for  a  fori>i<;;ner  to  compreiiend, 
though  the  natives  are  careful  to  observe  it,  and  never  substitute  one 
for  the  other. 

The  proper  meaning  of  a  seems  to  be  nf,  in  the  sense  of  hlonping  to,  while  o  is  more 
general  and  indelinite.  The  chief  didiculty  lies  in  determining  what  is  to  lie  regarded  as 
properly  in  the  possession  of  a  person.  The  Polynesians  seem  to  consider  that  the  child 
Mongs  to  the  liilher,  but  not  the  father  to  the  child  ;  that  the  husband  and  wili;  are  each 
other's  property,  but  brothers  and  sisters  not.  A  man's  body  or  his  limbs  are  not  consi- 
dered as  in  his  possession, — perhaps  Ix'cause  they  rather  form  a  part  of  him.  So  the 
house  in  which  a  man  lives,  and  the  clothing  which  he  wear;^  are  not  spoken  of  as  his 
pro|)erty  (but  rather  as  things  which  he  uses),  but*  his  food  is.  So  a  man's  speech  is 
considered  as  lielonging  to  him,  but  not  his  life.  The  almve  distinctions  pervade  all  the 
dialects,  with  some  exceptions  only  in  respect  to  words  expressing  relationship.  In  other 
classes  of  words  the  usage  varies.  The  o,  however,  is  the  most  common  particle,  .Vs 
the  a  is  properly  used  in  the  sense  of  Monf;ing  to,  it  can  only  come  beliire  a  noun  signi- 
fying a  living  being  ;  n  is  used  b<'fore  all  other  nouns  ;  thus,  "  the  canoe  of  (or  belong- 
ing  tt))  Filunin,"  will  bo,  te  vaka  a  Piltaga;  but  "  the  canix;  of  the  ship,"  or  "the  ship's 
lioal,"  te  vaka  o  le  folau. 

\  19.     A  peculiar  form  of  the  genitive  is  made  by  reversing  the 


i 


% 


I'  ()  I,  V  N  K  S  I  A  N    (J  R  A  M  M  A  R. 


243 


v«t;! 


.m 


iiHunl  order,  and  placin(^  the  noun  in  the  ^unitivo  lieCoro  tho  nomina- 
tive; in  this  case,  tho  o  or  «  wliicli  |)recedi'M  tho  gonilive  coalesces 
with  tlus  article  which  precedes  tlie  nominative. 

Tliiis  iiiHlPiiil  cif  /(■  /((/<•  0  A'  (//(/,  till'  SiimimiiH  siiy  /ii  Ir  iilii  /iilr  (/o  lor  /(•  i>)  ;  in  New 
Zi'iiliiliil,  liir  /('  kiipii  II  If  tagiitii.  111'!  H|)pt;cli  of  the  iiiiin,  wo  Imvo  ///  tr  liiijiilu  kiipii  /  in 
Tnhilimi,  (or  te  mnitiii  n  If  itinii  J''iiirisr<i,  lUr  ri),'hlc(>iisnr>sH  of  the  I'linrisci'M,  it  is,  In  te 
vuiii  I'/iiirisiu  miiiliii ;  in  lliiwiiiiiin,  te  piie  iiiiiii  n  Jiiiiriiii  tiri,  the  iitliinils  of  lliiwuii 
lirrc,  Im'coiiii'm, /m  lliwiiii  iiri  piu-  iiiiiii.  In  Tungiui  tlii.s  construction  is  niily  fuund  in 
tti)'  |>r<iniiun8,  wlioru  it  will  lj<'  hrreiiOiT  noticcil. 

i  20.  In  the  dialects  of  Now  Zealand  and  Eastern  Polynesia 
(Tahiti,  Uarotonga,  Hawaii,  &c.,)  the  same  distinction  is  made  be- 
tween na  and  no,  meanini^  'iftf'tr,  cuncernhuj,  as  between  a  and  o. 

As,  hr  tc/ihine  na  U  alii.  Haw,,  a  wilij  for  thu  king ;  he  fide  no  te  alii,a  house  for  the 

kioK. 

In  New  Zealand,  a  similar  distinction  appears  to  exist  between  ma  and  (mo,  as  tettthi 
mta  mo  te  mutiuUnne,  sumething  for  the  lather  ;  kai  ma  rittou,  food  for  thcin. 

ij  21.  The  dative  is  formed  by  prefixiii<.f  ki  (Tong.,  N.  Z.,  liar., 
Mang.,  Nuk.,-)  or  'i  (Sam.,  Tah.,  Haw.,)  to  the  noun.  Before  proper 
names  and  pronouns  this  becomes  kia  or  '/«. 

Ki  lie  iniinii,  Tong.,  ki  Ic  numii,  N.  Z.,  Kiir.,  .N'lik.,  'J  /«  niiinii,  Sam.,  '(  te  manu, 
Tqh„  't  III  manu.  Haw.,  mean  "to  tho  bird,"  Kia  Nnmn,  nr  'm  Xiimii,  means  "to 
Noma." 

In  iSunioan  and  Tongan,  a  particle  of  euphony,  Ic,  is  in.sorted  between  the  preposition 
and  the  pronoun  ;  as  kia,  te  ait,  Tong.,  'in  te  an,  Sam.,  to  mc.  In  the  other  dialects  it  is 
not  found. 

In  Hawaiian  the  '/</,  whicli  should  precede  pro|icr  names  and  pronouns,  is  sometimes 
changed  to  'f'o,  as  /ir/i:  mni  la  in  'io'ii  tici,  ho  came  to  me  here  ('(o'»  tor  'ia  ii'ii). 

I)  22.  The  accusative  generally,  though  not  always,  has  the  particle 
i  before  it.  This  particle  must  not  be  confounded  with  the  ki  of  the 
dative,  as  it  has  often  been  in  those  languages  which  drop  the  k. 
Before  proper  names  and  pronouns  it  becomes  ia. 

In  Samoan,  tn/ii  i  le  aji,  light  the  fire,  is  the  usual  form  of  expression,  though  tafu  k 
afi  is  sometimes  heard. 

In  Tongan,  this  use  of  the  i  is  less  common  than  in  the  other  dialects,  but  it  is  occa- 
sionally met  with,  ns  he  kuoii  tamate  i  ae  tai/ata,  I  have  slain  a  man. 

In  New  Zealand,  its  use  is  not  constant,  and  it  ap|K'ars  to  be  employed  cliielly  where 
precision  is  requiri'd  ;  e  ho  atii  i  te  iitii  kia  Jliha,  to  give  tribute  to  Cusar;  ya  tamariki 
o  ratoii  i  put II  i  ija  jmioj)iti,  the  children  of  those  who  killed  the  prophets. 

In  T.ihitiun,  linrotongan,  Hawaiian,  and  Nukuhivan,  i  is  constantly  employed  as  the 
prefix  of  the  accusative. 

^  2:3.  /  is  also,  in  all  the  dialects,  a  sign  of  the  ablative,  with  the 
meaning  of  ?«  (place)  and  fry  (cause,  instrument,  &c.) 


Ml 


I'll  I  l.o  l.oo  V. 


J  It  III),  Sam.,  in  Irnvrn  ;  i  he  rkn  liuii,  Ttiii;;.,  iil  my  nimiiitt;  i  iiln,  iilii(|„  on 
iihiirc ;  r  mnlr  riiliiii  i  te  hikr,  lliir.,  Ilirj  xlinll  dii'  liy  lln'  nwnril ;  iiii  mute  litlim  i  In 
mill,  Haw.,  Iliry  died  by  Bickiir»s. 

y  i.\|iri'sM('N  llii'  alilcillvi.'  Ill'  raiisc,  manner,  and  meanN,  aDcr  an  arlivc  vcrli,  ax  ''  Itial 
oraj;ifi(v  allrr  a  |ias«ivi.'.     This  disiiiiiliim  in  always  ncrii|ailiiiis|y  ulmcrvcd. 

i  24.  The  Ni<;n  of  tlio  ablative  after  a  passive  verb  ih  e,  answerin^r 
to  tlie  I.atiii  II  i>r  ah. 

DtltiiiKi  e  le  jtenijiltrtn,  Sam.,  .spokon  liy  llif  proplirl  ;  leu  aki  r  hr  tiigiiln,  Tong,, 
ipokcn  by  a  man  ;  u  i  Uiiniiilia  in  r  le  hiifu,  N,  /„  and  ho  wn«  niocki'd  by  the  pooplu ; 
r.  niii/iiiiiiiiii  Ill/nil  e  le  Aliiii,  Haw.,  we  an'  (in'scrvcd  by  (i(>d, 

)  'it').  E  is  also  tlie  sii{ii  of  the  vocative  case,  answering  to  o  in 
English,  but  in  more  freiiuent  use. 

K  lull  iilii,  Sam.,  (1  my  Inril !  /•."/>■/>'/»•,  Tnng.,  O  woman!  K  Iliiimona,  N.  Z.,  O 
Simon  !  K  le  Dinuiiiiia,  Tab.,  (>  Lord  I 

Tbu  SaiMoan,  |{aruloM){aii,  and  lliiwallan,  siimctimc!*  place  Ihix  parlieb'  aHer  Ibe  noun, 
lu/ui/eaii  e!  O  master  ! — and  sometime.s  \»i[\\  U'l'on'  and  allrr,  a*  f  Id  miitim  nlii  e!  O 
our  Lord  !   K  le  ulii  e!    liar.,  C)  Lord  !   F,  le  ntiia  e!  Ilaw.,  (>  UihI  ! 

Many,  il'  nut  all,  of  ibe  lanniiaj,'c\s,  bave  words  wliirh  an>  used  only  in  Ihc  vocative, 
like  the  iMijilisb  sir;  u»,  mJe,  Sam.,  sir!  I'liiiu,  Sam.,  woman  ;  ida, 'Von^.,  vi  general 
word  to  call  attention ;  mum,  .\.  '/..,  sir ;  i>ii,  N.  '/..,  lather. 


i 


T  II  E    A  I) J  K  I'  r  I  V  K. 

i  86.     The  adjective  follows  the  noun  which  it  iiualifies. 

bhle  tele,  Sam.,  leore  rulii,  .\.  X.,  Iiule  niii,  Haw.,  larj^e  bouse. 

In  Ton^'an  only,  a  lew  i'\i  eptions  are  (.(iven,  wbicb  anr  probably  rather  apparent  than 
real  ;  Ibey  are  ///,  great,  fiinmii,  cbier,  or  most  excellent, and  /mi  at  fur,  single; — -Ju  ukaii, 
a  large  tree  |or,  as  we  miglit  say,  "  a  lump  ol'a  tree").  I'lnjuiii  is  probably  I'rom  /«(;«, 
meaning  lnj>,  wilb  the  V'ilian  pri|K)siii(in  tii  afTi.xed ;  _/«  may  \k  from  the  Vilian  t'«,  a 
trunk,  stock,  foundation  ;  Jiir  is,  properly,  a  round  ma.ss  or  ball. 

I)  27.  In  most  of  the  dialects  the  adjective  is  frequently  made 
plural  by  the  reduplication  of  one  of  its  syllables,  and  sometimes  of 
the  whole  word. 

Sam.    luau  tele,  large  tree  ;  pi.  Inau  telele,  large  trees. 

Sam.    miiiiijii  maiiiUinju,  high  mountain  ;  pi.  maiij/a  muiiliiliiffa. 

Tong.  tiiluii  lulii,  great  whale  ;  |)l.  tiifuA  luluhi. 

Tong.   muliuki,  sick  ;  pi.  muhumuhiiki,  sick  (|)ersons). 

N.  Z.    ikii  /fii,  good  fish  ;  pi.  iku  jiu/x'i. 

Rar.     ikti  nieiluki,  giKid  lisli  ;  pi.  iku  memeituki. 

Rar.     nuiki,  sick  ;  pi.  mukniitiki,  sick  (|xTs<ai»). 

Pau.     crirc  leiru,  good  woman  ;  pi.  erirc  wiriiwiru. 

Tah.    tU4ita  miiiliii,  gmxl  man  ;  pi.  taatii  nuiiUUai. 


I'  O  1.  V  N  K  H  I  A  N    (i  U  A  ,M  M  A  K. 


840 


rah.     rniiii  ni/ii,  liirun  Irii' ;  pi.  ni"ii  nini/ii, 

'VWn  I iiliiirily  iliNs  iihI  ixi'.i  in  ihi'  lliiwniiiin. 

hi  Siiiiiiiaii,  l>y  II  Niii){iiliir  cxci'iilluii,  ih/i,  nihuII,  lins  I'nr  itn  pliirni,  ili. 

I)  QS.  Tlio  coinpariMori  of  adjtsctivcH  is  ottiictcd  by  various  circum- 
locution.s;  for,  "lliis  is  creator  tlum  that,"  they  say,  "this  is  great 
ahovo  tliat,"  or  "  hcvoiul  tliat,"  or  "this  exceeds  that  in  greatness," 
or  simply,  "tiiis  is  <,'ri'!it  to  that." 

Mom.     ('  ti/n  tiiici  I  Ivlii,  lliis  ii  jjrpiil  to  lliiit. 

Hnm.    e  si/i  Imtn  leki  i  Ion,  IiIh  ({(Kidnrsii  excrpdji  mine. 

Snm.    n'aii  ilili,  iii  lilr  in,  I  iiiii  siiiiill,  liul  lie  is  urciit. 

Sum.    tdildi  iinr,  nimiii  Ix'yiiiid,  fiir  nimhiit,  iiiiirc  rnidily, 

Tong,  Kill)  liiri  lithi  III'  /nun/"  la  lie  si/ii,  n  niiiii  is  grenlly  good  to  a  sheep, — i.  e.  s 

liinii  is  miH'li  Inllrr  tliaii  a  slin'|i. 
Tong.  /((//(  ill  Silomiiiic,  ^rral  ti>  .'"iiilimmii. 

Tong.  Iiilii  Itnke  i  — ,  grrat  al*)vc  ;  Inlii  inje  hi  — ,  grrnt  Ix'yond. 
N.  Z.    hr  liinnlti  riihi  iike  in  Ifotini,  a  ninn  great  above  John. 
N.  Z.    knlin  n/ii  in  in,  strong  beyond  him, 

N,  Z.    /cm  n/ii,  iiiiirc, — i.  r.  Iliat  iK^ymid  ;  rriiiin  n/ii,  five  more. 
Rar.      r  miiiiln  nin  i  /c  iiro,  b(>  is  great  to  (greater  than)  the  temple. 
liar,      kino  iiinii/n  iin  n/ii  /r  ii/x-iin  n  /nun  Inijn/n  in,  i  /li  miin/injnna,  bad,  great, 

lieyond  (much  worse)  (is)  the  end  of  that  man  to  the  beginning, 
Toh.     ('  mid  Tnlii/i  i  Mumrn,  Tahiti  is  great  to  .MiK)rea. 
Tah,     r  nilii  n/ii  lierrtmir,  Uritain  is  great  Ix'yond  (still  greater), 
Tuh.     f  rnlii  mil  'lit  Aiiiiricn,  America  is  very  gri'at  beyond  (much  larger). 
Tah.     e  men  mniliii  nr,  a  thing  good  alnivi'  (or  belter,  but  in  u  small  dcgiec). 
Tall,      nil  linn  /rir  i  Ir  mnnin,  this  exceeds  in  length. 

[These  examples  are  taken  Irom  llic  Tahilian  Grammar.] 
Haw.    polo  at,  short  aliove  (lor  shorter). 

Haw.    e  oi  ntii  to  nit/oii  nini/ni  i  lo  Inloii,  your  goodness  exceeds  theirs. 
Nuk.     mcitiii,  good  ;  iiiei/ni  n/ii,  lieller. 
Nuk.     {'  ittit,  inland  ;  t  iiln  ntn,  farther  inland. 
Nuk.     o  te  ointiii  mm  nko  i  If  litina  ke  n  te  Etua  (G.),  man  [is]  greater  than  (very 

great  to)  the  other  works  of  God, 

)  29.  The  superlative  is  formed  by  means  of  adverbs  which  have 
the  sense  of  very,  exceedingly,  or  by  a  repetition  of  the  adjective,  as 
in  Italian.     It  is  unnecessary  to  give  examples. 


NUlUERALa 

i  30.     The  following  are  the  numerals  in  the  Polynesian  dialects : 
it  will  be  seen  that  a  great  similarity  pervades  them  all,  with  tiie  ex- 

02 


•"ffm.^ 


346 


I'  II  I  I,  O  I,  O  (i  v. 


ception  of  the  Paumotuan,  wliicli  differs  in  this  respect,  as  in  much 
of  its  vocabulary,  from  the  rest. 

A  few  of  llic  Tahitiaii  numerals  nro  also  pwiiliar  ;  these  have  lx!cii  sulistitiiteil  for  the 
conimoii  words  (wliich  ore  not  altogether  obsolete)  by  a  custom  termed  te  jii,  for  which 
see  §  81. 


ONE. 

TWO. 

THREE. 

KOUR. 

FIVE, 

Fuk. 

tusi 

liin,  lia 

tola 

/"■ 

lima 

Sam. 

tiisi 

Ilia 

to/ii 

fa 

liiiia 

Tong. 

tului 

na 

tolu 

/« 

nimii 

N.  Z. 

tilhi 

ma 

torn 

wa 

riiiia 

Rar. 

Uii 

rua 

torn, 

a 

rima 

Mang 

tai 

rua 

torn 

a 

riiiia 

Pau. 

niri 

ite 

yrti 

ojyc 

ycka 

Tah. 

tii/ii 

run,  pUi 

torn 

ha,  maha 

rima,pac 

Haw. 

UM 

Ilia 

tola 

ha,  taiina 

lima 

Nuk. 

tahi 

na 

tou 

ha  otfii 

ima 

SIX, 

SEVEN. 

EKiMT. 

NINE. 

TEN. 

Fak. 

ono 

Jit  11 

vain 

iva 

filn,  yofiilu 

Sam. 

OHO 

JUu 

valu 

iva 

sefnln,  ijafnln 

Tong. 

otto 

pu 

vain 

hiva 

hoijnfulu 

N.  Z. 

ono 

wilit 

worn 

itva 

yiihnrn 

Rar. 

ono 

itu 

varii 

iva 

yiiiirii 

Mang. 

ono 

itu 

varn 

iva 

yaurii 

Pau. 

hcnc 

hi  to 

hiuin 

nipa 

horihnri 

Tah. 

ono,  fine 

hitii 

varn,  van 

iva 

ahuru 

Haw. 

ono 

hitii 

vain 

iu'ii 

himi 

Nuk. 

ono 

hilii,filu 

I'll  It 

iva 

onohiiii 

TEN  I'AIR. 

TWENTV. 

THIRTY. 

rORTT. 

rirrv. 

Fak. 

Ilia   Ijllf'ulll 

talii  luifiiln 

Ja  ynfiilu 

lima  ijafnlii 

Sam. 

lllll  fiilu 

tolu  nnfiitu. 

fa  ijiifit/u 

lima  i/iifnln 

Tong. 

ickati 

uofiilit 

tolu  ii'i/iuu 

fa  yifiilu 

71  ima  ijiifiilu 

N.  Z. 

tektiii 

rua  ijuhuru 

torn  ijahuru 

wa  ijahuru 

rima  iiahurii 

Rar. 

Mung. 

takiiii 

liikdu  ma 
ijauru 

rua  tiikau 

rua  tiikau  ma 
fiaurit 

Puu. 

tti'MH  (?) 

Tah. 

ta'iiH 

la'an  ma 
nh.irii 

rua  la\iu 

run   ta'aii    ma 
iihiirii 

Haw. 

iuiUiiJiio 

tiiiiatolu 

tanitlii'i,  ta'aii 

Uniiiha   mc   ta 
mm. 

Nu?i. 

lektiii 

tikiiu  ma 
OHo/lUU 

tuhd,  taiijd 

tolia  >na 
imohuii 

'f,K      'fi 


POLYNESIAN    (i  R  A  M  .\I  A  l(. 


247 


ch 

the 
licli 


I'ltlii 


(III 
(hi 
'hlu 
lint 


mc   Ui 


ONK  IIUNUKKU. 

TWO  IIUNUIIKI). 

FOL'K  lir.M) 

Fnk. 

lull 

Sain. 

lull,  seliiu 

lull  lull 

fii  ijidaii 

Tong. 

an,  ttnu 

ua  ijiuii 

fa  tjeaii 

N.  Z. 

ran 

ruti  nut 

wa  rail 

Rar. 

rail 

Mang, 

rima  takcnt 

run 

run  rail 

Pau. 

IKtIll 

Tah. 

rima  ta'itu 

ran 

run  rail 

Haw.    liiiUanahd  me      limn  taiuilia     Ian 

ta  iiva/alna 
Nuk.    ua  tolia  ma  ima  tohd  an 

tckau 


ONK   rilfll'SAM)  AMJ  urWAIlO.^. 

/.///,  a  lari!C  iiu.;:'uT,  illdi'lillilo 
«/(•,    1000  j   luiiiio,  lO.OC'l:   ilu, 

100,000 
iiji;  1000;   mniin,  10,000;  kilu, 

100,000 
maiii),  1000;  liiii,  10,000 
maiio,  -Zmu  ;  tini,  •,'0,000 
7iiam>,  -JOOO  ;  Kin,  20,000  ;  tini, 

a  gi'ciit  iiimiiIht 
mil  no,  1000  (.') 
minio,  -JOOO  ;  mamj/ini,  •J0,000  ; 

rrhn,  '-'OO.OOO  ;   in,  ;i,000,000 
nia/iij,  4000  j  lini.  40,000  ;  Ichii., 

40(t,000 
minio,  4000  ;  lini,  40,000  ;  t.u/d, 

400,000  ;  jio/ii,  4,000,000 


Tho  word  aft;  which  in  Snninan  and  Tungiin  signilius  a  llunisand,  is  wanting  in  thf 
other  dialects  ;  they  have  adapted,  instead  of  it,  iiiani),  wliich,  in  lli<'  Iwd  (iirnier,  signifies 
ten  thousand.  Kiln,  Tong.,  U/n,  Sam.,  a  liundred  thousand,  is  probably  the  same  word 
with  ill  in  Taliilian,  which  signifies  a  million,  and  kin,  which,  in  Maugarevan,  stands  for 
twenty  thousand,  and  wlii<di  we  heard  used  at  Fakaufo  fijr  a  great  but  indefinite  number, 
(c  kin  tc  till  fate ,  the  houses  are  very  many.) 

In  Sanioan,  the  natives  appeared  to  make,  in  the  tens  and  hundreds,  a  dill'erence 
between  the  dual  and  the  plural.  Sifiiln  was  ten  ;  Inn  fnhi  or  Inn  sifnln,  twenty;  and 
tolit  iinfiln,  thirty.  So  selnn  was  the  word  for  one  Inindreil  ;  Ina  Ian  or  Ina  scltin,  two 
hundred  ;  to/n  ijalan,  throe  huiulred.  The  missionaries,  however,  employ  Ina  ijafulii 
and  Ina  tjalan,  and  it  is  likely  that  tho  usage  of  the  natives  may  vary. 

^31.  Iia  the  Ttihitian,  Rarotoiigan,  and  Maiiifarevan,  the  words 
rail  antl  mano,  which  should  properly  .signify  hundred  and  thousand, 
are  doubled  in  value,  and  stand  for  two  huiidrt>d  and  two  thousand  ; 
while  in  Hawaiian  and  \ukuhivan  they  arc  tpiadruplcd,  and  stand 
for  four  hundred  and  four  thousand.  Tiie  missionaries,  in  order  to 
induce  the  natives  to  return  to  the  more  convenient  decimal  enume- 
ration, have  been  obliefed  to  introduce  into  these  dialects  the  English 
words  hundred  and  thousand  {/iiincri  and  tauscnii). 

The  origin  of  these  singular  variations  is  probably  To  be  fi)und  in  the  fact  I  lat  most  of 
the  objects  which  the  natives  h  ve  occasion  to  eiuuMcrale,  being  articles  of  f  lod,  and  of 
small  size  (such  as  yams,  cocoa-nuts,  fish,  and  the  like),  can  be  most  conve.iiently  and 
expeditiously  counted  in  pairs.  Tliis  mode  is  therefore  universally  adopted.  'I'aking  one 
in  each  hand,  the  native,  as  he  throws  them  into  tlie  storeliouse,  or  on  to  the  heap,  counts 
one;  for  two  pairs,  ho  says  lico;  lor  ten  pairs  simply  Irn,  and  so  on.  Uence  each 
iuiml)er  has  a  twofold  value,  one  lor  objects  counleil  singly,  and  one  (or  those  reckoned 
in  pairs.      Tlio  first  emigrants  lo  Tahiti  hud  naturally  but  little  occasion  lo  employ  the 


r 


EC 


sasrakc^r;;. 


248 


I'  II  I  !,(>  I,  OU  Y. 


p.i 


former  or  orii;inal  viiliio,  liavin^,  of  course,  tew  mcn.ciinoes,  or  other  liirj;c  olyects  wliieli 
rctinired  lo  Im-  cipinteil.  We  enii  easily  perceive,  Iherelbre,  liow,  in  process  of  time,  the 
primary  nieaiiini;  ol'  the  words  miylit  1h^  wholly  forgotten,  and  the  secondary  bi^  used  in 
coimliiij,'  units  as  well  as  pairs.  And  if,  aCti-r  this  nsaj.;e  had  Ix'icime  fixed,  a  second 
emigration  took  place  I'rom  Taliili  to  Nid<uhiva  or  Hawaii,  we  can,  in  the  same  manner, 
account  liir  the  second  duplication. 

The  word  Ldii  (ir  tchtii  appears  to  he  that  which  was  originally  used  to  signify  ten 
pair,  as  dislin<;uislicd  from  full'  or  ijii/iilii,  the  regular  word  for  ten.  This  seems  to  he 
its  use  in  Toiiijan  and  New  Zealand,  in  .Mangarevan  /iiKaii,  and  in  Tahilian  Id'iiii,  are 
the  ordinary  terms  for  twenty,  and  firm  the  hasis  of  the  higher  enumeration, — thirty 
being  twenty  and  ten,  forty  twice  twenty,  ii  huiulred  five  times  twenty,  iVc.  In  Hawaiian 
ten  is  ««(/,  the  same  ns  the  Tongan /,.v;h/,  which  means  ten  fathoms;  twenty  is  iwa- 
taliiti,  a  word  compounded  of  iiri',  nine,  and  /iin,  two, — though  why  it  shoulil  have  this 
meaning  cannot  well  be  understood  ;  thirty  is  taiKitolii;  forty  is  cxpn^sscd  both  by  lu^ait 
(for  lii/:(iii,  u  corruption  of  trkmi),  and  by  t<niiilia,  Ix-ing  the  word  ha,  four,  with  n  prefi.x 
of  unknown  origin.  This  word,  tiuiiilia,  is,  in  this  lunguage,  the  basis  of  enumeration 
(uidess  we  apply  that  term  to  Iiiidki,  w hich  is  a  collective  word  for  four,  in  which  case 
tamilia  wuuld  stand  lor  ten  tiiioiii);  llDy  is  lini<i/id  nir  ta  iimi,  forty  and  ten;  a  hun- 
dred is  two  forties  and  twentj  ;  two  hundred  is  four  foriics ;  and  so  on  up  to  four  hundred, 
which  is  Inn. 

At  the  Marfpiesas,  Ixilh  systems  of  lujmpralion,  the  binary  and  the  quaternary,  are  in 
use,  the  former  in  the  siiulhern  or  'I'almatan  cluster,  and  the  latter  in  the  northern  or 
Nuhuliivan,  but  in  both  with  some  peculiarities.  In  counting  large  objects,  which  recpiire 
to  Ik'  UMudH'red  singly,  as  men,  catKH/s,  jiigs,  \-c.,  tin;  'I'ahuatans  liegin  with  liilii,  one, 
and  continue  up  t(i  oiiiJiiiii,  ten,  hikiiii,  twenty,  »//,  two  hundred,  iiiiino,  two  tliousniid, 
tiiii,  twenty  thousand,  ti'Jii,  twti  hundred  thousand,  po/ii,  two  million.  With  snuill 
objects,  as  fish  and  most  kinds  of  fruil,  they  commence  with  Imuui,  a  pair,  and,  omitting 
oiKihiiii,  proceed  lo  /iiLdii,  ten  pair,  "//,  a  hundred  pair,  iVc,  showing  evidently  the 
maimer  in  which  the  binary  system  was  formed  from  the  si-uple  decimal  Kor  bread- 
fruit, thev  have  a  pe<Miliar  moile,  conmieucing  w'wh  jxjmi,  a  word  wliich  properly  siguilies 
R  knot ;  and  as  they  are  accustiuned  lo  tie  up  these  fruit  in  knots  of  li)ur,  the  word  has 
come  lo  denote  that  nundKT  ;  tiikiiii  is  then  ten  jmiia  (i.  e.  forty),  and  <iii  should  pro|MTly 
k'  one  hundred  ponii, — hut  for  .some  unknown  reason  the  word  Iniitiu  has  been  intro- 
duced to  denote  that  nntutK'r,  and  itii  is  used  to  signifj'  two  tiuiini,  i.  e.  eight  hundred  ; 
mnnn  is  ten  ««,  or  eight  thousand,  iVc.  'J'be  Nukubivans,  in  coimting  all  articles  hut 
breadfruit,  begin  with  tiiliiy  oni'  (the  word  tniiiid,  pair,  not  Ix'ing  used),  and  proceed  to 
onoliuii,  ten,  Ickdii  or  lihaii  (liir  liikiiii),  IwvDty.ltkiiii  »iii  oiiohuii,  thirty,  aller  which  a 
new  word  is  inlroduced  for  forty,  which  Mr.  Crnok  writes  tditju  or  tiiii/ui,  and  Mr.  Alex- 
ander and  .M.  (iracia, /«//«.  Fifty  is  tniilin  (^tx  ,'< Ini)  »ia  imoliuu ;  one  huTidrcd  is  m« 
tniilin  inn  tiknii ;  two  hundred  is  iiiiii  Iniilin  ;  fiur  hundred  is  uu ;  four  thou.sand,  iniino, 
&c.  For  breadfiiiit  they  use  the  wcird  /««»(,  a  knot  of  four,  when  liiiihit  signifies  ten 
p(,nii  (thus  reluming  to  the  decimal  system),  nil  is  one  hundred  /iniin,  niniin  one  thou- 
Ranil.  Sometimes  the  Nukubivans,  to  pri-venl  mistakes,  employ  the  word  ihi  (large)  atler 
the  numeral,  to  show  that  it  is  usi  d  in  llie  (|',ialeruary  sense,  and  not  according  lo  the 
Tahuatan  system,  ns  nii  nil,  four  hundred,  iiiiiiin  ml,  four  thousand. 

The  missionaries  have  introduced  into  these  language's  th(!  ordinary  decimal  sy.stem. 


1>  O  I-  Y  N  E  S  I  A  N    OR  A  M  M  A  H. 


249 


In  tlic  Tnliilinn  and  llnniton^nn  thcv  discniil  llic  tii'im  iiiid  tiiUnu  iilt()f,'clli('r,  usinjr  only 
nliiirii  or  iidiirn  for  Ion,  (iiid  Ibrniin^  the  lii^licr  niiiiil)('rs  rcj;uliirly  (riia  iiliiini,  titrii 
nliiini,  iVc.)  lip  hi  Iiiiiirri,  Innidrcd.  In  HaMaiiiin,  they  [irciccrd  iVom  /iinn/id,  (iirty,  to 
hniiiliiiiii,  lilty,  liiHit'ini),  sixty,  nnd  so  on  to  the  sanir  word  liiiiirri. 

In  llio  Nuw  Zealand  Lirammar  of  I'rolbssor  Lcc,  and  in  the  missionary  Irnnslntions 
into  that  dialect,  tekau  is  used  for  ten  in  nil  the  nutnhers  nhovc  nineteen  ;  for  Iwcntj', 
they  1,'ive  run  tcknu^ — liir  thirty,  tnni  tckn)i,  \-c.  Yet  it  is  certain  that  these  terms  mean 
rcs|)ectivrly  twenty  pairs,  thirty  pairs,  and  so  on;  or,  at  least,  this  is  llii'ir  proper  and 
original  signiliealion,  although  some  of  the  natives,  under  the  instruction  of  the  mission- 
aries, niay  now  nave  adopted  tlieir  mode  of  computation.  'I'lie  origin  of  tlie  inistako  pro- 
bably was  the  fact  that  the  natives  rnr  ly  have  occasion  to  use  the  higher  muiihers,  except 
in  counting  fish  and  potatoes, — nnd  ihesc  are  always  counted  in  pairs,  A  person  hearing 
a  native  sny  for  one  pair,  tiihi,  mei  ning  simply  one, — for  two  pairs,  rim,  meaning  two, 
and  so  on,  would  naturally  supposi  that  trknii,  used  for  ten  [inirs,  meant  simply  ten. 

In  the  I'aumotuan  we  can  ohser.e  the  process  !)y  which  th(^  reduplication  of  the  Tahi- 
tian  and  Unrotongan  was  probahl/  etlcclcd.  In  this  language  there  is  a  double  set  of 
numerals,  one  for  counting  single  objects,  and  the  other  for  pairs.  They  are  respectively 
as  follows : 


ran,  one 
itc,  two 
tjiii,  three 
0}h;  ((.ur 
)ienc,  five 
yckii  si.\ 
liilo,  seven 
linn  «,  eight 
nij)  I,  nine 
lior.lwri,  ten 


tikni/r,  one  pair 
tcriiCiijK,  two  pairs 
minliinr,  three  pairs 
tiiipikii,  four  pairs 
hnriliori,  live  pairs 


system. 


For  twenty  the  term  g'veii  (as  we  inidiTstoixl  it)  was  ilr  Inkan.  W'o  supposed  then  that 
these  natives  followed  he  same  mode  of  coiiipiitation  as  that  given  in  thi"  Xew  Zealand 
grannnar,  of  the  incrrcctncss  of  which  \\v  were  not  then  awure.  It  seems  likely  that 
we  made  here  precisely  the  same  mistake  as  the  compiler  of  that  grammar,  'ind  that 
Inknii  does  in  lact  IM-Iong  to  the  second,  or  duplicate  set  of  numerals,  and  means  therefore 
ten  pairs.  It  would  then  be  just  the  double  oi'/iorihori.  when  the  latter  is  used  for  live 
pairs.  It  is  easy  to  seo  how  Inkiui  might,  by  a  careless  usage,  be  transferred  hy  the 
natives  lo  the  hrst  set  of  numerals,  and  Ik'  taken  for  tin'  double  of  horiliori  when  the 
lai;"r  is  I'sed  for  ten  :   in  which  case  tnknii  would  mean  simply  twenty. 

The  '',.ciii..;:ian  word  for  huiulred,  ix')iii,mcn\\s  also  the  head:  we  are  reminded  of 
the  Samoaii  /»A^  ten,  wnu  \'  me!>!is  likewise  hair, — nnd  hnin,  which  signifies  both  live 
and  baud.  The  notion  of  connecting  the  names  of  numl)ers  with  parts  of  the  body  would 
naturally  arise  from  the  habit  of  counting  on  the  lingers. 

It  should  tx'  observed  that  the  natives,  in  most  of  the  groujis,  commonly  pn^lix  to  the 
numi'rals  the  particles  kn  or  n,  and  c,  which  are  probably  the  verbal  particles  of  allinna- 
tion  and  present  time  (viili'  ^^  .")()  and  '^'i).  The  first  (kn  or  a)  is  commonly  used  when 
the  numeral  precedes  the  noun,  as  kn  lorn  tja  irnkn,  N.  'A.,  there  are  three  cnnoi's  ;  a 

63 


250 


I'll  I  r,o  I, or,  Y. 


h 


If       '   ' 


tahi  raai',  Tall.,  one  tree  ;  the  second  both  l)ct(iri'  nnd  a(ier,  tvdkii  Honi,  \hTCc  canoes ; 
niia  ihi,  Nuk.,  two  clicslnuts.  In  llnwiiiian  lim  is  mmnionly  nsed  in  the  pliicc  of  these 
particles  belbro  tahi.  In  repenting  the  nunies  ol"  tlie  lirst  nine  numerals,  ka  or  u  is 
nsnnlly  onMixcil  to  the  first,  and  e  to  the  others,  iis  kaldlii  or  nlahi,  eliiu,  vtolii,  &c. 

\  32.  Somo  of  tlio  terms  for  the  higher  numbers  are  only  used  in 
counting  particular  articles. 

For  four,  the  llnwaiinns  hiive  two  terms,  lia  and  hr.uia;  for  forty,  they  have  laiiiihd, 
itUo,  nnd  Ui'aii.  The  first  of  these  (laiiulia)  is  the  i;eiieral  term  ;  into  is  used  in  counting 
pieces  lA' Idjxi*  (native  cloth),  and  la'tiii  in  counting  fish. 

It  has  been  before  observed  [§  14)  that  kim.  the  root  of  the  Tongnn  lekait,  probably 
signified  originally  a  parcel  r)r  bunch.  'Man  would  mean,  llierefore,  one  parcel,  which 
they  consider  to  be  twenty,  though  this  is  evidently  an  arbitrary  application, — precisely 
as  with  the  English  scon;  which  means  proiHjrly  nny  numlxT  scored  down.  The  natives 
of  Tonga  employ  it  only  in  counting  yams  and  fish.  They  have  also  a  similar  collec- 
tive term,  le/iihi,  for  hundred  (though  Mariner  does  not  state  its  exact  application)  ;  it  is 
prolmbly  the  word /;///(,  a  sheaf,  or  bundle,  (from  the  tinmoan /«ii,  to  bind,)  with  the 
article  tc  prefixed. 

The  word  tckiniii,  pi.  ijnknmi,  is  used  in  Tongan  for  ten,  in  counting  qfa,  or  fathoms, 
— the  common  measun'  of  lenglh.  In  New  Zealand  kiiiiii  signifies  simply  ten  fathoms, 
as  does  iiini  in  Tahitian.  In  Hawaiian  i/nii  is  the  usual  word  for  ten,  nnd  (iiinkiilu 
(from  yafiilu)  signifies  n  period  of  ten  days.  In  tlie  Mnngarevun  vocabulary  kioni  is 
given  as  a  word  for  ten,  but  with  no  explanation  of  its  use. 

In  .Nukuhivan,  jxmd,  fi)ur,  and  tdiidii,  four  hundred,  arc  used  only  in  counting  bread- 
fruit. 

V  33.  The  lower  numbers  are  connected  with  the  higher  by  the 
conjunction  ma,  meaning  and. 

In  Samonn,  srfiilu  ma  tasi,  eleven  ;  Idn  ijdfiili/  ma  tdsi,  twenty-one ;  in  Tongan, 
Iwyqfiilii  ma  iia,  twelve ;  in  New  Zealand,  ijahiint  ma  tdrn,  thirteen  ;  in  Rarotongan, 
paiiru  ma  a,  fourteen  ;  in  Nukuhivan,  onokiiii  ma  ima,  fiflecn,  &c. 

In  Tongan,  ma  before  dfe  becomes  mo,  as  mano  mo  ufe,  eleven  thousand. 

In  llnwuiinn,  the  word  titma,  which  is  rendered  in  the  vocabulary  "a  number,  com- 
pany, flock,"  is  introduced  l>efbre  the  conjunction,  as  itmi  tiima-ma-talii,  eleven;  tanahd 
Inma-md-liia,  Ibrty-two.  It  is  only  used,  however,  in  connecting  units  with  tens  ;  for 
larger  numters,  mc,  the  usual  term  for  witli  in  that  dialect,  is  emiiloyed,  followed  by  the 
singular  article  (tc  or  id),  or  the  plural  sign  (na)\  thus,  fitly  is  tanahd  me  ta  iimi,  (forty 
with  the  tea) ;  sixty  is  Uinahd  mc  ta  iwdtaliia  ;  seventy  is  tanahd  me  te  tanatola  (forty 
with  the  thirty) — or,  sometimes,  tatinhd  mc  tia  ami  ctoln,  forty  with  three  tens. 

In  the  .Mnngarevan  vocabulary,  the  word  tiima  is  given  with  the  signification  of  unity 
alter  ten  (aniti  ajtris  la  dizaine),  but  there  is  no  example  to  show  its  use. 

\  34.  The  ordinal  numbers  are  formed  by  prefixing  the  article  to 
the  cardinal, — and  if  the  word  be  iti  the  nominative,  or  independent 
of  other  words,  the  particle  hi  also. 


•  In  Nukuhivan,  hiatv  \a  liic  iianu'  oftiie  ]ia|)tT-MlullHTry  trcf,  nt' wfiit-li  tin-  /rt;w  is  maiif-'. 


POLYNESIAN    ti  It  A  M  M  A  R. 


251 


m. 


'O  /e  liKi,  Sum.,  the  second  ;  hr  torn  or  kae  tarn,  Toiig.,  tlio  third  ;  ko  Ic  va,  N.  Z., 
tlio  fourth  i  n  tc  rima,  Tnh.,  the  tillh,  &c. 

i  35.  The  first  time,  the  second  time,  &c.,  are  expressed  in  most 
of  the  dialect.s  by  tu,  or  some  similar  prefi.\. 

In  Samoan,  atu  lita,  the  second  time  ;  ii/u  lo/ii,  llic  third  time  ;  in  Tongnn,  (no  )ta, 
tlio  tolii ;  in  Now  Zenlnnd,  liiuriia,  tiiutoni  ;  in  Rarotongan,  tit-nui,  tii-torii  ;  in  Ha- 
waiian, tiia-hid,  tna-tohi. 

In  the  latter  dialect  this  form  is  olso  used  in  counting  generations:  tnpiuia  is  ancestor; 
tupioKi  tiKi/ii/i,  grandfather;  tii]>iniii  limtiilii,  great  grandfather,  &c. 

In  the  New  Zealand  diaii'ct  the  prefix  Inn  serves  likewise  to  express  the  partitives, — 
as,  tuuliitiy  third  part ;  tiui-ijii/iUrn,  tenth  part  or  lithe.  In  Hawaiian,  hajxi  is  used  for 
this  purpose,  as,  hapahta,  half;  ItiijmiCdhi,  an  eighth. 

)  36.  The  particle  tah,  or  ta'i,  is  used  in  many  of  the  dialects  to 
express  a  meaning  similar  to  the  English  hij  twos,  by  threes,  &c. ;  it 
is  also  employed  in  the  sense  of  twofold,  threefold. 

In  Samoan,  l(Cilii<i,  by  pairs,  or  each  two,  or  twofold  ;  lii'ihiii,  a  liundred  fold  ;  in 
New  Zealand,  tnlcirun,  tukiraii  have  the  same  meanings  ;  ihey  are  sometimes  used  in  a 
reduplicate  form,  as  tatakiraii,  a.  hundred  fold,  or  by  hundreds.  In  Rarotongan,  Uikirua, 
takitoni  ;  in  Tahilian,  Uiiriin,  tdilnrii,  fic. 

In  Mangarevan,  this  is  corrupted  to  tiki,  as  tikirun,  tikitorit,  meaning  two  to  each, 
three  to  each  (in  distribution). 

In  Tongan,  it  is  ta-tiio,  as  ta-tuo-filii ,  seven-fold. 

In  Hawaiian,  t<iilalti  signifies  unfrequcnt,  scarce, — i.  c.  by  ones. 

In  '^\m\ff\XK\a.n,  jyiirim,  jiiitDiii,  2>iia,  ani\  in  \\ayia\\an,]ntliiii,  2Mtolti,  puhd,  cxyiieas 
double,  treble,  fourfold.     In  Hawaiian,  these  words  also  mean  by  twos,  by  threes,  &c. 

i  37.  In  numbering  persons,  toka  or  toko  (to'a  or  to'o)  is  prefixed 
to  the  numerals,  and  also  to  adjectives  expressing  number. 

In  Samoan,  ii/i<i  si/o  to'asr/n/it  m<i  to'ulud,  his  twelve  disciples  ;  lii'dfid,  how  many 
(l)ersons)  \  tti'dlelr,  a  great  many. 

In  Tongan,  tioiio  tisdijxii  tokd-hoijoj'iiln  ma  titkatui,  his  twelve  disciples;  tokdfilia. 
how  many  1  tokaldhi,  many. 

In  New  /culand,  tokorini  yn  i>idtdj>o,  two  blind  men. 

In  Rarotongan,  tokonta  ptikv  taijald  mdinpo,  two  blind  men  ;  tokoia,  how  many? 

In  Tahitian,  im  iir  tunpili  <■  tooloni,  two  or  three  witnesses. 

In  Hawaiian,  it  becomes  by  reduplication  tnto'Oyafi  to/oWiW*;,  five  (persons)  ;  toto'olua, 
how  many  ? 

In  Nukuhivan,  tnkotahi  (or  more  commonly  tootdhi),  tokoiia,  Inkotmi,  tokohid. 

In  the  Samoan  and  Tongan  this  particle  is  used  more  frcfiucntly  than  in  the  other 
dialects ;  in  these  last  i!  is  rather  eni])loyed  to  express  the  number  of  |x?rsons  in  a  com- 
pany, than  for  general  enumeration. 

V  38.  In  Samoan,  in  numbering  certain  objects,  they  make  use  of 
words  analogous  to  the  English  term  head,  in  the  phrase,  "five  head 
of  cattle." 


P 


■r^ 


358 


V  II  I  I,  ()  LO(i  Y. 


; 


f 


Tlio  wcirils  whicli  Mr.  Honlli  jjivos  ns  exnniplos  nre  /m/,  ijitoii,  nuita,  and  fun.  Imu 
(one  moniiiiii;  (iCwliicli  is  /cdl)  U  used  in  oomilin^  lisli,  us  /tin  iiifiif'ii/ii  o  in,  ton  lislios ; 
/nil  /nil  ijiifii/ii,  twenty.  IIiiiki  (pcrhnps  stuno,  ns  yiiod  means  stony)  is  usod  for  cocoa- 
ntits  and  yams,  ns  iin  /iiiin  ijiioit  iiiii,  tlicro  nro  fivo  cocoa-nuts.  Miiln  (cycj  is  for  tido 
yoriim  escii/ciiliim), — ns  niiilit-iin/ii/ii  n  tii/n,  ton  turo-roots.  Pun  (frnit)  is  for  bread- 
fruit, n* Jiin-iinfii/ii  n  %i/ii,  ten  lircid-fruils. 

\V(>  jvnow  (>rii(illiinj;  siinilnr  in  tho  ollior  dialects,  except  tlint  tiiin,  body,  is  sometimes 
used  in  Tnhitian  niid  Uamloiignii  in  cniinieratiiig  persons,  ns  tnnla  linn  n/uirii,  ten  men. 
In  Uarotnngnn,  also,  ;vi«,  and  in  Tnbiliiin  nii^  are  used  liefore  the  word  for  ten  in  general 
enumeration,  as  mii-iiniini  in  idi,  Knr.,  and  nii-nliiirii  in  iii,  Tab.,  ten  [arc]  those 
gencniiions.  This  niii  may  be  a  corruption  of  the  Samian  /nii,  ns  thi-  counting  of  fish 
is  by  far  the  most  common  occnsion  I'or  numbering  among  these  islanders,  and  the  prefi.x 
which  was  at  first  appropriated  to  this  might,  in  time,  come  to  have  a  general  application. 

In  Nuliuliivan,  ]>ii  is  used  in  counting  esculent  roots,  as  afn/ii  jm  ti,  eiin  jio  ti,  one 
root  ofli,  two  roots  of//,-  po  vn/iic  signifies  a  billet  of  wood  for  fuel. 

P  R  O  X  ()  r  N  s. 


J  39.  The  pronouns  of  all  the  dialects,  with  the  exception  of  the 
Tongan,  are  nearly  identical.  All  have  three  numbers,  singular, 
dual,  and  plural.  The  first  person  of  both  the  dual  and  the  plural 
has  two  forms,  to  which  the  terms  exclusive  and  inclusive  have  been 
applied.  The  first  excludes  the  person  addressed, — or,  should  the 
conversation  be  of  two  parties  or  companies  of  persons,  this  pronoun 
applies  only  to  that  to  which  the  speaker  belongs,  and  excludes  the 
other;  as  "we  here  are  good,"  meaning  that  you  who  are  spoken  to 
are  not;  or,  "we  [Samoans]  are  honest,"  meaning  that  the  people  of 
Feejec,  concerning  whom  the  conversation  has  been,  are  not.  The 
other,  or  inclusive  form,  comprehends  both  parties. 

Most  of  the  Samoan  pronouns  have  abbreviated  Ibrms,  which  arc  used  only  in  the 
nominative,  preceding  the  verb.  These  are  given  in  the  following  list  immediately  after 
the  full  Ibrms  : — 


HINOtlLAR. 

nil,  o'li,  '«,  I 

'oe,  V,  thou 
ui,  he 


iiiniin,  mil,  me  (e.vc.) 
>iiiiii,  ta,  we  (inc.) 
'u/iui,  /itii,  ye 
/tiua,  /<i,  they 


PLURAL. 

nutloii,  we  (exc.) 
tiilou,  we  (inc.) 
\>utou,  toil,  ye 
tntoti,  they 


Oit,  I,  is  generally  followed  by  Ir,  in  the  pn'seiit  tense,  as  on  le  siivali,  or  au  savali,  I 
walk,     'f/is  only  used  with  the  preterite  particle  nil,  as  iiiCii  fiti,  I  said. 

All  these  pronouns,  when  in  the  nominative  liefore  a  v<'rb,  or  used  in  answer  to  the 
question — who  is  it? — arc  preceded  by  the  particle  of  agency  '«.  Ja  frequently  has  this 
particle,  also,  when  following  the  verb. 


1'  (1  I,  Y  N  K  H  I  A  N    (i  R  A  M  .M  A  R. 


363 


The  pronouns  in  tlio  dtml  iind  plurnl,  witli  tli(^  exception  iiColiKi  nnd  ''niiloii,  take  an  'i 
bclbro  llieni  whenever  tliey  are  iiseil  us  noiniiintives  nfler  the  verb,  or  when  preceded  hy 
the  prepositions  in,  icic,  <;  am\  by  the  adverb  jxi-ii,  like;  a.s  »o  o  iiKii  V  /(ilou,  tliey 
camo ;  n/ii  iatc  '/  Intnii,  fjo  to  lliem  ;  jiri-n  i  maun,  hke  ns  two.  Wometiincs  this  'i  is 
retained  alter  the  nominative  particle  «,  as  o  '*  laloii,  they. 

The  pronouns  lieard  at  Fakaalb  were  the  same  as  in  tlio  Samoan,  except  that  in  the 
second  person  they  usually  snid  ki)C,  koliin,  and  koiiloii ;  but  tlio  k  was  sometimes 
dropped.     Ki  iikiIoii  was  heard  in  the  nominative, — e  ltd  ki  malim  iloa,  we  do  not  know. 

In  Ton^an  the  pronouns  ilillcr  considerably  from  those  of  the  other  dialects.  Like 
tlie  Samoan,  lliey  liave  a  lull  and  an  abbreviated  htm, — or,  to  speak  more  correctly,  as 
respects  the  dual  and  plural,  a  simple  nnd  a  eonipound  form.  The  simple  or  brief  pro- 
nouns are  only  used  in  tlic  nominative,  before  the  verb. 


SI.Nfit'I.An. 

ail,  71,  kii,  1. 

knc,  ke,  thou 
iti,  lie,  lie 


DUAL. 

mtiiKi,  via,  we,  (exc.) 
ttiiiii,  III,  we,  (inc.) 
iiioiKi,  iiio,  ye 
vuiia,  nil,  they 


ri.UHAU 

maiitolii,  mail,  we,  (exc.) 
luiiliJii,  tun,  we,  (inc.) 
moiilolii,  moil,  ye 
hiiiiIdIii,  iiiiii,  they 


U  is  always  joined  to  the  sign  of  the  tense  which  precedes,  as,  }ici/  alii,  I  went ;  ten 
alii,  I  will  go  ;  kiiiiu  tiikii,  I  delivered.  In  the  present  tense  it  is  usually  followed  by  tc, 
as,  kiioii  Iv  ojii,  I  love.  Kii  is  used  only  aller  the  preterite  sign  iiA,  as  iiaku  viaiiavuhe, 
I  feared. 

The  compound  dual  and  plural  forms  [iiiiinii,  miiiilo/n,  iVc.)  have  the  particle  ki  before 
them  in  all  eases  except  when  used  as  possessive  pronouns.  Their  complete  forms  ns 
personal  pronouns  are,  therefore,  kiiiniiiii,  kimniitiilii,  in'.  All  the  pronouns  of  the  full 
forms,  when  used  as  nominatives  l)efore  the  verb,  take  the  prefix  ko, — as  ko  an,  ko  koe, 
kn  ill,  ko  kimii''i,  ko  kiliwn,  &;e.  AH  except  <((/,  when  used  as  nominatives  after  the 
verb,  or  as  aceuf"!!' I's  without  n  preposition  iH'fore  them,  take  the  prolix  a, — as  akoe, 
aiii,  akimiiiia  L  v . ''^  11],  An  may  have,  in  reality,  the  same  prefix,  but  if  so  it 
coalesces  with  the  initial  vowel. 

Kiln  (according  to  .Mariner)  is  a  pronoun  of  the  first  |wrson,  used  only  in  familiar 
c>/nversation,  and  rather  a  vulgarism. 

[The  iia  and  tdii  which  are  affixed  to  the  dual  nnd  plural  are  properly  the  numerals 
two  and  three.  It  is  probable  that  in  the  other  dialects  these  same  numerals  are  found  in 
a  contracted  form.] 

The  pronouns  in  the  New  Zealand  dialect  arc — 


SINGULAR. 

hiiu 
koe 


DUAL. 

maiia 

tuna 

korna 

rami 


PI.l'RAI.. 

viatmi 
tatoii 
koiitoii 
raloit 


All  the  pronouns,  when  in  the  nominative  Ix'fort^  the  verb,  take  the  prefixed  particle  ko  ; 
when  ill  the  noiiiinalive  after  the  verb  the  singular  pronouns  luiii,  koe,  and  in,  take  the 
particle  a  ;  the  rest  have  no  prefix. 

(it 


254 


PH  I  I,  O  I,  0  0  Y. 


Ill  Knroloni;iiii  unci  Mnngurovoii,  tlio  pronouns  nrc  Ihr  same  as  in  New  /onland,  willi 
the  t'Xci'|(ti(in  of  the  lirsl,  wliicli  is  dii.  Ttm  missintmrics  iilso  write  kiiloii,  in  ItnroUm^nn, 
instead  dI'  koiilnii.  la  in  the  nominative  iilk'r  ii  mtI)  becomes  iiia  ;  the  rest  n'mnin 
unchanged.  Kii  is  iist-d  in  the  neeiisative  oC  the  first  |X!rsun  singular,  aller  the  preposi- 
tions kill  and  (>/,  as  kiakii,  to  me ;  iiikii,  mo. 

The  I'ninnotimn  varies  considerably  from  the  n'st,  some  of  the  words  having  a  |)ecu- 
iiar  form,  us — 


8INUl'I.AR. 

au 


koe 


DUAU 

ri.t'RAL. 

maiinn  or  maiia 

milieu 

tttuija  or  tuiM 

Illicit 

korua 

kulllOH 

riiiia 

lUtCIl 

The  Tahitian  pronouns  are — 


■oc 
'oia 


mui.u, 
taiKt 
'orua 
raua 


matou 
titloii 
'outoii 
riiloii 


Vail  hos  in  the  dative  '(«'(/,  in  the  accusative  iiCii  ;  'oiii  is  used  in  the  nominative  both 
before  and  aller  thv.  verb  ;  wh<ui  used  in  the  sense  of  tlial  (demons.)  or  |)reccded  by  the 
preposition  r,  by,  it  becomes  ia  ,■  in  the  dative  it  has  Uaiiii,  in  the  accusative  iii/ia. 

The  Tahitian  has  a  phiral  indefinite  jironoun  of  the  third  person,  rcia.  It  is  used  in 
si)eakiiig  of  persons  in  their  presence,  and  may  Ix'  either  dual  or  plural.  It  is  probably 
the  same  with  tlic  New  Zealand  demonstrative  pronoun  era,  those,  with  the  particle  n 
before  it  ;  so,  also,  irfiilii,  some,  for  n  lUilii,  and  ("(/,  7,  for  n  iiii. 

The  Hawaiian  pronouns  are  like  the  Tahitian,  except  in  the  llrsjt  and  third  persons 
singular,  where  it  has  au  and  ia,  and  in  the  change  of  ;•  to  /,  making  'olua,  Inua,  and 
latoit.  The  missionaries,  also,  generally  write  mriiu  for  '«  iiii,  but  the  pronunciation  is 
the  same.  An  becomes  in  the  dative  ';'«'«,  and  in  the  accusative  ia'ii.  In  is  regular, 
and  makes  ia  iii. 

The  pronouns  in  Nukuhivan  arc — 


au 

maua 

miitou 

Ian  a 

laloii 

kijc  or  'oe 

kniia  or  'una 

koutou  or  'oulou 

ill 

HUH 

atou 

In  the  pronouns  of  the  second  person,  the  initial  k  may  be:  pronounced  or  omitted  at 
the  pleasure  of  the  speaker ;  the  latter  usage  is  the  most  common.  The  demonstratives 
tenei  and  /ca  are  frequently  substituted  for  the  pronoun  of  the  third  |>erson  singular. 


I 


1>  ()  .s  .s  E  IS  s  I  \  F.  1'  K  o  N  o  i;  N  s. 

^  40.     The  origifial  form  of  the  possessive  pronouns  seems  to  have 
been  the  personal,  with  the  prepositions  o  and  a  prefi.\e(J.     We  may 


f   , 


!•  O  L  Y  N  K  H  I  A  N    (J  R  A  M  M  A  R. 


255 


coiijccturo  tliat  there  was  once  a  personal  pronoun  na,  of  the  first 
person,— as  we  find  iie  still  existing  in  the  Tongan ;  and  perhaps  a 
pronoun  ku  of  the  first  person. 

The  Samonn  pronnuns  of  the  first  nnd  second  persons  singular  and  thi:  second  plural 
have  two  I'nrnis,  ii  full  and  a  contracted.  The  pronouns  which  are  joined  witli  singular 
nouns  dillbr  lioni  ihoso  which  are  joined  with  plurals  in  havin(r  the  I,  of  the  article  le, 
prefixed  to  them,  ns  :— 


KINCiiri.AR. 

Full  roriii.  Conlrictcd. 

laa^i,  ImCu  UCii,  lii'ii 

lii'iie,  Mtx:  li'iii.  Ion 

ham,  lima 
la  Million,  In  ^oiitoa         Idiitoii,  /diitnii. 


Pl.l'RAL. 

Full  form.  Contracted. 

tia'ii,  nCu  (Cii,  o'li,  my 

«'«',  o\ie  all,  Oil,  tliy 

iinii,  ijHii,  his 
a  'oiilDii,  0  'uiitciit         diitoii,  Oiitoii,  your 


The  remaining  forms  of  the  dual  and  plural  are  simply  the  personal  pronouns  with  the 
particles  /ii.  In,  it,  o,  prefixed, — as  In  maim,  la  maim,  a  maim,  o  maim,  &c. 

The  indefinite  article  sc,  when  it  comes  l)eforc  these  pronouns,  coalesces  with  them, 
taking  the  place  of  the  /;  as  c  le  ui  somifalc,  he  has  no  house  (for  >■  h  ai  sc  falc  u  ia, 
there  is  not  a  house  k'longing  to  hirn) ;  c  le  ai  sa  matuu  mra  c  ai,  we  tiave  nothing 
to  eat. 

_  It  will  be  -jbservcd  that  the  |)ronouns  beginning  with  /  are  an  example  of  the  pecu- 
liarity pointed  nut  in  §  17  ;  lini'ii  tdiiia,  my  son,  is  for  Ic  lama  a  an;  h  matim  faiiim, 
our  country,  is  instead  of  Ir  faiiua  o  malou.  This  formation  is  common  to  all  the 
dialects. 

The  diflercnct'  between  latCu  and  ImCii,  hum  and  loiia,  &c.,  is  the  same  as  ;hat  be- 
tween (/  iumI  I).     [^.  §  18.] 

Mil,  nspMDng  with  or  for,  is  also  compounded  with  the  possessive  pronouns,  as  iiioii 
uau,  with  ihv  brothers;  iiiona  Inn/a,  for  its  evil. 

At  Fakasilii,  the  following  possessive  pronouns  were  heard, — lal^ii,  lukr  (sing.),  iiiai 
(pi.),  my  ;  mukii,  for  me  ;  ton  (sing.),  on  (pi.),  thy  ;  /o  nmtoii,  our ;  to  outon,  o  outoii,  your. 

The  Tongan  makes  no  distinction  lictwccn  pronoiuis  joined  with  singular  nouns,  and 
those  joined  with  plurals.  It  has,  however,  several  classes  of  pronouns.  Those  which 
precede  the  noun  are  as  follows  : — 


BlNUL'tAR. 

eki(,  hoku 

hoo,  ho 
enc,  hono 


DUAL. 

cma,  homa 
eta,  hota 
hoo  mo,  homo 
Ilia,  hoiia 


PLURAL. 

email,  human, 
etau,  hotait 
lull)  moil,  homoii 
eilaii,  hoiiau 


The.se  foriris  diller  like  those  in  a  and  o  of  the  Samoan. 

The  pronouns  whif  h  li)llow  the  noun  are  a  akii,  o  akii,  mine  or  of  me  ;  a  an,  o  on, 
thine;  a  ia,  o  in, — a  •ma,  o  oii'i,  his;  a  mana,  o  mana;  a  mantoln,  o  maiiloln,  &c. 
These  are  also  used  when  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article  Im,  and  the  preposition  ma 


9M 


l>lt  I  I,  OI,(M?  V. 


or  iiiii;  ns  //'/  mtiiii  kiti,  soitin  oCtlicir  CcmmI  (or  some  food  ofllicirs);  ha  (imnii  liJo,  Home 
of  your  oil  ;  ma  nkii,  for  tiie  ;  ma  iiiiiiiiitiilu,  for  yonrsolvi'S,  or  for  your  own  ;  mo  onaii- 
tiilii,  for  llioir  own. 

Tin- /(  in //"/■//, //'I,  iVc,  is  prolinhly  from  the  nrtiolf //r  ,•  this  nrliclr  nlso  frr(|iiontly 
prtvi'ilcs  tlir>  oilirr  cliiMs,  as  liv  ciir  Jiir,  his  inolliur ;  /«■  t/iiin  liiiii,  tliiir  coming,  (li>r  lie 
hull  II  mill,  llio  coiiiinf;  of  llirm.) 

In  the  ilii\l«'cl  of  New  Zciiliind  tin-  |)os9C8;<ivo  pronounH  iiro  dilK-rcnt  for  singular  and 
plund  nouriH,     Thry  nrr — 


HINIMUH. 

Iiikii,  liikit 

tail,  Inn 

til  nil,  lllllll, 

la  maiia,  In  miiiiii 

ta  maioii,  In  maliiii 


I'l.mAi.. 
akii,  iikii,  my 
ail,  nil,  Ihy 
ana,  niiii,  his 

a  miiiiii,  n  maiiii,  our  (duni) 
a  maloii,  o  miUim,  our  (pluriil) 


nnd  so  for  the  remainder  of  llip  dim!  nnd  plural. 

Miikii,  ninkii, — man,  mim, — maun,  mnna, — ma  •ininia,  mo  niauti,  iVc,  mcnn  of  or 
for  me,  At.,  nnd  nre  frequently  used  with  the  sense  of  for  me,  for  thee,  iVc,  nnd  licnco 
simply  mine,  thine.  Nakii,  iinku — nan,  iioii — nana,  iioini — >ui  maiia,  no  maun,  &c., 
ore  nlso  used  to  signify  for,  of,  or  hy  me,  thco,  &c. 

It  should  l)e  observed  thnt  the  si-eond  (or  plurni)  cinss  of  pronouns  is  used  nfter  the 
nejjntive  Innr,  w  lielher  the  noun  be  in  Ihe  singular  or  not  ; — as,  ka  lioic  una  liiahia,  it 
wns  not  his  wish,  or,  he  had  no  desire.  In  some  cnses,  moreover,  this  class  is  used  for 
the  ordinary  giMiitive  of  the  personal  pronoun  uOer  a  noun,  singidnr  as  well  as  plural, 
as.  If,  alma  nna  c  ::nho  ana,  Ihe  appearaiiee  of  him  who  sut,  >Vc. 

The  Knrotongan  has  two  classes  of  pronouns,  resembling  those  of  the  New  Zealand  in 
soutui,  but  dilfering  somewliKt  in  use  ;  they  ar 


I        1 


IsT  ei.ASR. 

tiikii,  Inkil' 
tniin,  loan 
tana.  Ion  a 
la  mana,  lo  maiia,  &c. 


3l>  CI.ASfl. 

iikii,  iikii 
aa.ii,  ixM 
ana,  ona 
a  mana,  o  maun,  &e. 


The  first  class,  unlike  the  New  Zealand,  nre  used  with  both  singular  and  plural  noims. 
The  second  cliissjire  used  priiioipally  in  the  two  liillowing  cases: — (1)  with  numerals, 
as  riinni  aan  nrr,  five  arc  tliy  houses  ;  (U)  after  the  negative  karc,  os,  karc  ona  are,  he 
has  no  house  or  housjs.     They  weix",  no  doubt,  originally  plural  forms. 

There  is  a  class  of  obbrevioled  pronouns,  in  the  singidar,  which  ditTer  from  the  pre- 
ceding in  not  regarding  the  dillerencc  of  a  and  o;  they  arc  lAkii,  my  (pronounced  short); 
to,  thy,  nnd  tana,  his.  They  seem  to  Ix'  used  liir  the  purpose  of  discriminating  between 
ditli'rent  meanings  of  a  word ;  loku  racriia  is,  my  soul ;  tikii  Vaeriia  (said  by  the 
Supremo  RiMiig),  my  Spirit. 

Nakii,  tiokn, — mum,  noon, — iiana,  nona, — na  mana,  910  mana,  &c.,  mean  of,  for  or 
by  me,  thee,  him,  us  two, — and,  also,  simply  mine,  thine,  &ic. 

In  Mangarevan,  the  possessive  pronouns,  as  given  in  the  vocabulary,  are,  takn,  toku,  my ; 


Pol,  V  N  r,  SI  A  N    (IRA  M  MA  U. 


','57 


liiknr,  lohiir,  lliy  j  liiiid,  lotui,  hiii ;  In  Maim,  to  maiiti,  our,  iVe.  Also,  iinhn,  iiiikii, — 
mikiH',  iiiikin', — nana,  iiiiiin,  tiC,  with  tho  miiiho  niPniiiiiK!i.  [tcHiilrs  iIicmc,  tini/oi  i" 
Hivoii  lis  iiii|ilyiiif,'  IkiiIi /(«•  ;/»■,  (lis  iiiitkii  Irtiii  iiini ,  >um\v\\\m^  Wtt  iwo,)  nnt\  J fiim  iiir 
(lie  iiKiii  /iiiii).  Mil  is  iiImi  II  iiiiirl<  of  tlic  gniiitivc,  anil  exprt'sscN  iiiorr  |iiir(iiMiiMrly 
iios.srHsioil. 

Ill  I'niimotii,  we  liriiril  lor  nil/,  liikii  niid  "/•(/, — liir  lli>i,  lukm',  iiiikin-, — Inn  iiiid  Ion, — 
nil  iind  nil ; — niiil  for  his,  Iniin.  It  scciiicil  timl  nn  iiiiil  nil  wcro  iHcd  us  in  N'l'W  /onlniui, 
— Inn  iiiiikiii  WHS  your  (iitlicr  ;  ""  ninkni,  your  piirriils,  l'iitlnr  and  niotlifr. 

The  Tahiliiin  has  ihri'o  clnsw^s,  siiiiiliir  to  those  of  tho  Itarotoniran  ; — 


/(/  //,  Inn 

llt^nf,  Inoc 

liiiin,  Iniiii 

Id  iiiiiini.  In  miiiin,  lirc. 


nn  II,  lion 
inline,  nn'nf 
nniin,  nnnn 


(I  n,  n  II,  my 

a'lK,  n'nr,         thy 
nitn,  nun,        his 


It  has  also  the  abhrcviated  forms  lii'ii,  my, — In,  thy, — and  tiUiii,  his, — called  by  the 
missinimries  neutnil,  as  they  apply  to  all  nouns  iii<liscriminntcly. 

The  Tahilians  (nfcording  to  the  (irnininar)  soinctiiiies  substitute  the  first  person  siiijiu- 
lar  for  the  sr<on(l,  saying  Inn,  Inn,  iinii,  nun,  \'c.,  liir  Inui',  lniK\  nnin',  mine.  It  appears 
to  1)0  a  conipliinentary  form,  like  the  Riifjlish  //'////■  {ux  lliij.  (May  it  not  rather  k;  the 
Uarotoiigan  lnnn,lniiii,i<-!  the  Inn,  Inn,  tt\'  New  Zialand,  I'auinotu,  ami  Hawaii,  which 
may  have  Ik'cii  the  usual  form  in  the  Tahitian,  though  it  has  now  lieeonie  nearly  obsolete? 
The  reason  for  substituting  the  present  form,  Iiiik:,  linn-,  was  probably  the  great  similarity 
l)C.tween  /<('/',  /«'(/,  my,  and  Inn,  Inn,  thy  j  this  would  be  morc  likely  to  create  confusion 
in  the  Tahitian  than  in  the  llawaiiaii,  as  the  guttural  break  (marked  by  the  inverted 
comma)  is  much  less  perceptible  in  the  firiuer  than  in  the  latter.J 

The  Hawaiian  has  the  three  classes  of  possessives  :— 


UCu,  li^ii 

tun.  Ion 

tiiiin,  Inna 

III  niiinii.  In  niiinn,  &c. 


11(1  II,  no  II 
tiiin,  nnn 
niinn,  tnma 


n  n,  o  n 
nil,  nn 
iiini,  nun 


The  third  class  (those  commencing  with  o  mid  n)  ore  not  used  precisely  as  in  Rnro. 
tongan  and  Tahitian  ;  lliey  have  more  prniicrly  the  meaning  of  the  genitive, — of  me,  of 
thee,  \-c. ;  as,  in  ninn  niclii  n'n,  these  words  of  me,  or  of  mine;  Iclalii  hnic  n'n,  one 
house  of  thine,  or  one  of  thy  houses.  They  are  used  after  prepositions  which  require  to 
be  followed  by  o,  as  imnn  nun,  iK'fore  him  ;  ninlnnn  ami,  above  him  ;  so,  ma  li'ii  tiei, 
by  or  through  me,  by  my  means  or  agency  ;  mil  onn  In,  by  or  through  him,  his  agency, 
influence,  or  means  i  nun  o  tiitnii  In,  t'rom  us.  It  should  lie  observed  that  when  these 
pronouns  are  precedid  by  mn  or  mni,  lliey  arc  usually  lollowed  by  the  particles  In 
(there),  or  /"'  (here).  il/»,  when  prefixed  to  a  noun,  has  a  ililferent  meaning  from  that 
which  it  bi'ars  w  hen  joined  with  these  pronouns ;  it  signifies  then,  n^st  in,  or  motion 
towards  a  place ;  as,  nin  In  hnlr,  at  the  house  ;  nn  linin  nia  ma  lliln,  he  sailed  to  Ililo — 
but  '«'  Ililn,  is  the  more  common  form,     (Andrews.) 

The  pronouns  of  the  third  lonn  are  also  used  after  the  negative  fJc,  as,  anie  niia  inn, 
he  has  no  sin ;  nnic  mi  nliia  f,  thou  shall  have  no  olher  gods. 


*    'i 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


1.1 


lU  1^    122 


140 


lift 


6" 


FhotogFaphic 

^Sciences 

Corporation 


;\ 


\ 


23  WIST  MAIN  STMIT 

WmSTIR.N.Y.  MSM 

(7t«)  •7U-4S43 


9mmmm 


\ 


'25S 


P  II I  l.o  I,  0(i  V. 


Til  1(1,  to  ill,  is  n  liirm  soimliiiics  siilisliliilcd  liir  llir  nmrc  connnon  Innn,  hiiiii. 
Till'   Ihiwaiiiiii  liiiN  iilsii  llic  iiriilral  |ir<iiiiiiiiis /(('/',  my,  and  /",  tliy  ;  [•|ii.  /dmr,  ||U.'| 
UM'il  witliiMil  D'^'aril  to  the  ili.sliiiotii)ii  k'twcon  a  iiml  o. 

Till"  Niikiiliivan  |K>»ws.sivi'  |iri>ni>iiiis  aro  liirnicil  liy  |ir<'li\iii;;  In,  In,  /in,  iin.  In  llio  |)or- 
soiial,  as  III  ml.  III  nil,  ml  im,  ii'i  im,  lil  *<»'  "r  III  kin\  lil  in.  In  tit,  lit  nttlliil,  iVc,  Tlu' 
soODiul  [KTSuii  lias  likrw  isi'  the  loniis  Innn,  Imiii,  iiiinii,  itittii.  'I'lli.'ro  an:  also  two  pro- 
nouns, til  (or  |K.'rlia|is  //''"),  my,  and  In,  thy,  which  aru  prulNilily  neutral  forms, 

111.  M  O.N  ST  II  ATI  \  i;s 


Ml-     Tilt'  ticmoiistrative  proiuuins  arc  formed,  for  the  most  part, 
by  prefixiiifT  the  article  to  ndverbs  of  pltice. 


In  faiiinaii — 


leiiii,  this ; 
li  nil,  Mial  : 
Iria  and  leu,  thai  ; 


|ll.  /"'/,  these 
|>l.  /'",  lllosu 

pi.  Ill  and  la  r,  thosn 


As  liiiri  liinnlii,  this  man  ;  mi  untn  lininlii,  all  llirso  men,  iVc.  IjIh  sroms  In  dcslgnnlf 
a  greater  disianci'  than  /nui.na  «  /ma  In i/nln,  tUut  man  then- :  'J  li/it  nni,  lo  yonder 
village.  /(/,  llioiigli  haviiiu  the  lorm  ol"  the  |iri)iiouii  hi;  is  used  in  llii!  plural,  as  in  iiri 
ii/m,  these  words  ;  in  iiitn,  those  things.  I  have  met  with  no  example  of  In  i;  which  is 
given  liy  Mr.  llcalh. 

In  l''akaali>,  liii'i  nw\  linn  weif  iisi'd  llir  this  and  Ihnt, 

In  Toiigaii,  the  deiiionstratives  are  heiii,  this  or  these,  and  hiitn,  that  or  those.  Tlioy 
lake  llie  particles  /■«  and  '/  U-I'oru  iheui,  according  lo  their  place  in  the  sentence, — in 
which  case  llii'y  dro|p  the  //,  and  bi'coine  Icm  iin  iid  m  iin.  They  are  Irecjuenlly  divided, 
the  article  he  pn-oediiig  the  noun,  and  the  particle  iii  and  na  following  it ;  os,  he  hnlii  ni, 
this  place  (the  place  her<') ;  he  lamtn  nii,  that  man  (the  man  there). 

The  \ew  /Zealand  dcmouslralives  arc — 


Ifnei,  this ; 
li  ml,  that ; 
tern,  that ; 


pi.  rtiei,  these 
pi.  emi,  thase 
pi,  (/•'/,  those 


Titiii  and  /'•/•'/  diller,  in  that  the  (iirmr'r  is  us<.d  in  8|»'akiiig  of  things  in  sight,  or  to 
which  the  attenlion  of  the  parlies  is  directed,  and  tern  of  things  at  a  distance.  'IV/ici  is 
I'mtiuintly  divided,  as  te  iwi  nci,  this  |X'ople. 

I'niiii,  that,  pi.  nun,  those, — arc  used  not  in  jiointiiig  out  ohjects,  Init  in  r<;ferring  tir 
iheni ;  as  n  i  niiiri  ihn  i  nun  rn,  an<l  aller  liiose  davs  (of  which  we  have  liecn  s|H'aking). 

In  Uarolongan  the  <lcinonstrative  pronouns  are  leiti  or  cic, — leinini  or  rieiiei,  this  or 
these  ;  le  rcirn,  that  or  those;  Iniia  net  or  nun  iiei,  this  or  these;  iniin  rn  or  nun  rn, 
that  or  those.  'Diia  and  tern,  teiinmi  ami  li mm,  all  mean  ihnl,  but  tliey  nrv  seldom 
usetl,  and  the  distinction  between  Ihem  is  not  apparent.  They  are  sometimes  employed 
at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  with  the  meaning  of "  therefon-,"  "on  tlia*.  account," — 
and  they  serve  also  as  an  earnest  mode  of  address, — as  leiinnn  jiikiknne!  thou  hy|«K;rile  I 


*, 


iM)  I,  ^■  .\  i:s  1  A  .N  ci  i{  A  M  \i  A  rt. 


25'J 


liic  niid  (//«;  (lilliT  iVurii  /(/"  and  luiin  iniicli  iis  tin-  v\\\>*  of  |Mwsc.ssiv(;  proiioims  Ih> 
fsiniiiii);  wjlli  ('  mill  »  ilillir  I'l'inn  llii'  nllii'is  ;  iluit  In,  tin  y  iirr  iisi'd  uilli  iiiiiiirrnls,  nr  with 
IIki  |iliiriil  |iailirlr.s  /<»/,(  anil  «",  anil  allcr  ihi'  nrjialivi'  /,((/<,•  as  ^^'/  cc"  y'/.r  tniinlii 
III,  niK'  of  lliDsi'  (wo  iiirli.  ii  /■('<;  lii'iii i  piiLr  /,ii/,i ,  \vf  air  Iwu  swiirils  (or  two  urv 
Ihcw^  sworiU). 

Ill  Miiiignrcvnn,  « — »i'i,  iIiIh,  niiil  c — /i</ or  <' — »/(»,  llmt ;  an  u  imit  wt,  tliis  lliiiig; 
I',  mill  nil,  that  tliiii){ ;  a  luiiiiiriki  urn,  lliiil  cliild.  'l\iii'i  mid  ^'/i"  and  Inn  am  also 
U!n;i\,  nn  /in  I II im  Inn i  ki)  iivnilJ  li nil,  t\t\a  is  alxivi',  that  is  Intlow  ;  ;»»,  Ic  iilniiki  li in 
hiknii,  riilr  fnii'iilf  viiiil  tli'  In  ^mi'i  tin  mi, 

III 'I'aliitiaii, /»/'  or  (vc, /<•/'/"(  or  ((V/»7,  niraii  this  or  llii>r.  7i  (t,  acrordiiifs  to  llir 
missinnary  i^ramiiiar,  "  si-nns  to  niiswiT  rxarlly  to  thi'  l'"rciicli  ixci,  this,  mid  liiiini  to 
cvlni-ii,  iilli-ii,  this  lure,  closu  at  hand." 

Tnnn  rii  nnd  iinara,\\mX  or  those;  the  diUbrciice  hctwetii  iIh'si' two,  uiul  Ijotwii'ii 
trie  mill  lir  is  tlie  same  as  in  IJai'iitoiigan. 

'Dim  and  tern  Utxh  iniiin  lliai,  as  in  N'rw  Zialaiid ;  Inin  means  "  that  tiling  mar 
yon,"  or  near  Iho  [htsom  addrcssid,  liiil  at  a  distanri'  iVoiii  Ihi'  s|MaUi'ri  tern  iiiians  "  that 
yolidrr,"  at  a  dislaiici;  Ironi  hotli.      7!'  nirn,  that  llirri',  is  also  nsid. 

In  is  ollcn  used  as  a  drinonslralivi',  but  «illi  ralhrr  an  induriniti'  scnso, — nin  in,  that 
is  it.  It  is  l'rei|nrnlly  inlrodncid  liy  llii'  nalivrs  whiiv  no  similar  word  would  Ijo  nscd  in 
Eii);lish. 

Ill  Hawaiian  tlio  ilomonstralivrs  am  Icin  or  rin  and  ;»/",thisi  /'/",  /",lhnt;  nn— 
tici,  this,  and  "" — /",  that.  Tin'  last  two  an;  used  in  nlirring  to  ohji  rts  whirh  have 
rornicil  till!  snhji'pt  of  coiivorsation,  as  /"/  /mi  n'n  nn  Innnln  In,  that  man  (Iwloi'iMnin- 
tioned)  has  rcliirncd.  Em  is  synonymous  with  ;cin,  but  is  most  coinmnnly  rm|iloyiil  nt 
the  lH'j;inniiij4  ol'n  sontcnro,  to  cxpn'ss  "  this  is,"  or  "  thrsc  arc." 

Till'  Xukiihivan  has  Iriiri  or  liieini,  this,  tinn,  that  (nonr  or  by  yon),  and  ^vi  or  Irm. 
that  (yondrr  or  ImaoiiiI  yon).  The  mi  and  nn  arc  ficiiurnlly  posHixoil  to  tlio  noun,  ns 
If  line  iiei,  this  ivdaliasli ;  Ir  iimi  ini,  that  i;irl ;  nn  nnf  nn,  llioso  f;irls.  //;/('  is  used 
like  nil  in  Hawaiian,  ns  Inia  vn'ii  mi,  this  very  cmioi',  linn  kiiiiiiln  nn,  that  very  man. 

I  NTKIlKOd  .\TI\i:s 


i  42.  Tlic  interrogative  pronouns  are  seen  in  the  simplest  form  in 
the  Samoan ;  but  tiiey  arc  nearly  the  same  in  all  the  dialects. 

In  Fakanlii,  those  which  were  hoard  wi're  ni,  who  !  os  kii  ni  kne,  who  art  thou  \  i  ni. 
whom  .'  and  o,  what  /  whirh  look  the  arlirli-  bofoii-  it,  as  sr  rf,  kn  Ic  rf,  whnt  I  Pr  si  a. 
like  what,  or  how  !  Ai,  who,  is  usiil  in  this,  ns  in  all  the  diulei-ls,  in  asking  the  name 
of  any  [jerson  or  lliiiij; ;  as  hxii  Inn  innn,  what  is  thy  name  f  Ko  ni  to  onion  Inn nu. 
whnt  is  (the  name  oQ  thy  eoimtry  '. 

In  Saniomi,  iii,  who  t  as  'n  ni,  w  ho  '.  (noiii.) ;  o  ni,  a  ni,  of  w  l.oni  .'  '«(  le  ni,  to  whom  ' 
A,  what  f  ns  c  d,  sc  rt,  '«  /»•  rf,  ni  rf,  whnt  1  Ace.,  i  sc  li,  i  ni  rf,  ns  c  va'iivii'ai  i  ni  rt,  to 
see  what  '.  Fin,  which  ?  as  '«  Ir  fin,  which  f  (oC  two  or  severnl)  juifrn  ?  juifrn  f  which, 
tins  or  that  ?  Fin,  how  many  ?  as  rjinjiili,  how  mniiy  houses  !  'Ih'njia  ni  tnynln,  how 
many  arc  tho  men  \ 


'2flO 


l>  II  I  1,1)  I.  (Hi  V. 


111 


III  Tiiii)(!iii,  />"/,  who  '  tnki'ii  iIh'  |>nrtii'li-!t  /"  nml  ",  iici  nnliii);  In  IIh  |i|iiit  in  tin'  wii. 
((lice  ;  ff-l\.,  "  Ion  iiiiil  n  Imi,  H  Iiiim'  ?  //</,  u  Iml  '  it  |iri'i'rili  il  liv  llir  lirlicii'  lir,  nx  kurliil 
(num.),  wluil  '■  ki  hr  tin.  In  whni  f  J  lir  liii,  by  wlinl  f  /■'//»;,  Ikiw  miiny  f  n«,  r  filui Jitlr, 
liMtt  ninny  liiMi")'!! '  tnkntihn,  Imw  iiiiiiiy  (|iiT«iin») ' 

III  Ni'u  />'.iliiiiil,  iIh'  IntiTrii^alivi'  |in>iii'iiiii  iin-  t'"',  ului,  >i/ir,i,  nml  lini.  Wni  lakes 
till'  x.iiiif  |Kiriiilit  mill  |iri  ixniiidiii  iis  till'  ipniiHiiiii-i ;— «  (/•,//,  wlio?  in  (/'>//,  wlium  f 
null  III,  Intiii  nr  l>\  ulioiii  '  Alri  \vf  hi  in  llir  luiiiiiniilivi-,  iiiiil  li  in  llic  uliliijiii'  <'iim-!>  ; 
n»  hrnliii,  wlinl  ?  im  li  tilin,  liir  wliiil  '  /  /('  iilni,  wliiit  (iiri'.)  f  Tilirn  in  wliirli  \  kii  trlirii 
'I  in  liik'iniii,  HJiirli  iiI'iIm'  two  ?    Jim  in  liow  tiiiiny  '.    Il  liikis  III)*  |in  lix  lokii  tiir  imtmiiih. 

Ill  Knriiloii^nn,  ni.  wliof  mi,  wlinl  .'  '"",  »liir|i  I  in,  Imw  niiiliy  f  Ku  in,  who  F  id 
III,  whom  '  Klin,  whiil  F  «"  '>  mi,  lor  wiml  '  /.d  /<(ii  i  min  iki  tnijnhi  Inkuiiiii  mi,  which 
odlii-w  iwo  imii  !  fiik'iiii,  liow  iiiiiiiy  |Nr*>n«  f 

III  MiinL'iinviiii,  tlh-  iiilirrofinlivrs  iirc  tin-  siiiiic  iim  in  lh<'  Itiirolonifnn,  rxrr|il  ^xd, 
which  ' — II  lonii  which  wc  Irivc  nol  limnil  iii  llic  hitter,  llmiifih  it  iiiiiy  exist. 

Ill  I'niimoliinn,  ko  irni,  who  F  r  iihii,  whnt  ? 

In  'I'uhilian,  viii,ti/iii,  Iriliin,  anil  /"".  Vni  hnn  o  viii,  who?  In  vni,  tit  mi,  mi  riii,  mi 
rni,  iif  whom  '  whow  F  'in  mi,  to  whom?  in  viii,  whom  F  Alui  hn«  r  nlin,  mi  le  nliii, 
I  h  iihn,  iVr,  'lYilirn,  which  F  an  inlnii  li  ninilui,  which  i»  the  Im'kI  7  (literiilly,  which 
IS  th<-  (JikmI  ')     i^  hill  Inn,  how  ninny  hoiisiM  F  Imiliin  Innin,  Imw  iimiiy  men  F 

III  lliiwniiiin.  I'd/,  nlin,  hm,  nml  Inn.  Wni  liiis  'u  vnt,  who  F  n  irni,  n  imi,  ol'whom  F 
III  nni.  III  fill,  whow  F  mi  wni,  iin  iini,  lor  wlioiii  F  'in  imi,  lo  whom  F  in  irai,  whom  F 
\c.  Aim  linn  hrnkii,  wimt  F  n  It  nlin,  n  Ir  nlin,  ol'  whnt  F  mi  Ir  nlin,  mi  le  nlin,  lor 
wliiit  •  iVc.  llin  hn§  'o  Inn,  which  F  n  hm  nn<l  n  lirn,  of  which  F  '/  lirn,  to  which  F  Ac. 
///'/  ha!<  r  hill  mill  n  hill,  how  many  (ihinuM)  '  miil  Inlo  nliin,  how  many  |Mrwin»  F 

III  Niiktihivnn,  kn  m  or  '>/  m,  who  F  tn  m.  In  m,  mi  ni,  no  ni,  ol'  of  liir  whom  F  iim 
III,  iVoiii  whom  '  III  III,  lo  wlioni  F  \c.,  nlin,  whul  F  lilnn,  which  F  iin  Ii  Inn  Inn,  which 
gourd  '  Jlin,  how  many  F 

I  N  D  E  K  I  .M  T  K   I'  II  (I  .V  O  I   \  S. 

i  48.  Mo.st  (if  the  words  wliich  would  fall  under  tliis  head  (answer- 
ing to  some,  other,  many,  and  the  like)  have  been  already  i^iveii,  in 
treatini^  of  the  article  [v.  'y  11]  The  followinff  are  a  few  wiiich  may 
i)e  here  noticed. 

Snmoan.  .Yijii,  some;  mi,  other,  its  num.,  'n  mi,  another  or  other!! :  ficii.,  ii  i»i,  o  i.ii, 
111"  another,  of  others,  A:c.  Jjc  ni  sr  or  /'•  ni  ni,  nol  any,  none  (iVom  fi ,  not,  in,  there, 
mill  the  article),  us  r  Ir  ni  se  men  e  ni,  then.>  is  not  any  thing  to  ent  ;  r  Ir  ni  tit  Inyitn, 
there  arc  no  men.  fma,  unudtivn,  nil,  every  (frtiin  umii,  done,  linislieil) ;  as  ia  mat 
iiiiin,  all  llie^'  lhiii;is  ;  'n  Initnlii  umnlnrn,  nil  men  i  'o  Imni  nmnlnvn,  every  In-e.  Sr, 
the  articli',  is  used  in  all  indi  liiiite  sense,  which  can  hardly  Im'  nnilereil  in  l')nt;lish,  an 
'o  III  rn  fr  lihfili,  \\\\i>  \s  Hitnw  one  (or,  who  is  it|  thai  cIiinim's  F  /(Mi,  as  tilnsi  fnsi 
nun  ititi,  niiy  little  thiiii;  (or  rather,  any  littli!  jHirtion  ofa  thin^). 

Tungan.  Mihi,  some,  nny,  other;  /»//,  or  /////  lie,  nil  (in  niimlM'r),  every  one ;  kotmi. 
or  kotoa  U,  all,  the  whole,  evirv  !  '"'  Iminln  knlini  lie,  every  inmi,  or  nil  the  men. 


I'  O  I,  V  N  K  S  I  A  N    C  K  A  M  M  A  K. 


201 


Nrw  /I'liliinil.  M'lifii,  Irirahi,  some;  Irrii  <i/ii,  tr/iilii  iitu,  nnothi'r  ;  rrn  iilii,  etiiln 
«/w,  ollirm  ;  us  iru  atii  kiiii/<i,  olhcr  towns ;  kiitmi,  all,  us  f/.n  mm  kniixt,  ull  those 
things. 

Itunitongnn.  Trlnhi  aro)))i,  some  (|>rrsons)  ;  Mnhi  /kit,  siimr,  n  pnrt ;  ctiii-kf,  ntlinrs  ; 
nuitfiiiiiii, a  grnit  niuiiy,  "  / /'ni  ijiii  i  lertt  jci'."  is  given  I'or  " in  divurs  |ilnct's."  KatiKt, 
ull, — Ir  nil  mm  kiitmi,  ull  tilings. 

Taliitiun.  lUnlii  jHir,  sdinc  ;  fiiiiii,  sonM', — ns  /r;««  in,  some  lish  ;  Inqfiiiiii  man  rim- 
risen,  sonir  of  (he  I'haristTs.     Alixi,  all  ;  Innn  tiinii  mm  ntiHi,  ull  tlmsc  things. 

Iluwuiiun.  Wnhi,  suinc;  liiii,  another,  ustnl  only  afhtr  u  |irL'|H)siti(in,  us  u  hni,  n  hat, 
oronothrr  ;  to  hni.  In  Imi,  another's  j  Un  hai,  to  another,  ic.  A  pan,  or  a  jmn  liia,  all 
(rroni  jxiii,  (lone,  riiiisliiil) ;  ns  in  man  mni  n  jnii,  nil  those  things. 

In  Nukuhivun,  tclnln,  lUilii,  some,  others  ;  InOihi  ntn,  inoro;  iitua,  all. 


•i   , 


l(  K  I,  A  T  I  X  K  H. 


ii  44.  The  Polynesian  dialects  have,  properly  speaking,  no  relative 
pronouns.  Their  place  is  supplied  by  words  Iwlonging  to  other  parts 
of  speech,  or  they  are  left  to  be  understood  from  the  con.struction  of 
the  sentence. 

Pnknuro.  2^  i-aku  n  Pilmifn, — Ir  vnka  nhi,  the  cunoi:  of  I'ilinjfn,  the  cnnoe  [which 
is]  going. 

Snnionn.  O  Ir,  sing,  and  o  r,  pi., — in  ohiique  cnseH  simply  Ir  and  r,  arc  used  as  rela- 
tives, or  to  snpply  the  pln<-e  oI'sik  li ;  ns,  ir  JiinJrUiin  o  Ir  mil,  hiesscd  is  he  tlint  comes, 
or,  the  oiinic-r  ;  Innjxm  i  liimujiilii  n  r  nil-  nin,  ten  virgins  who  took  ;  aloj'n  ntii  i  r  frtiiii 
mni,  love  them  tlint  eurse.  Li-iia,  pi.  rmi,  ntt-  use<l  in  a  similar  manner,  as,  u  Iriin  jirpelo 
ill  te  ill,  who  U-tmyed  him  ;  ma  ma  miilimnli,  and  thou  who  tollowc<lst ;  [but  perhaps 
the  nn  should  rather  !«■  considered  the  sign  ol'tlie  past  tense ;  we  have  not  Ibnnd  Irna  or 
nui  in  till'  prc'sent.)  Sn  is  termed  hy  Mr.  Heath,  in  one  place,  a  relative  of  past  time, 
and  in  another,  a  sign  of  tense  ;  it  is  used  ns  I'ollows: — Ir  iijxi  sa  'c  ftii  tiiai,  the  word 
which  thou  didsl  s|H>nk  ;  'o  Inlnii  sn  mni,  they  who  were  sick.  A'k,  the  pro|M'r  sign  of 
|viRt  time,  is  ollen  so  pinced  ns  to  indii'nte  that  u  n'Inlive  is  to  lie  understood ;  as, 'o  Ingnlii 
nn  miiliniiili  mni,  the  ns-n  who  followed;  Irtin  na  ra/"-</i«,  he  who  was  s|ioken  of. 
Mil  is  given  ns  huving  a  similar  meaning  with  tn,  hut  we  have  founil  no  example  of  it, 
lk>sides  these,  the  |N-rs<iiial  pronouns,  (larticularly  in  the  oblique  cases,  an>  used  where  a 
rt'lulive  would  Is-  employed  in  Knglish.  O  Ir,  or  simply  o,  is  used  for  "  whosoever  ;"  as 
')  r  fnnilnn  nu,  whuaucver  shoil  confi'ss  inc(or  it  i*,  perhaps,  a  plural,— whatever  persons 
shall,  iVc.) 

In  Tongnn,  the  n-lntive  is  I'ilher  expn-ssed  hy  the  personal  pronouns,  or  left  to  be 
inferri'ii  ;  knrni  koin  r  Jnknhii  nn,  he  who  shall  confess  me ;  Ir  mini  mini  nin  Ir  mon  Irn 
nki,  ye  shull  nt-eivc-  tlint  which  ye  shnll  s|K'nk  ;  knr  fili  nr  nr-lnliii  in,  the  enemy  who 
sowed  it  ;  nr  linjnln  nil  nr  iinolii,  the  ninn  whom  he  hud  iiinde. 

New  /enlund.  Kn  kiir  rn  nn  nin  r  linrrr  mni,  nrl  thou  he  thni  should  come  f  7) 
Inniiln  hm  mm  trnlii,  n  iiinii  who  bus  no  plai-e  (lit.  not  of  hii  i  n  pluce).  Koin  rn  liiiri 
c  korri'ilin,  this  is  In-  tliut  was  s|Hiken  of. 

In  Uurotongan,  iri  mid  ko  In,  and  in  Tahitian,  In  and  '"  lei,  arc  used  as  relatives : 

00 


202 


I'  II  1  l,<)  l,0(i  V. 


itifV  sorm  til  Ix'  iiiproly  llii'  nrlirlo  Ir  Imnlhrncil  l>y  mipliimis,  nml  nnswrr  thorrforp  lo 
the  ^<Ilml»lH  '"  />  ,'  r  iid  Iniin  ii  In  hiiihiu,  hlissril  is  lii>  |iir  blcswdiU'ss  \n  |iis|  who  ti'iim, 
\c.  i  tiiiii  tinidlii  1,0  hi  iikiitii,  ii  cirliiin  mnil  who  built  j  le  ta^Uii  tri  aire  ini  mini,  llio 
moil  wliii  ■.vciil  liflbn-. 

Ill  lliiuniinn,  le  i§  usml  in  Ihc  snmc  mnnncr,  (ih  jnmiiiltii  Ititoii  tr  >i,  hli-xsml  nrc  they 
thnt  iiKiiirn.  This  le  ilix's  imt  iHromi"  /'/  U'Coro  nny  consdiiniil,  mid  is  Ihrri'forn  In  tip 
cuiisidcn'il  as  ilislinrt  from  the  iirliilr,  lli(iii<<li  it  niny  olii'<>  hnvn  Ikvii  tlir  Miiiir.  In  ollirr 
riisp!!  the  rolalivc  must  ln'  uiidcrstmi'l  rriim  llu-  ninslriictinn.  Mr.  Aiidn-ws  n'lnnrks, — 
"  from  tlio  mode  of  tliinkiii^  nmimi;  the  islanders,  it  is  rvidcnt  that  tlicy  linvt-  no  niorr 
use  fur  llir  rclalivo  prinioiiii,  lliaii  llicy  liavi-  for  tin'  vrrli  In  tx ." 

In  Nukuhivaii,  Ic  is  uwd  for  a  rrlalivc.  n»,  n  kiic  It  i  kniilni  in  ((i.),  it  is  tliou  who  art 
saluted ;  Ir  piii  la  .fan  i  luikiiile  nitii,  the  proyer  wliicli  Jpsus  laii);lit.  Ilul  commonly 
the  relative  is  understood,  ns  tut  Ic  puna  r  iiliu  i  If  cjx)  (C.),  it  is  the  pig  that  roots  in  Ihc 
earth. 

In  all  the  dialects  there  exists  a  relative  particle  ai,  unknown  to  any  of  the  Kuro|>enn 
lanpmges,  which  freciuently  supplies  the  place  of  the  relative  pronoun,  It  will  be  men- 
tioned in  treating  of  the  verb. 

V  45.  The  reflective  and  emphatic  pronouns  sr!/  and  otrn  have,  in 
some  of  the  dialects,  no  correspond i no;  terms  ;  in  others  they  are  e.\- 
pre.ssed  by  some  emphatic  word  appended  to  the  personal  and  posses- 
sive pronouns. 

The  .Samoan  and  Tongan  have  nothing  lo  .supply  the  place  ofthe.se  terms :  "  he  killed 
himself,"  is  simply,  "  he  killed  him  ;"  "  against  himself,"  is  merely,  "  ngninst  him  ;" 
"  thine  own  eye,"  is,  "  thy  eye,"  \c. 

The  New  Zealand  dialect  em|iloys  nun,  a  woni  used  in  various  senses,  such  as,  olso, 
indeed,  then,  truly,  \-c.  ;  r  vnkunra  in  in  nnu,  to  save  himself;  t  ton  kanolii  ano,  in 
thine  own  eye;  r  knraijn  nnu  kin  rutoii  ami,  calling  to  one  another. 

In  Uarotongan,  orai  (|)erhaps  from  rai,  great,  mucli)  is  the  common  word  ;  its  proper 
menning  seems  to  b<;  very,  in  the  sense  of — '■  this  rcnj  thing ;"  it  freipiently  has  the 
particle  iia,  "  merely,"  pn'fixed  to  it ; — kia  taton  urni,  lo  ourselves  ;  ko  JJnvitIa  orai, 
David  himself;  tonu  unurni  imknii,  his  own  heart,  lo  is  sometimes  used,  like  i/io  in 
Tahiliaii,  as,  loiinio  a/i,  his  own  stature. 

In  Tahitian,  ilin,  which  pro|)erly  means  down,  or  ilnivmiaril,  is  alTixed  to  the  personal 
and  posses.sive  prmiouns, — as,  i  rolo  ia  i.uloii-iho,  within  yourselves ;  Inu  iho  ninta, 
thine  own  eye;  nnna  iho  i  liamatii,  he  made  it  himself. 

In  Hawaiian,  iho  is  used  in  a  similar  maimer  ;  as,  tnii  iho  mntn,  thine  own  eye. 

In  Nukuhivan,  according  to  M.  (iarcia,  "  I  strike  myself,"  would  be  simply  "  I  strike 
mo,'"— f  ])rhi  net  ait  ia  nu, — as  in  Samoaii, 


r  II  i:  V  K  H  II. 


I)  46.  The  accidents  of  tense,  mood,  voice,  nvimber,  and  person, 
are  in  f^eneral  denoted  by  particles  allixed  to  the  verb.  The  oidy 
inflection  which  it  undergoes,  consists  in  the  reduplication  of  the 


I'  tt  r.  V  N  K  S  I  A  .\    (i  II  A  M  M  A  R. 


963 


wholo  word,  or  a  part  of  it,  to  cxpross  cither  pliirulity,  or  a  repetition 
of  the  action. 

Ill  Siinixin.  Ilir  nMlnplicalion,  rutin!  or  imrtini,  nl"  ihi'  vrrli  is  coinmoTi  (or  Ixilli  iIipsi' 
pllr|Xl^M•s  ;  ns  rnuii  Jr/r,  In  linr,  »o  liiiVf,  in  the  |iliiriil,  ii<i  J'i''/''  i  tutnu,  llirv  wi're 
nlraiil ;  ("rum  hi<«-,  lo  slc<'|>,  H/mHor,  In  sl(i'|i  Idfjcihcr.  '/'/;/<',  In  ilivirli',  Ims  (ijr  its  fro- 
<Hiciiliitivc  iHjiiliiJti,  to  uliiin'  out ;  tula,  to  M|H'nk,  lins  lululnld,  to  talk. 

Ill  'l'(iiii;nn,  Iroin  «'//«,  to  ilwrll,  ki  ninii  nnm/o,  Id  im  ilwi'll  toytlior ;  trie,  lo  Iromlile, 
frf-q.,  Metetr,  to  tn'mblc  miirh. 

Ill  Nrw  /I'liliiiicl,  it  is  iloiil)llul  whrtlicr  the  ro(lii|ilirntioii  is  over  used  I'ur  tin'  |iiir|iosf 
nf  rxjiD-ssin);  jiliinilily,  or  llio  iloiii^  iiiiy  lliiiij^  in  <'om|iiiiiy  ;  lull  it  oDcii  ocriirs  with  u 
frf'quciitntivf  or  iiitciisilivc  tiirc-c  ; — kiii,  to  cut,  nmkps  kiikni,  to  cnt  inucli,  or  <il\i'n  ;  inii, 
to  drink,  has  iiiiii;  /iiicrr,  lo  go,  makes  liiirircir,  to  walk,  (;o  al)oul. 

In  l(arotoii);aii,  tiic  ilu|ili<'ation  st'rnis  lo  cxpri'ss  cither  n  duality  (when  two  do  n  thing 
together)  or  the  ri'petilion  of  an  action  ;  Iroiii  lur,  to  eome,  arrive,  r  tn/iir  ulii  ra  rmiii, 
and  they  two  arrived  ;  rke,  lo  descend,  ixkc,  to  descend  togi^tlier  ;  kali,  to  bite,  kulikuli, 
lo  hite  often,  or  much,  lo  champ. 

In  Tahitinn,  the  same  ol)s«'rvalion  applies  as  in  the?  Ilarolongan ; — torfo,  to  sleep, 
taoijto,  U)  sleep  together  (two  persons);  hori),  tn  run,  lioliDm,  u>  run  together;  jxiii,  to 
descend,  jtnpoii,  to  descend  togethi'r.  Aniiilni,  to  split,  timiihdmiihti,  lo  split  repeatedly  ; 
hiiti,  lo  pull  or  pluck,  hiililiiiti,  to  pluck  n?|KMitrdly,  as  the  leathers  of  n  Ibwl  ;  hoc,  to 
padille,  lio/inr,  lo  paddle  n'|K'atedly  ;  jxiraii,  to  s|ieiik,  pararaii,  to  8|ii-ak  together  (two 
persons), — jHinijUiruii,  to  talk,  converse. 

In  Hawaiian,  this  roriii  occurs  only  in  the  s(>ns<>  of  a  iVeipientative  or  inlcnsitive.  /.c/c, 
to  jump,  to  (ly,  to  de|iart,  makes  /<M);  lo  jump  l'rii|uently,  and  Iclrltic,  to  forsake  re- 
peatedly (ns  a  man  his  wife) ;  liili,  to  vibrate,  rock,  tiilUiili,  to  shake  or  tremble,  us  the 
hands  or  head  ;  Imce,  to  take,  lawrUiwr,  to  handle;  Imli,  to  turn  over  or  aUul,  hiiliiili, 
to  search.  Mr.  Andrews  gives  ns  derivatives  from  the  riKit  laue,  th<!  forms,  /lUiitec, 
Imcnrc,  fiiireliiuv,  und  lnlaUni-c ;  few  verbs,  however,  have  more  than  two  of  these,  and 
the  meaning  of  ench  form  is  not  constant,  but  varies  in  ilitfen'Ml  worils. 

In  Nukuhivnn,  the  re<hiplication  has  the  snmc  force  as  in  Hawaiian,  aa  pehi,  to  strike, 
pcjiehi  and  pehijirhi,  to  strike  hard  and  often, 

^  47.  The  mcst  striking  peculiarity  of  the  Polynesian  dialects,  as 
respects  the  verb,  is  the  fact  that  the  distinctions  of  time,  which  in 
other  languages  are  considered  of  so  much  impoi  lance,  are  in  these 
but  little  regarded, — while  the  chief  attention  is  paid  to  the  accidents 
of  place  By  far  the  greater  number  of  the  particles  which  accom- 
pany the  verb  are  devoted  to  the  latter  purpose. 

f)  4S  The  numerous  verbal  particles  may  be  cla-ssified  as  follows: 
— (1)  particles  of  aflirmation,  ("i)  of  tense,  (I))  of  mood,  (4)  of  form, 
(5)  of  voice, — (6)  directives,  (7)  locatives,  and  (8)  relative. 

I)  49.  As  almost  every  verb  in  llu'so  dialects  may  be,  also,  with  no 
change  of  form,  a  noun  or  an  adjective,  scime  mode  of  distinguishing 
between  the  dilleront   acceptations   becomes   necessary.     The   term 


sot 


I>  II I  I.  <)  l.ou  V. 


i 


partirlex  of  a/firmation,  or  artit'e  particles,  has  been  applied  to  certain 
prefixeH  which  arc  used  for  tliis  purpoMc,  ami  which  bear  the  name 
relation  to  the  verb  that  ko  does  to  the  noun  [v.  ^  17].  Of  these  hta 
is  the  most  important.  This  particle  has  been  considered  by  some  a 
sijjn  of  past  or  (jresent  time;  by  others,  an  auxiliary  verb.  It  is  u.sed, 
however,  with  all  the  tenses,  though  not  so  often  with  the  future, 
whicii  lias  a  verbal  particle  of  its  own,  as  with  the  others;  and  the 
only  case  in  wiiich  it  appears  to  have  a  nieanin}r  apart  from  the  word 
to  which  it  is  joined,  is  when  it  precedes  what  is  pro[ierly  a  noun  or 
atljcctivc, — in  which  case,  as  it  gives  to  them  a  verbal  sense,  it  may 
often  be  translated  by  the  substantive  verb. 

In  Fnknnfi),  kiia  tnate,  dcnd  ;  kun  jto,  it  is  night ;  kua  leUi  te  tanm,  the  boy  is  gnod. 

In  Snmunii,  it  becomes  'iia,  ns,  '«.i  matrlaiii't  ia,  ho  (listed,  or,  was  fasting ;  '/«»  'c 
Hut  t(i  /  dust  thou  know  !  'u/t  Irlii  inir  nii,  it  is  agreeable  to  me. 

In  Tongnn,  it  is  kmi  or  kuo  ;  lira  kiiu  an  a  Finaii,  and  Finau  cnine,  or  was  come  ; 
kua  to  ar  la,  the  sun  is  set  ;  kua  tctei  in,  it  is  [or  it  was]  good.  When  preceded  by  o, 
and,  (which  is  frequently  used  wlH>re  it  would  not  lie  employed  in  English),  it  Ijecomcs 
nku, — as,  oku  mau  ilo  ia,  wu  know  him  ;  oku  ou  kole  kiale  kof,  I  beg  of  the*. 

In  New  Zealand,  the  use  of  kua  is  less  common  than  in  the  other  dialects,  its  place 
bring  supplied  by  ka  ;  it  is,  however,  not  unlrc<|Uent,  as,  kua  kilt  nuUou,  wc  have  seen  ; 
kiia  nuite  ratuu,  they  are  dead. 

In  the  other  dialects,  kua  (or  'ua)  is  used  as  in  the  Samonn.  In  Mangarevan  and 
Nukuhivan,  the  final  a  is  sometimes  dnip|HMl, — as,  ku''  ava  Maijareva  i  te  ua,  Man- 
gnreva  is  lost  in  thu  mist ;  ku'  Uinu  ia  (Mnng.),  he  is  buried.  IP  hanau  ia  (Nuk.),  he 
was  born.     This  liap|K'ns  in  Tahilinn  and  Hawaiian,  but  apparently  not  so  oDen. 

i  50.  Besides  kuu,  dilferent  words  are  used  in  some  of  the  dia- 
lects, apparently  for  a  similar  purpose,  though  with  various  shades  of 
meaning. 

In  Samoan,  olao,  or,  as  the  missionaries  write  it,  o  Ino,  is  a  very  common  prefix  to  the 
verb,  at  the  Is'ginning  of  a  sentence.  Mr,  Ileath  thinks  that  it  may  bt*  consi(K'red  a  sub- 
stantive verb.  It  Nivms  to  give  a  meaning  similar  to  that  of  the  pn'sent  participle  in 
English,  combined  with  the  ditferent  tenses  of  llie  verb  to  lie ; — n  Ivi  aai  taijata,  the 
|)eople  are  eating  ;  o  Im  tu  Ic  iiiutau  i  poijai,  the  axe  is  lying  at  the  root  ;  o  loo  manalu 
ia  i  lea  men,  he  was  thinking  of  those  things  ;  o  loo  iatr  nu,  I  have  ("  there  is  to  me," 
rst  milii  ;  ua  iate  an,  would  express  the  same  meaning).  This  may  lie  the  word  lo'o 
(for  loko),  to  come,  iisisl  in  the  s<'nse  of  lo  hronu;  like  hoko  in  Tongan,  which  has  both 
these  meanings  ;  the  o  would  then  be  the  conjunction  aiul  prefixed,  but  listed  rather  inde- 
finitely, as  in  the  Tongun  oku.  In  the  New  Zealand  translations,  orcAo  is  often  prefixed 
to  verltal  nouns,  to  signify  the  commencement  or  first  doing  of  an  action  ;  thus  we  find, 
te  oriikditaiynjii  n  te  iw,  the  liiuiulallon  of  the  world,  from  haya,  to  make ;  luit/aija,  a 
making  or  cn^ation  ;  i  Ir  orokomeatu ija ,  at  the  Is'ginning,  from  mra,  to  do;  viailaija,  a 
doing, — hence  this  word  will  nvNin,  at  the  first  doing,  or  the  beginning  of  doing;  so,  Ir 
onikouoltoaija  o  It  laijala  ki  If  uc/iua,  the  first  dwelling  of  men  on  the  earth,  from  uo/w, 
to  dwell. 


I'd  I.  V  \  KS  I  .\  N    <i  l(  A  M  M  A  K. 


'ir,r} 


In  Ni'W  Zr;iliinil,  <«  is  a  mtImiI  |ir<  li\  in  very  lVic|iiinl  ihi',  wliicli  npiwnrs  ciniiiiinnly 
to  tiikc  iIh^  |i|iicr  itf  kiiii, — lid,  ((  k(i  kill-  in,  iiinl  lit'  »iiw  ;  kn  iviikniciikiii  kiii'/mi,  y<'  "Imll 
be  jll(l^l■d  ;  titto  ka  liw  a  Jrsii,  wUvn  Ji'IIIh  wiih  cdihc  ;  ktt  mm  ulit  ahiin  kin  k'Hiioii,  I 
.sny  unto  ycm,  Ku  \*  niso  prclixril  td  inlji-ctiv.'s  nnd  !»  lulvcrbs  iiscil  indi'iiriidcnlly,  n», 
kii  /Hii.  hixhI,  iir,  it  is  ;,'()(id  ;  kd  hori;  no,  nr,  it  is  iiol. 

In  till'  (liidirt  III'  I'mniioHi,  IhiiIi  ku  iind  kmi  wcri?  used,  as  I'ollows  : — r  liiiki  kite  kii 
liii^i,  truly  yiiu  ari"  dead  ;  kauri'  mn/ii  kiin  //(«»,  not  iiidrfd  ilrad. 

4  T)!.  'I'lio  iiiilffuiitc  nrticle  se,  he,  or  c,  is  trtMnioiitly  used  to  supply 
tlio  place  of  llu!  siibsttiiitive  verl). 

Hi'  matii,  Kak.,  it  i.s  an  eye ;  In:  tiijiiijii  kiic,  art  tliou  a  priest  !  lie  jmiho,  N.  Z.,  it  is 
true  i  he  rn/ii  lo  rnloii  jxmri,  yrrni  is  their  sorrow.  He  uinio.  Haw.,  it  is  true ;  he  niii 
Ic  tihdjMii,  urcat  is  tlir  lidd. 

In  Karoliiii^an,  Tahitlan,  nnd  somotimcs  in  New  Zonland,  this  article  seems  to  be 
lengthened  to  hii  or  a  (as  It  in  lei,  ^11),  and  may  Ih-  translated  either  lo  If,  ox  fur,  or 
lit; — kin  ho  ntn  umn  oraijn  hei  iilii,  N.  /.,  to  j^ive  his  lil(\/o/-  a  rnnsom,— or  ns,  or  to  lie 
a  ransom  ;  so  in  llaruton^nn  ei  iitii,  and  in  Tahilian  ci  hmi,  willi  the  .same  meaning.  In 
Niikuliivaii,  e  Jill  nii  i  le  jiiiii  kiikii  ei  jiiikit  ana  no  le  knioi,  I  am  going  for  the  koku- 
l)erries,  as  (or  to  Is')  an  adoriunent  Ibr  the  danee. 

In  Tongaii,  he  is  I'nquenlly  u.seil  at  the  Ix'ginning  ol'  sentences,  with  the  sense  of  for 
(adv.) ;  as,  Ac  okii  noim,  (iir  it  is  |iro|ier  i  he  ke  le  loinihin,  for  tlioii  shalt  Ik'  justilied.  It 
is  probable  that  the  e  which  is  frei|Ueiitly  found  in  |{ariiloiii{an  and  Tahilian  at  the  liegin- 
ning  of  phrases  is  not  always  n  sign  of  tense,  but  rather  Ihe  article  used  in  one  of  the 
aliove  senses. 


!■  A  U  T  IC  I,  K.  .s  (IK   TF.  NSK. 


^  52.  Tlie  particles  of  tense  ahvay.s  precede  the  verb;  they  are  all 
used  with  some  detfree  of  iiideliiiiteiiess,  and  are  fre(pietitly  iiiter- 
chiiiii^'cd  for  one  another.  The  use  of  a  [larlicular  particle  appears  to 
depend  rather  upon  its  position  in  the  sentence  thtin  upon  its  intrinsic 
meaning. 

In  Samonn,  e  is  used  as  a  sign  of  present  and  future  time;  e  vnai  niii,  he  sees  ;  e  tn/n 
Icayii  iiini  Iniiiiln  in  le  oiitnii,  men  sliall  revile  you  ;  iil'ni  In-loii  n Jiii,  if  we  siiall  say. 
7J'  is  used  with  a  similar  meaning,  but  only  alb'r  a  pronoun, — as,  on  le  J'ni  ntn,  I  say; 
afni  miilon  le  J'ni,  if  we  shall  say.  A  (accoriling  to  .Mr.  Heath)  is  sometiiiies  used  as  a 
sign  of  the  immediate  future ;  but,  in  general,  we  can  only  distinguish  by  the  coni'  xt  if 
the  sentence  is  intended  to  \yc  in  the  present  or  in  Ihe  fulure,  Nn  is  the  usual  sign  of  tlic 
past  tense,  as,  nn'u  Jhi,  1  said  ;  nn  in  tnnfi,  he  bad  seized  ;  na  rniifnni  i  mnlon,  we 
have  stM'n ;  na  union  6,  ye  went.  At  the  iK'ginning  of  a  clause  or  sentence,  however, 
this  is  usually  prece<led  by  t)  (pri)l«ilily  Ihe  conjunction  and), — as,  mni  snii  ai  /en  o  Jesn, 
Icsiis  cam"  :  in  the  iiiiddle  of  a  sentence,  preceded  by  a  nniin.  it  serves,  in  a  manner,  (or 
a  relative  pninouii  |v.  §  li\,  ua,  o /e  Jnn  /en  nil  In/in,  that  was  Ihe  seed  (whicb]  was 
received  ;  in  ibis  case,  when  nn  is  followed  by  le,  it  is  to  be  translated  "  by  whom,"  or 
"  by  which;"  as,  nno  e  Inijnin  /aru,  nu  le  taliii  le  Jinayilo,  but  tlic  men  only  by  whom 

67 


'HW 


V  II  I  I.O  I.Oti  V 


f 


ii  iliiiic  till'  will,  iVi'.  |cir,  iiiil\  iIm'  iiK'ri  hIhi  iI<>  iIh'  nill.|  (hui  iiiiiv  tri'<|ii>'iitly  \f  rcii- 
(lirnl  /III »,  ir/iin,  tlml.     Sti  ix  ikimI  in  ii  siinilar  nmtiiKr  hiiIi  mi  jiii'  iIh'  i'\iiiii|i|i',  ^  1 1  |. 

Ill  Tiiii^iiii. '  I"  ii'«il  If  ill  SiiiiHxiii :  I'll  I  fill"  "'  I'lifitu  kiil"i  '•,  mill  nil  iiiiii  nliiill 
lintr.  7!  \*  iist'il  Milli  iIm'  |ir><ii>>iiii<,  Iml,  liy  ii  ?>iiii.'iiliir  c|i<u  r<'|>iiiii'y,  mIiiIi'  hi  Siiiiiiuiii  it 
lolliiwfl,  ill  'riiii^iiii  il  |iriiT(liM  llir  |iriiiiiiiiii  ;  ill  Siiiiiiiiiii,  '<  tr  Im,  in  'I'l '111:1111, /r  kr  lui, 
lIuHi  "liiilt  (1(1 ;  il,iii  II  iiiiii  iiiii-tiiiiiii>e,  iIkj  ('iiniict  kill ;  w,  'if  '//",  I  will  )!«,  Ilic  pro- 
iKiiin  '/  iM'iiijj  iiirixcil  Id  the  |Nirli('lt',  iYrt  (or  iih  the  iniii-<i((nnn<-K  linvc  ii|m-Ii  it,  hiki),  tun; 
iind  hi;  nn^  »inn«  «(  \mM  lime.  The  lirnl  h  im-d  willi  the  iirciionns:  »irl  mini  iiiiiiniilii. 
He  siiw  ;  iiiikii  n/ii,  I  Hiiil,  »Vc.  Xii  is  used  \»li(ii  md  lMI((»ed  l>>  11  |(n>n<iini,  ii«  iim 
hull  III'  fiJiii  '»  I'lnnlii,  llii  I'^iiii  (.r  Miiii  eiiiiie  ;  inir  1  m  nr  l'iii'itii,\\\rTi-  v»iii  a  iii.'in  tlieri'. 
It  preeedes  tlie  iii'^iiti\('  ikiii,  uliicli  i^  lluii  mhiii  times  liill<iHe(l  liy  />',  liilt  ikiI  with  11 
riiluix'  Ni^iiiliciilioii,  US  iiiir  ihni  Ir  mmi  iilii,  we  linxe  iKd  Ixiiclied.  .V»  is  (■oiiiiiniiily  iincd 
with  the  pronouns,  like  mi,  Iroiii  which  il  miiiis  to  dillir  only  in  lieint:  le— <  eiiiphiilic  : 
neii  tiin'iitii,  I  hnve  lieiird ;  «c  m  <////  or  m  nln  m,  he  Wdil  :  it  is  iilwi  nst'd  wilh  the  con- 
jiiiiciion  (il'piisi  time  1,11. 

Ill  New  /c'llaii  I,  <■  is  the  -iyn  (•!'  present  and  riiliirc  time,  and  1  ol'  past ; — kn  im  miilnjHi 
I  kill'  IIIIII,  the  lililld  see;  i<(;i(  liikii  jmiiiiiin,  iii\  servant  will  live;  I  Inn  II  nnitiiii,  \\t- 
Weill.  \\'lieli  a  verh,  ill  the  iiidu-ali\e,  has  no  particle  ol'  tense,  it  is  ^jeiM-rally  in  lh< 
preterite. 

In  Itaroloii^'an,  r  is  a  sipi  ol'  iIk  I'utiire,  and  not  iinrreipu  iilly  ol'  the  present :  knrr  1 
/nipiiiii  Iriiinri  iiki,  this  (reneration  shall  not  pass  ;  r  iirrr  mi,  I  yo.  V-  is  n  si;;n  ol'  the 
prpsent,  and  ol'llie  iniperllct  ;  in  the  first  case,  the  verh  is  liillowcd  hy  the  hs-ative  par- 
ticle III  I  (here),  and  in  th.  s(  coiid  li\  ni  (there),  as  li  ki/r  mi  mi,  I  know  ;  /(  /»»)  rii 
mil,  he  was  sillillj;.       /    is    the    sij;ll    ol'   the    past.       It    is,  however,  -ollK  limes  us(  il    ill    lh( 

present,  parliculiirly  aller  the  ncjiative,  as  kurr  tnntmi  1  kiti;  we  do  not  kimw.  When  iic 
particle  pnvedes  the  verh,  it  is  usually  in  the  preterile. 

Ill  Manjrar 'Van, »  is  ilie  si^jn  ol'  the  present  and  I'utiire ;  in  the  rormer  cnse  (nrcordins; 
to  the  vis-aliiilary)  il  has  umi  aller  the  verh,  and  in  the  latter  iii : — i  iiii  nun  Ir  iiuilani. 
the  wind  is  Mowing.  /  marks  the  prelerile  ;  iiller  a  iiej;ntivc  it  li(.V((inos  n,  as  kiikurr  iin 
li  kill.  I  did  not  see. 

Ill  Tahitian,  tin-  piirticjes  and  their  use  arc  precisely  the  same  ns  in  llaroloii:;aii, — and 
the  same  may  Ije  said  of  the  I'aiimotuan,  so  far  as  can  Is-  judged  from  the  s|iec'iiiiens 
which  we  have  of  that  lnn(;iia};e. 

Ill  llavvaiiaii,  <  indicates  the  future,  and  I'reipiently ,  also,  the  pre.sent  ;  li  is  the  pnijicr 
si^nofthe  present,  liul  in  the  sulijiiiietive   iiiis'd  il  denotes   llie    I'uture  also;   1  is  the   pre- 


tpritc  pa 


rticle 


Verh,   sii.;iiilies  frr>  iiiit.\,  lnjnn/i'im/,   and   lorms 


thus,  with  the  preterite,  a  sort  of  plu|Hrfect,  and  with  the  liitun'. 


id   I'uture, — fi 


/iiur  r  nil,  I  took  previously,  or  I   had  taken;  1  /aur  r  nii,  I   shall  lake  U'l'tirelinnd,  or 
shall  have  taken. 

In  N'ukiihivan,  r  is  the  i>\jin  nf  tlie  present  and  the  I'utiire.  In  the  loniier  rase,  to  dis- 
lin^uish  Ihc  tense,  the  parlich  mi  is  usually  postli.ved  to  the  verh  ;  as  r  kile  mi  mi,  I  • 
■>(•(',  Tlio  sense  of  liitiirity  is  (iciierally  made  apparent  hy  the  form  of  the  sentence,  as 
miOirii  (  liir  III  liiliiii,  which  way  shall  we  go?  E  lina  jxijxn  r  fill  mm  iii  miiiui,  lo- 
morrow  we  two  will  c^onie.  1  ia  the  preterite  particU',  ns  mi  ce  t  koiui  ton  Uilui,  you  have 
taken  away  my  place. 


r  O  I.  V  N  K  «  I  A  N    «i  K  A  M  M  A  H 


S67 


\  lll'HI.K.S  ll»    Miioii 


k  A3.  Tlie  HulijitiH'tivr,  cuiKlitiiiiiiil,  potiMitinl,  impcrntive,  ami  m- 
riiiiliv(>  iidmnIs,  lire  (listiiitriiislifil  Iriiiii  llic  iinliralivc,  iiMiially  liy 
t'linjiiiutiDiiH  or  otiii-r  iiurtulcN  pn  lixnl  to  llu^  Milt. 

Ill  SiiiiMmn,  tin-  Hiilijunrlivc  i*  ili'iinl<il  dy  llii'  |>iirlii'li'N  I'l/  iitiil  dui, — iix  m  in  li  lulu, 
tlinl  ill)'  '•iiMiii!  iiii^'lit  l«'  riiHilliil ;  II  'i  liilii  mil  luin,  if  llmii  mj^IiimI  In  Ix'  iHrliii  (nr,  lliiit 
tliiiii  In-  |»rl'-<l).  \N  illi  lli<-  iH'^jiilivi',  il  i«  iiiiii, — lit  iiiiii  I  /iilriii  li  lin ,  ihal  iIhv  sIi>iiiIiI 
li'il  n  liirii.  'I'll''  iM.iiililitMiiil,  Willi  1/  iir  c/i/H,  i<(  ('\|iri'<«ril  li\  n,  n/fii,  I'liin  {-\nniu-i  ), 
i'l,  !'•  /"'•  mill  ]"i;  nx  >/  '  iln  nun  if,  il'  llimi  uiil  Iniu  iIum  ii  ;  nlm  it  >  nlii,  il'  llmii 
||iM-Nl  ;  III  r  iMiiHiilK  IV,  irilmii  wilt ;  in Jni  onlmi  iiii  n/nmn,  wlini  \v  liu  ymir  iiliim;  /M- 
V  Ir  Ii4n  I  iii,  il'lhim  ilmin'  il ;  /on  Jai  ulii  niiliin,  il"  >r  kIiiiH  Miiy  ;  /«(  «■  niniii,  il"  it  In- 
truly  thoii.  J^i/  in  I'xiin-xM'il  liy  nri, — an  iiri  nlin  J'ui  nnliiii,  lent  ye  Ini  hilliii.  Cnii,  at 
rn\\*it  I'OtilJr,  l>y  iiinlni,  ii»tiiill\  iMIuwril  liy  niin,  ur  hi/,^ii<  r  niii/iii  inli  in  iin  full, 
Im"  run  liniik  (or,  il  i-  jHwsil.lf  llir  Iiiiii  U<  liniik).  'i'lii'  iiii|iiTiilivr  rillirr  liiii  Im  |iiirtirlc; 
Its  siiii  mm,  1  iiiiK'  ImR', — nr  liikis  in  :il1ir  it,  iiml  •ouiirliiius  aUn  mn  U  Ibri'  il  :  li  iiiir  in  ' 
go  nwiiy  !  mil  Iiii/d  hi  i  hi.'  lake  lluit  !  I'riiliiliilii<ii  >■*  r,\|ir<'KKril  liy  iinn,  willi  />,  li,  ur 
f  nrtfr  it, — an  ii"'«  li  Jiir,  du  iml  Irar  ;  una  'r  Ir  Inuln,  ilii  not  tliou  Hwnir  ;  nun  lim  limn 
r  Hon,  kl  mil  thy  liniiil  kimw.  IV'wnri'  in  ri'inlrri'il  liy  in, — »»  in  niilnu  tin  Jni  i-  union, 
licwnn'  Ii'kI  yi'  ilo  (nr,  list  Ix'  ilmii'  liy  y<>ii).  Tin'  iiiliiiiilvi'  Iiiim  >'  lu'lim'  it, — iin  nn  nn  >nii 
r  fiirnii,  I  am  i-i>iiii'  In  ili'«trn\, — lull  il  is  rri'i|iiciill)  i'X|irrsH<'(l  liy  lln'  Hiilijiiiiclivi' Willi  in. 

Ill  'I'nii'^iiii,  iIh'  sii|ijiim'ti\i'  li  I'Xjiri  -w'll  hy  A(, — an  l.in  nln,  lliiit  I  may  j;n  ;  Kr  innii 
Jnknl'iiii,  lli.il  wi'  limy  ilrstrnx.  In  the  ncpilivr  liy  /.c  nun  nn,  iis  /,r  nun  nri  iinii  Ininliii 
in,  lliul  lliry  slnmlil  lint  iiiiiki'  liini  known.  //  is  piKliri'il  l>y  kn  and  luilnin, — as,  In  kn 
urjiii  ac  githi  ftmr,  liir  il'lhr  wnrkK  liinl  Ihtu  ilmir;  hnlmn  h  iiniii  niitn  in,  il'  y  will 
rw<"ivi'  it ;  irlifii  is  i'\|ir<'Ns<'il  hy  kn,  whii'li  is  i^incrall)  n  jhiiIi  il  alVr  tin'  |>i'niiniiii, — as 
ka  iHini  kit  ilii  in,  wIhii  si-  sli'ill  liiiil  liiiii.  hn  rrri|ui  iill\  lias  n  lu'lnri'  il, — as  nkn  hln 
in  nl.iji,  wlini  it  is  will  with  lliir.  I^sl  is  lilin  nri  :—hlin  mi  nnii  nininnin,  Icsl  llii  y 
slmiilil  SIS'.  'I'lii'  iiii|i<'ralivi'  iillur  has  im  |iarli('li', — lis,  nniu  nln,  pi  ye!  linn  Linir  nn, 
nmw  111  iiR' ! — or  liikis  the  siijii  n('  thr  siilijiinclivi', — as,  l.i-  inon  luilii.  In-  yi'  wise.  Tlw 
|inihiliitivi'  »ii;n  is  nnn  nri, — as  nnn  nil  iiioii  nln,  jjii  yi'  iinl.     Tin'  iiilinilivc  lias  kr, — ii« 

tiaku  liiiu  kt  Jnkniln,  I  hnvt mo  to  wt  nl  vnriiiiirc,  (this  kc  niiHWtTs,  nut  to  Ilii-  >Sunioiiii 

r,  hut  lo  till'  'iri,  llic  si;;ii  of  the  siihjlin('tivi'.| 

III  New  /•'alanil,  km  ami  inn  nri'  sijiiis  ol'  thr  Niihjiliiitivr, — jis,  kin  Innrr  nln  nn,  that 
I  nmv  j;o;  inn  knr  kn  linin,  lliat  tlioii  slimilil.st  nuiii'i  in  Iho  nr^ativi', — km  knnn 
rntini  i  hnki,  that  tlii'y  slmulil  imi  nturn.  Mi  rxpn'ssrs  a  sort  nl  riiliiri'  njilativi', — nn 
luirrv  III,  he  slioiihl  (»<>,  or  must  (jn;  inrnkr  iiiiiy  Ih'  ri'iiilrri'il  "  is  to  U-,"  a*,  inrnkr  liikiiii 
tr  In imln,  thi'  iii:in  in  lo  b>'  (or  iniisl  simrtly  Ih')  tlolivrri'il  ii|i.  Inn  is  aUit  triini, — as. 
ina  nrnmin  knulon,  wIm'H  yi'  arc  iktsis'iiIiiI.  For  ij  there  arc  no  p.\|iii'SHions  i'xn'|il  ki 
If  mm,  n,r  Ir  nnn,  (hy  ll«'  tiling,  with  llm  ihinj;,)  nr  siin|ily  ki  h.  ami  «/<  ti  ; — as,  l,i  It 
mm  <  linrrr  mat  in,  il'lii'  shall  I'nim';  kl  li  liinliin  lilnlii  Iniinin,  il'aiiN  man  wish.  (/iiH, 
itT  jianUi;  is  nlni,  I'nilowi'il  hy  llir  arlicli', — as,  <  nlm  in  linn  Ir  kilr,  I  inn  sic  (the  s«s'. 
iii^  is  (Hissihlc  fur  iiH').  Tin-  iiii|icralivc  cniiiinniily  has  im  |iurlii'lc  :  il  is  sniiiciiincs  I'ul- 
lowcd  hy  rii,—a»,  linrre  fii  koiitun,  go  ye, — and  Honieliim'M  pret'cdod  hy  mi; — iw,  mr 
Innrr,  j>o  !     Knnn,  knniikn,  nnn,  iiniikn,  and  kri,  nil  sijinily  do  not ; — knnn  or  nnn 


•.»0H 


l>  II   I    I.O  I.IMi   V. 


Isi'iiliMi  r  mnliikii,  li'iir  ye  ii<il  :  kri  niitliiliit  kf,  li'iir  llimi  mil.  Km  \*  iim'iI  liir  llir  inri- 
nihvi'  iHirlirlr, — III),  I  hiirrr  nui/mi  km  klli,  wr  wriil  In  Mi'  ;  Xi  />'  hlr,  l<i  til)'  Mt'jii|f, 
iniuhl  iiUo  Ik'  ii<m'iI. 

In  Itiiniiiiiipiii,  Un  JH  iIh-  xiilijiini'tivn  pnrlicli',— nn,  kin  tun  tilu  mnliin,  llmt  wr  nuiy 
tfii :  II  |H  iiIhii  iiM'd  t<>r  il  iiiiil  irlirii, — IIS,  km  iikiilD/xi  null  1,'ir,  IT  llimi  uili  liill  ilnwn  ; 
km  till-  nun  nn  r<i,  »Ih'II  I  riimi-.  In  (Zi'iirriii,  1/  lit  llol  i'\|in'i4ii<'i|,  liiil  Ilir  ('nnililiiin  in 
Icll  III  Im'  inli'mij  frtiin  iIh'  ooniilnii'tliin; — c  litninh  knr  mi  tr  niiiu  ra,  il'lhiMi  Ihi  iIh^  8011 
111'  (iiHJ  (j.  I',  ilioii  iK'ini;,  iVr.)  Xiriift  in  iruil  nnlv  »itli  piml  tiini', — n»,  iianiiii  kniiloii 
I  kilr,  \<  v)'  liml  kiioHii,  /xi/  ia  urn,  wlijiji  ih  |iIiii'i'iI  iiIIit  tlir  vitIi,  iiiiiI  kii  «r  kti  le 
U'liiri'  il, — n-  k'l  li  innipnm  nni  rnlon,  Ii'hI  lln'v  1111111.  Am  im  iiIwi  iiwil  llir  frtl.  I.'iin 
IK  cjijiniuKil  liy  II  rliiiii-iN  |i('n|i|irii!>i«  1  knn  1  likn  in  km'  1  Ir  nkndiUin,  tlioii  I'linal  mil 
wliilcii  (lit,  il  it  nut  n^'lil,  nr  nlliiuiil,  liir  tliii'  In  wliili'ii).  'I'lir  iiii|K'riilivi'  in  iliiKitnl  liy 
kii, — UN,  ka  nnr  kn  kiiiii,  )j<i  iwvk  !  kit  In  Inlnii  tnin,  Irt  ii.h  kill  liiiii,  Kn  iilwi  ('X|ir<'itiH'it 
lutiin."  n<Tii<i<iiy,  n«,  mnounui  It  kn  varr,  ninny  "liiijl  Im  ilcccivtil  (nr  iniiny  nn-  limy  who 
iihiill,  iVi',)  ;  t  kn  knvrn  kininn,  iiml  hIiiiII  Im>  lirniitftil  lii'liin>,  'I'lii-  liirliiililiiiu  iii'j^nlivi* 
IM  niirnkn,—nii,nlirnkn  r  »i>//iiM'<,  lliiiik  iinl, — iiihI  iimn'  rim'ly  liy  III"'  I'liliilian  nnn,— 
nn,  riiin  •  /./«(.< .(/«,  (Ill  n'lt  cnt'T.  Tin'  |)rii|«>r  inriiiilivi'  sign  ia  1,  liul  in  (.'XjirciM  |mr|hi«<' 
or  ili'MUii  till'  Hiilijuiii'livr  |iiirtii'li'  ^iii  Ik  iiwiI, 

III  Mmi^iin'\iin,  iliii'ii  in  il  {|iriiliiilily  lor  llir  pri'lcritr  mily,  iiki' i/Ait't  in  Tnliitinn); 
/"ki  i»  /'.«/, — n»,  iki  inn  kne,  li'tl  llmii  liill ;  inn  is  nnn/il  llmt  [pliil  J  Dim  i/iii),  niiswcr- 
111)1  |M'rlin|ia  tn  mf  in  .New  X<'iilniiil  i  kn  i»  tin-  aign  nl'  llir  iiii|i<'riiliv<>, — iix,  tiilou  kn  oro  i 
le  Inkno,  Irl  us  ji"  In  niid ;  il  |irii|i(rly  Hiiiliilii'it  "t/ii'i/  if  n  ittvoir,  iiiiiritniiiiT,  /inuiliitili, 
t\-i„  jHir  nipjiDrl  it  rntliiiH  ilu  iiiU."  'I'lii'  iiii|H'nilivi'  Iiiih  Hiinu'liinrn  c  Ixiliiri!  il, — liiil 
rrri|iiintly  il  h  williniit  niiy  "i^in  In  di'iiiiiiiiilt'  it, 

III  I'linniniimii,  ^(1  si'i'iiis  In  la'  iim'iI  lit  in  MiinKiircviin :  kn  /mi  it  inn  i,  ntnv  \vrv.'. 
inlnii  kn  Ininnki,  lit  iia  li^lit,  nr,  ur  uill  ti|i|it. 

In  'riiliiliiin,  !<■  iiiiiu't-ri*  to  km  in  Uiirnlnnijiiii,  nii  (t'nr  Inn)  to  /(Xi;,niiil  nhin  to  nnnint. 
A  is  llitr  prclix  of  iIh*  iiiipi.-niiivc,  iiml  r  ><(  ilii-  inlinitivc  :  m,  n,  nnd  »  /'',  nrc  lined  lor  /ist, 
lis.!  i/z-d 'I  ;»</;(•,  take  ciri'  li'sl  [ynii|  dir  ;  n  If  Imrrc  /'il/i/H,  lent  lliry  I'liiiic,  /unha  in 
till'  |irnliiliilin'.'  pnrliric  :   1  inliii  1  liniii,  (jn  nnl. 

Ill  I  lauiiiiiiii,  I  aiisui'r>  In  in  in  'I'aliitiaii,  as  n  si;;ii  nl'  llic  Niilijiiiii'livi',  iiiciiiiin;;  l/inl, 
and  marks  ali«i  llii'  iiiiidiliniial,  Willi  iIk;  wnsc  of  1/  and  u/nn, — as,  1  itr  r« ,  thai  tlinii 
niayi'sl  kimw  ;  1  iVrrj  iiiiii  <  iin  Iniinta,  lo  be  sisn  liy  mrii !  i  piilc  outiiii,  whi'li  yc  pray; 
;  inn  Inn  iimlii,  il'lliim'  ryi-  l«'  evil.  Inn  sijiiiilics  il, — ns,  inn  onlnii  r  lini/r,  il"  vi'  I'omo, 
O  is  lisl,  a»  nuti  ni  niitnii  o  iimie,  cut  not,  li'sl  |yi'|  dir  ;  |tliis  is  |H'rliaps  the  Sainn:in  o, 
ini'aniii)i  nr  ;  "  cat  imi,  nr  ynii  ilii-."|  Cnn  is  cxJiriH-i'd  liy  liili,  In  arrin'  lit,  willi  n  onn. 
slriirlinii  siniil.'ir  In  lliai  nl'  tlic  Nrw  Xialiiiid  nlii  1, — as,  In/i  mi  i  liin  /kit  IniniUii  li  lieln- 
lii/ii,  iIh'm'  rliildnii  iiri'  aliii-  in  rend  (lit.  it  has  cniiii'  In  Ihrsc  cliiMrrii  tn  nnd).  I'nno, 
right,  gissl,  i<>  iisid  III  ihr  saiiii'  way  In  «'.\pn.'ss  ought,  should,  <Vi',  (Tlic  li  niV-r  llirtie 
Words  ni'vcr  bi'<'onio!i  /// ;  yet,  fmin  the  nnnlogy  of  tliii  other  dinleclH,  wr  enn  hiirilly 
doiilil  that  it  was  iiri'.iinnlly  the  artirle, — i,  e,  llir  rrnilinf>  has  coiiK!  to  the  rhildren.  Wo 
may  siippnsi'  that  when  (he  In  was  iiilriHliiced  il  was  only  einplnyeil  in  lliom'  rnm-n  in 
wliiili  till-  artirle  prisrdrd  what  was  rliarly  a  nniiii  ;  when  it  was  used  us  a  relative 
|v.  ^  ll|,nr,  as  III  the  present  lase,  Uliire  a  snrt  nl'  iiiliiiiiiNe  nr  gerund,  il  was  iiol 
rhaii;.'ril.|  /.' is  the  usual  prefix  cif  the  im|M'ralive, — na,  r  hnnui  ik,  \ii\t:  thou;  U'lore 
Humc  verbs  il  is  n'pliirisl  by  o  or  ««, — us,  n  luir  «',  go  thon ;  on  hoi  oiun,  do  ye  Iwo 


I'M  I.  V  \  KS  I  A  N    (i  K  A  M  \[   \  l( 


•>^ 


rrtiirn.  !\fiii  it  llir  pmliilnlivr  imrliclf, — iih,  m</i  /»/'  (»',  U"  llmii  imt,  Mni  nl«i  «iuiii. 
(Mf  iilriMxl,  iilmiil,  iiriir  til, — !>•',  mill  nnih  n",  I  iiiii  miirly  il' ml.  nr  iiImhiI  In  iln',  /.' i< 
IIk'  iiiliiillivc  |iiirli<'li',  liiil  r,  nt'lln'  Niilijiiiirlivr,  i)i  iiTil  will  II  iiliji'i'l  iir  |iiir|i<i«<>  ix  iiitrnilnl, 
m  ill  llii'  Ni'i'iml  <'\nni|ilr  itiviii  iilmvi*. 

Ill    Nllllllllivilll,    >'<    IN  II   ai^ll  III'  llic    Klllljllllrlivi',— IIH,   III  Dlllill     Hlllhlll,   tllllt    W)'    llT    OVIT* 

cnini';  il  ii|i|H'iirx  In  In'  iil-tii  iHiil  liir  llii'  lliiril  |»tkii||  nl'  llir  iiii|ii  rnliM', — ii<<,  in  liiiiiiij,iu 
hill  III  (»'  /iiiKi/,1111,  III  ili\  will  l«'  iliiiir.  A  K  llir  ii'-iiiil  iiii|ii'niiivi'  (iiirli'li ,— iiN,  n  /i#»  .' 
Uii.  Aii'i  14  till'  |ir<iliiliilivi'  tuiii  ill  llii'  Niikiiliiviiii  rlii'ili'r, — iii,  hiki  m-  hifi,  ilu  imt  riiiii<<; 
ill  Tiiliiiiilii,  il  K  imii  iir  (niT'inliiiu  In  tlic  I'niirli  iiiiH-iniiiin''")  iiiimi, — «»,  mui  m  km  w 
((',),  (III  not  <>nl  I  timoi  >«'  r  Iuihii  (<!.)•  <!■■  »"(  innki  !  'I'Im'  inliiiilivi!  luirlirli'  in  r,— ni,  r 
mm  r  vin  i  li-  ikn,  n  tliinu  to  H|H'ar  IihIi.  'I'Iic  ciiiiilitinniil  \*  imiiiilly  Irll  to  la-  iinitrritiiiKl 
frmii  111!'  liirin  nl'lli''  wiitriiri', — ns,  v  piki  iir  tiiiniiin  Iir  viikii  nil,  r  ninh  iir,  iT  ymi  rliinli 
ll|>  tliix  ship  ynii  »ill  l«'  killiil  ;  i",  limU'ViT,  is  "niiirlillli-i  iwil  liir  //, — ii",  in  iiiiiLn  unit 
ill,  il'  Iir  sliii<>,  //.«/  is  oi, — UN,  III  I'll,  Irst  yiiii  liill,  nr,  li>r  li'iir  III'  tiilliiig.  Mm  \»  iimiI 
fbr  iiImiiiI,  In,  nr  iKiir  in,  ixiicllv  as  mni  in  lliinniiiiii. 


I"  \  11  I'M'  I.  KM   (ir   KiHt  M 

\  M.  \\y  jiiiiiiiit:  rcrtniii  |iarlifles  to  tlii'  vcrli,  Imtli  n«  iirpfixes  and 
BuflixGH,  the  I'lilyiu'Miaii  dialuctH  ^ivo  to  tin*  orii^iiial  iiu'aiiiii|r  of  tlie 
Wfird,  nilditioiial  sliaiU-s  of  siL;nilii'atiiiii,  anal(i<;inis  to  some  of  llie 
Ik'liri'w  coiijniiatioiis.  'I'licsn  derivatives  we  have  termed  Forms, 
They  nro  causative,  desiiierativt-,  reeiproeal,  and  potential.  Tlicv 
receive  all  the  si^is  oC  tense  and  inowl  like  tlio  single  verb. 

Ill  Siiiiinaii,  llir  caiisatin'  liirm  is  maiii-  liy  pn  Hxiiit?  Jn'ii  In  ill"'  vcrti;  nt  J':i'iio/ii,  m 
save' In  nm',— I,  1'.  In  riiiisi'  In  li»r,  I'rniii  fVir,  In  livci  J  /ii'iu/k.  In  hIhiw,  call!*'  In  kliiiW, 
frniii  i/n,  In  IdiiiW.  Ihsiri'  In  i\pr<s'<ii|  \i\  /in,  pri  lixiil, — as  ""  /in-iiiii,  I  w  i^-h  In  ijrinlt  ; 
fianilii  in,  111'  ttixlii's  In  yn.  Tin'  riripnH'al  liiriii,  «liirli  iilin  rxpriswn  Ihf  ilmiifj  nl'aiiy 
lliinjj  liy  a  iiiiinlKT  nl"  imthihin  in  cnnipaiiy,  is  niailf  liy  /<  pn  lixiil,  ami  n'i,  In'i,  ini'i,  fi, 
li,  anil  iiHj  HuHixiHl  to  llii'  vcrli; — as  Ir.jiiiilnii-ii'i,  lo  Irailr  lum'tlirr,  nr  willi  nnr  aimllHT, 
—Jh-sn/ii-tii'i,  111  niii  li)|{i'llirr, — Ji-ilit-ytii,  lo  lialti  one  iinntlicr  ;  Jr-oso-Ji,  In  li-ap  li>)(rtlivr ; 
fi-iiii-si.  In  sniiii  Inyi'llirr,— /(-.'I*/**!//),  In  lii'lp  nrir  aiinllirr.  A'i  niiil  nut,  whiii  Ibl- 
Inw'iiijj  a  vrrli  riiilin^  in  ",  i-nali'sci'  willi  il,  a.s  in  llii'  last  rvainpli',  ami  in  ti-niinii'i,  lo 
qiiarirl,  iVniii  iiiisn.  In  liiar  ill-will,— /<. /<(/(/(,  In  sprak  in  imiiiril,  rrniii  /(//<.,  to  s|i«ak. 
'I'liis  Haini!  liinii  is  iisnl  tn  rxpri'ss  irrr^iilar  imitiiin,  liark  ami  Inrili,  up  ami  ilnuii,  alMiul, 
iiC, — uit/r.ii/ii.ii'i,  In  walk  iiImiiiI,  up  ami  i\iiwu,—^H ■/n/ii-ii'iiiii  (passivr),  'nst  aUmt,  a* 
n  vcssrl. ' 

III  'rnnnan,  /iikn  is  tlir  caiisalivi'  profix,— ns  Jiikiinioiii,  tn  savr,  trnni  inniii,  to  live  : 
fiiknliilii.  In  iliniinisli,  I'min  tiilii,  small.  Tlir  ili'siilcralivi'  parlirli'  is  Jia,  or,  as  it  is 
niiiri'  rniiimnnly  prniinliiiri'il,  /c, — as  mmi  Jul  n/ii,  wn  wish  tn  fio  ;  in)  imii  fir  fmiinn, 
tlii'V  wisliril  III  liiar.  'I'lu'  nripriical  liirni  (wliirli  lias  tlic  sanii'  tnranin^s  as  in  Samniin) 
is  niailr  by  /'■  prclixril,  anil  aki,  Juki,  laki^niii,  sull'ixril, — na  Jr-filii-aki,  to  wroHllo 
logrihrr,— /i'-z/o'/rt//,  lo  look  upon  ono  aiiotlirr,— /(•.«/(«/iiwi,  to  urct't  ono  another,  IVom 
fjii.  In  saliito  ; — iVnni  tnii,  to  riiinn  upon.  In  roach  to,  \('.,»c  hn\v  frtiiu/nki,  to  jnin  with 
nlio  aiinlhrr,— /i'/.';/'7(//(/i(/./,  lo  incrl  a  [HTson, — mid  Ji-jiikiijiiiiii/nki,  io  im-vl  with  one 

08 


270 


P  H  I  I,  O  L  O  G  Y. 


nnotlwT.  i''rf,  or,  ns  the  inissionnricN  write  il,  Jim,  is  iho  pntniliai  prefix, — ns  «<«•  ikai 
/(■  turn  I'a-iiit/ii,  tlicy  cmild  mil  dwell ;  knhiii  r  Jiuiluii  r  hi.  tdiiiiti',  il'ii  nmil  run  number, 
(or,  if  it  mil  Im'  iiumlx'nil  liy  ii  iiiiiii.)     Tliis  liiriii  cxisls  only  in  the  'roii)j(iii. 

Ill  Ni'W  /ealniid,  the  eaiisiilive  prefix  is  vidil, — ns  K  (/^(/l';(/,  In  mive  ;  uiihiikili,  to 
cniise  to  know,  llin  is  used  in  a  li'W  eiises,  ns  a  desidcrnlive  sifjii,  ns  hin-iiiii,  to  wish 
to  drink,  to  W.  tliirsly;  //((/./,(((,  to  wish  l<>  ent,  to  Is-  hiinjiry ;  hut  it  is  not  n  (^■iiernl 
prelix.  lliitliia  si^nilies  to  desire,  bnt  it  is  used  ns  nn  iiulepeiiilenl  verli.  'J'he  reci- 
|iriH-nl  I'orm  does  not  exist  in  this,  or  in  nny  ol'  the  Enstern  dialects,  which  hnve  only  ihc 
eniisniive. 

Ill  l{nroliin<;an  mid  Mnn^^nrevnn,  the  e.-nisntive  siun  is  iika,  in  I'aniiiotiKin  fiiLu  or 
li(tk(i,  in  Trihilinii  fii'a  or  //«'(/,  ill  Hawniinii  Sdinetiiiies  Ini'ii,  hut  more  commonly  /lo'o, 
and  in  Nukuhivaii  il  assiiines  the  li>iir  l(>rms  lAjiika,  /nikii, Jo'ii,  and  kn'ii. 

In  most,  if  not  all,  of  these  dialects,  tii  is  nlso  i'ni|iloyed  ns  a  eniisntive  prefix  : — it  is 
prohahly  the  same  with  the  verb  In,  to  strike;  ns  nk-ikn,  |{nr.,  low,  loakiiiikn,  to  ahnsc 
(to  strike  diiwn);  //,  eiilaiii^led, /(///,  to  enlaniile.  In 'l";iliilian,  ^n//rt,  to  cleans,',  from 
//m,  cliiiii  (to  distiii;;uish  il  perhaps  iVom  //f/f(/'(n,  ashaiiieil).  In  Hawaiian,  ^(/i//f//,  to 
anoint,  from  /liiiii,  uininieiit  :  In/ii/ii,  to  eiitan^jle,  Vom  //////,  entaii^'led  (|ierhiips  to  dis- 
tinguish it  from  liitJiilii,  to  covet  another's  pro|H"rty).  In  Niikuhivan,  la/iiii,  to  upset, 
from  hiii,  to  turn  over  ;  lajiii,  to  stii'k  on,  from  /)(/,  to  adhere. 


PA  liTICI.KS  OK    VOICK. 

ij  ar).  The  Polynesian  ilifilecl.s  makt  a  very  Croiiueiit  use  of  tlie 
passive  form  of  the  verb.  In  many  cases  it  i;-  "mjiloycd  where  tlie 
Eno;iisli  would  have  the  active ;  and  there  are,  in  all  the  diidei'ts. 
verbs  wliich,  tiiough  active  in  form,  are  only  used  in  a  passive 
acceptation. 

The  lasl.nieiitioned  class  of  verbs  dill'er,  however,  from  the  rejiular  passives,  in  taking 
aHer  'hem  th<'  alilntive  .vitli  i,  iiisteail  of  that  with  c,  (v.  ^^  'S.i,  24),  as  raiikii  i  Ic  Itii/dla, 
Rnr.,  oblaini'd  liy  the  man  ;  jxtii  i  tr  tJn,  Haw.,  destmved  by  fire. 

^  50.  The  passive  particles  are  numerous  in  tliu  ditferent  dialects, 
but  nearly  all  terminate  in  a.     Tiiey  are  all  sutli.ves. 

In  !Sninoan,  these  particles  are  a,  iti,  Jia,  luu,  tin,  and  inn, — ns  iijiiifi,  to  cover, 
/^M/i'/,  covered  ;  tnnfi,\o  hinder,  pa.ss. /w*//./"  ,•  si/n,U>  see  (cereiiionial)  s/Az/iV;,-  i/a, 
to  hnte,  itiiniii ;  si'i,  to  lit)  up,  si'itin;  nvr,  lo  give,  niv-i/in.  Of  these  particles  the  (irst 
two  and  the  last  are  by  far  the  must  I'onimoii.  The  passive  particle  may  lie  separated 
from  the  verb  by  an  adverb,  but,  in  this  case,  the  particle  thus  separated  always  is,  or 
liecomes  iiiii, — as  ijnnnln  ntna  inn  a  nittoit  nijnsn/n,  yoiir  ."ins  will  nlso  be  forgiNcii, — 
where  the  ndverb  niim,  "  also,"  conies  Is'twix'n  the  verb  and  the  iHiiticle. 

In  the  Tongnii,  we  nre  led  in  doubt  by  an  evident  mi.stake  on  the  part  of  the  mi-ssion- 
aries,  who  have  regarded  the  ablative  particle  r,  nieaiiiiig  ////,  as  an  article  of  the  nomi- 
native [v.  f)  II],  and  have  thus,  ui  many  ca.-ics,  iransliirmed  n  passive  into  an  n<'tive 
verb.  In  numerous  instnnces,  in  the  versions  of  the  .Scriptures,  the  verb  is  liilloweil  by  a 
particle  (,  which  iip|)ears  to  have  [lerplexed  the  translators, — as  they  have  printed  it  not 


I'  <)  I,  Y  N  K  S  I  A  X    (i  11  A  M  .M  A  II. 


271 


as  n  purl  of  the  word,  imr  yet  wlidlly  sc'|mrnle,  Iml  iihti'Iv  divided  (Voiii  it  l)y  ii  very  lliin 
"  (-IHici'," — lis  ill  iIk,'  scnli'iicc,  /  //('  Ixiikiii  Imlimtir  l;ii(i  fiiiniiii  ilir  ijalii  Ji'finr,  iiinciii};  nil 
the  mill  [«li(i|  liiivc  Ix  Til  JKirii  nl'  woiiicn,  Arc-.  ;  licrf  tlic  inissicjiinrics  coiisidi'i'  the  c 
Im'Ioi'c  Id'  as  a  si^rii  nl'  tin'  iKJininallvi',  ami  translile,  "  anxiiii;  all  wIidiii  wuineli  have 
Iwriie ;"  it  is,  however,  iiii(|iiesti()nal)ly  the  |ire|Mi.sitiiiii  A;/,  mid  llie  i  wliicli  IoIIohs  7(///</« 
Is  a  jmrtielc  ol'  the  passive ;  the  proper  reiideriii),',  therel'ore,  is,  "  aiiioiij;,  all  brought 
forth  liy  women."  This  mistake  has  aris<Mi  parity  Iroiii  the  cireiimstaiice  that  the  only 
other  Oci'anic  dialer!  wilh  which  the  missionaries  at  this  group  were  iu-c|uaiiiled  was  the 
Vitian,  whii'h  has  no  proper  passive,  and  which  "iiiploys  several  particles  as  aOixes  to 
the  verli  to  denote  its  Iransilivi^  stall', — and  partly  iVom  Ihe  IJict  that  llie  Toiigan  apjiears 
to  1h-  in  reality  undecided  on  this  point,  or  rather,  to  employ  the  same  const ruL'lion  to 
express  llie  two  relalioiis,  easily  ccinl'ounded,  ol'  an  active  verh  to  its  objective,  and  a 
passive  to  its  nominative.  'I'liiis,  in  the  phrase,  hilmii  r  kuhiili  c  Hflnni  a  Sctuni,  "  if 
Satun  cast  out  Satan,"  c  fiinin  is  evidently  in  the  ablative,  and  kiibiili  (pro[K'rly  kabiitiii) 
in  the  passive,  rrnm  /.((/w, — and  the  sentence  reads  "  ii'  Nilan  \yc,  cast  out  by  .^alan  ;" 
yet  a  I'ew  lines  alter  we  have  Ihe  same  li)rm  used  apparenlly  in  an  active  sense, — kiihiiii 
ten  kiiliiiti  III  Willi  lrfr>/n,  "  if  I  cast  out  devils,"  whriT  ihi'  n  of  tiu  is  the  nominative  pro- 
noun J.  This  is  the  Vitian  construction,  as  \v\\.  be  seen  by  referring  to  the  grammar  of 
that  language.  In  some  cases,  however,  the  passive  acceptation  has  bo'U  so  clear  that 
Ihe  translators  eoiild  not  remain  in  doubt, — as  lie  Ic  ke  tmuiliiii  i  Iiik>  lett,  lie  tc  kc  lialuiii 
i  limileii,  for  thou  shall  be  justified  by  thy  words,  and  llioii  siialt  Ik;  condemned  by  thy 
words  ;  the  preposition  '»/  is  here  rendered  i  (ai'cording  to  the  general  rule  in  tl'  .'  ly- 
ncsiaii),  and  not  r, — Ihe  ablative  Ix'iiig  not  thai  of  Ihe  agent,  but  that  of  Ihe  means  or 
instrument.  The  particles  thus  far  observed  in  the  Tongiui  aiv  /  (llir  in),  in,  Ida,  ki  (for 
kill),  Ii  (lor  lilt),  and  na  (|K'rhaps  for  inn) — as  c  nko/iiikiiin  ukiiiiiiitolu  c  lie  Oliiii, 
"they  shall  Ik-  taught  by  God"  (from  nkiiiiaki,  to  leai'h). 

In  Ihe  New  Zealand  dialect  the  partiides  are  more  numerous  than  in  the  rest,  and  in 
this  point  its  grammalical  system  appears  to  Ik-  more  complete  and  regular  than  thai  of 
the  ollK'rs.  It  is  to  Ix'  observed  that  no!  only  is  the  passive,  as  such,  used  much  more 
frccpiently  than  in  Knglish,  but  in  the  iui|>eri'.live  of  transitive  verbs,  the  passive  I'orm  is 
generally  employed  where  i!  must  Ix;  renderi'il  into  Knglish  by  the  active, — and  this  is 
also  sometimes  the  case  in  other  mtKids.  Ki  le  men  c  wnkiiniiiliniinliii  nun  knc  r  Inn 
knilnlii  ninliiii,  if  Ihy  right  eye  ollend  thee, — lit.,  if  thou  be  oU'ended  by  thy  right  eye  ; 
mnlinin-lin  ijn  rriinrrijn,  observe  the  lilies.  One  remarkable  peculiarity  of  this  dialect 
is  that  instead  of  tin:  passive  sign  iM'ing  separated  from  the  verb  by  an  adverb,  as  in  ihe 
other  dialects,  Ixith  Ihe  verb  and  the  adverb  have  the  atlix, — that  of  the  latter  lieing 
always  tiii, — ns  ka  tiikit-n  mtirie-tia  Ion  ponnijn,  thy  servant  is  let  go  in  pence  (tiikii,  to 
let  go ;  marie,  peacefully)  ;  korrro-tia  kino-tin,  evil  spiken  of.  The  passive  suflixes 
arc  (/,  in,  liin,  kin,  min,  >)in,  rin,  tin,  tin,  ijii,  inn,  and  kinn ;  as  tonii-n,  seni, — iinti-in, 
broken, — Imjo-liin,  taken, — infi-kin,  loosi  d, — nni-tiiin,  I'olloweil, — inikntn-iin,  placed, 
— tiiiimiiii-lin,  Ix'trolbed, — Inliu-nn,  biirnl, — irnimi.iin,  li'd, — liiin-inn,  called, — lini-kinn, 
cut  do'Aii.  The're  appears  to  Ih'  no  certain  rule  by  which  we  can  determine  what  is  the 
affix  of  n  particular  verb;  on  this  |Kiin!  usaj.e  is  ihe  only  guide.  It  would  seem,  how- 
ever, tlint  certain  lerminalions  are  liest  adapted,  according  lo  the  euphony  of  the  lan- 
guage, to  particular  allixes.  \'erbs  I'liding  in  ne,  nkr,  it,  rii,  iri,  oi,  nli,  iii,  mi,  nil, 
ukii,  urn,  iitn,  have  usually  n;  those  which  terminale  in  nki  and  titi,  have  ollen  in; 


272 


I'll  I  I,  O  l.()(i  Y. 


mnny  in  ";;«,  dim,  i>ii,  iikii,  rhr,  hnvo  hiii;  tliosn  wliirh  toriiiinnto  in  in,  niid  in  a  nnd  6 
ncrcnicd  linvi"  m'ncrnlly  X/«;  ninny  in  tiiiii,  itiii,  itni,  nnd  tiro,  haw  win;  most  tlint 
nnd  in  di  '  ivp  ijio ;  riii  is  only  (!iiind  with  vrrbs  ending  in  «  nnd  o;  tin  is  tin;  most 
common  of  nil,  nnd  is  joiiii'd  with  nny  tcrniiniilion  ;  mnny  vcrlis  rnding  in  <il>i,  iki,  nnd 
tiiii,  liiko  tin;  llioso  in  /)("  firncTiilly  mi;  llii'  l!'W  cnsos  in  which  we  hnve  fonnd  inn  nnd 
kiiiii  Imvi-  brrn  with  verbs  en(hn;;  in  n.  In  some  words  ihi"  usage  seems  to  vnry ;  we 
find  hoth  J/vf<r//(i-/,((/ |Miitt.  xiii.  i>7|  nnd  inikdlii-iiin  (Malt.  xi.  (i|  lor  "  oIliMiiled  ;"  so 
also,  Hiihiipiilit-id  nnd  uiikiipiitn-iiiii,  "  made  to  n|)|ienr."  Words  sonnded  nlike  with 
different  nrrcptntions,  will  hnvc  ditFerent  aflixes, — as  kata-iiin,  Innglicd  at ;  ktiliikatu-\ji(i 
sroreheil. 

In  Unrolongnn,  the  |iassiv(>  particles  are  n,  in,  kin,  nnd  mm, — as  nic-ii,  loosened,^ 
nron-in,  loved, — njm-kin,  seized, — Innii-i/iin,  buried.  The  last  two  are,  however,  rare. 
Sometimes  a  tin  is  inserti'd  Ix'lween  the  verb  anil  the  particle  in,  which  may  Im-  the 
remains  of  nn  old  passivi'  Ibrm, — as  nko,  to  buy, — pnss.  nko-in  or  okotiii-in  (in  .New  Zen- 
hind,  liiiko,  to  buy,  mnkes  in  the  pnssive  lioktmn);  tiitnki-iii  or  tiitnkitiii-in,  rewarded  (in 
\.  Z.  tiilnki  makes  tiilnkiiin) ;  so  kiii,  to  cnt,  pass,  knitjnin  (N.  Z.  kui  mnkes  kniijit). 
The  passive  particle  may  lie  se|iarated  from  the  verb  by  nn  adverb, — ns  rnio-iiinric-in, 
laid  up  rarefully. 

In  .Mnngnrcvnn,  the  usual  passive  particle  is  in,  ns  nkiivnnikn-in,  revealed,  made 
known, — cnusative  passive  Irom  rnrnkn,  to  know. 

In  Tahitian,  the  only  suffix  of  the  pnssive  is  /(/((;  it  may  be  separated  from  the  verb 
by  nn  ndverb, — as  /iiijHii.i'./iin,  tnken  away  ;  hniiiniii-itin-hin,  treated  ill. 

In  llaHniInn,  the  sullixes  are  n,  in,  liin,  nnd  lin, — ns  liJir-n,  lieard, — Invr-in,  tnken, 
niihiili.liin,  driven  away, — tnii-liii,  hung  up.  The  last  two  particles,  hovvevcir,  are  em- 
ployed in  but  very  lew  instances.  Tniilin  is  probably  used  to  distinguish  the  word  Inn, 
in  the  meaning  of  /')  linn^,  frmn  Inn,  iiieaniug  In  jinl,  or  set  down,  pass.  Inn. in.  We 
hnve,  |M'rliaps,  another  passive  siilVix  in  jii/i-tin,  crowded  close,  from  ]ti/i,  to  join  or 
ndlien'  to. 

The  N'ukuhivan  has  fiir  sullixes  of  the  passive  (/,  in,  hin,  and  tin ;  ns  hiinnii,  to  bring 
forth,  Iniiinii-n,  Imrii  ;  knohn,  to  sidute,  kniilni-in,  saluted  ;  nin,  to  inspire,  iirii-liin, 
inspired  ;  hnnlnpii,  to  sanctify,  hnnlnini.tin,  snnclilied. 

It  is  remarkable  that  soiiii>  of  the  active  verbs  of  the  Ivistern  dinleets  sec-m  to  be  ilerived 
from  the  passive  forms  of  N'ew  Zealand, — as  : 


jturi,     X.  Z.,  to  take,  pnss.  piirilin 

nkiri,        "  to  thr<iw,  "  nkirilia 

kini,  "  to  pinch,  "  kiniliu 

tnrnki,      "  to  overthrow,      "  Ininkiiin 

linrn,  "  to  swallow,  "  hoiiiiiiin 


piilili,  I  law.,  to  take  up 
kirili,  Mang.,  to  throw 
'inili,  Ilnw.,  to  pini'h 
lii/nitin.  Haw.,  to  overthrow 
lioriimi.  Tab.,  to  swallow 


Tliis  would  seem  to  iudic.-ite  that  these  passive  forms  once  existed  in  the  Intlcr  dialects, 
thoui;h  ihey  are  now  obsolete  ns  such. 

>i  57.  The  verbal  nouns  being  closely  connected  in  this  language 
with  tiie  passive  Ibrtns,  it  will  be  most  convenient  to  treat  of  them  in 
this  place.  They  are  formed  by  joining  to  the  verb  crrtain  suffixes 
which  usually  terminate  in  ya. 


P  O  I,  Y  N  E  S  I  A  N    O  R  A  M  M  A  R. 


273 


As  Iho  fiirrtialion  of  these  nouns,  like  that  of  the  pnssivt!  voice,  is  most  clenrly  nnd 
fully  (lispliiyed  in  the  New  Xenland  dinlcct,  it  seems  advisnbli^  to  depart  from  fiur  usual 
order,  and  draw  our  first  examples  from  this  tongue.  The  general  rule  is  that  the  par- 
ticle of  the  noun  depends  u|)On  that  of  the  passive,  ii,  ui,  rui,  ««,  and  j)(«  being  changed 
into  >)ii,  iind  hia,  kin,  miti,  ria,  nnd  lin  becoming  respectively  luii/ii,  lunjii,  maija,  rai/a, 
and  tiiiKt,  as — 


ACTIVE. 

piitii,  to  kill 

Willi,  to  break 

tiihit,  to  burn 

kiii,  to  cat 

piii,  to  favor 

l<i;/i,  to  lament 

waktiini,  to  judge 

aril,  to  pursue 

tn  (trans.),  to  stand  on 

kotero,  to  sjicak 


PAHaiVE. 
JMlllKl 

V'litiia 

tiihiimi 

kiiiij<i 

jMiiijiii 

liiijihia 

wakiiwdkiii 

(iriimia 

luria  (stood  upon) 

korrroliii. 


NOUN. 

pntiigtt,  a  killing 
waliijii,  fracture 
tahmjii,  a  burning 
kaii/ii,  a  meal 
jMiiijii,  favor,  kindness 
tatjiliaijii,  latnentation 
trakiitcakdija,  judgment 
uruminja,  pursuit 
tiiroiia,  a  stand,  foundation 
korer'tlttga,  a  speaking 


It  is  prolmbli^  that  the  passive  sull'ixes  inn  and  ki/Ki  arc  changed  to  j)«,  but  the  ex- 
amples are  so  few  and  doubtful  that  no  positive  conclusion  has  been  arrived  at ;  thus, 
wakiij>iiUt-inti,  made  to  ap|)car,  or  shown,  has  witkiijtiiluijii,  a  showing  forth, — but  then 
this  verb  has  also  another  form  of  the  passive,  nakiiputnia,  from  which  the  noun  may 
be  derived.  'I'lie  sutlixes  ijii  and  hitjit  are  tho«!  which  are  generally  used  where  a  noun 
is  to  Ih'  I'ormed  from  a  word  which  is  not  a  verb, — as  from  niii,  great,  we  have  yiiiitju, 
greatness;  from  y»»ri,  dark,  ;»;»/■//"«'(,  darkness;  from  «(/;/if,  peacefully,  «(«r(W«j)rt, 
ix-acefulncss.  Someliines  a  slight  irn'gularily  may  be  observed, — as  iriikapiiiiki,  to 
testify,  which  should  properly  have  iiiikii}miikii)ii,  has  viikiipiiakiiijii,  testimony.  When 
the  verb  of  which  the  noun  is  to  Ix;  liirmcd  is  (pialilied  by  an  adverb,  this  adverb,  also, 
receives  a  nominal  su(li\,  which  is  always  <«y«;  thus  w«  /onii  is  to  live  continually, 
from  which  we  have  oriniii  li»iii-l<iijii,  eternal  lite;  tii-kaii,  to  1)0  naked  (lit,  to  stand 
merely),  has  tinjn  kiiiiliiijii,  nakedness.  Here  it  will  lie  observed  that  tii  has  a  ditlercnt 
sullix  {nil)  from  that  which  it  has  above  {niiia),  and  with  a  ditlcrent  meaning.  This  is 
not  an  uncommon  case; — wiiiiitii,  to  bring  forth,  passive  iriinaua,  has  witiiiiutjii  (reg,), 
olfspriiig,  and  xriivniilinja  (irreg.),  birth  ;  iiko,  to  teach,  pass,  iikimii,  has  iikoija  (reg.), 
discipji',  and  nkorinjn  (irn-g.),  instruction.  No  certain  rule  can  lie  given  for  these  eases, 
except  that  when  th<'  rj'gular  derivative  of  a  verb  has  ac(|uircd  by  custom  a  meaning 
ditfercnt  from  that  which  it  should  properly  possess  (as  tciimiiiiju  should  properly  signify 
birth,  tiiriii)!!,  standing,  nknijii,  teaeliing),  another  noun  may  I)e  formed  to  express  such 
prop<T  mianing,  by  allixing  to  the  verb  the  pai'ticle  which  will  ll)rm  the  most  euphonious 
combination.  It  will  bt>  seen  that  the  Kastern  dialects  (Itarotongan,  Tahilian,  &c.)  have 
generalised  this  exceptional  rule  into  a  regular  system,  and  thence  derived  two  classes  of 
verbal  uoims. 

In  Samoan,  the  usual  sulTix  is  ii«,  which  sometimes  becomes  iii/a, — as  Inmnja,  inter- 
ment or  sepulchre, — tiifn-iiyn,  <livision, — tjatiitja  or  yiila-iiija,  end,  from  tjalii,  to  termi- 
note.     There  are,  however,  some  exceptions,  which  seem  to  indicate  that  a  more  com- 

09 


274 


1>  tl  I  I.  O  L  U  G  V. 


picx  syslrm  rcarmblinK  (he  New  iConlanil  rurincrly  r.xiiitrd ; — 111)111,  to  );mw,  inakc* 
lupu-<it))i,  )>n>K'th,  mill  lH/tii/<ijfii,  grnrrntiun  (in  N.  'A.  iiiika  fiijiiirtujd) ;  lii-yi  is  a 
atnndini;,  niiil  lu-Uit/ii,  n  xtnnd,  riiuiidnlion. 

In  Tnnttan,  pa  nnil  «prt  ape  llie  n'guhir  hiiITixcii,  and  sorm  to  U'  uwtl  indiiriTcntly, — 
as  kavr,  to  carry,  intr^i,  a  biirth<-n  ;  hii/r,  lo  novrrii,  luik-iiiiii,  a  kin);iloni, — takitilo,  to 
ahow,  Jakaihijii,  a  »\f,n,  indication  ;  tanii,  to  liury,  liiiiu-iiijti,  n  s('|iidi'lirp.  Hut  lunit 
Dignities  also  to  plniit,  and  wc  liave  lor  the  Hixth  lunar  nionlh,  luiiiimiitjii,  \\w  planting 
month  (Mariner),  evidently  IrDin  the  obsolete  passive  fnniiiiiin.  Tii  signilic.s  liolh  to 
stand  and  lo  rut :  in  the  toniH'r  sense  it  has  liir  its  noun  liuif/ii  or  tinjii,  any  thing 
standing  ;  in  the  latter,  it  mokes  in  the  passive  tiilin,  and  its  noun  is  tutaijtf,  a  piece  or 
slice  of  any  thing. 

In  all  the  l-^isiern  dialtvts  lhert<  are  two  panicles  ilistinct  in  their  use  and  purport.  In 
Rarotongnn,  these  are  p«  and  (inn, — the  laltiT  of  which  is  usH  to  express  the  action 
signified  by  the  verb,  while  the  former  has  refen'nce  rather  lo  the  result  of  the  action; 
the  one  ;nay  lie  termed  the  noun  of  the  active  voice,  and  the  other  that  of  the  passive. 
Thus  ininiiu-<i>)ti  is  birth,  and  wnnuiitxi  iitl'spring  ;  i/j>r-iii/<i,  an  ending,  apriiii,  end; 
j>i4tit-<i)xi,  a  collivting, /(»^/j»(i,  a  crowd;  riiir-iiini,  n  doing,  r(a'c«<i,  a  deed.  Smie  of 
the  jmssives  which  terminate  in  kiit  and  iiii'i  have  their  nouns  formed  from  them, — os 
oft//,  to  seize,  pass.  (V/«/;V(,  whence  f)/>iikiii<i,  xrv/Mw;  tiinii,U'i  bury,  \msii,  tiiniiiiiia, — 
laniimni)ti,  burial,  sepulchre.  7?;,  to  kill,  has  irregularly  tniijtt,  slaughter.  Tlie  active 
sullix,  iinii,  may  be  separated  from  the  verb  by  an  adverb, — as  kiti-iikiioii-aii<i,  a  seeing 
again,  or  a  itMlisoovery ;  this  particle  may  also  receive  the  passive  sullix  in,  thus  giving 
it  a  signilicatiiiii  like  that  expressed  by  the  English  lirinn  with  the  |mst  |iarticiple, — thus, 
U  kite-iiiin  signilies  the  knowing, — le  kite-iiii<(-iii,  tlie  In-iiig  known  ;  tr  r<irr-kimi-iii)ti  is 
the  ill-lreatiug,  or  ill-treatment  which  one  inllicts  ;  tc  ruve-kiHo-uga-iii  is  the  lieing  ilU 
treated,  or  ill-treatment  which  one  endures. 

In  Mangarevan,  tlie  two  sutfixes  are  >tn  and  rnttii ;  as  nuiteijti,  death,  nuite-raita,  tlie 
act  of  ilying;  mtjrpii,  bed,  niDc-rn^i,  tlic  act  of  sleeping. 

In  Tahitian,  the  stilfixes  are  11  (fiir  g<i)  and  rini  (for  riii)<i);  as  fdnnna,  offspring, 
/amiH-nui,  birth  ;  hojien,  end,  hojie-riui,  completion,  ending;  tiihiiii,  portion.  Iiihn-rnn, 
apportionment.  Insteail  of  nut,  litui  (for  hiiijfi)  is  sometimes  found, — as  tniluui  (tnni- 
lut^t,  N.  '/..).  lamentation,  ftloluut,  crying.  The  |>assive  particle  may  lie  affixed,  as  in 
Karotongan ;  as  te  vnhavdha-riia-hia,  the  Ixjing  abused  ;  tc  nrnlai-rnii-hiti,  the  lieing  led. 

In  Hawaiian,  the  jiarticles  are  ««  (for  ifii)  and  nun  (liird/j/i);  as  (oenn,  remainder, 
toe-ana,  a  remaining;  uUina,  burthen,  iita-ann,  a  conveying.  The  former,  however,  is 
U8«>d  only  in  certain  words,  while  the  latter  is  universal ;  it  may  Is;  separated  from  the 
verb  by  an  adverb, — os  Ui  oiitoii  Ininn-mnilni-nna,  your  well-doing,  or  your  gfusl  dee«U. 
Ana  is  used  also  like  tlie  present  participle  in  Knglish,  to  form  a  kind  of  present  tense, — 
as  e  lam  nnn  an,  I  am  taking;  it  follows  the  sign  of  the  passive, — as  laitc-in-nna.  being 
taken.  Some  wonls  seem  to  show  that  olhi'r  liirms  once  existed, — as  tomoliann,  the 
west,  Irom  lomo,  to  enter,  to  sink  into  (i.  e.  the  going  down  of  the  sun — uccnleiis); 
tu/fina,  a  place  where  many  things  stand, — as  a  village,  garden,  &n\  (Irom  tii,  to  stand). 

At  the  Manpiesiis,  the  regular  sullix  nn  Isvonies,  in  the  soiilhern  islands,  nn,  and  in 
the  northern  ka;  as  /f/j  or  /liti,  to  go  inland,  /?/f>i«  and  hilikn,  nn  inland  journey  ;  /««, 
to  sleep,  nioena  and  morka,  a  bed.  The  latter  suffix,  kn,  freiiuenlly  lakes  a  vowel- 
sound,  I  or  r,  licforc  it,  for  euphony,  as  to)/,  to  arrive,  Uiuika,  an  arrival.     M.  Uurcia 


POLYNESIAN   GRAMMAR. 


976 


gives  also  tilt  nnd  Ihm,  an  roriiinlivfs,  but  no  cxampU-s  of  llieir  use.  lie  mcniiuns  ulso 
th«!  pnrticle  ami,  an  licinj;  ummI  to  dHtiiiKuish  the  pri^'iil  luiisc,  but  it  is  uncerlniD 
whether  wc  are  to  consider  it  a  noniiniil  suffix  (from  aijit),  or  a  locative  pnrticle. 

DIRECTIVE   PARTICLES. 

I)  58.  Tlie  verbal  directives  are  words  which  are  postfixed  to 
verbs,  to  signify  the  direction  in  which  the  action  is  supposed  to 
proceed, — either  with  respect  to  its  place  of  origin,  or  to  the  place  of 
the  speaker. 

Thepe  parlii-les  are  most  accurately  distin);uished  in  tlie  Tongan.  They  are  five  in 
numlier,  nuii,  lUu,  aijr,  hake,  and  hifo.  Mai  signifies  motion  or  action  towards  the 
speaker, — atii,  motion  towards  the  (ktsoii  addressed, — atje,  towards  a  third  |K^rson,— 
luike,  u|)wards,  and  hifo,  downwards  ;  tula  mat  kitUe  an,  tell  nic ;  ten  Uda  tUu  kialc  koe, 
I  will  tell  you  ;  tola  aijc  kiatc  ia,  tell  him  ;  alii  hake,  go  up  ;  alii  hifo,  come  down. 

Th<!  Snmoan  has  also  tive  particles,  but  employs  th(Mn  somewhat  dillerently  from  the 
Tongan.  Mai  indicates  motion  or  action  towards  the  s|)enker,— «/«,  from  ihc  s|K;aker, 
— ane,  motion  aside, — «'c  and  ijh,  upwards  and  downwards ;  examples  of  uiie  are,  «/« 
atie  e  lau  ane  i  ai,  go  and  tell  him  ;  iVr  jxijxii  aiic  i  tatoii  le  tujatafa  o  lona  ofu,  that 
they  might  touch  the  border  of  his  garment. 

In  New  Zealand,  then;  a.-e  but  four  |>articlcs,  nuii,  atu,  ake,  and  iJh, — atie  not  being 
found.     These  four  are  used  as  in  the  Samoan. 

In  Rarotongan,  the  din-clives  are  mni,  atu,  ake,  and  w.  Ake,  besides  its  meaning  of 
upwards,  seems  also  to  take  the  place  of  ane  in  Samoan ;  at  least,  it  is  used  in  many 
cases  where  the  former  meaning  will  not  apply  j  as  riri  ake  ra  totia  pii  iaia,  his  master 
was  angry  with  him ;  kite  ake  ra  aiti  i  te  reira,  he  knew  that.  The  directives  are 
used  with  great  frec|Uency  in  this  and  the  following  diidects,  and  in  many  oases,  to  ap- 
pearance, arbitrarily,  where  no  motion  or  direction  of  the  net  can  well  bi-  uiiderstisid. 

In  Mangarevan,  the  particles  are  the  same  as  in  Rarotongan  ;  ake,  besides  its  ordi- 
nary meaning,  is  used  to  signify  that  an  act  is  now  in  progress  towards  completion, — as 
c  moro  ake  ana,  it  is  drying ;  e  rat  ake  ana,  it  is  becoming  large.  They  also  say, 
nora  koe  ake  tiei,  whence  come  you  f 

In  Tahitian,  Hawaiian,  and  Nukuhivan,  the  directives  arc  mai,  atu,  ae,  and  iho;  ae 
signifies  direction  either  upwards  or  aside,  according  to  the  context. 


LOCATIVE   PARTICLES. 

\  59.  While  the  last-mentioned  particles  show  the  direction  in 
which  the  action  is  supposed  to  move,  there  is  another  class  which 
indicate  the  locality  or  vicinity  in  which  it  is  considered  to  take 
place, — whether  near  the  speaker,  or  at  a  distance.  Their  use,  how- 
ever, is  not  always  clearly  defined,  and  it  is  generally  impossible  to 
render  them  into  English.  Some  of  the  dialects  employ  them  much 
more  frequently  than  others. 


976 


1'  H  I  I,  O  L  O  O  Y. 


In  Snnionn,  vri  (hrrr),  w«  (lluTi"),  nn*  in  common  iiw,— as  iiii  fiii  iitii  nri  mte  milou, 
I  snj  unto  yim ;  Jninitii  i  on  sim  mi,  Im'IiuIiI  lliy  disfiplrs  ;  Ir  ilrmniii  i  o  onion  iitalti  e 
tiili  iiii,  Ific  ili'vils  H'lioni  your  cliililrrn  ciist  out.  A'o,  it  would  scrm,  gcnrmlly  di'miloa 
a  imiiit  near  tlir  |MTson  N|>ok('M  to.  Iai  is  Homi'linics  iiM'd  iillcr  nil  iiii|xTiitivc,  a*  in 
New  /cnlnnd ;  .Mr.  Ilrnlh,  liowcvrr,  coiisidors  it  n  coiitrnclion  of  tlio  rnipliiitic  ndvi'rb 
luvti, — lis  Inn  mini  In  in,  just  j;o  slriiinlil  liirwiird  ! 

In  tlic  Tollman,  I  lind  no  |>arti<'l('H  i'in|il<iyrd  imriscly  in  this  nianncr.  It  dillera  in 
llii.><  n's|xvl,  as  in  many  ollirrs,  iVum  its  .sisiir  diali'cts. 

In  .\i-w  Zi'ulaiid,  mi  (lirrc)  and  niin  (ilicri')  arc  llw  particli's  most  fnH|Ucntly  used,^ 
as  c  mm  ntii  nri  nlniii  kin  konliiii,  I  ."ay  unto  you  ;  nrii  nun  rniiii  in  in,  llipy  tiillowcd 
him.  Un  is  used  alUr  the  iiupcnitivc,  and  in  snme  iiistanct'S  niler  other  moods,  when  a 
siipiiosiiion  is  iiilcndcd  ;  it  may  also  have  some  roferpnce  lo  place  at  a  little  distance 
from  llio  s|K.'akor;  nrii  nini  rn  in  linn,  liillow  me!  kin  rile  knloii  no  iiuo,\\\\  nil  be 
Ailtillcd ;  knn  mini  rn  kniitiiii,  yr  liavc  lii'ard. 

In  Uarotoiij^an,  the  i..c/.?:"v  particles  are  mi,  rn,  tin,  anil  iimi.  Xri  and  rn  am  Imth 
in  frecpH'iit  use,  the  liirmer  signil'yiii}!  Iirrr,  and  the  latter  there ;  and  as  an  action  which 
is  present  in  place  i.s  usually  so  in  lime,  and  as  one  which  is  distant  is  m(ir«!  likely  lo 
be  p.Tt,  Ihest!  two  have  come  to  be  also  connected  with  tens<\ — the  former  lieing  used 
with  the  pn'scnt,  and  the  latter  generally,  though  not  always,  with  the  past  [v.  §  5a], 
i\«  (yonder)  as  signifying  a  greater  distance  in  .spac<^  than  rn,  signilies  also  a  greater 
distance  in  time ;  te  tnnt.in  mi  nii,  I  say  (here) ;  le  tnntiin  rn  nn,  I  was  .saying  (then') ; 
i  liiiiliin  nn  mi,  I  .said  (yonder).  This  dislinclioii,  however,  is  not  always  maintained 
with  strictness,  Rn  is  used  freipienlly  as  an  emphalic  word,  without  reference  to  place 
or  time,  and  may  Ik?  translated  liiit,  indi'cd,  only  ;  le  lunliin  iitii  nri  ru  nn  kin  koiiloii, 
but  I  sny  unto  you.  Ann  is  sometimes  used,  though  it  is  diilicult  tu  sny  with  what  pre- 
cise ineiining  ;  knn  riro  iiini  iinn  n  Klin,  Klias  has  come  ;  kn  momono  nnn  i  tnan  koke, 
put  up  thy  sword. 

In  Mangarevan,  nri,  urn,  nn,  and  nnn  arc"  the  locative  particles.  Nri,  nrn,  and  nn, 
seem  lo  1h'  used  much  as  nri,  rn,  and  nn,  in  Uarotougan.  Am,  according  to  the  vcwa- 
bulary,  iiidi>'ates  distance  Ih>||i  of  place  and  lime.  Ann  is  given  with  several  meanings  : 
(l)ns  a  particle  of  present  tinn-, — as  r  pure  nnn  ^w,  thou  prnyest ;  ('i)  as  meaning 
peril  I ps  ; — mikn  nnn  rn, — nn  Irlnijiiln  ki'  nnn  rn,  it  is  |H-rlinps  mine, — |M'rliaps  the  other 
man's;  and  (M)  as  used  in  answering  a  (|uestion,  as  e  nliijn  tni  Ir  Unnj/ekn,  is  Kua|H:ka 
a  reel'(lireaker  of  the  sea)  ?  r  knnltni  nnn  in,  [no;]  it  is  a  |H>int  of  land. 

The  Taliitian  uses  nri,  rn,  anil  nn,  precisely  as  the  Uarotougan. 

In  Hawaiian,  nei  indicates  present  place  and  time ;  In,  a  distance  in  place,  and  some- 
times, though  not  always,  in  time. 

In  .Nukuhivan,  nei  and  nn  are  u.sed  as  nei  and  In  in  Hawaiian. 

It  will  Ik-  SL'cn  that  the  use  of  nri  ri'inaius  nearly  or  quite  the  same  in  all,  while  na, 
in  (rn),  nnn,  and  nrn  are  somewhat  variously  usi-d  in  the  dilferent  dialects,  though,  in 
general,  they  may  all  be  considered  corii'liitives  of  nri. 


HKLATIVK   I'ARTICLK. 


^  60.     Tliis  name  has  been  given  to  a  particle  which  in  many 
cases  supplies  the  place  of  the  relative  pronouns  in  English,  though 


> 


I'  (>  I.  Y  N  K  8  I  A  N   n  R  A  M  M  A  n. 


277 


frequently  it  cannot  well  be  translated.  It  usually  refers  to  some 
word  in  the  first  part  of  tlie  sentence,  expressive  of  time,  place,  cause, 
means,  manner,  &c.  In  most  of  the  dialects  this  particle  is  at, — in 
Uarnton^ran  ei. 

Jii<l<;in);  from  iIk-  Sniiionn  and  Tongnti,  tlie  prf)|HT  iii<>iitiin){  ofni  is  titerr,  ntnl  in  those 
Innnunm-Ji  it  fr<M|iiPntly  1ms  prciKisilioris  U'loir  it.  It  tlit'ri  iiiiswcrs  very  well  to  the 
i'ji<;lisli  rx|in'8.sic>ns  "  iIhti'IVoiii,"  "  llicrctil","  "  tlii'ri'iii,"  used  ("(ir"!!!'  il,"  "  of  them," 
"  of  liiin,"  "  fniin  il,"  "  in  il,"  &c.  It  nmy  iilso  Ik-  coniiinrcd  willi  llii;  Krciicli  y.  O  h 
till  c  I  lit  II  oiitoii  mi,  lit.  Ilir  pliirc  is  tlii'rc  tliy  wrallli,  i.  i-.  tlm  pliK'c  wlicri'in  lliy  wrnllli 
is ;  Irliisi  mi  i  ui  I'lhiii  i/iiiin,  llid  one  wlicn'unld  were  fivc!  tiilenis,  i,  c.  ho  who  hnd  five 
talents  ;  Jiii  iilii  i  ui,  sny  unto  him  or  them,  or  say  thereunto. 

In  Tongan,  iii  evidently  signifies  tlirre,  n»  lifii  iir  liikii  ki  ui,  and  he  placed  there  ;  but 
it  is  freipienlly  used  ns  a  relative, — as  o  lin  iitii  niiii  /ir  Ixilii  okii  ke  In  ui,  and  look  away 
from  the  pinec  thou  slandest  there  (when;  thou  slandesi);  iir  i/ii/ii  mm  iiku  iiio/iDiniio 
III,  the  things  ye  listen  ther«;to  (for,  the  things  which  ye  liear) ;  kiiluii  ia  e  fd-Mic  at, 
who  is  he  wheri'hy  it  can  U;  said  (tcir,  who  is  it  lliat  can  say). 

In  New  /enhind,  iiu  jxi  i  niriiju  ui,  Iho  towns  wherein  was  done  ;  tc  nuitr  e  niiii  ui 
koiitoii,  the  death  which  ye  n-ceive  ;  i  iiiriijuliii  kiitoutiii  tciiri  kiii  rile  ui,  and  all  this 
was  done  thai  might  Ix'  lidlilled  Ihercliy,  <Vc. 

In  Uaroloiigaii,  Ir  iiirii  i  riivii  ri  le  tuijiitu,  the  things  whereby  Ibe  man  is  defiled  ;  e 
iiere  iilii  ru  km-  ki  It:  juif  iiito,  r  liliii  iitii  ri,  but  go  thou  to  the  shore  of  the  lake,  i.nd 
throw  therein. 

In  the  .Mangarevan,  the  missionaries  have  perhaps  mistaken  Ibe  ofiice  of  this  particle. 
In  tlie  vo<-abulary  ui  is  said  to  lie  used  alter  u  verb  (having  r  bclbre  it)  as  a  future  particle, 
and  at  the  end  of  a  phrase  as  interrognlive.     No  examples  are  given. 

In  I'aumoliiaii,  kurui  kukiirnri  luiiu  r  knrn  ui,  by  and  by,  to-day,  we  two  will  then 
fight :  here  iii  refers  to  the  adverl)S  of  lime,  kiiria  kiikiiriici,  but  il  is  easy  to  sec  how  it 
might  bi-  mistaken,  as  in  .Maiigan'van,  for  a  I'uUire  particle.  I'jili'i  liiii  uiirure.  r  irii 
viui  ui  kur  kiuku,  what  is  thy  disire  for  which  thou  art  hostile  to  me  .' — here  ui  rell-rs  to 
vururr,  but  il  might  readily  Ik;  taken  for  an  interrogative. 

In  Tahitian,  Hawaiian,  and  Xukubivnn,  its  use;  is  the  same  as  in  the  examples  already 
given;  il  does  not,  however,  take  a  pn'|x)silion  iK'liire  it,  as  in  SanuMii  and  Tongan.  In 
most  of  Ibe  diaU-ols,  when  this  particle  follows  a  word  terminating  in  ",  it  freijuently 
coalesces  with  il ;  as,  Ir  tuiiulii  iiinliitiiiiu  i  hiiuiiiu^i  r  le  iiliiii.  Haw.,  the  first  man  who 
was  made  by  GikI  :  here  liiiuiiiu  is  the  passive  of  liiinii,  to  make,  and  the  '/  (for  ui) 
relers  to  lunulu,  and  supplies  the  place  of  the  ndative  trho. 


A  »  V  V.  It  II  S. 


J  61.  It  should  be  observed,  however,  that  any  adjective  may 
become  an  adverb,  by  being  used  after  the  verb.  The  same  words 
mean  good  and  well, — bad  and  badly, — weak  and  feebly,  &,c.  Cer- 
tain classes  of  adverbs,  however,  deserve  particular  notice. 

70 


279 


P  II  I  I,  O  L  O  O  V. 


J  62.  In  Samoaii  and  Tonj»an  the  causative  particIeyrtAo  orya'o  is 
frequently  used  to  form  adverbs. 

Snmoiin,— ^«V/i;('A'4/,  with  ono  accord  ,•  fii'd-vavmi,  without  end  (vnvaii  is  (hr  Imoit, 
nneifiit). 

'l"<iii'.;nn,— /((/i-aAwX/,  Imcliwards  (kt-viki,  n  (.Tul)) ;  fitkiitoii,  liriivcly  (toil,  bruve,  a 
wnrri(ir). 

This  iisiigi'  is  less  romiiioii  in  the  olhor  dialrets,  liiit  is  not  t'lilircly  unknown. 

When  prclixfil  to  namrs  ol'  countries,  this  pnrlicle,  in  these  two  dinlects,  ineiins — iiftor 
the  llishion  ol', — iis,  Jli'a-l^njn,  fuka-Fili,  Tongn-fashion,  Feejoe-fashion,  (d  Id  mode  tic 
Thiigd.) 

In  Mnn^nrevnn,  n  is  used  in  llic  snme  way  ;  ns,  rac  a  Ma ijiirevii .,  to  jump  as  in  iManga- 
reva  ;  also  with  conunon  nouns, — as,  tin-  n  juilii,  to  move  like  a  ship. 

^  03.  The  ncEratives  vary  much  in  tlie  different  dialects,  and  have 
several  peculiarities  deserving  of  attention. 

In  I'akaafo,  se  (or  he)  wu.s  used  for  not, — as,  e  si  ki  nuitoit  Hon,  we  do  not  know  ;  c  ae 
III  111  mil,  not  any  cocoa-nuts.  Ai-ii/n,  Uii-iilii,  ktii-tiUi,  wcro  all  used  for  no  ;  the  (ila 
is  prohably  an  expletive. 

In  Sninoan,  /'■  is  the  nefjative  particle  used  Ixith  with  verbs  and  adjectives, — as,  Vo«  tc 
le  siio,  ye  shall  not  enter;  /<■  sii/d,  nut  jiuilty,  guiltless;  with  ni,  it  becomes  />■  iii,  not, 
none, — e  /iiii  sr  tiin<itii,ihvre  is  not  a  single  man.  E  Ic  iii  is  the  coninion  e.\i)re8sion 
lor  no,  in  answer  to  a  ijuestion. 

In  Tongan,  ikni  is  the  general  word  for  no  and  not ;  fni  is  used  before  nouns  in  the 
sense  of  the  English  suflix  less, — as,  Uii-dhi,  houseless, — tiii-hiilii,  sinless.  Titki  means, 
not  yet. 

In  New  Zealand,  thi^  words  fir  not  are  korr,  hon,  kiliiii,  arui  te.  Kmr  is  commonly 
used  ill  the  present  and  future,  preceded  by  c  ;  Itniv  has  generally  kii  l)efore  it,  and  is  used 
for  the  ordinary  negative,  no  !  or,  it  is  not  !  Kiluii  is  only  used  with  the  preterite.  Te 
is  used  with  any  tense,  and  is  prefixed  to  adjectives,  imrticiples,  &c., — as,  li.nidiiidc,  not 
hurt ;  te-alui,  not  able.  Korr  is  also  used  in  the  sense  of  the  linglish  less,  or  without, — 
as, /«/;V(./,wc,  sinless, — niiid-kuir,  w'lthuul  |irii|M.'rty,  poor.  Eliiirn  signilies,  it  is  not; 
kid  nil,  not  yet. 

In  Uaroldiiuan,  the  negatives  are  knir  and  kiire ;  the  liiriner  is  usuallv  liuind  in  the 
|Mist  and  present,  f  )llowcd  by  the  preterite  particle  i ;  the  latter  in  the  present  and  future. 
Korv  is  also  poslfixod  to  verbs  in  the  sense  of  the  English  nn-,  and  to  nouns  in  the  sensi' 
of  less, — ns,  ori'i-korc-id,  iinwaslicd,  fnim  orei,  to  wash  ;  iirn-korc,  sinless. 

In  Mungamvaii,  korc  is  the  usual  ncLmtive,  and  is  added  to  nouns  as  in  \ew  Zealand 
and  Knrolungaii, — as,  jmre-koir,  wilhimt  a  hat.  '1\-  is  used  as  in  \ew  Zealand, — as. 
tr-nnniii,  nut  powerful, — li-innlii,  not  bniken. 

The  Tahitian  has  many  negatives,  and  distinguishes  them  into  classes  according  to  the 
lime  or  tense  with  which  they  are  connected  ;  unrc,  iiiiiui,  dinii,  nijxi,  ititd,  are  used  only 
with  the  past ;  e  crc,  c  orr,  e  rte,  are  used  w  ith  the  present ;  and  r  ore,  ciiiiii,  ri/in,  viln, 
with  the  future.  The  dillen'iiee  between  these  various  negatives  is  not  very  clear,  except 
that  dijMi  seems  to  include  un  iileu  of  doubt  or  contingency, — us,  "  [lerhaps  not."     Orr 


ji^t,    V*       ^ 


POLYNESIAN    <J  R  A  M  M  A  H. 


279 


is  used  nfter  nmins  nnil  vorbK  liko  kore.  in  Kiirutoiignii, — us,  hnni-ore,  guiltlc!i!i, — horoi- 
ore-hill,  uiiwnslicd. 

In  llnwiiiinn,  iiiJe  iind  iile ;  Iho  forninr  is  the  (^cnoml  nfytilivoj  iImj  IntliT  is  llin  HUtl'ix, 
and  may  bo  nddrd  Ici  nliixr'  nny  adjective,  coniiiion  noun,  or  verb  in  this  InngiiaK''. 

The  Nnkuliivan,  besides  iikue  (or  u'lie)  and  /.'*■,  bas  also  uiimn,  no,  used  as  a  strong 
negation. 

i  04.  A  certain  class  of  adverbs,  expressing  the  relations  of  place, 
are  treated  as  nouns,  (except  that  thoy  do  not  take  the  article,)  and 
have  a  preposition  both  before  and  after  them ;  they  then  correspond 
in  meaning  with  tlio  Fitiglish  prepositions,  above,  below,  before, 
beiiind,  within,  without,  &c. 

Samoan : — i  Moiiii  o  k  /olfMi,  within  the  field  (in  the  midst  of) ;  t  liiijti  o  le  sami,  upon 
the  sen. 

Toiigan  : — i  UUo  i  he  aUi,  below  the  firmament ;  *  iJinja  i  lir  <Un,  above  the  firmament. 

New  Zealand: — t  wiwgii/iiii  o  >ju  tcttrc,  between  the  houses  ;  i  iiiiia  i  /r  jxt,  Ix^forc  the 
town. 

In  Itanittingan,  those  of  thes4<  adverbs  which  end  in  it  liave  n  sullixrd  lo  them,  and 
take  l)esides  another  |)re|K)sili()n, — as,  ki  riit/ii  (adv.)  ulxjve,  on  high, — ki  niijiio  i  Iv  arc, 
upt)ii  the  house ;  ki  mini,  in  front, — ki  miiiio  iu  Jrsii,  before  Jesus. 

In  Tahitian,  toi  frequently  precedes  them, — as,  tei  mln  i  li'  tiiri;  within  the  houso.  In 
Hawaiian,  «/(/,  ns  iiinliit't  o  Ir  Ini/t;  within  the  bouse.  This  i)iii  is  also  employed  in 
Nukuhivan,  as  well  as  {'.  In  this  dialect  the  adverb  is  liillowed  by  /li  or  /ir,  as  inn  una 
hi  iiiiDiiu,  upon  the  U'd  ;  i  miu  hi  fur,  over  the  house ;  i  otii  hi  hiiv  (( '),  within  the  cala- 
bash ;  i  i)to  he  iiiii  ((J),  in  heaven. 

\  (>5.  Nearly  all  the  intorroirative  adverbs  are  formed  from  fea, 
which  seems  to  mean  properly  which.     [\.  \  42.] 

With  the  pre|)ositions,  /('(I  refers  to  place, — as,  i  fm,  Sam.,  where !  (i.  e.  at  which 
place  ?), — Hiui Jhii,  whence  \  &c.  Willi  jie,  like,  it  relers  to  nianner, — as,  ]Kfiii,fiiiijH/iii. 
like  what, — i.  e.  how  ? — the  answer  to  which  is,  jieiiri,  j)rnii,  jnhi,  like  this,  like  that,  i.  e. 
thus,  so.  With  the  signs  of  the  tenses  Jin  bas  reference  to  lime,  as,  n/cu,  when  !  (fut.), 
vtifni,  when  \  (post.)  These,  or  similar  words,  are  liiund  in  all  the  dialects.  In  Tongan. 
fen  bi'coines /(• ;  in  Kinoloiigan  and  .Mangnrevan,  en  ;  and  in  the  other  dialects,  hcu  ;  Jin, 
however,  is  sometimes  used  in  Tahitian  and  Nukuhivan. 

ij  06.  All  the  dialects  (except  perhaps  the  Toncjan)  have  particles, 
whose  office  is  to  give  an  interrogative  meaning  to  the  sentence,  like 
the  ue  and  rtum  of  the  Latin. 

In  Sanioan,  this  particle  is  en, — as,  /la  'c  i/ati.  en,  dost  thou  know  ?  'o  ni  ea  te  linjntit, 
wlio  is  the  man  ? 

The  New  Zealand  dialect  bas  commonly  in/iei  or  ravei ;  the  Uarotongan,  aiiin  ;  the 
Mangua-van,  ai  (!);  the  Tahitian  and  Hawaiian,  unci;  and  the  Nukuhivan,  ienei. 


280 


P  H  1  L  O  L  O  (i  Y. 


p  R  K  r  ()  H I T I  u  N  a 


I)  r>7.  Most  of  the  prepositions  have  been  nlrcndy  given  in  the 
remarks  on  the  declension  of  nouns.  The  following  list  contains 
nearly  all  which  are  found  in  the  several  dialects. 

SiiniiHin  :  a,  of;  r,  liy  ;  V/,  in,  nt ;  t,  in,  liy  ;  '/,  lo,  into;  ma,  with,  for,  on  acrount  of; 
mill,  iVoiil  (|iliicr) ;   //<//,  tVcini ;  ii,  of. 

Ton^nn  :  n,  iif ;  iiki,  with  (inst.),  by  moans  of;  r,  hy ;  i,  in,  at,  hy  ;  ki,  lo,  into ;  mit, 
for ;  mri,  from  ;  mo,  wiili ;  o,  of. 

Now  Xoiiliiiul :  II,  r,  ki,  i,  o,  us  in  Tongnn  ;  kri,  at,  with,  in  ;  tini,  mo,  for ;  »<>ii,  I'rom ; 
we,  with  ;  mi,  no,  of,  from,  by. 

Ill  linrotongan  :  ii,  r,  ki,  i,  o,  m  above ;  ri,  at,  in ;  tri,  in  ;  kio,  with,  c/ie:  ;  mii,  with ; 
ytui,  from  ;  mi,  no,  of,  for. 

In  Manfinrrvnn,  bcsiilos  the  first  livo  of  the  Karotongan,  rki,  with,  by  means  of;  in, 
with,  rlir:-  ;  mil,  for,  froiii ;  »ii\  with  ;  mo,  of,  liir,  from  ;   nil,  no,  of,  from. 

In  'riihilinn  the  sanK"  ns  in  llnroton^itn,  oxcopt  '*  tor  ki,  mai  for  met,  ond  'lo  for  kio. 

In  flawniian,  a,  e,  i,  'i,  »,  as  in  Sninonn  ;  'io,  to,  with ;  mti,  ut,  in, — by,  by  means  of; 
»i((i,  from  ;  mr,  with  ;  im,  no,  of,  for. 

In  NukuhiviiM,  (/,  r,  ki  (or  V),  i,  ",  as  in  the  (iireguing ;  'io,  to,  with  ;  mn,  at,  in ;  niei, 
from  ;  mr,  with  ;  nn,  mi,  of,  for. 


i   i 


CO.N  J  r  X»   T  I  O.N  s. 

4  68.  The  conditional  conjunctions  if,  that,  le.st,  &c.,  have  already 
been  mentioned  in  treating  of  the  verb.  As  for  the  rest,  the  Poly- 
nesian makes  but  sparing  use  of  them.  It  seems,  however,  to  have 
had  originally  two  conjunctions  signifyiiiff  "«'A — the  one  uniting 
nouns  and  the  other  verbs  ;  the  former  was  probably  ma,  and  related 
to  the  preposition  iril/i ;  the  latter  was  a  vowel. 

In  .*<iunonii,  n  is  nm/  iiiid  or,  but  only  with  vitIjs  ;  mn,  iril/i,  means  also  ('/i(/,.an(l  is 
iisod  with  nouns,  adjoolivos,  nnd  nuincrals. 

Ill  'ronyiin,  o  is  used  as  in  Samoaii ;  mo  is  the  other  connective,  e.xcept  with  the 
numerals,  with  whii'h  mu  is  used.  Ufa,  which  |iro|ierly  means  also,  is  oltcn  used  to  con- 
nect sentences  and  claii.ses  of  a  sentence. 

Ill  .New  Zealand,  ((  is  used  for  coiiiioctinf;  verbs  and  clauses  of  u  sentence,  »««  with 
niiiiurals,  and  /«r  (h/V/i)  with  nouns.  The  latter,  liowever,  is  mrely  used  ;  to  expri^ss 
"  the  fathi'r  and  the  mother,"  they  say,  "  the  lather  the  mother  ;"  "  the  house  of  I'cter 
and  John,"  is  "  the  house  of  I'cter  of  .lohii." 

In  Rarotonpin,  e  is  the  {jenomi  connective  with  l)0th  nouns  and  verbs  ;  tna,  honevcr, 
is  used  with  the  numerals,  and  sometiiiios  with  nouns, — as,/e  viinc  ma  U  Uinutriki,  the 
woniiin  and  [or  with]  the  children. 

In  .Mangarevan,  me  signifies  both  iciUi  and  iiiidi  e  seems  to  be  used  as  the  general 
connective. 


!1 


P  O  I.  Y  N  K  H  I  A  N   O  R  A  M  M  A  R. 


381 


In  Tnhitiiin,  r  ia  lh<'  (P'IictiiI  wiinl  ti>r  nnil ;  mn  In  only  iimciI  with  llii-  niinirrnlii. 
In   llaMiiiiiin,  n  I'dnni-i'ln  ktIw,  </  nir  iiiiiinH,  ///"   niiiiirriiU,  ninl  iHTiisicumlly  pnipiT 
nnnii'a.     Mr  |ir<i|ii'rly  "innilii's  inl/i. 

In  Nukiiliivnn,  >-  t'oniiccU  vitIm,  uml  mr  (wild)  nuiins  t  »/>/  in  iihi'iI  with  tlir  Miiincrnis, 


I  N  T  K  l{  J  KCT  I  (t  N  a. 

I)  fi9.  The  interjections  are  not  very  nuniprouH.  Tlio  only  one 
which  merits  notice  is  aiir,  wliich  seems  to  he  pociihikr  to  the  Poly- 
nesian, and  is  lound  in  nil  the  diiilucts.  It  is  used  to  express  ^riet'  in 
all  its  shades,  from  a  slight  CeeliiiR  of  re^ret  or  sympathy,  to  the 
wildest  and  most  clamorous  lainenlulion.  It  is  constantly  heard  in 
their  wailing  for  the  dead  ;  and  as  each  vowel  can  be  drawn  out  to  a 
great  length,  with  a  variety  of  tones  and  moilulations,  it  has  often  a 
singularly  dismal  and  even  painful  elfect  upon  the  listeners  The 
word  is  also  used  l)oth  as  a  noun,  nicaning  nonoH;  rigrit,  si/nipathij, 
ami  as  a  verb,  siguitying  to  yiienfor,  to  luimiit. 


S  \  S  T  A  X. 


',  70.  Most  of  the  rules  of  construction  have  been  anticipated  in 
the  jircceding  sections.  From  the  lack  of  inllcctions  in  these  dialects, 
these  rules  are  necessarily  few  and  sim|)le.  The  following  are  the 
most  important  which  ren»ain  to  be  noticeil. 

V  71  Almo.st  all  the  words  in  these  idioms,  which  are  the  names 
of  things,  (|ualities,  or  actions,  may  be  used  at  pleasure,  either  as 
nouns,  adjectives,  verbs,  or  adverbs,  their  acceptation  being  deter- 
mined by  the  context  and  the  accom|)auyiug  particles. 

In  Snniimn,  »<'  Imvc,  (or  exnnipl'.',  f'li/iif'ii/ii,  n  fonthcr, — iin  fiiliifiiltt  lin  iiiiihk,  llinl 
liirrt  is  IriilhiTi'd  :  mimii,  nm*m\\U<,—i<"  iiiiniii  /<l(i/e  /ici.  Ill i.'i  lionsc  is  inlcsloil  Willi 
iniisiiiiitiK  s  (lit.  is  inusiniilo<Hl) ;  so  /«/,  ani, — iiu  linn,  is  iinlnl;  jxi,  iiii;lil, — ///(  jmnni,  it 
iji  niiihliil, — liir  iiii:hl  is  ciime.  Alii  viivr,  go  (|iiii-kly  ;  mi  vnir  mni  Ir  tniin,  let  war 
h.xslon  liiilnT.  lliiliir,  lo  work;  liiijala  iiii/iic,  n  laboriny  innii.  'I\iiiiit(t  injiiS(il<i,n 
sinliil  Minn  :  liiloii  c  iiniisii/<i,  llicy  w  hn  sin  ;  ii  oiiloii  iiijiisiila,  your  sins. 

In  Toiiiian,  i  finli,  tvrniiiu  ;  lieu  ilinfi  ni,  and  il  was  cvt'iiiiij;.  jMniiiiin,  far  oil';  liiiiiin 
iii'iiiiiii),  dislaiil  •ounlry  ;  l,r  iiiiiiiinii  in,  that  il  may  bi"  liir.  Jjifii  kilir,  anotlior  ri'liyion  ; 
til  until  Int'i,  a  ndijiinns  man:  tin  Intii,  I  will  pray. 

In  -New  X(-alaiul,  rnknn,  a  Irco, — kn  inkniitin,  lit.  it  is  tn-i'd,  i.  c,  it  lias  l)eoonii'  a 
irco.      Tnkiriia,  douMi', — tnktriialiii,  doiildnl. 

In  Taliiiian,  ninhnnn,  day, — "((  niiiliiiniiliin,  il  is  daycd,  i.  p.  day  lias  appean'd. 

In  llw  Hawaiian,  an  <'xain|"li'  givfii   liy   Mr.  Andrews  shows  in  n   strong  light  this 

71 


9SS 


I'll 


,  <)  !.(>«•  V. 


IH'i'iiliiirily  <>r  III)'  I'lilyiii'iainii  Ihii^jik-h  :  il'  n  ix'rxiii  i'<  n'Inliiiu  tliiil  lir  liiicl  cm  mhih'  iiorn- 
mull,  lUiiwtil  liiiifH'll  111  liiiii'  ildiM'  nil  ncl,  he  vtiiulil  miy  "oiinii  ti/ii  hi  Inn  mi,"  "  I  j.i'ij 
III  him,"  liir  "  I  tiilil  liiiii  tluil  il  wiix  I  ;"  llx'  |iri>li<iiiii  oiruii  in  iim'iI  dh  a  vrrli,  wliirli  in 
ili'iiolnl  liy  tli<-  ilinrllvi'  iinil  jiirnlivi'  imnirlm  iilii  In,  \vtt'  IrniiNlnli'il  "  lo  liiiii ;" /ii« 
iiHiiii't  |iri>|»Tly  '//*",  liiil  i«  ciniiliiynl  iiOi'ii  im  ii  mrn'  wnrd  ol'  iilliriniilion,  liki!  imlitil, 
VI I  ill/.  AiiiillH'r  iXMiiiiili'  \*  "iiiiiii  III  mill  /miHi/i  ii  n  niilnii  '"  '•  »||>i  liiix  ii  NlrawJiiil 
anioii^  you  '"  ulnri'  im/i^ili-ir,  <>!rii»  liiil,  i"  iimiI  im  ii  mirl  ol'  i'iiiii|hiiiiii|  \rrljiil  iiiljLt:- 
tnc, — who  in  iht'  tliiiu'-hiiliitt  ihtmhi  aiiioii^  you  t 

V  7'-!.  WluMi  tlii<  iiiuniimtive  to  \\  vcrli  in  a  pronoiiii,  it  rr*M|U(Mitly 
pri'i't'ili's  tilt*  vi-rli;  wlicii  it  is  u  iimiii,  il  more  foiiiiiiDiily  CoIIowh.  In 
the  luttor  case  tlie  uhiiuI  tmlor  of  tlio  wonU  is — lirNt,  \\w  w\i,\\  of  tlie 
tciiMc,  or  uHirinativf  purtu-jo  (or,  in  ils  plucc,  soini'  coiijunctii/ii,  or 
coniuTtiiiti  ailvorl),  or  inti-rro^jativo) ; — secondly,  tlio  vorb; — tlunlly, 
thi-  qualilviiiK  ailverb; — fourthly,  tliu  verlml  tliroctive; — fifthly,  the 
locative  parlifii' ; — sixthly,  th»>  rclalivo  p.irliflo;  —  w^vonthly,  the 
iioiniiiativt',  with  or  wilhmit  tlif  artu-li;  holore  it.  It  hIiouIiI  be 
olwerved,  however,  that  the  relative  and  lociitivo  pnrticleH  nro  rarely 
used  loi»etlu'r. 

71  //(//;"  riMi  iiiiii  lilt  II  iitiiii,  Maw.,  (ioil  is  very  'iii(iry  ;  mi  Jul  ntii  in  /limi  Inijutti, 
•Snni.,  'I  (i-rt.iiii  inaii  Haid  lh<T<'ii|ioii, 

'/  T-i.  By  a  |ieculi.ir  construction,  these  laiifjua^es  freipiently  use 
an  obiiipie  case  in  the  |)lace  of  the  nominative. 

^uiiuxui :  /:•' '(  liiloii  r  fast  iili  tnir  />/,  iiiiil  tlicy  >liall  kill  hiiii  (tlii'irM  il  Nliall  Im'  Io  kill 
him).  A' 1  llrrnlii  mi  ia  limfi  Jiniiir,  IIitinI  hiitl  wi'/cij  .Idlm  (llcriHrx  it  wn<  to  wize 
.lohii).  /v  iiioiii  II  Ion  II  fill  iilii  lilt  nil  iiili'  iiiiliiii,  virily  I  say  niiln  you, — hero  all  llml 
lolliiHa  Inn  i"  I'liiisiiU'it'd  as  n  iiiiiiii  with  ulili'li  Ion  a^'n  rs,  ami  iIk'  s<'iilriii'<'  iiii^iht  Ik 
n'liilrpil  "  truf  is  my  saying'  I"  .M'ii  ;"  lli''  ri|«'lilicii'  cpl'iiic  nn,  fur  I,  in  llic  latlir  [part  ol' 
lilt'  iHnilciir't'  is  iiirri'ly  li>i'  ('in|iliaKis,  anil  iiiijjhl  lie  ilis|i<Misi'il  with, 

Tonjjan  ;  ko  ckn  Inln  moont  ntn  kUili  kiiiiiinlolii,  verily  I  say  unto  you  (my  Inic 
s|¥Mkiiiir  unto  you  is,  \r,)  In  this  lan^uajic,  however,  the  ronslruction  iloes  not  pre- 
vail 111  the  same  cxtenl  as  in  the  others. 

New  Zealanil ;  iiinnn  iiim  nnnlirni  r  mm,  he  shall  tell  his  anj^els  (of  him  it  shall  be 
to  tell  Ills  aiifjels).  Mnn  r  kornpiko,  lliou  shall  wors|ii|i  (lit.  thine  to  worsliip).  Mnmi 
iiltiin  I  iiiikiiorii,  he  healed  iheiii.  Ilinhii  In  koiilon  r  In  miii)irr,  why  stand  y  idle  f 
(when'liire  is  your  standing  idle  '.)  A  i  n,  rnlon  c  luifte  ntn  nun,  and  when  they  went 
(and  at  their  goiii);). 

Knpilon;.'an :  int  rntnii  r  Uijui  iiiiii  kui  limiiniielii,  and  they  shall  call  him  limanucl 
(theirs  It  shall  he  to  call,  iVe.)  A'"  Iniin  e  Uijm  nin  ko  Jisn,  thou  shall  call  him 
lesus  (iliine  to  nail  him  Jesus).  /:,'  mum  i  Inkii  mm  itikn,  and  lliou  gavcst  mo  (thine  it 
wa.s  to  give  me). 

Tahitinn  :  nn  Ilrrmlii  hut  i  injui'  in  .loniir,  for  Herod  hod  bound  John;  niimi  r  Innnmu 
I  Inn  net  liui/n,  he  shall  t'e  'd  my  pe<i|ile. 

Hawaiian  :  n«  te  afiiu  „  uliJui  imu  i  to  U  ao,  God  so  loved  the  world  \(totcuo  is  here 


POL  YNKHI  AN    «1H  A  M  M  A  H 


'ib'd 


nil  rlli|iliciil  liiriii  iiri'X|in'Mi>i<>ii  Icir  tr  milt  u  Ir  «», nr  ti>  If  no  mm,  tin'  iliiii^i  iil'ih)!  worltl 

|v,  ^  71  I ;  lliJH  iiiiilianioii  iiCii  wiiril  wlii<'li  will  In'  iiiiiliTntiHKl  IVdiii  III iittriii'linii  i>  mit 

uiiciiiniiiiiii  ill  iIh'm'  Iiiii^iiiiuix).  Ax  an  iiiniaiiii' nl' -iinkiii^  n'Miiililiiiini  in  liiniix  ln'twti'ii 
Iwii  wiili'ly  W'lHiriiti'il  iliiili'i'N,  wc  tinil  lliiil  in  Siinimiii,  ■■  ttliiil  I  Irll  you,"  la  IriiiiHlnliil 
«(('»  mill  I  Im  iilii  in'r  niihiii  (lil.  my  |||IIIK>I  In  lill  In  yon),  iinil  in  I  liiwiiiiiin,  "  mIiiiI  I 
hnvi'  I'liininiiiiiliiil  yoii, '  i*  '"'"  ""«  i  kniiuliii  nln  in  itiilmi  (my  lliiiiKH  l<i  Imvi'  I'oiii- 
niiiiiili'il  yiiii). 

Nukiiliiviili :  mi  I''  iiiKin  <  nliii  i  Ir  ijm,  tlic  |iii;  pkiIh  in  \\w  rnrlh  ;  r  kni  Uiiiii,  I  I'lit. 

\  74.  In  nioMt  nt  the  diiiloctH  tliniltiiil  niitl  pliinil  pronniiiix  iicrturm 
the  nffirc  of  coiijiinc'tioiis  in  coiiiiectiiif;  proper  nuin(!8  uiid  wiirilx  nji;- 
llityin^  piTwiiiN. 

In  Niiw  /i-iiluiiil,  Piurha  rnini  Kit  Ihiiii,  I'lmns  niul  Zaro  (lit.  Pliarc*  tlwy  Iwo  Zora). 
Itiirii  fiiliiii  kii  iiiiii  Ifiiiii,  .luiliili  iinil  liit  liri'llin'ii. 

In  KnrolDn^iiii,  Ahar  niiin  kn  I'Jni,  Mum's  anil  Kliaii. 

In  Mnii);an'Viiii,  I'rhrn  iniiu  kn  I'mi/n,  I'rliT  ami  I'aiil. 

Ill  lliiwiiiiaii,  Ail'imii  liiiia  n  I'.vn,  Aclain  ami  lln'. 

ir  yiMi  uliMTVP  to  a  native,  "  I  am  ({Miii({  to  tin-  town,"  inNlonil  of  naying,  "  I  will  ^c 
Willi  yi>n,"  ho  inertly  wiys  "tuiin,"  "  wi;  Iwo,"  i.  e.  we  will  jjo  togetlHT. 

Til  K    Kd  It  M  .\T  KIN    <•  V    Willi  lis. 


i)  75.  Words  lire  vi^ry  (roquriitly  formed  l»y  tlic  du|iliciitioii  ol 
8in^;U'  words.  No  mMicral  rule,  however,  can  lie  ^iveii  on  tliis  ]ioint 
There  arc  iiiaiiy  wonls  whieli  are  never  douliled,— otiiers  which  are 
never  found  except  in  this  form.  Sometimes  a  noun  by  hein^  doubled 
bceomes  an  adjective;  but  frequently  tlie  duplication,  whether  of 
nouns,  verbs,  or  adjectives,  j^ives  oidy  au  iiiteiisitive  or  fremientalive 
force  [v.  H  27.  1(1].  iSonietimes  the  doubled  word  has  an  en'irely 
diircretit  meaning  from  the  single. 

Kxampleii  of  lhc«e  eases  an-, — /n/n,  Tniinn,  oil, — lnliJnln,  oily  ;  jxtkn,  Rar.,  »lolH, — 
pokii/xikii,  .ftony,  I'ilnjiln,  Sam.,  strong  {Jil", — no  meaning).  Lugo,  Sum.,  a  lly, — 
liiffiiltitji),  to  lean  ii|)on,     i/»rf«,  Toiig,,  wiw,  litiliibiilii,  romiil. 

i)  76.  A  sort  of  adjective  with  a  pa.ssive  sense  is  formed  from  many 
verbs  by  prefixing  ma. 

Samoan:  sue,  tn  tear, — miimr,  torn;  sun,  to  H|)ill, — niiisiia,  spilt;  lii/n,  to  lixise, 
nuitiil'i,  loosed,  iriM'd. 

Toii(;an  :  _/"/(!,  to  strip,  |Hfl, — miiji/l,i,  strip|X'd  oil' (as  hark) ;  ye/i,  to  break,  innt'ctt, 
lirokeii. 

New  Zealand:  riiji,  to  |H)ur  ont,  spill, — iiinrhji,  spilt;  rrre,  to  go,  depart,  nuirerr. 
<;o:,e. 

liarotoiigan :  veli;  to  lfHis<',  to  o|)en, — iiiiivitr,  o|Hi|ied  ;   tjnm,  to  hide,  maijnro,  hidden. 

Taliitiuii:  lu'ii,  to  o|)cii, — mulaii,  ofieiied  ;  tarn,  to  loose,  iiuitarii,  luosetl. 


291 


I'H  I  LO  I,  OCi  V. 


niiwniiiin  ;  h>l<i,\o  uprrml, — miiluJti ,  »\\tcski\  out,  oxtondod  ;  iiini,  to  spill, — nMiiini, 
nil  ovrrtlowliii;. 

In  Sanionii  this  pnrtlcio  is  usod  very  frcipirnlly,  in  llnwniinn  rnrrly.  In  Knmtoiignn 
It  IS  ioiiiolimcs  clmniji'd  to  ija,  iind  in  llnwiiiiun  to  /ki, — iis,  ar,  Knr.,  line,  lliiw..  In  tear, — 
tiiiiir,  Ihir. ,  iiiiliiii;  Haw.,  torn.  This  prclix  ma  serves  to  (iinn  soino  nouns  (or  rather 
ndjeetives  whieli  are  used  as  nouns,) — as  siini,  Sam.,  white, — itKisiiiii,  the  moon  (i.e.  the 
while  ohjeet) ;  /iiiiiii,  a  torch,  to  }{ive  lijihl  as  a  torch, — innlaiiui,  Sam.,  light,  hrighlnoss, — 
and  in  Hawaiian,  the  miMtn. 

^  77.  Tliorc  are,  in  tlio  (lid'orent  dialects,  various  affixes  which 
are  joined  to  v\Frds,  .sometimes  to  alter  their  meanings,  or  as  intcisi- 
tive  particles,  but  often  with  no  perceptible  Ibrce. 

Sanioan:  Inn, — a:',  ill i/<i,  lo  twist, — ^/»«(//«,  to  jostle  ;  lai,  to  jiuide,  direrl, — taiitdi, 
to  pilot  or  steer  ;  tn/n,  to  tell, — Iniitdln,  to  s|X'ak  to;  rrii  and  liiwili,  \m\\\  niianiuf^  to 
tempt.  Tdiiliii, — as  jHi  and  /iiiiliiij,(i,  Initli  nieaniiijj  to  strike — the  latter,  |)crliaps,  to 
strike  frecpieiitly ;  ttiiii,  lo  weep,  and  Iniijiiiliijfi,  to  lament  (said  ol' several) ;  </*/,  iia'i, Jii'i 
are  cK-ensionally  postl'ixed  to  verbs, — ns  lii/o,  to  throw, — hifiHii,  to  throw  away  ;  no  and 
ao(i''i  to  tench  ;  no  and  nn/ii'i,  to  colled. 

Tongan :  /nii. — as,  n/o  and  tniinio,  to  paddle.  Aki,  /nki,  iinki,  ixiki,  tnki,  used  ns 
sufli.ves,  apparently  conveying  the  idea  that  the  act  denoted  hy  the  verb  passes  liom  the 
agent  to  a  distance,  or  over  a  consiileraliU-  extent,  or  lo  a  number  of  ix'ople, — as,  //,  to 
throw,— //(M/,  to  throw  aw,"j  ;  tiiln.  to  divide, — tdfnki,  to  shari'  out,  distribute;  nko,  to 
teach, — nkdiinki,  to  preach  ;  ln/oiii  mid  tolomiki,  lo  throw  stones,  &c. 

New  Jienland :  ]>ii, — as,  iirrn,  hot, — ■jmurrn,  Itikewarm ;  one  nnd  oin-jiii,  sand  ( jiii 
as  n  separate  word  means  earnestly,  strongly,  intently) ;  piilnlii,  ol'one  .source  or  origin ; 
piitiiki,  till'  trunk  ol'a  tree;  pii-tnilni,  a  buridli'  of  the  grass  called  Initiii.  [This  pii  may 
1)0  connected  with  thi'  Tongan  yi',  Viti,  rii  ;  v.  ^  '.'(i.|  Kii, — as,  nkiri  and  kokiri,  to 
throw  ;  jiihii  and  kii/iiko,  curved. 

Hariilongan  :  Inn, — as,  ninin,  strong,— /id' hwao,  lo  strive;  turn,  lo  help, — tnntnrny 
to  minister  to.  Pn, — as,  rnlo  and  nitnjin,  within,  inside;  pii.ninniin,  lukewarm,  from 
mnniin,  warm. 

Ilawii"",:: :  nn,  (perhaps  from  the  collective  particle  kmi  or  \iii  ;  v.  ^  14)  signilii's,  in 
soaie  coiMpoiinds,  a  t'tilU'ction, — as,  nnlnitnin,  a  [MMiple,  nation  (from  Iniintn,  man)  • 
niiinin,  a  cluster  of  caiux's  ;  nnninliin,  a  class  of  ancient  gods;  but  it  freipieiitly  has  no 
delinile  meaning, — as.  niint  and  nnniint,  lo  carry  ; — iiii/ii  and  nninilii,  to  repent.  O,  ns 
iiiilo  anil  Diiiilit,  lo  twist;  jiili,  lo  slick,  Ix'  I'lose, — iipiti,  to  I'ontracI  as  in  the  cramp. 
V'l. — as,  iiiniini,  giKvd, — jHiiiiniIni,  t'orlimale,  happy  ;  nni,  bad, — jk)I)iii,  alilicted  ;  pililia, 
crowded  I'lose,  narrow, — jxipililin,  distressing,  dillicull. 

y  78.  In  .some  of  tiie  dialects  the  words  emtij  and  lUflkult  are 
joined  in  a  peculiar  manner  to  ttie  verb,  so  as  lo  form  in  pronuncia- 
tion but  one  word. 

In  Sanioan,  these  words  are  «.''',<''"*>'.  ""d  w^/,  ilillicull :  they  are  suflixed  lo  the 
verb  and  pronounced  ivilli  it, — as  A//. wVi'i,  easy  to  Ao,  Jni-\inUi,\\i\n\  to  do;  sno-ijiilir, 
easy  to  eiiier.  sno-ijnlA,  dillicull  lo  enter. 

In  Tongan,  ii<ifun.  easy,  and  ]inUi,  hard, — as,  thi-po/un,  ensy  to  do ;  fdi-iintii,  hard 
to  do. 


I'  ()  I,  V  N  K  S  I  A  N   O  R  A  M  M  A  R. 


285 


In  Unrolonjiiin,  iriii'  mul  nnfc, — n»,  intr-i/nir,  ciisy  to  do, — roir-iidld,  linrd  to  ilo; 
nkiiu-ijoif,  easy  lo  cnlrr, — nhnCi-ii'ihi,  Imrd  to  ciilrr. 

hi  Miiii){iin'viin,  tin?  vocnlmlary  nivcs  /nin/n,  rcpriiiiiindcd,  oorrcctod, — prnlmMy  the 
pasNivo  ol"  jkiri/,  to  onrrret, — and  itiiniijiilii,  incorri^ililc, — I.  c.  dilUcult  to  corrpt'l. 

Ill  tho  other  dialects,  this  toiiii  stvins  jiot  to  exist.  In  'raliitian,  dillinilt  is  laidlii, — 
the  latter  part  of  whieli  may  |M>»sibly  lie  eoiineoted  with  i))itii. 

i  70.  Ill  compmind  words  tlio  Polyiiositin  diU'ers  fioni  tlio  En<»lish 
in  pliiciiiff  tl»o  ifDveriicil  or  iiiiulifyiiio;  svurd  last:  iiistojid  of  sea-coast, 
it  has  coast-sea ;  instoad  of  kiiid-licarted,  beart-kitid  ;  instead  of  swift- 
sailinij;,  sail-swift,  \c. 

Snmoaii :  lait-n/ii,  hair  (lit.  loliiij^e  ol"  the  head);  sili-iilii,  scissors  (hair-ciitters,  cr 
rather,  head-cutters).  Tiia-sivi,  the  back-lxnie,  iiieans,  therefore,  not  as  in  l'"n);lish,  the 
IxMie  of  the  Imck,  hut  the  "  hack  of  the  Ixmes" — i.  e.  ot'  the  skeleton. 

Tonjia') :  Miimivii-lii,  lear  (iillle-hnalh) ;  /<'/c-/»»((X7/,  pij,'-sty ;  tiifiiint-tii-vmka,  a 
mason  (lit.  artisan  eiitlinj;  sloiie, — or  a  stone-cutter). 

New  Zealand:  ni<i/<i-iiiiii,  the  horizon  (cdjje  of  the  heavens);  tii-kaii,  naked  (lit. 
standing  merely,  or  without  addition). 

|{arotonj;aM  :  niitii-jui,  dinir  (lit.  month  ol"the  wall);  iinnjn-iini,  many  (f;reat  bit). 

.Maiigarevan :  nuilc-kiii,  hunj;er  (wanting;  foot!) ;  rimii-niit,  united  lalKir  of  many 
|)Oople  in  a  work  (lit.  two  hnndn'd  hands). 

Tahitiaii :  tdhii-lai,  .sea-coast;  ]tiiji{ii-/in<in,  scrilies  (writers  of  words). 

Hawaiian:  /((////-(//««,  landholder  (lit.  lord  ol"  land — landlonl);  lutn-muiUii,  kind  (lit. 
good-heart,  or  good  ilisposiiion  ;  IhId  is  not  I'ouiul  separately  with  this  sense  in  tho  Ha- 
waiian, hut  it  exists  in  the  Samoan) ;  linii-iilni,  to  lament,  from  liiiii,  to  cry,  and  iihii, 
grief;  iii-tnnntn,  man-eater. 

Nukuhivan :  vai-hifi;  river  (running  water) ;  jkijiiiii-iiinn,  hen-coop  (enclosure  of 
fowls). 

Most  of  the  proper  names  of  the  isl.uidcrs  are  compound  words,  fre(|uciitly  with  whim- 
sical sigii|t"ieations, — as,  7''(-H;</-/i-/<n»  (sea-and-sky)  n  chief  at  the  Navigator  islands; 
PoitKiii  (niglit  of  c<iughing)  formerly  king  of  Tahiti;  Tdii-i-lr-iin.iiti  (sus|H'nded  in  the 
blue  heavens),  name  of  the  present  king  of  the  Sandwich  islands.  The  grandfather  of 
this  king  had  the  name  of  Tii-liiin-tiijiii-d-piii-iii.liini-niii,  which  sei'ins  to  mean,  "  lh>: 
sky  increasing,  and  striking  the  great  heaven." 


I,  A  N  (J  r  A  a  V.    tl  F    (■  K  R  K  M  O  N  V. 

\  80.  The  Samoaiis  are  a  remarkably  ceremonious  people,  and  very 
attentive  to  the  foritis  of  politeness.  This  peculiarity  appears  in  their 
languajre,  which  abounds  in  terms  of  salutation  and  compliment. 
Besides  alofa,  or  lalvfa,  (love,)  which  is  common  to  most  of  the  Poly- 
nesian islands,  they  have  particuhir  expressions  according  to  the  time 

of  day  : 

I'd  iisii  nidi, — is  ihc  morning  sululation; 
Ud  Idind  nidi, — at  noon; 
Ua  a/d/d  iiidi, — in  the  evening. 
7V> 


PHILOLOGY. 


Uti  mtii !  is  the  address  to  n  person  entering  a  house;  and  when  ho  tukcs  leave,  they  say 
"c  alii  «•/"  do  you  go?  The  words  expressing  thankfulness,  ^fM/f/ff*  and  fiuimanu, 
arc  used  on  receiving  ony  pa-sent,  and  usually  accompanied  by  the  motion  of  raising  the 
article  to  the  head.  A  native  will  not  do  any  act,  or  s|>cak  any  word  which  might  be 
considered  rude  or  unbecoming,  without  first  saying,  vacanc  !  which  may  be  rendered 
"  excuse  me !"  or  "  by  your  leave !" 

But  it  is  in  addressing  their  chiefs  that  the  Samoans  arc  particularly  careful  to  mani- 
(l^st  their  res|)ect  by  their  language.  There  are  many  terms  in  the  conunon  idiom,  which 
it  is  considered  improper  to  employ  in  s|icaking  to  or  of  u  |)erson  of  rank,  and  their  place 
is  supplied  by  other  words  of  the  same  signification,  which  arc  never  used  but  on  such 
occasions.  Sometimes  there  are  distinct  words  for  the  diflcrent  grades  of  cliicfs,  and 
those  who  are  careful  to  speak  the  language  correctly  will  never  address  a  high  chief  with 
the  terms  appropriated  to  those  of  lower  rank.  Thus  the  salutation  to  a  common  man, 
on  entering  a  house,  is,  as  above  stated,  ua  mai,  you  have  come  j  to  a  tida-fak,  or  house- 
holder, it  is  ua  alula  mai  ; 


to  a  low  chief, 
to  a  high  chief, 
to  the  sovereign. 


iia  nialiu  mai  ; 
ua  susu  mai  ; 
ua  afio  mai. 


Afio,  meaning  to  come  or  go  (like  «/»)  is  u.sed  also  in  s|)eaking  of  a  deity  !  uo  maliu, 
gone,  is  used  (iir  all  ranks  to  signify  tlrml.  In  the  speaking  of  the  canoe  of  nn  inferior 
chief,  thi-y  would  say — ua  silafia  ra  le  van  1  is  the  canoe  in  sight? — of  a  high  chief,  it 
would  lie,  .la  Utuhi^ia  ea  Ic  vaa  f  'J}>/d  and  to'it  both  mean  to  sleep,  the  latter  of  a  high 
chief,  the  former  for  one  of  low  rank  ; — they  arc  also  used  for  a  parting  sclutation  in  the 
evening, — lofd  ina  soi/ua,  sleep,  that  you  may  live  I  Tausami  signifies  to  eat,  applied 
to  a  landholder, — tuumqfa  to  an  inl'erior  chief,  and  tautc  to  a  superior.  It  is  probable 
that  the  ilitlercnt  words  for  sickness  and  dreaming  in  the  following  list,  also  appertain  to 
dilVerent  ranks. 


arm 

to  come,  go 

son 

daughter 

belly 

head 

to  bathe 

wife 

dream 

fii(;e,  eye 

sick 

hair 

to  dream ;  vision 

in  good  health 

llOUSC 

to  come,  to  go ;  dead 


CEKEMOSIAU 

COMMON. 

Alio 

lima 

Afio;  iilala 

alii 

Ah 

tama 

Alo/iifine 

ajiifinc 

Alo 

maiidva 

Ao;  litiji 

vlii 

luuimiilu 

'au'aii 

Fiilcliia 

avd 

Fnlepo 

mili 

Fn/ntja 

Vllltll 

Fiiatiifa;  yasnjase 

tiiii'i 

Laii-ao;  UiH-la^i 

liiu-iiht 

LVii 

mili 

MiUiifitiifi 

miiliio 

Mim/a 

fide 

Miiliii 

ulii ;  oli 

POLYNESIAN   GRAMMAR. 


287 


CEREMONIAL. 

COMMON. 

Mdleifita 

(da 

I'idi/piiliisi 

maH 

U(i  jmduyia 

mat 

ua  (iMa  mni 

Sisita ;  passive, 

silcijid 

mutamaUi,  ilua 

Ua  mitlia  tnai 

ita  1ISH  vuii 

Soga 

tauliia 

Soisoi 

ata 

Siisil 

stiu,  idit 

SoifiKi 

ola 

Siiafa 

ijfoti 

Tdiiid 

Jitse  oil 

7}t'tiMo 

sasu'c 

'Jhisd 

ita 

Ib'u;  tofd 

moe 

Taiisftmi 

'ai 

Ttiumafa 

« 

Tiiiite 

(( 

TiiuUi,  pass. 

taultiyia 

viataviata,  ilai 

Tulei 

Uiiatfti'i 

to  awake 

sick 

evening  salutation 

to  see 

morning  salutation 

servant 

to  laugh 

to  come 

to  live 

name 

to  kill 

to  disperse 

anger 

to  sleep 

to  cat 


to  see 
to  speak 


The  dialect  of  Tonga  has  also  several  words  of  ceremony,  but  not  so  many  as  the 
Samoan.  Some  of  these  have  synonyma,  whicli  arc  especially  used  in  addressing  the 
"  divine  chief"  Tiiitoiiga.  The  following  list  was  obtained  from  two  high  chiefs  of 
Tonga,  Tidiou  TaiiUd  and  Tuboii  LiUU;e,  whom  we  met  at  the  lAjejce  islands.  It  will 
be  seen  that  several  of  them  are  the  same  as  the  corresponding  terms  in  Samoan. 


CEREMONIAL. 

TUITOSOA. 

COMMON. 

alio 

taka 

ua 

to  awake 

alo 

foha 

son 

Joftnja 

Itnji 

ma/a 

face 

hiKifa 

hiijoa 

name 

Ho 

taitmafa 

kai 

to  cat 

mdinuta 

tiika 

tio 

to  see 

mea 

hacic 

halt,  all! 

to  come,  go 

moiii 

Iclci 

well,  not  sick 

ofai 

h(da 

tiuite 

dead 

tojitatji 

biUiihi 

mahaki 

sick 

toka 

lojd 

moe 

to  sleep 

III  the  other  dialects  of  Polynesia  there  is  nothing  of  this  description.  The  Tahitiaii 
has,  indeed,  some  expressions  which  arc  used  with  a  peculiar,  metaphorical  meaning, 
when  applied  to  the  sovereign.  "  His  houses  were  called  the  aoriii,  the  clouds  of  licaven ; 
aniia  tiia,  the  rainbow,  was  the  name  of  the  canoe  in  which  ho  voyaged ;  his  voice  was 
'  thunder  ;'  the  glare  of  torches  in  his  dwelling  was  denominated  ligliliiing,  &c.  When 
he  passed  from  one  district  to  another  on  the  shoulders  of  his  bearers,  they  always  used 


■  i 


289 


PHILOLOGY. 


the  word  miilixtii,  siunifvinji;  to  fly."*  This  lif^'urnlivc  stylo  of  sjionking  is  not  the  same 
with  the  ocrenmninl  tlialcct  of  Snmon  and  Tonga,  though  both  may  Imve  originnted  in 
the  same  Ceding. 

It  is,  however,  a  point  of  interest  to  inquire  whether  there  are  any  traces  in  the  dialects 
of  1-^stern  Polynesia,  fmni  which  we  may  infer  that  the  lanj^uage  of  dcleren<'e  was  in 
use  pri'vious  to  the  departure  of  the  Tahilian  and  other  colonists.  A  careful  examination 
shows  till!  existence  of  many  indications  of  this  sort.  The  word  fri/'()ij<i,  in  Samoan, 
signilics  the  face  of  a  chief;  in  Tahitiau,  it  would  liecome  liolirxi,  and  this  is  the  word  by 
which  till-  term  imaj;c  has  hern  rendered  in  Matt.  xxii.  ~0:  iioiiii  ti  /ii>ti(xi,&!.c., — "whose 
image  and  su|>erscription  is  this?"  Li'a  is  ihc  Samoim  word  of  ceremony  l<>r  to  i/rmm, 
— a  visi')ii ;  in  Hawaiian,  it  means  to  Ihinh,  ^xtiidrr.  Soisoi  is  to  laiigli;  in  Hawaiian, 
lioihni  means  jilmsal,  gratifud,  ji»ltiil.  Soi/a,  sijiiiifying  the  servant  of  n  chief,  is  (x-r- 
haps  the  origin  of  the  word  //mw,  which  in  .New  Zealand  tneans  the  lower  class  of  jieople, 
and  injd,  which,  in  llarolongnn,  signifies  a  tenant.  Ttiiiiiiiijii,  in  Samoan,  is  to  rat, 
said  of  a  common  chief;  in  Tongan,  it  is  applied  to  Tiiiloiiud,  to  whom  divine  honors 
are  rendered  ;  in  Hawaiian,  taiimnhd  is  a  sticiijicc  (i.  e.  the  food  or  eating  of  a  go<l.) 
From  these  examples  it  appears  that  though  the  language  of  ceremony  is  not  used  as  such 
in  the  dialects  derived  from  the  Samoan  (a  fact  which  may  bo  readily  accounted  for 
from  the  gri'at  e(|ualily  which  would  prevail  among  the  colonists  and  their  immediate 
descendants),  yet  several  of  the  words  have  been  retained  with  the  same  or  similar 
meanings  in  the  ordinary  language. 

CEREMONIAL    NEOLOGY. 

f)  91.  The  Tahitians,  besides  the  metaphorical  expressions  already 
noticed,  have  another  and  a  more  singular  mode  of  displaying  their 
reverence  towards  their  king,  by  a  custom  which  they  term  te  pi. 
They  cease  to  employ,  in  tlie  common  language,  those  words  which 
form  a  pnrt  or  the  whole  of  the  sovereign's  name,  or  that  of  iie  of  his 
near  relatives,  and  invent  new  terms  to  supply  their  place.  As  all 
names  in  Polynesian  are  significant,  and  as  a  chief  usually  has 
several,  it  will  be  seen  that  this  custom  must  produce  a  considerable 
change  in  the  language.  This  change,  however,  is  only  temporary, 
as  at  tlie  death  of  the  king  or  chief  the  new  word  is  dropped,  and  the 
original  term  resumed.  Vancouver  observes  (Voyage,  vol.  i.  p.  135) 
that  at  the  accession  of  Otu,  which  took  place  between  the  visit  of 
Cook  and  his  own,  no  less  than  forty  or  fifty  of  the  most  common 
words,  whicii  occur  in  conversation,  had  been  entirely  changed.  It 
is  perliaps  to  be  regretted  tliat  the  missionaries,  in  their  translations, 
have  employed  many  of  the  new  terms,  which  would  otherwise  have 
had  only  a  temporary  currency,  and  thus  made  them  permanent. 


*  Ellis*!  Polynesian  Researchca,  vol.  iii.  p,  37. 


POLYNESIAN   GRAMMAR. 


289 


Some  further  explanations  with  regard  to  the  extent  and  character  of  these  alterations 
will  not  be  out  of  place. 

1.  It  is  not  necessary  that  all  the  simple  words  which  go  to  make  up  a  compound 
name  should  be  changed.  The  alteration  of  one  is  esic<;mod  siiflicicnt.  Thus  in 
Po-marc,  signifying  "  the  night  of  coughing,"  only  the  first  word,/)0,  has  Xven  dropped, 
mi  being  used  in  its  place.  So  in  Ai-nuitn  (eye-eater),  the  name  of  the  present  (juccn, 
the  (ti  has  Ijeen  altered  to  anw,  iind  the  miUa  retained.  In  'li-arii-na-va/ta-roa  (the 
chief  with  the  large  mouth)  rou  alone  has  been  changed  to  rnanro, 

a.  But  this  idteratinn  affects  not  only  the  words  themselves,  but  syllables  of  similar 
sound  in  other  words.  Thus  the  name  of  one  of  the  kings  being  Tii,  not  only  was  this 
word,  which  means  to  sland,  changed  to  tin,  but  in  the  word  Jitii,  star,  the  last  syllabic, 
though  having  no  connexion,  except  in  sound,  with  the  word  tu,  underwent  the  some 
alteration — star  being  nnwfctiii;  I iii,  to  strike,  liccame  tiiii;  and  tup<ijxiii,a  corpse, 
tiiijHiptiu.  So  hn^  (iiur,  having  been  changed  to  mnliti,  the  word  aha,  split,  has  been 
altered  to  amiiha,  and  nnirihd,  the  name  of  a  month,  to  miiridhii.  When  the  word  ai 
was  changed  to  amii,  mtiraai,  the  name  of  a  certain  wind  (in  Karotongan,  marayai) 
Itecnme  mura-amii. 

3.  The  mode  of  alteration,  or  the  manner  of  forming  new  terms,  seems  to  be  arbitrary. 
In  many  cases,  the  substitutes  are  made  by  changing  or  dropping  some  letter  or 
letters  of  the  original  word, — as  hojxii  for  hapiii,  to  carry  in  the  arms ;  etie  for  hono,  to 
mend  ;  (iit  for  tan,  fit ;  hio  for  /io,  to  look  ;  ra  for  am,  path  ;  ran  for  varu,  eight ;  veu 
for  vera,  hot,  iVc.  In  other  cases,  the  word  substituted  is  one  which  had  before  a  meaning 
nearly  related  to  that  of  the  term  disused, — as  tia,  straight,  upright,  is  used  instead  of  t«, 
to  stand  ;  jiae,  part,  division,  instead  oCrima,  five;  piti,  together,  has  replaced  ma,  two, 
&c.  In  some  cases,  the;  meaning  or  origin  of  the  new  word  is  unknown,  and  it  may  be 
n  mere  invention, — ;is  o/'ai  (or  rthatii,  stone;  jxijir,  for  unj,  water;  ]>olie  for  ?nate,  dead, 
iSiC.  Some  have  Iren  adopted  from  the  neighboring  Paumotuan,  as  riii,  night,  from 
ruki,  dark  ;  /f«c,  six,  from  henr ;  arar,  moon,  from  katcake. 

It  is  evident  that  but  fiir  the  rule  l)y  which  the  old  terms  arc  revived  on  the  death  of 
the  person  in  whose  name  they  entered,  the  language  might,  in  a  few  centuries,  have 
been  completely  changed,  not  indeed  in  its  grammar,  but  in  its  vocabulary.  Of  the 
ten  simple  numerids,  live  are  ditlerent  from  what  they  were  in  the  time  of  Cook, — as  : 


ORIGINAL  FORM. 

PRF.SKNT  FtlHM. 

tahi 

faJii 

one 

Tua 

pili 

two 

tarn 

torn 

three 

ha 

viaha 

f"our 

nma 

jxie 

five 

OHO 

Jene 

SIX 

hitu 

hitu 

seven 

ram 

van 

eight 

ira 

iva 

nme 

ahiiru 

ahum 
73 

ten 

ESSAY 


A  LEXICON  OF  THE  POLYNESIAN  LANGUAGE. 


As  in  the  precediiif^  Grammar  an  attempt  has  been  made  to  deduce, 
from  a  comparison  of  the  various  dialects,  the  general  princi[)lus  of  the 
primitive  language  to  which  they  owe  their  origin,  it  has  seemed 
proper  to  complete,  as  far  as  possible,  the  view  of  that  language,  by 
bringing  together,  from  the  'iitlerent  vocabularies,  those  words  which, 
from  the  fact  of  their  existence  in  several  dialects,  may  reasonably  be 
supposed  to  have  formed  a  part  of  the  original  Polynesian  idiom.  It 
is  evident,  from  the  n.iture  of  things,  that  such  a  collection  caiuiol  lie 
complete,  and  that  it  must  be  liable  to  errors.  Some  words  may  be 
found  in  two  or  three  dialects, — as,  for  example,  in  those  of  Eastern 
Polynesia, — which  never  formed  a  part  of  tlie  primitive  tongue,  i)ut 
have  come  into  use  since  the  separation  of  the  Tahitians  from  the 
original  stock.  On  the  other  hand,  each  dialect  has,  no  doubt,  pre- 
served some  words  of  the  parent  language,  which  have  been  lost  in  all 
the  others,  and  which  we  have,  therefore,  no  means  of  distinguishing 
from  such  as  are  the  peculiar  property  of  the  dialect.  Our  materials, 
moreover,  for  such  a  work,  though  probably  mt)re  ample  than  any 
that  have  been  before  collected,  are  yet  very  imperfect.  When  com- 
plete dictionaries  of  all  the  dialects  shall  have  been  formed,  no  doubt 
the  number  of  words  common  to  all,  or  to  the  great  .'r  number,  will  be 
materially  increased.  It  is  believed,  however,  that  this  Lexicon  con- 
tains the  mass  of  those  vocables  which  constituted  the  jirimitivc  wealth 
of  the  Polynesian  speech.  It  comprises  the  terms  for  all  the  most 
common  objects,  ([ualities,  anil  acts,  and  would  probably  furnish  a 


r 


292 


PHI  I,()  LO(J  V. 


i 


sufficient  vocal)ulary  for  the  purposes  of  ordinary  intercourse  among 
a  scnii-l)!irl)arous  [»oople. 

The  plan  of  tlie  Lexicon  will  be  readily  understootl  on  inspection. 
Tlu^  primitive  or  radical  form  of  the  word  (or  that  which  is  considered 
to  he  such)  is  first  ^iven  in  large  type,  and  then  the  variations  in  form 
and  meaning  which  occur  in  the  dilferent  dialects  are  added,  together 
with  the  most  important  derivatives.  Some  difficulty  has  been  found, 
occasionally,  in  the  determination  and  arrangement  of  the  latter,  and 
it  is  not  likely  that  in  all  cases  the  disposition  which  has  been  adopted 
will  be  found  to  be  correct.  Some  words  may  have  been  referred  to 
a  common  source,  which  are  really  from  ililferent  roots,  and,  in  other 
cases,  the  thread  of  connexion  uniting  apparently  distinct  terms  may 
not  have  been  perceived.  In  many  instances,  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
primitive  form  of  the  word  is  not  found  in  our  vocabularies,  but  has 
been  ilcduced  from  a  comparison  of  the  variations.  In  such  cases, 
a  note  of  interrogation  is  affixed,  which  must  not  be  understood,  in 
general,  as  implying  a  doubt  of  the  correctness  of  the  deduced  form, 
but  merely  an  uncertainty  with  respect  to  its  actual  existence.  Thus, 
for  example,  we  have  in  Samoan  .sfV,  meaning  "to  lift  up,"  and  in 
Tongan  ftiki ;  the  former  dialect  has  no  k,  and  the  latter  no  s ;  hence 
there  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  original  form  of  the  word  was  siki, 
v\hicli  is,  accordingly,  given  in  the  vocabulary.  The  dialect  of 
Fakaafo,  and  probably  al.so  that  of  Niua,  have  all  the  elements,  and  a 
full  vocabulary  of  one  of  them  would  therefore  be  extremely  desirable, 
as  it  would  probably  present  us  with  most  of  the  words  of  the  Polyne- 
sian language  in  their  primitive  completeness.  Thus,  in  Samoan,  saa, 
and  in  Nukuhivan,  haka,  signify  "to  dance;"  the  ground-form  must 
therefore  be  saka,  which  is  accordingly  found  among  the  words 
obtained  by  us  at  Fakaafo.  The  brief  vocabulary  given  by  Schouten 
of  the  language  of  Cocos  Island  [Nina-tahu),  the  first  ever  published 
of  any  Oceanic  dialect,  affords  us,  in  the  word  for  "  beads,"  or  rather 
"necklace"  [casoa),  the  original  form  of  the  Samoan  asoa,  and  the 
Tongan  kahoa.  In  some  few  ca.ses,  however,  the  radical  form  is 
really  doubtful,  tlie  variations  not  being  such  as  to  give  a  clue  to  the 
word  from  which  they  are  derived.  Thus  holio/m,  which,  in  the  dia- 
lects of  New  Zealand,  Tahiti,  and  Hawaii,  signifies  "  deep,"  may  be 
a  corruption  of  xosoiiu,  or  oi  fufonu,  either  of  which  would,  in  those 
dialects,  assume  that  Ibrm. 

In  some  instances,  words  of  the  Vitian,  Ilotuman,  and  Tarawan  dia- 
lects (all  of  which  are  partly  of  Polynesian  origin)  have  been  intro- 


P  O  L  Y  N  E  H  I  A  N    L  K  X  I  C  O  N. 


203 


duced  by  way  of  illustration;  but  it  did  not  entor  into  the  plan  of  the 
work  to  make  any  reference  to  other  lanfjunges  of  the  Malay  family. 
Had  this  been  done,  many  terms  which  are  liere  given  as  primitives, 
would  have  been  referred  to  still  simpler  roots.  Thus  there  is  little 
doubt  that  the  words  mahnlii,  sick,  viatnkii,  fear,  atul  atun,  god,  are 
derived  from  the  Malay  sakit,  laknt,  and  tiihan.  In  the  Lexicon, 
however,  the  Polynesian  is  regarded  as  a  primitive  speech,  and  the 
simplest  form  in  which  any  word  occurs  in  it  is  considered  the 
ground-form.  Thus,  in  our  own  tongue,  the  root  of  tlic  word  lUsrern- 
menl  is  not  properly  the  Latin  ccrno,  but  the  Huglish  disarii. 

Less  attention  has  been  paid  to  the  particles,  numerals,  and  pro- 
nouns, than  to  words  of  otiier  das.ses,  as  the  former  have  been  already 
given  in  the  Comparative  Grammar,  and  their  nature  and  connexion 
more  fully  elucidated  than  would  here  be  possible.  It  will  be  sulFi- 
cient,  therefore,  to  refer,  in  each  case,  to  the  sections  of  the  Grammar, 
in  which  these  explanations  will  be  found. 

The  abbreviations  employed  in  the  Lexicon  are  such  as  will  be 
easily  understood.  Fuk.,  Haw.,  Mang.,  Nuk.,  N.Z.,  Pan.,  liar.,  S(nn., 
Tah.,  Tahii.,  Tar.,  Toiig.,  signify,  respectively,  the  dialects  of  Fakaatb, 
Hawaii,  Mangareva,  Nukidiiva,  New  Zealand,  Paumotu,  llarotonga, 
Samoa,  Tahiti,  Tahuata,  Tarawa,  and  Tonga.  L'biq.  (for  ubicpie) 
means  "  throughout  Polynesia,"  or,  in  all  the  dialects,  (of  course,  with 
the  regular  permutation  of  letters,  as  given  in  the  Grammar,  ij  9.)  Sa?n. 
et  cat.  (Samoa  et  ca'tera)  signifies  "the  Samoan  and  the  rest  of  the 
dialects."  Pron.,  adv.,  prep.,  part.,  stand  for  pronoun,  adverb,  prepo- 
sition, particle.  The  mark  (qu. .')  indicates  that  the  origin,  or  mean- 
ing, of  a  word  is  doubtful. 


74 


r  0  L  V  N  K  8  I  A  X    L  K  \  I  ('  0  N. 


r- 


Ai  Tiili.  Knr.  Miin;;.,  n  |mrticli>  pn  lixi'cl  lo 
riouiH  anil  |>riiiiiitins.     ((iniiii,  ^  II.) 

A,  |irc|),,  dl'.     ((irarii.  §  I".) 

A,  N.Z.  Haw.,  cdiij.,  and.    ((train.  ^  •1'^.) 

.1,  jiion.,  what  .'     ((irani.  ^  rJ.) 

A,  \.'/,.  Tall.  Iliiw.,  an  i'.\|ir<'r<siiin  to  dc- 
iiiiti'  prill rai'trd  linir,  I'lHilinnanci'  ol" 
an  iicliun,  tVr. 

A,  Snni.  Tiin;j.,  a  loiii'c. 

Kiiii-n,  Tuni;.,  <;/«/,  'I'lili.,  an  cncliwiirr. 

Afn,  Sam.  Tonn.,  ifi/v;,  N.  Z.,  ("'(/rrf,  Vili, 
n  liurrioaiii',  a  stnrni;  iiniiini,  'I'ali., 
lo  Im'  dIslnrlH'd  hy  a  stnrin,  as  Ihr  sea  ; 
innmicii.  Haw.,  a  mist,  spray. 

AjC,  .Sam.  Toiig.,  n  lliiuisand.  ((iram. 
^  30.) 

Aji,  .sJam.  Ton«.,  iilii,  N.Z.  Haw.  Nnk., 
Ill,  Har.  Mnnj; ,  niiiihi,  Tali.,  Iiri\ 

Aftafi,  Sam.,  rjiiiji.  Ton;;.,  iihinlii,  .\.  Z. 
Tuh.  Haw.  Nnk.,  nini,  Mat.  Man;;., 
evcnin;;,  (p<'rliaps  sn  callril  from  'he 
cusliiin  ol'liiihlini;  fires  al  lliat  lime.) 

AjO,  Xiim,  Toiig.,  iihit,  .\.Z.  Haw.  Nnk., 
cord,  Ittino. 

At,  pron.,  who?     (Gram.  §  -12.) 

Al  or  ei,  relative  particle.     (Gram.  ^00.) 

At  (?),  iii-iila,  kiii-iilii,  liii-iilii,  l-'ak.,  no ; 
I'Af/i,  Fnk.,  ikai,  liii,  Tonj;.,  kihiii, 
N.  Z.,  not ;  iiilii,  ainia,  niiiii,  iiipii, 
Tah.,  iiir,  iiiiini,  Nnk.,  no,  imt. 

Altit,  Sam.  Hot.,  miiilii,  I'aii..  n  spirit. 

/lA'rt,  Ton;!.  Unr.  Mang,  Niik.,  f'd,  Snin. 
Tall.  Haw.,  trakii,  Viti,  Tar.,  not  of 
a  jilunt, 

Aki,  Toni;.,  eki,  Mang.,  prep.,  with,(in.st.), 
by  means  of. 


I  Aki,  liar.,  slill,  fair,  na  llie  weatlirr;  </'i(j'i. 
Haw.,  fair,  elear. 

.iko,  'V>ii\-^.  Uar..  <('(),  Sam.  Tall.  Maw.,  lo 
leaeli,  iiislriii-l ;  d/.n,  .Niik.,  to  adinil  a 
^H'rson  into  a  elass  or  society. 

Akil  iU,  ii'i'<  Sam.  Tall.,  needle,  pin; 
iikii,  .Niik. ,(/'«, Tall.  Iliiw.,  till'  snord- 
lisli,  j.'ar-lisli,  vVe. 

Aid,  Sam.  Haw.,  iini,  'I'ali  liar.  Mang., 
((((,  Tong.  Nuk.,  awake,  wnlcliful. 

Auil,  Haw.,'/n'(,  N.Z.  Mang.,  toobstrurt, 
liiiiiler,  op|)os<'. 

Alllld,  Sam.,  to  come,  used  only  in  s|M'ak- 
ing  of  a  chief;  ahiliii.  Haw.,  lo  eon.se. 
crate,  to  n-nder  sncred  by  ooming  in 
contact  with  some  .sacn'il  object. 

Ale  (ipi.  f),  liilf,  Sam.  Tikop.,  to  congb ; 
Inn-,  .\.  '/,.,  to  groan. 
Miilr,  (law.,  nuire,  N.Z.  Tah.,  mariiiat, 
Nnk.,  to  raise  phlegm,  c.x|)ectorntc, 
cough. 
lliiiin;  N.Z.  Tab.,  iiavarr,  Rar.,  siiittte, 
phlegm  ;  (ipi.  siiu-nlr,  liquid  ofci  igh- 
ing  0 

AMo,  Sam.  Ilnw.,  rlelo,  Tong.,  arrro,  Tnh. 
Uar.  .Mang. ;  rm,  Nnk..  tongue. 

Allki.  I-'ak.,  ((//■/,  Sam.  Haw.,  tiriki,  Rar. 
Pan.,  iiri'i.  Tail.,  riki,  Tong.,  anki 
and  iikiiiiki,  .Mang.,  tiik<  and  luikniki, 
•Nnk.,  a  chief,  noble;  ariki,  .N.  Z.,  n 
chief  distinguished  from  other  chiefs 
by  n  |K'cnliar  sacrediiess  of  character; 
I'liii/i'i,  Sam.,  a  high  priest. 

Alo,  Sam.  'I'oiig.,  to  paddle,  to  fan;  Haw., 
to  swim,  to  make  the  motion  of  swim- 
ming. 

Alo,  Sam.,  the  inside  ;  also,  in  sjienking  of 
a  chief,  the  belly;  Haw.,  the  front, 
face,  breast,  belly ;  (iro,   N.  Z.   Tah. 


I       \ 


POI,  YNEStAN    I,  EX  ICO  \. 


',>9r> 


Itor.  Mniig.,  no,  Tong.  Nuk.,  Iliu  triint, 

liiiT,  |iri'iu'ii()', 
Alu,  Sinn.  Tkiijj.,  iki  (nr  i|ii.  <iii  >),  Nuk., 
to  g(i;  ii/o,  Tung.,  til  liiiiit;  urn,  N.  /. 
Tiih.  Knr.,  niiin/n,  llnw.,  to  I'ullow, 
|itiiNiie;  iilnu,  ti/i/,  llnw,,  to  oiiniliiiiu 
I'lir  miiliiiil  a«»istiiiK-(',  lo  lii'lj). 

AlH,  llnw.,  to  H'liix,  Im'  Iikmc,  liiin;;  ilnwii ; 

iininni,  llnw.,  tanrnurii,  'I'lili.,  Iihisi', 

Hinck. 
Ariiiiru,  N.  /.,  ii  siniill  liiiii(l-ni'l. 
Atnn,  llnw.,  aiiKtnui,  Sum.,  grievoil, 

Amo,  iihiq.,  to  ciirry  on  ilio  slioulilcr; 
Ixiict',  II  biinlrii  so  I'lirriril. 

Amu.  timiKiiiiii,  N.Z.  llnw.,  til  ri'vilf, 
iibii*,-. 

Ana,  ubi<|.,  n  cnvc,  ilcii. 

AflO,  Tall.,  ilcKolali-;  anonno,  llaw.,  mili- 
tary, still,  rrlircd. 

Ano.  lUr.,  to  wish,  til  Id!  willing;  <inoi, 
llnw.,  lo  dcsirr,  to  cuvi't. 

AllOlji  (.'),   iiniini,  llaw.,  diiui.  Tali.,  lo 

ini.x,  mingle. 
Ami,  Unr.  .Mniig.  .Niik.  Tab.  llnw.,  cold. 

Anu,  Sam.  Tong.,  to  spit;  anuanu,  Nuk., 

spitlU-. 
Anuanua,  ubii).,  rainliow. 

Anilfe,  Snin.,  iiniihe,  eniihe,  llaw.,  eniie, 
.Miing. ;  niife  (prob.  tiniiji),  Nuk.,  a 
ontcrpillar. 

Aya,  Sam.  Uar.  Mnng. ;  ha>xi,  N.  7.., 
hakti,  liana,  Nuk.,  hnna,  llnw.,  work, 
Intior,  to  do,  to  make  ;  nija,  N.  /.,  to 
bi'gin.  Ayn,  Tong.,  habit,  custom, 
knack  ;  a>j<i,  Snm.  Tong.,  yatjn,  Viti, 
dis|K>sitioii,  temper  of  the  mind  ;  hnijn, 
.\.  7..,  stutp,  condition. 

•^y(^  (0,  (ipnn^,  Tong.,  n  corpse  ;  heaha, 
henna,  Nuk.,  the  corpse  of  a  huiiinn 
victim  oirercd  to  the  gixis ;  hctina, 
llnw.,  the  IhhIv  of  n  person  slain  in 
battle  ;  n^njti,  N.  /.,  n  human  skull. 
Agaga,  Sam.,  a  spirit. 


Age,  Tong.,  "iir,  Sam.,  ne,  Tab.  llnw.. 
yonder,  nsido  (I!  ram.  ^  oh). 

Ayi,  Hnr.  Maiig.,  (//»vn/r,  llnw,,  a  gentle 
lin  TZe,  lo  blow  Hol'lly. 
il/(//(i))/',  Sniii.  Tung.   N./.  Knr.   Mnng., 
nnitti/,i,  or    iiiniiiiii,    Nuk.,    tinifint, 
llaw.,  iniiliii,  Tab,,  f"v',  Vili,  wiiiil. 

Al),  ubiij,,  iliiN  light,  as  ibsliiigiiisln  d  I'mni 

jii>,  iii^bt ;    lii'iici',  ll rrnlnl  wiirlil. 

as  iljstliigiiislii'il  I'ruiii  Ibi'aiii'iriit  iii^ibt, 
iiriliaiis;  also,  a  rlnuil.  [The  urigiiinl 
imiuiiiig  wns  prolinbly  the  sky  or 
vlsllilr  lirniaini'Mi,  iVoin  uliirli,  by 
iippiisiie  Iniiisilicins,  the  two  senses  uf 
"  liiilil"  anil  "  cloud"  were  derived.) 

Aoiiiiili,  .Nuk,,  till'  sun. 

Airiilrii,  N  /,  I'aii,  llaw.,  (dvi^v',  Tnh. 
Kar.  .Mnng.  Nuk,,  nomi  (i.  e.  no-nlfii. 
broad  day)  ;  mitin  und  <ii>tfii,  Nuk,, 
daylight. 

AwiiLr,  \.  Z,,  tiiuikc,  Mang.,  the  day 
niter  to-iiiorrow  (i.  e.  tin-nke,  the  dny 
iH'yiiml). 

Ana,  Tall.  Uar.  llnw.,  to  Imrk,  howl. 

Apt,  Sam.,  nhi,  Tong.,  a  residence,  lodg- 
ing-plnce. 
Ahi,  Tong.,   Iinapiiju,    IJur.,   property, 
possessions. 

AplClpt,  Sam.,  narrow,  strait ;  ahidht. 
Tong.,  crowded,  ns  n  rond. 

Ase,  Snm.  Viti,  a/ii;  Tab.,  jiiitilie,  Nuk.. 
ilialii,  llaw.,  sandal-wiKid. 

Asiosio,  Sum.,  ]>mthioliio,  Tah.  Haw.,  n 
whirlwind. 

AsO,  Sam.,  <i/to,  Tong.,  n  day. 
Tiaho,  N,  Z.,  to  give  light. 

AsO,   Snm.,  alio,   Tnh.   llnw,,  the   small 
rods  or  ratters  on  which  the  thatch  of 
n  house  is  fastened. 
Alio,  N.  Z.,  the  web  of  a  woof  of  cloth. 

AsO  (?),  alio,  Tnh.  llnw.  Nuk,,  ao,  Rar., 
breath  ;  hence,  patience,  endurance  ; 
lOionlio,  Tnh.,  sutfering,  distress. 


t    : 
.  t 


3on 


Pill  I,OI,  (»(1  Y. 


il 


i  I 


If. 


A.ill,  Saiii.,"/ii',Ti>ii^.,'//'-f/Ai,  Knr.  Ilnw. 

Niik.,  (iii-itiiiilii,  Tiili.,  Hiiiok)', 
I'/ni,  miihii,  lliiw.,  tuiiliii,  'I'lili.,  Ktonni, 
v]i|Mir  (v.  kiisii). 
A.ill,  Slim.,  to    liiilc  wiitrr,  til   illp  lint,  to 
iMriirl;  iiii,  Maii^.,lo  |MHir  nut  wiilrri 
iiliii,  Niik.,  Ill  lranN|iIiinl. 
Atu,   iilil(|.,  II  similiiw,    rclli'ctiiiii,   iiMii);i'; 
Tiih.,  n  cliiiiil. 
I'li'iiiild,  Slim.,  /</A(/(//(/  mill  liudtii,  NiiK., 

iikiiiilii,  iMinin.,^V*//(i,Ton(i.,ii  mirnir.  '•■ 
Ala,  N.  Z.,  tii/ii  II  h  (i/i;,  or  ln/iilii,  Sinn., 
tiii,ihi(ilii,'Vi\\\.  Iliiw.,llir  iliiuii  iil'iliiy. 
AlaiiKii,  ,Saiii,,  II  spirit  (i.  ■'.  ii  nliiiilr);  j 
lliiu.,  »isi',  Nkilliil  ;    ii/iiitiii,  N.   /., 
kiiiil,  grarious, 
AliiJi'i,  ,Sim.,  n  win  (i.  i\  lillli-  linage) ; 
iiliiriki,  .Maiig.,  eldest  son  ;  ulni,  Tiir., 
Hiin. 
Atf'l,  Tiinf!.,  iiliDita,  Mani!.,  wiile,  HpacioiiD. 

Aldtii,  Ilnw,,  clear,  plain,  ilinliecl.  i 

Ate,  iiliii|.,  the  liver. 
Aft,  ."^am.,  til  nmk(-  n  sihitIi  ;  Ilnw.,  lo 

lallle,  slaniliT,  lie  (v.  kiitr). 
Ato,  Tung.,  Ill  riiut',  ti)  lliiitcli ;  Haw,,  the 

art  of  thatching. 
AtU,  .Slim.  Vili,  (ilii.  Ton;;.,  n   colleelive 
parlirle    prefi.veil  to  wiirils   si^jnilyiiiK 
eiiiiiilry,  islaiiil,  lown,  \e.  ((iiain.  § 
U). 
Atll,  lil)i<|.,  away,  ynmler, — pnrtiele   siij. 
nilXin);   ilireelimi    from   llie    speaker, 
ami  likewise  in  liiniiint;  the  eiiinparn- 
tive  degree  (Gram.  §^  'J'^,  Uli). 
Atll,  .Sam.  Tong.  Tah.  Haw.    .\iik.,  the 

biinito  fish. 
Atll'l,  Sam.  Tah.   Knr.  Haw.  Niik.,  otmi, 

Tung.,  eliin,  .Maiig.,  a  ginl,  divinity. 
All,  pron.,  1  (Gram.  §  .39). 
All,  Siim.  Tung.,  lo  nrrivo  at,  reneh. 
All,   Sam.  Knr.  Tah.   Haw.,  the   gall  of 

nnimnls. 
Alie,    int.,    alas !    woe  !    also,    to    bewail, 
sympathise,  &c,  (Gram.  <j  60). 


Avil,  iiliii|.,  a  ehaniiel,  rnvi',  ereek,   har- 
iKir;  mill,  .N.  '/,.,  a  river. 


K 


/•/",  prep.,  Iiy  (Gram.  §  !i4), 

/'<",  part.,  sign  nl'llie  viiealive.  (Gram.  ^  M.) 

J'l,   pail.,  sign    III'  ihe   preMent   and    luliire 

(Gnmi.  ^  ."•■J). 
/'/',    Kar.,   Maiig.   Tah.    N'lik.,   emij.,    and 

((irniii.  ^  (IM). 
I'Uo,  Slim.,  i/i)  mill  elm,  'I'ling.,  yilii,  Maw., 

li'lid,  iifli-nsive, 
LilO  (?),  kiiriv,  uiriiiri),   Kar.,   ini,  'Vat., 

vrhvrliui,  VitI,  yellow  ;   veru,    N.  Z., 

red;   iiiilo,  Tong.,  brown,   yellow, — 

iiiiloiiirlii,  tawny; — Sam.,   red;   mile- 

iiirlr.  Haw.,  yellow. 
EllflciKl  (ipi.  0.  i^am.,  brown  ;  Haw.,  red- 

hiil. 
Evaeril,  Smn,  Tmig,,  to  walk  about. 


r  li,  Tung.,  /ill,  N.Z,  Haw.,  n,  Mnng.,  /mi, 

Nuk.,  to  breathe  strongly,  a  strong  ex- 

piriitiiiii  oCthe  breiilh. 
F('l,  .Sam.  Tong,.  tin,  ,\.  Z.,  n,  Kar.,  /iii. 

Haw.  Nuk.,  /lit,  iiiii/iii,  Tah.,  lour. 
h  (I  (.'),  nuifd,  Tung.,  nii/iii,  vn/in.  Haw., 

1)1111,   Knr.,  iimii/iii    (liir  ii/ici),  Tnh., 

split,    elert,    divided     (ipi.    parted     in 

ll.iir  M. 
I'ltlii,  Tab.  Nuk.,  lo  split,  erark,  break 

to  piices, — a  lissure ;  jw/iii.  Haw.,  to 

burst,  to  break  forth  suddenly. 
'ISfii,  .Sam.,   perpendicular,   steep  (i.  e. 

split  oil'). 
Mi>tii-ii/i<inii,  Haw., split;  ra/ianu,  Nuk., 

half,  or  part. 
Fae,  Tung.,  tciicii,  N.  Z.,  mother. 
Faja,  Sam.  Tong.,  iia/iii,  N.  Z.   Haw., 

va/ui.  Tall.,  to  carry  on  ihu  back. 


li^ 


I'or,  Y  \  i;SI  A  N    I.KX  ICON, 


297 


Ftlfn,    Niil<.,    vnhii,    S.'A.    Iliiw.,    luihii. 

Till),,  run,  Itiir,  Mnii^.,  Ilic  iiioiilli ; 

itiinihii,    Tiili.,     iiiiiiiihii,    lliiw.,    a 

rnriiilli,  ii|H'iilri|{  In  a  vt'ssrl ;  kiiuiiliii, 

N.  '/..,  II  (Jill"'. 
J/iiiiliihilid/iii,      Tiili.,      Iiniiiriiliiiiriiliii, 

Hum,,   iiliiiniiii-ini,    liar.,   U>    ili's|iJHr, 

intuit,  ninlrniii  (niiikr  iiKiiillit  iil  >). 
/'  ojii,  'ViiUK.,  Iiti/id,  lliiw.,  Hiihiiiiii,  N.Z., 

III  till  iilKiiit,  III  iniivi'  Itir  Imiiil  over  n 

tliiii)( ;  Jiijii,  Tiili,,  to  try,  to  ti'iii|il, 
''  '{/'i   i\'iil(.,  Ill  ■•liillir,  rliilliiiin, — II  liiin- 

illr  wriipt    ill   rliith  or   li'iivra ;    inilii. 

Haw.,  ir/i/,Tali.,  vai,  Wnr.,  to  wrnp  ii|i, 

Hwntlii',  ciivi'luiH', — II  wra|i|K'r,  shriilh, 
Fa/lP,  Sam.,  Jrjir,    I'lHit?.,   iniliif,  N.  Z. 

Haw.,  rnliii;  Tah.  Nuk.,  tvi/c,  Kiir., 

I'lirl,  liriwiKiil. 
r  njllic,    J^iiiii.,    /i/itir,    Tiinji.,    wiihiiie, 

N.  Z.  I'liii.  Haw.,  ?v(/i/)/c.  Tall.  Nuk., 

vainr,  Uar.,  .Miiiii;.,  iii/ic.  Tar.,  wo- 

liwiii,  li'iiialr. 
t  (ijo,    Sam.,   i'v///H,    \.  Z.   Haw.,  valw, 

Tah.  Nuk,,  tv/o,  liar.  .Mnng.,  without, 

oiitsjilr. 
rat,   .Sam.   Tonn.,   to  iln,   to   uiiikr;   ni, 

.Miiiif;.,  to  n'fiiilalf,  iliiirt,  jjovitii. 
Miijiii,  Sam.,  iilui,  N.  '/,.,  pos-siblc,  loasi. 

iili',  iiblc. 
I'liifiiiliiki,  Toiijf.,  to  imitnto,  mimio,  ilo 

nrooriiin);     In;    Jiiit'ni,    Sam.,   Jiiila, 

.Nuk.,  to  m(M-k,tli'ri(li',  almsi' ;  limtlini- 

lidi.   Haw.,    to   Iraw,   vex,   |irovok<! ; 

Uiiihin,  Hnu.,  niai,  Mnng,,  to  follow, 

chase,  |iiir.siii'. 
I'itiiiifd,  Sam.,  plnyfiil,  jrsling:  Ton);., 

coiiiprlition,    rivalry;    /uiimi.    Haw., 

orurl,  lianl-hiartoil. 
Fat,   Tah.   Nuk.,  hdiea   (!),  Hnw.,   ray. 

tish,  skato. 
/'  nka,  Jii'd,  ii-dkd,  hdkd,  lid'd,  lion,  the 

rausativi'  pri'lix.     (Ornin.  §  54.) 
Faki  (0.  ./''■''>  ^>'«       'o  speak,  toll ;  /(((, 

Nuk.,    /idi,    'I  Miiw.,    dki.    Uar., 

to  It'll,  confess. 

75 


Fll/ti  {!),/d'i,  Sam.,  to  pull  il..wn,  to  di?. 
ulniy, — III  extricate  j  Iraki,  kmrnki, 
.N.  Z.,  to  pluck,  hn'nk  otl',  pull  up; 
lidi.  Tall.,  to  lirenk  olf;  Imi,  uhui. 
Haw.,  to  jerk,  pull  mil,  break  olf,  or 
in  piices, — III  ileliver  from  Imiiilnxc  ; 
Jd/iii,  jMi/di,  Nuk.,  dki,  Uar.,  to  pluck, 
to  ){iilhi'r,  as  fruit. 

I' ilkl  ( f),  fit'i,  Horn.,  fi'i,  Tah.,  the  plan- 
tain. 

r  lull,  lidi,  lidrit,  iVc,  uliii].,  the  pnnilanus 

olIorilliHsilllllN, 

Fulnlil,    Sam.    Tong.,    Iiilele,    Hnw.,    to 

lean  upon. 
I'dKird,    Tiih.,    nriird,    Uar ,    to    bi-ot 

upon,  as  the  wiiiil,  to  strike  n^'ain.sl, 
/'  nil',    Ihrr,  Jur,    iniir,    hide,    hare,   nrr, 

uliii|.,  house, 
Faliki,  'J'onjt.,  imriki,  N,  Z„  arikiriki, 

Unr.,  hdlii.  Haw.,  to  spreiiil   on   the 

^niiinil,  to  spread  a  m.il,  to  make  a 

til  Kir. 
I'ani,   Tah.,    oriki,    Uar.,    to    receive, 

holil,  contain, — a  vessel   tor   holding 

liiliiiil.i,  n  iHillle. 
Fallllu  ( !),  Iidriiiii,  .N.  Z.  Tiih.,  dnirii, 

Uar.    .Miiii  '  .   hdliihi.   Haw.,    a    loud 

noise,  the     miriii);   of  the   wind,  tlic 

noise  of  siirt',  <icc. 
F(tna,   Sam.  Ton)i..    to   shoot ;    dii/nnn, 

Sam.,  Ihiw  and  arrows :  Jii/id,  Tah., 

dnii,  Uar.,  a    'ow      Initd,    Nuk.,    to 

iM-nd. 
Piimi,   Hnw.    N  ik.,    n    bow, — to   sluiot 

with    a    Ixiw ;    N.  /,    Wnw.    Nuk.,   n 

fillip  "lib  the  fingi 
Fanil   (!).    Irtiiii.'i'an,!,  Torn;.,  Iiawd/ia- 

uiind,    flaw.,    to   whi~|ier;   funayd, 

Toni;.,  a  table,  a  ficliiious  tale;  ton. 

lunjd,  Haw.,  n  prophecy,  to  preach; 

Vdiuina,  Nuk..  ;i  religious  ceremony, 

to  sinj;  hymns. 
FllHli,    Sam.    Toil);.,    ni/itl,    Viti,   dura. 

Tar.,  n  mast  of  a  vessel,  liana.  Haw., 

the  middle  post  of  a  house. 


; 

1       !• 


298 


I'  H  I  L  O  L  O  G  Y. 


i 


{ 


FanU,  Niik.,  wnrm  in  ntlnction  or  niijji'r, 
nrdcnt  ;  imi/iimi,  S«mi.  Tniif;.,  inn- 
liana,  N.  Z.  Tiili.  Maw.,  mrliaiKi, 
Niik.,  vtaana,  Itnr.  Mung.,  hulianu, 
llnw.,  wnrin,  hut. 

Jl'ina,  Pan.,  miihunii,  Tali.,  the  sun. 

Ilnnahiinii,  Tah.,  luuiii/uino,  I  law.  Xiik., 
bright,  s|ileiuliil, 

r  (IIHllI,  ivanaii,  liuiiau,  aiuiii,  ul)i<i„  to 
iK'ar,  bring  forth, — born. 

Fann,  Fak.  Tah.  \uk.,  la/wo,  N.  'A.,  to 
go,  prooii'd,  sail  (as  n  ship). 
Ihiho,    Sum.,    by    stages ;    haniiii    (qu. 
Iiaiiii .'),    Haw.,   stairs,   .stcgis    up   an 
ascent. 

r  a/Ilia,  Sam.  Tong.,  ueniKi,  N.  'A.,frniia, 
Toll.  Nuk.,  henna,  I'aii,,  tnna,  Uar. 
''n'vr  ■  honini.  Haw.,  earth,  land, 
country.  i 

r  aijd   (.'),  fiijiiijii,  Snni.  Tong.,   irnwii,  • 
S.  'A.,  haai,  ha/imii,  Tah.,  »;/«(,  Uar. 
Mang.,   hanai.    Haw.,  J'liiini,  hakai, 
Nuk.,  to  feed,  nourish. 
Faiiu,  Tong.,  n/miia,  Haw.,  mimi,  Tah., 

a  brood,  lloi'k,  laniily. 
0/iiW',  Sam,,  uicdiid,  .\.  /.,  tnaija,  Uar., 
'</(/«,  Tall.,  pniianii,  Haw.,  nest  ol"  a 
bird  ;  hno-jtiinnna.  Haw.,  to  brood 
over;  pnnana,  Nuk.,  to  lie  in  wnit, — 
an  ambush. 

f^a^a  (>.),  Jit  (qu.  Jiia.'),  Tah.,  vni.a, 
Haw.,  to  ap|icar,  come  in  sight ;  mtilu- 
faijd,  Sam.  Tong.,  shore,  bench  (i. 
e.  the  front  or  edge  apiKiiring  to  a 
voyager). 

Fayo  ('),  fa/aijo,  Tong.,  to  whisper, — 
fai^ofhifo,  to  blow  tin;  nose,  also  a  (lute 
blown  by  the  nose ;  mtijo,  N.  A.,  a 
groan  ;  hano,  Haw.,  the  asthma. 

Fao,  J'ajan,  Sam.,  to  collect  things,  and 
put  them  in  order;  fan,  fajno,  Tong., 
fao,  Nuk.,  hao,  luUian,  Haw.,  ao, 
Mang.,  to  put  in,  to  fill  up,  to  load. 

I'  tlO,  I'ak.,  a  spike,  a  nail ;  Tong.,  a  [K-g ; 


hao,  Tall.,  a  nail,  chisel ;  hao.  Haw., 

iron,  a  horn, 
r  do,  Sam.  Tong.  Nuk.,  hao,  Tah.  Haw., 

riO,  Uar.,  to  take  things  with  violence, 

to  plunder, 
Faxt,  and  fa/asi,  Snm.,  to  open,  to  bn^ak 

o[)en  ;  riU'i,  Viti,  to  cut ;  fiihi,  Tong., 

wahi,   vinnihi,    N.  A.    Haw.,    valii, 

vaviihi,  Tah.   Nuk.,  rami,  Uar.,  to 

divide,  rend  apart,  break  open  ;  Jiisi, 

Sam.,    a     fraiiinent,    portion ;     fiihi, 

Tong.,  a   class   or  division   of  men  ; 

u-ahi,  N.A.  Haw.,  vahi,  Tah.,  a  part, 

(Hirtion. 
Fast,  Sam.,  ]Hhi,  jxj>rhi,  Nuk.,  prjwhi. 

Haw.,  to  strike,  Iteat,  kill. 
Pchi,  Tah.  Haw.,  pet,  Uar.,  to  pelt  with 

stones. 
r  (ltd,  S'ma,/at(ila/fi,  Tong.,  Tikopia,  the 

breast,  chest. 
Fdtd,  Sam.  Tong.  Nuk.  Tah.,  irata,  N.  A., 

atii,  Uar.  Mang.,  a  shelf,  seallold,  table, 

altar,  «5kC. ;  hala.  Haw.,  a  ladder. 
r  dtt,  Sam.  Tall.  Nuk,,  /f/«,  Tong.,  irali. 

.N.  A.,  hiiti.  Haw.,  a/i,  Uar.  .Mang.,  to 

lireak  ;  /ali,  Tah.,  tmti,  N.  /.,  all, 

Uar.,  to  break  and  (lee,  as  an  army  ; 

/((//',  Sam.,  ati,  Mang.,  to   break,  as 

waves. 
Tr(/^V;j,'f(,  N.  A.,  aliya,  Mang.,  hatimi. 

Haw.,  a  (Vagment,  piece. 
Fdtll,  Sam.  Tong.  Tah.  .\iik.,  to  folil  or 

roll    up;  /<//»,   Tab.,  /('(///,  Haw.,  to 

lie  (ealliers  i>n  a  plume  or  (ly-brush  ; 

ic(i/ii,  N.  A.,  to  weave    by   hand,  to 

work  on  a  mat. 
i'rt/M,  Sam.  Niua,   Fak.,  a  .stone;  Sam., 

seed,  the  heart ;  Tong.,  the  stomach  (!) ; 

lintn,  N.  A.,  hail,  howatii,  slcme  ;  alii, 

Mang.,  seed  ;  hatii.  Haw.,  a  hard  lump 

of  any   thing,  the    tongue  of  a  bell  ; 

poliatii.    Haw.,    poatu,    Uar.    Mang., 

vatu,  Viti,  a  stone. 
Faln-lilili,  Sam.  Tong.,  fatnlii,   Nuk.. 

(Uiiliii,  Mang.,  ii:(UUiri,  N.  A.,  patiri. 


POLYNESIAN    I,  K  X  I  C  O  N. 


299 


Tall.,  Iiiiili,  Haw.,  tliiindiT  ((|U.  lliiin- 
ilcr-lxill,  sIdhv  Ihrinrn  /). 

r  Cllll,  Tiih.,  hiitii,  lliiw.,  iilii,  Uiir,,  lord, 
Minster. 

r  (XU,  Sam.  Tiini;.  Niik.,  Iliu  hibiscus  lijin-  1 
cells,  II  tree  Irnm  \vlios<'  Imrk  llie 
mitives  make  their  twine;  hence,  to 
li<',  to  tiinil ;  itii,  .Mnng.,  to  hind  ;  Jim, 
Tdiig.  Fiik.,  iVdntlel,  wreiilli  for  the 
heiid,  cnp;  Tiih.,  cup,  helmet. 
Vail,  Viti,  the  hibiscus, — nlso,  the  cinc- 
ture worn  by  the  women,  which  is 
mndo  from  its  hark  ;  Jiii',  Kiik.,  pmi, 
Haw.,  the  cincture  worn  by  the  women. 

FaU  {>),f}iiif<iii,  Tah.  Niik.,  unclean,  liiul, 
bad  ;  hmimiti,  I  law.,  unclean,  ini|uii'e, 
to  defile. 

Fe,  Jhi,  lira,  ivc,  iihi<|.,  w  liich  ?  wliero  ? 
when?     ((!rnm.  ^§  \'i,  ti.'j.) 

Fefe,  Sam.,  Villi  (qii.  w/ir .'),  N.  Z., 
Iioht;  Haw.,  al'raid,  fearful. 

Fefe,  Sam.,  a  disease  |irodiicing  swelled 
limbs,  a  kind  of  elephantiasis  ;  Nuk., 
elephantiasis, — an  ulcer,  boil ;  iirur, 
N.  Z.,  Iic/ir,  Haw,,  an  ulcer,  a  boil. 

Feke,  Ton;;.  Nuk.,  /cV,  Sam.,  /cV,  Haw., 
the  squid. 

FeU(]),  fer,  Nuk.,  to  strangle;  liel<\  jxi- 
liclf.  Haw.,  a  noose;  urrrirrre,  N.  '/.., 
to  hani;,  suspend. 

Fetl'f,  Sam.  Ton;;.  Nuk.,  iir/u,  N.  '/..,  rlii, 
Kar.  Mani;.,  Iii/ii,  helui,  Tah.,  lulii, 
hctika,  I'liu.,  liiUii,  Haw.,  n  star. 

Fici,  Sam.  Tonj;.  Fak.,  hia.  Haw.,  to 
wish,  want,  desire;  yli((/irt,  Sam.,  de- 
sire ;//(■/(«,  Toiig.,  pleasui-e,  joy,  pride; 
hiiliie.  Haw.,  neat,  (jood,  lively;  ieir, 
Rar.,  neat,  eU'gant.     (Oram.  §  51.) 

Fl/j,   Sam.  Tong.,  ii-iri,  N.  Z.,  iri,  U;ir., 
to  choose. 
Fill,  Sam.,  an  enemy,  or  rather  an  oppo- 
nent at  a  game,  an  adversary  whom 
one  selects  to  contend  with. 

Fili,  Sam.,  Jii,  Tong.,  faiijii,  Nul .,  Jiri, 


Tail.,  )(■//■(',  N.  '/..,  Iiili,  Wnw.,  to  plait, 
to  braid,     (."^ee  Vili.) 
Ofili,  Tab.,  oii'li,  I  law.,  to  roll  up,  twist. 

VililKllii  ('.),  iririiiiihi,  .\.  '/,.,  iiiiiiiki, 
Uar.,  Iiiliiiiii,  Haw.,  to  lean  upon, — 
hence,  to  trust  in. 
I'  llO,  Sam.  Tong.,  twine,  thn'ad ;  Jio,  Nuk.. 
//(/(),  Haw.,  I/O,  Kar.,  to  twist, — thread, 
twine. 
I'l/iloi,  Sam.,   iioi,    Kar.,  itiiili,   ivili. 

Haw.,  to  mix,  mingle. 
[It  is  dest^rviiig  of  remark  that  fili,  Jilu. 
tiii/o,  mini),  and  X'ili,  although,  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  of  I'olynesiaii 
etymology  they  must  Ih'  considered 
distinct  words,  yet  show,  lM>th  in  .sound 
and  iiii'aiiiug,  a  ik'gree  of  resemblance 
which  cannot  Ix-  considered  accidiMilal. 
The  same  may  lie  remarked  with  re- 
gard to  other  words,  such  ns  Jiisi  and 
viisf,  fell'  and  sele,  fisi  and  fose,  kapii 
and  siijio,  kiirr  and  lave,  knie  and  soli, 
kikiu  and  iiS'i,  I'lilii  and  miilii,  iirkr. 
]»ki;  srki;  and  trl,r,  jxka  and  lika, 
Iriiio  and  stiiio.  It  and  ti,  hia  and 
piia,  &c.  This  resemblance  must  be 
nscrilM'd  to  the  natural  tendency,  in 
all  languages,  to  ri'present  similar  ideas 
by  similar  sounds.] 

Fiudljnh,  ii:\m.  'i'oiig,,  lii>iai),irn,  N.  Z.. 
iiKiiKirii,  Kar.  Mang.,  Iiimmrn,  Tah.. 
Iiiiiaiiaii,  liintikdo,  Nuk.,  will,  desire. 

Fio  (!),  icin,  N.  Z.,  vivio,  Mang.,  hiohin, 
I'au.,  to  whistle;  liin.  Haw.,  eructa- 
tion,— hiiiliio,  "  to  draw  in  tho  breath 
as  if  eating  a  hot  potato." 

FisU{]),Jih<i,'VMV^.,viui,\\\\,  Jill, hia,  ia, 
Sam.  et  cut.,  how  many  !  how  much  '. 

FiSl,  Sam.,  (///,  Haw.  Nuk.,  to  pe<.d. 

/'V.s'/  (!), ,/('/(/,  Jihifilii,  Tong.,  to  entangle, 
entwine ;  iil  (coiitracte<l  from  nihi, 
(Jram.  ^  l),  ifiir'i.,  N.  '/..,  rushes;  also, 
to  lie  enlangi'd  in  rushes;  /i/'i.  Tab., 
ii,  Kar.  Mang.,  entangling,  ensnaring; 
hilii.  Haw.,  the    running,  branching. 


i 


it 


■r 


300 


PHILOLOGY. 


niul  nitwining  of  vinos, — hia,  hiliia, 

ciitanyU'il ;  Jiji,  Niik.,  a  net  of  cocon- 

nut  fibres. 
jf}{///?,  Tnh.,  tatriiii,  N.  Z.,  tail,  Rnr., 

liihihi,  Ilnw.,  to  oiisimrc. 
Fita/ita,  Snm.,  ilaitu,  Hnw.,  etaeta,  Tnh., 

strong,  liiirily,  vulinnt ; — itoilo,  'J'lih., 

iirdcnt,  bold,  rngor,  strong. 
Fiti,    Niik.  I'lik.,  iriti,  N.  Z.,  «<«,  Rar. 

Mnng.,  /(///,  Tr.h.  (law.,  to  ris«,  as  the 

sun,  to  appear,  come. 
FiliiJii  (?),    itiiju,    Rar.,     hiiia,    Tnh., 

hifiiia.  Haw.,  Ilic  rising  of  the  sun, — 

hence,  the  east. 
JPUi,  Sam.   Tong.,  the  Viti  or  Fecjec 

Islands,  i.  c.  the  Eastern  Land.   (V.  p. 

170.) 
Fti'ajili,  Sam.,  to  deceive,  deny  (act  the 

Feejee) ;  faktifiti,  Tong.,  to  apologize. 
PUi,  Sam.  Tong.,  to  fillip,  snap  with  ihe 

fingers. 
Majitijili,   Sam.,    restless ;    nuihitihUi, 

Haw.,  to  spatter,  fiap;  maliili.  Haw., 

to  vibrate,  liop,  jump;  nuiuili,  N.  Z., 

to  hop,  jump;  hiili,  Rnr.;  oliili,  Tah., 

to  pull  up,  or  out. 
Filu,  seven  (Oram.  §  30). 
Fill,  Fak.  Tong.  Tab.,  satiate,  tired  M-ith, 

sick  of;  fill,  Sam.,  vexed. 
''  0  {]),  fixiki,  Tong.,  /«('(',  Sam.,  hmiwi. 

Haw.,  lioiiMi,  Tah.,  oroya,  Rnr.,  ore, 

.Mang.,  to  give. 
Hu,  N.  Z.  Tah.  Haw.,  to  bring,  convey, 

give, — homiii,  bring  here, or  give  me; 

hixitii,  \.  Z.,  oatu,  Rnr.,  give  him. 
to,  fnfo,  Sam.,  to  doctor,  to  cure;  holioii- 

roijo,  N.  Z.,  to  make  ]ience  (see  luijo). 
Foa,   Sam.   Tong.,  to  burst,  split  open, 

be  broken ;  ai.  Haw.,  to  burst  forth, 

as  a  swollen  stream;    to  split,  as  a 

board  or  log. 

Foe,  Tong.,  n  ball,  n  lump, — one,  whole ; 
hoe,  Tab.,  single,  only,  one, — teline,  a, 
an,  one  (indef.  art..  Gram.  §  I'-i) ;  j)oe, 
N.  Z.,  a  ball ;  jme,  Hnw.  Nuk.,a  com- 


pany, collection,  cluster,  sign  of  plural 
(Oram.  §  14);  poepoe,  Haw.,  round, 
globular;  Rar.,  mass,  substance,  size. 
/'«',  Tah.  Rar.  Mnng.,  a  pearl. 

Foki,  Fak.  Tciiig.,  fi)'i,  Snm.,  hoki,  N.  Z. 
Pan., /(o'i,  Tnh.  Hnw.,oAj,  Rnr.  Afnng., 
to  return, — (adv.),  again,  nist),  indeed. 

f  OIU,  fo/o/ii,  Sam.  Tong.,  honi,  lio/umi, 
N.  Z.  Tnh.,  hotii,  hohiila,  Hnw.,  ho/iott, 
Nuk.,  to  spread  out,  unfold. 

Folau,  Snm.  Tong.,  volan,  Viti,  jmraii, 
Tnr.,  to  voyage, — a  vessel  of  any 
kind,  a  fleet ;  faraii,  Tah.,  hiilaii. 
Haw.,  a  canoe-house,  a  shed  under 
which  canoes  are  kept. 

Fou),  Sam.  Tong.,  Wo,  N.  Z.,  Iioromi, 
Tab.,  on,  ornpii,  Mang.,  to  swallow. 

r  ono,  Sam.  Tong.,  a  council,  public  as- 
sembly. 

Fo/lO,  Snm.,  Iiotio,  N.  Z.  Haw.,  oiio,  Rar., 
to  mend,  ns  n  garment  or  net ;  Jbno, 
Tong.,  to  inlay  carved  work. 

Fomi,  Snm.  Tong.,  honii,  Tah.  Haw. 
Nuk.,  oiiii,  Mang.,  n  tortoise. 

T  Oya,  or  fin)a,  Snm.,  top,  surfncc,  top- 
knot of  linir,  flower  of  a  pinnt ;  fin)ii, 
Tong.,  surface,  top,  summit  ;  Jh/oijii, 
Sam.  Tong.,  head,  face,  fcnturcs,  used 
only  in  speaking  of  a  chief;  hohoa. 
Tab.,  image,  likeness. 

Fose  (!),  /«//c,Tong.,  I'W'f,  Viti,  Aosc,  Rot., 
Ji)c,  lioe,  or,  Snm.,  et  cn't.,  a  paddlo, — 
to  paddle,  row. 

Fose  (?),  fn/ie,  Toiig.,  roc'V,  Viti,  ftore, 
Tnh.,  Iio/e,  Hnw.,  to  peel,  strip. 

Fotil,  Tong.,  h(ita.  Haw.,  to  press. 

I' otu  (J),  fotii-maimva,  Tong.,  the  right 
auricle  of  the  heart ;  hotii  te  matiava, 
Nuk.,  to  draw  the  breath  ;  hotii.  Haw., 
asthma  (sec  ntamiva  and/atu.) 

Foil,  linii,  ou,  ubiq.,  new,  recent, — again, 
anew. 

Fu,  Tong.,  hu,  N.  Z.,  to  pull  up. 

Fidi,  Sam.  Tong.,   huti,   N.  Z.  Tah. 


POLYNESIAN    LEXICON. 


301 


How,  Niik.,  7</i,  Rar.  Maiig.,  to  pull, 
draw  u|),  pluck. 

Fu  (?),  fufu,  Tong.,  vitni,  Vit.,  hiina, 
N.  Z.,  Tiili.  Hiiw.,  iind,  Rnr.  Mang., 
Iiiilo,  ronccnl  (.we  ««). 

r  It,  Tong.,  great,  whole,  entirely,— /««, 
nil,  every,  universnlly,  wholly, — kiia, 
Tiih.,  «rt,  Kar.,  earnestly,  strongly, 
entirely ;  fua,  Sntn.,  merely,  only, 
without  cause,  without  success ;  ])u, 
Uar.,  earnestly,  strongly, — authority, 
source  of  power,  master;  pii,  N.  Z. 
Nuk.,  strongly,  absolutely,  es|)ecially, 
merely,  only;  Tah.,  whole,  alto- 
gether ;  Haw.,  togetlier. 

Fua,  Sam.  Tong.,  hua,  N.  Z.  Ilaw.,  mi, 
Rnr.,  hiirro,  Tah.,  vuu,  Viti,  iiu  (or 
)/((),  Tar.,  fruit. 
Hua,  N.Z.  Haw.,  to  s|)rout,  grow,  l)ear 
fruit ;  fud,  Sam.  Tong.,  iiai,  Mang., 
to  begin. 

Fua,  Tong.,  the  shape ;  hiuthiia,  N.  Z., 
likeness,  similitude, — iiliiia,  looks,  np- 
|K'arnnce,  —  iiiikii-ahua,  to  pretend, 
ft^gn  ;  aiuhiia,  Ilnw.,  to  lie  a  hypo- 
crite. 

t  ua,  Sam.,  hua.  Haw.,  envious,  jealous. 

t  Ue  (!),  fiirfue,  Sam.,  a  species  of  wild 
vine ;  hue,  N.  Z.  Nuk.  Haw.,  pohuc, 
Tah.,  the  gourd,  convolvulus  Hnizili- 
cnsis. 

Fuke  {'.),fu>,  Sam.,  hukc,  N.  Z.,  to  lake 
food  out  of  an  oven  ;  liuf.  Haw.,  to 
unload  a  ship. 

T  Ufa,  fufula,  Sam.  Tong.,  huhua,  Nuk., 
to  swell,  swollen. 

r  ull,  hurt,  hull,  uri,  hid,  ubi(|.,  to  turn 
or  roll  over, — upset. 

Fulu  (?),  J'ufulu,  Sam.  Tong.,  vuluvulu, 

V'iti,  pulu.  Haw.,  to  wash  ;  pupu  (qu. 

puptiu  /),  Nuk.,  to  rinse. 
Fulu  (\),  fulufulu,  huruhuru,  hultthulu, 

uruuTU,  huuhuu,  ubiq.,  the  short  hair 

of  the  bmly,  fur,  feathers. 

76 


Fulu,  ten  (Gram.  ^  30). 

/'  USt,  fusifusi,  Sam.,  to  bind,  to  tie,  as  a 
bundle  or  sheaf;  hui,  N.  Z.,  to  gather, 
— huihui,  N.  Z.,  hui.  Haw.,  to  unite, 
assemble  ;  huilahi.  Haw.,  girded, 
l)eltcd. 
l^uifui,  Tong.,  a  flo<;k  of  birds ;  huihui, 
Ilaw.,  a  bunch,  applied  tu  vegetables; 
hui.  Tab.,  ui,  Rar.,  a  company,  class, 
sign  of  plural  (Gram.  §  14);  lahiii. 
Haw.,  rahui,  N.  Z.,  a  company,  a 
collection  of  [)eople ;  kiiliui,  N.  Z.,  n 
flock,  a  hero  ;  Nuk.,  a  bunch  of  fruit. 

FuSU,  Sam.,  fuhu.  Haw.,  Ix>xing;  a  pugi- 
listic contest ;  huhu.  Maw.,  angry. 

Futa,  Tong.,  to  boast,  vaunt,~-/emufuta, 
to  strive  together,  contend ;  muJuUi, 
Sam.,  mtJtuta,  Tah.,  to  rise  up;  ma- 
huta.  Haw.,  to  flee  away. 

Futt,  Tong.  Fak.  Tikopia,  vutuU,  Viti, 
banana. 

1'  Uyo  (?),  vupo,  Viti,  a  child-in-law, — vet- 
ruijoui,  the  relation  of  child  and  parent- 
in-law. 
Iluijoni,  N.  Z.,  Nuk.,  ngoai,  Rar.,  hooai. 
Tab.,  huiioai.  Haw.,  a  parent-in-law. 
Uundoya,  N.  Z.,  unnija,  Kar.,  hutioa, 
Tah.,  hunona.  Haw.,  Nuk.,  a  child- 
in-law. 


H 


By  referring  to  the  Grammar  it  will  be 
seen  that  the  letter  h  is  not  one  of  the  ori- 
ginal elenienl.s  of  the  Polynesian  speech, 
but  is  a  variation  either  of  s  or  f.  A  few 
words,  however,  must  be  given  under  this 
initial,  until  further  investigations  shall  de- 
termine to  which  of  these  radical  letters 
(s  or/)  they  properly  belong. 

Hererei,   Pau.,  erri,  Mang.,  eei,  Nuk., 

cocoa-nut. 
Hohonu,  N.  Z.  Tab.  Haw.  Nuk.,  oonu, 

Uar.  Mang.,  deep. 


302 


PHILOLOGY. 


L»  ■  I 


Hoko,   \.  Z.  Niik.,  hon,  Tnh.,  oko,  Knr.  1 

.Mnng.,  tu  buy  and  sell,  to  trade. 
Holua,   Haw.,  to  pliilc  down    hill   on  n 

sledge :  home.  Tali.,  to  swim  in  the 

surl",  to  flojit. 
Hope,  \.  '/..  Tnh.  Haw.  Niik.,  ojh;  Uar. 

Mang.,  end,  exireniily,  hinder  part. 
HcupO,    Niik.,   riujio,   Mang.,   the   heart ; 

/lOiijM,  Haw.,  the  thorax,  the  region 

ol"  the  heart, — palpitation  of  the  heart. 
Huhu,  N.  '/,.,  till,  Kar.,  a  moth ;  hii/iii, 

Nuk.,  an  insect  of  the  bee  kind. 
Hukahuka,  N.  Z.,  to  last,  endure;  uka, 

Mang.,  firm. 
Hume    Pau.,  a  girdle ;  mnlo.   Haw.,  to 

bind  round  the  loins  as  a  girdle. 
Htimu,  \uk.,  to  bind  tight ;  Haw.,  to  sew 

cloth,  to  fasten  together. 
Hupo,    Haw.,    hitj)fliHjx;   Tall.,   savage, 

barbiirous,  ignorant. 
HulU,  a  species  of  tree, — at  Tah.   and 

Nuk.,  the   Barringtonia  speciosa ;   at 

N.   Z.,   the    Phjilocladus    trichoma- 

noidcs. 


I 


/,  a  particle  prefixed  to  the  accusative  case 
(Gram.  §  22). 

/,  part,  sign  of  past  time  (Gram.  §  52). 

/,  prep,  in,  by  (Gram.  §  23). 

la,  pron.,  he,  she,  it,  &c.  (Gram.  §  39). 

Ifi,  Sam.,  Tong.,  to  blow  with  the  mouth. 

Iji,  Sam.  Tong.  ilti,  Nuk.,  a  species  of 
chcsnut  (see  lata). 

Ika,  i'fl,  ubiq.,  fish. 

Ike,  Nuk.,  Mang.,  »V,  Sam.  Haw.,  ikcike, 
Tar.,  mallet  used  in  beating  out  bark- 
cloth  ;  ike,  N.  Z.,  to  bruise  bark. 

Da,  Tong.,  ini,  N.  Z.,  ia,  Nuk.,  iliia. 
Haw.,  a  mole,  mark  on  the  skin. 

Ih,  Sam.,  iri,  Vili,  ii,  Tong.,  a  fan  (see 
lalii). 


Ilo,  Sam.  Tall.,  to  know,  perceive,  see. 
Ftikdiln,  Tong.,  fa'iii/o,  Sam.,  to  show, 

announce,  U'loken ;    hooiiiilo.   Haw., 

to  predict  evil. 
Faktiil(»i»a,   Tong.,  fit'ailinigu,   Sam., 

iikaiio,  Kar.,  akairoiiga,  Mag.,  htxii- 

Iniia,  liuiloiiu.   Haw.,  a  sign,  token. 

mark,  trace;  uakaiio,  N.Z.,  to  carve 

(i.  o.  to  murk). 
Ilo,  Maw.,  iri).  Tab.,  io,  Nuk.,  a  maggot. 

Ina,  if,  lliat;  sign  of  conditional  and  sub- 
junctive moods  (Gram.  §  53). 

IlUl,  ubiq.,  to  drink. 

lyoa,  .Sam.  N.  Z.  Rar.,  hima,  Tong., 
ikni,  iiioa,  Nuk.,  inoa.  Haw.,  ioa, 
Tab.,  name. 

Io,  Sam.  Tong.  Fak.,  yes  ;  1  law.,  true,  R'al. 

IpH,  Sain.  Nuk.  Tong.,  a  cup;  Tah. 
Mang.  Haw.,  a  calabash,  a  cup. 

Istl,  ihii,  ill,  \\hu\.,  the  nose. 

Ita,  Sam.  Tong.,  niaita,  makilii.  Hat., 
anger,  angry. 

Iti,  ilili,  Sam.,   ili,  ti,  Tong.,  iti,  Tah. 
Haw.  Nuk.,  gili,  Rar.,  small;  itiiti, 
Mang.,  child,  infant. 
Teiti,  Haw.  Mang.,  a  child ;  toili,  Nuk., 

a  boy. 
Kiiiti,  N.  Z.,  oili,  Rar.,  haiti.  Haw., 
narrow. 


K 


Ka,  V(,  verbal  particle.  (Gram.  §§50,53.) 
Kafa,  \ifii,  kiilui,  'aha,  kaa,  ubiq.,  (ex- 
cept N.  Z.,)  sinnet,  or  cord  braided 
from  the  husk  of  the  cocoa-nut ;  'aha. 
Haw.,  a  prayer  supposed  to  be  strong 
in  holding  the  kingdom  together,  as 
sinnet  is  strong  in  binding;  kaha, 
Nuk.,  a  charm  or  spell,  N.  Z.,  strength, 
power, — strong. 
Kafika{l.),  kaldka,  Nuk.,  ahia,  Tah., 
oliia.  Haw.,  native  apple, — (cugcnia 
Malaccensis.) 


POLYNESIAN    LEXICON. 


303 


Kafu,  Niun,  knfii,  Tori};.,  'nfii,  Snni., 
kiihii,  N.  '/..  I'mi.  Niik.,  lam,  Riir. 
Miiiig.,  '(//;»,  Tiih.  I  law.,  rlolliiiifi, — 
III  clollic  ;  l,<ifii.  Toil};.,  licd-fiiv<Tiiig. 

Kahi,  iiihihi  (<|ii.  ?),   N.  /.,  uihiihi, 

Nuk.,  tukdi,  IJar.  Mali};.,  to«/(/,  Tali., 

trilii,  littlii,  Itr/ii,  I  law.,  to  tread,  Irani- 

plc,  staiii|i  willi  llie  loot. 
liat,  \ii,  ubii|.,  to  oat. 

Pid-Ktii,  Toiig. ,  /iV(-«i,  Sam.,   hiti-lcui, 

N.  Z.,  desire  to  eat,  liiiiiger;  liia-iii. 

Tail.,  thirst. 
Kuiiid,  N.  Z.  Mang.,  '"ij)«,  Sam.,  ainti, 

Haw.,  A«iW((,  kiiikit,  Nuk.,  kdiiniya. 

Toll};.,  liiod,  a  meal. 
Kaiija,  Sam.,  iiiijd,  Toiig.,  laiiiily,  kin- 

di'(^d   (i.  G.   lliose   who  eat   tog<'lher); 

hence,  kditjd,  N.   Z.,  a  home,   re.si. 

deiice,  town;   kdifjd,    Mang.,  kiiikd, 

kdiiid,  Nuk. ,«(«((,  Haw.,  laiid,(:ounlry. 
Kdi,  \.  Z.  V'iti,  u  native,  inhahilant,  per- 
son in  general ;  kdkdi,  Toiig.  people ; 

'(/'«(',  Sam.,  town,  village. 
Kaisrl  (>),  kdilm,  Tong.,  kein,  Kar.  Pau., 

eitt,  Tuh.,  td/uic,  N.  Z.,  to  steal. 
Kaka  (?),  <«/,  Tah.  Haw.,  to  insult,  defy  ; 

VKikiikii,  Nuk.,  allronting,  vexatious, 

annoying. 
Ka/ii,  N.  Z.  Uar.  Mang.  Nuk.,  Wi,  Tah. 

Haw.,  the  neck, — properly  the  na|>e  of 

the  neck. 
Kala  {>),  kakdla,  Tong.,  kdkdrd,  N.  Z. 

Mang.,  kakaa,  Nuk.,  iila,ddla,  Huw., 

fragrant. 
Kala  (?),  kara,  Pnu.,  ara,  Tah.,  a/«.  Haw., 

a  pebble,  a  smooth,  round  stone;  krd, 

Nuk.,  a  stone,  or  stone  pestle. 
Kalae.a{i.),  kmwa,  Nuk.,  araea,   Tah., 

d/dra,  Haw.,  red  ochre. 
Kalajau,  Niua,  dldjiui,  Sam.,  fau.  Rot., 

the  check. 
Ralaya,   Tong.,   to   cry  out,  to  shout; 

'dlaijti,  Sam.,  karam,  N.  Z.,  to  call, 

to  summon ;  kdraga,  Kar.,  to  call,  to 

numc. 


Kale  (?),  kdrc,  Kar.  Mang.,  «yf,  Tah.,  ale. 
Haw.,  wave,  hillnw,  undulation  of  wa- 
ter ;  ktirc,  N. '/..,  kackdc,  Niik.,  reflec- 
tion of  light  from  running  water, 
glancing,  flashing. 

Kah  (!),  Id''dli,  Sam.,  the  spatlio  or  sprout 
of  the  cocoa-nut ;  hakdri,  Vixu. ,  lui'dri, 
'J'ali.,  dkdri,  Kar.,  the  cocoa-nut ;  ha- 
kdii,  \.  '/..,  a  feast, — al.>(o,  biids'-eggs. 
r(K's  offish,  .seed,  &C. 

halt,  'i'ong.  Vili,  dli,  Sam.,  a  wooden  pil- 
low. 

KallOt  (?),  karioi,  Pau.,  to  sing  and  dance ; 
arioi,  Tab.,  a  class  or  society  of  per- 
sons who  passed  their  time  in  festivitiDS 
and  the  practice  of  debauchery,  under 
the  .sanction  of  religion;  kdiui,  Nuk., 
a  p<'culiar  class  of  people,  under  cer- 
tain restrictions  from  the  tabu;  karioi. 
Mang.,  iniinoilcst. 

Kalo,  Tong.,  to  turn  aside  or  parry  a 
weapon ;  hilokdhi,  to  shake,  as  the 
head;  «/o,  Tah.  Haw.,  to  dodge,  to 
elude  the  stroke  of  a  weapon,  to  move 
out  of  the  way  ;  ahxilo,  Haw.,  to  turn 
this  way  and  that,  as  in  fear. 

Kamo,  Tong.,  kdkaiiio,  N.  Z,,  dmo,  Haw., 
to  wink. 
Kakdiiio,  Tikop.,  a  flash  of  lightning. 

Kamo,  Mong.  Nuk.,  to  steal. 

Kanae,  Tong.  N.  Z.,  anac,  Sam.  Haw., 
a  s|)ecies  of  mullet, 

Katiapa,  N.  Z.  Kar.,  anapa,  Tah.  Haw., 
kddjHiapa,  Nuk.,  to  flash,  to  shine 
forth. 

Kano,  Tong.,  'diio,  Sam.,  the  inmost  sub- 
stance of  a  thing,  the  kernel,  flesh : 
'aim.  Haw.,  meaning,  signification, 
moral  quality,  character,  likeness; 
kdkdiio,  N.  Z.  Nuk.,  kdnohino,  Mang., 
anoaim.  Haw.,  seed,  kernels. 
Kdno  o  he  mata,  Tong.,  boll  of  the  eye  ; 
kanuhi,  N.  Z.,  the  eye  ;  rniohi.  Haw., 
ball  of  the  eye. 

Kaya,  N.  Z.,  to  swear,  to  curse ;  anaana, 


304 


PHILOLOGY. 


:        '.'\ 


:  '.n 


How.,  sorcery,  a   prnycr  to   procure 

the  death  of  a  |)erson. 
Kao,  Unr.,  no.  Haw.,   to   sprout,  to   put 

lorlli  leaves. 
Kaon,  Riir.,  tun,  Tah.,  to  crow  as  a  cock 

(S<X!  tiod). 

Kaokao,    N.  Z.  Uar.   Pnu.    Nuk.,  <in<m, 

Ilnw.,  the   Hide   of  the   IkhIv  ;   notio, 

Sam.,  the  arm-pit. 
Kapa  (?),  hip(il;ii2Hi,  Tong.,  to  flap  the 

wings ;   apnnpa,   Sam.,   fins ;    Haw., 

changeable,  unsettled. 
Kapakau,  'I'ong., '(ipn''tiii,  Sam.,  pdknii, 

N.  '/,.,pfaH,  \Ks\t.,  pfhcu,  eheii.  Haw., 

keheii,  Nuk.,  wings  (see  jxirirau). 
Piikaii,  N\i\s.., imkiiukau,  N.  Z.,  a  child's 

kite. 
Kape,  Rar.  Afang.,  to  paddle,  row ;  api, 

Haw.,  to  flap,  shako, — gills  of  a  fish. 
Kape,  or  k(il)f,  Tong.,  to   curse,  revile  ; 

nj>e,   Tuh.,   to    assail,   insult ;    kiipe, 

N.  Z.,  to  sin,  to  transgress  a  law. 
Kape,  Nuk.,  Uar.,  k(il>c,  Tong.,  <ij>e,  Sam. 

Tuh.  Haw.,  arum  coslatum. 

KapU,  Mang.,  to  enclose,  contain, — a  cup, 

vase  ;  kapii,  Uar.,  apit.  Haw.,  a  cup; 

kfipiik'ipK,  Nuk.,    to   take   up    water 

with  a  cup. 
Apu-lima,  Snm.,(ipii-rim<i,  Haw.,  kapn 

nil  riga,  N.  Z.,  the  palm  or  hollow  of 

the  hand. 
Kasa   []),  \i'nsn,  Sam.,  kuknha,  Tong., 

kd,  kaka,  N.  Z.,  kd,  Mang.  Nuk.,  a, 

aa.  Haw.,  hot,  burning,  fiery. 
KaSO  (?),  kaho,  Tong.,   kakaho,    N.  Z., 

kakno,   Mang.,  aelio,  Tah.,  ahuawa. 

Haw.,  a  reed  or  rush. 

Kasoa,  Niua,  asoa,  Sam.,  kahoa,  Tong., 

a  necklace,  beads,  &c. 
Kata,  \Uu,  ubiq.,  to  laugh. 
Katl,  Uar.  V'iti,  ati.  Haw.,  to  bite  ;  fUi, 

Sum.   Tah.,   to   bite   through,    to   go 

entirely  through  ;   kati,  N,  Z,,  sulTi- 

ciently,  enough. 


Kato,  Tong.  Viti,  ato,  Sam.,  bag,  basket. 

Katoa,  Fak.  N.  Z.,  Rar.,  Pan.,  tUoa, 
Tah.,  kntai,  Tong.,  all,  the  whole; 
oini.  Haw.,  a  whole,— distinct,  sepa- 
rate. 
Ktiton,  Tong.,  atoatoti.  Haw.,  to  as- 
semble. 

Kail,  Fak.  Tong.,  'aM,  Sam.  Rar.,  a  col- 
lective particle,  a  plural  sign  (Gram. 
§14). 

Tekaii,  Tong.  N^. '/..,  Irktiii,  taktiii,  Nuk., 
takiiii,  Uar.  Mang.,  ta'ai/,  Tah.,  a 
score ;  UCaii,  Haw.,  two  score  (Gram. 
k  31)- 
Kail,  Tong.,  kakaii,  Nuk. ;  au,  Sam. 
Haw.,  stem  of  a  plant. 

'Alt,  Sam.  Haw.,  kiikiiit,  N.  Z.,  handle, 
helve  (of  an  a.xe,  chisel,  ice.) 

Knit -nut  II,  Tong.,  kau-iire,  N.  Z.,  kau- 
inui,  Nuk.,  ttii-limii.  Haw.,  the  stick 
which  is  rubbed  on  a  piece  of  wood  to 
produce  fire. 

Kiiit-tmtc,  Nuk.,  aii-mitf,  Haw.,  kau- 
urti,  N.  Z.,  the  piece  of  wood  on 
which  the  friction  is  made. 

Kail,  'ail,  ubiq.,  to   swim,   pass    through 
water,  wade. 
Kiiiikiiit,  Tong.,  nutiii.  Haw.,  to  bathe, 
wash. 

Kau,  Fak.,  'nil,  Sam.,  to  give,  bring  to. 
'All,   Sum.,  to  send,  direct,  command ; 
/mil,  Sam.,  fckuii,  Tong.,  to  send  a 
message,  to  oriler. 

Kaiia,  kaiiuka,  N.  Z.,  ana,  Sam.  Nuk., 
«//«,Tong.,  aiiau,  Tah.,  anraka,  Rar., 
desist !  forlxmr  I  do  not !  (Gram.  §  53); 
mill.  Haw.,  to  forbid,  refuse. 

Kaiiae,  Mang.,  kauvae,  Rar.,  auvae, 
Snm.,  koiiae,  Tong.  N.  Z.,  auwae. 
Haw.,  kouvne,  Nuk.,  the  lower  jaw, 
the  chin,  the  lower  part  of  the  cheek. 
Kauvae,  Wat.,  to  reprove,  rebuke  (qu.  to 
jaw  ?) 

Kava,  Tong.  Rar.  Nuk.,  'ava,  Sam.  Tah. 


<     :i 


POLYNESIAN    LEXICON. 


;}05 


llnw.,   the   piper   mdhysticuin ;   also 

the  l)evcriige  mnde  from  its  root. 
Kuvd,  iN.  Z.,  the  pi|)cr  rxcclsum. 
Kuim,  N.  '/..,  kiwii,  Knr.  Miing.  Niik., 

'(i\iva.  Sum.,  mciuiwa,   Hiiw.,   sour, 

bitter,  pungent. 
Kakiivii,  Tong.,  kahiira,  N.  Z.,  sweat. 

Kava,  Tong.,  fwa,  Sam.,  l)oaril. 

Kavake  (?),  kmi-ukc,  I'nu.,  mac.  Tali., 
the  ni(Min. 

Kave,   Tong.  Nuk.,  kdtcc,   N.  Z.,  ntr, 
Sam.,  au-c.  Haw.,  to  carry,  take. 
Karekave,  Tong.,  to  swing ;  kave,  Mang., 
tit'iire,  Tab.,  ta'aut;   Haw.,   to  sus- 
pend, hang  up. 

Ke,  Tong.,  V,  Sam.,  thou, — used  only  as 
a  nominative  to  a  verb  in  certain  cases 
(Gram.  §  39). 

Ke,  Tong.,  to  quarrel,  dispute,  wrangle; 
ee,  Sam.,  ir.  Tab.  Haw.  Nuk.,  to 
insult,  provoke,  pick  a  quarrel. 

Kea,  Nuk.,  en.  Haw.,  tortoise-shell. 

Kefll,  Tong.,  fla.\en ;  keliii,  Nuk.,  brown 
(applied  to  hair);  elm.  Haw.,  red  or 
sandy-haired. 

Kei,  N.Z.,  ei,  Sam.  Rar.,  prep.,  at,  with,  in. 

Kek  (>),  kelckclc,  Tong.,  eleele,  Sam., 
earth,  soil,  dirt ;  kiica,  Tong.,  elia, 
Sam.,  dirty,  stained  with  earth. 
Kerekcrr,  Kar.,  creere.  Tab.,  e/ee/c.  Haw., 
keekee,  Nuk.,  black,  brown,  dark- 
colored. 

Kelt,  'fli,  keri,  'eri,  kei,  ubiq.,  to  dig. 

Kemt,  Mang.,  to  depart,  disappear ;  emi. 
Haw.,  to  retire,  subside,  ebb. 

Kese  (?),  '«(•,  Sam.,  kehe,  Tong.,  ke,  N.  Z. 
Rar.  Mang.  Nuk.,  c.  Tab.  Haw.,  dif- 
ferent, other, — strange,  foreign. 

Keta   (?),   ketnkcta,  Rar.,  eta  or  rtiteta. 
Haw.,  foul,  gross,  filthy. 
Kcle,  Rar.  Mang.,  ^ete,  Sam.  Haw.,  a 
basket. 

Kete,  Tong.  Viti,  the  stomach,  the  belly. 

77 


Ketl'l,  Nuk.,  to  jump,  to  jerk,  to  e.xcavato 
with  a  sudden  motion ;  kctii,  Tong., 
lame,  to  hobble  ;  ctii.  Haw.,  to  root,  as 
a  pig  ;  kelii,  N.Z.,  to  displace  a  corpse; 
ketii,  Mang.,  to  seek,  search  for. 
Ketl,  Nuk.,  Rar.,  keiikeu,  Mang.,  ciieii. 
Haw.,  to  move,  agitato,  excite. 
Ell,  Sam.,  to  remove,  as  a  mote  from 

the  eye. 
Kcii,  Nuk.,  eii.  Haw.,  mischievous. 
Ki,  'i,  ubiq.,  to,  towards  (Gram.  §  21). 
A7,  N.  Z.  Rnr.,  t.  Tab.,  full. 
Ki,  Mang.,  t,  Haw.,  to  speak ;  ki,  N.  Z, 
Rar.,  to  answer. 
Ki,  Tong.,  to  whistle,  chirp,  squeak, — 
as  birds,  rats,  &c. 
Kia,  'id,  kc,  conj.,  if,  that, — sign  of  con- 
ditional and  subjunctive  moods  (Gram. 
^     §53). 
Kte,   Tong.   Viti,   'ie,   Sam.,   mat ;    kie, 
Mang.,  ie,  Tar.,  sail  of  a  canoe  (com- 
monly made  of  mats). 
A7A'0,  N.  Z.  Mang.  Nuk.,  to.  Haw.,  flesh, 

meat. 
Kilt,  Fak.  Tong.,  kiri,  N.  Z.  Rar.,  iri. 
Tab.,  Hi,  Haw.,  kii,  Nuk.,  skin,  bark, 
rind, — also,  a  lile  or  rasp  (originally 
made  of  shark's  skin). 
Kilikili  (?),  jV"'//,  Sam.  Haw.,  kirikiri, 

N.  Z.  Tar.,  gravel,  pebbles. 
Kiln,  Tong.,  'ilu,  Sam.,  a  hundred  thou- 
sand ;  kill,  Mang,,  twenty  thousand ; 
Fak.,  a  large,  but  indefinite  number ; 
ill.  Tab.,  a  million  (Gram.  §  30). 
Kinit,  Rar.,  imi.  Tab.  Haw.  Nuk.,  kiimi, 

Tong.,  to  seek,  search. 
Kimoa,   Tong.  Tar.,   imoa,  Sam.,   rat. 

mouse. 
Ktnaki,  N.  Z.,  inaki,  Mong.,  inai,  Nuk., 
victuals  added  at  a  meal,  as  a  relish 
to  the  principal  dish. 
Kini,    N.  Z.    Viti,    kiniki.   Tar.,    iviti. 

Haw.,  to  pinch. 
Kino,  N.  Z.  Rar.  Mang.  Nuk.,  two.  Tab, 


306 


P  1111.  O  L  O  Ci  Y. 


Hiiw.,  /.//■«,  Pan,,  liad;  j«oi//«,  Sum., 

nluiinlniililc,  lintdul. 
Iiioinn,  Shiii.   'I'uh.,   iiiiiimi,   Haw.,  In 

ilctrsi,  hale. 
Kiole  (I),  kiorc,  N.Z.  Mang.  I'au.,  'ialr, 

Sam.  IIiiw.,  nil,  mnusc. 
Kisi  (I.),  isi,  Sam.,  other,  ilillbrcnl ;  kikihi, 

Tong.,  to  opposf,  clash,  contradict. 
Kite,  Tonj;.,  to  view  at  n  distanco,  to  per- 
ceive, discern  ;  kil<;  N.  X.  Uar.  .Mang. 

Nuk.,  iti;  Tall.,  I  hiw.,  to  see,  to  know. 
AO,  V),  ubiii.,  a  particle  desinnatiiii;  the 

nominative  case  (liraiii.  ^  17). 
Ao,  the  root  of  the  pronoun  of  the  second 

|)erson  singular,  dual  and  plural.  Tor 

lUI  the  diiducts  but  the  Tongan  (Uram. 

Kg,  N.  Z.  Rar.  Nuk.,  6,  Tah.  Maw.,  a 
sharp  stick  used  in  cultivating  the 
ground  ;  hence,  to  dig,  plant. 

A'',  \.Z.  Rar.  .Mang.,  u,  Tah.  Haw.,  there, 
that  place. 

Koakoa,  N.  Z.  Mang.  Nuk.,  moti,  Tah. 
Maw.,  joy,  joyful. 

Knje,  'o/c,  kohe,  knr,  ^olir,  ubiq.   (except 
N.  Z.)  the  bamboo. 
Ko/c,  Tikop.,  kolir,  N.  Z.  Nuk.,  a  knife 

(origimlly  of  bamboo). 
O/te,  Tah.   arrow. 

Ao/?  (?),  ofi,  Sam  ,  to  have  space  to  enter ; 
ko/ii,  N.  Z.,  tu  put  in,  to  gather  into ; 
koi,  Mang.,  old,  Haw.,  to  collect, 
gather  up. 

Koi,  Rar.  Nuk.,  oi.  Haw.,  sharp,  a  point. 

Koka,  Tong.,  V«,  Sam.,  noa,  Tah.,  a 
tree  (ficus  prolixa)  from  whose  bark  a 
brown  dye  is  obtained  for  staining 
cloth;  oil,  Haw.,  "  a  species  of  woo<l 
resembling  mahogany ;"  knka,  Nuk., 
black  or  blue  (applied  to  cloth). 

Koke,  Itar.,  w,  Tah.,  a  sword  (?). 

Koki,  N.  Z.  Mang.  Nuk.,  oi.  How.,  pin- 
koki,  Rar.,  pirioi,  Tah.,  lame,  to  limp. 

Koko  (!),  ckoko,  Rar.,  to  doubt,  to  hesi- 


tate; o'li'i).  Haw.,  to  shrink,  to  Iw 
cautious,  parsimonious;  kuko,  N.  Z,, 
lean. 

hole,  Tong.,  '(j/c,  .Sam.,  to  In-g. 

Koklo  (?),  kiiirrn,  N.  Z.  Rar.,  orrro,  Tah., 
olelo.  Haw.,  to  s|H'ak ;  s|)eech,  lan- 
guage ((|U.  from  uliln,  tongue  .'). 

Koll  (.'),  nli,  it/ii)/i,  Sam.  Haw.,  joy,  de- 
light, pleasurable  excitement;  koikii 
and  koiiKi,  Nuk.,  amusement,  diver- 
sion, li'slivily. 
Tiioriiin,  Rar.,  to  stir  up,  excite  ;  oriori. 
Tall.,  to  vivify,  create. 

KolO,  Tong.  Viti,  a  fortress,  a  li'iiced 
town;  ii/o,  Sam.,  a  place  of  refuge; 
kiiio,  Rar.,  an  enclosure,  wall. 

K.0I0U,  Tong.,  V«(,  Sam.,  riches,  pro- 
|H'rty ;  olud.  Haw.,  a  gill  made  to  a 
child  sixHi  aller  its  birth  ;  oroii,  Tah., 
a  least,  a  festival. 

Komu,  N.  Z.,  ointt.  Tall.,  a  small  udzc 
or  dibble. 

Komo,  N.  Z.  'J'ah.,  to  put  in,  as  to  a 
Itasket  or  sheath ;  kokomo,  Mang.,  to 
shut  up,  stop  up,  a  stopple,  cork ; 
koiiiv,  Nuk.,  a  wocden  cover  for  a 
gourd;  omo,  Haw.,  a  cover  for  a 
basket. 

Koua,    Tong.,   'o«rt,   Sam.,    intoxicated, 
poisoned ;    koiut,    Rar.    Mang.    Nuk., 
ona.  Haw.,  intoxicated. 
Komi,  Tong.,  ona,  Sam.,  unaoua.  Haw.. 

bitter,  unpalatable. 
Makona,  Tong.  N  .Z.  Rar.  Nuk.,  nut- 
ona,  Sam.  Haw.,  un\  Tar.,  full,  sati- 
ated with  food. 

Kopelu  (?),  ojkIu,  Haw.,  opcru,  Tah,, 
kojKu,  Nuk.,  the  mackerel  (scomber 
scomber). 

Kcpu,  N.  Z.  Rar.  Nuk.,  op«,  Tah.  Haw., 

the  belly,  abdomen. 
KOSU  (!),  kohii,  T(mg.  N.Z.  Nuk.,  olix. 

Haw.,  koii,  Rar.,  log,  vapor,  steam. 
Kota,  N.  Z.,  a  shell  to  scrape  with,  a 


POLYNESIAN    LEXICON. 


307 


plnno    iron;  otiiDia,  I  law.,   siiw-diist, 

tilings,  (In.'jjs,  crumbs;  oliiit/d,  Tomj;., 

N.  Z.   Tiili.,   rulihiili,    refuse ;     kutit, 

Vili,  tlic  (Iri'gs  (if  jiiiva. 
Kote,  Toiig.,  to  rlmtlcr, — giblK-rish  ;  ote, 

Sum.,  to  srnlil;  Haw.,  talliativc. 
Kotl,  'o/i,,  uliiq.,  to  cut. 
Kotllkll,  N.  Z.  Mang.,  oliiii.  Tali.,  nm. 

tiikii,  Nul<.,  iiiutiiii,  Sam.,  a    heron, 

crune. 
Otiiti,  Haw.,  to  sit  in  n  meditating  pos- 
ture, with  head  reclined. 
Ku,  Tong.,  'm,  Sam.,  I, — used   only  as 

nominative  to  a  verh, — also  the  root 

of  the  lirst  possessive  pronoun  in  all 

the  dialects  (Gram.  §§  39,  -lO). 
Klia,  \ia,  a  verbal  particle  (Gram.  §  49). 
Kujane,    Nuk.,   kimnr,    Mang.,    uhtini; 

Haw.,  n  spirit. 
Ktli,  N.  Z.  Mang.  Nuk.,  mother. 
Kllhu  (qu.  ?),  N. '/,.,  to  put  in,  nii.x  in  ;  kil, 

Kar.  Mang.,  to  saturate,  to  fill  with. 
Kufcinn,  Mang.,  hiccough  ;  iiiiia,  llaw., 

to  snap,  crack  as  a  whip. 
Kuku,  Tong.,  '«'»,  Sam.,  to  hold  fast,  to 

grasp ;   ki/kii,  N.  Z.i  any  thing  that 

holds  fast,  as  a  vice,  pincers,  tongs. 
Kuku,  Tong.  N.  Z.,  '«'«,  Sam.  Haw., 

the  muscle  (shell-fish). 
Kuku,  Vili,  the  nails,  to  hold   by  the 

nails  ;  Tong.,  to  grasp,  a  handful  (see 

mntikuku). 
Kuku,  Nuk.,   a  green    dove;    kukiipa, 

N.  Z.  Pau.,  uupii.  Tab.,  pigeon,  dove. 
Kula,  Viti,  ktilokula,  Tong.,  kura,  N.  Z. 

Mang.,   '«/■«,  Tah.,  %ila.  Haw.,  kua, 

Nuk.,  red. 
Kuh  (?),  kura,  N.  Z.  Mang.,  via.  Haw., 

lobster,  crayfish. 
Kuli,  Tong.,  'h/j,  Sam.,  ktiri,  Rar.  Mang., 

nri,  Tah.,  a  dog. 
Kulu,  Niua,  kuru,  Rur.  Pan.,  uru,  Tah., 

utu.  Haw.,  the  breadfruit. 
Kumala,  Tong.,  'umulu,  Sam.,  kunuim. 


N.  Z.  Mang.,  kuniiui  or  kimutwd, 
Nuk.,  umiiin,  Tah.,  ;«(/«,  Haw.,  the 
sweet  potato  (convolvulus  batatus). 

Knme,  .N.  Z.  Mang.,  7(mf,  Tah.  Haw.,  to 
pull,  draw  out,  lenglhim. 

Kutnete,  'umclc,  ubiq,,  a  1k)wI,  wooden 
trencher. 

Kumt,  \.Z.  Mnng.,  kukuini,  .\uk.,  iiini, 
Tah.  Haw.,  to  s(|U('cz(',  to  extend  by 
pressure,  to  clioke,  strangle. 

Kumi,  'long., ten,  used  only  in  numbering 
liillioms ;  kumi,  N.  Z.  Nuk.,  umi, 
Tah.,  ten  liilhoms ;  kumi,  Mang., 
iimi.  Haw.,  ten  (Gram.  §  32). 

Kumi,  Viti,  kumikumi,  Mung.  Pan.  Nuk., 
umiiimi,'Vn\\.  Haw.,  the  beard;  ku- 
mikumi,  Tong.,  the  chin. 

Kuokuo,  Mang.  Pau.,  wmo,  Tah.  Nuk.. 
white. 

Klipa,  N.  Z.,  to  belch;  v^;iO,  Haw.,  to 
devour  with  greediness. 

KupnyjO,  'ujM'ijit,  'ujienu,  ^upea,  ubiq.,  u 
seine,  net. 

Kupu,  N.  Z.,  '«7)»,  Sam.,  word,  lan- 
guage ;  ujm,  Tah.,  an  invocation  to 
the  gods ;  kupu,  Nuk.,  to  curse,  to 
blaspheme. 

KutU,  'ulu,  ubiq.,  louse, — vermin. 

Utu-rcre, Tah;  musquito;  iitu-lele.  Haw., 
flea. 


La,  the  root  of  the  pronouns  of  the  third 
person,  dual  and  plural,  in  all  the 
dialects  but  the  Tongan  (Gram.  §  39). 

■Lu,  ra,  a,  ubiq.,  the  sun,  a  day. 

La,  Sam.  Tong.,  ra,  N.  Z.  Rar.,  a,  Nuk. 
a  sail. 

Ld,  or  laid,  Sam.  Haw.,  rara,  Tah.  Mang.. 
branch  of  a  tree. 
Rara,   N.  Z.,  a   rib ;  alapa,  Tong.,  a 
limb,  a  haunch  (qu.  branch  ?). 


808 


i>  in  I. oLO(i  V. 


Liia,  I  law.,  Ilia,  Tnh.,  aiicred  (pcrlinp« 
more  oorri'dly  lil  iiikI  rA, — s«!  nii). 

ItOe,  rar,  nr,  ul)i(|.,  livrclii'iiil. 

Luf'd,  /ii/n/ii/ii,  Ti)ii>;.,  Hal  ;  sii/ii/n/nlii, 
Siiin.,  /ii/iii,  pii/ii/iii/ii/ii',  I  law.,  jxiii- 
fuuihii,  Niik.,  jHirAm,  Har.,  jMirahn- 
nihil,  'I'lih.,  rumlmriinilKi,  Vili,  lirond, 
wiilo. 
Im/ui,  Haw.,  lo  cxtcml,  sprcail  out, — to 
publish,  circulatp  j  iii/iii,  N.  /.,  lo 
Bhow. 

Laja,  Sam.  'rung.,  spots  liuriit  in  llie 
skill ;  Fak.,  a  ciitaiieoiiM  tliscaso,  ring- 
worm. 

Lahlli  (qii.  ?),  Haw.,  ruhiii,  N.Z.  Tali., 
aiiui,  Nuk.,  to  prevent,  prohibit,  re- 
strict. 

Lailai  (?),  mimi,  N.Z.  Tab.,  lahUnlii, 
Haw,,  thin. 

LuKdH,  Fak.,  Mail,  Sain.  Haw.,  iikaii, 
Tong.,  rakiiii,  N.  Z.  Rar.  Mang., 
rrtflM,  Tnli,,  akiiii  or  kaiiii,  Nuk., 
A."nf«,  V'iti,  tree,  wo<hI  ((|ii.  (Voin  kiiii, 
stalk,  stem  ?). 

La/i'U  {>.),  rakiiriikii,  N.  Z.  Mang.,  »y/'«. 
Tab.,  lo  scrntcb,  scrape;  /iin.  Haw., 
to  feel  after  a  thing. 

IMlO  (?),  laliiu.  Haw.,  sahihiii,  Sam.,  pu- 
ram,  Tah.,  scattered  j  jHirarii,  Nuk., 
broken  to  pieces. 

Lalt,  Haw.,  rari.  Tab.,  wet. 

Law,  raro,  ao,  ubiq.,  below. 

Maiitiinio,  Sam.  Tong.,   moraro,   Rar., 
low,  not  high. 

Lama,  Sam.,  oww,  Nuk.,  the  candle-nut 
(aleuriles  tr  aba),  hence,  ubiq.,  a  torch 
or  candle. 
Maliimiilama,  Sam.  Haw.,  maramara- 
ma,  Tah.,  maamaamii,  Nuk.,  fitd- 
ramn,  N.  Z.  Rar.  Mang.,  mama  (for 
maxima),  Tong.,  ri/miirama,  Viti, 
light,  lustre. 
Malama,  Haw.,  marama,  N.  Z.  Tah. 
Rar.  Mang.,  maama,  Nuk.,  the  moon. 


l^niiiiliima,  Sam.,  to  watch,  »py ;  wkj- 
/(("/((,  Haw.,  lo  obsorvP,  ri'gard,  obey, 
take  care  of. 

Lnntll,  Sam.  Tung.,  to  chew,  craunch ; 
liiimii.  Haw.,  iiiiiii,  N.  Z.  Mang.,  to 
eat  Iragmenis,  lo  eat  what  is  lell  oftcr 
a  meal  ;  iiiiiu.  Tab.,  to  eat, 

IMim,  Sam.,   iit/iiinii,  Viti,   ran'.  Tar., 
/iiiiiii,  .N.  '/,.,  Iresh  water. 
Ann,  Tiiiig.,  u  lake. 
liiiiiii,  .\.  Z.,  a  mixture,  as  grnvy. 

Laya,  lulnfjn,  Simi.  Tong.,  raijii,  riiiiipii, 
N.  Z.  Mang.  I'au.,  /•»«/,  ranm,  Tuh., 
iiliiiiii.  Haw.,  to  weave,  braid, 

Laya  (I),  iiriiii.  Tab.,  akil,  ana,  Nuk,, 
light,  not  heavy;  faint.  Haw.,  to  flool, 
swim  on  the  water. 

Layatila  (?),  ragtUiru,  N.Z.  Rar.  Mang., 
raii/ira.  Tab.,  |X'tty  chief,  freeman  ; 
Iniiiilila,  Wuv.,  conqueror. 

Layi,  rmji,  laiii,  tai,  aki  or  ani,  ubiq., 
the  sky,  heaven. 
Ilinji-marir,  Rar.,  fair  weather;  N.Z,, 
mild,  gentle,  g(Mid-natured, 

Layo,  Sam.  Tong.  Viti,  rujii,  Rar.  Pan., 
run.  Tab.,  »7((r«,  N.  '/..,  nalo.  Haw., 
mil),  .Nuk.,  a  fly ;  luioiian.  Tab.,  a 
gnat. 

Layona,  Sam.,  raijmia,  N,  Z,,  to  under- 
stand, perceive. 

Laoa,  Sam.,  Aocn,  Haw.,  to  lie  choked. 

Lapakail  ('),  rajiakau,  Rar.,  riiptuin. 
Tab.,  tajkiaii.  Haw.,  ajHiiiu,  Nuk., 
medicine,  to  physic. 

£.«/>//  (f),  wy)^,  N.  Z.,  to  scnrch,  look 
lor;  liipiiUipii,  Haw,,  to  collect  to- 
gether, to  pick  up,  as  small  slicks  for 
fuel, 

Lapiivak,  Sam.,  a  mistake,  slip  of  the 
tongue:  lapuwate.  Haw.,  foolish, 
worthless. 

Lasi,  »am.,lalii,  Tong.,  rnhi,  N.  Z.  Tah., 
rai,  Rar.  Mang.,  great,  large. 
RaveriUii,  Tah,,  ruverai,  Rar.,  many. 


! 


POLYNESIAN    I.  R  X  I  ('  <)  N. 


:J0<) 


Jjdtn,  Sam.  'run;;.  Kiiw.,  ruin,  S. '/.., 
Iiiiiic,  (liiiiic.Hliriiti'il  ;  /(ixii,  \'ili,  (|iii('t, 

COIItl'lllt'll. 

Iiata  (I),  Tittn,  a  kind  nl'  Irrr,— nt  Tnli., 
tiiscnrpus  I'cliili.s  ;  at  N.  X..  mclnisi. 
(Icros  roliiiNtn. 
ijdU,  Id,  Slim,,  lini,  loll,  Timij;,,  ran,  N. '/.. 
Uitr.  Mnn;;.,  I'aii. ;  run,  run,  Tiili., 
Inn,  lliiw.,  an,  nil,  Niik.,  iiilraii, 
mini,  Vlli,  Iciil',  ti'liagc. 

Liiii-iilii,  Sam.,  Idii-iiIii,  'I'oiil;.,  riiiirii, 
Uar.,  riiiini.  Tali.,  rmimt,  .Man;,'., 
Iiinolin,  Wnw.,  iiiinlin,  Niik.,  mlrn-iii- 
iilii,  Vili,  hnir  (irihc  lioail. 

Lini-nmUi,  Sam.  Tong.,  pyclasli. 

Imu,  Tong.,  mirfncp,  nn-n, — lau-lnhi, 
broati ;  liiiiliiii,  Sam.,  a  plain,  a  tiililc  ; 
riinriiii,  N.  Z.,  a  plain;  liiiilii.  Haw., 
brimil, — liiumanui,  level  gurface. 

L(IH,  Tiiii^.,  to   It'll,    (lismiirso,    reckon; 
liiiiiin.  Slim.,  s|)occh,  wrmon ;  liiiinn,  ' 
Haw.,  rricnilly,  Kix'lal,  iiitimnU*.  I 

Pariiii,   Tab.    .Manj;.,    jiriiii,   Nnk.,   to  1 
8|M'ak ;  jki/iiH,  I  law.,  to  lie,  tell   (also, 
hixxl, — lian-jiiiliiii,   to   iK'triilh  :  jnirii- 
jxtriin,  N.  '/..,  to  rummand. 

Lail,  Tong., Jrlii II,  Sam,,  to  pinch. 

Lau,  Sam.,  nil,  Tong.,  run,  N.  'A.,  mlrnn,  , 
Vili,  a  biindn'il;  WM,Tah.  Kar.  Aliing.,  ' 
««, Tabu., two  hundred;  Inn,  llaw.,«(/,  ! 
Niik.,  four  hundred.     (Gram.  ^  01.)     | 

Land  (.'),  niiikii,  Uar.,  Iixiit,  Haw.,  »(w;«,  , 
Tab.,   koiikii,    N'lik.,   rittea,    Viti,    lo 
have,  |H>ssess,  obtain ;   riiwii,  N.  ■'/,.,  ! 
possessions.  | 

Lava,  Sam.,  enough,  indeed,  c.vceedingly;  ; 
ri/iv/,  Kar., /«iv/.  Haw,,  enough;  riiiva,  I 
N.  Z.,  a  remainder, — to  the  utmost, —  i 
e.xceedingly ;  Iciii,  Tong.,  thereupon, 
indeed. 

Lat'O  (>.),  /ii''nr(ir(i,  Satn.,  tiirava,  Uar.,  a 
lienm  in  a  house,  a  rafter;  kiitiva, 
Nuk.,  a  round  log  serving  as  a  beam 
along  the  front  of  a  house. 

78 


Ldllilkdi ('),  iiii'iihii,  Uar.,  riiniiii,'\'i\\\., 
Iiiviiiii,  Haw.,  nrnikii  or  iivnin,  Nuk., 
lo  catch  IIhIi, — a  lishcruiaii. 

Lave,  Haw.,  nivi\  Tall.  Kar.,  rniir,  I'au., 
niT,    Tong.    Nuk.,    to    take,    to    lake 
away. 
J-iivnii,   Sam,,    to   protect ;    run-.  Tab. 
Kar.,  lo  do. 

Le,  ric,  Sam,,  kore,  linrr,  N.  Z.,  knrv,  knrr, 
Kar.,  oir,  nr.  Tab.,  olc.  Haw.,  koe, 
Nuk.,  no,  not.     ((iram.  ^  li:).) 

iifjll  or  rfn,  Sam.,  rfn,  Tong.,  rrlm,  N.  '/.. 

Tah.,/f/',  Kar.,/(7i",  llaw.,ry(//,  .Nuk., 

ashes. 
I'inlin,    N.   '/.„   (luHl, — lo    lly   as   dust ; 

jnirlin.  Tab.  Haw.  Nuk.,  piirn,  Kar., 

scattered,  blown  niHHit  like  dust. 
Helm,  Tab.,  two  hundred  thousand ;  Mm, 

Haw.,  four  hundred  ihousand.    (Gram. 

Ll'i  (>.),  rri,  Viti,  lilii,  Sam.  Tong.  Fok., 
good. 

Leka  (.'),  rrka,  N.  Z.,  rckanka,  Kar. 
Mang.,  rciiren,  'l"ah,,  Iciitrii,  Haw., 
rcki,  Viti,  pleasant,  delightful,  joyful ; 
eku,  Nuk.,  melodious,  pleasing  to  the 
ear. 
Ttinhkiilekd,  Tong.,  poca,  Nuk.,  hand- 
some (a|)plicd  only  lo  men);  tunlinlrn. 
Sum.,  a  young  man  ;  tnnirknirka, 
N.  '/,.,  a  captive,  a  slav<'. 

Lek,  Sam.  Haw.,  rcre,  N.  Z.  Tah.  Rar. 

I'au.,  lo  lly ;  Mc,  Tong.,  lo  rim. 

Lrliii,  Sam.  Tong.,  lo  drift  away;  rrrcn, 
N.  '/..,  to  depart. 

ITclrlei,  Tong.,  to  run  together,  or  in  com- 
pany ;  Jiirrrri,  'J'ah.,  lo  meet. 

Wiikiirerr,  N.  Z.,  ([uickly,  immediately  ; 
nkarerr,  Mang.,  thereupon,  straight- 
way. 

Marrrc,  N.  Z.  Mang.,  to  perish,  to  pass 
away. 

Kiirere,  N.  Z.  Kar.,  elelv,  I  law.,  a  mes- 
senger. 
Letno,  Sam.,  lo  drown ;   miilcmo,  Sam., 


\ 


310 


V  II  I  l,<)  !,()(!  Y. 


jMrrinn,  Mnni;.,  ilniwnnl  ;  jhi/ciiio, 
lliiw.,  Ill  Kink  iiilK  llir  wilier;  piiiiiiii), 
Tnli,,  jui  mil,  N'uk.,  »li|>|Hry. 

Lemii,  '('"111,'.  Viii,  lliiw.,  ilir  l)iiiiiM-ki 

rtiiiii,  \.  Z.   Kar.,  llic  skirt  ol"  a  gar- 

lllrllt. 

Leifd.  Sam.,  mil,  Tung.,  nua,  Unr.  Vili, 
/run,    I  law.,  /m.  Tall.,  inn  iillil  (A((, 
\iik..  Iiirmci-ii', — yi'll.iw  puiiil. 
Jli  ii'i,  \.  '/,„  till'  scrri'lioiis  Ml' the  cjc, — 
rrwinmi,  a  Nrllnu  lily. 

Leo,  .Sam.  Tdim.,  to  wak-li,  j-iiard. 

Leo,  Sam.  Tung.  Iluw.,  ini,  S.  '/..  'I'ali. 
Knr.,  voice. 
Leu,  Tcin^.,  lo  »|K'ak ;  nko,  I'aii.,  Ian- 
giia^.-. 
ijepr,   Wiww,  ijxijif,  Niik.,  Ilio  I'liiiil)  of  a 

riK'k.  ; 

Lejm,    I  law.,  ;•'/»),   .\. /.   Tall.  I'aii. ,«■/»(,  ' 
Nuk.,  I'arlli.  ilirl. 
Li  I'll,  Sam.,  mnclily,  slngnant;  Tcing.,  n 

LeU({\\i.  .'),7""'»'",Tali.,  kiirtii,  Uar.  I'aii., 
kiieu,  Nuk.,  cincliirc,  dn-ss  of  tlio 
women. 

LeiI'd,  Haw.,  siisjirndcil,  iM'ndiiluus, — llio 
u|i|)or  rcgicin  of  Ihc  nir,  —  n  flag, 
slrcnmiT;  /(tk,  Tali.  Mang.,  tlic  over, 
hanging  firinnmcnl, — .Mang.,  a  Hag,  a 
trni  ;  reini,  N.  '/,.,  die  cyilid  ;  ri'ii, 
Niik.,  lo  droop,  to  hang  down, — a 
(lag, — the  red  flesh  hanging  from  a 
fowrs  neck,  &c. 
Lctfit,  Sam.,  reva,  Tah.,  era,  ,\iik.,  a 
trt*;,  the  galaxa  spnrla. 

Lt,  Tong.,  lo  tosa,  throw, — Uli,  to  fling 
with  liiree, — /iaki,  to  ca.sl  nway,  alxin- 
don ;  ti//e  or  tulci,  .Sam.,  to  throw,  lo 
drive, — //'«'/,  lo  root  up;  In',  Haw.,  lo 
rise  up,  lo  lift  up, — hno-lri,  lo  cast 
away,  reject ;  nkiri,  N.  7,.,  to  throw, 
dan  ;  kirili,  .Mnng.,  to  turn,  shako, 
throw  ;  kiriti,  Kar.,  irili,  'I'ah.,  to  lill 
up,  to  draw  out;   kokiri,  N.  Z.,    fo 


spring  up  i  Dili,  I  law.,  lo  am'end.    (Stf 

aJNo  (iti.) 
hi,  Haw., til  hang' liy  llie  neck,  to  slraiigle, 

— lilr,  lo  gird,  liiiid  aUiut  ;    ri,  Uar. 

Mang.,  to  lie,  liind  ;  siih,  Sam.,  tied, 

made    liiHt  :    /((//,   Haw.,  Inii,   .Mang., 

til  tie  nil. 
Ilia,  .Sam,,  a   dream,  a  vision, — used   in 

speaking  iif  a  chief;   Haw.,  to  pmider, 

medilate. 

IjUI,  TiMig.  Il:iw.,  ill,  Nuk.,  a  nil, — the 
egg  of  an  insect. 

Liu  (!),  //"//((,  'I'ling.,  rilinriliii,  N.  '/.„ 
liiiii,  M.'iiig.,  disagnialile,  hateful  ; 
liiilin,  \'ili,  limlisli,  alisurd. 

Likil  ('.),  rikiirikii,  N.  'A.  Uar.,  nnrin. 
Tall.,  almiiiiiialile, 

Llliit  (.'),  liliii,  Sam.,  giddiness,  fear  fnim 
U'ing  on  a  height;  tin,  Haw., shaking 
or  trenililing  thriiiigh  fear;  rikii. 
Mang.,  Ill  wake  with  a  start. 

Iiiki   (<),    nki,    .\.  Z.    Uar.    .Mang.,  ikt, 
Tung.,  ikiiki,  Nuk.,   ///,   Haw.,    lii. 
Tall.,  iiiiiiii,  Sam.,  little,  small. 
Lii/ii,  Haw.,  riirii,  Tnli.,  lillle,  piece- 
meal, liy  hits. 
Ltll,  lii,  ii,  uhiii.,  anger,  angry. 

I'li'ii-li/i,  .Sam.,  lo  rebuke ;  lui'o-lili,  I  law., 
lo  ipiestiun  with  [lertness,  to  assume 
airs. 

Lllo,  Sam.,  u  secret  ;  Tong.,  to  hide,  con- 
ceal ;  riro,  N.  Z.  Uar.  Mang.  Tah., 
lilo.  Haw.,  io,  Nuk.,  to  pass  from  one 
state  lo  another,  lo  pass  away, — gone. 
Ii»l. 

LltlKl,    Sam.    Haw.,    rimti,    Uar.    Mang. 
I'uu.,  imii,  Nuk.,  nimn,  Tong.,  tiiju. 
Viti,  riijii,  N.  '/..,  hand,  linger. 
Liiiiii,  rimn,  iina,  iiinia,  five   (Urain. 
§30). 

Limil,  rimii,  imii,  uhiq.,  sca-wccd,  s<'a- 
moss,  sponge. 

Ltno,  Haw.,  rino,  N.  Z.,  a  rope,  cord. 


t 


.  h 


P  O  I.  V  N  K  H  I  A  N    I,  K  X  t  C  ()  N. 


311 


lillfl,  Sam. 'I'oiin.,  ///)/,  liiiiii,  \,'/„  lliir,, 
t/'",  Niik.,  iiiiii,  lliiw,,  tin,  'I'lili.,  Ii' 
IMiiir  mil. 
I\lii/iiii,  iiiiiriiit,  miiiiiiii,  iiimiii,  |i(iiiri'cl 

Dill,  lllllil^ll'll,  Njllll. 

Jjltl',  Haw.,  li/r,  N.  '/..,  iiri/r,  lliir.,  like. 
Lito,  I  law.,  ii/ii,  N.  '/,.,  a  liiiil. 

Jjllt,  'I'liiiy.,  ;•/(/,  MaiiL,'.,  /r//'",  .Sam.,  fiiriii. 

Tail.,  mill,  llai'.,tip  lurii  niiiiiil  ;  //////, 

Tiinj,'.,  Ill  cliaii;;''. 
Nliiiii,  I  law.,  lo  wliriil,  turn  iis  a  lup ; 

niii,  Nnk.,  a  t<i|), 
Uliifin,    Sam.,    lo    runic.  In  pi, — unni', 

(Itail  (used  in  H|Hiikinj;  dl'  ii  iliii'l'); 

tllin'ii'.    Haw.,    Ill    alli'liil     In,    iiii'lilio 

liiwarih,     In'     liivoralilt; ;     iiiniiiiiiii, 
,,  ,  .  • 

iMaiiL;.,  I'liiMlir. 

Liii,  'rmii;.,  /■('/,  N.  X.,  tlir  liulil  ol"  a 

ciinm-  (i.  0.  the  |'mit  wliirli  liiriis), — 

////,  Haw.,  (■/■/(,  N.  Z.  Tall.,  i»,  Niik. 

1(1  Irak,  liili^i'-walcr. 
Lo,  Tun;,'.,  rit,  'I'ali.  •Man;?.,  o,  Nuk.,  /"(', 

Sam.,  mi.  Pan.,  an  ant. 
Im,  Haw.,  "a  small  liliu'k  insect." 
Lfl  or  h'l  (i|ii.  l),/iio-iiiii/iiu,  Sam., /(«///(«'', 

Haw.,  niiirw,  Mun;j;.,  uvahi/ic,  Nuk., 

iin  iilil  woman. 
Itiiuii,  Tall.,  olil  (applied  to  persons). 
Rii/iiriilii,  Tall.,   n\(c, — liiriihe,  foclilo  ; 

riirii/ii,  N.7,.,  olil,  fcclilo  with   ii;;o ; 

/iilii,  I  law.,  oppresscii,  wcarioil,  heavy. 

lailcn. 
Piilimi,  Sniii.,  Iiiiliihi,  Tong.,  sick,  ap- 
plied to  chicl's. 
L(ilii,  Haw.,  slow,  tardy,  Ceeble  ;   n>hi, 

Tah.,  loi,  Kar.,  toil,  labor,  fecblcnea.s 

from  labor. 
Lo  or  toil   (!),  Inlnii,  \'iti,  to  stoop,  bow 

down  (applied  to  women)  in  mourn- 

in;{ ;  tiilou,  Fak.,  Haw., /«/o/«,  Tong., 

to  sirtop,  liond,  l)ow  down, 
Tiiioru,  N.  Z.,  to  lie  weak,  inlirin  j  titrori. 

Tab.,  to  stumble.  Tall  down. 
Loliii,  Tong.,  a  crook,  a  hooked  stick  ; 

loii,  Haw.,  a  hook. 


liOil,  rmi,  mi,  iiliii|.,  lung, — also,  much, 
very,  exceedingly. 

Im-milt(l,  Sam.  Tung.,  rni-miila,  N.  Z. 
Itar.  Tall.,  tears. 

lill/iO  (!),  /ii'ii,  Sam.,  rii/,11.  Tar.,  to  come, 
111  liap|ien,  lieiiiiiie;   rnhmi,  Itiir.,  riKi- 
hill,  'I'ali.,  Imiliiii,  I  law.,  itkiJiia,  Nuk., 
allecli'd  liy,  reailied,  uvercunie  by. 
Koko,  N.  '/,.,  Ill  liiid. 

Loll,  Haw.,  imi,  \.  '/,.,  til  iiirn  oyer, 
iiiiliilil,  cliange. 

Loll,  Haw.,  m//.  Tall,,  holulliiiria,  bicho 
da  mar. 

liOlo,  Sam.,  the  kernel  ol'  the  uld  cocoa. 
mil;  the  oil  expressed  Iruiii  it, — liiliilo, 
lilt  ;  liJii,  Tung.,  uil,  iiily  ;  liili).  Haw., 
riiro,  N.  Z.,  on,  Nuk.,  the  brain, — mar- 
row  ;  iKi,  Nuk.,  llie  con,'  of  breadrniil, 
sap. 
hilit,    Maiig.,   til    have    the    taste  ol",   to 

savur  111'. 
Vitkiiliitii,  \"\li,  /ii/(ii,'l\tnn.,  fii/ij/o.  Haw., 
Iiiiiiro,   .Mang.,   a    pudding   in   which 
cocoa-nut  oil  is  an  ingredient  ;   roroi, 
N.  '/..,  a  kind  of  pudding. 

IjOnil,  litli)iiii,'\\m^„U\  press;  lonii,  Sam. 
ihiw.,  rumi,  N.  Z.  Rar.,  onii,  Nuk.,  to 
rub  or  pniss  » ith  the  hand,  to  shampoo. 

Loyl  (?),  riii.  Tab.,  aki,  uui,  Nuk.,  loijii. 
Viti,  Ix-'d,  couch. 

Loyo,  Sam.,  niin,  Tong.,  a  sound,  report, 
news;  lono.  Haw.,  n  report,  news, 
fame. 
lut'ii/iijio,  iSani.,  Jiiniiijo,  Tong.,  roijo, 
tcakiiroijo,  N.  Z.,  roix>,  iikarum,  Uar. 
Mang.,  loim,  hnoloiio.  Haw.,  fmirao. 
Tab., oh),  ono,  Nuk.,  ««, Tar.,  to  lieor. 

Loyo,  /o/«yo,Tong.,(|uiot, peaceful;  holiuii- 
roijo,  N.  Z.,  to  make  peace.     (S(«7o.) 

Loto,  Tong.  Haw.,  rolo,  N.Z.  Tab.  Uar., 
olo,  Nuk.,  the  middle,  cenlr<>,  within. 
Liito,  Sam.  Tong.,  the  mind,  heart,  dis- 
position.    In  other  dialects  it  has  this 
sense  in  compound   words,  as   luto- 


312 


P  H  I  L  O  L  O  G  Y. 


maiUii,  Ilnw.,  godcMionrtcd  ;  rnto-riri, 
Riir.,  iII-li'iii|H'rril,  nngry-mimleil. 

Lnio,  Slim.  Tong.  F{iir.  Tnh.  Haw.,  a 
liikf,  jioiul. 

Lntixi,  Sam. 'Pong.,  nn  enclosure.  (See  d.) 

IdMo,  Snm.  Toiig.,  dtn-p. 

LotU,  Si\m.  Tiiiig.,  prnyer,  religion. 

Lli,  /ii/ii,  Miiw.,  /•(/,  ;•«/•«,  nii,  N.  Z.,  ////», 

Snm.   Tong.,    i/ciir,   Tiili.,   to   sliiike 

(act.),  to  scatter,  to  sow. 
naliihi,  Tong.,  to  shake,  to  quake. 
narncnie,  Uar.,  earthqiiake. 
nuiiiiir,   Tong.    N.  7..,    txioioi,    Snm., 

naite,    miiieiie,    iirue,    Ilnw.,    <iiiei/r, 

iieur,  T«h.,  «/«(,  N.Z.  Mnng.,  to  slinke, 

tn'mble,  (|Unko. 
Lidf,  Haw.,  or/'z-r,  Tnh.,  to  vibrnte,  rock, 

change  nboiit. 
NiiJii/ii,  Ilaw.,  tidiiii,  \uk.,  liendnclio ; 

miiiiiiii,  Tah.,  pangs,  sorrows. 

Lll(t,  rud,  ltd,  ubiq.,  two  (Grnm.  §  30) ; 

ritarmi,  N.  Z.,  lew. 
Koliiti,  'oliKi,  koriiii,  oniii,  lioiia,  yc  two 

(Cram.  §  .Mil). 
T}iii-/ii//i(i,  S;im.,  tiiiddk\  hnif. 
Tiiliiii  o  JM,  Snm.,  luiiti-h),  Tong.,  turn- 

riijm,  Kar.,  niichiight. 

Lud,  run,  iKi,  ubi(|.,  a  pit,  nn  excavation. 

IdUn,  Tong.,  tid,  Ntik.,  lii/iKi,  Vili,  riinki, 
N./C.  .Miing.,  /««/,  Haw.,  to  vomit. 

Luki  (?),   riiki,   Pan.,  dark;   mi,   Tnh., 

night. 
Luhl  (0,  nikii,  \.Z.  Mnng.,  lini.  Haw., 

to  dive. 
Lulu,  rum,  N.  '/..,  close,  hidden  ;  Mang., 

a  shelter;   lulu,  Ilnw.,  a.   calm   spot 

under  a  lee,  to  lie  quietly  at  anchor. 
Piiruru,  Tnh.  Unr.,  n  veil. 
Lulu,  Sam.  Tong.  Vili,  owl    (cpi.  secret 

bird  .')• 
Lwga,  Sam.,  iiluyit,  Tong.,  rutja,  N.  '/.. 

Rar.,  luiui.  Haw.,  uua,   uka,   Nuk., 

nbove,  up ;    maiiahnja,   Sam.  Tong., 

high. 


Lupe,  Sam.  Tong.  Fak.,  pigeon. 

LuiU,  rutu,  N.Z.  Tah.  Mnng.,  to  strike, 

pound,  JK'at  ns  a  drum ;  lutu,  Hnw., 

to  destroy,  overthrow,  kill. 


M 

3/(7,  nbiq.,  prep.,  with,  nt,  in,  by, — conj., 
and,— C4illcctive  |)article,  &c.    (Gram. 

§§  15, 67,  OS, ::».) 

Ala,  the  root  ot"  the  pronouns  of  the  first 

|H?rson,dual  and  plural.   (Gram.  §  39.) 
Mn,  Sam.  Tong.  Viti,  Tar., «(;^»»/d,  N.Z., 

iiktimri,  Mang.,  /i((rt/Hfl, Tali., ashamed, 

bash  III  I. 
Af(i,  Tong.  N.Z.,  mdma,  Sum.,  maeniar. 

Haw.,  pnlc,  clear,  white,  pure. 
Ma,  nuie,  Ilnw.,  tmie,  Sam.  Kar.,  maehe. 

Tab.,  to  fade,  wither. 
Faka-turi,    Tong.,    Jii'd-iniinid,    Sam., 

wtika-mn,  N.  'A.,  Uimd,  Tah.    Rar., 

hoo-niaemae.  Haw.,  to  cleanse. 
M(l,  uKiimi,  Tong.,  mania,  Sam.  Tong. 

Nuk.,  to  chew, — a  mo  ithl'iil. 
Mana,  Tong.  Uar.  Ming.,  matia,  Nuk., 

a   niouthrul,   a   morsel ;   tiuui,   Tah., 

flKXl. 

Miitjii,  Kar.,  maa,  Tnh.,  n  piece,  portion 
ofnny  thing  (i.  e.  a  bit,  morsel);  hence, 
vunjii,  Kar.,  uiaii,  Tnh.,  ma,  I'ong., 
some,  n  portion  of.     (Gram.  §  I'J.) 

Ma,  Tong.  Nuk.,  uiasi,  ."^am.,  malii,  Tah., 
mamlrni,  Vili,  n  kind  ol'  lixxl  made  ol' 
vegetables  buried  in  the  ground  and 
lell  to  lerment. 
Miilii,  Tong.,  sour,  tart. 

Maea,  Snm.  Tong.  Fak.  Tar.,  makei, 
I'nu.,  a  rope. 

Mafa  (.'),  mama/a,  Snm.  Tong.,  taimaha, 
N.  'A.,  teiiiiim  or  tciiui,  Rar.,  teialui. 
Tall.,  taumulia,  Ilnw.,  heavy. 

Mafatua,  Snm.  Tong.  Tikop.,  to  sneeze. 

Maju,  Snm.,  to  heal,  ns  a  sore, — musty  ; 
mahu.   Tab.    Nuk.,    patient,    meek; 


■■ 


POLYNESIAN    LEXICON. 


813 


Nb 


^ 


Haw.,  silent,  indisposed  to  conversa- 
tion. 
Mafuna,  Snm.,  rough ;  muhtina.  Haw., 
the  scaly  np|M;arancc  oflhc  skin  caused 
by  drinking  kava. 

Mahaya  ((ju.  ?),  N.  Z.,  maapa,  Rnr., 
mahaka,  Nuk.,  vuUuie,  Tul\.,  mcilioe, 
Hiiw.,  twins. 

Mai,  hither, — direclivc  particle  implying 
motion  towards  the  8i)eiikcr;  also,  miii 
or  mci,  prep.,  trom.  (Gram.  §^  58, 07.) 

Mai  (?),  mci,  Tong.   Mang.   Nuk.  Tar., 

iiiiiiorc.    Tall.    Alang.     I'au.,    aeiore. 

Haw.,  the  breadfruit. 
Mai,  N.  Z.,  a  s|)ecies  of  pine,  whose 

cones  are  eaten  by  the  natives. 
Maile,  Tong.  Haw.,  tmiirr,  Tab.,  meie, 

Nuk.,  a  vine  similar  to  the  laurel. 

Maka,    Tong.,    »/«'«,    Sam.,    a    .stone ; 

viiikii-la,  Tong.,  mitkti,  Nuk.,  »««'(', 

Tub.  Haw.,  a  sling, — to  sling;  miika, 

N.  Z.,  to  throw. 
Makalili  (?),  ma\ilUu,  Sam.  Haw.,  maka- 

riri,  N.  Z.  Uar.  Pan.,  makaii,  Nuk., 

mariri.  Tar.,  cold. 

Makaive,  N.  Z.,  a  hair;  matiue.  Haw.,  a 

small  substance,  a  bit  of  string,  and 

the  like. 
Maku,    N.  Z.    Uar.,    w/a'i/.    Haw.,   wet, 

moist. 
Makiikii,  N.  Z.,  ma'u'ii,  Haw.,  moist, 

fresh,  cool. 
Mala,   Haw.,  mara,  N.  Z.,  a  garden,  a 

small  pieee  of  cultivated  ground. 
Mahie,  Sam.  Tong.,  a  public  s(]uare  in  a 

town;   miiitic,   N.  Z.,   a   couil-yurd ; 

Tab.,  a  sacred  enclosure,  a  temple ; 

mate,  Nuk.,  a   sacred    spot,  usually 

in  a  grove,  dedicated   to  a  divinity ; 

manic,  Mnng.,  an  olTering  of  coral — 

((i/ffdiitlv  tie  (Otail). 
Mala,  Tong.,  misfortune  ;  mnlaiit,  Tong., 

Sam.,  unfortunate,  wretched. 
Maramara,  Tab.  Mang.,  bitter. 

79 


Malfllu,  Sam.  Tong.,  charcoal. 
A/afeya,  Sam.,  a  travelling  party, — a  party 
of  chiefs  making  a  tour;  Tong.,  a  pub- 
lic S|H'cch, — to  preach. 
Mtirtiijd,  Uar.,  mama.  Tab.,  to  bear, 
carry. 
Malayat  (?),  nmranai,  Kar.  Mang.,  ma- 
raai  or  manunnii.  Tab.,  llie  south- 
east or  trade-wind ;   malunni.  Haw., 
the  northeast  or  trade-wind ;  imirag- 
ai,  N.  Z.,  the  east  wind. 
Malie,  marie,  ubi(i.,  gently,  softly,  nicely, 

—calm,  quiet,  gentle  (see  ni). 
Mahh,   Sam.,  to   fall   spontaneously,  as 
fruit;  liaw.,  stinted,  withered,  applied 
to  fruit. 
Mdlo,  nutro,  tiiao,  nbiq.,  the  girdle  worn 
by  the  men  around  the  loins. 
Maro,  N.  Z.,  tnuo,  Nuk.,  a   fathom, — 
i.  e.  the  length  of  a  ii.a/o. 
Main,    Sam.,   bard,   firm,   solid, — hence, 
the  strong  or  riding  party,  the  govern- 
ment ;  also,  the  tutelar  divinity  of  a 
town ;    maru,    Uar.    Mang.,    bard, — 
hence,  tmilo.  Haw.,  maro.  Tab.  Kar., 
mao,    Nuk.,    nioro,    Mang.,    maruke, 
N.  Z.,  dry,  bard  and  dry,  as  land. 
JlTijro,  Tub.,  to  strive,  quarrel. 
iV/((/(i,  Tong.,  well  done!  welcome!  ma- 
mi,  Mang.,  welcome! 
Malosi,  Sam.,  malolii,  Tong.,  strong. 
Mulolo,  Sam.  Tong.,   rested,  refreshed, 
recovered  from  sickness;  lioo-ma/o/o, 
Haw.,   to   rest;    maroro,    Uar.   Tar., 
strong. 
MaMo,  Sam.  Tong.  Haw.,  maroro,  Mang., 
;««(w,  Nuk.,  w((;'(im,Tah.,  the  flying- 
fish. 
Mnlu,  iibiq.,  shade,  protection  (sec  lulu). 
Main,  Haw.,  mom,  Mang.,  secret,  bid- 
den. 
Mala,  nuUiilii,  Sam.,  molii,  Tong.,  maru, 
Uar.  Tah.,   morn,   Mang.,  noliinolu. 
Haw.,  mariiru.  Tar.,  maliimu,  Viti, 
sofl,  plastic,  pliable. 


314 


PHILOLOGY. 


f       t 


:\      i 


Mam,  N.Z.,  broken  fine;  morua,  Mang., 

going  to  ruin. 
Manniiaru,  Knr,  Tnh.,  bruised,  mnshcd, 
beaten,  concincrfd. 

M^ma,  iiblq.,  light,  not  heavy. 

Mama,  Tong.  Sam.  Viti,  n  ring. 

Mama,  Snm.  Tong.,  to  leaU  ;  hamanui, 
'I'lih.  Haw.,  opened,  agape. 

Mamahi  (qu.  f),  Tong.,  mamuc,  N.  Z. 
Kar.  Mang.  Nuk.,  pain,  ache. 

Mamao,  Fak.  Sam.  Tong.  Kar.  Haw., 
far,  distant. 

Mauiart,  Mnng.,  hkhikh,  Nuk.,  egg, 
spawn. 

Matia,  ubiq.,  power, — powerful. 
Mdiia,  Tong.,  Tikop.,  thunder. 

Manaia,  Snm.,  nidiien,  Kar.,  moimti, 
Nuk.,  hanAsnrcc ;  fa'a-iiKiiiaia,  Sam., 
aka-mani<i,  Tong.,  to  adorn. 

Manako,  Sam.  Tong.,  to  desire;  wi«- 
nako,  N.  Z.  Kar.,  iiianao,  Tab.  Haw., 
niakiw,  iitiilcw,  Nuk.,  to  hope,  remem- 
ber, think,  consider. 

Manata,  Rar.,annoying,oirending;  Haw., 
disheartening,  discouraging. 

Manattl,  Sam.  Tong.,  to  remember,  con- 
sider; mii/ialinja,  N.  Z.,  a  memorial, 
keepsake. 

Maildva.  Snm.,  the  holly ;  Nuk.,  the  in- 
side ;  Mang.,  the  belly,  soul,  mind, 
conscience;  manau-u,  Haw.,  (in  com- 
pounds,) heart,  disposition,  as  mamaa- 
Icii,  charitable,  kind-hrartod. 

3/(7//flf(7,.Sam.,/«(/?(«r«.  Nuk., the  breath; 
jndWKiij, Tong.,7«(/«aftf,  Kar.,  ma/id- 
wa,  N.  Z.,  breath,  animal  spirits,  cou- 
rage ;  mumiwu,  Maw.,  a  spirit,  appa- 
rition,— a  time,  season,  space. 

Mama,  Haw.,  iminianui,  Sam.,  the  teeth 
on  un  edge, — the  st'usation  felt  in 
fding  a  saw. 

Mano,  Sam.  Tong.,  10,000;  N.  Z.,  1,000, 
Tuh.  Kar.  .Mang.  Taliu.,  2  00;  Haw. 
Nuk.,  4000  (Gram.  §  30). 


Manoyi,  Sam.  Rnr.,  monni,  Tah.,  fra- 
grant. 

Mann,  ubiq.,  a  bird. 

Maniifili  (qu.  wandering  bird  ?),  ot«««- 
«•;>/,  N.  Z.,  mtiiniiri,  Kar.,  nuitiihini, 
Tab.,  iiuililiiiii.  Haw.,  manildi,  Nuk., 
a  stranger,  visiter,  guest. 

Manu,  Sam.  Tong.,  pain  about  the  face; 
manna,  Sam.,  a  wound. 

Mann,  niaiiiiiu,  Sam.,  mounia,  Tong., 
happy,  fortunate,  pros|)erous. 

Mnuumnnn,  Sam.  Tong.,  covetous. 

Maya,  minuiminjd,  Sam.  Tong.,  matia, 
viananiana.  Haw.  Tabu.,  makn,  ma- 
kamaka,  Nuk.,  amaa.  Tab.,  —  a 
branch,  the  barb  of  a  hook,  &c., 
branching,  forked. 

Maija  (?),  fiikamatju,  Tong.,  Jh'amaya, 
Sam.,  to  open  wide,  as  the  mouth  ; 
maijai,  N.  Z.,  the  mouth. 

MayaiO,  Sam.,  vuma/o,  Haw.,  fresh, 
swet;,  as  water ;  mayaro,  Mang.,  mild, 
aflable. 

Maye.lO,  Sam.,  itchy,  itching;  tnimeo, 
Haw.,  an  itching,  pricking  pain, — the 
taste  of  pt^pper;  also,  niciico.  Haw., 
to  tingle,  itch ;  meijco,  Mang.,  bitter, 
stinging ;  maijco,  Mang.,  bitterness, 
chagrin,  mortification  ;  mancniico, 
Nuk.,  titillation,  sensation  of  iK'ing 
tickled. 

Mango,  Sam.,  dry ;  tai-maijoa,  Mang., 
low  tide  (dry  sea). 

MayO,  maHo,  muko,  maO,  ubi(|.,  a  shark. 

j\iaO,  Haw.,  to  fade,  as  o  decaying  plant, 
to  corrupt;  maoa,  N.  Z.  Tuh.,  to 
ripen,  to  be  completed — rip<! ;  mo- 
molio,  N.  Z.,  to  ripen. 

Ma&lll,  inabi,  Sam.,  moont,  Tong.,  true  ; 
mao/i.  Haw.,  maoi,  Nuk.,  true,  real, 
— indigenous,  native ;  maori,  N.  Z., 
niaui,  Mang.,  indigenous,  native  ;  ma- 
ori, Mang.,  civilized. 


POLYNESIAN   LEXICON. 


316 


Maori,  Tiih.,  mart,  Rar.,  really,  indeed, 

merely,  only. 
Mapu,    Sam.    Nuk.,    malm,   Tong.,    to 

wliistle  ;  miipiica,  Sam.,  to  sigh. 
Masa    (?),    malia,    Tong.,    viafa,   Viti, 

empty ;    mamasa,    Sam.,    mama)ui, 

Tong.,  low  water,  shnllow. 
Malta,  Tall.,  (iiiici,  appeased,  satisfied, 

comforted  ;  Haw.,  to  rest  from  labor, 

hoo-maha, — to  lie  satistied. 
Masaki  (l),  mahald,  Tong.,  mala,  Rar., 

Mang.,  nuCi,  Sain.  Tali.  Haw.,  sick. 
Maki,  Nuk.,  a  sore. 
MuKinuiki,  Nuk.,   nuCiiiuCi,  Tali.,   to 

desire,  long  for  (i.  e.  be  sick  for). 
Masi  (7),  main,  N.  Z.,  to  work;  mahi. 

Haw.,  ijaohi,  taiihi,  Tong.,  to   culti- 
vate, till  the  soil. 
Masoa,  Sam.,  ma/iod,  Tong.,  arrow. root 

(tacca  pinnalifida). 
Masui   (?),   waluii,  Tong.,   mahue  and 

matte,  N.  Z.,  to   lenvi;,  to  abandon, 

flee  from  ;  tnaiic.  Tali.,  to  fly. 
McitO,  ubiq.,  face,  eye,  front,  edge. 

Matiimata,  Sam.,  maiiuitii,  Tong.,  to  see. 
Mata-2)0  (night-eyed),  N.  Z.  Mang.  Tah. 

Haw.    Nuk.,    mata-ivi    (bone-eyed), 

Sam.,  blind. 
Mata-riki    (little   eyes),   N.  Z.    Mang., 

mata-rii,  Tah.,  maia-lii.  Haw.,  nuUa- 

iki,  Nuk.,  the  F'leiades. 
Mala-hili,  Tah.  Haw.,  muta-ili,  Rar.,  a 

year  (the  rising  of  the  Pleiades,  which 

marks  the  commencement  of  the  yi'ar). 
Ktnnata,  Tong.,  amata,  Sam.,  tiiiiiila, 

N.    Z.,    hainiiittii,    Tah.,    aknmatii, 

Mang., //wwH((/'/,  Haw.,  to  In-gin. 

Mata-ainana  (qu.  ?),  Haw.  Nuk.,  the 

common  |)cople,  the  lower  classes. 
Matuku,  miita^ii,  ubiq.,  afraid. 
Matau,  ubi(i.,  fish-hook. 
Mate,  ubiq.,  to  die,  to  be  hurt,  ill,  sick. 
Mute,    malcmale    N.  Z.    Mang.,    Haw. 

Nuk.,  to  wish,  desire,  long  lor  (i.  e.  to 

be  dying  for). 


Mate,  Sam.,  to  suppose,  explain ;  Tong., 
to  conjecture. 

Matikuku  and  motiao,  N.  Z.,  matikao 
and  maikno,  I'au.,  maikiikii,  Mang., 
Nuk.,  »«rti7iV(o,Tikop.,  mai'ii'it,  maiao, 
Tah.  Haw.,  finger-nail  (see  kiikii). 

Matolu,    Tong.    Haw.,    matorii,    N.  Z. 

Mang.,  tiiatoii,  Nuk.,  thick. 
Matll,  Haw.  Pan.,  to  run  off,  to  flee. 
Man,  ubi([.,  fast,  firm,  fixed,  constant ;  to 

obtain,  hold  fast,  adhere,  remain  fixed. 

Mail   or   iiinii   (f),   moH,   Mang.,  a   hill, 
mound  ;   hence,  man  or  moii,  a  col- 
lective particle  (Gram.  §  14). 
Mainjd   or  moinjn,  manna  or  niouna, 
iiiaiia  or  iiinua,  ubiq.,  mountain. 

Mau  (!),  m.iitmiii,  Sam.  Tong.  N.  Z., 
iiioiimnii,  Rar.,  spoiled,  wasted,  de- 
stroyed ;  maiiiia.  Haw.,  maiia,  Tah., 
to  waste. 

Mllllle,  Haw.,  moitri,  Mang.,  timid,  fearful. 

Muilll,  Sam.,  the  moon ;  Haw.,  the  first 

day  of  the  new  moon  ;  maiira,  Mang., 

a  season,  time. 
Maunu,  N.  Z.  Haw.,  moitnu,  Mang.,  a 

bait  for  fishing. 
]\ie,  with   (.sec    Ilia);   hence,  me,  N.  Z., 

Tall.   Mang.  Nuk.,  tnci,  Rar.,  mai. 

Haw.,  like. 
Me,    N.  Z.,    wei,   Nuk.,    mai.   Haw.. 

almost,  near,  about  to  (Gram.  §  53). 
Mea,  ubiq.,  thing. 

Men,  Haw.,  to  do,  to  act;  N.  Z.,  to  do, 

to  say,  to  think. 
Meika,  Mang.   Nuk.,  mei,  Pau.,  maia, 

Tah.  Haw.,  the  banana. 

Meituki,  Rar.  Mang.,  meitaki  and  meitai, 
Nuk.,  maitai,  Tah.  Haw.,  good. 

Melie  (?),  merie,  Mang.,  w/c/r,  Nuk.,  com- 
mon, free,  not  tabu  (perhaps  from 
malie). 

Mill,  Sam.  Tong.,  to  rub,  stroke,  smooth 
down. 


316 


PHILOLOGY. 


MilimUi,  Haw.,  minmiri,  Mang.,   to 
examine,  as  a  curiosity. 

Mtlo,  Sam.  ilnw.,  mio,  Tong.,  niiro,  N.  Z., 
to  twist,  make  twine ;  komirimiri, 
Mang.,  to  twist ;  milo,  Tong.,  a  top, 
to  spin  round.  (See  fill,  Jilo,  vilo.) 
Miro,  Tah.,  mio,  Nuk.,  a  tree,  tlie 
thcspecia  populnea ;  miro,  N.  Z.,  the 
podocarpus  lerruginea. 

Mtmt,  ubiq.,  mitjere. 

Minamina,  N.  Z.,  to  long  for  any  thing ; 
Haw.,  to  grie\e  for  the  loss  of  any 
thing. 

MtSt,  Sam.,  w/«7j»,  Tah.  Haw.,  mii,  Rar., 
to  regr.it,  to  grieve ;  niihi,  N.  Z.,  to 
sigh,  to  moan ;  mii,  Mang.,  to  be 
oUcnded,  bear  ill-will. 

Mill,  Sam.  Tong.,  mi.  Tar.,  to  dream. 

Mltl,  Tah.  Afang.,  the  sea, — salt  water. 

Miti,  Tong.,  to  suck ;  Nuk.,  to  lick;  Haw., 
to  eat  pot  with  the  fingers ;  mitimiti. 
Haw.,  to  nibble. 

Mon,  ubiq.,  domestic  fowl,  hen. 

Moa,  Tah.  Kar.,  sacred ;  Nuk.,  an  atten- 
dant on  the  ttiuas  or  priests. 

Moake,  Mang.,  moae.  Haw.,  the  east  wind, 

the  trades. 
MoanU,  ubiq.,  the  sea,  ocean  (never  used, 

like  Uii  and  miti,  for  "«n//  water") 

Mohuka  (qu.  ?),  Tong.,  moiikii,  Nuk., 
mau'ii,  Sam.  Haw.,  gra.ss. 

Moke,  Mniig.,  hidden,  or  lost;  mo'e.  Tab., 
to  be  last  or  forgotten  (not  to  Ix;  con- 
founded with  moe,  from  mose), 

Mnko,  wo'o,  ubiq.,  lizard,  reptile. 

Aliiko,  N.  Z.,  the  tattooing,  probably  from 

ils  spiral  and  curving  figures. 
Mokomoko,  Tong.,  cold  (as  the  skin  of  a 
reptile), — momoko,  a  disease  altenilcd 
with  chills  ond  wasring  of  the  (lesh  ; 
vioko,  Nuk.,  lean, — momijo,  benumb- 
ed,— a  cough. 

Mokopuna,  N.Z.,  tno'opuna.  Haw.  Nuk., 


a  grandson ;    makupuna,  Mang.,  a 

nephew. 
Mole,  Tong.,   smooth;  molemole.   Flaw., 

Inld. 
MoH,  Sam.,  mori,  N.Z.  Rar.  Mang.  Tah., 

oil  for  burning,  a  lamp. 
MontO,     Nuk.,    momac,    Tong.,    petty, 

small, — a    scrap,  crumb  ;    momoino, 

Sam.,  bruised,  mashed. 
Momoa,  Tah.,  to  promise,  betroth;  Haw., 

to  give  libt!rally. 
Momona,  N.Z.  Tah.  Haw.   Nuk.,  lus- 
cious, succulent,  pleasant  to  the  taste. 

Mose,  Rot.,  mofe,  Viti,  niofic,  Tong.,  rnne, 
Sam.  et  cirt.,  to  lie  down,  to  sl^.-ep. 
Molieija,  mocya,  iiiuemi,  niockti,   nwea, 

ubiq.,  a  sleeping-mat,  bed. 
Moenaku,  N.  Z.,  irimoc,  moemoed,  Rar., 
tiioerika,  Mang.,  moeiihane.  Haw.,  to 
dream. 
Fie-mnlie,  Tong.,Jia-mne,  Sam.,  hia-moe, 
N.  Z.,  to  wish  to  sle<'p;  hia-moe.  Haw., 
to  sleep, — deep,  sound  sleep;  Nuk.,  a 
nap,  a  fourth  part  or  watch  of  the 
night. 

Moto,  Tong.  N.Z.  Mang.  Rar. Tah.  Haw., 
to  lx)X,  strike  with  the  fist. 

Motu,  ubiq.,  to  cut,  cut  ofli  separate;  se- 
parated, cut  off. 
Motif,  ubi(|.,  a  division,  a  st^parate  dis- 
trict, n  small  island  se|>aratc  from  the 
main  lun<l. 

Mil,  Snm.  Tah.,  a  noise,  noisy. 

Mufl,  uliiq.,  front,  before. 

Mtlka,  Tong.,  a  sprout,  shoot,  blade  of 
grass, — the  bud  of  the  plantain  or 
Ixuiana ;  muka,  N.  Z.,  flux ;  tnuko, 
Nuk.,  the  bud  of  the  breadfruit;  7nu'a, 
Snm.,  a  young  cocoa-nut. 

Muli,  Sam.  Haw.,  muri,  N.Z.  Rar.  Mang. 

Tah.,  mui,  Tong.  Nuk.,  allcr,  behind. 

Taii-muli,  Sam.  Tong.,  the  stern  of  a 

vess(d. 

Mulu  (?),   mulumulu,  Sam.,  to   rub,  to 


f  ' 


POLYNESIAN    LEXICON. 


817 


clenn ;  mum,  N.  Z.,  to  rub,  wipo  out, 
obliterate,  wasb  nwuy. 
Musu  (?),  or  mii{l),  musumusu,  Sam.,  to 
whisper, — listless,  wenrlcil,  unwilling; 
omuhii,  Nuk.,  mumiihii,  mitmu.  Haw., 
omuiiiu.  Tab.,  to  wliisper. 

Kniimiimv,  Rnr.,  iJuimii,  Tab.  Ilnw. 
Nuk.,  amiiamu,  N.  Z.,  to  wbispcr,  to 
murmur  logetber,  to  gruml)lc;  miii- 
mid,  Sam.,  to  grumble,  to  be  dissatis- 
fied. 

Mumii,  N.  Z.,  mamii.  Tab.,  niamu, 
mumn,  Mang.,  miimule.  Haw.,  taci- 
turn, stupid,  sullen. 

Mutii,  Mnng.  Nuk.,  miUcki,  Rar.,  silent. 

Ml/rare,  Rar.,  dumb. 

Mutle,  Snm.  Tong.   Mang.  Nuk.,  tictic, 

N.  Z.,  grass. 
A7j<<M,  Tong.  Haw.  N.  Z.,  to  cut  off,  cut 

short,  terminate. 


N 

Na,  prep.,  of,  for,  by  (Gram.  ^§  20,  00). 
N(l,  there,  then,  that — sign  of  distanro  in 

place  aud  time  (Gram.  ^§  41,  52,  50). 

L(i,  rti,  ana,  and  aiu   ap|)ear  to  be 

variations  of  Ibis  particle. 
Na  (!),  nc,  Tong.,  he  (used  as  nominative 

to  a  verb), — nana,  they  (dual) ;  nan- 

tolii,  thi  y  (plural). 
Ne,  no,  Tong.,  na,  Sam.  ct  csct.,  the 

root  of  the  |)ossessive  pronoun  of  the 

third  jwrson  singular  (Gram.  ^§  30, 

40). 
Na,  Sam.  Tong.  Tab.  Haw.,  quieted,  ap- 

|>oased,  ns  a  child  ;  faka-nn,  Tong.,  to 

bush,  make  (]uiot. 
Na,  niihd,  Sam.,  haka-iia,fand,  Nuk., 

to  coucoal  (i.  e.  to  hush  up). 
Na  !  X.  Z.  Uar.,  noha !  Tab.,  lo !  Ixihold  ! 
NinA,  Tab.    Miuiu;.  Haw.,  to   look   at, 

observe,  U'IidIiI. 

Na,  Sam.,  nakv,  N.  Z.,  nac.  Haw.,  but, 

80 


only  J  anake,  N.Z.  Mang.,  awof.  Tab., 
only,  merely,  alone. 
Na,  Tab.  Rar.,  lirst,  beforehand. 

Nafa,  Sam.  Tong.  Nina,  a  drum. 

Naku  ( >),  tuiiituiu,  Sam.,  to  desire,  obey, 
regard ;  nniinou,  Tah.,  to  desire, 
covet ;  nomino.  Haw.,  to  reflect,  to 
think  of  with  approbation  (see  ma- 
niiko). 

Namil,  Sam.  Tong.,  odor,  scent ;  namu- 
iiamit.  Tab.,  foid-scented. 

Namu,  Sam.  Tong.  N.  Z.  Tab.,  a  mus- 
(|uito, 

Nanu,  Sam.,  namu.  Haw.,  to  speak  un- 
intelligibly,  to   speak    in    a    foreign 
tongue. 
Namu,  N.  Z.,  to  grumble,  to  murmur ; 
nanu,  Mang.,  to  curse. 

iVfl.se,  Sam.,  nahe,  Tah.,  fern. 

NatU,  Tong,,  to  kneel ;  Nuk.,  to  mix  up 
puddings,  to  wash  clothes ;  Mang.,  to 
dip,  soak. 

Nave  (!),  navenave.  Tab.  Mang.  Nuk., 
pleasant,  delightful,  joyful. 

Nea,  RaT.,neafiea,  Haw.,  lonely,  desolate. 

Net,  ni,  here,  now,  this, — sign  of  present 
place  and  time  (Gram.  §§  41,  52, 
50), — hence  and,  presently,  ana-nei, 
now,  to-day. 

Neke  (or  neki),  N.  Z.  Rar.  Mang.,  ne'e 
(or  Mc'(),  Tab.  Haw.,  to  move,  to  move 
along, — to  remove  (act.  anJ  neut.) 
Ne'i,  Sam.,  lest. 

Neva,  Sam.,  ptxjr,  destitute;  neice,  Haw., 
to  sutler  from  want ;  neneva.  Tab., 
fcxilisb,  insane. 

Nt,  Sam.  Fak.,  some, — a  collective  par- 
ticle (tiram.  §  1 1). 
Nisi,   Sam.,  nilii,   Tong.,   some;    lihi. 
Haw.,  a  portion,  lot  (Gram.  §  12). 

i'i  or  /(', — (a  number  of  words  having 
a  general  connexion  in  sense,  ap- 
|K.'ar  to  1k^  derived  from  this  rotjt), 
— niania,  mania,  manie.  Haw.,  ma- 


818 


PHILOLOGY. 


nia,  Tah.  Mang.  Nuk.,  manium, 
Sam.,  marino,  N.  Z.  Rar.,  smooth, 
calm,  as  the  sea ;  manino,  Sam., 
clear,  pure,  as  water  ;  nuinino,  Niik., 
clear,  serene,  calm ;  maninmiino, 
Haw.,  the  abating  of  fierce  winds ; 
maim,  Haw.,  to  bo  as.suagcd,  grow 
calm ;  marirc,  N.  Z.,  calm,  peaceful 
(sec  also  m(Uie). 

Nljl  (?),  manifi,  Sam.  Tong.,  thin,  nar- 
row ;  nihinihi.  Haw.,  diflicult,  atrnight, 
— a  narrow  ridge. 

Nifo,  tii/io,  nio,  ubiq.,  tooth. 

Nino,  Toh.  Nuk.,  to  twist. 

NtU,  ubiq.,  cocoa-nut. 

No,  prep.,  of,  for,  from  (Gram.  §§  20,  09). 

No  (?),  none,  Sam.,  to  borrow ;  noi,  nonoi, 
Hnw.  Nuk.,  faka-noi,  Tong.,  inoi, 
N.  Z.  Rar.,  to  beg,  to  entreat. 

Noa,  N.  Z.  Tah.  Ror.,  common,  free,  not 
restricted. 

Nofo,  iiolio,  noo,  ubiq.,  to  sit,  to  dwell. 
(In  'Vi\\\\\\ta\,  jiaruhi  has  liecn  of  late 
substituted  for  ndio). 
Nofixi,  Fak.  Tong.,  ttootjn,  Mang.,  moAo, 
Hnw.,  n  sent. 

Nohinohi  (qu.  1),  N.  Z.,  vohioi.  Haw., 
little ;  ii(vc,  Mang.,  a  dwarf. 

NoflO,  Fnk.  Sam.  Tong.  Tab.,  noni.  Haw. 
Nuk.,  the  morinda  citrifolia. 

Nut,  N.  Z.  Rar.  Haw.  Nuk.,  great,  Inigc. 

Nuku,  Mang.,  place,  spot ;  nu^u,  Sam., 
town,  district ;  nuku,  Rnr.,  nu'tt,  Tah., 
army  ;  nuku,  Viti,  sand,  a  sand-bank. 
(In  Nukuhiva,  Nuku-nono,  &c.,  it 
seems  to  mean  island  or  country.) 


n 

Ua,  na,  ubiq.,  the  plural  article  prefixed 
to  nouns  (Gram.  §  14). 

HaeyjUt,  Sam.,  to  sigh ;    imcmic,  Hnw., 
the  asthma,  ditlicult  breathing ;  kaikai. 


nainai,  Nuk.  (qu.  naenae?),  exhaust- 
ed, 8|H!nl, — referring  to  a  person's 
(mtience  or  breath. 

Unfa,  Sam.  Tong.,  jid.  Tar.,  «p<i,  Mang., 
ana,  anana.  Haw.,  a  fathom. 

Hahek  (qu.  ?),  a)iele,  Tah.,  ya^/aere,  Rar., 
nahrk.  Haw.,  wild  grass,  herbage, 
underwood. 

rJai,  Tong.,  we.  Haw.,  to  gnosh  the  teeth. 

Hakau,  Tong.  N.  Z.  Rnr.,  the  bowels, 
the  viscera, — supposed  by  the  natives 
to  bo  the  seat  of  the  mental  operations, 
— hence  used  for  the  heart  or  mind. 

iJako,  Tong.  N.  Z.,  jirt'o,  Sam.,  kahua, 
naJiua,  Nuk.,  tonahua.  Haw.,  fat,  lard. 

Halafu  (?),  para/iu,  N.Z.,  soot;  nanaliu, 
Itinahu,  Haw.,  charcoal. 

IJaie,   Tong.,   right,   becoming,    proper; 

yari,  Rar.,  goo<l,  pleasant,  agrceoble. 
rialo,  Snm.  Tong.,  paro,  N.Z.  Rnr.,  mj/b, 

Hnw.,  am,  Tnh.,  hid,  forgotten,  lost; 

also,  matj<ilo,  mngaro,  maaro,  with  the 

snmo  meanings. 
IVaka-i/aro,  N.  Z.,  to  hide,  cover,  over- 
whelm. 
IJalu,  Sam.,  i/aru,  N.  Z.,  nalu.   Haw., 

surf,  billow. 
riaiie,  Viti,  n  brother  or  sister;  tua-^nc, 

Sam.,   tuijane,   N.  Z.    Rar.,  tunane, 

Nuk.,  taitiiiutne,  Ilnw.,  elder  brother 

(of  a  sister, — see  tua). 
riano,    Tong.,    tiono,    Haw.,    red-faced, 

flushed. 
llaya,  N.  Z.,  noise,  uproar;  ttana.  Haw., 

to  bark,  growl. 
Uao,  Sam.,  the  gum,  the  grinders;  pau,- 

Tdug.  N.  Z.  Hnw.,  to  chew,  to  champ 

with  the  teeth;  auau,  Tnh.,  to  gnash 

the  teeth. 
Kahu,  tumaJiu,   Nuk.,  tuihu,  luinnhu, 

Hnw.,  to  bite;  kithu,  ntiJtii,  \uk.,  to 

scold,  rebuke. 
IJaoi,  Sam.,  tuuinao,  Hnw.,  to  steal. 


POLYNESIAN    LEXICON. 


319 


rJaosi,  Sam.,  paohi,  Tong.,  to  make.  (See 
mati.) 

IJase,  Sam.,  weak, — ^ano-pase,  lean ;  wa- 
hinahi.  Haw.,  soft  and  thin. 

IJata,  Sam.  Tong.,  a  snake;  garara, 
N.  Z.,  a  reptile  of  any  kind,  a  snake, 
a  large  kind  of  lizard ;  kakd,  nana, 
Nuk.  (qu.  kakati  for  j/agala?),  the 
large  house-lizard. 

Uata,  Sam.  Tong.  Uar.,  difficult,  hard 
(Gram.  §  78);  Uiiata,  Tah.,  with  diffi. 
culty. 

Ilati,  N.Z.  Rar.,  ati,  Tah.,  a  member  of 
a  tribe, — as  IlcUi-Maru,  one  of  the 
Maru  trilie;  nati-Karika,  one  of  the 
Karika  tribe;  aii-Jtidd,  Tah.,  a  Jew. 
(The  original  n.caning  was,  perhaps, 
a  descendant  of  Maru,  Karika,  &c.) 

Uatil,  N.  Z.,  to  scratch,  scrape;  nafu. 
Haw,,  to  seek,  search,  look  nllcr  (i.  e. 
to  leel  about  with  the  hands). 

rjaua,  Tong.,  a  kind  of  disease,  a  cutane- 
ous eruption;  jwmo,  N.  Z.,  netce. 
Haw.,  to  sutler  from  illness,  be  in 
pain. 

J7efe  (?),  5K-«,  N.  Z.,  lazy ;   pert,  Rar., 
iielc.  Haw.,  poor,  destitute. 
Matjeic,  N.  Z.,  idle,  slow ;  macre,  Tah., 
careful,  doubtful,  hesitating. 

IJepuyeptl,  Mang.,  tender,  soft,  yielding 
to  the  tou6h ;  nepunepu.  Haw.,  full  in 
flesh,  plump. 

Uofle,  Sam.,  j/oie,  Rar.,  yo/wi,  Tong., 
easy,  facile  (correlative  to  patd, — 
Gram.  §  78). 

Ilolo(l.),  yoijolo,  Sam.,  a  rushing,  bubbling 
noise ;  ijoyoro,  N.  Z.,  a  noise  like 
snoring, — to  snore;  noiioo.  Haw.,  to 
snore.     (See  yulu.) 

rJoto,  Ham.,  to  sink;  N.  Z.,  to  make 
deep,  to  sink,  as  a  well. 

Hu  (!),  yunu,  Sam.,  waha-yu,  N.  Z., 
dumb;  nunii,  Haw.,  taciturn,  unsocial. 

iJlllu  (?),  tagiilii,  Tong.,  to  snore;  pitpuni. 


Rar.,  nuru,  Tah.,  to  groan,  growl, 
roar;  puguni,  Pau.,  to  grunt, — puru- 
pitru,  a  hog;  nunulu.  Haw,,  to  growl, 
grunt. 
Nil  and  mmu.  Haw.,  to  groan;  mapupu, 
Rar.,  thunder. 

IJutU,  Fak.  Sam.  Tong.,  mouth  of  any 
animal,  beak  of  a  bird ;  putii,  N.  Z. 
Pau.,  ?/<«,  Tah.,  nutu,  Nuk.,  lip,  beak 
of  a  bird;  nutu.  Haw.,  snout,  beak. 


O,  prep.,  of.     (Gram.  §  17.) 

O,  Sam.  Tong.,  conj.,  and.     (Gram.  §  68.) 

O,  Sam.  Tong.,  to  go  (used  only  in  the 
plural);  o,  Tah.  Uar.,  to  enter;  faa-6, 
Tah.,  aka-u,  Rar.,  ho-u,  Haw.,  to  cause 
to  enter. 

0,  Haw.,  to  extend,  reach  out  the  hand ; 
a/,  Sam.,  to  reach ;  oo,  ta-oo,  Rar.,  to 
receive. 

Oja,  Tong.,  owa,  oha,  N.  Z.,  kaolia, 
iiohn,  o/iii,  Nuk.,  a/njh,  Sam.,  amha, 
N.Z.  Tab.,  aroa,  Uar.  Mnng.,  a/ulia, 
Haw.,  love,  good-will,  esteem,  com- 
passion. 

OJi,  Sam.,  to  hove  space  to  enter;  Tong., 
near, — to  approach;  aid,  N.  Z.,  oi, 
Haw.,  to  approach,  draw  near.  (Sec 
kqfi.) 

Ofo,  Sam.  Tong.,  olw,  N.  Z.,  ho-ohiioc. 
Haw.,  to  wonder. 

Ohana,  Tong.,  a  husband  or  wife,  u 
spouse ;  aJuina,  valuiiia,  Nuk.,  a  hus- 
band. 

Oku,  Nuk.,  (Ml,  Haw.,  a  rafter. 

Oktokl,  N.  Z.,  oioi.  Haw.,  rest,  repose. 

Oko,  Along.,  hard,  firm,  solid ;  Nuk., 
strong,  [Kiwcrful, — large,  full-grown, 
ri|)e ;  oo,  Haw.,  ripe,  mature, — oolea, 
strong,  hard. 


320 


P  H  I  L  O  L  O  G  V. 


Ola,  Snm.  Haw.,  ora,  N.Z.  Tah.  Uar. 

Mnng.,  to  live. 
Owl,   Tong.   Tah.,  to   draw   out,   hriiig 

out. 
Omo,  Tah.  I  law.  Nuk.,  to  suck. 
One,  ubiq.,  8and. 
Ono,  six  (Gram.  %  30). 
Ono  (?),  ononnn,  Sam.,  tPinptwi;  oiioii, 

onoimnii.    Maw.,    to    entice,    sodure; 

iDiixmo,  Tah.,  earnest,  solicitous. 
Opa,  Uar,,  to  wrap  up,  to  swathe;  Haw., 

to  squeeze,  press. 
Opata,  i  law.,  a  ravine  on  the  side  of  n 

iiiountnin ;  Nuk.,  a  precipice. 
Oso,  Sam.,  to  leap ;  olio,  N.  Z.,  to  leap, 

start  up, — excited,  moved. 
Oso,  Sam.,  olio,  Tong.,  o.  Haw.,  provi- 
sion for  travelling. 
Ota,  Sam.  Tong.  Uar.  Mang.,  mati,  N.  Z. 

Mhw.,  raw,  uncooked. 
M(Ua,  Haw.,  green   (or   raw)  as   wood 

not  y<!l  seasoned ;  mala,  Unr.  Mang., 

miilomato,    N.  Z.,    nuionuin.    Haw., 

green,  as  grass  ;  nmtd,  Tong.,  a  club 

made  of  a  young  tree. 
Oti,    Sam.    Tong.   N.  Z.    Mang.   Haw., 

ended,  done. 
Oto,  Tah.  Mang.,  to  mourn,  lament. 


Pa,  Sam.  Mang.  Haw.  Nuk     an  enclo- 
sure, a  tence,  wall ;  N.  Z.,  a  fortified 
town ;  pa  eniui,  Uar.,  a  country. 
Patii,  N.  Z.  Rar.  Tah.  Haw.,  a  wall. 

Pa,  \.  Z.  Mang.  Haw.,  to  touch,  to  strike 
gently  ;  ptipu,  Uar.,  to  beat  (sixpaki, 
pati,  patii). 

Pa,  N.  Z.  Tikop.,  father. 

Pa,  Sam.,  X.  Z.  Uar.  Haw.,  barren,  child- 
less. 

Pd,  Sam.,  ])(ipa,  N.  Z.,  to  burst. 


Pa,  Sam.,  barb  of  a  hook ;  Tong.,  a  fish- 
hook of  shell. 

1  ae,  Tah.  Rar.  Mang.,  acparnte,  apart, 
aside;  a  side,  border,  division,  part, 
portion ;  Tah.,  a  collective  particle 
((jiram.  §  14). 
7}iji<ie,  Rar.  Haw.,  tipae,  Tah.,  to  put 
aside,  to  turn  aside,  to  pervert ;  waiia- 
pit;  N.  Z.,  to  accuse. 
NiijMif,  tttpae,  Nuk.,  nijxie,  Tah.,  by  the 
side,  adjacent ;  rajHicaii,  Tah.,  outside 
(|)erhaps  from  fiisi). 

Pahi  (qu.  ?),  Tah.  I'au.,  pai,  Rar.  Mang., 
a  ship. 

Pahn  (qu.  T),  N.  Z.  Tah.  Haw,  Nuk,,  a 
drum. 

Pai,  N.  Z.,  good ;  paia,  Sam.,  sacred ; 
Tah.,  a  priest. 

Paka,  Tikop.,  jmi\i,  Sam.,  a  crab ;  paka, 
Mang.,  pa^a,  Tah.,  shell,  crust,  enve- 
lope. 
Paka,  N.  Z.,  any  thing  dried  by  the  sun ; 
pikiipiikn,  Nuk.,  the  crust  of  twikcd 
fruit. 
Pakiiinka,  Rar.,  paajiaa,  Haw.,  burned, 
scorched,  baked  hard. 

Pakart,  Uar.,  jxuiri,  Tah.,  wise. 

Pakeke,  N.  Z.,  hard,  solid,— hard,  diffi- 
cult to  do ;  jHikcke,  Mang.,  to  disobey  ; 
jxicc.  Haw.,  to  misunderstand. 

Paki  or  Uiki,  Tong.,  to  strike  against, 
impinge;  jxi'i,  Sam.,  to  touch,  strike 
lightly ;  jHijHiki,  N.  Z.  Ror.  Mang. 
Nuk.,  jMii,  jkipai,  Tah.  Haw.,  to 
strike  with  the  palm  of  the  hand,  to 
slap ;  paptiki,  Nuk.,  jmijiai,  Tah., 
Haw.,  to  Iwat  or  chastise. 
Pajmki,  Pau.,  jiajxii,  Tah.,  jMi,  Haw., 

to  imprint,  mark,  write. 
Puiiia,  pajMiina,  Tab.  How.,  the  noise 
of  clapping,  breaking,  rattling,  tick- 
ing, &.C. 

Pakisi  (?),  paki,  N.  Z.,  fair  weather; 
jmihi.  Haw.,  clear,  unclouded,  fair. 

Pala,  jHira,ixia,  ubiq.,  an  ulcer,  sore, — 


POLYNESIAN    I,  E  X  F  C  O  N. 


asi 


piirulrnt  mnltcr, — putrid, — foul,  Hlimy, 
Hrrnsy. 
Ptiitt/iu,  Haw,,  decayed;  jniruU,  Miui^., 
worn  out. 

Palale,  Ilnw.,  jximre,  N.  Z.,  to  cxtrt 
one's  sell"  with  haste  und  disorder, — 
tumult,  confusion  ;  jmrari,  Tah.,  bro- 
ken in  pieces. 

Palaoa,  llnw.,  ixinimi,  N.  Z.  Miing., 
pmiai,  Nuk.,  tht;  H|M!rni-whule, — tooth 
of  the  whale,  ivory. 

Palast,  Sam.,  scattered  about;  pdrnhi, 
Tah.,  jKtrai,  Mang.,  to  sit,  remain, 
dwell. 

Pale,  Tang.  Haw.,  jxirr,  N.  Z.,  to  ward 
off,  parry,  turn  aside. 
Pule,  Sam.  Fuk.  Ilaw.,  jmrr,  N.  Z.  Rnr. 
Mang.,  jxtc,  Nuk.,  hat,  Ininnet,  veil, 
head-dress  (any  thing  to  keep  olT  the 
sun). 

Pariran,  N.  Z.,  jirrcmii,  Tah.,  wing  of 
a  bird;  jtelcleti.  Haw,,  u  sliort,  wide 
canoe  (sec  ktipa). 

Pah,  \\a.y/.,]xiri,  N.  Z.  Tah.,  a  precipice, 

— also  a  stronghold. 
Pan  (?),  jMiri,  N.  Z.,  to  flow,  as  the  sea  ; 

Mang.,  to  gush  out,  to  pass  out, 

PaloiO,  Sam.,  mlxiMo,  Vili,  name  of  a 
sen-worm  which  np|M'ars  on  the  reef 
at  a  certHin  season  of  the  year ;  hence, 
piiMo,  Sam.,  nihiMo,  Vili,  paroro, 
Tah.  Kar.,  name  given  to  two  of  the 
niDUllis  (ante,  p.  08). 

Palll,  Sam.,  to  tlissolve  ;  Tong.,  to  mix 
with  water;  Iluw.,  to  lick,  lap  water. 
Paliiptilii,  \Uiw,,jHiriij>uni,  Tab.,  jMirii- 
ka/iii,    Unr,,   soft,  weak ;  pnnipiini, 
Uar.  Tab.,  bruised,  wounded,  hurt. 

/  anakt,  Uur.,  to  repair,  substitute  new 
for  old  ;  paruii.  Haw.,  to  redeem,  give 
a  substitute, — piiiai,  to  repair,  mend. 

/  ant,  Sam.  Tong.  N.  Z.,  to  besmear, 
plaster;  apani.  Tab.,  mopa/ii,  Kar., 

81 


jnjxini.  Haw.,  to  8tt)p  up,  close  up, 

cover  over. 
Paiii,  Nuk.,  cocoa-nut  oil  for  anointing 

the  head. 
/  aye,  liar.  I'au.,  jHir,  Tab.,  jxirjHir,  Haw. 

Nuk.,  that  which  supports  or  sustains 

any  thing, — a  prop,  stool,  stand,  &c. 
Pagu,  Mang.,  pakii,  jxiiiu,  Nuk.,  /»/«o. 

paiio.  Haw,,  black. 
Pao,  Tub.  Uar.  Haw.,  to  dig  or  hew  out. 
i  rtO,  Tab.,  7«w,  Haw.,  fast,  firm,  fixed; 

iMa./xu),  Tab.,  to  make_  fast,  to  fix,  to 

ap|Hiint,  to  keep,  to  comprehend  ;  lion. 

pao.  Haw.,  to   establish,  fix  ;   lii/xio, 

Tab.,  a  sign,  evidence,  confirmation, 
1  apa,  iibirj.,  any  thing  flat  and  solid,  as  a 

plank,  table,  rock. 
PiijMijMipa,  Mang.,  flat,  level. 
Pupa,  Haw.,  a  row,  a  rank,  a  file  ;  yxi- 

/Hiija,  Mung.,  a  line. 
i  apn,  Tab.  Mang.  Pau.,  pnpalaiji,  Sam. 

Tong.,  foreign,  foreigner   (applied  to 

the  whites). 
PajHi-aiii,  Nuk,,  "  a  part  of  the  sky  ; — 

also,  a  term  applied  by  them  to  iron" 

(i.  e.  liirt'ign  substance). 
Papalhja    (?),   jmpanr/u,   N.  Z.    Ror., 

papaliiKi,  Haw.,  piijxiriii,  Tab.,  pa- 

jHiiiia,  Nuk.,  the  cheek. 

Papaku,  N.  Z„  low;  p'lpait.  Tab.  Haw. 

Nuk.,  shallow. 
Papll,  Tab.  Haw,,  a  plain,  a  level  piece 

of  ground   ([icrbaps   a   corruption  of 

ptiixi). 
1  ata,  Tong,,  coarse-grained, — one  pata, 

gravel  (i,  e.  coarse  sand) ;  pata.  Haw,, 

rain  falling  in  large  drops. 
Patt,    Sam.   Tong.,   to   clop   the    hands 

logelber ;    Haw.,   to   smite   with   the 

palm  of  the  band  (see/(rt,  paki). 
Patiti,  Tah.  Uar.,  to  fasten;  Haw.,  hard, 

firm,  compact,  obstinate. 
Pain,  N.  Z.  Uar.  Mang.  Tab.  Nuk.,   to 

strike,  to  lieat  (see  pa  and  tu). 


322 


PHILOLOGY. 


Pail,  Snm.,  to  ccnso ;   N.  Z.  Tnh.  Miitif;. 
Haw.,  jmii,   Rar.,  dniic,  riidnl,  piisl 
nwny. 
Pun,  Hnw.,  coniplt'to ;    liriicc,   nil,  the 
whole. 

Pml,  Snin.,to  full ;  /w//,Tiili.,  to  ilrsrcriil. 

Pf,  Snm.,  if,  wlu'ii,  as  ;  Ik\  Toiig.,  when, 
nlso,  only  i  '(/«%  Ton;;.,  ^r,  /*•</,  \.  Z., 
pea,  Vnk.,  jhilid,  llnw.,  |H"rlm|)s. 
iVi,  Snm.,  like ;  y«',  N.  'A.  ct  cut.,  likn 
(iisfd  only  in  roni|x>nn(l  Irrnis,  ns, 
penei,  like  this,  thus, — /x'/«,  like  that, 
— iwftaf  liko  which,  how?  vVc.) 

Pt,  Sam.,  p/o,  Mnng.  Haw.,  extinguished, 
extinct. 

Peka,  Tikop.  N.  Z.,  Wi;,  Tong.,  ;»•'«, 
Sam.,  a  bat. 

Peha,  Mnng.,  iipe/,11,  N.  Z.,  n  cross,  n 
slick  laid  crossways  j  j>ck<i>j<i,  N,  Z., 
n  corner,  or  crossing  of  the  stre<!t. 
Pekiijifhi,  lUr.,  jifii/if<i,  Tah.,  ollindcd, 
hurt,  perplexed,  atllicled  (i.c.rronsid). 
lloitjieii,  llnw.,  to  punish,  to  accuse 
maliciously. 
I'ljwka,  Hnr.,  Uijica,  Tnh.,  n  yoke, — 
also,  Rnr. 'J'ah.  Haw.,  to  .seize,  confine 
as  n  criminal. 

Pehe,  N.  Z.  Rnr.,  to  remove,  move  oil'; 
]>ec,  Tah.,  to  follow, — iifrj>ef,  to  hasten ; 
/)«?,  Haw,,  to  run  nnd  hide. 

Pelt,    Snm.,    Mr,   Tong.,    iika-jtfrcjHrr, 
Rnr.,  here,  Fuk.,  a  favorite, — lieloved. 
Pelr/ir/f,  Snm.,  apcre,  Tnh.,  to  cherish, 
minister  to. 

Pelll,  Hnw.,  ])fni,  Tnh.,  pcu,  Nuk.,  to 
double,  fold  up. 

Penil,  Pnu..  the  hend;  Tah..  a  stone 
pestle. 

Pfpe,  Sam.  Tong.  Tnh.  Nuk.,  a  butterfly. 

Pej>c,  N.  Z.,  trembling,  llulleruig  ;  .Mnng., 

frngile,   triable;    Haw.,    soil,   pliable, 

broken  fine,  rotten;  Tah.  Nuk.,  rotten, 

bad. 


Pfti,  Nuk.,  to  trt'nd,  to  trample  on  ;  jieti- 

lirii,  Tong.,  pigs'  feci,  trotters. 
'  ',  \.  Z.,  the  young  of  on  animni ;  npi, 

Tnh.,  Ao/Ho,  Nuk.,  (tpio,  Hnw.,  young. 
P f,  Mang.  Nuk.,  y»(Vi<i,  Hnw.,  kupi,  Nuk., 

fiill. 
Pin,  Tah.  Rnr.   llnw.  Nuk.,  nrrow-rool 

(tni'ca  pitnmtifidn). 
Pihe  ((|u.  0.  N.  Z.,  n  funeral  odo;  Haw., 

lamentation,  wniling, 
Pihr,  Tnh.  Nuk.,  n  song. 
Pi/ti,  S.  Z.,  hiki,  Tong.,  pii,  "finm.,  to 

ndliert',  stick,  cling  to ;    hence,  piki, 

N.  Z.    Rnr.   Mang.    Nuk.,  pii,  Tnh. 

Haw.,  to  climb,  nscend. 
/  th'O,  jii'o,  ubiq.,  to  bend,  curvc,^curvcd, 

bent. 
I  ihlH,   Hnw.,  piiiii,  Nuk.,  jiiro,  N.  Z., 

Mang.,    fetid,     foul-scented  ;     pirtni. 

N.  Z.  Rnr.  Mnng.,  putrid,  spoilt. 
Plli,  Hnw.,  ;»>»,  Rar.  .Mnng.  Tnh.,  to  nd- 

here,  stick  to,  stny  with ;  pili,  Fnk.. 

iienr,  adjoining;  piri,   N.  Z.,   close, 

near,  crowded. 
Pipiii,  Tnh.,  /«,  Haw.,  .stingy,  parsimo- 
nious (i.  e.  close). 
Piri/id,  Rnr.,  to  compress,  stifle;  pi/ilia, 

Hnw.,   crowded,   close,    straightened, 

diiricult. 
1\ijii/i,  Haw.,  tapiri,  Tah.,  tdpii,  Nuk.. 

to  besmear,  anoint,  stick  on, 
0]>iJi,  Haw.,  the  cramp;  pipii,  Nuk,, 

contraction  of  the  limbs, 
Pili,  Sam,,  }>ili,  Tong.,  bif.  Tar.,  n  lizard, 
Pipi.  ubi(|.,  the  cockle  (shell-fish). 
I  isi,  Snm.,  to  fnll ;  bihi,  Tong.,  to  splash. 
/  ISI,  Sain.,  Inhia,  Tong.,  contagions, 
PitO-  ubi(].,  end,  extremity  of  n  cord,  stick, 

&c., — hence,    the    navel ;    Haw.,    the 

crown  of  the  head ;  hito,  Tong.,  full. 

brimful, — i.  e.,  reaching  to  the  top. 
Po,  Sam.  Tar.,  jmirii,  Tah.,  to  strike  with 

the  hand;  jioko,  Nuk.,  to  strike  one 

arm  with  the  other  hand  open ;  jifiekn. 


POLYNESIAN    LEXICON. 


898 


Nuk.,   to   hit  will)  ii  hIoiic  or  ihot ; 

jMrii,  llnw.,  to  kill  and  rob. 
Poi,  /n/ini,  Tonn.  Tiih.   Miiii;^.   Nuk.,  n 

piiste  or  jelly  iiinili!  of  Irriiicntcd  vc^r. 

Inblrs  {iim  or  miisi),  niixiMJ  with  thi' 

juice  of  the  rocoa-iiut,  or  of  the  ilrii- 

cirna  root.     {Slv  jxiki.) 
Poka  (!),  boka,  Tong.,  yjwi,  llaw.,  to  cnii- 

Imle. 
Pokai,  N.Z.  Nuk.,  to  fiild,  roll  up;  jxMii, 

llnw.,  to  riK'irrli-,  go  round, 
Poki,  N./.  Knr.  Mung.,  ym'j,  Tiih.  Ilaw., 

riivcri'd. 
JIi/)oki,  N.  Z.,  Iiijutki,  llnr,,  litpoi,  Tnh., 

p(ii,  Haw.,  to  cover. 
Poki,  Nuk.,  p<)U,  Unw.,  a  pnsle  or  pud. 

diii^  made  of  the  tiilo  or  nrinr.  root, 

bilked,  mashed,  and  mixed,  (at  Nuku- 

hiva,)    with   cwoa-nul    juice,    or   (at 

Hawaii),  with  water.     (Soc  /mi.) 

Poko  (.'),  jxikii,  N. Z.,  (ijnM),  Tah.,  a  pit; 
jDikiiinkii,  Mang.,  deep,  dii;;  out. 
Ttijnn,  llnw.,  to  sink,   as    into   water; 
lapoko,  N.  Z.,  to  enter, — also,  a  bag. 

Poko  (I),  jw'o,  llaw.,  iipoko  (qu.  for  iilii- 
jmko .'),  Unr.  Mang.  Nuk.,  iijioo,  Tah., 
the  head. 
Ulii-Utkn,  Ton);.,  ulii-jw'o,  Sam.,  ijaro- 

kttviikit,  Viti,  the  skull. 
Poko-iiri,  N. Z., ;wo-/(irj,Tah., /JOo-/iHC», 
llnw.,  tlie  shoulder. 
Poko-tllU,  Tikop.,  llie  knee. 

Pum,  Tnh.,  to  proclaim ;  Mang.,  to  call 
U|H)n,  demand. 
Pola,    Sam.,    Ma,   Tong.,    jxxi,    Nuk., 
thatch  of  cocoa-nut  leaves. 

Polo  (]),  poloiCi,  Sam.,  jK>roi,  Tah.,  to 
charge,  command ;  pormtki,  Uar.,  to 
command,  commission,  to  take  leave 
of;  pirojMmMiki,  N.Z.,  to  take  leave  of. 

Polo  [I),  jxJq/'eii,  Sam.,  <tiiimro,  Tah., 
iiiipm,  Nuk.,  [)ep|)cr. 

Pololi,  Haw.,  jxiiori,  Tah.,  pooi,  Nuk., 


Pona,  Sam.   N.Z.   liar.   Nuk.,  a   knot; 
Haw.,  the  pnrtN  of  n  HU);nr-cnne  bo- 
twirn   the   joints ;   /xiHtijxmii,  N.  Z., 
joint ;  /ntiu,  Nuk.,  a  bunch  or  knot  of 
four  bread-fruits  tied  together. 
Pono,  N.Z.  llnw.,  right,  just,  giKxl. 
Poyi  (f),  ni/miji,  Vili,  /««,  Tar.,  jn,  Sam. 
Tcing.  et  cirt.,  night  (used  nisn  liir  day, 
in  enuuieraling, — as,  lasi  /m,  one  day : 
JK>  fill,  how  many  days  ?) 
Ihiiiii,  Sam.,  benighted, — /lonisii,  dnrk, 
A'//'<J,  I  law.,  to  set  or  disapjx'ar,  as  the 

sun. 
Jtiiiii/niiji,  Tong,,  mfiopiiiiliotfi,  Viti,  jn- 
■/K>i)i,  Uar.,   jMiiii/Kiiii,  Haw.,   jnijioi. 
'I'nh.,  morning, — hence, 
Ji'ti}iljoiii,'l\>nf!..,ni/K>ijiMljo)ii,\[\\,  /njioi, 
Nuk.,  ii/m/io,  Uar.   Mang.   Haw.,  to. 
morrow ;    iijmjio,    \uk.,    some    time 
hence. 
I'diiH,  Sam,  llaw.,  Imiiti,  Tong.,  jmiri, 
N.Z.  Miing.,  iKiiri,  Uar. Tah.,y)Op/f«/e, 
llaw.,  dark. 
Pixin,   Snm.,    fog,    mist   (qu,   dny-dark- 
ne«s) ;  jHta,  jwan,  N,  Z.,  smoke, 
Poyi  (0,   jxmi.  Haw.,   jnjnki,  Nuk.,  to 
Ix'sinear,  daub  with  a  coloring  matter. 
Poifl,  Uar.,  ]Hii(i,  Tnh.,  hungry. 
Popo,  Snm.,  an  old  cocoa-nut ;  hilio,  Tong.. 
rotten,  mouldy;  /m/w.  Haw.,  a  mass 
of  matter  of  a  globular  form, — rotten, 
decayed,  ns  vegetables ;  yOT/w;,  Nuk.. 
dust,  especially  from  decayed  wood, — 
a  fungus. 
Potiki,  N.  Z.,  imlii,  Haw.,  the  younge.si 
member  of  a  family;   jiotii.  Tab.,  ii 
girl. 
Polo,  Snm.,  /x>/o,  Tong.,   wise,   shrewd. 

cunning;  tiijioto,  N.  Z.,  suspicious. 
Polo,  N.Z.  Uar.  Mang.  Tab.  Hnw.  Nuk.. 
short, 
Dntdxito,  Tong.,  round  ;  ]iotoj>oto,  Snm.. 
clo.se  tog(!ther,  assembled. 
Poll,  ubic],,  post, 
Pu,    N,  Z.,   a    bundle,   bunch, — a   trilx-. 


324 


P  II I  L  O  L  O  (J  Y. 


IhiiiiI, — /'«/'«.  to  liind  in  a  hunilltt ; 
piipii,  Kiir.  Tnli.  Iln<\.,  n  liiinrh,  knot, 
biuullr, — II  hiinil,  ('oin|)nny  ;  lliiw,,  n 
huncli,  iiM  orgrujin  i)r  Icnvi-M.  (Sec  /«.) 
"m,  t^iim.  'I'lih.  Iliiw.,n  Cdni-li,  ii  lriiiii|H't, 
n  iiiiiHki'l ;  N.  /.,  n  rvliiicliT,  iniiski'l, 
flutn  (i,  I',  niiy  tliiii);  lo  lilow  tlir(>ii);li). 

Puhi,  N.  Z.  'i'lili.  Iliiw.  Nuk.,  hiihi, 
Tcinn.,  /<//«,  Man;!.,  I"  blow,  lo  ptill', — 
hpnci*,  to  tire  II  iMiiMkct,  wliidi  the  iiii- 
tivc.i  lit  lirsl  Hiipiiotivd  lo  In;  doiio  by 
blowing  into  it. 
Pit,  Mnn|{.,  thick  ;  pii,  N.  '/•.,  ii  jirpgnnnt 
womiin. 

Jiiilii,  liiihiiUi,  Tong.,  viife,  viiviift,  Vili, 
jtii/iii/ii,  Nuk.,  jiiir,  Mnng,,  to  swell, 
Nwollen  ;  piita,  Sam.,  Hwolirn,  Inrgc. 

Pnf/)iie,  llnw.,  largo,  plump;  biihurii. 
Tut.,  Inrgp. 

Plia,  llnw.,  to  np|)rnr  nt  a  ilistanre,  ri.sc 
up  ns  .smoke  ;  jiiia,  Nuk.,  loam. 

Pua,  N.  Z.,  bmi,  Tonj,'.,  a  species  ot'plimt 
Itciiring  n  lnr;!e  (lower ;  jum,  Uar. 
Mnng.  llnw.  Nuk.,  n  llower  (see  /»</). 

Puakn,  N.  Z.  Uar.  Nuk.,  /jwihi,  Ton^.. 
jiim'ii,  Sniii.  Tall,  llnw.,  viitikii,  Vili, 
swine,  n  hog. 
Punkii,  .Maiig.,  n  U-ast,  animal, — e.xcla- 
miitinn  of  displeasure;  hiuikiika.  Tar., 
bad,  vile. 

PuOkI,  Uar.  Nuk.,  piiti'i,  Sam.,  to  vomit ; 
jmtii,  Tab.  Haw.,  lo  How  out,  pour 
forth ;  n-tikii.pmtki,  N.  Z.,  to  cause  lo 
apix-ar,  to  uller. 

Pulli  (,pi.  .'),  N.  Z.  Tah.  Haw.  Nuk.,  piii, 
.\lang.,  an  eel. 

I  like,  Tikop.,  Iiuke,  Tong., /jmV,  Snm.,  to 
Iny  hold  of,  .seize;  puc,  llnw.,  to 
u.ssail,  attack, — to  gain  what  is  an- 
other's. 

Puke,  N.  Z.  Uar.,  viike,  Vili,  pii'e,  Sam. 
Tab.,  n  hill,  mounii,  heap  ;  jiiie.  Haw., 
to  "  weed  out  and  hill  up,ns  potatoes." 
I'ltke,  Uar.,  pur,  'I'ah.,  a  coUectivo 
particle  (Cirnin.  §  14). 


Ptlkll  itt/m'ii,  Nuk.,7>MM,  Tnh,,  any  imall 
glohiilnr  atilMlnnce,  a  iN-rry,  n  joint, 
knob,  bull  ;  pioi.  Haw.,  n  protube- 
rance, biiiicb,  heap,  —  lump,  a  lot, 
(Hirtion,  —  a  collective  sign  ((iram, 
§  11);  mhiikii,  Vili,  a  knot;  jniku, 
N,  Z.,  the  aloninch, — Ihu  blwk  of  b 
ship. 

Uiikii/iiikii,  Tong.,  pinipiiii,  Sam.,  /««- 
/mil.  Haw.,  Nipiab,  short  and  thick, 

I'ukiipiikii,  Uar.,  rough,  i.  e.  covered 
with  knobs. 

I'likiitrtwirrir,  N.  '/,.,  pukiwaevtie,  Rar., 
puuviie,  Nuk.,  the  ankle. 

I'.iii.Uiiiu,  Haw.,  the  wrist-joint. 

I'ii/xi-jiiikH,  Mang.,puk'ot  ltuk\  Tar., 
the  buttoeka, 

PtlUl,  Wavi.,  piira,  N.  '/.,,  a  small  particle 
of  any  thing,  n  inoto. 

i  llle,  Sam.,  lo  dwrjK>,  ap|ioint,  govern  ; 
tiiliii/i,  Vili,  to  appoint  a  king ;  bii/e, 
Tong.,  lo  order,  regulate,  govern,  take 
council ;  mbiire,  Vili,  a  house  for 
public  meetings  and  councils,  and  also 
liir  worship;  jiii/r.  Haw.,  jmrr,  Uar, 
Tab.,  to  pray,  to  worship, — religion, 

I  Ule,  .Sniii.,  /<«/(',  Tong.,  mhiitr,  \\\\,  piie, 
Nuk.,  a    spotted   shell,   a   s|K>cies   of 
oviila. 
Puhpitle,  Sam.,  hiilrbule,  Tong.,  pure- 
pure,  N.  Z.  Tab.,  spoiled,  variegated. 
I'lipiire,  Tab.,  a  le|M'r ;  jiiijiulc.  Haw., 

insane, — a  lunatic. 
Piile-hhiia,    Haw.,  pur-ehua,    Nuk.,   a 
butlerlly. 

/  Ult  (}),  puri,  N.  Z.  (passive  pitrUia), 
piitili.  Haw.,  lo  take  up,  to  clasp, 

/  liltiku  or  puluu  ((|u.  ?),  piirokit,  Mang., 
lo  enveloiie,  wrap  \i\i ;  piiloii ,  Haw., 
bii/oii,  'i'ong.,  piioii,  Nuk.,  lo  cover 
th<!  head,  lo  veil, — a  covering  for  the 
head  ;  pit/oii,  Sam.,  buloijn,  Tong.,  a 
hat,  bonnet,  covering  for  the  head  ; 
puhii,  Fnk.,  a  jacket. 

PuwtU,  Sum.,    bulolu,  Tong.,   tnburbtu. 


P  O  I,  V  N  K  H  I  A  N    I,  K  X  1  C  ()  N. 


886 


Viti,  nil  iiliiiiil  ili'Hcrilii'il  nn  n  lurri'N. 
(riiil  |)nrniliiM>,  Niiiiiilnl  luwnrilM  llin 
linrthwcKl,  1111(1  xiipiioNccI  to  ini  thu 
iiImiiI<!  ill'  (livinilirH  J  /iiirutu  or  jKinitii, 
Tall.  Itiir,  Miiii)(,,  iKnilii,  \uk.,  tint', 
Imiiilioiiic,  cxciiiiMitc,  [MTlift  (i.  o.  hen. 
vi'iily.  |iiiriuliiuiii'nl). 
RtJiutii,  'I'lili.,  icrrcntrml  |inrmliM>,  rniiii- 
try  ofumilM. 
Pitlll,  Sniii.,  /iii/ii,  Tiiiij;.,  piiii,  Niik.,  iIip 

lllltll  Wllii'll  CIIVclolM'H  thr  <"<)Cllll.|llll,— 

iiw'd  liir  liiiiiliiiK,  i-aulkiii).',  i,Vc. 
Piilii/iii/ii,  Slim.,  hiitiibiilii,  Toii((.,  tci 
wrnp  lip  uliiHoly,  to  cover  the  bfxlyi 
mliiihiy  Vili,  to  coviT,  lo  liiiry  ;  puni, 
N.  /.,  to  hold  Inst, — n  cork  or  sto|i|irr 
fiir  n  iMvttlc. 
Biilii,  Toil);.,  jjiim,  pitch,  or  any  adhesive 
snlMlnncc  ;  /nipiini.  Tub.,  slimy,  mi- 
hosivo, 

I IUKI,  Suiii.,  hiinii,  Tong.,  to  jump,  spring 
up,  Hy ;  /iiinii.  Mini);.,  to  gush  up, — 
n  spriiii;,  I'oiinlaiii  ;  pinui,  N.  /.,  n 
spriii); ;  I  luw.,  n  well,  pit, — /miKi-triii, 
n  spniij,', — iiKi/iiiiiii,  to  iKiil  up,  as 
water  out  of  Iho  sen. 

PitHt,  Slim.,  lo  eiiflosc,  ns  n  net  ;  pinii, 
Tiih.  I  law.  .\nk.,  I'ini,  Uar.,  to  );o 
rniinil,  surround,  eiicloso — l<i  dose  up, 
finish,  eoniplrle  ;  /iiini,  N.  /.,  close, 
clo-sed  up  ;  Mnii<!.,  finished, — piotitfii, 
n  senl  (i.  e,  that  which  closes  up); 
tn-lmni,  Tong.,  to  shut, — n  Ixilt  or 
bar;  viitii,  Vili,  to  shut  up,  to  con- 
ceal ;  piipuiii,  Nuk.,  to  conceal ;  y/i/- 
iiijiimi,  llnw.,  to  di'ceivo. 

Pliniill,  Sam.,  hiinoii,  'long,,  to  incline, 
bow  down,  siu)p  (sec  iO,  tiilOii). 

Pitnua,  Nuk,  Mang.  Rnr.,  the  young  of 
any  nnininl. 

Pliyo,  Smii.  Mang.,  pida  or  jmitn,  Nuk., 
jiiind,  Ihiw.,  /iiiu,  Tab.,  coral  stone. 
Piitjii,  N.  Z.,  pumice, — also,  nn  anchor, 
(which,  where  coral  is  found,  is  usually 
n  fragment  of  that  stone.) 

82 


Pupil,  Sum.,  rocky  const,  arched  wny  ; 
llaw.,  roughly,  heavily, — liitr  pn/m, 
to  drag  a  log  or  eaiUM'  through  hriish 
among  ns'ks ;  /nijiii-miiii,  Nuk.,  rough. 

/  M.Vrt,  Slim.,  Iiitlui,  Tong.,  /miinktt,  N, '/.,, 
pilin,  Tnh.,  /nVj,  Uar„  n  Ikix,  chest. 

/  Ulu,  N./.  Miiiig.  llaw.  Nuk.,  to  ri«<»  up, 
come  in  sight,  ap|H'ar,  enter, — nn  i>n- 
trance,   nn   a|»'rture ;  put<i,  Tnh.,  n 
Wound. 
IT/iiitit,  Tah.  llnw.,  n  door.     (.Sec  yiH.) 

P'lti;  N./.  Unr„nbng. 

I'lltu,  piihi/mtii,  N.Z.  Rnr.  Mnng.  Tnh. 
Nuk., close,  thick  together, — to  nsscm- 
hie  ;  Jh'n-piitit,  Sum.,  akn-piitiipiilii, 
Knr.,  luM-piiliipiilii,  Tnh.,  &c.,  to  col. 
lect,  gather  logi'lher,  convene. 

Pimerewere  (ipi.  ?),  .N.  '/..,  pmmur/e. 
vr/i;  llnw.,  jmiiiivievrr,  .Nuk.,  n  s|>e- 
cies  of  apiiler. 
(There  sei'ins  to  In-  n  thrcnd  of  connexion 
running  through  most  of  the  words  lie- 
ginning  with  pii ;  the  primary  iilea 
seems  to  Ik-  In  incrcnsr,  either  in  size 
or  numlicr, — whi'iice,  to  swell,  enlarge, 
risi'  up,  (low  out, — to  lie  joined  together, 
nssembled,  formed  into  n  bundle— or 
into  n  heap — or  into  n  solid  sub- 
stnnce, — to  be  united,  tied  up,  wrnpped 
round,  &c.  dec.] 


Sa,  Snm.,  //«,  Tong.,  some  one.     (Gmm. 

§  la.) 

Sa,  Snm.  Fnk.,  sacred ;  (t'd,  Viti,  bad,  (|U. 

siiccr,  accursed  ?     See  /««.) 
Sae,  hae,ae,  ubiq.,  to  tear,  rend; — N.Z. 

Tab.  llnw.  Nuk.   liar.    Mnng.,  wild, 

furious,  contentious. 
Masne,  Snm.,  nuihae,  Tah.,  yiuie,  Rar., 

nahiie.  Haw.,  torn. 
SaKa,  Fak.,  srt'rt,  Sam.,  haka,  N.Z,  Nuk., 

luCa,  Haw.,  a  dance. 


i 


Iv 


.. 


326 


PHILOLOGY. 


Saka  (7),  }uM,  Hnw.,  Iiatifuui,  Tah.,  aka- 
Ilka,  Rnr.,  low,  short. 

Sakaii  (?),  fakaii,  Viti,  fuiknii,  Tong., 
li'aH,  Sam.  Tah.,  a  reef  of  rocks. 

Akin/,  N.  Z.,  the  sea-coust ;  aiiit-tu, 
Nuk.,  rocks,  or,  a  rocky  shore. 
Sake  (]),  fake,  Vili,  hake,  Tong.,  akc, 
N.  Z.  Uar.  Mnng.,  itf,  Sam.  Tah. 
Haw.  Nuk.,  up,  upwards,  over,  be- 
yond.    (Gram.  §^  38,  58.) 

S<i'sae,  Sam.,  hiihake,  Tong.,  eastward, 
windward  (i.  e.  up). 

Knke,  N.  Z.  Rnr.,  ac,  Tah.,  to  ascend,  to 
mount;  ae.  Haw.,  to  i)ass  over,  step 
over,  embark. 

Sala,  hula,  hftra,  ara,  luia,  ubiq.,  sin, 
transgression,  guilt. 

Sala,  Sam.  Viti,  ha/a,  Tong.,  a/a,  Haw., 
lira,  N.Z.  T»h.,  ara,  Rar.  Mang.,*;, 
Nuk.,  path,  road. 

Sala  (>),  siirasara,  \'iti,  araara,  Tah., 
ara,  Alang.,  mahara,  N.  Z.,  to  Uxik  at, 
observe,  see ;  maarii  !  Rar.,  Iwhold  ! 
mehara.  Tub.,  to  consider,  call  to 
mind;  haJiiwi,  halalo.  Haw.,  to  scruti- 
nize, look  earnestly. 

Sale,  Fak.,  haelc,  Tong.,  haere,  N. Z.  Tah., 
acre,  Rar.,  are,  t-re,  Mnng.,  helc,  luirle 
(plural),  Haw.,  hce,  Nuk.,  to  come  or 
go,  to  move,  proceed. 

Salo  ( !),  mosalosain,  Sam.,  mahaln,  Tong., 
haohim.  Haw.,  to  doubt ;  fc-masido- 
salo,  Snm.,  to  reason  together. 
Maluilo,  Haw.,  mUiarn,  N.  Z.,  numrn, 
Mang.,  malian,  kanahao,  Nuk.,  to 
wonder,  admire. 

Salll,  .Sam.,  to  strip,  tear  oil";  halu.  Haw., 
hani.  Tab.,  to  conliscnio  property,  to 
plunder. 

Sama,  Rot.,  famn,  Viti,  riima,  Tnr., 
lumiii,  Tong.,  aitui,  Sam.  et  cn't.,  an 
outrigger  to  a  canoe. 

Sao,  Snin.,  to  enter;  luio,  N.Z.  Haw.,  to 


put  in,  enclose ;  au  (qu.  ao  ?),  Nuk., 

to  enter. 
Sao,  Sam.,  straight,  correct ;  saosaoa,  Viti, 

Imaliaoa,  Tong.,  just,  perfect. 
Sapai,  Sam.,  ajmi,  Rar.  Mang.,  hapai  or 

hojm.  Tab.,  to  carry  or  support  with 

the  arms;  /utjxii,  N.Z.  Haw.,  to  lif^ 

up,  to  elevate. 
Sapo,  Sam.,  halio,  Tong.,o^w,  Haw.  Nuk., 

to  catch,  as  a  ball. 
Sapu  (?),  /mjm,  N.  Z.  Tah.,  ajm,  Rar., 

pregnant. 
Sasa,  Sam.,  haluiii,  1  law.,  to  beat,  scourge. 

Saif,  Sam.,  /wM,  N.  Z.,  wind,  dew ;  haii. 
Haw.,  land-wind  of  night,  dew ;  hahaii, 
Tong.,  luiu,  Tah.  Nuk.,  au,  Rar., 
dew. 

Sail,  Sam.,  /irtK,  Tong.,  a  king ;  )mu,  Tah., 
n(^,  Rar.  .Mang.,  kingdom,  govern- 
ment, reign ;  huv.  Tab.,  to  surpass, 
excel. 
Saii-rei,  Viti,  (qu.  good  government?), 
/w«,-Talv.,  ail,  Rar.,  |)eace. 

Sail,  Sam.  Fak.,  /i(fo,  Tong.,  ao,  Rnr.. 
«/«',  N.  Z.,  to  come. 

Sana,  Snm.,  A«t'a,  Hnw.,  wicked,  sinful ; 
rva,  .Mang.,  to  forbid  (qu.  forbidden  ?). 

Sauya,  Sam.,  awpa,  Rar.,  hauna.  Haw,, 
hiiua.  Tall.,  ofl'ensive  odor. 
Faa-saii ga ,  Sam.,  to  act  mischievously  ; 
hoo-huinia-cle.    Haw.,   to    cause    dis- 
turbance, sedition. 

Savill,   Sam.,  havUi,  Tong.,   a    strong 

brcc/e. 
Se,  Snm.  Fak., /«-,  Tong.  N.Z.  Hnw.,?, 

Tub.  Rar.  Nuk.,  the  indufuiito  article, 

— ul.so  a  verbal  particle  (Oram.  §§  11, 

51). 

>Se,  Viti,  sesr,  Sam.,  hv,  kelic,  Tong.  N.  Z., 
ce,  Mang.,  to  err,  mistake,  wander. 

>SW  (f),  hci,  N.  Z.  Nuk.,  an  ornament  for 
the  neck  ;  I'au.,  a  |H'nrl. 

Seke  (?),  AcV,  Sam.,  hekc,  Tong.  N.  Z.,  to 


POLYNESIAN    LEXICON. 


327 


slide,  to  slip ;  lice,  Tnli.  Haw.,  to  slip, 
glide,  mqlt  nwny,  flee;  eke,  Mang.,  to 
give  way,  to  go  to  ruin ;  lieke,  N.  Z., 
eke,  Unr.,  to  descend ;  heke,  Nuk.,  to 
retreat,  ebb,  as  the  sea. 

Seke  (?),  hchi,  Tong.,  eke,  N.  Z.,  ee,  Tab. 
Haw.,  to  embark,  to  mount,  as  a  borse ; 
liekaheka,  Tong.,  to  sit  Ujion. 

Sela  (t),  liela,  Tong.,  fatigue,  breathless, 
short  of  breath ;  hem,  N.  Z.,  gaping' 
(((U.  gasping?)  ;  era,  Mang.,  a  pause. 

Sele,  Sam.  Viti,  Itclr,  Tong.,  hclehek.  Haw., 
to  rut,  to  cut  in  two. 
Mdlielc,  Maw.,  to   divide,  to  cut  oH"  a 
portion   for  one ;    maltere.  Tab.,   to 
portion  out,  to  give  over,  to  grant. 

Sele  (?),  lulc,  Tong.  Haw.,  a  snare,  noose ; 
Iwre,  N.  Z.,  to  tic,  bind  ;  ere,  Rar.,  to 
hang  with  a  noose  (sec  fete). 

Sclu,  Sam.,  sent,  Viti,  he!ii,  Tung.,  heru, 
N.  Z.,  a  comb ;  helu.  Haw.,  to  paw  or 
scratch  the  earth. 

Sema  (?),  /tema,  Tong.  Haw.,  emu,  Mang., 
left,  sinister. 
Hemn,  Tab.,   to   tempt.      Hcnuihema, 
Haw.,  want,  need,  necessity. 

Semo  (!),  Iwmo,  N.  Z.,  to  slip  away,  to 
sink  down  ;  Haw.,  to  get  loose,  to 
move  away,  to  loose,  to  set  soil ;  Nuk., 
to  loose, — also,  to  catch  or  overtake ; 
emo,  Mang.,  unstable,  not  fixed  ;  ma- 
hemo,  Tah.,  slipped  otf,  past  away. 

Sell,  Sam.,  to  stir  about ;  hen,  Tong.,  to 
ward  off,  to  ovoid ;  hen,  Toh.,  eii, 
Rar.,  to  open  a  Aoot;  hen.  How.,  the 
first  shooting  of  beard  in  boys.  [The 
primary  meaning  seems  to  1«,  "  to 
push  out"  or  "  away."] 

St(l  (?),  Jhusiasia,  Som.,  h<i<i/ieo,  Haw., 
proud,  lofty,  houghty. 

Stapo,  Sam.,  hiiilm,  Tong.,  hiajio,  Nuk., 
native  cloth  dyed  brown  ;  also,  Nuk., 
the  (icus  prolixa,  from  whose  berries 


the  dye  is  obtained  (which  is  probably 
the  original  meaning ;  sec  kokii). 

Sifo  (?),  fivo,  Viti,  hifo,  Tong.,  ij'o,  Som., 

iho,  N.  Z.  Tah.  Haw.  Nuk.,  to,  Rar., 

Mang.,  down,  downward  (Gram.  §  58). 

Sis'Jb,    Sam.,   hihifo,   Tong.,    leeward, 

westword  (i.  e.  down  ;  see  sake). 
Iho,  Tah.  How.,  to,  Rar.,  a  particle  of 
emphasis,  used  to  form  the  rt-fleclive 
or  emphatic  pronouns,  myself,  thyself, 
&c.,  and  frequently  oflixcd  to  other 
words  (Gram.  §  45). 

Siki  (?),  hiki,  Tong.,  N.  Z.,  sVi,  Sam., 
/((■*',  Tab.,  to  raise,  lift  up;  hit.  Haw., 
ikiiki,  Mang.,  to  hold  in  the  arms,  as 
a  child  ;  iki,  Rar.,  to  select,  choose, 
draw  out. 

SifiO  (!),  hiko,  Tong.,  to  lake  up,  collect ; 
Nuk.,  to  snatch  or  take  owny ;  iko, 
Mong.,  to  take  owuy,  carry  oil'. 

Slkll  (?),  si'ii,  i'lt,  Sam.,  hikii,  ikii,  Tong., 
ikii,  Rar.  Mang.,  hiii.  How.,  ikn, 
Tong.,  Vk,  Sam.,  end, — to  finish. 
Sili,  Sain.,  to  exceed,  to  go  beyond  ;  hili, 
Tong.,  to  leave  oft",  or  finish,  to  be 
completed, — to  put  or  place  upon, — to 
lodge  or  be  fi.xed,  as  o  body  thrown 
into  a  tree  ;  iri,  N.  Z.,  to  hang  from, 
to  rest  upon ;  iri.  Tab.,  to  rest  upon, 
— a  scat,  a  table  ;  Hi,  Haw.,  to  strike 
or  strand,  as  a  ship;  to  lodge,  stick 
fast ;  akairiya,  Mang.,  a  lodging- 
place,  dwelling,  nest. 

TJairi,  Rar.,  to  creep,  to  crawl ;  nahili. 
How.,  slow,  lagging  behind. 

Hairi,  Rar.,  (//((//,  Tab.,  if",  suppose, — 
used  only  of  past  time  ;  (i.  o.  "  that 
being  siij>jx)sv(l," — siijijiositiis — laid 
down). 

Itihia,  Haw.,  oflt'nded  (i.  e.  sh  eked); 
iria,  Tab.,  angry,  irritable ;  iriea, 
Rar.,  sorrowful. 

Siua,  Sam.,  /(/«<;,  Tong.  N.  Z.  Haw,  ina, 

.Mang.,  white  or  gray,  applied  lo  hair. 

Sinu,  Fak.,  sinasina,  Sam.,  hiiichina 


i 


PHILOLOGY. 


Tong.,  mainaina.  Tar.,  white,  clear, 
fair. 
Miisitia,  Snm.,  nuihina,  Tong.  Tah. 
Haw.  Nuk.,  itmina,  Mnng.,  the  moon. 
Sina  (?),  /una,  Tong.,  molUna,  Tah., 
moiiic,  Mang.,  a  gourd,  a  bottle. 

Sinn,  Tikop.,  cocoa-nut  oil ;  hititi,  N.  Z. 

Tah.    Haw.,    inu,    Rar.,    ointment; 

tahitm,  Tah.  Haw.,  taiww,  Rar.,  to 

anoint ;  hinu,  Nuk.,  ink,  tincture  from 

the  candle-nut. 
Hiniihinu,  Tah.   Haw.,  iiiuinii,  Rar., 

anointed,  sleek   and  shining, — hence, 

bright,  splendid. 
Siya  (?),  kiijti,  Tong.,  N.Z.,  ipa,  Mang., 

hika,  hina,  Nuk.,  hinxi.  Haw.,  hia, 

Tah.,  to  fall ;  higa,  Pau.,  dead  (i.  e. 

fallen). 
Sisi,  Sam.,  hi,  hihi,  N.  Z.,  to  draw  up, 

pull  up ;  hi,  Nuk.,  to  fish  with  rod 

and  line;  hiu.  Haw.,  to  pull. 
Hi  (qu.  ?),  Haw.  Nuk.,  to  purge. 

StSl,  Tong.,  At,  Haw.,  to  hiss. 

Siva,  Tikop.  Rot.,  Civa,  Viti,  hiva,  Tong., 
iva,  ilea,  Sam.  et  crot.,  nine  (Gram. 
§30). 

Stva,  .'^am.  Fak.,  hiva,  Tong.  Tah.,  song 
and  cinncc,  festivity. 

Stva  ('.),  hiva,  Nuk.,  o  neighboring  val- 
ley or  town, — yonder ;  iva,  Mang.,  o 
foreign  country. 

Sivt  or  ivi,  Sam.,  ivi,  Tah.  Rar.  Mang. 
Nuk.,  iwi,  N.  Z.  Tah.,  fiiii,  Tong., 
sui,  Viti,  bone. 
Ivi,  N.  Z.   Mang.,  a  family,  clan,  (as 
in  Scripture,  "  bone  of  my  bone.") 

Soa,  Tikop.,  hoa,  N.  Z.  Tah.  Haw.  Nuk., 

a  friend,  companion,  mate. 
Fc-sodsodni,  Sam.,   mutual   assistance; 

hixi,  N.  Z.,  to  help. 
Ilahna,  Tong.,  a  pair,  a  couple. 
Soma !   Sam,,   Iwnui !   Tah.,   Friends ! 

(used  only  in  the  vocative). 

Soifua,  Sam.  (ceremonial), — to  live,  to 


be  in  good  health ;  hoihoifua,  Tong., 
handsome. 

Soisoi,  Sam.,  (cerem.,)  to  laugh ;  Itoihoi, 
Haw.,  pleased,  gratified,  joyful. 

Soka  (I),  eoka,  Viti,  hoka,  Tong.  Pau. 
Nuk.,  to  pierce,  thrust  in ;  )u>ka, 
N.  Z.  Mang.,  a  sharp-pointed  instru- 
ment. 

SoKO  (7),  so^o,  Sam.,  to  spread  over,  to 
flow  over,  to  join,  to  come;  Iwko, 
Tong.,  to  flow  as  the  tide,  to  come; 
Itoko,  Nuk.,  to  sail,  as  a  ship. 

Solt  (1),  Mi,  Tong.,  ori,  Mang.,  to  ask, 
to  beg  (see  koli). 

Solo,  Sam.,  to  sprciad  over,  to  run  over, 
as  an  eruption,  a  liquid;  sola,  Sam., 
hola,  Tong.,  fiolo,  Haw.,  /loro,  N.  Z. 
Tah.,  oro,  Rar.  Mang.,  to  run,  to 
flee. 

Solo,  Viti,  holo,  Tong.,  to  rub,  wipe; 
Iwo,  Nuk.,  to  chafe  the  limbs ;  Iwloi, 
Tong.,  to  chafe,  to  wipe ;  fio/oi,  Haw., 
Iioroi,  N.  Z.  Tuh.,  orei,  Mang.,  Iwoi, 
Nuk.,  to  wash,  to  wipe. 
Holtolo,  Tong.,  horolioro,  N.  Z.,  oro, 
Mang.,  to  grind,  sharpen. 

Soya,  Sam.,  a  chief's  servont ;  hui/a, 
N.  Z.,  the  common  people,  lower 
class  ;  Uj/a,  Rar.,  laborers,  tenants. 

Soye  (?),  fioge,  Tong.,  oije,  Sam.  Mang. 

Rar.,  okc,  one,  Nuk.,  oe,  Tah.,  tvi. 

Haw.,  famine,  scarcity  of  foo<l. 
SoTjt,  Imyi,  limii,  }im,  ubiq.,  to  salute  by 

pressing  noses. 
Sopo,  Sam.,  to  pass  over ;  hoibo,  Tong.,  to 

jump,  bound. 
Sopu  (?),  hopu,  N.  Z.  Haw.,  opu,  Mang., 

to  catch,  seize ;  hapu,  Nuk.,  to  hug. 

Sou  (?),  sousoii,  Sam.,  spray ;  Iwuhoii, 
N.  Z.,  }u)u.  Haw.,  to  wet,  moisten ; 
Iwn,  Haw.,  ou,  Mang.,  perspiration. 

Su,  susu,  Sam.,  wet ;  sil,  Viti,  the  water 
in  which  food  has  been  boiled, — soup ; 
hu,  Tong.,  to  boil  or  stew ;  hii.  Haw., 


'IS 


POLYNESIAN    LEXICON. 


329 


to   ferment,    boil    over,    ooze    out, — 

leaven. 
Sua,  Sam.,  hiKi,  Tong.,  a  general  term 

for  li(|uids. 
Suafu,    Sam.,   huafa,    Tong.,   a    name 

(cerem.) ;  kua,  N.  Z.,  to  name. 
Suai  (?),  hiiid,   Tong.,  huca,  Tab.,  to 

pour  out ;  hiini.  Haw.,  to  take  out  of 

an  oven  or  reservoir., 
Sui  (?),  hm,  Tong.  N.  Z.  Haw.,  to  mi.\ 

together,  to  mingle,  to  join. 
Suka  (?),  huka,  N.  Z.,  hua.  Haw.,  froth, 

foam. 
Sufce   (?),   jw'e,   Sam.,   to  search;    fine. 

Haw.,  to  look  slyly,  to  steal. 
Sukt  (.'),  hni,  Tab.,  uki,  Kar.,  to  pierce, 

prick ;    suisuui,  Sam.,   rough    (i.  e. 

prickly). 
Suku  (?),  httku,  Tong.  Nuk.,  to  dive; 

(qu.  ukii  from  luku,  q.  v.  ?). 
Suit,  Sam.  Tong.,  a  sprout  from  the  root 

of  a  tree, — a  sapling, — hence,  Sam., 

an  heir ;  hiiri,  N.  Z.,  posterity  ;  huli. 

Haw.,  taro-tops  for  planting. 

Sum,  Sam.,  to  give  light,  to  shine,  as 
a  torch  or  tlic  moon ;  hi/rii,  N.  Z., 
light,  lustre,  glory ;  Tab.,  outward 
appearance  (German,  scliciii). 

Sulu  (!),  fiirit,  Viti,  liu  (or  hiiii,  for  hulii) 
Tong.,  ulii,  Sam.,  wii,  Kar.  Mang., 
Hit,  Nuk.,  to  enter ;  im-tahi,  N.  Z., 
to  join  with  (i.  e.  to  enter  as  one,  or 
united). 
Uriilnii,'Ttth.,  wihia,  Nuk.,  vlida.  Haw., 
inspired,  possessed  by  a  god. 

SuHuki  (?),  suwd,  Sam.,  to  pierce 
through ;  humtki,  Tong.,  to  stick  a 
skewer  or  pin  in  any  thing. 

Suya  ('.),  himhiia,  Tah.,  vkauka,  Rar., 
broken  into  fragments,  ground  to  pow- 
der.— crumbs,  fragments ;  hii/ia,  hii- 
ttiihiina,  Haw.,  small  particles  of  any 
thing, — dust,  crumbs,  tine  rain  ;  huna- 
hiiiui,  Xuk.,  little. 

83 


Susu,  Sam., sHsi/,  sitfit,  Viti,  huhii,Tong., 
u,  N.  Z.  Tab.  Mang.  Haw.  Nuk., 
breast,  pap,  udder. 


Ta,  the  root  of  the  pronoun  of  the  first 

person  dual  and  plural,  including  the 

person  addressed  (Gram.  §  39). 

Ta,  Sam.  Tong.  Uar.  Nuk.,  tairi,  Tab., 

to  strike;  In,  Rar.,  also,  to  kill. 

Thta,  Sam.  Tong.  N.  Z.  Haw.,  to  strike 

repeatedly,  knock,  beat. 
T\i,  Tong.  Viti,  to  hew,  fell,  cut  down. 
Ta,  Sam.   Tong.   N.  Z.,   to  mork  the 
body,  to  tattoo ;  ta,  Mang.,  tola,  Rar., 
to  mark,  paint,  write. 
Ta,  used  instead  oCfaka  as  u  causative 
prefix  (Gram.  §  54). 
Tae,  ubiq.,  excrement. 
Tne,    Tab.    Rar.    Mang.,    to   arrive,    to 

come  to. 
Tae,  Sam.,  "  an  endearing  address ;"  tat, 
N.  Z.,  an  alfectionatc  word  for  mother. 
Ta/a,  Sam.,  taha,  N.Z.  Tab.  Haw.,  bor- 
der, edge,    brink ;    taJia,   Nuk.,   taa, 
Mang.,  place,  spot. 
Tiijxi,  Rar.  Haw.,  shore,  border,  side  of 
a  field ;  taiiilia,  Viti,  tapa,  Tar.,  place, 
spot. 
Tafa,  Tong.,  tava,  Viti,  to  cut,  make  an 
incision;  txiha.  Haw.,  to  mark,  scratch, 
write. 
Tafa  (?),  tnfao,  Sam.,  to  walk  about  for 
pleasure;  tului,  Nuk.,  to  go  or  walk; 
Haw.,  to  go  away,  to  set  out  to  go. 
1  aje,  lahe,  tae,  ubiq.,  to  flow,  as  water. 
Vai-tafc,  vai-tahc,  &c.,  running  water,  a 
stream,  river. 
Tajl,  Sam.,  tahc.  Haw.,  to  shave ;  tahi, 
Nuk.,  to  wound  slightly  (i.  e.  to  graze). 
TiJitaJi,Ton^.,  tavitavi,\\l\,  tahi,  N.Z., 
tahili,  Haw.,  to  brush,  sweep ;  tuhii, 
Nuk.,  a  fan.     (See  i/i.) 


330 


PHILOLOGY. 


, 


Tajiti  (?),  taiciti,  N.  Z.,  fur,  distant; 
tahiti,  Ilnw.,  a  Ibrcign  country.  ((Jii. 
hence  the  name  given  by  the  first  colo- 
nists from  Samoa  to  tlic  island  of 
Tahiti, — "  the  /ar,  or  foreign  laiul"  ?) 

TaJitO,  Sam.,  tau-ilo,  N.  Z.,  tahito,  Tnli. 
Ilnw.,  tailo,  Uar.  Mang.,  old,  ancient. 

Tajola,  Sam.  Fi.ri.,  /o/bn,  Tong.,  tohora, 
N.  Z.  Tah.  Haw.,  a  whale;  tuhod, 
Nuk.,  n  porpoise. 

Tafu,  Sam.  Tong.,  luliit,  Tah.  Haw.,  tau, 
Rar.,  tdhima,  N.  Z.,  to  light,  to  kindle, 
as  a  tire. 
Taliii,  N.  Z.,  a  husband ;  Haw.,  a  guar- 
dian, keeper,  nurse. 

Tahua  (qu.  !),  Tah.  Haw.  Nuk.,  an  open, 
clear  space,  a  public  square. 

Tal,  Sam.  Fak.,  a  collective  particle. 
(Gram.  §  14.)  I 

I  (U,  Tong.,  te,  N.  Z.  Mang.,  not,  a  nega-  i 
live   prefi.xed   to   adjectives.     (Gram. 
§  63.)  i 

I aka,  Tong.,  to  go  round,  lo  stand  round  j 
about,  to  turn  round, — lo  trundle,  roll  i 
along  on  the  ground, — a  top,  the  wheel 
of  a  carriage,  &c. ;   N.  Z.,  to  move 
round,  to  change  round,  as  the  wind, 
to  fall ;  t<i\i,  Tah.  Haw.,  to  roll  over,  j 
to  roll  down,  to  fall,  lo  move  off,  de- 
part ;  Haw.,  a  top  ;  ta'd-Mo,  Sam.,  to 
disperse  (ccniii.);  taa-hele,  Ilnw,,  to 
go  round;  putuka,  ^lang.,  jxitakdtiil.d, 
N.  Z.,  round,  to  go  round ;  jwroliihi, 
N.  /.,  round,  annular ;  takako,  Uar., 
to  encompass. 
Hon-Uia,  Hnw.,  to  roll  off,  to  remove; 
hmitiui,  Tah.,  iikaUika,  Rar.,  to  sepa- 
rate, put  asunder. 
Tdkai,    l-'nk.  Tong.    N.  Z.,  tiuii,  Tah. 
Haw.,  to  bind  round,  to  gird;  Sam.,  to 
roll  up. 

Tafcao,  .Mnng.  Nuk.,  to  spunk,  tell,— 
word,  iulbrmalion ;  Uiao,  Haw.,  a  le- 
gend, story. 


Takapau,  Tong.  N.  Z.,  ta\ipau,  Snm.,  n 
floor-mat,  a  sleeping-mat. 

Taki,  Fak.  Tong.  Mang.,  tiCi,  Snm.  Tnh. 
Hnw.,  to  convey,  bring  along,  lead, 
direct,  pilot ;  tnki,  Nuk.,  to  take  out. 
Fctitki,  Tong.,  fetiii,  Sam.,  tiitiiki,  N.  Z. 
Mang.,  to  meet ;  tutaki,  Rar.,  to  pay, 
reward. 
FakdJiUii  (?),   Tong.,  fii\ifelai,   Sam., 

ifiikiiiriidi,  N.  Z.,  to  thank. 
Mdldkitdki,  N.  Z.,  miitni/di  or  nwini, 
to  look  on  ns  a  s|X!ctator,  to  examine, 
inspect. 

Takoto,  lokuto,  Tong.,  tdotn,  Sam.,  to  lie 
down,  repose;  lakuto,  N.  '/..,  to  lie 
down, — to  lay  down,  put  down ;  tokoto, 
Jiang.,  to  put  down,  lay  down,^-cease, 
terminate ;  Uvtto,  Tab.,  lo  sleep,  re- 
pose. 

Tala,  Tong.,  to  speak,  tell,  bid;  tdia, 
Sam.,  convcrsntion,  news, — t<iutdlu, 
to  talk  ;  told.  Haw.,  tna,  Nuk.,  to  pro- 
claim, ns  a  crier,  lo  call,  to  summon  ; 
tdldJi,  Mang.,  to  call. 

Tula,  Sam.   I  law.,  tara,   N.  Z.  Tab.,  to 
loose,  untie,  set  free. 
Matnla,  tinifdra,  loosed,  freed. 

lata,  Tong.,  tdrd,  Tnh.  Rnr.  Mang.,  fan, 
Nuk.,  thorn ;  tdin,  N.  '/..,  the  upright 
poles  of  a  fence;  Itui,  Nuk.,  a  needle, 
n  lish-S|)ear ;  tdrd,  Tnr.,  n  spear. 

Td2dt<i/ii.,tdrat(ira,td(itud,  rough, thorny, 
prickly. 

Hnotdld,  Haw.,  iiui,  Nuk.,  lo  sharpen. 

Tdld,  Ilnw.,  totdra,  Tnli.  Rnr.,  tolaa, 
Nuk.,  the  sea-urchin,  echinus ;  totdla, 
Haw.,  spines  of  the  echinus. 

lalafa,  Fak.Tikop.  Niun,Vnitupu,  beard. 

Talai,  Haw.,  tdrai,  Tah.  .Mang.,  taai, 
Nuk.,  to  carve,  hew,  shape. 

lah,  tari,  ubiq.,  to  wait,  tnrry. 

lall,  Sam.  Tong.,  lo  receive;  tdri,  Rar. 
.Mang.,  to  carry,  to  bring ;  tdi,  Nuk., 
to  lay  hold  of. 


I 


POLYNESIAN    LEXICON. 


331 


Tahya,  Sam.  FaU.,  tcliija,  Tong.,  tiiriga, 
N.  Z.  Uar.,  tcriyu,  Mang.,  taria,  Tnh., 
the  car. 

Taw,  taro,  tao,  iibiq.,  nrum  esculcntum. 

Talll  (]),  larutuni,  N.  Z.,  grass,  weeds ; 

Uiliiha,  Haw.,  sea-grass,  rushes. 
Tama,  ubiq.,  a  child. 

Tanuilii,  Sam.  Ilaw.,  tiimariki,  N.  Z., 

tumarii,  Tuh.,  tamittl,  Tong.,  tanuiiti, 

N.Z.  llnw.  Niik.,  a  child,  a  Imy. 
Tamnhinc,  N.Z.  Tah.,  Uiimiinc,  Unr., 

tailumahitie,  Ilaw.    Nuk.,   a  girl,  n 

daughter. 
Tama,  Sam.  Fnk.,  Uimdi,  Tong.,  toTna, 

Viti,  Tar.,  father. 

Tamaka,  Uar.,  taman,  Tah.  Haw.,  shoes. 

Tamaki,  Kur.  Pnu.,  ^»»(«',  Tuh.,  to  quar- 
rel with,  oppose,  to  light, — war. 

Tane,  Sam.  N.Z.  Tah.  Uar.  Mang.  Ilaw., 
a  man  (vir),  a  male,  a  husband. 
7\i>tr,  Tong.,  marriage,— ^/(f/.7j-^(;(c,  to 
sit  after  the  fashion  of  men. 

Tan^a,  Sam.  Tong.  Nuk.,  a  Iwwl  used  to 
contain  the  infusion  otkiiva. 

Tanu,    ubic].,   to   bury, — and    hence,  to 

plant. 
Tayn,  Sam.  Tong.  Viti,  a  bag. 

Tayata,  Sam.  Tong.  N.  Z.  Rar.  Mang., 
Uintitd,  Haw.,  taatu,  Tah.,  anala,k<\- 
iwta  and  iinana,  Nuk.,  a  man  {homu), 
mankind. 

Tayi,  laiii,  tai,  ubiq.,  to  cry,  to  make  a 
noise,  to  resound. 

TaiJO,  Snm.  N.  Z.,  to  touch,  take  in  the 

hand. 
Tao,  Som.  Nuk.,  Mm,  Tong.,  UOw,  Haw., 

tail,  N.  Z.  Mang.,  to  bake,  roast. 

lao  or  ^(«,  ubiq.,  a  spear,  lance,  javelin, 

Taofi,  Sam.  Tong.  Nuk.,  taohi,  tolii. 
Haw.,  foi,  Uar.,  ^;/i<',  N.  Z.,  to  liold 
fast,  keep,  restrain. 

Taokete,  Tong.,  elder  brother  or  sister ; 


taokrtc,   N.  Z.,    tohetc,   Mang.    Nuk., 
brother  or  sister-in-law. 

Tapa,  Tong.  Haw.,  native  cloth,  made  of 
the  bark  of  a  tree. 

Tajm,  N.  Z.  Tah.,  the  thigh. 

'lapa,  N.  Z.,  to  order,  command;  Uijm, 
Haw.  Uar.,  tojn.  Tab.,  to  call,  to 
name ;  tntapa,  Nuk.,  to  adoi)t,  to  pro- 
claim or  assume  a  name. 

lapu,  Uihii,  ubiq.,  sacred,  and  hence,  tor- 
bidden. 
Tiipiii,  Sam.,  to  make  sacred ;   tahiii. 
Tar.,  to  refrain,  keep  from  ;  hibiiaki, 
Tong.,  to  bless. 

Taptl  ((|u.  ?),  tajnt-lima,  Sam.,  wrist : 
tapii-rnr,  Sam.,  ancle  ;  liipuvtii  or  ta- 
piini,  Tah.  Nuk.,  tajnnvai  or  liijiiiai. 
I  law.,  the  f(X)t,  sole  of  foot,  footmark, 
track. 

last,  Sam.,  tasa,  Tikop.,  liiha,  Tong., 
tii/ii,  N.  Z.  Tah.  Haw.  Nuk.,  lai, 
Uor.  Mang.,  one, — also,  an  indrfmite 
pronoun,  some  one,  other,  &c.  (Gram. 
§S^  13,  iiO). 
Fd'aliisi,  Sam.,  fiikatuha,  Tonj;.,  ho(i- 
ftihi,  Ha\>.,  to  unite,  combine, — to- 
golhor,  united  as  one. 
Hi(tiisi,  Sam.,  ijiil<ihi,  N.  Z.,  ijatai, 
Mang.,  together. 

Tasi  (»),  Uifi,  Viti,  tnii,  Tar.,  tri,  Sam.. 
tchi/ia,  Tong.,  teimi,  N.  Z.  Mang. 
Nuk.,  taitaina.  Haw.,  younger  bro- 
ther of  a  sister,  or  sister  of  a  brother. 

Tata,  N.  Z.  Nuk.,  vaitatn,  Uar.,  fatata. 

'Ya.\\.,iilalii,  Mang.,  liiUi,Sa.'m.,  near. 
Tata,  Haw.  Nuk.,  to  wash  clothes;  Tah. 

Nuk.,  to  bale  out  water. 
Tatua  (qu.  ?),  Tah.  Uar.  Haw.,  to  gird 

or  bind  on,  as  a  belt  or  cincture. 
I  an,  ubiq.,  a  season,  a  year. 

Tail,  Fnk.  Sam.  Tong.,  tiitau,  Tah.  Uar. 
Haw.,  tattooing,  marking  on  the  skin. 

1  ail,  Sam.  Tong.,  to  ])rcss,  scjueeze, 
wring  out. 


333 


PHILOLOGY. 


Tau,  Tong.  Tah.  Haw.,  to  hang,  to  over- 
hang, to  impend ;  taut'iu,  Tong.  Nuk., 
suspended,  hung  up. 

1  (lit,  .Mang.  Nuk.,  to  carry  on  the  back. 

lail,  Tong.  Mang.,  to  reach,  to  extend 

to ;  Nuk.,  to  arrive  at,  come  on  shore  ; 

N.  Z.,   to   meet:   Sam.    N.  Z.    Haw. 

Nuk.,  to  rest  upon,  light  upon ;  Sam. 

Tah.,  to  fall  upon. 

Tau,  Tong.,  to  fit,  to  suit, — fit,  suitable  j 

/iitdu,  Sam.,  tau,  Rar.,  taufitii,  Mang., 

tau   {ati   or   tin),   Tah.,   (it,   proper, 

right ;  matau.  Haw.,  ready,  preparej  ; 

N.Z.  Mang.,  expert,  dextrous,  shrewd. 

Miitaii,  Sam.  Tong.  N.  Z.,  kalau,  Rar., 

atau,  Tah.  Haw.,  right  (hand),  dexter. 

T\m,    Rar.,    talau,   Sam.   Tong.,   like, 

equal ;  fa'atatau,  Sam.,  to  compare. 
Tail,  Tong.  Tar.,  enough. 
Fakatau,  Tong.,  f<Catau,  Sam.,  to  ex- 
change, trade ;  nkiUaii,  Rar.,  to  cove- 
nant ;  wakataii,  N.  Z.,  to  meet. 
Taui,  Sam.,  a  reward. 
Faitau,  Sam.,  tatau,  N.  Z.  Rar.  Tah. 

Nuk.,  to  count,  reckon. 
Tau,  Tah.   Nuk.,  a   collective   particle 

(Gram.  §  14). 
Tainia,   Nuk.,   a   pair,  couple ;    Haw., 
four,  a  quadruple. 
10,11,  Tong,,  taua,  Sam.  ct  ctrt.,  war, — 
to  fight. 
Mataua,  Sam.,  envious,  revengeful ;  hoo- 
mataiia.  Haw.,  to  vex,  harass. 
Tauhipu,    Rar.,   tau'upu,  Sam.   Tah., 

the  waist,  loins. 
TaUM,  .Sam.  Tong.,  an  anchor,  a  cable ; 
taiila,  Httw.,  taura,  Tah.  Rar.,  taua, 
Nuk.,  a  cable,  rope. 
Tau/apn,  Tong.,  taitniya,  N.  Z.,  an  an- 
chorage, a  landing-place. 
Taula,  Sam.,  taura,  Tah.,  taua,  Nuk.,  a 

priest ;  taula.  Haw.,  a  prophet. 
Taulaki  (!),  UmUii,  Haw.,  ttiuaki,  Nuk., 

to  put  in  the  sun  to  dry. 
Tatimafa,  Sam.,  to  eat  (said  of  a  chief)  ; 


taumaha,  Tah.  Haw.,  a  sacrifice  or 

otfcring  to  a  god. 
lautHCl,  Sam.,  tauiia.  Haw.,  n  servant. 
laust,  Sam.,  to  nurso;  toi//ii,  Tong.,  to 

attend,  cherish,  minister  to. 
Tavatava,  Nuk.,  tawatawa,  N.  Z.  Haw., 

a  species  offish  (the  albriore?). 

Tavake,  Nuk.,  tava''e,  Sam.,  toac  (qu. 
tawacf),  Haw.,  the  tropic  bird ;  hence, 
white,  fair,  as  that  bird, — applied  in 
Nukuhiva  to  "  natives  with  white 
skins," — perhaps  albinocs. 

le,  Fak.  el  cret.  (/c,Sam.,  te  or  ta.  Haw.), 
the  definite  article  (Gram.  §§11,  44). 

Tea,  Tong.  Tah.  Rar.  Mang.  Nuk.  Haw., 
white,  fair,  pale ;  N.  Z.,  clear,  open. 
Tclea,  Sam.,  leprosy; — ua-tfa,a  shower 

in  sunshine  (i.  e.  a  fair  rain). 
Atc/i,  N.  Z.  Tah.  Rar.  Haw.,  wide,  spa- 
cious, clear,  open. 

Tefe,  Tong.,  tehe,  Tah.  Nuk.,  to  circum- 
cise ;  ttilie,  Haw.,  to  cut  or  slit  longi- 
tudinally ;  tetelie,  Nuk.,  to  extract 
splinters  of  bone. 

Teka,  Nuk.,  tea,  Tah.,  Haw.,  a  cross,  a 

cross-piece. 
Ti'ka,  Tong.,  to  string  a  bow  ;  tea,  Tah., 

archery. 
Tia,  Sam.,  to  separate ;  Haw.,  to  hinder, 

stand  in  the  way  of  (i.  c.  to  cross). 

Tcke,  Tong.,  te'e,  Sam.,  to  push,  thrust, 
drive  away. 

Tek  (.'),  tere,  N.  Z.  Tah.  Rar.  Mang.  Pau., 

ietepek.   Haw.,  tei,  Tong.   Nuk.,   to 

move,  glide,  sail  as  a  ship. 
Hoo-tele,  Way/.,  foa-terc,  Tah.,  Itaa-tee, 

Nuk.,  a  pilot,  steersman. 
Tele,  S^m.,  great,  large  j   teletele,  Haw., 

fat,  /lump,  rotund. 
Tepau,  Mnng.  Nuk.  Haw.,  tapau,  Tah., 

any  thing  readily  fusible  by  heat, — 

gum,  wax,  lead,  &c. 

Tete,    Sam.   Nuk.,    tele,  tetenii,  Tong., 


POLYNESIAN    LEXICON. 


333 


tetere,  N.  7..,  riitetetele,  Rar.,  luiutele, 
lliiw,,  to  tremble,  shiver. 
Datete,  Snm.,   to   be   troubled ;   natcle, 

How.,  to  shnke,  wave,  rntllc. 
ly'tc,  N.  Z.    Haw.,   to   strive,   struggle, 
quarrel. 

Teu,  Sam.  Tong.,  to  prepare,  arrange, 
adorn;  truleii,  Sam.  Tong.,  prepared, 
adorned,  neat,  elegant ;  tcoleo.  Tab., 
proud. 

TV,  ubiq.,  a  plant,  the  dracicna  tcrniinnlis 
(N.  X.,  the  draciena  australis).  Titi, 
Sam.  Tong.,  a  cincture  made  from  its 
leaves. 

It,  Tong.,  to  toss,  to  throw ;  tiaki,'Tong., 
/jrt'tjSam.,  to  throw  away,  reject,  aban- 
don ;  ti.  Haw.,  to  shoot,  fire  a  gun. 
Tiri,  titiri.  Tab.  Rar.  .Mang.,<j/ij,  Nuk., 
to  throw ;  kujxya  tilt,  Toiig,,  a  cnst- 
mg-net. 

Tiaki,  N.Z.  Rar.  Mang.  Nuk.,  ^V,'/,  Tab. 
Haw.,  to  watch,  wait  for,  guard. 

itja,  Sam.  Tong.  Fak.Tikop.,  muthcr-fil- 
pearl  shell ;  tifa,  Nuk.,  a  cover  or  lid 
to  close  any  thing. 

life  {?),  tihc.  Tab.  Nuk.  Haw.,  to  sneeze. 

Tilai,  N.  Z.  Rar.  Mang.  Tab.,  straight, 
upright,  just ;  lia.  Tab.  (used  lor  Ui), 
to  stand  up ;  tin.  Haw.,  pillar,  post, 
mast  of  11  ship. 

Tiketike,  N.  Z.,  tietic.  Haw.,  teitei.  Tab. 

Bar.  Mang.,  high  ;  tidic,  Sam.,  to  sit 

on  an  elevated  scat. 
Tiki,  N.  Z.  Rar.  Mang.,  tii,  Toh.  Haw., 

to  go  for,  to  go  to  seek. 
I  tkl,  ti'i,  name  of  a  god  of  whom  images 

wore   very   conmion ;    hence,   N.   Z. 

Rar.  Nuk.  Tub.  Haw.,  image. 
Ttia,  Sam.,  tira.  Tab.  Mang.  Pau.,  tin, 

Nuk.  (till.  Haw,— see  /iiu),  the  mast 

of  a  vessel  ;    tiltt,  Tong.,  sprit  of  a 

cnnoc;  tiru,  N.  Z„  the  back  fin  of  n 

fisti, — tirntii,  the  rope  which   fastens 

the  sail  to  the  bow-sprit. 

84 


Tilo,   Sam.,   to   peep ;   tio,  Tong.,   tiro, 
N.  Z.,  hio.  Tab.,  to  look  ;  tiroi,  Rar., 
to  lo<ik  at ;  tiohi,  Nuk.,  to  see,  look, 
watch  ;   tilo.   Haw.,   to  judge, — also, 
a   star-gazer,   astrologer,  observer  of 
signs, — till,  to  spy. 
Tinrf,  Sam.,  titiii,  Viti,  Tar.,  mother. 
Tiiia-iiiiiini,  Tong.,  a  sow  when  she  has 
had  a  litter ;  titiiuia,  Haw.,  a  ben. 
Tina,   titina,  Sam.   N.  Z.,  to   sipieeze, 
press,  crush  ;   fitina.  Haw.,  to  urge, 
press,  hasten. 
Tinei,  Sam.  N.Z.,  timd,  Rar.  Tab.  Haw. 

Nuk.,  to  extinguish,  quench. 
Tint,   Viti,   fen ;   N.  Z.,   ten   thousand ; 
Tab.,  twenty  thousand ;    Haw.,  forty 
thousand  ;    hence,   a    great    number 
indefinitely,  thousands  (Gram.  §  30). 
Tino,  Sam.  Tong.  Tab.  Rar.  Haw.,  ti- 
7111)1(1,  N.  Z.,  body,  trunk,  substance, 
person. 
Tino,   Sam.   N.  Z.,   appearance,    form, 

looks. 
Tinoi,  Sam.,  tiiu/hi.  Haw.,  origin,  be- 
ginning. 
liyj^,  Sam.  Fak.,  pain,  ache  ;  tina.  Haw., 

sin,  error. 
Tipi,   Mang.    Pau.   Tab.   Nuk.,  matipi, 
Rar.,  a  knife, — to  cut,  to  slash  ;  titn, 
Tong.,  a  club,  to  strike  with  a  club. 
Lipi,  N.  '/..,  miilipi.  Haw.,  an   axe, — 
sharp,  trenchant. 
i  O,  Tong.,  loto,  Sam.,  to  plant. 
To,  Haw.,  to  beget,  to  proceed  from,  as 
a   child   from  a  parent ;   Sam.  N.  Z. 
Tab.,  pregnant. 
To,  Tong.,  to   sink,   to   fall  ;   Tab.  Rar. 
Pau.    N.  Z.   (also  toe>ic  and    torciji, 
N.  Z.),  to  set,  as  the  sun ;  toi/i.  Haw., 
to  set,  to  go  down,  :>«  the  moon. 
Ihi,   N.  Z.,   to   be   dippd,   immersed ; 

Tong.,  to  hide,  conceal  one's  self. 
7b,   Rar.,   to   light   upon ;   topa,  Tab. 

Nuk.,  to  fall,  to  let  fall. 
Tbj/ii,  N.  Z.,  Pau.,  toa  (or  tooa),  Tah., 


334 


P  in  I,  ()  L  O  fi  Y. 


sniisol ;  linicc,  ihc  west ;  liciicc,  Tongn, 
the  wcslcrn  coimlry  (sec  p.  123). 
'J}>ngii,  Sniii.,  tli(;  winil  iVdm  Tongn,  i.  r. 
Ilio    siiulli    wind;    tnijii,    N.  Z.    IJiir., 
toiKi,  I  law.,  loii,  Tall.,  tlio  south  (or 
sdiitliwcsi)  wiiiil. 
Ajxitoi/d,  liar.,  iipiitiiii.  Tall.,  tlio  point 
towards  which  the  sonlli  wind  blows, — 
i.  c,  the  iKirlh. 
10,   Sam.,  to  or  /«,  Tong.,  taiitaa  (cpi. 

lu/i'i),  Maiig.  Haw,,  to  open. 
10,  Toni.!.  Kar.  Mnii};.  Tah.  Haw.  Xiik., 
to/ii,  Warn.,  inlocii,  Vili,  llio  sngar-cniie. 
10(1,  iihi(|.,  bravo,  a  warrior. 

Tan,  .Nnk.,  tho  male  of  beasts;  Sam.,  u 

male  fowl,  (•ock. 
Tiki,  .Sain.  Tong.  Tali.  I  law.  Niik.,  tho 
iron-wood  tree  (casiiarinu),  ol'  whicli 
war-clubs  arc  usually  mndc. 

1 00,  flaw.,  tiw,  N.  Z.,  a  mistake. 

lOe,  ul)ii|.,  (o  remain,  to  U;  over. 
1}xt)ii,  tiDiiii,  ttxii,  rest,  remainder. 

iojl,  .Sain.Tniig.,  lo  break  small,  to  mince. 

lojl,  .Sam.,  to  appoint ;  tot,  Mang.,  to  dis- 
tribute, sham  out. 

lOJO,  .Sam.,  to  taste,  try;  loho,  Haw.,  to 
chouse,  select,  determine,  guess;  toho, 
Xuk.,  toliii,  Tub.,  to  prophesy. 

1  oka,  Viti,  to  lie,  to  be  placed ;  Tong.,  tn'n, 
Sam.,  to  get  aground,  as  a  vessel,  re- 
main li\ed, — also,  !Sam.,  to  bo  hard,  to 
congeal, — to  sleep  (cerciii.) 
Tbka,  N.  '/..  Kar.  .Mang.,  j>u-tm,  T.'li. 
Haw.,  a  rock,  a  coral  reef. 

lokv,  Tong.,  a  salt-water  eel  ;  toke,  IS  Z. 
Nuk.,  toV,  Haw.,  a  worm. 

ToA'f  (.'),  toketokc,  Har.,  tortm-,  Tah.  Haw., 
mutoki:,  N.  Z.,  cold,  chilling;  haulokc, 
X.  Z.,  winter. 

1  oktalll,  Tong.,  tiiknliiii,  Viti,  to'c/au, 
Sam.,  the  east  or  trade-wind;  toktrai/, 
Rar.,  tmrnii.  Tab.,  the  northwest  or 
north  wind ;  tokorau,  Afang.,  tokixtii, 
N'uk.,  Ilie  north  wind;  t(J'ol(tu,  Haw., 


the  north  side  of  an  island.    (Pro|)crly, 

Ihn  sai-iriml ;  sec  page  171.) 
Apiilokrriiii,  liar.,  njhtincMii,  Tali.,  the 

point  towards  which  the  north  wind 

blows — i.  e.  the  south. 
I  okl,  ubii].,  an  adze,  an  axo. 
lokl,  Tong.,  lately,  newly;  toil,  How., 

fresh,  green,  nourishing. 
loko,  lo'n,  Mbi(|.,  a  settiiig-|)ole,  a  polo  for 

pushing  a  eanot!. 
Tokiitnko,  liiohi'n,  a.  slolT. 
lolt,  .Sam.  Tong.,  to  gather,  to  pluck. 
lolo,    1(1111,    ubi(i.,    to    creep,    crawl, — to 

creep,  spread,  as  a  vine,  or  as  t'lro. 
loloa,  .Sam.  Tong.  Haw.,  a  duck;  loroa, 

X.  '/,.,  an  olbalross. 
I  oht,  iiini,  lull,  ubi(|.,  the  number  three. 
JotHI,    Haw.,   to    prc.ss   down,    to    bear 

down ;  Nuk.,  to  cover  witli  earth,  to 

bury. 
To/no,  Sam.,  to  fall  through  ;  X.  Z.  Tah. 

iJar.  -Mang.  Haw.  Nuk.,  to  enter,  to 

pass  in,  sink  into. 
lOHil,    'IVing.,  a   disease   similar  to  the 

iliiivs,  attenilcd  with  pustules  ;  Mang., 

a  cutaneous  disease ;  X.  '/,.,  a  wart. 
10)10.  X.  Z.,  to  command,  order;  Haw., 

to  lead  olong,  persuade,  direct. 
1 07111,   Haw.,  ioliiiiu,   Sam.,  the   centre, 

the  middle  ;  tonu,  Sam.  Tong.,  ndo- 

nilomi,    Viti,   right,   correct,    precise. 

exact ;   tonii,    X.  Z.,    exactly,   accu- 
rately. 
Tnya  or  Uxiijii,  Sam.,  tiuDja,  N.  Z.  Pau., 

tiimi,  Tab.,  property,  [Kissessions. 
loyajltl,    to    [ilan,    contrive;    tonnhiti. 

Haw.,  tho  head-man  of  a  district  (i.  c. 

the  director) ;  totjoili,  Mang.,  noble. 
loyi,  Viti,  to  select,  award,  appoint;  trmi. 

Haw.,  to  try,  make  proof  of. 
Tutniji,  Sam.  Tong.,  payment,  reward ; 

/i'fcyi,  Tong.,  to  pay. 
lost,  Sam.,  tuhid.  Haw.,  to  stroke,  to  rub 

gently  with  tho  hand. 


P  O  L  Y  N  K  S  I  A  N    L  K  X  I  C  O  N. 


335 


Toso,  Snm.,  tohn,  Tong.,  ^J,  N.  7,.  Tnli., 
M,  Nuk.,  to  pull,  drug;  toi,  IIuw.,  to 
urge,  drive,  itisist. 

TotO,  i,bi(|.,  blno.1. 

1 U,  iilii(|.,  to  Htiind.     (See  tikn.) 

Fdka-h'i,  Tong.,  fmi-tii,  Sam.,  jkUA, 
Tall.  Rar.,  to  erect,  build.     (Seeywj.) 

Tiiapft,  tiij/a,  Sum.  Tong.  N.  Z.,  tiny 
thing  timt  stands,  ns  a  lioap,  row, 
&c., — hence,  Tong.,  a  collective  par- 
ticle.    (Gram.  §  14.) 

Tiirtuja,  N.  Z.,  a  stand,  support,  stand- 
ing-place; tidaita.  Haw.,  a  place  of 
many  things  together,  as  a  village,  a 
garden. 

Til,  Uar.,  ap|)carnncc,  looks,  character, 
kind. 

Tu,  tutu,  Tong.,  to  cut,  to  cut  off;  tii<i, 
N.Z.  (law.,  to  cut,  cut  down. 
Til,  N.Z.  Mang.,  to  beat,  .strike;  Haw., 

to  hit,  strike  against ;  Nuk.,  to  strike 

with  a  sjioar  or  shot. 
Tutu,  Tab.  Haw.  Mang.  Nuk.,  to  pound. 
Tiiki,   Tong.    N.  Z.   Nuk.,   tii'i,  Sam. 

Haw.,  to  lieat,  pound,  strike;  jxitii/:i, 

N.  Z.,  to  knock.     {Hcc  }iatii.) 
Tiikia,  Tong.   Har.   Nuk.,  tiiiti,  Haw., 

tiiiia  (for  liiia).  Tab.,  to  strike  against, 

(as  the  foot,)— to  stumble. 
Akntiikia,  Wnt. ,ftuituUa,  Tab.,  to  touch. 
1  lia,  ubi(].,  back. 
Tim-sivi,  Sam.,  the  back-bone, — a  chain 

of  mountains;   liia-hiwi,   Haw.,   the 

summit  of  a  mountain,  mountainous 

country. 

Tua,  Viti,  a  grandfather;  tu,  Tar.,  an 
aged  [lerson. 

Matiia,  Sam.  Tong.  N.  Z.  Haw.,  jiictiia, 
Rar.  Tah.  Nuk.,  motiia,  IMang.,  Ildl- 
grown,  mature,  elderly  ;  N.  Z.  Tah. 
liar.  Mang.  Haw.  Nuk.,  a  parent  or 
uncle  {viiiliia-tane,  a  father,  iHutiia- 
li'nw,  t\  mother). 

Mutiia,  N.  Z.,  first,  beforehand. 


Ulu-miUii  '.  .Sam.,  eldest  son;  otomedua, 
Tah.  Kill-.,  master,  elder. 

Tiiiikit,  Viti,  tiiii'ii,  Sam.,  timkaiia, 
N.  Z.  Uar.  I'au.  Nuk.,  tiiiuuiii,  Tah., 
tiiitiiiiami,  Haw.,  a  brotlier's  elder 
brother,  or  sister's  elder  sister. 

Tiiaijaiie  (sec  ijmiv),  elder  brother,  with 
respect  to  a  sistt^r. 

Tmijiijiiif,  Sum.  Tong.,  tiinliiiii;  N.  Z. 
Tah.  Nuk.,  tiiainr,  Uar.,  taitiiuhiiir, 
Haw.,  elder  sister,  with  respect  to  a 
brother. 

Timi,  Sam.,  a  long  time  ;  Tong.,  slow. 
'lufa,  Sam.  Tong.   Nuk.,  tiimi,  N.  Z., 
tului.  Tab.,  lita,  Uar.,  to  divide,  dis- 
tribute, share  out,  give  out. 

T'inva  i  tc  hiiarc,  N.  Z.,  tuha  i  te  hitnn. 
Tab.,  tiitiia  i  tc  unmrv,  Rar.,  tuha. 
Haw.  Nuk.,  to  spit  (see  ale). 

Tiiiiija,  Uar.,  a  half  (i.  o.  a  division); 
tua-lalii,  N.  Z.,  first,  first  purl, — tua- 
yiilwru,  tenth  part,  tithe. 

Tllflhja,  Fak.  Sam.  Tong.,  M//»j,fy,  N.Z., 
t(iiiiiii,\\uv.,lnhiiii,'i\\\\.,tuliiia,  Haw., 
tiihiika,  tiihiina,  and  tahuuii,  Nuk., 
one  who  follows  any  art  or  profession, 
— more  espcciidly  one  who  performs 
sacred  rites,  a  priest. 

rut,  Sam.  Tong.  N.  Z.,  to  prick,  pierce. 
— hence,  ubiq.,  to  sew. 

IlU,  Sam.  Tong.  Fuk.  Viti,  lord,  chief 
(prefixed  to  the  name  of  a  place,  as 
tiii-Aiina,  liU-Leviiku,  lord  of  Aanu. 
Levuka). 

Tui{i.),tiiitiii,  Tons.,  tii/iii,  Tah.  Haw., 

candle-nut  (aleurites). 
Tuke  (?),  tiikctiike,  N.  Z.,  tuctuc.  Haw., 
ii'itiikc,  Uar.,  tukc-rima,  Tikop.,  the 
elbow. 
Tukf-mata,  N.  Z.,  tue- nidtii,  Unw.,  ihc 

eyebrow. 
Tuke-vae,   Nuk.,   tiiclitc-tvairni;    Haw., 
the  heel. 

Tllki,  Rar.,  luf,  Tah.  Haw.,  to  spread,  as 
a  report,  be  published. 


336 


I'  II  I  I.  O  LOO  Y. 


7  llku,  ln\i,  iibiq.,  to  put,  put  down,  Irnvc, 
vie  111,  let  u,o. 

Tll/d,  Sam.  Tong.  Viti,  Imlil. 

'I'nlilld  (!),  tiiniki,  N.  Z.  Uiir.  Miin(j., 
Iiiliii,  llnw  ,////'((!,  Till)., tu  civcrthriiw, 

I'llSl  (lllWIl. 

/  nil,  liiri,  liii,  iibiq.,  dcnl', — sliiimrd   or 

(Iwirrru'd  by  noise. 
rtlli,  Snin.  Tong.,  to  run  n\\cr,  purmio; 

liiliii,    llnw.,   "n   younij,    biindsonic 

pcrsiiu    di'sircd    nnd   soiiylil    nltor,   a 

iK'auty." 
Tub,  Sam.  Ilaw.,  <»/,  Tong,  Niik.,  ndiiru, 

Viti,  tdii,  N.  'A.  ct  cn't.,  th<  knue. 
'Dxiliili,  Sam.,   titliiliii.  Ton;;.,  tiiliiru, 

N.  '/..,  tiiliili.  Haw.,  tiitiiri,  Uar.,  /»» 

te  luri,  Tah.,  to  kneel. 
Tulu,    Tong.   Haw.,   <;//•»,   N.  7..   Viti, 

kiiriikurii,  Unr.,  to  ilrop,  as  water. 

i  1111/  (?).  ^);/»,  Mnng.,  to  support,  sustain; 
/Mr;/,  liar.,  taiilnrii,  'lab.,  to  belp, 
assist ;  tiilulu.  Haw.,  to  set  up  on 
end,  ca-ct. 

Turn,  Pau.,  tiinitiint,  liar.,  tiiliihi, 
Flaw.,  tiitiiu,  N'uk.,  a  prop,  u  |K)st 
wbicb  sustains  tlic  r(M)rof  a  bouse. 

Tiiriitiini,  }i{an^.,  a  slic'k,  rlub;  liiliiii, 
Nuk.,  a  tree  of  touj;b  pliable  W(md, — 
a  boop  made  of  tbis  wood ;  tiitn/ii, 
I  law.,  the  circle  of  tbe  visible  borizou. 

TlinVl,  .^am.,  full, — tinauluinii,  top,  ex- 
tremity ;  tiimn-ake,  N.  '/..,  tbe  erown 
of  tbe  bead,  tbe  up|K'r  part  of  tbe  trunk 
of  n  tree, — liimiitiiiiiii,  lower  part  of 
trunk,  stump;  <wwm.  Tab.  Kar.  Mang. 
\uk.  Haw.,  trunk  of  tree,  stump, — 
hence,  Ijeginning,  iMisis,  foundation, 
producing  cause. 

Tuna,  Sam.  N.  Z.,  rubina,  Viti,  an  eel. 

Tunit,  Sam.  Tong.  Rar.  Tab.  Haw.  \uk., 
to  roast. 

Tliya,  \.  Z.,  iKnn,  Haw.,  a  sore. 

Twgl,    X.  Z.  Viti,   tutiij/i,  Rar.,  tutuni. 


tiini.  Haw.,  tiilui,  Tnh.,  to  light,  to 
kindle,  burn. 
TinjOU,    N.  Z.    Rar.,   Iiiwm,   Hnw.,   to 

li'.'ckon,  make  signs, 
Tii/xipiikll,  \.  Z.  Nuk.,  liijxtjKiu,  Toh. 

Haw.,  n  corpw. 
I UJJe,  N.  Z.,  n  snare  Cor  birds;  Haw.,  to 

fasten  with  a  fetter,  to  tie  the  wrist. 
i  UJM'le,  I  law.,  to  bruise,  as  fruit,  to  sollen  ; 
tii/K-rr,  Mang.,  a   knilb   for   scraping 
breadfruit,  to  scm|)c. 
1  lipil,  tiihii,  ubi(i.,  to  spring  up,  sprout, 
grow. 
Tiiji'iijii,  Sam.  N.  Z.,  tii/niaijii,  Tong., 

origin,  source,  ancestry. 
Tii/iii/iiiKi,  Sam.,  w<ik<i-tiij>iimt/n,  N.Z., 

a  getieration, 
Ti/jiii>ia,  \.  Z.  Rar.  Haw.  Nuk.,/«»i/»«, 

«//)«,  Viti,  grand-parent,  ancestor. 
Tiijiii,   Sam.,   presiding   chief,   beod   of 
tbe  governtnent ;  tiijiiKi,  Mang.,  high 
priest ;  Haw.,  sorcerer,  wizard. 
TllKI,  Sam.,  tofr,  Viti,  to/ii,  Tong.,  tnhi, 
tiiliitiilii,  N.  Z.,  to  make   marks,  to 
write. 
Ndiisi,  nifiii'i,  Viti,  tii>ii,  Nuk.,  to  point 
with  the  finger;  tiilii,  Haw.,  to  point 
out,  jiiilge,    conjecture, — l/i/iilii/ii,  to 
point  out,  show,  designate,  make  signs 
with  tbe  hand. 
Tute,  Tab.   Rar.    Haw.   Nuk.,  to  thrust 
awny,  put  aside,  e.xpel. 

Tlltit,  Sam.  Tong.  Nuk.  Viti,  to  kindle, 

to  burn. 
I  lltll,  Sam.  Tong,,  to  shake  (act). 

[The  riKit  tu  oppeors  to  hove  three  dis. 
tinct  significoliona, — viz.: — (1)  to  strike 
or  cut,  (2)  to  stand,  and  (3)  to  burn.  From 
the  first  of  these  may  be  derived  tutu,  to 
pound,  tiii,  to  pierce,  tiiki,  to  beat,  tiisi,  to 
mark,  tulu  (Sam.),  to  cut  ofT,  ond  tufa,  to 
divide,  together  with  the  tu  which  is  the 
prcfi.x  of  the  partitive  numbers  (Gram. 
§  35) ;  from  the  second  come  tiiku,  to  put, 


POLYNESIAN    LEXICON. 


n37 


fiilii,  III  erect,  Hiistnin,  ti'jm,  to  sprinj?  u\> 
or  griiw.  Ilium,  trunk,  sicm,  \c.  j  mid  iVuin 
the  tliiril,  '(/'"  anil  /««'>  •"  kiiiillc,  liiuii,  to 
roust,  mill  liitiii,  cmiille-mit,] 


u 


U,  Snm.  Toiii;.  [|mss.  ii-tin],  iili,  Tikop., 

to  liile  ;  nil,  Tnnn.,  to  bite,  peck,  stinfi ; 

uliiili,  Iliiw.,  to  vex,  provoke,  minoy. 
U,  N.  Z.,  to  eomo  together,  to  join,  to 

cleovo   to;    Tali.,   to   strike    ngiiiiist, 

shix-k. 
Ua,  Snni.  Tikop.  Fok.  Nino,  the  nock. 
Ua,  Viti,  uaua,  N.  Z.  M:nig.  Tah.  Nuk., 

a  vein. 
Ua,   Haw.,  hiia,  Niik.,  tniiii,  una,  N.  Z. 

Tah.  Unr.,  this,  that  (Grain.  §  41). 

Uaua,  N.  '/,.,  tough, — harsh,  slern  ;  iiitit. 
Maw.,  tough, — III! nil,  proud,  vain. 

Ufa,  Tah.,  mill,  N.  Z.,  «/«(,  Haw.,  jnifii, 

Nuk.,  the  thigh. 
Ufa,  Tah.  Nuk.,  ««'a,  N.  Z.,  female  of 

beasts. 
UJl,  iilii,  iii,  ul)i(|.,  yam. 
Ufi,    Sam.  Tong.    Nuk.,   ulii.    Haw.,   to 

cover  over,  to  vi'il, — a  lid,  covering. 
Uji,  Nuk.,  |K>arl  oyster  (see  li/a) ;  kn/a- 

ti/iii/i  (covered  jiebble),  I'au.,  jicarl. 

Ulliki  (ipi.  ?),  Tong.,  small, — the  young 
of  any  animal ;  iWi,  Sam.,  the  last  or 
younger;  »'(',  Haw.,  young,  strong; 
uiikii-iiki,  N.  Z.,  to  strengthen  (sec 

Ul,  Tong.,  to  call,  name,  summon  ;  filiiii, 
Tong.,  iii,  liiii,  N.  Z.,  ni,  ciii,  Mang., 
lit,  Kar.  Tah.  Haw.,  to  ask,  inipiire. 

Ui  (qn.  !),  maid,  N.  Z.  .Nuk.,  kaiii,  Uar., 
iiiii.  Tall.,  Ii'fl,  sinister  (sec  tan). 

Uilo,  iiiia,  nhi(|.,  lightning. 

Uki,  Kar.,  ?(/,  Tall.,  a  generation. 

Uku    (\),  j'lUi-iCii,   Sam.,   to    look    sad; 

85 


(!,  Hliw.,  to  grieve, — iiliii,  grief,  liiiiien- 
tiilion. 
via,  Sam. Tong.,  Iinln,  Haw.,  Iiiiiii,'['h\\., 
Ufa,  Kar.,  a  kind  of  dance. 

Wa  (.'),  iilo,  Tong.,  nra,  .Mang.,  tiu,  Nuk., 
miira,   Kar.,  auruiini,  Tor.,  iiiiilrc, 

Viti,  blii/c,  llame. 
(///,  iilinli,  Snm.  Tong.  Fak.,  bliiek  ;  (//i. 
Haw.,  ('/■/,  Tall.,  "(',  .Niik.,  bliu'. 

Ulll,  Sum.  Tong.  Viti,  the  hi'ad. 

Uliiiiki,  Tong.,  iiliin'i,  Sam.,  the  first, 

headmost. 
UliKjii,  Tong.,  iiliiijii,  Sam.,  >iriii)ii,  N.Z. 

Itiir.  I'au.,  iilunii.  Haw.,  iiriia,  Tah., 

a  pillow. 
Uma,  Tong.,  the  shoulder;   nma,  .\.  Z. 

Tail.,    iiiiKiiima,    Uar.    Haw.    .Nuk., 

kiiiniiii,  I'au.,  till'  heart. 
Unidtd,  Tung.  Tikiip.,  rainbow. 

Lmcd,    Tong.   .Sam.,   clay,   earth,  dust; 

Viti,  rust. 
Vmoti,    Tong.    Haw.,    a    stopple,    cork, 

bung. 
Linil,  uliiip,  an  oven,  or  |)it  for  roasting, 

U)l(l,   Sam.,    mill,  Tong.,    itiidhi.   Haw.. 

scales   of  a    fish;    nun,    Haw.,    nun, 

Tong.,  shell  of  a  tortoise. 
Villi,  N. /.,  iiniihi.  Haw.,  niiiii,  Uar.,  to 

draw  out,  as  n  sword  from  its  sheath  ; 

uiiiilii,  Nuk.,  to  stri|)  olf  clothes. 

Uljd,  N.  Z,  .Mang.,  akautja,  Uar.,  una. 

Haw.,  to  .send. 
Usd,    Uot.,   nui,   Viti,    nha,   Tong.,   ini, 

Sam.  et  eiet.,  rain. 
Ltd,  ubiip,  ashore,  on  land,  inland. 

Vte,  Nuk.,  aide.  Tall.,  iraiitr.  Haw.,  the 
paper-nuillxrry  tree,  (monis  papy- 
ri liTa.^ 

UtO,  Tong.,  the  bruin, — the  cocna-nul, 
when  it  is  about  germinating  ;  Sam.,  a 
name  for  tin?  head,  in  irony ;  Viti,  the 
breadfruit, — the  heart;  Tar.,  the  cocoa- 
nut. 


mim 


mtlm 


wm 


338 


I'lll  1,01,00  V. 


I'lll,  S,'/..  Tiili.  Ildw.,  piiyiiiciil,   price; 

In   pll\,    liMlird. 

I'/W,  Sam.   Mniii.'.,  In  dr.iw  wnlcr  j  iiliihi, 
lliu\.,l(i  polll'  Into, III  lill  II  vcnsi'l  willl 

liny  tliiiil. 


I  II,  Sum.,  ifii,  .N.  '/..  I  law.,  spiu'o,  ili^. 
Iniipo  bcl«('('ii  two  plnci'ii,  8|>hoo  nC 
liiiio;  viilii},  'J'niig.,  space  Ix'twii'ii  twn 
places. 
Viivii,  Sam.  Maiig.,  rent,  split,  npciicil 
widf. 

\  U,  Mang.,  to  talk,  coiiverac ;  tm,  Haw,, 
gossip,  private  cotivcrsntiiui, — to  say 
to  oiii''s  si'ir,  to  ri'lli'cl, — u-dlii,  a  say- 
ing, iiiiy  thing  said;  vn,  Uar,,  to 
Wonder. 
ll'(/i/.»'ri,  .\.  Z.,  iik<i-rii,  i{ar.,  /kui-viI, 
Tall,,  to  judge, 

Vae,  Sam.  Tong,  Nnk.,  iinir,  iv/mc.  Tali. 
.Mang.  Kar.,  trdtiw;  lliiw.,  iiiitiruc, 
N.'/..  Tan.,  the  leg,  foot. 

I  fll,  irtii,  uhii|.,  water. 

I  (11,  Tall.  Iliir.  Niik.,  to  lie,  to  ho  in  a 
certain  place,  to  1h'  laid  up;  viiinnjii, 
liar.,  tiiiiiiii,  Tah.,  that  which  is 
stored,  or  laiil  up  ;  hence,  inii,  Tali., 
laiiwiii.  Haw.,  pro|H'rty,  riches. 

Frt/7/0(.pi.  .'),  Tah.,  iviii/io,  N'.Z.  Haw., 
Viiio,  Uar.,  to  lay  down,  put  down, 
leave,  Ibrsiike. 

\  aifili,  Sam.  Tong.,  weak,  dehilitnted, 
vuiiipii-ihed. 

y  aka,  Tong.  Itnr.  Nuk.,  vtt'd,  Sam.  Tnh., 
Uiika,  \.  '/,.,  U(i\i,  Haw.,  Udtj^d,  Viti, 
iru.  Tar.,  a  canoe ;  vuk",  Mang.,  a 
rnl). 

\  (ikdl,  Tong.,  Vd'ai,  Snin.,  to  sec,  ob- 
serve, take  heed,  he  careful. 

Vaku,  Tong.,  iv(»,  Tah.,  j(V(MU'rt«,  Haw., 
to  scratch. 


Vilhkau  (f),  ra/ti'iiii,  Snm„  runtknii, 
liar.,  irii/iiiiii.  Haw,,  to  call,  cry  out, 
Nhont. 
\  (tlf,  Sam.  Tong.,  loolish,  crazy,  stupid, 
ignorant;  tniirirurr,  ^,'/,,,  null irnlr, 
Haw.,  lorgetlnl ;  vitrcvarv,  ,Mung.,  initi- 
taking,  ignorant. 

ViiiKilii  f(i/ir<ili;  Sam.,  tmiuiriki  Viirr- 
Vdiv,  .Mang.,  iiil'ant. 

lliiiiviiri;  Tall.,  /n/iiirii/i;  Haw.,  to  de- 
ceive. 

]|'(//c,  Viti,  Haw.,  merely,  only,  simply. 

Wtrt;  N,  7,.,  a  common  man,  n  man  ot' 
low  rank  (i.  o.  simple,  opposed  to 
gentle). 

Vii/iii,  Sam.,  stupid,  ignorant ;  iiiiiii, 
Tah.  Uar.,  stiipified,  overcome  hy 
sleep;  iiii/cii,  Haw.,  to  indulge  in 
ease,  be  <piiet. 
voll,  .Sam.  Tong.,  to  paint.  In  daub;  iiiili, 
Haw.,  to  grind  to  powder,  to  mince 
tine,  to  mix  ;  tvi//.  Tab.,  paste,  mud  ; 
villi,  Haw.,  I/V7/7,  Tall.,  tine,  soU,  like 
paste;  viii,  Niik,,  geiille,  tame. 

Jhiwari,  N.  Z.,  giiviiiivuri,  .Mang.,  soft ; 
7itiiriiliuiili,  Haw.,  kiiviiii'iii,  .\uk., 
weak,  li'clile. 

Vain,  iMirbl.     (Cram.  \  ill).) 

Willi,  Sam.,  viiiii,  Tub.  .Mang.,  vtiiiruu, 

Tong.,  vail,  mvaii,  Nnk.,  to  scrape. 
\  (10,  I'nk.  Sam.  Tong.  Haw.,  a  thicket, 

wilderness,  uninliubited  place. 
Vao  (?),   u'lW,    Haw.,   vacao,    IVfnng.,  to 

reconcile,  make  friends, 

t  USd,  Sam,,  rnha,  Tong.,  the  sea. 

\  line,  \iti,  nilic  or  tv/c,"  Tong.,  vavae, 
Sam.,  rue,  Mang.,  to  divide,  separate. 

Wise,  \iti,  riihc,  Tong.,  a  division,  por- 
tion ;  viiseija,  .Sam.,  a  cla.ss. 

Viieijii,  Sam.,  a  division,  separation ; 
riieijii,  l{ar.  Mang.,  u-nnja,  N.  Z., 
ifucmi,  viiwacnii.  Haw.,  vavwka  or 
viiviii'/iii,  Nuk.,  Ilio  middle,  lietween. 

Viitiia,  Haw.,  a  field,  farm,  (i.  e.  a  place 
divided  off.) 


I'  O  I.  V  N  K  MIAN    I,  H  X  I  C  ()  N. 


330 


' 


H'fA«<rAf,lV.>5„loilivido,i(i«pQrBtciIlnw., 

Id  o|i<'M,  ux|ilain,     (Sit  fusi  iiriil  j«ir.) 
VrtVdO,  ,Sam.  Nnk.,  uawn,  llmv,,li>sli<)iit. 
Vai>e,  iraiir,  iil)if|.,  ([uick, — to  Imilcn, 
'  t'l  Niik.,  i'i'iili|ic(lis  HT,  N,  /.,  ciitor|iillnr. 
Vekdf    Uiir,,   vm,  'rah.,    n    mo'tscnfrcr, 

horald;  ttro,  I  law.,  a  procurer. 
rc«l,*Sam.  Ton^.,  tirla,  I  law.,  urrniirrii, 

N.  '/..,  vtrdirni,  liar.,  vidveo,,  Niik. 

Tall.,  hot,  burnt. 
Vcr/i,  Man;.;.,  firp,  coiiflagraliun,  burning 

of  thu  griiSH  on  tho  hilla. 
Vele,  Sam.,  vcre,  Mnng.,  vaerr,  Tali.  Uar., 

rai/i;  Haw.,  to  wicil,  to  cIcMir  n  fioM. 
Vl'lo,  Sam.  Tong.,  vrm,  Mang.,  n  lance, 

to  throw  a  lance ;  vtn,  Niik.,  to  spear; 

jHihrlo,  Haw.,  to  throw  a  lance. 
Vtruveri),  Mang.,  a  flame  oCfire;  tn/n. 

ivi/o,  lhiw.,n  streamer, or  comet;  vera, 

Tab.,  a  tcm|)c»l,  a  hurricane. 


Vrro,  Tah.,  vm,  Niik.,  hiatvern,  N.  Z., 
tail  of  an  animal. 

VetC,  Ham.  Tong.,  to  despoil,  plunder, 
carry  off;  vctr,  Tong.  Mang.  Nuk., 
iviir,  N.  Z.,  to  unloow,  to  undo;  wrlr, 
Haw.,  to  crack  or  ojien,  an  the  joints 
ol'n  floor. 

Veitneii,  Mang.,  tiruweii.  Haw.,  gnm. 

' ',  Sam.  Tong.  Tah.  Nuk.,  tho  Urazilian 
plum,  Hpondia.s  dulcis. 

Vikt,  fi/Ji'iki,  Mang.,uiti,wilitciti,  I  law., 
cpiick, — to  hasten. 

Vtll,  viri,  iviri,  wili,  vii,  ubiq.,  to  twist, 
to  turn,  wind,  bore.  (Sec  Jih,  Jiln, 
milo,  iiino.) 

Vii,  Nuk.,  round,  to  turn  round, — also, 
to  liill.     (See  liihi.) 

Vtni,  Tikop.,  to  whistle;  vivini,  Sam.,  to 
crow. 


^ 


4b 


■• 


AN 


ENGLISH  AND  POLYNESIAN 


VOCABULARY. 


For  greater  convenience  in  using  the  preceding  Lexicon,  especially 
for  philological  purposes,  it  has  been  thought  advisable  to  append  an 
English-Polynesian  vocabulary,  drawn  up  in  as  concise  a  form  as 
would  be  ci>nsistent  with  utility.  With  this  view,  repetition  has  been 
avoided  as  far  as  possible,  and  some  Polynesian  terms  of  little  import- 
ance have  not  been  inserted  at  all.  It  should  be  observed  that  the 
Polynesian  words  are  given  always  in  the  radical  or  ground-form, 
under  which,  by  referring  to  the  Lexicon,  the  exact  term  corre- 
sponding to  the  English  word  will  be  found,  and  its  precise  meaning 
ascertained. 


4i 


86 


» 


•     I 


POLYNESIAN   VOCABULARY. 


A,  an  (art.)  se,foc,  tasi. 

Abandon,  masui,  li,  ti,  vaihn. 

Abominable,  kino,  lika,  lin. 

Above,  Itiya. 

Abstract,  take  away,  siko,  taki. 

Accuse,  2^c/:,  peka. 

Adhere,  adhesive,  mau,  piki,  pili,  pitlit, 

Ailjacont,  jiae,  pili  (see  near). 

Aihnire,  salo  (see  Avondcr). 

Adorn,  mnnaia,  ten. 

Adiilt,  tiia. 

Adze,  I'iki. 

Alter,  tiiu/i. 

Again,  foil,  foki. 

Vlns,  <u>c. 

All,  /«,  kdton,  pnii. 

Almost,  »ic. 

A\so,  foki,j>e. 

Ahav,  fata. 

Always,  n. 

Anibiish.^hyn. 

Ancestry,  forefathers,  ti/])ii. 

Anchor,  anchorage,  taiilu,  puijti. 

Ancient,  lajilu. 

And,  a,  c,  o,  via. 

Anger,  angry,  ila,  Hli,fitsii,  misi,  sili. 

Ancle,  piiki',  iapii. 

Announce,  publish,  i/o,  tiiki. 

Anmiyini.',  nuniata,  pcka  (see  ve.\). 

Aiiciliil,  jyaui,  pili,  sinii. 

Answer,  ki. 

Ant,  If). 

Aperture,  pitta,  fafa. 

\\>\Kar,  Ji I i,  fa gi I,  jmta. 

Appearance,  looks,y//«,  mlii,  tinn,  tn. 


Apiieaso,  pacify,  na. 
Appoint,  poo,  pule,  tnfi. 
Ardent,  eager,  fatui,Jita, 
Arm,  lima. 

Arm-pit,  kaokao  (see  side). 
Army,  mtkii. 
Arrive,  uu,  tae,  tan. 
Arrow,  kofe,fana. 
Arrow.root,  masoa,  pia. 
Artisan,  tiifinja. 
Arum  costatum,  kapc. 

"     esculentum,  talo. 
As,  me,  jie. 

Ascend,  kake,  piki,  li. 
Ashes,  le/'it. 
Asliore,  uta. 
Aside,  {iijc,  2>ac. 
Ask,  sn/i,  kole,  iii. 
Assail,  kiqir,  puke. 
Assemble,  putii,  poto,fim,  katoa. 
As\\\mn,fai)o,fotii,  ijaeyae. 
At,  i,  ki.  Ilia,  kei. 
Awake,  ala. 
Away,  iitii. 
A.\e,  tijii,  loki. 

B 

nack,  liKi. 
I!ack-l)onc,  lua. 
Unci,  kiw). 

Hag,  kali),  piitc,  tiniii. 
Bait,  miiiiiiu. 
Hake,  roast,  tao,  titnu. 
H'lld,  iiKili;  tula. 
Uale  (wairr),  tatd. 
Hall,>«',  piiku. 


» 


POLYNESIAN    VOCABULARY. 


343 


Bamboo,  kofe. 

Banm\BL,fiiti,  mciln. 

Barb  of  liook,  i/i/tga,  pa. 

Bark  of  tree,  }fi/i. 

Bark,  to,  cioa,  jjaya. 

Barren,  cl\jldless,  2>a, 

Basket,  /Htc. 

Bat,  j)c/m. 

Bathe,  kaii. 

Be,  kiia,  sc,  vai. 

Beach, yJjya,  »uit(i. 

Beak,  ffutu. 

Beam  of  wood,  l<ivn. 

Bear,  maltiya  (see  carry). 

Bear,  bring  forth, _/«?;a«. 

Beard,  ktimi,  talafa. 

Beast,  jniaka. 

Beat,  fasi,  lulu,  pa,  jxiki,  2>atu,  sasa, 

ta,  tu. 
Beat  against,  as  wind, _/«/<;/«. 
Beaten,  conquered,  nudu,  vaivai. 
Beckon,  luijnn. 
Become,  Ulo,  loko. 
Bed,  loiji,  muse. 
Before,  mun. 
Beg,  hole,  no,  soli. 
Beget,  to,fanau. 
Begin,  aijii,fiiii,  niata. 
Beginning,  commencement,  tmo,  tumti. 
Behind,  muU. 
Behold  !  na,  sola,  vakai. 
Belch, _/?o,  kujM. 
Belly,  iiimutva,  kopu,  kcte,  ah. 
Below,  lulo. 
Bond,  piko,fana, 
Besniciir,  pa)n,  pili,  potji,  vuli, 
Betrolli,  liiii,  iiiomoa. 
Between,  tonii,  vase. 
Beyond,  atu,  sake. 
Bilge-water,  liii. 

Bind,  /.'(«,/«s«,  humii,  It,  lakai  (sec  tie). 
Bird,  iimnu. 
Bite,  u,  k(iti,yao. 
Bitter,  mala,  kavi',  knna,  niaijeso. 
Black,  idi,  kcle,  pagu. 
Blind,  mata. 
Blood  tola. 


Blow,  as  wind,  ayi, 

"     with  the  mouth,  2/?, yj«. 
"     the  nose,  fayo. 
Blue,  iili. 

Board,  plank,  papa. 
Tioast,  futa. 
Body,  tino. 

Bog,  poko. 
Boil,  su. 

Bold,y(te,  tofi. 

Bone,  siri, 

Bonito  (fish),  a/u. 

Border,  pac,  InJ'a,  knm. 

Bore,  vili, 

Mmn,  fanau. 

Borrow,  ?(o. 

B(Jttle,  si>ia,faliki. 

Bow  (weapon), _/«««. 

Bow  down,  lo,  puHou,  2nko, 

Bowels,  ijakau, 

Fiowl,  kionetc,  tatioa. 

Box,  chest,  pusa. 

Box,  cufr,/«s",  molo. 

Boy,  lama,  iti. 

Braid, yW,  laija. 

Brain,  Mo,  ulo. 

Branch,  la,  maija. 

Brave,  loa. 

Breadfruit  tree,  kulu,  mai, 

\itc;\\\,  fail,  Juki,  f<uii. 

Breast,  chest,  /«/«,  uma, 
"      pap,  susu, 

Hn.'Mtli,  aso,  manava. 

Breathe,  /rt,/()i«. 

Breathless,  selu. 

Breeze,  aiji,  siii<ili. 

Bright,  /(■(««,  sinu, 

Jiring, /j,  kail,  lali  (see  carry). 

Broad,  /(;/(";,  lau,  tea. 

Broken  to  pieces,  laUi,  malu,  si/ka. 

Brood,  /(n;((. 

Brother,  ijunr,  tusi,  tua,  taoke/e. 

Brown,  eh. 

Bruised,  mtdu,  palu. 

Brush,  tiiji. 

Bud,  /i/o,  miika. 

Build,  (u. 


344 


P  H  I  I,  O  L  O  G  Y. 


Bunch,  /«st,  7W,  ]>uku. 
Biiiulle.  /((/J,  jm. 
Burn,  ^((»v/,  tin)i,  tutu,  vchi. 
l\urM,  fiiyfxi,  jHi. 
Bury,  t/iuu,  luiiii. 
ButtcrMy,  /*'/'<',  pule. 
Bullock,  Icmu,  jiuku. 
By,  r,  i,  dki,  dm. 


Cable,  taula. 

Cnlabiish,  i/iu,  fue,  sinri. 

Call,  k(iln)j<i,  va/iikiiu,  liiht,  lajxi,  ui. 

Calm,  ui,  uiulic  (st-c  quiet). 

Caniile-nul  (nlcurilos),  Uimit,  tin. 

Canoe,  /;V((«,  nikd. 

Cap,  lint,  \\p:\d-(irfss,fau,jxik,j)u/ijku. 

Carry,  amo,fafa,  tau,  sajxii,  knvc,  tali,  uia- 

l(ij)ii. 
Carve,  talai,  i'o. 
Castrate,  jxjka. 
Catcli,  S(i/>'>,  sriiio,  sopu. 
Calerpillar,  auu/r,  vi: 
Causative  particle,  rukii,  tn. 
Cnutious,  careful,  koko,  tjrl<: 
Cave,  (luit. 
(\^nse,  ]niit,  tdkoto. 
Centre,  loin,  touu. 
Centipede,  If. 
(,'lialt',  rub,  soli),  hmi. 
Champ,  liu/iu,  ijiui. 
Change,  lilo,  liu,  lu,  loli,  Itil.u. 
Changeable,  kajxi. 
Channel,  dfii. 
Character,  nature,  kauo,  tu. 
Charcoal,  malalu,  ijiitafu. 
Chatter,  babble,  tile,  kote. 
Cheek,  kultifau,  jxipaligd. 
Cherisli,  jirle,  tausi. 
Chew,  laniv,  mn,  puo. 
Chief,  aliki,  lui,  hnjntiln,  lujm,  tnr/afti. 
Chilli,  liDUii,  ili. 
C'liil(l-in-law,/»yo. 
Chin,  kiiuae,  kuuii. 
Chirp,  /,(. 


Chisel, /(to. 

Choke,  kuiui,  Inoa  (aeo  strangle). 

Choose,  ^/i,  siki,  tqfo. 

Circnmeisc,  tcfr. 

Clasp,  pull,  sopu. 

C\ass, /iisi,tusi,  vase. 

Clay,  uniea,  kele. 

Cleanse,  7na, 

Cl(>ar,  ma,  sina,  ui,  ata,  tea. 

VWmh,  piki,  kake. 

Close  together,  2>oto,  putu,  j/ili. 

Close  up  (to),  ])aui,  puni  (sec  shut). 

Cloth,  hifu,  tapa,  siajm. 

Clothing,  kiij'u,jaji. 

Cloud,  ao,  ata. 

Coast,  sakau,  mahi,fa))a. 

Cockle,  pipi. 

Cock's-comb,  le]K. 

Cocoa-mit,  tiiu,  kaii,  hererei.  popo,  uU). 

Cold,  auu,  makalili,  take,  moko. 

Collect, _/(«?,  lajm,  siko. 

Collection,  cluster,ybe,y}/«. 

Comb,  selu. 

Come,  sail,  lokn,  j'iti,  sale,  tae,  ofi,  snko, 

(ilala,  liu. 
Command,  kau,  lau,  jtoln,  tajia,  lono. 
Comnn)!),  free,  not  restricted,  melie,  noa. 
Companion,  sou. 
Company,  /oe,/«j!i,  malaita,  pu. 
Conceal,///,  >ia,  piiui. 
Conch,  /UI. 
Confess,  ////,;,  liUa. 
Congeal,  harden,  tiJca. 
CoiKpieror,  laijiitila. 
Contagious,  jiisi. 
Cimta'm,  faliki,  kapu. 
Contradict,  Am. 
Contrive,  toniiajiti. 
Corix],  juiijii,  loka. 
C<ird,  liui),  kdfii. 
Corner,  jxka. 
Corpse,  aija,  tufxijidku. 
Correct,  exact,  tau,  totiu,  pono. 
Cough,  die,  moko. 
Coimcil,  /«W". 
CoiiiUry, ./«««",  kdi. 
Couple,  pair,  sua,  liiu. 


*_, 


POLYNESIAN    VOCAnUI,  ARY. 


345 


Covcnnnt,  borgnin,  tati. 

Cover,  liji,  knmo,  jmki,  ]>nlii. 

Covotous,  titan  II. 

Criil),  ■pakd. 

Cramp,  jiili. 

Criino,  kotiiku. 

Crente,  «;;«,  kidi. 

Creep,  lolo,  sili. 

Crook,  Id. 

Cross,  jicka,  tckii. 

Crow,  kuoa,  viiii. 

Crown  (iriicnd,  linnu,  pita. 

Crumb,  kotn,  sinja. 

Crust,  paka. 

Cry,  tayi,  olo. 

Cup,  ipii,  knpti. 

Curse,  kaga,  kajtc,  knpit,  tianii. 

Cut,  koli,  scl<\  niulu,  miitit,  tii,  tipi,  tafa. 


D 


Dance,  iila,  sakd,  sirn,  kalini. 

Dark,  liiki,  i>o})i. 

Ddiigbtcr,  tdina. 

Diiwii,  (ilii. 

Day,  iiso,  la. 

Dayligbt,  ao. 

Dead,  tiiale,  siija,  lilt. 

Deaf,  tidi. 

Deceive,  viilr,Jiti,  piitii,  Ian. 

Deep,  loin,  hohnnu,  jioko. 

Deliver,  /('(/>  t  (see  loose). 

Depart,  kcmi,  Ick,  setno,  taka  (see  go). 

Descend,  jHW,  tn,  seke. 

Desire,  Jia,  nuinako,  Jinapulo,  ano,  maki, 

mati'. 
Desist,  knita. 
Desolate,  ntio,  nea,  rao. 
Despise,////*;. 
Despoil, /jo,  salii,  vetc. 
Destroy, _/«^(,  liitii,  man. 
Dew,  sail. 

Die,  iiKitc  (see  dead), 
Dillerenl,  kesi\  kisi,  kaUxi, 
Ditiii'ult,  ttiitd,  pakck(\  itiji,  pili. 
D'5,  ke/i,  ko,  kiiii,  poo. 

87 


Dip  up  or  out,  (isH,  kapu. 

Dirt,  dirty,  kcle,  lcpo,faii. 

Disobey,  jiakckc. 

Disposition,  <t>ja,  loto,  manava,  yakait. 

Dispute,  ke,  kisi,  lamaki. 

Distribute,  tufa,  toji,  scle. 

District,  motii,  ttiikii. 

Disturb,  kcii,  satiga. 

Dive,  liiku,  siikii. 

Divide,/^, _/««;',  tufa,  vasr,  sole. 

Do,  inia,  iiica,  liive. 

Dng,  kiili. 

Done,  nli,  pan. 

Doubt,  salo,  koko. 

Dove,  kuku. 

Down,  sifo. 

Drag,  tiisn. 

Draw,  kiimc,  li,  onii,  iiki,  sisi,  nmi,  via. 

Dream,  iiiiti,  mosc,  lia. 

Dregs,  kol<i. 

DriU,  Me. 

Drink,  i/ia. 

1  )rive,  li,  tekr,  tute. 

Drop,  tula. 

Drown,  Irnio. 

Drum,  tufa,  pahu. 

Dry,  nuUo,  mayo. 

Duck,  toha. 

Dumb,  masu,  pa. 

Dust,  hfii,  kota,  jiopo,  siiija. 

Dwell,  wfn,  jialasi,  sili. 

Dye,  tincture,  sina. 


E 

Ear,  taliya. 

VMnws\\y,fu,fana,fita. 

V.a.x\\\,fanaa,  kele,  lepo,  iimea. 

EarllKjuakc,  la. 

ISastcrn,  sake. 

Easy,  gofie,  mulie. 

Eat,  k'li,  lama,  taumafa. 

libb,  kriai,  sekc. 

Echinus,  ■sea-urchin,  tala. 

Edge,  mat<i,  lath. 

Eel,  ji.ihi,  toko,  tuna. 


846 


PHILOLOGY. 


" 


Egg,  manuiri,  knH. 

Eighl,  viilii. 

VAhaw,  liikf. 

Elcpliniilinsis,  /f'/e, 

Embark,  siikc,  sike. 

Empty,  mctSH. 

Encloiio,  encompass,  kaj>u,  jiokai,  7)K?ii, 

taka. 
Enclosiirp,  d,  loto,  koloy  jia,  mala. 
End,  extremity,  hojx',  jiito,  sikii. 
Eiuleil,  (Vi,  jHiu. 
Ei\cmy,Jili. 

Eiiougli,  /(/m,  kati,  tuu. 
Ensnare,  y/si,  ulc,fch. 
Enter,  «,  sao,  siilu,  tomo,  oji,  pitta,  jKiko. 
Entirely,/",  i>im. 
Envelop,  A"//?,  putoku,  ])ii/u, 
Envioiis,/«(f,  ^(K. 
Erect,  til,  tu/ii. 
Evening,  afiaji. 

Exnmine,  maia,  taki,  niiti,  sola. 
Exce<>(lini;ly.  lavn,  loa. 
Exchiini;e,  tun,  lioko, 
Exritc,  kt'n,  kdi,  oso. 
Explain,  i/o,  mate,  vase. 
Ex<|uisito,  ])ii/(>tu. 
Ivxtenil,  /a/a,  kiiini,  o,  tail. 
Extinguish,  tiiiei. 
I")ye,  tiiata,  kiiiio. 
Hye-brow,  tiikc. 
Eye-lasli,  /an. 
Eye-lid,  /cva. 


Face,  a/o,  mat'i. 

Fade,  ma,  inao. 

Fair  (weather),  akt,  /apt,  pakisi. 

Fall,  sitja,  pau,  pisi,  to,  tun,  taJ;a,  vili, 

tiia/i/i,  tumo. 
Fame,  /<iiio. 

Family,  kui,  sivi,/aga. 
Famine,  soi/c. 
Fan,  i/i,  tafi,  a/o. 
Far,  maiiHW,  tafiti. 
Fasten,  piw,  man,  ptUiti,  tnjie,  /lumn. 
Fat,  gako. 


Father,  tanta,  tiia. 

Faiher-in-law,/«j)o. 

Fathom,  nnfu,  mido,  klimi. 

Favorite,  /k/c. 

Fear,  ai'raU\,  fife,  mataku,  niau/e. 

Feather, /«/«. 

Feed,  /ill/a. 

h\'v\  (act.),  fa/a. 

Fell,  cat  down,  tii,  tu, 

F^>nce,  n,  jhi. 

Ferment,  sii. 

Fern,  nasf. 

Festivity,  ko/i,  siva,  kalioi. 

Fetid,  jii/an,  namii,  elo. 

Vow,  iti,  /na. 

Fielil,  a,  mala,  vase. 

Fiery,  kiisii,  ii/u. 

Fight,  tan,  tainaki. 

File,  ki/i. 

Fill,  knsn. 

Fillip,  fima,  fiti. 

F'in,  kiiiia,  ti/a. 

Find,  /i>ki). 

Fire,  aji. 

Firm,  man,  ma/»,  /inkci,  oka,  ]>atiti,  pao. 

Firmament,  /rva. 

First,  //((,  Ina,  ii/ii. 

Fish,  i/ai. 

Fish  (v.),  /avnkai,  sisi. 

Fish-hiHjk,  nuitan,  pa. 

Fit,  tun. 

F'ive,  /ima. 

Fixed,  man,  ])uo,  tokn. 

Flag,  streamer,  /cva,  vc/o. 

Flame,  u/ii,  vc/o. 

Flap  (v.),  kiipii. 

Flash,  kaiKijiu,  kanw. 

Flat,  /iifii,  piiixi. 

Flea,  kntn. 

l''lee,  Jhlu,  niutn,  soke,  solo. 

Fleet,  Jii/au. 

Flesh,  kano,  ki/co. 

l-'loal,  /(//;'(,  lio/na. 

l'"lock,  Idija,  fnsi. 

Flow,  l(ij'(,  pali,  ptia. 

F'low(_T,  fdtja,  pua. 

Flusheil,  ruddy,  pano. 


POLYNESIAN    VOCABULARY. 


347 


Flute,  fa^, 

Fliittpring,  jvi>c. 

Fly  (s.),  Idijo. 

Fly  (v.),  Mr,  miisiii,  ])una. 

Flying-fish,  maloto. 

Fouiii,  Sitka,  jma. 

Fog,  kosu,  Ji/iji,  (ifd. 

Fold,  fiUti,  jiflii,  jmkai, 

F'ollow,  (till,  fii,  luli. 

Food,  kai,  ma. 

Foolish,  vule,  7ieva,  lajm. 

Foot,  vac,  tapn. 

F'or,  110,  tia,  mo,  ma. 

Forbid,  forbidden,  eva,  sa,  lakui,  tapu. 

FVrehend,  /ae. 

F'oreign,  jiajM,  kesc,  siva,  tajili. 

Foremost,  miia,  idu. 

Forget,  yah,  moke, 

F^ortress,  hilo,  pa,  jxili. 

Foul,  filthy,  fait,  keta,  jiala. 

Foundation,  tumii. 

Founlnin,  pima. 

Four,  Jit,  tail. 

Fragment,  fast,  fiiti,  sitka. 

Frngriint,  kola,  maiiogi. 

Freeman,  linjntila. 

Fresl\  (water),  nuiyalo,  lanu. 

F"riend,  sua. 

From,  mat,  tin. 

F'ront,  all),  mata,  mita. 

Fruit,  fita. 

Fuel,  fa/ic. 

Full,  ki,  pile,  titihii,  kona. 

Fur,  fttltt. 

Furious,  sac. 


G 

Gall,  an, 
Gnrdrn,  ma?a. 
Generation,  liqnt,  tiki. 
Gcntl(^,  malic,  layi. 
Get,  laita,  man. 
Giddiness,  lika. 
Gird,  Idkai,  tatiia,  fitsi,  li. 
Girdle,  malo,  hitmc. 


Girl,  tama,  jioliki. 

Give,  fo,  kau,  scle,  monioa. 

Glide,  sekc,  haliia. 

Globular,  /«■,  jioto. 

Gnash,  tjai,  ijau. 

(io,  a/it,  sale,  o,fano,  liti,  Uil:a,  liifa,  tiki. 

God,  alita. 

Gone,  lilo,  liti. 

Good,  hi,  pat,  tiieitaki. 

Gourd, /«c,  si?ia. 

Govern, y^jj,  pit/e,  taki. 

Govi^rnmcnt,  malo,  sau. 

Grandparent,  tiijiii. 

Grasp,  ktikit. 

Grass,  iitnhiikit,  miitie,  yahcle,  tain,  veiivcti. 

Gravel,  kili,  pata. 

Gray,  sinn. 

Great,  fit,  last,  ntii,  tele,  oko,  pn. 

Green,  ota. 

Grieve,  miita,  misi,  nkn,  ama. 

Groan,  ale,  faiyt,  gulu. 

Gmw,  fita,  tiipn. 

Growl,  tjaga,  ijila. 

Grumble,  mnsn,  naiiu. 

Guard,  Iro,  tiaki. 

Guess,  tofo,  litsi,  mate. 

Gum,  resin,  tcpau,  jiulu. 

Gum  (of  the  jnw),  yao. 

Gush,  2>a/h  putia,  2>na. 


H 

Mail,  AV)?. 

Hair,  fi/lii,  Ian,  makaioe. 

Half,  Jh,  bill,  ttia. 

Ilanil,  liiua. 

Handle,  helve,  kan. 

riandsonie,  manaiii,  Irka,  viilotn,  soifita. 

I  lang,  feic,  li,  scle,  Ian,  leva. 

Ihippen,  lokn. 

Happy,  matin. 

Harbor,  ava. 

Hard,  mah,  oko.  pakcke,  jmtiti. 

Hasten,  vavr,  viki,  jwkc. 

Halrlul,  kino,  lin. 

Ha\e,  Uina,  man. 


34S 


I'll  I  LO  I,  OU  Y. 


I  ■ 


lie,  ill,  mi. 

Head,  ulu,  jioko,  uto,  penu. 

Hiiul-neh,  /it. 

Ilcnl,  mii/ii. 

Ilctip,  /)ii/;r,  til. 

Hear,  /ow. 

Ilcnrt,  iiakiiii,  /utii,  /lOiijui,  lulu. 

IIwivi'ii,  linji. 

Menvv,  tiiafa. 

Urol,  tiikc. 

Help,  sna,  tiilu,  alu, 

Hcrf,  nci. 

Hositnte,  knko,  pcli, 

Ilow,  tii/iii,  piio. 

Iliccmigl),  kiikina. 

Hido,  liiddon,  fii,  mi,  lih,  lo,  pnlti,  lulu, 

miilii,  viokr. 
Hi{;li,  /inm,  tikclikc. 
Hill,  iiiiiu,  puke. 
Hiiiilcr,  iilai,  Uwfi, 
Hiss,  sisi. 
Hit,  im,  til. 
Hither,  iiiai. 
Hot;,  piiuka. 
Hold  ((if  ship),  liu. 

Hold  (v.),  kiiku,  tiuiu,  jmlu,  taqfi,  kapu. 
HimU,  III,  iiiatau. 

Hoop,  tlllll. 

Hope,  mimiiko. 

Horizon,  tlllll. 

Horn,  fii". 

Hoi,  knsa,  fana,  vela. 

House,  fall'. 

How,  ]>e. 

HoM  many,  Jisa. 

Hundred,  lau. 

Huni;ry,  kai,  pddi,  popi. 

Hurrieane,  ii/'d,  vclo. 

Hurl,  piiJii,  mate. 

Husband,  tane,  o/iana,  tafu. 

Hush,  /"/. 

Hy|>ocrite,  fun. 


i 


I,  iiu,  kii. 

If,  ilia,  km,  pe,  sili. 


lynorniit,  vu/e,  hiipo. 

Image,  ntii,  tiki. 

Im'Unlc,  fiti. 

Iinmodost,  kiilioi, 

111,  (,  kii,  mil. 

lndceil,7''/><,  liivii,  maoni. 

Infant,  iti,  vale. 

Inland,  utii. 

Inlay,  fnno. 

Insect,  kimio,  sokii,  sno. 

Inside,  iilo,  loto,  manava. 

Inspire,  siilii. 

Insult,  iirovokc,  kaka,  kajK,  ke 

Intoxicated,  kotia. 

Invocation,  hqni,  jmle. 

Ileh,  maijrso. 

Ivory,  piiliioa. 


Jaw,  kauae. 

.lerk,  kctii. 

Join,  f.oko,  mill,  it. 

Joint,  jmiia,  pitkii. 

Joy,  joyful, yi(;,  koakoa,  koli,  leka,  soisoi. 

Judge,  ra,  tilo. 

Jump,  nsn,  sojio,  piina,Jiti,  kctu. 

Just,  jtono,  sao,  tika,  tonii. 


K 

Kernel,  kann.  Mo. 

Kill,  /rt«,  to. 

Kind,  iitn,  liu. 

Kindle,  tafu,  titi)i,  tutu. 

Kindred,  kai. 

King,  suit,  tupu,  aliki. 

Kite  (plaything),  kaj>a. 

Knead,  mitu. 

Knee,  tuli,  poko. 

Kneel,  tuli. 

Knife,  /.'//(■,  tipi, 

Knol),  piiku. 

Knock,  la,  tu. 


P0LYNK8IAN    VOCABULARY. 


349 


Knot,  j)ona. 
Know,  i/o,  kite. 


LmUpT,fat(i. 

Lnke,  Into,  lanii, 

Liimo,  limp,  koki,  hrtu, 

Liirnont,  olo,  pike, 

Lnnco,  tan,  velo. 

Lniigiiiigi',  kiipu,  leo,  olclo. 

Laugh,  kiit<t,  sni.sui. 

I.ny  or  put  dovn,  takoto,  vaiho,  tiikii. 

Ln/.y,  tjele. 

Lpa<l  (s.),  tfjxiK. 

Lend  (v.),  laki,  tono. 

Leaf,  Idii. 

Loak,  mama,  I  in. 

Lean  (ad.),  ijiise,  koko,  vioko. 

Lean  upon,  JiiJiila,  filiimki. 

Leave,  tiikii,  vailio,  iiuisiii. 

Leeward,  lain,  sifo. 

Led  (hand),  scniu,  id. 

Leg,  vor. 

Leper,  leprosy,  y«'/f,  ten. 

Lest,  nei. 

Lick,  villi,  pain. 

Lid,  liji,  tijii. 

Lie,  repoNo  (v.),  mitse,  tiikotn.  viti. 

Lift,  sii/)i'i,  mki,  li. 

Light,  lustre,  liiniii,  no,  sitln. 

Light,  not  heavy,  mamti,  Itnju. 

Light-hain>d,  krfit. 

Lightning,  iiihi,  knmn. 

Like,  j>f,  me,  tan,  lite. 

Lip,  ijiitii. 

Liquid,  sua. 

Little,  iti,  iiki,  iiiiiki,  auhi,  tiiomo. 

Live,  ola,  soifiui. 

Liver,  ate. 

Lizo'd,  nw^;n,  pili,  ijafa. 

Load  (v),  fiio. 

Lohsti-r,  kiila. 

Lodge,  .-(tny,  siti. 

Loins,  taukiipii. 

Long,  Ina,  tiia. 


Look  (v.),  sa/a,  tia,  liln,  taki,  lajtn,  lakai. 

Loose,  taJii,  vrte,  senio,  a/ii. 

l/oav,  lost,  liio,  mnkr,  ijalo. 

Louse,  kati/, 

Lr)vp,  ofa. 

Low,  la/o,  saka. 

I,ow-wnti'r,  masii,  iiiako. 

hump,  fa!ii,fije,  jmpo. 

Luscious,  7iinmoiia, 


M 

Mad,  vale,  iiera,  pule. 

Maggot,  ilo. 

Make,  am.  fai,  tjtwsi,  kali. 

Male,  taiie,  ttxi, 

Malh'l,  ike. 

Man,  tane,  taijata. 

.Many,  lasi,  tele,  tiui. 

Mark,  iln,  piiki,  ta,  tafii,  titsi. 

Marrow,  tola. 

Must.Jhnd,  tila. 

Master,  /(/,  tiia,fatu. 

Mat,  kiv,  tiikajxiu. 

Mature,  full-grown,  tua,  oko. 

Meal,  repast,  kai. 

Medicine,  lapakaii. 

.Meditate,  Ha,  niniiako,  sala,  va. 

Meet,  /('/'■,  taki,  tail. 

Mend,  /o«o,  piiiaki. 

Mi'ssenger,  lele,  nka. 

.Middle,  Into,  lua,  tniiit,  vitir. 

Mild,  laiji,  vali,  viayaJ/). 

Million,  kiJii. 

Mince,  tnfi,  vali. 

Mind,  lain,  mauava,  t/akaii. 

.Mirror,  ata. 

Mischievous,  kra,  samja. 

Mistake,  liijiii,  tna,  se, 

.Misunderstand  jxikike. 

Mix,  mingle,  nun,  /ilo,  siii,  pain,  rali.  ki/sii. 

MiTck,  fai. 

-Mole  on  llie  skin,  ila. 

Moon,  lama,  fina,  tnauii,  kavakc. 

Morning,  jm/i. 

Mote,  paid,  siiya. 


88 


:)so 

Miiih,  xikii. 

Miillirr,  ////(/,  hill.  Jut,  k>ii,  ttn , 
Miiiiiiil,  iiiiin,  piikr, 
.Mciiiiitiiiii,  mail,  tun. 
Moiiso,  kimixt,  kiiJe. 
.Mciiiili,  /((/(/,  fiiilii,  iiiiiijii. 
.Miiullil'iil,  iiiiiraci,  )iiii. 
iMdVc,  iiiki;  /nkr,  lih , 
.Mullet,  kiiiiiir. 
Muriiuir,  iimsu,  nuiiii. 
Muscle  (slicll),  kiikii. 
Musket,  /III, 
Musquild,  kulii,  iiiimii. 


N 

Nail,  s\)'Ac,fno. 

Nail  1)1'  lin;^(r,  kiiku,  mutikukii. 

Name,  iiimi,  siiiifii,  liijut, 

NaiK'  of  neck,  kiiki. 

Narrow,  njii,  ili,  nijx. 

Native,  miumi,  kiii,  yiUi. 

Navel,  y>iVo. 

Near,  Uitn,  jiili,  oji,  jxte. 

Neat,  /iV(,  Irii. 

Neck,  lilt,  kiiki. 

Necklace,  kiisixt. 

Nwille,  akii,  lii/ii. 

Nephew,  moknpiina. 

^cat,  fiDjii,  si/i. 

Net,  kiij>r!)ii,  iilu. 

New, foil. 

News,  logo,  laJii. 

Night,  7WJ1J,  luki. 

Nine,  siva. 

Nit,  lia. 

No,  (li.  If. 

'So\sr',faliilii,  mii,paki,  i/aya,  ijolo. 

Noon,  no. 

Noose,  yffr,  sflc. 

North,  to,  toktlau. 

Nose,  isii. 

Not,  ai,  le,  tni. 

Now,  nci. 

Nurse,  tuHsi,  tiifit. 


I'll  I  1,0  I.O(i  Y. 


O 


Olx'y,  liDiiii. 

Oihii',  kii/iicii. 

Odor,  iiiiiiiii,  siiiiifi, 

or,  (/,  n,  till,  iin. 

Oil,  lull),  jMiiii,  siiiii,  moii. 

Old,  III,  tint,  tiijitit. 

One,  tiisi,  jin: 

ih\\\ , Jim ,  I'll ,  mnoiii.  Hit,  vide. 

<  >|MMi,  /r;.s/,  7111111111,  iiiagu,  to,  Vit,  vase,  seu. 

( 'li^jiii,  lino,  tlljllt. 

Ornaiuent,  .sii. 

Other,  krsr,  kisi,  t<isi. 

Outside, /«/«,  jHu: 

Oven,  iimii. 

Overthrow,  overtuni,  tulaki,fuli, 

(.)w\,/,i/ii. 


I'aildle.yo.w,  (tlo,  kiipa. 

Pain,  liija,  munii,  mnnuihi,  hi. 

I'ainI,  iiili  (see  l)estnear). 

I'al< ,  mil,  till,  tavake. 

Palm  ol'lianil,  kupu. 

Paiidanus,  /((/«. 

Pap,  siisii. 

Paradise,  piilolu. 

Parent,  tnii. 

PaP'nl-in-law,y/(»)0. 

Parry,  /"'//,  kiUo. 

Parsinmnions,  jii/i. 

Part,  portion,  /((,/(««,  jxie,  vase,  ma,  ni. 

Past,  lilo,  jiaii,  scmo. 

I'ath,  sii/ii. 

Patience,  patient,  iiso,  niitfit. 

I'ay,  tiifti,  iitii,  tun,  hiiko,  luki. 

Pence,  pacific,  snii,  loijo,Jb. 

Pearl,  /(y,  ////,  set. 

Pearl-shell,  tijii. 

I'chhie,  kiiUi. 

\\'c\,Jisi,Ji)se. 

Pw'p,  siikc,  tilo. 

Pcg,Jho. 


I'  t»  I,  V  N  E  M  I  A  N    V  (»  0  A  II  1/  I,  A  (l  V. 


351 


Pfll  with  Htiiwrs, jiiai. 

I'c'<i|ili',  kill,  iiiiitii,  soi/ii,  nth. 

l'('|i|K'r,  jHi/ii. 

l'r|)|M'r-|)liiiil,  kiini. 

I'lTli'd,  tiio,  jiii/ijtii,ii>iiu, 

I'i'ilia|is,  fH\ 

I'lTMiii,  kill,  liti)<itii,  tiim. 

I'crvLTl,  Jim: 

I'i'Nilr,  /run, 

I'ieriT,  mikii,  siiki,  siinuki,  till. 

Pij^ciiu,  liijif,  kiikii. 

I'illow,  kii/i,  iilii. 

I'ilnl,  iiiki,  Ick. 

I'iii,  iikii. 

Pinch,  kiiii.  Inn, 

I'il,  hill,  jHikit. 

Pili'li,  piilii. 

Pity,  nfii,  iiue. 

Plncr,  til,  llllkll,  lllfll. 

Plain  (s.),  /nil,  juijiii, 

Pliiil,  /(/(,  /ni/ii. 

Plant  (v.),  kn,  Innii,  to. 

Plantain,  Juki. 

PluHsant,  /rkii,  niwn,  j/tik. 

Plciiulcs,  miUd. 

Pluck,  tu/i,  Juki,  fiiti. 

Plnni|i,  i/i/iii,  tile. 

Plunder,  Jui>>  siilii,  vetr. 

Plural   particles,  ittii,  foe,  fast,  kail,  ma, 

mail.  III,  ijii,  puke,  puku,  Uii,  tau. 
Point  at,  liisi. 
Poison,  komi. 
Pole,  toko. 
Poor,  tiriii,  ijrie. 
Porpoise,  tiifolA. 
Post,  i>oii,  tiilii,  /ami,  tika. 
Posterity,  siili. 
Potato  (sweet),  kionaja. 
Pour,  liyi,  iisii,  utii,  suai. 
Prayer,  lolii,  piili: 
Precipice,  piili,  ojuita. 
Pref,'naiit,  pii,  sapn,  to. 
Prepare,  trii. 
Press,  squeeze,  JhUi,  loiiii,  opa,  tau,  tina, 

tomi. 
Prick,  tiii,  suki. 
Priest,  tuiila,  tiifinjii,  tiipu,  aliki. 


I'riK'iaiin,  /xiId,  lulu. 

PrnjH'r,  inili'.  Inn. 

Property,  Initn,  njii,  knloa,  vui. 

Prophecy,  loj'o.  Ho,  faiia. 

Proud,  j/«,  ten,  iia. 

IVovision,  omi. 

Provoke,  /,(',  n,  jukn. 

Pndiliii;;,  loin. 

i'iMi;;ent,  knvn,  iiinijiao. 

Punish,  jKkii. 

Push,  tikr. 

Put,  liikii,  vnilio. 

Putri<l,  pnia,  pilau. 

Q 

(Quarrel,  kr,  main,  lamaki,  tetc, 

(luick,  viki,  vave,  Mr. 

C^uiet,  main,  na,  masa,  loffo,  lulu. 


R 

Italler,  lara,  ««),  oka. 

Rain,  iisn. 

UaiidK)W,  niiiiit,  iimata. 

Itaise,  siki,  sisi,  sajmi. 

Rat,  kiiiioa,  kinlc. 

Raw,  otn. 

Reach,  o,  tau. 

Ready,  tan,  ten. 

Rehuke,  lili,  kaiuie,  yao. 

Reckon,  Ian,  tan. 

Reconcile,  rao. 

Red,  kula,  do. 

Redeem,  jxmaki. 

I{eed,  knso. 

Ret'f  (of  rocks),  sakau,  toka. 

Reflection,  image,  ala. 

Reject,  //,  li. 

Relish  to  food,  kinaki. 

Remainder,  toe,  lara. 

Renieniher,  vianalii,  maiiako. 

Remove,  nekc,  jieke,  taka,  keu. 

Reptile,  piUa,  moko. 

|{esidencc,  api,  kui,  silt. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


I 


1.0     £Kili£ 

■tt  Bi   ■2.2 

S!  y&  12.0 


I.I 


^ 


^ 


V 


Photographic 

Sdmces 

Corporalion 


as  WIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WISSTIR.N.Y.  MStO 

(71«)a7a-4S03 


4^ 


SS3 


I'HI  I,  O  LOGY. 


Resmind,  taiji. 

Rent,  repose,  ma/6,  iiuim,  okioki, 

KosI  upon,  siii,  (an. 

Itrtiirn,  t'oki. 

Revolve,  taka. 

RiK  l,t. 

RiL'lil,  jmiin,  stio,  lonii,  \/iiU;  Inn. 

Ri^lit  linnil,  Inii. 

Ring,  nuima. 

Rip<',  mao,  oko. 

Rise,  /iti,  li,  fiita,  piitii. 

Riwir,  gii/ii. 

Roast,  liinK,  tito. 

Rock,  jMipa,  toka. 

R..11,  takn. 

Roll  up,  fiUii,Ji/i,  pokni. 

Root,  aka. 

Rope,  maea,  Uiiila,  /inn. 

Rotten,  jhi/ii,  jx>{iii,  j>rj)c. 

Roujjii,  tiiiiji/iiii,  piipii,  siiki,  tain. 

Round,  for,  jxiln,  taka. 

Row,  ran)',  /mijki,  lit. 

Ruh,  i;;i//,  mntii,  solo,  lomi. 

Kulihisli,  kola. 

Run,  SI  Jo,  Me. 

Rusli  (Jn)iciis),Jisi,  ktuo. 


Siictrd,  sii,  liui,  tabu,  moa,  ]nti. 

Sacrifice,  Unininfa. 

Sail  (».),  kir,  la. 

Sail  (v.),  jii'io,  soko,  tele,  foUiu. 

Salute,  miji. 

Sand,  line. 

Sandalwood,  aic. 

Sap,  liilo. 

Satiitc,  konii,  Jill,  masa, 

Savnu"',  »»«',  //«y«. 

Savor,  liJo. 

Scatrojil,  sta>j;iiig,  fata. 

Scale  ol'tish,  una. 

Scale  (lish ),/««. 

Scalier,  In,  /a/a,  /efa,  palasi. 

Sco'V',  kiin. 

Scrap,  inoiiiu,  nuikawe,  supa. 


.Scrape,  lakn,  yatn,  vain. 

Scratch,  se/n,  rakn,  /akn,  ijnln. 

Scull  (s.),  ai/a,  jnko. 

So,  tai,  tiioaiia,  mill,  rasa. 

Search,  swk,  kiiiii,  /apn,  snkc,  ijnln,  liki, 

kiln. 
Season,  Inn,  )iiiiw,fii,  iiianli. 
Si-a-weed,  limn. 
See,  till,  kill',  miilti,  vakai. 
Sifd,  kano,  fntii. 
Seize,  pnke,  so/in,  jirkii. 
Senil,  kiin,  iii)ii, 
Si'parale,  tiioln,  jme,  taka,  ruse. 
Servant,  saga,  tantua. 
Set,  piigi,  to. 
Seven,  Jitn. 
Sew,  Int. 
Shade,  ata,  mtilu. 
Shake,  ///,  /(',  tiitn,  trie,  kiilo. 
.Shallow,  innsii,  pnjuikn. 
Shnnie,  ashamed,  ma. 
Sha|H',  fiKt, 
•Shark,  minjo. 
Sharp,  koi,  lipi. 
.Shar|)en,  solo,  tain. 
Shave,  la/i. 
.Sheath,  Jiiji. 
Shed,  j'olan. 
Shell",  Jala. 
Shell,  jmka,  niia. 
Shelter,  In/n,  ma/u. 
Shine,  suln,  kanajHi, 
.Ship,  /lalii,  Jiilan, 
Sho<',  lainaka. 
Slirxil,  Jiuia,  pn,  li. 
.Short,  /xV",  saka. 
.Shoidder,  nmii,  jnko. 
Shout,  kiilaija,  vnlakuu,  vavao. 
.Show,  ill),  Lijii,  iHsi. 
Shrewd,  ala,  Ian. 
Shut,  kiiiiio,  /kiiii,  pnni. 
.Sick,  inaliaki,  la,  male,  ijana,  Jin. 
i^ide,  kiiokai),  jxif, 
Sijjli,  inapn,  n,isi,  yae. 
Sign,  i7«,  jMio. 
Silent,  niiijn,  mnsn. 
.Sin,  siila,  suiai,  kajir,  liiii. 


I»  O  I,  Y  N  K  8  I  A  X    V  ()  C  A  11  V  I.  A  R  Y. 


353 


Sinn,  sii'ii,  kiilini. 

Sink,  ijiili),  jiokii,  srkr,  .vmn,  lo,  tomo. 

Siiiiict,  /.(i/ii. 

SiHirr,  tdol^rlCy  Uisi,  liiii,  pone. 

Sit,  ««/«,  jKiUui,  tekc,  kittiikii. 

Six,  OHO. 

Skill,  ki/i. 

Sky,  linii,  levii. 

Sliu'k,  iilii. 

Slii|i,  jMiki,  jxili,  ]x>. 

Sliivi',  Mil. 

Sleep,  ninse^  tiikoto,  tokii,  voir. 

Siiii);,  miikti. 

Slip,  jcAr,  srnin,  /emit. 

Slow,  j/f/p,  »*/«,  lo,  tun, 

Siniiko,  iisii,  jxitji. 

Snake,  ivilu,  moko, 

Snww!,  mii/iitiiii,  li/r. 

SiKire,  i/olii,  tjulii, 

SlIOIll,    IJHtll. 

So,  jir. 

Soak,  until. 

SoU,  iiiiilii,  >jrj>ii,  jmi/h,  pejie,  tali. 

Soil,  krir. 

Solo  of  t(K)l,  liipii. 

Solid,  pnjMi,  tiui/i'i,  hiikii. 

Solitary,  into. 

SonM',  ma,  ni. 

Some  line,  */,  Insi. 

Son,  tiimii,  tun. 

Soii'in-law,  Jinjo, 

Song,  iiva,  jiiJie. 

Soot,  iHi/nfii. 

SorceriT,  sorcery,  tiijiii,  kni/n. 

Sore,  tiiixi,  Jeji;  mnsnki. 

Sound,  /uijii,  lagi,  j'uliilu. 

Soup,  sii. 

South,  tokelau,  to. 

Sow,  ///. 

Space,  VII. 

Spade,  ki>. 

S\KaV.,Jiiki,liH,  kii/e/o,ki,/au,  takitu,  talu, 

iilr. 
Spear,  tii/n,  tiio,  relo. 
S|>it'rli,  iiliilitijn,  liiii}ftl,  kolelo. 
Spill,  liiii. 

Spirit,  iiitii,  niHi,  ntn,  ku/une,  nuinava. 

80 


Spit,  n/e,  iiiiu,  liifii. 
Splash,  /»/a;. 
Split,  /(/,  /mi.  III. 
S|i<iil,  mini. 
ii\Hinn<',  limu. 
Sjiotled,  jiiile. 

S|H)U**,   ItflllUll. 

Spray,  tita,  son. 

Spri'ad,  /«/(/,  /ii/n,  tiiko,  tolo,faliki,  tiiki, 

Spriii^^  lip,  //,  pinin. 

Sprit,  tilii. 

Sprout,  //<,  kito,  miikii,  siili,  tiipu, 

S<pial>,  i>iikii,  juilo. 

Sipiarr,  public  place,  mii/a,  ttthna. 

S<piid,  AXc. 

S<piit'^>-,  kiinir,  o/xi,  liui,  limi. 

Still),  .vikii  (sc«'  picrcp). 

Stall",  liiko. 

Stajinanl,  /»7». 

Stair,  A/"". 

Siaiid,  //',  tikii. 

Star,  Ittii. 

Steal,  kiiiM,  piioi.  Hike,  kamo. 

Steam,  nsii,  kosii. 

Stem,  stalk,  kiiii. 

Stern  of  veswH,  muii. 

Stick  (v.).  piki,  pili,  puni. 

Stir,  *•(/,  krii, 

Sliiniacli,  kite,  fntii. 

i^Ump,  Jii/ii,  kiilii,  miikn. 

Stopple,  koiiio,  piilii,  iiHloti, 

Storm,  iitti,  iclo. 

Story,  tnle,  Inknn,  fiimi. 

Straijilit,  */>,  tonii,  tikn. 

Stniiifie,  krsi  (•«•«•  foreign). 

Slninulo,/'/^,  kiimi. 

Slri'nm,  Intr. 

Strike,  /(/«/,  /«/»/,  nioto,  jtn,  pnki,  ptUii,  jxi, 

fit.  III,  II. 
Strike,  a»  a  ship,  si/i,  tokn. 
Strip,  luifii,  mill. 
Strive,  mn/u,  ttte. 
Stroke  (v.),  /mK 
StT\n)\i,  fitii,  ok'K  knjii,  iiiiUu. 
Stuinlile,  lo,  til. 
Stun,  tiili. 
Stupid,  vole. 


S54 

Siilwlnncc,  /'V,  kunn,  lino. 

Slick,  Diili,  oino. 

Siignr-rnnc,  lo. 

Siiilnblf,  lull. 

Sun,  '(«,  Id,  /(tint. 

Sunset,  In. 

Support,  III,  jnijf,  liitii. 

Surf,  t)<iJii. 

SurfacT,  liiiKt,  lull. 

Surpass,  .«///,  niiii, 

SurriMind,  /w/k,  /xikai,  Uika. 

Suspicious,  /Ktio,  Jim. 

Swnllnw,  /(V«. 

Sweat,  mil,  kiivit. 

Sweep,  t,i/i. 

Swell,  /.vA/,  Jill. 

Swim,  I.IIII,  iilo. 

Sword,  /.'</,/•. 

Swortl-lisli,  nkii. 


V  im,  o  I,  o  o  V. 


Tnhle.  /<;^/,  lau. 

'I'licilum,  iiiiisii,  ijii. 

Tiiil,  sikii,  till). 

Take,   kin-r,   lavr,   lnH,  t'lm,  titki,  fiike, 

piili,  liiko. 
'I'nik.  Iiilii,  VII,  koir  (see  g|)cak). 
'riune,  Itilii,  iiiali. 
Tiisle,  tiflo, 

TiitliioinL!,  marking,  moko,  la,  lau. 
Teaili,  iiko. 
Tear  (s.),  loi. 
Tear  (v.),  sue. 
Tempt,  sriiiii. 
Ten,  /»/»,  kiiiiii. 
Tliank,  liiki. 
TImt  (pr.),  nil. 
That  (coiij.),  kill,  ina. 
Tha'.cli,  (ito,  jxilu. 
The,  If. 
Then,  mi. 
There,  ki).  nil, 
Tlicreu|Hin,  liivii,  lele. 
They,  /(/,  nu. 


Thick,  niiitalii,  pii, 

Thicki't,  run,  ijiilieic, 

'VUigU,  lii/m,  iifii. 

Thill,  liiiliii,  niji,  ijii$r. 

'I'hiiij!,  inrii. 

Think,  nmniiko,  mea  (see  meditate). 

Thirst,  kai. 

This,  nri. 

Thorn,  liil't. 

Thou,  ko,  ke. 

Thoiisniiil,  iilr,  niiino,  lini, 

'I'lireail.  /(/«. 

Thn'c,  liilii. 

Throw,  li,  li,  veto,  inaka, 

Thiiniler,_/((/M,  maim,  ijiilu. 

Tickle,  nifiiitwo. 

'Vir.  Jim,  li,  srie  (see  hind). 

'I'ill,  iimki. 

Time,  niiiiiiivii,  mniili,  vii. 

To,  /./,  mil. 

To-day,  mi. 

Together,  /",  limi. 

'I"o-iiiorrow,  III),  jmiji. 

Tongue,  iili'In. 

Tooth,  nijii,  i)iin, 

'l"op,  summit,  /(/v'(,  jiiln,  tiimii. 

Top  (playlhiiin),  ///',  inilo,  taka. 

Torcli,  lama,  snlii. 

Tortoise,  /«««. 

Tortoise. shell,  kill,  una. 

Touch,  /HI,  juiki,  taijo,  lit. 

Tough,  //(/. 

'J'owii,  /■(/(',  kitio,  nnkii,  jxi. 

Track  (s.).  Ill  Jilt. 

Trade,  /((",  lioko. 

Trample,  trend,  knhi,  jieli. 

'i'h-e,  liikiiH. 

Trcmlile,  III,  Mr,  jirjK,  lika. 

TrilK\  jiii,  ivi. 

'I'riie,  miiiini,  io. 

Trumpet,  pii. 

Trunk,  liimii,  lino. 

Trust  ill,  filiimki. 

Try  ,  prove,  /<//(/,  lifo,  logi. 

Turmeric,  Irijn. 

Turn,  /(//,  liili,  rili. 

Turn  aside,  jxi/e,  jme. 


POLYNESIAN    VOCABULARY. 


355 


TwiiH',  o/?),  filn,  kiilU. 

'l\\»l,  Ji/i,Ji/ii,  viilo,  tiino,  vUi, 

Two,  lua. 


V 


{'U'or,  frfr,  pii/ti,  liiyii. 

riiilrrstiiiiil,  linjnna,  ]Hio  (soo  know). 

I'iiUpIcI,  /fV(/,  li)/i. 

Uiirortiiiinle,  mtilii. 

VmU;  I'lisi,  f'hsi. 

I'lllolicl,  /«/,7. 

t'lislicalh,  iinii. 
L'|>,  Mike,  liiiju. 


N't'il,  piilokii,  jHilr,  lulu. 

Voiii,  »«. 

Vermin,  kiilii. 

Very,  luni,  /(xi,/i/. 

Vex,  vi'Xiilious,y«(,  u,  tail,  kaka,fiii. 

Visitor,  iiKinii, 

Voii'c,  Ipf). 

Vomit,  lua,  jma. 


w 

Wnil,  (lUf,  pilte,  0(0,  tayi. 

Wnist,  ttiuku/iu. 

Wail,  lull,  titiki. 

Walk,  tdfd,  rvii. 

VVnll,  i>a. 

Wniulfr,  sr. 

Waiii.  lufil,  sona  (see  poor). 

War,  t'tu,  lumuki. 

VVaril  "(V,  jxili,  siu. 

VVnrm,  /itiiii,  vela. 

Warriiir,  litti, 

WnrI,  limn. 

\\as\i,  fiilii,  solo,  lulu. 

Wntc'li  (v.),  lama,  leo,  tiaki,  vnkai. 


Water,  vai,  lunii,  tai,  mili. 

W'hvi',  kiilr,  ijalii. 

Wax,  lijHiu. 

We,  mil,  la. 

Weak,  riiiviti,  vali,paJii,  lo,  yase. 

Wcnry,  niiisii,  li>,Jiii, 

\\\»\l\ Jlllll,  luijH, 

Wird,  iilr. 

NN'clcoiiM",  miili). 

Well  (s.),  li/iit,  lua,  puna. 

West,  to,  sijij,  lalo. 

Wet,  .111,  lull,  mitku,  sou. 

Wlialo,  liifula,  palaoa. 

Wlinl,  d. 

When,/;-. 

Where,/;. 

Whicli.yr. 

\VW\>'\X'T,Jilllll,  tuusu. 

Wliistle,ylr'«,  iiiiipii. 

White,  lai,  kiinkiio,  ma,  sitia,  tavake. 

Wholi',  fijt.  I'll.  kiiliKi. 

Wiilc,  liifa,  Ilia,  lea. 

W'ili; Jii/im;  iikana. 

Wild,  4»r. 

\\  .Iderness,  vuo. 

U  ill,  /iiiiiijiilo  (see  desire). 

Wind,  iiiji,  sun,  sarin,  tokclaH,  to,  malapat, 

liioiikr, 
Wiiidwaril,  siikr,  hinc. 
Wing,  /,(//»(,  jHtririiH. 
Wink,  kiimi). 
Winter,  lokr. 
Wi|H-,  si)li>,  miilu. 
Wise,  (//(/,  /Hikiiii,  polo,  lull. 
Willi,  «)(/,  me,  iiki,  kci. 
Withered,  iiiii,  mulili. 
U'iihin,  liilo,  limu. 
Without  (adv.),  /(//o. 
Woman,  fujinr. 
\\ Under,  ofo,  siiln,  vil. 
Wood,  likau.fiijie. 
Word,  kiipu,  kiJtlo,  takau,  Liu. 
Work,  iiiia,  miisi. 
X''  iirm,  lnl.r. 
Worship,  lolu.  pule. 
Worthless,  liijui. 
Wound,  jiiita,  maiiu. 


360 


PII  I  I.O  l,(>(i  Y. 


Wrnp,  /rt//,  ojKt,  piilokii,  piilii. 

Wrist,  tnpii. 

Write,  jxiki,  Ui,  tafii,  liisi. 


Yam,  iiji. 
Year,  irnUa,  tan. 


Yellow,  eh,  /epd, 

Yo8,  to. 

Yield,  tiiku. 

Yoke,  /lekii. 

Yoniler,  age,  lUu,  siva. 

Yoii,  ko. 

\ounii,  i>i,  iihiki,  leku,  pitnua. 

Ymmm'st  ehiltl,  /lotiki. 


' 


DIALECT 


OF    FAKAAFO    AND    VAITUPU. 


A  FULL  account  of  these  two  clusters  and  of  their  inhabitants  is 
given  in  the  first  part  of  this  volume,  p.  149  to  IfiO.  It  is  there  re- 
marked that  the  dialect  was  found  to  be  nearly  or  quite  identical  at 
the  two  places.  The  only  difference  of  importance  was  in  the  greater 
distinctness  of  pronunciation  at  Vaitupu,  where  the  natives  sounded 
the  consonants  (particularly  the /"and  s)  more  strongly  and  shaiply 
than  is  usual  with  the  Polynesians.  At  Fakaafc,  on  the  other  hand, 
the  utterance  of  the  people  was  very  indistinct.  The  f  frequently 
became  a  sound  like  the  wh  in  where,  and  sometimes,  particularly 
before  o  and  n,  a  simple  h.  The  s,  likewise,  was  often  sounded  like 
a  strongly  aspirated  h.  I' and  7V  were  used  indifferently  ;  and  in  some 
instances,  k  seemed  to  bo  sounded  like  t.  With  these  exceptions,  the 
resemblance  of  dialect  is  so  close,  that  it  has  seemed  superfluous  to 
give  separate  vocabularies  for  the  iv.o  clusters,  the  words  obtained 
at  Ijoth  being  for  the  most  part  exactly  alike.  The  grammatical 
notes  which  follow,  refer,  therefore,  to  this  common  dialect,  having 
been  deduced  from  the  sentences  which  were  written  down  on  the 
spot,  as  heard  from  the  natives.  All  the  phrases  given  by  way  of 
example  were  thus  obtained.  Of  course,  the  circumstance  that  this 
dialect  was  found  to  be  a  purely  Polynesian  idiom,  clo.sely  resembling 
the  Samoan,  gave  a  facility  and  certainty  to  the  dcterminatior  of  its 
grammatical  characteristics,  which  would  otherwise  have  been  unat- 
tainable. 


J>0 


DIALECT 


OF  l-AKAAFO  AND  VAITUPU. 


; 


O  II  T  II  O  C.  11  A  1'  II  Y. 

The  numl)or  of  clomrntnry  sottniU  in  this  dinli'cl  is,  in  strict  acoiirnoy,  tint  tlfleen, 
viz. :  the  live  vowels,  niiil  ten  consipiiiints, — k,  I,  ni,  «.  ]>,  s,  t,  v,  ij.  TliP  h,  howi'vcr,  will 
be  (Hionaionully  employed  inttend  ul'  llic  s,  whrrv  it  wns  so  pronounced  by  tlie  niitives  of 
Fnknnfii,  iind  in  one  or  two  inslnnoes  the  iv  « ill  lie  employed  insteiid  nf  v. 

It  i»  one  peculinrity  of  this  clinleel  timt  llie  X-  at  the  lx>ginniiig  of  ninny  words  is  ofien 
driip|)ed,  apparently  nl  the  mere  pleasure  cif  the  s|ieaker.  Thus  the  natives  said  indille- 
rently  ko  or  'o,  ki  or  '/',  kiia  or  'i/n,  Aic.  'I'lio  first  nrlhogriiphy  would  no  dnulit  lie  the 
corrci't  one  j  liul  it  has  seemed  bettor,  in  all  cases,  to  give  the  wo;ds  exactly  ns  they  were 
heard  and  written  at  the  time. 

T  II  i:    A  U  T  I  (■  I,  K. 

71  is  the  dcfmito  article  in  the  singidar  numlier, — as,  »'i  Uhi  ic  lnm<i,  good  is  the  man. 
Sr  (or  hr)  was  used  before  nonns,  but  whether  ns  an  indelinile  article  or  ns  a  particle 
of  airirnmtion  is  doubtful : — .«■  mnUi,  an  eye,  or  ii  is  an  eye;  si  ulii,  hair,  or  it  is  linir. 


Til  K    Sf  II  ST. A  NT  I  V  i:. 

The  plural  of  nouns  is  determined  either  by  the  context  or  by  particles  prefixed. 
Those  which  were  heard  were  ni,  kim,  and  Ini, — ns,  ni  no,  clouds  ;  r  sc  m  ni  iifi,  there 
are  no  yams ;  kan  ]>u,  shells ;  c  kin  ti  tui  fiilr,  the  houses  are  many. 

The  cases  are  generally  determined  by  particles  niid  prepusiiions.  A"')  (or  ''<)  is  the 
sign  of  (he  nominative, — ns,  <  nliin  ta/ifi)  o  'Pjxj/n,  T}pijii  is  nil  nncient  giNJ.  It  is  used 
U'forc  pronouns,  as  ko  tin,  I ;  kn  ni,  who  !  nnd  in  nnswiT  to  n  (jiiestinn, — as,  who  is  it  ? 
Ans.  Ko  Ic  Tiii/itiijd,  it  is  T'lii/iiiijd  ;  ko  Tniijie,  it  is  'I'aiipe ;  w hat  is  it !  Aiis.  Ko  li 
III,  the  sun.  It  is  not,  however,  always  employed, — us,  c  su  Ic  papa  nei,  this  rock  is 
sncred. 


FAKAAPO    AND   VAITUI'U. 


8fi0 


Oi'ii.  71'  x'likn  II  rUiinjii,  thr  cnnnc  of  Pilmiia  j  niii  o  tc  a/iki,  cocoa-nuts  of  the  chief; 
nuuii  ki  vuiIdii,  rn|H^  iMilonj^iiig  to  ii8, 

Dat.  FUi-iUii  ki  Niikii/iti/iii,  I  wish  to  go  to  Nuku-lailai ;  'in  miUou,  to  ua ;  pi/i  ki 
Fitkiiofi),  iifiur  to  Knkiiafo. 

Ace.  Omiu  lie  niii,  givo  mo  n  cocon-nut. 

Abl.  V(iku  mai  TmgiUalni,  ship  from  Tongatobu ;  t  liii/a  i  te  lapi,  above  in  the  sky. 

T  II  K    ADJECTIVE. 

The  odjcctivc  usually  follows  iho  noun  which  it  fjualifics, — ns,  e  lama  li/ri,  ho  is  a 
good  mnn ;  but  whon  it  is  nccompnnicil  by  n  vorbnl  or  nlfirinntivo  |mrliclc,  it  may  pro- 
c(!(lo, — ns,  j/(t  Mri  tr  tama,  goi«l  is  the  mnn.  In  this  cnso,  the  n(lji?clivc  is,  in  fact,  con- 
gidfrod  ns  n  verb. 

The  sumo  word  niny  lie  (■illior  n  sulistnntivc  or  an  adjective  nrcording  to  its  construc- 
tion,— as,  fafine,  woman, — mala  fafinc,  foinalc  dress ;  laiia,  war, — /akait  tnua,  wor- 
club. 

The  prefix  fiika  was  heard  boforo  some  adjectives, — as,  Jiikn-atiia,  godlike,  divine ; 
fdka-Mci,  good. 


NUMERAL  -S. 

Tasi  (Initi) 

one 

Ilia  or  ua 

two 

lolii 

three 

fa 

Tour 

lima 

five 

OH'l 

six 

flu 

seven 

Vtllll 

eight 

ti-a 

nine 

aiia/iilii  or  (I 

tjllliultl 

ten 

Ilia  ijnt'iiln  or  ua  ijahulu 

Iwrnly 

liJu  iiiifulii 

thirty 

toll!  lau 

three  hundred 

Kiu  wns  used  indcfinitnly  for  a  prrnt  numl)cr — "  thousands." 

TMu  was  sometimes  prelixed  in  enumerating,  as  toku-oiw,  six  (qu.  |X!rsons  ?) 


•    P  KONor  NS. 
The  following  nrc  nil  that  were  licnrd : — 

I'KUSON  AL 
Isl  pors.  sing.,     An,  ko  an  ot'oau 
ail,  i  ail 
dual,     Mima,  via 
taua,  la 


I 
me 

we  two  (exclusive) 
we  two  (inclusive) 


»• 


300  PIIILOLOUY. 

plural,  m/i/oM  wo  (cxc.) 

I'ltitii  »!•  (inc.) 

8d  pcr».  «inp.,    Knr,  'ir,  kn  knr  ihou 

(liinl,     Wwii  nr  Vw>i  yi'  two 

|>luml,  kimton  or  'milon  yi* 

•  3*1   |icri.  iiiig.,    y<i  hi- 

I'DMUF.HSIN  K 

1st  prn.  xiiiR.,    (ikii,  Inkii,  tokii,  mukii  my 

plurni.  It)  nititim  our 

'iid   |icrs.  *iiig.,    oil,  lull  tliy 

t  plural,  M  oulou,  to  outoii  your 

• 

*    ilftU'M  menus  prohabiy  /or  mr,  ns  wo  hcnnl  kn/Uoii  miikii,  projwrly  (or  mcrchnndisc) 
for  riM!. 

INTKRROO  ATI\  K 

Ko  III  or  'o  iii  who  *  • 

t  iii  whom  T 

Ko  le  a,  ir  A  (he  a)  what  ^ 

/V  y  A  {jie  /if  il)  how,  like  whni  f 

Ao  ai  is  used  of  imthohs,  nml  niso  i^  asking  the  iiniiH*  of  niiy  thing !  as,  ko  at  o  oii'on 
fiiniin,  whnt  is  (the  nnmc  of)  your  country? 

DKMONHTRATI  VR. 
'Unci.  ihi.H.  Tniti,  timl. 

As,  ko  tii  /eiiri,  ulio  is  tliis!  r  /r/ci  le  luma  mi,  (rood  is  lhi'<  mnii ;  r  ri/iri/i  leiin  tiiai, 
thnt  ihiiii!  is  n  drill. 

No  nlixivc  pronoun  wiis  heard,  th<'  ooiistruclion  of  the  scntcnrc  np|mrfnlly  rt'iidiriiig 
it  nnnii-issary, — as,  tr  tiiku  u  I'lhinjii, — tv  vuku  ulii,  the  cnnoc  of  I'ilinj/a,  thu  canuo 
[which  is]  go'ng. 

Til  K    V  K  II  It. 

The  varintions  of  time,  moo<l,  A:c.,  in  the  verb,  nrc  denoted  hy  particles.  The  follow- 
ing aK  those  which  v>v  heard. 

il  is  us«l  n.s  an  atrirmative  sign,  nml  getirrnlly  in  the  present  or  future  tense,  M, — C 
fiiki  miiloii,  we  return,  or  we  sliall  return.  It  is  also  iMuployed  to  expn^ss  the  substantive 
verb,  as  r  «<«  onion,  ye  are  sacri-d  ;  r  iko  Ir  muLir,  yonder  is  (he  teiiii)le. 

Sf  (or  /"  )  was  use<l  in  a  similar  manner,  as,  sr  tii/nija,  he  is  a  priest  ;  Ac  n/ita  sn  kne, 
thou  art  a  sncn>d  gml.  It  may,  however,  in  these  instances,  !«  iiK-rely  the  iiidefinito 
article. 

A'c  is  a  sign  of  the  present  or  fntiins  as,  aii  kr  iiln  ki  iita,  I  am  going  on  shore. 

Kiiii  (or  '««),  is  an  atlirmalive  particle,  as, — '««  jm,  it  is  night ;  kim  mu/i;  it  is  dead  j 
/"(  /c/ri  Ic  liwia,  the  man  is  go<Kl.     Il  was  sometimes  pronounced  liia. 


I 


■« 


.. 


"«» 


FAKAAPO   AND    VAITUPU. 


3fil 


Pika  \n  a  rniiMlivp  pn-'fin,  n»,—/iika-tnii.  Id  ninkc  cxi-hnii|{r,  Id  Irmlc.  'I'liU  pnrtu-lo 
ii  nliMi  I'liiiiloyiMl  Id  liirm  iuIjitIIvi-ii, 

/"  ((ir  '()  Mi^mn  ill  (Hin  iimlniii'c  I"  bo  ii«pd  nii  the  |>nMivc  suffix,  nii,—m<Uakii  i  te  mm 
]>iilii-ii,  nt'rnitl  dI'iIh'  lliiii);  blown  (n  eigiir). 

liii|K'riiliv<' :  liiUiii  u,  k'l  ui  gD ;  c  p/pi  Uiiin,  Id  u«  two  Mlute ;  kt  aumai  ko/mi,  do 
you  two  cornc. 

A  D  V  K  K  n  H. 

Miii,  hilhrr,  towards  mr,  as, — tau  tiuii,  como  hero ;  e  pUi  mai  CkUtifu,  Oalnfu  is 
neor  bore. 

Atii,  nwny,  from  ino,  os, — ttiki  iitii,  take  away. 

Aki  (f),  nwny,  on,  siiir  iiki,  ^d  nwny,  or  go  mil. 

Nri,  bom: — r  sr  ai  ni  iijl  ki  nri,  lliorr  nru  no  ynms  lierc. 

Ko,  yonder ;— «  i  ko  If  miitur,  yondi-r  in  Ibo  iiiolnp. 

Ki  liign,  nl«>vi',  up;  ki  /<//«,  U-lnw,  down. 

Miimiiii,  fnr ;  manuin  Uiva  Siimtm,  vi'ry  ftir  is  Samoa.     Pi/i,  near. 

E  tf, — r  X  ni, — ai-iiJa,  tai-<ila, — ikai,  kelt, — no,  none,  not. 

/", — r,  ycH. 

iV.jr  A,  how  F  Pi-nei,  thus,  Hkc  this;  petui,  like  that.  TH-/ea,  where?  iiuu-fra, 
whcniM;  ? 

Nti  iinil  la  were  rrc(|iienlly  iisnl  nl  the  end  of  a  sentenec,  bui  with  no  dislinrt  meaning 
thni  could  lie  iicrcrivcd.  Tliey  nro  probably  locnlive  particles, nn, — sele  alii  In,  go  nwny  ; 
r.  iiiiki  kiie  mil  nrt  thou  n  I'bieff   "lyjxi,  o  lokii  Innid  mt, 'Vc.\ta,  my  fatlier  lliere. 

I"  R  K  POS  1  T  ION8. 

Ki  or  'i,  to. 

/,  in,  nl,  nmong. 

O,  <i,  to.  III,  of,  lielnnging  to. 

Xo,  of,  from. 

JWrti,  from,  us  vaka  mai  1hng'il4iliii,  ship  from  Tongatabu, 

Mil,  lor,  as  tnnkii,  for  inc  (iilso  probably  irith). 

C  O  N  J  It  N  i-  T  I  O  N  S. 

Mil,  and  (or  with),  as, — Oatnfii  ma  Niikiiiionu,  Oatafu  and  Nukunono. 
Kii,  and,  or  but,  ns,^-e  taf/nla  an,  ka  e  si  iiM-i,  I  am  a  man  and  not  a  chief 


Bl 


V  0  C  A  H  r  L  A  |{  V. 

In  tho  following  list,  the  wohIn  wliicli  with  lionrd  l)otli  at  Fnknnfo 
mill  VHitupii  are  li'I'l  uiiiimrknd.  TIiomc  wliich  were  heard  only  at 
one  of  tl»'  uroiips  are  marked  with  /•'.  or  V.,  r<'s|K'ctivt'ly.  It  \h  pri)- 
bable,  however,  that  most  of  the  latter  are,  in  point  of  fact,  common  to 
both  places,  and  that  our  failure  to  note  them  was  merely  in  conwe- 
(|uence  of  the  very  brief  intercourse  which  we  had  with  tho  natives 
at  each  group. 


AIhivc,  ki  /in)<i,  I  /(/j/fi, 

A  ('mill,  iniitakii. 

All,  /,<//<»/. 

Allc'ic'lil,  liifiln. 

Anil,  HI",  hn. 

A|i|>r(>(ioli,  /'*/*'  mai  (we  come). 

Arm,  lima. 

Arrivi',  fiti  (or  /iiV;),  nuii. 

Ariismi,  liijiimi,  liilimjii  (I'.);  liijiigti  (V.) 

Arum,  tall). 

Away,  (I//',  iiki. 

Am;  l(,ki,  uJiifiti  (V.) 

Ilnrk,  Inn. 

Had,  kino. 

nnnnim,7"'i  o  Liilumii  (V.) 

Bo  (is),  r,  mi;,  jr. 

Itcnrl,  kiiinikuiiii  (I"".) ;  tu/iil'n  (V.) 

Il<'<l,  iniifijii. 

Ifc'lly,  iiiiiHiivii. 

ft'low,  ki  liiln. 

Bird,  Hiiinii. 

Blnek,  iiliiili. 

Blow,  |piill",  jtulii,  |)nss.  puhiii. 

Box,  iMirkrt,  liilinna. 

floy,  Unini.  ttiniaiti. 

Briiid,  liiliiijti. 

Breast,  ". 

Bring,  i<ii/  mni,  \iu  max. 

Brolhcr  (ipi.  younger  I),  laimi. 


Bullrrlly,  /"r/"". 

Caiiillr-mit  (iilnirilea),  IniiKi, 

('iiiii«',  ftikii. 

('n|i,  wniiili,  lii'ud-dreiw,yri(/, 

I'Wuf,  ii/iki. 

( 'liild,  liima. 

Cliiii,  lower  jaw,  kniiiir. 

Cineliin'  worn  liy  men,  mnlo. 
"  "       liy  H(iiiien,yo;/, 

t'loiid,  nil. 

t'ocoii-nni,  iiiii.  , 

Come  here,  sail  iiini.  miln  mni,  f'l/r  vuii,  nlii 
111111,1111  mni.  |'riien'«re|ir<il)iil)lysome 
aliaile.t  of  ditlerenee  in  llio  ineaiiinn  of 
lliew'  Iprin.i,  wliieh  we  did  not  [icrceivc.) 

Crane,  mntukn. 

Cituiilry, Jii/iHii  { jhiKii). 

("np,  ipii,  liiiinii. 

Cut,  to,  «/»«■/(■  (V.) 

itaiK-e,  siikii,  sivit  (or  liakii,  hiva). 

Dt>!H-rt,  tiniiilml)ileil,  vito. 

Die,  (jiiicl,  iiiiitr. 

Ilirt,  earth,  kric,  kilrkrir. 

Diseased  skin,  Injn  (ijii.  lirrprs  .'). 

Divine,  )im\\\\n; Jiikii-iU ml. 

Drink,  iiiii. 

llruin,  jHihii  (V.) 

Kar,  Ill/if/a. 

Enr-ring,  kiuaijii  (V.) 


(■•AK  A  AKO    AND    V  A  I  T  U  I' U. 


.1B3 


Fiiirlli,  hilr,J(iinui. 
Hal,  km. 
KikIiI,  ViUii. 
Uli'|>liMiitiiiiiia(yif//. 

E)l',    IIKllil. 

I''.)r-liriiw,  liiii-miilii. 

l',\i:\\i\,  /il/njlllll'lll<ll(l. 

■''.yi'-'iliiiil)'.  I'lU-mtUu. 

Fur,  11111111)11). 

Fatlior,  lama. 

Fi'W,  mrii.ili. 

Fitly,  /iiiiit-yi/ii/u. 

FiiT,  iiji. 

Fill),  i^'i. 

Finli-hiHik,  tiuiUiu,  tamiUau  (F.) ;  jMiopao 

(V.) 
Five,  /i»i/J. 
Flowrr,  i>iin. 

Fmilisli,  mlcviile,  ptij/itva/e. 
F»Mit,  nif , 

Forliiilili'ii,  HI,  labu, 
Fcnliracl,  tiif. 
Fon'igiicr,  /Kijxilai/i, 
Four,  /(/. 
French,  triiri. 
Fmnil,  .1IMI  (lioti). 
Frirndly,  pKnl-nnlurcd,  gtipn-lelri. 
From,  >in,  iiiiii,  ma. 
Friiil,  /"((. 
Fiir,7"//'////«. 
(iiinlrl,  ilrill,  vilivili. 
Uirilli',  Itikin,  iiui/o. 
Give  mi'j  kiiii  niiti,  tii  nun. 
Go,  ii/ii,  (i  (|ilii.),  ttt/o,/uno  (hano),  sale. 
Goil,  (iliiit, 
(iiKiil,  /i/ri. 
Gn'iil,  /iixi,  Ina. 
Grow,  liipii. 
Hair,  iilii,Juliifulu. 
Hand,  linui. 
He,  1(1. 
Hoiivon,  liigi. 
FliTO,  iiri. 
Hillirr,  niiii. 
I  \o\i,  /iiiiik<i. 
Hoi,  HiiildtKifnna. 

HollSl', /((//■. 


How,  iKsrii. 

Hiiiiclri'il,  /iiu. 

HiinKry,  to  bu,  Jid-kni. 

I,  nil. 

iHlniiil,  miilii. 

Juckt'l,  /iii/iiii. 

K\»n,  Nlillllr  liy  prr'Wling  Down,  <»{(<• 

Kniti',  iiijii,  srUsrIr, 

Know,  iliHi. 

Lnnil,  /(i/<i»i,  iMijMi, 

Lnnt  {>),  11%. 

Ii<^ail,  ilin-cl,  taki. 

I,l'lll',  lull. 

!,«■«,  !•(«•,  ritviu',  ivawut, 
Like,  /«■. 
I,i|),  liiii-ijiilii. 

liOVC,  llllllll. 

Mnii,  lA>)iiiii,  idinu. 

Miiiiy,  kill. 

Mark  (V.),  iiisi. 

Mat,  ^jV  ,•  tiir  n  beil,  iimeija. 

MiKin,  iiiiisiHii. 

Morijida,  ^iVult  of,)  mmo. 

Motlii.T,  iiiiiliiH-Jii/ine. 

Month,  ijiitii. 

My,  'ikii,  Inkii,  loku. 

Nail  (of  iron),  /(/o. 

Namr,  iifim,  (ikoii). 

Near,  //i7i. 

Ni'ck,  nil. 

NiM,  kii/n'ijit,  Iteii. 

Ni'W,_/<;h. 

Ni){hl,  /"(. 

Nine,  (t'n. 

No,  si,  tii,  lai,  ikai. 

Nose,  isH. 

Not,  «•  if",  (■  sf  (/(,  Ar/(!, 

Now,  to-dny,  inci. 

Of,  rt,  »,  ta,  to,  no. 

Old,  miitiiii,  tiifilo. 

Only  (.'),./'*  orybi. 

Our,  lo  mntoii. 

Paddle, /w'. 

I'nin,  '(j;ii. 

I'aiulanus,yr(/a, 

I'ulh,  tila. 

Payment,  tail. 


364 


PIIILO  I,OG  Y. 


I'earl-shcll,  ti/,i. 
IV'rhaps,  jirii. 
Person,  tiiio,  ttimti, 

I'igPOIl,  /lljlf. 

Pripsi,  luj'i/pti. 

Pro|¥Tty  ( ?).  kaJUou. 

Pull  \if,fiiti. 

(^uipl,  nuilie. 

Rniii,  »<i. 

R.m1,  kiila. 

Remain,  ncfo. 

\\c\»Tn,fi)ki,  (liof:i). 

Rivk,  ]><ij>a, 

Ro|>c,  nuiea,  taula. 

Sacred,  jd,  (Ad),  taj)ii,fit/ia-ttipn. 

Sand,  onronr. 

Sea,  hii,  moana. 

Seot,  mifoa. 

Seven,  Jitii. 

Shade,  nuilu. 

Shark,  mai/6. 

Shell  (conch),  pu. 

iihip,/oliiit,  tviX'n. 

Shore,  iita. 

Sinnct,  ka/a. 

Sit,  nnfi). 

Six,  ono. 

Sleep,  moe,  vulevak. 

Small,  fVi. 

Snipe,  luU. 

So,  thus,  jienei,  pena. 

Sen,  tanta. 

Song,  Jim. 

Spear,  sua. 

Stoae,/atH. 


Sun,  /a. 

Surf,  JK//M. 

Tnkc,  nvr,  ttiki. 

Tattooing  (s.),  tau  ,•  to  tattoo,  ta-tnii ;  a 

tnttixwr,  ti^uga  Ui-tau. 
Ti'n,fii/u. 
The,  le. 

There,  t  ko,  tui. 
Thing,  wifd. 
'i'liis,  linri. 
Thou,  kiie,  'oe. 
Thy,  oil,  toil. 
To,  ki,  'i. 
Tongue,  iilelo. 
Tooth,  ni/o. 
Tortoise, /oMM. 
Trade,  /«/:«<««. 
Tree,  Uikau, 
Very,  lava. 
War,  tana. 

We,  nui,  ta,  maiia,  tami,  malmi,  tntoii. 
Weary,  tired  o(,Jiu,Jian. 
Well  (ndv.),/iAu/f/«. 
Whale,  tiifola. 
What,  (i,  «c-(i,  ko  tt  li. 
V'f—nee,  mai-Jva. 
Where,  teifva. 
White,  una. 
W'ho,  ai,  ko  ai. 

Wish,Aa. 

Woman,y(//{«c. 

Yam,  ufi. 

Ye,  kiJiia,  koulou. 

Year,  ^j«. 

Yes,  to,  f . 

Your,  o  outou,  to  oulou. 


.  L— 1 i,i.r 


A   GRAMMAR   AND   VOCABULARY 


VI  T  IAN    LANGUAGE. 


The  materials  which  have  served  for  the  construction  of  the 
grammar  and  dictionary  which  follow  are  (1st),  an  abstract  of  a 
grammar  of  the  Lakemba  dialect,  by  the  Rev.  David  Cargill,  late 
missionary  to  the  islands;  (2d),  a  brief  grammar  ci  the  dialect  of 
Somusomu,  by  Mr.  Hunt,  the  missionary  residing  in  that  town;  (3), 
a  dictionary  of  the  Vitian  language,  drawn  up  by  Mr.  Cargill,  in  the 
dialect  of  Lakemba,  and  revised  by  Mr.  Hunt  (at  the  request  of  Cap- 
tain Wilkes,  by  whose  care  the  copy  which  we  possess  was  procured), 
for  that  uf  Somusomu  ;  (4lh),  the  translations,  by  the  missionaries,  of 
portions  of  the  three  first  gospels,  into  the  dialect  of  Lakemba,  with  a 
brief  catechism  in  that  of  Somusomu ;  and  (5th),  a  large  collection 
of  words  and  sentences,  taken  down  from  the  [ironunciation  of  the 
natives,  while  we  wore  at  the  group, — principally  at  Ovolau,  Rewa, 
Mbua,  and  Mathuata. 

Althougli  some  errors  and  omissions  will,  perhaps,  be  apparent  on 
a  more  thorough  acquaintance  with  tlie  language,  it  is,  nevertheless, 
believed  that  the  account  of  it  here  given  will  be  found  sufficient  for 
all  purposes  of  philological  comparison.  On  some  accounts,  the 
addition  to  the  dictionary  of  an  ICnglish-Vitian  part  would  have  been 
desirable,  but  the  limits  of  our  publication  do  not  admit  of  this  ex- 
tension. 


i 


'Ji 


GRAMMAR 


OF  THE  VITIAN  LANGUAGE. 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Tub  Vitinii  language  has  twonty-ono  of  the  elements  contained  in  our  general  alphabet. 
Those  nrc  a,  b,  il,  f,  e,  g,  h,  i,  k,  /,  m,  n,  g,  o,  j>,  r,  s,  t,  ii,  v,  ?c,  »/.  '"  'lie  ilinlect  of 
Lakcmlto,  Ihc^'  is  added,  to  express  the  sound  of/  b».'forc  i,  which  is  nearly  that  of /ji/», — 
or  such  as  is  heard  in  the  English  words  Cliristiiin,  tjiirstidii. 

Three  of  the  consonants  are  never  used  except  in  coniliination  with  nasal  sounds.  The 
/)  is  always  preceded  by  m,  the  J  by  >i,  and  the  g  by  y, — us  in  the  words  tiimfiti,  ni/on- 
doiiii,  wayga.  The  r  is  used  bolli  by  itself,  and  prt-cedeil  by  n.  In  the  latter  case,  the 
sound  of  d  is  generally,  though  not  always,  inserted  between  the  n  nnd  r,  merely,  it 
would  seem,  liir  euphony, — as  in  n/lrtiu  for  7irai(,  nuiinlrni  for  nuinnii,  though  the 
latter  is  sometimes  heard.  When  the  missionaries  first  U^gan  to  reduce  the  language  to 
writing,  they  analysed  lhes(!  nasal  combinations,  as  we  have  done,  nnd  wrote  them  w/, 
nil,  iigg,  ndr.  They  found,  however,  that  the  natives  would  not  recognise  the  elements 
thus  separated,  and  in  spelling  always  united  lh<'m  in  the  same  syllable.  They  therefore 
determined  to  alter  their  system,  and  write  the  combined  sounds  as  simple  letters, — giving 
to  d  the  sound  of  nd,  to  /)  that  of  vdi^  and  to  g  that  of  pg.  Th<?  only  exception  is  the 
itdr,  which  they  write  dr,  not  having  a  character  by  which  to  denote  it.  It  must  not  Ik' 
inferred  from  this,  that  the  simple  sounds  /),  d,  and  g,  uneombined  with  «,  are  never 
heard  ;  for  the  surd  elements  p,  t,  nnd  k,  are  frequently  sortened  in  pronunciation  to  their 
corresponding  sonants, — or  rather,  the  natives  make  no  dislinction  between  the  two 
classes  of  letters.  So  in  the  combinations  nd  nnd  pg,  the  last  elements  are  frequently 
heard  as  t  and  k, — as  Kantarii  (or  Kundiiiu  (written  by  the  missionaries  Kiul<ivu), 
irnijkii  for  wapgii  (trng/i).     We  do  not  reci)lltM;t  to  have  heard  tid)  sotmded  as  tiiji. 

For  the  sake  of  uniformity,  and  to  facilitate  the  comparison  of  the  dilleront  Oceanic 
languages,  it  has  be<'n  thought  best  to  return,  in  this,  to  the  original  orthography  of  the 
missionaries,  and  to  write  these  combineil  sounds  in  full.  For  the  same  reason,  the  cha- 
racter I*"  has  been  substituted  for  the  c,  which  is  used  by  them  to  express  the  soft  ICnglish 
t/t,  as  heard  in  Ihif,  this;  and  the  letter  ij  is  used  io  place  of  the  simple  g,  for  tlic  nasal 
sound  of  tig  in  /utng. 


V  I  T  I  A  N   GRAMMAR. 


367 


The  five  vowels  hnvc  the  rrgiilor  sounds,  os  in  the  Polynesian  dialects ;  and,  as  in 
tiiosc,  every  sylhilde  ends  with  a  vowel.  Such  words  ns  tum'iii,  ni'i/i/ltt,  icinjgn,  Uiiulra, 
form  no  exri'ption  to  this  rule,  as  the  nasals  r/i,  n,  y,  ?ul,  really  belong  to  lh(!  last  syllable. 
In  the  missioiinry  orthography  this  is  made  n|>parr;nt  Cot  the  first  three  combinations,  the 
above  words  being  written  taliii,  matin,  uiign,  and  tiulrn. 

The  vowel  at  the  end  of  a  word  is  fri'(|uently  so  indistin>'t  as  to  lie  hardly  perreptible. 
Thus  most  foreigners  pronounce  the  words  nukr,  dance,  lavii,  oven,  Mttturiki,  the  name 
of  an  island,  as  though  they  were  written  mik,  lit;  and  Mii/iirik. 

The  /  and  r  arc  distinct  letters,  and  not  interchanged  as  in  the  Polynesian  dialects. 

The  V  is  one  of  the  most  remarkable  elementary  s<junds  in  the  language,  on  account  of 
the  wide  range  of  its  variations.  Like  the  Spanish  />,  it  is  pronounced  by  closing  the  lips 
together,  and  according  to  tlie  greater  or  less  force  of  pronunciation,  it  is  lieard  as  a  i'. 
/,  p,  or  It,  and  occasionally  even  as  m.  Thus  the  word  vaniui,  country,  is  sounded 
iKvpiently  fanua,  Ixiiniii,  and  jxtnini ;  /evii,  great,  is  commonly  pronounced  nearly  ns 
/(•// ;  f<ivti,  what,  ns  aij»i ;  and  the  name  Vtli  Icvii  has  bei'ii  written  by  dilferent  persons 
Feclcv  /)!>,  linlcc  lib,  and,  utterly  corrupted,  Mrln/nji.  At  the  beginning  of  words,  it  is 
more  ollen  hoard  as  /,  and  in  the  middle  as  /i  or  ]>.  In  some  (J^w  words,  the  sound 
of  y)  is  so  distinct  that  the  niissii  laries  were  induced,  at  first,  to  write  it  with  this  lijlter; 
but  they  find  it  impossible  to  keep  up  the  distinction,  and  at  present  the  sounds  of  j>,/,  r, 
and  /(,  (not  preceded  by  m.)  wherever  thi'y  occur,  are  expressc'd  by  the  same  letter,  v. 

The  y  anil  ic  arc  used  instead  of  (  and  i<  when  they  begin  a  syllable, — as,  ynrn  for 
itii'ti,  triiliiru  for  iiiilnvii. 

The  ni!ceiil  is  usually  on  the  iienulliiiiate,  ami  when  a  syllable  is  sufli.xed  to  a  word, 
the  accent  is  shilled  liirward, — as,  fd/e,  hous<',  ftileiin',  thy  house.  Some  words  have 
the  accent  on  the  last  syllabic,  as  ygiigga,  brave.  These,  which  arc  not  numerous,  are 
noted  in  the  vocabulary. 

The  consonants  of  the  \'itian  niphaliet  may  lie  arranged,  according  to  their  classes,  as 
follows : 


Labials 

r 

m 

nib 

w 

Dentals 

t 

n 

ml 

f 

Giitliirals 

k 

V 

VS 

V 

Li>|uids 

1 

r 

ntlr 

sO) 

D  I  A  L  E  C  T  I(  A  L    D  I  F  F  E  U  E  X  C  E  S. 


Whether  the  variations  in  the  language  ns  spoken  at  ditlercnl  parts  of  the  group  are 
sufficiently  important  to  constitute  what  may  be  pro|XTly  termed  dialects,  is  doubtful. 
The  principal  points  of  dillerence  of  which  we  obtained  information  were  the  following. 

1.  In  the  windward  chain  of  islands,  the  chief  of  which  is  Lnkcm/xi,  many  Polynesian 
words  are  employed  which  are  not  known  elsewhere,  and  which  are  probably  derived 
from  the  Toiigan.  Thus  in  V'iti-levu,  the  word  for  "  l/iing"  is  kn  ;  but  in  Lakcmlia  it  is 
iiipi'ii,  evidently  from  the  Polynesian  turn.  In  oilier  parts  of  the  group,  ?nr('ii  means  an 
cnriinf.  Ill  Lakeiiiba,  also,  the  t  (as  already  remarketl)  is  pronounced  like  t7j,  when  it 
precedes  i.     This  is  likewise  a  peculiarity  of  the  Tougan. 

2.  In  Vanua-kvu  and  Smiiisumu  a  dialect  is  s|>oken,  distinguished  principally  by  the 


368 


PHILOLOGY. 


omission  ol'llic  lolU-r  k,  its  pliioo  \tc\nji  indiciited  hy  ii  slij^hl  RUtturnI  cnlch, — ns,  traVi  for 
Udhi,  iitiUi  liir  iiiikii.  Al  Miitliiiiita,  in  mlilitioii  (n  this,  the  <  is  tr<'<|iirnlly  iImiiihmI, — 
ns,  'iimii'a  liir  taiiKila.  This  iiniiiimciiilioii,  liowcvrr,  is  roiisidorcd  Ihully  by  llii;  niitivrs 
tlicmsclvL'S.  In  sonic  words  which  iiro  rlscwhrrc  pronnnncrd  with  the  douhio  consixiant 
ml,  the  nnlivcs  of  Vnnun-levu  employ  the  simple  clement  /,  as,  viinili,  bnnann,  is  pro- 
nounced i';*^';  iiiliini,  knee,  turn  ,•  lu/dlnii,  we,  /iiloii.  There  nre  niso  vcrhni  dillerenccs, 
such  as  ti^i>/i,  lor  //.<(,  fish ;  liut  these  nrv  Cvw  in  number,  nt  leiist  I'or  words  of  common 
O'viirrence,  It  is  snid  by  the  niissioiiarics  llint  in  words  niid  locutions  of  n  more  recon- 
dite cast,  such,  for  instance,  as  those  expressing;  the  o|K'rations  of  the  mind,  and  particu- 
larly in  compound  terms,  the  <lillerence  is  much  greater.  Indeed,  they  fear  that  they 
shall  be  obliged  to  make  distinct  versions  of  the  Uibic  lor  the  two  stations, 

3.  On  the  eastern  side  of  Viti-levu,  and  particularly  in  llttrii,  the  language  is  said  by 
the  natives  to  lie  8|H)kcn  in  its  greatest  purity.  'I'here  are,  however,  some  slight  verbal 
diU'en-nces  even  between  the  neighlKiuriiig  towns  of  Mbau  and  llewa.  The  dialect  of  the 
adjoining  islands,  Oto/iiii,  Knrn,  Ngaii,  &c.,  is  very  nearly  the  same.  That  of  Kanifiivii 
is  said  to  vary  somewhat  more. 

4.  On  the  western  side  of  Viti-levu,  we  were  informed  by  the  white  men  resident  on 
the  island,  that  the  ditl!^rcncc  of  dialect  was  so  great  as  to  render  the  language  nearly 
unintelligible,  al  first,  to  natives  of  other  parts.  The  inhabitants  have  very  little  inter- 
course, either  for  conmiercial  or  hostile  pur|H>ses,  with  other  sections  of  the  group,  and 
arc  considei-ed  the  most  barbarous  of  the  Feejeeans.  I  saw  but  one  individual  from  this 
quarter,  and  in  a  brief  vocabulary  of  common  words  obtained  from  him,  found  but  a 
small  proportion  that  were  |H'ciiliar. 

The  ilialecticid  v.iiiaiions,  Imth  of  words  and  construction,  are  noted  in  the  grammar 
and  dicliiinary.  Hut  it  should  Ix"  observed  that  even  where  a  word  or  form  of  expression 
is  peculiar  to  one  section  of  the  gmup,  it  will  commonly  be  luiderslood  by  the  natives  of 
most  othera. 


E  T  Y  M  O  L  O  G  Y. 

THE    ART  If  I.E. 

Thc^re  is  but  one  word  in  Vitian  whi<-h  can,  with  strict  propriety,  be  callud  an  article. 
This  is  II  or  iiii,  which  answers  generally  to  the  Knglish  llic,  iho'.igh  it  may  sometimes 
Ik.'  niidcreil  by  the  indeliuile  article.  It  is  usimI  only  In-fore  common  nouns.  Sii  is  a 
euphonic  variation,  which  is  employed,  at  Lakemlm,  after  a  pre|Kisition,  and  after  the 
conjiiiictioii  kii,iinil,  (or  more  properly  villi) ; — as,  c  liiiuku  a  niutaii  ka  iia  A///-6,  good 
are  the  axe  and  the  pot.  At  Kewa,  however,  the  ii  is  only  employed  at  the  beginning  of 
a  sentence,  and  the  na  in  all  other  cases. 

It  is  a  peculiarity  of  the  Vitian  language  that  certain  words  arc  always  preceded, 
except  when  they  Ix-gin  n  sentence,  by  the  letter  i,  which  has  no  meaning,  and  se<'ins  to 
be  used  merely  lor  euphony.  Although,  in  jMiint  of  fact,  it  Ix^longs  to  the  word  which 
follows  it,  it  is  nevertheless  allixeil,  in  pronunciation,  to  that  which  prei-edes.  In  such 
cases  tin-  article  a  becomes  ai,  as,  vulu,  war,  iii  ralu,  the  war;  j/ava,  spade,  omiii  piiva, 
thy  spade,  &c. 


V  I  T  I  A  N   ('.  R  A  M  M  A  R. 


369 


The  indcfinile  nrticlo  is  sometimes  cxprrssod  by  the  numeral  one  (tidiia),  foilowcil  by 
>ui, — OS,  koiitii  rait'ii.  iiiliia  na  u-injgn,  I  st.'c  a  emiix'. 

Ko  (in  Sonuisonm  'o),  is  iiicliKled  by  the  missionaries  amonfi  the  articles.  It  is,  how. 
ever,  properly,  n  sign  ol'  the  noini:ialive,  imd  is  employed  only  wilb  pro|)er  names,  with 
n  lew  nouns  signifying  relntionsliip,  and  with  sfime  of  the  pronouns,  as, — 

Ko  Tiiiinn,  name  of  the  king  of  .Mbau. 

Ko  Tiii-^iikiiii,  title  of  the  king  of  Somusomu. 

AV)  Mliiiii,  SandolwoiMl  Bay. 

Ko  liimiingii,  my  fother  ;   Ko  tinamti,  my  mother. 

Hut  in  the  two  last  eases  (In'fore  common  nouns  of  relationship),  the  use  of  ko  may  tie 
nn  inaccuracy,  os,  though  common,  it  is  not  universal. 

Ko  is  used  beliiri;  the  interrogative  pronoun  t'li,  who? — and,  as  koi,  it  is  prcfi.\cd  to 
the  iiersonal  pronouns  in  the  singidar,  and  in  the  third  person  dual  and  plural. 

T  II  K    S  r  n  S  T  A  N  T  I  V  E. 

The  geniler  is  rarely  distinguished.  When  necessary,  laiiane,  man  or  male,  nnd  Incn, 
woman  or  Ibniale,  may  be  used  for  this  purpose, — os, 


yone  taga?ir,  son ; 
vuahi  tng<tni;  boar ; 


pone  Incn,  daughter. 
viiaka  letca,  sow. 


The  number  is  olso  gcnerolly  left  to  bo  gathered  from  the  subject  of  conversation,  or 
from  the  context.  There  are,  however,  st'veral  modes  of  designating  the  plural,  which 
arc  occasionally  employed.  The  particle  hi/a  is  prefixed  to  nouns  for  this  purpose, — as, 
a  loya  viilr,\\w  houses;  but  though  it  iK'curs  frecniently  in  the  translations  of  the  mis- 
sionories,  it  is  rarely  heard  in  conversation.  Yalii  (or  rather  atii  with  the  euphonic  t 
prefixed)  is  sometimes  employed  before  nouns  signifying  country  or  island, — os,  ai  atii 
vanitii,  the  lands. 

The  pronouns  koi  run  and  koi  ni,  they,  dual  ond  plurol,  ore  sometimes  employed  to 
denote  those  numliers ;  as,  koi  ran  na  kiii  Nandi,  the  two  Nan<li  people  (lit.  they  the 
two  Nandi  |M"ople) ;  sn  ii'ci  koi  ni  na  /nva,  where  are  they  the  women  ?  Hy  nn  anomaly, 
ra  is  sometimes  used  in  the  vocative,  for  "  ye," — os,  sa  lako  tui  tamandatou,  ra  j/one, 
here  comes  our  father,  child  rtm. 

Vet,  which  is  prefixed  to  verbs  to  denote  rcciprocol  action,  has,  when  joined  with  nouns, 
a  collective  signification, — as,  iionilra  ride,  their  house,  iiondra  rei-rale,  their  houses, 
their  village;  rn-kaii  (11.),  a  clump  of  trees;  rei-iitn,  a  grove  of  bread-fruit  trees,  &c. 

Sometimes  a  collective  noun  is  employed  to  express  number, — as,  a  'ntiiit^imit  tamata, 
(s.),  the  company  of  men. 

For  many  articles  and  objects  which  the  natives  have  fre<iuent  occasion  to  count,  they 
have  words  which  of  themselves  express  ten,  or  a  multi|>le  of  ten, — as. 


undiiiindii,  ten  canoes  ;  koro, 

}n/x>ln,  one  hundred  canoes ;  setiivo, 

mliuni,         ten  cocoo-nuts ;  so/c, 

93 


one  hundred  cocoo-nuts; 
one  thousand  cocoa-nuts ; 
ten  bread-fruits ; 


iil 


J 


370 


PHILOLOGY. 


pjiolo,  icii  pieces  of  sugar-cane  j 
m/>i,     ten  lurtli's ; 
mlH)/a,  ten  lishc's ; 


rum,    ten  pigs ; 

riilo,     Icii  wImicB'-tecth ; 

Sdi'rt,    ten  |v)ls. 


The  COSTS  of  nouns  are  di'tcrminei!  liy  particles  and  prepositions.     Those  prefixed  to 
pro|)er  imn\es  are,  I'or  the  mast  part,  dillerent  from  those  used  with  common  nouns, — as, 


K<>  Tiiiion,  Tanoa  (nom.) 

t  Tiium,  ofT. 

vri  or  kirei  7}iiina,  to  or  for  T. 

mewei  'I'moii,  for  T. 

kitii  i  Tuiiod,  with,  from,  in,  by, T. 

mai  7\ino<i,  from  T. 


a  tiinoa,  the  bowl ; 

ni  tttiimi,         of  the  bowl  ; 

ki  nil  tanoa,    to  the  bowl ; 

rci  mi  tanixi,  to  or  for  the  bowl  ; 

i  >ia  UiiiiKi,      in,  at,  by,  the  bowl  { 

mil  mi  tiinoa,  from  the  bowl. 


/  is  used  tefore  proper  names  in  the  accusative, — as,  sa  sarmara  koiaii  i  Vtnon,  I  see 
Tanoa.     a  I^  „!.,.)  used  occasionally  as  a  sign  of  the  vocative,  ns, — /  Srni,  O  Seru. 

It  will  lie  obscned  that  the  article  na  is  used  after  all  the  pre|)ositions  except  ni ;  ni 
na  taiion  woiilil  be  improper. 

In  the  Somusoniu  grammar,  ri  is  given  os  a  particle  of  euphony  which  is  frequently 
affixed  to  nouns,  without  altering  the  sense;  it  causes  the  accent  to  be  shifted  forward  one 
syllable,  as, — d  irdjtgfi,  and  ii  iiaijgari,  the  can<K'.  [Perhaps  the  latter  form  may  have 
a  demonstrative  force,  as, — tiuU  canoe,  or  the  canoe  before  s|)okcn  of.] 


if 


Til  K    A  DJ  ECTI  VK. 

Adjectives  follow  the  substantive  which  they  qualify,  as,— /«»  levu,  great  king ;  ma- 
ranui  vinaka,  good  lady. 

Comparison  is  expressed  by  various  circumlocutions,  as : — 

lent  fiikc  or  Iri-ii  ixini,  "  great  alxivc"  or  "  beyond,"  for  greater  ; 

lai/iii  somhii  or  Imlai  livn,  "  small  lx;Iow,"  for  less  ; 

ko  S(i  viiku  rei  kemluru,  thou  art  wise  of  us  two ; 

sa  kaiikdiiii  koiaii  kini  i  ko,  I  am  strong  to  thee  (stronger  than) ; 

a  malaii  vindku  pgoii,  a  nuittiii  ("d  pgou,  this  is  a  good  axe,  that  is  a  bad  one  (for, 

this  is  liotter  than  that) ; 
sa  Itila  ko  Viti,  sn  leva  na  tnimtln  i  America,  empty  is  Viti,  many  are  the  men  of 

America:  (i.  e.  America  is  more  populous  than  Viti). 

The  supi'rlutive  degree  is  also  expressed  in  many  ways : — 

(1)  by  prefixing  an  adverb, — as,  ran  tern,  very  great ; 

(2)  by  postfixing  an  adverb,  as,  viiuika  Ittivi  or  vincXa  sara,  very  good  ; 

(3)  sfHnetinics  two  adverbs  are  employed,  as,  vinaka  lairi-sara,  very  exceedingly  good  ; 

(4)  the  adverb  is  sometimes  <louble(l,  as,  tent  siirasara,  very,  very  great; 

(5)  sometimes  the  adjective  is  re|>eated,  as,  riiiaka,  vinaka,  vinaka  ; 

(6)  certain  strong  expressions  are  employed,  us  levu  vakairere,  great  to  make  afraid, 

feorfully  great. 


VITIAN   GRAMMAR. 


371 


lulua 


tnlu 


two. 

three. 

four. 


NUMERALS. 


liiii  ka  iiilua 
tini  k(i  nia 
run  snijiivulu 
tnlu  saijtivulu 


cloven, 
twelve,  &c. 
twenty, 
thirty,  &c. 


lima 

five. 

ntlrau 

hiiniireil. 

mto 

six. 

riia  nil  rail  or  rua  a  ndrau 

two  hundred. 

villi 

seven. 

lolii  mini  11 

throe  hundred 

u-nlit 

eight. 

vnilolii 

thousand. 

{iva 

nine. 

rua  wiilnlii  or  nm  a  umlolu 

two  thousand. 

tini 

ten. 

It  is  schlom  that  the  natives  require  a  numeral  al)ovc  a  thousand,  since  fur  those 
articles  which  they  [lossess  in  largo  quantities,  they  have  the  collective  terms  mentioned 
on  page  173.  Thus  for  "  ten  thousunil  co<;oa-nuts,"  they  would  say,  a  koro  e  undiilu, 
or  a  laiiMii  lui  korn, — i.  c.  a  thousand  tens  of  cocoa-nuts. 

Numerals,  when  joined  with  a  substantive,  commonly  have  the  particle  r  before  them, — 
as,  viile  e  nno,  six  houses ;  and  if  the  objects  numbered  be  rational  beings,  Ivwc  is  also 
employed,  as,  tiimtUa  c  Icice  lulu,  three  men. 

Once,  twice,  thrice,  &c.,  arc  expressed  by  vaka  prelixod  to  the  numerals, — as,  vaka- 
ndiia,  nika-rua,  viika-Utlu ;  the  same  form  miiy  serve  to  express  the  ordinal  numlx;rs, 
though  these,  in  general,  an^  not  distinguished  from  the  cardinal. 

liy  ttcos,  1)1/  threes,  &c.,  are  expressed  by  the  particle  ija  (each,  every),  prefixed  to  the 
numeral,  with  lewe  preceding,  if  it  refer  to  persons, — as,  leice  pa  rua,  two  by  two. 


THE    PRONOUN. 

The  pronouns  are  numerous  and  complex,  fiesides  the  ordinary  singular  and  plural 
forms,  they  have  a  dual  in  uU  three  persons,  a  dual  and  plural  of  the  first  person,  which 
excludes  the  person  addressed,  a  limited  plural,  applied  only  to  a  small  numlier,  two 
classes  of  possessive  pronouns,  separate  and  alfixed,  and  finally  a  set  of  posscssivcs 
appropriated  especially  to  articles  of  food  and  drink.  Many  of  the  pronouns,  moreover, 
vary  in  the  difTerent  ilialects. 

All  the  personal  pronouns  have  particles  prefixed  to  them.  These  are  koi,  ke,  and  kei. 
The  first  of  these  is,  for  the  most  part,  employed  only  in  the  nominative  when  it  follows 
the  verb,  or  is  used  independently,  in  answer  to  a  question.  This  rule,  however,  is  not 
always  observed,  and  does  not  apply  to  the  pronoun  of  the  third  person  singular,  koi 
koiii.  Kc,  also,  is  sometimes  omitted  when  the  pronoun  precedes  the  verb  in  the  nomi- 
native case. 

The  pronoun  au,  of  the  first  person,  is  thus  varied : — 


81N(i.  IhT  UUAL.  IrT  rLl'RAL. 

Koi  all,  I  ke  nihtrii,  thou  and  1  kc  n/la,  ye  and  I  (limited) 

i  au,  me,  or  of  me.  t  kc  mluru,  us  two,  or  of  us.      i  kc  tula,  us,  or  of  us,  &c. 


I 


•.m 


V  II I  i.o  I. no  V, 


MINU.  llT  IM'AI.. 

in  nil,  l(>  iiic  iri  kr  iiiliini.  Id  lis  IHO  Jn  pi.iii«i.. 

1,1111  i  nil,  rrom  or  tiy  iiic        kiiii  kr  mlnni,  rmm  us  two        ke  titlitloii,  yi'  and  I    (iin- 

liniiti'il) 

Ull  UIAL.  Hll  rlUKAI.. 

kit  mil,  lie  1111(1  I  kri  Inn,  tlicy  iinil  I  (liinilt'il) 

i  icj  run,  us  IHii,  or  of  us,  \i'.  Iru  n.riiAi. 

kri  niiimi,  tliuy  and  I  (un- 
limilctl) 

III  \\v>  illalcolH  of  Lnkciiilm  and  Mima,  tin;  ml  in  all  the  alxivc  |ininoun8  Wonios  /,  as 
kc  turn,  ki  la,  ke  liilou;  in  llmt  of  Sonmsoiiiii,  llic  k  is  uniiltrd,  as,  'ni  on,  V  mlnrit, 
'li  Inn. 

hi  sionir  dislrii't-  of  Vaniia  U'vu,  ki  m  and  km  riikn  are  used  instead  uf  kri  run;  rii  is 
cni|iliiyed  as  tlii:  nominative  to  the  verli,  and  mn  or  oruka  as  tlie  iKissessivc  prnnoun. 

Kri  lultilon  is  soriietinios  contracted  to  Ion,  particularly  with  the  iin|>erulive, — us,  In 
lou,  let  us  stand  loi^etlior,  or  stand  firm. 

The  |ironoiin  ol'the  si'cond  |icrson  is  ko,  and  is  varied  as  rollows : — 


ilSO. 

Kni  kii,  thou 

t  kn,  ttiw,  or  of  thee 

rri  kn,  to  tlie<! 

kini  i  ku,  from  or  by  thee 


Dt;AU 

ke  minii/riin,  ye  two 

I  kr  iiiioidraii,  you  two,  &c. 


IffT  ri.eRAi- 
kr  miinihn,  yo 
i  kr  miunhii,  you,  &c. 

2ll  Pl.l'RAL. 

munii,  ye 
i  mntiii,  yon 


The  second  plural,  miinii,  has  pro|K'rly  the  same  signification  with  the  first;  but  it  is 
also  used  in  the  singular,  as  a  res|K'ctl'ul  form  of  address,  like  "  you"  in  Knulish.  In 
the  latter  case,  it  is  freipiently  contracted  to  ««,  os,  nii  Ira,  you  go  (addressed  to  a  |K"rs(in 
of  rank),  liir  ko  Inkn,  tliou  giK'st.  Mninlrnu  and  mniiiliin  arc  oHen  contracted  to  mlrnii 
and  iiilnn,  particularly  in  the  imperative,  as,  m/on  liikn,  go  ye. 

The  Sdinusomu  dialect  has  'ot  '«  liir  koi  kn,  iVc. 

The  pronouns  of  the  third  [KTson,  in  the  dialect  of  Lakcmba,  ore  as  follows  : 


UNO. 

Koi  koia,  he,  she,  or  it 

t  koi  koia,  him,  of  him,  &c. 

in  kni  koia 

or  vri  run 

kiui  kui  koia,  by  him. 


to  him 


DUAL. 

koi  run,  they  two 

i  ran,  Iheiu 

vri  ran,  to  them 

kitii  i  ran,  from,  hy  them. 


ri.L'RAL, 

koi  ra,  they 
t  ra,  them 
vet  rn,  to  them 
kini  i  ra,  by  them. 


Instead  of  j  koi  koin,  him,  wc  heard  at  Ovolau  and  other  places  ui  appended  to  the 
verb,  as,  an  inlnniimin,  I  love  him  (lor  7itli>mi>hi  ia).  This  form  docs  not  <K"<Mir  in  the 
translations  of  the  missionaries. 

The  people  of  Mbua  say,  instead  of  koi  koia,  kn  kra,  or  simply  Art.  At  Somusomti, 
the  common  tiirm  is  'oi  \a  or  'ni  \i  for  the  nominalivi",  and  Va  for  the  accusative,  after 
a  verb.  At  Mbua,  also,  ratou  is  used  for  "  they,"  as  well  as  ra,  the  distinction  being 
perhaps  the  same  as  that  between  the  limited  and  unlimited  plurals  of  the  first  |icrson. 


V  I  T  I  A  N   «i  R  A  M  M  A  II. 


373 


liiHtrnil  iifrM  run,  llicy  two,  llic  Sdiniiwiiiiii  Kruiiiiimr  givrs  Vj  ran,  wliii'li  is  llir  snmc 
lu  tlu!  (Iiiiil  ol'lhu  first  iH.Titoii.     How  the  )listiiu;tli)ii  bctwcfii  tlinii  is  iiiiuli'  in  iiul  Htiili'il. 


PUHHF.8HIV1:  i>i(()Noi;ns. 
Those  which  prcredi'  mmns  nn;  ns  rullowi*: — 


pgoii,  my 


fiiiiH,  thy 
oiia,  his 


wvmlaru,  our  (of  thee  and  mo) 
iiiiruii,  (iiir  (of  him  and  me) 
omiiiiilriiii,  your 
onilrau,  their 


rn'RAi.. 
vriii/n,  iiiir  (liniilnd  inrliisivo) 
veiiitiitiin, imr  (iiiiliiiiiti'il  inc.) 
wriluii,  (iiir  (limited  c.xc.) 
vriiiiaini,  our  (iirdiiuilrd  I'Xc.) 
nmu nihil,  your 
iiDiiinu,  your  (or  thy) 
iiiiiliii,  Ihi'ir 
oni/iiUoii,  their. 


These  pronouns  nrc  iisimlly  preceded  by  tlie  nrlicle  n,  ns,  a  ij^oii  rnlr,  my  house ; 
a  imiii  viDjgii,  Ihy  emus'. 

At  MIdiii,  niiiliini,  itni/ii,  niid  imiliilmi  lire  used  iiisteml  of  urniliirii,  tivnifii,  nnd 
irrnilaloii ,  mid  onf;tiiH  li>r  y^'HK.  At  Kewii,  nil  llie  possessive  prdiiiniiis  ei)niiiieiice  with 
n;  iif:nu  becomes  nongii ,  ntn  11  mid  nil  llie  others  wliirb  Ix'gin  willi  «  hiive  «  prefixed 
(ns,  iiiwiii,  tiDiiii,  nominiitriiii),  Iliose  which  U'nin  with  in  chunge  this  lo  no  (ns 
nimdiirii,  tnmilii),  mid  those  which  Ix'giii  with  ifci  chmige  the  »'•  to  v  (ns  nciraii, 
■nriloii). 

When  the  |K)ss»'ssive  pronouns  nre  used  with  substnntives  signifying  articles  of  food, 
they  HssiiMic  n  dillereiit  form,  llfiiiii  iH'coines  ijfiilii,  whicli,  at  I.nkeiiilin,  is  used  with 
nniiies  lifilh  of  enlnbles  nnd  drinkables,  ns,  <i  ijumi  iiri,  my  yam,  a  iiiiiin  yiiufiona 
(or  II  iigiiiii  iii),ui>iiii),  my  kuva.  Ilul  at  Soinusoinii,  ijgiiii  is  used  with  eatables  only, 
nnd  for  drinknbles  iiieijfinu  is  employed ;  at  llewa  it  is  mrij^ii,  nnd  at  Mbiia,  ineijjtiau. 
For  till'  second  |H'rson  knnii  nnd  viimit  nre  employed,  the  first  for  eatables,  mid  the 
M'cond  Iiir  drinkables.  For  the  third  |H'rson  these  pronouns  are  kniii  and  miiiii ;  for 
the  dual,  kfiiiliini  and  mi'iiiliirii,  kciniii  nnd  miiruii,  and  so  on  tliroiigh  all  the  persons 
nnd  iiumlx'rs. 

Cocon-nuls  mid  siignr-canc  are  commonly  included  in  the  class  of  drinknbles,  ns  they 
nre  prized  chiefly  (or  their  milk  and  juice. 

These  pronouns,  it  should  Ih'  n'liinrked,  nre  used  only  when  food  is  set  before  o  person 
for  immediate  consumption.  When  it  is  merely  nnmed  as  nn  article  Ixilonging  to  him, 
those  of  the  other  class  are  employed,  as,  kiniii  niiikii,  your  |H)ition  of  pork  to  eat; 
omii  viiiikii,  your  pig. 

There  ari'  certain  substantives  which  reipiire  tlie  possessive  pronouns  to  follow  ihem. 
In  this  case  mniiy  of  the  Inlter  undergo  coniraclions,  mid  are  united  with  the  substmilivc 
so  ns  to  form  but  one  word.  llf;oii  is  contrncled  to  pjun,  nnd  those  pronouns  which 
begin  with  o  or  irr  lose  these  initial  syllables.  Those  which  commence  with  vri  Inke 
the  form  of  the  genitive  cnse  |M'rs(jnal,  ns,  /  kri  tun,  i  kei  miimi.     'J'hus  : — 

04 


374 


P  II I  L  O  L  O  U  Y. 


Sing. 


Dual. 


F'lu. 


»8'> 

my, 

mu. 

thy 

mi. 

hi* 

Hi/iint, 

iHir 

1  kriruii, 

iHir 

niiinilrnii 

yimr 

wiriiii, 

tlirir 

will. 

our 

i  kriloii. 

iMir 

muHiloii, 

your 

tulra. 

tlK'ir 

Tiiimi,  fallior. 

us    II  tiimiiiuii. 
(I  liimiiiiiii, 
II  tiimdiin, 
n  tiiiiiiiiii/tini. 


my  fatluT 

thy     " 

his      " 

ihtj  fiitlirr  iif  tlif-c  nnil  mc. 


II  tniiiai  kririui,  llii>  thilicr  nl'liini  niiil  mo 

II  liinuimiimlriiii,    "       "  ydii  two 

II  linnuniliaii,         "      "  tlicin  Iwo 

(I  tamdnilii,  "      "  yim  niiil  mo 

u  liimai  kiiliiii,       "      "  lliom  iinil  mo 

II  tiitiiiiiiiiim/uii,  your  I'lilhor 

(/  tiimamlrii,  their  liithor 


Tho  nouns  which  ivqiiire  Ihoso  nfTixrs  aro  the  names  of  iho  (hlli'rcnl  ports  ol'lho  hody, 
with  words  si^nilyin;;  soul  mid  iniiiil,  and  the  liiimcs  of  some  of  the  nearest  liiniily  rela- 
tions. In  general  the  (Hiisession  iiiipliod  by  thorn  U|i|H'ars  to  lie  mure  iiilimutc  than  that 
denoted  by  the  separate  pronouns. 

K  K  L  A  T  n  K  8. 

There  are  no  projior  relative  pronouns  in  the  languajje,  nor  does  this  drfirieney  eniisr 
any  olisciirity  in  the  construction  of  a  sentence;  as,  lor  example,  sii  Irvii  nii  Uoro  iiiiii 
Viti-ln-ii  m  ijgiili  ki  M/mii,  ninny  are  the  towns  on  Viti-levii  [which]  are  subject  to 
Mlwu.  The  verlml  particles  r  and  kri  and  the  n'lative  particle  ki-iiii  serve,  as  will  U' 
shown  hcri'aller,  to  previ'iit  any  ambiguity  in  the  connexion  of  dillerent  clauses  of  n 
sentence. 


1  N  T  K  R  H  O  (i  A  Tl  V  K    1'  K  O  .\  O  U  ,\  H. 

These  are  three  in  ntimU-r,  viz  : — tii,  who  ?  e'licii,  what '  and  riW;,  how  many  .' 
is  declinid  like  pro|H'r  names,  and  t'uni  like  common  nouns,  as: — 


M 


ko  ffi,      who  ? 

t  fW,         whom  or  whoso 

tr«  f'ri,     to  whom 

kini  M,  from  or  by  whom 


a  i'livii,        what? 
ni  i'lini,       of  what 
ki  nil  i'lii-ii,  to  what 
i  till  ('lira,    ill,  by  what 


Fn  incpiiring  the  proper  name  of  any  (H'rson,  place,  or  thinj;,  kn  fei  is  always  used, — 
as,  ko  (fi  II  yiit'anu  (or,  ui  iiuitiii) .'  What  is  his  name '.  Kn  M  a  ijnfii  iii  raiiiia  i  ci  '! 
What  is  the  name  of  this  country  \ 

fit  always  pni'edes  the  noun  to  which  it  relates;  ("iivii  may  lie  used  either  licfore  or 
.ifter, — as,  a  (uvn  ii  mnn.iiiiunii  i  li'  or,  n  iiianiimuiiii  t'livn  i  li?  what  animal  is  this  ' 

Vitu  is  usually  preceded  by  i,  as,  c  rit'ii  iia  tnieti-  (II.),  how  many  priests  \ 


U  K  M  O  .N  S  T  II  A  T I  \'  K  S, 


The  demonstrative  pronoun  in  most  common  use  is  iji'jm,  meaning  this  or  that.     It 
receives  some   nlFixes,  which  do  not  apparently  alter  its  moaning, — us,  tigorr,  ijginja 


V  rrr  A  N  isra  m  m  ak. 


:i7ft 


fffifJoi,  iic.  Ki,  vri,  mil,  miii,  iiri'  iiIhu  criiiilnyitl  nil  ili'iiHUiNtrntivrx.  TlK'y  lire  ilNiiiilly 
|iri'('cili'il  l)y  llir  iiiMili  or  nilji-clivr  In  which  lh<'y  n-liT,  ami  Hunii'tiiiK'H  hnvc  iin  i  inter- 
piiM'il  iR'lwirii,— lit,  hi  <ri  Ml  tamntii  ijgim  f  who  in  ihiH  iiinii  \  li  rimikii  i  ri  kit  r  fA 
X  pgoir,  Ihii)  In  ^niMl  ami  IhnI  iN  ImhI. 

1"  II  K    V  K  K  II. 

The  vi'rh  hnn,  |in)|n'rly  Niwiikiim,  n'l  in(1<vtloris,  All  ihi-  iicriilcnlii  of  li'iiw,  inimil,  vVr., 
nr<!  I'xpn-HM'il  hy  luirliclcH  pri'lixril  or  Hiitrixcil.  Th<!  only  fxccplion  in  ihi!  rMviisional 
du|>li('iilion  of  ihr  vcrh,  or  ii  |uirt  ot'  it,  to  4'X|in'!4H  iVi'iiiicnry  oC  iiclioii, — an,  nivii,  lo  kill, 
in  ivi-riiriifiii,  Ihi-y  iin-  killing  i>n<-  nnoihi'r. 

Till'  jHirlirli's  iiM'il  with  thi'  vrrh  inny  hit  iliviiloil  iiitii  (I)  nlTirnmtivi-  or  nrlivi.'  imrliclcs, 
(v!)  |iiirlirli'M  of  liiiw,  (S)  oC  modi',  (I)  iif  Corm,  (."i)  triiiisiiivit  allixuM,  ((I)  iliri'ctivc  pnrti- 
cli's,  mill  (7),  Ihr  rrliilivf  piirlicli'. 

Till'  piirlirirs  iirnirirnialion  nn-  Ihom-  whirh  nm  prrfixi'il  lo  a  woril  lo  show  Ihiil  it  is  to 
Ur  lakrii  ill  II  vitIhiI  ni'Iim-,  iiiiiI  whirh  lliiis  supply,  in  ninny  riiHi'S,  thi'  plno'  ol'  ihr  stih- 
stiintivr  vcrh.  A  \nT\!,r  pro|Hirlion  orilic  wonls  in  the  Vitiiin  liiii);iiii)i;i',  dm  in  the  I'olyni'- 
Niiin,  may  Ik'  uhciI  cither  as  nouns,  ailjcotivi's,  or  vrrlis,  anil  the  pn'cis<>  acccptatiun  in 
which  they  are  cniploycil  must  Im'  ili'terniineil  hy  the  particles  which  accompany  them. 

'I'he  principal  nllirmntivu  panicle  is  mi,  which  is  pn'lixeil  to  virhs  in  all  tenses.  When 
joini'il  with  worils  which  an'  properly  adjeclives  or  nouns,  it  may,  in  ({eneral,  hi'  translated 
by  some  tense  of  the  verli  In  V,— as,  sn  Inkn  iiini  nn  tdiiiniiiliiliiii,  our  lather  is  coiniii); : 
an  Inkn  i  Ornlnii  imiinii  kn  Sirii,  Seru  went  (or  was  p>iii)!)  lo  Ovolau  yisterdav;  sn  ii'ci 
lilt  Ininiilii,  where  is  the  man  \  an  visti  likn,  it  is  hnrninn  (n'niains  hiirninn)  >  *'  '''*"  ^■'■'*' 
it  is  all  hurnt  i  sn  Icvuli-vu  nn  turnpii,  ninny  an'  the  chiel's. 

ja  is  nnnlher  particle  I'mpienlly  used.  It  is  ollen  prdixed  to  a  virli  at  the  iM'jiinnin;; 
ol'a  sentence  or  clause,  when  the  noiiiinalive,  instead  of  preceding  the  verli,  llillows  it, — 
n«,  I'  Inkn  kni  koin,  he  (jim'S  ;  n  Inkn  iiini  <i  Inmnin,  the  man  is  comini;;  c  rrrrkiln  kiiniiti- 
ihii,  lilesscil  are  ye.  ]■',  is  also  prelixed  to  the  pioiiouns  of  the  third  person  dual  and 
plural,  when  Ihey  precede  the  vcrh, — as,  r  rn  Inkn,  they  i,'o, 

'  >Somi'tinies  the  nominative  comes  U'liire  the  verli,  with  c  lietwei'ii  them,  in  which  case 
this  particle  supplies  the  place  of  the  n'lntivc  pronoun, — as,  koi  ra  e  fnkii  <'d,  those  that 
do  evil  ;  kni  knin  r  kiu'ii'i,  ho  who  is  called  ;  kni  knia  i  i  In'fnni,  he  w ho  is  in  heaven. 
E  is  only  used  in  the  present  and  I'ulun"  tensi's ;  in  the  latter  case  it  olteii  priicdes  the 
I'uturi'  sifjii  nn, — as,  r  nn  Inkn  mm  kni  knin,  he  will  rome. 

Kn  is  used  like  e,  hut  only  in  the  past  tense, — as,  nn  lemlxi  ktCii  t'nknvn,  the  fjarland 
[which I  I  was  making;;  koi  knia  kn  lakn,  he  who  went.  It  must  not  \»'.  confounded  with 
the  coiijimclion  kn,  and,  which  is  of  iVeipient  oi'curri'nce. 

I'AHTICI.KS   (IK     TK.VSK. 


It  has  already  U'ln  explained  that  (  and  kn,  to  a  certain  deffrcr,  inilicate  time;  but 
there  nre  also  two  parlii'ies  which  have  pirulinrly  this  iilhce.  'I'hese  arc  nn  for  llic  future, 
nnd  a  (in  the  third  |M'rson,  Av/)  for  the  preterite, — as,  nn  nn  vnkniinilc,  I  will  kill ;  nn  a 
vnknmnir,  I  have  killed. 

These  panicles,  however,  arc  frci|iieiilly  omitted,  when  the  lime  of  the  nclion  is  other- 
wisi;  indicated,  either  by  the  coiilext,  or  liy  certain  adverbs,      llgai  expresses  an  action 


? 


It 


370 


l>  II 1 1.  (>  I.  oo  V. 


jiiHl  ('i)m|il<'li'il,  na  Iff  v^ni  inkuriitii,  w«  linvr  ju>l  Intii  rrcoiicilril ;  m  n/im  mtilr  a 
hirriffiii  /inn,  my  iliiii^litiT  ia  jiial  ili'iicl,  (tfi,  ilonc,  tiniiilM-il,  ja  iiacil  nlli-r  n  vcrli  Id 
I'.nprraH  n  kiiiil  iil'iiri'lrril)',  na  mi  <•/  iiiiir  iifi,  I  hnvr  aiiliK,  iiiii  ili)iir  aiiijtiiiK  ;  ii  vitii  uti. 
It  la  liiiriit.  hill  liiiN  a  aiiiiiliir  liiD'c.  7'//ii,  In  n'miiiii,  fi\\rn  ii  iiH'aiiilix  aiiiiilnr  In  llmt 
nl'ilii'  pri'Nfiil  |iiirlirl|ili'  ill  I'IiiijIhIi, — iia  nil  mi  iiilii  likii,  I  inn  wriliii|ii  <"  viut  liki),  it  ia 
liuriiiiig,      Hiiiii  uiiil  no  nn'  acinirliinis  iim'iI  in  llii'  Kiniii-  wiiy, 

rAUTM'I.KN  OK    MOOD 

Till'  aitjn  111'  the  aiilijimi'tivi'  ami  inrniitivc  in  ;//»,  wliirh  may  lir  n'mhTt-*!  "  Ihnl,"  "  in 

oriliT  that,"  "til,"  iVi-. ;  it  w<ni«  tci  la iinotril  with  Ific  |in'|Niailiiin  mri,  lor,  an  in  the 

('.\ani|il('M  kii  tiikiirn  </  lamulti  n  K ihni  mil  I'lirni.'  (io<l  iiiailc  man  li.r  wliat  I  aiis.  Mr 
kiln  kii  kill  II  Kii/iiii,  lliiit  Ik'  iiil;{lit  knnw  (iial. 

Tilt'  ('iiii)liiiiiiial,  with  //,  is  ■  .\|)ri'aM'il  in  thr  (iriHcnl  nnil  riilim'  liy  ki-rnkn,  ami  in  iIm; 
pant  liy  kr  |in'tiX('il  In  ihr  vcrh.  In  the  ihah'rt  iil'  Sdinuxoinu  V,  V/(,  iiiiil  'enn  nm  uat'd 
lor  i/i  liul  Ihr  iliatinction  la'twrrn  them  ia  not  pxploitii'ij,  LrM  ia  i')ipn'i'a<'il  liy  mlaka, 
— na,  nilakn  lulu  koi  koin,  Irat  ho  fall.  Hut  tVi'ipii'nlly  ihiTonililiniial  la  not  ili^itlnKnlNhcd 
hy  any  ai^n, — iia  sn  Inkii  Hint  koi  koin,  nil  sn  rnkninnliin  (II.),  had  ho  ciiiim',  I  hail  (or 
wniilil  havr)  klllril  him. 

The  iinprrallvi'  hua  iiir  (or,  nl  Somiiaomu,  mitui  or  mo)  la'fon-  it,  or  it  ia  without  a 
parlirlr, — as  ;«»•  Inko  kuiko  (or  iiiniii  In'o  'oi  'o,  or  mo  'no),  or  almply  tnko,  nn.  In  the 
dual  and  pliinil,  it  has  thi*  alilm'vlntrd  pronoiina  mlraii  mid  nilo"  hcliin'  It, — aa  mlriiii 
lako,  ((o  ye  two.  The  ini|H'rntivi'  of  rorbiddlng  ia  formed  by  kiJciin  wilh  ni  I'olhiwin;;,— 
as,  kiiJdiii  ni  liiko,  dn  not  go. 


.  PARTICLES   Of    KOHM. 

Vnkn  ia  ttip  raiiaative  prolix,  as  mnlr,  to  div,  Vdk'iiiin/i;  to  kill  j  mhuin,  to  live,  vnka- 
mliiiln,  to  save,  lociiri'.  Hut  this  prolix  Is  alao  used  to  tiiriii  advorba,  and  inual  I'roipiontly 
la.'  rondorod  "like,"  or  "  aOor  the  manner  of," — ua,  rnknt'A,  badly;  vakaiivi,  how  f 
vnkn-  Vili,  I'oi'jit'.rashion. 

Vri  prefixed  tu  n  verb,  with  i,  cV,  ki,  ni,  vi,  ti,  Inki,  innki,  taki,  yaki,  siiilixnl,  ex> 
pr»'.ssos  roeipriHml  action, — as  ivi.i'«^«!(,  lo  help  one  another,  i'roin  i'«Xr,  to  help;  vri- 
lniii<  i,  to  svnipnlhi.s*",  woop  to;>rthor,  Ironi  Initi,  to  woi^p ;  vri-kiliiki,  to  know  one 
aiioiliiT,  Ironi  kiln,  lo  know  ;  rri-t'nnimoki,  to  onior  one  within  anothiT,  as  the  links  of 
a  chain,  from  iiiiii,Ui  enter,  vVo.  The  sullixoa,  howovor,  an^  oHon  omlltod, — as  rvi-rui'ii, 
to  strike  cine  another,  to  Ihix,  rri-voli,  to  Irndo  together,  iVe.  This  form  with  vei  has  also, 
at  times,  the  signiticatlon  of  united  action,  liirining  a  sort  of  plural, — as,  iri-knniittvi,  to 
run  togollier,  ni-lonuitii,  to  live  or  ait  together. 

The  Nuftixos  which  the  verbs  in  this  form  receive,  an;  usually  the  same  which  they 
have'  when  they  precede,  as  transilivos,  a  pronoun  or  pro|)er  name,  as  will  bo  hereafter 
explained.  This,  however,  is  not  always  the  ca.se.  Ki/it,  to  know,  has  for  its  transitive 
sullix  (,  and  liir  its  reeiprocal  ki. 

With  ynki  fiillowing  the  verb,  the  prf.'fix  vei  often  loses  its  reciprocal  sense,  and  ex. 
presses  r^erely  short,  quick,  iiitijrruptod  motion,  like  that  denoted  by  the  phrases  "  to 
and  fro,  "  up  and  down,"  "  altout,"  and  the  like.  Thus,  vri-rait'i  means,  to  see  one 
another,  and  iTi-rnii/nki,  to  look  alxiut,  this  way  and  that ;  vei-tnko-yaki,  to  go  to  and 
fro,  go  about ;  vei-siki-ynki,  to  lift  about. 


i  t 


V  I  T  I  A  N    (i  K  A  M  M  A  K. 


377 


Th<<  nviprnonl  nllixi-ii  artf  nliH>  iim-iI  Io  (iiriii  tlx'  iilwlrni't  iiniiiiv  <>(  r('lnti»niilii|>,  nx, 
giinr,  briillirr  iir  HJNlrr ;  iii-ijiiniin,  tlir  rt'liilinn  iMlwit  n  Imilliir  iiml  nlNlrr:  ii'Uti, 
■|Miii'« ,  liiialHiiiil  iir  will';  rn-iiiiti  nr  iri-wiihiiu  \\\r  iiiiiiniiiniiiiil  rrliilmii.  Vn.itinn 
•igiillK'H  u  miiiriifiir,  I'rum  Itint,  In  cniiH'  iiriir;  iiml  rii-liirnii,  nil  liiir,  rnilii  (urn,  Ici 
mii'iMTil, 

Ihnlrc  it  i'X|ircM>Mil  Ipy  tin,  iit  rin-kiiiii,  to  wiiih  to  I'lil  i  iin.iiiiHf,  to  wish  to  »Uf[>,  to 
In'  iilii'iiy  i  nil  viit  tiikn,  I  wi«h  to  go, 

yiliiii  iii^iiitii'H  tViinicnt  or  rimtoinnry  onion, — nt  iiiluii-/iJi>,  to  liiMt  fminniily,  to  Ik; 

Unlit  to  lilsl  ;    ililtlil-l.ilH",  t'l  I'llt  llllll-ll,  to  llC!  II  glutton. 

T  K  A  N  M I T  I  V  i:    A  »  K  I  X  K  H 

Vrrlw,  wlirn  till')'  liiivc  n  Irnnsilivi-  MiitiiifK'ntioii,  iimmlly  tiiku  ri'rtiiiii  iiIIKi'm  wliioli 
(li'iinlf  tliJK  Ntntr,  iinil  tliiii  MliulliPrtlicy  nro  or  nn*  not  iniinnliiiti'ly  followril  liy  ii  iiniiii  in 
thf  olijrrtivi'.  'I'lic'w  iiHixcs  ari'  a,  t'n,  kii,  niti,  nu,  f/ii,  rn,  la,  ru,  yii,  Inkiiin,  rnkinn, 
liikinii,  Viikinii,  niid  unkinii.  Tin'  Inst  livr  (KTniiir,  in  tli"'  (liiilfcl  ol'  lU'wii,  tnkit,  ntkii, 
Inkii,  rnkii,  iiiiil  i/tdn.  All  tlicHc  iillixi's,  wlicn  Collouril  iiiiiniiliiitcly  liy  n  |iroiioiin  or 
pro|K'r  nniiir,  witli  the  nlijfctivf  ><i^n  /  lu'l'oru  it,  low  tln'ir  liiiiil  </,  ami  liiki'  tlii»  i  in  it« 
plncT. 

I'I'Ih'  iiiiHiiionarii'H  iil  l<nkrnil>n  at  I'lrst  cnnsiilrrcd  that  tlic  I'liinl  u  wn.t  rlinngpil  to  i, 
unil  llio  I  of  till'  oliji'clivi'  nlMi  ri'tniiiiil ;  they  tlK'n'tiirL'  wmtv  an  ruUi  ikn,  or  ini  raifii 
X",  |iir"I  luv  IliiT."  Iliil  nt  llfWH  nml  SnniiiHonm  tlii'y  Imvc  oiiiitlril  niic  of  llicfM! 
vowi'In.  Sn  liir  MS  niir  i'\|H'ririi<'i'  went,  only  one  is  Hoiiiiili'd  ;  inili'eil,  thi!  |ironniiii  in  tlif 
iicciisalivc  apiMiirs  l'ni|iiiiilly  to  Im'  alliju'd  to  tlic  verb, — as  nii  niii'lko,  I  sco  tliff  ;  kiikini 
ni  lesiikiiiii,  do  not  iir  iiii',  \Vc  smnrliiiK's  heard  the  «  rrlaincil.  as,  nu  rnir'n  ikn.  Tho 
omissinn  ol'lh<'  rinal  vowil  in  \'iliaii,  Ix-lorc  aiintluT  vowrl,  is  liy  no  means  niK'ninnmii  ; 
/nkn,  to  p),  when  I'olinwed  by  i,  generally  becomes  /iik\  as,  nil  sa  Ink'  i  Ovninii,  I  am 
goin){  tn  Ovnliiii.| 

Rxninplcs  of  transitive  iiHixes  are, — 


■  Kiri.l  VKIIt. 

tiilrrr.  In  elennsv 
siimlii,  to  drive 
ffsii,  to  tic 
fllljll,  tn  llll^ 
Ininn,  tn  lovo 
tarn,  to  ask 
viikiitii,  to  erect 
*(/((,  In  trample 
soro,  to  worship 
tn,  to  I'ell,  cut  down 
knfi,  to  ent 
tiimliii.  In  I'onsecrnlo 
riir,  to  Wound 
tiiki,  tn  draw  water 
io/f,  to  swathe 


Tii«s»iTivK  num. 
tulirea 
S(iiii/ii('a 
irsiiku 
t'liminia 
loiiiiiiia 
tnroija 
vnkntiira 
sihittl 
snrOvii 
taya 

kntUdkinii 
tani/inrnkina 
viirlnkina 
tnkiviikina 
soleijdkiiM 


05 


379 


PHILOLOGY. 


It  docs  not  nppcnr  that  there  is  any  difrercncc  of  incaiiing  (with  one  oxccpliun)  in  these 
siillixcs,  nor  is  there  any  mode  of  determlninf;  the  proper  siilVix  of  nny  parliculnr  verb, 
except  from  usage.  iSonietiincs  a  word  which  has  two  or  more  acccplnliuiis,  lakes  a 
diiTereiit  siilfix  for  each, — as,  tun,  Uiura,  to  talii',  luii,  Iciiii'd,  to  jjalhcr  or  pluck,  liiu, 
tiiiiiii,  to  cleave  to.  So  roijo,  roijor'ii,  to  liear,  and  roiiofdktmi,  to  |)rcach.  Hut  fre(|iu'iilly  tho 
some  sutH.t  is  joined  to  verbs  whicli,  though  sounded  alike,  are  evidently  dillerent  words ; 
//'«,  to  steal,  and  /id,  to  in(|uire,  both  make  haul.  Moit'over,  the  same  word  sometimes 
takes  two  or  mon>  nlfixcs  with  no  change  of  nieaiiiiig  ;  thus,  iiilxiso,  to  cut,  has  mdostika , 
iiil/osnfii/kiHii,  awii  iiilmsordkiiia. 

The  exception  mentioned  aUive  is  in  the  case  of  Vdkiiid,  or  ra'iiKi,  which  is  said  (in 
the  Somusomu  grammar)  to  have  sometimes  the  meaning  of  acting  or  doing  far,  or  on 
account  0/  another,  as,  au  sorovd'hui  ea,  I  pray  for  him,  an  /o/oi<i'in(i  Cd,  1  fust  for  him, 
ail  la'ova'ina,  I  go  for  him,  or  on  his  account.  It  will  be  observed  that,  in  this  case, 
the  sutBx  does  not  change  its  tinal  vowel  lx!lbre  the  pronoun.  It  has  not,  however, 
always  this  meaning,  as  t/atovtikina,  which  means  "  to  omit  the  k  in  s|)eaking"  (like  the 
l)eople  of  Soniusoniii). 

These  transitive  sulVixes  seem  to  lie  the  same  as  those  that  in  the  Polynesian  serve  as 
signs  of  the  passive,  [^^ee  Comp.  Oram.  ^  56.]  What  makes  this  almost  certain  ii  the 
fact  that  in  those  cases  where  the  \'itian  verb  is  of  Polynesian  origin,  its  transitive  suflix 
usually  correspoiiils  with  the  passive  sulVix  of  the  same  verb  in  Polynesian, — nt  least,  as 
we  lind  it  in  the  dialect  of  New  Zealand,  which  has  ri'lained  this  part  of  the  language 
more  complete  than  the  other  dialects.  Sometimes  the  Samoan  and  Tongun  also  coincide, 
as  will  be  i>cen  in  the  following  examples : 


VITIAN  VE»«. 

TRASSITIVK. 

TO1.TNK9UN. 

PASSIV*. 

rakdlii,  to  erect 

vakdtura 

vakatii  (IV.  Z.) 

icdkdlnriii, 

vakatuiiibii,  to  cause  to  grow 

Vdkn/iimbiim 

utikdtKjiu  (N .  y 

.) 

u-dkdinpnria 

i-akumdte,  to  kill 

vakantdtca 

irnkuMdfe  (.\.> 

:•) 

tidknmalea 

itki,  to  lill  up 

sikita 

/liki  (N.  Z.  and 
[also  si'i,  Sam. 

Tong.) 

Itikilia 
si'iliii] 

kini,  to  pinch 

kinitii 

kini  (N.  Z.) 

kiiiilia 

vafu,  to  strike 

vafiika 

JX!/U  (N.Z.),  to 

knock 

2tiitnki<i 

ttmhiiimhi,  fo  cover 

umhiiimbia 

iifiiifi  (Sam.) 

iilinlia 

keh,  til  dig 

kclia 

km  (\.Z.) 

knid, 

nnu,  to  drink 

nniimii. 

inn  (N'.Z.) 

innniia 

TIIK     I'AS.SIVK. 

There  is,  in  the  Vitian,  no  especial  formation  to  express  the  passive  voice.  When  the 
passive  in  lOmilish  is  lollowed  by  an  ablative  of  llii'  agent,  this,  in  Vitian,  would  Ix'come 
the  nnuiinalive, — us,  "  ye  shall  Ik'  hatcil  by  all  men,"  is  renden'(l,  r  na  i'ati  keninnilnii  11 
lugd  liimtitii  vnk/Mmlna,a\\  men  sliall  hate  you.  In  other  cases,  the  Ibrm  is  tlie  same 
as  in  the  active,  t|- ;  subject  being  put  in  the  objective  alk'r  the  verb,  and  some  nominative 
equivalent  to  the  French  oti  b«^ing  apparently  uiiderstiKnl, — as,  ka  na  kafivi  koikoid,  and 
he  shall  be  called,  lit   [|)eopleJ  shall  call  him  ;  e  nil  mhiiiti  ra  ki  Kiena,  and  they  shall 


V  I  T  I  A  N    GRAMMAR. 


379 


be  cast  into  Gilioiina — "  [an]  Its  jrttrrtt"  fee.     In  llifse  examples  Ihe  close    tvlnlion 
which  exists  iK'twcen  the  passive  ami  transitive  Ibrms  Dt'tlie  verb  is  evident. 

DIRECTIVE    PARTICLES. 

In  the  Polynesian  dialerts,  frequent  use  is  made  of  particles  expressing  the  direction  of 
the  action,  whether  towards  or  from  the  si)oaker,  upward  or  downwar<l,  and  the  like.  In 
the  Vitian,  similar  words  ;ire  in  use,  thouyh  not  to  the  same  extent.  ]\l(ii  signifies  motion 
towards  the  s|ieaker,  and  may  frei|ui'ntly  lie  rendered  hither ;  tiiii  or  i/uni  denotes  motion 
from  the  spi-aker, — as,  awai/,  (iff,  forth,  &c. ;  fdkv  signifies  ujiicarits,  and  <'iv'>,  iloicn- 
icanU.  Liiko-tmii,  cimxc  hither;  /<ik\iiii,  go  nway ;  tn  <fVUc,  stand  up;  tiikn  fti'o,  to 
put  down;  tiikii-fiani,  to  send  li)rth; — an  tiikiU'i  kcmiimlou  yaui,  I  send  you  forth; 
tuktit'd-mui,  give  it  here;  viri-ani,  throw  nway. 


RELATIVE    PARTICLE. 

Ki-na,  in  the  middle  or  towards  the  close  of  a  .sentence,  refers  to  some  noun,  pronoim, 
adverb,  or  other  word  preceding  it,  expressive  of  time,  place,  cause,  manner,  instrument, 
and  the  like ;  it  thus  fre(|uently  supplies  the  place  of  a  relative  pronoun ;  as,  a  tikina 
vakoniliiayd  ki>  hiko  ki  ?ui,  every  place  irhcrc  thou  g(K'st  (ki  iiti  referring  to  tikiiiu, 
place).  I  na  sii/ii  e  iiuite  ki  na  a  yaijomlra,  on  the  day  vhen  their  bodies  die,  (where 
ki  na  re(»,TS  to  sitjti.)  A  Cava  ko  raii'a  ki  >ia  it  iiin/iimiihi,  why  dost  thou  behold  Ihe 
mote? — here  ki  na  refers  to  fdva,  what, — i.  e.,  what  is  it  (or  which  thou  beholdest,  &;c. 

The  following  paradigms  are  intended  merely  to  show  the  mode  in  which  the  particles 
of  tense,  mood,  iVc,  are  applied,  when  it  is  thought  necessary  to  employ  them;  but  it 
must  not  lie  f  )rgotten  that  their  use  is  by  no  means  ''onstant,  and  that,  in  strictness, 
a  conjugation  of  regular  verbal  forms  is  not  consistent  with  the  genius  of  the  Vitian 
language. 

PARADIGM   OK   AN    INTRANSITIVE    VERB. 

Infinitive,  rtie  lnko,  to  go. 

kcnnitifhu  hiko,  ye  go 

>  Itiko,  they  go 


INDICATIVE  MOOD, 

PRESFNT  TKNBK. 

Sill(»ul(ir. 


an  hiko,  1  go 

ko  lako,  thou  g<x"St 

e  lako  koikoia,  he  goes 

Pual. 

krndarn  liikn,  thou  and  I  go 

kciran  hikii,  he  and  I  go 

kcniiiuilraii  lako,  ye  two  go 

t  run  lako,  they  two  go 

Plural. 
kenilu        1 

I      I  .      i  uikit,  ve  and  1  go 
kcnihitou  S 

keiloii       1 

,  .  >  Itiko,  Ihev  and  1  go 

keiiit'inti  S 


e  ni 
c  ratou 


INDEFINITE. 

ml  sa  lako,  I  am  going,  or  am  gone 
ko  sa  /(lb),  thou  art  going,  <SlC. 
sa  lako  koikoia,  he  is,  iVc. 

rBErr.BiTE. 
ail  II  lako,  1  went,  or  have  gone 
ko  a  lako,  thou  wentest 
ka  hiko  koikoia,  he  went 

Fl'TrBE. 

an  na  lako,  I  shall  go 

/■()  na  lako,  thou  wilt  go 

I'  na  lako  koikoia,  he  will  go 


380 


PHILOLOGY. 


CONDITIONAL. 

keraha  mi  hiko,  it"  I  go 

(conlracteil  to  kevuka'ii  lako) 
kn'itka  kn  lako,  i\'  thou  g<x>st 
kcviika  c  Uiko  koikoia,  if  ho  goes 

PRKTERITE. 

ke  nil  sa  lako,  if  I  Imd  gone 

(contrnetcd  to  kc'ii  sa  lako) 
or,  kc  s<i  lako  koiaii 
ke  sa  lako  koiko,  if  thou  hndst  gone 
kc  sa  Itiko  koikoia,  if  he  had  gone 

n'TURI. 

keviika  an  tia  lako,  if  I  shall  go 
kcraka  ko  na  lako,  if  thou  shall  go 
kevaka  e  na  lako  koikoia,  if  he  shall  go 

SUHJl'MtTIVE. 

tiie  ail  lako,  that  I  may  go 

(contracted  to  tiieUi  lako) 
me  ko  lako,  that  thou  mayest  go 
mr  lako  koikoia,  that  he  may  go 

PRKTERITE. 

men  sa  lako,  or 

Men  a  lako,  that  I  might  go 

t'UTl'RE. 

men  na  lako,  that  I  may  go 

IMPERATIVE. 

liiko 

lako  koiko 

me  ko  lako  \.  go  thou  ! 

mo  I 

viau 


t  ko  lako  I 
mi  lako  J 


tiu  lako,  go  you  (rcspectfid) 

DUAL. 

mliaii  lako  \ 

mc  kemiiiiilrau  lako  >  do  ye  two  go 

lako  keiniuiiltan        ) 

PLURAL. 

iiiloii  lako  \ 

me  ke  miiinlou  lako     >  go  ye. 

maiii  lako  kemiiiiiloii  ) 

CAUSATIVE  FORM. 

III!'. — me  vakalako,  to  cause  to  go 
ail  vakalako,  I  cause  to  go 
ail  a  lakalako,  I  caused  to  go 
an  na  vakalako,  1  shall  cause  to  go 
kevakan  vakalako,  if  I  cause  to  go 
men  vakalako,  that  I  may  cause  to  go 
vakalako  koiko  !  do  thou  cause  to  go 

FREQUENTATIVE  FORM. 

me  vcilakoyaki,  to  go  about,  up  and  down 

au  veilakoyaki,  I  go  almut 

au  a  veilakoyaki,  I  went  about,  &c. 

DE8IPERATIVE  FORM, 

me  via-lako,  to  wish  to  go 

U8ITATIVE  FORM, 

me  ndau-lako,  to  be  wont  to  go. 


PARADIGM   OK   A   TRANSITIVE   VERB. 
me  loma,  to  love. 


TRANSITIVE  FORM. 


loinana,  to  love  some  object. 


an  loman  a  ijoiie,  I  love  the  child 

an  loniniii  Seen,  I  love  Seru 

an  limiani  ko,  I  love  thee 

an  lomani  koikoia  (L.)' 

an  lomani  kea      (Mb.) 

an  lomani  ^ra  (.'^ain.) 

an  toniania  (It.) 

ko  lomani  an,  thou  lovest  me 


■  I  love  him 


ko  lomani  ko,  thou  lovest  thyself 

ko  lonuini  koikoin,  &c.,  thou  lovest  him 

e  lomani  an  koikoia,  ho  loves  me 

c  lomani  ko  koikoia,  he  loves  thee 

e  lomani  koikoia  koikoia 

or,  e  Ionian  ia  koikoia 

'     ..'am  lomani  koikoia,  we  two  love  him 

e  ran  lonuini  ko,  they  two  love  thee,  &c,  &c. 


he  loves  him 


VITIAN    GRAMMAR. 


881 


cAUMTivi  Fom.  keiidiiru  veilomani,  we  two  love  one  an- 

me  val;ahniana,  to  cause  to  love  other 

ail  vukidomani  ko  i  koikniii,  I  cause  thee    lifuUilou  vcilonuiiti,  we  all  love  one  an- 

to  love  him 
e  ra  vakidonuini  an  i  ki),  they  cause  me  to 

love  thee,  &c.  &:c. 


KECintoCAL  KOHM. 

me  veilomani,  to  love  one  another 


other 

DESIDKR  \Tlve  FORM. 

VIC  lia-lonui/ia,  to  wish  to  love 

ail  via-lomani  ko,  I  wish  to  love  thee 

UaiTATlVE  FORM. 

Vie  7iil(iii-lomaiui,  to  Ik;  wont  to  love. 


The  rcinaiiiini;  parts  ofsiicoch  lio  not  r(v|iiiro  a  |iarliinilar  notice.  All  the  |)r<'|iosilions, 
and  most  of  the  conjuti<'li<ins  have  Ixi'ti  already  ;;iveii  in  tniitin^  of  the  cases  of  nouns, 
and  tin;  niiKuls  of  v(;rbs.  The  formation  of  adverlis  with  vnka  has  also  been  adverted  to. 
We  therefore  procird  to  s|K>ak  of  some  other  iiecidiarilies  of  this  language;  and  first 
of  the 

F  ()  K  M  A  T  I  O  N    OF    W  O  R  P  S. 

The  duplication  of  simple  words  is  common  in  the  Vitian,  though  not  according  to  any 
particular  svstcm  or  rule.  In  a  verb  it  freiinently  expresses  re|H'lition  of  an  action 
(ante,  p.  37.">) ;  wiih  ailjeclives  and  adverbs  it  is  a  miKle  of  forming  the  snpi'riative 
(see  p.  H70).  Sometimes  adjectives  arc  Dinned  by  the  duplication  of  other  words,  as, 
from  sninliii,  down,  we  liiive  yiniliiisomhii,  steep ;  Irom  /«/,  dirt,  Intloii,  black,  dirty. 
Hut  more  commonly  nouns  are  thus  formed  from  verbs,  as  from  kait,  to  carry,  is 
derived  kiiiiknii,i\  burden;  from  jsoto,  to  worship,  so/-aso/-«,  n  religious  rite;  kamhn, io 
climb,  ktiiii/xikawlHi,  a  ladder.  \'ery  oHen  the  reduplicated  form  dillers  in  no  respect 
from  the  simple  word,  and  seems  to  lx>  pn'ferred  meri'ly  from  simie  idea  of  euphony. 

A  kind  of  verbal  adjective,  with  a  passive  meaning,  is  formed  from  inany  verbs  by 
prefixing  la,  as,  rof'e  to  (lay,  tnvm'r.  Hayed,  having  Ihe  skin  strip|Hd  oil";  lease,  to  sepa- 
rate, Unease,  separated,  divorced  ;  sere,  to  untie,  tasere,  untied,  loose.  This  particle  is 
sometimes  fimiid  between  the  causative  pri'fix  vakti  and  the  verb,  as,  ki/a,  to  know,  viika- 
triki/a,ln  make  known,  to  testify;  villi,  to  learn,  rakatnviiJi,  to  teach,  i.  e.  to  make 
Itanieil. 

Compounds  are  not  imeommon  in  the  Vitian.  The  words  which  compose  them  are 
arranged  in  the  same  order  as  when  separate, — that  is,  the  ailjective  follows  the  noun, 
and  the  noun  the  verb, — substanlivi's  are  separated  by  a  pre|)<)sition,  ice,  as,  malalailai, 
sharp-pointed,  from  nuitii,  eye  or  point,  and  tailai,  small  ;  molanivuiiiia,  a  councillor 
(eye  of  the  land);  ndiivii-vakatmii,  (lute  (noi.se-making  !>amboo).  Substantives,  how- 
ever, are  lre(|uently  u»ed  as  luljectives,  in  which  :  ase  no  preposition  is  required,  as, 
fikarahi,  stone-blin<l,  from  tika,  a  disi'ase  ol"the  eyes,  and  valii,  a  stone;  tiiruiidrdmlxi. 
Idea,  issue  of  blood,  from  tii/ii,  to  drop,  ndid,  blood,  and  mlialavii,  long. 

The  adjectives  rtiwiiraira,  easy,  and  ndrendre,  ditHcult,  are  trcquently  su(rixed  to 
verbs  to  fonn  com|iounds,  as,  vala-ratcaraxea,  easy  to  do,  vala-ndrendre,  hard  to  do ; 
taliii-rinearatea,  easy  to  command,  or,  rather,  to  be  commnndeil, — hence  used  (or  obe- 
dient ;  lalai-iidrendic,  ilisolK'dient,  ungovernable. 

!)0 


382 


r  U  I  L  O  L  O  G  Y. 


CONSTRUCTION. 

As  the  Vitinn  1ms  no  inflections,  tlic  only  rules  of  syntax  wliioli  npply  to  it  arc  such  as 
relate  to  the  urrnngenient  of  words  in  a  sentence.  Many  of  these  rules  have  been  already 
given.     The  following  is  a  general  summary  of  the  most  important. 

The  adjective  liillows  the  noun  which  it  qualifies. 

The  nominative,  if  it  \>c  a  pronoun  preceded  by  ko  or  koi,  usually  follows  the  verb; 
other  pronouns  conunonly  pn^cede. 

If  the  nominative  be  n  noun,  it  generally  follows  the  verb;  and  if  the  verb  have  a  pro- 
noun for  its  object,  then  the  nominative  conies  alter  'he  object,  as  Sd  i'aiidra  a  sir)(i,  the 
sun  rises  ;  S(i  lako  inai  ua  kai  M/ntii  (U.),  the  Mliua  people  are  coming;  sa  Imiituii  an 
ko  Scrii,  Seru  loves  me. 

Adverbs  gi'nernlly  follow  the  verb,  as  iithomn  }i(lolr  <i  siijn,  the  sun  sets  tiH>  soon;  ku 
/III  iiikiisiiriisiivn/iikiiiit  saiu  koikoiti,  and  be  will  thoroughly  cleanse. 

The  negatives  precede  the  verb,  as,  sa  seijii  tii  kiln  knidii,  I  do  not  know ,  e  iia  Utwa 
mbii/a  II  tiimatii,  maa  shall  not  live;  tawumboko,  no  end,  endless;  era  tut  £au  mute 
(Sam.),  they  shall  not  die. 

The  same  word  is  fre(|uently  noun,  verb,  adjective,  or  adverb,  according  to  the  con- 
struction of  the  st^ntence  ;  thus  iiibiilii  means  lit!',  to  live,  alive,  living  ;  iiri  is  wrong,  to 
err,  error,  erroneously,  &c.  'I'lie  verii,  if  transitive,  is  usually  <listingiiished  by  its  sulhx, 
and  the  noun  by  its  article  or  pre|Hisition. 

Sometimes  a  verb,  or  a  part  of  a  sentence,  is  treated  as  a  noun,  and  takes  a  possessive 
pronoun  lx.'fore  it,  instead  of  a  nominative,  as,  i  na  mm  tiiicii  in/xjki  rii,  l)ecause  he  could 
not  find  them,  lit.  for  his  not  finding  them  ;  caka  na  iici/oii  vukniiilonihniitiiki  rii  (U.), 
as  we  lorgive  them,  lit.  like  our  forgiving  them. 

The  natives  of  Viti,  like  those  of  Samoa  and  Tonga,  in  speaking  of  or  to  their  chiefs, 
employ  certain  terms  distinct  from  those  in  ordinary  use.  They  are  principally  the 
names  of  the  parts  of  the  b<xly,  and  of  some  of  the  most  common  acts, — ns,  to  eat,  s|H'ak, 
sit,  sl(x>p,  and  the  like.  By  a  singular  coincidence  of  iili'in  with  many  Ruropean  lan- 
guages, the  plural  pronoun  mnnii  or  kei/iinin,  you,  is  u-cd  as  a  respectful  mode  of 
address  to  a  single  [Hi-rson  ;  in  which  case  it  is  frecpiently  contracted  to  int.  Vim,  him, 
is  also  generally  used  as  a  term  of  ceremony,  instead  of  the  ol)lii|ue  cases  of  knikniti. 
The  following  list,  given  by  Mr.  C'argill,  comprises  most  of  the  words  of  this  description  : 


I 


CEREMONIAL. 

COMMON. 

eiiia 

eika 

c'likii,  temlienikida 

liya 

kuliiiisawbiila 

kuli 

ku,  uiikolo 

lako 

loiiianikoro 

vale 

mbiilc 

mute 

niilainila 

mliai'a 

mliikiiiiivesi 

nilakii 

nilrulambu 

iilitiiuUiia 

oviuvi 

tittuvi 

ophthalmia 

hand  or  arm 

skin 

to  go 

house 

death ;  to  die 

disease,  sickness 

the  back 

the  first-born 

a  cloak 


* 


VITIAN   GRAMMAR. 


383 


cinmioNiAi. 

seraii 

scran 

tauri 

tiivi 

titvo 

tokau'ide 

tiinitura 

Viikutamlmna 

ixihattitambu 

vakatnka 

vanua-i-€ake 

wave 

u-iri 

ifiriwiri 


COMMON, 

sarnsara 

viala 

kana 

ijone 

viofc 

mb-irisi 

ava  {yavti) 

vosa 

vosa 

a£a 

iilti 

kelc 

tiko 

tikoliko 


ENOLiail. 

to  sec 

eye,  face 

to  eat 

o  son  or  liaiightor 

sleep ;  to  sleep 

anger;  angry 

the  loot  or  leg 

to  speak 

a  word 

name 

head 

the  abdoraen 

to  sit 

a  scat 


P  R  O  S  O  I)  Y. 

The  Fecjceans  pay  more  allerition  to  poetical  composition  than  any  of  their  Polynesian 
neighbours.  Nearly  all  their  dances  arc  accompanied  by  songs,  in  a  kind  oC  recitative, 
to  which  the  motions  of  the  dancers  arc  made  to  correspond.  The  song  and  dance  a|)pear 
to  be  looked  upon  as  inseparable,  and  any  important  celebration  or  festival  is  usually 
signalized  by  the  production  of  a  mrkr,  or  dance,  of  which  both  the  movements  and  the 
words  are  newly  composed.  There  are  persons,  both  male  and  female,  who  devote  them- 
selves to  this  species  of  composition,  some  of  whom  acquire  a  great  reputation.  They 
frequently  obtain  a  high  price  for  their  productions,  twenty  tnmbiia  (the  native  currency 
of  whale's  teeth)  being  sometimes  given  for  a  single  song  and  dance.  As  a  person  with 
forty  or  fifty  of  these  teeth  is  considered  wealthy,  and  for  eight  or  ten  a  ship  may  be 
supplied  with  provisions  for  a  cruise,  it  is  evident  that  the  Feejeeans  alTix  no  slight 
value  to  the  works  of  their  com|Kisers. 

Fiideed  a  poet  of  Viti  has  a  far  more  dillicult  task  than  those  of  most  countries.  Me 
must  not  only  possess  a  good  knowledge  of  music,  as  it  is  understood  by  his  countrymen, 
and  be  acquainted  with  the  principles  on  which  their  dances  are  regulated,  but  in  the 
composition  of  his  song  he  has  to  adapt  it  both  to  the  tunc  and  the  dance, — and  he  must 
do  this  while  fettered  by  a  complicated  system  of  rhythm  and  rhyme  peculiar,  so  far  as 
we  know,  to  his  language. 

The  most  common  measure  in  their  songs  consists  of  three  dactyles  and  a  trochee  ;• 
but  in  the  place  of  any  of  the  dactyles  a  spondee  may  be  used.     Thus  the  line 


•  Tliis  incasurc  is  one  not  wholly  unknown  to  English  ballnd  lili'raturc ;  it  is  tliat  adopted  liy  Scott,  in 
tlic  wcU-known  lines — 

"  Wliiire  shall  the  Irtvcr  rest,  whom  the  fates  sever 
From  his  true  niiiidcn's  breast,  p.-irtcd  for  ever  ?"  &c. 


884 


PHILOLOGY. 


dM  tlka  I  mdi  lid  |  tdmhu  Id  |  gdni 
consists  of  a  dactyle,  a  spondee,  a  dactylc,  and  a  Iroclice.     And  in  the  line 

ndriiulri  |  Jld  i  |  tik6  md  \  lud 
wc  linvo  two  spuiidcrs,  a  dactylo,  nnd  a  trochee. 

Ono  vnriiilion,  however,  is  iierinitled,  which  is  not  consonant  with  our  ideas  of  metrical 
hnrinnny ; — when  a  nulu|ilicaled  word  like  S(i/i'»i/ii,  cWvii'rtv/,  is  intriKJuccd  into  a  line, 
it  is  considered  ns  Cdiiliiiiiiiif;  only  lis  iiuiiiy  s\  llaliles  as  the  simple  word.  It  is  piissihie 
that,  ill  siiii;ing,  such  words  are  iiol  doiiMeil,  hut  of  this  the  natives  from  whom  we  received 
the  songs  gave  no  hitimnlion  while  reciting  iheiii.     Thus  the  line 

SalusMii  III  vutii  mnkfrivaki 


has  two  syllables  too  many,  which  are  evidently  contained  in  the  first  word  ;  if  these  are 
omitted,  the  line  consists  of  a  dactyle,  a  s|K>ndee,  a  dactyle,  and  a  trm^hw.  This  rule 
holds  in  every  case,  so  fur  as  we  have  observed,  where  a  double  word  occurs. 

In  some  instances  a  l!K)t  of  lour  short  syllables  occurs,  instead  of  a  dactyle,  as, — 

if(i  villi  I  viifii  rd  \  lamii  rnivd  |  tdkd 

It  should  bo  observed  that  the  wonls  in  their  singing,  or  rather  chanting,  arc  divided 
according  to  the  tune,  without  any  reference  to  the  sense, — a  pause  not  unfre(|uently 
occurring  in  the  middlr!  of  a  word. 

But  the  obwrvance  of  metre,  which,  in  the  I^ialin  tongue,  constitutes  nearly  all  the 
mechani<al  part  of  verse.making,  is  the  least  ditlicully  in  the  Vitian.  There  is,  in  addi- 
tion to  this,  a  piHMiliar  manner  of  rhyming,  which  must  require,  in  the  com|)Oser,  a  great 
coniriand  of  words,  as  well  as  skill  in  disposing  them.  The  rule  is  os  follows : — those 
vowels  which  are  contained  in  the  last  two  syllables  of  the  first  line  of  a  stanza,  must  be 
found,  in  the  same  order,  in  the  last  two  syllables  of  every  succeeding  line: — and  the 
greater  the  number  of  lines  which  are  thus  made  to  conform,  the  belter  is  the  (wetry 
este<>ined.  Some  of  the  stanzas  in  the  poems  which  we  took  down  have  six,  others  nine 
lines.  It  is  evident  that  this  s|K^cics  of  rhyme,  or  rather  consonance,  could  only  be  suc- 
ce.ssfiilly  cultivated  in  a  language  distinguished,  like  the  Vitian,  for  the  predominance  of 
vowel  sounds. 

In  the  following  cxampl",  !ho  two  terminal  vowels  are  n — a: 


Ru  mrxr  kn>o  i  m/mre  M/iatua, 
All  iiiiilra  culii  ni  Cdiiih-  tia  villa. 
Oi)i;ii  iiiasi  till  liik'  i  miimliiva, 
Rukunilii  a  i'nii  tiiru  ki  tiimlia  ; 
A  mil  (ot'oko  iiu  iak'  i  riimhuna, 
Rfikuiiihi  a  fait  turu  ki  tuniba. 


V  I  T  I  A  N    G  R  A  M  .M  A  R. 


385 


This  song,  ns  well  as  tlinse  whirli  fiillow,  wns  nlitainoil  from  a  chief  of  Mbim,  or  San- 
dalwood Hny,  nt  which  plarc  a  iliiilnct  prevails  (hOiTing  holh  from  that  of  Ovolau,  whuro 
oiir  interpreter  ri'sidiil,  and  from  tliosc  of  Laki'inl)a  and  Somiisomu,  of  whi(di  we  had 
vcM'ahidarii's  ;  in  some  eases,  tlierefore,  a  didieully  was  experieiii'ed  in  arrivini;  at  the 
exact  interpretation, — a  dilhculty  increased  liy  thi^  elliptical  form  of  expression,  and  the 
poetical  license  in  the  use  of  words  to  which  the  native  hards  havo  recourse  in  order  to 
meet  the  exactions  of  their  coniplicati^d  metrical  system.  The  following  is  the  meaning 
of  the  al)ove,  as  near  as  we  could  ohtain  it : 

We  two  were  sleeping  in  the  council-house  of  Mhatua; 

I  awake  suddinly  as  the  moon  is  rising. 

My  girdU'  I  am  going  to  cut  in  two. 

TIk^  dew  is  falling  heavily  without; 

All  our  things  I  am  going  to  put  in  a  chest, 

[For]  the  dew  is  falling  heavily  without. 


The  mhinc  is  the  largo  house  which  is  f;>nnd  in  every  town,  and  which  serves  for 
conneil-honse,  temple,  and  house  of  reception  fiir  strangers.  Two  arc  represented  in  the 
.song  as  sleeping  in  a  house  of  this  kind,  called  MIkiIiiu,  having  left  the  articles  which 
they  had  hronght  with  them  (prohahly  the  dresses,  paints,  Arc.,  provided  (iir  the  dance)  on 
the  outside.  One  of  them  awakes  at  the  rising  (d"  the  moon,  and  finds  that  the  night  is 
cleor,  and  that  a  heavy  dew  is  jailing;  he  divides  his  girillc  or  cincture  of  native  cloth  to 
give  half  of  it  to  his  c(jmpanion  (which  the  natives  fre(|uently  do,  as  the  girdle  is  long  and 
wrapped  round  the  hody  in  several  folds),  and  proceeils  to  put  their  properly  where  it  will 
not  be  injured  hy  the  uioistMre.  There  is  nothing  poetical  in  the  verse,  which  was  pro- 
bably  composed  to  suit  the  rhyme, — the  liist  line  chancing  to  terminate  in  ii — a,  the  poet 
went  on  to  .string  together  as  many  words  of  this  termination  as  he  could  recollect. 
MiDuliiva,  whi(di  properly  signifies  to  rut  or  ^mh,  as  a  stick  or  a  finger,  is  used,  fi)r  the 
consonance,  instead  of  knsiiva,  whiidi  means  to  rlip,  or  cut  with  scissors  or  a  shell. 
Ritkiiiiihi  is  not  in  the  vocabulary,  but  we  lind  laiiiiihi  ii.  /aiji,  meaning,  a  heavv  fall  of 
rain  ;  riiLiimhi  a  ('nn  we  suppose  to  mean  (at  least,  in  this  dialect),  a  heavy  fall  of  dew. 
Titiu  is  to  drop,  to  drizzle.  Riimbii  means  a  chest  or  box,  but  by  taking  the  suHix  iia 
it  becomes  a  verb, — as  in  English  we  say  "  to  box  up."  Koto  means  to  put,  to  place, 
and,  OS  a  neuter,  to  /ir,  to  /if  ji/iicnl ; — but  it  is  used  after  another  verb  to  express  con- 
tinuance of  the  action  or  condition,  answering  to  the  participial  forms  iii  English — I  nm 
sleeping,  we  were  lying,  tVc. ;  ti/,o,  lohn,  and  »",  are  used  in  a  similar  manner.  Ni 
before  tiuniie  is  probably  used  I'or  iii  tuiit'a,  or  some  suidi  adverb,  meaning  iclien,  as,  or 
the  like. 

The  following  song  is  similar  to  the  preceding,  but  its  two  rhyming  vowels  are  « — i  : 

All  liko  mni  tm  Tiimhii-tayani, 
A  mil  mrke  kii  fnk'  i  liinimaki, 
A  tmi  kiilii  kii  tiiiji  tiikiiri, 
Aiiiliii  i'lilii  tiko,  kdii  pg'ii  taiji 
hull  inlxiii  t'uni  a  sc  ni  kiiiiilravi 
Sii/iisa/ii  ni  viii'ii  iiiakcrer.iki. 

07 


<  A 


386 


PHILOLOGY. 


Which  may  be  rendereil  as  follows  : 

I  was  lying  in  the  Tambu-tnjmni, 

We  were  going  lo  Icnrn  a  dnnco, 

A  red  cook  crowed  in  the  coiirt-ynrd, 

I  awoke  suddenly  and  went  lo  crying  ; 

1  am  going  to  string  the  (lowers  of  the  kundravi, 

For  a  necklace  in  the  harmonious  dance. 

This  is  evidently  intended  for  a  dance  of  females.  A  woman  represents  herself  as 
sleeping  in  a  house  called  'i'liii/iii-tiii/nni,  on  the  night  Ijefore  a  festival  ;  she  awakes  at 
the  crowing  of  a  cock,  and  recollerling  that  the  morning  is  to  bo  devoted  to  Icorning  a 
dance,  she  falls  to  crying  at  fuiding  that  it  is  already  late, — her  tears  being  probably  duo, 
in  some  measure,  to  the  circumstance  that  tinji  (to  weep)  is  needed  by  the  poet  for  the 
jingle  of  the  verse.  She  then  proce«.'ds  to  prepare  ;lie  necklace  of  (lowers  which  is  worn  in 
the  dance.  Tuntmaki  is  the  only  word,  the  meaning  of  which  is  uncertain  ;  it  is  possible 
that  a  mistake  was  made  in  Inking  it  down,  as  there  is  a  syllable  too  much  in  the  line;  it 
may  correspond,  in  the  Mbua  dialect,  lo  the  Lakeinba  word  saiimo/ci,  to  return,  or  cause 
to  return,  which  may  Ix!  used  for  icjmit,  rrliiiirsr,tc(ill  to  mind.  Tiko  is  used  nearly  like 
Uotn  in  the  preceding  song, — "  I  nwoke  suddenly,  and  remained  so."  Tigni  and  mlxiu 
ImjIIi  seem  properly  to  mean  to  I'j,  and  are  Ijulh  used  as  auxiliaries,  o/r//,  to  enter,  or 
|)ass  through,  is  here  used  as  a  transitive  verb,  meaning  to  insert,  as  (lowers  in  a  garland. 
Tiikiiri  (atOvolau  S(n)j;ati)  is  the  name  given  to  the  space  around  the  outside  of  a  house. 
KiiH  is  a  contraction  for  k<i  (in,  "  and  I."  ViitK  is  the  Jigtire  of  a  dance.  Makcrevuki 
means  "  in  good  accord, — wi'll  arranged." 

The  song  which  follows  was  also  nblained  at  Sandalwood  Bay,  and  is  valuable  not 
only  as  a  gix)d  specimen  of  native  composition,  but  as  containing  many  allusions  to  their 
|)eculiar  customs : 

Ni  nvii  limn  tu/ti  intm/iiln)  )ui  i\'va, 
S(i  uiiji  Inka  ni  iii'ii  i  licwa  ,• 
Mil  hired  no  a  sinii  ka  pgerii, 
Me  ra  fiiru  siiliisalu  niii  a/uira. 
^iirii  sinii  ka  iimlirti  ii  hinUi, 
Ra  niMii  ma,  kaii  luni/nnii. 
Ma  kcrid  ko  yanili,  kaii  srrra  ; 
Andi,  kii  liirata  na  urn  IiiiiIhi, 
Kiiii  viriani  ki  na  hm  Irka. 


Till  fakarn  va  Irnilui  kaii  fnkava, 
il/""  ra  nc  Ivvii  niai  a  ntarania  ; 
Ta  /ak'  i  i'lirii  ki  na  I'ninaira. 
Euniirn  tika  ko  Tinai-'ani-lamlxi ; 
A  onilti  nii'kc  ka  sii/i  viikaciiva  f 
Ka'o  ni  vo'iui  m  ?iuii  hila. 
Viiraviiia  na  vaniia  samara. 


• 

. 

' 

■■ 

0 

• 

• 

V  I  T  I  A  N   GRAMMAR. 

387 

'I 


Ra  villi  viifii,  ra  tiiiiiu  ratfiitnka, 
NilroiHU  iiilnle  sign  ki  MiU'iia'u. 

Whicii  may  be  rcnderptl, — 

In  the  town  of  Krwn  blows  slronglj  the  south  wind. 

It  blows  stondily  from  the  |Hilnt  of  Kowa ; 

This  sinu-flowers  will  \)c  slmki'ii  down  and  scattered, 

So  that  thr  women  may  string  gnrliinds  ; 

String  th<!  sinii,  and  add  to  it  the  lemba, 

When  they  arc  finished,  I  will  put  it  on. 

The  queen  l>ej.'s  for  it,  and  I  untie  it  ; 

Queen,  you  take  away  this  our  garland, 

I  throw  it  aside  on  the  little  couch. 

Let  us  take  tliii  garlands  that  I  have  been  making, 

That  the  Indies  may  make  a  great  stir  in  coming  : 

liOt  us  go  to  th(!  Thungiawn. 

The  motlier  of  'J'luingi-lamba  is  vexed  ; 

"Whcrol'ore  has  our  song  Ix^en  given  away  t 

The  bosket  ol'  Ices  is  empty  ; 

This  world  is  a  wretched  ploce. 

They  are  learning  the  dance  ;  tlicy  will  not  succeed  ; 

The  sun  sets  too  early  in  Malhnata." 

The  first  verse  describes  the  preparation  for  a  dance,  by  making  garlands,  anil  the 
idea  with  whicli  it  commences  is  certainly  a  poetical  one.  'l"ho  south  wind,  blowmp 
from  the  |H)inl  or  cape  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  of  Kewa,  shakes  down  the  (lowers,  so 
that  the  women  can  make  garlands.  The  latter  part  of  the  verse,  concerning  the 
"  queen"  and  the  "  little  couch,"  is  probably  introduced  to  fill  out  the  stanza  with  the 
necessary  rhymes.  In  the  next  verse,  the  "  ladies"  go  to  the  house  or  inlmrr  called 
Thinigiincii,  to  practise  their  ilanee.  They  find  their  mstrnctress,  the  composer  of  the 
song,  annoyed  at  the  small  amount  of  compensation  which  she  has  received ;  alter 
expressing  her  displeasure,  shi^  dechires  that  they  will  not  succeed  in  learning  the  dance, 
for  when  the  women  of  .Malliuata  attempt  it,  the  night  arrives  too  soon  for  them.  Some 
of  the  words  re(iuire  more  particular  annotations. 

Avii  or  i/aviiy  a  place  wliere  houses  stand, u  town;  this  name  is  given  to  the  platlbrms 
of  stone  on  which  the  houses  are  erected. 

Tidti-nilromlro,  applied  to  wind,  signifies  to  blow  briskly ;  tala-mlroiidro  na  t'aiji,  a 
fine  breeze  is  blowing. 

Seva,  the  south  wind  ;  £cvafcva  was  the  word  given,  but  as  fcvn  is  found  in  the  voca- 
bulary, and  is  required  in  scanning,  wo  have  adopted  it  instead  of  the  reduplicate  li>rm. 

7}ikii,  to  lie,  to  be  placed,  used  here  as  an  auxiliary,  like  liko  and  koln. 

U('ii,  propiM-ly  a  nose,  but  used  liir  a  point  or  headland  ;  the  river  of  Kewa,  whicli  is 
the  largest  in  Vili,  falls  into  the  sea  a  lew  miles  l«:|.iw  ilie  town,  u«d  has  a  tongue  of 
land  projecting  on  the  south  side  of  the  mouth,  Ibrming  its  liarlwr. 


388 


PHI  I, o I. o(i  Y. 


Aid  is  n  unrlictp  pfriilinr  In  llii'  Mhim  ilinlii-l  ;  it  ilrK>s  not  nrriir  in  oilhrr  of  Iho  grnm- 
mnrs,  or  in  llir  V(KNil)iiliiry.  and  the  inlcriirclrr  wiim  i;^ni)r(inl  ofilii  mi'iinint;.  As  the  line 
hns  n  nyllnlilc  lixi  inticli  for  llir  nictn',  il  is  ixMsililc  that  this  partii'lc  may  have  \kv\\  an 
niMiiiiiii  niaili'  to  the  s<in^  hy  the  natives  iif  Mhiia,  f'rnin  whom  wo  rri'i'ivcd  it,  Il  is 
oviclcnt  that  these  rnmpiiKltioiis,  in  imssin^  l'i\)ni  ime  district  to  nnolhi'r,  nni8t  be  liable  In 
Ik'  corrupti'd  hy  the  chaiijics  (il'diali'<'t. 

Mil,  similar  in  incanini;  and  nsc  lo  liLn,  /n/:ii,  and  koto. 

Sim/,  a  tree  l«virin^  iH'aiilil'nl  white  llnwers,  whieli  urow  in  diistprs, 

il/iwK  (•■»/•»,  Ac,  "  that  they  may  slriiij,'  (iarlands — the  women."  The  acnienco  is 
prohaldy  thrown  into  this  li)rni  lor  the  sake  ol'the  rhyme. 

Aliwti  is  Ireipiently  used  liir  Ictid^m  the  llewa  dialret ;  like  most  nouns  U'ginning 
with  II,  it  is  prireded  hy  an  /,  which  is  joined  to  whatever  word  comes  lielbre  it, — in  this 
case,  to  the  article  ml,  Throiij^hoiit  these  songs  n  and  tin  an;  nned  iridill'erenlly  l)otli  in 
the  nominative  and  the  accusative ;  prolmhly  ihi.'  choice  is  regulateil  liy  the  harmony  ul' 
the  vers<'. 

IadiIki,  a  Irre  iK-nring  n  yellow  llower ;  here  the  word  is  useil  for  the  flower  nione, 
and  aDerwards,  hy  metonymy,  (or  the  whole  garland. 

Mlnild  is  111  divide ;  ml'ilii-iiiii,  divided  in  two.  Two  garlands  ap|)enr  to  have  hcca 
braiili'd  on  one  string,  and  when  (Inishi'd,  they  are  divided  ;  ni  mlmhi-rua  should  there- 
lore  1k"  rendered  "they  Ixiiig  severed  in  two." 

ToiiOh  is  an  ornanuni  liir  the  lieail  or  neck  ;  with  na  it  becomes  n  trnnsitive  verb,  and 
signilii's  to  make  ofany  thing  an  ornament. 

AVr< ,  lo  beg  ;  she  supposes  that  the  (|uecn  will  be  struck  with  the  btmuly  of  her  gar- 
land, and  ask  lor  it. 

I/nyi,  till'  dais  or  elevated  place  lor  sleeping,  which  occupies  one  end  ol'the  house;  the 
epiiliet  likn  is  evidently  introduced  liir  the  rhynii;;  she  represents  herscll'as  Ix'ing  annoyed 
that  the  ipieen  should  Ix'g  liir  the  garland,  and  as  throwing  it  a^ide  in  displeasure. 

llii  r'(i/,iini,  ii:c.,—<'<il,(i  signilies  both  to //;Ar  and  lit  iiia/:r  ;  at  Dvolaii  the  meaning 
ol'the  line  Would  have  been  expressed  hy  "  kfi  run  e'ukii  nil  Irmlm  ii/ii  'ilfifii."  In 
kiiii  (contracted  for  hii  iiii)  Ihe  kn  may  Im!  either  the  conjunction  iitiil,  or,  'vhot  is  more 
priiliable,  the  preterite  particle  sup|dying  the  place  ol'  n  relative  pronoun. 

Xi;  noise,  bustle;  the  meaning  seems  to  Ix", — let  us  dress  ourselves  in  nil  our  finery, 
to  make  a  great  stir  or  "sensation,"  as  we  enter  Ihe  circle  of  dances. 

TliiiiiiiiiiHii :  every  houw;  in  Viti  has  its  nami>,  and  the  occupant  freiiuently  receives  an 
appellalion  I'rom  it, — as  the  lairds  of  Scotland  an'  called  by  the  names  of  their  estates. 
The  house  of  David  Whippy,  our  interpreter,  was  called  WiiiigU'runiin, — i.  e.,  "Ship;" 
and  he  w.ns  freijuenlly  spoken  of  as  Kn-iiiiii-uii-Winifiii-vmiiia,  "  He  of  the  Ship." 

Ti/iii-i-ciiiii-/iimlxi,  mother  of  Thangi-lamba  ;  a  woman  is  frequently  known,  in  these 
islands,  by  the  appellation  of  the  mother  of  her  eldest  son, — and  a  man  by  that  of  father 
of  his  eldest  daughter.      We  are  reminded  of  the  Arabic  Ahii-Iiikr,  Father  of  Bekr,  &c. 

Kii'o  for  kntn,  basket;  iiiiia  for  roliin,  which  is  a  .Mbua  word,  having  prol>nbly  the 
same  meaning  as  ynii  in  Kewa,  i.  e.,  property,  goods.  Here  it  n'fers  to  the  articles  given 
in  return  for  leaching  Ihe  song  and  dance.  The  omission  of  Ihe  /  is  a  peculiarity  of  Ihe 
dialect  of  Malhuata,  ond  as  Tinai-cajiilamba  is  reprcFcnted  ns  speaking,  she  was  probably 
from  that  place,  and  had  come  to  Kewa  lo  dispose  of  a  new  composition. 

Sii  nfti  lata,  "  is  here  empty." 


V  I  T  I  A  N   GRAMMAR. 


3S9 


1^ 


Nilolf,  tno  Rorly,  bnfnro  ilH  time;  in  male  ndult,  ho  diod  an  untimely  death. 

A  fimlii,  or  wiir-son){,  eniislats  UBually  of  two  linoH,  L'X|iro8Rivo  of  Homo  sciilimrnt  of 
dcfiancoi  which  thuy  nIiouI  forth  as  they  approach  the  enemy.  The  moutitnineerH  of 
Ovolnti,  who  HoiiK'limcs  nttncked  the  towns  upon  the  const,  were  wont,  before  they 
descended  I'rom  the  heights,  tu  tount  the  |>cop|e  below  them  with  the  words— 


That  is, 


Keitoii  (imbidmhi  toka  i  tualuii, 
Ntlrentlre  pi  i  tiko  mtUita, 

Wn  nre  sinfjing  our  wnr-sonj{  on  the  ridge, 
Hard  indeed  is  it  (for  you)  to  sit  pnticnily; 


i.  e.,  it  is  linrd  for  you  to  be  rom|)elled  to  hcor  our  insults  without  being  able  to  return 
them. 

Another  distich  dcclnrcs  the  cnac  with  which  the  assailants  will  break  through  the 
hostile  fortress ; — 

Niiiiiii  nihil  i  viiini  vine. 
An  na  lukia,  an  Itiserc, 

"  Your  fence  is  of  the  mem  vino, 
I  will  kick  it,  I  will  bleak  it  o|)cn." 

The  (bllowiiig  is  frequently  sung  n.s  they  approach  the  shore  in  their  canoes: 

XiliijiniHiji, — kciiii)  miiri  maiiilii, 
Kcnm  c  likn  i  vii  iii  lanu. 


% 


Which  wns  rendered  by  the  inter|>rclor, — 

Take  your  choice  now, — something  for  you  to  cot  comos  after, 
Something  for  you  lies  at  the  foot  of  the  mast. 

This  refers  to  the  custom  of  tying  their  prisoners  to  the  mnsts  of  their  cnnocs,  in  which 
mo<lo  they  bring  home  those  who  are  reserved  lor  their  cnnnilinl  feasts.  They  tell  their 
enemies  that  they  have  something  ready  for  thcni  to  ent  when  they  are  token  captive. 
Kemii  is  the  possessive  pronoun  lliij  in  the  form  which  applies  only  to  articles  of  food. 


98 


I 


A    VITIAxN    DICTIONARY. 


Fnost  what  hns  been  snid  in  the  introduction  to  the  Cirnniniiir,  it 
will  1)0  seon  that  this  dictionary  is  (hio  principally  to  the  lal)ors  ol" 
the  Uev.  Mr.  ('ari,'ili,  missionary  to  Laluniiha,  and  tiiat  it  wasoriifii.ally 
drawn  up  in  tho  dialect  of  that  island.  The  additions  made  to  it  are 
tho.so  hy  the  Uev.  Mr.  Hunt  for  the  dialect  ni'  Somiisotini  (marked  S.), 
and  tho.so  which  we  have  introduced  for  tiie  dialects  of  Knni  (K  ). 
Oriiliiii  (().).  Mulhiiiitd  (M.),  Mhna  (Mh.),  and  Un  (l{a).  it  shoukl 
also  be  romemitered  that  tho  dialect  of  Somusomu  omits  the  /•  in  all 
cases,  and  that  of  Matluiata  ifonerally  tho  t, — thouirh  tlie  latter  [k'CU- 
liarity  is  julmitted  by  tiie  natives  to  be  a  fault  in  pronunciation. 

Several  changes  have  also  been  made  from  Mr.  Carj^ill's  dictionary 
in  the  order  of  arranijement,  as  we  '  as  in  the  orthography,  for  reasons 
indicated  in  the  j^ranuniir.  'riiesi  altiualions  are  not  presented  in  the 
li^ht  of  improvements,  and,  in  fact,  if  considered  with  reference  to  the 
\'itian  lanifuaj^e  alone,  they  nii^^ht  justly  bear  an  opposite  desit^natiou. 
]Jut  the  pro|)riety  of  conforming,  in  I 'us  art  of  the  [)ri'seut  work,  to 
the  general  system  ado|)ted  for  the  whole,  will  be  readily  admitted. 
And  the  changes  winch  have  been  lluis  made  necessary  are  not  such 
as  to  render  it  ddlicult  for  any  one,  with  i  little  [jractico,  to  use  tiic 
present  dictionary  and  gramm  ir,  in  connc.Kion  with  the  translations 
of  the  missionaries. 

Most  (if  the  verbs  have  their  transitive  particles  ap|iendt'd  to  them  : 
five  of  these  are  given  in  an  abbreviated  form,  viz.:  lal,\,  rah-.,  tak.. 
rail.,  and  i/a/c.  In  the  dialect  of  Lakeioba  these  all  terminate  in  /,//i'i. 
as,  I'lLiiia,  rdhinn.  I've.;  in  that  of  Uewa.  in  La,  as  lalat,  riil:ii.  'I'he 
di  t  of  Somusomu  omits  the  I:,  but  otherwise  agrees  with  tiuit  of 
Lakciul)a,  as,  laiiia,  niiiKi. 


V  I  T  I  A  N   1)  I  C  T  I  0  N  A  11 Y. 


A' 

Ai,  with. 

Ar'",  immi.'  (sen  f/dfn). 

A"nn/K>li,  lo  liiirst. 

AUuci  (K.)>  '*'  """  (*'''"  /ncii). 

Aiii/i,  (|iu'cn  (st'O  yandi,  nim/i). 

Aiiiiuiiit,  the  ,>o|i|)er-plniit ;   piix-r  mclliys- 

lioiim  (sif^  i/ii i/uii/iti). 
Asi,  to    bow  lielbrc    a   rhicf  in   token   of 

respect. 
Atii,  to  ilo,  to  net, 
Atinnata  (K.),  ninn  (sec  tamdia). 
All.  I. 

All,  flew  (see  Can). 
Ann,  or  im  fm,  do  not ! 
il(/</  snti,  or  icrt  iiiis'iti,  desist. 
Aninln ,  lo  shine,  ns  (hime,  to  burn ;  sii 

aiindrr,  sn  ynvn  snrn,  it  is  l)iirned,  it 

is  entirely  destroved. 


f(i  -la,  to  hate. 

fn,  evil,  bad  ;  Ixidness,  vileness. 

^dt'a,  odd  nuinl«>rs  (itM)ve  ten,  twenty,  &c. 

(iir'nn  (S.),  lo  work. 

cnl.ii  -III,  to  lake  up,  do,  mnke. 

•  Miwil  «if  the  wnrdH  which  pr(i(M'rIy  rdinmrncp 
witli  <i  x^ill  Ik*  loiind  unfit  r  y,  hh  ytijii  Inr  iiiil,  yarn 
for  rtrw,  Ac  Tili'*  y  in  intTrly  llir  ciiplinnir  i, 
whicii  in  Vitiiin  it*  trciinrnily  prrhxcil  to  ninny 
worilf,  hut  not  :tr>-orflintr  to  iiny  kni^wn  ttynlcni, 
ami  with  no  iipjmnnt  obji'i-t  licyoncJ  vane  of*  pro. 
nunciation. 


("(/.(/,  hand  or  arm  (used  only  of  chiefs). 

&daf'(i  (Un.),  Imd. 

rnknn,  a  rei'f. 

o(/,T,  upwards,  above,  over. 

<%//.('  -fii,  lo  dij;,  or  raise  up. 

(nknmhii,  to  hurst. 

^iiln,  any  thing  empty,  ns  n  bottle,  box,  &c. 

cii/nirai,  a  |)ool, 

CnliniH,  to  burst. 

f(//o  -IV;,  to  pour  in  ;  to  sup. 

raniii,  the  outrigger  of  a  cniioc. 

cnmln;  to  go  up  ;  fniiiltc  i'n/.r,  to  rise,  as 
the  mixHi. 

tV(Hi/w,  lo  olFer,  present. 

ciimlKk'iimlii),  an  olVering. 

famtinm  (K.),  a  flag,  a  banner. 

FamliDn,  outside. 

^anilrii,  to  rise,  ascend,  spring,  grow. 

ciinn  -inn,  to  carry,  letch,  take ;  i'nun  mat, 
bring  hither. 

^iiijn,  n  span,  to  span. 

&IIJII-IA  (S.),  ginger. 

^U}jgn,a  colli ribulion, — an  article  of  Iraflic, 
contributed  by  an  individual,  when 
I  his  trilx-  is  exchanging  pro|H'rty  with 

I  anolhcr. 

ciiiignrii,  hard,  as  the  kernel  of  an  old 
'  cocoa-nut. 

ciitji,  wind  ;  fat/i  a  vunii  !  (n  phrase  used 
I  ns  an  exclamation),  wind  is  its  foun- 

dation. 

cniji  -iia,  to  lie  blown  by  the  wind. 

^niji)  (U.),  the  shrub  from  which  turmeric 
is  derived,— t'HrcKWrt. 

^ara  -In  nnd  'tuk.,  to  clear  the  grass  from 
I  a  road,  to  mnke  a  path. 


II.     I  I 


VFTIAN    DICTIONARY. 


393 


Sarafarti,  to  despoil  a  ix-rsoii  of  his  pro. 

pcrty. 
Sarifiiri,  ot)Cilionl :  the  noise  of  a  forge, 
i^iiii,  a  cockroaoli. 
<r««  (S.  ami  l{.),  no,  not. 
&M  t'uufdit,  (()).,  lund-lircczc,  dew. 
^iiiim/KMi,  aUsuiit,  not  lirro. 
Huiira  voit  (O.),  a  younj;  man. 
nirii,  what. 

oivii,  a  limit,  boundary  ;  I"  lend. 
^(ivti,  a  storm  of  wind,  a  hurricane. 
&ivaiu,  a  rustling  noise. 
Saviilfi,  to  eradieatc. 
feai'iii,  pale,  pallid,  corpse-like. 
Fd'Clerii  (L.),  a  plain. 
cri'fj/i^ii,  peace,  case,  cpiietness. 
rWi'ico,  li)od   of  one    kinil   only,  ns    yam 

without  (ish,  and  vice  versa. 
Tfi,  who. 
Femlic  -Id,  to  cut. 
Gemini  i>t  i'l'fii  •nil;.,  to  sliakc  olF. 
rc!j/;(i,  erect ;  to  lil\  up. 
^ojgii,  iiitii'h  ;  to  lirenthe,  to  snnlf. 
^eijgii   (U.),   tiirhear,   desist:    (a    word   of 

proliiliition  like  una). 
^cijgM'tijpii,  the  pit  of  the  stomach. 
^eriffunili,  breathless, — the  asthma, 
revr,  to  ap|)ear. 
^crri'rie,  eaves  of  a  house. 
^ciii  -tiiii,  to  (Minr. 
fen,  fciit'cu  -til,  to  carve,  to  probe, 
fovi,  the  south  wind. 
feivii,  to  sit. 
fciraf'ruM,  a  seat. 
fjrt,  to  run. 
?«'*/«  (K.),  rent,  torn  ;  an  aperture,  breach, 

rent. 
fikd,  a  disease  of  the  eyes. 
Sikavatii,    blind, — from    fika    and    vatii, 

stone. 
Sila  -ta,  to  shine. 
fi/i,  to  cut. 

fimlxi,  to  Ik;  blown  by  the  wind,  to  ascend. 
fimlif  (S.),  the  hip. 
fimlii,  to  dance  because  of  having  slain  nn 

enemy ;  n  war-song. 
fimhii'ivihi  (O.),  to  sing  a  war-song. 

00 


"/«<;,  a  lamp,  a  light. 

~i>i<ji  -I'll,  to  place  upon  or  alxjve. 

riixiii,  rude,  irrev(!rent. 

Ciii,  afloat;  -va,  to  float. 

Ciiit'iii,  to  steam. 

<"/i'",  a  sbell-lish,  an  oyster. 

Civi  'Ui,  to  cut  otr,  to  pare. 

civo,  ilownwards. 

ciriK'ifiii/d,  to  sound. 

rivii,  nine. 

t'iiiii  •siiifiinilii,  ninety. 

CO,  grass. 

^oi\'},  lieep. 

cia'W.'u, to  prepare;  all  (sec  fyAo and  c^o/iO- 

i'okn). 
'iikn.  (11.),  to  dart,  shoot,  throw  a  spenr. 
r'/kiirakr,  to  dig  de<'p;  an  inner  lence. 
""/.(',  up|K^r  branch  of  a  tree. 
I'likid,  to  gather  together,  take  up. 
foko  -ra,  to  prepare. 
fokni'nkn,  all. 
^iikiii'oki),  l>ead. 
Citkin-(i/ii,    to    assemble,    to    unite,    to    Ix- 

friends. 
(W(;.  -til,  to  carry  on  the  shoulder. 
i^itmlHi  -III,  ;o  throw  water  upon,  to  dash  as 

water. 
Moulin),  to   make  a  noise  by  clappinc  the 

liands  together. 
roiiiln)  -III,  to  cover. 
^oiii/Hxa,  covetous. 
^oiiiIk)  -Ifvii,  a  coward. 
fiiiii,  floor  of  a  house. 
Cinii/uu-n,  an    ambush,   from   fo,  tii,  and 

/iiwii,  a  net. 
fo>)tifiii/iint,  thorny. 
aiiiaiiii,  a  barb. 
fori  -ta,  to  bind ;   the  sinnct   that   fastens 

the  thatch  of  a  house. 
I'lirifori,  rigging  of  a  canoe. 
fiini,  to  singe. 
foiii'ouvi,  grateful. 
fnvr,  an  oyster. 
I^iivi,  a  gil>. 

fori  -a,  to  cut  or  break  olFn  branch. 
fovH  -ta,  to  (loek. 
fiit'u,  a  disease  of  the  eyes  (used  of  chiefs). 


394 


PHILOLOGY. 


liike  -td,  to  dig. 

?ulti,  o  fork,  a  |)olo  for  setting  a  canoe. 

^umbiii'iitnbii,  €imba£imba,  liudcs,  place 

of  soiila. 
!u>ulni,  anger ;  angry. 
^iiijii  -ma,  to  hug,  embrace. 
^uru,  to  enter,  to  pass,  to  go  in  and  out ; 

(R.),  to  string  flowers  on  a  garland. 
iitriifitni,  a  coat  or  trowsers, — Eurojican 

clothing. 
cina,  to  stoop,  bend  down,  look  down. 
Siivai,  bending  down. 


E 


E,  verbal  particle  (sec  Grammar). 

E,  particle  used  with  numerals. 

Ea,  if. 

£fV,  to  hitch  about,  to  part  gently. 

Ei,  here.     (It   is   always   preceded  by  a 

preposition.) 
Ei,  yes. 
Ema,  yes,  il  is. 
Ena,  if. 

Eo£ira,  a  mound. 
Eomba,  innumerable. 
Evi  -ta,  to  kill. 
Evu,  dust. 


I 


/,  in,  with,  on,  upon,  by,  of,  to. 

la,  iawe,  to,  yes. 

Ika,  a  fish. 

Ikai  (Ra.),  no,  not. 

Ike,  mallet  for  beating  cloth. 

Ikei,  this. 

Hi  or  u-ili,  to  number,  read. 

IloHo,  gloss,  glossy. 

lya,  straight, — or,  not  much  bent. 

Iri,  iriiri,  a  fan ;  to  fan. 

Iro,  to  peep,  look  slyly. 

Isaisa,  a  word  of  disapprobation. 

Ivi,  the  name  of  a  tree,  the  large  chestnut. 


[In  Somusomu,  and  in  many  parts  of 
Vaiiua-lcvii,  the  /.■  is  never  pronounced,  its 
place  Iwing  supplied  by  a  slight  catching  of 
the  breath,  as  in  the  Samoan  and  Hawaiian.] 

Ka,  sign  of  the  past  tense  of  verbs ;  some- 
ii..  ?s  used  with  the  present. 

K<i,  and ;  with. 

Kd,  thing, — also,  n  contraction  for  kakana, 
llxxl, — as,  a  kenilru  kd,  their  food. 

Ka€a,  a  crack. 

Kafi-va,  to  call,  name. 

Kafo,  to  despise. 

Kafn,  a  tree,  stick,  wood.     (See  kau.) 

Kdi,  with. 

Kai  or  kai/a,  to  tell,  say. 

Kai,  a  native  of  any  place, — as,  kai-La- 
kemlm,  a  Lakemba  man. 

Kai,  kni-mbia,  kai-mlina,  kai-vivi,  kai- 
vatulra,  kai-tn,  names  of  diflerent  spe- 
cies of  shell-fish. 

Kniktii  (Ra),  strong. 

Kaikainaki-ruwarawa,  obedience. 

Kailii-vak,  a  shout,  to  shout. 

Kdkii,  a  parrot. 

Kakavilie,  adhesive, 

Kakana,  food. 

Kakasa,  not  slippery. 

Kake,  an  outer  wrapper  or  cover. 

Kakii,  to  scratch. 

Kakua,  a  word  of  prohibition,  as,  forbear ! 
do  not !     (Sec  aiia.) 

Kida,  the  declension  of  the  sun. 

Katavo,  a  rat. 

Kalnu'a  -Ca,  to  step  over. 

Kali,  a  pillow. 

Kali  -a,  to  separate,  to  wean ;  to  ransom. 

Kato,  to  whistle. 

Kalokalo,  a  star. 

Kaloii,  a  god,  divinity,  spirit. 

Kalomjaia,  a  blessing. 

Kama  (O.),  hot,  to  burn. 

Kam/xi  'In,  to  climb. 

KamUikatnha,  a  ladder. 

Kambalu,  bent. 


Ul'JfJiJL 


V  I  T  I  A  N   DICTIONARY. 


395 


Kam/xisii,  torn. 

Kaiiih'  -la,  to  iidhcre, 

KiDiilirli,  to  l)ri'!ik,  crack,  injure. 

Kiimhi/iinisii,  spri'iul  out. 

Kambiikiiinbu,  mist,  misty. 

Kambiila  (R.),  tortoise. 

Kamhirctki,  to  sow. 

KnmikamU'<i,  sweet,  delicious, 

Kcimomo,  broken. 

Kumiiiiiiija,  riches,  treasure. 

Kami,  kii/iia,  to  eat. 

Kii/uikanu,  to  cat ;  food. 

KdnamlHikiita,  a.  cannibal. 

Kuniiivdmbu,  to  fast  through  the  day,  and 

cat  only  at  night. 
Kancii/avaviila,  a  temple. 
Kantiu,  to  run. 
KandafUa,  to  escape,  as  fishes  through  the 

meshes  of  a  net. 
KiDuhivi,  to  run  to  bring  a  |)erson  or  thing. 
Kimr/c,  an  unri|)c  cocoa-nut. 
Kamlresu,  torn. 
KandiktDuU,  delicious. 
Kaniliijii,  rotten. 
Kani-mbula,  a  ransom. 
Kanikiiitia,  a  stone. 
I'anusi,  saliva;  to  spit. 
Kao,  thoughtful,  intelligent;  to  think. 
Kara,  a  long   pole  by  which   canoes  are 

pro|>cllcd;  -va,  to  propel  a  canoe. 
Karakaraiva,  green,  blue. 
Kari  -a,  to  scrape. 
Kara,  prickly  heat. 
Kanika,  fern. 
Karusa,  destroyed. 
Kdsa,  aground,  to  run  aground. 
Kasii,  branches  of  the  piper  methysticum. 
Kasana,  a.  handle. 

Kasari,  stem  of  a  bunch  of  cocoa-nuts. 
Kasii,  crack. 

Kasokaso,  a  species  of  yam. 
KiUiiktita,  warm;  warmth;  fever. 
Katakaland,  centipede. 
Katalait  (O.),  lirst  meal,  breakfast. 
Kata/oma,  to  drown. 
Katambii,  to  belch. 
Kalumbulit,  to  give  a  signal  by  winking. 


KaUisnmi,  to  chirp. 

Kali  -a,  and  lak.,  to  bite. 

Kali  -viik.,  to  make  a  vigorous  effort. 

Katia,  to  choke  ;  to  burn. 

Kato,  a  basket,  box. 

Katii,  a  fathom ;  -ma,Xo  measure  by  fathoms. 

Kdluiiiba,  a  d<x)r. 

Katiivu,  to  tear,  destroy,  burst. 

Kail  -la,  to  take,  bring. 

Kail,  (O.),  n  tree,  stick,  wood. 

Kaiifaviu'avii,  a  tribute. 

Kail  kail,  a  burden. 

Kaiikaii mate,  to  take  an  oath. 

Kaiikaiiica,  strength,  strong. 

Ktiiildii,  forest. 

Kaiisiisii,  a  female  who  has  Just  been  con- 
fined. 

Kava,  a  roll  of  sinnet. 

Kant,  dust. 

Kdviidi,  to  curse,  to  utter  malignant  wishes 
or  orders ;  curses. 

Kaica,  offspring,  posterity. 

Kauai,  a  nmt  resembling  the  potato. 

Katrakdtca,  a  bridge. 

Kaicakawa,  a.  kind  of  fish. 

KawakawaketuiifdUoh,  the  name  of  a 
month  answering  nearly  to  July. 

Kaicakatagdve,  same  as  the  preceding. 

Kawawakdlailai  (?),  August. 

Kawiiwakdlai/ai  (qu.  levu  ?)  September. 

Kaivamboka,  kawai/ali,  destruction,  extinc- 
tion. 

Kai/a,  to  say. 

Kayakaija,  a  saying. 

Kayavi,  afternoon,  evening. 

Ac,  if  (used  with  the  past  tense), 

AV,  kei,  particles  prefixed  to  some  of  the 
pronouns. 

Krimami,  keilou,  we.     (See  Grammar.) 

Keiraii,  we  two. 

Kclckele,  an  anchor,  anchorage. 

Kelitii,  to  heap  up,  to  pile. 

Keli  -a,  to  dig ;  a  ditch. 

Kciiiii,  thy  (used  of  eatables  only.  See 
Grammar.) 

Kemiiiiiloii,  ye. 

Kemiindrau,  ye  two. 


396 


PHILOLOGY. 


Kemitnu,  yc ;  (to  chiefs),  thou. 

Keiia,  his,  hers,  its  (used  like  kemii). 

Keiuhi,  hrli't,  kcHdatOi',  hctiiluii,  wo.  (Sec 
Ciiainni.ir.) 

Kriiiliirii,  hitiini^  kriu,  we  two. 

Kenilm,  h iiihalmi,  their  ([lUirnl  o( Kcnii). 

Kciiilrnii,  (irthcm  two  (dual  o(  koiii). 

Kcnilni,  to  snore. 

Km;  to  bubl)le,  as  boilingwntcr  or  breakers. 

Kire  -«,  to  lieij;,  iui|ili)re. 

Kcrrkcie,  to  l)eg  ;  a  petition. 

AVs«,  to  prepare  native  cloth,  to  statrsj/  or 
color  it. 

Krsakcsa,  the  board  on  which  the  cloth  is 
stain  ped. 

Kvsii,  the  back  part  of  the  head. 

K<tc  (().),  a  bni;. 

Kcvckcve,  a  present,  gift,  religious  ollering ; 
nikkevi kciv, a\nAisc  built ovora grave. 

Kivou,  to  go  down. 

Kcnikrfii,  a  spear. 

A7,  to. 

Kie,  a  mat. 

Kikila,  teased,  perplexed. 

Kikisi),  to  limp. 

Ki/ii,  to  know. 

Ki/i,  ki/iki/i,  becoming. 

Ki/i,  kiri,  to  rub  with  the  hand. 

Kiiiild,  to  order. 

Kiiidiitdla,  to  1)0  astonished. 

Ki/ii/iiiiic'ii,  to  break,  as  day. 

Ki/ii,  from,  by,  in  possession  of,  witli. 

Kiiii  -tti,  to  pinch,  to  rattle. 

Kiiiofa,  to  seize  by  the  throat. 

Kiri  -mi,  to  hold  under  the  arm. 

Kisi,  a  removal,  to  remove. 

Kiso,  lame,  lameness ;  to  limp. 

Kitnki/iii,  to  persevere. 

Kiiii,  to,  tow.irds. 

Kii'i,  to  turn  the  head,  to  glance  at ;  a 
look,  glance. 

Ko,  thou. 

A'o,  a  prefix  to  proper  names  in  the  nomi- 
native. 

Kofo,  covetous. 

Abe,  a  prefix  to  some  pronouns  (sec  Gram- 
mar). 


Koikoia,  he,  she,  it ;  therefore. 
Kinriika  (Mb.),  they  two. 
Kokom,  koiokoro,  a  wound. 
Kokosi,  sport,  play  ;  to  play. 
Ko/(i  -til,  ti'  cut  or  sever  with  a  siring. 
Ko/i,  a  dog. 
Knndii,  to  eat  fish  raw. 
Ki»i(/idii,  to  bark,  to  squeal. 
Konnkont),  cross,  peevish. 
Knrn,  refuse,  leavings, 
Knra  or  knt<i,  a  preparation  of  old  cocoa-nut. 
Kori),  a  hundred  cocoa-nuts. 
Hum,  a.  city,  fortress,  fortified  town. 
Kt)So  •V(i,  to  cut,  to  clip. 
Kusoiir/6/<i,  to  circumcise. 
Kotii,  the  dregs  of  the  tiijgomi  (piper  met.) 
Koli  -/(ik.,  to  cut. 

Kuto  -ra,  to  place,  lay ;  to  lie,  remain, 
Kove  -«,  to  snatch,  take  by  force. 
Kdvu,  clothing  ;  to  clothe, 
Kua,  to-day, 

Kua,  n  word  of  prohibition  (sec  kdkfia). 
Ki/e/io,  to  shake  any  thing. 
Kid,  blind. 

KiiiUi,  the  cuttle-fish,  sepia, 
Kuku,   nail  ;    kiikii-iii-liya,   nail    of   the 
finger;  kiiku-iii-ydVd,  nail  of  the  toe. 
Kuku,  to  hold  by  the  nails, 
Kiikiina,  to  commit  suicide. 
Ki/kiirii,  to  drop. 
Kukut<iknulrmi,  the  thumb. 
Kukutakaisiiu,  the  little  finger. 
Kuld,  to  circumcise, 
Kiilti,  kulakulttta,  red, 
Kuli,  skin,  bark  of  tree, 
Kiihiiolu,  a  kind  of  dove. 
Kumliila,  to  take  hold  of,  cleave  to. 
Kitnil/Oii,  smoke. 
Kumhii,  the  end  of  n  house, 
Kiimhti,  confusion, 
Kiimlmkutnhu,  to  rise, 
Kumtiukiimlm-iii-liya,  elbow, 
Kii  mbukumhu-ni-yava,  heel. 
Kitmi,  beard. 
Kii m iniondie^  bea rd less. 
Kumuiii,  to  collect,  to  gather. 
Kuna  -ta,  to  strangle. 


i' 


VITIAN   DICTIONARY. 


397 


Kmidni,  to  grunt. 

Kuiie,  to  conceive,  l)eget. 

Knra,  a  tree  used  in  dyeing  red. 

Kurati,  reddish. 

Kiirc,  to  slmkc. 

Kiirekiirc,  to  wng  the  head,  to  shake. 

Kuritju,  a  yam. 

Knro,  an  earthen  pot. 

Ktini,  kuriikiini,  thunder. 

Kunikurdii,  fliglitiness  j  Highly,  restless. 

Kusa,  to  hasten. 

Kiitii,  a  louse. 

Kara,  a  disordered  stomach. 

Kiivu,  smoke,  spray,  steam. 

Kiivui,  to  smoke  any  thing. 


Lafa,  sail. 

Lailtii,  little. 

Liiiro,  land-crab. 

Lfiivd,  to  dash,  throw  away. 

Ldivi,  very. 

Laka  (S.),  blind  of  one  eye. 

Lakdlukd,  inenning,  signification. 

Ltiko,   to   go,   to   proceed ;   tako   mai,  to 

come. 
Lokbva,  to  go  for,  to  go  to  bring  any  thing. 
Lakovataiidnil'tku,   to    go    backward,   to 

backslide. 
Laid,  uninhabited,  empty. 
Lali^,  to  appear. 
Laltiija,  capacious. 
Ld/iiijii,  the  outer  fence  of  a  house. 
Lalakdi,  basket  or  mat  on  which  food  is 

placed  ;  hence,  a  table. 
Lali,  native  drum  formed  of  the  hollowed 

trunk  of  a  tree. 
La/i/ii/im/ii,  to  strike  the  thigh  with  the 

hand. 
Lambari,  storm,  strong  wind. 
Lamlxi  -ta,  to  kill  treacherously,  to  murder. 
LainMatnhe-tii-lhja,  a  sinew  of  the  hand. 
Lanr/(ini,  to  throw. 

Lanile,  to  bo  astonished  ;  astonishment. 
Lamli,  to  choose. 

100 


iMnrlilamlia,  durable. 

Laga  (O.),  go  on,  keep  on,  proceed  with  ; 
luya  nn  ineke,  go  on  with  the  dancing. 

Lapnla))a  -tiik.,  to  reprove,  admonish. 

LtigiUd,  to  raise. 

Ldij^ntagsia,  hilmjga,  not  compact. 

Liiijgirc,  gravel. 

lAiijf'uiijgui,  a  fit,  distemper. 

L(iiji,  sky,  heaven  ;  rain. 

Ldyi/iiJii,  to  prosier,  succeed. 

Im^o,  a  fly. 

Ltisa,  to  be  easy,  feel  at  ease. 

L(ise,  lime,  coral. 

Lasrldsea,  hard,  as  wood. 

Liisika,  to  appear  in  siglit. 

Lasii  (R.),  a  lie,  falsehood;  to  lie. 

Ldlia,  concealed. 

Ltilia-tiitii,  to  blow  aga'nst ;  to  shade, 

Liitilatia,  io  encompass. 

Ldit-tii,  to  pierce  with  a  spear. 

iMiifoka,  pierced. 

Ldiikana,  eatable. 

Laiiltiu,  the  place  of  a  wound. 

Laiita,  to  injure. 

Laittdki,  to  hurt  by  a  blow  with  the  hand. 
Lduvafa,  hurt  from  a  blow. 
Ltiixi,  any  article  of  food  eaten  with  an- 
other,  as    yam    with    fish,   and    vice 
versa. 
Lai-e,  larc/ave-ta,  to  raise. 
JUire,  /nice,  a  feather. 
Linr-tn-matc,  a  ceremony  performed  alter 
the  death  of  any  one, — as  building  a 
canoe,  making  a  feast,  and  the  like. 
Ldvi,  to  bring  fire. 
Lavo,  money. 
Ldvitsuyii,  to  go  tlirough. 
Liiiiii,  a  fishing-net ;  an  ambush. 
Ltiiidki  -till,  to  betray. 
LMcalawa,  a  company  of  travellers. 
Latviilaiia,  a  spider. 
iMUaiidim,  a  bird  worshipped  as  a  god. 
Lea,  to  go  (ceremonial). 
Lea,  a  particle  of  interrogation  (ceremonial). 

(See  lu.) 
Lxa  -ta,  to  extract. 
Lefa,  lost. 


**■»<* 


398 


PHILOLOGY. 


- 


Lckii,  an  age,  generation. 

Leka,  lekaleka,  short ;  brevity ;  a  dwarf. 

Lekiii,  almost,  nearly. 

Lckiitii,  land  not  under  cultivation,  wood- 
land. 

Lck,  a  lascivious  dance. 

Le/roii,  great. 

Lctcmi,  to  see,  consider. 

LcmUi,  a  tree  bearing  a  flower  which  is 
worn  ns  an  ornament. 

Lciint,  the  buttocks. 

Leijga,  to  turn  back,  turn  away. 

Lent,  a  brncelet  of  shell. 

Lcsii,  to  return. 

Lria,  blind  of  one  eye. 

LevaCi,  indignant. 

Lcriita  (M.),  ignorant  of;  not  to  know. 

Ia'IV,  to  start,  to  dodge,  to  flinch. 

Lcvii,  groat. 

Lend,  woman,  female. 

Lend,  to  see,  consider. 

Leiiasiisiiv&ki,  a  betrothed  Icmale,  a  bride. 

Leire,  a.  particle  used  in  numbering  persons. 

Lewe,  flesh. 

Leire,  the  contents  of  a  box ;  the  inhabi- 
tants of  a  town,  country,  &c., — as,  u 
lewe  ni  Skui/joii,  the  people  of  iSiim- 
boH  ;  a  leirr  ni  viiravitra,  the  inhabi- 
tants of  the  earth. 

Leue-kvii,  many. 

Lciic-lai/ui,  few. 

Leyareijii,  a  l)etrothcd  female. 

Lia  -ia,  to  steal ;  to  inquire. 

Lialia,  fiKjlish,  absurd;  folly. 

LiCa,  to  stir  alwut. 

Likii,  the  cincture  or  dress  of  women. 

Lilili,  to  swing. 

Limn,  five. 

LiiiKi-saijaviiln,  fifly. 

Linili,  to  break  or  burst ;  a  thunderclap. 

Lit/ii,  the  arm,  hand,  finger. 

Lipa,  narrow. 

lAjjarma/dii,  having  a  finger  cut  ofT. 

Liseija,  to  knock  with  the  lingers. 

Lisi,  a  black  pigment ;  black  native  cloth. 

Liu,  to  phii'k  out. 

Liva,  a  flash, — lightning ;  to  flash. 


Livi  -a,  to  pour;  to  swing. 

Liiia,  to  blow,  as  wind. 

IjO,  Ido,  an  ant. 

Lo,  (|uietly,  secretly,  suddenly. 

1m(I,  a  cloud  ;  dirt. 

Lnalod,  black,  dirty. 

Loti-iii-niala,  the  eye-ball. 

iMkii,  heavy  breakers  on  a  reef. 

Lokd  (S.),  an  egg. 

Litkiltiki,  lame,  unable  to  walk. 

lj)kitiiij(tm\  a  felling  axe. 

Ijtknioko,  a  child's  pillow. 

Lnkomikoiiii,  harmless,  righteous. 

L/iku,  lokiivi  -Sa,  to  appoint  a  time. 

IjAo,  to  fust ;  'Vak.,  to  fast  through  love 
f<)r  on  absent  person. 

Lolo,  to  flow  as  the  tide. 

ImIo,  a  preparation  of  the  pulp  of  the  cocoa- 
nut  used  as  a  seasoning  for  puddings. 

I^ldkii,  to  (lie  at  llie  death  of  another. 

Lolnio,  a  store-house. 

Jji/omti,  love,  affection,  kindness,  mercy. 

Lo/oii,  to  stoop,  Ixiw  down  (used  only  of  a 
woman  who  has  lost  her  husband). 

Ix)m<i,  the  mind,  the  centre,  the  inside; 
i  lotiia,  within. 

Lomiiasa  (.'),  to  attend,  listen  ;  to  be  stable. 

Lomukdo,  having  a  thoughtful,  intelligent 
mind. 

Lomahma-ni-mlio>ji,  midnight. 

Loma-ni-korn,  a  chief's  house. 

Loih/ki  -ka,  to  wring,  to  milk. 

Lombi  -a,  to  fold. 

Loiiilio,  to  squeeze  out,  to  express. 

ImiiiIxjIohiIio,  soil,  as  moistened  sand. 

Lomo,  to  dip. 

L^mui'i,  a.  flood  ;  a  painted  face. 

homnii,  to  dip,  to  inundate. 

IjDtno-ni-liivii,  sunk. 

Loija,  a  Ix'dslead,  a  mat, — the  elevated  dais 
on  which  tlicy  sleep  ;  a  piece  of  ground 
on  which  any  thing  is  planted  ;  a  loga 
uvi,  a  yam  bed ;  a  loija  mbili,  a  bed 
of  the  arum. 

i.oi)«,  a  sign  of  the  plural. 

Loijga,  n  club. 

Lopgi,  the  inner  part  of  a  houie. 


VITIAN    DICTIONARY. 


399 


Loua,  to  pour  out,  to  empty. 

Lovo,  loroyd,  a  fiirnncc,  n  nnlivo  oven. 

Lin'oiia  (S.),  to  bury. 

Lovuii,  a  pit,  n  liole  (illpd  with  wnter. 

Lu  or  li,  n  pnrtido  of  iiiterrogntion, — as, 

(I  fava  Id  ?  what  ia  it  ?  or  a  cava  li. 
Lud,  a  pit. 

Lalua,  to  vntnil  (qu.  lulua  ?) 
Liikii,  tlio  mucus  of  the  nose. 
Litkii,  to  sciut'ozo. 
Liilii,  nil  owl. 

Lii/iilii,  to  drop,  ns  the  seeds  of  a  plant. 
Liima,  shame ;  ashamed. 
Ltiiiii,  a  soo-wet^l. 
Liimuliimii,  to  anoint. 
Lilt II,  to  fall,  drop. 
LiitiiHiIrd,  an  abortion. 
Liiva  -ta,  to  strip,  take  ofT. 
Lmui/iii'ii,  old  sinnel,  mat. 
Luraliivtiki,  to  exclmngc, 
Liiviii/iimlif,  naked. 
Liivr,  a  child,  a  boy  or  girl. 
Liivr,  n  kind  of  pii>con. 
Liivr  ■<(,  to  breed,  lo  increase. 
LuiTiiii/nli,  or  liive-tii-iUi;  fatherless;  an 

outcast. 
Luvii,  to  sink. 


M 

Ma,  this,  here. 
Ma,  to  {*•  ignorant  of. 
Ma,  to  give. 
Md,  ashamed. 
MiKiica  (.S.),  old. 
Ma(tt,  empty. 

Mat'idii,  expanded,  intelligent,  open,  clear. 
Mucima,  space  l)etwecn,  interstice. 
Miit'e,  soli ;  the  husk  of  fruit. 
MaMr,  finished. 
Maccndru,  hiccough. 

Mafii,  sullicieiit ;  not  hungry,  full ;  abun- 
dance, fullness. 
ilf«j,  from ;  hither. 

Miii  (for  solia-mai),  give  me,  give  here. 
Makalii'ata,  bright ;  brightness. 


Miikari,  clear  (as  water),  lucid;  clearness. 
IMiikaiKi,  old. 

Make,  a  noise,  lo  make  o  noise. 
Makcrev&ki    (U.),     harmonious,    well.ar- 

rnnged. 
Miiko,  lo  anoint  or  smear  the  body. 
Makiimhii,  a  grandchild. 
Makiifii,  well  done,  |)erformed  with  energy. 
Makiitii,  lo  desire  to  do  any  thing  properly. 
Mtilii,  uWnU)  thing,  a  hair;  7nala  ni  iilii, 

hair  of  Ihe  head. 
Ma/di,  lo  scorch,  scorched. 
Maluku mlrii,  speaking  in  a  low  tone. 
Ma/ama/ii,  a  mote,  chip, — shavings. 
Maliniialnuii,  early  in  the  morning. 
Malanilot'i,  a  letter  (from  mala,  ni,  and 

tiki,  to  write). 
Malaija,  a  fan  made  of  sinnet;  the  tail  of  a 

P'K- 
Mahnja,  lo  preach. 

Malcka,  palatable,  pleasing  to  the  taste. 
Mnliiiinii,  a  smile  ;  lo  smile. 
Mall),  native  cloth  colored. 
MiiIdIo,  (lying-fish. 

i1/(//iOT,  until ;  shortly,  presently;  gently. 
Malitvialii,  shade,  shady. 
Malumahhjii,  weakness,  lowliness ;  weak, 

defeated. 
Maliiitiii,  sort,  elastic. 
Malinjii,  a  club. 
Mama,  lo  chew ;  to  steam. 
MaiiHi,  light,  not  heavy. 
Mania,  a  ring. 
Jifamiu'ii,  dry,  empty. 
Mdiiiiiloki,  a  joint. 
Mamafiiifa,  trade-winds. 
Mamaidii,  happy  ;  happiness. 
Mamari,  thin;  thinness. 
Mainatiui,  old. 
Mai/ii,  a  species  of  banana. 
Mamhii,  the  breast,  bosom,  chest. 
Mamhiilua,  a  full-grown  |)crson. 
Maim,  a  miracle. 
Maiiii,  a  salt-wnter  crab. 
Mandii,  i  manila,  iM'fore,  in  front;  formerly. 
Manila,  manilamanila  -na   and   -tak.,  to 

precede,  go  before,  go  forward. 


r  i 
;  f 


5      1 


400 


PHILOLOGY. 


MAndende,  spread,  open. 
Mamha!  (cxclain.)  good  !  well  done! 
il/nWra,  old,  worn  (ns  n  garment),  wilhcreil. 
Manilrui,  u  kind  of  food  innde  of  vegclobles 

buried  in  the  earth  and  left  to  ferment. 
Manr/ni/r,  a  sacrifice ;  -tak.,  to  sacrifice. 
Miliii/iia,  shyness,  shame ;  ashamed. 
Miiiiid  (S.),  to  think. 
MiDiiimo/iu,  a   fowl ;   an   animal  of  any 

kind. 
Mtimiitinnii,  a  streamer,  n  pennant. 
Miniifa  (Ml).),  no,  not. 
MiDjiidi,   the  dry  leaves  with  which   the 

niaiiilrai  is  covered  in  the  pit. 
MaijiiiUDji,  sinnet  braided  from  the  fibres 

of  the  cocoa-nut  husk. 
Miitjiti,  cooked  food,  provisions  for  a  feast. 
Mar)0,   to   wither   (said   of   yams) ;    dry, 

withered. 
3Tiiopi),  wise. 

Mara,  burying-place,  grave. 
Mara  -ta,  to  seize,  attack  (said  of  a  disease). 
Maraiiia,  a  lady,  a  female  chief. 
Mardii,  happy. 
Mardvii,  calm,  still,  no  wind. 
Maromaro,  fearless. 
Manii,  leprosy,  leprous. 
3Tnsn,  restless,  on  account  of  heat. 
Mnsaldi,  corrupt,  putrid. 
Miisd/o,  envy,  envious. 
Masi,  native  cloth  ;  the  tree  of  whose  bark 

it  is  made  (morus  papyrifera). 
Mdiiti,  to  rub. 
Masima,  salt. 

MasumasH,  prayer,  to  pray. 
Mala,  eye,  face,  presence ;  point,  edge. 
MalaCia  (S.),   blind. 
Matai,  a  workman,  artisan,  carpenter. 
MaJaiiii,  first. 
]\Ialainivtui,  first  fruits. 
Malaka,  day-break. 
Matakii,  fatigued,  troubled. 
Matakui,  blindness,  blind. 
MalalaUai,  having  a  small  point. 
Matiddii,  pretty,  neat,  rich. 
Malalaji,  a  wedge. 
Miduleua,  lascivious. 


Mtitamafdka,  dawn,  break  of  day. 

Malandioko,  blind. 

Malanifmie,  a  pearl. 

Ma/nnikiUoii,  red. 

MataiiikoCo,  covetous. 

Mataniknro,  gate  of  a  fortress. 

Mataiiisiifii,  a  nipple. 

Mata/iiraiiua,  a  councillor,  a  messenger,  a 

herold. 
MaUuiiiiai,  a  spring  of  water, 
Malaijnali,  a  fiimily. 
Matasela,  blind,  blindness. 
Matasrie,  a  snare. 
Matasoso,  covetousness. 
Matiitiri,  to  sound. 
Matnta,   to   become   strong   (said   of   the 

wind). 
Matalta,  poverty,  misery  j  poor,  indigent. 
Mataii,  right,  dexter. 
Mutaii,  an  axe. 

Molaundiitii,  a  gouge,  a  chisel. 
Matavd,  cut. 
Mataviiki,  a  disease. 
Miitaviira,  n  landing-pluco. 
Mate,  dead,  to  die  ;  death  ;  sickness. 
Matini,  intoxicated. 
Mali,  \o  ebb. 
Matia,  shallow  water. 
Matin,  to  fall  in,  as  the  earth  into  a  well 

or  pit. 
Matua,  old  ;  strongly,  vigorously. 
Mail,  firm,  constant. 
Muiimaii,  fatigue,  trouble. 
Maiimi,  mountain. 
Mam,  convalescent. 
Martxi,  to  '•ut,  injure. 
Mavoiita,  to  break. 
Mavuike,  earthquake ;  name  of  the  wife  of 

the  god  Ndcijei. 
Mbd,  a  branch  ;  -tia  (S.),  to  branch. 
M/m,  a  fence. 
M/>d,  to  quarrel. 
M/)d  -tuk.,  to  deny. 
M/xifa,  disease,  sickness ;  sick. 
MlxiCa,  a  bait ;  -na,  to  bait,  entice,  cheat. 
Mlmimlxiia,  a  maggot. 
Mbaketva,  the  pilot-fish. 


VITIAN    DICTIONARY. 


401 


Mliaki,  pcrhnps. 

Mlxikold,  tiilmkola,  the  corpse  of  an  enemy 

sluiii  in  war ;  used,  also,  as  a  conteinj)- 

tuouH  epithet. 
Mlutln,  the  male  tortoise. 
MlHilumlxUa,  hair-pricjier. 
MtxildVd,  inlHiliuiihilavu,  long  ;  length. 
M/xi/iiirii,  a  coarse,  strong  mat. 
Mluiliiva,  \'itian  name  of  separnio  stale  (?). 
MIxiU;  (IcHlli ;  to  die  (crrcnionial). 
MIxi/r,  a  spear. 
M/xi/i-u,  to  knciid,  to  rnb. 
]\I India,  foolish. 

MUi/dIo,  name  of  a  certain  sen-worm. 
MUiloln-litiliii,  n.  month  nearly  corrcs|)ond- 

ing  to  our  (VtoUr. 
MIxi/olo-lcvii,  iNoveiiibcr. 
MIxilii,  the  cheek. 
MIxiiiilxi/dvii,  lung  (see  M/xi/iivu). 
Al/idiii/iiiiiDitiiii,  (piarrelsonie. 
jMlxiiiiliiini,  to  pillage,  cut. 
MIxmi  .11,  to  press  down. 
Mlxii/i,  l()rs(H)th. 

MlHiiavi,  the  uninhabited  part  of  the  sea- 
shore. 
Mlxiri-iii-savii,  a  precipice. 
M/xisfiiKi,  a  branch. 
Mlxisiiiiilxisinja,  branchy. 
MlxisiDjUyix  crossway (from  inhusu)jn,i,of, 

and  i'a,  four). 
Mlxisii,  to  break,  tear. 
Mlxisnmlxisdka,  broken,  torn. 
Mlxilnmlxtld,  cold. 
Mlniti,  tiiolli ;  edge. 
MUtti  (U.),  an  inferior  ally,  a  dependent 

town. 
M/x(tikiili/i,  a  precipice. 
Mlxiliniikii,   an    ornament    made   of   the 

teeth  of  fish. 
MIxitinimaijiiiunji,  a.  plait  of  sinnet. 
Mlxitiiiiiiai,  verge  or  Ijank  of  a  river  or 

well. 
MIxitin  iinikolo,  wayside. 
M/xiit,  the  name  of  a  tree. 
AI/xiii,  very. 

Mlxiiisnio  (().),  to  ask  pardon. 
Mbawa,  a  banana. 

101 


Mhea  (S.),  Imbo. 

Mliiiimliianiiiiala  (S.),  eye-bull, 

Al/xri,  irreverent,  irn.'verence. 

IMIx'kn,  perhaps, 

Mlicleinlx'leidiiiliaka  (R.),  lips, 

MUli,  to  grow,  as  leaves. 

MMo,  a  crane  (bird). 

IMIiciiaiuliena,  a  marriage. 

M/x'iiit,  rubbish,  the  refuse  of  food. 

M/nra,  slow,  slowly. 

jMU-iai,  almost. 

JMUrr,  the  foot  or  leg. 

HJIiCiC,  impudent,  wicked,  [lerversc,  un- 
willing. 

Mlxiv,  priest. 

Mljtto  (Uu.),  house. 

JMIx-ua,  ten  bunches  of  bananas. 

M/x'iraiii/icirii,  a  cloud. 

M/ii,  ten  tortoises. 

MhitUa,  loathsome;  name  of  a  disease. 

M/iiiiii,  a  wave. 

MliUi,  (lesh. 

J\l/iik(),  a  disease. 

Mliild,  to  throw. 

JMhili  -nil,  to  drive  or  push. 

jMliiliijiiii,  loose,  as  earth  that  has  Ijeen 
(lug. 

Mhiln,  a  dish,  a  cup. 

Mhimlii,  heavy;  heaviness. 

Mliiiii  -«,  to  heap  up,  to  pile. 

I\l/iiii,  to  spring. 

i\lliit(i  -hik.,  to  throw  down,  to  dash. 

M/iilii  •ink.,  to  throw  down  when  fatigued. 

JWiili,  a  !)ed  of  arum-roots. 

Mldtii,  bainlmo. 

M/iitiuiUmji,  bamboo  flute. 

J\l/iiii  -til,  to  throw  away,  abandon. 

m/iij,  a  sore  or  boil. 

31/iu,  fdires  of  the  cocoa-nut  husk. 

ilfto  -kd,  to  know,  to  tind,  meet  with. 

JMIjokitla  {see  m/xiko/a). 

MlK)la,  a  hundred  canoes. 

Mtxild  (or  vihiild)  ten  fishes. 

MU>ln,  to  cut,  divide,  draw  apart. 

MMd,  leaf  of  a  cocoa-nut  tree  plaited  for 
thatching. 

MMc,  to  challenge. 


\'t 


\\\ 


408 


P  H  I  I,  O  L  ()  O  V. 


Mfm/n  -JK/,  lo  throw  stnnrs  or  sticks. 
MUJoiiiIkiIii,  till'  lop  (>('  tlio  small  house  in 

II  cniioc. 
Mhmih)  -ka,  to  sqiio'zc. 
MUwitiDlii,  rot),  ruddy  (snid  of  the  sky,  or 

n  IHTsiin's  skill). 
MI>o}iihiilii,  a  sln\  <■ ;  slavery. 
Minimi,  smi'll,  odor. 
J\l/i>iii,  night  ;  inim/'Otji,  lust  night. 
miK/ijiiiilioiji,  Miorninj;;  to-morrow. 
ISllioijk'dhii,  to  extinguish. 
MlK>i)i(tiKinii,  to  Ik'  JKiiightod. 
M/ion.ii,  linger,  angry. 
lil/ii/ifidi,  unkind,  ill-natured. 
Al/'/ri/i,  inalignnnt  wishes  or  orders. 
J\l/i'ji'),  to  paint  ;  paint ;  (Kipper. 
M/ioro,  to  refuse ;  not  lo  give. 
Mliorn.$nki)i(i,  to  break  small  {?). 
MIkisc,  to  eonsult ;  a  consultation. 
M/msi,  a  law. 

M/nis'/  -kd,  lo  nil),  to  knead. 
M/aiso  -Ink.  and  -rak.,  lo    rub,  to   break 

small. 
Mliola,  to  ap|K)rtion. 
Mfiotn,  to  pursue. 
M/niic,  to  n'pair  an  old  canoe. 
Mlioln,  a  Ix'ast ;  a  frog. 
MlK>lii-)ii-liivit,  native  oven. 
j\I/>o/oiiii,  lx)ll<ini  of  a  pot. 
Mliolurata,  crown  of  the  head. 
MIm,  a  young  C(K?oii-nul. 
Mlif,  (R.),  a  grandfather. 
M/iiKi,  an  uninhabited  place. 
Mfiutivd,  short-sighted,  da/zlcd. 
M/mr'i,  wet ;  moisture. 
Mliut'ii,  the  loins. 
MInii,  tail. 

Mhiiia,  to  come  to  land  ;  to  knot. 
Mfiiiikiti,  a  variety  of  the  hog. 
Mliitkii,  lire;  firewood,  fuel;  -na,  to  add 

fuel  to  a  fire. 
M/itiki/e,  (iregnant ;  pregnancy. 
M/iukitr-vatii,  dropsy. 
Mhiikii,  two  cocoa-nuts. 
Mliiikii,  m/ii'ikui,  a  knot ;  to  knot. 
Mhukiilamlxi,  to  kill  treacherously. 
Mbitla,  life,  to  live. 


Mlmliise,  cold  food. 

Mliiili  .11,  to  appoint  a  king. 

M/m/iii,  to  heap  up ;  lo  make  n  peace. 

MIihUihIiiiU,  a  least  made  for  a  king  at  his 

inauguration. 
ISUiiili,  the  ovula-sliell  (or  m/iitli). 
Mliiilii  -Id,  lo  bury. 
MIiiiIiiiiiIiiiIk,  lo  bury ;  thai  which  covers 

or  buries  any  thing. 
Mhiiliiinliiilii,  n  poace-oirering ;  to  present 

a  peiice-otl'ering. 
Mhiilinnhiihi,  a  species  of  banana;  also,  a 

small  shark, 
IWtiiiiiliii,  lo  devour  with  cogerness. 
Mhiiiiiliii/iii,  or  ni  hum/ill /I  III,  an  oath;  to 

make  oath. 
Mbiimhiila,  scorched. 
M/)ii7ir/i,  a  bunann. 
Mliniimi,    itihininiiihiino,   perspiration ;    lo 

[H-rspire. 
Mhiire,  ten  clubs. 
Mliiire,  a  temple,  a  council-house,  public 

house  of  reception. 
Mhiiri,  an  ant-hill. 
Mhiirinjo,  a  black  cockroach. 
Mhitni,  ten  cocoa-nuts. 
I\I/>iisa  (S.),  fire.     (See  mlmka.) 
Mliiisii,  a   plain ;    an   uninhabited   place, 

{mhiia.) 
MliiisiDiiliiisana,  same  as  aliovc. 
Mhiisi,  fetid. 

IMIiiilii,  sufiiciently  iKiiled  or  cooked. 
Ulliiitiialai  (().),  roasting  a  man  whole. 
Mliiitaiiihiitii,  food  and  pro|ierty  given  as 

compensation  to  the  carpenter  who  is 

building  a  canoe. 
Mhiitumliiila,  the  thigh. 
MhiilunihuUio  (S.),  a  thief;  lo  steal. 
jMhiilii,  the  centre,  midst. 
Mhiitu,  mhiitomliiifO,  dark  ;  darkness. 
Mhiitii,   a   marriage   ceremony   in   which 

properly  is  exchanged  by  the  friends 

of  the  bride  and  bridegroom. 
Mliiitu  -ka,  to  stamp. 
Mi,  lo;  that,  so  that  (sign  of  the  subjunc- 
tive). 
Mia,  bitter  (used  only  of  yams.) 


1 


VITIAN    DICTIONARY. 


403 


Mm,  to  liikr  cnri"  of  rhililri'ii. 

Mit(t  (L.),  II  ihirin,  nlliiir;  (U.),  an  ciiemy. 

Mikr,  xoiijr  mill  (laiioi'. 

Mili\  tlic  liiiil  |iiirl  (pI'ii  (jikmI  lliiiij^. 

Mrlriiif/iili),  liriiwii;   liri)«iiinjss. 

J\I)/im,  t(i  sirvf. 

Miiic  (Mil.),  Innijiip. 

Mum,  thy  (oI'drinkalilpN). 

Mriniiuihii,  your  (pliiriil  iil' nii mil). 

Miiiiiinilrnii,  ymir  (diml  n\' iiiemu). 

Minn,  his  (like  iiintiii). 

Miiiiltii,  minihiiii,  ilirir  (|)lurnl  and  dual). 

Mfuri,  llir  (used  liclbrc  |irii|KT  names  and 

intcrrogiitivn  prniKnins), 
Ml,  miiiKf'ro. 

Mil;iiiiikiii,  swill ;  swilliipsa. 
Milii,  to  .scratch. 
Milaiiiilii,  (liscasod  (coroni.) 
MiMi),  healthy,  oily,  shining  with  oil. 
Alini  -ka,  to  s(|ui'ir/c. 
Mini,  to  sow  seed. 
Mill,  to  rain. 
Miiiinin,  to  drizzle. 
MiMi,  the  lip  or  end  oCany  thing. 
Mmild,  a  variety  of  the  yum. 
Mix'r,  to  sleep  ;  sleep. 
Mik'rhitu,  to  sleep  soundly. 
Miiirmnfe,  a  lied,  bedstead. 
Mot'eiiiofe-yiitiili,  sleep. 
Mokii  (K.),  necklace  of  shells. 
Moko,  a  liiuird. 

Mnkoiiioko,  neckliand  of  a  chief. 
Mukii  .ta  ((!.),  to  kill. 
Molt,  a  shaddiK'k,  a  lemon. 
Moiiio,  to  break  a  co<:oa-nut. 
Momoijgiliijgi/i,  round,  roundness. 
Mumlre  -la,  to  tease. 
Moiioka,  to  scjiieeze,  shrivel. 
Monomutio,  to  mend. 
Mnijfie,  to  Ix-  restless,  to  kick,  to  struggle. 
Moijficmoijiie,  restless. 
Moijiiimoijgi/i,  round  or  oval. 
Moijgiiiiiuygoiia,  same  as  above. 
Moiigo,  to  lie  down, — (a  word  of  anger). 
Mosamosd,  ravenous. 
Molo,  s|K!ar. 
Motic  -ka,  to  beat,  punish. 


Mii/ii  ■Ink,,  to  boat,  moke  havoc. 

Miili'ikili,  a  worm. 

MdiiiiiiiiiIii,  niiUnmoto,  n  ball  j  round. 

Moiiit,  ih(!  brain. 

Mil,  thy  (affixed  to  nouns). 

Miiiiiiiiiiiii/ti,  prow  of  a  cnnoe. 

Miiaiiiiiiii,  stern  of  a  caiioc. 

Miimiinit,  talkative. 

Miniihe,  n  gentle  breeze;  to  blow  gently. 

Miiiiilii  -kit,  to  cut  (as  a  stick  or  linger). 

Miiiia  or  miiiiin,  to  speak ;  u  word,  Ian- 

giiage. 
Mini,  lieliind,  to  follow. 
Miirinuiri,  to  follow. 
Mum,  watery  (used  of  the  orum  n  ol). 
MiisH  -ka,  to  cut,  break. 
Miisii,  mouth. 
Miisiimiisu,  sullen,  sulky. 

N 

Nil,  sign  of  the  future. 

Sii,  art.,  the  (same  as  a). 

A'li,  a  word  used  by  children  to  their  mother- 

Kiiifii,  when. 

Ntikita,  to  expect,  to  do  any  thing  one's 

self(?). 
Namakit,  to  chew. 
Numn,  the  spoce  between  the  reef  and  the 

shore. 
Niimii,  musquito. 
Nana,  purulent  matter. 
N'tiKMi  (Mb.)  yesterday. 
Niisiiira,  to  knock  with  the  fingers. 
Nali,  tiaimti,  to  watch,  to  be  vigilant. 
Naiva,  to  (loat. 

iVf/ (rrt//«,  ««/irtjm(/a,  to  attend ,  to  remember. 
Nail,  a  word    used   by  children   to   their 

grandmother. 
Nuii-tuilai  (O.),  aunt  by  the  mother's  side. 
Nilji,  e.Ncrements. 
NiliUi,  to  nurse. 

NildfoniMcvii,  a  coward  ;  cowardly. 
Ndai,  a  lie;  -na,  to  lie. 
Nrlaimhiri,  a  snare,  a  trap  ;  to  ensnare. 
Ndaindai,  false. 


404 


Pll  1 1. (>  I, Oil  y. 


Sdiiimliii,  nn  uninhnlHird  plnco.  ' 

Xddiiiiliii  (\\h.),  lo.iliiy  i  (H.)  liyo-nnil-byo, 

prpirnily. 
Niliikti,  lest. 
^iluk<ti,  II  Ixiw, 
Hdtikili,  In  liill  |)nmlrii(c. 
yddkijii,   III   ii|ii'ii    lliu   mouth  ;    to   gapo, 

)l(;il|lC. 

Siliikii,  till'  Iwick. 

X'/ii/iiina,  to  giijH',  ngii|>c. 

Niliilinjii,  to  o|K'ii. 

Si/ii/f,  II  rii|K'. 

Sitii/i,  tell  iMllllr.rwIirs. 

Xihilnjd,  the  car. 

Ai/ii/iijiitit/i,  ticiil'. 

NiUtlii,  iiruiii  I'siMik'iitiim. 

A(/<t/i)iiio,  8unk,  ilrowiifil. 

Ai/dm/itiiolii,  iiimlile  to  wolk, 

A</(iiii(/i,  Id  liijnt. 

i\'t/iiiiiii,  nice. 

Ai/aniu,  iiiliiiiiiiiKliimii,  red. 

AiltiHtln^  soil, 

Kiltiitdiivui,  (li.-iiilx'tlii'iit,  lazy. 

Adiioiin,  wooden  dish. 

Ai/tiiimjd,  to  look  steiidily. 

Adiiiii,  a  loiioii  lor  thi^  eyes. 

Add i/i/iidd iiii,  II  hiilllu. 

Addid,  iidd/iddi'ii,  sli|)|iery. 

Addii,  II  (lisli, 

Addro,  to  prohibit,  prevent  j  prohiliition. 

Adiiid,  a  rusliiiin  sound. 

Adiiii/d,  sort  (used  only  ol"  fixid). 

Adiiliivd,  u  eowiird,  cowardly. 

Adaiu  lo  have  aliilily  to  do,  or  to  Ix)  in  tho 
hiihit  ol'duiiii;  any  thing. 

Adaii,  n  parly  of  workmen. 

iVf/(i//  .//(I,  to  coimnit  Ibrnicatiun  or  adul- 
tery. 

Admit II tjd,  lascivious. 

Addit/iud,  tidduldijuiie,  to  commit  adul- 
tery. 

Allured,  liable  to  injury. 

Adciiildto,  a  virgin. 

Adiiunddu(ii,  i>erishable. 

Addiisiini,  a  famine. 

Adauve,  a  female  cousin. 

Adduvere,  to  tempt ;  temptation. 


Adiiiiirrr,  alien, 

Aditi'r,  to  (low. 

AdiitTd,  comiuered. 

Addtrtii  (().),  passage,  chnnnol,  atrnit. 

AdiiiDiidi,  Mr,  idleness. 

Addiiii,  the  conch-sliell. 

A'/"ii//,  a  pit  or  well. 

Adiiini,  name  of  ii  tree,  and  its  Truit. 

Adiiiidi,  uiiiiiarrled. 

Adr,  the  heart  of  a  In-e. 

•V'A',  excrement  (of  inferior  animals). 

Adi'i,  firm,  hard,  solid, 

Adi/d,  the  summit  or  top  of  any  thing. 

Adnidi;  lo  delay  i  a  long  time  ;  constant. 

Ad'iidr,  u  crab. 

Adiiidi  .ill,  to  sprt'iid. 

Aili'iT  .11,  to  wash,  cleanse. 

Adiint  ■id,  to  inlect. 

Adid,  a  handle, 

Adiiiii,  true. 

Adiiia  -III,  to  Ix'licvo, 

Adiiji,  to  ch(M)se, 

AdiMi,  to  dart. 

iV/ii/,  iidului,  lo  flow. 

Adtii,  ten  land-crahs. 

iV/'(/,  name  of  a  tree, 

Adiiiddildi,  the  month  of  April. 

Adid-li-ru,  \\w  month  of  May. 

Adiikii,  the  lop  of  a  house. 

Adokiii,  to  reverence. 

AdoKiii,  to  mi.x. 

j.,'iM:o,  n  stick   used  as  a  spado;   to  dig 

with  a  slick. 
Adiili-  (Mb.),  curly,  untimely,  too  soon. 
Adii/i),  a  float  or  stick  for  swimming  upon, 
Adiimi,  to  sip,  to  suck. 
Adiiiiio,  the  voice  ;  the  neck. 
Adniiio  -lid,  to  desire,  to  wish. 
Adiiiii/ii,  to  stretch  out  the  hand. 
Ai/o/idiiiiii,  correct,  upright, 
Adijiiiiiidi/ija,  absurd,  absurdity. 
Adiiijo,  the  mangrove  tree. 
Adiiid,  entrails.  ^ 

Adoii,  ye. 

Adod,  udodndoii,  bold,  courageous. 
Adnri  -«,  to  break  or  cut  bread,  yams,  &c. 
Adovu,  sugar-cane. 


V  I  T  I  A  N    D  I  C  1'  t  O  N  A  R  V. 


405 


Xi/iij/ii,  tlir  lirnrl  of  n  IriT. 

jNiliii,  llii'ir  ^iilUxi'd  Id  iiiiutiN). 

KilrA,  IiIcmhI. 

yi/iil,  n  IrnC, 

yihtikii  (Ml).),  till;  iiioiith. 

•A7//(/A(/(, riiti|i(ii(',troul)U'i  liilitjiii'il,  troul)lr(l, 

i'iilinkiiiiiiiiliinii),  ccivutiiiis,  ill-imturcd, 

Xihdkiiii,  riibU'd  nil'. 

Xi/iii/it,  iiriii. 

Ai/iiili  •<!,  to  oriiali,  |in^8ii  duwn,  mnku  oven. 

Ai/iiimiisil,  oriisluMl,  liriiiMiHl. 

yihiiiiKKi,  li>  throw  down, 

Niliiiiin  -III,  to  hi|i,  lick. 

I\'i/irliii/i<l,  rncnms,  tcj  iiionatruotu. 

Ai/niiii/i(ti'ii<it,  poor. 

Ntlraiiiii/ii  (M.),  Imir. 

Xitriini),  n  liike. 

Ailniiiii,  insidi'  of  tin.'  inoiitli, 

iVi/iiiini,  swcni. 

AdiAliiinliu  (sncrcd   blood),  the  lirat-born 

of  II  chii'l'. 
Nilialoii,  their  (n  siidix). 
Nilrau,  of  tin  111  two  (sutlix). 
Aclniii,  hiiMiInd, 
Xi/riiii,  hiliiiitnilidii,  tt  lenf. 
Ni/i(iiiiii/i(iiik(i,  the  surluco  ofwnter. 
Nilruvii,  iishe.s. 

AtliiiiiiiiilniviKi,  (Inst,  ashes;  |)(H)r. 
Ndre,  firtii. 

Adie  -Id,  to  pull,  stretch. 
Adrrkr,  hold  or  cidiiii  of  i\  vcuol ;  inside  of 

ii  ciinoe ;  hole  in  the  earth  in  which 

food  is  cooked. 
Atliikiii,  not  (|uite  full. 
A(/ie/v  ((X),  frog. 
Adrili,  blunt. 

Adiiiiilic,  diU'icidt  ;  dillieulty. 
Adiiiidrc,    lnughter;   -rnk.,  to   laugh,  to 

deride. 
Aifirijd,  the  heart  of  a  tree. 
Ai/iTsu/id/Tsii,  to  teiir  ;  torn. 
Adieic,  to  pineh. 
Adreii,  ri|K',  riiieness. 
Adfiue,  to  carry  on  the  back. 
Adri,  pushed. 

Adri,  holothuria,  bicho  da  mar. 
Adrika,  cold. 

103 


Adrimui,  to  relniund. 

Adiiiidri,  to  swell,  swr'lling. 

Ai/iiiji  •III,  to  drive ;  erooki'ii. 

Adrini,  n  thief  j  to  steal. 

Adriii,  a  bud. 

Sdiiikd,  raw. 

i\di<ikiiiidii)kii,  green,  as  wood. 

Admiiiitiidiumim,  ri'il,  yellow. 

Aiiroitm,  to  deseend,  as  the  sun  ;  1»  tiiint, 

Adriinilru,  to  (low, 

Adiiiiidro/iiiii,  a  raiiilKjw, 

Adiini  (.S.),  lo  run. 

Ailrtifini  or  iidrintliiii,  a  banner. 

Admto,  slow. 

A/niii,  a  doMbie-enno"' ;  twins. 

Adni/uii,  name  of  u  disease. 

Adniimi,  foolish. 

Aitiinju  •!/it,  to  strip  olf  the  Imrk  of  a  tree. 

Adniiiii  -t'li,  to  sing  in  a  low  tone  of  voice. 

Ai/iiidniiiii,  c'orrupt,  fetid  (said  offish). 

Ad/imiii,  to  tear. 

AdiKi,  one. 

Ailiiii  (S.),  a  bone, 

AdiiiiiLikiiliiko,  to  separate. 

Ailiiiiisi  -III,  to  .scatter. 

Adiiiii/iiiiiiii,  to  ransom. 

Ailut'i,  ikIiih,  tt  finger,  to  point  with  the 

finger. 
Adiii,  a  club. 
Ai/iikii,  dirty. 
Adii/riii/ir/rvic'i,  awkward. 
Ailidciiii,  the  Ixittoiu  of  a  ladder. 
Adii/i,  deaf. 

Adii/ii,  t(!ased  out  of  patience. 
Aditm/iK,  to  |K'ep  slyly, 
Adiimii  'kd,  to  push  up. 
Adiimi,  an  eel. 
Adiiiiilii,  ft  corner. 
Adiindii,  deaf. 
Adinjii,  a  hole  in  n  tree. 
Adii\ja,  to  moan. 
Adiiijit  (Mb.),  one. 
Adinjundinjua,  black,  dirty  color. 
A(/nri,  to  sit. 

Adiiru,  till,'  knee,  elbow;  a  post. 
Adiiriiiidi/ni,  arm. 
Aduvii,  bamboo  eane. 


406 


PHILOLOGY. 


Nthivii,  a  vine  with  whose  bark  fish  arc 
intoxicated. 

Xei,  this. 

yene  -to,  to  punish  ;  to  be  angry ;  vexed. 

?ti,  a  particle  which  precedes  adverbs  of 
time. 

yikua,  to-day. 

Ximti,  a  scoop  for  baling  water;  -ta,  to 
bnlc. 

Xi  nibo^imlioiji,  to-morrow. 

Xl/ii/ti,  to  tremble,  tremor. 

Xinora,  to  peep. 

Xilu,  to  obtain  fire  by  friction. 

Xiit,  cocon-nut. 

Xiuidla,  a  whistle. 

Xo  -("a,  to  put,  or  place ;  to  remain,  be 
fixed  in  a  place. 

Xoka,  to  anchor ;  tiokunoka,  an  anchor. 

Xoya,  to  place. 

Xotoiioto,  idle,  disobedient. 

Xovo,  to  skulk  about  for  food. 

Xovo-tii-yara,  a  footstool. 

Xi),  you  or  thou  (see  kcmunu). 

Xiiilet'ii  (O.),  to  forget. 

Xiiiniii,  easy,  quiet. 

Xiikii,  sand ;  gunpowder. 

Xiniibii,  deep,  an  abyss. 

Xiinuiiiiimu,  worship. 

XiiitO,  to  dip,  plunge  (as  the  head  in  water). 

XuHuma  (O.),  to  think  of,  think  about, 
remember. 

XiDjm,  the  name  of  a  fish. 

Xuj/s'i/i'ildi,  December,  nwjgalcvu,  Janu- 
ary. 


B 

Pa,  only. 

/7rt,  a  wild  duck. 

Uacaiyt'-ii,  the  rigging  of  a  canoe. 

na('<nj(Uii,  entrails. 

Hai,  indolent. 

Ddltdii,  durable. 

nuluiytid,  capacious,  roomy. 

Jlakiyilc,  side  of  the  head. 

llidu,  dumb,  dumbness,  silence. 


nant/e,  gayanr/e,  to  walk  about,  to  stroll. 

IhiHt/i,  uncle. 

IlaiuUna,  uncle  by  mother's  side. 

niai/tro,  the  string  of  the  tongue. 

I1d))(i,  bitter,  bitterness. 

IJaiiiir/a,  to  look  steadily. 

llinir,  ount ;  also,  a  sister  or  brother. 

Ham,  hunger,  desire ;  -va,  to  hunger,  lust 

for. 
lldsau,  a  reed,  an  arrow ;  shot. 
Thisuesiie,  a  whirlwind. 
Hata,  sharp. 
Uata,  a  word  used  in  addressing  a  heathen 

deity. 
Hata,  a  snake. 
Hato  -vuk.,  to  omit  the  letter  k  in  sjxiaking, 

as  in  the  dialect  of  Somusomu. 
Until,  a  thick  glazed  sort  of  native  cloth. 
natiimhiri,  l)ed-curtain. 
rhiHue,  work  (a  Tonga  word). 
Uavinjnvii,  a  coward. 
TJtijrh;  to  sing  (used  of  one  only). 
ni'leijek,  loose  (said  of  the  teeth). 
Dgd,  provision  for  a  journey  or  any  work. 
Hgn,  hard. 

Hgd,  the  shell  of  a  shell-fish. 
Tlgn/oija,  to  make  a  vigorous  effort. 
Tlgai,  ijgci,  lately,  just  now,  then. 
rigaku,  a  crab. 
Dgakito,  a  valley. 
ngii/iil<i,  an  empty  shell. 
Ugali,  subject ;  a  tributary  slate. 
Pgnlitjgnli,  cotton. 
ngnliijgalia,  dirty. 
llga/iso,  coal. 
Ilgalo,  to  swim. 
Hg'Diii -ta,  to  hold  between  the  legs;  to 

crush. 
rtgnmu,  scissors,  nip|)ers  ;  -tii,  to  cut. 
riganiin/iilu,  a  slii'll,  nut-shell. 
Hgdtjga,  ImiMiicss,  audacity ;  bold,  brave, 

victorious. 
rignifgn,  thinness. 
Hginigi:  -ra,  to  seek,  look  for. 
r)ga>jg(0(j,  finger;  ijgaygnln  ni  avn,  toe; 

>)g(n)palo-levu,  thumb ;   ygatjgiUo-sau 

little  linger. 


M' 


( tfi 


VITIAN    DICTIONARY. 


407 


Bfiiira,  a  hole,  hollow,  cave,  den. 

rigiirii  -va,  (o  serve. 

Ugarandonu,  opposite. 

Illiiimmai,  to  front,  face. 

Ili;(irunii(fu,  nostril. 

Ugariilci,  iHjtweoii  the  legs. 

nganiva,  to  think  about. 

ngdravidomai,  to  sit  silent. 

Ugasi,  to  crawl. 

Hgasi,  old. 

IJgitsi  -ral;.,  to  prune,  strip  olT. 

Hgdta,  enclosed. 

Hgiito,  an  armlet,  bracelet,  ornament  for 

the  wrist. 
rigiitu  (Rn.),  firo. 
llgatu,   lower   part  of  the  abdomen  and 

upper  part  of  the  thigh. 
Ilgatn  -hik.,  to  cultivate  the  ground. 
Tigdii,  iny  or  mine  (used  of  food  only). 
Ilgdva,  a.  spade. 
llgin<i,  a  land-cnib. 
Ugai'oka,  or  ijgavokavoht,  a  scull. 
ngciim,  fire;  ti   kindle. 
Ilgei  (O.),  mother. 
ngC(r{\Ui.),a\\. 
TJgi/f,  earth,  soil. 
T}gfki)ge/eifa,  filthincss. 
ngi/i>,  limping, 
Hgem  (Mb.),  to  fall  and  be  scattered  about, 

as  leaves. 
Ugei-e  (O.),  ancle. 

Ilgctrtjsete  ni  lit/a,  palm  of  the  hand. 
Tigilojgele  ni  avti,  sole  of  the  foot. 
Ugfit,  a  (.'oiub;  -Ui,  to  comb. 
llgcva,  to  scrape  up  earth. 
rtgid  -ta,  to  totloo, 
Ugiiiiva,  a  kind  offish. 
llgihiiso,  charcoal. 
rJgiAnsotjgiiwn,  hot  cinders. 
Hgi/i  -a,  ti)  rub  with  the  hand. 
ngimaijgimn  (S,),  all. 
I7gii)gi,  cotton ;  to  roll. 
rigi>)go,  narrow. 

llgiii,  to  ring,  to  drum,  to  knock. 
U git II,  shallow  water. 
ligiini,  a  (lint. 

ngi),  this. 


NgO  (Ra.),  a  pig. 

Hgo/i,  fish  ;  to  fish. 

Ilgnluii,  a  shout ;  to  shout. 

ligom/idaii,  a  fisherman. 

Hgori,  that. 

TIgori)  .yii,  to  exclaim  ;  exclamation. 

Ilgorn,  to  take  away. 

Tigoit,  my,  mine. 

ngii,  my,  mine  (sutTix). 

llgua  -Oi,  to  wi|ie, 

rtgitaygiia,  a  towel, 

Ilgumi,  to  clinch. 

Tigiimu,  red  |)aint. 

Ilgiwiinjgumii,  a  shell, 

Hginjgit  -va,  to  hold  in  the  hand. 

Hgiiri-ni-lasinca,  the  ancle. 

rigi/rit  -til,  to  cat  any  thing  unrijic. 

llgusa,  to  wipe. 

Hi,  the  bristle  of  a  hog;  a  kind  of  grass. 

Til,  to  shout. 

Hole,  to  turn  the  head, 

//oj)0,  a  black  cockroach, 

IJoiiit,  a  word  of  commendation, 

none,  a  child,  a  son  or  daughter. 

IloiiCdkird,  virginity. 

IJono,  a  young  cocoa-nut. 

Uti,  earnest,  energetic, 

Ih'niuitiui,  earnest,  vigorous. 

Uimdit,  or  yutii  -va,  to  cut  off. 

Ihinii  (S.),  to  drink,     (Sec  mm). 

J.Hisii,  the  mouth. 


o 

<),  a  cloud. 

O,  an  interjection  of  surprise. 

Odia,  to  read,  count. 

Ofo,  covetous. 

Ot'oia,  to  enclose  in  a  net. 

O'ta  (S.),  he,  she,  or  it. 

Oi,  is  it  ? 

Oik .'  alas ! 

Okd,  lo  read,  reckon. 

0/,o,  okooko,  to  kindle  o  fire,  to  burn. 

0!d,  to  spring  u[),  as  a  breeze. 

Ok,  to  squeal. 


il 


408 


PHILOLOGY. 


Olo,  to  tie  up,  cover. 

Oh  (O.),  soul,  spirit,  shadow.     (See  alo.) 

O/oni,  tied  up,  bundled  up, 

Oinlxt  (L.),  to  full  prostrate;  (S.),  to  full 

from  nn  eminence. 
Omhe  (Mb.),   to  cover,  fold   over.     (See 

unibe.) 
Omim,  to  clap  the  hands. 
Oiiia,  lomo,  tJ  clip. 
Omu,  ominuloii,  oiuimdran,  o»iiini(,  oiin, 

ondra,  onilraii,  possessive  pronouns. 

(See  Grammar.) 
One,  to  mend  a  net. 
Ono,  six. 

Onostipavu/ii ,  sixty. 
Gija,  oijdoya,  engaged,  occupied  ;  envploy- 

ment,  occupation. 
Ojjo  (S.),  to  fall  prostrate. 
Qj/go,  to  clasp  the  hand  out  of  respect. 
Ogo/ia,  troublo<l,  adlictcd. 
Owi,  a  word  of  respect  used  to  a  chief. 
Ora,  to  choke,  sulTocate. 
Oio,  to  bind ;  a  girdle,  zone. 
Oro,  orovata,  a  bundle, 
Orooro,  a  bandage,  cord. 
Oroni,  soft  (applied  to  sand). 
Ose,  lamentation. 
Oif,  to  adopt. 
Oso,  to  bark. 
Oso,  osooso,  narrow. 
Oil,  done,  fuiishod. 
Oto,  to  lie  upon. 

Ouiiilieva,  to  kindle,  shine.     (See  aundrc.) 
Ova,  to  swim. 
Ovea,  to  take  by  force. 
Oviovi,  cloak,   blanket,  any  covering  (or 

the  shoulders  (cercm.) 
Ovo,  lamentation  ;  to  lament. 


R 

Ra,  they. 

Ri,  down,  below.    ■ 

Rai  -fa,  to  behold,  look,  beware;  a  look. 

Raisaia,  blind. 


RiiM,  to  spread  out  to  dry. 

lltikoruko,  reverence. 

Ramarania,  light. 

lidmlia,  broad ;  breadth. 

Ramhaildi  (qu.  ramlxdailai?)  narrow. 

Ramlndcvu,  broad,  wide. 

R(iml>a-7ii-vava  [jtapii]  a  board. 

Raiiibasamlia,  flatness. 

R<nid>c  -til,  to  kick  with  the  toe. 

R(im/m,  a  sling. 

RiiDiliosiu,  deceit. 

Rumbiiya,  to  cover  over. 

Raniiisu,  split. 

Raiidi,  miiandi,  queen. 

RinjiidSd,  dryness. 

Rdrd,   n   plain,  a   level   space;   a   public 

square  ;  the  deck  of  a  oanoc. 
Rdrd,  to  warm  one's  self  at  the  fire. 
Ramlcvu,  a  meeting  for  singing. 
Rdrdlcvu,  a  plain. 
Ranimii,  light. 
Rtisd,  greatness. 
Raloii,  they. 
Ratii,  a  respectful  appellation,  used  in  the 

vocative  singular,  equivalent  to  "  sir," 

or  "  my  lord  ;"  it  is  sometimes  placed 

before  the  names  of  chiels,  as,  Ratu 

Sent,  Lord  Seru. 
Riiu,  they  two. 
Ran,  the  thatch  of  a  house. 
Ran  -ta,  to  fit. 

Runku,  watery  (said  of  yams). 
Rami,  a  kind  of  yam. 
Ravamva  (S.),  a  stick  used  as  a  substitute 

for  a  spado. 
Ravcndi,  crack  ;  broken,  cracked. 
Raioija,  to  boil. 
Ravu,  to  kill. 

Ravuiav:/,  to  kill ;  a  murderer. 
Rawa,  to  possess,  obtain. 
Raxvaraua,  easy. 
Raicdiaka  (Mb.),  to  succeed  in  doing  any 

thing. 
Re  or  ri,  a  particle  suffixed  to  words,— n 

sort  of  enclitic. 
Reki,  rrnki,  joy  ;  to  rejoice. 
Rcmoremo,  to  blink. 


VITIAN   DICTIONARY. 


409 


Rcpge,  disabled,  unable  to  walk. 

Regu  -fa,   to  kiss, — salute  by  pressing 

noses. 
Rere,  to  fear ;  fear. 
Rerekita,  happiness. 
Rerega,  turmeric,  curcuma. 
Rerevaka?uiai,  dissimulation. 
Reva,  to  lie  to  (as  a  vessel). 
Rcva,  short. 
Rewaifukc,  high. 

Ri,  hunger,  desire ;  hungry,  lustful. 
Rika,  to  leap,  to  dance. 
Rikarika,  a  dance. 
RikoH,  to  shudder. 
Rinr/eii,  to  be  astonished. 
Rimlorindo,  to  dance. 
Rid,  rapid. 
Riri,  to  boil. 
Riri,  a  kitchen. 
Riiiiith),  to  dauco. 
Ririva,  perplexity. 
Rise,  lamentation  ;  to  mourn. 
Rito,  restless. 
Riva,  foolish. 
Rivau,  to  wink. 
Rmro(i  (Ml).),  to-morrow. 
Roiioi,  to  fan. 
Roka,  color. 

Rom/x),  full,  occupied  ;  -ta,  to  fdl. 
Rixjelc,  a.  flag,  banner. 
Rotjgo  •!'(,  to  hug  in  the  arms;  to  carry; 

a  mat  used  as  a  cradle. 
RoijO  -i'<i,  to  hoar  ;  report,  rumor. 
Rom,  near,  to  approach. 
Romii,  in  close  succession. 
Rom,  a  race  ;  running  a  race. 
Roni,  a  sprout. 
Rita,  two. 

RiKi.  ■siiniinilii,  twenty. 
Riiiiiii,  (o  brusli  away  flies. 
Riikd,  ildiie ;  destroyed. 
Riikii,   iiiuler;   the  early   part   of  morn- 

in;;. 
Ri(ki(nikit,  to  put  clay  on  the  head. 
RumliK  (11.),  a  box,  chest;  -na,  to  put  in 

a  l)i>x. 
Rum,  a  calm. 

103 


Ritaa,  a  curse. 
Ruve,  a  pigeon. 


s 


Sa,  a  verbal  particle  (see  Grammar). 

Sd,  one  of  two  who  work  together. 

Sd,  a  rafter. 

Stika,  Sir  (a  ceremonial  address). 

Sakatifima,  a  link. 

Sdkrsnkc,  desire  of  admiration. 

Sdkilia,  to  search. 

Siikii  -ta,  to  anoint  the  head. 

Siiku,  to  knock,  hit,  strike. 

tyila,  way,  road. 

Siihi  -ta,  to  cover. 

Siihi,  a  covering  for  the  head,  a  turban  of 

native  cloth. 
Sdhcii,  an  act  of  reverence. 
Sttlia,  the  mouth  of  a  harbor. 
fyiliisa/ii,  necklace,  neckband,  garland  of 

(lowers. 
Saiiiaka,  to  rub  with  the  hands. 
Satnaki,  to  heap  up  ;  to  sweep ;  to  prune. 
Sfimtisiiiminiki,  to  anoint. 
S<i»i/ic,  crooked. 

S(im/d  -Ca,  to  drive ;  -lak.,  to  punish. 
Siniiila,  having  a  defect  in  the  speech. 
S(ima  ■la  and  -lak.,  to  knock  down,  to 

kill ;  a  massacre. 
Sinjn,  the  ancle,  the  leg. 
Sdijusaija,  to  Ix'g. 

Stnjga,  canoes  (used  only  in  the  pturol). 
Stijjgd,  a  drinking-vcssel  of  clay. 
Siiggdli   (O.),   the   open    space    about   a 

house. 
Sdggotiiiuita,  to  assemble,  call  together. 
Siio,  saosiio  -fa,  to  count  yams  or  taro. 
i)tiiisao<i,  perfect. 

Stini  -vii,  to  lo<ik  for,  to  look  out  for. 
Stirasara,  to  sec. 
Siira,  siirasara,  very. 
Said,  a  male  pig. 
Saratii,  noise  in  the  bowels. 
Surcsare,  a  rib. 
Sari,  lizard. 


410 


PHILOLOGY. 


». 


Saro,  tho  broast-bone. 

Sdsd,  ten  mats. 

Sdsd,  brown. 

S<ii/,  on  ornament. 

Sail,  reward,  payment ;  -ma,  to  pay,  re- 
ward. 

&iu,  a  king. 

Sail  -fa,  to  clasp  the  fingers  of  one  hand 
on  the  pahii  of  the  other. 

Siiukii,  near  tho  fire-place. 

Saumaiulti,  to  wish. 

Saumaki,  to  return ;  to  cause  to  return. 

S<iii»in»iii,  to  chow. 

SiiioiifHisinjii,  crossways. 

Smint/xJiii,  morning. 

Sou  -iioiw  (K.),  abi)rtion. 

Suit  -lei,  Sdu  -Ik  (M.),  peace,  tranquillity. 

Saiimm  (Mb.),  miserable,  vexatious,  un- 
lucky. 

Stnimii,  a  mode  of  incantation. 

Saiisiiu,  exclamation  of  surprise, 

Siii/saii,  to  clap. 

&V///  -til,  plenty,  abundance,  pence. 

Safii,  a  temple  ;  a  gravestone  of  basalt. 

Snvasafii,  white,  clean. 

Save,  young. 

S<iio  -III,  to  draw,  as  a  rope. 

Sin-i/,  a  spout  of  water;  a  waterfall. 

Siiriilii,  a  i;>re-tooth, 

SdiiaiKi,  the  sea. 

S(ii/a,  alone. 

Sf,  a  clap  of  thunder. 

Se,  or. 

5c,  a  flower  ;  the  gills  of  a  fish  ;  breakers. 

Se,  to  wander. 

Scanuii,  to  come  (?). 

Seasea,  to  rend. 

Seavo  (R.),  train  of  native  cloth  worn  by 
the  chiefs. 

Seavii,  to  [K-rish,  be  lost. 

SeiiiKi  (K.),  to  rend,  to  divide. 

Sclaro,  a  thousand  cocoa-nuts. 

&^',  white  (used  only  of  the  hair). 

Sek,  se/esele,  a  knife  ;  to  cut  with  a  knife. 

Sekkoti,  scissors. 

Scksi'likii,  white. 

Sckta,  sword. 


Senia,  tho  left  hand, 

Semasema,  to  join. 

Sendic,  a  large  wooden  dish  in  which  oil 

is  made. 
Seija,  no,  not. 

Seija  -mfxiit  ■snra,  by  no  means. 
Seijata,  to  wish,  to  desire,  to  try. 
Si'ijgu,  full  (?). 
Scrtiii,  face,  eyes  (cerem.) 
Scmu  -iiu,  to  see  (cerem.)  * 

Sere  -vii,  to  sing. 
Sere  -ka,  to  untie  and  take  off. 
Sere,  brenst. 

iSf';»,  a  comb  ;  -ta,  to  comb. 
Seseijn,  desire,  misery. 
SfslniyiiSiiiilnilai,  February. 
ScSctihjiisdn/eni,  March. 
Seseiea,  Ibolishness. 
Seta,  fiill. 

Setavi'inviio,  brimfuU. 
Sen  ■to,  to  scrape,  scratch  (like  n  hen). 
Sen  •ra,  to  stir  alx)Ut. 
Scie,  disapprobation. 
Si-fii,  a  religious  offering ;  the  first  of  the 

yams. 
Seviia,  to  dash  as  waves. 
Seviisevii,  a  pi-csent  liir  persons  just  arrived 

from  other  islands. 
Srriisevii,  to  clean. 
Seietiri'ita,  n  flower  without  fruit. 
Seiiaseiea,  small. 
Sei/dfii,  to  go  astray. 
Si,  to  lie  ignorant  of. 
Sk'i,  to  whistle. 
Sika,  part  of  a  net. 
Sikefi,  a  kind  of  tree. 
Siki  -la,  to  \\(t. 
Sikisiki,  a  head-aclie. 
Siko,  sikosiko,  a  spy. 
Siknsikoti,  gray-lieadcd. 
Si/a,  a  species  of  wild  corn  (?). 
Si/a  -ta,  to  trample,  to  crush. 
Sila  (().),  the  sheet  of  a  sail. 
iS'(//,  to  bathe,  wash ;  to  circumcise. 
Sinn,  a  bottje. 
SiniinJot'c,  a  chain. 
Smusinu,  gravy. 


."  ■  ^. 


K 


&3i£^ 


VITIAN   DICTIONARY. 


411 


'Jn 


Siijii,  tho  sun,  dny;   -wa,  to  bask  in  the 
sun,  to  sun  one's  self. 

Sif/asiija,  clear,  open  country. 

Siij/isijidii,  white. 

Siii,  wrong ;  an  error. 

Siriji'i,  tlint  which  is  eaten  after  drinking, 

Sisi,  the  two  holes  in  the  cocoa-nut. 

Sisia,  to  piny,  sport. 

Sisivii  -Ink.,  to  revenge,  to  vie  with. 

Si/i,  a  plant. 

Sill.  -1(1,  to  extinguish. 

Sill,  lo  make  a  point. 

•SVi'o,  to  (lebas(\ 

Siua,  a  fish-hook  ;  -Utk.,  to  catch  fish  witli 
a  hook. 

Sn,  soil,  an  assembly. 

Soa-lfi'n  or  sole.rii,  a  festive  party,  a  great 
assemljingo,  usually  for  (easting. 

S(Xita  (K.),  a  grindstone;  |)uniice-ston(. . 

SoCo,  the  buttocks,  the  hips. 

Sold,  a  pointed  stake  set  in  the  ground  to 
entrap  an  enemy. 

Snkid,  to  pluck  fniit. 

S^ko,  to  sail  ;  a  voyage. 

Sul.i,  a.  stranger. 

&/c,  a  bonnet,  head-dress. 

Sole  -na  and  -ynk.,  to  wrap  up  a  corpse. 

Soica,  a  btmdle. 

Soli'sole,  to  wrestle. 

Soli  -a,  to  give,  bestow. 

Sulo,  to  rub,  wipe. 

So/oyii,  a  spouse. 

Soliire,  a  taro-bcd. 

Som/ic  -til,  to  cleave  to, 

So-inlifimmlienii,  a  wedding-party. 

Soiiiliosoinlio,  exclamation  of  surprise. 

Soiiihii,  down  ;  -tii,  to  fall  down. 

Sontliusoiiihu,  steep. 

Somi  •£a,  to  drink. 

Somia,  to  retaliate. 

Somiiii,  to  sniiir. 

Somiiii,  absorlxMl,  disapi>eared.  . 

Somu,  clay  and  sand  mixed  for  pottery. 

Soiiii,  wonder. 

Soiiilrcya,  to  gnash  or  grate  tlie  teeth. 

Sotjgi,  to  crouch  down,  to  hide. 

Sotjgo,  soijgovata,  to  assemble. 


Soijgosotjgo,  rubbish, 

.Sojio,  to  shut. 

Sore,  seed  ;  a  kind  of  beads  made  of  the 
seed  of  a  plant. 

Soicti,  tho  fence  of  a  house. 

Soio  -ni,  to  worship,  pray. 

Noio  •ink.,  to  pray  for. 

Susd,  impatient. 

.SoAu,  an  assembly  ;  ■va,  to  assemble. 

Sosmmi,  in  tho  room  or  stead  of. 

Sosoi-i,  a  very  young  cocoa-nut. 

Soli  (II.),  much,  exceedingly. 

Son,  steam. 

Soiisoii,  scorched, 

S<jrii,  a  basket. 

Sova  -ra,  to  pour. 

Siwasoeii-ni-mlicin,  a  dunghill. 

Soee  ■tak.,  to  knock  off  the  head  with  a 
club. 

Soviisoni,  a  club. 

Sii  (M.),  soup,  water  in  which   food   has 
been  boiled. 

Sua,  one  of  the  sticks  (?)  by  which  a  canoe 
is  propelled. 

Sim  -ka,  to  husk  a  cocoa-nut. 

Siiiiki,  to  hoe. 

Siiaijga,  a  plantain. 

Simsiiii,  wet. 

SiiiisiMuale,  or  suesiiile,  malicious. 

Simrale  -tiik.,  to  deceive. 

Sii('ii  or  siisii,  the  heart. 

Sue  (O.),  the  stone  in  a  fire-place  on  which 

the  pot  i"  placed. 
Siii,  a  bone,  a  needle  of  bone. 
Siiisiiia,  rough,  sharp. 
Stika,  to  dismiss. 
Siika-kimiiri,  to  go  backward. 
Siiki  -ta,  to  paint  or  daub  the  body,  to 

anoint. 
Siili,  taro. 

Siilisidi,  young  banana-tree. 
Siilii,  a  garment. 
Siilii  -la,  to  take  out  of  a  box. 
Snmhii,  pelvis  of  a  female. 
Siimiiia,  to  sdicnthe,  put  in  a  hole. 
Siinisiiiii,  gravy. 
SinjgH  ■t(i,  to  snatch. 


■  1 1 

-i 


5'  t| 


I 


i: 


418 


PHILOLOGY. 


i  » 


Sunt,  to  sneeze. 

Siisa,  lo  betroth. 

Susi,  to  cut. 

Susii,  a  pit  in  which  fish  arc  taken. 

Siisiitin,  to  adopt. 


Di,  tiiki,  lo  cut  with  an  axe. 

l\i  -yii,  to  fell  (qu.  same  as  above  .'). 

Th,  or  tula,  we. 

Tai^dke,  lo  look  up. 

Tafdijgv,  lo  hurt  llie  foot. 

TaCiini,  lo  root  up. 

Tni'eir,  lo  turn  over. 

Tai'i,  younger  brother  or  sister. 

Tai'ori,  to  singe. 

Tiiia,  to  pour. 

Tiiikimt  (O.),  (inijer-nails. 

Tailitsa,  rcslloss,  uneasy. 

Tliknli,  the  sen. 

Takitit,  to  separate. 

2\ikiiri  ( Mb.),  the  open  space  about  a  house. 

7'aki,  not. 

Taki  -rak.,  to  draw  water. 

Tdkornso,  l(njuiikoso,  lo  intercept ;  persecute. 

Tiikii,  lorldisi'-shcll. 

IhLU'ii,  goods  returned  for  -something  re- 
ceived. 

Ttiini,  lo  order,  command. 

Taliii  -71(1  re  III  I  re,  disobedient,  ungovernable. 

Jiiliii  ■ratriiriiini,  r>lx'dienl. 

Tii/a  ■iii/ro/i(/ro  (.Mb.),  lo  blow  briskly,  as 
wind. 

Tii/iii/i/x),  slack. 

Taliiiioa,  telling  stories. 

Tidasiyn,  upland  ground. 

Tiililiilii,  a  messenger,  a  servant. 

Title,  iiguin. 

Tale,  lo  return  ;  to  refuse. 

Tali,  li>  pinil,  lo  braid. 

Tallin,  to  carry  go(Hls. 

Talitio,  to  forget,  forgetfulness. 

Ta/iri,  split. 

Tiilyi,  razor. 

Talotii,  to  [Kjur  into  a  dish. 


Tiila,  whilst. 

7JjOT«,  father. 

Tuna  -IxiUai  (O.),  uncle  by  fother's  side. 

T-ma  (K.),  salute  from  an  inferior  to  n 
su|)crior. 

Tinuilr,  exclamation  of  surprise. 

Tamata,  a  man  {homo),  a  (M;rson,  man  or 
woman. 

Timhi,  a  present  before  a  feast. 

Tiiiilxi,  a  place. 

Tamlm,  arm,  from  the  shoulder  to  the 
elbow. 

Tiimbakau,  mat  made  of  the  cocoa-nut  leaf. 

Tamliamhiili,  a  necklace  of  ovula-sholls. 

TamhaUimata,  a  generation. 

Timlmi/amliake,  a  season  of  the  year. 

Tiinlie  -It,  to  hold  in  the  palm  or  hollow  of 
the  hand. 

Timbevatida,  collar-bone. 

Tiim/toiji,  concealed,  secret. 

7((;;//i«,  sacred,  prohibited;  -rai'.,  to  con- 
secrate, lo  prohibit. 

Tamhiiii,  a  whale's  tooth. 

TimliiDiiayiiiKnji,  an  adze. 

Tanibit  -vili,  a  broad-axe. 

Tambii  -vo/aii,  lo  wait  for  a  favorable  wind. 

Tiimii  (Mb.),  no,  not. 

Taiiiiisii,  lo  cut  down. 

Tiiiiileiiile,  spread. 

TiDiihIa,  o|)enod.  • 

Taiiiira,  dream. 

Tamlni  (.M.),  ring. 

Taiii,  (liHerenl. 

Tiniii,  a  bag. 

Taiiiiloa,  llio  smell  of  a  dead  body. 

Tiijoiie,  n  mule. 

Taijaiii,  lo  put  into. 

Taitsiaiia,  precipitation,  haste. 

Tinjuiri,  sounding. 

Tatji,  to  rry,  weep. 

Taiji/aiji,  In  swallow ;  the  windpipe  (?). 

Tarn,  lo  lake  up,  lo  build. 

Tiira,  lawfid ;  -vu,  to  come  next,  to  suc- 
ceed. 

Tarnnilie,  to  strike  the  foot. 

Tiralara,  lo  manufacture,  work  upon,  build. 

Tiro  -j/a,  to  ask. 


•r 


VITIAN   DICTIONARY. 


413 


i» 


«r 


Tbsere,  loose. 

2hsi,  rotten  (used  of  cooon-nuts). 

lltsivori,  to  simvc  the  head. 

Thiovti,  split. 

Thta,  to  hack,  to  cut. 

'I}itu,  a  mallet  used  in  pottery, 

3!(<rf,  Imrdcr,  horn. 

Tbtdka,  rcvcngfliil ;  to  revenge,  retaliate. 

l\il<i/<iri,  to  warm  one's  self. 

Talfiiiia,  ijuick. 

Ihlitra,  the  cover  ol'a  book. 

Hill,  a.  part  ol'a  eanoc. 

Tim  -fa,  to  place. 

Viit  -fii,  to  gather  fruit. 

3}(«  •)•«,  to  cleave  to. 

3!{«  -/■a,  to  catch,  take. 

2iw/  exclamation  of  surprise. 

Tliiifii,  drawn  forth. 

7}iii)iil>iiil(iiii,  to  rain  heavily. 

'Ihitki,  a  keeper,  proprietor. 

Tiiiiiuh»iii,  early  in  the  morning, 

Tiiiniii  (O.),  a  swinging  shelf. 

Tiiinji'iiijga,  strength,  vigor. 

TuHii,  to  eat  or  drink  ;  food  (ccrem.) 

Tiiiil<iii,  to  agree;  agreement. 

Ihiiliuiviitd,  like. 

Tallinn II (ilili,  to  swing. 

Tail  -IK  (U.),  (K^rsons  who  have  the  same 
god. 

Thiiuakc  -iia,  to  take. 

Tint,  to  cut,  niake  an  incision. 

Tti'iia  (l{.),  a  hottlc. 

Tiiii/r,  a  brother-in-law. 

Tiiraiitiairn,  a  large  a.xe. 

7!ji'c,  son  or  daughter  of  a  chiof. 

Tiiri,  a  task,  a  piece  of  work,  an  under- 
taking. 

Tivi  -a,  to  strike  on  the  cheek. 

Ta  filar i,  a  broom  ;  to  s wee  i. 

7\ivn,  latavo,  to  sleep  (cercin.) 

Thriit'i,  /loyed,  skinned. 

Thvofa,  that  part  of  the  beach  which  is  dry 
at  low-water. 

lavufii,  to  ragc!  aj  the     aves. 

7}iviiki,  to  turti  alxiiit. 

Tbviilit,  to  strike  the  ttx)t. 

Jiivitlii  (R.),  a  whale. 

104 


7htfa,  a  negative  particle  having  the  same 
force  as  the  Knglish  un- ;  it  is  placed 
almost  at  will    belorc  adjectives  and 
verbs. 
Tiiira,  inhabited. 
Tiiciifa,  the  firmament. 
Tatrnfiiica,  everlasting,  without  end. 

Tail  like,  a  flag. 

Tiiiiakina,  to  arrange  a  sail  so  as  to  catch 
the  wind,  to  brace  in. 

Taiiamiiudii,  constantly. 

Taiiiisr,  (livorceil. 

Tiii'fii/iii/a,  useless. 

Tiii/ii,  to  cut,  to  hack  (see  la). 

Tiii/iina,  to  spread. 

7ii,  to  plant. 

'Pi,  a  kind  of  club. 

'l\iliikivu,  to  go  or  come  down,  to  descend. 

'JVinoso,  the  (lower  of  tlie  banana. 

Tikrrii,  to  begin  ;  Ix'ginning. 

'/!'/./,  not. 

Il/r,  razor ;  -a,  to  shave. 

'IVinlKiiiiiiisii,  lip. 

Tinhnikii/a,  mouth  (cerem.) 

1)mo,  calf  of  tlie  leg. 

'IVre  -1111,  to  touch. 

Vli;  to  stretch  out,  extend  (as  branches). 

'Ihir,  to  circumcise. 

'JH'ii  ■/•«,  to  spread  out. 

7^  very  young  yam. 

Tika,  to  roll. 

Tiki,  a  place,  a  part. 

Tiko,  to  sit,  to   remain,  to   be   fixed,  to 
dwell. 

Tikoliko,  a  seat. 

'niiililii,  to  knock. 

Tilii  -ma,  to  swallow. 

7'i/uii,  a  word  spoken  by  way  of  apology 
for  standing  up  in  another's  presence. 

TiliJlih,  the  windpipe  ((|U.  gullet .'). 

7'im/>i,  a  (lash  ;  to  blow  a  conch. 

Tiiiira,  the  large  intestines. 

Tina,  a  mother. 

Timira,  dysentery. 

'l\)iatinii,  timinitu,  a  sow. 

7\iii,  ten. 

Tini  -a,  to  conclude. 


414 


PHILOLOGY. 


Tiiiiii,  n  button. 

'Vinitini,  tlic  conclusion. 

'liija  (O.),  (lew. 

'Jil/fini,  iinmc  of  a  place  in  Mbulu  or 
Iliidos. 

Tiiiiid,  to  shmil ;  (0.),  nnmc  of  a  game. 

Ihi,  to  lircnk,  ns  iiii  egg. 

Titi,  to  liiing  down,  be  pendent. 

Titombii,  deep, 

Tt/oko,  wnlking-slick,  stnlF. 

Tilolo,  tlie  pn|)cr-inulbcrry,  when  stripped 
of  its  bark. 

Tivd,  to  turn  aside. 

'Jhii,  n  fowl. 

'Jhri,  to  write. 

'Mil,  to  lie,  to  be  placed,  fixed  in  any 
pliu'n. 

Tokd/'iii,  east  wind. 

'Inkolinitulii,  tlie  north  wind;  the  north. 

TiikiiliiUii,  a  seat. 

Tiikotiikii,  i\  priest. 

Tukiiljikn-iii-iKmr,  aller-birth. 

Tiikiitiiii,  mountain,  barren  hill. 

Tnkiiuiili;  anger,  angry. 

Ibkinji/d,  to  stand  where  the  fresh  water 
unites  with  the  salt  to  w.itch  for  fish. 

Ihki ,  to  remove,  to  quit  a  place. 

Tnki,  to  ii  ck. 

Thko,  Ixloved,  favorite. 

Thla,  hollow. 

7Wo,  till'  waist. 

7hloi/iiiki,  to  push. 

Tbldiia,  the  trunk  of  a  tree. 

Tdld,  three. 

IhldsdijdVd/d,  thirty. 

T}»n(i  -nil,  to  increase;  to  sit,  to  dwell. 

Thinhd  (O.),  a  bay  of  the  sea. 

'DjuiIj' ,  a  long  lull  of  hair,  worn  as  an 
oriiaiiiciit ;  any  ornament;  -tia,  to 
adorn  one's  self  with  any  thing. 

Tbrnlf)  -kit,  to  catch,  seize. 

'Ihm/ji)-ni-viii,  a  well. 

Ibni,  to  slo'p. 

Tbiiid,  to  endure. 

Thnitdiii,  a  ceremony  |)erformed  at  a  fune- 
ral, or  at  the  consecration  of  a  temple. 

'Ihnoka,  to  wound. 


Ihtjga,  a  sow. 

'Ihijgtde,  to  carry  on  the  shoulder. 

Ihggi,  to  fall. 

'Jhijiii,  a  whcj'l. 

'J}>io,  to  approach,  advance. 

'Jhrot/itiii,  to  move  about. 

Tdso,  to  move  by  jerks. 

'iUiiku  (().),  to  fight  for. 

1})to,  pain,  painfiil. 

lUoii,  to  paste  with  arrow-root,  or  the 
fruit  of  the  ton  tree. 

'Ihtii/o,  sailing  swirtly. 

7Iw,  the  name  of  a  tree. 

Ihvii,  a  dish. 

'J'dVd,  habit,  nature. 

TJyro,  to  try. 

Ihi-dtovo,  an  elFort,  a  trial. 

7!w»,  the  back. 

7h>/a  -Jia,  to  print. 

'J'l'i/uvd,  brackish. 

Til,  the  upright  part  of  a  tree. 

'IVi,  to  stand. 

I'h,  word  used  by  children  to  their  father. 

Td/i,  word  used  by  children  to  their  grand- 
lather. 

Tddi,  to  delay. 

Tddku,  an  elder  brother  or  sister. 

Tiuttiid,  the  top  of  a  mountain. 

3'///,  tditdi,  to  sow  (qu.  sew  ?). 

Tdi,  king,  chief,  lord. 

7V/<(l{.),adog. 

'Tditdi,  salt. 

Tukd,  a  gnuid  father, — a  very  oged  person. 

Tukci,  to  accuse. 

Tdkii  -fa,  to  put ;  to  give. 

Tukdfavii,  to  put  the  whole  of  any  thing 
into  one  dish. 

Tikdiia,  to  tell,  to  speak  of. 

'Tdkddilravu,  to  daub  the  head  with  ashes. 

'Tdkdidhd,  a. speech. 

'Tdla,  bnld. 

'Tdli;  ear-wax. 

'Td/ewi,  to  push. 

'Tdli  iji,  to  pr(!S8. 

Tdletjii,  to  moan, 

'Tdli,  dull. 

Tdli,  to  make. 


VITIAN   DICTIONARY. 


416 


Tumlia,  to  Ily  ;  fliRhl. 

Tiimlxi,  outsido,  exterior;  i  tumlia,  without. 

Tiimlid,  iiind-criil). 

TiwiIk'  -/•«,  to  lend  hy  tho  linnd. 

Tiaiihii,  to  spriri};  up,  to  sprout,  grow;  n 

sprout. 
I'limhii,  n  ;{rnndm()tli('r. 
Tumliiiho,  mnrk  on  tho  skin  occasioned  by 

liiirnin;?. 
Tiimhiiiiinniir,  niidwifo;  nflor-birth. 
Tiimliiild,  to  stinid  still. 
Tiiiiiliiiliiiiiliii,  to  liallio  (cercm.) 
Tuiiiiii/iiii,  II  fislicrninn  ;  to  fish. 
TiijKii'ii,  palo,  sickly. looking. 
Titiji  -vii,  to  kindle. 
Tii/ii,  to  crrct,  to  pinco, 
Tiii-iniii,  cliirC. 

Tiiniliini,  Coot  or  ion  (('frem.) 
Turn,  to  drop,  to  trickle. 
Tu/ii,  vnlley. 
Turuhii,  n  stone  which  has  been  worn  by 

tho  dnshing  of  the  waves. 
Tumliirr,  elbow. 
Tust/e.iiihiia,  the  small  entrails. 
Tutu,  a  border. 
Tuh'i,  a  stand,  foundation. 
Tiitur,  thin,  thinness. 
Tittuitihulu,  to  stand  still. 
Tutiimu,  liips. 

Tutiiii,  a  cloak,  blanket,  bod-clothes. 
Turn,  inlura,  a  tree  (Voni  which  a  poison 

is  obtained  for  intoxicatiiiij;  tish. 
Tiiviilatjgafai/gii,  to  Im;  in  conl'usion. 
T^ivatufd,  tho  stones  which  surround  the 

earth  on  which  a  house  is  erected. 
Tuvi,  tutuvi,  to  cover  with  Ijed-clothcs. 
Tuvu,  fresh  water  springing  up  in  the  sand 

below  the  salt-water  mark. 
Tuvuki,  to  turn  about. 


u 

O,  an  exclamation  of  surprise. 
Ua,  a  wave ;  to  flow,  as  the  tide. 
Ua,  u  vein. 
Uafa,  low  water. 


Uiiiiilnnn,  high  water. 

ITiiuit,  muscniar,  strong. 

IJui,  to  break,  as  an  egg. 

11(11,  rain. 

U'i,  to  resemble. 

Utiwni,  ufuwai,  a  frith,  a  creek. 

Ut'u,  tho  nose  ;  a  promontory. 

Uf^u  -iHi,  to  (Irnw  out,  unshenth. 

Urn  (().),  a  fish-weir,  a  wall  for  enclosing 
lisb. 

Ui  (Mb.),  a  noise;  to  make  a  noise,  stir, 
bustle. 

Vhu  (.M.),  nail  of  finger. 

U/ii,  tho  short  missile  club  ;  -tn,  to  throw. 

Vic  -a,  to  stir  niKint. 

Uli,  a  steering-paddle  ;  to  steer. 

Uli,  n  dog, 

lUi),  a  Mingitot. 

Ul(xi,  maggoty. 

Ulii,  the  head. 

Ulu  -fa,  to  give  away  Iho  dress  with  which 

n  person  is  clothed. 
Ubnjani,  chief,  principal  (from  ulu,  head, 

>)'(,  only,  and  tii,  of). 
Uhnmite  (U.),  wig. 
Vlumutim,  the  first-lwrn. 
Uliiiiaimiiri,  the  tail. 
Umlic,  also. 
Uiuhi,  the  cheek, 
Unilii  .11,  to  cover;  bed-curtain. 
U/u/iiiiiiilii,  to  cover. 
Umeii,  rust,  rusty. 
Uiidohi,  a  thousand. 
Unilrc  -VII,   to   shine,   to   burn  j   shining, 

burning. 
Vnilreyiini,  burned,  destroyed. 
Uniliiunibi,  ten  canoes. 
Uiiii  .mo,  to  drink. 
Uifd,  a  shell-lish,  land-crab. 
Uj/ifc  -tu,  to  be  in  motion,  as  water. 
Ura,  a  shrimp,  a  lobster. 
Uiriirr,  to  rock. 
U)u,  grease,  fat. 

Ifru  -i'li,  to  strike  or  lower  a  sail. 
Uiii,  to  land. 

Us<i,  a  cargo  ;  -na,  to  convey  a  cargo. 
Usiiiui,  food  of  one  kind  only. 


r 


416 


P  H  I  L  O  L  O  a  Y. 


Usii  •la,  In  match. 

Usiiniaki  -«/i,  to  Hhontho,  put  in  n  hole. 

Vto,  n  brencHriiil  liw  ;  llii;  fruit  iil'llio  trc-e. 

Uto,  till-  hoiirl  ;  the  iMick-lmiic  (f). 

Utoiiii  (S.),  tlio  hi'iirt  of  a  lrc<!. 

(Jill  -mi,  to  join,  uiiitu  one  tiling  to  another. 

U/ii,  h>  come  to  land, 

Uii,  a  ynm.  j 

Ut'ii,  tlip  yonnn  leaf  of  n  iMinium  Irro.  j 

Urn  ■('(!,  lo  blow,  snnnil  (us  ii  IruniicM), 

pnir. 
Uviiiivii,  to  inllntc. 


Frf,  four. 

VaCi,  vriciraf'i,  to  cut. 

Vdt'ii,  cyc-briiw. 

Vtitii  .kn  anil  Ink.,  lo  box,  cuif,  strike  with 
(be  fist. 

r«((v/iic(/,exlraorillnary ;  wise,  intelligent. 

Vaka,  acconlini;  to,  os,  liki^  (particle  pro- 
lixcd  to  nouns  and  adjctctives  to  form 
lulverbs). 

Vnkii,  causative  prclix  (sec  Grammar), 

Vakiiniitliui,  all,  every  one, 

ViikiKd,  biully ;  -;m,  to  make  bad;  to 
blame. 

VakiU'iiCa,  m\(\  numlx-rs  nlx)ve  10,  tJO,  &lc. 

Yakut iiki,  deceit,  deceitful ;  accident. 

Viiktit'avu,  why  ?  for  what  \ 

Vaktii'ivn,  a.  custom  of  spitting  and  express- 
ing a  wish  after  drinking  aiji^una, 

Viikai'iKi)  -litk.,  to  dce|)en  ;  deep. 

Vakiui)<'itlc,  to  try  ;  trial. 

VdkrU'ix'oifiriuiri, an  eddy  ;  to  turn  round, 

Viikue'iiko,  to  prepare, 

Vukauiai,  or  vukai/ai'a  (O,),  to  give  a 
name. 

VakaU'iinU'iirii,  a  garment  with  sleeves  or 
legs. 

VakaiUisa,  to  tame,  make  (piiet  or  cosy  ; 
comfortable,  contented. 

Vakaiiii/ui,  to  s|)eak  falsely. 

Vakaimlimi,  really. 

Vakairiri,  lo  alarm,  alarming ;  very,  ex- 
ceedingly, i.  e.  terribly. 


Viikiiixuktisaka,  to  reverrnco. 

Viikditiimrra,  very,  exceedingly. 

Vdknivii,  how. 

Viikiikiiisi,\\Vv  a  |)crsonof  low  rank, slavish. 

Vukiikiiloiigatn  -tiik.,  U^  bless. 

Viikiiknsiiii,  to  despise  ;  act  arrogantly. 

Viikukdliikntii  -tak.,  to  warm, 

Viikdkdiikdiia  -tdk.,  to  strengthen. 

Vdkdkila  -ijd,  to  inform. 

Vdkdkoiioko/io,  impudent. 

I'dkdkiiriinit'ii,  to  sow,  plant. 

yakdldildi  -Ink.,  lo  lessc'ii. 

Vdkii/diif'i,  lo  starve. 

Vdkc/iitil/Kx'd,  to  ileceivr, 

Viikiiltikdid,  declining,  not  erect, 

Vdkdliild  -tdk.,  to  reveal ;  stand  aside. 

Vdkd/dtr/dVC,  lo  liU  up, 

Vdkdlrkiiliku,  lo  sliiirleu, 

Viikdicvii,  lo  Hugment, 

]'(//•((/<■»•(/»(((///«  ■^//.■,,io(U'privcorvirginity. 

Vdkdkiili,  to  ransom  ;  lo  separate. 

Viikitlidlid,  foolish  ;  ■Ink.,  to  make  foolish. 

Viikdliwaliird  -tdk.,  lo  cool. 

VdkiUo  or  fikii/i;  elderly  (!). 

Vdkiilodlod  -tdk..  Ill  blacken. 

i'dk'i/ofo,  a  preparation  of  cocoa-nut  and 
laro;  a  sort  of  pudding. 

Vdkdiolomd,  lovely,  causing  love. 

Vdkd/onid/umd,  hollow ;  silent. 

Vdkiilimifx'd,  lo  di.'liige. 

Vdkd/injd/dijii  -tdk.,  to  make  even. 

Vtikdlniind,  lo  make  a  noise ;  noisy. 

Vdkdmd,  ashamed  ;  -Idk.,  to  shame,  abash. 

VakdmiUii  -tdk.,  to  empty. 

Vdkdindi'dld  -tdk.,  to  explain. 

VdknmdkaJivdtu  -Uik.,  to  brighten. 

Vakdtiidkdd  -tak.,  to  make  clean. 

I'dKiimn/di  -tdk.,  to  cause  to  wither. 

Vdkdiiidliimdhnjii  -tak.,  to  weaken. 

Vdkamdmat'it,  lo  dry. 

1  'ukiniidiiiaka,  ashamed. 

Vdkdnuimusii,  lo  pray  for,  to  advocate. 

Vakanidiiumanii,  having  streamers  at  the 
sail  of  a  canoe. 

Vakd/iidsi,  to  clothe;  the  ceremony  of  put- 
ting ihc  girdle  on  to  the  son  of  a  chief 
for  the  first  time. 


VITIAN   DICTIONARY. 


417 


Vakamata  ■nn,  to  erecl. 

Vakitniiitiiliiii,  nxciilli-iit. 

VaknvMlalen,  to  impovurisih,  rurse. 

Vaktimtite  -a,  to  kill, 

Vakamatiimaliid,  economical, 

Viiktimiiii  -til,  to  (hslcn. 

Vuktimai/dii  -tak,,  to  tnnrry, 

VakiimiiijAii  .ttik,,  to  JihIhc 

Viikfim/Kit'ii,  to  enlist;  to  lie  sick, 

ViikiDHlmt'ii,  to  Imit. 

Viikamhile  (O.),  to  cut  down,  fell, 

VakaiiihuiiUif  crosswisr. 

Viikiitiiliiiiilii,  to  iHHirvc;  liiitli, 

Vitkuiiihiko  -tiik.,  to  extinguish. 

Vaknmliombiilii,  to  enslave. 

Viiknm/iorisi,  to  irrilnlo  ;  niigry. 

Vtikdiii/xirmi,  to  make  close,  bring  together; 
close,  near. 

Vakdmliiilii,  to  iK'g  (i)0(l. 

Vakamlmla  -Id,  to  save  ;  a  savior, 

Viikaiii/iii/o  -/itk.,  to  darken  ;  to  be  blind  ; 
to  faint. 

Vdktinirtoinrltt,  a  (orerunner,  o  herald;  to 
go  IjcIIm'i',  to  niiiioiiiice. 

VakuDiiriifd,  to  sow  or  plant, 

Vnkiinukc  .rti,  to  cause  to  sleep ;  soporific. 

Vdkdiiii/rimiiri  -d,  to  imitate, 

Vdkdmiisiimiisii,  sullen, 

Vdkdmniiili,  silent,  taciturn. 

VakiiiiAiiilakii,  to  backslide. 

Vdkdiidiifldkiivuli,  to  turn  the  Imck. 

Vakdiidiitdy  to  consult. 

Vakdrii/iimiiiif/dmii,  to  redden. 

Vakdiiildiiniaki  -mi,  to  ccuse  desire;  quiet- 
ness, satisfaction, 

Vdkdnikre,  to  clean,  sharpen. 

Vdkdihlind,  to  verify,  to  fulfil, 

Vakdni/r»tio,  branchless,  as  a  tree ;  to  cut 
otr  the  branches  of  a  free,  to  hew, 

Vdkdtiilmno  -Hd,  to  cause  to  desire, 

Vdkd>ii/niiit)»i/)iila,  causing  to  desire  life ; 
exquisitely,  exceedingly. 

Vdkdndoiii/oHii,  to  make  straight ;  to  par- 
don ;  rightly,  correctly, 

VdkdVi/onunrhHii,  to  put  in  order,  to  fulfil, 

Vakantlrainiikdfii,  the  custom  of  putting 
the  leaf  of  a  tree  secretly  into  n  per- 

105 


son's  food,  in  the  expectation  that  lomo 

evil  spirit  will,  in  consequence,  cause 

his  death, 
Vdkam/rakdi  -Idk.,  to  vox, 
Vdkandranu  •ma,  to  sweeten. 
Vdkaniiri  -td,  to  (hsten  ;  a  button, 
Vukdiidrrkcd,  not  full, 
Vnkdwlrekeitdrrke,  ileep,  as  a  dish, 
Ydkdiulrcii  .tak.,  to  ripen, 
Viikamlmmii  ■Ca,  to  cause  to  sink. 
Vtibiiiilromii  -yii,  to  disappear. 
Ydkdiiiliid,  mire, 
Viikdiiiliila,  to  pacify, 
Ydkdiidldijdid,  to  make  commodious, 
Vdkdijfiami  -td,  to  press. 
Ydkdijiinygn  -Idk.,  to  embolden. 
Viikaijf'dra,  to  bore  n  bole, 
Vukdijgdtra  ■t'd,  to  cause  to  burn, 
Vakinjijeii,  to  empty, 
Vdka>i;irle)jfiektta  -Idk,  to  defile, 
Vdkdiigiiigi  -i'd,  to  roll. 
Vakd iignijiioloii  ■tak,,  to  cause  to  shout. 
Vakdtigiimi  -ii,  to  clinch, 
Vdkanro,  to  gird. 
Vdkdosnoso,  to  make  narrow, 
Vdkaoti,  to  finish. 
VdkdraU'a,  to  look  at,  attend  to. 
Vdkarairai  -Ink.,  to  disclose. 
VdkarirA   -tak.,  to    put    the   deck   on   a 

canoe. 
Vakiirduna,  to  provide. 
Vdkardvi,  to  cause  to  trust ;  confidence, 

trust, 
Vakarnje  -fa,  to  lie,  to  rest, 
Vakdmjc  .tti,  to  take  care,  to  hoard  up. 
Vdkarerekita,  to  make  happy. 
Vakamca  -tak.,  to  elevate,  to  hoist  (a  sail). 
Vakarnviiird  ■tak.,  to  lower. 
Vdkarikdtid,  a  word  of  respect,  spoken  of 

a  father  or  mother  (1), 
Vakariri,  -tak.,  to  hurry, 
Vakaririi,  to  divide, 
Vakariririvi   -tak.,   to   square,    to    make 

square, 
Vakaroroo  (S,),  to  honor, 
Vakaroijo  (O.),  to  listen. 
Vakaroyoro)jo  ■tak.,  to  report,  publish. 


418 


Pill  I,(»I,Ofl  V. 


Viikariiii,  twice. 

Viikitniiii/itiii  (S,),  to  ilraw  ii  ciirlniii. 

Vdhiiriiiiilietirn,  to  liiinn  up. 

('(ikiiriiiiilniinDi/iii,  Mili'iit. 

\'(ik'inini,ni\  iiin)in'lln,Hunslia(lR;  to  shade, 

III  !<lllrl(l. 

Vitkuriisii  -Ink.,  to  ciimc 

ViikiiiA  -tiik,,  to  niiikc  iniiiiircst. 

I'dkastilii,  to  warn,  ii)i|iriso  orilangcr. 

Viikiisiiliisiilu  -Ink.,  lo  pcrsooutc. 

I'lkiisitli,  lo  How. 

Viikiisnviiiiii,  to  iip|irls(', 

Vukmf^  lo  cause  to  stay. 

Vtihisrstii ,  to  hiss. 

Vdkdsiiiivu  -/Ilk.,  lo  fill. 

Viiktisttdi,  lo  ilericio,  make  fi>olish. 

VakiniiKi/ffii,  (liiHicr,  noou-inenl. 

Vdkiisiijiisiijim  -Ink.,  to  whiten. 

Vdkdsisi/<i,  ahoniinahle,  cruel. 

Vdkdso/okdkd/id,  one  who  cnts  without 
workinj,'. 

Vdkdsnmhii,  lo  come  to  land. 

Vdk<isori>,  to  hroiKl. 

Vttkdsiidsiia,  II  jest,  lo  joke. 

V<ikd.sii{'u  .m/i,  lo  bring  forth. 

Vdkiisiilii  -md,  lo  clothe. 

Vakiila,  to  make. 

Vdkdlakdkand,  to  eat  without  working. 

Vdkalnktd,  to  disclose. 

VakiUdkckciii,  meet. 

VdkdlAkit'iit'iUii,  to  deny. 

VakdtakiUiijd,  to  mark,  to  testify. 

Vdkdtiiinliuva,  to  order,  command  (cerom.) 

Vakdtaniurid,  to  imitate. 

KaAv/u^u  -?/«,  to  intercept,  balk. 

Vakdta}jn,  to  remember. 

FaA(/«iSo<o,  to  cruise. 

Vakiitdra,  lo  make  lawful. 

VakaldriUdra,  to  make  it  lawful  to  leave 
the  i)lacc  where  a  chief  has  been  eat- 
ing, by  removing  what  may  remain  of 
his  Ibod. 

Vakdtatakdtjdh,  to  bo  revengeful. 

VakdtdUilo,  to  cast  lots. 

Vakdtn/dind,  to  hasten  ;  quickly. 

Vakdldldiiihii,  commandment. 

VakuUmi,  to  put  awoy. 


Vdkdiaiikdt&lakiiiam&i,  to  lie  nbrensl,  oi 
I  wo  cnnocM. 

ViikdldiitdiiVdld,  lo  make  I'fpml,  to  com- 
pare. 

VdkdididVd,  to  place  ono  leg  abovo  an- 
other. 

Vdkiiidvdvii/i,  to  instruct. 

Viikiitdird  •ml,  lo  watch,  a  watchman, 

Viikditkiiiiluiili,  to  kneel. 

Vdkdirrr  -ya,  lo  touch, 

Vdkd/Cd  -fd,  to  instruct. 

Vdkdtikd,  lo  place,  cause  to  sit. 

VdkdUjidiid,  to  deny. 

Vdkiifukd,  name  (cereni.) 

Vdkdtokd,  to  plac(^ 

VdkdIokdWdJe,  lo  irritate. 

Vdkdiiikolokoi,  Iwloved. 

Vdkiilolu,  thrice. 

Vdkdlovdlo  -fd,  to  try  ;  an  elTort. 

Vdkdtit  -ra,  to  place  erect;  the  upright 
|H>sls  in  the  fence  of  a  house. 

Viikdhiludlua,  cloudy. 

Viikdliimlnt  -ra,  to  raise  up,  prepare,  ar- 
range. 

Vdkdtumhiiniii,  a  mode  of  divination  by 
spinning  a  cocoa-nut. 

Vdkdtit/ii/na,  a  porch,  or  shade. 

Vdkdiurdijd,  lordly,  chief-like, 

Vdkdtusa,  to  explain. 

Vakdtulii  -tak.,  to  allot. 

Vdkdiif'iufi  -rt,  to  imitate. 

Vdkdii/i,  to  steer. 

Vdkd)i7ulie,  to  burn,  lo  cause  to  burn. 

Vdkdumriimcd,  to  cause  to  rust. 

VdkdutatUd,  to  think  ;  cogitation. 

Vdkd vdkdCeCipi ,  a  resting-place. 

Vdkdfdle,  to  deny. 

VakdfdSdkdSdkd,  to  stride. 

Vakdvrivdkaesini,  to  cost  mutual  re- 
proaches. 

Vdkdve/evc/e,  l)eloved. 

Vdkdirrerere  -a,  lo  entangle. 

Vdk<ivevi  -tak.,  to  weaken. 

Vdkdrrvefe,  to  tempt. 

Vdkdvikivikia  -tak.,  to  oppress  with  a 
heavy  load. 

Vakdvinuka,  well ;  to  thank. 


VITI  AN    DICTIONARY. 


419 


Viikiiviriitn,  to  (■ncirrlc. 

Vdhiiro,  Ici  cniisr'  to  ri'iimin, 

Viikaiiii'ii,  Id  Inm. 

Vnkiivotiilo,  Id  pill  III)  Ixmrd. 

VaknroniivniiH,  In  briiist). 

Viik<ivol(i,  III  (illoi. 

Viihd'iiii  •Ink,,,  to  rrni'W. 

ViikiiviKilii,  to  |Miiir  out. 

V(ikiinikiii/(t/i),  (lit,  ciiiiHinn   ''i"  spirit  to 

tiyi)  ^^rriitly,  rxcccclinyly,  very. 
Viikdvuli  .id,  lo  instruct. 
Vukai'iini,  secrijt,  Nocrt'tly  j  •a,  to  hido. 
Viikufiiyii  .Ink.,  lo  lill, 
Vukdviiniviiru,  iilUr   tlio  innnnor  of  the 

worlil. 
VitknrtUa,  to   persevere;  cnpnblo  of  en- 

diiriiii,'  lalior. 
ViikiitcA  ■/ilk.,  to  iiicrcnsc. 
Vdkiiwiii,  to  doride  ;  to  weep. 
Vnk(iwiileii(i/e,  useless, 
I'ikiiini/iike,  lo  wrinkle. 
Vitkdimvil  .fa,  to  erect,  rnisn  up. 
Viikmvdvugga,  to  look  nfler  ennoes. 
Vakiiireleiiclcd,  to  drown  Iho  voice. 
Viikai/tifa  -nil,  to  niiino. 
Vakiii/iWo  -ra,  to  cause  to  happen, 
V)ikiii/ukei/<ike,  to  improve  in  health. 
Viikin/iilo,  Bpiriliml,  having  ii  soul. 
ViikdiiAloijiuiduiui,  lo  make  upright. 
Viik(ii/(imo£e,  to  leel  (.'). 
Viikiiijumu,  to  desire. 
Vakil i/iin(lr<i  -va,  to  awnkcn. 
Viikui/iiga,  to  render  useful. 
VakuiiiiydnuUuimUinju  -ttik.,  to  make  hum- 
hie. 
Viikiii/injiisiri  -Ink.,  to  cause  to  sin. 
Vukiii^iiliiniMiiiirMii,  to  go  in  great  num- 

b<,'rs  to  any  ])orson. 
Viikiiiiiiwa  (S.),  far  olf. 
Vdkilukeld  -ttik.,  to  tease. 
Vdkirc  (for  vakakire),  to  cause  to  boil  or 

bubble. 
Vtiknki)to,  goods ;  the  name  of  a  stick  (?). 
Vakvfa,  when. 
yakiiviikitvu,  to  cause  to  smoke  or  burn 

dimly. 
Valu  ■til,  to  do,  make. 


Vii/ii  [jiiUii],  rotten  J  rottennosi, 

\'ll/ft  (().),  to  light. 

Viildliiid,  m'Xiial  inleri'oiirse, 

Vdliiiiii  \i,iil(itid\,  to  Ix'iray. 

Vdliiiiilridiln',  dilliciill,  hard  to  do, 

Viiliiidiiii,  easy. 

Viiliinild,  a<'iiipni  mciining,  signification. 

ViildCdIii,  the  leinplos  of  the  head, 

Vdli;  a  house. 

Viileiikii,  a.  storehouse, 

Vdlu,  war. 

Vd/ii  [jidlii],  to  rub. 

Vdiid,  a  mast. 

Vdmi,  to  shoot. 

Viuii/d,  a  maid-servant  or  slave. 

ViDif/ii,  thick  (of  fluids),  congealed,  a.«  oil 
hy  cold. 

Vdtti/iiijii,  the  sound  of  any  thing  falling,  or 
ol'slariipilig. 

Vdniid,  a  land,  territory,  country. 
Vin/ii  or  viujuiu,  to  feed  ;  one  who  feeds. 

Vat)riiilrtjrniliii,  lo  shake  together,  to  beot 
with  the  fingers. 

Vmjgmjgdt'i,  to  insult,  deride. 

Vnijfidtii,  to  surround  ;  to  sharpen. 

Vdijgntn,  to  corrupt. 

Vdi/Diiii,  to  arouse. 

Viigiit^iijiifiiii,  a  frown. 

Vorii  (K.),  deaf. 

Viiri,  the  scale  of  a  fish;  a  part  of  o  canoe. 

Valid,  the  pulp  of  a  cocoa-nut. 

Vim,  a  file  ;  covetous, 

Varitro,  a  file,  a  saw. 

Vdsamliiritiiina,  to  ensnare,  entrap. 

Viixii,  nephew  or  niece. 

Vdtii,  bedstead  ;  shelf;  the  top  of  a  house 

or  canoe. 
Villa,  all  together. 
Villi,  to  talk  much. 
Viitii,  stone. 
Viitidixi,  innuinerablc. 
Vim,  the  hibiscus. 
Vail  ■t'a,  to  seize,  catch,  bind. 
Vail,  very. 
VaiiviiH  (S.),  cotton. 
Viiva,  a  footstool,  a  shoe. 
Vava,  to  carry  on  the  back. 


420 


PHILOLOGY. 


Vava  [papa],  a  board. 

Vavdhia  [p<ipakua],  thick  ;  thickness. 

Vavala  [jHipaial,  foolishness. 

VavuJayi  [pajm/at/i],  white  man,  foreigner. 

Viii'a/ii,  the  fence  of  a  ho'jsc. 

Vavdtio    [fufiitio],  elastic,    thot    can    be 

stretched. 
Vavtita,  likeness ;  like. 
Vai'i,  to  ronst,  cook  in  the  eorth. 
V(iyu,  a  poisonous  fowl. 
Vedtu,  a  s|)ecics  of  slicll-fish. 
Vei,  where. 
Vci,  to,  of,  from. 

Vei,  n  prcllx  denoting  reciprocal  action, 
Veifn,  to  hnte  one  another. 
VeUdi,  the  commerce  of  the  sexes. 
VcUartivi,  n  word    used  in  inquiring   the 

relationship  of  two  |)crsons  ; — "  how 

are  they  reliiled  ?" 
VeiCu  (S.),  grassy  or  swampy  land. 
VeUuriniuiki,  to  enter  one  within  another, 

as  the  links  of  a  chain. 
Veilrivi,  to  fear  one  another. 
X^eikiii,  to  curse  one  another. 
Veikiil;iin(iV(iki,  to  whisper  together. 
ViikdiiiUiri,  to  run  together. 
Veikiildkiitii,  mutual  warmth  or  anger. 
Vrikdii  (O.),  a  clump  of  trees,  a  wood. 
Veitiikoi/dki,  to  go  to  and  fro. 
VeiJeva,  vrileuai/dki,  to  take  care  of  one 

another. 
VeilonuiHi,  to  love  one  another. 
Vcinidsd/o,  to  envy  one  another. 
Veinidi/dki,  the  centre ;  half. 
Vcimhn,  to  quarrel,  brawl. 
VeimUkdm/iikai,  to  lie  one  above  another. 
Veim/ji/ii/dki,  to  push  one  another  about. 
VeimlKtrisi,  mutual  anger. 
Veini/iii,  mutual  deceit. 
Vcitii/diir'i,  the  commerce  of  the  sexes. 
Vcinilruiiilriiijdki,  to  come  and  go. 
Veiiidfiigyti,  to  hate. 
Veitjaneni,  Ira'ernily  ;  the  relation  between 

brother  and  sister. 
Veirdui,  to  be  face  to  (ace. 
Veiniii/dki,  to  look  about, 
Veiniru,  to  kill  one  another. 


Veisi,  to  work  together. 

Vcisdu,  an  exchange  ;  to  barter. 

Veisdldi,  to  carry  on  a  stick  on  the  shoulder 
between  two  persons. 

Veisdmu,  to  cudgel  or  beat  one  another. 

Veisikii/dki,  to  lift  about. 

Vcisiiifirii/dki,  to  miss  one  another, 

Vcisivi,  to  vie  with  one  another, 

Veisoteso/e,  to  wrestle. 

Vritdijii'i,  to  cry  with  one  another. 

Vritdtd,  to  meet. 

Veitdldtmndhf,  to  race. 

Veildii,  a,  friend  ;  courtsliip, 

Vcildui,  repentance. 

VcitdVdh'iii,  a  male  cousin-german. 

Vcildi/dki,  maki'  liiisle. 

Vritdiiitini,  to  dwell  or  sit  together, 

VfUnroi,  one  who  succeeds  or  comes  next 
to  another. 

Vcinit'd,  to  fight,  box,  spar, 

Vciidkiirdk^i,  to  be  face  to  face,  to  take 
care  of  one  another, 

Veifdkdrivdi,  to  mock,  deride  one -an- 
other. 

Vewdle  (O.),  a  hamlet,  group  of  houses. 

Veiviiidkali,  mutual  desire. 

Vriiolckdi/dki,  to  be  near. 

Veiio/i,  to  trade  together,  to  barter. 

Veiimdki,  to  converse. 

Vriviint,  to  diish  as  waves,  to  be  in  motion. 

Vcinikii,  to  assist. 

Veirinjoni,  the  relation  between  father-in- 
law  and  son-in-law. 

Veiti-d,  to  wait. 

Vcmiili,  to  jest. 

Veiu-dti,  rcitnUiiii,  the  relation  of  husband 
iiml  wife,  matrimony. 

Viid'ckdiii,  relationship,  kindred. 

Veii/tii'uri,  to  come  together, 

Vcfi;  to  knock  with  a  stick. 

Vrkii,  excrement ;  to  void. 

V^fke  [pcAr],  to  dip. 

Veld  [jielti],  slime. 

Vi/eku,  a  chisel. 

Velovilo,  a  boat. 

Vi/ote/od,  yellow. 

Vein  [pelii],  to  bend. 


i   ; 


i    1  ^ 


VITIAN   DICTIONARY. 


421 


Velulu  [jKltilii].,  wrinkled. 

Venu  [_/&««],  to  blow  iho  nose. 

Verdi,  verdit,  almost,  nearly. 

Fere,  temptation ;  entangled. 

Vereloa,  a  root  which  serves  for  soap, 

Veria,  a  chain. 

Vcsd,  an  anklet,  a  lo<;  band. 

Veso  [prso],  to  pierce. 

Vesii,  the  middle  finger. 

Veve  [j'cjie],  weak,  infirm, 

Vcvrku,  snd ;  sadness. 

Via,  to  desire  ;  desirous. 

Vid  -hina,  to  wish  to  eat ;  hungry. 

Via  -moic,  sleepy. 

Vifa,  how  many. 

Vifmifo,  the  navel. 

Vikeii  [pikiu],  crooked,  crookedness. 

VikivikUi,  pain  occasioned  by  carrying  a 

heavy  weight. 
Vili  -ka,  to  count,  to  read. 
ViliCio,  awkward. 
Vilo'  fa,  to  prepare  medicine. 
Viloicai,  a  physician. 

Vinaka,  good,  goodness;  -ta,  to  like,  desire. 
Vinokinilai,  a  hypocrite. 
Viri  -tak.,  to  cast,  throw. 
Viiikoio, a  halo  round  the  moon ;  a  fenced 

town. 
Viro  -mai,  to  return. 
Visa,  to  burn. 
Visitki,  to  bind. 
Vita,  to  strike. 
Villi,  seven. 

Vitu  -sayavulii,  seventy. 
Vivi  -tja,  to  fold,  roll  up, 
Vo,  remainder. 
Vofe,  paddle. 
Vofi,  to  skin,  flay. 

Vofota,  patient ;  to  endure,  to  be  patient. 
Vokiiukifi  [jmkipokifi],  round. 
Vo/a,  to  mark,  print ;  a  line,  print,  book. 
Vo/au,  to  sail,  to  voyage. 
Vo/eka,  near,  close,  nearness, 
Vo/i,  to  trade,  barter. 
Vonih,  to  ascend,  embark, 
Voni/re,  grasshopper. 
Vono,  a  law ;  -ta,  to  legislate, 

106 


Vono  [pono],  to  seize, 

Vonogo,  withered, 

Voraki  •na,  to  endure,  endurance;  must, 
shall. 

Voro  [pord],  paint;  ■«,  to  paint. 

Voroka,  to  break. 

Vorolaki,  to  break  to  pieces, 

Vosa  -tak.,  a  word,  language ;  to  speak, 

Vota,  a  portion  ;  to  apportion. 

Votanc  [jmtanc],  to  mend. 

Volii,  lo  ap|)ear,  come  in  sight  (as  land). 

Volii  [2M"]i  1  place. 

Voiiia  (Mb.),  property,  riches. 

Von,  new. 

Vovo,  dillicult. 

Vovo  []>o}Ki\,  rotten  ;  rottenness. 

Vii  (K.),  daughter-in-law. 

Ft!,  root,  bottom,  basis,  foundation,  source, 

Vila,  him  or  her  (cerem.) 

Vila,  fruit. 

Viiaira,  west  wind. 

ViHika,  pig. 

Viiiilikit,  the  west  wind,  the  west. 

Viiiuia  or  vuaya,  grandchild. 

Viiiiiiikit'u,  a  pill. 

Viiatii,  grown  large. 

Viifi,  wet,  low  ground. 

Viic  -ta,  to  lift  up. 

Viie  -tak.,  to  wound. 

Viifc,  to  swell ;  a  swelling. 

Viii,  wet. 

Viiifi,  leprosy. 

Viii'ii  (Mb.),  the  figure  of  a  dance, 

Viikii,  to  fly. 

Vukiiviika,  leprosy. 

Vukai/ah,  to  astonish. 

Vuke  [puke]  -tia,  lo  throw  up  earth  about 
the  root  of  a  tree;  to  prepare  the 
mounds  in  which  yams  are  planted. 

Vuke  -a,  to  change  ;  to  assist, 

Vukeviike,  a  mound. 

Vuki  -i'a,  to  turn  upside  down. 

Vukiviiki,  to  turn,  roll  over. 

Vu(u,  wise,  expert ;  an  artisan,  a  mechanic. 

Vukuniwai,  a  physician,  surgeon. 

Vula,  the  moon,  a  month. 

Vultiimbotambota,  April, 


^ 


i 


422 


PHILOLOGY. 


Vulaikckkde,  May, 
Vuldimayomaijo,  May. 
Vitlaiircrcwere,  June. 
Vulavula,  white. 
Vulaiji,  a  stranger. 
Vu/e  [pule],  to  reign,  govern. 
Viilivuli  -fd,  to  learn. 
Villi  [pidi],  a  loaf  of  bread. 
Vu/o,  cord,  thread. 
Vulo,  a  whale's  tooth. 
Vulono,  a  hatchet. 

VitJoii  [pu/oii],  a  covering  for  the  face. 
Vuluviilu,  to  wash. 
Vti/uvu/ii-iii-mata,  eyebrow. 
Vuluvulu-kani-mata,  the  eyelash. 
Vutiaii,  to  admonish ;  warning ;  a  law. 
Viiuitua,  without  branches. 
Vitni,  secret ;  to  shut,  conceal. 
Vunikau  (O.),  a  tree. 
Vufiika/ou,  a  physician. 
Vuni/atji  (O.),  white  man,  foreigner. 
Vunitamha,  shoulder. 
Vuniirsia,  an  enemy. 
Vunitvai,  medicine ;  a  physician. 
Viiiioka,  to  rub. 

Vunuvunit,  white  (used  only  of  the  hair). 
Vupgii,  lull. 
Viirii,  visiter. 

Viirtnn/xiramba,  having  a  broad  basis. 
Vuraveilevuyaki,  midway ;  to  pay  an  equi- 
valent for  what  one  receives. 
Vurarura,  the  world. 

Vuri,  to  break  out,  to  spring  up  (as  water). 
Vuru  ■fa,  to  crumble. 
Vusa,  rottenness. 
Vuse,  a  crack. 
Vusi,  to  suspend. 
Vuso,  spray,  steam  ;  to  foam. 
Vitsona,  the  end  of  a  thing. 
VuUi,  to  disobey. 
Villi,  fair,  white. 
VhlI,  hair,  fur. 
Villi  -a,  to  pluck. 
Vutivuti,  bristles  of  a  pig. 
Vittoviilo,  a  sponge. 
Viilii,  a  groan  ;  to  groan. 
Vutu£etjuCeijii,  the  pulse. 


Vitliiiin,  to  repose. 
Viitiiniyiiu,  sick. 
Viiliivittiia,  hairy. 
Viivtilc,  neighbor. 
Viivu,  muddy;  a  bladder. 
ViivuCe,  a  swelling. 
Vuviika,  to  fly  (as  dust). 


w 

W'li  -ta,  to  fasten  or  tie;  a  fastening,  a  band. 

Wd,  a  swelling. 

Wd,  wawa,  a  vine. 

Wiifa,  to  beat  upon. 

IVuSaki,  to  wait. 

%Va£(nvaCct,  firmament. 

Tr«t,  water;  medicine. 

Wiiindranu,  fresh  water. 

Wiiisaia,  thin,  watery. 

Wailiii,  salt  water,  sea. 

Wiika  (R.),  root. 

Wakavitndi,  roots  of  ajtgona. 

Wakia,  foolish. 

Wakia,  to  rub. 

Wakolo,  road. 

Wakolo,  to  go  (cerem.) 

Wakiduga,  hatred,  malice, 

Wakuiio,  not  quite  full. 

IVafe,  really,  only,  merely. 

Widcte  (U.),  tlie  papaya  tree. 

Widid,  to  anoint. 

Widdi,  suspended  ;  -frt,  to  brandish. 

Wiiliifidi,  oil ;  to  anoint, 

Wdokii,  an  egg. 

Widii,  eight. 

XVidiiki,  a  wrinkle. 

IJW«i'«,  a  land  flood,  an  inundation. 

IVdiii,  flattery  ;  -a,  to  flatter. 

Waygii,  a  canoe. 

Wdygaivaygd,  a  rib. 

Wdygi,  play,  sport. 

Winjf-oijgo,  to  shrivel, 

Wdtfgola,  dry,  withered, 

Wdra  (H.),  no,  not. 

Warowaio,  a  tree  with  the  leaves  of  which 


VITIAN    DICTIONARY. 


423 


thoso  who  have  been  touching  dead 
bodies  wash  themselves. 

Warumisa,  warm  with  the  sun. 

Wiisc,  to  divide ;  a  division,  portion. 

Wiisit  •ta,  to  pinch. 

Wuti,  a  husband  or  wife, — spouse, 

Wuti  -rak.,  to  snatch,  seize. 

Wait,  a  club. 

Wa  uti,  do  not !  desist !  (See  aua,  kakua.) 

Wavata,  bound  together. 

Wave,  belly  (ccrem.) 

Wuvini,  encircling. 

Wavu£uke,  standing  still,  erect. 

Wawn,  to  fasten. 

Wawa,  entrails. 

Wdu'd,  to  wait. 

Weimami,  weiraUfivcitou,  our  (see  Gram- 
mar). 

Weko  (O.),  brother. 

Well,  to  drivel. 

Wore  'Ca,  to  till  the  ground. 

Wercicere,  a  plantation,  garden  ;  a  house. 

Welti,  veUirii,  wctatou,  our  (see  Grammar). 

Wete  -a,  to  injure,  destroy. 

Wi,  name  of  a  tree  and  the  fruit  which  it 
bears  (probably  the  Spondios  dulcis). 

Will  -<fa,  to  gather. 

Wiri,  to  sit,  dwell  (cerem.) 

Wiri,  majesty. 

Wiriu'iri,  seat  of  a  chief,  throne. 

Wo  !  exc.  of  astonishment. 


Ya€a,  a  name. 

Yafo,  to  happen,  to  become ;  to  extend. 

Yakavi,  evening. 

Yala  •nil,  to  terminate,  to  bound. 

Yalariia,  to  divide. 

Yalayala,  boundary. 

Yali,  to  go  astray,  to  stir  about. 

Yalo  -va,  to  nod, to  beckon. 

Yalo,  spirit,  soul,  mind. 

Yalo£i,  bad  tcm|)er,  bud  disposition. 

•  St'c  iindiT  i4  for  ft  note  respecting  the  words 
which  begin  with  Uiia  letu-r. 


YaJdoloma,  kind-hearted,  affectionate. 

Ytdovaijone,  childish. 

Yaloyalorua,  careless,  indifferent,  of  two 

minds. 
Yamba,  a  mat. 
YamUike,  a  year. 
Yamtn,  nakedness ;  naked. 
Yai,.^,  the  tongue. 
Yanie-ui-mbiika,  a  flame  of  fire. 
Yamesamila,  the  palate. 
Yamcyamica,  sweet,  delicious. 
Yamo  -£(1,  to  feel. 

Yana  -ka,  to  spread ;  -vak,,  to  level. 
Yaiiili,  queen. 

Yamlra,  awake ;  to  watch,  be  vigilant. 
Yandrc,  forehead. 
Yandua  (S.),  every  body. 
Yania,  durable. 
Yani,  away,  off,  yonder. 
Yaiii,  to  flatter ;  flattery  (see  wani). 
Yaniiijanu,  an  island. 
Yaya,  use ;  useful ;  to  do,  to  act. 
Yai/iinialupu,  humble,  unassuming. 
Yayamiondonu,  upright,  just. 
Yagasiri,  sinful,  wickedness. 
Yayavi/iaka,  meekness,  goodness. 
Yapga,  to  creep. 
Yapo,  the  body. 
Yaijoi^d,  rough ;  sick. 
Yar/ovimika,  smooth,  handsome,  in  good 

condition. 
Yara,  to  drag ;  to  hoist  a  sail. 
Yarapi,  arms  and  ammunition. 
Yare,  to  decline,  as  the  sun. 
Yarega,  to  adopt. 
Yarer.'ana,  to  yawn. 
Yasa,  the  sides  of  a  house, 
Yasa  -va,  to  seek ;  a  search. 
Yasc,  sandalwood, 

Yatayala,  the  sky  about  the  setting  sun. 
Yiite,  the  liver. 

Yaii  !  a  contemptuous  address, — fp'  ow  I 
Ydu,  household  furniture,  property,  riches. 
Yiiuin,  moist. 
Yaiiyau,  shade ;  dew. 
Yava,  foot,  leg. 
Yava,  barrenness  of  a  woman. 


—J 


424 


PHILOLOGY. 


4 


Yavala,  to  be  in  motion,  to  shaice. 

Yavasambe,  a  bandy  leg. 

Yavi  -a,  draw. 

Yavi  -ta,  to  punish. 

Yavi,  afternoon.     (See  kayavi,  yakavi.) 

Yavo,  the  reed  on  which  the  thatch  of  a 

house  is  fastened. 
Yavu,  exhausted,  destroyed. 


Yavu,  the  ground  on  which  a  house  is 

erected ;  a  collection  of  houses. 
Yav^a,  a  tribe,  clan,  genealogy. 
Yawa,  distance ;  fiir. 
Yauiai,  a  flag,  a  banner. 
Yawai£ake,  high. 
Ydyi,  an  ornament. 
Ye  !  int.  ho  I 


A    VOCABULARY 


DIALECT  OF  TOBI,  Oil  LORD  NORTH'S  ISLAND. 


Of  Horace  Holden,  to  whom  we  are  indebted  for  the  following 
vocabulary,  some  account  is  given  on  pago  78.*  Besides  the  list  of 
separate  words,  many  sentences  were  written  down,  for  the  purpose 
of  elucidating  the  grammatical  structure  of  the  language.  It  was, 
however,  soon  evident  that  this  was  expecting  too  much.  The 
situation  in  which  the  captive  soamen  were  placed,  was  such  as  to 
deprive  them  of  all  desire  of  acquiring  a  better  knowledge  of  the 
language  of  their  inhuman  masters,  tlian  was  absolutely  necessary 
for  the  purpose  of  communicating  with  them.  And  even  had  the 
desire  not  been  wanting,  their  opportunities,  while  constantly  engaged 
in  harassing  labors,  were  very  unfavorable.  They  were  therefore 
contented  with  learning  the  most  common  words,  which  they  strung 
together  so  as  to  be  intelligible,  but  with  little  or  no  regard  to  the 
proper  idiom  of  the  language.  Thus  they  had  no  knowledge  of  the 
affixed  possessive  pronouns,  although,  from  the  fact  that  nearly  all  the 
words  expressive  of  relationship  (as  wutimum,  father,  migcrufn,  mother, 
bfjiom,  brother,  mlmjvm,  sister),  and  the  names  of  the  parts  of  the 
botly  (as,  mitgemum,  head,  petgim,  foot,  kCtsiim,  baard,  tgtm,  hair) 
terminate,  as  given  by  Holden,  in  m,  which,  in  the  other  languages 
of  this  division,  expresses  the  pronoun  thy,  we  can  hardly  doubt  that 


•  -Mr.  Ildlik'ii  is  now  ciignged  in  business  nt  the  Sanilwicli  Islands,  wlicre  he  is  much 
estecnieil  for  his  probity  and  intelligence. 

107 


..-k-m! 


426 


PHILOLOGY. 


this  class  of  affixes  really  exists  in  the  dialect  of  Tobi.  Notwith- 
standing these  deficiencies,  the  vocabulary  is  valuable,  as  showing 
beyond  a  doubt  that  this  little  community  is  a  branch  of  the  ethno- 
graphical family  which  extends  from  Eap  to  the  Kingsmill  Group ; 
and  it  is  not  improbable  that  by  means  of  it,  the  very  subdivision  of 
this  family  to  which  tiie  natives  of  Tobi  belong,  will  hereafter  be 
discovered,  and  their  origin  thus  determined. 

Most  of  the  words  which  follow  are  identical  with  those  given  by 
Mr.  Pickering,  in  his  Appendix  to  Holden's  Narrative.  Where  any 
difference  exists,  it  has  been  noted. 


T  013 1  AN  VOCABULAllY. 


Absent  (out  of  sic,'lit),  yut&men. 

Air  (the  o|)en  air)  glituni.    War  a  gOtum, 

out  of  doors. 
And,  m/i, 
Awny,  mora. 
Back,  liikidik. 
Backward    (or    hithcrward  ?),    toj-j    (sec 

come). 
Bad,  ItJinA  or  tama. 
BamlxMj,  jiA 
Beard,  kuxtnn. 
Belly,  mii^itim. 

Bird,  kdnrm  (or  rather  sea-gull). 
Black,  vaizeris  or  uaharis. 
Bono,  ^ji/. 
Box,  W  I'fyii;. 
Boy,  icemrci/j  a  mare. 
Brass,  moldhdili. 
Breast  (also  milk),  tut. 
Brother,  hijiitm. 

Byc-and-l)ye,  tnpdi.  Vui  tnt  (see  wait). 
Canoe,  prdo. 

Carry,  Wdhogi  or  uohugi. 
Chilli, /riA). 
Cloth,  elotlics,  HjiC. 
Cloud,  knt^o. 
Cocon-nut,  kardjia. 

"         very  "oung,  t^o. 

"         partially  riiw,  siib. 
Cold,  mrikrdzm. 
Come,  taitil;   hitlt. 
Come  back,  /)iU(;i,  bltu. 
Convei-se,  to,  titinvp. 
Cord,  string,  kril  (kr'U,  P.) 
Cry,  to,  titg. 
Dance,  to,  kokSin. 


Dark,  klimwaizdris  (see  black). 

Day,  yaro  (see  suu). 

Dead,  puruk,  mali. 

Dig,  kHI^iip. 

Dirty,  iihit. 

Drink,  llmi  [lima,  P.) 

Kat,  mCika. 

l''ar,  yutdii.    Very  far,  yatdil  vc. 

Father,  vntimtim. 

Finger  (or  hand),  kaimuk. 

Fire,  yi\f. 

Fisli,  ik(t. 

Fish,  to,  vizivig  a  ika, 

P'ish-liook,  kiiiiortka  (or  kaii  ivor  ika). 

Fishing-net,  i^i/n). 

Fish-line,  ydo. 

Fly  (s.),  /„!/. 

Food,  I'lkrihn. 

Foot  (or  leg),  jtetgviii. 

Girdle  (of  men),  vclivct, 

"      (of  women),  vctiveti. 
(tirl,  vcrcircilj  d  vaivi. 
Give,  ^vaipto,  or  kripto;  It. 
Go,  /i;V«.     Go  away,  mora-hitu. 
God,  ydris. 
Good,  yisay;  mapla. 
Grass,  imrc. 
flair,  tpm. 
Hand,  kdiiittrk. 
Hatchet,  UijHti. 
Head,  DHlrcmvm. 
Here,  atia;  (atUli,  P.) 
House,  yim. 
Hungry,  md, 
I,  iiatj. 
In,  ?(•(>/•. 


428 


P  H  I  L  O  L  O  C.  Y. 


! 


f 


S( 


Iron,  piii}vl;  pigu. 

Iron-hoop,  tsipa. 

Kill,  mite. 

Kind  (see  good),  mapia. 

Knife,  wnsc. 

Large,  yenup. 

Laugh,  mtnii, 

Leni',  trila. 

Lie,  repose,  to,  rilu. 

Lightning,  rijik. 

Liznrd,  jiild. 

Man)  (imtire. 

Many,  2>'pi- 

Milk,  till.     (See  breast.) 

Mofjn,  mCikom. 

Mother,  mii^erum. 

Musqiiilo,  liim. 

Name;  what  is  your  name?  vframtia  gu? 

What  is  the  name  ol'thalt  metdinen  a 

meiia  1 
Near,  yiipatilo. 
Night  (or  to-night),  niho. 
No,  til ;  tat. 

Old,  adult,  maziii.     Very  old,  mnzui  a  ve. 
Paddle,  vitc/. 
Pregnant,  yisii, 
Rnin,  tit. 

Rat,  ki't^irt^i;  {Ulmium,  P.) 
Red,  i/eijiir/a. 
Reef,  /•(li/. 
Rope,  t(i/i. 
SacKii,  ifitnp;  tahii ;  (the  latter  word  intro- 

ducid  by  /"i/r/  Ktit,     Sec  page  78.) 
Sand,  ])i. 

Sea,  salt  water,  tut. 
See,  tniagi. 
Set,  as   the  sun,  nu^rilio  (qu.  mora  i  i<>, 

away  in  tho  nigut  ?), 
Shark,  jto. 
Ship,  nitue. 
Short,  yamot. 


Sick,  makdkes. 

Sister,  miaj/um. 

Sit,  matitu. 

Sleep,  OTrtse  (or  mumaiidi.  P.) 

Small,  piit^ik ;  jxit^igit^i.  Very  small, 
])at(igit(;igi ;  (qu.  7Ja-<;iA«VjiAi  ot  pa- 
likitiki  ?  In  tho  dialect  of  Binabe, 
tikitik  is  small.) 

Star,  oij'. 

Stay,  remain,  miimutUli, 

Stone,  rds. 

Strong,  yakailit. 

Sun,  yiiro. 

Talk,  ?i//j,  titiuvp. 

That,  mi'na. 

There,  etisnai. 

Thou,  ^'f>. 

Throw,  kni^ivdra. 

'i'liunder,  ijejia  (pa.  P.) 

To-morrow,  waraziira. 

To-night,  iiilm. 

Tortoise,  vari. 

Understand,  g^rra. 

Very,  kUio ;  ve. 

Wait,  tnjHii. 

Wiirni,  iriihtttf. 

Wash,  bathe,  icatiiti. 

Water,  fresh,  tdru. 
"      salt,  tat. 

U'ave,  ran. 

Whale,  kas. 

What ;  (see  name.) 

While,  /ii't^ihrit^. 

Why,  Imi. 

Wind,  //((p. 

Wood,  liimi'itp. 

Woman,  iv(il7',  vaiivi. 

Yam,  kuri. 

Yellow,  artij/. 

Yes,  ltd. 

Yesterday,  riilo. 


Sa  or  za  is  a  very  common  verbal  particle,  used  with  all  the  tenses ;  as,  gir  za  yvtiinun, 
thou  wcrt  absent  or  away;  nay  sa  bitu,  I  will  come;  gtt  a  7iinj  sa  muka,  thou  and  I  eat; 
gu  za  midgi  ptpi  a  prao,  dost  thou  see  many  canoes  ?  These  sentences,  however,  as 
has  been  before  remarked,  can  hardly  be  relied  upon  as  showing  the  real  idiom  of  the 
language. 


DIALECT    OF   TOBI. 


429 


N  U  M  K  U  A  L  8. 


There  are  three  classes  of  numerals, — the  first  of  a  general  nature,  the  second  npprti- 
printed  to  counting  cocoa-nuts,  and  the  third  used  only  for  fish.     They  are  as  follows  : 


<itNIRAL. 

FOa  COCOA-NUTS. 

rOR  FI8II, 

yut 

su 

iimul 

one 

Mill  (fiulu, 

P.) 

gluii  (guo,  p.) 

gtvimul 

two 

'/" 

sunt 

srimiil 

three 

ira>i 

Villi 

vuniul 

four 

i/nntm  (nim,  P.) 

limi) 

iiimiil 

five 

ytiivor 

warn 

irrirrmiil 

six 

//rtVIJ- 

vijit 

vijiemiil 

seven 

i/awii 

wariu 

ifiiremnl 

eight 

yatu 

tia 

liuemul 

nine 

yasik 

mk 

seki'ima  sii 

sckama  glim 

seka  nut  sirru 

seka  ma  vau,  &c. 

giitk  (giiu-ik.  P.) 

sunk 

vank 

Hmek 

wUnk 

vijik 

U'urik 

tiiiik  {tiuii-ik,  P.) 

snhiin  or  sahuij 

Sik 

ten 

eleven 

twelve 

thirteen 

fourteen 

twenty 

thirty 

forty 

fifty 

sixty 

seventy 

eighty 

ninety 

hundred 

!i 


108 


1 


VOCABULARY 


DIALECT  OF  MTLLK,  ONE  OF  THE  RADACK  ISLANDS. 


Wk  nrn  indohlnd  Cor  this  viioiilMiliiry,  ns  hits  Ihtii  clscwliorr  stated  (p.  **?),  lo  llif 
Hi'V.  H.  Hingliimi,  wlio  obliiiiitd  llio  iiinlciiuls  liir  it  iVdin  lli<.'  two  soiimrei,  Lny  mid 
Hussoy,  shortly  ntliT  tlicir  rosciio  from  ciiiitivity.  [lis  cxiicrioiice  in  writing  llic  Poly- 
ncsiiin  idioms,  and  liis  aniinicy  in  such  mnttcrH,  Icnvo  no  room  to  doulil  tlial  llio  voi.'abn- 
inry  is  as  coinpli-tc  as,  nndcr  tin;  ciriMnnslancos,  it  conld  liav(^  Iuhmi  niadi'.  lie  remarks 
conccniinfj;  it,  that  "  it  is  vory  imiicrlcct ;"  hul  tho  diliricncios  arc  such  as  nuisl  properly 
1)0  rclorrcd  to  ii  limited  knowlodt,.^  of  the  lan},'iiaij;e  on  the  part  of  the  two  men,  wlio 
could  have  nccpiircd  little  more  than  u  smattering;  of  tlie  most  common  idioms,  with  such 
words  as  were  needed  in  the  daily  intercourse  with  the  natives. 

The  orthoj^raphy  adopted  by  Mr.  Itingham  is  so  similar  lo  that  employed  in  this 
volume,  that  hut  I'W  alterations  woulil  l)0  iii'cessary  to  make  it  entirely  thi>  sumi'.  Soim 
of  these,  such  as  the  change  of  aiv  to  ti,  of  ii  to  n,  and  ol'  /  to  (/;',  wc  have  thoui;lil  proper 
to  make.  Ihit  the  double  consonants  etnployi'd  by  Mr.  15.  to  give  a  short  sound  to  the 
preceding  vowel,  ns  in  M/in  for  /n/iii,  have  been  retained,  as  also  the  use  of  the  /(  and  / 
in  sonic  instances  liir  tho  purpose  of  lengthening  n  syllable, — as  moiiiarii,  for  mitimiii. 
amani,  for  umiiii,  ptih-o,  tor  jmo,  &c.  The  combinntion  r/i,  which  frecpiently  occurs  at 
the  end  of  a  word,  seems  to  Ih;  rather  intended  to  express  a  vague  and  obscure  vowel 
sound,  than  that  of  the  consonants  which  com]>ose  it.  Of  th(^  pronominal  allix  an/i  or 
«(;7/,  Mr.  ningham  remarks  that  "  its  sound  would  be  tolerably  well  cxiiressed  by  the 
English  pronoun  their,  by  rejecting  the  I  and  removing  the  /(  to  the  end  ol'  the  word, — 
thus,  cii/i."  I5ut  in  the  ordinary  (thougli  incorrect)  pronunciation  of  the  word  l/iiir,  tin 
(•  is  not  heard,  the  sound  being  nearly  that  which  would  be  written,  with  our  alphaU't. 
^'iii, — and  it  is  probably  some  such  sound  ns  eti  wliich  is  liere  meant  to  lie  represented. 

The  possessive  proniiuns  given  by  Mr.  Ii.  are  /,  i/-ar,  or,  it-tiili,  I  ;  /.ire,  Ihou  or 
you  ;  id,  he,  she,  or  it ;  ilntro,  we.  It  is  evident  that  the  real  word  liir  ynii  (plural)  as 
well  ns  for  llinj  was  unknown  to  his  informants. 


4H',» 


Pil  1 1,  oi,n(i  Y. 


The  |ioiiito»«ivp  or  iiiflixcil  |irnnoun«  nrc  ■nrh,  my  ;  •i'»i,  ifiy  nr  you  j  •<■»,  hi*,  hor,  ita ; 
•erro,  our ;  -ilii/i  or  -iiirli,  Ihcir.     The  Iblluwing  exiiniplt's  ol' llicir  iiao  ore  givpii ! 


Im-iirh 

my  liciusc 

J)/im-iiih* 

my  fiither 

ill!  •(lilt 

tliy  and  your  fioiiso 

iljim-iim 

thy     " 

im^ii 

llJM  liouw 

i/jim-r/i 

his      " 

iiii-irri) 

our  house 

i//iiU'i'n'(t 

our     " 

im-iii  i/i 

their  houHC 

i//iin-iti'i'h 

Ihi'ir  " 

tiii-rn-inn  > 

whoso  houio  7 

lUhi'iirh  * 

my  mother 

I)j(i/iiri, 

n  younger  hrolher  or  sister 

ilfin-'iin 

thy     " 

itjdtiirli 

my  brother  (or  sister) 

i/Jiii-cn 

his      " 

iljiili'i  in 

thy  (or  your)  brother, 

vVe. 

(Ijiti-i  iri) 

our     " 

iljiiliii. 

his 

iljiH'iit'rli 

llieir   " 

iljiiliirn. 

our 

f/jatiitrli, 

their 

[It  is  [irohnble  thot  the  sulTix  of  the  srcond  person  siiigulnr  is  properly,  as  in  Tarnwnn, 
limit,  anil  that  oC  the  plural,  itiiii ;  the  concluding  vowels  of  both  l)cing  omitted,  there 
wdiild  be  no  distiiietion  liclweeii  ihein.] 

Ill  or  tail  siynilies  this  or  tliiil,  as,  i min  ik  in,  n  ^o<id  fish  this.  Mrniiiu  is  also  given 
for  //lis.  Ailtin  or  ailniii  f  who  or  what .'  as,  aitaiii  nuiiiiiiu  !  what  i.s  this  \  MirutOuiii, 
what  ?  what  is  it  >. 

The  tollowing  vm'abulary  is  principally  from  that  of  Mr.  Ilingham,  A  U-w  words 
have  Ix-en  addi'd  from  those  givc^n  in  the  narrative  of  the  two  seamen;  these  hove  the 
English  orthography,  which  they  enipluvi  added  in  parentheses. 


Adze  (iron)  mill. 

Ankle,  kiiiliiiiiiii. 

Arm,  hand,  Inin. 

Asleep,  mriljiiill,  nici/iiili. 

Awake,  mil. 

Axe,  i/Jiimi/i/. 

Back,  cUif!ii/i. 

Bad,  niitia. 

Bad,  jiailjU. 

Basket,  yip. 

Beautiful,  excellent,  emman. 

Belly,  uiiin. 

Bird,  piih-o  or  piio. 

Blanket,  k.ld  (oiwi/). 

Bottle,  bucket,  &c.,  bfikkah. 

Boy,  son,  loJrik. 


Breadfruit,  miili. 

Brother,  elder,  '//(/(  (see  sister). 

"       younger,  iljutiiii. 
Build,  ri. 

Bury,  kufi/iiiiii  (cdI/i/Ikxjiii/). 
Cunnon,  Inikr. 

Cnnoe,  Ixwit,  ship,  ii'in  or  waJi. 
Curve,  hew,  iljikiiljik  (Jick-e-jick). 
Cask,  tiibiinh. 

Chief,  tainiiH  (tammtum),  vroit. 
Chin,   iljimiiiinitfin,  i/Jimmiiilgii/,  iljim- 

miimjirh  (i|U.  r/jimmi,  father,  >ii,  of, 

t/iii,  teeth). 
Cloud  (or  squall),  kOrrH. 
Cocoa-nut,  young,  iii. 

"         ripe,  iraini. 


'  In  the  lilt  of  words  appended  to  the  Narrative  of  l.uy  and  lluwiey,  "  my  father,"  is  written  gimmah 
(Engliah  orthug.)  and  **  my  motlier"  ginnah. 


DIALECT   or    M  I  M,  E. 


4M 


Cnrna-niit  iihcll,  paka. 

Colli,  ]ii(iii. 

C'onw,  initio  (in/to). 

Curd,  lino,  ri)|i<',  kokuiil. 

('(Hint,  III,  liiiniii/m/i  (hiinnettini). 

Cut,  to,  Imi'  (/Kunriti/). 

Diirk,  iiiarok. 

DiiiighiiT,  ^irl.  liilrik,  neiiji, 

Diiy,  run, 

Dciiil,  imiiii/,  niimmit. 

Di({,  Loliikuli  (iiili.r.cmili). 

Divo,  to,  ilulnk  (iliiutuck.) 

DifsM,  1/1  (riic). 

Drink,  irnik. 

UrDWiicd,  iiiiilloit  (iiiiilloiif:), 

Eiir,  l.ijliilliiiiii,  /.n/i/liiiirh. 

I'liirlli,  liirl,  iliist,  nirraii. 

Ent,  miigiih. 

Ekh,  /'■/'. 

Eiiixigli,  Drill. 

Kxccllrnt,  niiinan. 

I'lyi',  iniililiirli. 

Full,  hiiiihk. 

Fiislcn,  i/ji/iij. 

FnthtT,  '/Jim  or  tljinia. 

Fi^ht,  lairiiiiii,  tiiriiniii. 

p'injjcr,  i/jii/i!)iirt,  ifjiiiilleii. 

Fire,  kiiljiiik  (kiil-jn-ick). 

Fish,  ik. 

Food,  kiikk.in  or  kukkoii. 

Foot  or  li'^,  mil. 

Foremost,  lorwrird,  amarn. 

Fuel  (or  wckhI  !),  kHni  (connij). 

Girl,  liilrik,  ncilji. 

Go,  rt/(//,  puilmn,  irailnm  (ti'ijlum), 

God,  spirit,  «»|7. 

Good,  nimi  or  riiiiii ;  emman. 

Grass,  iiiljiict  {oojitoct). 

Grave  (s.),  /»7'. 

Iliind,  /mil. 

IlHndsiimc,  tiilio. 

He,  slic,  it,  ia. 

Head,  /iinrllm. 

Himsr,  im. 

Ilusbnnd,  Mliii. 

I,  »,  «>-«/•. 

Kill,  »<JJ«ii  (iiiniiiii/). 


KiiiCc,  timlrik. 

Know,  ihlliih. 

Lund,  umiii,  iiinf. 

Llirgo,  ('//(/;. 

1,1'nvi'H,  IrllilKil  {/irlli//nil). 

Lie  down,  to,  /hi/ih  (Imh-lia)). 

Li){lil,  niiirriiiii  or  murium. 

Linlilninn,  i/iirrnni. 

Live,  to,  iiiiiiiiirh. 

Mini,  mail',  iiinmurn. 

Maul,  kiiiljii, 

MiKin,  nlliit). 

Mother,  iljiniia, 

Mniilh,  Iniiiii  or  iKi/iren, 

Mii>i|iiito,  tiiknti^iiji, 

Mnski'l,  /unit. 

Nail  (i>r  (liiger),  oufiiik. 

Nail  (iron),  inrrri. 

Ni)ihl,  //(/«  or  /'«{). 

Nose,  /yl'liirt,  li.lten. 

Oar,  pailille,  ki/iliel, 

(^il,  /liiii/ii/r/i. 

Oiilri^'t^er  to  eanoi',  Ai/'kj. 

Paddle,  /iiiiiii  (aiiniirii,  see  onr). 

I' laniis,  hop  {liiiji). 

Powder,  lioltiir]). 

Itnin,  lit. 

Uise,  \!f'{  up,  ih'iirikltk, 

Kiipe,  ^(»  (/oic). 

Uiin,  tilliirlil. 

Sail  (s.),  hiiiljiltii,  uuiljiiltih. 

Sand,  /xjX'. 

Saw  (s.),  i/irri/xiii. 

Sera|H',  f;iiliik. 

Sit,  /<(/(■  (/"//'/)• 

Sew,  .''(7''/7  (thillhil). 

Shark,  li.ikka. 

Sinu;,  «/(/. 

Sister,  elder,  djtn. 

"      yonnyer,  iljiitan  (see  brother). 
Skilliil,  dexterous,  luljcllii,  ailjclh. 
Sky,  All;  (/'"',i')- 
Sleep,  to,  iiiiiiliirti  (iiuuldurah), 
Ski'py,  niiltigi. 
Small,  iiiiiiij. 
Smoke,  liaiU. 
Son,  hoy,  lot/rik. 


100 


434 


PHILOLOGY. 


Star,  etljii  (e/eir). 

Steal,  miihldrh. 

Slecr,  kiliftiliet  [kibhetebet,  sec  oar). 

Stone,  rukkah. 

Strong,  mmljodjau  {ma-jo-jmr). 

Snn,  tU. 

Sunrise,  tiikiii  ill  [titckiii  el). 

Sunset,  iliilsk  at  [iloolock  iil). 

Swill,  migiitii:iit. 

Teeth,  niii  or  tjin. 

This,  or  that,  in  or  iaii ;  mciiiiiu. 

Thou,  kite. 

Thread,  (nli. 

Thunder,  i/ani. 


Walk,  pailam  or  paialam. 
Water,  fresh,  reiniin. 

"      salt,  ISjet. 
We,  deno. 
Well  (s.),  aibvt. 
Whale,  rat. 

What  is  it.'  miriitOani. 
Who,  what .'  aita/i?  ditanil 
Wife,  till  or  rim. 
Wind,  liTito  (giUto). 
Woman,  kiirnih. 
\Vork,  (lerrililil. 
Yesterday,  iiii-  (iiuKii/). 


NUMERALS. 


Djiittn 

one 

(Ijiltlmi 

one  hundred 

RiKth 

two 

ruliltiii 

two  hundred 

Til,, 

three 

tiliUnii 

three  hundred 

Emit/ 

four 

all/mi 

four  hundred 

Ldik'tit 

five 

lililiui 

five  hundred 

Dildjiiio 

si.\ 

ilcrraliin  or 

ilcrrali-hiii 

one  thousand 

Villi j ill ji  mi:  iljuiin 

seven 

Ailjinn 

eight 

Aililili  mc  ilJKini 

nine 

Vjiiijol  or  (Ititjol 

ten 

A  comparison  of  this  vocabulary  witli  that  of  the  Radack  language,  given  in  the 
A|)|x-ndi.v  to  Kotzebue's  first  Voyage,  leaves  no  room  for  doubt  that  the  natives  of  Mille, 
though  differing  in  some  of  their  customs  from  the  inhabitants  of  the  northern  islands,  are 
yet  of  the  same  stock,  and  speak  the  same  tongue.  The  diirerence  in  the  orthography  of 
the  words  is  no  greater  than  would  naturally  arise  from  the  different  circumstances  under 
which  the  two  were  made. 


:'l 


.. 


OUTLINES   OF    A    GRAMMAR 


TAR  A  WAN    LANGUAGE. 


W'k  have  elsowherp  [pngo  90]  stated  the  reasons  wliicli  linvc  induced  us  lo  apply  the 
ii.iiMi'  "I'  Tarawa  to  tlic  group  callrd  by  the  I'lnglish  tlio  Kingsmill  Islands,  and  by  tlio 
I'Vcinh,  L'Arohipel  (iillHTt.  The  sources  from  which  the  malcrials  liave  licen  derived 
liir  lh<'  graniniiir  anil  vocidiulary  which  follow  are,  firstly,  a  collecliuii  of  aliout  four 
h\inilriil  words  made  during  the  brief  intercourse  whi<'h  we  had  with  the  natives;  and, 
sei-ipiidly,  the  information  obtained  from  two  seamen,  Kirby  imil  Grey,  tin.'  one  Irish  and 
the  niher  Scotch,  who  were  taken  by  us  from  the  islands  of  Kuriu  and  Makin,  on  which 
ihe\  had  U'en  resident,  the  former  three  and  the  latter  live  years.  I'nibrtunately,  we 
had  no  0|i|iortuuily  of  couununicafiug  with  the  natives,  after  taking  these  men  on  l)oard, 
and  innlil  not,  tliereliire,  make  use  of  their  intervention,  to  ac(|uire  a  more  thoiou;;h  know- 
ledf><'  of  the  language  than  they  themselves  wr-re  able  to  furnish.  Their  chief  delicieney 
was  ur  [.ronunciation,  in  which  their  c^rrors  were  such  as  are  usually  made  by  uneducaleil 
men,  win  I  attempt  to  learn  a  language  after  reacliing  middle  age.  The  articulations  tti 
whiili  such  persons  have  never  iH'lore  Iktu  accustomed  can  with  dilliculty  b<>  acquired, 
anil  the  nicer  shades  of  sound  are  usually  neglected. 

On  the  other  hainl,  in  the  wonts  obtaini'd  by  us  directly  from  the  natives,  the  laiigungi 
In  111};  entirely  strange,  with  no  common  medium  of  cominunication,  some  mistakes,  as  a 
matter  of  course,  were  made  in  the  meanings  of  words.  These  were  alh-rvards  corrected 
by  ilie  iwo  interjireters.  The  proiiuncialien,  however,  of  these  words  was  irohahly  deter- 
inined  with  considerable  e  .actnoss.  The  following  list  of  vocables,  (jive  i  as  they  were 
iiblauicd  by  us  I'rom  the  natives,  and  from  each  of  the  interpreters,  will  exhibit  the  prin- 
cipal discrepancies  Im'Iwccu  the  three,  and  will  show  the  allowances  which  uiiist  Ih'  made 
for  iiiis|ironuiiciatii)n  in  the  words  given  solely  on  the  aiilhorily  of  the  two  seamen. 


NAIIVF. 

tnniiild 

p<>/H>i 

miimii/i 


KIKRV.  aREV. 

miitiik  miak 

jwjiin,  Inlm  Mm 

iiuiiKDji,  mtidij  [iiKi'  tiiji,  burning  wi»id] 


above,  to  windward 
Arum  osculentnm 
ashes 


436 


PHILOLOGY. 


aku 

iigu 

dgiia 

back 

paicne 

baien 

[tiiguau,  bOra] 

basket 

biiai 

biiai 

biiai 

beard 

man 

man 

amfn 

bird 

atiii 

tiliii 

aile 

boy 

biri 

dfri 

tiiiin  (his) 

brother 

Utriii 

dirii 

tiirti 

my  brother 

tanmu  or  tarim 

i/frfm 

thy  brother 

Ilia 

lien 

Ufa 

chief 

natiu  (my) 

niiljii  (r.iy) 

/ii'u/Jin  (his) 

child 

vki 

II  gi 

uki 

cluw,  nail 

vaiji 

tiag 

net 

cloud 

miiimotu,  moimotu 

moimot 

[«/] 

cocoa-nut 

pod 

liiii 

tibin  [te  pi  •li] 

old  cocoa-nut 

til  pa 

tap 

cuirass,  armor 

rfioiii 

riiia 

riiia 

diUKre 

yiiiga 

pain 

kiiina 

dny 

mate 

mat 

met 

dead 

hniipii,  karep^ 

kaiiip 

dra^'on-fly 

?ii)iia,  pima 

vimii 

vima 

to  drink 

moi 

mo 

moi 

to  drink 

tiiiiija,  tihiipa 

tdnxgia 

tdtitgam 

ear 

kaiia 

kaiia 

kana 

to  eat 

mata 

mata 

me  tan 

"ye 

tamiim  (thv) 

ttniitm  (ihy) 

ttimaiia  (his) 

Cat  her 

6 

ilo  [!'•  ()] 

to 

fence 

ai 

te  [te  ai] 

tai 

fire 

ati 

at 

firoplncc 

ika 

'? 

iga 

fish 

vintn 

miy 

■tiap 

ny 

aniardkc 

amiirak 

limarak 

food 

rniiiiui,  raoioi 

roir 

Toiri 

good 

utciite 

tiitiit  [le  utciite] 

dwtiid 

grass 

tamiiroa 

tamiiro 

teniaro 

handsome 

tciiii. 

dim  or  tua 

diia 

he 

atit 

edit 

vadii 

head 

Lata,  lima 

/)ft,  iii/ia 

Uimii 

house 

mariiijHi,  inaniapa 

mump 

miiniap 

council-house 

piii 

nai 

ipiii 

I 

apa,  lieuiia 

ap,  liinu 

t^iiji  \tc  apa] 

island,  country 

fogo 

VV- 

notiDii 

itch 

P" 

ba 

ban 

leaf 

uai 

wti 

ven 

leg 

rill 

nf 

rin 

lip 

uDuine 

11  man 

man 

man 

i 


TARAWA. 


437 


NATIVK. 

KfRBV. 

atiwt. 

kie 

/,'ie 

e* 

ITlftt 

kamiiimui,  kamoimoi 

kamaimai 

Uikamoi 

molasses 

makaiga 

jiM/.aina 

mahaiiia 

moon 

ara 

era 

ara 

name 

roroa 

aroro 

ton 

nock 

akfa 

akea,  aki 

akea,  idk 

no 

/xiiri 

/mil- 

boinim 

nose 

lumn 

riima 

riima 

outrigger 

k»  iiai 

fniiiiti 

tiikapr 

pntli 

kitiuki 

tikimo  [Ic  kimo(i\ 

tikimo 

nit 

tuiiri 

tiiiir 

tiiri 

sea,  salt  water 

?i(wiia 

iiaoria 

e/iorio 

see  it 

titmimc 

tmiirir 

shadow 

« lie 

diifiie 

[liikalaka] 

to  sing 

tiknhka. 

ihkiiilik 

tikiiliki 

to  sit 

kiiiawa 

kuiitvii. 

kitrima 

sky 

main 

malu 

[krrii,  <j:ini'\ 

to  sleep 

Uino,  tan 

tim 

tiiiin 

soil,  sand 

piioloH 

hiritii 

liiritii 

stomach,  belly  (my) 

alijiii,  iilip 

aiib 

tiili;ip 

stone 

iiuii 

taaig 

Uii 

Sim 

kdfkan 

kaijknn 

kiujkinj 

sweet,  palatable. 

noiiu 

IIOIIIl 

luma 

to  swim 

Kijgoe,  t)g(>c 

iiijfie,  iygc 

ivei 

thou 

nine 

neriiii 

tongue 

laijiliiiji 

tatjitinji 

eta-g 

to  weep 

ok  mi 

dgua 

lisiia 

whale 

tcra 

tim 

tigara 

what  ? 

pa 

ya 

ana 

where ! 

iintiii 

aiitai 

anda 

who? 

'I'lie  chief  ditrerences  which  will  he  remarked  are  (1),  the  change  in  the  vowels  from 
n  l)rcin<l  to  a  slender  sound,  us  <  itiii  and  inh  for  «/<//,  iteri'  (or  liiri,  S:c. ;  (2),  the  frequent 
omission  of  the  coneludiiig  vowel,  as,  iiaij  for  «f(;.t,  unit  for  mute,  ijoii  for  ijoijn;  (.S),  the 
coalescence  of  the  article  te  with  the  nouns,  as,  tai,  fire,  for  te  at,  liittil,  grass,  for  te 
iitciitc;  (4),  tlie  shifting  of  the  accent,  which  is  usually  thrown  back,  as  amiirak  and 
dmariik  (nr  aiiiiiriike,  tikimo  Cor  te  kimiiii ;  (.5),  the  change  of  consonants  of  the  same 
class,  as,  /'  anil  /),  t  and  //,  v  ami  ir,  ij  and  ii,  k,  ,i',  and  /., — and  somelinirs  those  of  ilif- 
ferent  classes,  as  /',  /',  and  </.  Some  discrepancies  in  the  lists  must  be  referred  to  a 
dilli'ri  nee  of  dialect  between  Miikiii  and  the  southern  islands,  as  likani,  what,  for  tera  ; 
krrii,  sleep,  for  nuiln. 

The  grammatical  characleristies  have  been  deduced  in  part  from  the  sentences  written 
down  from  the  pronunciation  of  the  natives,  but  chielly  from  the  communications  of 
Kirliy.  lie  was  a  man  of  consideriible  intelligence,  had  married  the  daughter  of  the 
principal  chief  of  Kiiria,  and  had  the  best  opportunities  for  acquiring  c  knowledge  of  the 

110 


438 


PHILOLOGY. 


Ianguni;c.  His  nrqunintancc  with  its  idioms  was  more  extensive  thnn  might  bo  inferred 
from  his  (icrcclivo  prnniiiieiation.  Many  deficirncios,  however,  still  remain  to  bo  supplied 
in  the  follmviri!;  grammatical  sketch,  and  some  errors  will  possibly  iiave  to  bo  corrected 
on  further  invesligiition. 


O  R  T  II  O  C  11  A  I'  II  Y. 

The  following  remarks  upon  the  snimds  fif  the  lan^irigc  were  written  immediately  afier 
leaving  'I'.ipiitcoiiea  (Dr-iimniond's  I,),  and  lKll)re  we  look  on  hoard  the  two  sailors  : — 
"  The  arlii'idnlions  are  very  dilfK'idl  to  calcli,  owini;  to  the  gullnr.il  and  indislincl  jiro- 
nuneialioM;  heneo  arose,  at  (irst,  many  siiimilar  n)isi;diis  jji  writing  them,  such  as  the 
use  of  I  and  even  h  instead  of  i'  .■  /'  for  ii  and  vice  veisn  ;  il  liir  }\  iVc.  They  had  no  f. 
It,  J,  i,  or  V.  'i'he  /,  whii-h  was  once  or  twice  written,  was  picipi'riy  an  /■ ;  /)  and  ''  are 
the  same  sound;  as  are  t  and  il,  k  and  f.  The  «  is  eonniinn,  and  in  a  li'W  instances  llie 
sorter  nasal  sound  of  the  I'Vench  laiigiiaue  was  heard.  There  are  several  comhinalinns 
of  consonants,  as  nl,  »s,  iiii\  iir,  \e.  .Most  ol'the  wonis  teruiin.ate  in  vowels,  and  where 
till'  contrary  appears,  the  consonant  is  pronounced  with  a  sort  of  prolonged  utleraia'e,  as 
though  there  were  a  vowel  suppressed  :  which  we  presume  to  havi'  been  really  the  case. 
Diphthongs  are  nmuerous,  and  being  pronounced  with  great  (pliekne^s,  their  orlhogr.iphy 
is  som<'limes  doubtful, — as,  ui  or  tii,  ixi  or  ok,  iw  or  iii. 

"  The  accent  is  ollen  placed  on  thi'  antepenult, — rarely  on  the  l;ist  syllable.  \\  hen  a 
possessivi'  pronoun  is  allixed  to  a  noun,  the  accent  is  shilled  liirward  one  syllahli'.  as 
ii]ici,  country,  tijiniiiii,  thy  country." 

In  the  pronunciation  of  Grey  and  Kirby  thi'  .sounds  /.  /,  r,  .<  und  r  were  bi'ard.  but 
they  seenieil,  in  all  eases,  to  \»'  corniplions  of  other  elements,  as,  /,,  I,  and  ir.  If  the 
language  shoidil,  heri'.ilii'r,  be  studied  on  the  spot  by  a  I'oinpelent  person,  the  lunnber  ot' 
consonant  sounds  will  probably  lie  reduced  to  eight,  viz.: — /.,  m,  ii,  ij.  /i,  r,  t,  ir,  being 
(with  the  exception  of  the  ij)  the  same  elements  as  are  found  in  the  Hawaiian. 


ET  V  MOLOi;  V. 

Properly  speaking  there  ar<>  no  indecliuns  in  the  laiigii.'iL'i'.  The  accidents  of  case, 
numbiT,  tense,  mood,  \-c.,  are  denoted  either  by  independent  words,  or  by  alli\ed  [larli- 
cles.  'l"he  panicles,  however,  sometimes  coalesce  with  the  word  to  which  they  belong, 
in  such  a  manner  as  to  have  the  appearance  of  inlleclions. 

■I'  II  i;   A  Ii  'lie  I,  i:. 

The  arlii'le  is  tr,  which  seems  to  1m'  merely  the  word  for  nm:  Il  is  used,  however, 
befori!  nouns  in  the  plural  as  well  as  in  the  singular, — though,  possibly,  in  the  li>rme:r 
ease,  they  in.Ty  have  a  eollccllve  signification,  and  Ik'  regarded  as  singular.  It  t.ikes 
the  place  of  both  our  arli(des,  as  : — 

Tia  kii/iii  ft:  lii,  I  eat  the  fruit. 

Antai  /latwarai  n'  te  tajxi,  don't  stab  me  with  the  knili". 


TARAWA. 


439 


ii  iKiitrarnk  //'  Ir  tiijxi,  sinbbcd  witli  n  kiiifo. 

Iriliiiiu  Ic  iiiiiiiiilii,  till"  men  (lisliki'  liim. 

Tia  liomi  ti'  ii'imi,  1  iiikIimsIuiuI  iIh"  swimming. 

It  Is  possible  thill  nnothi'r  iirliric,  ii  or  c,  really  exists  in  the  lnngim;;e,  nlllii)u;;h  it  was 
not  p-rooiveil  by  the  inler|>reters.  On  iii(|iiiiinj;  of  a  native  the  wonl  for  iiicii,  he  gave 
both  te  iKiniKlii.  ami  a  ixniuilii ;  in  other  eases,  a  similar  parlii'le  seemed  to  be  used,  but 
our  o|i|)orluuilles  did  not  enable  us  lu  determine  its  iwuct  im|iort. 

T  II  i;  s  I'  n  s  T  A  \  T  I  V  i:. 

'Pile  gender  is  disliiigiiished,  when  neeessaiy,  by  the  words  (iiitniir,  man  or  male,  and 
iiiii'C,  wuiiian  or  ll'male.  When  Ihe  snbsttmlive  signilies  an  irralioiia!  ereiiture,  these 
wonls  are  ji|i|ieiided  iintiirdialely  to  it ;  as  //to'  ////iti///'^  a  eoi'k  ;  ///n^  i//i/if\  a  h'-ii.  When 
it  is  a  term  used  only  of  persons,  the  parliele  ///  is  inserted,  as,  (ifni  //i  ////tit//i\  a  Mian- 
ehild  ;  t//t/i  i/i  «/;«e,  a  girl  (perhaps,  a  ehild  i///it)//i:  men,  \e.);  til  >/i  »/»"/"■,  an  old 
man  t  hi  /li  niiiir,  an  old  woman. 

Case  is  denoted  l>\'  prejiositions  prefixerl  to  tli'-  siihstanli\t'.  The  most  common  .'iri' 
///,  of,  lor,  from,  aiiioii^',  by  ;  i,  to,  al,  in  ;  /,(//,  \"  :  /ii  and  n/i/i/i/.  from,  aiiioiit;,  about. 
lx.'longiiig  lo;  t/ia,  wilb,  by.  It  should  !«•  observcil,  however,  ihal  //;,  /',  ami  n/u  .are  the 
only  prepositions  wliiidi  euii  inmiediiilely  precede  ihe  noun.  The  others  uiust  have  the 
tirst  of  these  («t  ux  «')  alh'r  tliein,  as,  itki  iii  /'(«',  nail  of  linger;  /  Kii/in,  in  Kurin; 
ma  Ir  ihn,  with  the  lish.  W'itin  kai/i  tc  tiiiiir,  carry  it  lo  llx'  woman.  Jiii//  ti/iniii. 
from  thy  inoiher. 

'I'he  panicle  /;/  frcrpientlv  loses  its  Vowel,  as  in  the  iiist.'iiices  just  given,  and  is  ilien 
suffixed  lo  the  preceding  wcud,  whether  noun,  verb,  or  preposiiioii,  as,  i/iii/n/iji//  Ir  m, 
ashes  of  the  lire;  id  Iki/i  tiitni,  1  tun  done  with  lidling.  liy  tlf  inlerpreters,  a  vowel 
;'  or  ('  «as  iVeiiuenlly  inserted  beliire  the  ",  as,  ko  In/link  in  a/il/,  thou  art  great  among 
spirits.  This,  bowi'vcr,  w  is  probably  only  the  final  letter  of  ihe  preceding  word  omilled 
in  their  usual  prouuncialioii  {l/iil>i/k  for  ImUik/),  and  reinserled  when  it  iR'c.-ime  necessary 
in  oriler  to  separate  two  consonauls ;  Ihe  foregoing  phrase  >liould  therefore  properly  be, 
ko  hiih^iki  //*  find. 

We  could  discover  no  iiioile  ol'  dislinguisliiiig  the  iiugular  iVoui  the  plural,  except  by 
prefixing  llie  words  //ti/ili  tind  IniilKlr  (many),  as  may  be  seen  in  Ihe  v.icabulary.  It  is 
possible  that  other  modes  may  exist,  hn',  if  so,  they  are  si'ldom  used.  In  general  tlic 
number  of  the  thing  or  things  spid\cii  of  is  to  lie  understood  from  the  context,  or  from 
circumstances. 


T  II  F.    A  I)  J  i;  V.  T  I  V  i;. 

The  same  word  is  ollen  used,  with  no  idiange  of  form,  as  substantive,  adjective,  and 
verb;  Ihiis,  «/«/// means  '•life,"  "alive,"  and  "to  live."  The  exact  meaning  is  deter- 
mined by  the  eolloealion.  'I'he  adjective  iinmcdialely  succeeds  the  noun  which  it  ipiali- 
(ies, — as,  ii//iit//r  /t///ii,  good  man.  When  an  adjei-live  precedes  a  iiomi,  it  takes  a  verbal 
signification,  or,  at   least,  the  substantive  vc-b  is  to  be   understood   between  them, — as. 


I 

i 

h 


f  If 


f 


440 


PHILOLOGY. 


amiiKiu  le  buok,  the  war  is  long.    In  like  manner  the  adjective  liccomcs  a  verb  by  taking 
the  prononiinnl  prefixes, — as,  lia  andnnii,  I  ntn  tail ;  ko  Imbaki,  thou  art  great. 

The  degrees  of  comparison  are  expressed  by  the  prepositions  kai  and  ni,  which  are 
placed  arter  the  odjeclive,  oiid  are  tiien  to  h:  rendered  Ihan  and  amonf;, — as,  Tin  ananuii 
e  kdiiii,  I  am  taller  than  thou  (lit.  tall  to  thee).  Aiitai  anunttu  e  nir,  who  is  the  tollest 
of  us  (lit.  who  is  tall  among  us)  I 

N  U  M  !■;  R  A  L  S. 

The  natives  ol'Taputeouea  furnished  us  with  several  sets  or  classes  of  numerals,  which 
are  probably  used  in  cnuntini;  objects  of  ditl'erent  kinds ;  but  on  this  point  we  had  no 
moans  of  ol)lainin)i  iVoni  them  any  oxplanalion.  The  interpreters,  also,  although  they 
were  aware  of  the  exislence  of  these  several  classes  of  words,  and  believed  lliem  to  have 
distinct  applications,  yet  were  unable  to  give  any  precise  information  respecting  them,  and 
were  accustomed  to  use  them  indillerently.  They  thought,  however,  that  those  which 
terminated  in  iiuuiii  were  used  in  reckoning  i/ioiifhs  or  iiiooi/s,  and  those  in  ^)oi)  for  t/ai/s, 
(or  rather  iii^'/ils.)     It  is  possible  that  those  which  end  in  ua  are  used  in  counting  ^xiiVs, 


1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 


/e 

ua 

teiii 

a 

/limii 

Olio 

iti 

odnii,  uanii 

run 


10     trgaun,  fe/iiiina 


teai 

Una 

tnnniia 

tejH)gi/a 

ua 

xiua 

uiimatia 

udjnij  or  ual>0}j 

ti/ia 

teiiua 

truimtuia 

tenijiog 

(1 

li  ua 

iiinana 

llJIOff 

iiinwa 

imdua 

imamana 

iinajiotj,  &c. 

onca 

oiidua 

onomaiia 

ilia 

itiua 

ilitiiinui 

oumi 

(Mt/iua 

uiuiiiuana 

ua{\) 

niiiuu 

iinmana  (?) 

tegauii 

trhutiui 

Idjuuaii 

The  higher  numbers  are  as  Ibllows : 


20 

ualmi 

30 

triiibui 

40 

aliiii 

50 

nimnhui 

60 

ouolmi 

70 

iti/iui 

eo 

nnnliui  [thi 

90 

ruiihui 

100 

te  yd 

200 

mi  ijd 

300 

teni  ijii,  &c 

lil/ui  .'I 


1 ,000  c  rrpu  or  rcpii 

2,000  ua  rrpu 

3,000  t'ni/ipn  (for  ton  roiu) 

4,000  «  rrpu,  &c. 

10,000  U-  kiul 

20,000  ua  kuri 

30,000  Uiii,  kuri,  &c. 


One  of  the  natives,  in  counting  his  fingers,  used  what  s("emed  to  be  ordinal  ninnbers, 
formed  by  prefixing  ka  and  sullixing  ija, — as,  ka  iiriya  (!),  second  ;  ka  tiiiaiija,  third  ; 
ka  aiija,  Iburth  ;  ka  ?iimdiija,  fifth. 


TARAWA. 


441 


P  K  O  N  o  r  N  s. 

The  personal  pronouns,  when  used  soparatoly  mid  independently  of  other  words,  are 
as  fullows : 


tjai,  I 

pffiy  fir  injgi)c,  thou 

teua,  he 

Wirt,  she 


ynnd,  we 

Hti^iuiii  or  •!  1)1x11  III i ,  yc 
i'ii/cii/,i,  llicy  (inii.sc.) 
ii(i/c'i/.i,  Ihcy  (leni.) 


There  are  three  li'miniiie  prommns  of  the  third  person  singular.  Sia  is  used  in 
speukingof  a  person  who  is  absent;  iiiiii  or  /((/////,  when  she  is  present;  nnd^dwor 
niyire  in  like  nianuer,  but  with  a  respeelliil  .sijiMiliciitiou.    Kirby  rendered  it  "that  lady." 

The  personal  pronouns,  when  |irelixed  as  noiriiualives  to  a  verb,  have  n  dillerent  Ibrm. 
They  nre  tia  {or  in),  \  or  we;  /.o,  ihou ;  e  (or  in),  ho  or  they;  ijkam,  ye ;— as,  lia 
wmriii,  I  .see  it ;  Ld  nanriti,  thou  seesi  it  ;  r  nawia  Una  or  nin,  he  or  she  sees  it  ;  lia 
nuorin  ijairii,  wo  see  it ;  ijImhi  naiirin,  ye  sec;  it ;  <■  naoria  tcukaki  or  iiiiLuld,  they  see  it. 
It  will  be  remarked  that  in  the  first  and  third  persons  plural,  the  separate  pronouns  are 
appended  to  the  verb,  in  order  to  distinguish  thcni  I'roui  the  sinj;ular.  l<i  is  useil  in  the 
first  person  instead  of /if/ belbre  the  preterite  partiele  /ifi/f,  probably  Ibr  eu|)bony— as, 
tui  in  lit,  1  sew  it  ;  ia  liiui  iiri'i,  [  have  sewed  it.  It  is  used  also  liir  the  third  person, 
as,  ill  iiiaiiiii  nil  liipii  rti,  my  knili-  is  lost  to  me. 

The  pronouns  have  still  another  Ibrni  when  alHxed  to  verbs  in  the  objective  case. 
They  are  iii,  me ;  ho  (or  ifj)  thee ;  ia,  him,  her,  it,  or  them ;  ura  (ar  or  '/),  us  ;  and 
kami  (or  -ami),  you;  as,  kupf,  to  tie;  kiipiai,  tie  me;  kiijiiho  (or  ktijicL-o),  tie  thee; 
kapcia  tcua  or  iiiu  or  u-akaki,  &c.,  tie  him,  lier,  or  them  ;  kupiani,  tie  us  ;  kapikiimi, 
tie  you. 

The  possessive  pronouns  have  also  two  liirms,  separate  and  affixed.  The  former, 
which  precede  the  noun,  are  as  follows : 


au,  my 

am'  ((|U.  amu?),  thy 
anil,  he 


f(/«,  our 

iiiiii,  your 

ana,  irakaki  (?),  their 


As,  f<«  Affm,  my  relation  or  kinsman;  aw'  kaia,  \\\\ ;  iiiia  kara,  his;  ara  kuia,o\ir 
relation  ;  ami  kiini,  \  our ;  ana  kara  irakaki,  iiukiki,  their,  &c.  The  latter  Ibrm  is, 
however,  doubtful. 

The  possessive  pronouns,  when  postti.xed  to  nouns,  are  nearly  the  same  with  the  sepa- 
rate elass,  merely  dropping  the  initial  vowel.  They  are  ii,  my  ;  //i'  or  nut,  thy  ;  na, 
his;  ra,  our;  mi,  your;  ia  (/),  their.  The  last  is  doubtful,  and  may  have  rather  a 
dcmonslralive  meaning.  The  fillowing  examples  will  show  the  manner  in  which  these 
pronouns  are  united  with  a  substantive. 


ini,  canoe 
unit,  mv  eanoe 


tiima,  father 
tamuii,  my  father 


111 


k 


! 


442  PII 1 1,  oi.OG  V. 

irkiii\  thy  raiKM" 

irdiiii,  his  c'liniK! 

triirii,  (iiir  ciiiioc 

ifdiiii,  yiMir  ciiiiix; 

vaid,  llicir  wiiioc  (.'),  .ir  those  cniim's 


liiiniiiii,  tliy  liitlirr 
tiimiiiiii,  his  liilhiT 
tiiiiiitni,  cMir  DilhiT 
liiiiiih/ii,  yiiur  I.iiIkt 
tamuiii,  Ihiir  (!)  liilhcr 


What  (hstiiiclioii,  if  any,  p.\isls  in  the  niipliciilion  ciriht'sr  iwn  cliissi-s  of  prnnoiiiiH,  wo 
conic!  not  li'arii.  In  sonii'  rasrs  ihi'V  serin  to  Ix'  nscd  imhlliiinlly,  as,  mi  Imhi  and 
ImiIiiii,  my  hoiisi'.  'I'lic  siillixccl  |ir(iiii>iiiis  an'  always  ii^cii  willi  llic  |>rr|>(isili(ins,  instead 
oftlie  ohjei'live  fcirni  cil'ihe  pM'sunal,  wliicli  would  seem  to  lie  uiiisl  eorreel.  'I'lliis  ill  (or 
niii)  of  or  willi  ini' ;  rum,  of  iheo  ;  rum,  of  or  anKin;{  us;  ruiiii,  of  you  ;  in  llie  third 
person  a  dillerent  I'orm  is  used,  heinjj  the  preposition  »'  {«i),  and  tin;  personal  pronoun, 
as,  rim  trim,  iiin,  viihiiki,  mikiiLi,  of  hiui,  her,  them. 

The  demoMstralive  pronouns  are  li>rineil  hy  means  of  tlio  adverbs  iii,  here,  imd  iiri, 
lliere,  poslli.xed  to  the  nnun,  with  the  artic  le  If  precediui;, — as,  tv  Inilii  iii  (or  If  I'lilai), 
this  house  ;  Ir  IhiIii  iiri  (or  le  htihiri),  that  luiuse.  lain  wiis  used  hy  Kirhy  as  a  plural 
form,  as,  aiiliiia  liijiiiui  iiiin?  whose  knives  are  those  !  It  ma)  he  douhted  wlielher  this 
is  correct. 

'l"ho  interrogative  pronouns  are  iiiildi,  \\\\o\  Inn,  iir  trrui,  whiil  I  iiiiirii,  iiiiii/ni,  or 
anu/riii,  what !  what  for?  era  or  irii,  how  many  !  iiii,  which  (  Aiiliii,  wlien  it  pri'cedos 
n  vcrh,  usually  takes  in  after  it,  to  distinuuish  it  from  ihi'  prohihitive  particle  niitni,  "do 
not,"  us,  iiiitiii  ill  i/iriijii,  who  U'ats  him  !  iiiilui  i/irinin,  do  not  U'at  him.  Tor  exam- 
ples oftlie  other  iulerro<;ativcs,  see  tlie  vocahulary. 

There  are  no  relative  pronoun. ,  their  olHce  Iwiiij,'  sup|>lied  hy  the  construction  of  the 
sentence,  as,  e  im  te  Inpn  Im  iiiniin  rrii,  where  is  the  knil'e  [tliatj  yon  received  [it|  from 
me  \     III  till  le  hnta  l;o  hntiia,  is  the  house  linished  [which]  you  were  hiiildiiiir  [it J  ' 

T  H  E    V  I]  It  B. 

There  nre  several  particles  which  serve  to  distinguish  the  tenses  and  moods  of  the 
verb,  hut  they  arc  fre(|uently  omitted  when  the  sense  is  clear  without  them. 

The  present  has  no  particular  sign,  unless  the  «  or  c  which  was  freipiently  heard  at 
the  begimiinf;  of  a  sentence  may  he  looked  iijion  as  such.  Rut  it  s. cms  to  l«'  in  most 
cases  an  expletive,  or  at  least  ii  mere  sign  nf  a  verbal  signilii'ation,  as  it  is  used  with  the 
|iasl  and  future  tenses  as  well  as  with  the  present.  This  same  part' de,  «  or  ^,  occurs 
continually  in  the  sentences  as  given  by  the  interpreters,  in  places  where  no  mr'aniiii,' 
whutever  can  be  nliixed  to  it.  It  si'oms  to  lie  ollen  introduced  for  euphony  alone,  and 
wc  arc  inclined  to  believe  that  in  many  cases  it  was  miTcly  a  misproniuieiation  of  the 
terminal  vowel,  which,  ns  has  Iwen  hellire  iulim.-ited,  is  usually  very  lightly  prnnounced 
by  the  natives,  and  was  freipienlly  suppressed  altei;ether  hy  the  liireigners.  'J'hus  the 
phrase,  c  riik  r  te  niiiiil  e  miniii,  a  man  comes  aller  thee,  shcjuld  piol'ably  he,  r  rokn  ti 
(Himiitii  miiiniii. 

Till  (which  iiiu-.t  not  he  cojiliiunded  w  ilh  thr>  pronominal  pn  fix  Im.  I),  means  to 
fiiiiuli,  or  to  hr  ihiie  wilh  any  tiling;  with  iIm'  particle  ii  allixed,  it  lieenmes  linn,  ami  is 
then  used  as  a  sii/n  <if  past  time,  fir  compleled  action;  as,  «■</(/,  sew  it ;  in  tiii/i  in  in, 
I  have  sewed  it,  or  am  done  wilh  sewing  it. 


T  A  K  A  \V  A. 


443 


Na  in  iho  sif!n  of  the  I'litiirn.     Tia  /iii  inin,  I  will  sew  il. 

Kniiu  is  iisid  wliiTc  in  I'^iifili^li  wo  should  ciniilny  the  wonis  "  uniiig  to,"  or  "  iihoiit  to.' 
7'ia  /xiiiiii  in  ill,  I  am  jioiii^'  l<i  sew  it.      limiii  nil  Ir  iinli,  \hr  I'lii'idi's  will  soon  rise, 

hiiiiiii,  f;(iiiiii,  Iniiii-fidiiiii,  ir,  iiro  |iri'ri.\i'(l  to  vcrlis  to  llirm  the  cojidilional  ni'Hid,  in 
which  c'lisc  ihi'V  liilic  till'  |ilac(!  oI'iIk^  pri'ciMlin;;  |jarlirli's, — us,  hiiinii.  /,ii  jmni,  tin  /.niiiii- 
fcf"!),  il'  ihoii  strike  nil',  I  will  kill  ihee ;  li<iiii-i:iiiiiii  l.o  jhkii  ijI^hii,  Un  m<i(i-,  il'  Ihnn  liad.st 
strni'k  Mil'  then,  tlion  wrrt  di'ad. 

/»!/,  thai,  in  onlei'  to,  (l(!sij;nnl('s  the  siihinnitivr' or  inliriitivi'  nioml,  as,  (y/.in;/  humil- 
1111)1111  lint  Kiiiiuilriii,  yc  aro  di'i'rivinj;  ni"  that  yo  may  kill  ino  (or  in  oriirr  to  kill). 
Nil iji/m/,0  11/  inn  Kiiliiiii^n,  I  am  coniini;  to  oil  Ihoi'.  Allrr  /.')  Ihi/i  parlii'lc  Ijcrumi'S  iia, 
ns,  nini,  Ln  iin  nm,  roino  that  llmil  niayrsl  drink.  Inn  is  nsed  in  asking'  |ii'rinissiun,  as, 
inn  niiiin,  may  I  ilriidv  ! 

I\ii,  prrlixi'd  to  a  vcrh,  !;ivcs  it  a  caiisativi'  sense,  ns,  niiilc,  to  die;  hnmalr,  to  eansc 
to  die,  to  kill ;  IhiIhi,  to  Tail,  ImIkiLii,  to  ranse  to  Call,  to  throw  down. 

'J'lie  relki'live  and  reiiprocal  forms  lire  inajo  hy  simply  alllxini,'  to  the  verh  the 
ohjeelive  proiiiiims  of  the  same  person  with  thi.'  nimiinnlive,  as,  tia  ,',nniii/ciii,  I  kill 
niysrll';  /,r)  /,n/iii;n,  thou  ties!  ihysill".  llhini  in/,iii::nnii  rnimi,  ye  love  one  another 
anioni;  ynnrselves  (iln;  preposition  rn  U'lng  nenssary  lo  ilistini;insh  the  rociprotal  I'rom 
the  relleclive). 

The  imperative  is  the  verb  in  its  simplest  Corm,  as,  nit/,n,  no  I  iniu,  sew  it ! 

The  passive  partieiph;  is  formed  hy  siilhxijii;  «/.■  or  7,-  (perhaps  r//,/)  to  the  vcrh,  as, 
kiirn/iii,  le  hide;  l^nriipnl;  (or  hnrnpaiik),  hidden;  y«),  lo  strike,  y/iw/,-,  struck. 

'I"he  liilliiwin;,'  paradii;m  will  show  the  manner  in  wliiih  these  pnrtii'les,  and  the  pro- 
nominal allixi's,  arc  united  to  the  verb. 


nnla,  to  tall. 

/in  htda  n"i,  I  fall 
ko  Imkn.  ihoii  (hllesi 
e  IniLn  trim,  hi'  Dills 
till  link'!  miira,  we  fall 
^kniii  /"tkn,  ye  fall 
e  Ixikn  niikaki,  they  fall 

in.  linn  Inikii,  1  have  lidlen 

kotinn  Imkii,  ihon  hast  fallen 

(■  tiitn  linkn  Inni,  he  has  lidlen 

la  Inn  Imkn  iiniiii,  we  have  Ihllen 

jfkuni  linn  Ixikii,  ye  have  fallen 

r  linn  Itnka  wnknki,  I  hey  have  lidlen 

till  nr  liikn.  1  shall  liill 

ki)  nn  liiikn,  llioii  will  fall 

r  nn  iiiil.n  Imn.  he  will  f'lll,  iVe. 

tin  knnn  I'likn.  I  am  .:hoiil  In  fall 

kii  knnn  Iml^n,  llimi  art  ■\\v:[\\  lo  liill 

F  kaiiii  Uika  li-iin,  he  is  i;ii|;ii;  lo  lull,  ilVic 


knniii  Iin  Imkn,  if  1  fall 
kanui  kn  Imkn,  if  thou  tall,  vVc. 


inn  Imkn  niii,  that  1  may  fall 

inn  Imkn  iniitiv,  or  / 

ko  nil  Imkn,  S 

inn  Imkn  lean,  that  he  iiiiiv  fall. 


that  thou  niavcst  fall 


hinliikn,  to  cause  to  liill,  to  throw  down. 

tin  k'llinknni  (iir  kiilmkiii)  1  cause  myself 

to  liill 
Iia  kiiliiikn^i),  1  cause  thee  lo  full 
//('  kn/iii/niin,  1  cause  him  to  (all 
till  kniiiiknnin,  I  cause  us  to  fall 
till  kalinhniinnii,  1  cause  you  In  fall 
till  kn/inkniii  irnknki,  1  cause  them  to  fall 
/,()  k'l/Hiknni,  llioii  causesi  me  to  lidl 
/.()  kiilnknun,  thou  c;niscsl  thyself,  iVc. 
(■  knimknni  Imn,  lie  causes  me  to  Ihll 
f  knlmkn^i)  Imn,  he  causes  ihce  to  fall 
li'i  kninj.iini  ijniiii,  we  cause  me  to  lidl 
//('  knl'iikii'm  iinirn,  we  cause  ihee  to  full 


444 


PHI  LOl.OO  Y. 


j)k(tiii  hilxikiitii,  yo  cause  me  to  fnll  ko  iia  kiiliitkaara,  thou  wilt  cniiso  us,  &c. 

gkiim  ku/xikug(tmi,  yo  cnuav  youiwlvcs  to  tin  kiiiid  knlKikuuo,  I  am  going  to  cnuao 

lull  thee  to  fall,  iScc. 

id  hiui  kdliuktifin,  I  have  caused  th«'  to  Ihll 

k»  tiiin  kahikmii,  thou  linst  ciuiscl  luo,  &c.        Kii/iikiik,  causod  to  foil,  thrown  down. 

fia  mi  kii/'tkuiii,  I  will  cauao  him  to  lull  e  kalmkiik  te  tajnt,  the  knifo  is  thrown  down 

The  prtvciling  rcumrks  nnd  cxiimplcs  arc  sulTicicut  to  givo  n  general  knowledge  of 
the  most  striking  grnnunnticnl  clmracteristiesof  the  Tarnwan  langimge.  Concerning  the 
reniuiuing  purls  of  speech,  and  the  rules  of  conslrucliun,  nothing  furtlier  need  b<;  udiled 
here.  The  voealnilnry,  which  Ims  U'en  made  as  coinplele  as  possilile,  will  furnish  many 
mslunces  of  idiorus  peculiar  lo  llii>i  tongue  ;  hut  it  has  seemed  U'st  not  to  iillempi,  on 
every  point,  niinnle  explaualimis,  whii  h,  eonsiileriiig  the  deli'ctiveness  of  our  materials, 
would  have  liecu  likely  often  lo  Icail  into  error.  What  has  l)cen  here  giviu  will  |w  nulli- 
cient  to  cnahio  the  student  of  comparative  philology  lo  determine  tli(>  relations  of  this 
toM!;uo  to  others,  and  to  assign  to  it  its  prop<T  place  in  the  family  lo  which  it  belongs. 


^.   ) 


. 


I 


A    VOCABULARY 


I 


T  A  R  A  VV  A  N     LANGUAGE. 


Note. — Tho  words  marked  with  an  asterisk  are  those  which  were 
obtained  directly  from  the  natives,  and  of  which  the  orthography  is 
therefore  more  hkely  to  be  correct  than  that  of  tiie  rest  of  the  vocabu- 
Uiry,  furnished  by  the  two  interpreters.  The  words  arc,  in  general, 
given  as  they  were  written  down,  though,  in  some  cases,  where  the 
alteration  produced  by  the  incorrect  pronunciation  of  the  interpreters 
was  evident,  the  word  has  been  restored  to  what  was  plainly  the  cor- 
rect form.  When  the  two  men  ditfered  from  one  another,  or  when, 
from  the  indi-stinctness  of  the  pronunciation,  a  difficulty  was  expe- 
rienced in  determining  the  exact  pronunciation  of  a  word,  the  varia- 
tions have  been  given  in  brackets,— sometimes  with  the  initial  of  the 
interjireter  attached  to  it,  wlien  there  is  a  possibility  that  the  discre 
pancy  may  indicate  a  difference  of  dialect. 


113 


s^. 


A^< 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


// 


//      >>.^ 


lis  <  ^^^ 


1.0  Sfut  m 

"Hi   122 


1.1 


:  us  12.0 


t^i 


1.4 


1.6 


<^ 


p^ 


K^' 

^.^' 


j^' 


/} 


Y  m 


op. 


HiotograiJiJc 

Sciences 

Corparation 


^. 


»  WIST  MAM  STMIT 

WIU1<t,N.Y.  USW 

(71«)  t72-4M»3 


>^^ 


T  A  R  A  W  A  N    V  0  C  A  B  U  L  A  11 Y. 


A,  n  I'uphoiiic  ])nrtic|p  of  frotjiipiit  occur- 
rpiico  In  the  liingiiagc,  ns  s|iok<>ii  l)y 
the  inlcr|m>tprs.  It  inny  Ik:,  in  siiim- 
cnsps,  nn  article  (see  the  Grammar). 

*A,  lour. 

Aai  [t'iKii,  G.,  t'uaik,  K.],  the   sun  (see 

/(Hit). 

Abii,  end,  I'Xlreinity,  lop.    E  kakapii  fahun 

nil  ii/ii,  the  end  of  my  needle  is  sliar|i. 

Ko  taiiiotiim  i  tuliiin  li-  ni,  climb  lo 

Itie  lop  of  the  tri"e. 
*Ahiiiiiimi,  shoulder  (see  aija). 
* AliiiniU:i  [nhiin,  G.],  finger  (see  /*(*). 
*Ahiiiiiwai,  Imit  or  toe  (se<'  «■«»). 
*Af!u  or  (i/i/'i  b<u'k  (sei'  f;nf:ii,  k<i/:nmi). 
*Ai  [i\,  fire. 
*Ai  [cj,  here ;  this.     E  rniiri  (niiiiriii), 

te  Ai  ai,  e  Imtikakii  tc  ki  <iri,  the  mat 

here  is  good,  the  mat   there    is   )>ad. 

Antiiiu  •mil  iiif  »lio.n  canoe  is  this  ! 
Ai,   me    (an   alfix).      Aiiti,:   jxHii,   don't 

strike  mo, 
*  Aid,  jes. 
*Aiai,  this,  these. 
*Aiari,  that,  those. 
*Aiine  or  iitiii\  woman,  P'male,    E  ImVuir 

te  tiiitie,  many  are  the  women,     li'iiii 

te  nil)  iiiiiii',  egg  of  the   hen   (lemalc 

fowl). 
Atiiik  (or  iiriok  or  nii^ok),  to  lie   rricn<lly  ; 

(rii'iidship.      'ham    aiiokf     are    ye 

friends ! 


I  *Aio,  there. 

Aiiiri  ((!.),  like  (see  era). 
.  Akiulil^  (G.  (|U.  kiitili.'),  knife  of  shell. 

Akiii  (see  kiii). 

•vU<(/,  no,  not.      h'o  iikeii  tain,  thou  dost 
I  not  know  (siv  //'/). 

I  *Aki,  not.     Aki  nakii  mat,  not  coming. 

Aki<leria  (G.),  deep;  far  off. 

Am,  thy  (pr<'fi.\). 

Amnii,  month.  Emman  aman,  how 
many  months? 

*Amiiiiikr  [iiimirnk],  fiKjd,  victuals. 

Amila,  iiiiiilrii,  aiiiraf  what  is  it  f  what 
for  ? 

Ami,  your  (plural). 

'  Amo,  to  carry  on  the  shoulder  ;  slick  (or 
carrying  a  burden  on  the  shoulders  of 
two  men. 

Ann,  his. 

*  Ann,  Ix^low  (opiMised  to  eln\. 

Ann,  to  take,  receive,  get,  bring,  take  hold 
of.  .1/((/'  niiiiin,  coiiii'  and  take  it.  E 
ijn  Ir  Inpn  ko  nmiin  rni?  where  is 
the  knile  yon  got  from  me  '.  Anokon 
mm  iinlun  //■  ruh  in  te  nt  tii  tieniak, 
go  and  bring  for  mc;  sonic  clay 
from  the  niullet.|Hmd.  Mni  nun  te 
mniii  en,  come  and  take  hold  of  this 
rope. 

Ann/,niii  ((!.),  slave. 

*Aniiiinii,  long,  tall ;  a  long  time  ;  to  last 

long.      7V(j  nnniinii  ma  iiiisine,  I  am 

as  tall  as  you.     Anannit  tuiijfin  ijni 

I  nikiii,  I    have  wailed    for  you    long 


TARAWA. 


447 


horp.     Aniinau   te   huo/,  the  wiir  is 

*Aiir  [uiirne  or  liniiii^,  <*<»ig,  to  sing, 

•.i;/m,  must  iiC  vessel. 

Am  run  ((«.),  laro-pit  (scm-  ;•««). 

Alio,  inside  (see  nanaii). 

Aiitiii,  (Id  not,  lorlxinr,  desist.  Antiii 
i/iriifh;  dnii't  beiil  us.  J  iilai  kiitiiijni, 
don't  make  nii!  cry.  Aiiliii  knmn- 
riikr^o,  diin'l  hurt  yoursell"  {svc  tai, 
tiii/iii). 

*Ant<ii  [uiii/ii,  (!.),  wliii  f  Aiittii  iiniii 
iijMtiiii  f  who  is  the  rhiel"  oC  your 
liiiid  ?  Aniiii  ill ilirhikiiiiii !  who  Ih'mIs 
you.'  Ao  iri  nia  'iilni?  you  eaiiic! 
with  whom  ?  A/i/iii  la  kaniiuakrfio! 
who  hurt  you  ? 

*.\nli  [mil,  K.,  Cf«^;,  fi)r  te  iititi,  G.], 
spirit,  (jfMl.  K /mrxi  'Ihhiierik  in  ciil ! 
how  is  Tahui'rik  nmon<;  spirits  or 
divinities  f 

Aniiii  [iiitiii],  ink  Hir  taltonini;. 

Aniiiiii,  K.,  ««/o  or  »//»/i,  (i.,  whoso? 
Aiilhiii  tiijm  ai?  whoso  knife  is  this  \ 
Aiilit  iron  III .'  whose  ennoe  is  this  ? 

Ap,  wind,  li  Imiliele  te  iitj,  there  is  niueh 
wind. 

Ayii,  shoulder.  Hin'iiwi,  h<jne  of  the 
shoulder,  seapula. 

Apiirii,  axe. 

Aori !  seo !  brhold !  (sec  tiaori), 

*AjKi  \iij),  K.,  a/m,  (!.],  land,  country, 
earth.  Antiii  moil  iipiiiiii f  who  is 
iIh'  eliiel'  of  your  land  .'  Inn  te  up 
[/ii//  A,"/'],  on  the  earth,  litiil  c  tr 
ii/>,  the  land  is  hi^h. 

AjMiiii  [ilKiiii,  ti.],  linished,  complete  ;  all, 
every  Ihinji,  entirely.  A/Miiii  in 
kiiniik,  all  eaten  (si^e  /«/«/,  kii/xuii). 

'Ajuijxi/, /,  <,'reat  (.see  ImlHiki). 

'Ajiii,  hasket. 

*A/iiiji,  Imjx  made  ornialtin;;. 

Ajmn  (•!.),  it  is,  it  was.  Ajmn  iiani,  it  is 
your  eanni'.  Ajx>n  tiiiinii,  it  was  his 
lirolher. 

'AjH},  lish-line. 

Am,  our.     Am  mni,  our  lirc-pliice. 


Am,  very.     Am  Imhnni,  iirii  bahak,  very 

lar;;e,  very  jjrrnt. 
Am,  current  in  it»'  sea.     Iiii  te  urn  f  is 

there  a  lurn-nl  ? 
*Ara,  name.     Antui  nruni  '  what  is  thy 

name  ! 
Amiiiii,  lon-i<;n  rope. 
Ariiiii,  thread. 
Ari,    tlii're,    yonder:     that.       ?>•     m    art 

i»</m«/,  that  low  tree.     Anitko  iiri,  ^o 
j  yuich'r. 

Ari,  the  day  al)er.     Siiialiii  o  iiri  o  iiri, 

to-morrow  and  the  day  alliT  and  the 

day  al'ter. 
'Ari,  eyehrow. 
Aria  (( ;.),  calm. 
I  *.\tiii  [.y/.;;].  child. 
I  Aliii  [eiliii^,  ri;;hl,  dexter. 
Aim,  who  (see  nntiii). 
Al,  liver.     Ill  kiiinii::  ii  knin  i  In  mo  ntitii, 

his  wound    is  jireat,  n'aching    to    his 

liver. 
*Alii,  a  ^t.'iy  to  a  mast,  a  M|>o. 
Ali,  child  ;    iitinii,    his    child ;    ntim.  our 

child  (se.'  iit-ii). 
Ali,  fire-place;    stone   usi'd    in    makins;  a 

(iri'-pl:ici'. 
Ali,  ihatcli.      Alin  uiiitin,  thitch   ot"  thv 

house. 
*Ali/)ii  [iilili,  K.,  t'iit;iji,  Ii.],  a  stone. 
I  Alia,  hold  it  (see  iriti). 
* Alii  ["/»],  head.      Titiiliukan  te  <//».  lop 

ol'tlle  llc'lld. 
* Atiinijxii,  wrist. 
All,  my.     All  kum,  my  relaliun. 
*.]iiii,  liiur. 
Aiiiitii  (Ii.),  many. 
Ati/iOf)<i,  Iridacna  (sliell-lish). 
Aiiileriii  ((i.),  evil  spirit,  devil. 
Aiirii,iiiiriuiiirii,  s\\mm'i.  j;lowing,  blazing  ; 

H'd  hot. 
Aiili  I""';],  a  louse;   the  (lonMipine  llsh. 

I'linin  I'liiiti,  cap  ninile  of  the  skin  of 

the  porcupine  tish. 
Aiili,\\v  I'leiadcs;  al.so  winter  (m-koncd 

I'roin  the  ap|)enmncc  of  this  constel' 

hition). 


448 


I'll  I  I.OI.Od  Y. 


1 


Auti4i  or  iiwljio  (O.).  '"  <li(J-  ■^''"  '"" 
auiljiti  le  muiiiop,  cuna'  unci  dig  llio 
well. 

Ainriirn  (0.)i  •''»  •»  ''" ! 


B 


/f(i,  oil ;  rcM'im-nut  oil. 

Bit,  rock.     A'  innitrii  le  Im  If  iiimntuni, 

llu-  pcrittiiiklr  slicks  to  llic  rcK  k. 
*]i<i,  II  Iciil'  of  n  IriH'.     Iiiiiii,  cocoii-mit 

It'll  r. 

7J(/,  tliiindi'r.  A"  inni  u-  /«/  i/r/.'  do  you 
hear  llic  lliiiiider  llicri'  \ 

Bn-iii-iiiata,  tc'iii|p|r,  lioiisc  ol'»|iirils. 

Biilmki,  yri'iil,  liiri;<'.  In  IhiIkiI;  a  kniii, 
my  wound  is  (jrcnl.  Dukor  <■  /.»  Im. 
Inik  ill  urn,  truly  tlimi  iirt  iiri'iil  iiiiiiiii<; 
rliirl's.  K /iii/nik  'I'lipiiltiiiiiii^'Y.  (\\\v 
i.xland)  is  liirf,'r.  (Sii-  n/Mijin/ki,  knlm- 
Ixik.) 

*Biii  or  jMii,  arm,  liaiid,  '1\  miihikii  iii 
kiii,  \vnf,\\\  o(  arm  (a  infasiirc).  On 
<•  Ihiiii,  my  tuiiid  is  liill. 

*B(ii  I'm,  /k,  y«  ],  u  ll)i'\i;,  any  lliilifj, 
Konii'tliiDi;;  an  instriiiiii'i'l,  iin|ilriii('iit; 
a  on'atiiri',  a  liviiiy  liiiiii;.  /■,'  /mkc  If 
hit,  that  thing  is  thrown  down.  'IV 
Ihii  III  kiimik,  soiiu'thiii^  to  lir  cnlon. 
tiiii  III  liiitiii,  im|ilciiii'iil  liir  tattiniini;. 
Aiiliii  kiiiiiiilr  Ir  Inii,  dMii't  kill  that 
(•rcatiiro.  (S<i'  Imi,  which  is  prolialily 
tho  saiiii'  Word.) 

Bai,  very  (imly  used  in  roiniHiiind  words). 

Bai/irle  or  bnilinti,  much,  many,  a  great 
deal ;  grrally.  /i  UiiUlr  le  nun  ruin, 
there  is  much  lilood  ahoiit  thee.  A' 
Imiliele  If  htlioi,  there  is  a  grciit  deal  of 
laro.  K  iKiihle  I'iririii,  gi'eat  is  the 
heal.  Ji  tmiliele  le  niiiir,  there  are 
many  women.  Ko  /mi/icte  "n  ihiliri, 
you  are  very  cross.     (Sih;  Irle.) 

Biiiliiiiikti  or  /xii/iiiii/,  ((i.),  very  Imd,  vile, 
Iwse.     (.''H'c  hiiiikii.) 

Biii-ni-kiularii/liirii ,  a  spy-glass  (i.  e.,  an 
instrument  lor  causing  to  sec.) 


Biii-ni-kiiiuhiiiii,  a  razor;  (instrument  fiir 
cutting  lieard.) 

Oaiiiakii,  honored,  sncrcd.  E  Iminitka 
iiii/irr,  she  is  honored. 

Biiin-uiiiiiii,  it".  Buiii-pniiiii  tin  iiiifio 
iiir/tiii,  till  ilinniiio  knvniiii  iii  nun, 
il°  I  dnviin  atioiit  you  to-night,  I  will 
tell  you  the  sub.stance  of  my  dream. 
(Sec  kniini.) 

* Bnieiir,  luiskct. 

liiiiii  [Imiiii,  (•.],  nose.     (See  rnkn-lmir.) 

Ihiilnr  [liiiliiri,  (!.|,  hololhuria,  sea-slug, 
hirlio  tin  iiini-. 

Baku  \linkn  or  Ihi/ii],  to  liill ;  to  set,  as  the 
sun.  Irik  nliiii  o e  Imkn  mn  nirniiiiiik, 
his  head  turned  round  and  he  I'cll  in  a 
lit.  Kniin  Imkn  le  kiirii,  the  rain  is 
going  to  Call.  I' Imkn  lnnik,\\w  sun 
is  setting.      (See  knlmkii.) 

linkn  (ti.),  to  throw.  11  bnka  fiiii  r  ijiii, 
throw  it  to  me, 

Bnkninr,  to  slight,  contemn.  Kn  /mkni- 
iiiiii,  you  slight  me;  (opposed  to 
inkni.) 

* Bnknhiin,  a  nsh-s|H'ar. 

*Jinki,  hungry. 

liiikiii,  greatness.     (See  Imkin.) 

'  Bnkini,  shark. 

•  Biiiiiiili,  iH-ads. 

Binjii  ((!.),  cannot,  know  not  how.  JC 
luiim  liriliri,  he  cannot  lie  angry.  II 
Ik'iki  noun,  I  don't  know  how  to  swim. 
(S'-e  /Hi/uitKi.) 

Jinni  ((■.),  dirt,  dirty.  Bnrn  in  le  ni, 
ashes  (dirt  from  the  fire). 

*Barai,  a  cage  for  fowls. 

*Iiaren  (herenk,  K.,  Uiiink,  (t.),  a  canoe- 
house. 

Bnrik  (K.),  dirty.     (See  /mm.) 

*  Bain  [lull,  IkI\,  house,  dwelling.     Bnlam, 

thy  house. 
Bauf,  to  swallow;  suhsistence,  I'immI.   Ban- 

tifi,  swallow  it.     Ko  aki  ln>  ma  Uui- 

tnin,  you  won't  get  a  livelihood.     (See 

kniidulia.) 
Bainrar,   spittle.      Diviiinok   fmuwarani, 

eyv.l  your  spittle. 


T  A  H  A  W  A. 


449 


BelHulixi,  cookrciadi. 

*liriii  iir  /<r/(",  iilcl  v\\«-  cncdii.niit. 

]icn-ll-iniliii  (i|ii.  I„ii-ii-lr.iiiil,(i  ').  Hllist- 
mill,  ciiicliiic. 

Hiiii<i/,ti,  iiiiillct,  '/!■  Ill  III  hniidliu,  iiiiil- 
lct-|Minil. 

*Bcniiii  (//i«H|,ciiiiiitry.  Iiiiiil,  i^laiul,  shorr. 
K  iiiiii  Ir  lihiii,  the  liiiid  is  liir  nil'. 
Tiiik>  riiko  liiniiy  we  will  imt  fjn  mi 
sill  ire.  *  Mm  i-lrtiiKi,  liuiirs-riiil,  I'lid 
III' an  island, 

Bcii/:,  In  liilp,  III  liasli'ii ;  lo  sirivc  fur, 
seek  ;  lo  urgr,  u>  indiirr.  Miii  Uiii 
/,«  nil  ln'iifi  aiilioi  lit,  foiiic  nnil  Ik'I|i 
iiic  with  lliis  ihiiij;.  llvnuin,  liurry 
Willi  it!  'IVili  liiiiai  iiinlii,  |hii|i1o 
llial  sii'k  my  dcalli.  I\ii  fmi^ir  in 
liiiiriir,  llinn  liasi  iirfjc'd  us  In  do  wronj;. 
Kn  lieri^iiii  in  kiimnliiio,  ihoii  wilt 
mako  inc  kill  lli(i~, 

Bttc  [lull,  /uili],  miirli,  many.  E In /'  mm 
miiti  Una,  many  arc  liis  slain.  JjU/i 
Ir  kiirii,  ilifi-c  is  niiicli  rain.  {See 
IhiiI'U.) 

*Brti,  inniM-  pari  ol'ilii'  |iandniius  nnt. 

Biliiiti  [I'lliiis],  adoal  ((i.) 

Bii!ii!:ii,  |ircgnanl. 

Bikii  [liiun,  pik],  luaih,  sirand,  sandy 
|ilaco  ;  sand.  Ijliini  ii/i  Ic  /<//../,  llir 
Ik'HcIi  is  nol  VL'I  in  sij-lii  (or  iism). 

Bir,  lizard. 

Biriniiik  [liirimar,  Ci.],  lo  run,  to  linslcn. 

Biriimk,  lo  run  nwny,  to  run  lo.  A'  im  'in 
kdtv' ?  Akin,  Ini  lii/inok  'kiiiinimo, 
where  is  your  .slavi' .'  I  don'l  know; 
he  ran  away  yesterday.  Biiiiink  r 
li  lull,  run  lo  Ihe  house. 

*Hili,  iron. 

*Bitiliili,  knil'u  of  iron. 

Bo  or  /HI,  lo  meet,  come  together ;  reneh 
to,  loueh,  allaiii.  Tin  lii\  we  will 
meet.  Kliiniu  Im  mn  uvunr,  I  have 
nol  met  with  yon.  Ko  Im  mil  kurnini 
o  iiiitiii,  yon  have  reacliiMl  Ihe  skies 
and  the  subterranean  world,  la  kit- 
iniifi  n  kiiin  i  Ui  iiiu  alun,  his  wound 
is  great,  n-aching  lo  his  liver.      Tinkt 

ii;t 


Im  niiiji  (hill  iiji').  I  shall  nol  riMich  iho 
laiMl. 

7/(1  [i|ii. //H '|,  In-Ill,  eriK.ked.  11  Im  iitiin 
liiiii  [i\,),  his  leg  is  eriHiked.  U  Im 
iiiiiliiiii,  you  arc  rross.pyeil. 

'  liii,  lo  Iradi',  exriiaiigc  (see  kiilioliii);  |iav- 
ineiit,  i'i|iiivalMil. 

//i)/*;,  lo  light,  kiiiillc.  Iiiirii.  /l  l^ilii  li  ni 
iiiiiiiini'  when  will  ilic  I'm'  1m'  liyhlcil! 

'  lliilmi  or  /iiijiiii,  laro,  iiruiii  csciilciiluin. 

Bin,  gone  (i|ii.  {uiddlid  oH','  see  Imi). 
Akfii  lilt  liiH-  Ic  ten,  indeed  ||ie  caiKie 
is  i.'oiie. 

Hiii,  |iro|ierly,  any  iliiiii;  possessed;  thing, 
in  general.  Al,iii  Ir  Imi  run,  lie  has 
no  property.  Wilin  mm  Ir  lioi,  give 
me  Ihe  thing.  Aulmi  ni,o  amim  iii, 
niinlmi  l"  ma  v  lok'  ni,  tins  is  mine, 
thai  is  yours,  and  Ihe  rest  belongs  to 
Ihe  king.     (Hee  Imi.) 

Iliikiiliik  [liiilnliitl.  (?.],  lo  eoiigli. 

Iliiki,  grealness,  size.  Ko  kmnii^  in  /h). 
kim  III  unl,  ihon  art  learl'iil  in  thy 
greatness  among  spirits.  Tin  Imkin 
n/igm;  I  am  (of)  the  size  of  you.  (."^ee 
Imki,  Imlmki.) 

•  Boil,  night:  used  also  fiir  Ihe  eiiiire  day  of 

Iwenly-llmr    hours.      Siijtin    Ir    Imij, 

lo-morrow   night,  (ti.)      Tiiiki  niniii, 

r  nihil  nil  Imii,  I  shall  nol  live,  my  lime 

is  come. 
Bill)  [Ikiiih,  Iiiiiiii\,  to  sel,  as  Ihe  sun,     E 

luitj  n  lunik  [«■  Imii  Ini,  G.J,  the  sun  is 

set.     Kiina  Ini)  n  Inaik,  ihe   sun  is 

selling. 
Jlnii  or  Imij,  a  I'lsh-lrap  made  of  willies,  an 

eel-pot, 
Boijri,  to  liear,  bring  I'orlli ;  iHirii.     E  lioijii 

nii/irr,  she  has  brought  forth  a  child. 

Kn  Ikiijii   nini  prim   linam  iniaijni! 

When  were  you  born  from  your  mo- 

tlier .'  (or  lioriie  li\ ) 
JloiiUmii,  growing  dark,  l.ocoming  iiighl. 

•  lliiii  or  jiiiii,  post  of  a  house. 

•  Hii,  spouse;  husluinil  or  wife. 

Jill,  [jiii.  jiiin,  liiin],  bill,  only,  merely, 
just,      Tiiik  'Ihliurn,  Im  tend,  it  is  not 


450 


1'  11  I  I,  O  I,  oil  V. 


'I'lilmm,  but  hi'.  Tiak  If  imiiit  c  iiiijiii, 
hint  li  mil,  she  is  iiol  ii  liiiiunii  iK'iiii;, 
but  (I  s|iirit.  /,'  till  tin  iiKiiiriijiii,  I 
bnvf  jii>l  tbcMii-liI  1)1"  it.  1!  liti  lui  Im 
mil  iifi^m;  I  have  just  mi't  with  vdu. 
Jhiii  li-  iiiij  iiijsioc,  yi'ii  iiro  only  n 
shivo.  Hint  karoun,  jiiMt  lie  (jiiiil. 
With  idiii  ill  niiswcr  to  a  c|ii('Stion,  it 
I'onns  a  sort  ul'  an  airirnialivc, — as, 
r  iiti  If  ini  !  is  the  canoe  in  si};hl  .' 
Akca  li'iili  I'c  wi,  yes,  the  oaiKu'  is  in 
sifilil. 

Jtii,  n.  .smell. 

* Uiiii,  month. 

*  Hiiiii,  lieanl.      Kiiiii/iiiiii,  to  shave. 
Jimikii    and    'hniikukii,    bad,   vile.      IViia 

liiiiikii  tna  kill,  he  is  had  with  the 
spear,  ii  ritiiiiiii  Ic  /,i  id,  r  /niiikakn 
le  ki  iiri,  this  mat  is  giKxi,  that  is 
bad.  liiiiikn-kanniii,  stonily  hi  ,i- 
ther. 

liiuiij,  luisaltic  stones  louiid  in  the  roots  ol' 
trees  w  hieli  are  drilled  to  the  islands. 

* Jiiiiinni,  whale's  t(»>lh. 

liii/ii/  [/iii/i^,  to  sprout,  to  grow.  Jliihiin 
I'lii,  snioko  (i.  c.  product  or  growth  of 
the  fire). 

liii/iii  (it,),  blunt,  not  sharp, 

*  llii/iiioiii/mi,  ellmw. 

*  Hii'iiioiiiinii,  knee. 

*  liiil'iuii.  large. 

Diifiiiti,  deep.    E  huhuli  Ic  laira,  the  clian- 

licl  is  deep. 
liiif   [f/iic ;  /mi,  G.]    warm,   hot ;   henlcd, 

burnt.     Till  liiw,  I  am  warm.     E  Imi- 

iinriiiira,  it   is   red-hot.      E  Imr  liiitar, 

our  house  is  burnt.     (See  kiiiin.) 
liiif  or  /mi  (( t.)  steering-oar,  rnilder.    (See 

;we.) 
JiuiMiir  [or poi liar]  a  pnddlc. 
Bui  f'""").  egg.      liiiin  limit  itiiiir,  egg 

of  the  hen. 
Jiuia  (O.),  lofl  of  a  house.     (Seo/«(m). 
liiiiirnr,  to  smell  sweet !  fragrant. 
Biiinai,  earth,  loam. 
]3uir,   to  <lo   wrong,  to  Ik;   in   fault ;   sin, 

fault,  error.      Tin  /mir,  I  am  in  fault. 


Tiiitiiiiir  ill  /iiiiinr,  snvc  lis  from  our 

sins, 
•//('»///,  to  smell  bad;   fetid. 
Iliiiiii/iiiir,  fiiilli.      hiik  r  /iiiirnliiiir  in  te 

k'liiiiiiiio,   take    the    froth    iVom    the 

toddy. 
liiiki,  to  throw  down  with  noise.     E /mkt 

Ir  /mi,  that  thing  is  thrown  down. 
liuki  or  /iiikii   [/'Ilk,  piikt\,  butti«;k,  tail, 

hinder  part. 
JSiiki/iiik  [or  /miki/iiiik]  eask,  barrel. 
liiikin-iitii,  na|)C  of  the  neck. 
liiiki-ni-iiiii,  \w\. 
JJiiuii,  (k'af      E  liuiiijii  /iiitiii,  he  is  deaf. 

*  liiiiii-kiiiki,  a  cutaneous  disease,  the  her- 

pes.    (.S>e  !:ii>ii.) 

lliiiii  ((!.),  good. 

liii-iii-iiiiui  (K.),  n  p(xir  man  (tpi.  bun 
iiiiiiDi,  only  a  common  person  '.). 

liii-tii-miiliiij  ((■.),  a  chief-judge,  a  prime 
minister. 

Iliniiit  (ti.),  round. 

Iliiii'i,  chin,     llmjiiiii,  thy  chin. 

liinjii/iiiijii,  a  hole.  Biiijii/iinjii  iii  rinn, 
hole  of  your  lips,  mouth. 

Dupiisa  or  Itoyii^a,  n.  word  used  in  entreat- 
ing. Ill  liiiijiigiim,  Tii/iiirrik,  we  pray 
thee,  ()  Tabuerik.  E  /unjngiim  ko 
1111  riik  iir  veil,  wo  In^g  thee  to  be- 
come our  chief.  Tin  /unj'.igami,  I 
lx>g  of  you. 

liiiok  \/iiio/],\\i\t;  to  fight;  hostile;  trou- 
bled,  distracted.  Auiinau  te  /nidk,  the 
war  lasts  long.  Ivmi  /niok  ?  do  ve 
fight .'  'Dili  /milk,  one  who  fights,  a 
warrior.  E  /iiinka  kiut  inn  to  up 
iikiiiim,  all  the  pi'ople  of  the  land  are 
opposed  to  you.  E  Iniitk  a  iiaiiu, 
my  mind  is  distracted. 

Uimknii ikiii  [/:uokii)i>/ikiii,  /ninsuinyikai, 
K.,  //iiii/.iinikiii,  Imimikiii,  (J.],  woods, 
woodland,  inlanil  country. 

*  Burr,  the  ovula-shell. 
liiinr,  pilar  hair  ;  feathers. 

* Buriihurii,  fur,  hair  ol"  animals.     Buru- 

/mrun  te  kimoa,  fur  of  the  rat. 
Biita,  navel. 


T  A  K  A  \V  A. 


451 


Untiiii  ((!.).  riKit ;  liiitiin.lr.iii  (K.),  Inucr 
|iiiil  nl'ilii'  trunk  (il'n  Irrc,  !4liiiii|i. 

Jhilii/.iit  {{',.) jr),,     (Sue  Ma/nlc.) 

Jhiliini  ((i.),  I,|«rk. 

*7y«/",  (IngyiT,  asiimll  wcaiMni  armrcl  with 
sliiiik's  Iccili. 

Jiuicii,  tlirutt.      liuttinii,  tliy  llirunl. 

I) 

[Tlic  Idler  (/  is  ni  roiii|)nmtiv(;ly  rare 
oociirrciici',  n:ul  sii'iiis,  in  all  <-aM.s,  to  Ix-  a 
SdllclK'd  soniiii  ol'llic  T.] 

JJara,  to  look.     (Sco  luid.) 

Dr  (0.),  chilli.     (Sco  ntai.) 

Dekiikii,  to  cry  out.     (SVi'  Imhi.) 

l)itiu\  lie  ijnicli. 

JJi/iiii:,    wash.      J\(i   /i,in   ililiiigiii  f   havo 

villi  washed  it  '. 
Diiliitirii,  lilK'ral,  frriiorons. 
Duliri,  iliriiliri,  cross,  irritahlc.    (Sec  liri- 

tiii.) 
Di-MiiKui,  n  native  ofMakin  ((!.) 
J)ii>i(liM,  to  drop,  as  rain. 
DtiKi,  to  hilf.    JJilluiu,  lute  it.    (So»>  ktti/i- 

miiliiKi.) 
Diiidin,  to  roast. 

Diiiiiimk,  to  \yp  in  the  act  fifronstin;.,'. 
Uiriij,  to  beat,  to  strike ;  to  contend  with, 

opixise.     Aiilai  (liriijir,  don't  lx>at  us. 

Ko  ihriij  (iliii  in  lent  >    Why  did  you 

Ixat   the  children  ?     K  dirhjir  iiiiti/; 

our  !;od  is  ai^ainst  us.     (See  ////.) 
Djiramik  (U.),  to  lioat.     (8ec  tiri.) 
I)jak->xiin  (G.),  crippled.     (Qu.  link  Iku, 

no  legs?) 
Dokirr,  truly,  surely.     Dokuv  c  ko  Uilntk 

in   mil,  truly  thou   art  great  nniuiig 

spirits. 
Dun  (K.),  sacn-d,  Uilm.     (liu.  the  I'olyne- 

sian  aliia  f) 


E 


[By  both  tlie  interpreters,  the  lou};  c  was 
fn-cpiently  suhstiiuteil  li.r  the  diphthong  ui, 
and  the  short  i  lor  «.] 


Vi,  a  leller  freipiently  introduced  by  the 
inlerprelers  iK'tweeri  the  words  of  a 
si'iiteiire.  In  some  eases  it  inav  Ite 
an  article;  in  others,  it  is  prolmlilv  a 
corrupt  pronuiii-ialji>n  ol'  the  last  letter 
of  a  Word, — as  Uhil'  V  li-  up,  llir, 
irtata  or  iilntit  Ir  up,  liiyh  in  the  land. 

/v,  lire,      (.'^ee  r/i.) 

P.,  this  ;    lieri'.      (."<ee  ui.) 

Hii,  Hlieri?  hii  iiiikn  mni  lO,  whence 
emnest  thou  '.      (.See  in.) 

i'.liiiiiiijii,  a  had  smell  ;   ("elid. 

liliii,  child.      (See  iiliii.) 

Ijliii.rii  or  ri/jiii-io,  anchor.  ((Ju.  iitin-ro, 
stone  ol'iiuietness  ?) 

Ji/iKii,  not  yet.     (See  idiiui.) 

Kii'ui,  blind.     Kiiigi  inutiiii,  |  ,iin  blind. 

I'iii-iiiiUa  ((!.),  cToss-eyed. 

ICai-iiiimiiu  ((i.),  coward. 

Kkiiniililii,  short,  low.  Ku-ckimol'lu,  to 
shorten. 

Kniiij  ((!.),  to  send  liir. 

Ihit,  spirit.     (.See  i/;(/i.) 

KifiiH  ((1.)  this  niorniii!,'. 

AVd  or  va  (or,  with  siillixes,  criiiiu,  cni- 
tiiiiii,  ciii/ioij,  nil/nit,  \c.),  how  many. 
JCiii  liiifiii  kii  iiiiniiii,  how  nianv  stars 
do  joii  see  \  Erulnil  am  Ixil,  or  iruiiu 
/nittiiii,  how  many  nro  your  houses? 
F.iiimnti  iimiiii,  how  many  nionllis  ' 
I'.rdliDijii  Ir  Ijitij,  cit'Miyd  tc  ijdiii,  h.)w 
many  days,  how  many  nij^hts  ?     (.>^er' 

lIllVil.) 

Era  ((!.),  why,  what  fiir.  Era  tar)  ungoc, 
why  do  yon  cry  ?    (See  kiiera.) 

liran,  thus,  this  way;  the  same:  nlMut, 
coiiccrniiiir.  Kiwra  ko  aki  hiroia 
trail,  why  d<in't  ynii  do  it  thus?  Ko 
letiii  rran  Ir  hunk,  do  you  know  about 
war  ?  (see  It  le  iriiii). 

Eriiriiti,  leaky,  dropping  water. 

Ereru  [iriro],  black  ;  dark.  E  liot-erero 
(0.  II  hiack  person.  Errnt  tinjilini, 
vi'ry  dark. 

Eriiii,  side.  E  miirak  cri/;ii,  my  side  is 
painliil. 

Eri^'in,  by  the  side  ol',  near.     Tia  tckatrk 


452 


I'll  I  I.O  I.O(i  V. 


rriuiii  te  /nit,  Irt  us  sii  down  liy  llio 

lllMISI', 

fymii  [iir  iiIiim],  (.'i'iivi'I. 

liti.  111  lirrnk.     Aiitiii  iliin,  iloii'l  Imnk  il. 

i'Jiiil;  If  mil,  ilic  .i|ii(lrr-sliill  (ilroiii- 

I)iim)  is  brokuii. 


G 


[This  Icltrr  is  iiMToly  n  snih-r  pruinin- 
ciatioii  111'  the  k,  which  iirolmhly  iiii)>hl  in 
nil  oiiHCs  Ix'  sulisiiluleil  for  it  wilh  pro. 
|iri.'ly.| 

6'((w(,  how  ?      K  S'liia  Ihlmrrik  in  iiiitif 

lliiw  is  'riiliiii-rik  ninoiii;  spirits  \    Tin 

kitiv'   iiaixi    (nil    iilimii),  !  am    sorry 

for  it. 
iliiiiuii,  like.  GaijiiiL  tc  jxho,  liko  ihr  p(M'o. 

shi-ll. 
(iti/,iik,   spnihe   or   sprout    of  tho   rut-on- 

mil. 
Gilt    or    kill,    nl,    lo.      Ko    yiiri   siii-nui, 

thou  iirt   Inughiiii;  at  iiii,'  (scu  n.onin- 

fiiii). 
(iiiii!:  [kihiki],  to  pinch.    Aiifui  i:iiiimii, 

(loii't  pinch  inc. 
lliii^ii  \kiiikiii\,  ijravi'l. 
G'<>«,  to   s(pic<.'zc,   compress.     Ko  ^iniini, 

you  crowil  inc.      Tin  /imi  c  iiukiiin,  I 

si|Uccwil  your  waist. 
diiiiiilniiki  tc  ira,  hniil  up  the  canoe  on  the 

beach. 
(I'lisii,  fiet  on  my  Ihick  (see  kii!.'iis:ii). 
(lii^iini.  Ill  look  lor.    A' i'»^'H7(/i'o,  looking 

lor  thee. 
(inn   ((jii.    kiiiii f),  skin,  bark.     O'liinii, 

my  skin.     Ji  kntikilik  c  f:uin   ir  Ir 

Imi,  the  Imrk  ortiio  tne  is  rough. 
(liiiit-mnio,  !:niii-katki,  a   disease  of  the 

skin,  lier|ies. 
(jiiri,  to  snatch,  seizn    suddenly.     Aiilni 

UHriti,  don't  snatch  il. 
Giiii,  almost.     la  fiiui  iiiul   lu   ond;  I 

almost  died  of  sickness. 


I 


•/,  in,  nl,  to.  I  Fir II,  nt  Peru.  Ko  In- 
iiioliiiii  i  I'nimii  Ir  ni,  climb  to  the  lop 
ol'  the  tree.  /-ii,  alMHe;  i-ii,  lielnw; 
i-kiii,  heri',  iVc. 

Ill,  verlml  pri'lix,  used  inslend  of,  or  wilh, 
Ihe  pronouns  nf  the  first  ami  third 
pirsiiiii.  Ill  mnriri,  I  am  culd.  In 
iiikii  >iiii,  I  am  ccime.  It  ha  h iia,  hu 
is  done,  it  kiiiiiiii;  r  Imkiii,  tearful  is 
ils  gri'atness. 

Ill,  where  ?  A'o  iiiafiik  in,  wlieri-  were 
you  hurl  .'  Ko  iiitkn  viiii  in,  whi-ncc 
come  yiiu  f     (.Sc(^  in.) 

Ill,  n  kind  of  dance, 

/(/,  lielow,  under,  lo  leeward,  westward.  A 
iiiikn  ill,  go  IhIow.  Tin  /mntiiiiok 
in,  we  will  snil  lo  Ihe  we.stwuril.  In 
ni  knrniia,  under  the  sky. 

Ill,  verbnl  nll'ix  liir  Ihe  third  |M'rsonal  pro- 
noun. Wid,  strike  him.  Tin  iliriijin, 
I  ln'al  them.      'I\i/nii,  cut  it. 

/(/,  allixed  possessive  pronoun,  of  the  third 
[MTson  plural.  Ilnlnin,  their  house, 
or  their  houses.  Antiiiii  tnptiia  tain, 
whose  knives  are  thesi'  f 

In,  particle  used  alter  niitni,  who  /  to  dis- 
tinguish  il  (nimaiilnt,  do  not.  Aiilai 
in  kiiDinrnkfLiii,  who  hurt  you  .'  Aiitni 
kniiiiintkt\i:o,  don't  hurt  yoursi'If. 

Iit/itil,  high  wati'r.  Iiliini  ii'inlnit,  it  is 
not  yet  high  water  (see  Inilmli). 

Ini  [/( ],  there  is,  there  are  ;  is  there,  nre 
then' .'  Ini  tr  iminl  iiiniinn  n/Hir, 
there  art;  men  wiihin  our  land.  Kniini 
ini  trnii,  if  I  had  a  cnnue.  Ini  ntit 
Inp,  hi're  is  thy  knile.  Ini  If  ika 
ruin  >  have  you  any  fish  ? 

*hiiii  \ini,  ii<iii\,  these  here  (pluml  of  ni). 
Aitia  Imtaia  inin,  whost;  are  those 
houses  \ 

Ini-iiiik,  weather-side  of  island  ;  eastward. 

Ink,  not.  /i  riiiik  r  Inm,  ink,  has  he 
come  down  or  not  .'  (see  akca,  tiaki, 
ini:.) 

Iiiknt,  to  rcs|)ect,  to  love.      Tia   iitknigo, 


T  A  II  A  W  A. 


403 


»■<•  ris|«'rl  llici'.  Aim,  kinni  'kniii  ' 
aki  iiikiiii:iiini  mini,  cliildrfii,  why  [ 
(lon'l  you  liivc  nm'  umitlirr  f  I 

yr;/Y;wi«»,nlr('iicly,  loii;!  ngii.  {i^-v  kmiKiti.)  \ 

hikiinikn  (or  kiinikii),  liw,  In-kiinikii  Ic 
iiiiiiiiiiil,  ih'i'i'  iiri'  liw  iMK'Dii-niilM, 

•7(1//,  under,  lifuriilli  (liir  11/  iii).  | 

luiiiiiii,  lilt,  riir|>ul<'ut,  lull,  Mitlsrii'il  with  ! 
L'liliuH.  laniiiii  /iiiii,  lio  is  till.  Jii  | 
till  innmii,  I  nin  intislictl.  | 

Iiiijiti,  liill,  sHiislinI ;  tired,     [a  tiii  tn^fii, 
I  iiin  III  II,  sal  ill  led.     liiijdi  inn  uiiorin,  \ 
I  urn  lireil  dl' lookiiij;.     (iiff  knijni.) 

Jliir,  II  scirl  nl'f;ii<iHelHrry. 

J/nnjil  or  li/mijil,  priesl. 

*Jliii,  cup  miide  of  11  eocoa-niil  .fliell. 

Iiliiiii,  not,  not  yet.  li  ro  nitnuiii  n  ii/iiai, 
is  voiir  mind  ill  |H'iiee  or  not  .'  hliiiii 
ii'liii'it  ti-  till,  tlie  crop  is  not  yel  ri|)e. 
Ukaiii  a  till,  lire  you  done  f  7V 
iiliiai,  wo  lire  nut, 

*/f,  Sllll. 

*hlii,  hImivo.     Aiioko  iriii,  go  nbovo  ine. 

'Diniliirn  iitn/ii,  liMik  iilmve  you. 
/»/ii',  liigli.      litiit  I-  Ic  nji,  liiiili  is  till!  land. 
li:ii'^i,  proud.      Kn  i^iiui,  llioii  art  proud. 
liiiiiii,  to    understand.      Tinki   it'iniiw),  I 

don't  iiiKlersland    you.      Ho  i;:iii   tin 

litiliii,  do  you  undcrslnnd  my  sjK'eeh  I 
lilt  [liiii],  a  vein. 

Jill,  gray  Imir.    lia  /I'litii,  my  hnir  is  gray. 
Jkii,  lisii. 
Ikiii,  liere,   hither.      Ill  Im   ikni,  we   will 

meet  lieie.      il/d?  ikni,  ooino  hither. 
*]kiiiiiiijiii,   lately,   just    now    (i.   e.    ikai 

ii'ii/Ki,  hero,  on  this  s|)ot.) 
*Ikiiki    [li'i.i'r/],  licnrl ;    also   hrcnth ;    to 

hrealhe. 
Ikrike  \i^ik\,  mallet. 
Ikidikiilii,  to    lly.     la   tcliii   ikiUknlri  le 

viiiii,  ean   the  bird   fly!    (See  kijitii- 

kijmi.) 
Iki-liiliH,  a  coward. 
*Iki>,  here. 

*lkii,  girdle  oC  shark's  skin. 
lliiirii  ((i.),  how  niuiiy  \  how  much?  (See 

era,  crnun,  &.v.) 

Ill 


*  linn,  live. 

Jiii/di,  sharp.|Miiiited  eliili,  javelin. 

In,  coral.  Vi  liki  iiiiiii  in  t'iii,  my  Tool  is 
pierced  with  a  hit  of  coral. 

/",  111',  ill,  at.  I'or,  vVc„  prolmhly  a  corrup- 
tion ol'  //(. 

•//(((,  that,  in  order  that,  to;  will,  shall. 
llkniii  knmiiiiiiii  inn  kniiiiilrni,  ye 
are  deceiving  ine  in  order  In  kill  me. 
hill  iiiiiiitf  shall  I  drink?  lint  iiao- 
tin,  I  will  set'  it  (pro|i<'rly  ////,  which 
sop). 

*hiiii,  mat  orciwoa-nut  leaves. 

IiiiiIhii),  lo-iiight. 

Imimiii,  within,  in  the  inside  ol'.  Tin  rliin 
Tin  iiiiiiiiin  riilmlam,  I  will  break 
(all)  the  boni"S  In  your  body.  lai  tc 
oinitt  iiiiiniin  n/mr,  there  are  men  in 
the  iiisiik'  of  (or  iK'iiealli)  our  country 
(said  ol'thc  antipodes),     (.^eo  niiiiit.) 

I>tnt:iiiiin!iii,  skill'iil,  versed  in.  l/iiimii- 
iin);ii  in  tc  hiiok,  skilled  in  war. 

litinijtti,  when !  Ku  tin  kittiii  Uttoin 
iiiiiiijiii  f  when  sliall  you  build  your 
house  ? 

Iiiinnii,  k)W.  71'  ni  art  iitiiiaii,  that  low 
trii". 

I  unit  i,  a  wart. 

* Iijmtnii,  ye. 

Igiivtio  [ij;;i/x/i/,  tijf:inlii>ij,  U.],  last  night. 
Kn  mntii  ui  iijgilio,  whore  did  you 
sleep  last  night  ? 

IiiL'iki,  (It.),  lormerly,  long  ago. 

Iijkani,  I  do  not  know ;  (only  used  in  an- 
swer to  a  ipicslion.) 

Iijkitn  [ijkaii, rj;A«//], then-.  Aiitai  igkiin  > 
who  is  there  \  Tiiigai  igkaii,  wait  for 
me  there. 

/i>,  alxive,  up,  over,  upon.  Mai-ii>,  to  wind- 
ward, or  south-southwest,  Ikilnkithi 
If  nutn  iim  Ir  Ixit,  the  bird  (lew  over 
the  house.  Inn  Ir  kiv,  upon  the  mat. 
A  tioko  iini,  go  to  windward. 

Ira,  to  steal ;  thiol".  E  diiiijia  in  trn,  I 
boat  him  lor  stealing,  ii  ira  Iciiii,  he 
is  n  thiol'.  Intik  ait  aijnnt,  my  axe  is 
stolen. 


J. VI 


!•  II  I  I.O  I.O(i  Y. 


//ii  (Ci.),  girillu  wiirii  liy  men. 

•//•((,  linir.     Irmi  atii,  liiiir  ol'thi'  hfml. 

Iiiiino  or  ifiiiiii,  lint,  liirfiiiiwl,  ln^lon' ;  in 
ciiiiiu  lirst,  III  iin'ccilc,  Aiilni  luttmi 
iriiiiio,  wild  WON  yiiiir  lirNl  Wll\^^\ 
A  iiok  iniiiiiiii,  (.'II  U  liirr  iiii'.  VV<l 
iriiniu  ijiii,  I  iiiii  llif  lirHl  cniiur.     (Stf 

Jmiiiiii  [iiliiiiiiii,  K.,  iiiiiiriii,  (■.],  lH<liinii, 
nlliT,  liisi.  A/ink  irmiiiiiu,  conn- 
nflcr  me.  Kit  iiamui,  joii  nn;  llic 
Insl.     (Sci'  miii.) 

Ill,  In  j,'i)  willi,  III  !irt'iim|iniiy.  IC  ""  i'Ji'O 
liiiii,  ln'  will  (^11  willi  lliir.  hi>  inii, 
kit  fiik  f  U'ill  villi  go  w iili  inr  or  stay  ! 
Kit  in  mil  'iitui,  with  wliom  diil  you 
coino  \ 

Jriti,  iriiik  [eiitik,  irik],  lo  lurn  round,  lo 
whirl;  111  pi  iiIkiiiI,  lo  lurk  ship,  /rin 
tr  inj,  \\v  willi!  whirls  rmiiiil.  Irik 
atiiii,  his  hi'iiil  Uiniril  Miiiiii.  Tia 
iiiiik  ma  U  ten,  wu  will  jiiil  ihc  cniiop 
iiIhiuI. 

liil.ni,  iii/iik,  [iitilnii,  iililmk],  lo  ilislike, 
U'  ilispli'iisi'il  with.  InlniiiiD,  I  ilon'l 
like  llu'c.  Jri/miii  te  niiiiti,  the  mill 
ilo  lint  llki.>  liiiii.  Ku  irilnik,  arc  you 
(li!i|il(;asc(l  \ 

Ir ilia  mi,  lo  ninnure. 

Iriiio  \tirijjo],  (losh,  meat.  B  kugkan  r 
titiiiit,  WHS  the  nu'ot  frofni  ? 

Ifikak.  li  ink  in  iriknk,  (ihe  title)  hos 
cniscd  (lowing  anil  is  going  out. 

Inrrp,  l<Kit.|mll  (the  gniiic).  Tin  rokn 
main  tiririji,  wo  coinc  Ironi  playing 
rooi-lmll. 

Iiu  (CI.),  yellow,  light-eolnrcd. 

Iiua,  foreigner.  Iruu  iiuknki,  they  nre 
foreigners. 

It,  il)t  [tit,  <i/j],  lightning'.  K  mittr  tr  m 
ma  t'tt,  iho  tree  is  killed  by  lightning. 

Iti,  straight. 

■  ///,  seven. 

/liUiki  (Ct.),  hawk's.hill  lorlniw. 

[tit,  the  resin  which  drifts  ashore  on  these 
islands ;  also,  any  tiling  I'ragrunt,  like 
resin. 


llii  or  ir/(/,  iiMilU".     /.'  kiikiiitu  t'lil'iiii  nil 
itii,  till'  |Hiiiil  ol  niy  no'dhi  is  itlmrp. 

K 

Kii,  pri'lisi  cl  to  n  word,  has  in  most  I'asrs 
n   eauwil    nigniliealinn ;    in    sunie    in- 
stancei  its  meaning  v*  doiihlliil. 
Kaaii,  village,  ward  ;  wnMinii  of  a  kniin  or 

town. 
Kii'ml'iki;  In  eiilari;''. 
Kii/iikii,   In    111    fall,   drop,    thmw   dnwn. 
Till  kiiliika  III-  iliii-rii  ikni,  we  will 
dmp   our    aiu'lmr    hen'.       Kiilmkiik, 
thrown  down. 
Kii/itifi  ((•.),  to  ilrop,  let  tall.     Kulnitjiaa 
III  tr  iiiiiiiiip,  i\t<'\>  it  in  the  well.     (Uu. 
n  mistake  Inr  kiilmkn  '), 
Kniiiiiti,  In  unlp  dnwn.      Ko  iiki  kimtiii  te 
iiiiiiinik.    ko    kiiliiiitiii,    you    do    not 
eliew  the  IimhI,  ynu  gulp  it  down. 
Kiitiikoiirii,  licaoh,  sinind.     (Sec  liiku.) 
Knlioii,  In  oil,  anoint. 
Kiiliil'ii,  to  trade,  Imrler. 
•  Kii/»xi,  lo  come  together,  unilp,  iroTl.    TVn 

kiitim,  n  roininon  limn  of  salutalinn. 
Kiilmiliiiii  (H,  i|Uiiils. 
Knliuii,  lo  eliise,  shiil ;   requite,  take  ven- 
goance.      Ka/>iiii  itiuknim,  shut  your 
jaws.      Till   kiVma   mil   trim,   I    will 
take  vengeance  uii  him. 
Kii/mii,  a  Imil,  sore. 
Kii/'ii/i,   dull,    lilunl.      E  kiiliuli  am    tap, 

your  kiiili-  is  liliint. 
Kniiiir,  to  make  warm,  lo  heat ;   healing, 
hni.     Mm  ikiii  ka/nirso  rriuiii  tc  tii, 
come  hen^  nnd  warm  yourself  by  Ihc 
(ire.     /i  kii/'iir  tnnik,  the  sun  is  hoi, 
Kiiliiiiliin,  preserved  tarn  (K.);  o  kind  of 
liHid    pre|ianil    from    the     par.  laniis 
nut  (Ci.) 
Kii/xik   [kiiliiiik,  kii/iuL'],  to   burn.      Mm 
ikiii  kiiliukri:ii  in  trtii,  come  ond  burn 
yourself  in    the    tin'.       Antm  tiiiititii 
kaliuk  tr  lull  an,  dnn'l  prevent  that 
I  house  from  being  burnt. 


'I'  A  U  A  W  A 


453 


h'lil'iiiiiiiiii,  mill  wiirii  llir  ilnsn. 

hni/iKiii,  II  npniii  iiiailr  nriiiiiniin  liiiir. 

Kiuliiiiiiliiiii,  to  liilo  iiiiich  or  hard.  E 
kiiiliiiiiiliiiii  tf  miitiiiiiir,  tlir  imim|ili- 
Ii«v4  iiru  hiiiii^r  wviri'ly. 

Kiukiimiliilii,  III  iiiiiki'  sliiirl.  Hinkiniiiliitn 
titu  tftttiit^  iiiiikr  ymir  s|Hi'rli  Ntinrt, 

A'iK'ii  (iir  kiiiiii\,  iH'Mr,  E  knrn  c  tnui,  lii' 
IK  iii'iir.  7i  kiuii  If  kiiiiii,  ilm  villii({c 
in  iii'iir.  (TliiMn  mny  Ijo  the  luiniu 
wiiril;  kiiaii,  |M'rlinpM,  si);iiitir»  iici/ili- 

A'lii"  iir^K/ ((!.)<  miliviMil'.  Hiun  Kiauv 
r  iiiii,  I  (III)  II  iiiilivi-  iirKiiiwi', 

hiif;iif:ii.  III  riirry  mi  tin-  Imrk.  Tin  kn- 
guf!ii;:i),  I  will  i-iirry  you.  (Sco  ngii, 
fiiifni.) 

h'dluiid,  kiihi/Mi  ((!.),  riiiiilMiw,  siin-ilnK. 

■  hill,  Irrc,  wikkI,  Mlirk,  |kisI,  rliili.    Wnkiiii 

l>  km,  root  III'  llii^  Irif,  IC  nimliti 
Imiii  tc  km,  lliii  wooil  Niirkx  to  my 
hniiil.  71  km  til  Ir  Ui/mi,  a  Ntii'k  (or 
riKil)  ot'lnro.  !■!  tai  kiii  Iriia,  lie  mi- 
ilri'HliimlH  li^liliii);  (or  llic  ritili),  Kain 
I'd,  |iii,st  of  till-  I'l'tico. 

A'lu  ( /.('I,  iikiii],  u'oiinil.  /'(  kiimaii  c 
kiiiii,  my  woiinil  is  ilri'iiill'iil.  Kmm- 
main  km  iii  Imiii,  \hi:  woiinil  in  my 
arm  is  ^oiii;;  to  liiiil. 

Kill  [iikiii\,  to,  towanU,  n^aiiiiit ;  than. 
Hkiriltii  am  taka  knin,  your  siKirh 
to  nil-  is  I'alsi'.  /i  In/iiz-i  a  kniii  trim, 
III'  has  tiiki'ii  ii|i  arms  a^airiRt  mr.  Ji 
mini  an  kiimiiimiii  a  knin  Una,  I 
havr  more  molassi's  than  ho. 

Kai,  hi-rc.     (Sro  i-kai.) 

Kai-ni-kiilinii,  spaile, 

•  Kai  (Tiiiiii),  ilo  not.  •  Kai  kuriiia,  don't 
rut  ii. 

KiiUhiIki,  liiimlioo  (wliirh  soniL'timcs  driUs 
to  ihr  iNJauds). 

A'k/'w/i,  slii|i,  (A  Nrw  Zi'alaiid  word  in- 
Imdiiri'd  liy  Ihi-  whites  at  'ra|iul(!inicn.) 

Kiiiiok,  lo  make  I'rionils;  (Viiiidsliip.  (Si'c 
«/(ii^.) 

■  Kniiiii,  till'  pandaniis  li-ci'. 
Kmo,  llie  li'iivfs  ul'llie  arum. 


K'ii/11,  till'  liili'i'iil  Niipporli  aroimil  tin   liMit 

III' till'    pllllllllllllH. 

A'xif'i,  III  Ntrlli^llt■'n ;  kmltuo,  Nlrai^jhten 
yoiiriM'ir. 

Kmira,  ilivinatioii,  Nori'iry. 

Kak,  to  pill  down,  lo  wl  down  ;  to  lowrr  a 
sail;  lo  rrji  I'l,  iliriiw  oil';  lo  di  scind. 
Aii/i  c  III  Ir  iimaiak,  wlirri'  sliali  wo 
»rt  the  vii'liials.  Ktik  r  liiiiriilnnr  in 
Ir  kiirniimii,  mmovo  tlw!  I'roih  rroin 
the  liMlily.  Aiiliii  kiikir,  don't  throw 
IIS  oil'.  Aii^  liilmi  ((i.),  roiiie  down 
a  lilllo. 

A'^ii^ii  ((i.),  a  pri'iervu  inadu  ul'  the  imiida- 

IIIIS-IIUl. 

Kiikii,  llol■^e,  oiilrry. 

A'iiXvn;i;,  sharp ;  oppn'ssive  (as  heat).      A' 

kiikai/ii  mil  In/ut  >  is  your  knil'e  sliar|i  ' 

l\iikiniii  li   mill,  the   heal  ol    llie   sun 

i8  oppiv»>ive. 
Kitkiiija,  eaiiiulial.      K  kakiiija  ninink,  at 

Ihu  soiilheasl  they  an'  eiiniiiluiU. 
Kakitia,  lestivities, — daneing  and  sin^'ini;. 
Kakoiiii,  kiikiirri/i  ((!.),  same  as  kinn/irjiii. 
Kiikii,  eoi'oa-niil  leal". 
Kakiirokiirii,  to  slreiiythen.     Aiilni  kitknni- 

km  It  /III  nil  in,  don't  raise  \oiir  vniee. 
Kamau,  to  lerrily;  rearl'ul,  drcniiriil  ;  very 

(jnal.      Kmiuifiai  r  Una,  he  riif;lilens 

me.     Ill  ^i(;//(i^' r  ^((i/i,  his  Wdiiiid  is 

Hieiit.      la  kmiiHg  r  kiikni/a  Ir  nun 

III  liiiin,  the  heiit  at  noon  was  exeivd- 

infjly  ^n'lit. 
Kamiii,  <^isv  heri'.      Kiiinni  am  Inji,  yive 

me  Jour  knile.     Knmai  ijair,  give  us. 
Kamaiiiainii,  to  make  white. 
Kaiiiiiin,  to  save,  to  euro,     ii  kmiiniinii, 

ho  .saved  my  lile. 
Kmiiaii,  already,   long    ai;o.      In    kniiinn 

liiniink,    lie    is    liurieil    already.       In 

kainiin  rnkn,  he  is  gone  loni»  ago. 
Kaiiiaiiiiji,  to  make  a  IIkiI  ol'.  to  deceive. 

llkam  kiiiHaiiigini,  ye  are  making  a 

IImiI  of  me. 
Kaniaink,Ut  hurl.    Aiilai  in  kmiinrnki^o, 

who  hurl  lliee  ? 
KamaU  \kniiwinal\,  to  kill.     Ku  tniigiai 


I'  . 


4A(i 


I'  II  i  I.  It  l.txi  V 


in  kiimiUrfin,  llmii  will   ninki<  iim<  kill 

IIhi',      'I'm  Itiiiiiii'iii,  I  kill  iii\M'ir, 
KtiDiriiii,  II  mcvr. 
hiiiiirlKlti,  III  iiiiiki'    linn.      Knmilitln  urn 

hiiliii,  iiiiiki'  linn    vmir  "iNitli,  i.  r, 

xlirk  lo  wiml  villi  hiiy. 
Kiiiiiii,  to  cniiiM'   to  drink,  to  mirklc     1-' 

kiniiitiii  in  iiiriiiiim,  l>'l   it  ilrilik  rri>ni 

your  lin'iiil. 
Httfmtili^  (n  I'ftiiMi'  III  Miirr/r,      l\  kutnitihfii 

Ir  lull,  till'  lliiiii;  riiii>u»  nir  In  unii/.i', 
*  Kiiiiiiiiiiiiii  [kiiiiimiiiiii,  K.,  I'ikiiiiitii,  (l.|, 

ilKilaHsi'H  niiiilr  rrnlli  the  liijiinr  of  llii; 

i'iM.'1111-init  tr«'. 
All",  |Mii|i|c.     ii  liiiiiiifiiim  II  kiiim    kiin 

i»;i  tr  lip,  till'  |iiii|ili>  nil  oviT  till-  liiiiil 

lii'K  iirilirf.     (Sit  kiiil'i,  kiirii.) 
* hiiiiii.  III  i-nl ;   I'imhI,      7V</  kniiiini,  I  niii 

i-iiliii);   it.      hiiiiiik,  ciiirn.      Kaiiam, 

thy  limil. 
Kiimi    [kiDi,  /iiiiii],  tilmiit    111,   |{iiiii){   to. 

Till  kiiiiii   Hill,  I  mil  piiiiK  111  ilriiik. 

hiiHii  luikn  II  kiiii,  tin:   mill  i«  jfiuii^ 

111    liill.      hiiiiiliokii    (liir    A((h'    riikn) 

III  mil  til  riiini'. 
Kiitiii  (l!.),  lo»n.     (Sec  kmiii.) 
h'liiiiii,  ir.     Hniiiii  ko  /«»//,  //u  kniiuitfiii), 

il'tliiill  Hirikij  me,  I  will  kill  tliii-.  (Si-c 

fullii-flililill.) 
Kiiiiiliiaii,  til  lrlii{tl|i'ti.     (Si'c  iiiiiDiiin,) 
Kiiiiiiiii'iiii,  111  fiiitli'r  liws.  III  U'  iiiilortii- 

liati',      /i    kiiiiiininiii    r   h'lin,   \\v    18 

iiiiiiirluiiiiti'.    Till  kii  III  1 11  nil  II,  I  siitUr 

liis.s  Iruiii  it. 
Kitiiiiuii  (or  kniiiMi),  tin,'  iiisiilc,  contpntK.  i 

Kiiiiiiiin    III    iiiiiniiim,   the    insiili'  of 

yiiiir  liri'iisl.      Hium  wa  ni  mm,  the 

Hiilistaiii'i   III' my  ilnnin. 
Kmiiiuii-iii-innlu,  I'yilmll. 
Kiiiatriipi,  iHirri'n,  utilruitriil, 
Kiiiiipii,  ilrnjtoii-IIy. 
•VlV/«<,  niCDii.ilut   Ini'.      K  tmliii  U-  kniii, 

lie    i^    ciittiiig     the    trot".       ('ix'iin-iiiit 

Will  II  I. 

Kiiiiiiii:  ('i.).  iilli'iiiled. 
Kuiiiiii,  lit   III  ilriiik.     K  kiiiiim  the  run, 
till'  w.iiir  is  c'ikkI  til  drink. 


AdHim,  to  Mirk,  In  rniiM'  In  nilliin'.    (S<'<' 

til  nil  HI.) 
Siiiiiikii,  to  ciiiiii'  111  I'liiiir.      Kniiiikti  mill 

I  Iniii  <i  kiiin,  Willi  liiin  lirri'  to  iiir. 
hiiniikn,  lo  rniiN)'   lo   fix,  to  M'nil,  In  rX|M'l. 

Till  kiiiiiikii  r  trim  ii  kniinn,  I   wnil 

hull  111  iIki'.      '/'(■/  kiiniiknvii,  I  ilri\i' 

IJH'c  awiiy. 
hniitm,  rjii'w  it, 

hiiiilii  ((•.),  to  11111!  lo  oni''"  M'lr,  to  hum. 
'Ai/ici',  111  lill,  iiiaki-  liill.      hiiiMiiMii,  lill 

Ihy^iir. 
Hiigiif,  hair-Klii'k,  liair-prirkfr. 
*  Siittkiiii,  iHilatulilr. 
hiii)iirnfini,  to  riiiii**'  In  laugh. 
hiuiiii  ((!.),  rronx,  irritalilr. 
hii/'ini.  III  liiiiiih.  111  roin|il<'li'.  111  ilo  nil. 
Snjkini,  to    o|M'n,  |im'<o,    unlit",      hiijuiin 

Iniirn,  o|ii'n  your  haml. 
Kitpr,  lo  III-,      Till  kiijM  III  I  iiukn,  I  tie  it 

nniiiiiil  my  wnint,     Kiipf  iirorom,  lie 

your  iH'i'k,  i.  i'.  haii((  yourwll'. 
hiiji/H,  a  kiiiil,  a  way  nl'tyin);. 
h'lii'niiik,  liiwi'r  slory  nr  ;;muiiil  flnor  of  n 

hmiiu-  uhii'li  lias  a  piini,  fir  lol). 
All/',  kiikiir,  lo  mil,  to  srrnpo.      Mill  ikill 

kit  nil  kiiriii,  coiik"  iiihI  riili  iiin, 
hiira,  a  ri'lalivc,  n'latinn,  kimlnil.      Tin 

kiimmni,  iiii  kiiiii,  I  will  mivc  him, 

Ik'  is  my  rrlnliiiii. 
hiiriiniii,  ilijrr  linilli'r  nr  sister. 
Jiiiriiiniii,  yniiniicr  lirolhrr  or  sisti-r. 
Kiiriipii,  lo  liiilo,  conronl.    KitrnjMHii,  hiilo 

nil',      ho  nil  kiirajDiiii  tn,  when-  will 

you  hide  il !     Jiniii/nik,  liiddi'ii. 
hiirii/ti/Ki,  a   kind  nf  I'inhI   |ir<!|Hin'd  iVoni 

llic  I'ruit  III' till'  |ianilaniis. 
* hiiritirii,  sky,  hrnvcii,  wi'ulhi'r.     Eniuu 

tiitiik   I   kiirnuii,  how  many  suns  in 

the  sky  ?     K  liuok  n  knrmra,  the  sky 

is  trouliird,  or,  the  wi-nlhcr  ia  had. 
'  Kiirnr,  .syru|i  nr  mnlassos  of  the  cocoa- 

nut,  inixni  with  water. 
' Hiiniiii  [kiiinl,  K.|,  fish-hook  of  |ienrl, 
hioiirn  ,  In  liclieve,  lio|»',  i'X|i<vl. 
Knrinii,  lo  |iiit.     Huriint  in  te  Imrea,  put 

it  in  tlif  caiint'-housc. 


f-i"i-r"»iitir  ■- 


T  A  K  A  \V  A. 


457 


Kfint  [knioiiii],  tn  ijiiirt,  np|i<"nw ;  In  I'lx, 
iirriiniji',  wttlr  ;  In  iniiki'.  hinniin, 
k<i'|i  \nlirwiri|"l"'l.  hkiiiKiii'lhlillfiik, 
III  n|i|H'nM'  'I'liliurrik.  hit  knm  «  nit- 
iiiini,  ImvM  you  m'tllwl  yiiiir  mind,  nr 
piiriHiw  f  Kiiiv  II  U  iili  leiiniia,  iiinki- 
nnolliiT  (iri'-|iliii-u.  Tin  kiinnn,  I  will 
nrriiii){i'  ll. 
'Kiiiiiiii  [nl  Miikiii),  lil'i'k  ln'iiiU. 
Kuril,  mill.     /•.'  /'•ll  If  knrii,  Ihcru  ii  much 

mill. 
Karuiik,  to  cnuw  ti>  ili'»i-<'iiil.      Kuiimk  r 

Iriiu,  M'Uil  him  down. 
Kuriiii,  li'ihinK-iH't. 

Hni-iioiiio,  "  UMhIy," — thu  ri-rnii'lilud  sup  of  i 
Ihr  ciH'iia-iiut  trw.  I 

hutuUiii,  to  iiKiuiiv,  u»k  (lit.  to  couto  to 

tt'll). 
•  hiiliiiiiii,  onl, 
KiUitgiy  to  c'Hiis)'  III  cry.     Antni  kulapii, 

diiii't  iimkr  im-  cry. 
KiUt,  til   liuild,  to  iTiM-l,  wl  up;   111  linisi 
Biiil ;  to  put,  pliicc.     /((  till  ir  lull  ki) 
katiiii,  is  Ihc!  hduw  fiiii«h<'d  Ihiil  you 
wen'  building  I      Tin  knit  Ic  /unit  tii 
le  /ml  mi,  I  will  put  cocon-nut  trees 
ill  tlint  hiiuM'. 
'  Kiittu,   to    KiiiHi'ze   out    wilh    Torcc;    to 
shoot  ;    n    (lun,  pistol.     J\ii   kalia   te 
tdijd,  you  nhiKit  the  cuiniss. 
hiitikitik,  roiinh,  prickly. 
'Kutirr,  to  show,  li't  mv.     hiiiiie  iriliitnt, 

let  mc  WH'  what  you  have  brouyhl. 
Kiitoka  [kiiliik,  kiu/iii;\  to  cause  to  »luy,  to 
Htop,  to   Ifiivc   behind ;    to   store   up ; 
to  place,  to  put ;  to  cun'.      Tin  kato- 
kill,  I  will  Mtop  it.    Aiii>l;i>n  i  knlokiii, 
gone  and  left  me  liehind.      7!'  /hU  in 
kntiikn  le  nnwrnk,  the  lioiw!  lor  storing 
the  IoikI.      Tin  knlnkniin  i  l'iiliiiiint)n, 
I  will  lokc  you  on  my  shnuliler.    Tnne 
kalnka   Ir   ornk,   a    mmi    who   cures 
(stops)  sickness. 
Kntoka,  n  landholder;  one  who  Ims  ob- 
tained land  by  coni|uest. 
*KtUo>i),  to  set  or  lay  down  nny  thing, — 
hence,   to   trodu,   exchange.      Kulor' 

115 


iijkiiii,  -Ml  it  down  there,      h'nloio  It 
nmniiik.  In  Imrter  IikuI. 
hnlnkn  (Ii.),  Irnwxers  of  matting  worn  an 

a  delence,  In  lighting. 
* Kini,  to  wl|ie,     Jxim   It   iiKtUimii,   wi|>e 

your  eyes. 
Kniifi,  crab. 

*  h'lwr,  iii-eklace  of  (lowers. 
Kniiii,  to   cau-w'   to   ipiarrel,  to   vex.      Ko 

kniiuni,  you  vixeil  me.     (.Sii'  tin.) 
Knnoiin,  sermid.     (From  iin,  two.) 
Kniira,  to  cut  in  two.    Tin  kiiiirngo,  1  will 

cut  you  in  two. 
Knuritnrii,  a  light. 
hiiiili,   to   awaken.      Kiifra   ko   knutini, 

why  did  you  waki,"  iiic? 
Kinrn   \kiit\  knit,  fiiv\   pity,  sorrow;    to 

regret,     InkiH  kaxen  ((•.),  no  pity. 

Till  kiwii  nkt  roko  trim,  I  am  sorry 

he   diH's    not   come.      A'lity   /.'iigUt  '<> 

have  cause  liir  sorrow,  to  regret.  (Sec 

ii'ii)ii.) 

*  Hnwii,  town.    Ap'iiii  Ir  omiit  in  te  kav/a, 

are  all  the  |M'i)ple  in  the  town  \ 
Knirn  [/.(((/',  kiui],  slave. 
Knwa,  to  tish.     Tiu  noko  ina  knwa,  1  nm 

going  a  fishing. 
'Kiiirni,    path,    road.       Tiitai-iii-kawai, 

talking  by  the  way,  conversation. 
Kiivnikniin,  to  creep. 
Hniiiiir,  dirty.     (See  niaiij.) 
hrru  (<■.),  to  sleep. 
A'l/,  come.     Kii  iiuii,  come  here. 
A'((//<  (K.),  ship. 

*  Kir,  mat.     Kicti  inu,  sleeping-mat. 
Kief  nil  Ir  un,  poles  which  unite  the  out- 
rigger to  the  canot.'. 

Kikn,  kikn,  cuttle-lish. 

Kiiiiitn,  rat ;  o  thief. 

"  Ktiio,  ant,  cminet. 

Kino,  to  dig.     Kiiiu  te  run,  dig  a  taro  pit. 

* KtjHiikijiin,  to  puddle  ;  u  paddle.     (See 

iki/iikn/ii.) 
* Kipiiin,  net,  seine. 
*Kiri,  dog. 

*  Kim,  annoying,  iiurtful,  bad. 
A'<(((,  porpoise. 


458 


PHILOLOGY. 


Kitci,  n  liornlil,  nirssciiger,  ncws-hriiij'rr. 

Ko  iitjii   III    iiici,  do  Villi    liiiir  llio 
iiirs.st'iinir  ? 
AVh;V(/(,  IhlMliiHul ;  U>  lio.    li  kiiiilni  nm 

Ink  II  l.iini,  what   ymi  trll  mo  is  liilsc. 

Kn  kiinliii,  VdU  lie. 
•A'o  or  gii,  lliou,  lliri'.      Km  in  kn  kiimii- 

iiikcgo,  wliy  didst  tlii>ii  hurt  tliyselff 
Ki>,  a  virijiii. 
Jxmik,  tliciii  wilt  not.     lio  oi'/,  koiik,  wilt 

tliiiu  ri.'tiini,  iir  not  '. 
Kii^iii,  blow  it  (as  tliroiigh  n  pijio). 
*Koiriki,  to  scrn|H", 
A'li^'  or  All//,  to  cause  to  return,  to  send  for, 

to  invito  again.      'I'ia  kvuo,  I  expect 

tlicc  back      Anliii  kogin,  don't  send 

for  liini.     (Sec  og.) 
Kiiki)  (O.),  jealousy. 

Kij)ii,a  corrupt  pronunciation  of  pA(/»/,  yc. 
Kv>i  (for  kii-oii),  to  fill.    Jinn  r  tc  luiiii,  till 

my  hand.     Kon  c  Ic  niainig,  till  the 

cup. 
Konoii,  sonj;,  verse.    //(  linn  wiUiil,  konon 

in  iineiic,  I  have  coin|)osi'd  a  song  for 

singini;. 
'  Kuril,  cord,  string.     Kniit  >ii  jiiii,  vein. 
Koru,  dart,  javelin,  s|x;ar. 
Korokoro,  strong.     Aiitai   ia   knrnkoro  e 

nin   V  ikaki,   who    is    the    strongest 

among  them  ? 
Koifiir   [i'oi/v//-],    to   go   to,   to   conic   to. 

Koiciir  am  kani,  go  to  your  relations. 

Mui  till   kuifiir  a   IkiIhhi   n  Iiikiiiu, 

come  let  us  go  to  your  other  house. 

Tia  rokoii  koirarifin,  I  have  {•onic  to 

you.     Jiiiera  kn  iiki  knnini,  wliy  did 

you  not  come  to  ine  ? 
Kmhiiitiod,  yesterilay.     Ju  mntr  Iciiii  kiiii' 

iiiinoa,  he  died  yesterday. 
Kiiira,  why  ? 

A"«ii>i  [a^'I"],  wood  driAcd  to  tho  islands. 
* Kumcti-,  wooden  disli,  trencher. 
* Kuna  or  konn,  to   be  able;   to  endure, 

tear,      ho    kiniii    Ir    iiniiii,    can    vou 

swim  !     Tiiiki  kiiiiii  U-  iiniiii,  or  linki 

kunii  tmiui,  I  cannot   swim.      Titiki 

kuna  tc  timnntk,  I  cannot  liear  food. 


Tiiiki  koiiiiii  kiiHii  Ic  iimarak,  I  can- 
not liear  to  eat  the  food. 

* liiiri,  ten  thousand. 

Kuril,  to  scratch.  Antiii  kiirilni,  don't 
scratch  me. 

•  Kuril,  to  cut.    Antiii  kiirii'Ui,  don't  cut  it. 
Kiiniliiiiii,  to  shave.     (S«!  Inuii.) 
Kiiruitittii,  to  cut  in  pieces.     Ti(i  kiinii- 

latiiLn,  I  will  cut  you  in  pieces  (qu. 
from  kiirii,  and  IhIc,  many  f). 
Kiiriikiii,  to  cut  wiKid,  to  hew. 

*  Kiirukiirii  [korokuiu],  n  cut,  a  wound. 


This  letter  docs  not  properly  belong  to 
the  language.  In  a  ^ery  few  words  it  wos 
uschI  by  the  interpreters,  probably  for  some 
other  letter, — r,  u,  or  t. 

Ltiuti,  to   pluck.     Ake'  tuUia,  has   not 

pluckeil  it. 
Li,  heard  only  in  th"  •single  phras"',  kana 

lUi  li  iiuti,  the  I'leHu!"s  arc  going  to 

rise,—  probably  usetl  for  te. 
Liiiii,  fish-line. 


M 

*Ma,  with,  by,  as.     Ko  iri  ma  'ntai,  with 

whom    earnest    tlic.;  ?      Tia   iri   tna 

Iciiii,  I  cnme  with  him.     Tin  uiianau 

ma   nggnc,   I    am    as    tall    as    tliou. 

E  mute  tc  ni  ma  ttt,  the  tree  is  dead 

by  lightning. 
^fll,  a  fish-weir. 
J\[n,  front ;  licfore.     (Sec  mo.) 
Miiiitj  [maiiinji,  mnniji,  muiij],  dirt,  litter. 

Maiijiin  l\ii,  dirt  of  the  fire,  ashes. 
MiUuj,   left,   sinister,      n   Ixii   maaij,  the 

left  hand,  i.  e.  the  dirty  hand, — that 

w  hich  is  not  uncd  in  eating. 
Many,  bitter,  s-/ir.     E  mnon  Ic  run,  the 

water  is  bitter.     Miunjiu  Ic  iiuinam. 

taro  preserved  in  a  sour  state. 


, 


. 


T  A  R  A  \V  A. 


459 


Mug,  nfrniil ;  to  fear.  Tia  mtiu,  I  am 
nfniid.      Ti(i  itiiiuri'ii,  I  four  llico. 

*M(ii,  liitliLT,  conic  here.  IVilin  tiini, 
brill;;  liitlicr.  Mai  ikiii,  conic  hither. 
nidi  ko  nil  mo,  come  thiit  you  may 
drink. 

Mill  and  tiidhi,  from.  Ko  iiiiko  niiii  in  ? 
I'roin  whi'iice  comest  tlioii  !  Tin.  inkn 
main  liriirji,  1  come  from  the  foot- 
hnll  playing. 

Mai,  ovon,  heurth,  c<H)king-|)lace. 

*M(tiii,  ro|)c. 

Miiiii  [iiiniiii,  mill,],  leeward,  westward. 
Till  jiitrtiii  miii  miiiii,  we  have  sailed 
from  the  westward. 

*Miiiiiki,  southeast.  E  kakapa  mitiiiki, 
at  the  southeast  there  are  cannibals. 

Maie,  necklace. 

MaiiKiiiiii,  white,  bright.  E  nuiiiiaiiin 
tiiitiii  i  kiiriiuii,  the  stars  ore  bright 
ill  heaven. 

Miiiiiiik,  northward,  or,  perhaps,  (lorlh- 
wcst.  Tia  kaiia  jmrniiiiok  i  nuii- 
mik,  we  arc  going  to  sail  to  the 
northward. 

Mdio,  windward.  Tia  kniia  jMinm/iok  i 
tiiaio,  we  arc  going  to  sail  to  wind- 
ward (i.  e.  east,  or  cast  southeast, 
see  ;<>). 

Muion,  through,  out  from.  E  tiipitinji  rin 
tc  mat  tmiioii  tint,  the  dead  man'.s 
bones  arc  sticking  up  through  the 
ground  (from  mai  and  to). 

Maipiiia,  C(x;oa-niit  shell. 

Maim,  from.  Tana  tc  orak  mairv,;  keep 
sickness  I'rom  us. 

Main  [moiti,  IJ.],  many,  much  ;  more.  In 
..iittti  tc  kaiu,  there  is  much  rain.  E 
maita  wait  a  kaiiim,  my  canoes  are 
more  than  yours.  E  maiti  iiijgoe^G.), 
you  have  the  most. 

Main  \mciii,  iiuo,  iiieia,  man,  vuiiir],  to 
live,  to  heal,  to  get  well  ;  alive,  well  ; 
good;  lilc.  Ah  main  e  tciiii,  he  will 
not  live.  Kanumaiii  kiii  ni  Imiii,  the 
wound  on  my  arm  is  going  to  heal.  E 
vuiiu  iijHir  ma  ajHimi,  our  land  is  as 


good  as   yours.      Kaiuiiiaii   maiuir, 

prolong  our  lives. 
Miik'i,  branch  of  a  tree;. 
Makai,  jaw.     Kalmn  iiiakaim,  shut  your 

jaws.     Miik(ii-li(if>Hrii,  a  scold    (big. 

jaw). 
*Makai>ja  [miikaina^,  incxin. 
Makr,  a  small  canoe. 
*Miikiiko,  a  wound. 
Mam,  fresh  water.     Tb  mam  in  tc  tiiaiioj), 

water  from  the  well. 
*Miima,  ashamed. 
*Miu)in,  breast  of  woman,  pap. 
Mama  (G.),  mother  (used  only  by  young 

children). 
Miimam  ((•.),  rotten. 
Mamiii-  [memai],  weak,  feeble. 
Mamitiia,  to  mfick,  make  sport  of.   Ko  ma- 

moniuii,  \.)U  arc  making  sport  of  me. 
*Ma>i,  bird.     Ara  man,  our  birds. 
Man,  month.    Uainan  le  man,  two  months. 

(.Set!  anian.) 
Miunun,  a  preparation  of  the  arum. 
*Mana>ji,  dirt,   refuse.     Manaijin   tc  ai, 

ashes.    (See  maay.) 
Manila,  polite,  accomplished. 
*Maniapa     [manfp,    nianinji],    council- 
house.      Tia  roko  mai  te  maniapa,  \ 

come  from  the  maniapa.  ((Ju.  ntna  ni 

II [HI,  house  of  the  town,  town-house ') 
Miintki,  footstep,  track. 
Maninar,  muscpiito. 
Miuiitjia,  foolish. 
Manop  [maniiip,  G.],  a  well. 
*Manrtrc  (Makin),  much,  greatly. 
''Mann,  brother  (of  a  woman) ;  sister  (of  a 

man). 
*Miigai-ni-wai,  little  toe. 
Marak,  to  ho  hurt ;   hurt,  sore,  in    pain ; 

pain.     Ko  miinik  ia,  where  are  you 

hurt  f     E  maiiik  chgii,  my  side   is 

sore. 
Mariini/ii >i,  slippery. 
Mnriuiii,  lonesome,  lonely,  solitary. 
Mill  II rv,  heart  of  a  tree. 
Maiiri  [nurir,  K.,  mnridi,  G.],  cold. 
Maroro   (G.),  strong,    powerful.     Maroro 


460 


PHILOLOGY. 


e  pni,  I  nni    strong.      T\ig  mtiroro, 

strung  wind. 
Munia    [or   ?noni<i],   to   lose;    lost.      Ko 

iiufn/ti  ani  lupu  in  /  wlicrc  did  you 

lose  your  I  nilb  !    7i  inii'im  nii  iiijnni, 

my  iixi'  is  lost. 
Hiiiri'ti-i:ui,  to  lorgol.     E  iiiiinia-^i/iid,  I 

I'lirjii't  it.     Ko  inufiiii^iiiui,  Imsl  thou 

I'orjiotlcii  me  ? 
Miriint  (M.),  soil,  i|uift. 
*M(it<i,  eyo.     Mdliiii  ti/di,  my  right  eye. 

Miitdii  hkkii),  my  l<!ll  oyc. 
Mildki  (O.),  bhiid. 
Mutiimiir  ((^.),  shnrt-sighti-d. 
*Muttiij  [;«(//(/ 1,  spirit  (?)■     liti-iii-mtitinj, 

teinpli'.    U'li-iii-mtittiij,  ship.     Miitinj 

Anic/icri,  whites  I'rom  Anicricn, 
*M<iUtu,  fisli-hook. 
*Milr,  to  die  ;  dond,  shiiii ;  de«d  person  ; 

death,     li  male   tviut   kuanaiimt,  he 

died  yosterdiiy.     li  mole  iuh  niitui, 

killed  by  wliotn  ?      'tVili  /irri^i  main, 

those  who  seek  my  death. 
il/((/f  (G.),  raw,  not  well  cooked. 
Milemiil,  wood. 
Miilolo  (H.),  hard,  solid. 
*MnUi    (Kuria),   to    sleep.      Ko    matu    in 

i)i(ilin),vi\v.\K  shall  you  sleep  to-night : 

(See  kern.) 
MdiKi  ((!.),  afraid. 

Jl/'/«/j(G.),to  lal)or,  to  cultivate  the  ground. 
MiiuiHi ;  r  iiKiHiia   iii   miikiihjn,  absence 

of  the  moon  (U^lbn!  the  new  moon). 
Maiiiju,  ti>  have  a  disagreeable  smell.     la 

niaioji:,  it  sniolls  bad. 
Maiir/ga  [man,  U.],  n  cup.    lai  te  maiij/pa 

c  If  nana  eriim,  have  you  another  cup  ? 
Mauri,  w  ieked,  bad.    E  i/irnjia  iiia  mnuri, 

I  iK'al  him  lK'(!ause  he  is  bad. 
Maiiriiji,  to  think  of. 
Mrauiii,  rushes. 
il/<^',  to  dwell,  to  live,  to  l)e.      Ko  mi!;  in, 

where  do  you  live  ?      'I\iiiok  a  nijgoe 
ko  mi!!  ar  ura,  for  friendship,  b»^  thou 

our  chief 
Afri,  breailfruit. 
Mco  [iiieoii],  dew  ;  |)erspiration. 


*Mio  [wo],  Chinese  papcr-ti«e. 

Metiiro,  scuttle,  hatch. 

MeUiiir  [t\\x.  nuitttora  ?],  to  be  troubled 
alwut.  Aiitai  meUtnria,  don't  trouble 
yourself  about  him. 

Mill,  go(Ml.    (Si-e  main.) 

Sill,  to  dream ;  to  think ;  dream,  revery. 
Hiiin  ftaiiai  lia  mi}!0  ina'ioj/,  tia 
i/iiaijuo  kaimira  iii  mill,  if  I  dream 
aliout  you  to-night,  1  will  tell  you  tho 
substance  of  my  dream.  I'ia  luiiu,  I 
will  think  of  it. 

Mi  or  *mimi,  to  wonder,  to  be  surprised. 
Till  mi  rum,  I  am  surprised  at  you. 

Mimi,  niinger<\ 

Miiiiti,  fat.  Minilin  Con,  fat  of  the  tor- 
toise. 

*  Mirimiri,  a  babe. 

Mo,  with,  by,  as  (same  as  ma). 

*31o  or  moi,  to  drink. 

Mo,  tore-part,  front,  face.  Md-ni-piroto, 
lore-part  of  the  belly.  Thti  mom, 
wi|)e  your  face. 

Ml)  [mil,  mon,  »«(»],  before.  Antai  nea 
e  moil  teiin,  who  was  king  before  him  I 
Aki  roko  mon,  none  cnmc  before  me. 
(See  irnmn,  kariimo.) 

Mo,  chief,  king.  Antai  m«mi  tint^wa, 
who  was  your  chief  (brmerly  ?  Mim 
te  ajxi  [moH/jYiy;],  chief  of  the  land, 
king. 

*Moa,  domestic  fowl.  Mo'timdn,  cock. 
Mo'aiine,  hen. 

M(x/iii,  to  sneeze.     (Sec  kamoi/i.) 

Moiti,  fat  of  meat,  blubber.  E  kngkan 
moeliii  te  kiwi,  the  fat  of  the  porpoise 

is  g(KKl. 

Mog,  dog. 

Mognr,  work,  task,  labor;   to  work.      E 

jHini  an  mogur,  my  work  is  fmishod. 

Ttra  go  na  mogiir,  what  are  you  going 

to  do! 
Moi,  c<x>ked,  well  done.     Ko  kaiia  te  or6ra 

o  ko  kana  Ic  moi,  will  you  eat  it  raw 

or  cooked  ? 
Moko  (G.),  rotten.     E  moko  iiin,  his  teeth 

are  decayed. 


TARAWA. 


461 


•  I 


Mnnn  (O.),  wot. 

Moiii  (K.),  the  siiblnrranpnti  world  (?). 

Mill  ((J.),  to  brciik  ;  bnikoii. 

Mol,  n  fpiilipedr. 

Aliii,  iin<-r.     Aki  inho  miiiii,  none   cnnip 

nfirr  mo.     Aiitiii  iiiomi  e  iiiiiin  leiia, 

who  was  your  king  nftcr  liiin?     (See 

iriimiii,  karumiii.) 
*Muiiniii,  viuimntii,  ciieoii-niit. 
Midiikii  III  Ihii,  fiilliom, — or,  length  from 

lip  of  finger  to  opposite  shoulder. 
Miimiit,  to  vomit. 

Miiriiiiiiri  (tJ.),  Id  Ix'  slow,  to  deliiy. 
Uliili,  to  finish,     ho  muti  le  tni  litm,  have 

you  finished  your  gathering,  or  crop? 
Mitligiik,  determine,  rtsolve.     A  miilis'ak 

takin  tcua  iiia   ktimtUea,  they  have 

determined  to  kill  him. 


N 

The  intprpr(?tcr.s  sometimes  interchanged  | 
this  letter  with  /',  as,  /xiiri  and  /Kii/ii,  nose,  ' 
mariii])  and  imniitip,  council-house.  In 
some  instances  this  was  prolwibly  agreeable 
to  the  practice  of  the  natives,  as  we  find  the 
/  and  r  of  many  I'olynesian  and  Malay 
words  changed  in  Tarawan  to  n;  as,  iiidjo, 
fly,  for  luyit, — niiko,  to  come,  lor  lako,  &c. 
We  heard,  also,  nt  'I'apuleouea,  kaiiij>n  and 
lcarfp\  iimaiic  and  it/iuire,  &.c. 

*Nii,  sign  of  the  future  and  of  the  subjunc- 
tive. Till  mi  iiriii,  I  shall  sew  it. 
Miii  ikiii  ko  na  nritii,  come  here  that 
you  may  ti'ach  mo. 

Naur,  used  only  in  the  salutation,  ko  iiimr? 
wlr',h  means,  where  are  you  going! 

Nniii-iii,  to  wiidi. 

Naip  (G.),  Mask  or  bottle  made  of  a  cocoa- 
nut. 

Nairiinak, "  no  matter ;"  "  I  don't  care,"  i.Vc. 

Naitrar,  to  stab.  A/itai  miiiia/iii  'ii  W 
UijMi,  don't  stab  me  with  the  knife. 

Nnkaki,  they  (fem.  oi wiikaki). 

*Nako,  to  come.     Nttko  mux,  come  hither. 

110 


Ko  iiako  miii  la,  whence  comcsl  thou? 
Ndko  supplies  the  place  of  roko,  in  the 
im|H'rative. 

yitii  [iiitiiii,  iiii'ii],  the  inside,  the  interior; 
the  mind;  within.  I^  iiianik  i  nami, 
there  is  a  |Hiin  in  my  inside.  JC  ro 
naiiiun  o  iiluai,  is  your  mind  nt  rest 
or  not !  /  iintian  a  jmihiijhihu,  within 
my  breast. 

*\(ii)0,  a  dy. 

*A'(oj/  or  I'll  III,  cloud, 

*j\'il>lillll)li,  to  go. 

*iViniiiiiiko  or  iiiimnnko,  to  go  or  come. 
A'aiihiiikool  iiiii  kiitnniiio,  I  am  com- 
ing to  oil  you.  Till  ninjimiko,  I  am 
going  (salutation  at  parting). 

*\Xinjii,  stem  of  a  leal'. 

*J\'iti)i'i,  to  see.  ^liii  ko  im  niiorio,  come 
that  you  ;nay  sw  it.  Im|irnitive,  iiori ; 
iiori  te  Iniiiiiiie,  see  the  shadow.  jNa- 
iiiioiiii,  let  mo  see. 

*Xii/i,s<m.  .Y«//«,  my  son.  Xaliii  Cuea, 
son  of  the  chief. 

*Xfin\  tongue.     .Vcictw,  tliy  tongue. 

*jSi  [ii\  /'((],  of,  in,  at,  among,  for,  from, 
with,  i'li /ii7><7»/,  leaf  of  arum.  i\'«j)j 
III  kiiiiitni,  clouds  of  the  sky.  A'rt- 
hiiokiiio  ill  tr  ai,  burn  yourself  wi  the 
fire.  Ku  /mUik  i/i  iiiiti,  thou  art  great 
among  spirits.  7!-  /mi  ,ii  kaiiiik, 
sonu'thing  to  !«  eaten.  Tuutiiitai  in 
tc  iii-/iiiok,  keep  me  Irom  slander. 
Aliii  «'  iiiiiiiiie,  man-child  ((|u.  child 
among  men  f)     (See  Grammar.) 

^Vi,  |)ond.  liii/i  ill  te  ni  iii  liciiitik,  clay 
from  the  mullet-pond. 

Ni,  tree. 

iVi  (for  ni  III),  whence,  IPo  «i,  a  canoe 
from  whence  ! 

yiii,  she  (when  the  person  s|K)ken  of  is  not 
present). 

Niin  or  niyin,  she  (present). 

Niirc  or  nii/irr,  she,  that  lady  (a  resjiect- 
ful  form  of  expression). 

Ni-kail(iiniliirii,  wixxlen  lieads. 

*Xiiiui  or  ijiiiiii,  to  drink,  hia  iiima,  let 
us   drink,   or,  may  I   drink .'     Akea 


462 


PHILOLOGY. 


hu  n  I  milk,  there  is  none, — it  is  all 

(Inink  u|>. 
'Niiiiii,  fivr. 
*yi)iialnii,  tilly. 

Nimuliini,  a  kimi  of  shclUfisli ;  the  peri- 
winkle. 
Ximlta,  to  stick,  to  ndliere. 
yimti,  to  liok  wild  the  tongue. 
^iiiijH),  II  |)iisie  miiilc  ortlic  nrum. 
iVi«j  (li.),  oiK'on-nul. 
Niiii,  a  IngCNin  in  the  centre  oC  nn  island. 

(Sec  /li.) 
Ni/ii,  lilt,  liisoioua  (used  (iiily  (if  fisli).     ii 

/liiii  tr  ikd,  the  tisli  \h  liil  and  (loud. 
yiijdliii    \>iiijiiilio,    K.|,    to-morri)W.      'Pin 

roko  ma  te  tni  iiiijio/m,  I  will  ennie 

With  the  ennot!  to-morrow.     ^Xii/ii/iii  o 

tiri  o  ari,  to-morrow  and  the  day  after 

and  the  day  after. 
Nhjdn  ((!.),  to-morrow,     yhjan  nri,  the 

day  after  to-morrow. 
yiii  ((!.),  Clip  made  ol'n  cocoa-nut  shell. 
Ait/ill,  nil/ire, — (sc«'  iitiii,  niiie.) 
JSb  (('■.),  surl'.     Oruak  te  ua  in  tc  no,  the 

canoe  is  lost  in  the  surf, 
Xok,  breakers. 
'Noko,  to  go,  to  proceed,  to  come.     Bain- 

ininai  yoko  te  ro,  tia  iioko  inn  k<nra, 

il"  the  fine  weather  comes,  I   will  go 

a-fishiny.      'l\u  iioko  ot,  shall  1  come 

(or  go)  to  you  1 
Noknnoko,  to  walk,  to  go.     Kiiera  ko  akia 

nokoiioko  eriir,  why  do  yon  not  walk 

like  us?     Antai  a  nokoiioko,  don't  go 

away. 
Noko  (li.),  to  come.     E  iioko  mai  e  r/iii 

run  tiimaii,  I  come  from  my  father. 

(See  roko.) 
Ndii,  Morinda  citrifolia. 
Noiio  (K.),  surf.     (See  no.) 
Noriii  (K.),  to  see.     (See  mioriii.) 
Nordp(\\.),  to  see  any  thing.     'IHiiki  nordp, 

I  don't  see  any  thing 
'NtajMki,  ornament  of  shell  suspended  from 

the  neck. 
JS'uk,  middle ;  waist.     E  mcdk  te  tva  i 

jiiikan,  the  canoe  is  split  through  the 


middle.     T\a  kaptia  i  niigu,  I  lie  it 

niuiid  my  waist. 
Nmo,  wave,  hillow. 
*iVufV(i,  string  braided  of  human  hair. 


n 

riolli  Kirby  and  Grey  had  much  difticulty 
in  pronouncing  this  element ;  the  first  fre- 
ijiiently  substituted  for  it  nn  n,  and  the 
latter  n  k. 

•77(1,  where?  which  ?    E  t/it  tritmi,  where 

are  your  canoes  !  E  ffu  ko  tun,  which 

do  you  like? 
*/7(i,  a  hundred. 
H<i,  a  liithom. 
n<ilioijilio}ji,  to-morrow. 
*Hiii,  I.     nai  ma  teiia,  I  and  he. 
*naiit<i  [ijiihi,  piii,  K.,  kaina,  tl.],  day. 

Eia/ioija  te  yiiiifa,  how  many  days  ? 

(IJu.  itjdiga?) 
Hainap  (K.),  to-day,  this  day. 
*naira,   we.     Hair'  n   iira   bit,  we   and 

our  wives.    Tia  korokoro  yair  e  kaimi, 

we  are  stronger  than  you. 
Hi'i/io,  last  night.    (See  iijgebo.) 
*II/:ne,  thou.    (Sec  y)j/:oe.) 
*nkain,  ye  (nominative  prefixed  to  verbs). 
*nkan,  then.    (Sec  ijjkun.) 
*Tloijo,  to  itch. 
Hoifd,  to  speak.      Tiaki   iji»j<>,  I  will   not 

speak. 
*Hieta,  spine,  horn.     Hietan  te  ika,  the 

prickly  spine  of  a  fish. 
lloriijiiri  [ijariijari],  to  laugh. 
Hori-gin,   to    laugh    at.      Ko   yori-ginai, 

thou  art  laughing  at  me. 


o 


O,  and,  or.  E  ]>d  wain  o  fxiin,  his  legs 
and  arms  arc  struck  (with  disease).  E 
rd  nanam  o  idiuti,  is  your  mind  nt 
rest  or  not  ? 


TARAWA. 


463 


*0,  n  retire,  enclosure.     Poll  a  te  o,  |H)sI 

of  the  (once. 
0,  to  paddln.     O  viai,  pnddlc  this  way. 
*Oiiiiu,  eight.     Oitni/iiii,  eighty. 
Of;,  oil/;,  or  iif;i,    to    return.      'Ha    iig,   1 

will  return.     Ki>  iij^i  Ko  tik,  will  you 

return  or  not ! 
Ogiia,  tired. 
*Ukua,  whdie. 
*Oaiiiata   [oiiiut^,  n  gentleman,  n  person 

of  rank ;  n  mnn,  n  liumiin  l)eing,  a 

person.     Kinrn  jwko  te  oiaiiiila,  why 

did  the  chief  strike   you  ?      'Viak   tc 

omul'  e  tiiin,  bun  le  aiiti,  she  is  not 

n  human  being,  but  a  spirit. 
Omri  (G.),  to  cook. 
Oh,  full.  On  e  Ixiiu,  my  hand  is  full.  (See 

kdn.) 
*On,  tortoise ;  tortoise-shell. 
On  (G.),  dew.   (See  mcon.) 
*Ono,  six. 
Onton  (G.),  all. 
Ora,  shallow  ;  ebb-tide,  low  water.     E  ora 

te  rawa,  the  channel  is  shallow.  Iduai 

n\>r,  it  is  not  yet  low  tide. 
Oram  (G.),  wearied,  tired. 
*Orak,  to  be  sick;  sick;  illness,  disease. 

Ko  tia/i  orak,  have  you    been  sick  ? 

Ihiia  te  orak  c  mairur,  keep  sickness 

from  us. 
*Ori,  see  !     (See  aori,  naori.) 
Orora,  raw. 

Oriiak  (G.),  to  destroy  ;  destroyed,  lost. 
Ot,  thither,  to  thee.     A'ai/iiioko  itt,  I   am 

coming  to  thee,     liji  noko  ot,  shall  1 

come  where  you  are  f 


No  distinction  is  made  between  />  and  p, 
and  the  following  words  might  have  been 
inserted  under  the  former  letter.  We  have 
preferred,  however,  to  retain  them  as  they 
were  originally  written. 


Faikara,  what  is  it ! 


Piini,  finished,  complete.  E  juini  iiii  mo- 
isiir,  my  work  is  done.  (.See  iipaiii, 
kiijHiiii.) 

*l'iinii/)iiiiii  [or  jmnipiini],  breast,  hosom. 

*  I'll  III,  chin. 

Pupil,  a.  small  Ijoard;   a    float-board.     E 

lerrki  Ic  j/iip\  the  board  is  narrow. 
Papii,  cheek. 
' PiijMt,  th(!  Ik'IIv. 
*P(iji(i\]ii,  cannot,    know   not    how.      Tia 

piijiiiija  uoiiii,  I  cannot  swim.     (See 

/mi  nil.) 
Piijiii  (<!.),  a  preparation  of  taroand  cocoa- 
nut. 
*Para,  cap,  helmet ;  shell  (of  lobster). 
Paraii  [prai)],  to   sail,   to  voyage.      Tia 

pariiii  iniii  iiiuia,  we  have  eunic  from 

the  leeward. 
Paruuiiok,  to  sail  away.      Tia  kaiia  jxi- 

rai/nok  i  iiuiio,  we  are  going  to  sail  to 

windward. 
*Piiro,  jjoro,  a  box,  chest. 
Pi  or  pri  (M),  to  tic  ((ju.  firm,  fast.     See 

kiipi). 
Pik,  excrement  ;  to  void  excrement. 
*I'iri/ti>,  sloiiiach,  lielly. 
Po,  to   strike,   beat,   pound.     Aiilai  p(nr, 

don't  strike   us.     Poiti   te  kurapepa, 

pound  tlie  karapcpa.     la  tian  jxxik, 

it  is  pounded. 
Pottiia,  steering-oar,  rudder,  paddle.   (Sec 

/)«<■.) 
*Poijm,  a  paddle. 

*  Pni,  to  give. 
*Pii,  conch-shell. 

Pun,  to  blow  with  the  mouth. 

Puna,  voice.     Pitiiam,  thy  voice. 

Piirii,  loll  or  garret  of  a  house.   (See  ka- 

puriik.) 
*Puriii,  hair  on  the  breast.     (See  bitrc.) 
Puriti,  to  pull.     Puriti  te  »iaia,  pull  the 

rope.     Antai  puriliai,  don't  pull  me. 


R 


Tills  letter  was  occasionally  confounded 
with  n  and  (/. 


f 

f 

i 

li. 


464 


PHILOLOGY. 


Rah,  a  hnskct.  I 

*  Kutmht,  IxhIv.  I 
RiiIkiiiii,  col.  ' 
Riti,  plunk.    E  rajMi/m  tr  mi,  ihi-  plnnk  is 

liri  111(1. 
R<ii,  a  iimt  used  In  ccKikinj;. 
* R<iiiiii,  ciiitri}.');c'r  to  n  ciincH>, 
Rdimi,  til  |iiiilill('. 
RiiiiKi  (C!.).  (i)n'ln'ii(l. 

*  Run,  waliT.      Iliiti-in-matti,  Ipnrs. 
*Rfig,  cloud  (si>o  )iiiiji). 

Rag,  sinvo ;  IIk"  slave  onslc.  7^/•(^  ko 
lai/iii-iii-kiniiii >  hiiii  le  rinj  ini^or, 
why  ilii  you  lalk  f  you  arr  hut  a  slave. 

J{(ip  or  rn/iii,  jjood,  rif;ht.  7!'  nioin  nip, 
a  giKid  danr<'.  AV;  riij),  you  arr  jjimhI. 
ii  /■«/)'  f  tciKi  k"  ktini  c  tc  till,  h(!  is 
good  at  making  n  cnnoc.  Ko  <di  rap 
in  riHi  lak,  you  an"  not  uprijiht  in 
your  s|MH'ch. 

*J{iifiii/>r,  hriiad,  wide. 

Rum,  hl(MHl.  /i  iHiilKir  Ir  mm  iiiiii, 
thrrc  is  much  hlooil  about  tlicc. 

Riimaiok,  to  swoon;  a  I'ainling-Cit. 

*Uiiri>,  I'ar. 

Riirii,  dcMTt ;  lanil  without  trc<;s. 

*R(iii,  Ihalih. 

Ran,  (lask  made  of  a  cocoa-nut  shell. 

*Riii,iriu  \mi/ioi,  moiri],  g.iod. 

Ruifd,  channel,  passage,  entrance  to  a 
Ingoon. 

*Re/iii  or  rrpii,  thousand. 

Rciek,  narrow,  thin. 

Rdiit  ((!.),  higti.     (See  ieUit.) 

Jitiid,  to  split.  /(/  tiiin  rriniin,  I  have 
split  it.      Revnk  (passive),  split. 

Rrralii  (C),  heavy. 

Ri,  to  mix.     Rink,  mixed. 

Ri,  or  riri,  to  tench.  Mai  ikiii  ko  na 
ririiii  ina  rnoiti,  come  and  tench  mo 
to  dance. 

'Ri,  Imiuc.  Ri  ii^irtd,  shoulder-blade,  sca- 
pula.    Ritii  ptireke,  clavicle. 

•Rui,  lip. 

*  Rill  or  na,  a  scoop-net. 

Rik,  inken  captive.  K  rik  in  te  hitok, 
taken  captive  in  the  war. 


Rin,  to  go,  to  onler.  Aniai  riii  in  tc  hit 
art,  do  not  go  into  that  house. 

Rin  ((!.),  to  touch, 

*Riri,  cincture  worn  by  the  women. 

Ririijii,  hot ;   heat,  rays  ol'thi'  sun. 

Ro,  liimiui".  H  niiilr  niikaki  in  Ir  ri>, 
they  dii'd  in  the  liiininc. 

Ro,  peace,  ipiietiiess ;  liiir  weather.  7U« 
f  le  ro,  ki  ep  the  |H'a<'e.  'IHti  ro,  a 
man  of  [leace.  Jiiiin-f!<itini  roko  tc 
ro,  if  the  line  weather  comes. 

*Roko,  to  come;  to  iK'come.  Tin  roko 
niai  tr  nianiajxi,  I  come  from  the 
council-house.  Tin  kntv'  inn  kiin- 
ilriiki)  (for  kiinn-rokii),  I  am  sorry  that 
he  is  coming,  linijiii^nm  ko  nit  rok^ 
ar  urn,  we  pray  tliee  to  become  our 
chief. 

Roko,  sprout,  shoot,  sapling. 

Roko-lniin  (or  rnkn-lmini),  to  press  noses 
by  wa'   of  salutation. 

Rii,  from,  by,  alKiut,  with,  among,  belong- 
ing to.  Ho  iiniiia  e  rii,  you  received 
it  from  me.  IC  male  run  anini,  slain 
by  whom  \  Tia  iayai  erOni,  I  um 
done  with  thee.  E  riimi,  among 
yourselves.  Ini  tr  nuinijfui  e  leimna 
eriim,  is  there  anutlicr  cup  belonging 
to  thet! ! 

Run,  a  taro-bed.  A  pit  or  trench  in  which 
the  arujn  is  planted. 

*Rua,  nine. 

Rndk,  to  come  down.  Tiaki  e  riiak, 
I  will  not  come  down.     (Sec  karuuk.) 

Rnil,  the  spider-shell  (Stn>nd)Us). 

Rui-mnin  (or  |H'rhaps  rna-ma/a,  two-eyea), 
the  constellation  .Viiiares;  hence  sum- 
mer, which  is  reckoned  from  its  rising. 

*Ruoia,  to  dance;  a  dance. 


It  hns  been  sometimes  impossible  to  de- 
cide whether  this  letter,  when  initial,  pro- 
perly lielongs  to  the  word,  or  is  the  prefixed 
article  te. 


TARAWA. 


466 


*T)i(ii  [tmiH;  K.],  Ilip  sun  [(|U.  tr  iii?]. 
E  niariiro  liiiii,  the  sun  is  sironj; 
(hot).  E  Uikii  l<mik,  tlic  sun  is  set- 
tin};.  Eriiiia  Iwiik  i  ktiriiiitt,  how 
mnny  suns  in  Iho  sky  ! 

TUfii,  n  cup. 

*T\utri,  salt  wntrr;  tho  srn.  'Ihnti  ai, 
te  itin  iii,  this  is  suit  wnlcr,  this  is 
fresh.   Wuiin  tniir,  to  lH)il  salt  wntcr. 

IWnt,  tho  iniri|>v  fruit  of  the  piiuiianus. 

Td/iiui,  to  tiiko  up. 

Tiilmlii,  tho  hnwks-bill  tortoise. 

*Tiiliunu,  tho  scull. 

Ihliu,  a  club. 

25(//M,  a  spenr. 

IhJmiriki,  tho  principal  deity  of  some  of 
the  Kingsmill  Islands. 

Tiibui,  to  refrain,  kwp  from ;  to  spare, 
save  up.  Tiiiki  lulmtia  IkUu  <i  kaini, 
I  will  not  keep  my  hand  from  thee, 
Ko  ta/iiiiia,  are  you  spnrini;  (saving)  it. 

Tabuna,  to  prny  for,  to  intercede.  Ko 
tahioiai,  ko  kaiimiirai,  you  praved 
for  nu',  you  saved  my  life. 

T\ibuii(mk,  praying,  intercession,  witch- 
cralK 

"Dilmnak  (G.),  round. 

Ttibutahu.  IXibutahu  piiniwi,  you  stut- 
ter. 

•  jfJie,  to  know.     Ko  tain,  do  you  know  it? 

Tut,  crop  of  pandnnus  fruit. 

Tai  ((•.),  stop,  cease,  do  not.  Tai  tc 
ttiitai,  stop  the  talking.  l\u  mot  an 
iikculit^,  don't  break  his  knife.  (See 
antdi.) 

Tiiimaru  ((!.),  mid-day,  noon. 

7}iink,  evening. 

*l'aitai  [Uli],  tnlk,  conversation,  speech, 
command.  Tune  u-iti  tc  tnitai,  n 
man  who  carries  speech,  an  ambassa- 
dor. Till  kuw'  (iki  laiiak  am  taitai 
i  Kiiria  i  ei-an  Oiiaik,  wo  arc  .sorry 
that  thy  commands  nro  not  done  in 
Kuria  as  in  Oneak.  Taitai  >ii  kaitai, 
conversation,  talking  by  tho  way. 

TYiitai,  to  cut.  Tuiliii  tc  kuni,  he  is  cut- 
ting the  tree. 

117 


Tltitiii,  by-anil-bye,  presently. 

*'l\itlai  [>«!/«(,  (i.J,  to  tattix).  Aiitai  ia 
taitaiiio,  who  latlofied  thee  ?  'I\ine 
lailai  or  Uiti  tuilai,  a  tattooer.  71 
Uii  III  lailiii,  impli'monia  lor  tutlooing. 

Tuilara  (<■.),  curriMit  of  the  oeenn. 

T<ik,  talk,  speech,  saying.  Ja  tian  tuny 
am  Idk,  I  have  told  bim  your  talk 
(what  you  said).  Ko  <iki  rap  in  am 
tak,  you  arc  not  upright  in  your 
s|)eech. 

Tiikara  (<•.),  old,  worn  out. 

Tdkaldkd  (<■.),  song,  to  sing. 

Tiikdtdii  (U.),  b«'ads. 

Tdki  ((!.),  wood. 

TakilHiUi  (ti.),  bamboo.     (See  kaikilia.) 

*  'Ihma,  father. 

Tamanu  (I'.),  council-house. 

*  Tamantd,  handsome. 
Tdiiivtaiii,  to  climb. 

Tdminie  [tumrir,  K.],  shadow,  shade, 
spirit. 

Tiinai,  an  axe. 

Tunc,  tan,  to  love,  like.  Tia  iukaigo  o 
tia  taiiego,  I  respect  thee  and  love 
ihce.  E  yd  ko  tan,  which  dost  thou 
like? 

Taiic,  a  man  engaged  in  any  business. 
Tine  witi  tc  taitai,  a  man  who  car- 
ries speech,  an  ambassador.  Tane 
kati  tc  hit,  a  man  that  builds  houses, 
an  architect.  Tatic  biiok,  |>cople  that 
fight.     (Same  as  tcili.) 

Tane-kaiua,  a  conjuror. 

*  Taiio,  tan,  earth,  soil,  ground.     Iim  tan, 

on  the  ground, 
Tantan,  the  sea-urchin.  Echinus. 

*  Taija,  a  beam  in  a  house. 

*  Taya,  a  cuirass,  coat  of  armor. 
Tdijana  (G.),  same  as  ntanam. 

Tigata  (G.),  to   want,  wish,  desire;  to 

love,  like. 
*Tipiun,\a\, 

*  Tiiyi,  taiiitaiji,  vdap'ndayi,  to  weep,  cry; 

lamentation,  weeping. 
Taiji  (M.),  to  love. 
TJijitVi,  to  weep  for,  to  be  sorry  for,  to  pity. 


466 


P  II  I  I,  0  1,00  V. 


i!  i 


V  I 


'Dru  ko  liigiriii,  whnt  nro  you  crying 
nlxiul  (      7Vf(  tiiijiiifin,  I  |)ily  you. 

'l\if)ilii iji ,  to  stirk  up.  /■,'  tiiifititiji  riii  If 
unit  iiiiiiini  1(111,  lli(!  (lend  iniin's  Imhiis 
are  slicking  up  llirougli  llu.'  >;rimuil. 

TiijMi  [liip],  pinro.  All  Uiji"  in  te  kaicii, 
iny  plni'c  in  llio  town. 

T}ijKi,  a  knill- i  to  cut.  Antina  tiijiii  ai, 
whoso  kiiilr  i«  lliis  \  Anliim  liijmiii 
inui,  wliosi'  knives  nn'  llicsc  f  Aiiliti 
tiipiiim  'n  If  liijui,  (loii'l  fill  yours<>lf 
with  tho  knife. 

'Dipiiji,  n  species  ol'shurk. 

*  'l\irii,  biirlioil  s|iettr. 

Tarn,    si(;ht,   iip|penrnnce.       Tinki    kiina 

liiriiiii,  I  can't  In'iir  your  sight. 
Tdiiini'iiif,  ollcrint;  nl'  loixl  to  n  pxl. 
Tiiiiiliirii,  to  hH)k,  to  SCO ;  seeing,  iiwnko. 

Ihiki    kiiiian   tariiUirago,    I   cannot 

beor  to  look  at  you. 
T}irincii,  a  conical  cap. 
*'Piii,  lirolher  (of  u  man);   sister  (ol'  a 

wiiuian). 

*  Tiiii,  salislioil,  enoufih. 

lUii  or  tiiiiii,  to  take,  keep,  take  hold ;  to 
look  ulk'r,  lake  care.  Tuu  e  te  mo  o 
kiijM  ia,  catch  the  hen  and  lie  it.  Tiiiia 
tc  oriik  e  iiuiiriir,  keep  sickness  from  us. 

Tail  (<■.),  the  game  of  boxing. 

Till,  ready.  Ia  tan  jxirau,  ready  to  sail. 
(See  tawii.) 

*  Tiiiilicrc,  (ly.brush. 
Tauhiiki,  top,  roof,  ridge. 
Ihiigara,  cinder. 

Taumi,  to  l)ury.  Ko  tniinaia  in,  where 
wilt  thou  bury  him  .'  Ia  tian  taunak, 
he  is  buried. 

Taut,  stingy,  penurious. 

TUutaii,  to  keep,  protect,  preserve,  take 
hold  of.  TiiiiUiuir  in  hiiinir,  kec|)  us 
from  bin.  Tallinn  maiiiar,  save  our 
lives.    Tiiutiiii  iiiikau,  clasp  his  waist. 

Tautaii  (G.),  spot  on  the  skin. 

Tautainiii,  to  smother,  strangle.  'Via  tuu- 
tanna^o,  1  will  smother  thee. 

l\iiva,  ripe,  ready  for  gathering,  Iduai 
taica  tc  tai,  the  crop  is  not  yet  ri()C. 


'Diwa,  to  dry.  la  tian  tairiiia,  I  have 
dried  it. 

*  7I',  one;  o,  an;  iho  (numeral  and  article). 
'IVInii,  to  disturb,  Iroidilo.     Antni  tcliiiia, 

(liin't  disturb  it.     Ko  te/nii,  you  are 
troiiblosoino. 
Will,  grondpaii'nt. 

*  'IMiiiiiiii,  ten. 

Via,  to  w ipe.     Tl'/rt  mnm,  wipe  your  face. 
*'Malrka,  In  sit. 

*  IVili  [lit'fi,  '/''vijt  a  Imy ;  n  person,  one 

engaged  in  any  employment,  [M-ople, 
'IHti  kiitm  hu,  a  man  who  builds 
houses.  Tkiti  Ian  c  tr  rn,  one  who 
keo|is   the   |)eace.      'Iliti   n'aiine,   a 

gifl- 
7)*.>r(C;.),  older. 
'Ihniiiia,  (inc ;  another. 

*  Vh/ij,  three. 

'Ihiiiniiiinui,  a  small,  young  cocoa-nut. 
lyiiiknhiiija/iiipa,  sca-urohin,  echinus. 
'IXiiikiularnilaiii,  beads  (made  ol"  wood  and 
shell). 

*  Trillin II,  ton. 

*  'Dim,  he,  that  man. 

'Ihia,  to  break.  Anoko  tii  taifuia  te 
taliii,  go  and  break  the  club.  Ti-icak, 
broken. 

"n-ifini  [ipi.  iciiii .'],  shooting  star. 

jfi,  to  stand.  Tin  ti  o  tia  tekatika,  shall 
we  stand  or  sit?  i"  li  c  taaik.  the 
sun  is  high. 

Ti  or  tii,  to  resemble,  correspond,  agree. 
Tt  te  Inikir  ajHir  ma  ajxiiiii,  the  size 
of  our  land  :igrecs  with  yours.  Ti 
tuan  o  tcraii  Uitar  in  raviriii,  our 
houses  are  one  and  the  same  in  great- 
ness. Ti  te  nan  pni  ma  tciia,  I  am 
equal  to  him.  Tt-te-eran,  the  same, 
similar,  0(|ual. 

*  7'ia,  prefixed  to  vo'bs  and  verbal  adjec- 

tives, is  a  sign  of  tho  first  |iers(>n,  sin- 
gular or  plural.  7Vrt  loko  vtai  It 
maiiiapa,  I  conic  from  the  council- 
house.  'I'ia  roko  ijaiia,  we  come. 
Tiaki  (from  tia  and  akea),  I  will  not,  I  do 
not,  &LC. 


TARAWA. 


407 


Till,  ildiic,  liiiislicil.    Kii  till,  nrt  lliim  dime? 

Ill  tin  trim,  he  is  ddiic. 
Till,  Willi  /(  or  /)/  aflixcil,  is  used  tooxprosN 
|i(i.st   time,  (ir  the  complflion  of  nii 
uc'iidii.      'JUAt/iiii,  oriisli  it;   in  tiun 
tii/iiiiia,  I  hiivo  crushed  it.     Ko  tian 
tiitiiniii,  hast  thou  crushed  it ! 
TianiiHiiik,  to  wash. 
TibitUii,  lame.     K  libititd  wain,  my  log  is 

lame. 
'Ti/kiijii,  [)riesl. 

3VA-,  a  <|uick,  ilarting  pain ;  to  leel  a  pain. 
Tin  tik  itiniiu,  I  have  a  pain  in  my 
inside. 
TUiirii  {ii.),vhal1 

Tiki,  pierced,  hurt.     E  tiki  triiiu  in  t'in, 

my  Coot  is  pierced  with  a  hit  of  coral. 

(I'<'rha|is  the  same  word  with  tik.    Sec 

katikitiki.) 

Tiiitiit  (O.),  pumice. 

Tin,  the  llbrous  envelope  of  the  cocoa-nut 

tree. 
*Tinit,  mother. 
Tiiiii,  a  (leet  of  canoes. 
Tiniiliii,  Ixitllc. 
Tiiiiji,  danghler-in-law.      'I'iiiipii,  my  — . 

Tiiiijniiii,  thy  — . 
I'ip  ((!.),  n  mallet. 
7'iii>:ii,  tiesh,  meat.     (Sec  irii'o.) 
Tiritiri,  to  light;  to  kill;  bo  angry. 
7\io,  paltry,  mean,  of  little  value. 
7'itiriiii,  hair,  eipial  |K)rlion.     (See  ti.) 
Tiviii,  throw  it  down. 
Tiijiiiiii,  alhicorc. 
7hkii  (O.),  top,  summit. 
Tikii  [tnk  or  tiik],  to  stay,  remain,  stop;  to 
reside,  settle  on  land;  to  he  full,  as  the 
moon  (i.  e.  to  stop  increasing);  rest, 
remainder.     Ko  iriii,  ko  tok,  wilt  thou 
go  with  me  or  stay?      I'm  titka  ion  tc 
mi,  I  stayed  on  bf)ard  the  ship.     3h 
tok'  itiiiit/iii,  when  did  you  get  your 
land  ?  (said  to  a  kiiloka,nr  landholder.) 
Jj  lokii  III  mnkaiija,  the  full  (resting) 
of  the  miKin. 
'Ihkoluk,  iin  old  and  dry  cocoa-nut. 
Thinn,  to  sip,  suck  up. 


7>»iaiiti,  nying-fish. 

T}/itiiilii,  gravel. 

7hiiii,  noon.     IC  Inn-  titaik  in  toiiu,  the  sun 

will  lie  hot  at  noon. 
Totii,  a  thid";  to  steal. 
'Jhtim',  to  crush,  scpieeze.     Ko  tiiiti  totonia, 

hast  thou  crushed  it  ? 
•  31/,  tii-ni-kiiiiiii,  fruit  of  the  pandanus. 
Tuiuj,  to  tell,  to  inform,     la  fiiiu  tiiaij  ■im 
i  tnk,  I  have  told  him  your  speech. 

I  *  Tiiitiii,  star. 

I  "  'l)i,   aged    iierson,       Tii-iii-iimnne,    old 
man.     7^-iii-iiiinc,  old  woman. 
Tiintii,  frock  made  of  woven  sinnet, 


u 


*P,a  fish-trap,  an  eel-pot. 

•  Ua,  two. 

*Uiiiiu  or  (Hiiiii,  eight. 
Uaijiiji,  very  small. 

•[/((/•(■;■('/.■,  small.  71'  miiimot  uarirck,  a 
small  cocoa-nut. 

•  Uii,  iiiii,  nine  (sec  lua). 
Uni,  flower. 

•firt,  chief.  Aiitai  nean  apami,  ytho  is 
the  chief  of  your  land  ? 

*0i,  tooth.     Uiii,  my  tooth. 

Ui  (Ci.),  |ilaco.      Uiii  frii,  place  of  fire. 

Ui-kitkiiijii,  cutwater  of  a  canoe  (sharp- 
tooth). 

Ui-kiitik,  sarcastic  (piercing-tooth). 

Ui-)i\iiiti,  slander. 

Uiniiijiniiij,  to  whisper  in  the  ear. 

*Uki,  nail,  claw.  Uki-ni-bai,  finger- 
nail. 

Ukiini,  sni|)e. 

Umn  (G.),  house  ;  (K.),  house  without  a 
loft. 

•  Uiiuitie,  iiniiiri;  man  ;  mule. 
Umitiii  (O.),  to  boil. 

l/ii,  iiiiiiii,  tv  fight.     Aiitai  I'lM,  atiii,  don't 
light,  children.     THli  iinun,  one  who 
lights. 
Uiiiga,  a  pillow  (qii.  iiruija?) 
*Uniii,  sjiear  armed  with  shark's  teeth. 


r  * 


468 


P II 1 1,  o  I,  o  (i  Y. 


I! 


fTp,  i/jw,  to  lionr.  Ko  ui/<i  tr  kitri,  ilo  you 
liPiir  Iho  lit>mlil  f  Tilt  mi,  I  hcnr. 
Tiiiki  injiij),  I  don't  hoar  nt  nil.  (Soc 
iiurnp.) 

•  UijiiiH-,  lliiili  (sec  OA'ff). 
Uijisini,  Ibrnirrly,  Imin  ago. 

*Ui>iiti,   to   gwiiii,      Ifoiia-iiiiik,   111   Rwim 

wull. 
Uiiiiik,  to  llio  enstwani, 
Uoiag,  two  nioiitliM. 
t;^),  n  young  cucoa-nut,  before  the  pulji  is 

forincd. 
*Urii,   red,   like   (ire,   glowing    (sec    tin- 

raura). 
Vr,  lobster  (sjiocics  of  Palinurun). 
Vri,  8pcnr  sot  with  shark's  toolh. 
*Uta,  some,  a  little.    Uta  iii  uUike,  a  little 

tolmcco. 

•  Uleiite,  grass. 

Ud.,  to  rise,  a|)|icar,  come  in  sight.  Kana 
uli  lattik,  the  sun  is  going  to  rise. 
I>/uai  uli  te  /»k<i,  the  beuch  is  not  in 
sight. 

•  Uto,  cocoa-nut. 
Utiia,  kitc-llying. 


w 

•  It'll,  cnnoo. 

IVii'ni'HKittip,  ship. 

•Il'i,  fruit. 

♦U'.ii,  log,  foot. 

Wiiiiriii,  roi-f. 

W'akii,  r<H)l.  lyukiin  te  kai,  root  of  the  tree. 

*\Vakiiki,  ihoy,  them  (masculine.  Soc 
niikaki). 

ir<iMi//i,  husk  of  the  cocoa-nut. 

tViirigi  (i|U.  inrikif),  to  count.  IVnrigia 
te  kiilokii  ill  ti-  kiiiiii,  count  the  land- 
holders in  tlio  town. 

Wiitl  or  witii,  to  shout,  halloo. 

Wei,  to  sew.  Tia  kiiiiu  irrhi,  I  am  going 
to  sew  it. 

*Wari,  those. 

ICi//,  to  lie  down,  to  repose,  Nayinokou 
win,  I  am  going  to  lie  down. 

Wirarii,  rainNiw. 

Witin  [wHiiia,  irii/ia,  eti],  to  carry,  bring, 
take.  Wilia-iiiai  te  li/ii,  bring  me 
tho  noodle.  Ko  koriikoro  in  wiliiim, 
thou  art  strong  in  thy  carrying. 


NOTES  ON  THE  LANGUAGE  OF  ROTUMA. 


Tub  mntrrialM  for  the  following  rcmnrks  wero  obtnini'd,  ns  hns  licon  cisnwhoro  Htnlr-d, 
during  a  l>rief  intercourse  with  »omr  natives  of  this  island,  whom  we  met  ot  Tongatalni  and 
at  the  Feeje<!  Ciroup.  Although,  from  Ihc  unfavoroblo  cireumNtances  under  whirh  the 
notes  were  made,  they  arc  necessarily  very  inifK^rli'ct,  lliey  may  yet  serve  to  give  somo 
idea  of  Ihir  nature  of  the  language,  and  its  relations  to  other  idioms. 

Great  dillicully  was  rxjierienced  in  fixing  satisfactorily  the  ortliogropliy  of  many  of  the 
words,  owing  partly  to  the  extreme  indistinctness  of  the  pronunciation,  and  partly  to 
certain  changes  whi<-h  most  of  them  undergo  in  accordance  with  n  |icculiar  system  of 
euphony.  Add  to  this,  that  numerous  contractions  occur,  in  which  vowels  are  dropped, 
and  separate  words  arc  confounded  in  one, 

A  general  law  appears  to  l)o,  that  when  a  word  stands  by  itself,  not  followed  by  another 
on  which  it  depomU,  it  must  terminate  in  a  vowel, — and  this  appears  to  Ix-  the  pro|)er  and 
original  form  of  most  of  the  words;  but  when  combined,  in  any  way  whatsoever,  with 
other  words,  an  alteration  takes  place,  by  which  the  concluding  syllabic  is  so  transposed 
or  contracted  as  that  the  consonant  shall  be  the  linal  letter.  The  following  examples  will 
show  the  eticct  of  this  singular  law  : 


OSIUINAL  roiiH, 
till  III,  moon 
vhi,  yam 
layi,  wind 
olioni,  mother 
alii,  to  die 
mose,  to  sleep 


cosaTiiucT  roimi. 
kual  riia,  two  moons 
j/A'  run,  two  yams 
leaff  ma,  heavy  wind 
uliiin  -ta,  the  mother 
aV  nioiva,  dead  a  long  time 
po  kal  nws  (or  iiiois)  ra,  I  did  not  sleep. 


This  altered  or  construct  form  of  the  words  is  the  one  in  which  they  are  the  most  com- 
monly heard,  and  many  of  those  given  in  the  vocabula'v  are  in  this  state, — a  circum- 
stance  which,  in  some  measure,  disguises  their  similarity  to  the  corresponding  Polynesian 
terms.  The  distortions  produced  by  this  change,  and  by  contraction,  are  frequently  very 
great.  Thus,  the  word  for  womiiii,  which  is  hoiii  or  luitii,  becomes  by  this  change, 
hmaii  or  hauiii,  and  by  contraction  huu  and  /Uii,  in  which  last  form  it  is  most  commonly 
heard. 

lie 


I 


470 


I'llILULUU  Y. 


Ill  writing  Iht'  liin|pin|iD,  iirvrn  vuwrl  thnrnrtiri  ()i,  »,  t,  i,  n,  ii,  u)  hnvn  lirpn  iiimI, 
uikI  lilVi'ii  niiiwiiiiiiiN  ((,  /,  /i,  k,  /,  HI,  II,  I),  /I,  ;,  s,  t,  i),  v,  ir),  ll  in  prnlialilo  llint  two 
of  tlii'M'  vowcU,  n  mill  ",  iiiiil  twii  rniiMiiiiiiiln,  ^  iitiil  c,  will  lirri'iilli'r  Im'  rmiiiil  iiiinivi>ii> 
anry,  tln'ir  pliu'rii  la'iti^  Mii|i|iliril  r<'!<|Mvlivi'ly  by  »,  o,  <  ami  r,  tliiH  rfiliiriri);  tlir  niiiiibur 

llt'rll'IIHillH  III  HI'VI'lltllMI. 

Till'  liiw  wliirli  pri'viiilN  ill  llir  l'iilyiif»iiiii  diiiliiMs  liy  wliicli  Iwni-nnioinniilii  nrvrr  orriir 
williiml  II  vowel  Im'Iwii-ii  iIiiiii,  iIin'n  iml  ii|>|ily  In  iIuk  tiui^iir.  Al  llu'  111111)'  tiiiH',  llii'  i-oin- 
liiniitioiiH  lire  iii'illii'r  miiiit'niii.s  imr  liiimli,  niul  (he  gvncrnl  muiihI  of  llii'  laiigim^r  in  mit) 
niid  iilriimiii;. 

T  II  K    A  n  T  I  (•  I,  K. 

Tin'  nrlii'li'  in  I'l  nr  '/«,*  wliidi  wcins  to  tie  llir  siiinr  wnril  with  Iho  niimrrnl  o/ir,  nnd 
luiswcrs  III  ImiIIi  till'  iiiilrliiiilr  iiiiil  ili  liiiiir  iirtii'li'M  ill  Kii^'lixli.  Ill  llii'  liilli-r  I'lisc,  il  MiiiKi. 
linns  lllkrt  till'  |lllli'('  lil'llir  ilrlll<i|l'<lrillivr  //k//,  n|'|M>M<'il  to  /;,  lIll).      Until  thl'"!'  WnriU  (III 

nnil  ti)  iirr  |KwHi.\i'(l  tn  llic  nouns  to  whii-li  llii'y  U'lon;;, — an,  hii/it  (I'oiis.  hiiiil)  niotin, 
hualila  or  hmiltn,  the  mcKiii ;  lirOii  (rnini.  Iirilt)  mar,  hrithla,  thu  star ;  Oui  or  Oa,  man ; 
rrii  ihi.lii,  Oiiti,  not  llmt  mnn,  [liiit|  this  num. 

Till'  liiiiil  votti'l  oi'  this  |iiirti('li'  is  sniiii'iiini'a  (lro|ipi><l, — M,  tM  uOttt'  On  wakai',  my 
I'utlii'r  liis  cniioi'  tlint,  lor,  tliiil  is  Ilic  raiim'  nl'  my  liitlifr. 

T  II  K    N  0  I'  .V. 

The  (inly  real  inflti-tion  wliicli  nouns  nmlcrgo  in  Iho  onphonin  rharign  already  men- 
tinni'il,  (icnilrr,  wlirii  it  I'.vists  in  iiiitiin',  is  ilinlin;;iiisli<'<l  liy  aHixing  lu  the  Hiilistniilivc 
thl'  woriln  !)<ti  or  i)ii,  iniilr,  iiml  lioni,  liiitii,  or  Inn,  li'innli' ;  as,  /(■«,  child,  liDui,  boy, 
lihitiii,  (jirl ;  1/  or  Im,  |iiirriit,  iitin,  liitlirr,  nlnmi  or  iiliin,  motlirr. 

Till'  (.'rnilivi'  is  rorincil  I'illirr  by  tlir  |ironiiiin  mi,  his  (as  in  nn  oxainple  just  givrn),  or 
by  till'  artix  //,  whirli  is  proluibly  nn  nbbn'vlnted  liirmofo  prc|Ki8ition  (wo  or  ««).  inca'ii'ig 
iif;  Hs,  iiiUiii  iUilii,  I'alhrr  oI'lliHi  man. 

Tho  diitivo  mill  iiblutivo  arr  r.vpR'ssod  by  means  of  the  prepositions  se  nnil  r ;  as,  sr 
Iloliiiiiii,  to  Uotiinia ;  r  iilioi,  in  th<'  ship;  r  Hiiliiiini,  I'roin  Roiiinm.  Si'  ap|iearH  to  lie 
ulao  cinploM'il  to  di'iioti'  ibc  siinplr  arriisiilivi',  as  nn  kil  \r  iiiii,  I  sit  tlic*-. 

N'l  imiiiflc  iiiiirkiiif;  tlic  pliiriil  roiilil  In-  iliscovrrrd,  cxiTpt  the  word  miioi,  many;  lis, 
;i  niiiui,  iiiaiiy  housi.'s,  \c.  Il'ihe  lanu'iiu;;c  (lassoss  any  more  direct  method  ol'exiiress. 
ing  plurality,  it  i.s  probably  seldom  used. 

A  n  J  K  (■  T  I  V  H  S    AND    NUMERALS. 

Tlirsi'  liillow  the  noun  to  wliirli  tliry  lu'long;  os,  Oa  lelci,  goiKl  man;  hual  snijhul, 
ten  ninnths. 

The  comparative  degree  is  expresseil  by  meons  of  the  proposition  e,  following  the 
adjective;  as,  leu  (cons,  li")      cat,  iji>  li'  r  Until,,  1  um  great  by  (greater  than)  that  man. 

•  The  ((  i»  inirily  n  nofli'iuil  iiounil  of/,  wliicli  ini),'lit,  with  |>roprirtjr,  lie  nilMtituted  for  it  W«  liave 
preferred,  liDH'ovtT,  to  leave  tJie  words  M  they  were  originally  written. 


R  O  T  U  M  A.  471 

The  riillowinn  arc  llio  niiiTM'rnla  IkiIIi  in  llicir  nimplc  ntui  in  lln'ir  conMnirl  Ibrm. 


■IMPI.X.                                               cnNNTiiifcrr. 

ta                                               III  (t')  iir  etea 

onn 

run                                            riui 

two 

(hJit                                           Oat 

Ihrco 

hilkf  (htke)                               hilk 

four 

lima                                      Mm 

Ave 

OHO                                        m 

■U 

hiih,                                  M9 

dpvpn 

VI Jit  (irii/ii)                               wal 

I'igl.t 

livn  (.«(((•(()                                 .liitti'' 

niw 

ill  fill  itl  u  ut  ji'itte  ('.)                  tiiijliiil 

ton 

su>)hul  Oiimii  telle 

eliivcn 

siiijhiil  Hiimii  triir  run  (?) 

twrlvo 

Siiiihiil  ihimii  Irlir  lliii 

tliirti'i'n 

siiiihiil  Ihiiiiti  hhr  link,  iV 

', 

foiirlfirn 

riiayhiilu  iir  riiiii)liiil  or  /mlie  riia 

twonly 

OiJaijIiiilu  or  ihJiiiniliiil  nr  /mlir  i 

W 

Ihirry 

luikdi/luilii  or  liakrinjiiiil  or  jmlie 

link 

forty,  iVc, 

UiroH  or  litriiu 

huiidri'd 

tiiroii  run 

two  liiindrej 

III  mil  thil 

lliro"  liiiii(lr<'d 

Inrim  link  or  hfk 

lour  hiindri'd,  dec. 

hfjtt''  or  kiiintniiiniiii 

ono  tliciuHiiiid 

luf-ruii  or  kimiiiimnriia 

two  llinusnnd 

liif-Oit/  or  kimituniiiDul 

tlirct'  lliousnnd,  dec 

kiiit'  or  kimaniHun.siighul 

ten  thousand 

The  numlM-rs  above  this  nro  merrly  niidti|iloH  of  Ihn  prccpdinj;,  and  there  seemed  to 
be  some  uncertainty  in  the  mode  of  formin)?  them.  Some  of  the  preceding  may  not  be 
entirely  corn'Cl,  as  the  natives  (hlferrMl  Hinon){  Ihenw.'lves  with  ri'gard  to  them.  It  is 
|)ossibIe,  however,  that  there  may  Ite  diirerent  modes  of  counting  appropriated  to  ditrerciU 
objects.  The  use  of  Oiinia  in  the  nuinlxTs  lietweon  ten  and  twenty  is  exactly  the  same 
09  that  t>( liima  in  Hawaiian;  thi^  tilie  which  lullows  it  was  |K>rhaps  a  mistake,  and  may 
properly  U'lonj?  only  to  the  number  eleven.  When  these  numbers  are  joined  to  nouns, 
Oitnui  is  omitted,  ond  the  noun  rejieated  in  its  place ;  as,  Oii-suijhiil  ma  OtU\  eleven 
men ;  On  senjhut  iiui  On  ma,  twelve  men,  &c. 

The  particle  lie  sometimes  intervenes  lietween  the  noun  an<l  the  numeral,  though  the 
rule  according  to  which  it  is  inserted  or  omitted  is  not  apparent ;  ns,  sen;  knife,  ser^  he 
riia,  two  knives,  ser^  he  Ool,  three  knives  ;  knkiii  eseii,  one  finger,  kakai  Ite  rua,  two 
fingcro ;  «/ii,  yom,  vh'  ma,  two  yams,  «/»'  Ool,  three  yams. 

PRONOUNS. 
The  personal  pronouns,  as  far  as  they  could  be  determined,  were  as  follows : 


1 
■   I 


472 


PHILOLOGY, 


|t'- 


•lira, 
yn  or  poll,  I 
at  or  ei,  thou 
hati  (?),  ho 


DDIL. 

amia,  we  two 
aua,  ye  two 
erui,  they  two 


ri.viAU 
am  or  amu,  we 
au  or  Ri<«,  ye 
em,  they 


We  were  assured  by  the  natives  that  there  was  no  distinction  of  exclusive  and  inclusive 
pronouns,  as  in  the  P.ilyncsian ;  but  in  one  of  the  wntences  which  were  written  down, 
we  find  the  word  us  rendered  by  mokoi  (instead  of  am),  which  may  bo  a  corruption  of 
the  Polynesian  nuitoii.  Tiu're  was  olso  a  pronoun  of  the  second  person  plural,  amu, 
making  in  the  dual  iimiui,  but  in  what  it  diU'cn-d  from  iiii  we  could  not  ascertain.  The 
pronoun  of  the  third  |>orson  singular  is  doubtful;  that  which  is  given  was  only  heard 
once,  the  natives  generally  using  Oata,  that  man,  in  its  place. 

The  possessive  pronouns  are : 


tito  or  otoii,  my 
i>  or  oil,  thy 
on,  his 


otomui,  of  us  two 

011(1  or  omiia,  of  you  two 

oria,  of  them  two 


imiii  (?),  our 
oits  or  omiis,  your 
oris,  their. 


These  all  precede  the  substantive  to  which  they  belong :  there  arc  no  possessive  oiRxes. 

The  alTixed  particles  tii  and  ti  have  been  mentioned  as  answering  to  the  demonstratives 
tiitit  and  lliis.  When  used  sepnriiUly,  they  would  set^m  to  be  changed  to  tes  (or  te^)  and 
tay ;  as,  nto  ri  te^,  on  ri  ttnj,  this  is  my  house,  that  is  yours.  Li  was  also  used,  in  one 
instance,  to  signify  tliis,  as,  iis-h,  this  day. 

The  interrogative  pronouns  are  sci,  who  or  what  \  (used  only  of  persons)  teste,  what? 
and  his',  how  many  \  as,  st-i  Oata  I  who  is  that  man  ?  on  sei  rii/a,  whose  is  that  bouse  1 
Sei  oil  lis  ?  what  is  thy  name  ?  Ftefore  a  vowel  this  word  is  sometimes  contracted  lo  *', 
as,  s'o«  (i.< .'  what  is  thy  name?  s'on  as,  what  is  his  name?  //iV  is  |KThaps  the  con- 
struct form  of /lisu,  from  the  Polynesian  yfaa; — as,  haiiiia  /»««',  how  many  towns,  or 
lanus  ? 

THE    VERB. 

The  number  of  sentences  which  were  obtained  is  not  sufTicient  to  enable  us  to  give  a 
full  account  of  this  part  of  speech.  The  future  lenr<:  is  denoted  generally  by  the  particle 
la  ;  as,  i^;  /a  tsiinlika  ai,  I  will  kill  Ihi-e  ;  ijo  la  nios  r  jmi/i,  I  shall  sleep  to-night.  Ma 
seems  also  to  be  employed  to  express  intention,  as,  simit  ma  ijo  ln6  se  liotiinui,  by-and- 
bye  I  will  go  to  Rotuma.  No  sign  of  the  preterite  could  be  discovered,  though  it  is  very 
probable  that  such  may  exist.  Its  place  wns  supplied  by  some  adverb  significative  of 
past  time ;  n.s,  jw  /<i'  r  asa,  I  went  yesterday  ;  ijo  leiim  iiiaioa  e  Itoliima,  I  come  long 
ago  from  Itoluma. 

La,  Ix'sides  its  future  signification,  is  olso  used  to  express  any  kind  of  contingency, 
where  we  should  employ  the  optative,  !  iibjuiiclive,  or  infinitive  moods ;  as,  po  kiim  la 
krl  haniia,  I  can)o  to  see  the  land  ;  /<io  la  my  la  iiaijati^a  If  urn,  go  tell  the  chief  to  come 
(go  to  tell  that  the  chief  come) ;  iii  la  Ian  sr  Rotuma,  ijo  la  nao  le  maoi,  [if]  thou  wilt 
go  to  Rotuma,  I  will  give  ftbee]  many  things. 

The  directive  particles  mat  nnd  atu,  so  frequently  used  in  the  Polynesian  to  signify 
respectively  motion  towards  and  from  the  sjieaker,  arc  found  in  Kotuman  under  the 


R  O  T  U  M  A. 


473 


forms  >»'  and  uto  (or  aC),  siiflixod  to  the  verb.  Thus  liio  or  hi,  whicli  signifies  to  go,  or 
move,  becomes  ItMtn,  to  go  nwny,  hum,  to  come ;  from  niio  or  nti,  to  give,  we  have, 
lutm,  give  here  or  give  mc,  naato  or  naat\  to  give  away. 

ADVERBS. 

The  negative  adverbs  are  kat.  (or  k<il)  and  ra,  the  first  of  which  usually  precedes  the 
verb,  and  the  second  follows.  They  are  used  together,  very  much  as  ne pas  in  French; 
as,  jw  kiU  mns  ra  e  piiij'la,  I  did  not  sleep  last  night ;  go  kal  leum  ra  c  kaat,  I  will  not 
come  to-morrow. 


110 


-  IM 


ROTUMAN    VOCABULARY. 


A,  sharp. 

A'aro,  arum  csculentutn. 
Afaf,  sick. 

AfOia,  foot. 

Alwi,  ship  (probably  from  the   hail,  ship 
ahoy !). 

Ai  or  ei,  thou. 

Ai,  tree,  wood,  stick ;  ai-jxluj/a,  fighting- 
stick,  i.  c.  club. 

Aihi,  club  (probably  same  as  above). 

Ala,  oT,  to  die ;  dead. 

Ala,  oT,  tooth. 

Alele,  aid,  tongue. 

AUlc,  snake. 

Am,  amis,  we. 

Amia,  we  two. 

Amn  ;  amua,  ye ;  ye  two. 

ApH,  mat. 

Ajn-oii',  priest. 

Ar-Ui,  foot  (>ju.  sole?). 

Ar-siii,  palm  of  hand. 

As^  (qu,  tisa?),  smoke. 

jlsa,  ai',  name. 

.Asa,  ai',  sun,  day ;  as-li,  to-day ;  t  asa, 
yesterday. 

Astia,  wliitc  men. 

AsUOiniols,  noon  (qu.  ai-to  Ou  nnts,  the 
sun  stands  in  the  middle?). 

Ate,  to  eat;  meat. 

Atia,  dead. 

Atmai,  generous;  wise. 

Atua,  deity. » 


An  or  aw,  ye. 
il«a,  ye  two. 
Avdv,  weak,  sickly. 
Awa]}  (or  doaji),  cloud. 


E 

E,  in,  at,  by,  from ;  than. 

Bay,  to  tell. 

Easa,  yesterday.     (See  asa.) 

Eilii  (qu.  itii  ?),  town. 

£?  or  clem,  near. 

£/f/,  low. 

Esea,  one. 

Bfi,  whence,     (See  tei.) 

EOi,  eO\  belly. 


Faiapa,  faiap,  to  speak. 

Faksisia,  stingy,  parsimonious. 

Fana,  low. 

Fatfata,  breast,  chest. 

Full,  cheek. 

Els',  white. 

Fdo,  green. 

H 

Ha  or  Iw,  to  pufT,  blow ;  to  smoke  a  cigar. 
Haareij  (!),  young. 
Hake,  hiik,  hik,  lour. 


R  O  T  U  M  A. 


475 


(Qu.  hafe  or  afe  ?) 
(little   woman ;    see 


Hani,  lioni,  hninn,  fioian,  hun,  hen,  wo. 

man.     (See  Notes.) 
Hani'Ki,  hunoa,  land,  country,  town. 
Haii,  he.     (See  Notes.) 
HaOii,  had\  stone. 
Heak'',  buttock,  nates. 
Hiifi,  Itef,  thousand. 
Hen    miamea,   girl 

hani.) 
HeOu,  IteO  or  /leiO,  star. 
Hidphiap,  palm  of  hand.     (See  ar-siu.) 
His',  (qu.  hisa?),  how  many? 
HiOii,  hiO,  heid,  seven. 
Hoam,  to  bring. 
Ho-fak-M,  arrow. 
Hoi,  tortoise. 
Huuij,  heart. 
Hue,  flower. 

Huhoni,  hitOa.    (See  uluini,  u6a.) 
Hula,  hual,  moon,  month. 


/,  day  (?)  ;  I'j,  to-day. 

la,  axe. 

Fa,  fish. 

Imu,  torn,  to  drink, 

Inea,  to  know. 

Like,  indi,  no. 

Ini,  skin ;  feather. 

Ihosu,  inCis,  wife ;   married   (qu.   spouse, 

married  person?). 
loro,  shark. 
Ipa,  pigeon. 
Isu,  eis,  nose. 

K 

Ka,  yes, 

Kmit  or  kilt,  to-morrow. 

Ktiha,  to  laugh. 

Kaka'c,  kakai,  kakf,  finger  or  toe ;  kakai 
maOua,  thumb ;  kakai  tsuts,  little  fin- 
ger (or  toe). 

Kali,  circumcision. 

K(Uo£i,  egg. 


Knmin,  dog. 
Kata,  kaf  (kal),  not. 
Kava,  pi|>cr  mcthysticum. 
Kck,  kel,  black. 
Ktle,  kcP,  to  see. 
Kia,  hiiiit-kut,  neck, 
Kimanmana,  thousand, 
Kiu,  ten  thousand. 
Kok,  foolish. 
Kokomimcai),  friend. 
Kumkum,  beard;  chin. 


La,  future  particle.     (See  Notes.) 

Lu,  leg. 

Latitliima,  lamluin,  up ;  high. 

Laijti,  n  fly. 

Laijhaniia,  town. 

Xajji,  /raj,  wind,  air ;  sky. 

Lao,  spirit. 

L(w,  ld\  Iti'liV,  to  go,  move,  walk ;  laato, 

go  away,  depart. 
LausilOjm,  below. 
Lea,  lee  or  le,  child ;  lea-rirl,  leriri,  child 

(qu.  little  child?). 
Lehdui,  lehoni,  daughter, 
Leilei  or  Irlei,  good. 
LeOdi,  son. 
Li'um,  seed. 
Liioii,  to  come. 
i>t'(/,  /«(i'',  hair,  or  beard. 
Li,  tliis(!). 
Lima,  liam,  five. 

M 

Jlf((,  future  particle.     (See  Notes.) 

Ma,  and. 

il/(i,  heavy,  strong,  powerful. 

Mahdii,  warm. 

Mnk,  to  sing  and  dance. 

Ma' ma',  green. 

Mamoru,  hard,  strong. 

Mtiiiiiiauu.  a  bird. 

Miwi,  iiiaui,  many. 


476 


PHILOLOGY. 


i 


Mara,  n  kind  of  food  made  of  vegetnblos 
which  linvo  undergone  fermenlnlion. 

MiiriHi,  a  long  time. 

Musi,  sail. 

Mtisimis,  hungry. 

Mat^iio,  an  artisan,  workman. 

Mtilii',  cold. 

MaOo,  niaO'',  face,  eye. 

MtiOiiu,  old,  full-grown. 

MiiOim  (m.<i)iiOiia  /),  elder,  councillor. 

Maiii'iri,  ma'iir\  to  live ;  alive, 

Miamca,  small  ;  young. 

Mian-u'n,  nail  of  finger. 

Mem,  fresh  (as  water),  not  salt. 

Mi'a,  red. 

MiUenini,  niUsami,  morning. 

Mai,  fowl,  hen. 

Mokoi,  we. 

Mose,  mns,  mots,  to  sleep. 

Motara,  forehead. 

Mjiira,  clay,  earth. 

Miiri;  On-muri,  a  common  man,  a  man 
of  low  rank. 

Mut-seae-rna,  halves  (qu.  divided  in  two  ?). 


N 

Na  {nao),  to  give  ;  num,  give  mc,  give 
here ;  naat  or  naO',  give  away,  give 
thee  or  him. 

Nam,  shoulder. 

Nr,  if,  whether. 

Ncinei,  strong,  healthy. 

Niii,  cocoa-nut. 

Nono,  pn!sently,  by-and-bye. 

NiHi,  welcome ;  ««J  ia,  the  usual  salu- 
tation. 

Noh'  nosiio,  sit  down. 

Nolio,  leaf. 

Niitsit,  nouts,  mouth. 


n 

U,  yes  (a  kind  of  inarticulate  murmur  or 
grunt,  the  head   being,  at    the   same 


time,  thrown  a  little  upward  and  back- 
ward). 

Utitjut^a,  f(ii/dt^,  chief,  noble. 

Ho  or  ijoii,  I. 


0  or  nil,  thy. 

Ohoni.     (See  iihani.) 

Oi-hapa,  bark  of  tree.     (See  (li.) 

Oitii.     (See  aiiii.) 

OmtM,  of  you  two  (dual  pos.) 

OiiiHS,  your  (plu.) 

0/1,  his. 

0)1,  of,  belonging  to  (?). 

Oiia,  drunkenness. 

Olio,  on,  six. 

Oga,  lightning. 

Oiia,  of  them  two. 

Oris,  their. 

Oroie',  heaven,  residence  of  the  deity.  (See 

aitu.) 
Oti)  or  ()/<■)«  or  ontlou,  my. 
Otoiiiia,  of  us  two. 
Oil  (or  (j),  thy. 
Oil,  to  cry. 
Oua,  of  you  two. 


Pa,  grass. 

P«,  to  wish,  desire. 

Pari,  banana. 

Pat,  to  love. 

Patpiila,  plebeians,  common  people. 

Petii,  jiel,  to  fight. 

Pi-piioiits,  lip.     (See  nulsii.) 

Perii]icni,  yellow. 

Pilsa,  cat. 

Poke,  ten. 

Poi)i,j>iio>),jmp,  night ;  epuj/dit,  last  night 

c  ymi/t,  to-night. 
Pom  or  /mu,  very. 
Piiaka,  pig. 


ROTUMA. 


477 


R 

Ra,  not. 

Rahi,  re,  fire, 

Rttksd,  bad. 

Ramu,  ramo,  musquito. 

Ran,  leaf. 

Rei,  to  see. 

Rere,  up,  above. 

Ri,  house. 

Riamham,  yellow. 

Riamkau,  king,  sovereign. 


s 

Sd,  sacred. 

Sania,  outrigger. 

Sayhani,  saywaivdni,  sister. 

Saijhulii,  saghiil,  ten. 

Sdsiugi,  sdsipi,  brother. 

Sau,  king. 

Se,  to. 

Scniit,  soon,  by-and-by. 

iSere,  ser\  a  knife  ;  to  cut. 

Seas,  salt  water. 

&i,  who? 

Siokstko,  deceitful. 

Sisi,  without,  outside  (?). 

SiS,  arm. 

Stw,  siaw\  nine. 

SoitsoK,  far, 

Sm(,  bone. 

SuiOcap,  hip. 

Shw,  warm,  hot, 

S«s,  breast,  pap. 

Simin,  to  burn. 


3h,  one. 

J)j  or  da,  llie,  that. 
3J/J;,  that. 

2li;«Hm  (qu.  damtiral),  cemetery,  burial- 
place. 

120 


Tan  or  ton,  fresh  water. 

Ihnoa,  bowl  for  drinking  the  infusion  of 

kava. 
Tarau,  taroii,  hundred. 
7\ao,  spear. 
T^drau-a,  blue. 
7\ffTO,  to  run. 
K  or  <t,  thing. 
Tiay,  yesterdoy. 
Jii,  where ;  e  tei,  whence. 
ma'a,  food. 

'Veue  Rotuma,  people  of  Rotuma. 
Tes  or  te^,  this. 
7!v.Ve,  v.hat ?  what  is  it  ? 
llOui,  ornament. 
!/Im  or  tiu,  great. 
Tfime  or  Zt'tiMe,  all. 
Ti,  this. 
2'()/,  to  carry. 
Tblo,  whale. 
Tbto,  blood. 

l\dvek,  tsdvuka,  to  strike,  to  kill. 
TMits,  tpiti;  little. 


0 


Out  or  fld,  man  ;  dd-miiri,  common  mon ; 

one  of  the  lower  class. 
Oalhja,  Odliaij,  car. 
0umii,  to  bury. 
Oaune  or  Oor-ni,  inside  of. 
OanOaii,  earth,  soil. 
Oi'-sds,  tattooing,  marks  on  the  body. 
0i/o  or  Oi/ou,  head. 
06-ni-ld,  toe. 
GomaOfia,  back. 
6>o'/^  sugar-cane. 
Oh,  to  stand. 
Oil,  the  olhow ;  the  knee. 
GiKtijsoh,  mountain. 
0iii,  lliuiulcr. 
Oiima,  particle  used  in  connecting  units 

with  tens.     (See  Notes.) 


mm 


478 


PHILOLOGY. 


u 


l//'a,  a  hen. 

U/ui,  native  cloth. 

Uhani,  uhoni,  uhen,  mother. 

Ufii,  uh',  ynm. 

UlC-lei,  potato. 

Ulu,  breadfruit. 

T/liipn,  up,  above. 

Tfsa,  uas,  rain. 

POu,  lutOa,  hnOa,  father. 


Vat,  water. 

Vnka,  canoe ;  vaka-atua,  ship. 

Viikvaka,  side, 

Va-fa-sc,  get  up !  arise ! 

Vain,  ti'ol,  eight. 

Tawa/',  to  like,  love. 

Vavani,  husband. 

Veko,  work. 


THE    LANGUAGES    OF    AUSTRALIA. 


When  tho  first  imperfect  vocabularies  of  Australian  dialects  were  collected,  the  great 
difTcrences  observed  between  those  spoken  by  trit)es  in  close  vicinity  to  one  another  led  to 
the  iinpreasion  that  a  multitude  of  totiilly  dissimilar  idioms  were  spoken  in  this  country. 
Further  investigations  have  shown  that  this  belief  was  not  well  founded ;  and  at  present, 
the  opinion  of  those  who  have  given  attention  to  the  subject  is,  that  the  tribes  of  Australia 
ore  of  one  slock,  and  speak  languages  which,  though  dilRring  in  many  respects,  yet  pre- 
serve sufficient  evidence  of  a  common  origin.  This  opinion,  however,  is  founded  rulher 
upon  the  resemblance  of  a  few  of  tho  most  common  words,  and  a  general  similarity  of 
pronunciation,  than  upon  any  careful  comparison  of  tho  various  languages,  more  es|)ecinlly 
with  reference  to  their  grammatical  characteristics,  on  which  alone  any  positive  conclu- 
sion can  be  founded. 

Our  own  field  of  inquiry  did  not  extend  beyond  tho  limits  of  the  colony  of  New  South 
Wales:  but  that,  within  this  region,  the  dialects  of  all  the  native  trilx's  arc  nearly  nkin, 
cannot  be  doubted.  The  following  comparative  vocabulary,  though  brief,  and  compiled 
under  circumstances  unfavorable  to  entire  accuracy,  yet  shows  sufficient  evidence  of  a 
general  connexion.  Morcton  Hay,  Lake  Ma(|Uarie,  Sydney,  Liverpool,  and  Muruya,  are 
the  names  of  places  on  or  near  the  coast,  from  lat.  27°  to  lat.  30°  south.  Peel  River, 
Mudgee,  Wellington,  and  Hathnrst,  are  from  one  to  two  hundred  miles  inland,  separated 
from  the  coast  line  by  the  ruggid  chain  of  the  Blue  Mountains.  Of  the  vocabularies,  that 
of  tho  trilx!  at  Lake  Maquani  is  principally  from  Mr.  Threlkcid ;  that  of  the  Mudgee 
dialect  was  furnished  by  Mr.  Watson ;  the  few  words  from  Moreton  Boy  arc  froin  an 
anonymous  vocabulary  which  Mr.  Threlkeld  discovered  among  his  papers.  The  remain- 
der were  obtained  directly  from  the  natives,  in  most  cases  from  a  single  individual,  with- 
out the  opportunity  of  a  revision,  which  might  have  enabled  us  to  detect  some  emu's,  and 
supply  deficiencies.  The  Australians  have  commonly  two  or  three  names  fijr  an  object, 
expressing  the  same  general  idea  willi  slight  modifications.  This  will  be  observed  in  the 
words  under  the  head  of  Lake  .Maqunrie.  To  form  a  complete  vocabulary,  for  the  pur- 
pose of  comparison,  it  would  be  essential  to  obtain  all  these  partially  synonymous  terms, 
OS  otherwise  many  jwints  of  resemblance  would  be  missed. 


Morelon  Bay 

Lake  Maquaric     wnlor/ 


HAIR. 

ciiIiIkmi  en 
liitv )),  n-i'i- 
rOn 


EVE.  NOSE. 

Ill  ill  moral 

yaiktn/,po-  nokoro 
rotvup 


ko ruka 


I 

i 


480 


PHILOLOGY. 


IIIAD. 

nun. 

ITK. 

NOlI. 

MOUTH. 

Sydney 

kahirii 

kiltm 

mtlnirai 

iiokoro 

kdrka 

Liver|)ool 

kiiUira 

gtlnij 

milmre 

kariika 

Muriiya 

kiijiua 

tiiiiir 

miiUira 

ta 

Perl  Uiver 

Imra 

taikiil 

mil 

muru 

pa nkai 

Mudj^ec 

ga  or  Art 

lull,  {mir, 
face) 

Wellington 

huilyng 

11  rail 

VI  it 

mump 

pan 

Bnthiirst 

Uiliig 

giiin 

mekalait 

tiikiti'  (1) 

ndndarge 

Lira. 

TKETll. 

TOMiUI. 

CHIN  (or  beard) 

EAR. 

Moreton  Bay 

dear 

dalan 

ye  ran 

liidiie 

Lnkc  Mni|imrio 

tn  mbiri,  ici- 

lira,  j/anta- 

lidin 

vattiu,  ya- 

purviip, tn 

lis 

ra 

rd 

rttkuri 

Sydney 

piin 

yira 

dalan 

trido,  yarin 

kiire 

Liverpool 

ultUj 

y\ra 

talay 

u'ido,  ycrnp 

kurt 

Muruya 

u-i/ip 

yira 

talap 

tcfUu,  yarin 

guri 

Peel  River 

j/tii 

yira,  yira 

talcottolai 

iirdi 

biua 

Mudj;ee 

yira 

talui 

yarei 

bina 

Wellington 

miimlu,  Ml'. 

iraij 

talan 

yaran 

uta 

Batluirst 

tlumhirj/i 

trap 

yaran 

bendparei 

HtCt  OR  THROAT 

HAND. 

BREAST. 

THIOH. 

LU. 

Moreton  Bay 

morrdii 

Imiylio 

Lake  Maquarie 

lcaleirp,u>ord 

nuiUira 

wapara, 
IMiiyil 

buloinkoro 

pari 

Sydney 

kurfgd 

damn  ra 

bfrig 

dara 

Liverpool 

kitj/ga 

tanuira,  bi. 
ril 

miijMl 

dara 

Muruya 

kami 

mil  Ha 

bitjtil 

hiinta 

Peel  River 

nnHfUj/gici 

ma 

pamura 

tara 

btiyti 

MudgC'i 

yurun 

mara 

biri 

tara 

buyu 

Wellington 

kate 

mtira 

namap,  bi- 
rip 

tarap 

biiyii 

Bathurst 

koflatiji 

pabap,  diliti 

gadar 

pari 

FOOT  (TOM). 

■KIN. 

BONI. 

HAN. 

WOMAN. 

Moreton  Bay 

Lake  Maquarie 

tina 

bttkai 

tibun 

kore 

noknp 

Sydney 

kana  (?) 

bakai 

didra 

kvre 

dyin 

Liverpool 

duna 

Muruya 

dana 

u-ardu 

yuen 

wapen 

Peel  River 

tina 

kftiitai 

pura 

iiirt 

inl\r 

Mudgce 

dina 

kiilir 

Wellington 

di>iat/ 

yulain 

dabal 

gibir 

inur 

Bathurst 

dina 

yikm 

mauup 

balan 

. 


' 


' 


AUSTRALIA. 

48 

rATiin. 

MnTMIIII. 

■UN. 

HUON, 

WIND, 

Moreton  Bay 

Intfia 

gtillan 

boran 

Lnki!  Mti(|Uiirio 

bii/aijUii 

tdiikan,  nai 

JMIIIll 

ynliina 

tvibi 

Sydiii^y 

Ini/iiij 

vaiyinj 

gaii  or  kan 

gibiik 

Livt'r|>o<)l 

tmrlii  mij/ 

uu/iij-iniUla 

Muriiyu 

jMiptite 

meiulii 

b/ifiurin 

dimara 

miriguma 

I*wl  Uiver 

yoktiia 

piimpai/i 

toni 

jmlii 

maier 

Mii(lg(;o 

Imwitlficr 

^luiKija 

mil  Id  L 

ki/ai 

kira 

Wellington 

lull II  n 

lint 

Balliurst 

giiru)i/xU 

kiinain 

manuuhf 

daiilyii 

ptulrii 

FIRK. 

WJTtR. 

8Tf)NR. 

OOOD. 

RAD. 

Morclon  Hay 

(Iiirloo 

yeiuo 

Lake  Miiqunric 

koiyvj) 

kulig,  koko- 

titling 

miirorog 

yarakai 

Sydney 

kuiyii}) 

III 
kttlcre,  Ixitlro 

giber 

biityiri 

Liver|>ool 

Muriiya 

kiiiiye 

j/iit/yii,  Itaiiii 

bunt 

ti/aniitgu 

gunina 

Peel  Uiver 

vi 

kdj/un 

milraina 

mdrutta 

niii 

Miuljjeo 

iri 

kali 

niariibaba 

Wellington 

tcin 

kiUif 

wa/ag 

miiriig,   wa- 
luin 

Batlmrst 

kanbi 

nailyu,  yu- 
ruy 

yiiriibuij 

vmriimfxig 

gadbai 

ONE, 

TWO. 

THIIER. 

Moreton  Bay 

Lake  Mnciimric 

■wiikol 

buloara 

■goro 

Sydney 

Liverjiool 

Muriiyn 

Peel  Uiver 

pier 

pii/iir 

piir/a 

Miidfjee 

Welliiif;lon 

j/itiiltii 

hula 

biil(i-}jnnl>ai 

Batlmrst 

Besides  the  similarity  of  words,  whirh  is  siiflicicnily  shown  in  tlic  foregoing  list,  it  was 
considered  important  to  ascertain  wliellier  an  ccjiial  degree  of  resemblance  was  apparent 
in  the  grammatical  striictiire  of  the  different  languages.  With  this  view,  it  was  thought 
best  to  select  two  dialects  as  widely  separated  as  |x)ssible,  and  determine,  as  well  as 
circumstances  woidd  allow,  their  leading  characteristics.  By  the  assistance  of  others, 
this  object  was  accomplished  with  less  ditficidty  and  more  satislactorily  than  had  \yixn 
anticipated, 

Oni-  of  the  dialects  selected  was  that  spoken  by  the  natives  who  wander  over  the 
region  Ixirdering  on  Hunter's  Uiver  and  Lake  Maipmrie  (or  on  the  coast,  in  about 
lat.  "A'A"  S).     Of  this  dialect  a  grammar  was  published  at  Sydney,  in  1S34,  by  the 

121 


482 


V  II  I  I.  O  I,  O  <!  Y. 


Hcv.  I,.  R.  Tlirclki'ld,  who,  for  imw  nctirly  Iwrnly  yciirs,  hna  Ikth  Inlioiirint;  with 
uiiHciiricd  imlicncc  lor  llif  funvcrsioii  nnil  iiislriu'tiuii  orilir  nl>ori){iiirN.  Thin  grniiiiniir, 
tho  only  oiin  licrdoloro  puMislinl  of  niiy  AiiMrnliiiii  idiom,  cniitniiiH  u  iiinM  of  vnliinblo 
inllinnaliiin  in  n^ialion  lo  ii  siihjwl  rnliri'ly  nrw.  Il  is  not  «nrprisin(j  thnl  the-  novelty 
and  slriin^cni'ss  of  tlic  priiK'ipli'x  on  uliicli  iIk'  Nlriiiiiin- of  the  liin^iiii^r  v/an  fonnd  to 
rest,  should  Imvc  rcndi'i-rd  a  clear  arnin^iernenl,  nl  lirsl,  a  matter  of  (iiHii'ulty ;  and  somo 
dejijret'  of  olisciirily  anil  inlriraey  in  this  ri's|M'el  have  eansed  the  work  to  Ik.-  less  appre- 
ciated than  its  merits  ileserved.  \Vi'  were  liirtiinalely  enabled  to  visit  Mr.  Threlkeld  at 
hiii  station,  and,  in  a  leu  days  passed  with  him,  reeeived  niuny  nsefnl  e.Nplanations  on 
points  not  sntrieienlly  dneiilHted  in  the  jsrammar,  lojfether  with  free  nceeHs  to  his  uiipiih- 
lislied  notes,  anil  the  advaiita;ie  of  nlireiii'e,  mi  dunlitliil  points,  to  tlie  natives  ff.ini  w  hom 
his  materials  had  l«'en  derived.  The  i;r:onMiar  of  the  l\ii>rn/ii><n  dialect  which  follows 
is  therefore  entirely  due  to  Mr.  Thnlkeld,  the  only  chaises  l)eiii)>  in  the  orthii;iraphy, 
tho  nrran^cment,  and  some  of  the  nomenclatiir<<.  The  name  of  Jiiimi/iinii,  it  shoidd  he 
remarked,  is  that  );iven  to  the  |)eiipli>  of  this  district  (or  rather,  |H'rliaps,  lo  their  laiii,'liayo) 
by  the  natives  of  Wellinjjion  Valley.  We  are  not  aware  if  it  is  known  to  llie  people 
themselves,  or  if  they  have  nny  jienernl  word  hy  which  to  desijjrnate  all  those  who  sjH'ak 
their  tongue.  None  is  given  hy  Mr.  Threlkeld,  to  whom  it  would  dmihtless  have  \»^-n 
known. 

The  other  dialed  is  tlial  spoken  at  the  place  last-inentioned, — \Vellini;ton  Valley, — 
situated  U'voiid  the  Itlue  Kiil;;e,  about  two  hundred  miles  nest  of  Lake  Maipiarie, — indeed 
on  the  interior  Ixiundary  line  of  the  colony.  At  lliis  place  a  mission  of  the  Church  of 
Knglnnd  had  U-en  established  aUait  eii;ht  years  before  our  arrival.  We  have  to  acknow- 
ledge the  e.vtrenie  kindness  of  the  Ki'V.  William  Watson,  who,  during  a  (iirlnight  passed 
at  his  house,  not  only  gave  every  assistance  in  oblaiuing  a  vocnliulary  from  the  natives, 
but  (hil  us  the  unex|iecteil  lavor  of  drawing  up  an  account  of  the  most  im|x>rtant  |H'culi- 
nrilies  of  the  language,  nHMh'lled  as  nearly  as  possible  on  the  granunar  of  .Mr.  Threlkeld, 
for  the  purpose  of  comparison.  This  is  here  given,  with  only  some  slight  change  of 
form,  and  mii.st  l)e  considered  as  constituting  n  most  valuable  contribution  on  the  part  of 
Mr.  \\'atson,  to  the  stores  of  philological  science.  The  language  is  known  to  the  natives 
who  speak  it  by  the  name  of  Wirn-diiiei  or  Wirtttiirtii. 


PII  ONl)  l-Ot:  Y. 

The  following  list  comprises  all   the  elementary  ^sounds  that  occur  in  the  Australian 
dialects,  so  far  as  our  observation  has  extended. 


miMinvt  socMM. 

a 

e 
o 
k 
I 

m 


VtmATIONIk 

II  ;  ,T 
i;  7/ 
u;  w 

s 


A  i;  S  T  R  A  1,  I  A. 


483 


niMiTiri  anuNni.  vaiiiatiiini, 

n 


V 

p 

r 
t 


b 
d 


Til  ihrsr  should  |HThiipH  1k>  iiildrd  twii  more  (ioiiikIh,  tlii>  ono  Hoincwlint  rrsrnililinj;  ths 
Fri'ncli  t,  hilt  slinhily  nnsalisiil.      Wliiii  Ininlliiiii'd,  it   lins  iii'iuly  lln'  smiiiil  ol'  ii  slmrt 

u,  rollinvt'd  cliisily  liy  n  sliurl  i,  iiiul  may,  iiidroil,  lx>  only  ii  rn|ii>l  |irniiiniiiiiii <(  tliix 

di|ihllic)ii!!.  Mr.  Wiilsoii  hii.s  wrillrii  it  <}.  Tlic  iitlirr  iirliciiliitidii  in  im  ;■,  ii<jt  trilliil,  lull 
|)rimiiiinc<"d  likewise  with  n  tiiiMiil  inlniinlinii.  Mr.  Wiilsdii  distin^inislies  it  somi'tiiiies  hy 
nn /«  preriulini;  it  i  bill  in  dllicr  iiistmii'i's  it  is  lill  umimrkcd,  mid  it  seems  donliiliil,  on 
the  whole,  whether  it  is  not  to  Ix?  regarded  lis  ii  imiv  \arialioii  ol' ihiMisual  trilled  or 
rolling  /■. 

Leaving  these  out  of  the  (|iieslioii,  it  will  lie  seen  llial  the  iiniulier  ol"  elements  is  Imt 
eleven,  and  that  anion);  them  are  no  sihilanls,  aspirales,  or  yiiltiinils.     The  neneriil  elm- 

raeler  of  the  |)rommeiiitioii  is  dental  and  nasal  ;  the  sounds  are  I'or I  |iriiiei|ially  in  the 

fore  part  of  the  mouth,  and  the  intonations  an-  viried  and  pleasiii);.  'I'lie  aeeent,  in  wordB 
of  twci  syllables,  is  usually  on  the  liisl,  and  in  wiirds  of  three  or  more  on  the  antepenulli. 
male;  but  to  this  there  are  many  e.veeptioiis.  Wcails  and  syllables  always  end  in  a 
vowel,  or  ill  one  of  the  eonsoiinnls,  /,  ;//,  //,  «,  and  r. 

The  most  striking  |)eeulinrity  in  the  alplmliet  is  tlii'  paiieity  of  vowel  sounds.  This 
had  not  been  observed  by  the  inissionnries,  nor  was  it  brought  to  our  attention  until  alter 
leaving  the  eountry.  On  reviewing  our  notes  and  voeabiilnries,  we  were  struck  by  the 
eviilent  faet  that  only  threi^  distini't  vowel  sounds  were  to  be  recognised.  The  ii  and  ", 
(he  (•  and  /,  and  the  o  and  a,  are  aUvays  interidiangeable.  Some  ilialeels  more  allict  the 
first,  and  others  the  second  variation.  In  other  dialects,  some  iniliviiliials  proiioimc'c  the 
a,  f,  and  o,  and  others  tlu^  ",  /,  and  ii, — or  tlu^  same  person  uses  both  indilfcrently.  In 
three  hundred  words  of  the  KiuiiiUiidi,  written  down  from  tlicr  pronunciation  ol'  a  native 
(of  course  lieforc  this  |ieeulinrity  with  respect  to  the  vowels  had  Ix'en  obsi.-rved),  the  letter 
0  is  not  once  used,  and  the  letter  e  but  four  times.  On  the  other  hand,  in  two  hundred 
words  of  the  II  V/-«'/»/ri,  while  the  <>  is  liiiind  si.\ty-aeven  times,  the  ii  occurs  but  six; 
the  r,  also,  is  much  more  frequent  than  the  i,  though  the  iliMl>rence  is  not  so  great,  the 
latter  licing  written  chiefly  in  the  diphthongs  di  and  ri.  In  si'veral  instani-es,  the  words 
are  writt<Mi  in  two  ways,  as,  lulia  and  Ultd,  /inniiij  and  ixinntj,  show iiig  that  the  pro. 
nuiicialion  wavered  between  the  two  .sounds.  Words  spelled  by  Mr.  Threlkeld  with 
u  were  written  by  us  with  o,  an  pimhitii  for  Imiiknild;  but  probably  from  another  native 
we  should  have  heard  the  word  agreeably  to  the  latter  orthography.  This  variableness 
in  the  sound  of  the  vowels  will  account  liir  the  live  characters  being  used  by  the  mission- 
aries, where  three  would  be  sullieieni,  Ii,  <l,  and  if,  are,  in  like  mnnni'r,  fre(|iiently 
used,  though  their  places  might  always  1h'  supplied  by  the  corresponding  mules,  /),  t,  and 
k.  In  the  following  grnmiiiars,  the  orthography  of  the  missionaries  has  in  general  Ixx-n 
adhereil  to,  with  the  exception  of  the  omission  of  unnecessary  letters,  such  as  double 
consonants,  and  the  h,  which  is  employed  by  them  to  denote  sometimes  a  iiu.sal  and 


484 


Pii  I  i.oi,o(i  V. 


■oinrtiini-N  H  (Icritiil  |>romini'inlii>n  o("  ilio  ronsonniit  which  it  Bccompnnli'i,    Tho  short  m 
in  lint  is  rxiirciwfd  by  ",  Iho  iif;  by  j/,  iVc, 

E  T  Y  M  O  I.  O  G  V. 

For  Hri'iilcr  rniivriiicnco  in  inntitiitinK  n  rom|)nri»on  bolwrrn  tho  two  grammari,  it  hni 
MX-mcil  lic»t  to  givp  them  in  pnrnlli-l  rohiinnH,  by  whirh  not  only  ihf  (points  of  rrst'm- 
binni'f  iind  iliisiniiliirity  mny  be  nciwil  nt  oncf,  but  th<'  nPO(»aity  of  re|icnting  many 
r.\|>linmliotis  is  nvnidi'd. 


KAMI  I.  A  K  A  I. 

N  O  I'  N  8. 

There  is  no  inncction  of  the  nonn  to 
r.\[iri'ss  cilhi  yrndiT  or  niimtirr,  nnd  Ihcso 
nrr  rnrrly  .  i.-ilinniiisbrd  in  T-jx-iikinj;.  Or- 
cnsidnidly  n  |iriinoiin  is  used  liir  Ibis  pur- 
pose ;  ns,  iiKikori),  llsh,  mii  taio  iiiiikoro, 
those  lush. 

In  the  singU'  ensi-  of  piitronyniics,  there 
is  a  feminine  terniinalion  distinct  from  the 
mnsciiline  ;  —  lUi;;l(i)iilk<il,  Kni;hshnian  ; 
EiiiiliiiiilkiUirii,  HnKli'ibwcimim. 

'I'be  ruses  nre  dislini;iiished  by  particles 
corresponding;  to  our  pn-posilions,  but  |H)8t- 
fixed  lo  the  noun. 

There  nre  two  nominiitive  cnses,  one  of 
wliich  is  the  simple  nominntlve,  or  ground- 
form,  nnd  tho  other  is  employed  lis  the 
nuenl  to  verbs,  or  in  answering  to  the  (pies- 
tion,  who  did  it  ?  This  lorm  always  termi- 
nates in  0. 

The  accusative  is  the  same  with  the 
simple  nominative,  except  in  pro|)er  names 
of  (K-rsons  and  in  pronouns;  no  error  can 
arise  from  this,  ns  the  simple  nominative  is 
m^ver  used  in  conjunction  with  a  verb. 

The  viK'ative  is  Ihe  same  with  the  simple 
nomijintive,  having  merely  the  particle 
alii!  answeriii);  to  O!  pn>fixed  to  it. 

The  genitive  of  possession  (nnsweriii}:  to 
the  (piestion,  whose?)  always  terminates 
in  hit. 


W  I  K  A  D  U  «  K  I. 
N0UN8. 

The  plural  nimilier  is  not  often  distin- 
guished, but  when  necessary,  it  may  lio 
e.xpresjM-d  eilher  by  a  pronoun,  or  by  aflixing 
Ihe  |mrticli-s  ^'i/Aij)  and  nirUigj  as,  bagai, 
shell,  liagai-gnUij/,  shulls. 


The  simple  (or  neuter)  and  the  activo  (or 
agent)  nominative  exist  in  this  language; 
the  latter  always  terminates  in  «. 


The  accusative  is   tho  same   with   the 
simple  nominative,  except  in  the  pronouns. 


The  vocative  is  distinguished  by  the  por- 
licle  i/a!  prelixed  to  the  simple  nominative. 

The  genitive  ends  in  guna  or  ,?m/w, 
though  the  linal  syllable  (/«)  is  sometimes 
omitted.  Giiiia  is  used  with  proper  names, 
and  nouns  relating  to  human  beings ;  guba 


!■ 


AUHTRALIA. 


480 


K  A  M  I  I.  A  It  A  I. 


Tho  ilnlivn  of  rlio  olijwl  (nnnworinn  to, 
for  irlmiii  >  for  irliiil .')  ciiiIh  in  kii,  cxrrpl 
for  iiniiii'N  nl' piTsiiiiH  mill  inicrni^^nllvi'  pro- 
nnilll-t,  wliii'li  liiivr  ii'ni. 

Till' iliiiivi' III' iiKilinii  (luiNwrriii)^  til, /»or 
louiiril  iihoiii  itr  iiliii/  f)  ciuIm  in  itkiiut  iiihi, 

Tlir  iililiilivr  III'  llii'  riiiiNi^  (Jrnni,  nil  iic- 
cniiiil  III,  ID/Ill r III II k)  ciicU  ill  in  iir  /.<//. 

'riiriililiitivi'iiriTiiilioii  ( liiiiii,iiiiui//rom) 
Icriiiiiiiili's  ill  ii/iirini  iir  iiiliirnt). 

'I'lir  iilil.'itivr  III' I'liiijuiU'tiiiil  [irilli,  illiiiifi 

Uil/i)  ClllU  ill  IMl. 

Tlio  nlilntiveof  liK-nlion  or  n'siilrnri'  {nl, 
rcmiiiiiiiii;  ill  or  ii  illi)  rnils  in  hIhi  nr  inlii. 

Tlirru   IlltJ    »ix    ili'i'lrll!ii(in»,  III  riil'ilin^   111 

which  not  only  iiuiiiis,  hut  iiiljcctivi'H  anil 
pnrliripirs  iirr  ilcrlJncil. 

All  liiunrN  III'  prrsdiis  tK'l(iii);  In  thi'  first 
ili'olrnsiuii.  The  iictivL'  noinlnalivi^  i»  liiriiiril 
from  tho  simpli>,  hy  iiililin){  In;  the  );i'nilivi! 
hy  iiililiiit!  iiiii^Ki ;  till'  (ii'ciisiilivr  liiiH  mni; 
till'  first  iliilivr,  mill;  the  srciinil,  kiiiLo;  iho 
(irst  iililiilivi'  liiiH  hiii ;  Ihr  mmuiuI,  kiiilri. 
rnij;  ihii  lliiril,  kiiUui ;  iiiiil  lli<"  Ibiirlh, 
kiiilni. 

In  nil  hut  the  first  ilcrlcnsion,  tlio  ficni- 
livo  teriniimtioii  in  IhJhi,  nnti  the  tir»t  (hitive, 
ko.  'Y\\v  ollifr  ciisrs  arc  liirnu'il  rrnni  tho 
active  iiiiiiiinalivi'  hy  chiin;,'iii{{  thi^  liiml  o 
into  iiko,  ii/iiriiii,  at,  ami  u/m.  It  will  there. 
fore  only  Ik'  necessary  to  give  the  terniiilO' 
tion  iiftho  active  noniinative. 

The  active  noniinative  of  the  seeunil  de. 
clensian  terminates  in  to;  nl'  tho  tliirit  in 
ko;  of  the  limrlh  in  /o;  of  tho  lillh  in  n,- 
nnil  of  the  sixth  in  ro. 

Nouns  eniliiij;  in  i  or  hi  helong  ti>  Iho 
seconil  (li'clension  ;  those  in  j;,  ii,  i;  o,  ii,  to 
the  thini ;  those  in  /  to  the  liiiirth  ;  those  in 
TO,  belonging  to  the  fillh,  rcipiire  the  accent 
to  be  shiOeil  to  the  o,  ns  inukoro,  lisli, 
active  nominiitive,  miikuri'  Nouna  of  thriMj 
syllables,  ending  in  re,  .  i:  the  e  to  o, 


w  I  n  A  I)  r  R  K  I. 

with  name*  of  the  hiwir  aniinaU  and  Inani' 
mate  ohji'cts. 

The  ilalive  of  the  object  terniinntea  in 
f!ii ;  it  is  HiiiiHstiincs  not  diHtinguiahvd  from 
the  genitive. 

The  dative  of  motion  or  place  (lo,  tiilh, 
ImiiiriU,  ill)  alwny^  ends  in  ii. 

There  in  lint  one  ablative,  answering  lo 
the  prcposilinns  /W(;/l,  Ay,  ilUiill,  CUIICllllillg, 
(Sue. ;  ita  lermliiul  letter  Is  i. 


Tin.'  ilcdinsinns  nro  distinguished  in  this 
language,  according  to  the  mode  of  forming 
the  ai'llve  nomjnalive. 

The  first  declension  comprises  .■  II  noun* 
which  terminate  in  t  or  ii ;  these  form  the 
active  nominative  us  follows  : 


HIMITE  NUM. 

ACT.  NOM 

-*■     makes 

(ll/U 

III 

l/lfit 

an 

lilt 

ill 

(i 

in 

<( 

nil 

til 

ri 

iilu 

III 

atu 

dill 

1!  >ltU 

The  sciMind  declcnKi..n  includes  those 
nouns  which  end  in  a,  u,  or  p.  and  foreign 
words  in  in.  '/'he  active  i  niiimlivc  is 
formed  by  iiddiiij;  fxn  I.  the  sun|.!c|  it  is 
therefore  the  same  with  the  dative. 

The  third  declension  comprehends  all 
nouns  which  end  in  /  or  r.  The  active 
nominative  is  formed  by  .idding  u  to  the 
simple. 


122 


48fi 


p  II 1 1,  o  i;  O  G  Y. 


K  A  M  I  I.  A  R  A  I. 

as  kokcre,  hot,  koirro;  lliosc  also  belong  to 
the  lilUi  ilci'lciisidn.  Nmins  of  liiur  sylhi- 
bles,  cinliii^  in  / ,  are  of  llic  sixth  declension. 

I'nrtici|iial  nouns,  used  ns  agents,  change 
tlieir  linal  syllable  rii  to  ;i>,  as  l>iiii/(ki'ii, 
that  which  is  struck ;  active  iioininativc, 
huntiMirt). 

The  author  gives  a  second  declension, 
which  comprises  a  lew  variniions  pvuliar 
to  names  of  placi's ;  as,  Miihiliiiilxikal,  a 
man  of  Mululiinlia ;  IMiiliibinlKtkoliiy,  to 
MuUibinba.  In  the  other  cases,  the  words 
are  declined  according  to  llicir  terminations. 
Mii/iiIuu/ki  is  ol'llie  third  declension. 

The  following  is  an  examples  of  a  noun 
varied  aci,..J  n^r  'o  the  tirst  declension,  or 
that  appropriated  to  the  names  of  |icrsons. 

lliiii/»i/i,  a  tnan's  name  (meaning,  pro- 
|ierly,  lOaglchawk). 
>Sim|ile  Horn.    Jiim/iiui 
Act,  iioni.        Jlirtt/HiHto,  11.  dix'.s,  did,  will, 

ic. 
Gen.  liiialmnumlKi,   belonging   to 

U. 
1st  Dat.  llirii/xiniiiiii,  for  U. 

-d  Dat.  Jlird/Kiiikhikd,  to,  toward  B. 

Ace.  Ihniliitiuiinj,  Hiralwin 

1st  Abl.  i)'i/v/A(i;//.(((, froni,(maccount 

of  II. 
!Jd  Abl.  liirii/MDikii/tirinj,  awny  from 

n. 

3d  Abl.  liirulHinkalM,  along  with  H. 

4th  j\bl.  liinihtiiikuilid,       remaining 

with  n. 


W  I  R  A  D  IT  R  R  I. 


The  same  word,  when  used  as  a  common 
noun,  signifyiiig  an  ni^/c-hiiick,  is  declined 
according  to  ttie  second  declention. 

Simple  nom.  bimlHtii,  a  hawk 
Act.  nom.       /lini/Hitilo,  a  hawk  does,  d:c. 
Gen.  iinilmnkolm^  o\' n  hawk 

1st  Dat.  /iir(i/iiink<>,  for  a  hawk 

2d  Dut.  hiralinnUikn,  to  a  hawk 


llnuiii,  a  shell  or  spoon,  of  the  first  de- 
clension, is  thus  varied; 
Simple  nom.  Ixifnii,  a  shell 
Act.  nom.       Ixtiiutii,  a  shell  does,  will,  dtc. 
Gen.  iHiiiiiiiiiilHi^  of  a  shell 

1st  Dat.  Ixtgnif'ii,  lor  a  shell 

Ud  Dat.  Inigaitu,  to  or  with  a  shell 

Ace.  Ixrnai 

Abl.  Ixi^iiii/i-^  by,  concerning,  &c., 

a  shell 

ri.URAI.. 

Simple  nom.  Ixisni-iiiildij,  shells 

Act.  nom.  Ixiiitii-sialdiidii  ((\n. -f^u  >)    ' 

Gen.  lxi;''ii.!:<ilu\)!:Htxi 

Isl  Dat.  /xii;ui-!.'ii/iini;ii 

'■id  Dat.  lxii;(ii-!i(iliiit!:a 

Abl.  iMigai-palumli 

Karnmlamt),  a  iHHik,  of  the  second  de- 
clension, is  varied  as  follows: 

Siinple  nom.  karnnilaidi),  a  book 

Act.  nom.       kdnindanipgu,  a  book  docs. 

Gen.  kdrdHi/drat/giilxi,  of  a  liook 

1st  Dat.  kdiii/ii/drtnjgd,  for  a  book 

2d  Dat.  karawlnraijga,  to  or  with  a 

b(H>k 
Abl.  karii  iiddrandi,  by,  concerning 

a  book 

The   plural    is   kdrdtularaii-galap,   de- 
clined like  that  of  Ixisui, 


AUSTRALIA. 


487 


K  A  M  I  I.  A  R  A  I.  W  I  R  A  n  U  R  E  I. 

Acc.  Iiini/mti,  n  hnwk  I/iar,  womnn,  and  limul,  brd,  will  serve 

1st  Abl.  /liiv/niiitiii,  on  uccoiint  of  n     as  examples  of  the  lliird  dccloiision. 

Iiawk 
2d  Abl.  Itira/mHtahiriip,  away  Irom  a 

hawk 
3d  AbL  /jiriilHi/itoa,  along  with  a  hawk 

4th  Aljl.         liirulHinltilia,   staying  with   a 

hawk 

The    other    declension    can    be  easily 
formed  from  these. 


Simple  iiom. 

iiiar 

hiiriil 

Act.  nom. 

iiitini 

hurulii 

Gon. 

itKiri^tnui 

lnn'tili^uUi 

1st  Dnt. 

iiKirgit 

hiirtil^n 

2d  Dat. 

imira 

Intrtila 

Abl. 

inari 

huriili 

AUifrX'TIVKS. 

The  same  word  may  be  adjective,  noun, 
verb,  or  adverb,  according  to  the  construc- 
tion, or  the  artixed  particles.  Mirronnj, 
good,  yarakai,  bad,  komiii,  pretty,  with 
the  particles  of  agency  allixcd,  would  Ix;- 
comc  agents,  or  verbal  noniinati>es,  and, 
consequently  nouns,  as  mirrorotjko,  the 
gooil ;  i/iirnkailn,  the  bad,  etc. 

The  adjective  follows  the  noun  which  it 
qualities,  and  agrees  with  it  in  case. 

Comparison  can  only  1h>  expressed  by  a 
circumlocution  ;  as,  this  is  very  sweet,  that 
is  not,  krknl  kci  uiii  kaiiirtilkauu-nl,  kea- 
wax  inimi,  lit.,  sweet  is  this  exceedingly,  is 
not  that. 


ADJECTIVES. 


Adjcclivcs  are  declined  like  nouns,  and 
generally  agree  with  tliem  in  case. 

Comiiarison  is  expressed  by  circundo- 
cutions  ;  as,  ifitui  ninyini  hala  iital  diUi^ 
this  good  truly  is  with  that  (<lili  being  in 
the  ablative),  for,  this  is  belter  than  that ; 
or,  ijiiia  manoj  iji/a  iiirui,  this  good,  that 
not. 

A  high  or  superlative  degree  is  expressed 
by  the  addition  of  /kiij  or  hihiij,  or  IkjIIi,  to 
the  adjective  ;  as,  imuinj,  good,  imiriiinlniij, 
very  good,  murumbiitj  Inliiy,  extremely 
good. 


NUMERALS. 

The  natives  can  count  no  farther  than 
four,  beyond  which  they  use  the  general 
term  kaiitcu/kaiaiiil,  many. 

U'likn/,  one 
l)ii/o<irii,  two 
poro,  three 
•  wnran,  four 


NUMERALS. 
The  only  numerals  in  use  are — 

yiinlKii,  one 
btdii,  two 

Imlii-tjiitilxii,  three 
hiitjgii,  fi)ur  fir  many 


hinigii-fiiildri,  ) 
Inatj-galiKj      S 


very  many 


48S 


PHILOLOGY. 


KAMILARAI. 


WIRADUREI. 

These  arc  declined  like  nouns,  according 
to  their  terminations. 


These  become  ordinals  by  declining  them 
so  ns  to  ngrco  with  the  noun  to  which  they 
belong;  as,  ptirpuijku  yoroka,  on  the  third 
dav. 


The  following  are  the  ordinal  adverbs : 

riiin/mta,  onco 
hiila^n,  twice 
hitiaijiiiilntta,  three  times 
hiiiijga,  biapgunda,  many  times 


PKO.NOUNS. 


PRONOUNS. 


There  nre  two  classes  of  personal  pro- 
nouns in  the  singular  nimiber,  corresjwnd- 
ing  to  ihc  simple  ami  active  iioniinalivcs  of 
nouns.  Those  of  one  class  are  used  sepa- 
rately (ns  in  answer  to  the  question,  who 
is  il  ?),  and  may  be  termed  absolute  pro- 
nouns. They  rescnilile  the  moi,  tot,  liii, 
of  the  French.  The  others  are  only  used 
in  conjuiicliiin  with  the  verb,  like  the  je, 
III,  il,  of  that  langu.ige.  In  the  dual  and 
plural,  however,  this  distinction  is  not  made. 

The  absolute  pronouns  nre  irregular  in 
their  declension, — 

NOH.  (JEN.  DAT. 

jia/oa        cmorim/xi        emolnj,  I,  mine,  to 

me 
yintoa       tjiroltin/xi       j/iVo'i;;,  thou,  thine, 

&c. 
iiimvoa     yikolnnfia       yZ/.o'i  y,  he,  &c. 
Itoli  titoa     lioli  not)  nlxi     iott  noli  )iko,  she 

The  other  oblique  cases  arc  formed  from 
the  dative  (except  those  of  Itomitoii,  which 
nre  formed  from  the  acou.sative  lioitnoltii), 
according  to  the  first  declension ;  as,  emo- 
Dpkhiko,  to  ttK!,  cmoUi/kai,  oa  account  of 
me.  &.C. 

The  adjunct  pronouns,  or  tliose  which 
arc  used  with  verbs,  are — 


There  is  but  one  class  of  personal  pro- 
nouns, and  in  these,  with  Ihc  exception  of 
the  dual,  the  active  nominative  is  the  .same 
as  the  simple.  The  accusative,  however, 
is  ditlcrent  from  the  nominative.  All  the 
pronouns,  when  postfi.ved  to  other  words, 
undergo  contractions.  The  singular  pro- 
nouns are  itdt/ii  or  patu,  1;  j»'«(/«,  thou ; 
fill  in  or  yi/i,  he,  she,  or  it.  Na  is  some- 
times used  for  the  feminine  or  neuter  of  the 
third  person. 

These  pronouns  are  thus  declined  : 


FULL  FORM. 

CONTRACTIO.S. 

Nom.       p(uli<  or  pntu 

du,  til,  or  dyit 

( icn.        yui/i  or  ijati 

di,  ti,  or  dyi 

1st  Dat.  ijat/i  or  g<tti 

it          u 

2d  Dat.    iiiitiinula 

tiiinda 

Ace.         tjanal 

mil 

\oc..        ya  ijiinal  (ah  me  !) 

Abl.         yniiiindi 

nundi 

BKCOND  rCKaON. 

Nom.       -giiidu 

indu 

Gen.        yimt 

nu 

1st  Dat.  ijinugu 

HllgU 

2d  Dat.    yinyunda 

?tyunda 

Ace.        yinyal 

nyal 

Voc.        ya  yindu 

Abl.         yinyundi 

nyundi 

AUSTRALIA. 


489 


KAMILARAI. 

bay,  I ;  tiii,  me 
hi,  thou  ;  bin,  thee 
noa,  he  ;  bon,  him 
boltntoa,  she ;  noan,  her 


W  1  R  A  D  U  R  E  I. 

TIIIIID  PERSON. 

Nom.^it'/i  or  >)i«  (contrncteil^a/);  Gen. 
guy;  Dat.  yuan;  Ace.  j)i«v  Abl.  <ie«. 


There  nrc  three  dual  pronouns, — bali.  The  dual  pronouns  arc,  b<di,  we  two; 
we  two  ;  biila,  ye  two ;  biiloara,  they  two.  yintlit-buUt,  ye  two ;  ynin-bula,  they  two. 
They  are  thus  declined—  The  first  is  thus  declined : 


NOM.  ACC.  OEN.  1  ST  DAT. 

bali         yaliu      yntiiilm,  yalinhn,  &c. 

bula        biiluH     bulunlm         buliniko 
buloara  buloara  buIoarakolHi  biiloarako 

Bnloara,  when  used  as  a  nominative  to 
a  verb,  becomes  btiloaro;  the  others  un- 
dergo no  change. 

Bali  properly  sij;nifies  "  thou  and  I ;"  to 
express  "he  and  I,"  or  "she  and  1,"  the 
adjunct  pronouns  of  the  third  person  sin- 
gular arc  added ;  as — 

Nom.  bali  noa,  we  two,  ho  and  I 

Ace.  yalin  Imii,  us  two,  him  and  me 

Gen.  ya/iiilu  Utn,  of  us  two 

Nom.  ba/i  Ixjttntoa,  she  and  I 

Ace.  yalin  nolrn,  her  and  me 

Gen.  yalinba  noli H,  ot  us  two 

A  peculiar  kind  of  dual  (if  such  it  may 
be  called),  in  which  the  nominative  and 
iccusative  ore  combined,  is  used  in  con- 
junction with  the  verb.  There  are  six  of 
these  compound  pronouns : 

banfty,  I — thee 
/kinoltn,  I — her 
biiiuy,  thou — him 
binoDn,  thou — her 
bi/oa,  he — thee 
bintoa,  she — thee 

They  arc  used  in  such  expressions  as 
"  I  love  thee,"  "  thou  strikest  him,"  &c. 
They  make   the   nearest  approach  which 


Simp.  nom.  Iiali,  we  two  (thou  and  I) 

Act.  nom.  yuli,  we  two  do  — 

Ace.  yaligin,  us  two 

Gen.  yii/ij:ingiina,  of  us  two 

1st  Dat.  yaligvinii,  for  us  two 

2(1  Dat.  yaligindi/a,  to,  or  toward  us 

Abl.  yalijjinilifi,  from,  by,  <tc.,  us 

In  the  pronoun  of  the  second  person, 
yinilu  and  bula  are  both  varied  ;  us — 

Simp.  nom.  yindu  biibi,  you  two 

Act.  nom.      yinihi  biilngit, 

Gen.  yinu  bulagu,  of  you  two 

1st  Dat.  "         "         for  you  two 

2d  Dat.         yini/unda  bidaga,  to  you  two 
Ace.  yini/al  bula,  you  two 

Abl.  yini/uudi  buladi,  from,  by  you 

two 

The  declension  of  yain-bida  is  not  given  ; 
probably  only  the  last  word  is  varied.  Bu- 
laguol,  the  other  two,  is  varied  according 
to  the  third  declension  of  nouns. 

To  express  "  he  and  I,"  the  pronoun 
guin,  he,  is  prefixed,  without  change,  to  all 
the  cases  a(  Indi ;  as,  guin-lndi,  he  and  I ; 
act.  nom. guin-yali ;  ucc.guin-yuligin,  &c. 

The  combined  dual  pronouns  do  not  exist 
in  this  dialect. 


123 


490 


P  H  I  L  O  L  O  (1  Y. 


K  A  M  I  I.  A  R  A  I. 

occurs  in  the  langimgo  to  the  transitions 
of  tlio  Indian  tongues. 

The  phirnl  pronouns  nrc  pci'n,  we;  mini, 
ye;  /tura,  tliey.  Tliey  are  declined  as  fol- 
lows : 


NOM. 

*co. 

OEN. 

yein 

ijciiriTH 

ijeani/ilxi,  &c. 

II  lira 

niirun 

niiniiitxi 

bara 

biirun 

Ixirunlia 

By  adding  bo  to  the  pronouns,  we  have 
an  emphatic  Ibrm  of  expression ;  as, — 

jtotoa  -bo,  I  myself,  I  only,  I  indeed  (am) 
gin/oa  -bo,  thou,  &c. 


They  are  thus  declined : 


N'OM,  AND  ACC. 

Uhi 


vnoa 
vntoa 


9ll  DAT. 

unliKo,  to 

this 
untako 
untoako 


w  I R  A  n  u  n  E 1 


There  are  demonstrative  pronouns  which 
are  employed  according  to  the  relative  dis- 
tance of  the  object.     These  are — 

nni,  this,  near  the  speaker. 

tinoa,  that  yonder,  at  a  little  distance. 

ontoa,  that  there,  near  the  person  addressed. 


Tlio  plural  pronouns  are  igiani,  we; 
yiiiildiiir,  ye;  fiiiinsiidiii  or  ijhigii/iii,  they. 
liir,  wliioh  is  luMed  to  ijinihi,  scenis  to  be 
a  conlriiilion  of  the  plural  sudix  girkig; 
gii/ia,  which  is  added  to  giii/i,  signilies  pro- 
perly /ike. 

These  pronouns  are  thus  declined: 

Noin.      ijioiii  gitii/ii/iir 

Ace.        ijiiiiiigiii  j/iiii/ii/gir 

Gen.       yidiiigingu  yiiiiigirgii 

2d  Dat.  yiiiiiigiiiilya  i/ini/iiiu/agir 

Abl.        ijianigindyi  Tgrinyundigiri 

Nom.  guin-guKa  or  yiii-gidia 

Ace.  (qu.  Dat.?)  paguan-gidiala  (or  50- 

giKii/i) 
Gen.  ydgiiiin-gidiiigu 
Abl.  yagiiiiii-gu/itdi 

By  adding  the  words  guyiiyim-bul  to  the 
personal  pronouns,  we  have  a  meaning 
similar  to  that  given  by  self  or  selves  in 
English  ;  as,  rfiulii  guyii tjan.hul ,  I  myself. 
Giiyinjan,  with  the  genitive,  has  the  force 
of  own;  as,  ycu/i  giiyiipan,  my  own. 

The  di-monstralive  pronouns  are — 


3d  abl. 
irnti/iiruy,  from 

this 
untabirug 
untotibiro]) 


piih/i  or  yidi,  this 

pimi,  this 

yiigii,  this  (agent) 

piu/i,  that 

j/ana,  " 

giigu,  that  (agent) 

yih,  that  one 


1'I.UHAL. 

piih/i  -gidia,  these 
gi/ia  ■giilia      " 
gugti  -giilia 
gain  •giilia,  those 
ganaingidia    " 
gagugidia        " 
pilii-gidia        " 


The  dual  is  I'nrmed  by  changing  gulia  to 
bida;  ijiiia-hidu,  these  two,  &c. 

These  pronouns  aroalso  used  as  relatives; 
thus,  gina  dibiluin  jfiiHii  ijiiidii  Ixda-hiini, 
this  is  the  bird  that  thou  didst  kill ;  ijina 


A  U  S  T  11  A  I,  I  A. 


491 


K  A  M  1 1-  A  n  A  I.  W  I  R  A  n  U  R  E  I. 

These  pronouns  nrc  only  used  separately ;     iHlrihiin  pugu  witli/eia,  this  is  the  bird  that 
those  which  arc  employed  as  nominatives     drinlis. 
to  verba  are  pa/i,  tliis  ;  pnla,  that  yonder  ; 
j/aloa,  that  by  you.     From  these  the  otlier 
cases  are  supplied. 


ACT.  NOM. 

yali 
"gala 
paloa 


yalihoba 
ualoakoba 


IsT  DAT. 

yaliko 
yiilaho 
puloako 


Til  may  l)e  termed  a  verbal  pronoun.  It 
resembles  somewhat  the  French  viiici,voili, 
and  niiiy  lie  translated,  U  is.  In  the  plural, 
it  makes  tara,  they  are,  whicli,  when  used 
as  the  nominative  to  a  verb  (in  conjunction 
with  another  pronoun)  becomes  taro  ;  tlius, 

Abs.  niii  ta,  this  is  he,  or  it  is  this. 

Adj.  pili  til,  this  is  he  who,  &c. 

Abs.  uiii  tara,  these  arc  they. 

Adj.  ijali  taro,  these  are  they  two. 

The  interrogative   pronouns  yan,  who?        The  interrogative  pronouns  are   tjanUi, 
mill  or  mviarig,  what  ?  are  thus  declined :      who  ?  minyay,  what  1 — 


S.  N.       pan 
A.  N.      tjanto 
Gen.        yaniimha 
1st  Dat.  ijantiiitf 
2d     "      yankiriko 
Ace.        pannup 
1st  Abl.  pankai 
2d    "      pankinbirap 
3d     "      pankatoa 
4th   "     patikinba 


min  or  minarip    S.  N 
m  inaripko 
mitiaripkoba 

mhiaripkolap 

minnup 

minariptin. 

miiiariy/iirop 

minariykoa 

minaripkaba 


Minnim  signifies,  how  many! 


minyap 
minyalu 
mimjapgu 


pandi 
A.  N.  pandii 
Gen.  paiigii 
1st  Dat.        " 

2d  Dat.   pdniitula    mini/apurgit  (toward) 
Ace.        pandi         minyap 
Abl.         panundi     mini/ali 

mimjala  (in,  with,  on) 


Minyapan  or  minyapain  signifieg,  how 
many? 


IXDEFINITK  V 

vnnta,  some 
yantiii,  all 

kamviilkauwul,  many 
warea,  few 


INDEFINITE  Pi 

gtiUrir,  some 
hiamlml,  all,  the  whole 
biap,  many  or  more 
biapgul,  all,  every  one 


492 


PHILOLOGY. 


n 


K  A  M  I  L  A  R  A  I. 

yitorahiil,  some  one 
tarai,  other 


W  I  R  A  D  U  R  E  I. 

yainhitoti,  any  one 

giio/,  other 

l/un/Kiiguol,  anotlicr ;  hula  guol,  two  others. 


ADVERBS. 

Adverbs  whose  significntlons  will  nimit 
of  it,  nre  iloclincd  in  tho  same  way  ns 
nouns ;  as  — 

Nom.  vo)i  or  troiita,  where? 

Gen.  masc.  uonUikal,  of  what  place? 
Gen.  fern,     vontahilien,  of  what  ■  lire? 
Ist  Dut.        «'o«^rtAvV<ip,  to  whati>lace,whi- 

Iher! 
2d  Dat.         u-ontariy,  toward  what  place  ? 
Ace.  uoniiu}j,  what  place? 

1st  Abl.  wnnUili/ilo,  at  what  place  ? 
2d  .Mil.  wontahini  ij,  from  whence  ? 
3d  Abl.  noiilakcxi,  through,  by,  what 

place  ! 


ADVERBS. 

The  followini;  is  tho  declension  of  the 
adverb  lii-gii,  where? 

Nom.      tii-gii,  where?  what  place? 

Gen.        ^ii-^'H,  of  what  place? 

1st  Dat.  tit-fiii,  for  what  place? 

2d  Dat.    tiigfnjurgu,  toward  what  place? 

1st  Abl.  tiiL'ii/ci  (Imijgnia)  in  what  place? 

ad  Abl.    ttuii/a,  from  whence? 


PREPOSITIONS. 

These,  if  we  regard  their  construction, 
should  be  called  postpositions,  as  they  are 
always  appended  to  the  noim.  We  have 
elsewhere  treated  them  as  case-endings. 

/>a,  ko,  kohl,  of,  for 

kday,  to,  towards 

till,  from,  on  account  of,  because  of 

kai,  same   as  tin,   but    used   with   proper 

names,  and  pronouns 
liinii),  from,  away  from 
katoa,  with,  in  company  with 
ka,  kiiUi,  in,  at 
miifdriti,  into 
mvriii),  within 
U'tirai,  without 


PREPOSITIONS 

The  particles  which  are  afTi.\ed  to  nouns 
and  take  llic  place  of  pre|X)sition3  are — 

gii,  giiiiii,  gii/m,  of,  for 

pur,  ijiirgit,  towards 

(/i,  from,  by,  about,  concerning 

(lamlu,  by  means  of 

iliiiri,  with,  in  company  with 

la,  iu,  at 

iirginiii,  in  (or,  as  a  verb,  to  be  in) 

vruin,  through  (or  to  pass  through) 

yiriage,  by  (or  to  pass  by) 

vomtiimja,  upon  (to  be  upon) 

The  last  four  are  more  properly  verbs. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


These  arc  rarely  used,  the  construction         There   are,   strictly   speaking,  no   con. 
of  the  language  being  such  as  to  leave  no    junctions  in  this  dialect,  the  construction 


'  \ 


AUSTRALIA. 


493 


K  A  M  I  T,  A  R  A  I. 

necessity  for  such  connectives, 
lowing  nre  sometimes  employed: 

IKitun,  ami 
kula,  becniisc 
ga/iihi,  therefore 


W  I  R  A  D  U  R  E  I. 

The  foU  not  requiring  them.  Bii,  signifying  ami 
or  a/so,  is  never  used  alone,  but  always  as 
a  8ufli,\,  as,  gaitu-lm,  I  also. 


VI'.RBS. 

The  verb  is  tlio  most  peculiar,  and  at 
the  srime  time  the  most  difficult  part  of 
Austnilinn  grammar.  It  has  numerous  va- 
riations, many  of  which  nre  unlike  those  of 
any  other  Innguaj^cs.  These  variations 
have  all  reference  either  to  time  or  to  man- 
ner, there  being  no  inflections  tor  either 
number  or  |wrson,  which  are  always  ex- 
pressed by  the  pronoun.  The  root  or 
ground-form  of  the  verb  is  usually  a  word 
of  one  or  two  syllables,  and  to  this  various 
particles  are  oppended,  which  modify  the 
signification,  and  sometimes  protract  the 
word  to  an  extraordinary  length.  Thus, 
from  the  verbal  root  bu  or  biin,  to  strike, 
we  have  the  forms  which  follow  (the  nomi- 
native pronoun  ba^,  I,  being  understood)  : 

1.  Active  transitive  form :  buntan,  I  strike. 

2.  Definite  or  participial :  bunkilin,  I  am 
striking. 

3.  Continuativc :   buiikilihn,  I   am   con- 

tinually striking  (as  threshing,  beat- 
ing, &c.) 

4.  Reflective:  bfmki/ean,  I  struck  myself. 

5.  Reciprocal :   Iritiikilnn,  we  strike  one 
another. 

6.  Optative :   buwil,  I  would   strike,   or, 

that  I  might  strike. 

7.  Deprecatory :   biiiitea  kun  koa,  lest  I 

should  strike. 

8.  Iterative:  btmUa  konun,l  will  strike 

again. 

9.  Ini|)erative  :  biiva,  strike. 

10.  Infinitive:  /wnAiViXo,  in  order  to  strike. 


VERBS. 

The  verb  in  this  language  is  as  remark- 
able  as  in  the  Knmilarai  for  the  number 
and  peculiarity  of  its  variations.  There 
are  eight  or  nine  forms  in  common  use,  to 
express  the  mode  of  an  action,  and  no  less 
than  fifteen  tenses. 


The  following  are  the  principal  modi- 
fications : 

1.  Active  transitive :  fti/OTaro,  I  strike. 

2.  Participial:  of  this  there  are  two  forms, 
bi'imalgimaiia,  and  bumalbiana,  I  am 
striking;  the  former  is  the  most  com- 
mon. 

3.  Continuativc;  formed  by  reduplication: 

bumalmmara,  I  continue  beating. 

4.  Reflective :  bumalijidyilinya,  I  strike 

myself. 

5.  Reciprocal :  bumalafia,  we  strike  one 
another. 

6.  Optative :  Immali,  that  I  may  strike. 

7.  Iterative  :  buma/dlitn/a,  I  strike  again. 

8.  Imperative:  btima,  strike. 

9.  Infinitive:  bumdligu,  in  order  to  strike. 


124 


404 


P  H  I  L  O  L  O  G  y. 


K  A  M  I  L  A  R  A  I. 

I,  SuppoNitivc :    Immjxi    Ihi,    if    I    had 
struck. 

TENSES. 

There  arc  pijj;ht  lenses,  though  in  some 
of  the  forms,  only  u  part  of  ihcni  nre  in  use ; 

1.  Present:  Imtitdn,  I  strike. 
a.  Remote   piist :   huitluUt,  I  struck   for- 
merly. 

3.  Uecent  pnst :  Imnhiln,  1  struck  Intely. 

4.  Uecent  plu|)erfect :  hiinkula  -la,  I  hnd 

Intely  struck. 

5.  Hodiernal  past :  tmiikeun,  I  struck  this 

morning  (or  to-dny). 

6.  Future  norist:  hii/iuti,  I  shall  strike. 

7.  Crastinal  future:  huiikin,  I  shall  strike 

to-morrow  (mornin};). 

8.  Inceptive  future :  Imnkiti  -koldg,  I  am 
going  to  strike. 


Of  these  tenses  the  continunlivc  form  has 
but  two,  viz. :  the  present  and  past  aorist ; 
the  usitative  and  reciprocal  have  only  the 
past,  and  the  optative  has  only  one  tense, 
with  a  general  signification, — himil,  that  I 
might  strike.  The  participial  and  recipro- 
cal forms  have  all  the  tenses. 

There  is  no  special  form  for  the  passive. 
It  is  denoted  by  suhjoiiiing  to  the  verb  a 
noun  or  pronoun  in  the  accusative  case, 
without  a  nominative  expressed  :  thus,  bun- 
tan  bag  signifies,  I  strtke,  and  bini/an  tia, 
1  am  struck  ^lit.  strike  me). 

There  are  various  forms  of  the  negative, 


W  I  R  A  D  U  R  G  I. 


TENSES. 

1.  Present:  biiiiiura,  I  strike. 
'i.  Inslnnt   pn-seni:   buiiialairana,  I    am 
just  now  striking. 

3.  Past  aorist :  bumf,  I  struck. 

4.  Inslnnt  pnst :  binmilninmi,  I  was  just 

now  striking. 

5.  Preterite ;  biniinhiiain,  I  have  struck, 
fi.  Inslnnt  preterite :  bumiilutca/i,  I  have 

just  struck. 

7.  Kemole  pnst:   Immalguiiiin,  I   struck 

long  ago. 

8.  Hodiernal  pnst:  bumahjdriii,  I  struck 
this  morning. 

9.  Hesternal  past:  bumalgiiraui,  I  struck 

yesterday. 
U).  Pluperll'ct :  biiimitfiiii,  I  hnd  struck. 
11.  Proximale  future:   buvialgiii,  1  shall 

soon  strike. 
\'i.  Instant  future:  biimaldicdgiri,  I  shall 

immediately  strike. 

13.  Remote  future :  bumalijiirisiiri,  \  s\\a\\ 
hen^afler  strike. 

14.  Crnslinul  future:  biimalgaridwagiri,  I 

shall  strike  to-morrow. 

15.  Future    preterite :    bumegiri,   I   shall 
havo  struck, 

Ench  mode  or  form  may  be  varied 
through  all  these  tenses. 

Some  verbs  (as  those  which  terminate  in 
ana  and  iiiya)  have  still  anothc  r  tense, 
answering  to  the  recent  past  in  Kamilarui ; 
as,  yiimi,  I  see ;  preterite,  yagiiuin,  I  have 
seen ;  recent  pnst,  j)«J/(,  1  saw  lately. 

iMr.  Watson  snys  nothing  of  the  passive 
in  his  grammar,  but  some  forms  are  given 
in  the  translated  sentences  which  seem  to 
indicate  its  existence.  liiimiUi  (or  biimiiiii) 
biila  mil,  I  am  struck  (wliere  ntil  is  in 
the  accusative).  Nal  biwiani  i/i/iii,  1  am 
struck  by  him,  (where  nal  is  in  the  occusa- 


1 


^  j^ 


AUSTRALIA. 


495 


W  I  R  A  D  U  R  E  I. 

tivc,  and  ihjiii,  him,  in  the  nblative.)     Bu- 
mdgiri  nijal  ijuiii,  lest  thou  bo  struck. 


K  A  M  I  I.  A  R  A  I. 

the  verb  being  sometimeM  only  preceded  by 
keaivaiur  kciwdraii,  nm\  Hunietinios  hnving 
after  it,  in  ndditinn,  kmicii  or  />«.  Thus, 
the  negative  of  Imtitnn  is  kenwnraii  bun- 
korieii  ;  that  of  hunkcmi  is  kcaicai  biinki- 
pa,  dec. 

CONJrOATIONB.  CONJVOATIONS. 

Using  this  word  (as  in  the  Latin  gram-        There  are   seven    conjiigntions,    dislin- 

mar)  to  signify  dilferent  modes  of  indenting  guishcd  by  the  termination  of  the  infinitive, 

verbs,  there  appear  to  be  but  four  conjugn-  Those  of  the 
tions  in  this  language, — though  others  may 


possibly  exist.  Thf^  are  distinguished  by 
the  termination  of  the  infinitive.  The  verbs 
of  the 

Ist  conj.  end  in  (lliko,  oliko,  and  eliko 

2d     "  "     ki/iko 

3d     "  "     biHko 

4th    "  "     riliko  and  tiliko 


Ist  conj.  end  in  a/igu 


2d 

iligu 

3d 

agigu 

4th 

'S«A'« 

5th 

«Vh'if,''t 

6tli 

ihjgigu 

7th 

iygigu 

These  conjugations  (lilTer  in  the  forma-        The  principal  tenses  are  formed  in  the 
tion  of  the  tenses  as  follows :  following  manner : 


rilES.  REH.  PAST. 

BW;.  PAST.     PUT. 

Dir. 

INP. 

nti. 

PAST.  AOR. 

PERP. 

1. 

an 

dla 

(i         a  nun 

nlm 

Oliko 

1.  ara 

e 

alguain 

an 

ahi 

a         fl  turn 

Olin 

oliko 

2.  ira 

i 

ilgunin 

ati 

dla 

a         d  tinn 

tlin 

rliko 

3.  una 

uni 

aguain 

2. 

tail 

tdla 

kula   nun 

kilin 

kUiko 

4.  inya 

ini/i 

iguain 

3. 

bin 

bid/a 

bia      binun 

bilin 

biliko 

5.  una 

uni 

tiyguain 

4. 

rin 

Tdla 

rCa      riiiun 

rilin 

riliko 

6.  ana 

7.  ipja 

PUT. 

1.  algiri 

2.  ilgiri 

3.  agiri 

4.  igiri 

5.  ungiri 
0.  aijgiri 
7.  iygiri 

uni 
ipji 

PARTIC. 

algitnana 

ilgunana 

agunana 

igunana 

uygunana 

aijgunana 

iggunana 

ayguain 
iygtvain 

INFIN. 

algigii 
ilgigu 
agigu 

uygigu 

"VS'S" 
iygigu 

496 


P  H  I  L  O  L  O  O  V. 


K  A  M  1 1.  A  R  A  I. 

PARADIGM  OF  TUB  FIHIT  CONJUOATION. 

Umdliko,  to  innko, 
Koot,  ?/»»«  (or  uma), 

INDRPINITK  FORM. 

Prcst.  iinutn  /xnj  inii,  1  make  this 

Rem.  I',  umii/a,  1  mndo 

Rcc.  P.  iimii,  I  made  lately 

Plu|),  nmii-tti,  I  had  made 

Hod.  P.  wnalciuii,  I  have  made  lo-doy 

Fut.  A.  utni^ntni,  I  shall  make 

Cras.  F.  iitmditi,  I  shall  make  to-morrow 

Inc.  F.  iiinii/i-koldi),  I  am  going  to  make 


WIRADUREI. 
rARADION  or  TIIR  FIRIT  CONJVOATION. 

Mdligu,  to  make. 
Uool,  ma. 

■  .tDiriNITE  roiiM, 

Pros,  miira 

Prct.  vidlgiinin 

Past.  A.  tiie 

Plii|).  maUini 

Hnd.  P.  ma/i)ririn 

I'rox.  F.  imi/i'iri 

Crns.  F.  mahjiiriinvafiiri,  &c. 

[The  other  tenses  may  be  easily  formed 
from  these.] 


rAKTICiriAL  OR  DKPINITE  roRM. 

Pres,  vmu/in,  I  am  making 
Rec.  P.  iimii/ie/a,  I  was  making  lately  (?) 
Plup.  iimiilii/iitu,  I  hud  ln'cn  making 
Hod.  P.  iinwliktun,  I  have  been   making 

to-day 
Fut.  A.  untd/iiinti,  I  sholl  be  making 
Cras.  F.  ii»ivHki>i,  I  shall  be  making  to- 
morrow. 
Inc.   F.   nmulikoldg,   I   am   going   to    bo 
making 


DEriNITI  OR  rARTICIrlAL  roRM, 

Pres.  nialguniiiia  (3d  conjugation) 

Pret.  imilgHimguain 

Plup.  malguiiainini 

Hod.  P.  malgiDKDjnrin  (or  malgutiaigarin) 

Prox.  F.  nia/iiiiiKigiri 

Cms.  F.  niulgiinaj/itridicagiri,  &c,  &c. 


CONTINl'ATIVE  FORM. 


CONTINl'ATIVE  OR  INTENSIVE  PORH. 

Pres.  umiililin,  I  am  making  constantly,    Pres.  mamar.:,  I  make  constantly,  or  ear- 

or  I  keep  making  nestly 

Past,  iimuliliiia,  1  was  constantly  making      Pret.  mamulgiiain 

Past.  A.  tname,  &c.  &c. 


REPLECTIVE  FORM. 


Past,  umvleun,  I  have  made  myself 


RECIPRC.  a  FORH, 

Prest.  umulaii  ball,  we  are  making  each 

other. 
Rem.  P.  umuldla 
Plup,  itma/dhita 
Hod.  P.  umnluikeou 
Fut.  umulontin 
C.  Fut.  umulaikin 
Inc.  F.  umiilai-koldr) 


REFLECTIVE  FORH. 

Pres.  malmdyilinya  (4th  conjugation) 
Pret.  maltjul;iUiguuin,  &c.  &c. 

RECIPROCAL  PORH. 

Pres.  maldiia  (3d  conjugation) 

Pret.  malagiiain 

Plup.  malaneini 

Hod.  P.  maliigarin 

Fut.  malagiri 

Cras.  F.  maitiiawagiri,  &e. 


A  U  H  T  K  A  M  A. 


497 


K  A  M  I  f,  A  R  A  I. 

INI-INt'llVK. 

Indie.  iimii/iLi),  in  nnlcr  to  mnko 
Cnntin.  iiiiiii/Ui)ti,  to  cuiiiimu^  mnking 
Rocip.  umaluikou,  to  miiku  one  onothcr 

OPTATIVr. 

Aorisl,  umauwil-krxi ,  thiit  I  might  mako 

lTr.R»TIVl!. 

I'rcs,  iimfiihiiii,  I  mil  nmkiiig  agiiin 
Put.  ummkutiiiii,  I  sliiill  iiiiike  iigain 

■I'proitrnvE. 
Aor.  umapii-Ui,  had  I  made 


WIRADUREI, 

INriNITIVK. 

Indcf.  mdlifiit  (or  iinili) 

I'lirlioip.  iiiii/i'iiiiiiffifiu  (or  mnlgunagi) 

Uccip.  wiiliifiigu  (or  mnliigi) 

llor,  mnluliiiigu  (or  mii/it/igi) 


ITKIItTIVI. 

Pres.  >iia/it/iiii/(i  (Itli  conjugation) 
Flit,  malaligiri,  &c.  Aic, 


DRlllDRtlATlVK. 

Aor.  uDMjia-ta,  I  noiild  that  I  had  made 

IMl'RHATIVR, 

Indie,  iimn/a,  make  thou 

Intcns.  iima-iimulu,  make  diligently 

Reflee.  itiim/ia,  make  thysell" 

Recip.  iimvlii,  make  one  another 

Iter,  iiminku,  make  again 

InHtant,  uiitiikiii,  make  now,  at  once 

The  paradigms  of  the  other  conjugations 
may  be  easily  formed  from  this  example. 

There  are  two  neuter  or  substantive  verbs, 
kti  or  ku,  which  mokes  in  the  infinitive 
knkilikn,  and  Ui  or  bit,  which  makes  Ixitiko 
(or  Ui/iko),  The  first  has  a  possive  signi- 
fication, as  simply  to  exist  or  be  in  any 
state ;  the  other  is  active,  meaning  to  be 
in  the  act  of  doing  any  thing ;  as,  teti-ka, 
to  be  dead  ;  tfti-bti,  to  be  dying,  or  to  die. 
The  latter,  however,  seems  to  bo  more 
rarely  used  tlian  the  former. 

The  following  is  the  paradigm  of  the 
verb  kit,  to  be,  of  the  second  conjugation. 
(The  a  in  this  word  lias  an  obscure  sound, 
approaching  to  u,  which  is  sometimes  sub- 
stituted for  it.) 

INOKriNITE  FORM. 

Prcwnt  Tt'iisf. 
Oag  kvUtn  (or  kiUdn),  I  om 
hi  kirtan,  thou  art 
noa  kutan,  he  is 

125 


IMrlRATIVI. 

Indcf.  >mi,  make 

Intcns.  miDiiti,  make  diligently 

Recip.  vialaUi,  make  one  another 

Iter.  vuilaliUi,  make  again 

Particip.  malgiiimUi,  continue  making 


There  is  properly  but  one  substantive 
verb,  though  several  other  words,  particu- 
larly Ixila  and  ivari,  are  often  used  in  place 
of  one,  but  they  are  indeclinable. 


The  following  is  the  paradigm  given  by 
Mr.  Watson  of  the  verb  piginya,  to  be 
(of  the  fourth  conjugation). 

INDEFINITE  FORM. 

Prrst'nt  Tense. 
patu  yipinj/a,  I  am 
pindii  yipinya,  thou  art 
yiti  j/ij/iiiya,  he  or  she  is 


II 


It- 


f! 


I! 


49S 


!•  U  I  L  O  L  O  U  Y. 


K  A  M  I  r.  A  R  A  I. 

INIIKriMtK  MUtM. 

fioll  liliki  /.iiliiii,  she  isl 
yiiii  kdtiui,  HO  iim,  iVc. 

Kcni.  Pn»t.  kdlit/a,  1  \vn»  fDrmerly 
Rr.;.  I',  kiikf'/d,  I  WH8  lalily 
Pliip.  hiki'i/iilu,  I  hnil  liilt'ly  l)tTn 
lloil.  1*.  k<i/iit'>i,  I  WI19  lii.ilny 
Fill,  Am'.  knkiUiiin,  I  kIhiII  1k' 
Cms.  1".  ktikiii,  1  sliiill  Im'  tii-morrow 
liK'.  F.  k(ikili-koluf),  I  am  guiiig  to  be 


iiKiiMTr  niim. 
I'ros.  knkilihii,  I  am  now  (or  nm  being) 
I'nst.  kitki/ii/ii,  I  WQs  then 
l'lii|..  kiikiliiltitit,  I  [mil  llioii  beon 
Hoil.  P.  kukilikinn,  I  was  this  morning 
Fut.  A.  kiikilitain,  I  shall  llien  be,  Ato. 

CItMINX'ATIVK  FORM. 

Pros,  ktiki/iliii,  I  continue  to  Ix),  or  am 

conslnnlly 
I'ast  Aor.  kakUida,  I  continued  to  be 

RKCirnoC'AL  FORM. 

Prcs.  kakilihxti,  wc  are,  or  live,  together 
Past  A.  knkilidlii,  we  were  together 
I  led.  P.  kakilaikrun,  «S:o.  &c. 

INFINITIVE. 

Indie,  kahliko,  in  order  to  be 
Contin.  kakilikoa,  to  continue  to  bo 
Rccip.  kakilaikoa,  to  be  with  one  anotlier 

OPTATIVE. 

Aor.  kauwU  km,  that  I  might  be,  or,  I 
would  be 

ITERATIVE. 

Prcs.  kaUakun,  I  am  again 

Fut.  kdUakCtnun,  1  shall  be  again 


W  I  l(  A  DC  l<  Kl. 

INIIKIIMTK  IIIRM. 

))iuiii  >jii/ini/<i,  we  are.  Ate. 

In.st.  Pn-s.  giiiminn,  I  om 
Past  Aor.  i/iij;/i,  I  was 
Inst.  Past.  ifiitu-iiHi,  I  was  just  now 
Pret,  j/ii))!ii'<ii)i,  I  have  luicn 
Inst.  Pret.  iiiiiwiDi,  I  Imvo  just  Ix^n 
Kfiii.  P.  iiiiiamiitii,  I  WHS  ji>rint'rly 
lloil.  P.  yitjiirhi,  I  was  this  inoriiiiig 
I  lest.  P.  tjii)!iiiioiii,  I  was  yesterday 
Pliip.   ))i]/ihii,  I  had  Ihoii 
Prox.  Fut.  ijii/uiii,  I  shall  soon  lie 
Inst.    Fut.    j/iiiwu/;iri,   I   shall   bo   imme- 
diately 
Rem.  Kut.  piptirigiri,  I  shall  Im>  hereafter 
C'ras.  Fut.   i/iijuriuwiigiri,  I  shall   lie  to- 
morrow 
FuttPa>t.  i/ij/i/igiri,  I  shall  have  been 

UEFISITF.  niRM. 

Pres.  ijhjiiiianit,  I  nm  being 
Past  A.  ijingiimini,  I  was 
Pret.  i/iiifiiirMgiiilin,  I  have  been 
Fut.  tfitjgiDiagiri,  I  shall  be,  iSiC, 

There  is  nnotlier  participial  form,  j/im- 
hiaiia,  though  the  dilleri'iice  lietwecn  the 
two  is  not  explained.  The  two  termina- 
tions are  sometimes  united  in  the  luturt 
tense,  to  express  long-continued  action  or 
existence,  as,  ijimbiitgunagiri,  I  shall  long 
continue  being. 


INFINITIVI. 

Indef.  pipg'gii  (or  >ji>igi),  to  bo 
Partio.  ijiiigiiiiagi-gii,  to  continue  being 
Iter,  yiii/igi-gii,  to  be  again 

OPTATIVE. 

Aor.  mtilan  pipga,  would,  could,  should  be 


ITERATIVE. 

Prcs.  gialinyo,  I  am  again 

Fut.  tjiuligiri,  I  shall  be  again,  &c. 


AVa  T  K  A  L  I  A. 


499 


K  A  M  I  I.  A  l(  A  I. 

•t'rr<»irtv>  avii  Nnurivi. 
Aor.  hi/ia  /'ii,  \\'  I  liiiil  Imi'ii 
Aor.  keituaran  kcjiii,  1  luivo  not  been 


IMPtllATIVI. 

Indt'f.  kii(iiiii,  1k! 
Del",  kiikiliii,  Ik'  thtw,  rpiimill 
Ui't'i|i.  kiiki/ii,  In"  liij{rther 
Iter,  ktilvdkii,  lie  iigiiiii 

Tlicri)  iiri' sovcriil  vcrbiil  nniins,  or  nouns 
deiivcci  (Vi)tii  verbs,  in  tbis  lnnij;imijo: 

1 .  'I'hi!  nj,'ont,  or  iIikt  of  an  act,  \a  ex- 
pressed by  Ibo  terniin.itinn  kiiii;  iis,  /nin- 
ki/ikiiti,  II  striker,  one  who  strikes. 

8.  One  wbo  hnbitniilly  or  professionally 
performs  ony  net,  is  "Xiiressed  by  the  ter- 
minati<in  i/r;  as,hunkiije,  a  striker, a  boxer, 
murderer,  iVe. 

3.  'I"bn  thing  or  object  whieli  |)i'rforn)s 
an  act  has  the  termirmtion  hiiie;  as,  limi- 
kilikaiie,  the  thing  which  strikes,  a  cudgel. 

4.  The  particular  net  iierforined  is  ex- 
pressed by  ta;  ns,  Imnkilila,  the  striking, 
Iho  fighting  (which  took  place). 

5.  The  act  in  the  abstract  is  distinguished 
by  to;  as,  hiiiikiHto,  a  blow,  or  figlit. 

0.  The  place  in  which  an  nction  takes 
place  has  the  termination  pi7  or  ijeil;  ns, 
bunkiiii/eil,  a  place  of  striking,  a  pugilistic 
ring. 

There  is  nlso  n  verbal  noun  or  adjective, 
with  a  passive  signification,  ending  in  tmra  ; 
as,  hiintixira,  that  which  is  struck,  umii/i- 
tiHtrti,  that  which  is  made  or  done. 

The  following  table  of  (icrivativcs  is  from 
Mr.  'I  hrclkeld's  manuscripts.  It  shows  in 
a  striking  light  the  advantages  which  the 
language  derives  from  this  source,  both  for 
discriminating  nice  shades  of  meaning,  and 
for  devising  names  descriptive  of  new  ob- 
jects: 


W  I  i(  A  II  I'  11  K  I. 

[Ilesides  the  above  liirins,  others  iiiii 
given  among  the  examples,  whii'h  seem  to 
lie  colli rnetioiiM  j  as,  i/iliyit  for  i/litiiiya; 
fiiliiiiiii  for  giuliyn,  itc.\ 

IMimtTIVK. 

Indef.  jjiijfid,  Ik- 

Uef.  iiiijgiiiiiitn,  l)c  thus 

Iter.  ijiuliUi,  bo  again 

Verbal  adjectives  are  lijrnied  from  the 
porticipic  by  adding  gi'lijul ;  as,  /xiM^it. 
utiiiii,  singing,  iHiliilgunana-guljiiU  giliui, 
n  singing  man. 

Verbal  nouns,  signilying  one  who  habi- 
tually iierforms  an  act,  are  lijrmed  from  the 
preterite  by  changing  tnuiin  to  tain;  as, 
iHiliil^imiii,  I  sung,  Ixi/ii/lai/t,  a  singer; 
i/(tru,  to  s|)eak,  ijit/umiii,  I  spoke,  i/ii/tdt/i, 
n  siH'akor. 


:  it 


Hh 


5  'f-^  , 

=    S.    a 


rl^'^r'l^ 


i  I 


IS  .^^ 


1 


H    .-    r-  -^    S    5    g 
5  1  js 


a  .5 


is    -T    *    ■" 

~-  ■'5     ~     s" 

I  -i  "i  '1 


;   a   5   R 


lee 

=    -^    5      . 


~S  5  "5 


5      =5 

s 


.3  s 


.-§1 
—      W 


< 
at 
< 

-      fc    =    S    -    5 


Si 


~      3 

S    1 


R      ^ 
^    ^ 


_>!    s    i  :^ 


:i  s 


11 


■I  ! 


S     S*.    ».    JC^ 


IS     ^ 


"?  "3 
II 


11 


11 

0.  s 


-3    <—     3     =    -^ 


^ 


£  ^   £ 


■^    ~    I 


>-    w  =  .5- 

i:    ^         '>    u 
-    F    5    ^    o    2 

-  ■-   ^    E   C    l  ^ 

>.  g    ^  C  ^^   «    ? 

I- 1    l|'  f ■  11 
a    S-.  »  E\.  .5    Sk  s 

u 

C      I. 

SI 

i    c    t.  u    ii    5 

-^    s    i"  c;    o  :2 

I '5;    s    J  'E    ^^ 

s  :3  5  5  £  -^  ^ 
^  ^  -^  -S  -i  ■?  "5 

1 §>^ 1  1^ 

t:    5.    '-^    "5    ^    ^    ^ 


u 

r  s  s  c  &•  I 

■     C     £    ;~'    5      O      O    .   ' 

■|  "§    s  "^  rS  ^'   I 


5    to 

S    •/.  ^  .5 
S  "c  -i  3 

T3     *      13      « 

^.  ■£  -^-  r^s" 

IS  ^  -^  s^  a  - 


t 


^  I 


d.  —  p 


I^H 

60 

S    '^ 

C 

?.t  9. 

'i 

a,  -S    s    a, 

c 
o 

trf     u     X      t^- 

g  S  £i  -^ 
.  g      - 

O 


3 
9. 


5^ 
?  "5 


^  I, 


^  3 

•S  s 


=      C3 


s  "  e  3 

^  -§  ^  S. 

«  "^  "S  s' 

•ii  Si  3  H 


o    »    o   — 

^  "i  "^    ? 


1 


c 


i  I 


.2 


3 

I 


E 

to 

l-t 

o 

I 


<=  3 


"1 

S 

Si 

« 

s 

V 

^ 

1 

5 

« 

* 

•a 

0 

'I 

< 

§ 

1. 

ft 

C 

J 

^ 

a; 

_5 

3 

— • 

.=   S.  o 
E    I    s 

H| 

o    —  » 

to  '.  "g 

.5  .ti    a 


S  'E 


Jr  E 


c  "^ 
o  « 
J,      o 

ii 

>»  "H. 

S  ^ 
.2  % 

S  t> 
E  •£ 

E  " 

e  = 

to  a 


E  S,-^ 

<_  .{  « 

o  5    o 

tn  •?    "^ 

CL  -^       T. 


J5    * 


<5  j=  -a 

So" 

jj  —    « 

u  c     S 

CJ  C;       O 

■■%  sr  a 

"=  8  '3 

u  c    5 


a 

.2  J  2 
—   "  -3 

a    o  ^ 


-0'  t, 

—    i  -a  J5 


E  ^ 
P  -c 


71 

c    a 

'to  ■- 
«  .2 

E  - 

la 

g  1 

If 

i 

a;  s^ 

^      << 

g  E 

1 

il 

«  -5 

o  = 
■-    a 


E  -f 


^ 


I 


S  .  -  .^ 


5  c  „ 
■^    s-f 

;;  3  E 
•■5  -^  , 

"  -?   3 

OJ  S*  o 
-=  T3  3 
-o   ^     g 

■3     nJ     o 

•2.  J-  E 

"    §    2 

2   s   § 

■=  «  * 
a  ^  •S 

.5    i    * 

E  -£    gP 

S  *  3 

.1"  i  % 
£00 

■■5  J  e  § 


c  :r; 


*    o    c    6 
s    a, '«    cd 


AUSTRALIA. 


501 


K  A  M I  L  A  R  A  I. 

From  what  hits  been  said,  it  will  be  evi- 
dent that  the  power  of  the  Australinn  lan- 
guages resides  chiefly  in  their  numerous 
inotlifying  |iartiolcs.  It  is  often  diincult  to 
determine  whether  these  should  be  written 
as  separate  words,  fir  united  with  the  term 
which  I  hey  serve  to  modil'y.  It  is,  likewise, 
not  always  easy  to  trace  the  exact  shade  of 
meaning  which  the  pnrficlu  is  intended  to 
indicate,  owing  to  the  novel  and  peculiar 
principles  on  which  the  grammatical  system 
of  these  languages  is  founded. 

Besides  the  particles  already  mentioned, 
some  others  reipiirc  to  lie  noticed. 

KoricH  is  the  word  for  not;  but  when 
op|)ended  to  ii  noun  or  adjective  it  has  the 
force  of  -less  or  iiii-  in  Knglish  j  as,  inuro- 
roff,  g(X)d,  worthy,  mti roroij-koricii,  worth- 
less, unworthy. 

Kilou,  like,  is  used  as  a  suflix,  precisely 
as  in  I'jiglisb ;  as,  iionui-kilwi,  v\\\k\\\K.c. 

Kci  answi'j-s  to  ish  in  English ;  as,  no- 
naikei,  childish  ;  uoiikii/kci,  foolish. 

Yaiili,  as,  is  used  in  forming  compari- 
sons ;  as,  krktitkei  (iiii  ijanti  iinna  kilai, 
lit.  sweet  this  as  that  like,  i.  e.  this  is  sweet 
as  that.  Yanli-lio-la  is  rendered  "  so  in- 
deed it  is." 

Bo,  joined  with  a  pron<inn,  has  an  em- 
phatic signification  ;  as,  tjiitna-lm,  I  myself, 
I  indeed,  iS:c,  It  is  also  used  with  other 
words, 

Ko ;  this  particle  is  of  very  freipient  use 
in  this  language.  With  some  nouns  it  forms, 
as  has  Ix'cn  seen,  the  active  nominative  case ; 
with  all,  it  forms  the  dative  case,  having  the 
signification  of  tn  ur  for,  implying  purpose 
or  object;  with  the  same  meaning  it  is  ap- 
pended to  the  infinitive  of  verbs  ;  as,  hnn- 
ki/i-ko,  in  order  to  strike.  In  the  latter 
case  it  is  fivquently  omitted  in  speaking. 

Kikt  is  used  with  the  infinitive  instead  of 
ko,  in  order  to  expn?ss  continuance  of  an 
Bction.     With  the  form  of  the  verb  which 


WIRADUREI. 


Mo!;ii  is  nftixed  to  nouns  to  signify  desti- 
tution or  privation ;  as,  imtj,  teeth,  //«- 
mo^ii,  toothless  (the  ;j  being  dropped  before 
m  for  eupliony).  Mulxiij  has  the  same 
meaning ;  as,  iiKiiiiij-miilxig,  not  good, 
worthless. 

(t'li/ia  is  suftixed  with  the  sense  of  like  ; 
as,  uiiijsini-siiilui,  childlike.  Hut  where 
similitud<'  is  intended,. «■«/«;/(  must  be  used; 
as,  !;i/)ir./:ii/<iiii,  like  a  man. 

lUtjidii  is  used  in  cimparing;  as,  yidi/i 
maiittj,  yilti  ijiijia/i,  this  good  that  like,  i.  c. 
this  is  as  good  as  that. 


lilt  signifies  too,  or  u/so  ;  as,  ijmhi-hii,  I 
also. 


Uii ;  all  the  remarks  made  respecting 
ko  in  the  Kamilarai  dialect  will  apply  to  this 
particle,  which  is  identical  in  use  and  nearly 
in  sound. 


lac 


502 


PHILOLOGY. 


KAMILARAI. 

we  have  called  deprecatory  it  has  the  signi- 
fication of  lest;  ns,  Ountra-ku n  kfxi  lion 
Uii),  lest  [  should  strike  him.  With  the 
optotivc  it  signifies  that,  in  order  that ;  as, 
buwil  koti  bo/i  /*;jj,  that  I  moy  strike  him. 

Jia  has  the  sense  of  irhik,  if,  uhcn  ;  as, 
huntdii  lion  Ihiij  Iki,  while  I  strike  him; 
Immpa  lion  liog  Ixi,  if  1  had  struck  him. 

Lui)  denotes  quality  ;  thus,  from  pttle, 
salt  (the  noun),  we  have  the  adjective, /Jo/e- 
lap,  salt,  saline  ;  jnile-korien  would  signify 
soilless,  without  salt,  and  pulc-koricn-lap, 
uusalted,  sweet. 

Wal  is  a  particle  expressing  intention  or 
will  ;  it  is  frequently  joined  with  the  future 
of  verbs. 

J\e  can  hardly  bt^  translatetl  except  by 
the  English  neuter  verb,  though  it  has  not 
in  reality  a  verbal  signification ;  ns,  mina- 
rig  ke  inii  f  what  is  this  .' 

Ta  seems  pro|)erly  to  mean  that ;  but  in 
many  cases  it  cannot  be  rtMulered  into  Eng- 
lish, and  ill  some  instances  it  must  be 
lianslaled  by  the  substantive  verb. 

lia  (besides  the  meaning  given  above) 
signifies  to  lie  in  any  net  or  place.  It  may 
olten  lie  rendered  by  the  substantive  verb, 
ie  is  another  prirtideofn  similar  character; 
as,  uni  U>n  ye,  who  is  he  } 

Ma  is  used  before  the  im|)erative;  ns, 
ma  biiwa  bdn,  strike  him. 

Kfin  has  the  sense  of  indeed,  in  fact ; 
when  appended  to  interrogalives  it  has  a 
negative  meaning  of  n  peculiar  kind ;  ns, 
wonen  pH'n  uuala  J  where  shall  wo  go  \ 
tvonin  kan,  I  do  not  know  where, — (lit. 
where  indeed  ?). 

Kal  and  kalien  are  used  as  patronymics; 
Enfilanil-kal,  nn  Englishman ;  EnglaiuU 
kalien,  an  Englishwoman. 


WIRADUREI. 


Wari  is  frequently  joined  with  verbs  as 
n  particle  of  the  future. 

Bn,  ga,  hi,  tea,  Ixihi,  nilii,  para,  nre  par- 
ticles which,  with  various  shades  of  mean- 
ing, and  peculiarities  of  construction,  nre 
used  in  cases  where  the  substantive  verb 
would  be  employed  in  English. 

Na  signifies  it,  tluU,  and  is  used  like  la 
in  Kamilarai, 


liari  is  used  with  the  third  person  of  the 
imix-rative;  ns,  Iktri  yia,  let  it  be;  u-inatja- 
liiliii  kiri,  let  him  believe. 

Ga  is  used  with  interrogalives  to  reply 
in  the  negative ;  ns,  minyay-ga,  1  don't  know 
what  (what  indeed  !) ,  t.agu-pa,  I  don't  know 
where,  &c.  It  seems  to  have  the  general 
signification  of  "  indeed." 

Glin  is  used  to  form  patronymics ;  as, 
England-gan,  an  English  man  or  woman. 


AUSTRALIA. 


503 


KAMILARAI. 


WIRADUREI. 


COMPOUNDS. 

There  are  many  compound  verbs,  and 
they  are  frequently  employed  where  in  other 
languages  adverbs  and  prepositions  would 
be  used.  The  verbs  which  most  commonly 
serve  to  modify  others  are  the  following : 

Munhili  or  hmihili,  to  permit ;  as,  bii, 
strike,  hiimu nhiliko,  to  permit  to  strike ; 
bumiininn  bon  Imy,  I  permit  him  to  strike ; 
uvw,  to  make,  umahti iihililio,\o  permit  to 
make  (or  perhaps,  ralhiT,  to  porniit  lo  be 
made).  When  binihili  is  preceded  by  niar<i 
it  has  n  passive  signification  ;  as,  bitimira- 
biitibili,  to  permit  lo  be  struck. 

Mali  or  moli,  to  do,  to  make,  gives  a 
causal  signification ;  as,  pitui,  joy,  pitul- 
mali,  to  cause  joy,  to  make  joyful, — jntiil- 
ma  lK»t  hill,  I  made  him  glad.  Kola,  secret, 
kolamuli,  to  conceal. 

Bunlili  has  nearly  the  sume  moaning 
with  mali;  as,  poai,  growing,  poai-ki ntili, 
to  cause  to  grow. 

Bntjuli  means  to  compel,  oblige,  cause; 
as,  Uti,  dead,  Ifti-binjn/i,  to  cause  to  bo 
dead,  to  kill ;  por-buinili,  to  compel  to  drop. 

Btirili  signilies  to  cause  by  some  means 
or  agency  ;  as,  lUr-bmiH,  to  break  by  some 
means;  tHi-burili,  to  kill  by  some  means 
(as  poison). 

Kuli  signifies  spontaneous  action ;  as, 
tiir-kti/i,  to  break  of  itself.  (It  is  probably 
the  substantive  verb  ka,  meaning  lo  be  in 
any  state, — as  is  also  the  following): 

Kahili  is  used  to  convert  adjectives  into 
verbs ;  as,  pilul-kakili,  to  be  glad ;  tiHi- 
kakili,  to  lie  dead. 

linli,  signifying  to  be  in  any  act,  is  em- 
ployed to  form  active  verbs;  as,  tilt-bu/i, 
to  be  dying. 

Maiiji'li  gives  to  the  verb  the  meaning 
of  failure  or  incomplete  o|ieralion  ;  as,  na, 
to  see,  iia-maiijuli,  to  look  without  observ- 
ing;  pirti,  lo  hear,  iinni-niaiiinli,  lo  hear 
but  not  to  attend.     Du-maiiju  Um  Ihuj,  I 


COMPOl'NOS. 


Mambili,  to  permit;  as,  bumalmambira, 
I  permit  to  strike ;  biiiiialnuimbiUilinya,  I 
permit  to  strike  again;  biimahumalalimam- 
bilnaridaagin,  I  shall  permit  to  continue 
striking  again  to-morrow ! 


Mali,  to  make  or  cause  to  be;  as,  marga, 
shield,  marga-mali,  to  (  luse  to  be  a  shield, 
hence,  lo  protect,  save ;  Uipgan,  broken, 
Ixiggamali,  to  break. 

Biniili  has  a  causative  force,  (perhaps 
from  bii,  strike,)  as,  lia/u-biinia,  kill,  (which 
may  be,  "  strike  dead.") 


Gilinya  is  used  to  convert  adjectives  into 
verbs ;  as,  gntuij,  glad,  gataij-gilinya. 


604 


PHILOLOGY. 


:li- 


r 


KAMILARAI. 

nearly  struck  him,  or  did  not  quite  strike 
him. 

Yeli  (or  yali)  from  tciye/i,  to  speak,  is 
used  with  all  terms  implying  verbal  com- 
munication;  as,  yakoyeli,  to  lie,  deceive; 
piye/i,  to  beg,  entrciU ;  tiirakaiytii,  to  con- 
vince. 

Eili,  from  uwali,  to  walk  ;  as,  wij/aiei/i, 
to  talk  and  walk,  or  to  converse  while 
walking  ;  tateili,  to  eat  and  walk. 

Several  verbs  are  sometimes  united  in  one 
word  ;  ns,  tiir,  broken ;  tiir^iuyuli,  to 
break,  tiir-hirga-bunbUi,  to  |>crniit  to  break. 


WIRADUREI. 


Ya/i  or  i/eti  signifies  to  s|)eak,  haii/a/i, 
to  command  ;  hence  yaiialKiiyitli,  to  tell  to 
goj  iiriimlxiiya/i,  to  tell  to  come  in;  /Hiram- 
haiynii,  to  tell  to  rise. 

Dili<:t  is  a  suffix  signifying  to  obey,  or 
do  wh;it  the  principal  verb  commands;  it 
is  correlative  with  Ikih/ii/i;  as,  yaiia-Ziiiis^, 
to  go  when  told  ;  yu/hi/iui,  to  s|)ciik  when 
told  ;  taM/ivi,  to  eat  when  told. 

■f^ij;i,  sijjiiities  to  do  any  thing  for 
another;  it  might,  perhaps,  have  l)een 
ranked  as  a  mixliticalion  of  the  verb;  as, 
gtwililigi,  to  carry  for  another  (from 
g(uia) ;  mi/iMigi,  to  beg  for  another ; 
mi/ifii,  to  make  or  do  for  another ;  Aa- 
luyeli/si,  to  die  for  another. 

Numigi  gives  the  signification  of  liefnre, 
prior  to  (in  lime);  as,  yaiinumigi  (for 
yidnmnifsi),  to  speak  Ixjfore  or  sooner; 
tan/iiiniisi  for  lul>iiiiiiif:i),  to  eat  before ; 
baliiiii4mi^,  to  die  lic(i)rp. 

Gurag  is  a  prefix,  having  the  sense  of 
completing  any  act  ;  as,  giiragmali,  to 
finish  doing;  giiragayeli,  to  finish  speak- 
ing ;  futragutcUi,  to  eat  all  up,  to  be  done 
eating. 

Malay  and  giiiili  are  independent  words, 
or  particles  used  in  forming  the  potential 
and  optative  moods.  'I'liey  have  the  par- 
ticles gu,  gild,  yn,  yiii,  /m,  trari,  and  the 
tenses  of  the  verb  yiiiyi,  to  be  joined  with 
them  to  vary  their  meaning;  as,  malay  gu 
ye,  could  speak  ;  yiiidu  gild  nuiliiy  yinya, 
thou  oughtest  to  be  ;  hiimai  inalag  ya  nal 
yiyga,  I  should  have  lM«n  struck.  Bumali 
yiiidi  Im-ilii,  1  wish  to  strike  ;  Innnali  yimli- 
ilyii  yiy>/i,  I  did  wish  to  strike,  or  would 
have  struck  ;  humnli-ilyu  yimli  yiyguain, 
I  have  wished  to  strike,  &c. 


To  complete  the  comparative  view  of  the  two  languages,  we  subjoin  a  collated  list  of 
the  most  common  words,  with  a  collection  of  sentences  rendered  as  literally  as  possible. 


AUSTRALIA. 


505 


The  former  were  mostly  writlen  down  from  the  pronunciation  of  the  natives,  while  the 
latter  are  from  the  grammars  of  Mr.  Thrclkeld  and  Mr.  Watson, — circumstances  which 
will  account  lor  some  discrepancies  in  the  orthography  of  the  two. 


KAMILARAI. 

WIRADUREI. 

kenta 

gira 

afraid 

moron 

miirun 

alive 

niiiwara 

Uiltii  or  dalai 

angry 

wirajjkaji 

mdrguii 

ankle 

tandn 

ilainydnana 

to  approach 

kqpa 

bdgiir  or  bokur 

orm  (upper) 

tardy 

hi 

arm  (lower) 

pimpi 

hiinan 

ashes 

baibai 

burguin 

axe  (iron) 

pako 

guingal 

axe  (stone) 

palkd 

bira,  mar,  gdrba 

back  (different  parts  of) 

kinan 

naru 

bag 

bakai 

duraij  aldranda 

bark  (of  tree) 

worowai 

biinuilgidyal  (?) 

battle,  fight 

hikili,  ball 

yiiiija 

to  be 

ttuuiie,  paraji 

biirldn 

belly 

tepcn 

dibilain 

bird 

polo- 

Imdag 

black 

tikemdp,  woropil 

buday 

blanket 

kdmara 

kuain 

blood 

bUmbili 

bumhira 

to  blow 

marinawai,  nawai,  kataf 

wdrgag 

boat,  canoe 

karaidg 

viarin 

body 

mula 

mula 

boil,  sore 

tepun 

dalnd 

bone 

tdrama 

bargan 

boomerang,  a  missile  weapon 

teral 

biidii,  yarain,  Mri 

bough,  branch 

koiiug,  konarig 

galiygati 

bowels 

kum/iorokdn 

kdbuka 

brain  (see  egg) 

tiirmali 

bapgamdra 

to  break 

■wdpara 

pa  mug 

breast 

bigai 

gargati 

brother,  elder 

kambal 

kdlmu'in 

"       younger 

kand,  kiyubvli,  wineli 

kunana 

to  burn 

baiyagbaiydg 

budindmdyd-gUgil 

butterfly 

tcoloma 

ifuliima 

calf  of  leg 

karili 

bnramara,  gana 

to  carry 

knh 

tahd 

cheek 

piriwal 

gitiinudtdin  (leader) 

chief 

wanai 

ivaggai 

137 

child 

S06 


PHILOLOGY. 


I  ' 


KAMILARAI. 

WIRADURGI. 

moHti/o,  yari  (beard),  wo- 

ydrdin 

chin  (or  beard) 

Uni 

yufcil,  yura 

yiiriig 

clouda 

kdtara 

iita,  giidaru,  bundi 

club,  cudgel 

ktarapai 

mitrrilin 

cockatoo  (white) 

vniila 

niaran,  bilir 

black 

tuhtira 

Miulam 

cold  (to  be) 

nuimarakiin,  milkamilka 

waljiar 

collar-bone,  clavicle 

mcali 

yuiKina 

to  come  (also,  to  go) 

kardknl 

puyargir 

conjuror,  doctor 

ivarimvarin 

fmrgaubargan,  waliwali 

crooked,  bent,  askew 

tcakan 

witgan 

a  crow  (bird) 

koke,  u-inM,  winup 

kiiki 

cup  (of  bork) 

burhiyuli,  kardkal-umali 

giininhiinmara 

to  cure 

kunbuntili 

baggabira 

to  cut 

unteli 

u'dgana 

to  dance 

yindlkun 

ndmur 

daughter 

gorokdii 

piiiiiggal,  pdrgan 

dawn 

teti 

UUu 

dead 

piriko 

purambal 

deep 

mimali 

immdra 

detain 

tetUmli 

bdlitna 

to  die 

piitili 

mutiiUmngara 

to  dig 

umali 

mara,  bunmara 

to  do  or  make 

arekal 

miri 

dog 

ijxiki,  ?nuroykai 

yiiki 

notive  dog,  male 

miri 

karingali 

"      "    female 

poran 

yarudag 

dream 

pitu/i. 

u-iih/ara 

to  drink 

pona 

bunan 

dust 

paropara,  i/areap,tarakvn 

via 

ear 

parai 

takiin  or  -lagtm 

earth,  land 

takili,  ta 

dara  or  tara 

to  eat 

korotyoy,  kanin 

kalindulin 

eel 

yam 

kdbiika 

egg 

jfina 

puna 

elbow 

kotjkordy 

piiruin 

emu 

yaria 

gurumbap 

evening 

mikai/,  j/aikay,  porowap 

mil 

eye 

ynlknra 

peer 

eyebrow 

woipin 

timit 

eyelash 

garogaro 

buiuhnya 

to  fall  down 

kij)ai 

wamii 

fat,  grease 

peyap,  bintunkin 

babin 

father 

AUSTRALIA. 


507 


KAMILARAI. 

WIRADUREI. 

bnmili,  tuykamati 

yamiiiya 

to  find 

viatara 

mtira 

finger  (sec  hand) 

garakonld 

bandyan 

"     little 

tireil 

yiilu 

finger-nail 

koiiig 

win 

fire 

mtikoro 

guya 

fish 

kolabili 

Imtamhira 

to  fish 

kalara,  molig 

ydiiara 

fish-spear 

tiriki 

yalan 

flame 

karat,  pareag 

banay 

flesh 

muraban 

gurawin 

flower 

yala,  tvurapkan 

burimal 

fly 

kotiogai,  wonkvl 

giiiiyguay 

fool 

yolo,  tcna 

dinay 

foot 

yentare 

yuliiy 

forehead 

koffkirj/ 

giiygalay 

frog 

yiikili,  yu 

yuiia 

to  give 

marop,  marorop 

tiidruy,  u-dluin 

good 

woid 

biiguin 

grass 

tulmvn 

tdgun-mdr 

grave,  (mound.) 

kau'dl  or  kawOl 

murawat 

great 

biirag,  ketap 

nrtin 

hair  (of  head). 

ketay,  wuran 

kit/yay 

hair  (of  body,  fur). 

matara 

mura 

hand 

pitul 

gaday 

happy 

piriral 

valan 

ii.ird,  (also  heavy) 

karakai 

Imrabaraiydnana 

to  hasten 

walay  or  walay 

btday  or  buluy 

head 

yarali 

tiimiydra 

to  hear 

Imlbul 

kin  or  gin 

heart 

xcinal,  yakay 

mi  lay 

hip 

kirika,  korundy 

mini 

honey 

miparai 

kanirj,  mdrin 

honey-comb 

kapiri,  turmipiri,  yuruyun 

yarun,  girtigal 

hungry 

urakiy 

wdliii 

initiated  person 

nolkanvlko 

girmlxuhi 

iron,  metal 

untay 

takal-dalxU  (cheek-bone) 

jaw  (lower) 

pdtukaray,  kaneiwdy,  bol- 

baiidar,  wamboin,  vluma 

kanguroo  (different  kinds  of) 

buy,  moatie 

icti-birijali 

balubiniira,  bdlubiimara 

to  kill 

boinkuli 

budarbdna 

to  kiss 

warombay 

biiygay 

knee 

kaliyticlo 

gdliijdl 

knife 

pintili 

bindyira,  bimdibundira 

to  knock  down 

kiiitai 

kintana 

to  laugh 

:i 


'  11 


508 


PHILOLOGY. 


t 


i:i 


KAMILARAI. 

WIRADUREI. 

por«j)d>t 

7Hiraga 

left  (sinistrorsum) 

wanban 

biiyu  or  buiu 

leg 

pinkuH,  u-olol 

Miki 

lightning 

weinveir 

u'irgana 

to  limp,  lame 

tvmhiri 

mundu 

lip,  upper 

we/eij 

vilip 

lip,  lower 

mimvg 

kanap,  guralup 

liver 

kore 

gibir 

man 

pantemai 

mabun 

messenger 

tvilep,  kuruka 

pS%H 

mouth 

kvruban 

hilubiinulain 

murderer 

topij/ 

miigin 

musquito 

MoTf 

muragir 

naked 

papai 

miluula 

near 

word,  kaleai) 

urit 

neck 

tokoi 

niiritp 

night 

nokoro 

mump 

nose 

j/arombai 

diriban 

old  man 

paropeen 

balagan 

old  woman 

uelai 

leiliii 

opossum 

kirin 

i/i'gi,  ipgil,  bandyabandya 

pain 

yariyari 

pdrapdraibara 

to  pant 

kirakira,  kaneta 

burain 

parrot 

yapag 

mum 

path 

turali 

dura,  dana,  durinya 

to  pierce 

nimali 

tiimiira 

to  pinch 

■parmcan,  warun 

icunigal 

plain,  level 

konin 

tandar 

pretty 

tcarekali 

warambia 

to  put  up  or  aside 

yerip 

buHl 

quill 

boarij/,  koiieon 

gudp  or  guop 

rain  (or  mist) 

kdpdra 

gtibargubar,  gidyi,  dirun- 

dimp 

red 

kotabnnbUi 

winapaigunana 

remember 

wiyea,  wiyayeli 

yaUdinya 

repeat 

nara 

tarar 

rib 

turoun 

bumalgal 

right  (dextrorsum) 

parogaroji 

Kottatcada 

rough 

poroghd 

yawai 

round 

marali,  talbuli 

bunbatia 

to  run 

puna 

karat 

sand 

naki/i,  no, 

pana 

to  see 

komara 

gild/,  dugui,  giruman 

shadow 

koian 

gial 

shame 

j/oitip,  ponkop 

bungul 

short 

AUSTRALIA. 


509 


KAMILARAI. 

WIRADUREI. 

fMra; 

kana 

shoulder 

mani 

mil 

sick 

kitrirhirp 

yiiU  (?) 

side  (of  body) 

konin,  tnupai 

tilnum 

silent 

tneya 

kttynn 

sinew 

witili 

baliira 

to  sing 

yalatrnli 

■winy a 

to  sit 

biikai 

i/iilain 

skin 

kapara 

ttiTMi/,  lUitxU  (bone) 

skull 

farabo 

yumiwirinya 

to  sleep 

mill,  warea 

bubai 

small 

maiyd 

ttirug 

snake 

yinal 

iirumaXn 

son  (used  by  men) 

ffiiluijgal 

son  (used  by  women) 

kdrakop 

murumfian 

son,  eldest 

taiol 

umbiih/ap,  pilainin 

son,  youngest 

napun 

giiiH 

song 

marai 

tiiluliay 

soul,  spirit 

warai 

tulii 

spear 

porelmi  (m.),  porekanbai  (f.)  nu/nin. 

spouse  (husband  or  wife) 

tO/IOIJ 

waJag 

stone 

po/ikek  or  bdnkili 

btiinara 

to  strike 

kiakia,  kaigu 

u'd/an 

strong 

vunal 

iraibaff 

summer 

pantU  ot  panO  I 

irai 

sun 

kiiubul 

till  mill 

swan 

watpuli 

bdmbinya 

to  swim 

porei 

pdmirgal,  gdinwal 

tall 

jfiirmali 

banmmara 

to  tear 

buloinkoro 

daraij 

thig.1 

koUli 

winaydna 

to  think 

kcUearip 

kale 

throat 

wdmara 

wdmar 

throwing-stick,  lever 

ti/nkdnbetn 

pityar 

thumb 

mblo 

miiriibardi 

thunder 

Ifirn/i 

bdnddra 

to  tie 

pirii 

bira 

tired 

katnl 

kdtal 

tobacco 

takin 

tdlain 

tongue 

tera,  punturu 

trap  or  yirap 

tooth 

koi/og 

pump 

town  or  camp 

kolai 

mdtan 

tree,  wood 

tokol 

keri 

true 

nupi'/i 

naltinbira 

to  try,  to  measure 

pilapai 

giilgiin. 

valley,  pit 

tarakcl 

bapil 

vein 

138 


510 


P  il  I  L  O  L  O  O  Y. 


K  A  M  I  I.  A  R  A  I. 

miiJanuili 

ptUro,  kokoiii,  kaliy,  j/ero, 

IHitog 
tit  ml 
kiniiy 
ircjx,  ifibi 
korn 
fnkdiu 
Diiniki 
nokag 
I'-opara 
intirakcen 


W  I  R  A  D  l>  R  G  I. 

Kurai,  giiip 
mu/amuJdp 
kulitj 

yiiruii 

f-nra 

kiriir 

ilirihhril 

/m/mij,  Ixiludai 

vjiiriiuii 

imir 

ii/;af,  Mfiurpau,  iiarmatj 

niikigay,  inugiijiay 


voice,  language 
to  vomit 
water 

well,  not  sick 

wot 

wind 

win(lpi|H!  (also,  reed) 

wintLT 

wise,  skilful 

woman 

young  man  (unmarried) 

young  woman  (unmarried) 


SENTENCES. 


TiiK  (blldwing  sentences  nro  from  the  some  aourccs  aa  the  grnnimnrs.  Tlioy  will  scrvi' 
to  cxcmplily  thi)  rules  which  nre  given  in  llin  precnding  pnges,  nnil  will  illualrnto  many 
peoiilinrilics  oC  construction,  which  cnn  only  be  lenrncd  Ironi  example.  The  literal  or 
interlinear  translation  of  the  KAmilnrai  is  Inkon,  with  somo  olterntions,  Irom  Mr.  Threl- 
keld's  Grammar  ;  for  that  of  the  VViradurei  wo  arc  responsible,  and  cnn  hardly  expoii 
that  it  will  be  found  entirely  free  from  error.  Where  the  meaning  of  a  word  has  not 
been  [K'rleclly  understood,  (or  Ix'lieved  to  be  so,)  no  translation  of  it  is  given.  Those 
connective  particlia,  nnd  similar  words,  of  freipient  occurrence  in  these  languages,  for 
which  no  corresponding  terms  exist  in  English,  have  an  asterisk  under  them  in  the  literal 
version.  The  importance  of  these  particles  in  tln!  grammatical  system  of  the  Australian 
dialects,  is  very  evident  from  the  examples  which  follow. 


KAMILARAI. 

Piin  ke  hi?     Hatoa,  B- 

who    »  thou        I 
Han  ke  trtii  1  vnoa  ? 

who   •  this       that 
Kore  uni;  nuktrp  vnoa 

man  this    woman  that 
Minarig  ke  iinif 
what      *    this 
Warui  ta  uni 

spear    *  this 
Minaripko  k'  unoa? 

what  for     •    that 
Turvliko 
spcoring  lor 


W  in  AOUIl  EI. 

BIMrLE  NOMINATIVK  CASK. 

niintli  va-)ir/it?  Utulu,  B — 

who      #  thou         I 
UiuiiU  ijiilif  yanaj 

who      this      that 
Gibir  yiili ;  iiiar  yana 

man    this  woman  that 
Miiiaij  i)ii/i  ba! 

what    this   • 
Tutu  Iki  ijan 
spear  *  this 
Minatjgu  ha  yila  1 
what  for    •    that 
Tiirilifiu 
spearing  for 


Who  art  thou  T     It  is  I, 

Who  is  this?  that? 

This  is  a  man  ;  thot  is 

o  woman. 
What  is  this  ? 

It  is  a  spear. 

What  is  that  for  f 

To  s|H.'nr  with. 


ACTIVR  NOMINATIVE. 


lianto  hill  wiya? 

who  thee    told 

Nimroa  tia  iviyii 

he      mc  told 


ndndu  nyal  yi  ? 

who      thee  told 
Gain  nal  yi 

he    me  told 


Who  told  thee  \ 
Ho  told  me. 


fil2 


PHI  LO  I.UO  Y. 


K  A  M  I  I.  A  R  A  I. 

ntili  noil  tilt  trii/ii 
thin    he   me   tiilil 
/?(//«  IkiiiiiIdii  till  ii-ii/ii 
this       k\w      1110  told 
fhi/i  mil  II  III  iiniii 
this     he    thin  iimil<> 
Miiiiiri]/kii  ItiH  hunkiilil  till 

whiit       him    Hlriick  dead 
XiiKi'  ijkii.     Vitiiliiiiiiiko 
Wcimnn         nicHm.'iigiT 
Wiikiinlu  mimiiin  laluiif 

crow        what       I'ntd 
Mimirigko  uiikiui  tittun 

whnt         crow     cuts 
NugUnto  till  jiitni-iiiaii 
song      inc  gind  makes 


Kn/iiito  till  Imiikiilii  wokatinto 
stick    me    struck  abovc'from 


niDiumlni  noil  inii  yiniill 
whoso       ho  this     son 

ElllOlllll/xt  til 

mine  it 
nnlikolxi  hm 
this  -  of  »  ho 
HIiii(iri//kij/Ki  II  III 

whnt  -  of  this 
Wiiiita-knl  liarn  f 
where  •  of    they 


Enfglantl-kal  Ixira 
England    of  they 
BuiKii-kiil 
to-day  of 

Makorokoba  ta  irni  jfirog 

fish's         •   this  blood 

Governor-kai  kill  Imp 

governor's      of    I 

Governor-vm/ia  baj/ 

governor's        I 


W  I  R  A  I)  II  R  R  I. 

Iliili  fiibiru  iiiil'i/i' 
this     man    nw  told 
Hiili    iiiani    mil  i/t 
this    wiimaii  mo  told 
lliili  ffuiii  tjiiiiii  i/iiiii  nif 
this     ho      that    lliis  mailo 
Miiiftiitii  j/iii  Imlii-liuiii  Ixi 
what     him  (load  struck  • 
hull  II.      H'ii/kiiii/h 
woman    niosstMigor 
Miiii/iiij  u-iigiiiiitii  tiiljiif 

what         cniw       eats 
Miiiiliilii  tii/iii  ivugimf 

what      oats      crow 
hii/iiiiiliiii/i/ii/it  nil/  fiiiUig- 
singing  niu     gInd 

l/i/iiii/ii 
niiikos 
Miiiliiiiilii  hiiiiiliii  j^itiau-aJguri 
stick      struck     mv- above 
ituriiii  II  iiiU 
hit     •  mo 

OKNITIVI. 

riiiijfiu  iiriiiiidii  1)11111  bat 
whose      son        this    • 
Ihiili   liinl  Ixiiu  Hit 
mine  indoi'd  •      it 
r/i««j.'«  /a  ijin 
this. of   «    he 
Miiiifiiiiffu  hi  ijiiiii  Ixi 

what  of     •    this   • 
Mini/iitj  >jiiiii)'iilia  piriimUtr). 

what        thoy  country 

gun  f 
of 
Iliiinpiliu  built  Englittul-gan   They  are  English 

they  •      England   of 

Da/iiiigii  hala  na 
to.day-of    •      it 
lliiiii  Ixila  fiiidn  gm/iigu 
this       •    blotsl     fish's 
Cioreninr-birag-gii-tii  fxipgaigu 

governor's       of   I    placc-of 
Govenior-gii  Ixila-tii 

governor's       •      1 


This  nun  told  mo. 

This  woman  told  mo. 

This   is   ho  who   mado 

this. 
What  killed  him  ? 

Tho  woman  did.     The 

messenger  did. 
What  docs  the  crow  eat  t 

What  is  it  that  eats  tho 

crow  t 
Tho  song  doliglits  mv. 


Tho  slick   fell    from 
above,  and  struck  me. 


Whose  son  is  this  t 

It  is  mine. 

Ho  is  this  man's. 

To  what  docs  tliis  be- 
long f 

Of  what  country  are 
they  T 


Recent :  of  the  present 

day. 
This  is  the  bi'xxl  of  a 

fish. 
I  belong  to  tho  govef' 

nor's  place. 
I  belong  to  the  governor. 


* 

• 
• 

• 

A  U  H  T  R  A  M  A. 

518 

K  X  M  1  1.  A  K  A  I, 

W  I  H  A  D  U  R  K  I. 

'                                                     Murorojfko/Ki  korrMid 

Mariii)  fiihirnu 

llolong  lo  a  good  man. 

good  •  of      man  •  uf 

giXHl     miin-ol' 

UATIVK  otn. 

Mitkoro  hi   Dutca 

Ctiiifit  giinfia 

Give  the  fiih. 

fiiih    thou  nivn 

(l.sh      niv(! 

wlinm  •  lo        rlilcf.  to 

Uiiii^iu  III .'  (tiiiimiilliiinnH  a  f 
\vhiiiii-lo»          lender  •  lo        • 

To  whom?  to  the  chief? 

Krau'iii,     ijiiolnj     In 

Wiriii,  ffiii/iiii(in-nii-f;ii 

No,  for  thyself. 

no         tlittvlor  only 

no             sell',  thy  •  I'or 

Karai  tin  puira  rmoii  ^  tdki/iko 

liaiiiu)  li  ijiifimi  tiiliffii 

Give  mo  flesh  lo  ml. 

flesh  mo  give  inr  •  for  ont  •  to 

lle.sh    inn  ^Ive    ent  •  lo 

Yuriff  III  tfii/ii  iii/iknn  i/.kinko 

UifiniilKiln,  ijiiiiii  ijiKin 

Bcotf!  go  to  him! 

' 

awny  ihoii  k"         l>in>  ■  'o 

ili'pnrl         pp    lo  him 

tlimkinko?     Pinintlnkol 

Hiinioiilii  III  >   (I'hiiniiUtiiinifit 

To  whom?  to  the  chief! 

whom  -  to          chief,  to 

whom.to    •           lender  .to 

# 

Wontanyf 

7W^'i/  III  liiiyf;iil)<ii  > 

VVhiihcr? 

«*                                                 whrn-  -  lo 

whni    *    plaee .  lo 

Miiliiliinlm-kako 

lJiriniliiiiif;u 

ToNVwcnslln(N.a.W.), 

lo  Xruvitsl/e 

to  Willui;iliin 

lo  Wellington  Vnllcy, 

Engliiiiil-knko 

Enuliiii'Ifm 

&c. 

lo  Kngliind 

lo  I'^ii^lnnd 

ACXrUIATIVR  CAKK. 

naiitn     Ikin      bmikvla      tfti 

Uniiilii  i)iii  /mill  hinii? 

Who  killed  him? 

who       him       sniolo      dead 

who     him  dead  smoto 

kiilicun? 

sliir 

niiniiiipf     liirakinnap 

TliDiili  In  1     Biriilxm 

Whom  ?     nirnbftn. 

whom            nirnbaii 

whom    •            B — 

Hiilod  lidn   tiira 

Tifulii  ijin  III  lit   iKiltt 

It   wns   I   who  speared 

I      him  speared 
Turii     Imn  Ihhj 
spcnred  him    I 
Kailiiila  lion  iioii  n.  Hannuy  1 

call  her  whom 

Onv))  yoij  uiiatnu)/  yukur) 
there  yonder  IhnI  woman 
MiDikii/i  kora  tnioamnj 

lake       not        that 
Mara   hi   unonnny 
take  thou     that 


I       him  speared  • 
Hinlii  Ijin  tuni 

I      hima|)cnred 
Uliiijga-ini.     Uandi  la  ha  ? 

call .  hor        whom   »    • 
nana   iiiar   ganiiin 
thot    woman   there 
Karia  i'(iiji,;<i  ijila 
not      lake    that 
nindu  pilii  gaijiia 
thou    that    take 
129 


him. 
I  s|)eared  him. 

Coll  her.     Whom? 

That  woman  there. 

Do  not  take  that. 

Take  that. 


i     ,! 


514 


PHILOLOGY. 


K  A  M  I  L  A  R  A  I. 

Mara  unti-kal 
tnke  this  of 
Makoro  tia  yiiica 

fish  mc  give 
Ufinirn  Immig 
give -will  I- thee 
Puntimdn  tia  baran 

throw      mc  down 
Makoro   hi   tiirn/a  waraito 

fish    thou  s|)car  spcar-wiih 
Tibin   bi     btitra    muskct-to 
bird   tliou  strike  musket-with 


Wii/ala  fwn 
tell      him 
Wii/a/a     bininj 

tell     thou  •  him 
Biinkula  tia.     Wonne  1 

struck     me        where 
Wolup  tia  )ioa  wirea 
head    me   he      hit 
Miniiriij   bo         bali  u-ii/ald  ? 

what    indeed  we  -  two    sny 
Hunto  unoanvij  umvnvn 
who       that       make  -  will 


£Za  /  kaai     taniin     tintiko 
Ho!    come  approach  hither 
Wau  !  kaai  !  kaai !  karakai 
Ho!     come    come     hasten 


BovykalinuH  wal  bay  tcaita 
arise-will  *  I  depart 
bijiu  ijlxiitako        cnionytxiko, 

father  -  to  my  •  to, 

fOliin  u^i/unun  wal       lion, 
and    say  -  will     •     to  him, 
Biyuy,    yarakai  bap    umii 
father  evil  I        did 

mikiin    ta  morokoka  yatun 
presence  •  heaven  -  to   and 
piroinjkin 
thcc  •  to 


W  I  R  A  D  U  R  E  I. 

Gapga  giilbir   yidi 

take      some  of  this 
Gin/a   li    ijiir/gu 
fish     me    give 
Ihulu  -  7tti  wari    pupgiri 
I    -    thee      *       give-will 
Wanaii  l>ala  nal 
thrown    •      ine 
Gw/a  turn  tiilii  •  (hiratii 
fish    s|)oar  spear  -  with 
Dibilaiii   biriiniba    barima- 
bird  shoot       musket  - 

duratii 
with 
Hala  pin 
tell     him 
nindii  j/iw  t/ald 
thou    him  tell 
Buman  bala  nal.       Vitga  Id  ? 
struck     •      me       where  • 
Balaijga  nal  guiii   burnt 
hend-on    me     he     struck 
Mint/aUi  li  i/ali     pali    ba  ? 

what      *  say  we  •  two  # 
ndndu  wari  mara  •  malgiri 
who       •     make-will  (pin 
understood.) 

VOCATIVE  CASE. 

Ya !  padii  yera   tain   yatid 
Ho !       I      say  hither  come 
Ya !    baroharai    tain    yana  I 
Ho !       quick      hither   come 
bunlmtiUd  ! 
hasten 
Bnrapgari  -  di/ii    wuri    yana- 
ai 'so -will      I  *         go- 

g,  'i  -  ih/u  •  bu  bal/ifidi/a  •  ti, 
will  -  I  also  father  •  to,  my 
yalgiri  -  hu  pagieala,  Ya 
say  -  will -also  him -to  O 
B<ibi)ii/yi,  padu  wilidyal 
father  •  my,       I  before 

pi/ii/iinda  wamap 

thee  -  to       evil 
malgiinain 
did. 


Take  some  of  this. 
Give  mo  fish. 
I  will  give  to  thee. 
I  am  thrown  down. 

Spear  the  fish  with  the 

spear. 
Shoot  the  bird  with  the 

musket. 

Tell  him. 

Tell  thou  him. 

I  am  struck  '    Where  ? 

He  struck   mo  on   the 

head. 
What  shall  we  two  say  ? 

Who  will  make  thatl 


I  say,  come  hither ! 

Come    quickly ;    make 
haste. 


I  will  arise  and  will  go 
to  my  father,  and  will 
say  to  him,  Father, 
I  have  done  evil  [be- 
fore heaven  and]  be- 
fore thee. 


AUSTRALIA. 


516 


kAmilarai. 

Koaktian  bara 
quarrelling  they 
ndiikai  ? 
whom  -  about  1 
Uii/ikai  kan ! 

whom  -  about  indeed 
Minaiiijtin  1  Mituiriptin 
what  ■  about  what  -  about 
ktm  ! 
indeed 
Makorig    yatan      koretin 
fish  -  about  and     man  •  about 

lidnkin-biruy   uni pun- 
whom  -  from      this  mes- 
timai  1 
senger? 
Jckovaka  -  birap,  Piriwola  - 
Jehovah  -  from .      chief - 
biruij 
from 
Wontaka-hirup  noa? 
where  -  from       he 


Wokaka-birap  morokokabirap 
above  •  from      heaven  -  from 

Miitarig-Mrvg  utwa  umii? 
what .  from      that  made 

Kolaibirup.     Brass-birup 

wood  •  from      brass  -  from 

Yurig  hiwala  emoupkin-birop 

awny  thou  go         me  -  fnm 

Ye/iiicala    bi    emoap.katoa 
sit       thou     me  -  with 

Dan-katoa  bountxxi, 

whom  •  with    she 

Nani-katoa  ba 

Nanny  -  with  * 

Woiitii-kaloa  noa  uwa 
whrro-by      he  went 

Kormj-ktxi 
bush '  by 


WIRADUREI. 


ABLATIVE  CASX. 


naiiigiilia guondiltUaigmiana  They  are  quarrelling. 

they  quarrelling 

ndnundi      bai?  About  whom? 

whom  -  about   * 


Banundi 


ga! 


Whom  -  about  ihdeed 
Minyali    ba  ?  Miin/ali 


ga! 


what  about  »  what  about  indeed 


i   do    not    know  about 

whom. 
About  what?     I   know 

not. 


About  the  fish  and  the 
men. 


Guyadi,       gibirbandi  or 
fisli-about      men  ■  about 

(gibirga/atidi). 
nanundi      pina    walandti 
whom  -  from   this     messenger 

buogi;  ? 
came 
Joba-di,  Ginimaltaindi    From  Jehovah,  the  King, 

Jehovah  •  from   leader  -  from. 


From  whom  is  this  mes- 
senger ? 


7\idi      pin     tain      bapgcdi 
whence    he      here  place  -  from 

buoge ? 
come 
Munibiri      patinvahjiiri 
heaven  -  from  above  -  from 
Minyali      pin  hiinmdn  ? 
what  -  from  that     made 
Matandi.     GunihaUuK 
wood  -  from  metal  ■  from 
BinimlxUd  pantindi 

depart      me  -  from 
Widi/a  panunda-durei 

sit  me  -  with 

Handi-ditrei  gara  na  ba? 
whom  with       »    she   « 
Ntuii-durdta  na 
Nanny  -  with  she 
Widi/mj-purgu  pin  yanain? 

whrro  -  by       he      went 
Uruin   biramali 
through     bush 


Whence  did  he  come  ? 

From  heaven  above. 

Of  what  is  that  made  ? 

Of  wood.  Ofmetul,  &c. 

Go  away  from  me. 

Sit  with  me. 

With  whom  is  she  ? 

She  is  with  Nanny. 

Which  way  did  he  go  ? 

Through  the  bush  (fo- 
rest). 


mlS^^^i^A 


516 

KAMILARAI. 

Kt^irda  bay  uwa 
house  -  by  I  came 
Wonuy  ke  wurubilt 
where    •     cloak 
Biraliiin-kinba 

at  Biraban's 
Onti-tinto.    Onta-tinto 
here  -  from     there  -  from 


Minnn       koretatuinba? 
how  -  many  man  come    * 


Wnkol  Ix)  ta  noa  tandti  ba 
one    only  #    he   comes  » 

KMirdn   bo  ta 
few      only  * 

Til)into  noa  tatdn 
bird      he    eats 

Ha/i  noil  tihiiito  ])it(in 

this     he     bird    drinks 

Uni  tara  I'Mn  bi  bunkula  teti 

these  they  bird  thou  smote  dead 


Ilintoa  bo  ta  vnoa  kore 
thou    only  *    that  man 

Yakmii  noa  maiijiiko  putinun, 
how    ho       snake        bite 
teti  koa  kamcil  kore  ? 
dead  for  may  be  man 

Tirako  ijikoumbako 

teeth  ■  with  his  -  with 


PHILOLOGY. 

WIRADUREI. 
Padu  piriage  milmadi 

I       passed  house •  by 
Ti-gara  badi/uunj 
where        cloak 
Biratmn-lnrayga 

at  Biraban's 
Hklila     IxiggaH. 

this     place  -  from 

b<ipga/i 

place  -  from 


I  came  by  the  house. 


Where  is  the  skin-cloak? 

At  Biraban's. 

nidiala  From  this  place.    From 
that  that  place. 


J 


Mini/(ir/dn   gibrigal   buogara  How    many    men    are 
how -many   man -of      come         coming? 
ba? 


IJunbai  gibrigal  bial  buogara 

one      man -of  only  comes 
nunltai-t/unUi  bial.  [Gulbir'\ 

few  only      some 

Dibiluntu  tdlgi 

bird        eats  (habitually) 
/?('««  ilibilain  yagu  u-uli/era 
Ms       bird       that    drinks 
ninagului  dibilain  yana  yimlii 

these         bird      that   thou 

Ixila-buiii 

dead  -  smote 
Hint/u  gild  la  gUrir  lid  bial 
thou    indeed  •   man   •  only 
Wifli/iiyiilug   turiiygu  bcUalgi 
how  snake        bite 

halu-biiiitaligu? 

dead  •  strike  -  to 
Iray-giin-durdtu 
teeth  -  his  -  with 


Only  one  man  is  coming. 
Only  a  few. 
The  bird  eats. 

This   is   the    bird    that 

drinks. 
These  are  the  birds  that 

you  killed. 

Thou  art  the  man. 

How  does  the  snake  bite 
in  order  to  kill  ? 

With  his  teeth. 


Wibi  uni  kauwol  kutan 
wind  this    great       is 

KauMan,  kauwul  lay  uni 
yes,        great     •    this 

Kapirdn  bay  kntdn 
hungry     I       am 


THE  NEUTER  TEKB. 

Murowal  b<da  girar 
great        #     wind 
Hd,   walanbdy 
yes,  strong  -  very 
Ginigal  Udd-tu 
hungry      •     I 


It  is  a  high  wind. 
Yes,  very  strong. 
I  am  hungry. 


I 


K  A  M  I  I.  A  R  A  I. 

Pan  unli  kutAn 
who  here  lives 
Bara  bo  unli  kvtan 
they  only  he     live 


Kiakia  bap  kakeii  n  vni  yorokan 

conqueror  I    was   this  morning 

Bvka  Img  kakvla 

angry    I       was 

Kumba  hay  kaken  Sydney-ka 

to-morrow  I  shali-be  Sydney-at 


Konap.  ta  vni  murorin) 
will  -  be   •  this     good 
i?o«  ke  kiakia      kunanl 
who  *   conqueror  will  -  be 


AUSTRALIA. 

WIRADUREI. 

natttli  yini  hi  u-igi 
who     here  *  lives 
Danaingulia       giiyugan-guy 
thoy  selves  -  their 

pini  wigi 
here  live 
Balatit  tvari  waratiiriiidnHi 

#    I      •  con()»('rpd  -  to  -  day 
Hculu  man  tvari   lalai-biiap 
I         •        ♦    angry  -  very 
Jlatlu     Sydney-dya     gipaiia- 
I  Sydney  -  at     shall  -  be 

uagiii 
to-morrow 
ni?ia  gilti  wdri  marup  pipgiria 
this     *       *       good    will  -  be 
Hundi  warnliirulyain  pipgiri 
who         conqueror       will  -  be 
ba? 


617 


Who  lives  here? 

They    themselves     live 
here. 


I    was    conqueror    this 

morning. 
I  was  angry. 

1  shall  be  at  Sydney  to- 
morrow . 


This  will  be  good. 
Who  will  bt!  conqueror? 


Muka    noa  teli  kunun 
perhaps   he  dead  will  -  be 
Kabo  Imp  kuMin    Sydney-ka 
soon    I    shall  •  be  Sydney  -  at 


Kunun  bap  tarai  ta  yekna-ka 
shall  -  be  I  another  •  moon  -  in 


Kaiyu  kan  bap 

able    indeed    I 
Kaiyu  korien  bap 

able       not       I 
Wirofmlikdti  bara  pikonmba 
followers      they    him  -  of 


Pirapird  bara  kakilin  unteli- 
tired  they  becoming  dancing- 
tin 
by 

Wunul  uni  kakilin 

summer  this  becoming 


Ydmaga  balu  p\n  pipgiri 
perhaps  dead  he  will  -  be 
Guoguaiu-tu  wari  Sydney-dya 

soon        I      •      Sydney  -  at 

pipgarigiri 
shall  -  be 
Uinibai  giiola  giwapga-tu  wari 

one     other  moon  -  in  - 1     • 

pipgiri 

shall  -  be 
I^adu  walan  bala 

I      strong    # 
Wirai  n-alan  liald-tu 

not     strong    #     I 
Haingulia  turu/galtaingalap- 

they  followers - 

gu  Id 

his  • 
Wagapiilynlu  paingiilui 

dancing  them 

maluhungambira 
tires 
Yireilxip  buogalgunana 
summer      is  -  coming 

ISO 


Perhaps  he  will  be  dead. 

By-and-bye  I  shall  be  in 
Sydney. 


In  another  moon  I  shall 
be. 


I  am  powerful. 

I  am  weak. 

They  are  his  followers. 


The   dancing    is    tiring 
them. 


Summer  is  coming. 


518 


PHILOLOGY. 


K  A  M  I  L  A  R  A  I. 

Storc-kaba  kakilin    liountoa 
store -nt    is -living      she 
Kapiri  hiy  kakiliria 
hungry    I        was 
Musket  tia  katdlti  Si/i/nei/-ka 
musket  me    was    Sydney  -  at 
Kiiitii      l>ay     ktUMi,     yckita 
afraid         I  was         now 

ken  uai 
not 
(hita  Ixiy  kattila   ijuraki  Eiig- 
there     I      lived  formerly  Kng- 
land-ka 
land  -  in 
Mdrtm  noa        kakilhwn 
alive     he  will-continuc-being, 
titi-korien 
dead  -  not 
Wild     kakilihn     varfa 
wind  is  •  lieeoming  small 
Hatai.   /h) 

I      only 
Knkillan  bali     Immtoa 

live  .  toijethcr  we .  two      she 


Yaknai  binj  Mi  k(imirnf>iiiini 
how        I    dead  let  -  te  ■  shall 
/h>/i 
him 
Kakiliii-kfKi  Ixi/i 

niay-rernain-that  wo-t\vo 

mi  not 
peaceful 
Mani  noa  kaleakan 
sick     he    is -again 
Yauoa,  minii  koa  noa  kateii- 
do -not,    sick     lest    he    may - 
kini 
be 
Muni  kuntin  buy  Ihi 
sick  shall -be    I      if 
Han  ke   Mi         kiihiaiijd 
who   •  dead  being  •  near  -  was 


w  I R  A  I)  i;  n  E  I. 

Stdr-ra    na  mfjitnamiiia 
store. at  she     is-  living 
Ginigal  btild-tii  ijiiii 
hungry      *     I   here 
Barirna  Imld-dyi  Si/ihiei/.di/ii 
musket      •  mine  Sydney -at 
nrn/it   girlf-iaiiigi,    wiiai-aiii 
I        afraid  •  was,       not  - 1 
yaiitiil 
now 
Hculu    nuin    wisiiniigi    pant 
1  #  lived        there 

Eiighind-tla 
England  ■  in 
Hill   miiriiii    irigigii   yumbul 
he       alive      live -to    always 
bu  wirai  lialu-niimigiri 
also   not     dead    ?  will 
Girar  hiilxii  yitidf/iiiinya 
lillle    wind    growing -is 
Iladii  giti/iiydn 

I        indeed 
Na        yaliguna         niiinin- 
she       us -two -of        alive- 

yamigiri 
stay  -  together-  will 
Wiilyii-yiini-lii      yina-gulinj 
what  -  by       I      that  -  through 
muti  IkiIii  guy 
make  dead  him 
niudi-r/i/u  gamayga       yiili 
wish  - 1  wo  -  two 

yaliiligu 


She  is  living  at  the  store. 
I  was  hungry. 

I  had  a  musket  at  Syd- 
ney. 

I  used  to  be  afraid,  but 
am  not  now. 

I  used  to  live  in  England. 


He  is  going  to  live  for 
ever,  and  not  die. 


The  wind  is  lessening. 

It  is  I  myself. 

She  and  I  will  live  to- 
gether (marry). 


How  shall   I  cause   his 
death  1 


I  wish  that    you  and  1 
may  be  at  |>eacc. 

He  is  sick  again. 


Hin  iygil  yiiilinya 
he    sick  is  -  again 
Kdria,  ya  yiu  iiigil  yiygiri      Do  not,  lest  he  be  ill. 
do -not,  or    he    sick  will -bo 


Ya/itu-tu  iygil  malay  yini         If  I  should  be  sick. 

if      I    sick  should    be 
Ilandi  isara  yidaiman  /xi/uui    Who  nearly  died  ! 
who  almost      died 


K  A  MI  LARA  I. 

Titi  Ixip       knmaiga 
dead    I    Ijeing-ncur- was 
Piriwiil  M   ba      kajxi     pitol 
chief    Ihou  if  hadst-bccn  ylnd 

paii/a  /aij    ktijm 

then      I   liad  -  been 
Kapa  hi    hi    vuta    yoro- 

had-lK'fn    Ihou  if    there    this  - 

k<in    III,    mijm  yiiii/ii  /xiinnj 
morning*  hud-se<?n  then  I-lhee 


Koni II  kiiiiwa,  tiinkii/e  koia 

qiiiel       lie  wail      not 

Kaki/it    nurii  jnliil-kiikiliko 
continue    ye     glnd     to-be 
Muron  Ixti:  kniiw nbi/d 

alive    him      let -be 
Kauirii    III     teti  kakiliko 

yes,     thou  dead     to-  bo 
Kiimiiii/n/iiiu  tuiiiinj  piriirnl 

be  -  let  -  will     I  -  thee     chief 
kakiliko 
to  -  lie 
Piiiunl    hi      kuUiikii 

chief     thou  Ik'  -  again 
I'iriuiil  Utii  kiimiiiiihiiji  kora 

chief    hiui      let  •  Ik;        not 


Mimiriijliii    hiliki   hiiiikula? 

what .  liir  he  -  thee   struck 

Oni      hiilnii      hiinkiila  noa 

these  them  •  two  struck     ho 


nauninj  hiinkiila/ 

whom      struck 
IVii/iUa   hi  till,  miipaii/i  koni 
lell      thou  mc    conceal     not 
Halt  111)11  tia  hiinkiita 
this    he   me    struck 
Miiiiirii/ko     hilod     Imnkulii  ? 
what  -  with  IhiH!  •  ho     struck 


AUSTRALIA. 

WIRADUREI. 

IJ I  III  II  jsiirii  iiiilaiman  haliini 

I  almost       died 

Umitii-vilu   pipua   pini  king 

if     Ihou     been    wast 

gii'ap  fiila-iii  pipfia  pilinyi 

glad    then  - 1   \wvn 
YiuilK-iiilu  ijaiiiila  pipKii  piili/i 

if-  Ihou       there     lx;en    this 

pill  ill  pitiii  Hiiiliii)  iiilii  tiijah 
morning  saw  should  then  Ihec- 

tii 
I 
Tilmiip  gipga,  km  in  i/itpga 

quiet        Ih'    do -not    cry 
Dingii  piiiilii^irhinj  gaiiiapgu 

Ik!  ye  peace  -  in 

Miiriin  pin  ii-iii  haii 
alive    liini  live   let 
Ha  Imliiiigiri     vuiii-idi 
yes    di(^-\vill   surely -Ihou 
n imii iiihi/i: i ri-ili/ii-  II II  king 
he-  let  -  will- 1  -  thee 

pipgi 

to  Ik! 
King  ijiiiliili/a 
be  -  agiiin 
Kariu  pin  king  piiniimhia 

noi     lu.M  let  •  be 

V't/gi 
to-be 

ACTIVK  VKRRa. 

Wnrgulniga  nyiil  giiin  hiimf?  Why  did  lie  beat  you  ? 

what  -  for     thee      he     struck 
IHiiana      hnia      puna    guin  These  are  the  two  that 


519 


I  was  near  dying. 

If  thou  hadst  been  king, 
I  should  have  been 
pleased. 

If  thou  hadst  been  Ihcre 
this  morning,  I  should 
have  seen  thee. 


He  quiet,  d(j  not  cry. 

Be  at  peace  you. 

Let  him  live. 

Yes  you  are  lo  die. 

I  will  permit  thee  to  b<' 
king. 

Be  king  again. 

Let  him  not  be  king. 


these     they  •  two  that       ho 

hunii' 

struck 
Uaiiili  giirn  Inimdn  ? 

who  struck 

Yiilii-nnl,  karia    gnniip-pa 

lell    lue   do  .  not     conceal 
Hind  III  II  Hiigii  mil  liiinie 

this     he    that    me  struck 
Miniiiitf-iliiintii  nijal  huinil 
what  ■  with      thee  struck 


he  struck. 


Who  was  struck  \ 

Tell  me,  do  not  conceal 

it. 
This  is   he  that   struck 

me. 
With  what  did  he  strike 

you  ! 


l! 


,  \ 


520 


PHILOLOGY. 


KAMILARAl. 

Miitaro      j/ikotrmltako 
hand -with    his -with 
DuwU  koa  hon  kaii/a  korien 
strike  would  him    nble      nut 

I 

Kotira  hi  tia  yitira     hiiwil 
cud^rl  thiiii  nip   give  may  •  beat 

koa  /ion  btig 

that  him    I 
BumlHi  hold     lion      liaij, 

had -struck  surely  him        I, 

iionio     /Kip  Ixi  kintii    kan 
but         I      *    afraid  indeed 

kttkii/a 
was 
Bunkeun  hon  hap 

striiok  -  to-day  him    I 
Biinun       hon  Imx)       kaJio 
strike -will    I    him    presently 
BunkilailHin  kora  nura 

strike  -  one  ■  another  not     ye 


Biinkilin      hon  liara  yakita 
are  -  boating  him  they    now 


Bunkiliilii   hon  haij  tanan 
was  •  bt'titing  him  I  approaching 
hi      Ihi     uwa 
thou  when  came 
Buntahi  tia  bara  u-onai  liam-ha 
beat     me  they  child     I      • 


Bunkililin  noa  trheat 

bf^ating  •  continually    he 
Danlio      nura      hunkiliin 
who  only    ye     fight  -  together 


BiiKh'fvila  bara    ho   bara 

fought  -  together  they  only  they 
ho 

only 


WIRAPUREI. 

Mara-fiiiratu-pup-f.'u  With  his  hand, 

hand- with  -  his  -  with 

Bumara  nudap  pln-diju  urirai  \  would  strike  him,  but 
strike     Aould   him  - 1      not         am  not  able. 
ba/ii-Zii   mal 
*     I     able 
/7iif/j     viui/iititn)     hitmalia-tu  Give  me  a  cudgel,  thot  I 
give  -  me  cudgel    may  -  beat  - 1        may  beat  him. 
pin 
him 
Bumf      maJay-'jai      gin-(/i/u  I  should  certainly  have 
struck     should  -  have    him  - 1         struck  him,  but  I  was 

fiiihi/anii/afu  afraid, 

afraid  -  was  -  but  - 1 


Bafa  pin-flifH  humalmrini 
*     him    I    struck -to-day 
Guaiu-tu     pin   hitmalgiri 
presently  - 1  him  strike  -  will 
Karia-iulugir  hutnii/aigu- 
do-not-yc    be -striking -one - 
nala 
another 
Bumalaitagunti na  pin 
are  -  now  -  lieating  him 
guingulia  bial 
they      indeed 
Bumalgunani  pin-dipi 
was  l)eating    him    1 
yantunilu    buone 
when  thou  earnest 
Gudngulia  mil  humi  yantu-tu 
they        me    beat    when  - 1 
utiijgai  pint 
child     was 
Yiira   muiiira  giiin 
wheat  threshes     he 
nandu  gara   vyunda  baJnga 
who  with -thee      * 

humalana 
fighting-  together 
riaingulia  bumalattgunani 
they    were  fighting  together 


I   have   beat    him    this 

morning. 
I  will  strike  him  by-and- 

bye. 
Do  not  be  striking  one 

another. 


They  ore   beating   him 
now. 


I  was  beating  him  when 
yuu  came. 

They  beat   me  when  I 
was  a  child. 

He  is  threshing  wheat. 

Who  are  fighting  with 
you  ? 


They     fought     among 
themselves. 


A  U  H  T  a  A  I,  I  A. 


531 


K  A  M  I  L  A  R  A  I. 

BiinkiUila  Ixdi        jimi 

fought  -  together  we  -  two      I 

Biilaiwonai  txili    noa   hi 
U —  child  wo -two  1  when 
Buiikilviiun  hula 
will .  fight     they 
YaiKxi  liunkiyi  kora 
do  not    strike     not 
liiDikitiiiktn  ball 

will  -  light  -  to-morrow   we  -  two 

Tioa  kiiinlHi 

he         to-morrow 
nakouiita  kc  lutra  bunkiliimin 

when       »  thuy     fight  -  will 


Kumlxi      ken  ta 

to-morrow 

Kumlxi  k'llx} 

to-morrow  presently 

Waila  -  kolai)       Ixnj  Imiikihko 

depart -nbout -to    I     smite -to 

7ni(skrtlo 

musket  -  with 
Wii/aUi  UiH    buivil      koa  Ixni 

tell      him  mny-bcat  that  him 
Buivil  bay  PaUij  -  iitry 

would  -  l)eat    I         Potty 
Yari    bi     uMinon 
not    thou  wait  -  will 

Imntiaktm        koa    bin 

may  -  not  -  l>eat  that  thee 
Blind H        noa  tia  ba   turula 
shall  -  strike  he   me  when  S(K;ar 

yaii/a     biniiij 
then  thou -him 
Bumuiijii       tia  tvonta  bay  hi 
struck  •  almost  mc    but      I     « 

mord 
ran 
Keauanin  tia     biimba, 
not         mo  had  -  struck, 

kajM       bum  hi     unti-lio 

had  -  been  1     if  here  -  only. 


W  I  R  A  D  U  R  E  I. 

YantiiMiiigan  yaliuiinn  bund- 
when      M —      wo  -  two   chil- 
giihiy,  bit niaki/aiia ig unain 
dron  used  •  to  -  fight  -  together 
linla         gam  bainalugiri 
they  -  two  will  light 

Kuria  btimd 
do-  not  strike 
Birabadiu  yin  ijaligiina 
ho    we  -  two 
bnmalaiyiiriaWHgiri 
fight  -  lo-niorrow  -  will 
Widi/injga  gitiiilu     yaiiigulia 
what  -  in  tliey 

biinialagiri 
fight  -  will 
Dani  gunny  girola 

OlIuT 

Giiogiiaiii  yiygniiaivagiii 
presently  it  -  will  -  be  lo-.norrow 
Bmimiiili  -  ili/ii     iiantitl 
musket  -  with  - 1       now 

biruviliali 

to  •  shoot 
Hin  >/nla   yin   biiinali 
him    tell     him  In -beat 
Palli/     biinidli  yindidyu 
to  -  beat    wish  - 1 
Karia  iiarainyar  yiyga 
do  -  not  bo 

biimagin  ni/ul  i/aiii 

will  -  beat  thee  else 
Yantii  giiin    nal    buvudgiri 
when      he      mc  shall  -  strike 

diirii  ijantii  yin 

spear  then   him 
Bumai   malay  -  ya    nal   yina 
struck    would  -  hnvc  me    there 

yii  ■  tu    buidmavani 

but  •  I       ran  •  away 
Wirai  nuday  -  ya  •  nal  biimiin 

not   would  ■  have  -  me  struck 

yantu-tu   wigundn   yini 
if       I   hod -dwelt  here 
131 


When  —  and  I  were 
children,  we  used  to 
light  together. 

They  two  will  fight. 

Do  not  strike. 

He  and  I  will  fight  to- 
morrow. 

When  will  they  fight? 


The  day  after   to-mor- 
row. 
By-and-bye,  to-morrow. 

I  am  going  to  shoot  with 
a  musket. 


Tell  him  to  beat  him. 

I  wish  to  beat  Patty. 

Do  not  wait,  lest  you  be 
beaten. 


When    he   strikes    me, 
spear  him. 


I  should  have  been  struck, 
but  1  ran  away. 


1  should  not  have  been 
struck  if  I  had  re- 
mained here. 


: . 


■ 


522 


PHILOLOGY. 


K  A  M  I  L  A  R  A  I. 

Yurig      bin  up       bunUdka 
away   thou  •  him  strike  -  again 
yakita 
now 
Wiijii  Imn  /xig  biimlxi, 

say    him    I         had  •  struck 
bumbii  yini/d     bi    tia 

had  -  struck  then    thou  mo 
Yari   Iwn     bunUa-kunirn 
not     him  shall  •  strike  -  again 
Bumviibia    hi    tia 
let -strike  thnu  me 


Bumrni/rifin  lion  l>ai) 

pcrmiltinif- to -strike  him     I 
Bumu nbiyi  kora    inm 

let -strike     not     him 
Bunwiihila     Iri    lia  h»i 

let  -  strike     thou  me  him 
Bunkiln  ntira 

be -striking -one -another  ye 
Wakith     bitiitt/      hiiwa 

once     tliiui  -  him   strike 
Ma    hiinliaka     tia 
do  strike -nijain  me 
BuiiiinihUa  liiiiiti)      biitcil 
let-strike     Ihnu-him  mny-striko 
kai  )ina  tin 
that  he   mc 


Yakoai,   butril   koi  Ixirun  bup 
mind  ;  may-beat  that  them     1 
Kiiita  kora  hi,  kxuraruii  bin 
afraid     nut  thou,       not       thee 

hiiiitni 
shall  -  l)oat 

Kora-koii   hi   tia  hunttui  ? 
why  -  not  thou  me  strikes! 
Biiwa    biiiin) 
strike  thou  him 
Biinkia  hiiiuii 

strike-to-morrow  thou-him 
Bunkili-tin  noa  miira 
fighting-from  he  ran-away 


WI  R  A  OUR  EI. 
Yana        bi/idi/ibUiavatii 
go      strike  -  again  -  instontly 

yin  yantiil 

him    now 
Yantii  j/ln-th/n    ijii/ga  btinu 

if      him  •  I        lK!cn  struck, 

gitol   gila    yindit  tial  piyfia 

again  then    thou    mo   been 
Karia  yin    biimtiui/iiiigii 
not     him  to  -  strike  -  again 
liumaimamhilgiiiin   yanal 
be- struck -|K!rinitted     mo 

yinilu 
thou 
Biimalmamhilsunana  yiii-dyu 
permitting  -  lo  •  strike  him  •  I 
Karia  bii  ni  aim  am  hia 

not         let -strike 
Biima/i     yiti-dyii 
to  -  strike  him  - 1 
Buiiia/ainiJiata 
be  -  striking  -  one  -  another 
Bii  ma  yiinlnita  yin  null 
strike     once     him 
liiimalaliilija  nal 
strike  -  again  me 
Bumaliiiamhia  yin   yana  nal 

let  •  strike       him    that     mc 

tien  bnmailiiliyaid- 

by-him        struck-accordingly- 

ligiri 
agnin-shalM)o 

liiirayisa  humnii  yiygiilia-tii 
away  thal-n  ,'v-beat  them  I 
Karia     fiirla,      nirni     ni/al 

not         (vi  r,         not        ihc« 

hiimtiii/inc  isiiri 
Uat-sh.'JI 
Jliiinara  /mga  ti  imhi  virai  I 
strikest    why  me  thou     nut 
Biinia  inn 
.strike  him 

Hin    hii  mill  nil  riinratn 
him  strike  lo-morrow 
Bii  m  ala  yiili/ali  bii  nbii  m  Hid  n  i 
fighting  -  from      ran  •  away 


Uo    strike    him    again 
now. 


If  I  had  struck  him,  thou 
wouldst  have  struck 
me. 

IaA  him  not  be  struck 

again. 
Thou  didst  permit  me  tu 
be  struck. 


I  am  permitting  him  to 

strike. 
Do  not  let  him  strike. 

Let  mc  strike  him. 

Continue  fighting. 

Strike,  him  once. 

Strike  me  again. 

Pormil  him  to  strike,  that 
I  may  be  Iwateii  by 
him. 


Stand  aside,  that  I  may 

l)eat  them. 
Fear  not,  thou  shall  not 

be  Ix-'otcn. 


Why  dost  thou  not  beat 

nie .' 
Strike  him. 

Strike  him  to-morrow. 

lie  ran  away  on  account 
of  the  fighting. 


AUSTRALIA. 


K  A  M  I  T.  A  R  AI. 

Kaitwiil  irnoii    hunkilikane 
great  that  striking-instnimont 


Onmi  la  noa  Imtikilikdn 
thfit    «    lie       striker 
Halt    una    buiiki/iku/ito 
this       hu  striker 

huiikiila 
struck 
Hii?ikii/e  Intra  unoa  korc 
figliter    they    that  man 


W  I  H  A  D  U  R  E  I. 

Ilanain        giira        mitrnwal  Thu  is  a  great  thing  to 


ont      that                             greot 

strike  with. 

mint/ainbul       hiomUufiigu- 

wliero-by            to -strike 

ilitnitii 

by  -  means  -  of 

nnmila  tnltuin  Imla 

That  is  the  striker. 

that      striker     • 

tid  Hhui  liillain  \jiina  mil  hume 

This  is  the  striker  that 

me     this   striker   that   mc  struck 

struck  me. 

nanaingulia  /mma/atain-galai/  They  are  the  fighters, 
they  fighters 

liala 


Tinmniiigu-tx  yanana 
hattlc-(iclJ-lo  I       go 


Wtiitii-ko/atj  /xt)j  Imiikihiitj  ill- 
depart-about-to  1   fighting-place 
kolaff 
towards 
Buntimra  fxtt/  yali-lriruy  Imh     Nal  liiimani  dijin 

struck       I      this -by    him 
Bimkiti-tin  Ixlp  kiildn  initi 
fighting-froni  I      am     hero 


I  am  going  to  the  field  of 
battle. 


I  was  struck  by  him. 


yinnlu  I  remain  here  because  of 
hero        the  fight. 


Mtini  ijeeii  kajxiii/in  hunkili- 
sick     we    sutlering   striking- 
biruy 
from 
liali  till  loa  hiiiitoaro  Imnkvla 
this  me  he   stricken      beat 


WotiuT)  ke  bara  buntoara? 
where    ♦   they     struck 
liiDitnarin  Uira    teti- 

woun(lril-l)eiiig-by    they    dead- 

kakiilii, 

l;)ccamc 


iiriiin  Wo  are  ill  through  fight- 
through       ing. 


Bit  malapuli/nli-ili/ii 
fighting  -  from     I 
vi)ii/a 
rcmoin 
/jji'i/      /lald       yinni 
sick         •  wc 

biimuliiidyali 
fighting 
Hina  viinjiir  aihir  ijdviht  nal  This  is  the  wounded  man 
this  wounded  man    who    me       who  beat  me. 
bit  me 
tent 
Til  ga  yagiiguliabumani?        Where    are    those    that 
where       those        struck 
Miiijar-milmiili         baliitii 
wounds  -  by  died 

ijfifnigiilia 
those 


Where  are  those 
were  struck  f 

They  died  of  their 
wounds. 


Miiiaiiiig  a  nwim  1    Warai  Miiii/atj  ga-vi/ii  mam  1  Tiilii  What  dost  thou  make 

what     thou  makest      spear       wliat       #  thou  makest  s|X!ar       A  spear. 
Hiitiloi'iiiumaf     Halt  nainlu  me  yiita!     Yugii         Who  made  this?     Thii 

who    this  made  this  -  one  who   made  this     this -one  ]x;rson. 


524 


I'll  I  I,  O  LOO  Y. 


K  A  M  I  I.  A  It  A  I. 

fjiintn  lid  miiioii  iimi'ntm 
will)    Mif^   alive  will  -  iniiki< 
rhiiili)     niKXi      Jill  mil      limit. 
will)        tliiit         SUM      in.iilc  I 

Jiliiivii-kn 
.Iclioviili 
Mariirojf  naa  umti 

(;no(l        lie    did 
yiittimin  u'inlit  kakitla,  iimii 

blind        Sdinn      wore,    miide 

mill  /hIiiI/i  imhilikiin 
lit-    I  hem        si'crs 
Uiiuibuii/iii/i  liorn,  liti  kixi  nun 
permil-lD-do   not  doiul  lest  lie 

kiileiikii  n 

niny  •  l)o 
Onuiiijiitii  Inig   "iii  yanikai 
nenrly-rnnde  I      this       biul 
Wiijiilii  /mil  uiiiauwil-k(>ii  iiikhi 

tell     him  miiy-iniike-llmt  tliis 
Warai   Imij    it  inn /in 
sprnr       I    niii-inukiiig 
Miriii  /nig  upnliii 
point     I    putting 
XVoiii'ij  kr  iiiinii  iiirilixiru 
where    •    point  •  iilFiNed 
Uiinitiiiiru    kiiiii/Kl-/iiriiij 

niude      yesterday-lVom 


W  I  K  A  I)  It  R  R  I. 

nniiilii  mil  iiiiiniiifrunrii/ifiri  Who  will  Have  mo  nlivof 

who      MIC       idive  will  Have 
lliiiiilii  ijiiri /iiniiiif  !     liiiduu  Who  inadi' the  NuiiT    Je- 

who      NUii     made      Jehovah       liovah. 


Jiii/ii  1:11111  iiiiinni  /iiiiimf  Ilo  did  good. 

•     he       j;i«iil        dill 

lliilliir  III  Hill  II  L'liiii  /ill  II  nil'  pii.iri  I  lo  mndo  some  who  were 
some     lilind      he    madi'tosee        blind  to  see. 


liaiia  ijiii  inali  iiialmamliiu, 

not     him  to-du   permit-to-do 
/m/iiijfiiii  i)iii  i/iiin 
will -die    he    elsi- 
Ila/ain-i/ii  wi/iii  /niiiiH'  >)ina 

nearly  - 1  tliis 

Yalii  gilt  /iitnma/ii^ii 

tell    liim    to-iimi.e 
'I'lilu  /mlii-lii  iliiii/it/ni/ftiimiiiii 
spear     *      I     niii  -  lashioning 
ISii/ii-lii  gtiiiiiiiiir  tiir/Htia 

•      1       point     shar|H'ning 
Tufiiiiii  ijdimlti gii?iiinitr-i/iirai 

wiiero     that         (Miint .  with 
Unnntii  i/iiltin  ilini/n/Hilfinnin 

that     yesterday     riifhioiied 


Do  not  permit  him  to  do 
it,  lest  ho  die. 


I  nearly  siwilod  thia. 
Tull  him  to  mako  it. 
I  am  making  a  spear. 

I  am  making  a  point  to 

it. 
Where  is  that  which  is 

shnriH'iied  ? 
That  which  was   made 

yesterday. 


Wuiila-koliiij      /li    niciiii ! 
where-towards  thou   goest 


Sydiiey-kolitp 


T\ifiit-tjiiri.'u  i!tt-)iilti  /lat/ualgu  Whither  arc  you  going? 
where-towards  #  thou  place  -  to 
yiiiiiuM  ! 
going 
Si/t/iiri/-pur/!U  Towards  Sydney. 


Whence  did  you  como  ? 
I  started  from  the  camp. 


Woiilii-Ziirinj   /li   mod?  'Ihi/i   gimlit   //iiijgtiH     /luogv 

where-from  thoucamest  whence  tliou  ploce-lVom  earnest 

Koii/oi/fin  /mij  iiwa  lliirunt/i  yiifiuni-itiiu 

camp-lroni    I    came  canip-lrom  moved  - 1 

Wiijn   /li         Uinan      uirnta?   Yaimt    la-m/it    titin     yanii<;i  Dost  thou  wish  to  come  ? 
say   thou  approacliing  come  *  thou  hither  to-come 

ijiiii/i  f 

wishest 
Wiifa/ii      ttinan      wwanvnl  Yanui-nihi  tain  yanagiri? 
say  thou  approaching  wilt-come  thou  hither  wilt  •  come 


Will  you  come  ? 


AUSTRALIA. 


fl25 


K  A  M  I  r.  A  R  A  I. 

W7//rt  hi     viiifa   utcala  f 
nny  Ihoudopnrting    go 

Wii/a  hi     Pdita    uininiin 
nay   thou  ilrpnrtiii^  wilt  •  go 

IVii/ii  Inli    Hwalii 
any   wo  •  two  go 

Wuitd    i/tin  utviila  wilimnti. 

(lepnrting  wo       go      huiiting- 

to 
IVoni'n      j/een  iiinihi  I 
which-woy  wo       go 
niakai 
this-way 

WoMn        kun  t 
which-woy  indeed 
Wiiinvil      Ixtli      hi      Pakai 
may-go    wo-two  thou     I'akni 

kaho 
presently 

Yanon,  uwtinun    bo    ta  Ixip 
nut-so     will-go  alono  *    I 

IVii/a     bali    hag  waimnl 
say    wu  -  two  I    niuy  -  go 


Ee,  waila     hali 
yes,  depart  we  -  two 
Wnila     lag  Ixira 
departed    •    they 
Yurii)     huhi      mcald 
away  you  -  two     go 
Uaralxikako  Ixig  waita 
sleep  -  for      I    depart 
Waitu  koa  hmj  mimaii/i  kora 
depart  that    I       detain     not 


Winla  hara  waita  uwrnuti 
some    they  away   will .  go 
Waiia  'triinun  7ioa  lia,  waita 
away       go        he  when  away 
yaiija  geen 
then    we 


W  I  R  A  I)  II  R  K  I. 

Yamu-ndu  yanngi  ijindi  I 
thou   to  •  go     wilt 

Yama-nilu  i/ana/;iri 
lliou  wilt -go 

Uri/i    yantigi,  at  yatuini-li 

wo-lwo     go,  go-wo-lwo 

Unrawigi  gitini 

go-hiiiiting    wo 


Dost  thou  wish  to  got 
Wilt  thou  go  ? 
Let  UH  two  go. 
Let  us  go  a  hunting. 


'Ibf-K-gurgii   yuiKiffi    giiini  f 
whcni-towiirds     go  we 

IHiiii  i/iiin 

here  -  hy 

whither-  indrcd 

Pdkiiiiiffu    giiaiii     ijiii(li-</i/u 
I'ukui  -  to  presently      with  - 1 

yamaf'.i 
to-accompnny 

Wirai,   giiyugdii-du    yana-tu 
no  myself  go -I 

mi/igiri 
niiidit    panutida       t/amiigi 
thou       with  -  mo    accompany 
gimli-dyu 
wish- 1 
/?a,   tigunda-tu  yamagiri 
yes,  with  -  thee  - 1  will  •  go 
Yaiidii  UUn  guingutia 
gone       •         they 
Hindu     hida    yana 
thou     ye  -  two    go 
Yurai  wirigigit  yanana-tu 

going -I 
Yanagiri     miiii-dyii,      karia 
will  -  go    necessarily  ■  I,    not 
md  niima 
me  detain 
DiDdMii  marag  wari  yanagi 
some  will  -  go 

Yantu    gin    yanagiri,    giani 
when      he       will  -  go        we 
wdri  yanagiri 
surely  will  -  go 
132 


\V'hich   way    shall    we 

go  I 
This  way, 

I  don't  know  which  way, 

I   want  thee  to  go  with 
me  tu  i'akai  presently. 


No.     I  will  go  by  my. 
■elf. 

I  wish  you  to  go  with 
mo. 


Yes,l  will  go  with  you. 
They  arc  gone. 
Go  away,  you  two. 

I    am    going    away   to 

sleep, 
I  must  go,  do  not  detain 

me. 

Some  of  them  will  go. 

When  he  goes,  we  will 
go- 


k^ 


#     1^ 


*. 


&2R 


pii  I  i.o  i.oa  Y. 


KAMI  I.  A  It  A  I. 
Wonta    jmnul    kuknln  iiirA 
whcn^       lun         wn*     vomu 
(l(/(//rt  iiHra  Imf 
Ihi'n     ye    when 
Uirii/it/a    iiiHl /hi,  iiiiniinirini 
guiii^  •  una  lio   no,  iiicl 

i/iiii/n  /mil  iiini 
llirn   liiiii    lie 
\\'i)/ii  /n       iiM'ti/^inii     knii/iiii- 
soy  lliDii  wrnl  •  lii.ilay  camii- 
koliiiif 
lowfirds 
Keitiiiii  kiim/iii     /mi)   u-nilit- 
no     |()-i)K>rriiw  I  ili'|mrl-|io. 
'iiiikiii 
lii-iiKiiniw 

Ku/k>        ii'iiilii  'nil linn  /mn 
prrspully  nwjiy  sliiill  •  gn    I 
Kiirikiii-knrikiii      tii      knliiii 
(|iil('k  -  ({iiick  *  is 

/( ii'dlikiijii  il-kfdii  11,  ken  leaia  ii 
III  ■  tio  jnii-towiirds,    not 
tri/ii  ijko 
rclurnin;,'-  l'<r 

Pilii/'Hiiijiu  /li     till     /ki, 

glad  •  iiiailc- linil  llimi   ini'      il' 
kf'iiinii  iinii/ii  /huj     inijxi 
nut        thru      1    guiR>  ■  liitd 


mild  /ill)  mi  nun  II ! 
say       I      shall .  f,'(i 
Waninn/ii/a  tin  Si/i//iii/-kii/iiii 
loi .  jro       mi)  lowurda 

Wamn >i/ii mi n  /ninug 
let -go -will     I-lhee 
Keatcarati  wul  /li    inrninm 
not  thou  xhall  -  go 

Yiiiioa  niiiiifi  kora 
desist      go       not 
Yari  /li     'wniiini,    U'lieitknii 
not  thou  shalt  •  go,  s|H:ar-iiiay 
koa  /nil  koirko  /mra 
,lcst  Ihcc    man    they 


W  I  It  A  II  r  It  K  I. 
'l\iili   fiiiru    yiiii    i/aiifii-iutit 
wlii'ro  lun    whiui-llioii 

/iiiofie  / 
I'anx'st 
Yiiiilii     fiiiiii      i/niiiiiii/ii/iiiii 
when  he        wai*  •  walking 

/lirii/i/iiiiimf  ijiii  uiiiii 
mrt  him   ho 

Itniiiit-iii/ii      i)iiniiii:ii      i/iiiiii- 
Ihciii     eam|>-tc)      went- 
ijiiiin  f 
Ill-day 
11 1/(1*    /hiIii-Ih     null     Ilium- 
no  •     I  go  -  to- 

mtiiiiinmiii   iiiiniiiiin/  j/iulil 
iiiiirrow  nhnll    iiioniing      I 
'Ih/iilit/iiii-lii  iiiiri  ijiiiiiii;iri 
Mimn  ■  I  shnll  -  go 

Iiii/ilinj      /hi/ii     iiiiiiliii)iili/iil(t 
(■nay  •       nIiiiI  ■  iilacc  •  In 

i/finiifii,  teirai    /'in/  im/i/dij 
III -go      not    indri'd   I'aity 
/iiiiif!ii/ii/ii;i 
lii-oiimo 
Yd  III II- mill  mil    iinniiniHiii, 
il'-lhiiii        mo      hadst  •  liivi'd 
viidi        iiid/dii  fii/ii-td 

mil     should  •  linvo     Ihon  - 1 
1/uiiuiii 
gone 
Yiima-tii  f!iiiiai;iii  /hi  f 

I    shall  -gii  • 
Si/i/iiei/-uu  ijiimiiiidiii/iid  iidl 
to        l(.'l-gii         mo 
Ydiidviam/iil^iii  iii/dl-tii 
lol -go- will         Ihco-I 
Wirumln    /,ial  iiiiii  i/iiiiiii:iri 
niit-lhiiu  indood  shall -go 

Kuriu  i/iiiiii 

not       go 
Kdiiii    i/diiit,    t.iiri<iiri     in/ril 
nut  go     ttill-siionr  thee 

itari    ijiriiii-nlf-iri  ffi/iri^al- 

pass  -  through    ntcn  • 
galaiidi 
by 


What  limo  wni  it  when 
you  came  ? 


A*  ho  wn*  wolking  he 
met  him. 


llnvo   you  iHi'n  to  thn 
<'ani|i  this  morning  f 


No,  but  I  shnll  go  to- 
morrow  morning. 

ny-nn  l-hyo  I  ihnll  go, 

Il  is  oasy  III  go  to  iht' 
jail,  liiit  not  NO  onay 
to  get  out  again. 


If  thou  hadst  lovrd  me, 
I  should  not  have 
gone. 


Bhnll  I  got 

Ix'l  me  go  to  Sydney. 

I  will  permit  thee  to  go. 

Thou  shall  not  go. 

Do  not  go. 

Do  not  go,  lest  you 
should  be  speared  by 
the  men. 


. 


•,* 


A  U  8  T  R  A  I,  I  A. 


fl27 


K  A  M  I  I.  A  It  A  I.  Win  A  l>  II  It  i;  I 

Vwulit  iKKi  i/itiili  lit  jxiiiiil  Im  (liiiii  liimur  i/iinlii  iiirrt  iiriiii-    ll«  rnrnci  wlii'ri  tlio  aun 

cnmi-    Ik'      IIS      •      HUH      •  liu     i^iiiiii!   when  itiiii  solliiij;  •       wns  Nutting. 

juJiti)    kiilrnn  H'lui 

linking    vrna  wiix 

Kratvariiit  iitxt     uhi/m     ywiti  Winii  fiiiin  ln/ouiiiii    i/milu  lli;  hail  imt  rcmii!  when 

nut          he  hml  ■  romo    nii  n<it         he  hail  •  iiiini'     when        thu  Hiin  wuh  iii'lting. 

la  piniol  tm    jmlng   kiilenn  i/iiri          iiniin 

•    Hiin      •  HJnking     wiih  sun  piissi'd  ■  llinuii^h 


'IHiidii       II  lli 
is  •  broken  thin 
Tiir.liinia       viii 
hrdki'H  •  nmilo  this 
Haiito  II  lli     liir-hii  i/ii  / 
whi)      it    briiki'ii  •  imulo 
Wiiri,       liir.liiiliiikiin       kmi 
mind,   hrokiMi  •  shoulil  •  bo  U'st 

sjMii/e 

spailo 
Willi,      liir-hinjiiikiin       kim. 
iniiul,  bnikrn  -  inako  -  may  lest 

hi    V  iiiMi  ajKti/e 
thou  that 

Wiiri,      liir-hii  rfnkiin       kixi. 
mind,  broken  •  innkc -may  b-st 

hi   II  iiiki  sjHiile  ijiili  kiilailii 
thdii  that  that  slick'With 

'nii-hiiiinpii        hiiiiiliii,  mi  nil  II 
broken  -  made  -  Imd  1  •  if  what 

hniitiu  ijaii/ii  ham  Ma! 
done      then    they  mo 


Mill  nil  hill  I II  Irif 

what    dning  thou 
Miniiij  /hi  hin? 

what         thee 
Miiiuij  hiiiiiin  pail/a   hi/oaf 

what    will -do    then    thee  -  ho 
Miinii)  hiiliko  kef 

what    to  -  do 
Miniii)      hiiti-kol*iij      hnintoa 

what        to-do  -  for         ^ho 
■iiwiiniin 
will  -  go 


Jllllil  lillilizilll  /nl/ll 

Ibis     broken     • 
Hii/i    Imniiiiiniiii 
this  broken  ■  made 
H (I  mill  f)in      liiiiiL'iiiiii^ 

who       it    broken  -  made 
Hiiiiii,    kiiia        Imniiiiuiri 
do  •  not,  Hjiade  broken  ■  will  ■  \to 


This  is  broken. 

This  is  broken  (by  some 

one). 
Who  broke  it  I 

Take   care!    the    spade- 
will  be  broken. 


Yii       'uiiiganuilfiiri       i/indii 
broken  -  make  •  will     thon 
i/iinui  kiiiii 
spnde 
Yii  kniii  i/iiijtii      liiiiisiiiiiiiil- 
spade  broken  •make. 

fiiii  iimiliiiiiliiriilii 
will     stick  •  with 
Yiiiilii-tii   i)iii^a      /iiiiif:iiiiir, 
if  •  I         had     broken  -  made 
miiii/iila      iial      ijaiii'iulia 
what .  in       mu  they 

ijiufia  f 
Ix'on 
Miiii/aij  irii-nilii  mnliiiniiiiiaf 

what       #   thou        doing 
Wiiliiuij  ijttii/a  ha  ni/iaiilal 
how  is  to  •  thee 

Wiili/inj  fniin    vi/al    ijiiiaiii? 
wliat        ho    to .  theo  will .  bo 
Witli/inj  muritnaii  ijiijgi ! 
what      good  -  lor  to-  bo 
Miniiiini-it  gii  mi  yanaguiiana 
what  -  for        she     is  -  going 
viai 


'J'ake    care,      lest     you 
break  lliut  spado. 


Take  care,  lest  you 
break  that  spade  with 
tlie  stick. 

If  I  had  broken  it,  what 
wouUI  Ihoy  have  done 
to  me? 


What  art  thou  doing  ' 

Wliat  is  the  matter  with 

thee  f 
What  will  he  do  to  you  ! 

Of  what  use  is  it ' 

For  what  is  she  going  ? 


528 


PHILOLOGY. 


K  A  M  I  L  A  R  A  I. 

NanoH       boiintoa      hiytiylxii 
will  -  SCO         she  father 

bonnoiin  lia 
her 
liti  ba-butitnta  lion 
dend      bo  -  let     him 


'liti      hvgula       Utn 
dend  mnke  -  to  -  be  him 
Tcti     Imi-Ihj  nliiiiii  n    baninj 
dead  to-be-permit-will  I-tbcc 
2\'ti-bu  }ju  mt  n  lianinj 

dead-to-be-caiisp-will  I-thec 
Miiunj  hauwil  kt>ii    Ixili     Ixni 

what   may-do  that  we-two  him 
Yanni,  teli-Uakini  koa  noa 

desist  dcad-may-be  lest  he 


Teti-buriliun  liay 

dead-to-be-made-myself-  I 


Uanlo  viyan  7 
who      speaks 
na/iko,  ya/i-taro 
this      tliis-they 
Wif/axwi/  lii  tin  yakoai  Ixira 
may-tell    thoi-  mc     how     they 
lia   irii/a   bin 
spoke  thee 
77a   Iti/nnj   u-ii/d? 

thou  him    told 
/?»«  (i/iinj  uii/alin    yoy 
who  there    lalkitif;  yonder 
Ha  mil/   l/i   ifiytiH  f 
whom  thou    ti-llest 
Emolip?     Hal  :?     Barun 
me  us  -  two        thee 


Korekolxi  tvii/cla    In     tia 
man-of    speak  thou  lo-mc 


WIRADUREI. 

Baliiii  gup  j/iigigu 
father  her  to -see 


Baluia  ijin  hart;  balumambia 
die      hiin    let     |icrmit-to-dic 
ijiii 
him 
Hin  Imliiliitiiia 
him  dciul- strike 
Ni/<i/lu  Ixi/Ktmiml/i/gin 
thee-l    to-die.pormit-will 
Buyiihiri  Imlutjgi  nyat-tu 
to  -  die    thee  - 1 
Wiilyii  la       U       piidn  mali 
what         we-two  to-him  to-do 
Ktiria   wilai    nuda   liahnjifiri 
not  will  -  die 

lii/i  ynin 
'.,!>.    else 
Biiluliiiiiihjulyih.t  patlu 
dead-struck-myself     I 


namlii  yara  1 
who     s[M;aks 
Yugu-la  ;  yugii-gulia 

this  these 

Xyal-tii     ijinili    viilyinjur 
thee  I       wish  how 

yinyiil-miliii)  yi: 

thcc-to     spoke  (subin.Mey) 
Yuma  la-vilu  ijiii  ye  ? 
*     thou  him  told 
Hu>i/lii  snra  yiilgiimniii  gila 
who  talking     there 

Hainitiila   ga-iiilii   yara? 
to-  whom     •  thou  speakest 
ndnuiida  1     Ihiligxngn  ! 
to  -  me  to  -  us  -  two 

Hanoiiiguliala 
to  -  them 
nat.unila      yiild       giayga 
to  -  me        speak   tongue  -  in 
viaiiigii 
native  -  of 


To  see  her  father. 

Let  him  die. 

Cause  him  to  die. 

1  will  permit  thee  to  die. 

I  will  make  you  to  die. 

What  shall  thou  and  I 

do  to  liim  ? 
Let  him  alone,  lest  he 

die. 

I  have  killed  myself. 

Who  speaks  ? 

This  one  does ;  these  do. 

I  wish  thee  to  tell  me 
how  they  spoke  to 
thee. 

Didst  thou  tell  him  I 

Who  is  talking  there  T 

To    whom    dost     Ihou 

spi  ak  f 
To   me?     To  us  two? 

To  them. 


S|)cak  to  me  in  the  na- 
tive language. 


AUSTRALIA. 


529 


i 


y 


K  A  M  I  I,  A  R  A  I. 

Wiyitika    Id    tia;    kuru    tia 
tell-ngiiin  thou  mc    slowly  mo 

ivii/<ila 
speak 
K(i/>f),  kalx),    irlijmriijali 

presently,  presently,     tnlk-talk 

kon  Uiij 

thnt    I 
IVomii     /tag    wii/irnirn    irtii 
how  I      shull  ■  sny    this 

yitera 

nniHO 
Wiknii  iitti    Itilod,   u-iijii  ? 

when      thcc-he   loUl 
Wii/nii  iHiiit'ir)  ijaiokiliko 

tell      I -thee   to -arise 


}Vii/iiii')n    hiiiiiu       hi, 
shiill-tell  thou-him  when 
ivii/iinu/i  yniyii  tia 
sImlUidll    then  me 


W  I  R  \  D  U  R  E  I. 

Nat  yahdvbja;   indyaif  yala  Tell  mo  agnin. 
mo     tell  •  agnin     gently  sixjak       slowly. 


Speak 


Mahulya,    vxahvbja,    yana-tu  Stay,  stay,  that  I  tnay 

stop             stop            that  I  have  a  little  conversa- 

biilmi  yciltt)jiili/nl  tion. 
little  eonvi'rsiilinn 

Miiiyaij  gara  yiiin   ijiii'igit  What  is  the  name  of  this? 
what             name  of.  this 


WiilyiDji'iisii  giii/i  nyal    ye  ?    When  did  he  toll  Ihcc? 

«hcn  he     thee     told 

nhiyal  /xirinjgi  tindii  yara 
thee     to  -  rise      I       tell 
Nyiil-tii    /laratnhtiyaid 
thee-I    lo-rise-i'omniand 
Ihuilii-iiilit      iiUi      ytilgiri 
when -them      liim    shalt-tell 
viiKiyali-ilyii 
to -know- 1 


I  tell  thee  to  arise. 

I  command  thee  to  arise. 

When  you  toll  him,  let 
mo  know. 


Pdtiii  mli  koiivonto 

drops  this      rain 

KtJio        kn  ta  tiirnnun  yaiya 

presently  will-spear  then 

bin 

fhee 
Bdlkd-kaJm  noa  fmtikiinkafia 

hat'k  •  on      ho      lioast  -  on 
Kcntfui  kolitt)  hiitj  vntdn 

not      about    I      give 


niikih'i  ha/i     inioa 

givo-earh-othcr  we-two    that 
Korti-kod   napiil   wciin    knre- 
why  -  not  woman      go      man- 

kai  ? 

with 


Kiilhitlu  yiiliara 
water      drops 
Giiaiii    ijitiyiil  turi<;iri 
presently  thee   will  -  spear 


It  rains. 

By-and-ljve  you  will  b<,' 
speared. 


Birnm  iranuniim  isuiHKinya  He  is  on  horseback, 

back-on    horse-of     he      sits 

Wiiiii    Uda-lii    tjiiifgi    wina-  1  am  not  about  to  give. 

not        *     1     to-givo     am- 

yana 
thinking 

Hidi  ytiyiktffi 

we  -  two  give  •  enoh  •  other 
Wiirgii     inniii-dya     wirai 

why       man  -  with      not 

iiiai-^irlKiij  yamiigi  7 
women     accompany 
133 


Let  us  two  exchange. 

Why  do  not  the  women 
go  with  the  men  ? 


f 


VH'%>' 


630 

K  A  M  I  I-  A  R  A  I. 

Y<i>io(i,  yiriyiri  ka  kc 
desist      siicrcil 


Piti'l  korirn  fniii  shoe-tin 
glail      not       I  Irom 


Pnle  i)'iiri .koliii 
voices  siriinyo-of 
Uliiinrinlin    /it    koliin    iriitixi- 
wlint-lVom  lliou  lliiiiUrst  tlial- 
/hi 
(Viiiii 
Kodtlii/d      /mil  Mi  /nil)  /nikapa 
Wii-'-lhinkin}'  1  ilcud  I  slioiild-bc 


Tlriip  Ihiij  kiituii 

nwnke    1      iim 

Tiiaii    /jinjiila    Ikin,  l>oii  ijkii/i 

nwiiko  m.-ikc-to-bc  liiiri     nriso 

kon  nfxi 

tli.-it  ho 
Kt,iiin !ii II iii  [picliircj  iiaki/iko 
pretty       this  to -see 

Tlii/ia    lio    III    (kiij    tfii/iiini/i 
surely  1      will-s|K'iik 

tiilua 
slrnij^ht 
Miiiariiilin    /li    lia    hrikii 
what  -  rrotn  thou  inn  angry- 

l)injnn  ? 
makest-to-Ix' 

Uliiinriij/in  Id  tin  Imka  kiitaii  ? 
what-froin  thriu  inoan;;ry   art 
Kiiiniiliilti     >ioti     Jehova-ko 
finished        he      Jehovah 

yantin-liirnt)  umuii-lrintij 
all  -  from      work  -  I'roni 
Kniiirii   wii/dlfitn      /xii)  itattxi 

yes    !s|>oke-to-inysi'ir  I  myself 

'in 
alone 


P  II  I  LO  LOO  Y. 

W  1  U  A  D  U  R  E  1. 

I1aiuif;u      miiiynmliul 
that -for  tiling 

yiriifiiimlxiij 
sacred 
Wirai-i/yii      /;<it(ipgilitiya 

not -I  am -glad 

Uisiiniilar-diiriii 
shoe  •  with 
Iltmj  piiollmg 
toiifiiio    other 
Miiiydij-iiidii  (Hill  u-iiiayiuiu 

what  -  thou  of-  that  thinkiim 


Because  it  is  n  sacred,  a 
forbidden  thing. 


I  am    not   pleased  with 
tlic  shoe. 


A  foreign  language. 

What   dost   thou    think 
about  that? 


Diulii      viiiiiyatiHn      iHiluni  I  thought  1  shoir  .  have 

I     thought  -  to  -  myself  die  died. 

■iiiiiliii)-iiilyu 
should  •  I 
Mil'/i     tiiir'iiia  I  am  awake. 

eycs-iny   stand 
Jiiirnnibuiiid  ijiii  /mnii/giuii 
awake-strike  him    lo-ariso 


Wake  him,  that  ho  may 
get  up. 


Iliiiii  daiiilar  [picture]  ijiigigu 
this     pretty  to -see 

Ihiilii     iiari   kiiri     yii/airi 

I  truly  will-spenk 

Ikih  ijiin 
indeed 
Wargii-tiilu  »al  tiilid  /iiujiim- 
why  -  thou     me  angry  niakest- 

hira  ? 

to-l)e 
Wargii  /mlit-tiflii-titiilni  pitiyii  ? 

why      ♦  thou-me  angry  art 
Jiivii-flii  giiiiliini     miihji'lyiili- 
.lehovali   censed  working-from- 

giig  liiantlml 

his      all 
Yii/ii-/ii  ydliligvnnni 

truly  I  was-s|<cakiiig-lci-inyself 


This  is  a  pretty  picture 

to  l(X)k  at. 
I  shall   certainly  speak 

the  truth. 


Why  dost  thou  enrage 


Why    art    thou    angry 

with  me? 
Jeliovah  rested  from  all 

his  work. 


Yes,   I  was   talking   to 
mvself. 


*■#•«•■ 


'^•.  -i. 


A  U  S  T  R  A  t,  I  A. 


531 


K  A  M  I  I,  A  n  A  I.  W  I  R  A  D  U  .1  E  I. 

Nauwa  wiro>>an  /loitntoa  tia  Hiiga      yiuitu      na      vdl 

look,      follows        she  mo    look        when      she     me 
bii  gH/>affiiliii/gii}iagiri 


Look  while   she  is   fol- 
lowing mc. 


follow-constantly- will 
Ua/i  ijinjilagiitiana  We  two  nre  looking  at 

we-twoarc-lofiking-nt-oiieh-other      cnch  other. 
rhidii     yaijit/i/i/iit     huonaiji-  I  saw  myself  in  the  niir- 
I        saw  •  myself  reflecting-       ror. 
(hjUiiUja 
thiiig-in 
Wiifgii  Ihi  gc  ijiii  himiiH  ?         VVhy  was  he  Ixiatcn  ? 

why  him    stnii'k 

ritaidgit    ijii!    /ti/iii   yigiuiagi  Because    he   is   always 
that  -  for     he  angry      to  -  he  angry. 

tiirur 
always 
Kaiia     i/ala     nidlii 

not    that. way    do 
nuniDnidi/a-li    ni/ii. 
lend       mi'  that 
Hiniiiinin  Ixilit  na 
lent  it 

ridi/ii  iiiaiii     giio/gH 
1        man  another -to 
yunttmini 
lent 
riuiiiaiya  bin  ani  wonto      hi  Hiini  mu/aij-n/ii/uiida,  ivirai  I  would  have  given  it  to 
ottered        I     that    but    thou    gave       would  -  to  thee       not         tlicc,  hut  thou  wouldst 
Uikeaicai        mdivpa  iidi-i/aiulu    linnime 

not      wouldst -take  but      thou    didst  -  lake 

Tunut)  ittii  Tiirheij  kolxi  niiniu-d/dij  Tdrkci/-  giilm 

this     stone        "  of 

Hina  lidla  Tidiccii  •  gdit 
this      *  of 

HaldiKUi  rial  kaniiiia 
llamc      me     burns 


while 
Ndkiinn  liali 

look-at-each-other  wc-two 
Niikilinii     hdij     ijalod,      lio 
snw-myself    I       myself  alone 
Nakilitji/a 

seeing-place-in 
MinariijttH  lion  Inuikala  7 

what-from  him  struck 
Knia  iiod  hirka  buritj 
because  he    angry  always 


IJanti  hiui  koia 

so      do    not 
Miimlrila  Hn  yiiloa 

lend      mo  that 
Mumbiioara  >im  "ni 
lent  it    that 

Mumhm  Ixiij  taidi  ktm 

lent        i    another 


stone    this       "         of 
Korc  iJiii  Turkey  ■  kid 
man  this  of 

Tiriko  tia  vina 
red      m('  burns 
Mdkoro  ijiiifd  tid,i)dt.tni  karai,  Thiijga   ii  giii/d,  Imnaij  dibin  Give     me     fish,     dcsh. 


Do  not  do  so. 

Lend  that  to  me. 

It  is  lent. 

1  have  lent  it  to  another 
person. 


not  take  it. 

This  is  a  stone  of  Tur- 
key. 
This  is  a  Turk. 

The  (lame  burns  me. 


fish      give   me    and     llosh 
pitun   tibin    ^iitun    kokoiii 
and      bird       and       water 
taiiicU     konlniii,     pitdiiiii/ 
may -cat  that   I    may -drink 


give     inc    fish,    flesh,     bird, 
kii/iiii  -  till  yaiiii  -  III  td/giii, 
water -and,  that  - 1   will -cat 
vidi/dlgiri  -  bii 
will  -  drink  -  and 


fowl,  and  water,  that 
I  may  cat  and  drink. 


kmi  buy 
that    I 
Md  tdiiira  I'liti  ■  I. id 


this 


.if 


Kidiidi/d  gii/bir  yiiudii  tiilit 
bc'An       some    of  this  eat 


Eat  some  of  this, 


THE 


LANGUAGES  OF  NOKTIIWESTEIIN  AMERICX. 


The  langungn.s  of  tlio  tribes  west  of  tlio  Rocky  Mountnins  mny  Ix"  divided  into  two 
clnssps,  which  diU'cr  very  strikingly  in  llieir  vocid  cleinents  nnd  pronunciation.  These 
classes  mny  l)e  denominated  the  northern  and  southern,  the  latter  lieirii,'  found  chiefly 
south  of  the  Cohnnliin,  and  the  former,  with  one  or  two  exceptions,  on  the  north  of  that 
river.  To  the  northern  belong  the  Tahkali-l'mqun,  the  Stdish,  the  Tshinuk,  and  the 
lakon  languages,  with  all  on  the  "  Northwest  Coast"  of  which  we  have  any  knowledge. 
The  southern  division  comprehends  the  .Sahaptiu,  the  Shoshoni,  the  Kalapuya,  Saste, 
Lutuami,  and  all  the  Caliliirnian  idioms,  so  liir  as  w<'  are  acquainted  with  them.  Those 
of  the  norlliern  class  are  remarkable  for  their  extraordinary  harshness,  which  in  some  is 
so  great  as  almost  to  surpass  Ixlief.  The  C'hinooks,  C'hikailish,  and  Killamuks,  appear 
actually  to  labor  in  speaking, — an  illusion  which  proceeds,  no  donbt,  fiom  the  ollect 
produced  on  th(^  car  of  the  listener  by  the  harsh  elements  with  which  liicir  languages 
abound,  as  well  as  by  the  generally  rough  and  dissonant  style  of  pronunciation.  The  / 
is,  in  these  tongues,  a  somewhat  deeper  guttural  than  the  Spanish  ./"''''•  The  a  is  an 
extraordinary  sound,  resembling  the  hawking  noise  produced  by  an  ellfirt  to  expj'l  phlegm 
from  the  throat.  A  similar  element  (as  we  are  assured  on  good  authority)  in  the 
Quio'huan  or  Peruvian  language,  is  called  by  the  Spanish  grammarians  the  cc  aistii- 
fiitc/iis,  and  is  com|)ared  to  the  somid  made  in  cracking  nuts  with  the  teeth, — from  which, 
of  course,  we  can  only  iiiler  its  extreme  harshness,  7'/./  is  a  combination  ntleii'd  by 
forcing  out  the  breath  at  the  side  of  llie  mouth,  iKlween  the  tongue  and  the  palate.  The 
vocabularies,  and  the  remarks  upon  them,  will  exhibit  some  otlier  peculiarities  of  these 
languages.  They  are  all  indistinct  as  well  as  har>h.  The  same  tientent  in  the  Tshinidi 
nnd  other  tongues  is  heard  at  one  time  as  a  *',  at  another  as  a  h,  and  again  as  an  iii, — 
the  latter  being  jn'obably  the  most  accurate  ifpresentalion.  So  the  ii  and  r/arc  in  several 
imdisliiiguishable,  and  wc  were  constantly  in  doubt  whelher  certain  short  vowels  shoidd 
be  written  or  omilled. 

'I'be  southern  l.iM.^uages  are,  on  the  other  hand,  no  less  distinguished  for  solhiess  and 
harmonv.  The  Liultmals  are  lliund  in  two  or  three,  into  which  tliey  seem  to  have  been 
introduced  by  communication  with  the  northern  tribes.  Tin?  rest  want  this  class  of 
letters,  anrl  have,  in  their  place,  the  labial/,  the  liquid  /■,  nnd  the  nasal  ;;,  nil  of  which 


? 


034 


PHILOLOGY. 


are  unknown  in  the  Cornier.  Difficult  combinations  of  consonants  rarely  occur,  and  the 
many  vowels  make  th?  pronunciation  clear  and  sonorous.  There  is,  however,  n  gcxid 
deal  of  variety  in  this  respect,  some  of  the  lanj^uagcs,  as  the  Lutuami,  Sastc,  and 
I'alnilinik,  being  smooth  and  agreeable  to  the  ear,  while  the  Shoshoni  and  Kahipuya, 
though  sol^,  arc  na.sal  and  indistinct. 

In  their  grammatical  characteristics,  so  far  as  these  were  determined,  the  languages  of 
Oregon  belong  to  the  same  class  as  the  other  obnriginal  idioms  of  America.  An  exu- 
berance of  inflections,  oiid  a  great  aptitude  for  coiiipnsilion,  is  every  where  apparent. 
Man}'  of  the  forms  are  precisely  the  same  as  those  which  occur  in  the  languages  of  the 
eastern  and  southern  triln'S  of  our  continent.  The  system  of  "  transitions,"  or,  in  other 
words,  the  principle  of  expressing  the  pronouns,  both  of  the  subject  and  the  object,  by  on 
inflection  of  the  verb,  is  followed  by  all.  In  like  manner,  those  modifications  of  an  idea 
which  in  other  languages  arc  expressed  by  separate  words,  are  in  these  denoted  by 
aflixcs  and  inflections.  The  facility  with  which  any  other  purl  of  speech  may  Ix)  trans- 
formed to  a  verb  is  no  less  remarkable. 

The  distinction  made  in  some  of  the  eastern  tongues  Irctween  the  names  of  animate  and 
inanimate  objects  has  not  l)een  found  to  exist  in  the  Oregon  languages.  The  missionaries 
had  not  met  with  it  in  any  instance. 

The  dual  of  the  pronoun  is  found  in  the  Tshinuk  and  Waiilatpu,  but  not  in  the 
Sahaptin,  Selish,  or  Kalnpuya.  The  double  plural  of  the  first  person  (including  and  ex- 
cluding the  person  addressed),  is  also  found  in  the  Tshinuk.  In  the  Sahaptin  it  occurs, 
not  in  the  pronoun  itself,  but  in  a  very  singular  class  of  words,  termed  by  the  mission- 
aries "  declinable  conjunctions," — words  whi<'h  do  the  office  of  conjunctions,  but  only  in 
connexion  with  verbs,  and  are  varied  for  number  and  |K'rson. 

A  very  simple,  and  what  might,  with  some  propriety,  Ix;  termed  a  natural  method  of 
forming  the  plural,  prevails  in  many  of  these  languages.  It  is  by  a  r('|ietition  of  the  first 
syllable,  or  n  portion  of  it,  sometimes  with  a  slight  change  of  the  vowel ;  as,  llUius, 
lather,  in  Selish,  p\.  /ii/(Uiits  ;  tana,  ear,  \i\.  titiilaiia  ;  kclii;,  hand,  \i\.  kilkeli^ ;  skal. 
taiiti/.o,  man,  pi.  skiilkultamiy.o.  So  in  the  Sahaptin,  jritiii,  girl,  pi.  pijiitin  ;  and  in 
Netela,  ^•l^;,  house,  \t\.  kikit^-.  In  most  of  these  languages,  the  ndjectivi-  has  also  its 
plural,  which  is  generally  formed  in  the  same  way  as  that  of  the  substantive,  but  is 
sometimes  very  irregular. 

1.   THE    TAHKAI.I.UMKWA    FAMILY. 

(A.   Tiy.kvli.     B.   Tliitskanai  [a.  Tldtshmai  ,•  b.  Kiriifyidkua.'\     C.  (hiikua.) 

The  words  of  the  Tahkali  language  were  furnished  by  Mr.  A.  Anderson,  of  the 
Hudson's  Bay  Company,  who  had  been  liir  several  years  in  charge  of  a  trading  post  in 
New  Caledonia.  Their  general  correctness  may  be  relied  upon,  but  the  minor  shades  oC 
sound  are  probably  not  always  distinguished.  A  few  terms  have  been  added  (in  paren- 
theses),  from  the  Appendix  to  Harmon's  .lournal  of  Travels  in  the  Interior  of  North 
America,  a  work  of  the  l)est  authority  on  this  subject.  The  words  of  the  Tlatskanai 
and  I'mkwa  were  obtained  from  individuals  of  those  tribes. 

The  languages  of  this  family  belong  to  what  we  have  called  the  northern  division,  and 
are  as  remarkable  as  the  rest  for  the  harshness  of  their  sounds.  The  Umkwa  forms  a 
partial  exception,  being  much  softer  than  the  others,  with  some  peculiar  elements,  os  the 


NORTHWESTERN   AMERICA. 


535 


p  nnd  r.    This  diflcrcnco  may  have  arisen  from  the  intercourse  of  the  Umkwa  people 
with  tl,o  neighbouring  trilx'S  of  the  southern  division. 

The  little  that  is  known  of  the  grammatical  characteristics  of  those  three  languages 
serves  to  confirm  the  opinion  of  their  affinity,  deduced  from  a  comparison  of  the  vocabu- 
laries. In  all  three,  Ui  is  the  word  for  hand.  In  the  first  «V«  is,  my  hand,  and  «V«, 
thy  hand.  In  the  second  the  forms  are  precisely  the  same.  In  the  third,  jVd  is  my 
hand,  and  iianlu,  thy  hand.  Other  points  of  resemblance,  of  a  similar  kind,  will  be 
observed  in  the  vocabularies. 

9.   K  I  TUN  A  II  A. 

(D.  Kitunii/.a.) 

These  words  were  obtained  from  a  ('ree  (or  Knislrneaii)  Indian,  who  had  been  much 
with  the  Kilunaha,  or  (.'oulanies,  and  spoke  their  language  with  fluency.  Full  reliance, 
however,  can  never  be  placed  upon  information  respecting  n  language  derived  from  any 
[Kjrson  to  whom  it  is  not  the  native  tongue, — at  least  as  regards  its  mii\ute  peculiarities. 

3.  TSIHAIM.BEMSH   FAMILY. 

(E.  QupnipuiiKj.  F.  S(7<s'  [(;.  Kiilesjiclin ;  d.  Tlsc Kndsitlin ;  e.  S/.oauil/./j>i.] 
G.  S/cilsiii^.  H.  Piskuiiiis.  I.  Sktivle.  J.  7i:/.ai/ig  [f.  Ts/iiilii^  ;  g.  Kwainnt/.l ; 
h.  KwcmiiwityJ.'l     K.  Kmirlilsk,     L.  Nsiel^uiclis.) 

All  these  vocabularies  (with  the  exception  of  the  Skwale,  which  was  received  from  an 
interpreter)  were  obtained  from  natives  of  the  respective;  tril)cs,  generally  under  favour- 
able circumstances.  For  the  Scliii,  Skitsuish,  and  Piskwaus,  .vc  are  indebted  to  the 
kindness  of  Messrs.  Walker  and  Eels,  missionaries  of  the  American  Board  at  Tshania- 
kain,  near  the  Spokan  lliver.  It  wn'  :ii,  ugh  the  interpretation  of  these  grntlcmen,  and 
the  explanations  which  their  knowledge  ol  the  Selish  enabled  them  to  give,  that  the  words 
of  nil  three  languages,  nnd  the  numerous  sentences  in  the  Relish  illustrative  of  the  gram- 
malieal  peculiarities  of  that  tongue,  were  correctly  written. 

The  languages  of  this  Ihniily  are  all  harsh,  guttural,  and  indistinct.  It  is  to  the  latter 
(pialily  that  many  of  the  variations  in  the  vocabularies  are  owing.  In  other  cases,  these 
proceed  from  dialectical  dill'erenies,  almost  every  clan  or  sept  in  a  tribe  having  some 
peculiarity  of  pronunciation.  In  the  Selish,  three  dialects  have  been  noted,  and  more 
might  have  iK'cn  given,  had  it  not  Ix-en  considered  superfluous.  These  three  are  first, 
the  Kullespelm,  spoken  by  a  tribe  who  live  upon  a  river  and  alxmt  a  lake  known  by  that 
name ; — they  are  called  by  the  Canadians  PeniloirillcSy  which  has  been  corrupted  to 
Ponderays;  secondly,  that  of  the  pro[)er  Selish,  or  Flathcads,  as  they  are  called,  and^f 
the  Si)okan  Indians ;  and  that  of  the  Soaiatlpi,  Okinakain,  and  other  tribes  upon  the 
Coluudiin. 

Of  the  Tsihailish,  also,  three  dialects  are  given,  which  diller  considerably  from  one 
another.     The  (iuaiantl  reside  upon  a  river  of  the  same  name,  north  of  the  Tsihailish  (or 


636 


PHILOLOGY. 


Chikailish)  proper,  and  (he  KwenaiwitI,  in  like  manner,  are  north  of  the  KwaiantI,  not 
far  from  the  entrance  to  the  Straits  of  Kuca. 

Atorc  attention  was  given  to  the  grammatical  |KM:uliaritie8  of  this  extensive  lamily  of 
languages,  than  to  those  of  any  other,  and  the  result  was  to  place  the  affinities  which 
prevail  between  them  in  a  much  clearer  light  than  cuuld  have  been  ctrccted  by  the  more 
comparison  of  words.  This  will  appear  from  the  following  table  of  pronominal  affixes, 
in  several  of  the  most  dissimilar  idioms : 


t^■itu)^ 

(situ/. 

house 

tUfitii/. 

hitsi/ii/. 

my  house 

atttplii/L* 

antsilii/* 

thy  house 

tjlltll/.S 

tSltll/.S 

his  house 

kuy.t^ituy^s 

kiielsitii/s 

our  house 

t^itii/.nmp 

tsilii/.nnip 

your  house 

t^iitiiy.s 

IIIIAILItll. 

tsiUii/.s 

NaiETSIIAWUS, 

their  house 

M<i 

siirniiuen 

house 

Wnti/.n( 

to  tis>ie?tthnn 

my  house 

t»m 

txsvenittven 

thy  house 

te)i.<i^s 

tdsnriiaurnns 

his  house 

te^ti^l^ity^l 

l(tstieiiaurtiini/il 

our  house 

te/M^i/irp 

tasiie/iau'fllt 

your  house 

tc/.ii^s 

tasiiciiavenus 

their  bouse 

It  is  evident  that  the  t  which  commencrs  the  word  in  the  Inst  two  is  not  an  integral 
part  of  the  pronoun :  it  may  therefore  be  omitted  in  the  comporisnn.  The  affixes  will 
then  be  as  follows  : 


SHUSIIWAP. 

SKLISII. 

T8IIIAILISH. 

NsirrsiiAWus. 

n  — 

in  — 

unit  — 

nn  — 

my 

a»  (or  (()  — 

an  (or  «)  — 

u  — 

i  — 

thy 

.V 

—  s 

—  s 

—  ns 

his 

ku/.  — 

kite  — 

—  li-it/l 

—  int/l 

our 

—  vmp 

—  timp 

—  ilrrp 

—  hi 

your 

—  s 

—  s 

—  s 

—  IIS 

their 

The  N'sietsbawus  did'crs  more  widely,  in  its  vocabulary,  from  what  may  1x3  called  the 
general  type  of  the  family,  Ibnn  any  of  the  others.  One  of  the  most  striking  |)oints  of 
diirerciicc  is  its  rijoition  of  all  the  liiliial  articulations.  Sometimes  it  adopts  peculiar 
words,  insicad  nf  those  wbirh  oontiiin  llicsc  nliincnls ;  but  freipiently  it  supplies  the  place 
of  m  or  A  by  a  u\  and  that  of/j  by  an  /(,  as  in  ilic  following  examples : 


*  The  an  tecomes  a  before  a  consonant ;  as,  astit/.lam,  thy  canoe. 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


537 


TIIHAILIIH,  iXWALE,  ITO. 

NIICTBHAWUI. 

minuin 

nuwnn 

son 

mos 

t/.la-vot 

lUco 

miiqsnn 

u-iiqsnn 

nose 

IKiiilnlnkam 

lui>itf.lal^iwot 

spring 

jxinsiUiitf^i 

iMnsiiMt^i 

winter 

tOmfiy. 

tawef. 

earth 

mulsiits 

tmvfitsai 

snake 

nikUf.1 

anitvat)i.l 

wc 

ptuiult^s 

t/.la-h(intfi» 

ten 

Tlio  f()llowin;j;  lire  the  most  importiint  grnnimiiticnl  peculiarities  of  tlie  Selish  tongue, 
from  whicli  it  is  probable  that  the  other  huiguuges  of  tliis  family  do  not  materially 
differ  : 

1.  'I'here  ire  various  modes  of  forming  the  plural.  Thnt  which  may  be  termed  the 
regular  method,  is  by  prefixing  the  syllable  iil/l, — or  as  it  is  sometimes  pronounced, 
mit//  or  lit/./;  MM,  hit^/ds,  bmlhcr,  pi.  iil/.llMl(;lds ;  tio/.oiin/Jis,  will',  pi.  iit/liiof.nno/Ms. 
Anolliir  rommiiM  mode,  which  has  been  already  mentioned,  is  by  the  duplication  of  the 
first  part  of  the  word,  with  sometimes  u  change  of  the  vowel ;  os,  utt/.t('ilt,  infant,  pi. 
va/.u\t/.lnll ;  stiiiiikiHilt,  (laughter,  pi.  stiimlu iiikaalt ;  stU/.lam,  canoe,  pi.  stit/Mit/Mni. 
Sometimes  the  plural  is  (iirnied  ap|inrently  aHer  this  principle,  but  in  a  very  irregular 
fashion;  as  ^■iii(/iiiii,  girl,  pi.  ^itiiritinii;  sldkiinfi/iisttui,  eye,  pi.  skikintt/MiUii,i:liistan; 
titoil,  boy,  pi.  Iiloif.  In  some  cases  the  plural  is  a  peculiar  word,  entirely  dillercnl  from 
the  singular;  as,  sinuiiiuii,  woman,  pi.  jiel/.lpil/lkui,  jirolmbly  derived  I'rom  jwl/./ki,  the 
word  for  woman  in  Kitima/a;  but  sut/isii/iidam,  is  sometimes  used.  Some  nouns  have 
a  double  plural,  ns,  i/liiin  out,  K-hii-l',  ]^i.  iit//i/iliimi/.om.  All  these  variations  must, 
of  course,  be   larned  by  pmclicf,  as  they  depend  upon  no  general  principles. 

2.  The  plurals  of  .iilj<  ciives  nn"  formed  in  the  same  way  as  those  of  nouns;  as,  iaidt, 
strong,  pi.  lU/liaim;  uiest,  nmWi^  y,\.  /ns/aest ;  tiii(ii\,hat\,  \)\.  titmiiii.  liut  there  arc 
several  which  have  ihe  plural  .ntirely  dillerent  from  the  singular;  ,\s,  kviitiinl,  ^rcaX, 
f\.  j)iislji./ft ;  k'liii-diviini,  small,  pi.  tsitsimet, 

i.  A  diminutive  of  some  words  is  formed  in  idl ;  as,  skokosuii,  boy  or  sun,  s/cokosiui/t, 
IMe  boy;  stumt^dd,  daughter,  siumtfjddll,  little  daughter,  (^'uiitum,  girl,  has  ^epitirm 
for  its  diminutive. 

No  cases  have  been  distinguished  in  the  languoge. 

4.  The  personal  pronouns  are — 


koida,  I 

annul  or  dndi,  thou 

tsaiut/.lls,  \u) 


kaetipild,  we 
»pilnpstump,  ye 
tsuniU/./ts,  they 


NVither  the  dual  nor  the  exclusive  plural  has  been  found  to  exist  in  the  language.  To 
express  "  I  and  thou,"  a  speaker  would  say  kaoutmrm,  lit.  we-thou.  So  "  I  and  .lohn'' 
would  l)c  kafii-Juh/i,  we-.lohn.  K<ic  or  ka,'H  is  nn  abbreviated  Ibrm  of  the  first  person 
plural,  used  as  a  prolix. 

135 


538 


PHILOLOGY. 


8.  Thn  ponsrssivp  nflixps  hiivo  bf'rn  iilo'ncly  ^ivon.  The  rollowing  PXnmplos  will  ahow 
the  milliner  in  which  they  iirr  Juinrcl  with  nniuiH,  ll  will  tiv  oliaorvcil  that  tho  not'  the 
first  ami  socund  ihtsoms  is  (Ircipiu'd  Ix'fort'  iin  s: 


Ifiiiit  or  /(!««,  fiithcr 
in/niiii,  my  CiUliiT 
lui/iiiiii,  thy  ruthiT 
/nulls,  lii.s  liillitr 
kititiHiii,  our  liithrr 
liiniKimji,  ymir  rntlicr 
/(iiiitus,  their  liilher 


,  /n/iuiii,  fnlhors 
iii/iiliiiiii,  my  PnlhiTS 
iin/ii/iiiiii,  thy  liith'TS 
/ii/iiiiiix,  his  llithers 
/.III /(I /mi II,  our  Ihlhcrs 
III /nil  II II  III  l>,  your  liithers 
/n/niiiins,  their  tiilhers 


sttt/lim,  eiiniio 
istil/iiim,  my  eiinoc 
<islif//iiiii,  lliy  oiiiiiK' 
slit/./iiiiis,  his  oiinui' 
k<irslit//um,  our  cnmio 
ililf/iniip  (irrej;.),  ymir  cntioo 
stii///iii/is,  their  eiiniH! 


pi.  .tlil//lif//iiiii,  ennooa 
ii,lil/llil/liiii,  my  eiUKx-s 
imlil/ lilt //mil,  thy  eiiiioos 
ilil/llilfliims,  his  cniioes 
liaislilf/lttf./iim,  our  onnocs 
si  it /It'll //limp,  your  eniux's 
slit/lliit//'iiiis,  lh(  ir  ciiiuios 


The  tliiril  |xrsiiii  pliiriil,  it  will  1k'  seen,  (lillirs  iVdm  the  thinl  person  sinjinlnr,  not  in 
the  allix,  luit  in  the  (lupliciition  ol"  the  vowel  of  the  suhsliiiilive.  'I'his  peeuliitrily  runs 
thriiu;ih  the  whole  lnii|j:un);e,  (mil  will  lie  ohservoil  in  ih iiijii)j;iition  ol'ihe  verb. 

When  III/./  lit  Hill//,  is  used  to  lorni  tho  phirni  of  n  word,  it  is  prefixed  to  these  pro- 
nniins  i  lis,  /;iilrlii,  brother,  inkiit^/^i,  my  hrolher,  iil/liiiKiili,/ii,  my  hrolhiTs  ;  iin/diii)/, 
wile,  iit/lhiidin/Diin/ ,  our  wives. 

(I.  liiii  sigiiities  tlm;  i-iiii  (or  jv/j),  //,v(  tind  it/In,  l/iat,  neoordini;  to  the  distnnco  of 
tiie  ohjeet  to  wliiili  lliey  relir.  (,'iui  may  li.ive  the  tense  si),'ns  u  (or  o)  and  mn  lM>forc 
it ;  as,  in  answer  to  the  i|iiestion,  who  did  it  f  a  unlive  would  say,  M-('(<i(,  that  miiu  did; 
who  will  ^'o  '  alls,  iiin-i^iiii,  llint  one  will. 

(^'iiil  is  the  inlerroijalive  who?     In  the  plural  it  makes  i;iniaiet?    Stfm  sijjnilies  what  ' 

7.  The  exact  iiiiiiilier  of  lenses  and  modes  in  Welish  is  not  yet  deieriiiined.  Past  time 
is  expressed  by  prefixing  ii  (or  e)  and  l//iim,  the  llirmer  liiivini;  ii  general  si^iiifiealion, 
the  latter  relerrini!  to  an  action  as  just  completed.  Then;  are  also  two  future  sii,'iis,  m  (or 
mn)  and  iinin,  the  first  expressing  simple  futurity,  and  tho  latter  apparently  liaving  u 
signilicatiipn  of  will  or  inlenlioii.  All  the  lenses  have  two  forms,  thn  one  indelinito,  as,  I 
sleep,  I  slept, — the  oilier  definite,  as,  I  am  sleeping,  I  was  sleeping,  &c.  This  form  is 
made  by  prelixiiii;  nts  or  fls  to  the  verb,  and  sulHxiiig  J;  or  h  ;  as,  tlhilsiil,  lie  laughs, 
(Jts:ti>ilsiitir,  he  is  laughing;  ii/,uiiUntsiil,  I  laughed,  ii/,iiils:Uhlsiitir,  I  was  laughing. 

By  prefixing  uliS  or  n/c.s  to  a  verb  with  (>  suflixed,  a  liirm  is  oblaiiiod  signifying  wish 
or  desire ;  as,  iil/Jin,  he  eats,  ii/isiit/./inir,  he  wants  to  ent. 

Suits  prefixed  gives  the  signification  of  ought  or  should;  as,  lrtti;<iiijir/tim,  to  pray  for, 
Aiieli;ili,iiiij>i/iii'i,  we  pray  for  liini,  /ciirsiiilstrrtraujH/iim,  we  ought  to  pray  l()r  him. 

The  negative  form  is  made  by  prefi.\iiig  to  or /«?«  to  the  verb;  the  interrogative  by 
prefixing  /.«. 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA.  S39 

8,  The  following  pnradigm  rIiowi  some  of  the  variations  of  nn  introniitivo  verb: 


INUEriNITK  I'dHN. 

Aj'w-jl/j',  I  slcpp 
kwtt-iiff;,  thou  Hlprpnst 

iltr,  hn  «lro|>s 
kar-iilr,  wo  sleep 
7)(/-j|/j',  ye  sleep 

ilti;  (it'i^)  thoy  sleep 


u-ki>i-iil(;,  I  slept 
ti-ku'ii-ii/r,  thou  didst  sleep 
li-iit^-,  ho  slept,  «ko. 


t/.laiii-kiH-iit(;,  I  have  slept 


mkiniit^,  I  shall  sleep 


namktuiiti^,  I  will  sleep 


DlriNITB  roNM, 

rSUENT. 

ki-atsiitpi;,  I  nm  sleeping 
kti-al.tiili-ir,  thou  art  sleeping 

(itfiilrir,  he  is  Hlcepiiig 
k(ir-(i/siitrir,  we  are  sIcH'piiig 
])ii.alsiiti^ir,  ye  are  sleeping 

aUixt^ii;,  thoy  oro  sleeping 

miTERITC, 

ii-ki-ii/siifi'ii,',  I  was  sleeping 
u-kii-(ihiitf;ii^',  tli(ru  wast  sleeping 
ii-alsiiliji^',  ho  was  sleeping,  &o. 

rERrKT. 

t//aiit-ki-(ilsii/rir,  I  have  hcen  sleeping 

riHST  KUTUHE. 

7nki(itsiiti^i(',  1  shall  ki  sleeping 

RECONU  FUTl'RE. 

tiiiiiikiiitsiilrir,  I  will  be  sleeping 


kiaksiitrir,  I  want  to  sleep 
ki'.-nksiilrir,  tlmu  wishest  to  sleep 

iiksii/ri'\  he  wants  to  sleep 
k(iiiksii/'^ii^\  VIP.  woidd  sleep 
poksiifrii;,  yo  would  sleep 
('ksiil<;i';,  Ihcy  would  sleep 


kiniifknsiilrir,  \  am  wanting  to  slee|) 
kin/skir.siit'^ii^,  thcui  art  wanting  to  sleep 
c/sk(isiitri(^',  ho  is  wanting  to  sleep 
kdclskiisiitrir,  we  are  wanting  to  sle(>|i 
jinctskdsiilij^-,  ye  are  wanting  to  sleep 
elskdsii/rn;,  they  are  wanting  to  sleep 


OPTATIVE  PAST. 

u-kiaUiit^ii;,  I  did  want  to  sleep,  &c. 


DECESTIAU 

kisaitsiil^ig,  I  ought  to  sleep 
ktctisaitiiit^i^,  thou  oughtest,  tfco.  (Sec. 

There  is  still  another  form  in  i^aus,  signifying,  to  go  away  to  do  any  thinij ;  as, 

kiit'auiiitp^,  I  nm  going  away  to  sleep 
kwosiiaiisii^i^,  thou  art  going  away,  iic. 
vkisir(iusiil{;i^\  I  went  away,  iVe. 
namkisuatmit^,  I  will  go,  &c. 


^, 


^^^ 

.0^.  \^^ 


,^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


4^ 


^ 


1.0 


lii|21    12^ 

■tt  Ui2    122 

u 


I.I 


£  liS   12.0 


IL25  nil  1.4 


IJi& 


Nyi^i 


1.6 


Hiotographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


-  ^ 


'^%''^' 

^.V' 


33  \MIST  MAIN  STRUT 

WItSTIR.N.Y.  USM 

(7l6)t72-4S03 


'^ 


fe^  A 


^  A 


^ 


^ 


'*%^>^ 

^i^ 

V 


ftiO 


P  il  I  L  O  L  o  a  Y. 


9.  The  fedective  rorm  ia  denoted  by  the  termination  ItOt,-  as  in  tapenttit,  to  kill  one's 
self: 

Sing,  kinlaptnttit,  I  kill  myself  Plu.  kartapentsM,  wo  kill  ourselves 

kvatapeHltut,  thou  killcst  thyself  piiUijieiiUut,  yc  kill  yourselves 

liiprntsmt,  be  kills  himself  taajientaut,  they  kill  themselves 

This  form  rerrives  the  same  affixes  for  mood  nnil  tense  ns  the  simple  verb, 

10.  The  reciprocal  form  terminates  in  iiaf.ii ;  us,  from  jio/istum,  to  kill : 

kiifpn/isttiwu/.ii,  wc  kill  one  another 
piipii/istinni/.ii,  yc  kill  one  uiiothor 
pulistiitvu/1.11,  they  kill  one  another 

11.  A  form  sipiifying  to  do  any  thing  for  or  concerning  another  is  made  by  the  addi- 
tion cfjx/a  or  pc/f  to  the  verb ;  as, 

trct^niijiflam,  to  pray  (or 

kuikl^cl^aiijif/iim,  I  will  (or  would)  pray  for  thee 
koli^rl^itiipel»iiUf.u,  thou  proycst  for  me 
kMjK-lani,  to  b<>ar  witness  ajjainst,  accuse 
kiukMjteUntum,  we  accuse  him 

Vi.  The  following  is  the  present  tense  of  u  transitive  verb  varied  through  oil   its 
transitions : 

uit^in  or  tti'ff  t>i,  to  see. 


tiilpntsin,  I  see  thee 
uit',in,  I  sec  him 


riRiT  TSANaiTION, 

uikitjt.lman  (or  uikalyJainen),  I  see  you 
uiil^in  (or  iiit^in),  I  see  them 


kointfintu/.,  thou  seest  me 
uUfimtifi,  thou  sccst  him 


■ICOSD  TSASSITIOM. 

kanvit^il/.lp,  thou  seest  us 
uiit^intu/.,  thou  seest  them 


imritffis,  he  aers  me 
uitritomas,  he  sees  thee 
uitfis,  be  sees  him 


THUD  TSANSITION. 

kaeu-it^itf.lis,  he  sees  us 

V) 

uiitfis,  he  sees  them 


i 

Ml 


uitfiiut,  we  see  thee 
kanctl^iHtom,  we  see  him 


fOnSTH  TRANflTION. 

uiti,il/.lanwt,  we  see  you 
kactvHti^intum,  we  see  them 


kalauU^inUr/.,  ye  see  me 


rilTH  'nUNSITION. 

kaeUuilfU/.lp,  ye  see  us,  iic. 


NORTHWESTERN   AMERICA. 


541 


koUui/^iiitum,  they  see  me 


•IXTH  TIIANIITIOII, 

ktietsuU^itjf./ii,  Ihcy  see  us,  iic. 


UCirROCAL  roRM. 

kaei)tptaiva/.u,  wn  sec  one  another 
put^Uawa/1.11,  ye  sec  one  another 
ut^ilairri/.u,  ihoy  see  one  another 

Verbs,  like  nouns  and  adjectives,  somvlimes  have  a  plural  entirely  dilTorcnt  from  their 
singular;  thus,  iiiiilsiil,  to  Inugh,  has  in  the  plural,  /.ira/.iauii ;  tiifi/k;,  to  stand,  has 
ttipip. 

13.  The  imi)erntive  tcrniinates  in  the  singular  in  iV,  in  the  plural  in  iri ;  a%  siistif;, 
drink  thou  ;  siistiwi,  drink  ye. 

14.  There  arc  some  particles  in  frecpicnt  use,  the  exact  meaning  of  which  it  is  dilTicult 
to  defwic : 

T/.iu,  perhaps  from  the  demonstrative  ?>/./«,  that,  seems  to  Iw  used  ns  a  kind  of  article. 
It  is  prefixed  to  both  subslaulivi's  ami  adjwtivos  ;  as,  1^11/1  l/./a  Indus  l/.lu  'l\:3n  J  where 
is  the  father  of  John  ?      T/.lu  /<ie&l  l/.lii  sLii//(imi/o,  l\v  man  is  good. 

E/)l/l  (or  before  a  word  In-ginning  with  s,  c/m)  has  a  possessive  signification;  as, 
f]it/.l  iio/o/io/.,  having  a  wife;  f])t/.l  iiiiilritiiiin,  having  a  knife;  rps  s/a)/iii,  having  a 
husband,  .loined  with  the  pronominal  prefixes  of  the  word  it  changes  Ihrm  to  possessive 
pronouns  ;  ns,  paipil/.l  (for  pii-cpl/.l)  liiliidu,  your  fathers,  j}iiips  slil/Jam,  your  canoe. 

//(  or  n  is  a  pre|)osition  signifying  /o,  tit,  in.  I'retixed  to  pronouns  (and  perhaps  to 
nouns)  it  supplies  the  place  of  a  dative  case;  as,  kiiikskwn!ol;iiucllii^  ndnt'vi,  I  wish  to 
talk  to  thee;  kicitkskirii/okirtirllii;  iikoiiid,  thou  wisliest  to  talk  to  me. 

.Spj  is  an  adverb  which  expresses  present  and  continued  existence ;  as,  liijxiis,  it 
rains ;  spislstt/M  u-liijmis,  it  rained  yesterday  ;  spislstt/U  ii-scs-tiijxiis,  it  rained  yes- 
terday and  is  still  raining. 

l.'i.  A  noun,  pronoun,  or  adverb  which  commences  a  sentence,  frequently  has  t  or  M 
prefixed  to  it,  apparently  for  emphasis ;  as,  iMeri  ukoliiitnm  u  aintsiitir,  Mary  caused 
him  to  laugh;  Isiift  opitlislnrn  ?  who  killeil  him  P  tkoiiUi  opolislum,  I  killed  him;  tntriin 
tf.lu  kirnk/itii^  !  whei-e  art  thou  going  \ 

10.  Almost  any  word  may  Ijecome  a  verb  with  very  little  variation.  Thus,  from 
/.acst,  good,  we  have  kin/arsl,  I  am  gotnl,  kwii/.aest,  thou  art  good,  fiiesl,  he  is  giKid, 
&o. ;  mimkin/.acst,  I  will  be  good ;  kaks/.aestif,  we  wish  to  be  good ;  kaesaits/.acsti^, 
we  ought  to  be  gcMnl,  tie. 

From  ^aii,  that,  or  so,  we  have  tn;  aiit;,  it  is  not  so. 

From  cstlf/iii,  two  houses,  are  formed,  kinesi/f/.n,  I  have  two  houses;  kinicstlrfu,  thou 
hast  two  lu)us<;s,  iStc. 

A  termination  in  li/w/f,  signifies  Vj  desire  an  object ;  as, 

ino/oiin/u-ti/'iii;,  to  want  a  wife,  from  iio/oiin/. 
iiiikinl/.lf.iiiii<ilisi(;,  to  want  a  ho'ise,  from  siiiiit/l/n 
kinumiiiii/.U'<i/isii;  to  want  tobacco,  from  s'lmiin/n 

Other  parts  of  speech,  also,  may  be  formed  from  verbs ;  as,  from  iiti;,  to  sleep,  we 
have  siitsuni,  a  blanket,  and  sniiiitisli'ti,  a  bed. 

130 


fi42 


I'll  I  I.  ()  l.()(i  Y. 


1  : 


Olio  noun  mny  Ih'  fDrniod  frnni  another ;  u», 

from  sinimu/ii,  lolmi'co,  In  lormiMl  yiniiin/iitiiii,  \n\H- 

from  siiinlf.lkuii,  wattT,  siiiiiiu-ilf.1,  a  lisli,  or  nny  iininiiil  llml  livcN  in  the  wiitcr 

from  Mil/.<iii,  the  niiinc  of  n  plttcc,  Smuil/uiii^,  ihp  |m>o|>I(!  of  Mil/uii. 

IT.  Tlx*  SclJHh,  liko  other  Iniliiin  Inn^na^i'H,  ihmhokm'm  in  ii  \»^\i  ilc);ni'  the  ixmcr  of 
r<iiii|Hisiiinn,<ir,  iiH  it  hiis  Ihi'M  ciiIIimI,  a^^lutiMllti(■ll,  liy  which  our  or  Iwosyllahlcs  iirc  liikon 
from  (lilli'rriil  wonls,  mul  I'cimliirii'il  to  form  a  new  trrm.  Thus,  I'rom  jxtfjxt/nt,  ohl,  and 
ti^rsiis,  ii^ly,  is  mailo  thi-  wonl  /xiiiis,  mcaiiin;;  "  u;{ly  from  .ijjp;"  from  .vi/.t,  now,  and 
siiiul/le/ II,  house,  i.s  niadi'  sils/i/ii,  now  houw.  The  sumo  word  liir  house,  eomhined 
with  the  numerals  ««•/,  two,  kri/.lis,  three,  make*  esi/r/'i,  two  honiH-8,  krt/.Mr/.u,  three 
houses.  I'roin  kiinluiit,  j.'reat,  and  .s/«)o.v,  hi'art,  is  derived  kiitrsjmm,  a  hrave  man,  a 
warrior;  from  sintiil/lsiiskii/n,  a  horse,  and  ///i>I//ih<siihi,  to  look  l<>r  any  Ihinj;,  is 
formed  the  verh  l/laikit/.n,  to  Idnk  liir  horses,  whieh  is  n'litdnrly  varied, — as,  kiiks///iis- 
ku/iit/lip,  we  mean  to  lisik  liir  our  horses;  mnkhiiutiislfln/n,  I  shall  go  to  look  for  my 
horse. 

These  ohservalions,  though  necessarily  imperlect,  will  servi;  to  give  some  idea  of  the 
character  of  the  Selish  language,  and  of  the  others  which  Ix'long  to  this  family.  Some 
notes,  of  a  similar  kind,  which  wen-  made  on  the  •Shushwa|i,'rsihailish,  and  Nsietsliawus, 
ore  omitted,  as  they  show  no  |)eculiarilies  dillering,  ui  any  im|M)rtant  |R)iiit,  from  the  fore- 
going. 

4.    8  A  H  A  P  T  I  N    F  A  M  I  f.  V. 

(M.  Sahaptin.     N.  Witlimula  [i.  I\lus;  j.  Uutkema;  k.  7>7i *«/«/] ). 

These  vooahularies  an-  from  various  sources, — hut  wi-  are  |irinci|>nlly  indehted  for  them 
to  the  assistance  of  Dr.  M.  Whitman,  Missionary  of  the  American  lloard,  at  Waiilntpu, 
through  whose  nieiliation  we  were  enabled  to  ohtr.'n  the  words  from  the  natives  with 
greater  accuracy  than  wouhl  otherwise  have  Is-en  [Ktssihle.  To  the  same  gentleman, 
who  has  Iss'ii  six  years  a  n'sident  at  that  station,  wc  owe  much  valuahle  information  on 
various  suhjecis  connecti-il  with  the  character  and  customs  of  the  natives. 

We  had  also  the  go<Hl  fortune  to  m^-t  at  Astoria  the  Ilev.  A.  H.  Smith,  who  had  resided 
three  years  in  the  same  lril»\  near  the  Kooskooske<!  Kiver.  During  that  time  he  had 
applied  himself,  with  singular  success,  to  the  study  of  their  language,  and  the  elucidation 
of  its  very  (leculiar  and  complex  structure.  We  are  indehted  to  him  for  a  copy  of  his 
grammar,  or,  as  ho  has  modiwtly  enlilleil  it,  "  Kemarks  on  the  Peeuliaritio""  of  this  lan- 
guage, together  with  many  additional  explanations  on  the  same  subject.  In  the  summary 
which  Ibllows,  the  only  changes  that  have  been  made  an-  the  omission  of  nnim|Mirtant 
details,  anil  some  alteratiim  in  the  arrangement.  As  the  words  given  in  our  v(K-abulary 
will  be  found  to  diiri'r  somewhat  in  orthography  from  those  contained  in  this  grammar,  it 
will  lie  proper  to  explain  the  cause  of  the  iliscn-pancy. 

To  the  vowels  r,  i,  o,  «,  the  missionaries  give  the  same  sounds  as  they  have  in  our 
system;  but  they  employ  the  a  to  repn'sent,  Isvsides  the  sounds  heard  in  father  and  tiian, 
those  of  the  «  in  ha/l  and  what,  and  the  ii  in  Imt,  In  our  vocabulary,  thiise  sounds  are 
written  with  peculiar  characters,  a,  and  ".     The  propriety  of  separating  these  elements  is 


I 


N  O  R  T  II  W  K  S  T  R  R  N    A  M  K  II  I  C  A. 


543 


cviilciil  rriiiii  iIm'  fuel  Ihnl  two  dl'lhr  nuHlific-nliniis  i>l'  Iho  vrri)  rliin-r  only  i"  lli«  s'>unil»  « 
nnd  n,  whiili  ilisliMclion  tlir  missiomirirs  arc  nlilignl  tn  li'iivf  iiiiinnrki'il.  In  snnir  wiirds 
it  n|i|K-nn'il  to  iim  Ihiit  llii-  a  of  tin-  iiiisNioiiiirics  iiii^lit  !«•  Ix-ttrr  rt'iin'sciitcd  by  rii,  as 
U'fdliir,  land,  I'or  irtilm^- ;  liiit  this  iiiny  havi-  Im'cii  a  diali'diral  diHrn'iicr,  mm  the  Indiaiifi 
iifar  Waiilalpu  8|K'iik  n  iMilois  varying  n  lilllc  Innn  lliat  of  llii'  IkiiuJ!!  alxHit  tlii!  Koos. 
kiK).sk('c. 

Thn  cnnwinnntH  used  in  tlic  grammar  an;  nine,  viz, :  /i,  /••,  /,  ni,  »,  p,  a,  I,  ir.  No 
distiiirlion  ix  llicri'  made  iH'tuicn  /.'  ami  '/;  in  liu't,  ilin  lallcr  dilliTH  (rum  tin-  liirmcr  oidy 
in  a  niDO'  fjullnral,  or  Imllow  nltrranrc,  and  lias  liy  no  nirans  llic  as|>i!  .ifd  riiUfjlniiHs  of 
tlip  .same  U'llcr  in  the  Tsjiiniik.  Tlii' |iro|KT  I'.n^ilish  A  docs  not  exist  in  llw  lanfjuap'; 
wliom  rmploycd,  Ixith  in  the  vocalMilary  and  llii'  ^ranmiar,  it  should  iiavn  tlii^  same 
sound  as  the  /. 

A  dilli'ri'nci-  of  opinion  rxists  among  llu'  missionarii's  with  n>gnrd  to  tlic  pro|)cr  mode 
of  writing  rcrtaiu  words,  in  uliirli  Kom<-  lirar  only  tlin  sound  of  s,  while  others  distin- 
guish a  preceding  t.  The  worils  usually  olli-red  as  a  test  art!  t(ili»,  giH>d,  and  knskiis, 
small.  Tho  ipiestion  is,  whiMher  they  are  to  Ih'  pronounced,  as  hi'ri'  written,  or  rather 
tuts  and  kiitskiils.  The  li  in  tii/ix  is  intenileil,  as  we  weri'  told,  to  repri'sent  a  sort  of 
hiatus,  or  indistinct  hreathing  alter  the  vowel  a.  AHer  hearing  these  two  words  pro. 
nounced  jiorhaps  a  hundn'd  times  hy  several  natives,  we  were  still  in  doubt  as  to  the  In-st 
mode  of  writing  them.  The  Sahaptin  Indians  about  Waiilatpu,  and  tlio.se  of  other  tribes 
who  had  learned  to  speak  their  language  (such  as  Ihi'  t'ayuse  and  Wallawallas),  pro- 
nounced the  ts  very  distinctly,  while  the  natives  I'riun  the  inli'rior  toiicheil  so  lightly  upon 
the  /  as  to  leave  it  hardly,  if  at  idl,  nialible.  On  the  whole,  we  weri'  inclined  to  lielieve 
that  till!  full  orthography  of  Is  was  the  most  correct.  This  opinion  ri'sts  chiefly  on  the 
fact  llin  those  who  n'joct  the  t  do  so  only  when  the  sound  in  question  occur.s  at  the 
liegiiniing  or  end  of  words, — ns  in  si/iikt  (or  tsiliikHI),  Unly,  silisilt  (tsi/.tsi)'.),  grass, 
hamitlis  /anutlils),  hniuLsonic;  but  in  the  middle  of  words  nil  agree  in  writing  it,  as  in 
ttuitsaiii,  ear,  hitsiii,  star,  &c.  The  hiatus  above  mentioned,  represented  by  li  in  liilis,  is 
nicnMy  the  shor  l>,  which  sound  freipienlly  occurs  liel'ore  tin;  's;  w<!  have  therefore 
written  'nuts,  good,  kuDtskitltts,  small,  miunts  (for  7>iias),  child,  i-tc. 

The  soil  s  and  the  i;  nrc  freipiently  confounded  in  this  Inngnnge,  as  nrc  the  /  nnd  //  ,- 
the  latter,  however,  is  rather  a  dialectical  dillerence. 

The  general  sound  of  the  langunge  is  very  pleasing  to  the  ear,— clear,  smooth,  and 
sonorous, — more  resi'mbling,  in  its  general  ipiality  and  intimations,  the  Spanish,  than 
any  other  of  the  Kuropean  languages  which  we  have  heard  spoken. 

The  following  is  an  abstract  of  Mr.  Smith's  grammar  of  the  Sahaptin  language: 


1.  The  number  of  letters  noi-essarily  used  to  e.\pre.ss  the  sounds  of  this  language  is 
rourtwn, — five  vowels  nnd  nine  consonants.  Seven  other  consonants  are  occasionally 
employed  in  foreign  words  intrmluced  hy  the  missionaries  in  their  translations. 

3,  The  following  is  the  arrangement  of  the  alphal)ct : 

A  pronounced  ns  a  m  father 
E  "  "  a  in  hate 

I  "  "  i  in  machine 

O  "  "  o  in  note 

U         "  •■•■  oo  in  mam 


P  II  I  I.  O  I,  O  O  Y. 


//,  k,  I,  m,  n,j},  s,  I,  w,  are  pmnounred  aa  in  BnglUh.  B,  d,f,  g,  r,  v,  :,  are  i  rad 
only  in  wunls  of  foreign  origin. 

3.  The  vowoU  hnvc  somuliinos  other  xoiiniis  bmiiloi  IhoMC  given  above,  A  i«  lined 
with  the  most  latitude,  iind  n'pruseiitH  niso  the  Hound  iif  a  in  fiUl  (4),  of  a  in  what  {H), 
and  II  in  hut  (ii).     li  hns  nUo  the  Hound  of  «■  in  mrl;  i  thiit  oft  In  pin,  and  of  1/  in  i/ou, 

4.  The  most  roinmon  diplithoiigs  are  «i,  pronoiineed  like  1  in  jiiiie,  an,  like  ou  in 
loulli^  mill  iu,  like  ru'  in  tinr. 

Ti,  (i.  The  cninliiiintions  of  ccins<innnt.s  nn;  iiiiuiy  of  them  dilTerent  from  Ihoae  which 
oceur  in  Kuro|KNiii  liingunge.s,  nnd  n'lider  it  dillieiilt  fiir  fon-igners  to  nequire  the  exnct 
proiiiiiiciiition  of  the  words.  Some  of  the  oomhiniilions  lire — Ik,  as  in  alk,  kt,  ns  in 
si/iikl,  III  (If),  ns  III  kokalli,  hi  {/!),  ns  in  hlnphlnji,  iht  (';/),  ns  in  pishi,  ih  (//),  ns  in 
silh  (the  It  not  comhiiiing  with  the  t  ns  in  Kn;;lisli,  liiil  usi'd  only  ns  nn  iispjrnle),  iiih,  ns 
in  shmiih,  iim  ns  in  Hlnkaiiiii,  knh,  an  in  tuksh,  hsh  (/j),  us  in  miihsh,  xlil,  ns  in  knshl, 
mill  (ml/),  lis  in  kiimlh,  <.Vr, 

7,  A"^  nnd  /  nro  freijiiently  used  iiiliri'li«nj;enlily,  L  is  more  eiimimin  niiiimg  some 
bands  of  Nez-I'erces  Ihnn  others.  The  woineii  nnd  ehildn'n  niniost  invnrinbly  use  / 
instead  of  n. 

8.  There  nre  other  chnngi's  of  letters  mnde  (or  the  snke  of  eii|)hony  ;  ns,  h  iH-eomes  A: 
belbre  a  word  or  ntlixed  syllnble  coniiiienring  with  n  vowel  ;  /.  is  changed  to  h  lu'lort^  a 
syllable  commencing  with  ", 

O  F    T  II  K   F  0  It  M  A  T  I  <»  .V  OF  W  O  K  D  S. 

!i.  The  rndieni  form-i  nf  words  c  insist  usually  of  one,  two,  or  three  syllables,  but  rnn-ly 
more  than  that.  'I'o  these  rndieni  liirnis  syllnliles  niny  Is'  pn'fixeil  nnd  sulli.xed  to  nlmost 
any  extent,  varying  the  sigiiil'icntion,  nnd  leiigtbeniiig  the  word  to  nine,  nnd  sometimes 
even  to  twelve  or  more  syllnbles.  Words  are  eiim|«niiided  nlmost  indelinitely.  The 
various  eircuinslnnces  nr  iiKsles  of  nn  nctioii  are  in  genernl  not  expressed  by  separate 
particles  or  qualifying  words,  os  in  most  lMiro|iean  languages,  hut  nlmost  every  thing  of 
the  kind  is  brought  into  the  verb  itself,  nnd  makes  a  part  of  the  word.  For  instance, 
till/Ill II II ill  is  nn  ndjective  terminntion,  signifying  intensity  ;  ns,  luhnliimaiiniii,  very  good. 
This  pnrlirle  is  com|M)Uii(led  with  the  verb,  and  gives  it  the  same  additional  sigiiilienlicin ; 
as,  hiirakiildiiuiiisii,  it  ruins  very  niueb.  Several  eireumstnnces  nn?  thus  sometimes 
brought  into  the  same  word  ;  ns,  for  exnniple,  in  lii-tnii-lii-iil-ii-icih-ii(iii-kiiu-iia,  whirh 
will  be  found,  on  nnnlysis,  to  be  corn|iounded  of  two  verbal  roots,  preceded  by  two 
insepnrable  particles,  each  of  which  aihls  to  its  signification,  liesldes  a  prefix  which 
determines  the  numlx<r  and  [lorson,  nnd  n  sulfix  which  determines  the  mode,  tense,  and 
direction.  Hi  is  the  prefix  of  the  third  |>erson  singular  numlier ;  Uni  hns  reft-rence  to 
any  thing  done  in  the  night, — tiinin  to  nn  nrtioii  |ierliiriiied  in  the  rain.  These  two  are 
never  used  alone,  and  are  not  derived,  so  liir  us  is  known,  from  any  verlml  root.  Wihiiiin 
is  from  the  simple  verb  icihiiuxa,  to  travel  on  loot.  The  verbal  noun,  which  is  the 
simplest  form  of  the  root,  is  uihiiu.  The  last  ti  seems  to  be  added  for  the  sake  of 
euphony.  Kaii  is  from  the  verb  kokaiimi,  ro<ii  kokuiin,  to  pass  liy.  Ka  is  the  suffix 
of  the  indicative  mixle,  aorist  tense,  direction  from  the  speaker.  The  whole  word 
signifies,  "  he  travelled  by  in  n  rainy  night." 

lU.  To  this  other  particles  may  be  prefixed  and  suffixed,  lengthening  the  word  and 


N  ()  K  T  II  \V  K  S  T  K  H  N    A  M  K  K  I  •:  A. 


645 


chan^iiiK  its  mrtiniii);, — n»,  hi-sluip-d-tiiii-hi-nl.u.iiili-iiiiii-kiiii-iiim-ii.  Mure  the  sha{> 
)(iv(>H  n  rniiNiitivc  si^juiticiilion  likit  tlii^  llclircw  lli|iliil ;  llioa  uliirh  rollowH  it  ix  merely 
for  I'liphiiny.  The  .siilVix  niiiiii  Ih  i<(  the  aiimc  iiichIi'  iiiiiI  teiiHe  na  the  prccctlin;;,  but 
chnn^cM  the  liircctiiiii  louiinls  the  s[M'iiker. 

II.  As  ill  othiT  hiiiniiiines,  ihiTe  lue  rrt(|iiriilly  wiirils  nl'  ditliTi'iil  siyiiilicMilieii  wliiuu; 
cirthiijiriiphy  niiisl  Im'  the  siiiiie.  In  eoiiversMiliiui,  Imwiver,  these  wurds  im'  iisuiilly  (lis. 
tin}.'nishecl  hy  n  variiilioii  in  |iiiiiinni'iiiticin  lurn  plililc  to  llie  ear,  Imt  ineiipalile  cil'  heing 
exprrsseil  liy  the  alphaliet.  |  A  Inure  ediiiplite  aiphalH  t  than  that  adopted  hy  the  mis- 
siiinaries,  (i>r  one  in  whieli  the  vriwels  a  anil  ii  wi're  I'liiployed,)  vvnuhl  in  many  enw^a 
eiialilc  Ihrm  to  make  the  iieeessary  disliiictinii  in  tin'  (irlliMjiiaphy.  Si'e  the  remarks  on 
the  \'ocahnhiry.| 

\'i.  h"ew  ;^eii(rie  terms  an'  I'omid  in  the  Inii^na:;!  ,  Imt  speeille  terms  arc^  exinniely 
imine  rolls. 

(I  V   V  II  i:  I'  A  It  IS  II  I'  s  I'  K  i;  (•  II. 

i:l.  The  parts  of  s|Hi'eh  are  ihi'  noun,  adirciivi,  piMiioiiii,  and  verli,  ileilinalile ;  the 
nilverh,  eoiijiinelion,  and  inlerjeeliiiii,  iiidei  liiialilr.  To  Ihise  may  Im'  addeil  iiiiollicr, 
which  sei'iiis  to  he  a  dislini'l  purl  of  speeidi.  Ii  is  iimcI  in  coiinrvion  with  Mrhs,  Imt  has 
nsiiallv  some  propcrlies  ol' the  i-oiijiiiielioli.  To  disliiii;iiish  it,  it  uill  lie  eallrd  \\v  (livliiiii- 
l)ie  votljitmtum. 

II.  I'roperlv  spriikiii};,  there  are  no  prepositions  in  lln'  laiij;iia;;c'.  I'reposilioiis  are 
only  snlhxi's  lo  lli.'  nouns,  fiiriiiiii);  a  pari  ol'  lln'  wonl  ilscll',  ninl  pirhaps  ihisi'  siiilix 
Ibriiis  may  In'  mori'  pro|Mrly  termed  eases. 

O  F    T  11  i:    .NO  I'  N. 


15.  Nouns  are  varied  liir  iiiimlier  ami  ease,  hiii  seldom  lor  pir^on.  There  is  somelimes 
n  variation  liir  the  second  |H'rsoii  in  words  (ksi^rnaliiiij  relalionsliip, — as,  iix/:iij>.  joiiiifjer 
lirother,  iis/^ii,  second  |H'rson,  or  liirm  ol'nd<iress.  This  llirm,  however,  in  many  cases,  is 
mi  enlirelv  dilli'rent  word, — as,  /;/.<///,  liither,  liitu,  second  person,  or  lliriii  ol'addrcss. 

l(i.  The  niimlH'rs  are  two,  siii!;nlar  and  plural.  The  pliir.il  is  usually  formed  iVoin  Ihi" 
sini!iiliir  hy  u  reduplieution  oCllie  first  syllahle;  as,  piliii,  f^irl,  pi.  jiijiili//. 

17.  When  the  noun  commenci's  with  n  vowel,  instead  of  ii  con.soiiHiit,  the  vowel  is 
somelimes  douhled  ;  as,  iitiriii,  an  old  woman,  pi.  iiiifitui. 

l>*.  To  this  mode  of  formiiij;  tlii'  plural  there  is  an  exception  of  one  whole  class  of 
words,  which  in  this  lanituafie  is  uiieommonly  full, — vi/.,  those  expressing  the  various 
fnniilj  relations.  In  this  class  the  plural  is  formi'd  hy  siilUxiiifj  ma  to  the  sinirular, — ns, 
jiikd,  mother,  pi.  pil«t»iii.  When  the  siiif;ular  ends  in  y),  tliis  letter  is  dropped, — ns, 
aski'p,  pi.  iixk<i»i<(. 

1!>.  The  gender  of  nouns  is  to  some  extent  distinguished, — only,  however,  hy  n  dis- 
tinct name  liir  each  sex,  and  never  hy  o  variation  of  the  same  word;  as,  /id.sini/,  hoy, 
piliii.  girl ;  nnirnhui,  male  elk,  f<ix/iij>,  female  elk.  \\  lienever  there  are  not  distinct 
names  liir  the  two  sexe.'*,  the  words  /itliiiii,  nude,  and  aiiU,  I'emalo,  are  used. 

20.  Nouns  arc  deeliiied  by  n  change  in  their  termination,  or  hy  snUixing  prepositions 
which  Ik'i'oiiio  a  part  of  the  word  itself,  changing  sometimes  the  orthography,  and  fre- 


546 


I'll  I  l.o  I.  OU  Y. 


qiicnily  llinittin;;  llio  nrrnil  ii|)<in  n  dilfi'ri'iit  sylliiM"'.     Ilrnco  iho  niiiiilwr  of  rniici  muil 
lie  nuiiicniiis,  if,  iniliN'd,  it  Is  pri>|NT  In  rail  nil  llicw  sullix  Ibriiiii  i'aM.>ii. 
31.  Tlic  iiinin  1//1V,  n  Inxisf,  i.i  tliiH  ilirlincil: 

Noiii.  iiiil,  liiiiisc 

(irn.  /«(//;//,  dCii  lioiisr 

Aro.  iiiiiKi,  lniii«' 

1st  Dill,  ihilph.  III  ur  liir  a  \m\i»a, 

"A  Dal.  iiii//>ii,  in,  mi,  or  u|>im  n  Iioiiho 

Isl  Alii,  iiii/ki,  willi  n  Ihuim'  (iiislruint'nt) 

'Jil  Al)l.    iiiif/i/,iiiili,  rriiin  a  limisi! 

M  .Mil,    hiiltiiii,  liir  llic  |iiir|i<M('  ol'ii  lioiiso 

(TliP  |iri)iiiinrinlicin  cIik's  ntii  slmw  cli-irly  thai  ihi-n-  is  11  ilitrcrfnt  form  of  thin  word  for 
till'  |iliiral  ;  it  wiiiild  |irii|Mrly  In-  linit.) 

Then'  are  nlliiT  .siillixi's  wliirli  may  Ih'  Cdiisidrri'il  iidjcclive  or  advcrbiul,  ns: 

iiiifiish,  the  |i!(ic('  urn  ln>ii'«' 
iiiit/iiiiiia,  Mon^imji  In  a  hmiao 
iiiiiinl,  xiiliiiiit  (or  dcstiliilo  of)  a  house 
inilin,  liaviii;;  n  luiusu 
iiiifiili,  like  a  luvuse 
itiilsiiii,  iiiilv  n  hnii.se 


I 


'J'Z.  Noiiim  cndin!;  in  n.  /,  o,  ami  11,  make  the  ^'iiitive  by  miiliii);  nm  ;  ns  liiiinn, 
linmiiiiin  ;  hnlsii,  IkiIsiiiiiii.  Th<iM'  eniliii^'  in  '/',  ks  in,  nnd  .1,  iiy  iiddin);  niiii,  aa. 
Iii/uii,lii/i<tiiiim  ;  irM,vililiiiiiii  (see§^);  sliikmii,  sliHnm/iini,  Tlinse  endiiif;  in /and 
X,  expi|it  it  lie  ill  in,  liy  ndilinu  in,  as  linsini/,  Imsmilin  ;  tiliikini,  lilakdiim,  TIiosk' 
cndiiii;  in  in  eliaiiije  llie  11  In  sliiiiin,  as,  liiiiiiii,  liiiiiis/iniiii.  Those  in  ji  add  iin,  as, 
]iiii/i,  jiiiijiiin.  'rimse  in  nl  add  iiin,  ns  iiiiiihut.  mnJiiiliiiii.  Thow  in  (/  ehnnf{e  Iho  I 
to  mil,  ns,  iskil,  iskiiim.  Tlmse  in  kt  dni|i  llie  /  and  lake  iini  with  a  vowel  pR'Ocdiii(j. 
ns,  Idii/ikt,  taiilikiiim  ;  niikt,  niikinim. 

an.  The  nceusalivc  is  liirmed  from  the  itmitive  liy  dropping  the  m  (nnil  /  when  it  pre- 
ecdes  it)  ami  adillii'i  a  ;  or  if  the  wi  is  not  preceded  by  11,  by  adding  /)",  ns,  iskiiini, 
iskiiia  ;  witihnim,  icitilma  ;  mniliatniii,  intoliatna, 

0  F    T  II  K    .\  !»  J  K.  t    T  I  V  E, 
'<!4.  The  adjective  is  declined  in  tlic  snme  wny  ns  the  noun :  as — 


SIMJ, 

\om,  tiihn  \Utnu] 
Gen,  tii/i.siiim 
Aeo.  Iiilimiit 
Isl  DnI.  lulisph 
8d  Dm.  UilisiHi 
1st  Abl.  Itihiki 
2d  Abl.  tttlispkinih 
3d  Abl.  tuhsain 


good 


n.eit. 
titiilis 
tiltilisiiim 
liliihsmi 
Itlahsjilt 
ti/it/isjia 
tilahski 
tilahipkinih 
tiUilisnin 


N  ( »  H  T  11  \V  K  H  T  K  11  N    A  M  K  H  I  ('  A.  f)47 

9A.  Thu  ilc-|{rtfa  of  coiiiparii«)ii  iin<  llum  cxpri-HNcd  : 

I'cwilivi',  liilit,  (JcmmI 

('(im|>iiriilivr,  liiha  kiiiniiukdiiiii,  licllcr 

Su|K>rliitiv(',  liilia/ii,  U'sl. 

Then-  nro  oilier  iiiimIiw  of  <'X|irf>i»inj(  ihc  »ii|KTlnlivi'  cirjjnv,  n»  lnhslnmauni",  very 
go<xl,  Arc, 

Un.  T)H'rc  in  niMo  ii  iikkIc  of  fxpmoiinf;  iiiiy  lliiiig  timt  \»  \imffn'*»\n^  tiiwiirdti  a  super- 
Intivo  |Mijiil,  wlii<-li  ix  liy  dDiililing  ii  Hylliibic  or  piirt  cifd  sylliilili';  iix,  lainl,  i-lcar,  piniii : 
laimiiit,  iiicn.>ui«iii)j;ly  clvar. 


i>  !•■    I'  It  (»  N  <i  I'  N  S. 

'.J7.  I'ronoiins  miiy  1»"  diviilcil  into  |mtsiiiiiiI,  iidjcclivi',  iiiiil  inlfrmgnlivr.  Thi"  |ior- 
KonnI  prniiiiiins  iirr  in,  I,  iiii,  iIhhi  ;   ijn,  ]»•  or  she ;   ;///«,  wr ;  ////(/,  ye  ;  iiiiiiiti,  lliry. 

(Tlic  priiliiiiiiis  (if  llic  s nil  and  third  pirMHis  plural  mv  (lisi|iiu''ii'<li<'d  in  wrilini:  lor 

the  .'•aki'  III'  |K'i>pii'iiily  ;  liiil  in  pnuiniicialidii  iin  dilliri'iin'  «lial»'»vir  i-aii  U-  disccriifil 
iR'tHi'cii  lliciii,      Ittilli  arr  siiiiiidc'd  iiiiii,  with  llic  ai'i'ciit  dii  ihi'  last  syllalilr.) 

liH.  IVimouns  an'  dcidiiii'd  in  ilii!  saiiii^  way  ns  nouns  and  adjiiiivis.  /«  nial»os  in 
the  genitive  iiiini,  aci'.  inn  ;  iin  niakeii  iniim,  imiiiin ;  i/n,  ijiiiiiii,  i/nui  :  miii. 
liunini.  Ilium,  iiiin,  iiiiniii,  iiiii/iin,  iniiiiii,  iiniiiniii,  i  in  inn  nil, 

'UK  'I'lio  |ii'rsi>nal  pniminns  arc  variimsly  lonipdundcd,  or  ri'ciivc  various  sulVixfs 
which  olmnge  their  gignilicalion  :  as — 

in/nil,  I  inysi'll';       ininili,  ihoii  ihyscH';       i/iinili,  hi'  liiniscir 
iiisiinit,  I  alone;     iinsinn/,  thou  alone;      ijkiiiiiI,  he  alone 
inkii,  I  also;  i/iiLn,  ijiinika 

inkii,  inikii,  iiiinl,ii. 

Thin  termination  (kii)  ia  useil  to  signily  assent.  It  is  sullixed  not  only  to  pronouns, 
but  to  verlw  and  ol\en  to  other  words  in  giving  an  airinnnlive  answer. 


i/ikai,  I  lirst 

iniiiltniikm,  I  myself  first 
inliinii,  I  instead  of  another 
inlit,  I  the  suinc 


iiiikds,  i/iinikia 
inmiliniiLiis,  vVe, 
iiiiliiiiii ;  ipinhirni 
iiiilit,  ipiiilil 


All  these  are  declined  like  the  simple  forms. 

30.  The  genitive  ease  of  personal  pronouns  is  olten  eom|xninded  with  nouns,  forming 
one  contrncted  word  instead  of  two;  as,  inin/wn,  insteail  of  inini  iiinlii'i,  my  com- 
panion ;  illiiiiliuit  for  iniiH  liiiiliira,  my  friend  ;  nniii/nnliun  liir  Hiinini  /iiiitiirii,  fif, 

31.  There  nro  only  two  adjective  pronouns,  and  these  are  demonstrative,  viz. :  ki,  this, 
pi.  kimti ;  inli,  that,  pi.  inkniiia, 

32.  Ki  makes  in  the  geintivc  kinm,  ace.  kinui ;  kiiiui  makes  kinimam,  kinimaiia: 


048 


Pil  I  i.ni.oti  v. 


i    >» 


1: 


loh  hnii  Ihr  it«  genitive  linfcninr,  kunim,  i kiinin;  nnd  in  Ihn  plumi  kuitimam, 

ktnittiiitmi, 

!1M.  Ih'HJilrH  iIk-  ordiimry  "iillix  "ir  I'ltw-rdrnw  ihrri-  i«  oiii-  nnirli  iiwil  with  llirw  Iwci 
pruiiiiiinii,  vi/. :  kiiiim,  HJn^.,  nnti  kiniiiiiiiit/i,  \<\. ;  kimiiti  niiii  kiiniiiintnii, — NJ^iiiryin){ 
with,  ill  ciiiniHiiiii  iiilli,  thn  i>r  lliiit,  TIh'  suiinc  Millix  (iii)  In  oOrn  iilliiclii'ij  In  |ini|i<<r 
nninc'N,  iiml  Nuriii'tinii'M  In  (■inninoii  uiirs,  U  hiiiivrr  iIiIh  lliriii  \»  iisi'il,  llic  mtIi  in 
cniiiirxiiiii  ulili  il  it  iilwiiys  |i|iiril,  lliiiii){li  iN  iiMiiiiiiiilivi'  Ik'  Hingular ;  oh,  kiiiiiiii 
kiiilii^li,  I  inn  nnm^i  willi  iliiil  oiii'  (III.  uilli  lliiil  one  wr  ^in). 

Till'  llilji  rtlvr  |>riiilcilins  lin-  riilll|liillllilril  llki'  lllr  |H'rNli|ll|l, 

S\.  'I'liirt'  iiri'  llirif  inlrrnij^nlive  |iri>iiiiiiii»,  vi/.. : 

mA/,  who  f  |il.  i»liiiiiii,  ri'laliii^  In  iktsihih  mily 
ilii,  uliiil  f  |il.  i/iiiiiii,  rrlaliii^  mily  <»  lliiiii;>,  iinil 
Mil,  uliicli  I   iisi'il  iiI'IkiIIi  iM'rHiiiis  iiikI  ||iiii;:s 

Va/ij  Ikin,  ill  llio  );c'niliv<-  liill^'>llll^,  ia/iiiiiii,  ni'i'.  ixliind;  jjiii.  |il.  iahiiiiuiii,  aci', 
Uihimiiiia.  Itii  liiiK,  III  llio  uniltlvr  Miiigular,  Hiiinii,  i\r\\  iliiini ;  |il.  iliimnin,  iliiiiniiiii. 
Mil  iniikra  III  )jrn.  iniiiin,  iicc.  iiiiiiiii. 

Jx/iii'iii,  iliiiiiii,  itiijuiiiiii,  iiiiiiiiii,  iiiiiiiii/iiiiiiii,  iVr.,  iiir  liiriiis  in  iVt'qilcnl  use, 

:<•).  'I'liin' nil' |iri<|iri'ly  im  nlalivr  |ir<>ii<Miiis  In  ilils  hm^'iiap' ;  liiil  a  I'nniliinatlon  Is 
uscil  uliicji  aiiswrr.s  llir  |iiir|K)M',  |l  Is  lliriiinl  liy  usliii;  a  |K'rsiinal  nr  ailjrcllvi'  |ir<iniuin 
ill  <'(innf\liin  wllli  kuli,  a  |iarli<'l(<  lx-loii>;ln^  In  tin-  i-Iiisk  rallnl  ijrrlini  Iilo  ninjiinrtinna. 

Till"  iisi's  of  lliis  |i,irlick'  iirr  varinus.  It  i»  i'iii|iliiyi'il  with  a  |iartli'iil»r  liiriii  nf  the 
vorli,  «lil('li  iK-rlmii-*  may  U'  ralli'il  a  illnlliirt  iiiikIi',  wIii'II  il  has  llii'  sl^niricalinii  nf  fliiif, 
ill  iiiilcr  lli'il,  lliiil  I  null/,  \i\  Willi  till'  NaiiH'  liiriii  aUn,  linl  iinl  i|i'|h'|i<Ii'IiI  nil  a 
prevlniis  iiiilii'iillvi' iiinnil,  as  In  llic  lliniirr  case,  it  lias  the  siiisi' nl' /(/,'  us,  kiili  kiis/i, 
let  nil'  yo. 

Wlicn  used  In  ('(injuiu'tiuii  ullli  a  |H'rsiiiial  nr  ailjrclivi:  |irniioiiii,  to  siipply  ihi'  place 
of  a  ri'lativc,  il'  It  n'latcs  In  |N'rsons,  the  pronoun  Inllnws  the  parliclr;  If  to  thing's,  the 
prniiniiii  prci'i'ili'S  ;  as,  miks  liiLiilntuslia  ka  i/ii  ini/isii  Inirusli,  niii'  is  almiit  to  gn  who 
Is  skilliil.     lull  kali  tiikiikii  ikiiiii  liiicmli,  that  which  I  have  s|H)ken  is  triii.'. 

O  K    I)  i:  (•  1,  I  N  A  11  I,  K    V  ()  N  J  V  N  C  T  I  ()  N  S. 


30.  'I'lio  class  of  words  called,  lor  the  sake  ordlsllncllnn,  dccjinaliic  cnniiinctlnns.havo 
usually  snnic  prn|«'rlli'S  ol'  coiijuni'tloiis,  yd  ihcy  arc  nol  simple  cmincclives.  Some  itf 
thciii  have  merely  an  Intensive  force,  while  nilicrs  serve  as  I'nnnecllves  Ixitwcen  sciilences. 

37,  This  class  is  varied  according  lo  nunil<<;r  and  person  ;  thus — 

mviULAR.  ri.rKtu 

1st  |K'rson,  kiih,  that  Imh  or  kiiiim 

■Jd  person,    kum  kiijxim 

3d  |ierson,    kii  ka 

hull,  if,  perhaps,  (used  with  a  supposition.) 


N  ()  II  T  II  W  K  S  T  K  K  N    AM  K  H  I  C  A. 


049 


IhI  imtmiii,  kiih 

'it\   IHTHIIII,     klllll 

M(J  |H'riuiii,   kn 


ri.i'iiAt.. 
kiih  or  kiDiniim 
kii/xiiii 
kii 


3H,  III  till!  Cirsl  |HT"oii  pliirnl  uriHilli  llu'w  wnriln  \\v'tf  nm  Iwd  (iirin",  wliirli  :irc  iiwil 
„.j(lrr  iliMi'rriil  ciriMiiii-iliiMrcs.  Wlicii  llic  s|iciikrr,  liis  iis-iiiciiilcH,  iiilil  ll«!  |«'r«in  or 
IXTHolls  ii(l(lr>>!«(l  iin-  till  iiii'liidi'd,  Ilic  liilliT  liirin,  l.iiiiui  i>\-  kiiiuiinii,  is  iimiI.  IT  llii' 
s|M'iikcr  uiiil  hit  iissihIiiIis  only  iiri-  iinliiilid,  iiml  iinl  Ihciw  iiililriswil,  111''  ollii  r   Icpriii   in 


^1 

iisiil,  /,(//(  iir  kiili 

ill).  Wlii'ii  IIiIh  cIiins  III'  uiirils  is  iimiI  ill  roiiiiixion  uilli  an  iiclivi'  iraiiHitivi  .  .. 
wliirli  liiiH  lor  lis  uliji-t't  n  mvoiid  ihtnoii  Nin){iihir  or  |iliiriil,  llini'  is  still  anolhir  varii 
lion  i  UN — 


\<rli, 


Siiifj.  or  I'lii. 
Isi  |H  rson,  kiiiiiiili 
3tl  iiersoii,   kiiM 

Isl  iKTMin,  k"/n'iii<ili 

'M   IKTMUI,     kll/llllll 


(Olijcrl,  yd  iMTsoii  sill);.) 
(Olijc'ci,  '.M  |Krsiin  plural.) 


•  Illirr  Words  ol'  lliis  class  ari'  n/dli,  kniimli,  inkuli,  tnkn/i,  \i\,  all  varied  in  llic  -ainr 
maiintr, 

I  If"  T  II  i;  V  i;  K  II. 

40.  In  llic  vorlironsislscinplinlirnlly  the  power  ol'lhi'  Saliii|ilin  liingun^.  'I'lic  various 
particles  anil  auxiliaries  wliiili  lnlp  lo  form  oilier  lan);iia;;es,  and  render  tlie  variations  of 
the  vcrli  more  simple  ami  I'oni-ise,  are,  to  a  ^renl  i  xlent,  wantinu  in  lliis.  Hence  the 
varialions  ol'  the  verli  are  cxtreinely  miiiierons,  and  llii'V  may  lie  increased  to  an  almost 
indcliiiitc  extent  liy  composition. 

41.  Verbs  inny  be  divided  into  three  classes, — neuter,  active  inlransilive,  ami  nclive 
Irnnsitivp. 

4'J.  There  are  two  nenler  verbs,  inis/i,  to  !«■,  sigliilyin)!  simple  existence,  and  irilsdsliii, 
to  iK'coine.  'I'he  llirmer  is  wiintini;  in  all  the  Inliiro  teiisi's,  or,  il'lliey  exist,  they  are  the 
smile  with  those  ol'  irifsii.\/iii,  and  liiriiied  Ironi  it. 

43.  Tin;  active  intransitive  verlw  ari'  thosi'  which  do  not  admit  an  accusative  nller 
llirin.     They  an'  similar  in  their  variations  to  the  neuler  verbs. 

44.  Roth  lhe.se  classes  present  a  striking  peindiarily  in  one  respect.  There  is  one  Inrin 
of  the  verb  lo  agree  with  the  noiniiialive,  and  nnotlii'r  lo  ai;ri'e  with  the  genitive  when 
possession  is  implied.  In  the  first  ami  second  |K'rsons,  however,  the  form  is  the  same  in 
each  i  thus, — 

WITH  TlIK  NtlMINATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1st  person,  in  iiitsh  Jiiin  unsliih 

Ud  person,  im  itiinsh  inui  atlnrasliih 

3d  |)ersoii,  ipi  hinitsh  imma  hiiis/iili 

138 


*, 


1 


;i 


I 


SAO 


I*  II  I  I.O  l.tHi  V. 


WITH  Till  IIKKITIVI. 


Hlhtfiilar. 
Int  iM'rxoli,  iiilin  until 
■Jil  inrsiiii,   iiiiiiu  iiiiii.ih 
Mil  iHTmill,   i/iniiii  iit/i 


I'liiril. 
Hiinim  iriuhih 
lllitltii  titlili'iislnh 
till  mil  III  II II  thill 


Tlicw  lliriiii  u(\\\r  villi  iiri'  sill  clrliiiilc  thai  ullrn  it  JH  mil  iicicH'.iirN  tn  ii-i'  llir  {iriiiiiiiiii, 
iinil  in  ronvcriinlion  it  in  iVi'iinrnlly  uinjitiil.  I''iir  iimliiiui',  il'  I  iink  wliiiw  ii  iliini;  ix  which 
ln'liin^D  III  till'  iHiiiilr,  Ihi'  iiiiiui'i'  hIII  I>'  "ihisIiiIi,"  tlir  |iliiml  l'>riii  nrtlir  vrrli  iiii|ilyinf( 
Imuhw'H'Oiiii,  (iMriiiiinu,  "  il  ii  tin  iri.") 

I.'i,  I'll!'  iii'iiM'  iiiii'iiiiHiiiM'  li.is  Mill'  I'lirin  to  ii^rii'  »iili  lln'  iiiuniiiiilivr,  iiiiil  iiiiiilliiT  to 
iijirii'  Hilli  till'  i^riiiliM',  till'  -null'  iii  tlir  iH'iitiT.  I''iir  iii^tiiihi',  «  Siilin|iliii  »ill  mjiv,  Ijmim 
iiiuilii  iiliiiiliiiii,  iiiKli'.'iil  'A'  i/iiiiHi  iiiiiiliM  lii/iiiilimi,  lim  rliilil  iliiil. 

in,  'I'll!-  iii'ti\f  iriiiisili*!'  virli  |iri>i«iitM  n  inm-h  iimri-  Hlrikiiiy  |»-riiliarily.  'I'liin  is 
nlwayii  <-n|mlil<-  <il°  ttikiii;.'  an  iii-iMinntlvo  iiI^it  il.  Iml  |H'rhii|iH  as  rrri{iii'iilly  tnki-ii  a  iinini- 
imtivr  iilirr  it  mh  its  iilijcrt  M"  an  ai'riioalivi'.     Wlini  a  inrimi  |iiTliirin'<  an  ai'lioii  li>r  him- 

wir,  llic  iiliji'i't  111'  llif  vrrli  in  iKiially  ill  llli'   liiiliiilialin',  ami  is  pn ili  <l  liy  a  nniiiiiiativi' 

rxim-isiil  iir  iiiiplitii  in  all  i-aws.*  'I'lir  liiriii  nl'  llic  vi-rli,  li"',  is  iliMinni  f'nmi  lliat  wlirn 
liillnui'il  liy  an  ai'i'iisaiivn.  Il'  iuh'  s|h  aks  nl'  an  ai'tmii  wliirli  is  |stI<<miii'iI,  »illi<iiit  any 
iiilinmliiin  liir  wliiun  it  is  {Mrliiriiiiil,  iln'  vitIi  lakrs  an  arriisativr  aDir  il, — in  wini'li  r:iM>, 
il'il  Im'  in  Ihi'  third  |ii'rs<in  it  laki'sa  uinilivi'  Uliiri'  il  instrail  nl'a  miiiiinalivr.  U  Inn  lhi> 
vurli  takfM  iin  in'i-iisativr  aDrr  il,  iIk*  vrrli  i»  varini  ihrnniihiint  its  whnli-  iliflrnsimi, 
III  riinliiiu'  t'l  Ihi'  niinilii'r  ami  |H'r>iin  i>rilii'  arnisativi',  llniri'  ihiri'  ap'  six  \arialiiiiis  nl' 
thr  M  rli  ai-riinlinj;  In  iIh'  minil»r  ami  ixMsnn  nl'  its  nlijiTi.  I'l'liisi'  variaiimis  an'  what 
IIP'  II' ■»  liTimvl  liy  ;^raiinmirians  Inimi'iniis, — a  wnnl  lirst  i'ni|il<iyi'il  liy  Ihi'  S|iaiiish 
inissiiiiiarirs,  ami  iiilnHlurnl  into  ^ri'iH'ral  nsr  liy  Mr,  lMi|>iim'i'an.| 

•J7.  ir  nn  nrliiin  in  iM-rrnrini'iJ  liir  ainithiT,  iho  vrrli,  inslcml  iil'  ln'iii^r  variiil  in  ihrlnn- 
sinii  III  ili-nolc  it,  asKiMiM's  a  ih'W  ^miimlliirni.  i<r  in  thrnun  intn  amilhrr  i'iinjii<;atiiiii,  whniir 
(Jirlciisi'in  in  very  siiiiilar  In  thai  ol'llw  sinipli'  liiriii,  ami  ri|iially  I'lill.  This  liinii  ;,;"Vcriis 
twii  riis"s,  ihr  ari'ifaiiM'  nl'  a  |H'rsiiii  ami  iiiiiiiinativi'  nl'  a  llnn^.  IliiLisn  is  ihc  Miin|itp 
|5iriii,  and  linliiiniisli'i  nr  linhiiiiisliii,  arrnriliiiv;  tn  Ihr  dlalifl,  is  ihi'  liirin  sii;iiiryiii}!  the 
|K!r|iiriiiam'('  nl'ihi'  artimi  llir  aimlhiT. 

'IVi  this  may  Ih'  aildrd  tun  iiiIht  rniijii^'niinns  diTivril  iniimiliati'ly  I'min  thi'  prrrrdiiig, 
— thi'  "III"  sii^niryiii^t  'h'"  K"'"f{  '"  P'Tliirm  im  arlii  a  at  a  distain'i-,  ami  thi"  niliir  ihr  'Jfnn^ 
III  iH'rliinii  an  aclinii  Inr  aiinlhir,  as  ImLhisu,  tn  ^w  in  kit  any  lliilii,'  at  a  disianr)',  and 
IkiIiiiiiiiIiimi  (nr  linliiiiii/iiMi),  tn  yo  In  S11'  ijir  iiimihrr. 

Thi'se  iirr  all  di  rliiird,  ill   f.'iiii'ral.  likr  thr  siin|ilo  lorni,  with  snmr  li'W  dilfi'n'ni'i's   in 

snilll'  nl'lhl'  inildrs  allll  Irnsi's. 

•I".  As  yi'l  no  pnssivi^  I'orm  oflhi'  vitIi  has  liccii  discnvi'P-d,  and  »'<•  nn-  Uil  In  con. 
rliidr  that  il  does  not  i-xist.  The  vi-rlml  adjrctivi'  nr  |mrtici|ili-  rndiiif!  in  ih,  v»hirh  is 
rrcqiii-ntly  itsi'd  uilh  Ihi'  vitIi  orrxislrnrr,  hnx  nilhi'r  Ihi'  si^inilii'iition  ol'a  iiktii  niljrrtivc, 
or  of  till'  (irosi'iit  parliri|ili'  in  I'jiL'lish,  than  orthi"  past  partiripir  whirh  roriiis  Ihi'  passive 
in  our  lan^naj;i'.     Il  may,  Imwivir,  in  soiin'  rasis,  havr  a  passivr  sij!niliralinii.     An 

*  Thin  M'Hti'iirt'  in  rutluT  iilineurc,  ami  it  in  tn  In;  nj^rrlU'il  tti:it  no  I'xniiiplr  is  givi'ii  in  tlir  {rniiniiiar  to 
illuntrnlj'  till'  iMTuliarity  in  qucaliun. 


N  U  II  T  II  W  K  H  T  K  K  N    A  M  K  II  I  C  A 


M\ 


imiwrtiiiml  Uinn  iil'  I'xpriiixiini  U  n\*»  iixnl,  niniiliir  in  ilir  l)iiuli-li  "  iIh  y  «iy,"  I'nr  "  il 
i«  "fill!.'* 

•  II.  A  iiir:;''  iiiiiiil<  r  iirvrrlm  iirr  rimlriirtKl  iil)(  r  llir  iniinnir  of  lln'  linik  rmilr'iflK. 
Tliii  i'<'iilrii('iiiin,  liiiui'ti  r,<M'('iirN  mily  in  ihc  ihinl  ihtmih  nm^iihir  iiml  |iliiriil  ihniiiuliiiiil 
nil  llir  IlliKHJM  nllil  IrM-UN  ;   ||4,  hliitsiLihil  liir  lili'  Itxlullil, 

.'(0,   Vcrlw    III!'   viiriril    iu-c(irilitid   In  liK'aliiiii,  diro'licui,   iiichIi',   Ii'ii«',  iiiiiiilicr,   mid 

IMTMIII. 

fli.  Ai  ri'jiiiiU  liMMiliiiii,  wlicii  iIh'  nrlidii  nriaiimli'"  IVmim  llir  pliiri'  wjii-ri-  llii'  ii|Kiil4<»r 
in,  the  iiiinil  liuiii  iil'llii'  xrii  is  iiicci  ;  liiil  hIhh  iIic  ii'lhin  nri^iiiiilcs  1111111  n  pliid'  ill  11 
iliHiiiiii'i'  I'niiii  till'  spiMki'i',  u  ililli  rriit  lliriii  i^  ii-uil ;  ii»,  linliini,  imri"!  Iiihi',  I'liiiiinim 
(nnn,/iiihiiii/.i/,i/>ii,thf  miiih'  Iiiim',  uIhii  iIh'  in'licni  nri^iiinli'i  ill  11  ijisliiliri'.  In  llir 
I'lirni  Hi^mryiiu  ilini'linii  liiMiiriU  llir  ii|i('iiki'r,  il'  110  iiiliTiiiiiliiili'  |Hiiiil  nr  plnri'  in  N|Hik<!ll 
•  ■r  in  iIk'  |iri>^ri'»M  »{'  llic  iiiiinn,  llic  rnniinini  Inriii  is  ii«<'il  ;  liiil  wlii'ii  llii-  iirlinn  in 
|irii;;ri'HH  in  -iiKiki'ii  iil'nH  riiniiiiK  rmin  lliiil  iiili'riiiiiliali-  |iliii-i',  ihi'  oilier  |i>rin  \n  iiwil. 

fi'J,    IhriTiioii.     JArrv  virli  y*  viiricci   11 iliii'j  »■*  llir  iiiiinii  or  nil!  riioii,  or  ivin 

Ix'in.',  Imvi'  11  ilir>'<iioii  loutinU  or  iVoiii  llii'  •<|»Mkrr,— «•<,  Imki^iiy  ttinn  iIh'  miioii  i> 
//')//'  till'  n|Hiiki'r,  .'Mill  liiiKsiiiii,  whin  il  is  louinr/s;  miil  in  llir  liiriii  "i^nilyinti  nil  iirlioii 
ori^'lll'iltli;{  III  11  i\\^Uwrr,  liiil,:<ii>ll,i,  lioiii,  nui\  /iii/,Miiil,iU>ii,  /Diiiiiih.  Il  i"  ilill'n  ult  In 
ciiliri'lvo  111'  (lin'rtion  ill  llif  vrrli  <'X|in'>«iiin  Niiii|ili'  tAislinro,  Iml  hero  Ihe  two  tonus  iire 
in  loiiiinon  iiw  ;  iis,  liiimsli,  iVom,  iiinl  liii'inn,  lounnls, 

n:).  The  iiiiu/rs  lire  inori'  niiinerons  limn  iisiml  in  other  liiii;iiiii;,'es.  'I'liin'  iire  iil 
Ic-ist  si\  ilisiiiiit  moili-.,  mill  |Hrhii|>s  one  nmri'  oiiu'lil  lo  he  reekom  il.  Tin  y  .ire  iisi 
lollows  : 

(1.)    Iiiiliiitliii,  liinini;  lln-  siiiiie  Kiiiiiiliiiition  11^  111  Ijii'lisli. 

('J.)  UsiUilivr,  Ni^iiilyinH  ""  ni'tion  lliiit  is  eiisluiniiry  or  Imliitiiiil  ;  iis,  in  tMhuik'uui, 
I  Useil  to  siiy. 

(!).)   Sii/ijxiMliir,  iiii)ilyiii);  11  eoniliiioii  or  iloiihi. 

(I.)   ■S'«/i/(///(7/rr,  sifiiiilyiiiL^  nil  iielion  Willi  h  ili'|Miiils  im  11   previous  supposition;  iis, 

^1/  iilKI  /lllltlt'i/l,  1,1111(1   III  il/,Mliiilli,  il'he  Were  here,  then   I   sholllil  see  hilll, 

(.'i.)  linfuiiitiir,  IIS  ill  other  liinijimnes,  \\  hen  proliihitioii  i<  expressed,  the  I'litiirc 
fnrni  ol'llie  verh  is  iisi'il,  insleml  ol'the  ini|i<'nilive,  with  the  iie:,'iiiive  irnimrt  prel'iMil. 

(d.)  lii/i/iiHir,  Hifjiiilyin;;  llie  piiriMiM'  I'or  wliieli  an  iielion  in  iMMMoriiieil ;  nil,  hiiliiiii»h 
klllllil,  I  IlllVl.'  eoliie  to  >ti'. 

The  iitlier  liiriii  of  evpression,  hinteil  ill  as  liein^  an  aililltional  iiinile,  is  similar  in  il5 
Kif^nilii'iition  lo  the  intinilive.  It  lollows  a  vcrli  in  oiii'  ol  the  oilier  nioiles  in  the  same 
manner  iis  the  inlinilive,  iinil  is  prereileil  hy  ihe  parlii'Ie  kuli  in  the  sense  ol'  llnil.  This 
t'orin  ol'lhe  verli  is  varied  aeeordiiiu'  lo  luimln'r  ami  |«'rHon,  hill  is  iiol  varied  iiiTonhiin  lo 
lime  ;  as,  hulsii  iii/Hiii/nm  knli  iiliksli,  hrin;;  nie  some  wihhI,  thai  I  iiiiiy  iiiiike  a  lire. 

r>l.  The  lenses  as  well  as  iiiiHJes  iiie  iiiiioiiinionly  niiiiieroiis.  Then'  are  no  less  than 
nine,  llioii^di  they  are  not  all  used  in  nny  Iml  lliu  indicative  mode. 


(I.)  I'ri'senl,  siynilyini;  an  aetioii  wliieli  is  passinj;  at  Ihe  iime  the  assertion  is  made  ; 
as,  ///  fniiiisii,  I  iini  wrilin^, 

{'■!.)  I'erleel,  denotiiij.;  an  action  jii.st  completed  j  as,  in  liiildn,  I  hnve  jii.st  scon. 


w 

Ml 


662 


PHILOLOGY. 


(3.)  Recent  Pnsl,  reprcscnling  nn  nrlion  which  took  pince  wi:hin  n  recent  jwrioil, — it 
mny  lie,  in  the  rnrly  part  of  the  snnic  iliiy ,  or  within  n  few  dnys  ;  ns,  haksaka,  hnvc  seen. 

(4.)  Remote  Pnsl,  denoting  Ihni  the  iii'lion  look  pincc  nt  n  more  remote  jicriiKl,  iisiiiilly 
n  lon^  lime  ngo  ;  as,  IkUhuiki,  I  siiw. 

(5.)  Aorial,  or  I'nsl  Indeliiiile,  n-presenting  iin  nclion  ns  pnst,  without  relercnco  to  Ihe 
precise  lime  ;  it  mny  W'  rt-ccnl  or  reiiiole  ;  n»,  IkiIiiki. 

(0.)  I'icseni  Fiilim-,  repri'senting  nn  nclion  which  is  nboiit  to  tnke  pInce;  as,  liakta- 
his/iii,  nlioiil  lo  see. 

(7.)  I'"iiluri',  representinj;  nn  nclion  which  will  liike  pince  nl  nny  future  time;  ns, 
hdliHii,  will  sfv. 

("*.)  Recent  Pnst  Future — nn  n<Micin  whidi  was  nlmul  to  lake  pIncc  nl  n  recent  iM-riod  ; 
as,  litiklii/((sli<i/.<i,  hnvi;  Urn  nboul  lo  lie  seen. 

(!l.)  RcMicili'  Past  Fiihire, — au  nclion  which  wns  nlxiul  to  tnke  place  nl  n  ri'moto 
IHTidd  ;  ns,  liiikloliislitiiKi,  wns  ahoul  In  see. 

">").  Kach  verli  has  usiinlly  two  vcrhiil  adjectives  or  participles.  Thouyh  their  pro|)er- 
lies  are  sonicwlint  diircrciil  iVoui  those  ol'parliciiilcs  in  oilier  languajies.  One  is  allirin- 
nlive,  and  the  other  negnlive  ;  ns,  luiliiiin,  the  alFirmntivc  participle  of  hiikisa,  and  liit/i/iui, 
the  neijalive. 

56.  'I'liere  are  nlso  ihii'c  verhal  nouns  Irom  encli  verb,  having  dilFerent  significations; 
ns,  liiikiii,  having  a  signilicali'in  siinilar  lo  Ihi^  Lnlin  gerund;  lidkiniisli,  v,\\\r\\  has 
rt'li'rcMcc  lo  iho  uhjcci  or  purpose  to  which  a  thing  is  upplii'd.  The  names  given  lo  tiHijs 
or  inslrumenis  previously  unknown  lo  Ihe  people  are  in  this  form.  Thi'  oilier  noun 
signifies  the  dixT  of  nn  nclion  ;  ns,  Inniidiral,  mnker,  from  lianisha,  lo  make. 

57.  There  is,  nlso,  in  some  cases,  nn  ndverhinl  form,  used  in  connexion  willi  oilier 
words  expressing  Ihe  ninnncr  of  an  aclion  ;  ns,  h<ikmniili  liikiisliii,  lie  gin's  seeing. 

S"*.  In  Ihe  active  inlrnnsilive  veil)  there  is  often  a  dilliTinl  li>rm  slill.  It  is  Ihe  simplest 
form  of  ihe  word,  Ihe  root  ilsill',  and  is  iiMd  in  cnniiexion  wilh  kiishiiy  lo  go;  ns,  liiii 
hikii^li,  il  lins  gone  dry,  or,  il  has  drieil  up,  ns  n  founlniii  or  slreniu  of  waler. 

•")'J.  If  coiijug.-ilion  is  defined,  as  in  Ih'lirew,  as  having  reference  to  diU'erent  forms  of 
the  same  verb,  there  may  Ix;  .sniil  lo  U'  many  eonjugalions  in  this  language.  'I'lw^  active 
inlransiiive  and  the  active  transitive,  while  lliey  dill'er  widely  in  llieir  deelensions,  have 
nlso  dilferent  conjugnlions.  The  form  terminating  in  oslm  or  iislm  lielongs  exclusively 
lo  Ihe  liirmer,  while  Ihe  u>(lecliv<^  lu'longs  exclusively  lo  llie  Intler. 

00.  'I'he  lliri'c  firms  mcnlioiicd  in  ^  47  ns  eonjugalions  nr<'  (l(Tived  immedintely  from 
the  ground-form  luikisa  ;  und  encli  of  Ihe  eonjugalions  lo  lie  nienlioued  are  similar  to  the 
original  ground-form,  innsmuch  ns  they  each  have  these  three  forms  derived  from  them  in 
the  snnie  mnnner. 

01.  Tlie  eonjiigntions  nre  ns  follows  : 


OF  THE  ACTIVE  INTRANSITIVE  CljiSS. 

Hisnmsd,  is  the  ground-firm,  which  means,  to  he  nngry;  from  this  is  formed, 
Ifisamruks/ui,  to  lie  angry  townrds  or  ut, — which  is  nclive  trnnsilivc,  und  may  govern 
an  accus,itive. 


N  ()  irr  1 1  W  K,  S  T  K  U  N    A  M  K  KM"  A. 


/ir):} 


i)K   l-IIK  ACIIVK   niANSITlVK  I'lA-iS. 


ITiikisd,  is  the  jiriuiiiil-liirm,  rnmi  wlii.li  «<•  hnvr  i1m'  liillnuiii^ : 

rUiiiksik  (|ilii.)  iC(i|Huc;il ; — to  src  iMuh  oilier.  'I'liis  lonn  is  rrci|iirnlly  used  in  the 
8iiij;iiliir,  striinyi'  iis  il  in.iy  seem.  Il  is  i<(  iimvl  iVrijiicii!  iK-cnrn'iicc  in  llii'  wiml  iiiisliti, 
lo  givi',  mill  tlidsc  ()('  a  siiiiiliir  ini'iiiiiiii;,  mid  mciiis  Io  ri'i'i>i.'niso  ii  |iriiii'i|ili'  of  nrlioii 
amoiiK  llio  |)c(i|)lc,  wliicli  is  iihviiys  Id  cxpci-t  ii  riinin  wliiii  they  uivo  any  lliiii}».  They 
know  of  fjivini.'  ill  nn  Dllicr  sense.  When  mie  s|ie,ii<s  Id  anoiher  ahoul  any  Ihini;  which 
he  lias  ;;ivcn  him,  il  is,  mli  hmii  jiiiiiiim,  iiisli  ail  n{' (liiniini,  •Mlial  wliiili  ymi  fiave  me." 

liiii/>Sii,  relleelive;  1  sei^  iny.seir.  'I'liis  linin  is  iiiaile  hy  |ireli.\ins^  llie  personal  pro- 
nouns,— as : 


Dim, 

hidk.vi 


l.st  person, 

8il  person,  imaksa 

3il  person,  ipniiLsn 


PLr. 
iiiimiiksih 
imiiimikfih 
imiitamaksih 


S/iiij)tik.iii,  cmisalivo; — lo  cause  lo  see.  In  show. 

M'liiksii,  successive; — lo  sn-  in  successimi,  or  one  thini;  after  miolher. 

Tiikiikm,  lo  see  suililenly,  or  li>r  a  slmrl  lime. 

02.  There  is  anolher  li'rin  which  some  words  are  enpalile  nriakini;,  which  is  also  causa- 
tive, hul  it  always  has  rell'rence  lo  an  ellecl  pruihicid  hy  language, — as,  siikmisti,  to 
k/inir  (llie  groiind-rorin) ;  /(i.snkii(i.sa,  lo  cause  lo  know  liy  liilkiiig  to,  &c. 

63.  'J'here  a—  siane  other  preli.ves  which  are  nlladied  to  some  verhs  in  the  same  way, 
and  also  some  siMixes, — as,  kiiliiiipnsiiishu,  lo  desire  to  see.  Hut  most  of  the  sufli.\es 
arc  fragments  of  other  verhs,  which  aii-  sullixeil  lo  li>rni  compounds  almost  without 
numU-r. 

01.  There  is  one  striking  peculiarity  in  respect  to  the  change  ol"  the  verh,  and  other 
words  also,  in  giving  an  atrirmalive  answer  to  a  i|neslion.  Instead  ol'  using  an  nllirma- 
tive  particle,  it  is  'jsual  to  re|ieat  the  verb  belonging  le  the  iiuestion  in  a  ilill'eront  form, 
which  makes  a  form  ol  assent  throughnut  the  whole  declension  of  the  verb  ;  or,  should 
the  word  re|)ealed  lie  a  noun,  pronoun,  or  other  part  of  speech,  it  also  receives  the  same 
variation.  It  is  merely  a  change  in  the  lermiiialion,  or  a  syllable  sutrixcd,  the  terminating 
vowel  lieing  always  ii.  For  instance,  to  the  ipiesiion,  init  iikiildliisha!  are  yon  not  about 
to  go  ]  the  aflirmalive  answer  will  lie,  kiitnttisliii ;  so,  iiiil  akin  .'  nns.  hiitkii. 

Or».  Almost  any  noun  or  adjective  may  iMcome  a  verb  by  changing  its  form  or  adding 
a  verluil  snfli.x  ;  as,  niisliiit,  a  chief,  ipiioinioliiiliikalni,,  he  makes  himself  a  eliief,  or  con- 
ducts himself  like  a  chief.      Jliiiiiikiisli,  great, — liimakaxliiri^/id,  lo  lie  great,  &c. 

CO.  .V  paradigm  of  the  verb  is  given,  from  which  an  idea  may  Ix'  formed  of  the  extent 
of  its  variations.  .Most  of  the  conjugaliolis  are  declined  in  the  same  manner  as  the  one 
given.     Some  of  them,  especially  the  reciprocal  and  relleelive,  dilier  in  some  respects. 

OF   THE    A  n  V  E  R  n. 


67.   Adverbs  are  not  numerous  in  this  language.     The  manner  nf  the  action  is  so  fre- 
quently expressed  by  the  verb  itself,  that  il  supersedes  the  necessity  of  the  frequent  us<' 

of  the  adverb. 

130 


554 


I'll  I  I.  ()  I.P(i  Y. 


69.  One  class  orndvorlis  is  ilorivcil  .iircolly  IVdin  vrrlw,  nnd  when  this  nclverb  is  used, 
il  is  <lop"iMl<-nl  on  a  vrrli.  iiiid  o ;  ii'sscs  the  iimiiricr  ol'  tin-  acti(.n ;  lis  if  I  nsk  a  nnlivc, 
"  minuiiiii/i  tikuiiin '"  "in  wliiit  wiiy  did  yiiii  ('dini' !"  ln'  will  iinswcr,  "ifiliiitinih 
kunt'i,"  '•  I  rniiK'  on  fi«il."      Wiliiiniiih  is  iVntn  llu'  v<tI)  iiihinixii,  In  wnlk. 

6!».  Then'  an-  also  adverbs  of  time,  !is,  «■((/■«,  now;  imkrjxi,  long  ago; — of  place,  as, 
tiiKi,  herp;  kumi,  llioiv,  nnd  many  ollicrs. 

70.  Thorx-  are  also  those  wliieli  are  used  ns  inierrogatives,  nnd  llieso  all  have  the  \)e- 
ctiiiarity  of  eomniencing  with  iii,  prolmMy  from  tin-  interiogntive  pronoun  iiui ;  as,  Diana, 
when?  minii,  wImtc?  mas,  how  much?  malahuiii,  how  many  times?  mti/uil,  how 
long  1  mii/oi/ius,  how  many  hundreds  .'  d:<'. 


OF   r  O  N  J  II  .N  C^  T  I  O  N  S. 

71.  The  simple  conjiinelions  are  few  in  nnnil)er.  Wiih,  and,  is  used  only  to  eonnect 
words  togollH-r,  usually  nouns.  Kaiia  is  used  to  ennnert  penlenres,  hut  seems  also  to 
have  n-lcrem-o  to  lime,  or  order  of  events,  in  the  sense  of"  then,"  "  and  then."  It  receives 
also  some  adjective  terminations,  as  do  also  some  of  the  adverbs, — as,  kaiiama,  bt^long- 
ina  to  that  time ;  kitiuiJit,  nt  that  same  time. 

Other  conjunctions  are,  met,  kiiiiel,  but ;  kit  or  Isaltivi,  if;  iiia/i,  inaki,  though, 
although  ;  muin,  notwithstanding,  &.C, 

OF    INTERJECTIONS. 

I'i.  .\s  in  all  liarbarous  languages,  interjections  arc  numerous,  and  frequently  used  to 
express  strong  and  sudden  emotion.  I-ia-a-a-iah  is  an  expression  of  despondency  or 
Hes|Kiir,  ic.  A;c. 


S  Y  \  T  A  X. 

73.  The  following  arc  a  few  of  the  most  important  rules,  concisely  stated  : 

(I.)  .\djcctives  agree  with  their  nouns  in  numlnT  and  case. 

(2.)  Vertis  ugre»-  with  llieir  noniiniilives  in  ninnlKr  ainl  jierson. 

(3.)  \euiir  and  ac-live  inlraiisiiivc  verbs,  when  possession  is  implied,  take  Ix'fore  them 
u  genitive  instead  of  a  noniinnlive. 

(4.)  Active  tnnsiiive  verbs,  when  I'ollowi'd  by  an  uccusative,  always  take  a  genitive 
hrtbre  them  in  lh<'  third  person,  instead  of  a  nominative. 

(5.)  The  conjugation  which  signifies  to  perform  an  action  for  another,  or  in  reference 
to  another,  always  lakes  aOcr  il  an  accusative  of  a  persdu  with  a  noininalive  of  a  lliiiig. 

(6.)  As  to  the  relative  posiliun  of  words  in  a  senlence,  no  very  precisi'  rules  can  be 
aiven.  The  language  admits  of  greater  laliliule  in  trinsposilinn  lliaii  the  lOnglish.  The 
lorm  of  wonls  is  so  definite  that  the?  gr.iniiiialical  eouslriu'liou  is  easily  determined  without 
reference  to  the  n'lative  |Kisitioii. 

(7.)  The  adjective  usually  precedes  the  noun,  and  the  verb  is  usually  throwii  into  the 


N  O  R  T  H  W  E  S  T  K  R  N    AMERICA. 


555 


latter  part  of  the  sentence,  having  the  accusative  before  if. 
last  in  the  sentence. 


Sometimes  the  nominative  is 


"The  foregoing  f^marks  (says  Mr.  S.)  arc  siiUicicnl  to  give  some  idea  of  the  language 
of  the  Nez  Perces.  It  cannot  be  o.\|>c(!t<'(l  thut  ii  full  grammar  of  it  should  Ix-  given. 
As  yet  our  knowledge  of  it  is  limited,  und  res|)ecting  some  of  the  forms  there  is  .still  some 
doubt.     That  other  forms  exist  of  which  we  arc  ignorant  there  is  almost  a  certainty." 

Mr.  Smith  gives  a  paradigm  of  the  s.inple  vnrb  htikisu,  to  see,  conjugated  through 
all  the  modes  and  tenses,  as  well  as  in  the  directive  and  locative  forms.  Some  idea  may 
be  formed  of  the  extent  of  the  variations,  and  of  the  labour  required  in  educing  them, 
from  the  fact  that  they  occupy,  in  his  essay,  no  less  than  liirly-six  pages  of  manuscript. 
And  it  is  to  be  recollected  that  neither  llu:  six  derived  conjugations,  nor  the  thrt,*  forms 
mentioned  in  §  47,  of  which  they  are  all  suscepliltle,  are  included  in  this  parodigm. 
A  few  of  the  variations  will  be  given,  to  illustrate  the  preceding  remarks;  they  have 
been  thrown  into  an  order  somewhat  dilU'rcnt  from  that  adnpled  in  the  original,  in  order 
to  show  more  distinctly  the  system  of  transitions,  or  the  mode  in  which  the  pronouns  ore 
combined  with  the  verb,  both  as  subjects  and  objects  of  the  action. 

Tho  following  paradigm  of  the  substantive  verb  was  written  out  by  Mr.  S.  at  my 
reijucst,  as  likely  to  be  a  subject  of  some  interest.  It  is  in  frequent  use,  with  precisely 
the  force  of  the  Knglish  "  to  be,"  ns  is  evident  from  the  example  given  in  another  part  of 
the  grammar — ioh  kali  tsekukii  ikiiin  iiiwasii, — that  which  I  have  said  is  true.  In  the 
third  |)erson,  singular  and  plural,  two  forms  are  given,  the  latter  of  which  is  used  with 
the  genitive  of  possession  (sec  §  44). 


DIRECTION  TOWARDS. 

im  a*  uriin 
ipi  liiivam 

ima  nik*  vashinm 
imtiM  hiushinm 


DIRECTION  FROM. 

in  viish 

im  a*  wash 

ipi  liiirash  ;  ipniin  ush 

It  II II  nil  skill 

ill! (I  iilli*  iiiishik 


I  am 

thou  art 
he  is ;  it  is  his 
we  are 
you  are 


imma     liiiisliih  ;     iinmam     they  are;  it  is  theirs 
aiisliili 


tcaiiika 

a  tciimka 

Imvdiiikn 

wasliiiiiiikii 

iilli  inis/iiiiiiikn 

hiushi/iiiikti 


RKcr.NT  I'AST    r-ENSK. 

viikii  ( pro.  ^rnkn)^ 
a  trnkit 

liiiriikii ;  awnka 
viislirka 
nth  inislicka 
liiiisltekii. ;  iiiishekii 


I  have  just  been 
thou  hast,  &c.  &c. 


RKMOTK  PAST  TKNSE. 

ir'ik'i  (|in).  iriikii)^ 


I  was 


*  'I'lif  [wrliclrs  a  and  alh  (or  itth)^  wliich  ;irt'  the  siijns  of  the  sccuiu)  jwrsim,  fjinirul.ir  and  plural,  are 
hcrr  (,'ivrn  si'paratc  troin  thi'  verh,  as  in  tliot,  iiistanceg  occur  where  otiier  wnrils  are  intrwlueed  between 
theni  and  the  verb. 

t  These  words  will  illuslrntc  what  has  heen  said  (§  11)  of  the  advisability  of  introducing  otlier  vi>\vcl 
sijrns  iiit')  the  al|>hal>et. 


HI 


566 

OIIIKITIDN  TOWAIIIIS. 

(J  I'vinin 
hi  in  I  III  It 
unihiii'iin 
iilli  triislihiiiiii 
hiiisliiniiKi 


mrukam 
hiirakam 


p  in  L  o  L  o  a  Y. 

IIIKKtTIIIN   KHOn. 
RF.nnrE  PAIT  TENaE. 

a  iriikn 

liitfiikii ;  iiiiaka 
iriishiiia 
atli  irashiiia 
hiiisliiiiii ;  misldna 

LOCATIVE  FOHM.      (Scc§51.) 

Iraki 
awaki 
liitfiiki 
icnshiiiki 
alh  iriisliinki 
hiiisit  iiiki 

RECENT  PAST  TEN8K. 

tviikdkii  (proii.  nK-kaka) 

It  mikiikd 

fiiirakaka 

viisliinkitkn 

ath  iiiisliiiikiika 

hiiisliiiiknka 

RKMt>TE  PAST  TINBR, 

irakikii 

a  wiikikii 

liiviikikii 

inisliiiikikn 

Dill  viifliiiikika 

hiiisliinkika 


The  substantive  verb  is  defective  in  the  other  tenses  and  modes,  and  they  are  supplied 
from  the  verb  witsashn,  signifyinji  lo  bcrome,  which  is  inflected  as  follows: 

\\'i/siiiliii,  to  lx>come. 


DIRECTION  TOWARDS. 


a  witsnshnm 
hiiilsiisluim 

ath  witsaMnm 
hiulsr^hinm 


DIKEITION  FHOM. 

PRRRRNT  TENSE. 
jril.1ll.shll 

a  uitmxlui 
hiiiliii.shii ;  nuistuha 
irilsiishih 
ath,  irilsdnhih 
hiiilS'ifliih  ;  'litis — 


I  become 

thou  becomes!,  &c 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


667 


IIIRRCTION  TOWARD*. 


UlRKt^TlnN  FROM. 

rKurCOT  TENIB. 

tvilMsh 
a  witsnak 
hitcilsush 
jHiu-itsttsh 
alh  ptnvitsash 
fiipiiicitiuuih 


I  hove  become,  or  been 


witsashamka 
a  u-it.mshnmka 
hiiilsashumka 
witiiuihiiimka 
alh  tiitsashinmka 
liiiitsasliinntka 


KECiNT  r*aT  Tixn. 
witsiislidkn 
aici/siis/uika 
hiii/sinilidka 
vilsHshrka 
nllt  vifxiixlirka 
hiuts-vi/ieka 


I  have  just  become 


mtsa$h(inia 
icilmsliinnui 


REMOTE  PAST  TINSE. 

mlsashinia 
witnasliimi 


I  (lid  Ixx^ome 
we  did  become 


trilsama 
pautsama 


u-ilmiii 
pautsaia 


I  became  or  was 
we  became  or  were 


■witsaiukum 
pautmiukum 


PI.'TURK  I.IDF.FINITI. 

vitsain 
pantsdiu 


I  shall  become,  or  bo 
we  shall  become,  or  be 


witsatatnsham 
witsatiUashinm 


PREHENT  rUTURK. 

witsalaldsha 
nit.iatii/iishih 


I  am  abodt  to  become 
we  are  about  to  become 


tvitsdlafashamka 
u'itsaUUashinmka 


RECEXT  PAST  FUTURE. 

mtsatnlashdka 
%1-itsatHtdshcka 


I  wa^i  just  about  to  become 
we  were  just  about  lo  become 


witsaldlashama 
uitsatalasliinma 


REMOTE  PAST  FUTURE. 

uitsdfdtashana 
witsatataskina 

140 


I  was  about  to  become 
we  were  about  to  become 


008 


P  H  I  L  O  L  O  U  V. 


Paradigm  oftho  verb  hahnash,  to  see. 


niRKCTln:<  TOWARDS. 


OIREt-riON  FROM. 

rRElONT  TEN». 

First  Tr:in>Uion. 
in  a  hiiki.m  imana 
in  uki.iii  iptia 
in  atli  /iiikisa  imutia 
in  annsluiksa  immnna 


I  soe  theo 
1  wh;  liim 
I  si'(!  you 
I  sec  I  hem 


im  a  hnksam  ina 
im  a  nksitm  ijina 
ill'  itnaxluiksam  niina 


Socond  Trnniiitioii. 
im  It  akisa  ipna 


ihnii  sccst  mo 
tliou  scest  him 
thoii  spcst  ua 


im  anas/uiksam  immuna      im  a  minshaksa  immnna       tliuu  scest  them 


w 


Tliinl  Transition. 
ipuim  hiiksnm  ina  hn  srcs  mo 

ipiiim  n  luiksani  imana  ipiiim  a  linkisii  imnna  he  sees  thee 

ijiiiim  jMiksam  ipna  ipiiim  jxiksa  ijni'i  ho  sees  him 

ipnim  hiiKishitkmin  iiuiia  lie  sws  us 

ipiiim  atli  liiik.111111  imiina  ipiiiiii  alh  Imkisii  imiaia        ho  sees  you 

ipnim    hinasluiksiim    im-  ipnim  hiinishaksa  immnna   ho  sees  them 
miina 


Fourlli  Transition. 
nun  II  liiiksih  iimina 
nun  (ik.sili  ipna 
mm  iilli  hiiksili  iiiiunii 
nun  iiksi/i  iininiina 

Fifth  Transition. 
ima  ath  Imksinm  ina 

ima  atk  nksiiiiii  ipna  ima  <ilk  iiksili  ipnii 

iiiiu  allt  nashiiksiiim  nuiia 
inui  atk  aksinm  immuna      ima  atk  iiksili  immumi 


wc  .see  lliee 
wc  sec  iiim 
we  si'o  you 
we  see  them 


ye  sec  mo 
ye  see  him 
yo  see  us 
ye  see  tliem 


Sixth  I'ransition. 

immam  haksinm  ina  tiiey  sec  me 

immniii  n  haksinm  imana     iinmnm  u  liaksih  imana  they  si'e  theo 

tmmiim  jmksiiim  ipna  immain  puk^ili  ipna  tliey  see  him 

immam  Uiiiashiiksinm  nuna  they  see  us 

immam  nth  haksinm  imiina  immam  nth  hnk.sih  iiiiuna  they  sec!  you 

immain  paksinm  immuna    immam  jniksih  immuna  they  sec  Ihem 


^.JSam. 


NORTHWESTERN   AMERICA. 


559 


DIRECTION  TOWARD!. 

t/i  a  hnhnim  imana 

in  iihnim  ipiia 

in  aiMsluihnim  iinmnna 


DIRECTION  TROM. 

rMi'rcT  TK.xar. 
in  a  hakin  imana 
ill  aluikin  ijma 
in  anasliakin  immnna 


I  hnvo  seen  thco 
I  have  sccM  liim 
I  linvo  scfjii  tliuin,  Azc. 


a  haksamka 

aksamka 

anualuiksamka 


RKCEMT  rAIT  TIM». 

a  haksaka 

aksakn 

anasluiksaka 


I  have  just  srcn  theo 
I  Imvo  just  scH'ii  him 
I  huvc  just  scon  thorn 


a  haksama 

aksama 

anas/uikstuna 


REMOTIt  rA«T  T«N«I. 

a  hnksiiiia 

aksiniii 

a/iashtiksa/ia 


I  (lid  sro  tlieo 
I  (lid  soo  him 
I  did  sec  ihom 


a  hahiiima 

alitiiiiiii 

anaslininui 


toRIST  TBNSI!. 

a  hdhna 

aliti/i  III! 
anas/ia/i  na 


I  snw  lli(?c 
I  siiw  liini 
I  8IIW  thi.'m 


a  haktatiisham 

akiiihisliiim 

anaihaktalasham 


niKFKNT  rrTl'RK  TSNSB. 

a  hakliiliisha 

akiuliit-ha 

anashaklaliisha 


I  nm  nlxiul  to  sec  ihcc 
I  am  alKiut  to  sec  him 
I  am  about  to  sec  them 


a  hiihtiiikiim 

ahiiiikinii. 

aiiasliuhiiiikum 


mvHK  TINaK, 

a  hall  nil 
ah  II II 
anasliahnn 


I  shall  see  thee 
I  shall  sec  him 
I  shut!  sec  thorn 


a  liiiktafiishitmka 

aktatasliiimka 

aniislmlUulaslutmka 


RKTENT  PAST  Ft'TL'RK. 

«  hiikliiliisliiika 

aktiiliisliakii 

(masltuhtiiliishaka 


I  was  just  nlmut  to  sec  thoc 
I  was  just  alK)Ut  to  see  hitn 
I  was  just  about  to  see  them 


a  liiiklii/iishiima 
nkt  at  II  sill  I  III  I 
anusliaktatashama 


RKMOl-E  TAST  PUTURK. 

a  hiiktii/iishana 

aktal(i.\liiiiia 

a/iasliiiktatashatia 


I  was  alxiiit  to  see  thre 
I  was  abinit  to  sec  liim 
I  was  about  to  see  them 


in  aksaiikikim  ipna 
ahmikikiiii 
aksiiiikikimka 


LOCATIVE  FORM. 

t«  aksiiiiki  ipna 
ahiiiiki 
aksaiikaka 


I  ace  him  (yonder  ?) 
I  have  seen  him 
I  huvc  just  seen  him 


060 


DIIir<'TIOM  TOWABIM. 

aksdtikikiimi 

ahiiiikikikiniii 

aktaUishdiikikim 


aktiitinlintikikimka 
<iktiititsluinkikiina 


in  olimiktim  ipnn 
ahiiiikiinikti 

iihiKikdiiiti 
nhiinkiiiiiikiiiii 


I'll  1  I.OI.OU  Y. 

DIRECTION  raoM. 

tiksiitikikii 

tihiiiikikikii 

iikliUitalianki 


I  did  M^  him 

I  Miw  him 

I  am  about  to  we  him 


(no  IIRNKHtl.  ri'TUHIC  Tixn.) 

aktiiliisliniikdka  I  wns  just  about  to  sco  him 

aktiitiisliiinkika  I  was  about  to  we  him 


1-.4ITATIVK  MODK. 

nil  mill 
nil  iKikiikii 

nhnakniin 
iilimikiiiin 


I  am  wont  to  sn-  him 

I  hnvc  lately  biM'ii  wont  to  sec 

hiiM 
I  wns  formerly  wont  to  sco  him 
I  shall  sec  him  occasionally 


nhnnkankikim 
iihiuiUiiii  k  ik  i  III  kit 
nliiiiikniikikima 


kiik  ill  akinainh  ipna 
kum  ill!  iikiiiitmh 
kit  ijiiiiiii  jmkiiiiimh 
kiili  iiiiii  iijHikiiinmh 
kiijxiin  iiiiii  ii/xikiiiiimh 
kii  iiiimii  piiksiiiiiimh 
kumak  in  hiikiiiamh 
kum  ipna         " 
kiipniiiiik  in     " 
kupiim  ijiiiim  " 


VIITATIVE  MOni,  Loctl'IVE  FORM. 

(iliiiiikiinki 

iiliiinktinkiikii 

ahnnkiiiikikii 

■I'rroSITIVK  MODI. 

kiik  ill  iikiiiiih  ipna 
akinnh 
piikiiiali 
n/xikiikiiiali 
njKikinnli 
piiksiiniili 
liakinali 


I  om  wont  to  soo  him  yonder 
I  have  lately,  iVc. 
I  was  formerly,  &c. 


if  I  SCO  him 

if  thou  sees!  him 

if  he  s«es  him 

if  wo  siv.  him 

if  ye  see  him 

if  they  see  him 

if  I  sec  thee 

if  lie  se»>s  thee 

if  I  see  you 

if  he  sees  you,  &c.  &c. 


Aomar  nsac. 


kuk  ill  ahnokunka  ipnn        aliiwhi 


kuk  in  aksnnamh  ipna 
kum  iin  aksminmh 
ku  ijiiiiiii  ptiksiiiinmh 
knit  mm  iiksiiinmh 
kupain  imn  nksinnmh 
ku  iniina  jiaksinamh 


SmJlNCTIVI  MODI. 

iiksntiah 

aksannli 

pakuniuili 

aksiniili 

aksinali 

piiksinnh 


if  I  saw  him 

I  might  or  should  see  him 
thou  mightest  sec  him 
he  might  sec  him 
we  might  see  him 
yc  might  sec  him 
they  might  sec  him 


aksanokumka 


aksanoku 


I  might  have  seen  him 


f 


N  O  R  T  11  W  E  H  T  E  K  N    AMERICA. 


561 


UIRKCTION  TOWARUI. 


akuuoihanamh 


aktatoshanokumka 


akiiiktiiniimk 
aksiiktanokiimkn 
akliiUi.sliiiklaiiamh 
iiktaUtsliukUmokumka 


halinim  ina 
haJmimth  ina 
ntiiliaiinim  niina 
nailiiihiiimth  nuna 
nlmim  ipnim 
ahninuh  ipna 


UIRKITIIIN  FHOM. 
KMICNT  rUTUM. 

aktiUatlmiiiih 

MIT  rVTUIII. 

aklatdshaiinka 

LOCATIVE  romi, 
iikaaktana 
iik.itiktiiiinka 
aklatiisluiklaniih 
uktiilitskiikta  nokii 

IMrUATIVB  MODI. 


ii/iakim  ipna 
akilh  ipna 

mriNiTivi  MODI. 
luihnash 


I  may  soon  wo  him 
I  might  hnve  seen  him 


I  miijhl  SCO  him  yonder 
(Aorisi) 

(l'^('^M•nt  Future) 
(I'uat  l-'ulurt') 


i(xil(  (thou)  at  me 
look  (yr)  nt  mc 
look  (thuu)  at  us 
l(K)k  (yo)  at  us 
look  (thou)  at  him 
look  (yc)  at  him 


to  see 


ll 


5.    THE    WAIILATPU    FAMILY. 
(O.   Waiilutpu.     P.  MoMe.) 

The  first  of  these  vocabulorics  was  taken  under  the  supervision  of  Dr.  Whitman,  and 
is  undoubtedly  correct  j  the  sc<'c)n(l  wns  obtained  from  a  iiotive  during  a  single  interview, 
and  [xissibly  contains  some  errors. 

From  the  long  and  close  companionship  of  this  tribe  with  the  Nrz-Perces,  some  words 
of  the  iSahaptin  language  appear  to  hnve  l)ccn  adopted  into  their  own.  This  may,  per- 
haps, account  for  the  similarity  which  will  be  obscr>cd  in  the  niimomis  and  the  prjnouns, 
while  in  all  other  respects  the  Inngungcs  seem  to  be  |)erfectly  distinct.  We  hal  no  time 
to  obtain  any  particular  information  rcs|)ccting  the  structure  of  tin-  Waiilntpii,  but  were 
assured  that  it  diflcred  radically  from  that  of  the  Sahaptin.  The  following  examples  of 
plural  adjectives  arc  given  in  the  vocabulary  : 


yiiumua,  great 
sitaitt,  good 
ludsfu,  bad 


pi.  yit/tmu 
pi.  sasuatii 
pi.  laluiistu 


There  is  also  a  dual  of  the  second  person,  nkimi^,  which  does  not  exist  in  the  Sa- 
haptin. 

141 


562 


P II I  L  O  L  O  O  Y. 


6.    THE    T  8  H  I  N  ir  K    FAMILY. 

((^   Walf^lula  [1.  Wutf.ltdii;  m.  Sipiloilif].     II.    'I\i>nik,[\\.   Tliniik;  o.  Tf/dtsiip; 

p.  Wdkiiikiiiu.]) 

Tlio  niimi'roiw  vnrialinim  in  iIh'ho  vooiibiilnrics,  Ix-xidcs  llmsi^  which  "|>rin;i  frcini 
(liiiii'cliral  ilitli'n'riccs,  niiiNl  lie  iiscrilicil,  in  part,  to  the  cxIri'Mic  iiiiliNtiiictiii'ss  in  (he 
pruiiiinriation,  in  which  <;  and  t,  k  and  i:,  d  and  I,  an<i  even  ///  anil  />,  nrc  cniiNlantly 
ronlc>undo<l,  and  in  pari  to  grannnntical  chan)2r.s  in  the  llirin  of  word.'*,  indicating  auine 
dilTenMico  ol'  incaning,  ns  in  iiikp/'it,  mouth,  il^kii^/ii/,  my  month,  iic. 

So  cxtri'incly  dilViciilt  \k  the  pronnnciation  ol'  many  of  the  sounds  and  cnmliinationii  of 
oiomonts  in  this  lnii^na;;c,  that  liirci^ncrH  seldom  atlr'mpt  to  acipiin'  it,  NotwilhHtaiiding 
the  closi'  intercourse  whii'h  has  lieen  iimintained  with  this  peoph."  hy  traders  and  settlers 
lor  more  than  thirty  years,  only  one  instance  is  known  of  a  whilo  man  having  lenrneil  to 
s|M>ak  the  laniiuajie  with  (liiency.  This  man  was  n  Cimadian,  who  went  to  the  country 
in  Mr.  Astor's  first  expedition,  and  has  remained  there  eviT  since.  In  the  course  of  a 
long  iMness,  during  which  he  was  nursed  by  the  natives,  he  chose  to  occupy  himself  in 
ncipiiring  n  knowledge  of  their  tongue,  and  hy  so  doing  olitaiiied  no  little  celebrity  among 
both  foreigners  ami  Indians.  The  extreme  dilliculty  of  learning  this  speech  has  proludily 
iK-en  one  of  the  causes  which  have  given  rise  to  th(!  curious  "jargon,"  which  hih  for 
many  years  liirmed  the  usual  medium  of  communication  lietween  the  traders  and  the 
natives,  and  of  which  an  account  is  given  in  another  place. 

The  consonant  sounds  in  the  language  are  r  (or  s),  k  (or  p),  /.,  I,  m  (or  /<),  «,  /),  7,  t, 
and  (/•. 

So  liir  as  our  knowledge  extends,  the  Tshinuk  seems  to  lie  still  more  remarkable  for 
the  variety  of  its  forms  than  either  the  Selish  or  the  Sahnptin.  In  the  pronouns,  for 
exainple,  it  has  not  only  the  dual,  but  also,  in  the  first  person,  both  of  the  dual  and 
the  plural,  a  twofold  form,  one  excluding,  and  the  other  including,  the  parly  addressed. 
We  find  also,  in  one  dialect  (if  not  in  all),  two  pronouns  of  the  third  person  singular, 
masculine  and  leminine,  a  distinction  which  is  not  made  in  many  of  the  Indian  tongues. 

The  following  arc  the  i)crsonal  pronouns  in  the  language  of  the  l'pi)er  Chinooks,  or, 
Watlalas. 


•INOI'LAR. 

nitikit,  I 

iiiiiikd,  Ihou 
iii/kii,  ho 


DUAL 

tuliiikii,  we  two  (ex.) 
t/.nik(i,  we  two  (inc.) 
»iiliiik<(,  ye  two 
i^ld/.kii,  they  two 


tili^dikii,  we  (exc.) 
til/aika,  we  (inc.) 
niriiikd,  ye 
t/.ldili^kii,  they 


The  possessive  pronouns  are,  as  in  Selish,  particles  joined  lo  the  nouns.  They  are  the 
same,  except  for  the  first  person,  as  the  two  or  throe  first  letters  of  the  |)ersonnl  pronouns. 
With  itiikiil/U  or  iliikuut/lv,  house,  they  make — 


SI\aCI.AH, 


kukiriU/l  or  kiiki'it/l,  my  house 


DUAI..  ri.VTIAI.. 

>idnkwit/.l        nt^iiknil/./,  our  house  (cxc.) 


^aiM«*i.n'm 


NOR  T  II  W  K  H  T  K  UN    A  M  K  R  I  C  A. 


063 


mi'tikwilfl,  lliy  hmiiw 
iakivil/t,  liJM  I1UU80 


ni'ti..  ri.iiii«t. 

i/»kiiii/l  iil/iikwii/l,  our  hniiiio  (inc.) 

milakiril/l  tii^iikinl//,  ymn  liimw; 

ii-lakiril/l  t/Mikwit/.l,  llieir  liouso 


Tlio  lirst  iM'rHiiii  '\H  Hiimclinii'ii  I'xpn'HMi'il  by  iVy,  niiil  tim  iiccond  by  imi ;  an.  il^gil^, 
my  iiiwc,  iiiiiiti/^,  lliy  ii<>»p,  iiinili^,  \\\*  rmsc,  iVr, 

In  llio  Nnnii!  wny  v<>rlHi  nml  vcrUil  iiiljccrivr-i  Inki-  ttii'si!  prrCixon,  to  fcirni  tho  vurious 
inni'ctliins  (iir  niiiiibiT  iiiid  ihtmiii.  TIiih  IVdiii  /'.m,  cold,  wllli  Afii/.,  which  lecinit  to  be 
UHcd  U!<  lui  iiu.xiliury,  ur  |iorhu|is  u  aubiilantivi'  v(tI),  uru  luniu.'d — 


iKiikii  li'inii/kriif ,  I  mil  rdld 
tmiika  Irirtimkiii/.,  llmii  art  cold 
iii/kii  (rikatji.,  he  is  n>lil 


Diinl. 
niltiika  l^irtnilkcn/. 
lyjiikii  Irirlkea/. 
vutaikii  ti,imi'ki'iif. 
i^ta/.ku  t^ii;lkm/. 


riiiral. 


nti/tikn  li^i^n iili;keuf.,  wii  nro  oold  (nxc.) 
o//.(iikii  li^iliikraf.,  wn  aro  cold  (inc.) 
tmiiikii  ti^iriimrkiii/ ,  ye  arc  cold 
l/.lail^ka  t^i^ul/.lkeaf.,  they  ore  cold 


titkni/.l  naika  ti;iiiiitkiii/,  yi'Hlrrdny  I  was  cold 

Uiknt/l  nlraikd  tt^iriiiilrlkru/,  yistirday  we  were  cold  (exc.) 

Uikiit/.l  ulf.aika  l^itintkni/.,  yesterday  wo  were  cold  (inc.) 

(It  will  bo  seen  that  this  tense  ditfors  from  the  present  merely  in  the  insertion  o(  at 
before  toi/..) 

ruTi)»«. 
at/./ki-  vtiika  t^iijnn/Mlkn,  liy  ami  live  I  shall  lie  cold 
iit/.lkr  mliiikii  tririnnl/iitkn,  liy  and  liyc  we  two  shall  \yc  cold  (cxc.) 
iit/./ki-  t/aikit  t^i^iiZ/iilkii,  by  and  bye  we  two  shall  lie  cold  (inc.) 
Ill /Ike  mdiiika  t^ii^iiinfMtkit,  by  and  bye  y(!  two  will  Ixi  cold 
tit/lkc  iiii^tiikii  Irirnmr/dlka,  by  and  byr  ye  (pi.)  will  lie  cold 
nl/.lki'  lf.lnili,kii  /(,i(;iit/.//iitkii,  by  and  bye  they  will  Ik)  cold 


In  all  the  preceding  words,  tlii-  ^<«';  may  Ijo  st'pnratcd  and  placed  at  the  end  ;  as, 
naika  viir/iilka  l(;i^,  I  shall  lie  culd,  clr. 

The  traiisilivc  inflections  arc  as  ilisliiict  in  this  lani;imi'c  ns  in  the  Sclish,  and  more 
numerous,  inasmuch  as  lln'y  comprise  iho  iliial,  ami  llie  double  plural  of  the  first  person. 
The  following  examples  will  sullice  to  show  the  existence  of  these  forms : 


P  II I  L  O  L  O  O  V. 

iiminotrii/tuii,  I  kill  thee 
I^Dimriifiiia,  I  kill  hi  in 
iimtkimmiigiiti,  I  kill  yrni  two 
Vi,lkiiiouOiiuii,  I  kill  Ihrin  two 
um^kiiimrnnim,  I  kill  ymi  (pi.) 
ot]i.lkinoirnitiiii,  I  kill  Ihcm 
iimfkiiruf:iiii,  ye  kill  him 
nl/./kiwiif!Uii,  yc  kill  lliccn. 


Tho  Ix>wcr  or  pni|H'r  Txliiniik  wi'in«  to  ilillir  I'rnm  llip  lYl"''  ("r  Wallnln)  ralhcr  in 
words  llinii  in  Krniiiirinliciil  |ii-dili>irilipt.  In  lh<>  ilialrrt  of  U'liknikrim,  Iho  pronouns 
nm  ni'iirly  llir  hiiiiii-  hh  in  llint  of  Wntlnla.  I'nr  lir,  howovrr,  wim  ^ivpn  iii/i',  nnil  lor 
tlir,  icii/''. 

Of  ninny  «f  lh<'  noiin*  no  pliiriil  form  coiilil  lie  iliurovcrrd.  Soinc  of  iIms  name*  of 
living  Ix'ingn  lind  ii  plural  trrniinnlioii  in  uk$  or  uk^,  but  thin  wan  not  iinivrmal : 


tflikula,  man,  (vir) 
kiittdti,  lioriie 
t}<tkamokt,  dog 


pi.  Iflikalatvukt 
kiiiliinukf 
tkiimoktukt 


Some  of  tho  plumU  wore  nltogclher  irrrgulnr :  ns — 


knlfli'liktim,  man  (homo) 
t/laktl,  woman 
tj^lkutkut,  boy 


pi.  Uleknm 
tiinnmtiks 
tktuotinoks 


7.   A    K  A  t.  A  P  0  Y  A. 

This  vocobnlsry  wnii  oblainod  from  two  nntivcn  of  the  tribe,  one  of  whom  wn»  a  youth 
oduriited  by  Ihf  missionarii's  at  the  Wullnnnm'l  station.  The  language  is  roD  and  har- 
monioiiH.  The  7  r.nd  ^  iMTur,  but  not  very  often,  and  the  Inllcr  is  frequently  softened 
to  an  /(.     The  other  ronsonants  nro  f  (or  i),f,j,  k,  I,  m,  n,  f,  p  (or  b),  t  or  il,  and  ir. 

The  Kalapuya  \»  i-hiedy  remarkable  fiir  the  gn-nl  changes  whioh  its  words  undergo  in 
their  grnminatieal  variations, — leaving  often  very  little  Iraee  of  tho  root  or  ground-form. 
This  is  so<-n,  in  some  degree,  in  the  noun,  but  mon'  partieularly  in  the  verb,  the  form* 
of  which  ap|M-ar  to  lie  not  less  numerous  than  in  ibe  Snbnptin. 

Tho  dun!  and  double  plural  do  not  exist  in  this  tongue.     The  personal  pronouns  arc — 


«{•«  or  /f  li,  I 

niiilia  or  man,  thou 
kokit  or  kak,  he 


solo,  we 
miti,  yo 
ktniik,  they 


The  following  examples  will  show  the  jMssessive  adjuncts,  and  the  manner  in  which 
they  arc  combined  with  the  noun : 


N  O  l(  T  II  W  y.  H  T  K  II  S    A  M  K  III  C  A. 


6M 


^^^^  rimnn,  my  fnlhrr 
mnliii  liiihtii.'i,  lliy  I'allirr 
kok  tutjum.  Ilia  I'lithur 

l^i  riiiiii,  my  iiiuiliir 
niiiliit  kiiiiiii,  til}'  iiiiitlirr 
knti  iniiiiiim,  hit  niollKT 


tnti)  tii/iiDi,  our  fiilhflr 
;;/!/»  lifiitii,  ymir  liilhrr 
ktiiiik  iiiifiim,  their  liithcr 


.i(rf(/  fun  mm 
iiiiti  Imiiiin 
kiiiiik  iiiiiiiiiiii 


/('i  tiikira/iik,  my  I'vo 

w/(i/«/  jiiikini/iiL,  thy  i>yo 
Xi'A  iiiliiKiiiiliil,,  Ills  eye 


l/V(//(  likiriiliik,  iiiir  ryi'K 
iiiitiii  lihiiiildk,  yniir  rym 
kiiiiik  iiii/.iiii/iik,  their  eyPM 


((i  IHtiimiti  or  liiiiiitiiii,  my  lioiisn 
niiiliii  jiiiiMiiiiii,  thy  hoiiHi! 
^')A°  iiiimmiii,  hix  liouw 


»«/«  liiniiiKii,  oiir  lioii*o 
>////(  liiitniiii,  your  lioietn 
kiiiiik  iiiiniMiii,  their  hnii* 


No  iiilleetion  or  li^'ii  to  iiidicnlo  pltirnlity  eoiilil  Im'  ijiscovered  lither  in  Iho  noun  or  the 
idjeelive. 
Thi^  I'ollowini!  !•<  the  eonjuniilinn  ol'the  im  liter  Mil)  illniin,  to  W  siek  ; 


/ji  Hfiiliii^  I  inn  sii'k 
»«/l/  illiiliii,  thou  iirt  nick 
i/liihn,  he  in  nii'k 


/';|V»  l//';/i  we  lire  siek 
iiiti^ij)  illiij,  ye  II rr!  niek 
kiiiiik  ill  i/li'l,  lliev  iiri"  siek 


ilfntiii  li,i  kiii/i,  I  WHS  sicL  yeilenliiy 
iiiikii  i/liiliii,  llioii  w.isi  ^iik 
//(/  i/liiliii,  he  was  siek 


lii/i  ill'ij,  «e  uiro  sii  k 
iiiikiiji  ilfiijs  ye  were  siek 
kiin  lll'ij,  thev  were  siek 


miilji  liiillit  Irii,  lo-inurrow  I  shnll  lie  siek  hfi  ilfil,  we  slinll  lio  siek 
"  liiill'il  inaliii,  "  thoii  will  iK'sii'k  /((/</'  (//(V,  VI'  will  Im'  siek 
"      kiillil,  "        lie  will  lie  siek       kiiiiik  in  ilfit,  thev  will  ls>  siek 


imgk  /(,//.  iljiilit,  I  mil  mil  siek 
irnf)k  iiiiiiik  ilfnlil,  limn  iirl  mil  siek 
"       illiiliii  kiik,  he  is  imt  siek 


xrnilk  SDliik  liil/nf,  we  uro  not  sick 
vniik  nii/iiik  fiii/fiif,  ye  nrc  not  sick 
"      kiiiiik  itiii/lnf',  thev  nre  not  siek 


Akini,  liiiii,  has  the  liillowin"  vnrtnlions: 


ktnlit,  it  rains 
riikii  \lil,  ilis's  il  mill  ! 
iiniik  kinlil,  il  docs  not  min 
Ixikinlil  kitiili,ikiiii,  it  rained  last  ninhl 
his  kihiiiiknil.  presently  it  will  rain 
ir.iiik  liis  kniiii/iiktrit,  il  will  not  rain  sikhi 
Ilia  kiliikwiuntil,  presently  it  will  tease  mining 
112 


566 


PHILOLOGY. 


The  following  oxnmples  will  give  some  i<lpn  of  the  syslom  of  transitions  in  this  lan- 
guage, and  of  the  cxtriiordinnry  chnngrs  which  the  words  iindorgo.  It  certainly  would 
not  be  supposed,  without  such  evidence,  that  himkunUi  and  ttiUtat  were  merely  inflec- 
tions of  the  same  verb. 

tfill^Mit^itfip  malia,  I  love  thee 
t^itnphil^iio  kok,  I  love  him 
hbnlJpinli^iiciilit  t^ii  kak,  ho  loves  ino 
hiiiii^itapint^iifala  tpi,  dost  thou  love  me  ? 

trihotairop  trii,  I  see  thee 
«  chotn/i  trii,  I  ice  him 

lihiiki/liiilon  kok,  dost  thou  see  him  ? 
hi/iikii/iiiM^itfon  f>;ii,  dost  thou  see  rnc? 
Iihiikiihoinn  kiniik,  dost  Ihou  see  Ihom  ? 
kinuk  himkuiihotuii,  do  they  see  thee? 

sif  kok,  give  him 
jf'/i/o  soto,  give  us 
^ini/i  kiiiiik,  give  them 
eia  piitctip  nui/in  kiiska  keiitaii  ?  w  ho  gave  thee  that  horse  ? 
i^imma  tnitu  kolvtat  trii,  my  fathi'r  gave  it  to  me 
mei/Ji  tikiiMfi,  to-morrow  I  will  give  it  to  him 
"     fdkiimti  rimiiKi,  thou  wilt  give  it  to  my  father 
kitii.rt  ho  will  give  it  to  me 

tatititt  Ihou  wilt  give  it  to  me 

tiMip  I  will  give  thee 

kihliiip  he  will  give  thee 

eia  hitiikimi/i,  to  whom  didst  thou  give  it? 

hiiii/i  i^iiiniia,  I  gave  il  to  my  father 
wit]/k  trii  keck  tiiiii/ili,  I  do  not  wish  to  give  it  to  thee? 

Of  the  remaining  voonlinlarics  little  can  be  said  beyond  what  may  be  gathered  from 
the  vocabularies.  In  the  langii.igos  of  Klj  and  Xctela  a  few  examples  of  plural  and 
pronominal  forms  were  obtained,  which  may  bo  worlh  preserving. 


uoiDit,  man 
klt(,  house 
hai/.,  mountain 
i^-of,  wolf 
tihfiiuait,  good 
l^inui,  small 
yup%/.a,  black 


pi.  iroroiot 
pi.  /.//./>'/ 
1)1.  /iiiliiii/. 

pi.  I'lOlt 

pi.  til  iirait 
pi.  t'jiriniii 
pi.  II II pi  nut 


KI  J. 

toki'tr,  woman 
jiait/.tiiii;  bcw 
icusi,  (log 


pi.  lutokor 

pi.  jHipait/.iiar 

pi.  iraiisi  (qu.  wdtcasi  ?) 


iiinlmi,  bad  |)1.  ninmn/iai 

iiriiinitiii,  white     pi.  rnuiinot 
kfvaiio/a,  red         pi.  kiiuii/.dnat 


ninak,  my  father 


ayoiuak,  our  father 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


567 


monak,  thy  fnlhor 
anuk,  his  liitl— . 

nikin,  my  house 
miikiii,  thy  house 
tiki)j<i,  his  house 


siiol,  star 


N  E  T  E  L  A. 


asoinak,  your  father 
? 

ei/okw,  our  house 
tisnkiju  (I),  your  house 
jmmokitii,  their  house 


pi,  siilitm 


The  following  words  apponr  to  bo  nlso  in  the  pUiral,  with  the  possessive  tin/  prefixed : 
Jiopii/ii III,  cyvs  (my);  vaiiakdiii,  cars;  nikUialtim,  cheelts  ;  ;/«/a/i«/o»i,  hands ;  iieti- 
mrliim,  l(necs. 


wj'Xi,  my  house 
om  aki,  thy  liouse 
jwki,  his  house 

110/.,  my  boat 

om  onii/.,  thy  l)oat 

onqmmif.  (qu.  jmni/.),  his  boat 


trnniki,  our  house 
nmniii  oniki,  your  liousc 
oiiipomki,  their  liousc 

tt;oiin/.,  our  boat 
omimi  onii/,  your  boat 
omjx))ii)/.,  their  bout 


The  similarity  which  exists  Iwtween  many  words  in  these  two  lanj;ungcs,  and  in  the 
Shoshoni,  is  evident  ouougli  iVoin  a  comparison  of  the  vorabulaiies.  The  resemblance 
is  too  great  to  be  attribute:!  to  mere  casual  iulercouise ;  but  it  is  iloubil'ul  whether  the 
evidence  whicli  it  ati;)rdswill  justify  us  in  classing  them  tog(-thcr  as  Iranchcs  of  the  :faine 
fumily.  The  fact  that  the;  Conianclies  of  Texas  spcaU  a  language  closely  allied  to,  if  not 
identical  with  that  of  the  Shoshonees,  is  supported  by  testimony  from  so  many  sources, 
that  it  can  hardly  be  doubted. 


REMARKS    ON    THE    V  O  (   A  B  U  I,  A  R  I  E  S. 

The  list  of  words  was  intended  to  be  the  same  as  that  adopted  by  Mr.  Gallalin,  in  his 
Synopsis  of  the  Indian  Tril)es  of  .North  .\nierica;  but  some  omissions  and  varialifms  have 
been  made  for  dill'erent  reasons.  Among  others,  the  words  for  (iml  and  l",vil  ."Spirit  have 
l)cen  omitted,  because  it  was  lound  that  lliesi'  languages  (at  least,  the  lirst  ten  of  which 
vocabularies  were  made)  possessed  no  proper  indigenous  terms  llir  Ihcse  ideas.  Since 
they  have  been  taught  by  the  whites  to  speak  of  a  good  and  evil  principle,  lliey  desi  nate 
them  by  compound  terms,  drawn  usually  from  the  relative  situalious  which  they  have 
learned  to  a.ssign  to  them, — in  the  heavens  above  and  in  the  internal  egioiis.  Thus,  in 
the  Selish  language,  dod  is  expressed  h\  Xiii-slv-jm/jm/o/,  ot  "the  Old  .Man  above,'" 
and  the  evil  spirit  liy  /aid.  nirot,  the  "  bad  Ix'low."  In  tlii^  Hahaplin  they  have,  in  like 
manner,  (iki'ini-kiiiikit  and  hii/iikiiiiku,  meaning,  the  one  i.liove,  and  the  one  Ik'Iow. 

As  has  been  liefon^  ii'marked,  all  the  vocafailari  s  are  not  to  e  regarded  a.s  eipially 
authentic  and  accurate.  Those  of  the  S<'lish,  Skitsuish,  I'iskwaus,  Sahaptin,  W'alawala, 
nnd  W'aiilatpu,  may  be  looked  upon  as  correct,  having  IxHin  taken  down  with  the  assistance 


56S 


I'lrr  i-o  L()(i  Y. 


ol'iho  mi^sioimrirs.  The  Tsihailish,  Nsictslmwus,  Tshinuk,  niul  Knlnptiyn  niny  nlso,  wo 
think,  lie  <lc|>i'nil«l  ii|Min.  The  others  wore  mostly  received  (rom  single  iiidividuiils  of  the 
sovenil  Irilies,  or  ("rom  iiitcrprt'tcrs,  mid  have  iiol  iherel'ore  hiul  those  iidvanlnj^es  of  com- 
pnri^in  nnd  ri'visnl  which  aluiie  iiisiir<!  iicrlci't  acciiracy,  ilut  the  great  mass  of  words  in 
all  has  |ir«t>:ibly  Utn  rightly  understood  and  wrillen. 

TlR'r<-  an'  certain  words,  however,  in  all  llie  vocahidaries,  whieh  are  not  exact  transla- 
tions oI'iIh'  Kii^llsh  words  under  which  they  stand.  This  is  es|ieeially  the  case  with  nil 
generic  di'iioniinnlions.  'l"|ie  words  yiven  liir  tiri\  siinhc,  /lin/,  Jis/i,  si^nil'y  in  most  cases 
mervly  si>me  s|>eeii's  l>elon);inj;  to  these  classes, — as,  j)ine,  riitz/i'siiakr,  jiifteo/i,  sii/iiioti, 
Arc.  In  many  instaiiiis,  where  the  natives  were  made  to  iiiiderstaiid  the  meaning  ol' the 
English  word,  they  dirlan'd  that  there  was  no  corri'spondiii;;  term  in  tlieir  own  dialects. 
The  \v..rd  "liven  in  the  .S'lisli  V(Kaliulary  llir  lish,  viz.,  siiniiuil/l,  eom|ireliends  all  ani- 
mals which  inhaliit  the  water,  IkJii;;  derived  from  siiinf/hra,  which  means  water.  ir<//'«- 
tUUrti,  the  Sahaptin  word  liir  W/v/,  means  properly  "  the  winded  animal."  The  terms 
loirn,  irnrrinr,  fiirnil,  must  nlso  Ik'  reckonc^l  amoli;;  those  whose  va;;ue  or  generic  cha- 
racter Mkikes  it  dillicult  to  obtain  an  exact  translation  into  the  Indian  languages, 

li".  as  souH-times  h.iii|ii'iis.  there  exist  two  terms  for  man  (answering  to  vir  and  lionio), 
thi'y  will  usually  Ix'  found,  the  liirmer  imder  iikiii  or  /iiis/miii/,  and  the  latter  luider  "  In- 
dian, native."  In  iii'iieral,  however,  there  was  no  means  of  ascertaining  with  precision 
IIk'  existence  of  this  ilisiindion. 

For  llic  words  /«//«•/■,  iiioIIk  r,  sister,  hroflicr,  there  will  he  observed  n  profusion  r>f  cor- 
respfinding  term*  in  the  Indian  languages.  This  arises  from  three  circumstances  well 
kniiwn  to  philologists : — lirstly,  the  fact  that  the  sexes  use  dill!  rent  terms  to  designate 
these  ndatiiins;  schouiIIv,  that  the  vocative,  or  the  word  used  in  addressing  a  relation,  is 
otlen  entirely  ditti-reul  iVom  thai  employed  on  oilier  iMVasioiis;  and,  thirdly,  thai  the 
Iniiians  an;  accustomed  to  designate  the  elder  brother  and  sisti'r  by  dillirent  terms  iVom 
ilh>se  iw<l  for  the  younger. 

Tlie  words  given  lor  spriiiSs  siiiiimrr,iiiiliiiiiii,  trhiter,  t\i)  not  ot'len  correspond  exactly 
with  the  Knglish  terms.  They  are  sometiun's  properly  iIk;  names  of  certain  months 
in  th"S«>  seasons;  in  other  cases,  they  signify  merely  intnii  and  cu/i/.  Mniiiiin:  and 
frrniisu  have  in  every  language,  as  in  iMiglish  (moniiiig,  daybreak,  dawn,  sunrise),  so 
many  corn»s|v>ndiiig  expressions  of  slightly  dillirent  iiieanings,  thai  ill  general  it  was  a 
matter  of  chance  if  exactly  the  same  translation  was  olitained  in  any  two  allied  dialects. 
TIh*  same  may  lie  said  oC  f/i/fri/,  the  Indian  words  lorwhicli  signify  rivrr-liottnin,  riiriiie, 
(kll,  and  sometimes  ilni  rratir-coiirsr. 

The  distinction  of  o/'/,  as  ii'^cil  nni\  as  tiol  iinr,  is  generally  made  in  tlu-  Indian  Inn- 
guaiies,  and  is  somelimes  pointed  out  in  the  vocabiilariis.  Hut  (iir  i/oiai^,  in  many  cases, 
no  word  was  lout;  I  but  that  signifying  sniiill.  This  was  the  case  in  the  iSahaplin,  where, 
had  any  such  word  existed,  it  would  uni|uestionably   have  been  known  to  the  mission- 


It  is  remarkable  that,  in  several  of  the  languages,  the  samewiird  is  employed  to  signify 
both  iirstrrilaii  and  in-mormrr.  The  meaning  is  determined  by  the  construction,  usually 
by  ihe  tens*"  of  the  verb. 

The  third  jx-rsonal  pronoun  was,  in  general,  dilTicult  to  obtain,  nnd  the  word  by  which 
it  is  remfc-red  in  some  of  the  vocabularies,  prolwhly  means  rather  tluU  or  litis. 

The  numbers  aliove  five  could  not,  in  several  instances,  b<!  obtained  with  certainty, 
.nnd  in  some  not  at  all.     This  w»s  the  case  in  many  of  the  southern  dialects. 


SYNOPSIS. 


FAMILIES. 

1,  Tahkali-Umkwa 

2.  Kitunaha 


LANGUAOES. 

A.  Tnhkali  (Carriers) 

B.  TInlskanai       .... 


DIALECTS. 


C.  Utnkwtt  (Umpqim) 

D.  Kiliinnlin  (Coiilanirs,  I'lut-bows) 

hu  Shusliwnpunisli  (Shiisliwnps,  Ainnhs) 


r 


Northern  Brnnch  . 


3.  Tsilmili-Sclish 


4.  Sahaptin 


6.  Tshinuk 


7.  Kalapuya 

8.  lakon    . 

9.  Lutuami 

10.  Sasic     . 

11.  Pnlaihnih 

12.  Shoshoni 

13.  Satsikna 

14.  Nootka 

16.  1 

10.  Kizh      . 

17.  Nctcia  . 


F.  Selish  (Flathcntls) 


r>.  Skitsuisli  (CuMir  d'nlfene) 
.  II.   I'iskwniis  (I'isrnus) 
Midille  Branch  .         I.  Skwalc  (Nusqually) 

t  J.  Tsihnilish  (Chicknilis,  Chills)  . 
Western  Branch    < 

'   K.   Kawclilsk  (Cowelils) 
L  Southern  Branch       L.  Nsici.shawus  (Killninuks) 
M.  Sahnptiit  (Ncz-l'crfes) 


'   N.  U'ulawala(VVallawallas)    .     . 
5.  Waiilatpu j  °-  .Y""'"'''"  (^^'"1"^°"^.  C^yuse) 


Q.  Watlala  (Upper  Chinooks) 
U.  Tshinuk  (Chinooks)      .     .     . 


S.  Kalapuya 

T.  lakon  (Lower  Killamuks) 

U.  Lutuami  (Tlamiitl,  Clamets) 

V'.  Waste  (SImsties) 

VV.  Palaihnih  (Pnlaiks) 

X.  Shoshoni  (Shoshonees,  Snakes) 

Y.  Wihinasht  (Western  Shoshonees) 

Z.  Satsikaa  (Blackfect) 

Kwoneatshiitkn  (Newittee) 
San  Kapliael 
San  tinl)ri(!l 
San  Juan  Capcstrano 
14S 


a.  TIatsknnai 
h.  Kwnlhioqua 


c.  ICullespelm  (Ponderays) 

d.  Tsakailsitliu  (Spokan  liids.) 

e.  Soaiatlpi  (Kettle-falls,  <.V:e.) 


f.  Tsihnilish 
jr.  Kwaiantl 
h.  Kwi'iiuiwitl 


i.  Pclus  (Pclooses) 
j.  .Iiiakrnin  (Yakcnias) 
k.  TIakatat  (Klikatats) 


1.  Watlala  (Cascade  Inds.) 

in.  Xihaloilih  (Ucheloots) 

n.  Tshinuk 

o.  TIntaap  (Clatsops) 

|).  Wakaikain  (Wahkyecums) 

(|.  Kalapuya 

r.  Tuhwalati  (Follaties) 


570 


PHILOLOGY. 


MAN. 

WOMAN, 

BOT. 

I 

A. 

(lliii  (temiee) 

<f(7.o  (s7i«j'a) 

i/iiii<is 

B. 

]/.aiuine;  Uiiitsen 

Isitikciii;   (b.)   tMit,   (n) 
tsi'iike 

Itiiiii;  (b)  skiyi;  (a)  a^t- 
kira-tiitsin 

C. 

titsaii;  tune 

i/.e 

s/.(iie/.e 

2 

D. 

lltqurl;  vajin 

ptl/Jki 

nn(/al/./ndna 

3 

i;. 

knhiiii/.;  skaelenni/. 

siiiiiiit/Jitfk 

/iiiinrtviU ;  y^i^'.'nritin 

p. 

skalUimvy.o ;  skult(tmiy.n 

snmtiiim;  (c)  takut]f.li- 
mtlifM 

skoknsta ;  tetoit 

G. 

skiiiltcmu)!. 

suinicin 

kokivdasa 

11. 

skalOnniy.o 

suiiiiinu 

tiiiiii 

I. 

SlUDir 

sl/liiilai 

Sllllll/i^ 

.1. 

slii/.ii ;  slfipt 

skiiKjIrnl/.l;  (h)  staksc 

yaiiq 

K. 

iiuiir//./iii>i<i/.;  sit^tamay.  h'lvilf.l 

kiriii'il/.l 

L. 

taiilalio;  taiklf.6)^. 

sitit/Jdts;  tsiiil/.Mts 

tasika-kn  nuu-in  ;    rrnsti. 
has.siil/.l 

4. 

M. 

hiuiia 

ui'it 

hit.sual 

N. 

won-;  irin^; 

Itlaki;  (k)  aiat 

tti]f.twt^amiit ;  (k)  aswan ; 
(isit-al 

5. 

O. 

yiiinit 

pi?U/./kniu ;  wat/.l(Hi 

Idiitlmj 

1". 

uii,  idi 

luijil/lai 

miiidts,  kw'vytn 

6. 

u. 

tf.kkuUi,  t/lkiila 

t/.lkiikilak 

t/./kaskirs;  iut/.lku 

K. 

l/./tkii/a;  kotf^kliktim 

t/.lakcl 

tf.lkiiskiis;  (o)  Ikaskui 

7, 

S. 

titi^iUjgo 

piiiniudike 

mlinlim 

8. 

T. 

knh 

t/.Liks 

tyMm-f.ato 

e. 

U. 

hi^uuUas 

ipuurats 

kitskanii^o 

10. 

V. 

MCdlikoti 

taritsi 

atoku'tayi. 

u. 

W. 

yaliu 

UllltluitSCH 

ialiiitsin,  yaitUsa 

12. 

X. 

tiika 

kiri'  If 

tiiitsi,  tiiwitsi 

Y. 

nana;  ndl 

moyoni,  luqaqa 

niilsi 

13. 

Z. 

ninito 

akiiia 

pnkuo 

14. 

tfJeti'u/Momak 

15. 

lamantiya 

kii/aij 

16. 

uoroil 

tokor 

kiviti 

17. 

yiits 

SUfflcul 

anuiitckc/a 

NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


571 


1.  A. 
B. 

C. 

•i.  D. 

3.  E. 
F. 

O. 

n. 

I. 
J. 
K. 
L. 

4.  M. 

N. 

5.  O. 
P. 

6.  (i. 
U. 


aiRL,  ixrANT;  child, 

<j'(7.(V(s  bci/r  (i;hutun) 

tscki'slc;  itiit;  (b)  skiyete  astixjice 


ill 
}iaiik)id)ia 


kaio ;  mir^/.e 
tsiikoHunii/.l-kiimo 


PATIIXR. 

apa  (ajijid) 

mama;  (b)  stda;  {a)ivata 

or  ta 
stauli  ;  itta  ;  ^tan/i 

titiinis ;  my  —  katito 


f.n f.nf.oUmi  tsnkt/.lmila  kiilsa,  kiiti^n 

^aiilinii  ;  fif;iitam;  (e)     a./.tiill;  d/.teli;  (e)oa/.ti/i  liiuiis   (by  mon) ;    miistu- 


stvKjititnif. 

^iiitiim  o(i/.tell  or  a,/.taU ; 

kiaiina  wa/trll 

sl/.hit/.Ui'lai  sy,uqrt/.l 

■/.tiiiq  sqaiiail/.l 
Isktcaiil/.l ;  t^it.ikwaiil/.l  kiciiiinit/.l 

sika  kfi itinviii ;  itqdUilj^    keiudis,  kcawdis 


pitin  viidnts ;  miapkauip 

to/.anct;  (k)  putiniks        tniditu^- ;  n-aptai 


stnii/Jinj;  stuMip 
kirCiiiiisa 

lid/eq 


skill/la 
kiiUikiila;  kuqdsa 

t/./ahiild(lik{; 


iiiirs  (by  women) 
pijiii.s ;  maalfimiis 
liiniis ;  inmeii^tuni 
Ikui 

kd/lcns ;  (h)  teulis 
komd  ;  lamdiiawe 
Iliad  (by  men);  nti^oii  (by 

women) ;  tawoivds 

])i^t ;  nalot 

Pi'il ;  (k)  ti'itas  ;  natiita 

J>illt<t  ;   tilra 

2)uttih-a ;  tutUg 


t/.hr/.ldm ;    winam  ;    (m) 
t^iinidma ;  tvindmie 
//./dliij;  (o)  okoskas;  (p)    ct^amiks;  (p)ska/.akeik6/.  t^liamdma ;  (p)  cmam 
tikdskas 


7.  S.     api/iiia  awejx,  awiijx 

8.  T.    t/Janksaiva  vinhaitc 
0.  U.    kitskdni^naicats  kistka 

10.  V.    tiiritsik  tii/.ea/. 

11.  W,  iimtaidltsin ;  mimaiiitsa  tsdiikdlii 


12.  X. 

y. 


miintsats  ;  naia 
tsid 


ira 
oltd 


13.  Z.    kdkwa 


ennksllsipokao 


sima;  kdkam  (ihy) 

stnitd 

kauktigap 

waii,  katsiiaii  (my) 

upiii 
uiid 

iiiiid  (my) 


14. 

15. 

16. 

taf.ai 

17. 

iKiiritinal 

yokeko 


api 
andk 


572 


PHILOLOGY. 


1.  A. 
B. 

C. 

(iiiiiiinigcool) 
fiaa;  (b),«Hdwa;  (n) 

mill 
tinlu  ;  fkdka 

wa- 

(eki) 
sikskiiii ;  (b)  itittine 

d/.kiiiin 
fhd)j(t ;  s/.('n 

•(a) 

bdat  (<iijei/e) 
sikuteS'dt ;  (a)  iiadt 

S'at.-f\U:0) 

2.  D. 

iiiaiiis;  kama 

ka>iitit/.ldkna 

kalit/.lndmu 

3.  E. 
F. 

G. 
[(. 
1. 

.1. 
K. 
L. 

kt/.a 

skiiis  (by  inon);  tfimtrs 

(l)y  woiiien) 
askiirrs;  timika 
^kiii 

SOfJO 

kuj^s 

kiitii,  stanawe 
ullUi ;  l/./niit^6in„t;  t)t./a- 
liiiriis 

s/m/iic 
I'/.iiiliii 

i]f.ailikira 

(^d/iii 

sh-islifu 

(i)itis ;  (h)  listqwennjms 

S/Jifl 

Umsiiotia;  titsuon 

siindum ;  snmdiim 
mA/.OHH,/. !  (e)  ndf.onof. 

iioy.oiiof.0 
fsiiku-ug 
(;iniis 

krivilfJ  or  kmrity.! 
t/Minsikas,  ((^ugds;  nl^i 
kds 

4.  M. 

N. 

jiikd ;  iiiUs;  ilsrt                lianm  ;  my  —  intrm-dm 
pii\;d;  (k)  itfla;  nditj^/as  um 

itriipna 

5.  O. 
1'. 

]irtiin;  nitl^a 
iptks;  iia 

i/idiii 
idty^lam 

int/L/kuio 
lugit/lni 

6.  (1. 
R. 

H'niiik;    dk/.o;    (m) 

H(ik<; 
t/.lianda;  (p)  t^dmci 

wd 
kf. 

it^ikikal 

itsa/.  rkal ;    tjtcdp  ; 
akukekal 

(P) 

kakilak  ;  vknkekat 
uiaj~ck(il 

7.  .S. 

sixiii;  kanni  (thy) 

leil 

put 

8.  T. 

t/la 

SUIISlt 

sint/.ldks  (my) 

0.  U. 

nnkompkisvp 

10.  V. 

iiii/dt/t.i 

11.  W 

tatii 

iluidiii,  katsuidiii  ( 

my? 

lume,  katsidiirne 

12.  X. 

Y. 

13.  Z. 

pia 
pia 

idkistsa 

kiiiiia 
iktimd 
nummi  (my) 

uipui 

norikwe 

nUu/.kman 

14. 

15. 
10. 
17. 

una 
imk 

tlOIJO 

diL 


NORTHWESTERN   AMERICA. 


673 


1.  A.  (n/aze) 

B.  tikaU-Uintstl  Husla  ;  (b) 

j/aase  ;  (n)  tie 

C.  ^d^ai ;  jijie  or  ^ie 

2.  D.    a^kdlj^Uis 

3.  B.    skiisail 

V.    skoAosai ;  nkokosudlt 

G.  tiskosdd 

II.  df;kiisa.i 

I.  niiniida;  tiilxula 

J,  kulon  f    Uinumdt;    (h) 

nvmiut 

tuniiivCin;  tnladkat/.l 

/uistrafdmiats  ;  midots 
tdUt ;  (k)Wto;  iwtf'ji 

vdi 

train;  gii^atfici 

it{i)Ldn ;  imif.an  ;  (m) 

it^'f.dn 
ets/>/.a ;     et^O^na ;     (p) 

ilsuft.dn 


{edchi)  (echill) 

siku-tsvkaida;  (\i)tzee  suskdtte/. ;   (b)  dietze; 

(a)  slsee  .limine  (a)  sonaka 

ite  ;  ji*  itlHlc !  (it/.le 


kdiue  (my) 


A-aM/t  (my) 


K. 
L. 

4.  M. 

N. 

6.  O. 
P. 

6.  Q. 
R. 

7.  S. 

8.  T, 

9.  U. 
10.  V. 

u.  \\. 

12.  X. 
Y. 


ttiinikildlt  kati^ki ;  ^i/it^a  (younger) 

sttnnl^dall ;    (e)    stum,  kd/^ki    (elder) ;    sintsii 

ka&lt  (yoiint^cr) 

stimkiui  knkaifski ;  isusiiilsuu 

stuinkas,  kiajudna  kalijii ;  ^inl^a 

nilmda  tska ;  naii/alg 

lf.UHst{invmdt ;  komeitfl  tCnnUi^;  nti^eU^ ;  (h)  a«/f i 

tsuniiindn  nusk 

l)^luiiiiw(iii ;  tf.lnvw(ina  tiin.six/p;  u?ntfkits  [e\dcT) 

pitiniiiiiat.s ;  isUi  piup ;  rtsAff/)  (younger) 

il«;  (V.)  ]>utiniks  ;  ujd  nijxi ;  mka  ;  I'is/.tip 


mil 

puitia  ;  pena 


pndktin  ;  pinidtap 
piindka  ;  pitndt 


irkd/.dn  ;  (m)  uk/.dn 


tt^o/.dif.  ;     emamaf.if. ; 
(m)  aid  ;  dpf^u, 
okw6y.a;  asa ;  (p)  oAvr.    kap/.i<  ;  an;  tf.lkawaf. 
f.dn 


tawdijai 
sinmddts  (my) 


yauitsa 

natsi 
Hue 


t^iUipinna 


13.  Z.    tio/.kda 


lumauitsa 

tianai,  naiu 
taudy.ki 

titdni 


(p)  ilso/itce/L 

^ipi ;  (Ut  (younger) 

sutmkutimi  (my) 

kautapivp 

yapdtsi 

ajMwi,  katfu^tUunwi 

tami/e ;  tsakai 
isalamdtkviait  (?) 


14. 

15. 

at 

le. 

dikok 

17. 

nakdm 

tti 

aiarok 

nipilts 

ntisiidm 

napas 

144 

I 


574 


P  H  1 1. 0  L  O  0  Y. 


i> 


(.  i 


I 


aim*.  inoun;  rnru. 

1.  A.  {ptazr)  tii/.kiie,  Ui}.kOli 

B.  tivkskaetsn-jf^i  (\i)dietse;  /.amine 

(a)  svlUdslse 

C.  stct^e  tune;  miihane 


a.  D.    ktitsa 


ttk  ii/Uta  mdkanik 


3.  E.  ki/i  ;  I^Cit^n  sktti/ekdrm 

F.  t/./kikee  f  t/.ltsitsuopus  skdi/i/u 

G.  yiikwii ;  tsiitsia  skint 
\l.  kii /. ;  tsaiddus ;  sintu/iis  t^kint 

I,  tska ;  tsokwa  (Usitf.l-tilme/.o 

}.  kopfis  niipiihiii(^ 

K.  posun  ?iawit/./amafL  ;  elama/. 

L.  t/lansoqe  kuslmat. ;  t/laatcewe 

4.  M,  kSnis;  priiet;  asip;  nani  titokini 

N.  cUs ;  ]>et ;  isip ;  (k)  ats ;  tuilitaili;    (k)    tinma ; 
nil^d  Id  lien 

6.  O.  pandtiap;  pamcaiuq 

P.  pukaini  tcitstp ;  icit^p 

6.  Q.  ukot/iy^;    ememdt/.iyi ;  natitanoc;  tile/Lam 
at(i 

R.  t/.lidu;  ats  tOle/.am 


7.  S. 

ititt 

m&nami 

8.  T. 

kitslam 

0.  U. 

totidk^ip 

10.  V. 

n.  w. 

tcapiqu-i ;  wenumci 
(younger) 

iji  or  is 

12.  X. 
Y, 

tuimei;  jmUsx 
sum  (!) 

takumuikwas  (7) 

13.  Z. 

tiiskOti 

mafipewak 

■HAD. 

f)it.ia  (jnlMi) 
jLoiti^nut;  (h)ntn;  (a) 

stsie 
sufa;  ri 

akldm 

skdpi/iin 

spit/.liikdin 

i/dmiikan 

qiimiikun,  qdiiwkon 

.i/.aius 

mdiit 

qdmnt 

tatjen ;  n/dfyal 

hiifiis  ;  hi'n'Uf 
tUpi;  (V)  pdl/lka ;  tr.ldm- 
til/ 

talf ;  tdalg 
Idiri 

kdqstaq  ;  kdkstnq 

t/likhVkatOka;  (o)ebi- 
kataka;  (p)  t/Ucdkitak 

tdmut/l 

t/lukia 

nus 

iiiak 

lah,  UHie 


pampi ;  pimpi 
tsojnn 

dtakdn 


14. 

16. 

16. 

nipiits 

17. 

nekeis 

to/.otset 
mdlit 
apodn 
nuyu 


NORTHWESTERN   AMERICA. 


876 


HAia, 

WkOt. 

rotm*D. 

1. 

A. 

(otezega) 

B. 

f.oU(i$ea!  (\>)  »oaf.tkint ; 
(n)  tunte 

foneiitsunv 

/.ontiimaiei  (b)  konase; 
(a) sntn 

C. 

zuya;  sola 

itiii 

trko  I  enimaU 

2. 

D. 

(ujoklum, 

akukanis 

3. 

E, 

Hduitirn 

stjutfUa 

niqamoi 

F. 

tjomkan  ;  (e)  qOmnkun 

Miiiitf.los  ;  (e)  sqwutfliis 

ski//.lkimdsgin 

G. 

kipiiknin 

st/.losomin 

skilf.lti;imilUgin 

II. 

sf/viukan 

st/.Uisomun 

nkatkamilf 

I. 

st/iit-so 

<ldlom 

J. 

f/ilikodt;  stgus;  (h)  sildte 

moot 

»Uf.lt(a 

K. 

kifskus 

ntsiimoi 

tf.lo/.<a  ;  ty.laf.6se 

L. 

tf.lu<U]in  ;  vmkkin 

t/./auos;  t/.linau!os 

siimidlus;  tflantsinddlts 

4. 

M. 

kiiku/. 

mrlgtai 

giu-a 

N. 

liitaiiiki 

(k)  dtf;as 

pid 

6. 

0. 

t/Llokomot 

liequkg 

]>etidtf.lif 

P. 

tdt/.tim 

logdnui 

tdkui 

6. 

Q. 

trka^fu  ;  (m)  natf.lf.ut 

ami^  ;  wdmiy.; 

(m)tcai7 

ami('j6 ;  teal/La/.;  (m) 
nkfgico 

R. 

tf.likMkso;  t/.liOkio;  (o] 
tfl-afi  (p)</tttf«o 

sid/^os 

obttspo/.;  (o)  obey.;  (p) 
ebif. 

7. 

S. 

i-mutfl 

tampan 

8. 

T. 

sinnt/.ldsin  (my) 

hams 

kwoli 

9. 

U. 

lak 

tdlig 

laqe 

10. 

V. 

inay. 

oi 

tsaruf.  (D) 

11. 

W 

liyi 

dsv 

id 

12. 

X. 

tupia  ;  tiupia 

kuivif 

motdka 

Y. 

ikud 

kovd  or  kaibd 

Id 

13.  Z.    odsi 


ostukis 


14. 
16. 
16. 
17. 


apsatup 


-J 


676 


PHILOLOOY. 


tA>.  ITI. 

I.  A.    otto  (oiho)  btnUoHar,  jA.) 


( ftanin^hu) 


tUd/.ai 

jtai  (my) 

C. 

tpue;  t^nit 

ltd  ye 

mi«<j«y  ;  (if 

3 

D. 

jHikwand ;  nkiikuat 

akiikle/.l 

akiinikak 

3 

E. 

t/Uniti 

/.iikiii/Zostan 

s/iiiMika 

F. 

tdna 

skikm/Zos/aii ;  (e)  sifii- 
ffiri/t/hattin 

ijtiiaiiks 

0. 

Una 

si/it//iKV>i>iin 

sf  Hid  melt  ks 

H. 

lann 

31)1111/ /i>^omirii 

tniiksiii 

I. 

fjolniir. 

</d/oin 

nidknsiii 

J. 

r/Mn;  (h)  iftreluH 

miHis  or  mdt;  (h)  /.oulo- 
kira 

miikns;  mOki's;  (h)  mO- 
k(i  sill 

K. 

qnaldn 

moi 

fii/lkiisirii ;  mdksnn 

L. 

tuni ;  (pi.)  ntonWnt 

f...-,(j///;  .st/i.itlqat/1.1 

tiud'/isnn  ;  tunutfd(/snn  ; 
luwdksiin 

4. 

M. 

mntmiu 

iih, 

niii^nii 

N. 

mitsiu/i. ;  (It)  mi^iuh 

■liii;  (k)  alias 

ni(nu ;  (k)  nu^nu 

5. 

0. 

taki 

hdkamirf 

pit^ldken 

P. 

taops 

tuiils 

pit/.lls 

6. 

Q. 

amemtga;  (m)  amt)Lld/i.e 

idy.ot ;  ifyd)Lol ;  tme)i.os 
(m)  sia/.os 

imiktfif  (m)  igiti; ;  efyd- 

R. 

lieiilf  ks:  miutsaks;  (o) 

sid/.os ;  (o)  ^ebi/LOlt ;  (p) 

elir)i.dls}i.at ;  (o)  ebikdl(/.  ; 

tehe..      j7 ;  {^)akal«iUa 

skunos 

(p)  e/>ekost 

7. 

S. 

pokla 

ku-dlak/. 

vndn,  tanon 

8. 

T. 

ku'd/kiftrtsa 

skikha 

tusina 

9. 

U. 

mumotttf 

• 
loliip 

K'f 

10. 

V. 

isak 

oi,  ui  (D) 

iri,  cit  (D) 

11. 

vv. 

kamumuaU  ;  ifut 

asu 

iami 

12. 

X. 

titl  gkatca 

put 

miii 

Y. 

inakd 

W/f 

moai 

13.  Z.    o/.tokis 


oajis 


tc(^sit 


14. 

jKi/Mi'sis 

kadifsis 

timiU/.Uam 

IS. 

alof. 

[uta 

hukf 

16. 

annua,  najas 

at^dt^on,  isdtson 

ami  pin,  mupin 

17. 

variakum 

nopulum 

nomuiium 

N  O  R  T  II  \V  E  H  T  E  H  N    A  M  E  R  I  C  A. 


577 


HOUTH.  TOMIUI,  TtlTH. 

I.  A.  {/sim/il)  (iiliMOOi  1>1.) 

B.  /.okivail^iuile ,•  wiinayu     pili;t^l/.ll^il/ltiuilui ;  (\))  /.otsiukatol/luin;     (b) 

uiilua  ;  (n)  itijimiktil        koiilc 

C,  hi  Idtom !  uinl/bt  no;  cii jii 


a,  D.    iikfil/lina 


tiat/liiiirk 


iikiiminu 


3.  v..  spaliitsin  li/.iruUk 

V.  a/ii/imiilsnii  li/iitski 

U.  II  tt^ii  tail  lain  li/iilski 

II.  si/iiiiii^iii  i  si/nmiilsin  iiiilik 

I.  kuiiiif.  t/liiliili 

J.  kuiii'i  ;  k'luoa  ;  (li)  ^d-  Ir/ii/lml/l 

in/u 

K.  kfniif.  ti/iilsi'/l 

L.  ^iiiiiithiiis ;  liitttnn 


/.nlr/.u 
•f.utlr/.it 

l»u  tits 
yinliics 

yitiia 


ti/ilsris;      imiiJiiii/iii  ;     l//(imwiii  ,•  liii;iUt 
iiini/iii 


4.  M.   hm 

N.    im  ;  (k)  lim  ;  vtn 


jtiiiii^  lit 

tiilu(^  ;  (k)  iiilei^  ;  mclai^   iliti ;  (k)  etei  ,■  tUtf 


5.  O.    sdiiit/iikij 
P.    Sim  ilk 


Pi'i 


tenif 
tiiiiif;  tttlii/. 


6.  (J.    emikitr/.dt ;  (m)  iiik^i-     nKtn/iilktmiima  ,■    (in)      l/.t/iektit( ;  {m)  l/.l/.akdl^ 
/.III;  ilf^kii^/iit  niii/ii,  '..iiii/umiil 

R.    elMiiijiit/.l ;  (\t)  eUkiis/.a    emuiniiikonuliii;  {o)flie.   t/./Uiil.i/. ;  (yi)  t/.lebrktttt 

iKinkoniivii  ;  (p)  ebi- 
lKiii/.ulkirdnulia 


7.  S. 

ntanili, 

lant 

nuiiiUi-n 

tfl 

piili ;  timli 

8.  T. 

qui 

in/i/u 

sIcUtliki 

0.  u. 

film 

jxiiii's 

tut 

10.  V. 

ail,  «i/(D) 

eliniii 

ilsiiii 

11.  w. 

<;;) 

ipili 

Usii 

12.  X. 

timpii 

akii 

tdijuii 

Y. 

liipd 

e)o 

liiiiiii 

13.  Z. 

(Mil 

niatsimsti 

oji.pikiii 

14. 

t^aiipie 

l^il^;ilpe 

IS. 

lakiini 

iiiilip 

kill 

16. 

uloijin 

anoijiii 

alolnm 

17. 

nolo 

H 


145 


ft7H 


i>  II I  r.o  i.oc.  V. 


xin'R 


I.  A. 
B. 

V. 

a.  I). 

:).  K. 
F. 

u. 

H. 

I. 

J. 

K. 

L. 

4.  M. 

N. 

ft.  O. 
P. 

(1.   Ci. 

K. 

7.  S. 

8.  T. 
0.  U. 

10.  V. 

U.  W, 

12.  X. 
Y. 


/Ofaiiia/llif ;  »lnmit\(lir    /utismr;  (\i)  iiniiif:i'iii ;  /ulnn  ;    (li)    kuiint,  (a) 
kliiii- ;   rllioat/il  kllilil  ;   kdllt 


(ikiial 


ohiiLiKi 


It/ 1/  Ink 


I  (I  I,  III!  Ill /111  in  >/. '«(/  'IH 

Ini.s/iiii;  (i\)  klitjiin  ;  (v)  JA '*(/'"• 
/i,  i.i/iii> 

t^iln/iiu  atsiiikiiil 

kiU;/)in  Knii/. 

ti,(s/iin  li'iiliu; 

/Siiji«l.i/,iiii,  (li)  Itrrjm/skii.s  >',h/i,  ''/'«/' .'  (h)  ti^rajmn  /nonml^ 

Iriiiml.iis  l.iisjiiiii  kiili/ 

ko/iDtsin-i ;  kwiiioli'in       l/lnlriiyt;  sluli^afinvnt  t^alua 


.sHii/infi^iti 
siHijintfiti ;  ilijHipiul 

siinni/iiittiii 
rini/ifain 

S/  lltll/iillllS 


liimli>h 

riill  !   (k)  I'l/O 

riiiiki  miij,' 
/luskaiiiilJi 


iil'iiit  litim 

tiiiiiin  lit ;  (k)  tiitiliillr        (■/'<(/' 


iiljiii/> 


til /ill/ 
liiiij/iii/ii 


ifinemiiikro ;  temtiik^o     rUtitk/.  ,•  eiitelok/L  ;  (m)     cmi/o;  t/id ;  (tii)  i<j/ 


iti.tmi ;  rfokip 
teMieflkso;  ttiniksn  U/nk/  ;  r/iiluk 


IIIUIIlU 

Slunk 

iiliiiltiilsok 

leiikd 

iiiiilifru 
niitsiii 


13.  Z.    nkiriis 


14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 


ajMiksam 
iyjiia 

iwii,  piheti 
niniius 


mdiiihuki 
tso/.a 

naokniiok.1 
hiikaka-iruma 

viijiiili 

kiiril 
kiilii 

okokini 


aliike 

agin,pa/.on 

napatnkonom 


(my) 
liejiitlitiik  ;  (|i)  elx/.o 

jiutnkiii,  Uintukwi 

jiiiksailiisUi 

VUlJi 

hiilsiil 

III  pi  I II 

piiiiil 

ijiutii  or  putd 

okfi  nUtsu 

noun  pi 
Ulik 

aniiiti,  man 
nama 


NOIIT  II  \\  KNI"  KIIN    A  M  Kill  »' A. 


ftTII 


I,  A. 
B. 

C. 

«.  I), 
a,  K. 

F. 
G. 

II. 

I. 

J. 

K. 

I-. 

4.  M. 

N. 

s.  o. 
.  I*. 

fl.  (i. 

R. 


III;  iny  —  n/ii;  thy  —  n/ii  (r/iiki) 

f.olun;  i/ii  l/.lii/n/iiliiiii ;    (li)  />«.     /iKiisiilUi)t/e ,•  (!>)  ^(i/ro 


/.iiiihini 
^/iitiii  iir 


rkilililiok  ;  klfltiiii 

iiMjiaii 


III  f  nil  iilal  la/iiUnktl 

krlii;  ;  kittii;  ;  (n)  kclif      nlnaiikniiiiksl ;  ki/i/. 

itiiitki.1t  itiiiKikitt 

kiili/  kiilif. 

t<,ii/ii';  ti;»liii; 

^iHiiiinlr  sil/iiiii//its,  si/ini/iinliiitii    tinia/iili; ;  /m/iiiitr 

lii/iiiiika;  stitiika               /n/iiniku  ;  stulikn               iiiijiiiinkii  ;  slnliLa 

triiliia  ktikdlmt^tu                       y'vi'j,* 


/.  'l/kiiinikst 

Ln/knuiikit 

Liin/kninikH 

lsn//iiiiikal 

i/n/i/rii 


I /III/);  (k)  iijiiiji ;  iit/.lii     r/Jii/i 


'J"l' 
laj'iiitnki 


fii.ia 

itsis  !  (k)  am  ;  iisii 

siik.i 


lii.iiikri ;  (m)  it/./kiii;iii     tiiiitrkri;  (m)  it/.lkiii'iii     iil/nnie  ;  (m) /.o/.u-a/tifi- 

iiiii/it 


tehfksi^ii ;  teiiukio ;  (o)    teliiksiga 
lrlnki;ra 


idiikira 
kuol/l 
kojKi 
(l/.diik  (D) 

a 

nut^/t 
mai 

ul^istris 

kakiitsiduk 


7. 

,s. 

iliiktia 

8. 

T. 

0. 

II. 

nii/i 

lU. 

V. 

ii/ikii 

11. 

W. 

1/ 

12. 

X. 

Y. 

imui  or  mai 

13. 

Z. 

Illrisl^lS 

14. 

IS. 

akiie 

le. 

(iiiiun 

n. 

iiutiikalom 

t/lltit/M>/.otitvk  I  (p)  lelh- 
1/ 1/  wale 

miinHii 

kilii 

stiiks 

era/i.a 

ililsd 

imi^ilu 

okiilp^' 
t^alf-iit^i 


wut^kvt 


580 


V  II I  L  O  L  O  G  Y. 


1.  A. 
B. 

C. 

2.  D. 


kiit^iii  (o^a^/iiti,  pi.)  (ofrt) 

/.OHUstea;    (b)  onaste ;     )i.O(jiva\rt/.a ;  {h)stsdtc;     /.i.u/.dstlsukai,  tiukat/. 
(n)  siinvsie  (n)  sts(tf.a 


3.  E.  suwanijf.u 

F.  skailtiitj^i ;  (d)  skailtiki  ; 

skailtnku 

G.  skiiilliki 
H.  skdi/likn 

!.  ts(tUil-f.-tulumi/.o 

i.  naiits 

K.  niiwit/ltse 

L.  Uisiwst iiriit  ;  titsiws 

4.  M.  siliikt ;  tsiUiknt 

N.  uwiiiak^iir 

5.  O.  ^iliimiJi^ 
P.  pitf.Uin 

6.  Q.  cmilf.lqa;  (m)  wefyut/.lk 
R.  eUt/.l.ii  ;  (p)  rltit^lka 


sqmi  /.  Im^in 

stsixH'in  ;  (e)  tsuo/.iii  stjiiHKjvi 


stsiiinin 
sUoohin 

tSlMjljf.1 

tsodt/.l 


slsmhiii 
tii'i^in 

tsitjorn  III  ;  sUikg 
Isol/.t ;  slnld^in 


t/.U^On,i^isnns;  ntsakfl/.l  iii/ci^ans;  siinakei^in 


viiiii 

vo/.u  ;  (k)  M'n/d 

maiiwut 
tiuiiiit 


(i^iiu 

u-o/d ;  (k)  waj'.d 

tic; 
tailaks 


7.  S.    lukajiia 

8.  T. 
0.  U. 

10.  V. 

11.  W,  /itiii/,i/sf 


teUijoft ;  emekujut ;  (m)     luiiup^  ;     (m)    idil/.dp^  ; 

t/.//Mkwait ;  ektcait  '/'/■"' f 

tidirr;  {»)  tc/jediiue;  (p)     ty-lekhtijis  ;  (o)  tumliai})^  ; 
(P) '/'"*<■« 


chikwuit 
jmlouin,  al&tei 
sid 
tsoks 

luilmcai,  hatif;  (D) 
atctcird 


2>uiif 

JHl/S 

aktces 
/siko 


12.  X. 
Y. 

13.  Z. 

14. 
15. 
10. 
17. 


rildlilitr 
ill  ill  ill 


yun 

omakiioki 

t/liii;li^ina 
htncul 
anif,  nentv 
net 


iiamjMi 
kiiki 


koio 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


581 


1.  A. 
B. 


8.  D. 

3.  E. 
F. 
G. 
H. 
I. 
J. 
K. 
L. 

4.  M. 

N. 


•nUM,  ■ONE.  IIIART. 

bilsi  {ogee) 

)ioa/.dt/^ltgane ,-  nukat/.    /.otsrlne ;  (h)  t^dmu^ho ;  )i.ot/.lnainuksate,-  (h)stsiie 

(a)  tart  ne 

^/.Hsiine  (Hani;  kog  ^'{i 

aket)i.lui 

kwokioOwilf.1  jmsimin 

istiimpn  ;  (e)  .shim/.iii      sts/t?n  ;  st6m;  (e)  stsam  sjioiis  ;  spuiis 

filamiiiin  !<tdm  spiiii.i 

stsofswihin  (pi.)  ^tsdm  skait ;  stt;iipd6s 

s(pra/.6noi.i;  siju-filwohuti^  lecq  skifdlnm 

hi/.aii.i/(.in ;  imptii^iii        ^dirir  skifdlum 

niisqakitsii^ifu  tsuwela,  tsmrila  Hyinokds ;  tihikds 

a/.u<atdlam  pipii,  P'Pi'  tiniimi 

no/.d  ;     (k)   way.atyi.ld.    pijx;  ;  (k)  pij)^-  ;  </ofyl  timiiih  ;  (k)  Wmud 


5.  O. 
P. 

6.  Q. 
R. 

7.  S. 

8.  T. 

9.  U. 
10.  V. 


tyla  ;  watikaivds 

liyin/du 
lylakywailotyt 

tiimept; ;  iililydjn' 
tylekhtSps 

jmitf 


kojM 


pdpat 
piipt 


tanu.lp 


ilimp 


.  I 


(■70/50  ;  (m)  ymjirdl<;o        c/viiaii ;  (m)  gicdmu nity.l 
iaotso ;  (p)  tukotso  tbcUuan ;  (p)  ebebayU 


potii 
i/trai 
kago 
ak 


jmmhuupin 
hidltsu 
stainas 
hiwasori 


11.  W. 

12.  X. 
Y. 


tsiko 
kuki 


dlat 

aoho 


etainag 

piv 

pitee 


13.  Z. 


oskitsi 


14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 


papdVg 


Mlom 
aent,  ean 
nohuksen 
146 


teteitgdn 
iriski 
ohiiry,  sun 


*i> 


582 


PHILOLOGY. 


■LOOD. 

town;   VII.I.AUE. 

ciiiEr, 

1.  A.    skiii  (sko) 

mii'iti  (meutee) 

B.    tatjil;  (b)oUlle 

(b)  kwunhtiHt/Lkot 

k^iskai;   (b)  skuske ;   (a) 

koske 

C.    fUiU 

mamdsan ;  t/.laiie 

/rtj/c 

2.  D.    odiiiimo 

akikluis 

nasoiikin 

a.  h.    metiqra 

kdkiipe ;  kokpe 

F.    sane/Loui;  sanapil. 

(<=) 

idpirkpt ;  satsqaiif 

iUini/.om ;  (c)  iliimi]Lom 

mity.lkia 

G.    milil^ana 

ilitmi/om 

H.    mit/t./kaia 

i/iiiii/om 

\.      slii/iktcan 

ist)i.ldt/.lil 

sidiii. 

J.     skoU/.l;  sktcaUlf.1 

sUil/iluni; 

stnlUiq  ;  (xh  or  dVUs 

K.    skiraitf.1 

aiitkt-fd/. 

li/is 

L.    skiuo 

tasUirinutvin ;   nustn^i- 
iiuwun 

ta^dtsuH ;  ^atsin 

4.  M.    kikH 

piut^umokin 

mio}.iit 

N.   i/«A  ,■  (k)  tuniicdn 

ikokea ;  (k)  (/.laknit 

into/.;  (k)  mid/.;  midua/. 

5.  O.    /iKfrtf 

iatoiaij 

P.     d///p 

iaknnl 

6.  Q.    tulkdirulkt  ; 

(m)  kawtl- 

t/.lkdkamdna ;  i^tdmy. 

likit 

R.    tyilaiciilkt ; 

(p)    <;ctt;d. 

tU/.am ;  (p)  ele/.am 

t/.lkdkamdnan  ;  (f)ty.lku 

u-alkt 

kabdna 

7.  S.     meenu 

suihdmih 

aU^Ompaki 

8.  T.   /»«to 

itsdis 

kidwilsa 

9.  U.  iwt^te 

lake 

10.  V,    inie 

awalikiiea 

11.  W.  n//a/t" 

winiaki 

U'ihelii 

12.  X.    pdape 

kiiti 

taiira 

Y.     «/)»! 

nosiu-e 

jiunuiniMmicit/.  (our 

elder  brother) 


13.  Z. 


aketiipiu-a 


14.  l/M/ldwdkabas 

15.  kil^o 

16.  a/oin 

17.  nod 


t^almta 
hoipiis 

toviir,  tomi&r 
not 


t 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


583 


WARRIOR,  rRIXNU.  II0U9I. 

1.  A.  k>i^  (W^O 

B.  {h)  /iocitseite;  (a)  Itika-    tf.Uu)i ;  nsone-kanane        kdntu/.;  {h)k6ta/ 

tntkcisse 

C.  t/.fyai^ ;  ktvetayiilne  ^l/ilai ;  tqunficle  ma,  man 


2.  D.    kastsumakakdiu 


kusuo 


akit<^nt/ilanum,akit/.lanis 


3.  E.    /.ukistpJlsa  nwjiiai  tf;itu/. 

F.  kiUespMs,-  likilikil;  {c)  islsiikai ;  intimltn ;  ti-  Isilii/. ;  suidt/.l/.u 

ilikUukU  vuilis 

G.  Ia.li;iliti;U  istim  tsatii/. 
H.  nqrii^iliwd^  »S""t"  (^)  stiilM 
I.     tiisiela/.  /i.at/.UumUsin  ulutf.1 

J.     iiuUnut  to/.iis  nappit^u;  f.a^ 

K.    y.cU/.likwu II  t.o/.us;  aiyalittoui  /.a/. 

L.    Ic/.a/.u ;  nasia/.a/.(i  nikasty.ldtana ;  Ui^kds  hisneiidwin;  nasinendifin 

4.  M.   piwapsidunat ;  hawdlii-  ^ih-liira  i/iit 
N.   pUf.liauif.t/.lam ;  {V)  t^d-  ialipt ;  (V.)  sid^.tumnd  init 

tawe 


\ 


5.  O. 
P. 

lotiwa 
kiliikulai 

enldjxrit 

hclim 

6.  (1. 
R. 

ito/Licedl 
at-f.ldkauka%i 

tudHa/.n 

tkurit/.le;  itukw6ty.le 
tdoty.1;  (p)  t/.lkwtlt!i.le 

7.  S. 

t^cl/i.lidqa 

tankwu 

hdmmeih  ( —  firo) 

8.  T. 

sinuki7id/.ait 

tsitsaiskia 

9.  U. 

sawdlinds 

latsOg 

10.  V, 

6ma 

11.  VV 

iUiyi 

tokdm 

tiluts 

12.  X. 
Y. 

top 
naini 

pdoi 
itced 

uinkdn 
notti 

13.  Z. 

konatdpasu 

nit6katvau 

ndpiicis 

14. 
16. 
16. 
IT. 

mhiifis 
knitoya 
kit^,  kin 
niH 

1 ' 

.1-  ' 

I 


584 

PHILOLOGY. 

■rrTLE. 

■ow. 

Amiow. 

1.  A. 

Ofa 

{allung) 

(kd) 

B. 

(b)  UukundUkas 

Mty-Uohua;  (h)  tstftlte  ,• 
(q)  sajHimDne 

suptimOn;  tu/i.Ud)rice  (1) 

C. 

ncfylmioyia ;  tutt/.lme- 
/.disa 

aU/.i;  tit/.lki 

a}i.irs 

a.  D. 

eitikimi 

lawo ;  tavois 

dka 

3.  E. 

^ibukwan 

tpkurnnk 

(it(;ikirel 

F. 

ty^lti^cep  ;  (d)  tyilkeep 

Iskuent^;  fsktcint^;  (e) 
tpikwitiik 

tupumin  ;  (e)  tapmin 

G. 

t)i./ti;ip 

alsikin 

tdpumin 

H. 

tj^lkdp 

halsikin 

tsqailin 

I. 

siiil/./t 

tfstin 

J. 

tsfi  ktsnktn 

takvdt/./en 

qotaiks 

K. 

Udkslnkfin 

stirr/ii  ;  stiqa 

sit/.l 

L. 

sqiuin  ;  wftitskaiisin 

f/i.lii/.ielsan  ;  t/i.laj^il^in 

(/.Ittlotsi,-  ulatse 

4.  M. 

hikai 

tinu'nii 

tsaj) 

N. 

tkusci  ;  (k)  qapot)t.l 

tuinhif^  ;  (k)  tuinpa^ 

wajLandtat;    (k)   kaiasti 
widlpas 

5.  O. 

t/./ipanif 

hifoit 

laJjL 

P. 

idqiit ;  tigai 

ifdt/.lak 

wai^l 

6.  Q. 

trtcat 

at/.ld/t.et 

tkdmatgy. 

R. 

knlk6t/.leU  ,■  (p)  akaiko- 

opI/Jcke  ;  optyJike  ;  (o) 

tkaUiitdnam;  (o)6bdU-f.r 

tf.lcle 

o/.Ui/.aitk;  {f)  at/i.d/.ai 

(p)  tkdboU 

7.  S. 

ateieati 

opSsqe;  opofqa 

eniik 

8.  T. 

ooia 

mokwaUvm 

tsitsikia 

0.  U. 

poko 

taif 

kais 

10.  V. 

iapoko 

imakidi,  ahan  (D) 

dkidi 

11.  w. 

papiika 

intes 

legtsik 

12.  X. 

uilua 

tUga 

uiuna 

Y. 

ttitld 

ati 

pogos 

13.  Z. 

hinka 

ndmai 

dpsu 

14. 

opdiiak 

mosWtf 

tsejudtf 

la. 

kono 

lata 

16. 

pait/Loar,  paito/. 

tguar,  nikun 

17. 

kutupg 

hul 

NORTHWESTKRN   AMERICA. 


586 


AXC;   HATCHIT.  KNIFX. 

1.  A.  {(Iiafhill)  iti^  (glestay) 

B.  katUun ;  {h)  kusity-lmaiu  tiyi.e ;  {h)  t^ulio 

C.  senatl ;  se/.utl  natlmi 


2.  D.    dkotatf.1 


akutsdmat/.! 


3.  E. 
F. 


G. 

H. 

I. 

J. 

K. 

L. 


4.  M. 

N. 

5.  O. 
P. 

6.  Q. 
R. 

7.  S. 

8.  T. 
0.  U. 

10.  V. 

11.  W. 

12.  X. 
Y. 

13.  Z. 

14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 


OtNOi;   BOAT. 

tsi;  (wooden)  Uintti 
tse  or  isei 

iuksdmit 
tsahiwil/.l 


t/.lumtn  /.ut/.lakst 

^ilmen ;   giliimin ;   (e)  nint^amun ;  (e)  ninku-  t/.lia  or  t/-liye  (bark); 

/.ilmin  ,        min  stil/.lam  (wood);  (e) 

iitiit/.l<ini 

^Alumin  tvuhmlem  tiida 

ijawisqan  nii/nmirn  sWI/.lam 

ijamiUn  snot/  ,■  t/.lqaf.an  t/lui 

(/.luail^eptir  /.oaif/^l  net/ 1;  givityit 

qtlsln,  uvqOstin  kuii/.iimun  uii/.l 

t/ilakutstun ;  naqulsten  Ui)i.au)l/.l ;      ta/.6ktun  ;  alsdLit/.l ;  tsats(ikit/.l 


vauvidna^  vals,  n-dlits 

watsokte ;  (\<.)qdistUH       y.d}iitf.lmi 


yepgoking 
iutf.ludkains 


fckt 
(/.Ikoinla 


qOeslirn  ,  qatveqe 

ekahil/Jeba  ;  (p)  ekdstan  oputsdy. ;  akewek/iai 


qOeftan 

pd/.tiu 

lakotkig 

aniakidi 

glakolku 

huhiihtcan 
wiiwidni 

kuksdkin 

isiak 


hckcmistdh 

kidi 

teate 

atsirai 

■  gdti/. 

htvihi 
u'ihi 

istodn 

kakaiak 

147 


ling;  liec; 

u-dsus  ;  (k)  wdsas 

t/.ldap 
t/.lap 

ekduim 

ekditem  ;  ekabolelml 

humpo,  iMmpau 

hoi 

wonlg 

ikhiti 

idpi 

gake 
saki 

a)i.sdts 

t(^aptits 
sukd 

traiH/.e,  nikin 
u-a/.et 


686 


PHILOLOGY. 


HHOKS, 

pire. 

TO»ACOO. 

. 

1. 

A. 
B. 

C. 

keskiit 

kv ;  (b)  milsiai 

f.e  ;  t/.lsus 

tekafsi  (rhkdtesai/) 
U'ck(ifS(UsiUiiva  ;  (b)  tsa- 

jiiiki'S 
at^e ;  titled, 

0 

lekii  (tilled) 
Ittt^dne 

sel/.lii> 

2. 

D. 

t/i./u>ii.i 

kits  or  kos 

iiikait 

3. 

E. 
F. 

ijaipii,     yaivpii ;     (c) 

suiivmttiiy.ulen ;     si/ii- 
m<ln/.i/k'H,   (o)  Sinn, 
min/.ulan 

sumanif. 
siimanyLU  ; 

(e)  samifi/.u 

G. 

H. 

1. 

J. 

K. 

L. 

sqair^ia 

srjiiidhin 

id/^iii 

nui^imisfitun ;    tyjatm- 
Indian,  tuili^atcn 

si>iimc)ii/.itn 

f;hit/ill<it/din 

tridZ/./u 

kou.i(/o)(.ut 

takulh 

■nt^iisltol-f.klewin 

sumrle/.u 

^cindii)i.u 

siiidiliij 

sl/t.lusoqwa 

kua/emot/.lin 

sii ji^diit/.lil ;  tsot./(.lit)t.l 

4. 

M. 

N. 

ildpkiit 
tj^lii/dm 

kelemut,  kdlamet 
t^eldmat ;  (k)  ti^aldmat 

toll  or  to]f. 

to/  ;  (k)  tdwa/i. 

5. 

O. 
P. 

tdily.lo 
j)ii/kdii(,- 

iptny.ldn^ 
we/iukf ;  iveabikf 

han^ 
fiimip 

6. 

Q. 
R. 

tkail/!jja 
tuk(tit/M)a 

ka/dmut 

Ircldinul ;  (p)  akaldba 

kainiit/.l 

kaiiiot/.l;  (j[>)kus/idloMttrk 

7. 

S. 

iilumof,  alumauf 

anl ;  utiimpg  (?) 

kamiit/.l 

8. 

T. 

skanaiksealiusta 

t/.lku!d7ie 

kimisa 

9. 

U. 

u'akipia 

paks                      . 

katskal 

. 

10. 

V. 

dlsn/.,  luUsayi  (D) 

?iopiri 

hopiriki. 

11. 

W 

kelala 

skot 

up 

• 

12. 

X. 
Y. 

jiatsa 
mokd 

piiu 
toi^a 

paynii 

jmmii  oT  pahtnuh 

13. 

Z. 

atsikin 

u/.ku-enimdn 

pastdkan 

14. 
15. 
16. 
IT. 

aiUs-tsntf.liak 

koijiak^ak 
nuhukop 

koifd 
piuot 

NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


597 


1.  A. 
B. 
C. 


9Kr;    IIRAVIN. 


2.  D.    nkit/Jmoiat 


flUN.  MfXlN, 

fart  (sd)  tsa  (^/ido/^KSsd) 

taOse;  [h)  ii;laf.alaf.a  Uifise 

nataiiilc ;  natdnika  ti^itfJmoiat-natdtiik 


8.  E. 
F. 


G. 

H. 

I. 

J. 

K. 

L. 


4.  M. 

N. 

6.  O. 
P. 

6.  Q. 
U. 

7.  S. 

8.  T. 
0.  U. 

10.  V. 

11.  W. 

12.  X. 
Y. 

13.  Z. 

14. 
15, 
16. 
17. 


sl/.lnujtil  skicotinilis  ma/ru 

stgitgnmaskait;  it(^it^u-     sjimjniif ;  splikane;  (e)  (c)  skokoits-spnqanc ;    (d) 

me2>!  (c)skikumasqiit       y,aiut/.lna^  sotjdtim;  (e)  skoku'oats- 

/.niHt/./na/. 

sti/^imdskftit  ut/.l(ldratiiqi  ul/Zi/druiiiiji 

qv inomldsqut  qo^rrm,  kotisum  siiin/dam 

t/.twinty.l  st/.liikwalum 

sqdtt/l  skiviUns  tiniiltm 

l/.ltd/a/.u  t/Jt>(/iral/.l  t/./oijini//.l 

tasqfi /.ir n  f    tjiltdtije}.!!  ;     taldn/.liin,  }na)(.ai  ;  Jia-  tuqit^dlun  ;  kwo^ilan 

iilldt^k  tu/.lliin 


lidikKt  luif/jmnia  higamtuks 

y^ii/ji'/ (clouds);  (k)sKdtof  an 


ndjS  laicaia  ;  tipjiap 
tajdnup;  hucilp 

koi,a/. 
kosa/. 

uniidnk 

laa 

%rfikwi 

useheld 

tiikiim 
piitSskia 

kirseistsOkHt 

(/./eseokak 


was 
kdtji.l<t/. 


siktii/pama-hiiamtuks 
a//.ui/. 

httt/lldp 
hutU/.l 

ukty.li)  men  ;  ukukt/./iimi:/i 


6dt^lay ;  (p)  akdt]f.af.        6kui/.lamen  ;  (p)  akdyim 
Ampin  n;  OmpiOn  tttap ;  utop 


jritskom 

6/.on 

sdpas 

uvkdiikof 

tsoare 

ap/.dtsu 

ttul 

tsiil 

tava  or  talia 

viiiyd 

tavd  or  tuud  or  taM 

mit^/td 

7iaU>sit 

kokwina  tdsin 

oput}.lak 

ndakeak 

hi 

piilitluk 

tdmct 

nuldr 

temet 

moil 

588 


PHILOLOGY. 


1 

A. 

(f /mot,  pi.) 

(janeiu) 

{al^heese) 

B. 

y^aiU/lkdnte 

kleakut !  qUakdte 

C. 

)idllatfe 

^aiillli ;  yfttf.lf.A 

/.aUi;  kliak 

2 

D. 

nkit/.ltio/ios 

kaliiiiuiiU  ;  kiokieit 

tfit/Llmuit 

3 

E. 

siiko^int 

jHi/idiiif. 

jnutfitfdi 

F. 

kiikiisvm;  (A) skukiiMvnt  s/.alf.iilt 

sqoijofts,  skitkw&its 

O. 

slikilsi-f.ontsut 

sitiikiit 

tiiiiikiriits 

M. 

jiiii/jiiKjuiduit 

s-f.dl/tilt 

gtsiHH 

I. 

»^(IJ«.V 

s/i.la/.el 

tr.hif. 

.1. 

•sy.  iiiik/  iia 

SljMI/.l 

stii/i/oils  ;  S])dtak/.o 

K, 

ktisc ;  l/Mitpiis 

si/iiiij.  ;  sije/. 

kirairi/ 

L. 

wr/i.i/Luii/.ia,  nt^snkr 

hfi  n  11  iriis  ;  hatiau-O  s 

hiiltcl;  hantol 

4. 

M. 

/.(lit  mi  II 

hald/.p 

sikait ;  sikit 

N. 

f.aslu  ;  (k)  ifL(U}.lu 

pdtiiic ;     (k)    lyilikwe ; 
//./kici 

^tsdt ;  {y)tsat;  sdtpa 

5. 

O. 

t/ht/lii 

etrein 

fialp 

P. 

kiiki 

wasnd  ;  t/.ldka 

iskdi;  miika 

6. 

Q. 

lf.liie/.d  llama 

inlfdkliy;  (m)  it^okdidi/. 

aiikdp  ;  (m)  /.dbiy. 

R. 

ijekaiiiip;  (\t)  eyekdnap- 
p!)/.ka 

ctsoktet ;  ekelsokte 

nojMimm ;  (p)  /.api^i 

7. 

S. 

atiiininank 

(1  iiipilt  n  ;  Ampin  n 

atili^ikim 

8. 

T. 

t/lalt 

kaehe 

9. 

U. 

liol 

Piiii 

10. 

V. 

ap/.a 

11. 

vv. 

tsnmi/. 

nuUijutsi 

maliiktsa 

12. 

X. 

piitsihwa 

ta^On 

tukwOn  ottuguOH 

Y. 

piUuzitva 

taaino 

tokdtio 

13. 

Z. 

kiikatoiiu 

kifestsakH 

kokoi 

14. 

t/./isiakakak,  tastltfvtfa 

atf-eti^idak,  huntOla 

18. 

hiti( 

hi 

ivaJai/iita 

16. 

smit 

oroga 

yaukel 

17. 

siiol 

feme 

tiikmut 

NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


589 


UOMT, 

DAHKNKtll. 

■ORNINO. 

1.  A. 
B. 
C. 

hiit/iUn 

Ud/iolkus 

[punetd) 
kaimcvf. ;  iatca/. 
amdntii ;  /.asmut/.ltan 

a.  D. 

t^itf.lmuiatni 

wil/.li4am 

3.  E. 
F. 

0. 
H. 

J. 
K. 
L. 

ku/pa/.iduit 

o/.fll 
piiahu 

tsioji.wat/.l 
ske/.eican 
hirntsihdk,  nefktiiio 

/.iitlnwan 
ilf&m;     rUfumpil/iba;    sqtrikiiite ;  t/.lkokwist 

(e)  qem 
(Ufiim                                   Idiifo 
iqftm                                 ikuku-dst 

t^.l(y/.lpa 
pdtak'f.o                             tifJuii/M-ilyl 
squiy^nltun  ;  skwimwan  kin/nio/.u 
kaiolsiiia                             himto/idttrg  ;  ntonuts 

4.  M. 

N. 

lakaiiit 
la^aief.in 

gdktit 
itsdt 

nidiin;  niaimi 
iqxvipa ;   (k)    maitski; 
/.aiai/. 

5.  0. 
P. 

notawdnm 

(ilimlij/k 

letji./piota 
pdkasl 

6.  Q. 
R. 

ua/. ;  (p)  ua^ef. 

xoponam 

kairil/. ;  (tn)  kailu/. 
kaue/. 

7.  S. 

hdlultn 

8.  T. 

kahinnk 

0.  U. 

10.  V. 

n.  w 

.  wimikaiki 

intmmelta 

matiktsa 

12.  X. 
Y. 

kutduifo 

tokdno 

itgukii 
awdmiidgii 

13.  Z. 

pi;kindtsi 

apnakus 

w 


14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 


148 


temek 


.t:W 


090 


Pll  I  I.O  l,0(i  Y. 


1.  A. 

C.  /.n'ij/iuaa 

'■i.  D.  irct/i.lkamiiit 

3.  K.  /.astikoktraiikii 

F.  skiiikiUf     t^tlu/. !     (e) 

kiiksh 

G.  piiliik 

H.  halfttf.1 !  piitdkai.i 

I.  U«itk(ip 

i.  oliis 

K.  skunsdwiin 

L.  >itii/t/limn/.ii ;  hnnidi- 
kil/.l 

4.  M.  kii/ihrit ;  kii/rwit 
\.  iji/i/airit 


J).  O,  irn/iiia 

P.  mii'iimp 

0.  (i.  /(itrfska;  (m) /fi/y«j7t'/. 

I{.  tS(Jios!r ;    tsitiostc  ,■     (p) 

7.  S.  //«//, 

8.  T.  kuits/.a 
0.  U. 

10.  V. 

11.  W.  wiiitsrimeha 

12.  X.  viii^ipar 
Y.  inmtiia 

13.  Z.  ti^ulakui 

14.  atpt(^it/.l 
15. 

16. 
17. 


■rniNu. 


•UHHn, 

Aijwr?  ,•  /«(>)<<<  (past) 


^•ikiipn/s  skiilkiilltim 

skt piilsti  ot  skarpvtsa        siUiiitfJke  ;  (c)  quijuina 


silnkiijis 

piiiiik//i'is 

/liiii/ii/K)/ 

pniU/ldkiiin 

t/.liikiiiii. 


idliislk 

paatxiii/oti 

I'llliilllh 

jMiiikteum  ;  panmmtUui 

pmifinfitylini 


trnira/p 
inncii/iiii 


taiiim  ;  hititm 
tii/Cim ;  Ilium;  (litiin  , 
(k)  /.mam 


^iKitoliniiilntiy ;  kititim     ^fjiiiilim 
tahink  wiisam 

kawn/riniti)/  V^akteai ;  tsngwaii/. 

tsiiipai;  {p)kau-a/.tfmtek  tsdkoie;  (p)  t^dkwai/^ 


niiiiialliiit 


kattui 


yivdno  or  yibdno 


tf.lopeil/.a(Uik 


ni^ndlkiit,  nirkini 

jmeskomiskia 

2)uld 

atdhi 

dliii 

tdlsu 

tazd  ;  miiiju 

atii/ii 

t/hjifi/^/.a 

tl'd/dllllu 

ororine 
vdnat 


r 


[4      ^ 


N  ()  11  'I'  II  W  K  a  T  K  R  N    AMERICA. 


091 


AIJTUHS. 

WINri!«. 

WIND. 

1.  A. 

tiikele ;  Uikelii 

yiili;  /.lUa 

B. 

tfitii/iitt ;  f.lokwti 

■f-mtiil 

ndiUehi ;  naslsie 

C. 

ydiiioydl/au 

/.nitir,  f.intiU 

t^i ;  mi^i^e 

2.  D. 


a/.kdmi 


3.  K.    l/.fiMt/itstiiH  i;iistikii 

F.    .«/;■<'<•«  ;   ti;h'i  ;   (e)  qiuti  sitsltili-i ;  (o)  fintakili/i.  stindimil ;  (o)  niu-il 

or  5iy<i(i( 

(!.    sliji'i'U  sil.sitiikit  ititiiwut 

11,   pas/i)mp  puiiii,lkica  ^ii^iimiii;; ;  it/.lapul/.tkun 

I.      pttiitrhnl  jhUilas  ^i/oiii 

J.     paniiloirdiiii/.  ;  puitiilo.  /i<iiiM>t(i!(^i  tt/.hyf. 

A'"""/ 

K.    pa iirii/ soman  jhuUo/os  s/.ii/.  or  s/.o/. 

L.    kisldo-kislwjd! /loniikaln  Immotut^i,  liansdtt/t^i  sigo ;  pgo;  jikU 


4.  M, 

N. 

5.  O. 
P. 

6.  Q. 
K. 


spam  ;  (k)  tidm 

lug 
naiump 


em  III ; 

anim 

dim  III 

;  (k)  dnm 

wU 

P 

hdlia 

/.lilt  ;  (k)  kiOt 

hiinlil/.p 
hdif.lkiii^p 


t^dmal/.Hy  t^ai^riln/Jy.U-f!.  ik/Mi 

tsdbatf.1;  (p)  t^dbalji.li/L     tsa/.ri/itkt/.le;  {p)tia/.ri.     its/.d^;  (p)  j*/d/a 
luklif. 


7.  S. 

8.  T. 
0.  U. 

10.  V. 

11.  w. 

12.  X. 
Y. 


qop 


nvama/t. 


kompios; 

knmpiaus 

airiip ;  yanan 

gu-ut-tahau 

fiurl 

Idllum 

slaifis 

xcakvi 

aska 

astsiii 

wehiimd 

tumit 

Ji/trtr 

tOIIIll 

hikicd 

13.  Z. 


u-ukici 


sapiu 


14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 


kait/.l/.at/.l 


ifdlasilumka 
oti^oli-ine 
sou  out 


vciiksean 
un/tilieua 
ahikaiii,  dlidken 
hiigd 


692 


P  in  I,  O  I,  O  G  Y. 


TMUNDKR. 

I.KIIITNINO, 

B«M 

1 

A. 

Mtnik 

(nininn) 

B. 

tfiilHitika 

f/Mtif.vii/ilsii 

tiiitkay. ;  viilatilkailt 

C. 

rtiii ;  Ullne 

nifgiii-t/iikn^ ;  /.wapa 

natfthika ;  /.Iff  A 

•i 

D. 

iniwkokinitf.1 

3. 

K. 

tfiulf^ieulaktonm 

lf.Uakstiim 

kliikitnm  ;  Uiltualurint 

F. 

tltilliiliium ;  ((I) 

stiirln- 

skumkiimfiitiin 

slri/irh   or   iteipdit ;    (p) 

niiim;  (o)  atsiiijntsdtjam 

xinit 

G. 

.itnrtnrtem 

t$Utt/l/ll 

tf/i>piit 

H. 

^tapnm 

fiiiiiiiiiiiifum 

slit  II 

I. 

/.iri'ktratle 

.v/ii/nm 

J. 

s/iini.i 

.il^ii/mn 

slij/.n  or  tliiltlii 

K. 

sft>t/u 

XtlM/ll 

sDkini 

L. 

ttilttlfl-f.<in  ;  nnf.iy.fino 

l/.lnt.iinrvl,  tfliilsualo 

l/liisihil/l 

4. 

M. 

hiiiimAt 

ilkiisniohta 

uiikiil ;  Vftikel 

N. 

iiairinat/.ltt 

(k)  nliii;  nnmra 

f/^iiiiilif;a;  (k)  td/.lo/. 

ft. 

O. 

tiijtiiliiliile^in 

piikliiirii/lig 

ti^lkilflmiliij 

P. 

timinii 

liil/llUkoit 

kiiaiiuost ;  kiuua^m 

6. 

Q. 

kanawdk^dmaf; 

(m)  ^-(j. 

U'dtol/1.1 

iikilf.lli 

R. 

rkiinnirakioha 

rkelikst 

»ey.lf.ttt^st ;  ntukwitflte 

7. 

S. 

fimjuikwi 

a  mpiihri 

iikini 

8. 

T. 

(/.lllllOS 

0. 

V. 

kiitot^ns 

10. 

V. 

utiik 

11. 

w. 

til 

valah  mlsi 

rmearttd 

13. 

X. 

tiinuint 

pamtkii^ii 

utrfi  r 

Y. 

iiinidiia 

atsmriziaho 

tomoa 

13.  Z. 


iota 


14. 
IS. 
16. 
17. 


tutatf 


nf/tikljd(lakifidtfl 


bU/.ldad 
valtiiipa 
aku-dkit,  ^rakoro 
ku-asi 


■   il 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


503 


1.  A. 

n. 
c. 


•Nnw, 

jriVi  (yiilh) 

yay.> !  i<^/.u$ 
tat/./itjil/i.l !  ilia 


3.  I).    n/it/i./u 


8.  K. 

K. 

O. 

H. 

I. 

J. 

K. 

L. 


HAM.. 

tivUin 

vnlduna ;  ituoie,  i/u 


pioh/in  I  kijiinunui 


mni/ii 

snmai./vot ;  stimuptp  ,■     mime  /    hii.ii/iim  ;    (c) 
((>)  .somakteiikwu  sl.iitsitsi/iim 


smu/ol 

^tnuijiil 

mtu/o 

S/./UIJII 

sjt.Mi/iru 
t]i./asij'>  nil  n 


latiaitusa 
tsutnluia 

t/.lff.inliif.$ 
t}.lasti;<it ;  t/.luiv6//. 

tiimiil ;  tdmitil 


4.  M,    niAka ;  minku 

N.  piiui !  (k) ;»«'  .•  tuanaia   tomyu ;  (k)  tumku-ikwi 


riRi. 
kirini  (knne) 
t/i/kiitie ;  /-tdnt 
/.OD,  /Wtif/ 

akinakdko 

ti'rkuii  I  Mkiru 

(c.)  .in/^itstn ;  (d)  sure- 

ji^i/u,  (e)  a»riiiljxi 
slkiidi/tikop 
^ti'iutkiip 
hilt 

ml)  t^iip 
mok.iip 
tf.ltisf.on,  IflasiMjua 

dla 

ilukfja 


6.  O. 
P. 

6.  tl. 
R. 

7.  8. 

8.  T. 

9.  U. 

10.  V. 

U.  W. 

12.  X. 
Y. 


ptigini 

p(Uf.liwd>  ;  patliwds 


tfhitkd  !  (m)  i/f./tikd        mUaojitsop ;   (m)   atsa. 
pvtsop 


tflkdpa;  (p)  tf/tukd 

nukptik,  alupaik 

kimis 

kuis 

ijae 

ti 

niuiHu-i 
uiudici 


13.  Z.    konis 


14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 


yamim 
yo:t,  toiit 
yuU 


tflkfikfuil !  (\)}dkolf.i 
aldiu 


tnhali 

pdiiffp 
patiuonodt 


kats6biui 


tut 

tats 

ifdtdtf.1 

o/pitski  ;  (p)  dtotfl 

hammiih  or  hdmai 

kilita 

UMs 

imi 

malts 

kuna 
kotd 

iftft 

addk 
woik 

t^duot,  Idina 
mufat 


149 


694 


PHILOLOGY. 


f     I  < 


WITEII. 

ICK. 

ukth;  land. 

1.  A. 

Ill  (too) 

ttrn  (gltiiii  or  ton) 

kiia  (otcluss) 

B. 

to 

k~wnlo;  id /.OS 

nee 

C. 

tji^o  or  to 

hwnthaij 

lidme  ;  nOe 

2.  D. 

uo6,  «i 

akouit;  dkiwit 

ainak 

3.  E. 

f;<ii)il/./i:ivu 

H"lt 

t/L/oka/ii/. 

F. 

sdiril/i/kiri  ; 

siiit^lkivi  ; 

(c)  s/.uiiimt ;  (il)  s/hj- 

slole/iu  ;  (e)  tamu/uk/ii 

(o)  siiiit/^/kifU 

lint ;  (o)  s/.iiiii mttkivir 

G. 

sikirir 

s/wliiit 

tiniiif.idlimu)!. 

H. 

^iiiiit/./kifa 

s/Liiintk 

iimauniit 

I. 

,J0 

si/a/io 

siiatiii/.tin 

J. 

kiili/ii,  ktU 

stgio 

tdmpmig 

K. 

kal 

tolotguH 

tOmtt/. 

L. 

t^taqio,  t/./aq6 

nistgCi  tut,  t/.lastgtl  t 

tau-e/. 

4.  M. 

kii^- 

tiiling 

ifiitog 

N. 

tm-'  (k)'i 

a  wag 

takauk  ;  (k)  to/. 

titgum 

5.  O. 

i^kiihii^ 

tok 

fhs 

P. 

oki»til.s 

I/l/its 

laijks 

6.  (i. 

ty.lti;okua 

kiipa ;  (m)  ikdba 

wefy  ;  iiili/. 

R. 

t/.llsok ira  ; 
Iti^iiko 

(o)    Itgfike, 

ikdpa 

elci  ;  (p)  ilcji. 

7.  S. 

maiiipifka  ; 

dmpke 

am/is 

Iiii  tuialop,  dno 

8.  T. 

ki/o 

kimsrn/iari 

miitstah 

9.  U. 

timjM 

uus 

kaela 

10.  V. 

utsa 

tdrak 

11.  vv 

,  as 

Uijats 

kill 

\i.  X. 

pa 

pahikfip 

titcip 

Y. 

pa 

]>atsi)iop 

dip 

13.  Z. 

of.ki 

kokwOtaia 

sd/.ktci 

14. 

tgdnk 

ko-f.6 

15. 

kilk 

jMloi 

y6wa 

16. 

Uir,  akuidken 

toudya 

17. 

pill 

N  ()  II  T  11  W  K  S  T  K  R  N    AMERICA. 


695 


1.  A. 
B. 

C. 


MEA. 

nn/makiit 


2.  D.    aknsuok 


RIVER. 

iikoy. 

tasike ;  mitoivdka 

/.diuf  ;  f.dniii 

akiii-iiiilok 


iJkKE. 

j)h  ijkiil ;  ( iVi  >zeii )  —  tn  ykat 

mil  iikiit 

miiijkiik 

akiiokirK  lies 


3.  E. 
F. 

G. 

II. 

1. 

J. 

K. 

L. 

4.  M. 

N. 

5.  O. 
P. 

6.  Q. 
U. 


paisilflkini  li,iiir/.  ;  riliilktl'ii  juiini/kini 

ski/jiif/i/eiiiiitrkii  ;    (o)       7i^iiilikiiii  ,■  ii^tdlk ;  (e)     sl/.//MUkwii  ;   tril/.li/iUf 


iiki/jiil/./iimitukt0i'  iii/.iilnkwii 

skcljiiitam  fikini. ;  ii/.iiiji.iU 


skiitolska 

hoiii/li; 

lii/iiitiin 

skiiiiril)i./ko 

ntsiidi^i 

itrdkiif 
atdt^ug 

yamiii-i^katni^ 


vjiiikinilkirt 
stiiliikirii 
7umil/Jti;i 
sktiril/./ko 
tiisiiliiiiri,  lus/.d/. 

pikiiii  ;  iiilii 
U'diia ;  (k)  /.atnt; 

/iipiii 
tab 

//^/ir/.oiiit ;  tcinuit;.! 


tfi  iiiat/Ll 

■iiekdii-d;  (p)  tunMtjul       ici /«(//./ ,•  (motf.l 


III  ilai. 


7.  S. 

8.  T. 
0.  U. 

10.  V. 

11.  W.  iimjiokdni 


12.  X. 
Y. 


cirijm 
piiiiiiiat^ 


13,  Z.    omay-kwiuki 


14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 


ti>jm//.l 
/ilia 


mdiilsal ;  anhwiio 

tiaiu 

kokiii 

asiirahdtta 

(ilsiiiiia 


ptojia 
anahiikiea 


nihituhta 


(poiul) ;  (e)  liijiit 
kiiilijii/ii 
liiiiijiit 

iMlllltll 

tsiilil/.t  or  Udliliye 

Isvlf. 

l/.llsaldl/.li,  tsaliU/J 

hiiciitiiiii 
Will  dm 

finj-; 
ki/aiji 

it/i.ld/a 

ikako/Ul/.  ;  (p)  il/./dla 

miimpdlde  ;  mampat/./ 


atras 

ij>)i.diia 

neu-nks 


jiikdu 
jHitsiin 

omuksikimi 


596 


PHILOLOGY. 


TALLBf. 

■■ill;  hountain. 

■•LAND. 

1.  A. 

(ihea) 

B. 

tafukilUOte 

tvtf  snstaf. 

noquaikutf. 

C. 

llomi;  nuiUlntaf 

ndnlsa;  udatsap 

nohilawa^f. ;  kiog 

8.  D. 

akUtUajLkti 

akiuotf.U 

niskakdn 

3.  B. 

^ilcatri 

t^kom 

t^isiinekivum 

F. 

etsantaqolf/LU  ; 
ItUnus 

(e)  an- 

etsimrnjwa;  yi.uts6t ;  (e) 
Ui/.  nmp 

t^isiinekwa;  (e)  kisuntkietr 

G. 

etsilaatiieis 

etsilif; 

etskclaqoilvkwa 

H. 

ai^dq 

luiiaiit 

k^iinitk 

I. 

skdtutf 

stvl^i 

J. 

sU/i.atgi 

smaanitg  ;  kais 

sputcitf 

K. 

t^lajM-lis 

smof. ;  snta/.o 

statin 

L. 

tf-lusat^h;  nift/ild;  qo- 

ty^ldastutq  ;  slutdfina 

ti^init^indks 

lokt 

4.  M. 

po^ol 

hdiUikam  ;  ma}i.fam 

(itna 

N. 

poftei;  /.awigt 
tiau  tit^am 

(k)mi. 

tdpof;  pitd/.anuk;  (k) 
nl^itdk 

umd,  imd;  (k)  umdui 

5.  O. 

panidkp 

tiit 

li^tkaili 

P. 

iakap 

yd  j/int 

6.  Q. 

iaqomel 

Ipokdyiutnaji. ;  ibdkal 

aka^etk;  {m)ag(ipt)^lf.ti)a' 
iay. 

R. 

naiaqe 

ipdk/.dl;  (/.Ipakdhma  ,• 
(p)  natspOkei/. 

tf-lof. ;  (p)  kokwfilak 

7.  S. 

tiekuxi 

amefo 

atiii/kei 

8.  T. 

ktrots 

9.  U. 

iaitia 

aicdloicirs 

10.  V. 

wdkwe 

11.  W 

ikoi 

ago 

iui^ta 

12.  X. 

pdun 

tiiidtci 

pahdrnur 

Y. 

ti)d/a 

kdiua  or  kdiba 

padiwa 

13.  Z. 

aksUskoi 

mastdki 

tntni 

14. 

ndotje 

opOt^ukt 

IS. 

tuk 

paiis 

1». 

half. 

17. 

NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


597 


■TONt. 

1.  A.    tse  (Isay) 

B.  t^ctte 

C.  seh;  se 

2.  D.   nookie 

3.  E.    j-/(i«(/ 


ndtkatve 
tlejtap;  titK^t^e 


t^UtiHt 


F.  «?<■»?,•  i;ieni( ;  (e)/i/-     kitu^t^inl;   its&ra ;  (e) 

G.  f-a/oi  ntsora 
H.  /.iit/./ot;  itf.lot  sol 

I.  tgct./.lti 

J.  sputdln ;  kail  qud-f. 

K.  tu  kalis  qtvd/. 

L.  ta^Sn^ ;  ta^en^;  t/.h^iliii^  ni^ifntj 


N.  /jjMd 

5.  O.    ri/M7 
P.    A«n< 


7.  S.  Sndi 

H.  T.  kilih 

9.  U.  Aotoi 

10.  V.  itsa 

11.  W.  wftf« 

12.  X.  timpi 
Y.  <i>t 

13.  Z.  o/^kotokia 

14.  tenctfuk 

15.  /«;»!'» 

16.  <o<a 

17.  tot 


katuiriuia^ 
katualos 

kamtipmpen 


6.  Q.    qaldmat;  utqana^  l-^lupi-f. 

R.    toAdno^s  ;  (p)  ebigdn        t^lupiy. 


kdltis 


taplalsdi 

wavi  or  waW 
piinaiiiimwaidkin 


(ikstaij) 
Uf.e 
ndtlmi 

nit/.lko 

^iihpiliildlam 

ololim  ;  idiilim  ;  (e)  xoiil- 

tpulim 
li'iiliriiliiii 
(;tej)dkin 
siiotj 
/.irait/.l 
say.ols6tf.Un 
tkulki'i  to 

kisiii 

/.a/aiuk  ;  (k)  tuks 

qaii(jauit)t.fiinik 

keweuke;  keweuqe 
ekeivek/.e 

atskwafunt 

tadtikidwhi 

mate 

atfiralii 

sat ;  uuhculim 

tumpiu 
piiitcd'if; 

mikskimi 


150 


098 


PHILOLOGY. 


mn. 

WOOD. 

LEAf. 

1.  A. 
B. 

(liiahin) 
tukHn;  tsolf. 

tsa^ 
tsuts 

iduke 

C. 

sintpmdta;  sint^o 

/.ondl^i 

,-  Mt/us 

mdsnah 

2.  D. 

tsahal/.li  akokmut/.le 

t/ldkini 

aktcat/lakupiak 

«.  E. 
F. 

G. 

H. 

I. 

J. 

K. 

L. 

ets^ita  ;  (e)  etsgiip 

etsuhnl 

^itopt ;  cUspdty^la 

iiaiitsdfjMi  ,•  nt^iirdkf 

id  milts 

t/.faasqd  ;  t/ilaiistp'si 

i^likat^dsum 

lotfwa  ;  liiqu'U  ;    (e)  «- 

lipa 
silipii 
fu/dp 
o/io/l 
tsiapiiitiip 

l/lasqd 

tst/iit/lp 

pilstpt/l ;  (d)  pitskit/l 

tqanui 
jmiskit/l 
pit^kil 
stfot/lja 
pOtstiH/l 
kdle/. 
t/last^dqa 

4.  M. 

N. 

taitlikt 

"Hit;  {V)pdp^ 

hddsu  ; 

ilukas ; 

/.ens 

htetsu 

pisko  ;  pHqo 
dpt/ldpt/l ;  (k)  paldtoi 

5.  0. 
P. 

laiiik 
mos  or  niM 

hiiti^ 
kii/. 

ijaisos 
ihikum 

6.  Q. 
R. 

tkamoiiak 
i/.te/)d/.ast/.a 

igkdn  ; 
e//dds/.  ; 

itkdmnnak 
(o)  txil^/ 

akdsa/.  ;  (m)  tktcd/.a 
tfipso 

7.  S. 

hCt  tilawat/Ll 

avdtiki 

heyhreik 

8.  T. 

hi/. 

ihikum 

9.  U. 

anko 

pdputkv 

10.  V. 

dwa 

11.  W 

tsaiia^ta 

hau 

ttaldfuipi 

12.  X. 
Y. 

^mri 

wdpi 
kund 

najfka 
puhi 

13.  Z. 

miiUis 

mutts 

nipists 

14. 

15. 

tumai 

16. 

• 

kuta 

NORTH  WESTERN    AMERICA. 


599 


riNK. 

tapsaltemnnijf. 
Ui^indta;  Mj'fe 

akitsla 

qiima 


lAHK.  atiKS*. 

1.  A.    la  t/.ld(ilo) 

B.  tf;i/afiiiilsa ;  skeit/.u  I/.I0;  qlii/.o 

C.  pnle;  iUat^e  t/.lo 

2.  D.  Uahat/.l 

3.  E.   ijiisat/.lj)  e/r/iit/^l]) 

F.  Ipi/ile/.ii;  {e)fjttilile)Lii  $op6k/.u;  siipiitaf.u;  (c)    saatakint)i./pa ;  tsketnlpii 

stii 

G.  tqialai  tMa  siiUakiiafyl 

H.    puldn  skoiiilamu/. ;  stia  ijo/.<jo/.ti:in ;  atsjidt/.l 

I.      stiiilntiirts  $(jiirkini/e  st,;umtiumem<ts 

J.     snliindk^a  jXttstiiit/.l  skdqoimitf.1 

K.   jHilen  yidsitn/tpn  idimrls 

L.    tipuidntt;  //.lastiUfju  tiasdiity.ltasqd 

4.  M.  pukt ;  jiiakt  si/si/.  ;  tsif.tsif.  ;  pa!c<;      laka;  papi,  kimila;  iai<;ai 
N.  piiih;  {ytwaqCilinwy.      titsiji ;  uastjo  paj>^  ,■  kimila ;  ilkwas 


5.  O.   prlimi 
P. 


t)i.left  ;  q(^i^t 
paliiks6m/.te 


6.  Q.    aiaqilpitepiq ;    itiqwd-     ut^kitc ;  wati^kuti^ 
mihiq 


R.  okwotdty^la 

7.  S.  atdkirt/.le 
■  8.  T. 

9.  U.  kandwitse 

10.  V.  itska 

11.  W.  imitk 

13.  X.  okutsay  01  oguUan 

Y.  apod 

13.  Z. 

14.  tsakdbus 


Wpso 

uliqa,  tiloqo 
palaks(imf.U 

)t.dtsiri 

hagti;  tsal6)Lte 

niihwa;  hwdwa 
puhi ;  sondira 


lauikfi 
MM 

itgdokg 

iakaitahdtuka 

hOntawat},l 

saikeitdhOmke 

asuna  (D) 
wafopi 


600 


PHILOLOGY. 


ruBH; 

MtAT. 

uoo. 

■urrAiA 

1.  A. 

(uUon) 

t)i/i  (i/ing) 

(gi'ldy) 

B. 

tgvtsfin 

t/.lin 

C. 

isap;  isap 

tf.li;  t/.lige 

8.  D. 

akot/Llak 

/.aiU/.ltsin 

tf.l6kup6!  yiUik 

■.\.  E. 
V\ 

G. 

H. 

I. 

J. 

K. 

L. 

tgie 
skiii/talgi 

skailtuki 

shtllk 

maiats 

Uuituf.a ;  tsaweti/. 

kos 

tatse 

skiiy.a 

^.tili/llsin  ;   tiii/iiqaiumi- 
kiiigiii;  (e)  kiikiwejM 
eskike 

skolnii 

st/^/iisii  mpt^l 
kaj.a 
tf-iisfptfca 

slumdltig ;  ( 
stvmdllaviig 

t(nyi.a,  styMp 
/.ateUduis 

4.  M. 

N. 

nukt 

nikiite  ;  (k)  tifiku'iit 

sikiinikan 
(/usif/iisi 

5.  O. 
P. 

pit/.li 
ndwit 

ndapag 

witkui 

6.  Q. 
R. 

ip/.aleu'a 

qob/U  ;    qoatqoat  ; 

kill/an 
tjulkdmokuie 

(m) 

mitsmtisqe 
musmus 

7.  S. 

nmhok 

mdnlai 

8.  T. 

tske/. 

».  U. 

watsak 

yoho 

10.  V. 

htipso 

n.  vv 

mifuts 

vatsdqa 

12.  X. 
Y. 

a^ihru,  fiuru 
atiiku 

gari 
soyoiiuk 

13,  Z.    eksikinfi 


\mUdo 


emua 


14. 
IS. 
16. 
17. 


kaiditjLl 

tfUtfU 

wausi,  woii 
afwal 


NORTHWESTERN   AMERICA. 


601 


|KA«.  WOLF.  ORR. 

I.  A.    s(is(sus3)  ye*  (large)  yeatf;i ;  {reindeer)  /.oJni 

B.  tulsdnu  nalf-leUi  l^esle 

C.  fWtpt/jw  (black )i  nM«.  »»i<dtonf  ;  seyi  (small)      tn/jt 

diji^iin  (white) 

wi/^Jltto  (block) ;   A<//<i-  /;t/a«6  (large) ;  itoutoi    tsijmka,  fMtpukai 
%vU/.la  (while)  (small) ;  kahkin 

jA(f»i;«ra  (black);  »/«-  stiia/.o/.cli</. ;      malem-     i/.uh/.kan 

/urjus  (white)  st/.lie 

Iilf.l4imka;  siim/.aUpn  f    ntsfilsin  ;  siiit^ilep  ;  {(•)     /soi>k/.u  ;  sinetf;illsn  ;  [^) 


2.  D. 

3.  E. 

F. 

G. 

H. 

I. 

J. 

K. 

L. 

4.  M. 

N. 

5.  O. 
P. 

6.  Q. 
R. 

7.  S. 

8.  T. 

9.  U. 

10.  V. 

U.  W. 

12.  X. 
Y. 


(e)  skiim/.iti;t  siiiiqtilijt 

nt/.ldmukfii  simu}.aiikin  qaiiiUm/.ii ;  sinuii/iu 
mi/.al/.l ;  stuintumil  nti/aua  ;  t^mlaii 


st^ity.on 

tatont^icsho 

iaka;  Ari/i«/«  (while) 
idka  ;  wapdnt/.la 

Umeaki^  ;  nokoluo 
natdm 

iqwdijva 
ets/.ol 

alotufan 

kotiiniamo 

toktinks 

haiikidai 

loqoa;  u-u/.  (white) 

uira;  uitsitsi 
padua  ;  tokdkwiM 


13.  Z.    kiio 


14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 


kiilai 

hunar 

hiiiiot 


tdlujxis 

taiisaluilo 

hemin ;  tsaifya 
/.alii;;  sjiilia 

t/./aiu  ;  !s6i/a/.S 
kasii/i 

isko/ea ;  (m)  i^kihiki; 
ileaijiim 

dvtelitU 

mit  ill 

was 

ktidtak 


titkntiips 
tsiyit 
t^atiiili 

/.watdq 

t/.lalus 

taldjiai 
tipi 

aitfJcwa 
mitsims 

lala/. 
imdsun 

atdlim 

l/ltiheta 


tsitiiii  ;  tsemul  (small)        tosi 


flinCnci 
I'ju  ,■  i:d 

nuiknii 

kwaifilsuk 
omoliii 
i}(rf,  tsot 
isot 

151 


mil  rd  I  si 
sufus 

hepasto 

miikuCitt; 

kasuin 

^ukdt 

sfikot,,  sukmal 


602 


1.  A. 
B. 

C. 


iitdkalak 


a.  D.    kity.lukailf.lta 


3.  E. 
F. 

G. 

H. 

I. 

J. 

K. 

L. 

4.  M. 
N. 

5.  O. 
P. 

6.  Q. 
R. 


Ii/.als 
s/.nsilaks 

/Ldsiaks 
^inakU^a 

k/ielnt 

Inldstir 

ta^ipka 

yutit/^ 
miijii 

molak 
imolak 


7. 

S. 

dntoqn 

8. 

T. 

?i  It  tits 

9. 

U. 

wun 

10. 

V. 

hatdka 

11. 

W 

pau 

12. 

X. 

parfti 

Y. 

patit 

18.  Z.    ponokdo 


14. 

18. 

kekaia 

16. 

IT. 

pilut 

PHILOLOGY. 

UATKR. 

ti-a  (t/«l) 


aknipi 

kaatsildwa 

piim 

taieai 

piim 

kohi 

kikstakeik* 

teaf-aiK 
titnis 


t/.loktrait/.o 
nnthctf.1;  ally  as 


skill  an 

sjmhfwdkus 

skiMu  ;  (o)  stunif.li 

spiiliii/u'dkas ;  (c)  aresi 

kii'ii  ;  spii  rii kwdkii s 

niiiiuli^iiiika 

sjMiriikivflliikus 

skiildu 

iira^ikwa 

uliti^ek 

tf.ld/.ittf.lit^ 

wuliU^iutcntut^i 

wetfldfo 

tiitniu-oso 

ni^uqnn 

Uifc;pul 

aUijL 

td/.^j>iil 

ala^ik 

jHekd 

atsik 

piismisiiis 

Ikdmat 

kdiioij 

etf.hif.%ra 

et/.ld/.ica 

fUdkut/.fe 


yatamt 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


603 


rw. 

HUHqUITO. 

•NAH. 

1.  A. 
B. 
C. 

tsi/. 
naiai ' 
mtlsna;  pnn^t^o 

tsi/. 

Uiiliiakaili^i ;  t^idse 

2>i^ii^lf.li;  piitsilie 

tiinnne 

iiydft^o  ;  t/i.luwdn^tf.le 

8.  D. 

ootia 

ooiia 

3.  E. 
F. 

G. 

H. 

1. 

J. 

K. 

L. 

kiraknska                            kirn  iirnuU/J 
/.amdiifihin ;  (o)  mamila  se/dkim ;  smi/dkiis  ; 

Uiisilnkiii 
/i.amut/.ltii  III                       stiitsdliikui 
mtU/.ttcmiih                         ttOsulnks 
tsetsmkiis 
pakwalit                            Uqii 
/.waio/M-aio                       matiikd/it/./in 
tatjajonlaewa                      ^//o/h^m/  nt^ikiii 

tsafi/t 
(o)    esliiif ;  piiiUi/u  ;  (p)  »yaw 
ijairilif.il 
/.iiiimrmii/.  ;  tlldMUi; 
skmwjii 
milt  silts 
olii 

srkiilekaiu 
tawCitsui 

4,  M. 

N. 

/d/^/itvi 

md]f^nuii  maf.uli;  (k) 

irdmi 
uuiwd 

trd/pii^ 

ird/.piti;  ;  (k)  piil^kwai 

8.  O. 
P. 

miimus 

pipkii 
laitiks 

iraiimafi 
kird/ai 

6.  Q. 
R. 

eqaHdjLwe/.v!e 
opomitsoklsak 

aponnt^rikt^tik 
otanCikst 

kauelf. ;  (m)  kdwilii/. 
itsdiaii 

7.  S. 

atikadnc 

lamul^iik/fiuk 

I'ltimiikwa 

8.  T. 

kakdia 

kinak 

tf.  U. 

10.  V. 

11.  W 

kalasiia 

wlehd 

hiuta 

18.  X. 
Y. 

mupu 
mipUa 

muani 
mopoij 

tiiqua 
toyokwe 

13.  Z. 

kineksil 

14. 

mdtchcuii 

/.Hi 

I 


604 


P  H  I  L  O  L  O  Q  y. 


■mB. 

no. 

rltTHMI. 

.  A. 

(ogme) 

ta 

B. 

I^iuie;  If  idle 

xcnskaidke 

tfUDt;  UMtaju 

C. 

midke 

ifOre;  €j.a 

nakitca 

■i.  D. 


akiiikott 


a. 

E. 

F. 

G. 

il. 

I. 

J. 

K. 

L. 

spida 

flii/iirii/i.tatdf ;  tts^wad 

lUiil 

huhiiiiil 

t/.lil/.iuilkum 

smaiko 

1  f-hutqiKia 

odati;  iiiiia 
aiisd 

(KM 

ikof.it  umaitf.1 
ikwii/.stuiiiit/i.l 
t/iluuiiHut ;  t/LluO*aUfi 

fij'.ii/.pulst 

ipum 

tpiim 

fpiil/ilt 

UiUiit 

tlai/dluq 

Isolsijii 

t/.lii.si/di/a 

4. 

M. 

waiiUiliken 

tdmum 

kolkot 

N. 

jiiiipiu  ;  jtaieliit , 
kill;  /«//«< 

(k)  kd. 

tamtim;  {k)  ttimdm 

udplus 

s. 

O. 
P. 

tiiiiiiyiira 
Iril^a 

lopitjil 
lulu 

tiaqaifnutf.1 

e. 

Q. 
R. 

ikdlakiddlHi^  ;  Uikalii 
kaJakuMma  ;  tidln/i. 

t/.lkoldwaUnviiks 
tkoliiwuldwuks 

lupeak 
tupie 

7. 

S. 

pokaJ/m  na,  tuit^ 

atimp 

atuwdniwan 

8. 

T. 

knkuaia 

hit/.ldopiu 

U. 

U. 

Idliik 

napdl 

la* 

10. 

V. 

Uirard/i. 

Oppa 

11. 

w 

laiiitta 

isd 

imuh 

12. 

X. 

Y. 

pdgi/ia 
kiiiiida 

niqxihtci 
ano/ui 

wnfia 
apilii 

13.  Z.    piksiu 


14. 

okiitop 

15. 

knkalis 

pula 

paJa 

16. 

amd^arot 

altdf.ne)ie,  akdkan 

amdgan,  apthan 

17. 

eheymat 

jnpdn 

pdnwg 

NORTIIWE8TERN   AMERICA. 


005 


1.  A. 
B. 
C. 

3.  D. 

8.  E. 
F. 

G. 

H. 

I. 

J. 

K. 

L. 

4.  M. 

N. 

6.  O. 
P. 

6.  Q. 
R. 

7.  S. 

8.  T. 
0.  U, 

10.  V. 

11.  W. 

12.  X. 
Y. 

13.  Z. 
14. 


inatitiitkote 


tkod/.an 

skapiisifut ;   (e)   stiiqii. 

peutin 
kitMiifimi^in 
stdkiifm^in 

k<yp 

tpdne 

sii/.(Ual,  tmtaal 

u'faplag,  wtlpbt(; 
hi/.aUif. ;  (k)  fll(if.uhif. 

hap 
hep 

tinriwiokg  ;    tutciiikf  ; 

(m)  idiapiuk 
aioko 

alaku>a 

ttakic(it/.link 

teak 

(Usari 

td/.e 

kasa 
huzikia 


qby.1 
naktft/.K 

kituintf.Unina 


maiko 


ltstj^l/.om ;  (e)  listj-ln.     /Lott/.dtsiim ;    (e)   /.oUum- 

jL&m  /.ottnm 

f.wdtji.01  f.6lau/.aU 

iif.atf.at  /.oliumf.6tsirm 
fatf.at 

t/liikwau/o  ^nminm 
/.at/ tit 

t/laia/ia/  t/lakokoi 

kalknt  kiiinu ;  ti-ittlu 
/dt/at  ,•  (k)  /.wai/ivai      kakia 


t/hip/asupato 


m'imt/l 
nrst 

okwe/kve/ 

okwfktre 

rtmpiiik 

apOatsa 

wiaqos 

kfua 

kola ;  gala 

tfiga 
put 

oksOp 


auuku 


kd/atnau 


tsxucipu 


ihoi'i 


159 


606 


I"  II  I  I.  ()  I.  OO  V. 


ri»ii. 

air.MiiN. 

iTuionii. 

A. 

II. 
C. 

l/liik  {i^laiaii) 

Inlii 

nthtkva 

tf.lH 

•  l/U\kiin 

If  li.  ili;o 
1  f  liikiiii\lt,n 
l/Mrll<^i ;  tf.letl^o 

3.  n.    ijivilil 


i 


3. 

i:. 

^miiiiiilyl 

K. 

siiiiiiiiil/l 

(i. 

kilt/  ulii. 

II. 
1. 

tiw,uiiil/lkwu 

.1. 

K. 

I.. 

4. 

M. 

hniiti;n; 

N. 

tkiranaitil 

r*. 

O. 
1'. 

u-iaiir 

vnilxilj' 

«. 

»1. 
R. 

7. 

S. 

s. 

T. 

0. 

U. 

10. 

V. 

11. 

W. 

ali{ 

12. 

X. 

jMiyHtsi  (?) 

Y. 

ayni 

nknliilitiin 

miininh 

tlllilt/hir  •   (o)  ulillf 

ISli  fll/l  s 

niiiitilii^riiikn 

miniiilfl'iik 

iililiii/ 

Milyl 

tpAfiniiuntf.1 

liist/.liiiko 

Uikiit^al 

fiaUo/. 

liosnjL 

mihu/li 

Imif 

ti'ghai 

iHtiiiitt 

iniu/ifoH 

ikiriinn 

inai/fon 

idiiiii'i'k 

Omtok 

tsiitnii- 

U'oqiont 

lijifihs 

Ifopkiif 

kiliiri 

tsidlni 

akiii  or  agdi 

ayai 

\ 


13.  Z.    namiit 


14. 

16. 

16. 

kirnittf 

17. 

muj/ul 

nkicnk 
kasi 


koikoif 


N  ()  tt  T  ir  W  K  H  T  K  R  N    A  M  E  R  I  r  A. 


607 


I.  A. 

H.  1/iiH.v,  Dour 

(',  orii 

a.  D.  kiipri  kiUiiHH;\) 

3.  E.  ikinul 

F.  ikuist ;  ((')  .ikirisl 

II.  Stllll'lllltl^ltl 

I,  A////.*f 

J.  .siiik/u 

K.  i/limlnmu/. 

L.  Iiiitsm^ 

4.  M.  iiiiiiikt 
N.  uiiiiikt 

,5,  O.  y«|/> 

I*.  Iiaistnk 

6.  (],  (ttf.iileu 
R.  i<i;(a/ 

7.  S.  ./</* 
9,  T.  tjn/dni 

t>.    U.  II  .SUA 

10.  V.  AtAwai 

11.  W,  tiliqdtaki 

12.  X.  «(;«•» 
Y.  «««a  (?) 

13.  Z. '  otiistau 

14. 

16,  /(iii'j,' 

16.  Iniiian 
17. 


AKmrnoN, 

WIIITK. 

///mill  (i/rll) 

irfi/lfj/HfUl 

iltsiiin  1  l^(iiiu»li>\r 

flft///illf/  / 

luilii  /■  (i  1 
kiiiiiii.ikiiiitfh 

/oiiii/in 

l""'l 

/tiiiiiiili,iiit 

;  ((■)  n/tin'iii- 

IIHHI/ 

kiiiit 

/iiiiiiiiik 

11/11  III/ 

i/t/ifniiiiiik 

/•■mil/ 

s/iil/Zii 

fnk/i"/ 

s/.illliil^ill  ; 

hmfM/iiiliii 

ksi/mif. 

/.laiiint 

hiliiii/i 

lititii  II 

''/"/  >'  C*)  fli/ii/»ii 

(iliiij) ;  lii^kta^eHtluiigko 
mdt/./kiist 

tijiiie/. 

tkuit/.  I  qdleneaf.vl 

t^ukiinlfi^ 


tuyutiimi 

nigiwa 
pi)dsiipikia 

takomiuintan 


/'"/"If- 

kiiik  ;  ji/ii^  ;  (k;  kmu/. 

l/hikl/Mko 
l/l.,ki, 

Ijoj) ;  totqop 
Ikop 

kommou 

kiidf.iUt 

]>il/jHll 

itaiii 

tiuilsi 

Uii^uiri 
loliukuitya 

apiii 

trulisuk 

pikii 

aruiin/ai,  /.osie)i.u 

hicaiy.not 


U: 


it  I 


608  PHILOLOGY. 

■LIOB.  KU), 

1.  A.    dolkifs  tluUcdn 

B.  lnhdne;  niaktt-tvlukOie  t/i.lts6htce ;  t^iiltsiuke 

C.  holdji  tin/.l 


enlsiisr 
halso 


2.  D. 

kanitkoat 

3.  E. 
F. 
G. 
H. 
I. 
J. 
K. 
L. 

kwaioquuiit 

iayu-in  ;  (e)  inkuiaiu 

oqwiul,  or/wardd 

qwaii 

/iaintetq 

tfsif/itiijn  ;  U^sindka 

ksnnqii ;  ksqxre/. 

tsiiwoli'i  iji 

tfiaqtcir 

ikwil 

uku'il 

kuU 

/aikwit^lu 

tctseuij  ,•  tekf/iiffuj) 

uktsrtiqn 

t/laki'il;  sulowaii 

<io6 

iuktcai 
apvad 

f-aitots 

tekejLiit^nj) 

kiiqwtf. 

t^sM  k  ;  qld^v  n 

4.  M. 

N. 

tsimiif-lsimit/. 
tpniik 

ilpi/j) 
lilted 

JfH/i'l't  iosios 
lamt ;  {k)  musmusu mak 
xvitf.1 

5.  0. 
P. 

^kujtqkiipu 
mokimoki 

lakait/akailu 
t^akt^dktce 

yotsyots 
Uuildtwe 

6.  Q. 
R. 

ly^lul,  taty.M 
t/ldlii/. 

tf.lpdl;  tuty^lpdl 
tjilplilpul 

pti'i/-  ;  (m)  tuputsdjt. 
span 

7.  S. 

maieam 

l<;al 

8.  T. 

kait(t 

pahdlat 

9.  U. 

pospmli 

t4ikldkali 

10.  V. 

epy.otdra/.e 

td/.li 

11.  W 

hakutfi 

td/.ldqe 

metiiqati 

12.  X. 
Y. 

titwit 
tuhiikuityd 

dfkawit 
atsdkteitiid 

i^aku'dkar 
ikwitsktcityd 

13.  Z.    sikimiu 


mikio;  asOn  (red  paint) 


14. 

topiikoOs 

I/.U/.0OS 

IS. 

nwliita 

tfupula 

16. 

yujny^a,  yonm/.j>e 

kwaMf.a,  rdure 

17. 

yuiidt/^nol 

koiakuiet 

lofdsfa 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


609 


1.  A. 
B. 

C. 

2.  D. 

3.  E. 
F. 

G. 

H. 

I. 

J. 

K. 

L. 

4.  M. 

N. 


TII.LOW. 

{datleese) 
i(ne(dats/.u 


hralt 

ikxfdli;  (d)ku!areit;  (e) 

ku-alHt 
ajwnrmik 
ku^aiak 

tsqu'tlt/.l;  kleitflint/.l 
skwequ 

mukimukf 

maqO^ ;    (k)    maf.6^ ; 
tkenOe 


URKIN. 

thilkllij 

kate ;  soicaldts/.u 

)ialso 


pom 

iu/.waiil 

(xjwiid 

skuniitsa 

/.trakwdls 

f^sktceuka 

kuipve/. 

yitf;i/ii( ;  IsikUihedkuii 
tsiiktsiik-wdkut/.l 


OIIHT. 

wane;  selookwa 
mint^d^e 

kuml-f.l-kaane 

)^ai6m 

r/wotunt,  kutunt ;  (e)  sili- 

/.aiit/.avM 

kwutiint 

heqwo 

tddwntyi.1 ;  Idagivvty^l 

tilled  t/. 

t/latan;  tatan 

himaka^,  pi.  titilu 
nt^i ;  (k)  nlsie  ;  7it(ie 


5.  O. 
P. 

6.  Q. 
R. 


qiigijUfU 
kuskiiswe 

ir^-im/. ;  (m)  tagdij 
itakdukaudka 


7.  S.    t&pkt^-im 

8.  T. 

9.  U. 

10.  V. 

11.  W. 


12.  X. 
Y. 

13.  Z. 

14. 
18. 

16. 
17. 


tdjUtag 

wapit 
ohuktcityd 


paijfi-UKi 


yotsyots 


tupiitf;d/i. 
pittsfi}. 


mesuqaii 

iakvauit 

kiimuni  (?) 


yaiimua ;  pi.  yiyimu 
nosa;  nu^a 

idkaityi.1;  (m)  idgait/.l 
idkunit)i.l 

pul,  pal 

haihaiat 

mobnis 

kempe 


piap 

paaaiii  or  pawaiu 

amtiksim 

ii]f.wais 

uniini 

yoit,  uariajeren 

obiiloo 


103 


61 

0 

PHILOLOGY. 

SMALL. 

STIONO, 

OLD. 

1. 

A. 

VMSul 

liOs 

(ltd  (long  ago) 

B. 

asUkwn 

ntf.lOtse 

Isitpniin ;  satdtik  (long 
ngo) ;  isaidkote 

C. 

stsol/.lit/.le 

f/Utdi 

nuistsdne 

a. 

D. 

tsakwuninea 

kaestsumkakdne  (he  is) 

nliiiakanca 

3. 

E. 

kiraiyima 

iaiat 

t^ikdwil/  ;  ^ilclea 

F. 

qiiqwaioma ;  kuknioma 

iaiAt;  yaiiyaiit 

2>o/.po/.tyut  (aged) ;  t^aiilif  ; 
itiiq ;  (e)  i/.lat/.lay.d]) 

G. 

kii/itina 

ilaUltiUiU'dt 

Mmcm ;  tiqittiqitt 

H. 

Uwma;  taoma 

kwflt(kivtrt(t 

yfimem 

F. 

meiman 

'SOula/LO 

Idloly.Ui 

J. 

y.oa]HU 

tsupnka 

sf.oy.  (aged);  toyd  (not  new) 

K. 

/.Idle 

tSVJ) 

t^(rndtcit/.l ;  maqtl  (not 
new) 

L. 

t/l/fituse ;  tsOtnse 

IsiiikOs ;  l/a/di 

sisin 

4. 

M. 

kuskits  ;  kiitskiits 

kujtskirps  ;  kii])gk}iji^ 

u-akema  ;  kewtiti ' 

N. 

tcajKtai ;  (k)  ik$iks 

qoltfj) ;     qot]f.UCip;     (k) 
/(itetiif.  ;  tau-dtt 

/.osaniU/. ;  {k) /dsat 

5. 

O. 

etsapiia 

ntdloa;  naantaloti 

kiiidtsu 

P. 

kosa;  kli^a 

t/.lifoe 

tiaiwe 

6. 

Q. 

ioktcaits  ;  (m)  iagails 

tidt/l/.etcOl;  (m)  idia- 
l/.lwilu/ 

iakaidkt ;  itjedqut 

R. 

iaiiokiist ;  it/ldnuksi 

tiatyjcivti  I ;  to)(.aial 

iakaUKjwat ;  iiit/lbaiit 

7. 

S. 

pamalioq  ;  titjitk 

USlktako 

iiifioyit ;  yuhaiyim 

8. 

T. 

nadtohut 

ykOl/as 

maluiii 

0. 

U. 

kitskdn 

kalis 

mot(duntka 

10. 

V. 

oto/Lia/. 

kilotsdma 

yumaf.d 

11. 

W 

tsoktsa 

ipatse 

tolitca 

12. 

X. 

titntii 

jigUH 

tlllqi'ipilisi 

Y. 

tiitsin 

naziti 

moitup 

13. 

Z. 

pistakwiu  (?) 

punattips 

apiu 

14. 

ktc&anita 

nthfukwa^ 

itfup 

15. 

yokai 

16. 

tpnui 

apOsterot 

era/po 

17. 

olutdkald 

p&dltoitf 

ma/.duinal 

NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


611 


TOUNO.  OOOD, 

1.  A.  t«;  sii/jwi 

B.  tfjik ;    qdnqute    (now) ;     nuson ;  t^u^e 

teneuai  (young) 

C.  t/.lemas/.ai  j'o 


nikahitay. 
latsOte 


2.  D. 


kisiiks-tsumkakane  (ho  is)  salmni 


3.  E.  /.duitum  Ida 

F.  skokoemolt ;  sits  (new)  ii.dest ;  (e)  ji.ast 

G.  skokivdsad  ;  a)i.aiivtilyl  )f.aest 
H.  U'af.Udt  /-"(t 
I.  t^dl^ii^  lf.ldm 
J.  ntf.kA-fJ.^ixuti ;        t^dus  t/.ld<ju 
K.        (new) 

/.u-ell ;  maiien  (new)  iye  ;  die 


gest 

taia  ;  (e)  qaest  or  qant 
giaigit 
kai^t  or  qv^t 
qaluni  or  qdlub 
'/.asd^ ;  l-f.uasd/.icit]f.l 

y.vg 


L.    )i.Otuse-dwus 


tas)i.olsun  ;  tay^otsune         t^ is  or  stfis  ;  total 


4.  M.    kutskuts  ■  tdits,  tdnts  ku]>gii 

N.   icajietai  ;  (k)  ittgiu-itif;      iii/.  ;   ieiy  ;   (k)  qui/.  ;     mild  ;  (k)  tgailuU 

tsiiilam 


6.  0. 
P. 

itsdyu 
kusdijfwe 

sitaiH  ;  pi.  sasudiu 
bdsii-e,  pdstvi 

litastu  ;  pi.  laludstu 
ndinai ;  nOma 

6.  Q. 
R. 

kiiirlipy 

ikwalds,  katsaet/.ldbutet 

tokte  ;  itokutc 
ctokvte;  tokte 

idmiila;  ma^dtgi 
idkcUycU 

7.  S. 

amuii 

tenna 

kOsqe,  kagq 

8.  T. 

f.iiet-f.lkuta 

sdnuqu 

9.  U. 

titse 

qdits 

10.  V. 

karesd 

karikwitsi 

11.  W 

tsoktsa 

tusi 

lehaiiqain 

12.  X. 
Y. 

diwiinisi 
titsiu 

tsdiiti  or  tsaant 
pijiyu 

tup 
gitdyu 

13.  Z.    sakompiu 


lidsiu 


purkd])s 


14. 

* 

tylotylimg 

weqOsetj 

16. 

taiiis,  tat 

till 

16. 

'moriuaiis 

tihn  raet,  tiliorivait 

mohiridi,  mohai 

17. 

keMt 

poloii 

hitoigutu 

612 

PHILOLOGY. 

HANnOHl, 

uaLT. 

AUVI. 

1.  A.    nzu  (nezo) 
B. 

C.    niwdfi]t.e 

{ne(liay) 
ni-tif)iwdif 

{ann&) 
natydidle 
nindstsa 

8.  D. 

tA'}.aki-s6k 

3.  E.    laa-kisunUdilf 

F.  )^aest;  itdnis; 

G.  ts(U/.tt 
H.   y-a^t 

I.     y^atyil 

J.    f.as)i.6spUf.l 

K.    aie 

L.    tashotstiut 

qest-lognlmiif. 
(e)  9V/a«  {fcjiis ;  (e)  kaiiis 

giaigius 
koft 
qdlom 
/.dspUj^l 

itisttut 

mukiik 

yi.wila]nwiU;  (e)  }.wUtt- 

/.welt 
astqintvm 
atsf.wut-/t.l/.watyi.U 
Itho/ 
pisi/.o 
net/.l 
tatsokul,  kaskotsidq 

4.  M.  hamdlits 
N.   fii;c 

^ajupitits 

wdquf 
icaqdf 

fi.  0.   hapiitsu;  main 
P. 

hudsttt 

wioko 
kest 

6.  Q.   i(9d» 
R.    katsfiikta 

idmala 
eiakdtf.a 

padla;  iaku)dmunil)i.l 
t/lakandie  ;  ni/tdpat/l 

7.  S.    tina-tekwdlak 

kagq  takwdlak 

idlei;  idlai 

8.  T. 

Modlas/LOmst 

0.  U. 

10.  V. 

n.  w.  ft«f/«w 

vUtdttqai 

hawaqt 

18.  X.    nasuntu 
Y.  ;w;Vy.« 

tirk6 
ktcatsiyeu 

kieu 
torfietii}/a 

13.  Z. 


U. 
16. 
16. 


hdnagi 
yait 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


HI.) 


DEAD.  COLD.  WARM. 

1.  A.    liil.sdi  hin/kaz  hiimil 

B.  i^isle ;  (lyaiittoie  kiiat$a/.6towa;  koskalse  t/.lukwfitie ;  ivuld 

C.  ^t^tetik  skats  hoszut/J. 


'i.  D.    ipil/.lani 


kiikoone 


3. 

E. 

kiriitrdk 

tijirdt/il 

kiriidls 

F. 

qulil 

tsidl ;  (d)  Isarel ;  kisfsi- 

kiiadts  ;    kitkivadts  ; 

t]f.l^in  ; 

(e)  kiiiiiijdit 

kinoqivcuUs 

G. 

Itl/.Of. 

if.  iimiis 

skwiils 

II. 
I. 

lo/nf. 

t(IS 

fkirdtg 
tiiS'/mi/c/ 

.1. 

liluni ;  si/oolsai/Jit 

j>(i  md.s ;  s 

/.Me/.tvit/.l 

st/i'd/til/.l;  •iLolda 

K. 

■miiijiit 

ly.lai 

/.lid /a 

L. 

ls(wts/.at 

Uilsuiiiiii , 

tatsy.mUf.li 

Uilski'i  lo 

4. 

M. 

tixiii/.nin 

•  helniikin 

id  nils 

luitr/vts ;  idijii^ 

N. 

ii/.kduii^(i 

,•  (k)  i^miota 

qusil;  (k) 

tsiKiia 

Ui/.o(-f. ;  (k)  ildt)i.Hkia 

iy. 

O. 

iiwiia 

fHJKI 

iokoia 

1'. 

uiiuiina  ; 

anint 

firaita  ;  J'atdsnm 

piildkenc;  mOka 

ti. 

li. 

t/hinmcliist 

tsdmetiy  ; 

(tn)  it^etfinj 

iot(;kiiiti)/ ;  (in)  agdt/.!. 

R. 

tf.lonmkt  ; 

t/.lmimeliisl 

fo'H.S  ,•   ^,"5 

noskoit 

7. 

S. 

fiiii,  foo 

pdijkafili 

maimci7i 

H. 

T. 

likidis 

k'rHlitiiy.C 

nu 

jjiitsiihCit 

t). 

V. 

sj)ino 

kdtaks 

soiilkas 

10. 

V. 

kinki 

isikdlo 

ketUsdkatna 

11. 

W 

uimiiniii 

vstsi 

irsldijai 

li. 

X. 

tiijv 

ut^i'i  in 

tunitH 

Y. 

i/ci 

iztis 

yiii 

I.M. 

Z. 

istiiijen 

14. 

kdyi//./ 

l^iti'ispr/^l 

t/loimt/.l 

15. 

miiili; 

M!. 

(tutt'i/a 

O^JO 

oro 

154 


•^■' 


^'i*- 


if-- 


614 


1.  A. 
B. 
C. 


SI 

sik 


'i.  D.    ^-affiin 


PHIIjOLOGY. 

TUOV. 

r/»«  («ff  or  ye) 

tidnuk 

na  or  nat) 


idnnk  ;  tvtmie 
haUike 

iiiiilittis 


3. 

E. 

ntfutt; 

Id  ;  iifsutsmi 

aniiwi ; 

gUJIUi  ; 

i  (III  III 

nninhs  or  iniis 

F. 

koiad 

■  (o)  intri'i 

unntvi. 

(Inui;  (o) 

(UWlri 

tsiiiiU/.ll$ ;  (e)  tsinit^lta 

G. 

ants 

dnugivvd 

tsunal 

H. 

int^d 

inui  or  innwi 

tsunil 

I. 

litsa 

(l/if^ive 

U(init/.l 

J. 

fi  nttis 

■  rinti 

iifiwa; 

tu'i  idwa, 

Ili'ifUCIi 

tsuntii ;  Idltti 

K. 

fintsa 

nOu-e 

tsfine 

L. 

niitsd 

vnaikc , 

•  nike 

tsvnit/.l;  tdat/.la  (that) 

4. 

M. 

in 

im 

ipi 

N. 

in,-  (k)  inttk 

iin ;  (k 

iiiKfk 

2>in  ;  pun;  {V)  p<inttk 

5. 

0. 

iniij 

niki 

nip 

P. 

ina 

ki 

nut 

0. 

Q. 

natka 

iniiikii 

id/.ka  ;  aj.ka 

R. 

iiaikri 

or  naik/.ii 

maikii 

id/.ka  ;  /.ei/.eik  ;  (p)  id/.e 

7. 

S. 

tin 

mdha 

kak,  koka 

8. 

T. 

kone,  ku'one 

nif. 

ktcoutii 

9. 

U. 

)10 

i 

hat 

10. 

V. 

ida 

mai 

hina 

11. 

vv. 

it 

pi/.kd 

pif.ka 

12. 

X. 

ktcan 

emOe 

ton,  tan 

Y. 

ni 

i 

00,  oco  (?) 

13.  Z.    nistoa 


15. 

kani 

16. 

noma 

17. 

no 

kistoa 


ezemazt 

oma 

om 


teutot 


ahf,  paima 
wandl 


TMi 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


615 


1.  A. 

n. 

c. 

WE. 

tuiidkwa 
niyd 

Tl. 

nd}.onek 
nohni 

TH«V. 

yini/i ;  /wioti'i  k 
a/.io 

2.  D. 

kamcndt/.la 

ninkdnnm 

ninkoii 

3.  E. 
F. 
G. 
li. 
(I. 
J. 
K. 
I-. 

lit/./ nil  is 

kiiciipi/a,  kntipilii 

kilijiiisl,  f^e/rpiist 

HUMvnimil 

nibal-f.1 

uiieiii 

eiifm 

uniwat/.l 

nt/^lniiiump 

npiliipstrjinji 

kopi/ipnst ;  L 

liipildpst 

kiildjm 

a/dp 

eldpa 

kultiknla 

opc/ipiist 

niii'is 

tsiimit/./ts ;  (e)  tsiniit/^/U 
/ipnst ;  u/itsaniU 
teintsinU 
tsm/it.f.1 

tsuntr ;  gwdtir^ 
tt^i>iidi>mi'y. 

tsirntsiint^ ;    l/./undt/./<i 
(those) 

4.  M. 

N. 

nil,  imit 

noma;     (k)    iiiipinik  ; 
nil  mi 

imit 

puma ;  emit . 

(k) 

iiiiiiii/K 

iniil 

kiima;    (k)    ktvunmi; 
jiinik 

S.  O. 
P. 

mimuk 
kimt 

mki/ni^ ;  (dual) 
kCimug;  /cilniti 

ukiniir 

nipik 
divi 

6.  (i. 
R. 

nusaika  ;  al/.aikii ;  (tn) 

nti-aika 
niimika ;  (p)  Htr/.aika 

mvsnika ;  (m)  n 
musaika 

i;aika 

t/.laiti;ka 

t/./dska ;  (p)  tf.laiUka 

7.  S. 

sdfo  ;  sata  ;  pitol 

miti 

kinnuk 

8.  T. 

kuonahdt/lha 

nihvpst 

kairdtatju/lia 

9.  U. 

nat 

at 

put 

10.  V. 

iaa 

midwut 

11.  VV 

itiiig 

mio 

kiimelie 

la.  X. 

V. 

tami 

iii,  (?) 

imui  (?) 

13.  Z. 

kesUmdno 

kettuwdwa 

wistudica 

14. 
15. 
10. 
IT. 

netctr 

maiko 

aydhin,  et/imtoma 

t^am 

asoin,  omoma 
omom 

niko 

pdmiimde 
wanalam 

616 


PHILOLOGY. 


Tina. 

THAT. 

Al.l.. 

1. 

A. 

(intee) 

tsia  {cheuir) 

B. 

titik;  tete 

ieii< 

iidl/J 

C. 

idti 

iuyi 

tdhiii 

•J_ 

D. 

nusninu 

ntaji.d 

kujii 

3. 

H. 

iuii  nil 

yiiiyi 

y.iriiy.ivinit 

F. 

iiui  I  ((■)  /.ai,  iauUi 

it/Ju,  iisi,  ^aii  or  jtt 

cl.iid  or  ctsida  ;  (o)  atsiiiii 

G. 

/.wii 

t/ilii 

ctsiiuiii 

H. 

aijii 

alf.hi,  itsa 

i/.ii/iit,  ijaycUo 

1. 

tsii/i^c 

il/.lilii 

mi'iijiiir 

J. 

tea  lie,  Hjji 

tiii/ie,  lat^id»t/./tii 

/.mikiiti 

K. 

tsiiiic;  tpiii 

/.wiiko 

L. 

to  III ;  t/ilUi 

tlllil/./iH 

tviilninitdtyl ;  yiilyulit- 
katf.l 

4. 

.M. 

kl 

10)1. 

uyikdia 

N. 

/<;i ;  (k)  ,lfi 

ink  ;  (k)  ikwa 

l/./npK';  t/.la)i.wik  ;  (k) 
tl/id/io 

5. 

0. 

ije  or  r/a  or  ke 

ijii  or  kd 

nayindo 

1'. 

11  mi 

kiiwe 

ndijkiii 

(>. 

u. 

liiia/. ;  (m)  iluwtii/. 

iiif-ka 

saijii ;  (in)  kanawea 

u. 

okok  ;  jf,ei/.eik 
ijid ;  iii/.i 

;  {v)M- 

ia^ia/.  ;  id/.tau  ;  id/.kii 

kiuiawe  ;  (p)  kanairaiukt 

7. 

s. 

/umkii,  huska. 

luikiij^H 

koifan 

jmkolfan 

t 

T. 

kawd 

U 

u. 

hot 

luiniik 

10. 

V. 

inii 

uiiraii 

11. 

w 

JJIU 

j)i)f.ku 

Idlu 

IJ 

X. 

mainu  nlu^ 

Y. 

ill 

IKI 

noiomi 

lli    '/,.    mud 


U. 
IS. 
16. 
17. 


uiindl 


ilulm, 

oe 

^luMiimn 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


«17 


M*N»  C»"JCII). 

WHO, 

NCm. 

A. 

//./«» {i/yiir) 

mpiln 

nil^tttk 

B. 

tf.ldn 

Uaiemi , 

irtiek 

/.iDivt ;  jinkiUi 

C. 

zont-f.te 

tiiliU 

ij()/.n-tulf.le 

'i.  D.    yuinakttiU 


katf.tu 


(ikulak 


3.  E. 

iisisi/a 

luH 

kikiiln 

F. 
0. 
H. 

/.icaiit,  takotoqwut 
tuiiiwe,  niiliie 
hiiiit 

suet;  audi 

suguet 

^iiiit 

tiiiti^et ;  (d)  kiket 

kikita 

kiikita 

1. 
J. 
K. 
L. 

qa  or  ka 
kitf.utf.l 
aiitkti 
ty.lanily.1 

kiriit 

nut,  gwnt 

wa 

t^laa-ut/.li)i ;  kiito-kuitfl 

t^il(;ute 
/.misidn  ti; 
iiikdiiin/. 
hotxdji 

4.  M. 

N. 

ilaf.i<e 

Utif. ;  (k)  y.Uik 

jirt  ,•  (k)  iiiitma 

kiml'tm 

tsiwes ;  (k)  Isdjia 

5.  O. 
P. 

yiphea 
tarn 

it 
twi 

puiji 
iduhwe 

•I.  (1. 
U. 

tyLliapalu;  {m)a(hUH}.l/.i 
o/.oirc;  (p)  tf.lkaj»iUili,k. 

^ani;aii  ;  (m)  hiiitan 
•  t/.ldksla  1  (|))  tf.laii 

qiodpi/.  ;  ({iruhi}. 
kwapkuti ;  kviijm/. 

7.  S. 

siiiwi,  ^iiioi 

ein,  aid 

piinuj/k 

8.  T. 

Iwl 

kid/.at-i/)t/.l/.u 

aut/.l 

9.  U. 

ilomi 

10.  V. 

oktfdri 

II.  W 

kam  or  kiim 

kihi 

iiiJifuya 

Vi.  X. 
Y. 

ntaniiku 
iwaiu 

iluua 

tayi 

13.  Z. 

akaiim 

sikd 

iistsi 

14. 
15. 

vkyiuk 

at^akul/.l 
mariti 

adetwtf.1 

16. 
17. 

ayinn,  aioen 
Hiuiokom 

tiakt 

1.15 

momoa 

fil8 


P  H  I  L  C  L  O  a  Y. 


TO-DAT. 

rUTKRDAV. 

TlkMORIIOW. 

1.  A. 

dntil  (now)  (unlit) 

(huUA) 

{pHHtaij) 

n. 

tiktsin i  iiuju'diUe 

kanin  H 

tflttkdii 

c. 

litii 

inw 

ahmu 

a.  D. 

iiaoMtnitkin-kidkutk 

vrl/.lkm 

kaiimtM'iU 

3.  E. 

ki^Uqat 

pisUit/.U 

pn/.iduit ;  t^iij'.uiuhlf.  ; 
/.It ill II it  ' 

F. 

ctsiasqnt;  t$inanoi»i  (o) 

spitMlf.lt 

/.iihp ;  (e)  piit/ialip 

G. 

iim/iKjiiiiii/a 

irsjHi/iii/ 

Inayio 

H. 

iaidiit 

pildkiil 

aikviisl 

1. 

ateets.li/iil 

lodilfhUit 

ddr/ai/ii 

J. 

t:t</(listri  ,•  qOestnp 

lijiittqiit ;  t^ili^ 

elii 

K. 

Ms/.r/t. 

ids 

qel 

L. 

tikaka  ;  tnlkikot^'hahd^ 

kawttshts;  lilitfcU/./ 

kmrfskus 

4.  M. 

taks 

watii;/. 

U'dln/. 

N. 

mane;  i}.icdnca 

watt  HI 

mrisii/i. ;  mdisf. 

6.  0. 

jHimitg 

UHn 

tetjify 

P. 

mmkitwaii 

tdtim 

tdtim 

0.  (i. 

Hkotrif. ;   (m)  i^ailmka- 
tfla/. 

tnkvtfJ ;  fdkot/./ 

kaiif.  i  (m)  itwi/ni'a 

R. 

akikil/la 

tadntf.lkU 

U-e^e  ;  u-U)i.e 

7.  S. 

hnska  mdntifo 

k6yi 

miitf,  kiH 

8.  T. 

6niki{\) 

isis-kvhiftak 

dniki  (?•) 

0.  U. 

onattdlka 

OfM 

10.  V. 

kima 

11.  W 

pdla 

liuiame 

numloqomi 

12.  X. 

vyilii 

tuma 

Utu 

Y. 

iydsii 

moa 

m6v$ 

13.  Z. 

anicjf.ka  tsUtsikoi 

matiini 

apvndktta 

14. 

16. 

le. 

miuma 

ftodna 

hidmte 

17. 

piikala 

tukof 

potdku'ola 

N  ()  II  T  II  W  E  8  T  R  R  N    A  M  K  II I  C  A. 


01!) 


1.  A. 
II. 
C. 


vn, 
ii/iii  i  atf^Uulini 
aiiik 
cite 


3.  D.   hiiUa}.a 


K. 
G. 
H. 

iniia 

una,  /(da 
ai)iit/il 

a 

J. 
K. 

L. 

e 

a  • 
a,  a 

cid 

4.  M. 

N. 

(I 

0.  0. 

p. 

t 

ia 

0.  (J. 

u. 

a 

rkiid  ;  {[i)ka 

7.  S. 

lif,  tiave 

n.  T. 

miihokitskiu 

9.  U. 

kodak 

10.  V. 

ya 

11.  vv 

jiultna 

\i.  X. 
Y. 

"i 

alia 

13.  Z. 

e-mania 

14. 
If). 
16. 
17. 

ode 

(Ull/tU 

rlf.la 

bMs 

Iflii 

to 

ail  fin 

u-iha ;  miiali 

oke,  koke 

lait 

tiijo ;  mik» 

ta,  lam 

inuijo,  iitiju  ;  {v)  lUlks 

ht 

iidifU'ti 

let 

ndk( 

hue 

iWt^o  or  nvdjii 

mr/M 

paii,2><igu 

me/.lta 

ots 

ku.i,  kui\ 

tiiheike 

tcCitu ;  mill 

links 

wal;  (k)  1(110 

>M/.s ;  (k)  la/.t  1  nak^ 

Uehu 

ua 

pUa 

ndijiT  ;  mga 

akwuskii ;  (ni)  kuut 

ip. 

kc  or  ije  ;  nekst ;  iiktvtix- 

iM 

ka ;  ija 

Kdyk 

tcd&tt 

UfJa 

yium 

Uk 

tidt^ik 

ma 

l(idmu 

Utiu 

0mi* 

Hard  mot 

fimutsi 

kaii 

sii/tfeiu,  tipvdiu 

wikisi 


tokskvm 

tsakiiBdk 
kinai 
pitku 
puku 


(MO 


I'll!  1.0  1,0(1  Y. 


TWO 

Til  KM. 

rtM'H. 

1.  A. 

niii/kti/^ 

la,  Inki 

hpffi  (linffkiti/) 

n. 

iialoke 

ld<^ 

ti)  iil^i; 

c. 

ndkhuk 

tak 

tOiit^ik 

■i.  1). 

III,  iimin 

kilhii  ;  ktUy,lut 

kiiltd,  /.uattti 

:t.  i:. 

siaeln 

ktl/iku 

nun 

F. 

nrt,  tuti  ; 

(o)  aji/ 

l^rl/^ln !    ketlf.lii 
kdtilf.la 

;    (p)     iiim  or  miis 

0. 

dtet 

kit/.lr.i 

III  in 

II. 

ii/iiuni 

k<il/./r.i 

1)1111^111 

1. 

mi/e 

Ifllf^O 

iiion 

J. 

ml 

ti^iiilfl 

mot 

K, 

mlf 

kdlf.le 

1110.1 

L. 

I^ImAU 

tfjandt 

f/./tiu>os 

4.  M. 

lupit 

mildt 

piltlpt 

N. 

nupil;  (k) 

lUiplu) ; 

iiepl   mitiU ;  (k)  mitdl  ; 

mitao  pinitpt !  (V.)  pini'pt ;  pt 
tidpho 

ft.  O. 

kplin 

main  in 

liipig 

P. 

lupku 

pnHku 

pijHl 

6.  d. 

mdkuft 

t/.lon  or  f-lon 

Idket 

K. 

nidkiut 

IpciM 

Utkel 

7.  S. 

kefm 

itpsin 

Idopc,  tap 

8.  T. 

t»6f.wa/.wa 

piii>int/.l/.u 

ttaiki/jit»o/.icdkin 

1».  U. 

Idjiit 

Htani 

WOHip 

10.  V. 

hoka 

hdUki 

ira/iaia 

11.  W 

hdki,  luii/i 

UKiti 

luitdma 

la.  X. 

hwal 

maniigit  (\) 

hwdt^iwit  ( f) 

Y. 

waMiii,  tcaiieyu 

jmlitiiu 

wafsikweyu 

13.  Z. 

iiiitokiim 

nilwktkum 

iiesoi  or  nitoi 

14. 

lU/il 

wiyu 

mtn 

16. 

dza 

til  Idka 

wiag 

16. 

velte 

palie 

waltd 

17. 

Willi 

pake 

u-atsd 

k: 


N  O  R  T  H  W  K  H  T  K  R  N    AMERICA. 


621 


I  I 


nvi. 
1.  A.    ikiinlni 

B.  Uiiku'iMe 

C.  iu^nliik 

iilkilnke 

kwiinlimahe 

wutthune 

»TIN. 

Iiikiiftr  (ttkulli) 

i^ial^ita 

hmliihi 

•i.  1).    yi/^ko 

nmitn 

viaUitfla 

3.  E.    /itlikst 

V,    hi/;  IHlUiiitii;  Mhkial'i 

(J.    hilikiUn 

II.    I(,ilikiil 

1,      liiliils 

.1.      Isrlnl^s 

K.    <JfA»/l 

L.    tii<i/.Da,  tf.laU}.(it 

liiijiimiikU 

Iiii/iih;  tiii/ii nl^Utii ;  III- 

ijiinikslii 
Utirii;aikslii 
hot\;imdktl 
Isilnli^e 
mill  ^j' 
tu/nm 
tfiilii/nit^i 

li^Hhil/lkii 

lispiil ;   iiiiipiillf;e  ;    litpiil- 

kill ;  (<')  ^npii/kii 
isii/iikislinn 

honks 

lllHtpilS 

hops 
liiti;oos 

4.  M.   p«/n< 

N.  y«i/«/ ;  (U)  7«i/.'i'  >'  /"i- 

oi/iiku 

oilu/.n  {k)  piitd/  iiiiii 

oindpt 

niniipt  or  iiiniipt ;  luskas 

/.mm 

5.  O.    ^iicii 
P.    pika 

iiinmi 
niipUka 

noilip 
liipitka 

0.  (J.    Awriwnm 
U.    kinniam 

luf.iim 
Uipim 

snnumdkiitt 
siiniimdkust 

7.  S.    hiitmn 

I/If,  taf 

/i^viimiia 

H.  T.    h6lal/.l)La 

0.  V.    tonnpni 

nakakiguptane 

lapki^upldne 

10.  V.    f/jn 

takaia 

twkaikinis 

11.  VV,  mo/6si 

12.  X.    fiiimumif;  (i) 
Y.    napiiiu 

natakskueifu 

13.  Z.    niJt/.n 

nado 

kitsikvm 

14.  s«/f" 

15.  kenekiis 

niipo 
patirak 

i)lf.lp 
semUwi 

16. 
17. 


mahdr 


pavdke 


ayivohuit^,  w(Uidkaoia 


156 


}t 


622 


1.  A. 
B. 

C. 


EIOIIT. 

ulkitiygi  {alketinga) 

li^nniwaha 

nakdtUi 


'i.  D.    u/.dtsa  ;  wa-f.atsa 


a.  E. 
F. 

G. 
H. 

1. 
J. 
K. 
L. 

4.  M. 

N. 


o.  O. 
1'. 

«.  (1. 
U. 


iikoDjis 

liadnirtit ;  (o)  Umit/./ 

haeiii'iit 

tuuin 

takiit^c 

tsdamos 

ti^dmas 

tiikdl^i 

oimalat 


PHILOLOGY. 

NINE, 

lanizi-elif.lahula 

ty^lHveet 

aitfJanli 

kaikilu 

liniit/^lhikokvmu 
/aji.aiiuiit ;  /.a/iaitot 

pi/.aiidt 

f.(if.aiidt 

/.oD  n 

taiiii/.,  tdiigii/ 

t6o/.u 

t/.kw 

qoils 


uimCital;  (k)  pu/iatuiimt    tsirins!;  tanmrst;  (\i)t$a- 
iicid  /.simkii 


noiiiidi 
miifpi/kit 


ta/idiiiiiii;i/iip//i 
/ugiiLstiidlkcs 


ksd/kiii  ;  (m)  kol/lknl        k trios  ;  (m)  kiri'i.s 
kiistd/.tkin  kuaiUst 


7.  S.     kei'miui 

8.  T. 

9.  U 
10.  V 

u.  w. 

U'.  X. 
Y. 

13.  Z.    imiiisd 


ndtmeki^uptdne 
hatsikikiri 


wdnwuhtt 

natskaiaki^ 
kirihariki-ikiriii 


lanizi 

kumnffin 

huiinrza  , 

ilu 

dpiikst 

dpun  ;  optmt^st ;  {c)dpu- 

niksl 
opuiiikst 
y.Otf.ly.utfM 
panulfs 
pdtiut^s  ,, 

(/.huiluiiUp 

pulimpt 

puUinpl ;  (k)  pulumpt 


iiii/ifr/j) 
niwilspu  ;  Idkenti 

tdl)(.Mikaiii  ;  lat'/.lilam 
fdl^f.lelam 

tiiiijia 

saiiitu'lir 

taiinip 

etsch&ioi 

liaiiii^- 

paimanvf  (?) 
sigica/ui/u 


14. 
16. 
16. 

17. 


at]f.lkwatyil 
tvusuya 

ire)ttsicatsd,  siiileija 


piuksiu 

tsaiidktcot/./ 
finiuiask 


kiiipdi 

ty.ld)i.wa 
kitps 


pehelega,  maJidrkauia       uehkun-mafidr 


NORTHWESTERN   AMERICA. 


623 


ELEVEN. 

1.  A.  lanizi-oal-elf-la 
B. 

V  C.  aity^le-ataij    . 

2.  D.  t/.la-oke 

3.  E.  6}nikst-ety.lcnik6 
F.  opmitpl  el/.lenikoo ;  (c)     etji^lesil 

—  cly.ltiniq6 

'     G.  opaiiikst  /((/.liiakua 

H.  Y.ul-f.ljf.ut^lt-alnttks 
^  1. 

.  J.  Ud-jmu,  t^il-jyign 

K.  pa/iiit^-kullotsiis 

L.  t/,Uuilianti^s-to-lmkc 

4.  M.  piitimt-tca)(.-7ia/.s  jmtiiiit-way.-UipU  limptit 

N.  iiiiiciui/.^:  (k)iciHald/.sl    iniie>i(ipt ;  {\i)  ui/iampt   miptit ;  (V)  neptil 


TWKl-VK. 

TWENTV. 

tanizi-oat-miykay 

nat-la7iizi 

juit-kwane^e 

nakaidt/.h 

natahwena 

t)Lla-is 

asaUiiwu;  aiwo 

6j)iikst-ct/.lxisclu 

sit/.li6pukst 

etfiksil 

esclidpanikst 

opaniksl  iil<isH 

aseltt  opanikst 

ji.ut/.//.iit/M-ti/-trj(iiis 

i^iiUfOt flit  fit 

stiUt^r 

htl-sdl 

tmim-toomui^ 

pannt^-katlsiilc 

t^um-lomuf. 

.  lo-sd/c 

tasale-tas/.el/il 

5.  O.    \idiitely.k 


leplin-ntet/.le 


Icpiiik 

/(ipuitsjio  ;  tapimlakeiiuii 


Q.    UiifMikam  ikima-ift         tdt/Mikam  iknud-niakufl  >iiciki/sl-t/./k<ityJ 
R.    tdl/^lelam-konc-if.l  ldt/.letam-kimc-mukusl       makiis/.t/Mtt/-/ 


7.  S.    tinifi-no-wdn 

tinifi-no-kefm 

keim-tinifia 

8.  T. 

9.  U. 

nasgidian 

10.  V. 

11.  W. 

12.  X. 
Y. 

wahdwalotju 

13.  Z. 


naUsipiu 


'.4. 
15. 


%-kitpi^ 


694 


PHILOLOGY. 


1.  A. 
B. 

C. 


tat-hinizi 
I  Utkt-kiranei^e 
tatahtrena 


3.  D,  katsamia 

3.  E.  kit/.lidpiikst 

F.  t^ii/.Midpn  tiiksl 

G.  kct/Jf/l)  opa n  iksl 
H.  ka>/^lay^dkst 

\,  s/.lif.oat^e 

i.  t^ani^  UimjnnU^ 

K.  kanif.  tomv/. 

L.  l'-aita-tus/.ft}.l 

4.  M.  mitaaptit 

N.  mildptU  ;  (k)  mtaptit 

5.  O.  mdtiiik 

P.  vuUuitspu ;  matimlake- 


ONE  lltTNURED. 

laniii-tlanizi 
kwan"ian-tkwanise 

etiiunno 


ONE  THOUSANK. 


kiu!it/.lit/.li-tu  un  uo 


/.at^iUjikst 

iiqakain  ;  >iuqo6kain        iiopirwkstuqOn 

jLotsitsdkist  aopu  nikstaijfi  n 

vlnakskain  ;  hutsiitsakst.  /.iil/.lji.uf/.ltkam 

simqmit^e  pu  iiccs-sir  mqcxit^e 

2>d  nU^-tit/.l-ti'i  mpmii'         piinit^-tal/.l(^-panit^-tit/.l- 

lOmpmi^ 
]Hiiuks-t}.l-t6mu/. 
ttutlui  ntp-tasijd 


putdptit 
jmtdptit 

nii/ilaipiiik 


putmufnf 


«.  Q. 
R. 


l~f.lon-t/.lkatyLl 
tf.lon-t/.hit^l 


7.  S.    ppn  tinifia 
K  T. 
9.   V. 

10.  V. 

11.  w. 


ntanpatan 


tdqamcmak 
itdkamimak 

tuitipc 

siitdatst 


idty:.tikam  ikarmmak 
tinifi-tumpe 


18.  X. 
Y. 

13.  Z. 


pahimanotfu 
nihepi 


It 


kipipi 


kil^ig-kitp; 


kipipoi 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


6-25 


1.  A. 
B. 
C. 


aii/e 
iat/.l 
imhja 


tanttrna 
thoutna 


TO  RUN. 

kiif/.lkai 

trll/./d 

/liggook 


2,  D.    iki  or  eke 


3.  E. 
F. 
G. 
H. 
I. 
J. 
K. 
L. 

4.  M. 

N. 


5.  O. 
P. 


{•//./in  sta  nauilitf. 

ityJin  siist ;  {c)  siust  ki'ictsr/^; ;  kuetseKi^ 

il^lin  okwns  iuikwinum 

it)L/iH  kdiiiiwUukudtkwi  iiaiiih/ 

ct/i.lui  kof.wo  titdwi 

ic//.t  sko  sktU/./dka 

kiiit/.li<  id ;  tsahido  qakviyM  kanaikdi 

hipii^a  i]>iiukii(-(i  ivi/ukdikga 

tikwuta^a  ;  (k)  tku-dtata  it'.u^'i ;  indt^ti  ;  (k)  /;«-    icmpi^a  ;  uaiapii^a  ;  (k) 
laild  wmif.lUa 


pitdxjti 
pddsl 


piisi/i/>is/d>/(i 
okiiiia 


jupiltllql 
llllHISt 


6.  U.    itf.l/.nliim;  {m)iia/.il/.-     iint/Miko,ni^l(i;  {m)  un-     spaknmiiklc 
R. 

7.  S. 

8.  T. 

9.  U. 

10.  V. 

11.  W. 


l/.i'ilohaf. 
alHil;f.//.d/clxi 

kiiiiinapfo 

ki/iHHsaimi 

j>H)i  at  pun 

itskuk 


yiima 


l/.ltti(jriinirt.ii/,ii 
(/.li'ik/iihst 

rikiiilninnipka 

kiniikiitsimi 

])oniii 

kitsik 


liaf.i\iieko 

milltriri 

kiiit/./ukeimi 


i/ay.oine 


12.  X. 

likarii 

mipi 

llOHlflii, 

Y. 

tikd 

VJi 

pi:iiinid/.o 

13.  Z. 

tauo/iip 

jtokaie 

14. 

/.ii  ikii 

yintaksirt/^l 

iitsntt^iatfJ 

15. 

yoltun 

"&■'•• 

16. 

kirii/.,  kifoa 

pd/.,  pan 

17. 

nilti./nll 

ptic 

157 


686 


PHILOLOGY. 


TO  DANCE. 

TO  »INU. 

TO  si.Ftr. 

1. 

A. 

I>d/.t(in 

{iitii/i) 

[iiamUtee) 

B. 

tiiii/iiiii 

■/.r/kiile 

C. 

i^aiina 

tiiii/i/i 

luiilld 

8. 

D. 

?taianit/lnam 

kwomn&nc 

3. 

E. 

mili/.am 

p/riiinm 

nti/ii 

F. 

qtvaimitUsol ;  (/U'aii)iiiit- 

Sllf 

iikiiiiem  ;  u/iifkirnmii/i 

lliirc  ;   ((■)  iti/. 

a. 

qiitiimintsot 

ii/inkiriiiim 

till/,  (ir  iti't. 

H. 

(/innili)^ 

iikirunktiuiit^iiitim 

kiitit/lilif. 

I. 

S(I/.II1H 

i/iit 

.1. 

Sf/i/l'UJIIS</il 

maifrhidt ;  smnicntnat 

Isihjini 

K. 

L. 

knh'iikoi 

iipostisnkonn 

l/hihiiiaoi 

4. 

M. 

piiliomsu,  »('«.«( j» 

irciijiirii 

piiimik(^<i 

N. 

iua^u^a  ;    (k)    tijliupn- 
niti;  tkopiuiik 

tiutqii''(i  ;   (li)  Itdnj/iiij 

liiiiiii;(i ;  (k)  )ilri)l( 

5. 

0. 

iokseak 

tinjsciit// 

'Jinriijijl 

1'. 

fiifalki 

Ottjsfis 

ji/iis/    . 

0. 

Q. 

tiiiiit^' ;  iil/.oiiitrkiia 

lalaniii/;{^m)nl'^nliiln»lii  kiinin  .•  anckoplel 

R. 

Ixt  tfii  Isk  ;  »iii  ici'i  tsk 

iunskalaliuii  ;  oqcwaiu- 

t/J,JO 

(ikijitc ;  aiiuiptc 

7. 

.s. 

iatnmpiiih 

I'iiqdUl 

pirei,  tiiuci 

8. 

T. 

kinnkitilaiini 

l/.lii/.riviisialu 

ki/Kilskiaimi 

9. 
10. 

U. 
V. 

sko/uk 
iUnitisi 

11. 

\V 

iidhrkali 

ynsn 

ildmati 

13. 

X. 

nikar 

liiiikiniii 

lijmi 

V. 

una 

oviitllm 

ant  or  abi 

13.  Z. 


iiiokdu 


14. 
13. 
16. 
17. 


/.oidt/.l 


irl  itr 
aiik 

yatdmkoa 
kOji/ii 


1 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


627 


TO  BPKAK. 

rii  sF.K. 

TO  LOVE. 

1.  A. 
B. 
C. 

(/I'isiii  (yiilUii^k) 

uHuil/.llmJne 

ydllhik 

aiiii  (iicel/en) 

/.aiin 

iintti 

(rpiiscc  or  kane^liei) 
niU/.Udl/.l 

2.  D. 

ko6j))i.a 

kols/./dkit/.l 

3.  K. 
K. 
G. 
H. 
1. 
.f. 
K. 
I-. 

hnkidiita 

kirn  1(1  kirde/t 

kuddfjifiifil 

vkiiriiaiii/iki'm/. 

/ot/ot 

to'lifnl/.lii. 

kali'i /.ii'i II  ;  talapina 

wiiiklni. ;  iiikfgiii 

inli^iii  ;  iiikiii 

ijiriki/iiin 

ulsiils/fislDiimii/. 

Idptiim 

t/.ldurjiril/.l ;  a/.d  niti' 

iakiuscivi'i  sa 

y^uiipieslat ;  }.oy.(iisti;iti 

/.imienlr  ,•  /jimdiiiki 

y.amiiiiki 

n/.iiiiidiiik 

s/.ullii  or  sy.adlii 

/jtdiili^iii 

/.isairiisi 

4.  M. 

N. 

ilsiiiksa 

siituira ;  (Ic)  /ut/Jikra 

hiikisa  ;  pi-li  ksii 
itiiki;a  ;    paliiksa ;    (q) 
(itjt'/iiiftuk 

llllldlliril 

tiiipy  ;  (k)  tqeqnaira 

5.  O. 
I'. 

ii/i/ikin 
so  nasi. 

miskalciiiitiil 
piilslaliiiike 

ktdro 

ilia  komdiy.lkas 

0.  Q. 

n. 

piilninilii ;  p(Mlca/ir/ 
ki/Hi/diiiil 

?ii(y/i)i)iil ;  ikija 
huk/.ikst ;  ianidk/.aw 

lip-f.edmii/.t  (I  love  thee 
tllqi/.id 

7.  S. 

ril/ill 

sli^cpulont 

li^vkdiihele 

8.  T. 

ill  sill  iaty.ti 

l/.lyaidnia 

tkaioUy.ul 

9.  U. 

/null  k  Ilk 

sle 

10.  V. 

kitiisi 

kimd 

11.  vv 

.   Iiwiri 

uiimdki 

yaqiitvii 

12.  X. 
Y. 

iiiiipitkiin 
yiulua,  tikwi 

puniiii 
jiimi 

13.  Z. 

ipiii/ca 

iiiteniia  (I  see  him) 

' 

14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 

IscnktSiDk 

ndsut)i.l 

wikimdks 

» 

tellu-t 

628 


PHILOLOGY. 


TO  KILL. 

1.  A. 

B.  ninntt/.l/.icaa 

C.  yalehi 

'i.  D.  kiiepit/,1 

3.  E.  piilisia 

F.  piihtii/ii;  jm/iskai/enii : 

(f)  piil'stnm 

G,  piihit/tlsa 

H.  y-filijUiiliim  ' 

I.  kiildllnm 

J.  S(<>^«  ,•  tiri/jio/s 

K. 

L.  txii  iihiii^  ;  kakai^tin 

4.  M.  wapsiiiini 
N.  ityilinwia 


5.  O.  /till ) it /  It i I) 
P.  ;)(■»«  4< 

6.  (J.  <a/iiiaklxi ;  iomaknt 
R.  Diiil/.liiu'd 

7.  S.  .sVd//^ 

8.  T.  kinnl/.lin 

9.  U.  «///( 

10.  V.  ?/i^i^- 

11.  VV.  yiiiKitiia 


siutd 
)i  int. lilt 
iiiiilsiik 


(iiuitld 

t/Mikiili^  ;  tdlnktea 

dmi^ 

aslflukaUy.kin 
fsoriliii 
l^ii'mipmiityl 

t/.l(tki/a 

trir/.^iisd 

niekiiike;  aJiinawi;  (k) 

(I  ilk 

ifiii'/l ;  i/iiikta 
liiijiitkc 

mCil/liiit ;  (m)  (iniitf.la- 

vhi ;  idyiviit 
miil/.luit 

si  fill,  pint 

kaidnitsa 

ti;ii/kiin 

sdu 

1/(11/ H 


^   mn 


12. 

X. 

kirririiiinir 

kd  III  nil 

Y. 

irnlsd 

kuli 

13. 

Z. 

<  nild 

apiii 

14. 

kii/rii/l 

tiki'iil/l 

nilkirs 
iiihi/iikufj 


tut/.li/.a 

turili;  ;   tii^ilif  ;   (c)  td/.i- 

tsiilir  ;  tdpilig  (plu-) 
kiinti^i/i/. 
t)i.ljiMr/f; 
tfJdhiika 

ieliitetii ;  iclntsftsii 

aii<,dtii 

ipili^ikiiiki  ;  (k)  liilii;a 


laiitsii) 
rcitdki 

mfit/riil;  (ni)  anulf.v\ila 

nti'i  t/.iii' ;  Id  tf.<x 

tdpiili ;  f;it6p 

ptit/./in/.(l 

kak 

tyMaf; 

yntsdua 

U'i'i  iiinii 
u-ini 

t/.l<iki^it/l 


i 


mmtnm 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


629 


1.  A. 
B. 
C. 


TO  OO. 

tvusli^ian 
tanas 
natat/.l,  i6kj.o 


2.  D.    t/.lami/.am 


a  VI, 

ndnas 

yoku'o 

tiikam 


8.  E. 
F. 
G. 
[I. 
I. 

nasit./.la 

hid  ;  /.iiif;  ;  (c)  )^v^](. 

nu/laliii^ 
o/.im/.u 

tiif-udnta 

ti/.ilif,  Ishiiifl  ;  {c)  Istr/.iii/L 

ts/.'Hiit/.l 

tpiiii/.ta 

dl/.la 

.1. 

ivakum 

esi 

K. 

L. 

(iyMly.lun 

Isid/.a 

4.  M. 

kii<;a ;  kiii 

kiim  ;  iirdkiam 

N. 

icmti<;a ;  (k)  toinatn 

viiiiun  ;  (k)  wiua 

5.  O. 
P. 

vintiikstaya  ;  vdnUiql  (imp.) 
tila 

nhiUikum 
tiUtm 

6.  Q. 
R. 

mi^a;  dfyoia 
maid  ;  alf-oyi/. 

mi'ite:  mfipa 
mfitc  or  I'ltte 

7.  S. 

tgak 

pndk 

8.  T. 

kiniiiimi 

aut/./i/.a 

9.  r. 

ken 

kdpkc 

10.  V. 

kala 

kalak 

n.  w 

i/aplr 

timo  . 

12.  X. 
Y. 

midktri 

jiaiki 
kimd 

i:).  Z. 

isuipot 

jwksnpvt 

14. 

u-(il/Mitf.lli;i 

Iu7>siii<it/.l  . 

ir>. 

10. 

opoi 

men,  taiikomoko 

iiiii 

kii/ni,  kitim 

17. 

Italtc     o 

nkiiiit(,:iim 

15S 


It 


MISCELLANEOUS  VOCABULAKIES. 


BKSfDKs  till-  words  oflhf  Shosly  liingimgo  licforc  mentioned,  Mr.  Dnnii  rollcrtcd  voca- 
liiilnrics  ol"  sovirni  dialeds  s|Mikcn  im  Itio  fiiii'rnniPiil<i,  wliicli  lire  of  C'spccinl  value,  as 
lK>ing  the  only  infi)rninlion  wliicli  »c  possess  relative  to  the  c'lhiiograpliy  "I  that  refjion. 
'Phi!  I'ollowing  are  a  lew  words  ol'lhe  laiiL'iiaue  spoken  by  the  Indians  on  that  river, alH)nt 
two  hnndrcd  nnd  t'lliy  miles  above  its  mouth.   The  name  of  the  tribe  was  not  usecrtained. 


(I.)     D  P  P  !•;  H    .*<  A  <•  K  A  M  I'.  N  T  O. 


hair,  tonioi 
eye,  tininit 
nose,  Isiino 
month,  /..t/,  /,sr/o 
ehin,  kintikiit 
forehead,  Iri 
arm,  hiijr 
fmjiers,  /scmiit 
leg,  to/r 
/(Mil,  h'tdinoso 
knee,  hiiiiik 


knil'e  (oi  iron),  ki/ekfle 

snn,  s.ls 

fire,  jin 

water,  iiiriiii,  7iiriniu 

di'er,  nop 

salmon,  iiioiink 

grape,  iii/iiht 

rush,  ISO 

eat,  I  HI  or  lins 

see,  or  lot  me  see,  ivila,  I'lfr 

go,  kfffa 


At  the  residenec  of  Cai.iain  Snter,  a  respectalili'  settli'r,  who  hud  estalilished  himself 
aJHiiit  .'I  hundred  miles  np  tin'  .Sacramento,  Mr.  Dana  learmd  that  all  the  Indians  of  that 
vicinity,  who  were  dividid  into  mnnerons  Irilx's  or  bands,  mi;;lit  U-  referred  to  two  raees. 
one  i>f  which  dwelt  chielly  on  the  east  side  of  the  river,  and  the  otlu'r  on  the  west,  or  on 
the  banks  of  Feather  llivcr,  a  tributary  to  the  Saeraincnlo  on  the  enstem  side,  about 
twenty  miles  further  up.  Tliese  raeis  reseudiled  fine  another  in  every  respert  but  lan- 
guage. To  the  Ibrmer  lielong  the  Tuliiliii  trilx;,  of  whicli  a  vocabulary  was  obtained,  as 
well  as  the  following  bands,  ibe  names  of  which  were  furnished  by  Captain  Siiter,  viz.; 
th<;  Ochccamiics,  .'scivusbamucs,  ('h'ipiiiimcs,  Oiiiulchuiuncs,  .*sicumncs,  \\  alagumnes, 
Cosiunnes,  Sololiiuincs,  Turealeiunes,  .Say  waniines,  Ncvii  biinmes,  Malchennies,  .Sagayn- 
yumncs,  Mutheleinncs,  and  Lopolatinmes.  In  the  dialccis  of  all  these  tribes  the  word  for 
water  is  kik,  while  in  those  of  the  other  race  it  is  luviiii. 


• 


■^w<»w«iwn  mnniifiiwipii  ipii<«ininiimnjjn 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 
(S.)    T  A  I,  A  T  U  I. 


631 


A  tribe  living  on  the  Kossima  River,  a  tributary  to  iho  Sncrnmento,  on  the  eastern 
side,  obout  eighty  miles  from  its  mouth. 


man,  smre 
woman,  csie  or  esnti 
child,  time 
daughter,  tele 
brolhir,  aili 
fnllior,  /(ita 
hcnd,  tikit 
hair,  ntimti 
car,  n/ok 
eye,  ui/iii 
nosi',  u/c 
mouth,  hii/ie 
neck,  Hirmit 
arm,  taicii 
hand,  ikii 
fingers,  kiiljnhu 
leg,  koli) 
foot,  si'bei 
toe,  ti 

housr,  ko'/Jd 
how,  oli 
arrow,  h'tulo 
shoos,  lok,  loka 
sky,  irii^irk 
sun.  III 
dny,  liifimii 
nighr,  hmcil 
dnrli,  /uniulki 
lire,  Hike 
water,  kik 
river,  tvakat^i 
niDunliiin,  irrpa 
sliine.  saifii 
trrr,  ii/iiira 
woikI,  limber,  kawil 


griipns,  mute 

deer,  "ifia 

bird,  /line,  ti 

fish,  y(/< 

salmon,  tii>iUH 

name,  itc'ik 

beads,  limciit 

good,  wilcwil 

bod,  mi'/c 

old,  iiilntniti-e 

new,  I'y.vfr 

s«(?el,  li:iiiti^ni 

sour,  siksik 

quieli,  urazdk 

go  quick,  fow  weaznk 

run,  /'(/^'c 

walk,  /»/» 

swiiri,  n/«c 

talk,  hiDiiii 

sing,  hukik 

dance,  linmk 

cat,  Ipiiniik 

one,  keiKilc 

two,  iii/oki) 

three,  ^/./.•o 

/bur,  oiri'iko 

five,  kcusdko 

six,  tcniclx) 

seven,  kiinikuk 

eight,  /!■  iiiinda 

nine,  *)/ 

ten,  ('/,();/« 

twenty,  //«« 

thirty,  iii/iini 


(3.)    P  UJ  11  N  I.        (4.)    S  E  K  t!  M  \  K.        (.^.      T  S  A  M  A  K. 

or  the  second  race,  or  that  iidiabiting  the  western  Imtdv  ol'  the  Sacramento,  Mr.  Dana 
iiblained  the  name  of  the  li)ll(Avuig  trilies,  viz. : — Rushuiniies  (<ir  Piijiini),  Secumnos  (or 
SekCimtie),  Yasunines,  Nemshaw,  Ki.sky,  Yalesunmes,  Huk,  and  Yukal.     The  following 


632 


PHILOLOGY. 


vornbiilnricH  Mong  to  Iho  iwo  first  nicnlioncil,  nnd  tn  n  third,  thi;  iinriii'  dl'  which  wns  not 
dixtiiiotly  uiidurslciod,  l>'it  socincd  to  be  Uh<imtik,  ut  T^uiiuik. 


tvtvut. 

KlrUMNI. 

TIAM^K. 

iniili 

(line 

viitilik 

muilik 

H'oman 

kele 

kele 

kale 

child 

imiiilummiai 

dnii|{htrr 

eli 

hfud 

l^iiti^iit 

Istol 

liutful 

hiiir 

oi 

lino 

ni 

cnr 

mill 

hnto 

ono 

pyp 

iriili^il 

il 

hi  I 

n(i8e 

hriikit 

S'fl/lll 

month 

mnUt 

sim 

neck 

tokoldk 

kiii 

kiiliit 

nrm 

vm 

link 

kaliil 

hnnd 

t^apai 

mil 

lamsiill  or  Intiit^iil 

finycrs 

tfikikiip 

hili 

l^ikikiip 

Ic).' 

jini 

JHnlo 

bimpi 

foot 

kiilii/i 

pat 

pat 

tiie 

tup 

liiti 

hmiso 

III' 

ht 

bow 

III  11  mi 

nrrow 

liiiiii 

»hoP8 

mill  m 

bends 

liawiit 

s'vv 

hihi 

sill) 

okn 

oko 

dny 

oko 

eki 

nijiht 

/« 

fire 

;" 

sa 

''" 

Hntei- 

iiiniiii,  mop 

moji 

momi 

river 

Itikolok 

miimdi 

viiimti 

stone 

n 

0 

tree 

tfa 

tSIl 

gmpps 

miili 

dej'r 

vil 

hi.l 

kill 

bird 

nil 

lish 

paid 

snlmnn 

mill 

niiii 

name 

ill  nil 

good 

luk 

III  line 

hiik 

ba<l 

-■ 

''>'", 

mniilik 

old 

liaiiil 

new 

■j! 

!„■ 

sweet 

sialnk 

N  O  R  T  II  \V  K  8  T  E  R  N    AMERICA. 


ess 


«nur 

hnston 

run 

wnik 

Nwim 

talk 

sing 

(liincc 

onn 

IHCI 

llirci' 
I'm  II' 
(ivc 
f\\ 
sfvrn 

<inlii 

niiii' 
ten 


rrjUNi. 

MKKL'MNI. 

oho 

mm 

t^d 

//ewa 

ii/e 
ni 

uiyi 

iriliiiiil 

riiirm 

t.sri/ 

/Kiio 

ti 

11  Ikle 

/&tic 

lien 

t"/"'» 

xiijiui 

jieKel 

Isi 

iiiiistik 

mil  Ilk 

tiiii,  n 

Inn.  a 

/it /mi 

/iiiisi  (?) 

/"■'',<' 

Iiipiii  (!) 

mn/^iini 

iiii'Isiiin 

trdpilnilkll 

iitliik 

(0.)    t,  A    SOI.  r.  DAI).        (7.J    SAN    M  I  IJ  I' R  I,. 

I  Ik'^jiiii  liikiiiH  down-,  n\  llic  siinu'  lime,  vocaliuliirics  (jI'  Hvd  lniii;iiii;.'i's  IVnm  Indian' 
lic'idiiijiii!,'  Ill  llicsc  missions,  hut  was  unliirluimtcly  inlrrniplnl  in  my  task,  and  had  no 
ii|i|«iruinity  nl'minpletliig  ll.  Tlio  \vw  words  which  were  (li)t(iiiif'd  will  serve  nt  Irast  In 
shnw  that  these  hiiij;iui^'es  are  independi  nl  ril'eaeh  other,  and  uf  all  the  rest  ronlained  in 
this  work. 


«i 


m 


one 

two 

thron 

four 

five 

six 

seven 

eight 

nine 

ten 

man 

woninn 

father 

mother 

son 

daughter 

head 


i.A  sni.niiAn, 
ll  iiii  ilaa 

Hire 

kiij'/ii 

iil/ii 

imnitii' 

hiiiiii'ikrrl 

iiili'i  hi^a 

lailemi 

iriif.so 

llllllSOSO 

mill' 

riirirmr 

iiikiipa 

nikiiiia 

tiikini^ 

lit  kit 


159 


•IAN  Mli.lTKI., 

loki 

k'la.iit 

till  Ml  i 

kisa 

ftlih'iilij 

piniilr.  t 

lepii 

sriitel 

lii/ilriij' 

Iriipii 

/otti,  liiai,  lo^uai 

lloii' 

latti 

(ipai 

/laser,  pasii 

jiiiSi:r,  pasrl 

tdliuko 


@ 


■&■ 


®  *' 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


■tt  liU    12.2 

m  m 


u 

itt 

u 


140 


1^  i^  U4 


Hiotographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WIST  MAIN  STRBIT 

WItSTIR.N.Y.  MSn 

(716)I73-4S03 


fe 


684 


PllILOLOU  Y. 


LA  M>I.IDAD. 

SAN  moDti. 

uvro/. 

teasd^o 

i$SO 

Itnt/.ilo 

«1 

ICHinto 

Aijn 

trugeiUo 

hai 

triliko 

H  A  1  I,  T  S  A. 

hair 
cars 
nose 
eyes 
mouth 


(8.J 

Mr.  A.  Anderson,  to  wliom  I  nm  indolrted  Ibr  the-  Carrier  vocabulnry,  niso  giivi- 
me  the  following  words  of  the  language  spoken  by  (lie  Inuinns  on  Milbank  Sound,  in 
latitude  52°  20'  north. 


man,  tiiimiis,  trisin 

woman,  kdnitm 

child,  hajik 

child,  my,  hitnuk 

boy,  hitmikir/. 

head,  kete 

hand,  liaitisi 

chief,  f.dimas 

slave,  kiikii 

Europeans,  kdmpk^wii 

house,  koiika 

blanket,  kv//.sirm 

scissors,  ka/,.kiiit/./i)i 

black  silk  handkerchief.  /<dti/kml/./i' 

twine,  Isuii/'. 

beads,  khiaUif.  {t/t.laiala/.  i 

canoe,  kilwii 

knife,  Itainum 

shoes,  kaiiui/. 

shot,  ti^ulsa/.aio 

iron,  kiliy. 

stone  n<lze,  kiii/.-kaul 

sun,  t/./ik^iiulit 

moon,  ?iiisi)i. 

wind,  ioiila 

thunder,  jiijcfl/ 

rain,  yii/^k-ua 

snow,  kitispi^ 

hail,  ketpti; 

fire,  ti^ullilii 

water,  v-di)  m 

dog,  vats 

wolf,  ku-a^ilts 

deer,  kiijumila 

deer-skin,  ku-atsa/. 


gout,  <j7/;( 

Ix'avrr,  kt>i>liin 

goose,  /(Uiakaitk 

salmon,  ima/i. 

grvat,  kaikias 

small,  jMiiio/a 

strong,  If-hiiruk 

dead,  ///"/ 

1,  II  Ilka 

thou,  ksii 

we,  iiiikiniiiak 

many,  kitinuri 

lew,  liuna 

yes,  /a 

no,  /•'i»ji 

one,  iiUDiiuk 

lw(i,  mii/iiik 

three,  ifu/.tiik 

four,  «/(>hA- 

five,  skiiiiik 

six,  kti/Ziiiiik 

seven,  nuil/.tiiis  or  mti /.simii.\ 

eight,  i/n/Jii/.iiiniis 

nine,  mnmisknmin 

ten,  hiifliuskum 

drink  (lo),  nukay. 

see,  /()/.  i/v(At 

say,  kimloy. 

\\v,  tell  falsehood,  kaiiku 

walk,  /<W(i 

go,  >i>inina 

come,  hiiinan 

trade,  A7irt;t 

understand,  haomilt 


THE  "JARGON," 


OR 


T  R  A  I)  E  -  L  A  N  G  U  A  G  E    OF    OREGON. 


A  vKitv  siliiiiiliir  plienonn'iioii  in  |)liil(ili>ny  is  ihi-  lrii(l<'-lnni;iiiin<',  or,  ns  il  is  gciifrnllj 
collcil,  tlic  J((/-^'o;/,  ill  use  mi  llic  N'iirlliwrst  (Vuist,  niicl  in  ihn  Orcpm  Territory.  Tin 
circiiinstiinccs  to  wliii-h  it  owes  its  orii;in  arc  iirolmlily  ns  li)llow.s :  Wlicn  Ihr  lirilisli 
and  Ainrrirnn  lrii(liiii;-slii|)s  first  npiwaictl  on  tin'  const,  iiIhiuI  sixty  yrars  «};<>,  tliey 
liiiinil  tlirn-  ninny  irilx's  s|H'iikin^  distiiK-l  lnn;.Min;;('s.  Ilml  it  ('linnrcii  llinl  nny  one  ol' 
tliosi-  Imd  Urn  oi"  rnsy  uc(|iiisiiion,  nnd  very  {icnorally  dilliisuil,  like  the  ('lii|)|>(!Wny 
nmony  tin;  I'listi-rn  trilirs,  the  Mnlny  in  tlio  Inilinn  Arclii|i<'lnjjo,  nnd  llin  Itnlinn  in  tin 
Mcditrrrnncan,  it  would  no  doiilit  linvi-  Ihtii  iido{iti'd  ns  tlic  nicdiiim  of  oominiinirntion 
lic'twrcn  llir  whiles  and  the  unlives.  I  iilortiiiinlely,  nil  these  langunjies, — the  NiMitkn. 
Niisiinnle,  Tshinuk,  Tsihailish,  \',\, — wen;  alike  hai>h  in  proniineialioii,  einiiphx  in 
striieture,  and  s|iokeii  over  a  viry  liniiled  space.  'I'lie  liinij;iiers,  thereliire,  tixik  no 
pains  lo  lieconie  actpiaiiiled  with  any  of  them.  Hut  ns  the  liarlHUir  of  Nootkn  was,  at 
tlint  time,  the  head-ipinilers  or  principal  dc|Mil  of  tlio  tinde,  it  was  necessarily  the  cas< 
that  some  words  ol"  the  dialect  then-  spoken  liccnmc  known  to  the  traders,  nnd  thnt  the 
Indians,  on  the  other  hand,  wen<  maile  liimiliar  with  a  lew  l')ii<;lish  words.  'I'hese,  with 
the  assistance  ol"  si(.'iis,  were  siiHicient  liir  the  slight  interc-oiirsu  that  was  then  innin- 
laiiied.  .Mli'rwards,  the  traders  iK^iran  to  lrec|iient  the  ("oliimliin  Kiver,  and  naliirnlly 
attempted  to  comiiiiinicate  witli  the  unlives  there  liy  iiienns  ol"  the  words  which  they  hnd 
found  intelligihlc  nt  Nootka.  The  ChiiiiHiks,  who  are  ipiick  in  catchinjj  sounds,  soon 
acquiri-d  lliew  words,  Inith  Notitka  ami  I''.iiglish,  and  we  find  ihiit  tliny  were  in  use 
among  them  as  early  as  the  visil  of  Lewis  and  Clarke,  in  IH04. 

But  when,  at  a  later  |)oriod,  the  whites  eslahlished  themselves  in  Oregon,  it  was  soon 
foiinil  that  the  .scnnly  list  of  nouns,  verlis,  and  ndji'ctives,  then  in  use,  wa.s  not  siifriciont 
for  the  pur|iose8  of  the  more  cimslant  and  general  intercourse  thnt  iH'gan  lo  take  place. 
A  real  Inngunge,  complete  in  nil  its  parts,  however  limited  in  extent,  was  required !  and 
it  was  formed  by  drawing  uikiii  the  Tshinuk  for  siicii  words  as  were  necessary  to  odd  to 


636 


l>  II  I  L  O  L  U  U  Y. 


the  skclrtnn  whirh  Ihpy  iilrriiily  |io8m<)is<-<I,  the  HincWR  and  trndonii,  thn  rnnnrcting  li|;n- 
inciilH,  ns  it  were,  of  n  s|«hi'Ii.  Tlirw  consiMnl  iifllu"  niimcriils  (ihc  ten  iligils  niid  tho 
»<ir(l  tor  humlrrtl),  Iwrlvc  pDinoiiiis  (/,  llimi,  lie,  i<r,  ;/r,  tliri/,  litis,  ollirr,  all,  /kiIIi,  irhn, 
m7w^),  niid  iiboul  twriity  iitlvcrlw  niiil  prr|>osilioiiM  (such  ns  umi;  llirti,  fhimrrlf/,  $ijon, 
itrmsi,  ashore,  oji'-tliore,  iiilaml,  iilmre,  Mitir,  to,  &<•.)  Ilnviiig  a|i|in>|irinlr<l  thcw,  niicl 
n  li'w  other  words  of  the  siiiik"  liinannjio,  thi?  "  Jnryon"  iissiimrd  a  r('f>idur  sha|i<',  and 
iHfatiH'  of  ^'rciit  service  as  a  medium  of  couimuiiii'iilion  ; — for  it  is  remarkalile  that  for 
many  years  no  lon'i^ner  li'arned  the  |)ro|ier  'I'shiiiiik  suflicieiitly  well  to  he  of  u».'  as  on 
inlerpreter. 

Hut  the  new  lanjiiiafji'  nriMveil  ndditions  from  otluT  sources.  The  Ciinndian  rni/iif;eiirs, 
as  they  an'  called,  who  enlisted  in  the  srTvice  of  the  American  and  llrilish  lur  coinpa. 
niifi,  were  hrou^ht  more  closely  in  enntact  with  the  Indians  than  any  ntherx  of  Iho 
fon'ijjners.  Thi'V  ilid  not  merely  trade,  they  travelled,  hunted,  ale,  and  in  short  lived  with 
them  on  ti-rms  of  liuniliarily.  The  consc(|uence  was,  that  several  words  of  the  I'reneh 
lanj'uai'e  were  added  to  the  slender  stock  of  the  .lnr;;on.  These  were  only  such  terms 
as  did  not  pn'viously  lielong  to  it, — such  as  the  names  of  various  articles  of  IIhmI  and 
clothing  in  use  amoni;  the  Canadians  (hreml,  flmir,  laril,  oven/Ml/,  lull),  some  implements 
and  articles  of  furnilun-  {ii.Te,  /n/ii;  mill,  lalje,  lior),  severnl  of  the  parts  ef  the  bcnly 
[liriiil,  moHlh,  toiijiiie,  Irrlli,  imk',  liiiml,  J'mt),  and  the  verlis  to  rini,  -litig,  and  itnuvf. 
A  single  conjunction,  jmix,  corrupted  to  jii,  and  used  in  the  s<'nse  of  iiml,  was  also 
derived  from  this  source. 

Kijjht  or  ten  words  wei-e  made  liy  what  granunarians  term  oliomatopcria, — that  is, 
were  formed  liy  a  rude  attempt  to  imitate  .sound,  and  are  therefore  the  sole  mid  original 
pro|KTty  of  the  .largon.  (Vaisidering  its  mixlc  of  formation,  one  is  rather  surprised  that 
the  numlier  of  these  words  is  not  greater.  Ki/ilip  is  inten(h'<l  to  express  the  .soinid  of 
lioiliiig  water,  and  means,  to /««/ .•  liDlii}  {itr  liiiliii)  is  th<'  ringing  of  a  liell ;  />«  is  the 
re|n)rt  of  a  gim  ;  liklik  is  lor  a  inthli  ;  liimlum  is  the  word  lor  luiiil,  and  is  inlenili-d  to 
reprisent  its  liealing;  the  word  tuiii,  pronounced  with  great  liirce,  dwelling  u|Hin  the 
concluding  m,  is  the  nearest  approach  which  the  natives  can  make  to  thi^  iioiso  of  a 
cataract:  hut  they  usually  join  with  it  the  I'jiglish  word  /'v//c/-,  making  /i.;;/.</-ii^i,  the 
name  which  they  give  to  the  lidls  of  a  river.  Minli*  repri'sents  the  soimd  of  any  thing 
falling  or  thrown  down  (like  the  Knglish  niiish  and  s/iuisli) ;  kink  is  the  sound  of  a 
ro|)e  sialdenly  looseil  from  its  liistenings,  or  "  let  go." 

All  the  words  thus  lirought  together  and  comliined  in  this  singularly  constructed 
sfiecch  are  alsiul  two  hundred  and  filly  in  number.  'I'he  llillowing  list  may  hi'  regarded 
ns  very  nearly  complete. 


NOOTK  A. 


htims,  grnnt,  very 

hntii,  much,  many 

kakcul,  to  strike,  hurt,  kill,  destroy 


kliitiiira,  to  go 
klosh,  gnral 
klutshiiiun,  womnn 


*  The  «  and  the  (A  arc  cniplnycd  in  Uiii  paper,  in  which  a  •Uictly  aciuntific  orthography  ia  unnooea. 
aary,  inilead  of  Uie  u  and  r  which  have  Imen  oicd  rlKwhvrc. 


NORTIIWEHTF.  RN   AMERICA. 


637 


kum&takt,  tii  know,  uncloratund,  hcnr 
mnkiik,  lo  lrnik>,  buy,  m-II 
miimiik,  tn  make,  cauto 
iiiaiiitth,  ilcor 
jmtliUsh,  lo  givo 
pttlink,  bad 


lair,  cliiol' 

luiita,  litilc,  young,  o  child 

ttJinko,  U)  como 

ti/iikamiii,  iron 

ink  ur  ift'A-,  no,  not 


F.  \  (i  I.  I  H  II. 


Umiuii,  .Xmcrionn 

lull,  IniiiI 

/iiikii/fliiiiii,  Imndkorvliicr 

llllllS,   hl.llM! 

/■Vi//.  lo  cry 

/./</*,  JilllSM 

Hiiilsliitlsh,  ICngli'li,  EiigllHlinimi 
/.///,  kflllr 

^•»/,  I'olll 

/i/,,  lako 
/i.w,  lii/.y 
/»/»,  null 
man.  iii.'iii 

»/»/',  IIKHUI 

itiiiski/,  iiiiiskct 

111  HI,  inline 

tins,  iiosc! 

oliiiiiaii,  iild  man,  fiiilicr 

puiii,  fire 

jK'jMi,  paper 

ymi,  Miip|Hi9c 


utiiiuii,  salmon 

.«)'/,  sail,  raiivas.s,  rritlon-cloth 

.<r//«.«,  sIkk's,  iiiuccasilis 

shiil,  Mhirt 

.«//.,  sli-k 

.«/.//>,  skin 

siiiiik,  siiiiikc 

.«//<>,  snow 

««//,  sail 

slik,  stick,  wimhI,  lrr<" 

.</«»,  sldiir,  iHinr,  any  tiling  solid 

stiilsliin,  sliir^ron 

sun,  sun,  day 

tala,  dollar,  silver 

//'(/,  dry 

Isliakfl,  jacki-l 

liiiiiold,  Id-morrow 

Hum,  warm 

M(i/<(,  water 

iriii,  wind 


T9H  I  ND  K. 


H,  yes 

lilkr,  JHion 

«//(/,  now,  then,  tlioreiipon 

liiKikali  or  it/ikali,  tbniiorly 

a/s,  younger  sister 

ail,  yoiinger  brother 

r/i/i,  Is'toTi! 

iiiinti,  river 

liaJoiiiia,  other,  dilFerent 

iiiluilr,  iinme 

iulika,  lie,  she,  it 

iiikso,  hair 

iiikira,  this  way,  on  this  sido 


iri//(/,  that  way,  on  that  side 
ikala,  ikta,  what,  why 
i/r/ii,  earth,  land 
iiiatiii,  lieyond,  across 
iiUso,  Isinf' 
iiik,  paddle 
islii,  now,  iininediolely 
itmliul,  hluck  Iwnr 
ill/kill,  lont; 
Xi///,  where  ? 
kaiiiiitl,  tolmcco 
kiilailaii,  arrow,  shot,  bullet 
kaliikala,  bird 
ISO 


0)38 


I'UII-OI.OO  Y. 


kiimuks,  ilo); 

l.tllUIIII»kst,   lM>tll 

/•timiiri;  all 

kiiiii  III,  ciinoc 

A(/«/*/ii(i/l,  liixv  much?  how  many t  wh<'n! 

/,iiji-liii,  or  kiijiii/iH,  eldiT  brother 

A'((f(/,  what 

kikiiili,  liclow,  low,  (IdWii 

ki/iimi,  to  turn,  n-turn 

ki/i/uiii.  Hint,  ^'liisH 

Lilil.-ul,  Uittli! 

k until,  JM-hiud 

kiiitiin,  ImrM." 

kliiliiuiiiiiii,  to  salute,  tu  sympathise  with 

A/iii/,  lilnok 

klitkilii,  who 

k/ii>kii,  ihi'V 

X7(  fki'rsk.  Mint 

k/i/hiil,  r<)|R',  string,  thn-ai) 

A/;//,  sour 

kmii/i,  sky 

kiid/iiii,  ear 

kiraiiisiiiii,  always 

ki'iis,  alVaiil,  tiiniJ 

ki'ilikinli,  ilurk 

likini/iii,  or  /i/.7>i>,  older  sister 

iiiiiikii,  thou,  lliy 

Hiaimi,  down  stn'am 

mu/kiii/i,   (or    tiiiUJkiriti),   ashore,   away 

IroMi  the  river,  inland 
iiinlliiii,  to  or  near  the  river 
miiiirliisl,  dead,  to  die 
iiiislshhiiui,  slave 
iiiilkoi,  to  stand,  be  still 
millait,  to  sit,  reside,  remain 
inuMikii,  »r,  our 
musiiiiis,  bullhlo,  cattle 
iirt  /  interrogative  particle 


/Kir/,  mother 

tiiiika,  thou,  thine 

tiiiiiiiiiiiiks,  other 

iiiiuiis,  oll'-shori',  on  lh<!  strram      • 

tiiiiiifikii,  suri'ly,  certainly 

iiiis'iikii,  ye,  your 

ii/iij)it.\ki,  (in- 

ojiikuii,  liiisket,  tin  kettle 

ojiillki,  Ikiw 

iijii/.sii,  knili' 

(>/«</*//,  slern  of  vessel 

ol/ii/i,  sun,  day 

jitlj'tl,  red,  IiIikmI 

]>il\lnlt,  i;ii-en 

siihii/i,  mikii/i,  hifih,  up 

.siniim,  the  brown  b(<ar 

siii/ii»,  eve 

.v(7i.v,  I'lielid 

syiii/.,  Iiluc^ 

mikiiiiliil,  ^iMi,  musket 

tiiiiii/iki,  yesterday 

tdiiiit/ilsli,  cask,  liarrcl 

/inn  it,  U'fi. 

til  or  /«/,  heavy  ;  tired 

tilikuiii,  men,  |H>op|e 

tilikiiiii-miiinii,  lather 

Isliikr,  dire<'tly,  instantly,  soon 

/.v/(/.«,  colli 

ti'liiiiii,  paint,  painted 
^vo^,  water  • 

tiikili,  to  wish 
tiikiip,  W'hili! 
vdki,  to-morrow 
wi'Xv,  again  j  more 
inkiit,  road,  path,  trail 
tni.iijti,  by  iind  bye,  presently 

('I'he  numerals  ore  given  elsewhere.) 


F  R  K  N  C  H. 


Ayi/w,  (capot)  coat,  frock 

<y/j<-^  (ciissettt)  Ikjx 

A'u/j  (coiirir)  to  run 

I'dltiisJi  (lit  Imtclir),  mouth 

Miuali  {/it  liiirlir),  axe 

/ujl-/!fs  (//(  graisse),  grease,  lard 


la/an  (la  Irtn^ur),  tongue 

Inmrstiii  (la  iiirilecine),  medicine,  doctor 

laiiiiiiiliii  (la  iiioiita^ne),  mountain 

liijitj)  (III  jii/x),  pipe 

lasHin  (la  .soie),  silk 

latiipl  (ta  liUJe),  table 


• 


N  O  R  T  II  VV  E  8  T  E  R  N    A  M  E  R  I  ('  A. 


639 


Mttl  (In  l(li),  liinil 
l<tirrsl  (la  ii>lr),  wninlri>nl 
liiuv  (lit  lirilli),  iilil  wii  nun 
Mihkiii  (le  liiiiiiil),  L/lHL-iiit 
IniiiitiiH,  sliccii 
Ifpir  (le  pint),  \\m\ 
liku  (Ir  coil),  iiii-k 
Hill  (Ir  li)ii/i).  Weill" 
liiiiiiii  (Ir  iiiiiin),  liiind 
lihlii  (Irs  ilriil.s),  tcclli 
lu-mnnui  (loiij)  iiiariii),  seal 


iiiiilii  (iimiiliii),  inlll 
jiiijMi,  liilhiT 

J'lisiiiiiks  (  Fill  II  f  II  in),  I'Vinchninn 
jm.srxr  (friiiifiiisrs  I)  cliilli,  bliiiikct 
puliili  (/loiiilir),  )(iin|inwik'r 
.sii/nlil  (III  III  line  I),  (lc)iii',  bnmd 
siiiiii.sli  (sitiivifir),  Iniliiin 
iiliiiiilr  (rhiiii/rr).  Id  siii); 
siiijHil,  Mii/iiil  (rliii/ifitii),  hut 
ti>ti!,r  (iliiiinei),  Ici  dnnco 


n  Y    ONO  M  ATI)  !•  (i:  1  A. 


Iiiiii .'  hull  I  liiirrii .'  Iinstcn  !  i|iiirk  ! 

/;(//(■,  111  liiii^li 

/./«/.-,  iinlifd,  Id  |i«>s«) 

lijiHli,  1(1  IhiII 

miisli,  liillni.  cniNlicd,  broken 

TN),  III  shool,  iioImv  ol'n  gun 


lil.iil:,  n  iviilili 

/in'iii,  ti  Ik'II 

Iiiiii,  n  hciivy  iiiiisc  J  liiiii-iralii,  cMntncX 

(u ml II III,  lii-iirt 

(j)i/lnii,  liHilisli) 


DOUBTKI'  I.. 

Till-  liillcminj;,  wild  oik;  or  two  rxcqiliiins,  must  lie  i  iilirr  Tsliiiiiik  or  N'ooika  ;  but  il 
is  um-crlniii  Id  whicli  ol'lhu  two  lliov  urc  to  Im-  rcli'rri'd. 


Iiiitnl;,  i|iiii'k 
Itriil,  llDIll' 

iklit,  iiomIs,  |irD|iorty 

inn,  lit-nvcr 

isknm,  to  liikf,  get 

kiikirn,  so,  thus,  like 

kullit»,  mrrfly,  Id  no  |iurposo 

kniiiii.iiik,  lioiids 

kan,  tied,  ninde  I'list 

knjisliiiiiln,  to  stt.il 

kuijtnl,  (qu.  aii!iiille  d  peau  ?)  needle 

kliiiiriifkifit,  to  lie 

klimiiiklimin,    snnd,    fine,    ground    fine, 

broken  to  |iicces 
kill  mis,  perhniiK ;  I  do  not  know 
kusliiskusliis,  rtockings 
kirajHi,    to,    toward,    at,  of,   about,  con- 

coming 
kua]>rl,  no  more,  no  longer ;  stop 
Itle,  long  time 


Uilo,  Id  curry 

miikiiiiiiik,  to  eat,  drink,  swallow,  inhole 

niiisiilsi,  luid 

vinsaiii.  Id  li<!  down,  to  idcop 

tiiiiiii/iilxli,  or  iiaiiilsli,  to  sea 

okiik.  Ibis,  tbnt 

olrlr,  iK'rrics,  fruit 

oil),  bun^TV,  thirsty 

]M>lnkli,  night,  dark 

sniu,  fur 

siikiiliiks,  trottsers 

sdleks,  nngry  ;  to  quarrel,  fight 

sukiiiii,  half 

skiikiiiii,  strong,  powerlul ;  Icarful 

suns,  ruin 

siipiiia,  to  jump 

tillil,  tsliillsliil,  a  button  ;  a  star 

titiisli,  milk 

ttoli).  Id  lose  one's  way,  to  mistake 

vau-a,  to  speak,  to  tell 


640 


P  II  I  L  O  L  O  O  Y. 


It  may  appear  hiiiKulnr  thai  kitop  Knitlinh  word*  tliould  bo  omplnycd  (hiicIi  an  man, 
mm,  nxKiii,  siirk,  miow,  »ann,  \r.),  ahM-h,  it  »<hiIiI  i>n-m,  nii^lit  linvii  Ut-n  xiippliitl, 
likf  llif  oiIht  Kjiiijlnr  ti-rm*,  froni  thr  Jmlinii  l.iii){ua);<-«.  TIm'  n-nwm  in  prulinhly  lu  In' 
roiiiiil  ill  iIh'  tiiot  ihni  ihf  ri>rrrs|ii>iHliii){  trriiin  in  iImmc  lan^uiigi'H  arc  m)  i'.\C4filiii|;ly 
ru^itril  ill  Miiinil  in  t«  In'  ini|>nii-lM*nl>h-  !••  i\fu  KiifiUnU  iiri;nn!<  ol'  h|iitcIi,  'I'Ih'  'r><liiiuik 
trniiNliiliKii  ol'  till'  nlirivi'-iiMnlHiOitI  linnt  wixilil  In'  k'i///i  like  ill,  «///(//,  oki'l/lannii, 
i/O/m/iist/ii,  l//l.it/'ii,  ami  imiil/Ztb/.  In  wmi"- cnitcK,  when"  tlic  Txliiniik  trrin  in  less 
ililliriilt,  loth  thai  and  iIm'  Kn;:li'>h  an-  in  ux;  anil  Wjually  ui'll  iiniliTKtiHHl ;  aM,  lu)k  and 
irnla,  liir  watiT, — /';m  and  L)J,  (i>t  ctM,—*>liipittki  and  imni,  lor  fin",  TIk'  word  /ii//«r 
lias  tlini-  HMionynii  il<Ti»"l  I'niii  tlin-"'  laii^na^c!<,  /<»/»(,  (roiii  lli<"  I'lH'lirti,  i>/H»iiin 
(old  man),  t'miii  iIk'  Kiii{Ii'>Ii.  and  lilikniii.iiiumtt  I'dhii  iIii-  Tsliinnk  ;  (llic  pr<>|M'r  wurd 
ill  till'  l.ilirr  ii  I'laiihi,  lint  ni  ihii  i^  I'lHind  In  !■'  aiiilii^iiiiiiiN,  iVniii  ili  ilillrrint  iiiriiiiiii;'  in 
l'!lij^li>li  mil  I'ri'iii'li.  iIh'  »i>ril  lilikum.  nun,  it  pn  rix'-il).  W'-  arr  rrniiiiiird  mI'  mir  nwii 
lan^na^i',  in  wliirli  »r  lia»i-  iIm*  i-omiiimhi  n-rni  <///</  (nr  ilmlilii)  ilrrivcil  iVniii  Ihi'  W  I'i-li 
or  am'iint  llrili'<li,  th«'  word  hillnr,  <>r  Snx<>n  oriijin,  and  tlir  won!  /xi/xi,  wliidi  wr,  likr 
till'  Cliinooki),  have  lii>rn>«r<il  I'roni  tin-  pr»-iH-h. 

'riio  ori'^in  ol*  •«imn  ol"  th<-  «<iriU  i*  railiiT  wliinisii-nl.  'I'lic  Ainrriraiis,  Itrilish,  and 
Fo'iuli  nri' ili^tiiiLMiislNil  liy  the  li'riii«  lUfJun  (or  llosioii),  Kiid^holsli  (Kiii)>  (i>'or^i'), 
mill  l'iis'iiiil.>,  Mhii'li  »!■  pntiiiiw  tn  !>••  iIh'  word  I'minuis,  rxrniplril  to  I'lixiii  (lis  niiihrr 
/,  I,  imr  iIm'  natal  /'  imii  Ik'  pnniiMiiH-i'd  liy  tli*'  liuliaiit),  uilli  ilir  'rNliiiiiik  pliinil  Irrnii- 
lialion  11/.S  ailili'd.  The  »<>ril  lor  Maiiki-t  is  prii|ial>ly  Ironi  llii'  saiiir  soiirri'  (  /;v/hjv;/.v.«, 
Frriirh  uoimIs,  or  rliiihin)!).  FimJi^/i  i>  «xpn-»Mil  liy  JVlun,  wliirli  Hat  tlii.'  name  of  a 
Ciiii.idian  who  lnTamo  ik-rnni-fd  at  Fort  V«in-ouvcr;  In;  wiit  ihp  lirnl  |ioriioii  whom  llii! 
lialivi's  had  ivit  M'<'n  in  that  Mali-,  niiil  hit  Mniiii><'  ap|i<-ariiiiri'  and  arlioiit  iiiadr  Hindi 
an  iiiipnssion  ii|>on  tl11m.ll1.1l  thiii<i'l<>r«ard  any  mii' hIio  rondiii'lril  in  iiii  alisiird  or 
irratioiiiil  iiiaiiiiir  was  said  to  a<-t  LnLun  J'l/foii,  "like  I'illon  ;"  liiit  llii-  word  is  now 
coinniiiiiiy  iishiI  Hilhoiit  tlie  pr«T<diMu'  |>aftirli\ 

In  thi'  phonMJiii'y  of  iIh-  lani;iiau<'  oim-  point  it  |iis-iiliarly  intrn'stinir,  a.t  illiislralin<;  llio 
usual  rrtiill  01°  iIh'  t'lition  ot'  two  or  iiHirv  laiitiiia^it.  As  tlir  .lar;:oii  is  to  Is-  spiikrn  liy 
Cliiliookt,  r'nulithiiH'n,  and  Fr>'fi<-hiiH'n,  so  hit  to  Ik- aliko  easy  and  iiiti<llii;il>lii  to  all,  il 
miitt  acliiiil  no  *  Hind  wliii-h  cannot  In- nadily  pniiioiiiiritl  lij  all  tliri'r.  Tlir  nultiiralt 
of  ilir  'r-liiiiiik  (/  and  '/)  an*  mOIiikiI  to  h  and  k  :  i/l  IsTomi's  Wat  tlir  iH-^iniiiii);  ol'  a 
word,  and  '/  at  tin-  iiid  :  and  sihih-  ol'  iIh-  h.ir«li  roiiiliinalions  orroutonants  ari'  Niniplilii'd 
by  oiiiitiiiiy  one  or  two  ol'  iIh-  ••lcin<iit«.  Thus  wf  liavi-  tukth  liir  /(lyiy ,  klill  (iir  t/lil/l, 
klosli  lor  tfliiiiili,  lM>k  tor  tfliMnjiin,  iVo.  (In  iIk-  othor  hand,  tin-  il,J,  f;,  r,  r,  z  of  the 
I^n;>lish  and  FrriK'h  iK-ronn-  m  the  mouth  of  a  Chiiinnk,  t,  ji,  k,  I,  ir  and  s.  'I'ho 
l'jij;lish  /  (</:/i)  it  ■'h'in;!iil  to  r\h  ;  tin-  Fn-inh  nasal  >i  is  dnip|H'd,  or  is  nMainrd  without 
its  nasal  toiiiid.  KxampUii  ••)'  all  ihtf.  and  ol'  oilii'r  rhanui's,  will  Is'  stvu  in  tlir  viH'a- 
iMilary  ;  and  wr-  may  roinj>ar<>  th<-in  with  iIh'  siniilar  cllit't  pnHlured  liy  that  conibiualiiin 
ol'I^aMin  and  Fninh  whi>h  I'oruHil  our  moli-rii  l-'nulish  loiiijui'. 

In  llir  pronunciation  of  a  (iw  wordt  thi-ro  arr-  sonio  slij-lit  variations.  The  short  vowel 
H  (or  ")  is  frffpirntly  iittcrrd  like  a  short  1,  and  sometimes  liko  a  slinrl  '/ ,-  siiiiuiiiiikxl 
^.siiiiiiiiiiik.tt)  srven,  is  prorxsimiil  by  tome  [ktsihis  Arj»i»iii/,.«/,  by  others  .\i'imii)iiikst ; 
kutiiiiiiii,  livi',  is  rhan^"il  to  linnuni  and  knniiuiii  ;  liil,  heavy  or  tired,  is  iil'ten  pro- 
nounriil  fi/,  \i\  In  man\  w..rdt  it  it  impovsilile  to  deride  whether  n  or  i<  should  be 
written  ;  as,  mamuk  or  mamnk,  to  make, — mrmr/iisl  or  mrmrlml,  to  die, — tuok  or  iMik, 


11 


N  «»  It  T  II  \V  K  S  T  K  K  N    A  M  K  It  I  V  A. 


nil 


wnlcr, — niomini  or  iiiiisiim.  In  hIi'i'il  A  ••iiniliir  dilliriiliy  Miuiu'liiiir^  iH-nint  with  llii^  r 
mill  i,  Ht,  kiiiiiiin  (ir  X(/«i/»i,  nil, — In  lit  i\r  Inlii,  \v\\»\  N  h  iHTiisiuiiiilly  |ir<iiiiiiiiir('il 
iiki* .«//,  mill  virr  viTNii ;  ii  Irlirr  i>r  nvIIhIiIi'  i»  wiinrtiiiK'M  ilr<i|i|H'il,  iis  iiiitiiiiiil!ili  nr  miiiilnh, 
III  Ml', — t^H/ir  nr  <X/'<,  u li.il  .'  All  llii'M-  Miriiilioii'i,  liiiHi'viT,  iiri'  iiiiiiii|><irliiiil,  iiiiil  in 
Ki'iii-ral  il  limy  In'  hiiiiI  llml  llir  liiii)>iin<;i'  \*  iiHiki'ii  with  )!ri-ril  iiniliiniiily  IIimii^IiimiI  iIh* 
wliolc  I'Niitil  (ir<'(iiiiilry  «liin'  il  |ir"Viiil-i. 

Till'  ui'iiiiiiiiiilii  III  mill  nri'  »rry  >iiii|ilr.  Iiilli  rlii'iis  ilirri'  iirr  iiniii'.  Tlir  mily 
iii>liiii<'i'  ill  ttliirli  11  Mni'ij  SI  I'liii'il  III  Ik'  viirii'il  ill  liinii,  uiis  tlmi  nl'  IJH'  iiilirni'^iilivi'  |ir<i- 
iiiiiiii  liiihi,  uliiii,  i>r  ujiirh  ikaiii  »iiM  iHTa^iiiniilly  ii-^iil  in  iiii  oliliijiir  nisi,  us,  miikn 
l.imiirl  kiiiiiiiliiks  ikiilii  miiika  iiiwii  iiiiikii,\  hiivi' (iiruolii'ii  (im  Inii^rr  kiiiiu)  uliiil 
yiiM  siiiti  III  nil'.     Iliil  ikiilii  Im  nlwi  n-wii  in  Ihr  sinw'  uC"  liir  wiml  V  nr  "  why  '" 

'I'lirri'  is  iin  iirlirli'  in  lln'  liin^iiii);i-,     'I'lii'  ilriiinnslnilivi-  |irnniiiin  oknk,  lliis,  ixrii- 

sinlllilly    sii|i|i||(s  llii    jiliirr  nl'llii'  laiilllsli  /In. 

rill'  ;;i'iiili\i  111'  iiuiiiis  is  ili'liriiiini'il  iii'rrly  liy  lln'  rnii^liiirlinii  ;  iis,  kiilti  mm  iiiiiikii 
jiiipii  >  uliiil  is  ilii'  Miiini'  111' thy  Uillirr  I 

'I'lir  |illll'.'il  is  ill  )>i'ni'i'lll  linl  ilislinfjillsliril  III  s|M'nliiiij;  ;  sniiii'liinrs,  //(//»,  llillliy,  is 
rin|ilnyril  liy  uiiy  iirriii|i|iiisis. 

Till' iiilji'i'liM' I'mi'ili's  llii' iiniiii,  :is  in  'rsliuiuli  ninl  l'ji;;lisli ;  w*.  Iiisinn  liiikiilslmiii . 
silk  liiiiidkiii'liii'r;   iiiiiMiIsi  lOiLnw,  luiil  |iiii|ilc'. 

( 'iiin|iiirisnii  is  r\|in'ssril  liv  ii  |M'ri|i|iriisis  ■■  I  mil  slrnlivrr  lliaii  llinii,"  Uniilil  Im', 
ink  iiiiiikii  sknkiDii  knkiin  iinihn,  lii.,  llimi  iml  slmiiy  iis  I.  'I'lir  sii|irrlalivi'  ik'nrrr  is 
indiciili'il  liy  mlvi'ilis  ;  n-t,liiihix  kIhiiiiiii  nkitk  kaiiiin,  n  ry  nlil  lli;il  niiinr  ;  mini  iliiiikilli 
vi'ry  iinrii'iil  (lil.  IJir  ii«n).  A  (jri'iil  ilcil  is  cNpri'ssi'il  liy  ilir  imrr  stnss  nl'  llir  vniri' ; 
lidiitf"  (ilwi'llin;;  Imiy  nil  till'  liisi  .sylliilili')  iiic.-iiis  vrry,  i'M'n'iliiii.'ly  uniil ;  iiii'itkiili, 
H'illi  I  III'  lirsl  s\  lialilr  itrmi  II  niit,  siu'iiilii-s,  \i'rv  loiiij  aL'n  :  'oi  lniitik'\  lniiii'\  In  mis" .  \'i*. 

Till'  iiniiii'iiils  air  rrniii  ilir  'rsliiniik.     'I'luv  an — 


ikl  nr  (/// 
/links/  nr  niiikiisl 
klitii  or  /.'(/// 
Iitkri  nr  Ink/ 


one 

IWd 

lliris' 
fiiiir 


kini/iiiiii.  kinniini,  nr  knnmim  live 
/akiiiii  nr  /iilinin  six 


XII II II milks/,  Mtiiniiiks/,  siimi/niiks/  .srvcn 
uliililkiii  nr  s/iili/kin  ri^hl 

kiiniis/  nr  kiriiii/s/  nine 

/il/lilnm  ten 

/iik'iinoHiik  nr  /iikiiiiiiimik  linndrrd 


•Sniiir  id'  llii>  variiiliniis  ill  |irniiiiiii'iiilinn  wliirli  ii|i|K'ar  in  Ilir  rnri'){iiiii^  linvc  Ihtii 
ain'ailv  rx|ilaiii<'il :  llir  ollirrs  |iri«Trd  rrniii  ijii'  ^'rialrr  or  Irss  ii|i|irnxiiiialiiin  »ll('in|ilrd 
liv  llii'  s|H'aki'r  In  llii'  nri^inal  liriiis  in  'I'sliiiiiik  ;  liiil  all  llu'  liiriiis  mmld  Im  i'i|iially 
ui'll  iiiidi'rsliHiil, 

'I'lir  cnlilliillalinlls  nj'  llir  IlllMlirMls  am  llli'  IllnsI  silll|ili'  |iosNilili'.  I'lU'Vrll  is  /il/hlillil 
pi  ik/,  Icn  and  niii- ;  Iwi-lvi-  is  /n/lrlnm  pi  mnks/,  \r.  'r»riily  is  mitks/  liillilnm  ; 
lliirly,  klon  InlMnm.  TlioliKiind  Is  Inlliiiim  /iikniiiiiHiik,  or  Irii  liiiiidrrd,  l%ij;lilrrn  hull- 
ilrcd  and  fiirlv-lwn  wniild  ln'  liillrUint  pi  s/ohtkiii  liikiinionnk,  Inkrl  /iillrliim,  pi  mnks/. 

Till'  |M'rsnim!  iirniiniins  (in- — 


miikn,  I 
iiniikn,  llioii 
iiilika,    he 


mfisnika,  wo 
niisiiikfi,  yn 
k/tiska,      they 


101 


643 


l>  II  I  I.  ()  l,0(i  Y. 


MutiiHii,  in  'I'lliiiiiik,  iiiiiiii!t  "  wr  Imic,"  fxi'lmliiin  ilir  |Hrii>ii  iiililri«s<il ;  in  iIh'  .Iiitkoh 
it  i*  ummI  in  n  mop'  gcni'rni  Hcnw,  iIhhikIi  nlliiiikn,  wliji'ti  miiiii'i  "'  nil  (inrliiiliiiK  th< 
{N'r«in  niMr>"4'Hil)  in  mmwlinirn  i'iii|ili>yril  hy  llmw  ulin  iiiiclirNliinil  tlii'  niitivc  iiliiiin, 

'I'll.'  |i.r-.HiiHl  |ininiMin»  Ih'ciiiih'  [uwHcs-iivi'  nMTily  liy  ln'iii;j  pri'lixi')!  lo  nmin*;  n^, 
iiiiiLii  li:iii.\,  iiiv  liniiw;   iiiiiikii  iiliiiiiiiii,  lliy  liillirr;   mlihi  kiiixi,  \\\*  rniil. 

'I'll''  iiilrrr'ifiiillvi'  |inpiiiiiiMH  iin-  /■/((/,»/'/,«  Im  f  /.'/'i/ nr //"/>/,  wli.il  .'  I,iiii/sliiiili,  \\i>* 
iiiiirli,  Imu  iiniiiy  f  'I'ln'  ImiI  is  iilso  iiv  <l  liij-  «liiii'  i.e.  ||i>u  imik  li  liiii<',  cr  linu 
iniiiiN  il.'iyx  ! 

'I'lii'  ri'liilivi'  |iriiniiiin?i  iihkI   in   ynirriil   Ik'   iiihIi  iv| I;  t\^,  l.nh  nhil  miiiiiiii   iihiikii 

trairii  kii'i/iii  iiiiUn,  wliiri'  i-<  lli.it  MiiliiMin  |iil'  »liii'li|  ymi  -.ipuld' Id  iiH' '  SdimlinirM, 
hiiwcMT,  ihi'  iiilrrriii'iiiivc  (irmi'iiins  tii|)|ily  ilirir  |ilnii',  ii-i  In  ICii;;lisli  ; — iim,  iiik  iiiiikii 
kuiiiiitiikf  ikiild  iiiiiikii  ifiiiiii,  I  i|ci  lint  ihiiIi'I'-'I'iimI  «IiiiI  llion  kiivi  si, 

Ok'ik,  this  nr  tlnit,  in  llir  mily  ili'iiiiiiisir.ilivi'  |iri>ii'iiiii, 

TIm'  inili'finitc  |ir<>iiiiuns  iirr  Kniiinimki'i,  Ixilli,  Inlny  iiiuii',  kniiiin,,  nil,  Imiii,  inii -li  it 
iinny,  timnx,  Irw  nr  lilllr,  linloi/iid,  cilliir. 

In  iimiTnl,  till'  liiisL-  i>\'  the  vitIi  \h  Irll  in  I"'  iiilcip  il  rrnin  iIim  cintcvt.  \\  lien  il  i> 
iilisiiliili  ly  Mrn-s.iry  t.i  ili«tiiii.'iiis|i  ijir  lime,  iirt.iiii  ihImtIis  iiri'  riii|ili.yfil,  iis,  islii,  nnu. 
iillii,  iiiiw,  jiisl  now.  NtriiiL'lilHiiv .  iri/iijii,  priM  litis ,  iilkr,  kihmi,  t.iliiki ,  dinctlx ,  iiislnntly  : 
iiniik'iti,  liirincrlv,  nkuk-Miii,  to.ilav,  liiiiioln  or  iiiihi,  lo-niorrosv,  /iitiii/iki,  yrstcnliiy. 
I'lii'  I'litiiri',  in  III "  s<'iis<'  111"  "  iilmiii  111,  "  "  ri'nciv  to,"  is  sonii'tiiiiis  t\|in'ssiil  liv  liil.ih. 
which  inrnna  pro|HTly  to  triilt  or  ilnirr, — im,  nniku  inijui  liikili  miiin/nfl,  my  liiiliir  i- 
ni'iir  liyin:.'.  or  niHiiil  to  die, 

A  coiiililionul  or  sii|i|>iisiiivr  simiilii-riliuii  is  ;;lvrii  lo  Ihc  nrli  liy  |in  lixiiij  llir  wonN 
l./'iiiiif,  |Mrlii|ii,  mikI  /««,  i|cri\iil  I'roin  ihc  llnylisli  sii/>/>'tsi\  Imt  iiscil  riillnr  iiKJiiiiiiti  ly  : 
IIS,  iinih'i  kiiiir,  ii'iil.ri  lili'.iiiii-iiiiiiiiii  IJiiiiii.i  iiifiiii  iiiiist,  I  Hill  .irriilil  lli'il  my  liitln  r  will 
ili'"  (III.  I  iilVdid  my  rmlu'r  |K'rh^i|>s  die).  Xiikii  liikili  jua  mnikn  iiiitiniik  k/i»li  imikn 
liiliusli,  I  wish  >oii  Would  imnd  my  iixc  (iil.,  I  wish  sii|i|)osc  you  rnnkc  -lood  my  iixi). 
/1m  maikii  klalnirn  iuliirn,  pi  miikii  tslinko  knkira,  if  you  will  ^o  yonder,  I  will  liillow 
(lit.,  HU|i|)os<-  yon  L'o  Ihiit  way,  llii-n  I  coiiii'  Ihi-  siimo). 

All  iiitcrrounlni'  llinii  is  siiiiii'limis  u.-iilr  liy  ln-i'rtiii'4  llio  imrliclc  nil  ;  iis,  iiinikn  im 
lukili  iiiiiKnk  iiiiiikii  ki'iiiiii  kiiiijiii  iinikn,  do  yoii  wish  to  sell  your  horse  to  me  ' 

The  siilisiHiitive  vorli  iniisl  nlwnys  Im'  iiiidirsli««d  iVoin  tin- loriii  ol' ihe  senti-iire:  us. 
inaikii  jiilli»i,\\v<\\  art  fiM.li.sh;  sik  mnikn  nn  .'  is  thy  lirolher  >\'\i  f  Ihiiiis  olnniai' 
mnikn  knmm,  very  old  is  thy  e:iiioe. 

The  adverh  usually  |irec(ilea  the  ndjeelive  or  verli  wliic  li  it  i|iialilies,  lhnii;:li  il  iiia\ 
someliiiies  fiillnw  the  latter;  as,  Imin.s  klufli.  vi  ry  (.'iiod;  knlfns  imikn  iiiiisinii,  I  am 
only  sli{|)iii;i ;  iinikn  lininx  tiikili  kiiiiinliiks.  I  very  miiili  wish  In  know  ;  irik>  ikl  nun. 
one  inuri'  day,  or  au'ain  one  day  ;  pnllnlih  inkt,  yive  more,  or  a;!aiii. 

There  is  hut  one  |ire|Misiti(iii,  vi/.,  kiiii/m  or  kiin/m,  which  is  used  in  various  sinsr.s, 
Bs,  to,  for,  at,  in,  tiiiinnu,  lininnls,  iVr.  jtiil  even  this  may  fiencrally  lie  omitted,  and  Ihe 
sentence  remain  inlelli;;ilile.  Snikn  klnlnun  imikn  linns,  can  oiilv  mean,  '•  I  am  (joinf; 
to  my  house."  Ktkirili,  down,  is  used  in  the  sinse  ol'  IkhhiiIi.  and  snknli,  hij;li,  up,  in 
the  sense  Ki\' iilinrf. 

Only  two  coiijiini'tions,  pro|HTly  s|.eakin;;,  are  linmd  in  thi-  lnnj;tia){e; — /n,  from  the 
French  word  ;)«i.v,  is  used  to  mean  ami,  or,  llien,  &o, ;  pot,  from  suppoM",  menus  i/;  in 
case  /lull,  proriiled  titat,  and  serves  in  nennrnl  ns  n  sign  of  the  snhjiinctive  or  conditional 
mood. 


N  O  U  T  n  W  K  M  'I'  K  K  N    A  M  K  UK    A 


64:i 


All  \h 


iimo  rxi'lMMiiiliKiH  wliiili  iirr  ill"'  iiiiliinil  i\(irissiiiii>i  cil'  liiliii:;  mi'l  iiiKtimi  iiiiiy 


In>  NiMil  lit  iM'Inii: 
l»> 


,  '.'    Illt'JIIII',    III  llljs    liljiilll 


I'hl 


Illy  nil''  rr.iily  |i<  riili.ir  In  il    (mill  llml 


Ullll'll 


111   |i;irlly  Innii  llir   i'lii^ilisli)  In  |||ii  i'«|iri'»iiiiii   '•  hmi  I  /</ 
iwil  III  iiryi'  iir  IiiihIi'Ii  a  |iiirly  in  iiiiy  work. 

it  limy  MH'iii  (It  I'irxl  HiKht  iiiriitii|ir<'li<'ii«ilil)'  ili:ii  ii  luiiuiiu'^i',  ii 
<'iiiii|iii>i'il  III'  Hii   ll'W   Wiiiiji,  lliiis   iiiiii'litii'iiiliy  riiiiililni  i|,  ■>liiiii|il    Ik'  r\ti  ii-inly   n-ui 
till'   siili'   iiii'iljiiiii   III'  iiiliTi'iiiiiiiiiiliiriiliiiii    iiiiiiili;;    liriliv    ill 


I'll  il 


II V    III 


iilli'il. 


lilHIIIIll     IlllllMi 


liialx.      Viiriiiiin 

riri'lllll-lilliri'K  lll'r,  IliiUi'ViT,  In  In'  liiiriH'  ill  lllillil,  ill  I'nlillllllill'^  ill  ViillH'  IIH  slli'll  II 
iiHiliiiiii,  III  till'  lir.Hl  |iliiri',  II  i;<iiiil  iliiil  |x  i'\|irr^'<i'il  liy  llir  liiiH  iil'  viiirr,  i|ii>  liMik,  mill 
Xi'Mliiri'  III'  till'  ii|H-iiki-r.  'i'lir  liiiliiiiii,  ill  ({I'nrriil,  rniiiniry  In  wliiil  la,  W(i  Ix'lii'vr,  tin 
I'liiiiiiinii   ii|iiiiiiiii,  uri>   very   N|>iiriii<,;   i<(  llnir   ;ji^iii'iiliitiiiiiii.      Nii    liili^ilti'^cH,   |iriiliiililv. 


ri'iiiiiri'  lr»i  iisiiiiiiiilid'  I'rniii   lliis  siiiiri  r  lliiiii  llnirs.      lln 


ry  riri'iiliiKtiitli'r  iiliil  i|iiiilitirii- 
till 


liiHi  111  llnir  iiliiiM  M  i'\|irr-«'il  III  llii'ir  .s|ic'irli  «ii|i  u  niiiiiiiriii  sx  hIihIi  in  iliiiv  iircin. 
Ililllnl  only  I'l  llir  llllli;illl;;i  s  lil'  I'llirnl"'  ll|i|irlll'l  r\il;/fji|iili'il  llllil  illlr, — li'<  llllU'll  NII  Oil 
till'  liiriMi  III' till'  liiriiiiiii  mill  i.riliii  inny  miiii  In  llir  I 'liilii'M'.  W'l'  rri'i|iiriilly  liiiil  iktii- 
Hiiill  til  iili-urvr  till'  siiilili'ii  i'li:iii;^r  |iriiili|ir(l  ulii'll  II  |iiil'ly  iil'  iiiiliM  x,  W  lin  llllil  Imi'II  rnii- 
viirniiin  in  tlirir  nwii  liiii)(iii',  wrrc  joincil  by  a  Inri'ijriiiT,  «itli  wlinin  il  wan  ncci'smiry  in 
.H|i<'uk  ill  till'  .larjjun.  'I'lir  rniiiili'iimirrs  wliicli  lii'liiO'  liiiil  Ihtii  (jrivr,  stnliil,  miil  iiii  x- 
|irrssivi',  wrri'  iimlniilly  li^lilril  up  \\  illi  iiiiiiiialiiiii ;  llir  Inn ,  iiiniinlniinns  Iniii'  lii'riiiiir 
lively  mill  iiiniliiliiliil ;  I'vi'ry  fi  iliiri'  uiis  iiiilvi';  ihr  In  ml,  llir  iitins,  nml  llir  wlmli'  Imily 
Hrri'  ill  iiinlinii,  mill  rvrry  Innk  miil  iji'stiirr  liirmiii'  iiisiimi  uiili  iiiiiiiiiii):,  Oiirwlin 
ktlcW    lllrri'ly    till'    nlllljl'Ct    lll'   llli'    llisi'nlirsi'    llli;;lll    nllill    hllM'    rii||l|irr||i mlril,    ri'iilM    tins 

Koiiri'r  ainiii',  till'  ({I'lirral  |iiir|Hirl  nl'llii'  iniiMTsatinii. 

Il  »liniilil  riirthiT  U'  (iIwitmhI  timl  inmiy  'il'  llii'  wmili  li.ivr  ii  vrr\  ;!i  m  ml  si  nii',  miil 
may  rririvi-  .sever  ll  llillerelll  llimi^ll  lllllril  si'^llilii'litiiills,  lli'i'iinlill'.'  In  llii'  I'nIlll'.VI.  'riiiin 
utiilii'h  \^  III  ti'iiili\  liiii/^  \tl/^  nr  Ittiihi  ;  stiktili^  m*  snlntii^  r\yvvs'<vH  ti^itn'f,  /lyi,  ovtr. 
A/y/;,  ^///.•  a'//i'  il  .iHr/,,  iirji>il\ /ht,  JuiTtt,  i/iil>,  ni/ii',  \r.;  .«//(/,.«  is  iim^ri/,  Jio.\li/e,  In 
i/iiiini/,  li^lil ;  tiiillitil  is  to  il/,  iisii/r,  irmiihi,  siti/i ;  iiiiikiiniiil;  is  to  lake  mi\  thing 
luln  iIh'  iihiiiiIi, — luiiri'  milkiiiiiiik  niniiii/i,  In  iiil  ".iliiimi ;  uiiikunKil;  Iso/,,  In  iliiiik 
wilier  ;   iinikiliiink  kiiiiiiill.  In  simike  tnliarcn. 

Iliil  il  is  in  till'  I'aeiiliy  of  eniiiliiiiiii^  ami  rniii{>niiiiillii:.'  ils  siiii|ili'  vm-alili's, — a  |iu\m  i 

Wllii'll   il  llrl'ivrs,  lln  (liilllit,   rrillll   IN  inllllevinll   uilji   tlir    llnlimi   ln|li;lll'S, llllil    llli'  .Illl'^nU 

limls  lis  s|il'i'ial  ailll{illllinll  In  Ihe  |ilir|inM'>  In  uliii'li  il  is  ii|>|iliril.  'I'nn  or  lliri'i'  llUllilri'll 
wnrils  may  lie  Irarinil  willmiil  ilillinilly  in  a  iliiy,  miil  a  miv  slmil  liiiii'  will  make  llie 
learner  I'miiiliar  willi  tin  ir  miliiiary  use  ami  nuisiriiilinii.  lie  will  linn  have  nn  ilill'i- 
ciiltv  ill  imilerslaiiiliii;;  the  iiumeniiis  enmiHiimiU  vtliieh,  il'  tiny  hail  lueii  siiii|ili'  wnnls. 
wiiiilil  liiive  ensi  him  min'li  ailililiniial  lahniir.  Aliimsl  every  verb  imil  ailjei'live  may 
rwiiM'  a  new  siu'iiiliealinii  hy  |iri'li\iii!,'  the  word  niiuiiiik.  In  make  or  eaiise.  Thus 
ninniiik  Isliiiko  (In  make  In  eniil''),  In  liriiin  ;  iiiniiiiik  kliilmiii  (make  In  i;n),  In  seiiil  nr 
drive  awav;  iiiiiiiiiik  iiiiif/i.  In  llirnw  ilnwii,  In  smash;  iiianiiik  /hi,  In  lire  'i  yiin  : 
iiiuiiiiik  X/oi//,  tn  repair,  pill  in  order,  arraiiiie,  eiire;  iiininiik  kikiri/i,Ut  put  down,  tn 
lower.  In  hiirv  ;  iiiaiiiiik  k/iiiiiii,  to  make  line,  like  saiiil,  hence  to  ({rind  ;  iiiniiiiik  jii pii. 
In  write;  iiiiiiiiiik  kiiiinitaks,  to  make  In  know.  In  leneli,  itc. 

The  liillo\vin,<;  inslanees  will  .slmw  the  usual  innde  iirinrminj;  ('onipniind  terms.  From 
the  I'lnijlish  words  iiuai,  ship,  slik,  sloii,  .m/,  Ikiiis,  skin,  are  I'oriiied  shipntaii,  a  sailor: 
sliipslik,  a  spur;  slikskin,  hark;  si/liiiiii,  a   lent;  slik^ton,  n  piifo  of  iietrified  wtnid. 


\'\ 


nil 


l>il  I  i.o  i.(>(i  V. 


'ril<>  lilllcr  Irrill  yn\*  iimhI  l>y  h  nillitr  hIhi  hii»  iIh'  fruln^iM  I'olllH-tillX  ll|MM-illM'n»  i>r  llllll 
ilrncniiliciii;  ulirdiir  il  uii-  ri>iii|Hi<M'il  mi  ilir  n|H>i,  i>r  hiih  iilniiily  in  «■•<',  h  lint  known. 
//fiiH. //.(».«  (iimiiy  liiiniM»)  h  iIh'  roiiiiiiini  lirm  t'nr  lnwii;  iiJ-i/ilii,  1111111.1/1I41,  (iiilil 
ri>iiiilr\ ,  uiiriii  ciiiiiiry,)  iiii'iin  mimmir  iinil  innlif  ;  Miok-iriiiiink  (inlil  »ii  km-*'*  wiiriii 
•ifkiirst)  |iri>M<iiiiir<'>l  iia  iiiii'  wuril,  \*  tin-  liTiii  I'or  /<  /iv  itiid  iiiiiir  ;  kniiiitl-kiiiiitiliil,s  (nil 
liin^rr  kiiiiw)  iiH'iinit  \n J'orurl,  Viikih.iiuiii  (lilili'  man)  ix  ilirli'mi  l<ir/<Hy  ,■  liiHiif-klulnh- 
iiiiiH,  liir  a/;/.  Till)  liiiiiil  i\|iri'««iiin  liir  <i'i*/  i>  ■mkuli-l  itr,  lit.,  iilKi^crliiff,  or  Itir  rliii  l' 
nil  lii^li.  7V/;/,  iM'iny  iini-x-,  mil  Hiiiir,  iimki'  liun-inil  1,  h  i-.ilnrml ;  tul-lnok  (luiivy 
Wiilir)  i>  lit. 

riir  |ilai'i'  III  uliM'li  llii'  .liiruoii  is  iiin-l  in  ii«r  I-.  a:  i'nrl  \  aiirniivrr.  Al  llii"  i'-lalili'<b- 
nii'iil  ri\i'  laii<<iiap'4  iin-  s|iiiki'ii  liy  alHuii  i'im'  liiiiiilr<>il  iMrmiim, — iiaiiK'ly.  iIk'  Isii'^^liili. 
till'  Ciiiiailian  l-'niirli,  ilic  'I'liliiiiuk,  lhi<  ( 'n'r  <ir  Kiiinlrnraii,  iiiiil  Iin-  Hawaiian.  'I'lii' 
tlinr  llinnrr  an'  uln'aily  niTonntril  liir;  tho  ('n'c  in  tlir  laii;!iiM;><'  Kioikin  in  tlic  laniilii'K 
•>r  many  ulTiriT^  ami  iihii  ln'Inii^inK  In  tlir  IliiiUinrs  Hay  ('iiiii|iiiiiy,  ulm  liavi'  iiiarriril 
hall-lii'iiil  »i\i'i  al  llii'  iiKsIs  ra'.t  nl'  llir  K'><  Ky  MhhiiIiimio,  TIh'  Ihinaiinii  is  in  iiw 
aniiiii:;  aluiiil  a  liiiinlrril  iiaiiti's  nl'  ihi'  Sainlwiili  Kliiml^  ulm  arr  •  iii|<IiimiI  as  lalHiiinTH 
almiil  till'  liirl.  Ikshlrs  ihrsi'  livr  lai)i;il:ip's,  llii  rr  arr  iniiliy  hIIicin, — llir  'I'^iliaillHli, 
Waiawiila,  Kala|>iiya,  N'askwaIr,  i\r., — wlili-li  iiri'  daily  liranl  rmiii  iintlvrN  who  visit  th<> 
liirt  liir  iIh'  |iiir|sisi'  nl"  Irailiii'.'.  Aiiinii);  all  thrw  imliviiliials,  tjirri'  iin-  vrry  ti'W  who 
iiiulrrslaiiil  Minri'  than  mn  laii^iia^i  !<,  iiml  iniiiiy  whn  N|i4'iik  only  Itii'ir  nwn.  'I'Im' 
){riii-ral  I'lMiiiiiiHiiialiiiii  is,  ihiTrliiri-,  inainlaiiii  il  iliirlly  hy  im  aiis  nl  llm  .l.iriinii,  »liirh 
may  Im' s:iji|  111  Ih' till' |iri'\ailiiiu  iiliMin.  'I'lKri'  un'  I  aiiailiaiis  ainl  liiir-lirisils  mariii'il 
'n  Chinnnk  uniiii'ii,  » Im  I'aii  niilj  rnnvcrw'  wilh  llnir  wins  m  this  H|sirh, — ami  il  is  the 
liiot,  slraiip'r  as  il  may  st'ciii,  that  iii'iny  ynini;:  rliiMrrii  arc  ^rnuiii){  ii|i  inwlinin  this 
rnrlilioiis  lanuiiajjf  is  really  thr  mnlhi'r  Inii^nc,  anil  whn  s|K'ak  it  with  innn'  rrailax'Ks 
aiiii  jsrlt  I'linii  lliaii  any  nlhrr.  ( 'oiilil  llm  siair  ol'  lliinus  uhirli  now  ixisls  ihirr  Ik' 
>iilli'ri  .1  In  ri'iiiani  liir  n  rinlnry  InnifiT,  llic  n  "iill   iiii;ilil   U    llir  liirnialinii  nl'a    rail'  ami 

iilinin  ul alliiMlK  s  uniilil  Is'  a  |>u/.yli'  In  rlliiin_<ra|ihi  rs.     'I'ln'  liilr  ul'  |ui|iiil.ill"ii,  Imw. 

I'vrr,  wliK'h  IS  iinu  tiirnin;^  in  thai  ilin'rlmn,  will  sisui  nMrnhnliii  ami  iihsnrli  all  ihisc 
iM'alU'rcil  IriiinirntK  of  jHt'iilinr  linragn  iiml  N|Hs-i'h,  h  aviii);  im  trarc  iH'himl  hut  kiii'Ii  ns 
may  exist  on  thi*  written  |>a);i'.  It  has,  tlnri'liin',  soi'nicil  ailvisnhli',  nl  this  liinr.  In 
(iri'MTVi'  iIk  s<>  ill  tails  ill  n-j^ard  In  n  siihjirt  orsniiic  intrn'sl  in  ilsnll',  rrnin  its  sinu"larily, 
ami  uliii'h  may  Ih'  nf  im  sliiiht  value  rmiii  lis  Isarin^  nii  cerliiin  |Miints  nl  |iliilnln;;lriil 
invo.sli^iiion. 


P 


In  aildilinii  In  the  ixaiii|ile>  ol'  eonslriiclinti  yi\rii  in  the  liirej;ninjj  |iaj;es,  ilm  Inllnwinn 
rn|liK|iiiiil  jihrascs.  wrillen  dnwii  as  they  were  heard  Irniii  the  natives  ami  nlhers  verwil 
in  the  iiliniii.VIII  ~linu  ihe  niaiiiier  in  vtlmh  il  is  eiii|i|nyi'd  n.s  a  iiH'diiini  of  nrilinarv 
inlercniirM'. 


.1-. 

♦■^ 

•V-' 


I 


Xi,  siks  > 

KfiiJiinrenm 

huh  tiinikit  /iiiii.t  ' 

Kiih  iiiiukit  kUtliiirti .' 


Mo!    Irieiid  I 

llnw-  do  you  (In?  (the  i-ominon  unlulnlioii.) 

Where  is  thy  Imiis*'  \ 

Wliire  art  llmu  gning  ? 


N  o  K  T  ir  W  K  H  T  K  It  \    A  M  K  II  I  C  A. 


iU^ 


' 


Vf/ 


htih  irtkiil  /./iildiiii  ll'iikiiikum  ' 

hull  inntkii  Itlinkn  ' 

Kanlnhiiik  iiititkii  kliiUniii  mniku  lmu$  f 

l'iil/iil»Ji  Imik 

Hums  iji)  tstik  miikii 

iifilti,\  fi/o  nittknniiik 

Siiikn  k/iiliiirii  ki'iipn  kiiHfMt 

hiiti/nt  iriiiiii  f 

W'l  k  niiiku  utiniinit^ili 

hil nfihiiik  iiiiiikil  li/lkliiii  ' 

'l\il/i/ii/>i  />i  k/iiii  lidiit  kilimirr 

.\*itkti  tuki/t  tintkiittiiik  uniiti/xh 

hiiiilihiiik  Minim  iiiiiikit  iiiiikitk  l.tlmk'i  ' 

hiilii  iikiik  inn  ' 

lliiiii.\  iiiii,      Ihlii  II  in, 

likiik  mill  litiiim  iiiiiii 

OktJi  iiiiiikii  liiiiin  ' 

(ikiik  ulik  k/iitiiirii  ililii 

Hiiiifshiiik  ts/uiko  iiiiiikit  iititi  ,' 

Sik  iiiiiikii  /Ill/Ill  ' 

S'liinlik'i  /iiiiiii  kitihitiiitiiii  inlik" 

Xiiikii  koksliiiil  ii/iil/ki 

hiiknliiill  iiiiikii  /i/iir 

Miiikii  lilt  kuiiiiiliik'  iifki  sliiiim 

lliiiiiM  IIIIISIII.M  iiiiiikii  kniii  III 

Mki  kliitiiini  ki/.iii/i 

h'ifii  iiiliiilr  htiiik'i  /xi/ni,  <»r  \ 

hiilii  III  III  iiiiiikii  li/ikiiiii-iiiiiiiiii,  iir  > 

Kiilii  III  lit  iiiiiikii  vliiiiuiii  ?  * 

Siiikit  hiiiiislukilt  kiiiiialiikf  iiiitmiik  /H/n 

Antikitli  liiiiiis  iiiiikii  kiiiiiiitiiks  kiiimltii- 
ii/ii, — 11//11  ki/ii/Kii  iiiiikii  luiiiliiiii 

S'linlikii  limns  iiilikii  kiiiiiiitiik.i  siijiiiiii 

Ikillii  iiitiikii  iirk    kliiliiiiii  kiiksliiill  mil, 
itlkf  iiiiiikti  iiniknk  iiniskit  ' 

Siiintikii  kiiiiiiirf  nusnikn  hlikiiiit  iiiiiiic- 
liisl 

Hiiiits  klimli  tiknk  iiiiilii ;  linink  iikok  ma- 
milk  kliiiiriikliiiint  nknk  mi/ki/iI 

IVrk  iiiiMiikit  kiiiiiiitiiks  iiiknt 

hiiii/iii  ill  III  klalitiiii  sliiji 

Ihlii  lnok 

Iliiiiis  II  ill 

Kiiksliiill ;  kliiiirii  ttlmko 

Atta  liliji  hikiiili  If  ok 


I  Imvr  linl  my  wiiy. 

\\  hlTr  11  llir  Mil)   III  |{ii  In  Wilkniklllll  ' 

WiMllrc  I'liini'nl  ihlHI  P 

^^  Inn  iirl  ihiiii  \iii\n\i  in  ihy  hoiiM.-  f 

(live  IIM'  MMIN-   MllllT. 

I  IIIII  very  lliirp«ly. 

Vrry  hiiiiKry. 

I  mil  ^l>lllK  ill  II  I'liiiiif, 

l>M  llMl  llllk,  nr,  xlnji  iiilkiiix! 

I  iln  iini  Ml',  liii\i'  mil  wen,  iVi*. 

Iliiw  iiiiiny  iiri'  lliy  |k'ii|iIi'  f 

'riilrlii'ii  liiHiM'ii  in  nil. 

I  Hiiiil  III  I  III  siiini'  \i'iii4iin. 

I  liiw  iiiiiiiy  n.'iliiKiii  1I111I  lliiiii  liniitj  In  tr.iili' ' 

lliiw  uiit  ilir  »inil  '  (ttliiil  llml  Hiiiil  ') 

A  nlriiii^'  Hiiiil.      No  »iiiil. 

'I'll!'  Miiii  (or  (liiy)  will  viTV  wiirm. 

I"  lliii  lliy  liiin»r  ! 

'I'lir  Ircc  li'll  III  III!'  i^riiiiliil. 

^^  lirn  11  lliy  iiiiillicr  coining  '■ 

U  ili\   liiilur  !-ii'k  f 

Truly    III'  IS  ilillrjl  III  Ik'  |lili('ll, 
I  liiivr  hriikril  my  Ihih. 
My  Ic'n  is  liriiki'ii. 
IIiihI  ihiiii  llijnk  It  Mil!  ruin  ' 
Thy  (•iiiiiit'  in  vrry  IhiiI. 
lly  iiiiii  liyi'  il  mil  »iiik. 

NVhiil  is  till'  iiiiiiii'  III' lliy  liillirr  ' 

I  wish  vrry  iniirli  In  Iriirn  to  write. 
Knriiirrly    I    iisnl    In   (lit.,   klii'W   to)    strni 

iiiiirli, — now  my  liriirt  is  cliiiMucil. 
Truly  licciiii  jiiiii|i  well  (lil.,  kiinws  Injiiini)). 
,     \\  liy  iliiNl  llmii  iiiii  ^n  iiiiil  kill  Ix'nvcr,  nml 

liny  n  )i\m  f 
.     Truly  nil  niir  |h'ii|iIc  nrc  di'nil. 

•     ViTV  )i<HMl  is  timt  mill ;  (jnirkly  it  ^riniN 
tlio  cnrn. 

\Vf  iliil  nnl  kiiiiw  the  ohniinrl. 

Tho  sliiji  Mint  n^roiind. 

Then-  wns  no  wiilcr. 

The  wind  wns  hi){li. 

Pcrishtil  i  Willi  111  (liiTps. 

Then  sunk  down  into  the  water. 
1A9 


"■^^IMAtaaMMa^ 


646 


Pill  I,  O  l,0(i  Y. 


U'rk  k/iikslii  nuiiir/iisl,-  -{iDiitiir  ktulmrii     NdImkIv  wiin  ilroHiinl ;  nil  (jol  iislinn'. 

niiilkirili 

Xiisiiikii  siifrks  )iiiisatsi-tilikum  W'r  Iciii^lil  llir  iiuiiiy  (Imil  |M'ci|)Ii'). 

AViiH  tiiisdikii  kiiksliiill  W'v  killrd  lliri'i'. 

Mnkiist  kakirti  limii  iiiisiiika  Thfy  were  Iwii'c  iis  iniuiy  ris  we. 

All ///*/•  «;/■  iiiiistiikii  !  How  iiiiiiiy  wire  llinr  of  you  f 

Miikiist  litlif/iim  j)i  kirumim  Twonty-livr. 


I  '! 


il 


V  ()(■  A  III    [.  A  II  Y. 

The  rullcwini;  list  i-nnliiiiis  nil  ilir  «iiii|>lr  uonlN  nl'  llic  Inidi'.lniifiimjjr,  nml  sonic  ol 
the  coiniioiirid  Icrins ;  l)iit  In  Imvc  inclmlt'il  all  the  liillfr  aoiilil  liavr  -wrllcil  lln'  vnciilm- 
lary  to  imiliy  limes  its  preseiil  extrrit.  Imlrcd  »  sclcrlidii  nC  sevi'ral  llioiisjiiid  l''.ii};li.s|i 
words  mighl  Ik>  iniule  lor  Hliieli  eorres|kindiiif,' cxiiri'ssiiuis  roidd  Ih- IouikI  or  liirmcil  In 
this  lanjjiinge,  ueeordinj}  lo  the  |)rilli'i|ilrs  iM'I'ore  r.\|daiiii(l.  Il  uiidd.  however,  Im>  ii 
work  ol'  some  lalnoir  and  very  Mltle  use.  What  is  here  ^ivin  hII!  Iw  ^iiHiricnl  lo  ■.alisl'y 
any  eiiriosiiy  which  may  he  I'elt  cMineernin};  ihis  sinjjnlar  spei'ili. 


Ahoul,  eonrerinn<;,  kirii/xi. 

\Im)uI  lo,  liiLiii. 

Aloive,  Miliiili  or  siikiiJi. 

\eross  (a  river),  iiiiiliii. 

MVaid,  liniiil,  kirns. 

All,  kdiKiiii ,  kiiiimri. 

Always,  kiriiiiisiiiti. 

Anierieaii.  liosluil. 

And.  j)i. 

\nii,  Ii  until. 

Arrive  al,  iiii/iiiiiil.ih  (to  se«"), 

.\rrow,  kdlniltiii. 

.Vshore,  iimlkwili. 

As,  kokini. 

At,  klril/xl. 

.\xe,  /iJiusli. 


B 

Itud,    tna.ialii    ur    vuudlnhi ; 

jHshiik. 
Iturrcl,  UnmduUih  or  tamolUs. 


pisliak    or 


Itaskel,  iipikun. 

Heads,  kiommik. 

Hear,  lilai'k,  itahiilin)      lirown.  .wii/w/. 

It.al.  kiikshiill. 

Iteaver,  im; 

lleliire,  ih/i. 

Ileliind,  kiiiilii. 

Ill  II,  liii!!li»!i  or  liiiliii. 

lieneath,  kikin/i. 

Ilerries,  o/iVf, 

Bird,  kiilakiih. 

ihsiMiil.  Iihiskiit. 

lilaek,  /./.Ii/. 

lilanket,  jiiisinr,  jxuisi. 

HlcKiil,  ptipil  (i.  e.  red). 

Iloal,  /«>/. 

Hoi  I,  liplip. 

Ifcilie,  sloii. 

Ilolh,  kiniiiiiiiik.sl. 

Uotlle,  kililsiit ;  kiliktin  (lliiil). 

Row,  upiliki,  or  itjii/ki. 

Ilox,  kiistt. 

Hoy,  /iitiii.s-m'iii. 

Hrnridy,  iiliipi/skilr.k  (firr.wntrr). 

Brond,  sajieiil. 


N  O  R  T  I!  \V  K  S  '!•  K  K  N    A  M  E  R  I  C  A. 


fi47 


Kii'iik,  knkshiitl ;  iiiamiik  musli. 

Hriiii;,  inn  III  Ilk  tshiiko. 

llrotlMT,  rliliT,  kii]i<>,  kiijiiiltu. 

linillii'r,  y»iiii)tcr,  mi. 

P'.illi'l,  kn/iiitiiii. 

Iliilirr,  iiiiisiiiiix-/iik/is  (oi)W.)»mi«"). 

Hiilinn,  /»///'/,  c.r  Islii/ls/ii/. 

Hiiy,  miikiik,  or  iiiiikiik. 

llv  unci  liy<',  irnii/ii,  n/ki . 


Ciiniip,  kniitiii. 

Clip,  siii/Hil,  nr  sinpiil. 

<  'iirr\,  liilii. 

Ciilllr,  iiiiismiis. 

( 'liirl',  tiiir. 

( 'liilil,  luiiiis. 

l/'liilli,  wiKillni,  y/(/.vc.«' ;  colloii,  jic/. 

font,  kii/io, 

Ciild,  tslii.i ;  kol. 

( 'oiiir,  tshiiko. 

CiMik,  iiiiiiiiiik  juiiii. 

( 'di'ii,  sii/h/i/. 

("rv,  k/iii. 


■■'Ik,  mnlak. 
I'ji)jlislimiiii,  hiiitsholsli. 

I'\l-,  illlllilS. 


P 

Pnlls  (iifii  rivrr),  lum-trutn. 

I*'iir,  M/m. 

I'lillirr,  /HI/HI,  oliiiiiiiii,  tilikum-iiinimi. 

l""fliil,  hum  ;  jiu/i. 

l-'rvrr  niiil  'ijiiu',  kn/sik-inimsik. 

Kinlil,  sii/rkii ;  kiiks/nit/. 

Fin-,  /*/ii/. 

■■'lint,  kiliklin 

{•'ihmI,  iiiiikiiniiik. 

lAuilisli,  pilliiii. 

\'\»t\,  /r/iie. 

I'liriirl,  kiiii/K/-kiiiiiiliiks. 

l-'orincrly,  aniikiili. 

Fri-iii'lini!iii,  juiMiinks. 

l-'iiiiiiis,  sika. 


G 


D 

Diilirc,  liitit.^f. 

Diirk,  jh.l,ikli  (uIkIh)  i  klitU  (lilnrk). 

Diiy,  sun. 

l)oi>r,  iiiiiuih/i. 

nil',  (lead,  viiiikIiisI,  inimlusl. 

|)rN-l(ir,  liiiiiiisiii. 

Kii;;,  kiiiiiuks. 

Idilliir,  lutd. 

Itciwii,  kikiiili. 

DdWii-slri'iiiii,  iiiiitiiini,  or  mniini. 

Dry,  ^/ri«. 

Duck,  ki'i/ikiirli. 


(iri,  i.ikiiiii. 

i  iirl,  Ittims-khilt'hiititH, 

liivr,  iHilliitsli. 

(illISS,  klll.s. 

(to,  k/a/inni. 

i  iimI,  sitkiili'tiiu'. 

(  mmhI,  khmh . 

(.JcmhIs,  inrn'liiiiiilin',  ikntii,  or  iXm. 

(Ini'ii,  iiilslnsli. 

(iriiiil,  iiiiiiiiiik  k/imenktinifH. 

( inn,  iiiuskit 


H 


E 

I'iir,  kirnlini. 

I'iirlli,  liinci,  i7«7ii,  or  ii(//i 

ICiit,  iiiiikniiiiik. 


Iliiir,  i(U.v)  or  ynksn. 

Iliilf,  silkiiiii. 

Iliiiiil,  /iiiiaii  or  lima. 

I  InnilkiTcliicr,  luikiit.tliu in . 

Hal,  siajxtt. 


648 


P  H  I  L  O  L  O  U  Y. 


He,  she,  his,  hers,  iahka  or  yitkka. 

Heod,  lattt. 

Hear,  kiinuUnks  or  kumtaks. 

Heart,  tumtiim  or  timthii. 

Heavy,  tul  or  til. 

Here,  okok  (this) ;  idkicn  (ih. j  way). 

High,  siiha/i. 

Horse,  kiiitan. 

Hot,  huiai  wiim. 

House,  haus. 

How  much,  how  many,  kdnUhmk,  kdiitsek. 

Hungry,  oh. 

Hiirrv  !  "  /uiu !  hait  !  kurm  /" 


Leg,  liiiu-U  ;  lepie. 

Lie,  (hxM'ive,  kliminfkivit, 

Lv',  repose,  immim  or  miisiim. 

Lightning,  xiihii/i-o/apil.ski,  (fire  above). 

Like,  similar,  kakini. 

Like,  love,  tiikeli. 

Little,  tuiKis. 

Long,  iii/knt  or  yiilkat 

Long  lime,  Itlr. 

IxM)k,  mindiiilsh  or  nanitsh. 


M 


!:    ■ 


I,  naika. 

Ice,  tiit-tsok  (heavy  water). 
Immediately,  Ishike. 
In,  kwajxi. 

Interrogative  particle,  ««. 
Iron,  tshikiimin. 


.Facket   tsliuket. 
.lump,  siipimi. 

K 

Kettle,  kit/. 

Kill,  kuk.i/ia/l ;  mamuk  mtmelust. 

Knife,  oputnah. 

Know,  kiimatdks  ; — I  do  not,  kliituis. 


Make,  mdniiik  or  mumok. 

Man,  man. 

Many,  much,  hiiii. 

Mat,  kli'skicfsk  ;  for  sleeping,  ilkotet. 

Mwlieine,  /unictsin. 

Men,  |)eople,  tilikum. 

.Merely,  only,  ktiltas. 

Middle,  si/kitm. 

Milk,  tiliisli. 

.Mill,  miila. 

.Mirror,  k/n.i. 

Mistake,  l.tn/o. 

Money,  lii/n,. 

.Moon,  tiiiitt. 

More,  iiikl. 

Morning,  tiiiins-xtiii. 

.Mother,  iiiui. 

Mountain,  lamo/it'ii. 

Mouth,  I'lhiisli  or  I'ipiish. 

Musket,  muskk. 

Mv,  ntiikn. 


N 


Lake,  lik. 
Land,  iUlii. 
Large,  liaias. 
Laugh,  hthe. 
Lazy,  Itsi. 


Name, /«/(«/«  /  iiim. 
Neck,  Irku. 
Ni^dle,  kiapol. 
Night,  jmlakk  or  puinkli. 
No,  lick,  or  tcik. 

No  more,  no  longer,  kieajiet ;  to  no  pur- 
pose, kalUts. 


NORTHWESTERN    AMERICA. 


649 


None,  luh  or  lulu. 
Niion,  iilkuin-sun. 
Nose,  Hos. 


Itofic,  slriii){,  ihrriul,  k/ijxitt. 
Rnlton,  CuM,  j)uli, 
Kuiii,  /um, 
Klin,  kii/i. 


Obliiin,  iskiim  ;  iiiiiitiiiitsli. 
OH-sliorc,  in  thu  slrcnni,  iiuuita. 
Old,  iild  innn,  tJuman. 
Old  womoii,  lavie  or  biicie. 
On,  kitajxi. 

Other,  diircrent,  haloima. 
Oiler,  nnndmuks. 
Our,  nusutka. 


I'nddic,  ixti. 

I'uint,  to,  mdiiiuk  tshum. 

Pn|)or,  book,  jk'pa. 

People,  tilikum. 

Perhaps,  kiiimis. 

Pi|K',  /(tpip. 

PInte,  pnn,  iiidlnk. 

Pot,  npikfin. 

Powder,  (i^iin,)  jHi/ti/i  or  i>ultdi. 

Pro|ierty,  goods,  tkdla  or  iA'<'<. 


(juick,  haulk. 


R 

Uiiiii,  slimis  or  .«««.«. 
Receive,  ixkiini. 
Red,  ;)('•/))(•/  or  p(7/»»V. 
Remnin,  reside,  milltiil. 
Return,  ki/apai. 
Ring,  ku-iiikirio. 
River,  <•/»«//  or  niMt. 
Road,  trail,  iciia/  or  oikat. 


s 


Sail,  w/. 

Sailor,  shipmait. 

Salmon,  sdm'in. 

Salt,  so/t. 

Sand,  klimen, 

Sny,  fraira. 

Sea,  ivikoma,  haitus  Isok. 

Seal,  lii-mardii,  wnlhwaiu. 

See,  ndniinitsh  or  nanitsh. 

Sew,  mnmiik  kuijmt. 

She,  iri/ito  (1). 

Sheep,  lemiiloH. 

Ship,  »'A//J. 

Shirt,  .«Au/. 

Shoot,  mumiik  jm. 

Shoes,  «Ai/.v. 

Sick,  Jt'A-. 

Silk,  liuiiiai. 

Silver,  /<«/<*. 

Sink,  kldUiirii  kikirili;  ti/ip  kikirili. 

Sing,  shiiiitc. 

Sister,  elder,  /Uyxf  or  likpiihn. 

"      younger,  a<«. 
Sit,  millnil. 
Skin,  «Ai». 
Sky,  ktmtJi  or  kiisuli. 
Slave,  mistshimii.s. 
Sle<>p,  iiUtsiiin  or  iniiiuim. 
Small,  tanas. 
Smoke,  smok. 

Smoke  tobacco,  iiuikamak  kaiiiutl. 
Snow,  snn. 
So,  thus,  knkwa. 
S<Hiii,  dlk(\  tshike. 
Sour,  kill  I. 
Spar,  miist,  shipstik. 
Speak,  uiiirii. 
Stand,  Hiitkoi. 

IflS 


650 


PHI  LOLOO  V. 


Slnr,  ti/li/ or  hfiiMii/  {huUon). 

Steal,  knjisliiiiila. 

Slern  (ol'vcsspl),  ojxtlili. 

Stiickiiiijs,  kiisliisl,u.iliis. 

Stoiir,  ston, 

Sto|i,  kirajirl ;  mil/aif. 

Strong;,  nkokoiii  or  skiikiini. 

Sturgoon,  ttutshiii  or  stiitsliin, 

Siinimcr,  iram-iUhi. 

Sun,  »M/'  ,•  !>//(///. 

Surely,  nniritikn. 

Sweet,  SI. 

Svvoril,  sa/eks-itpiitsiih. 


u 

llndorstand,  kunitUaks. 

Untie,  let  go  (as  a  ro|ie),  mamuk  klak. 


Very,  limns. 
Vest,  lairtst. 
\\\\ngi\  liiDii-haiis. 


w 


Table,  /«/«/)/. 

Take,  iskam. 

Talk,  iraira. 

Teeth,  /«/«/(. 

Tent,  sr/haiis. 

That,  this,  thoiv,  Ate,  okok  or  u^m^. 

That  wny,  iawa. 

Then,  (i/te. 

They,  klaskti. 

Thirsty,  o/o  tsfJc. 

This,  «)AoA',  iikuk. 

This  wny,  iiikun. 

Thread,  klijuiit. 

Throw  down,  mamuk  mash. 

Tied,  kao  ;  to  tie,  miimiik  kao. 

Tired,  <  /  or  tU. 

To,  toward,  kirnpii. 

Tobacco,  ktiiiiutl. 

To-diiy,  okok-suii. 

Toniu Imw k ,  so/eks-f'ihii.s/i . 

To-morrow,  tiimoln  :  intki. 

Tongue,  hJitti. 

Trade,  miikuk  or  maknk. 

Tre<'.  .«///t. 

Trowsers,  sakiilnk.'i. 

Turn,  kiUipai. 


\Vnler,  inita ;  tsuk,  tsitk,  Uhok. 

Woy,  path,  trikat. 

We,  misaika. 

What,  kiitn,  ikiila. 

When,  kanlslwik  or  kdntsek, 

^^'here,  Xn//. 

White,  liikoj). 

Who,  klaksta. 

Why,  lAiUrt  or  iXto. 

Wind,  wi«  ,•  itsttl. 

Winter,  hU-iUhi. 

Wish,  /uX-«7j  or  Uikek. 

Wolf,  /i/«  /  talajnis. 

Woman,  klotshman  or  kluUthman. 

\N'ood,  stik. 

Work,  mtimiik. 

Write,  mamuk  jwpn ;  mamuk  Is/turn. 


Vellow,  kaukauvak. 
Ye,  you,  your,  musaika. 
Yes,  (i. 
Yesterday,  taanliki.  ' 


r  A  T  A  G  0  N  I  A. 


The  following  vocahiilnries  were  obtninnl  iit  Iho  town  of  Cnrmon,  a  sninll  froiilicr 
sclllrmcnt  of  Buenos  Ay  res,  Kitimtcd  iilioul  filtirn  miles  from  the  nioutli  of  llir  KioNc^ro, 
which  (liviilos  llic  tprrilory  of  llml  K<'pulilic'  from  the  ind<'|HMi(lrnt  or  rullior  ilio  desert 
region  of  Pntngoniii.  The  Indians  who  iiro  ner'iistomod  to  visit  this  spltlcnieiit  for  the 
purpose's  of  trade  lire  known  to  the  inhiihitiiiils  by  llie  designations  of  Aiiaijirs,  Puiiijmis 
Indians,  IVhuiliclirs  (or  'liltiie/clus),  and  C'hi/onos.  Tlie  first  two  nri'  snid  to  ooeupy 
the  extensive  plains  which  stretch  from  the  Ilio  Negro  northward  as  far  as  \lw  Kio  Colo- 
rn(li>.  The  Tehniliches  and  ('hilenos  dwell  sonlh  of  the  Uio  Negro,  the  tiirmi-r  holding 
the  connlry  east  of  the  Andes,  and  the  latter  Ix'longing  properly  to  the  west  of  that  chain, 
though  they  freipiently  moke  incursions  into  the  territory  of  their  neighlioiirs. 

The  natives  whom  we  saw  pre8<'nted  the  usual  characteristics  of  the  American  abo. 
rigines, — a  medium  stature,  with  w<.ll-formed  limbs,  a  brownish  copper  complexion, 
coarse,  straight  black  hair,  growing  low  on  the  forehead,  small,  black,  and  deep-set  eyes, 
and  a  wide  face,  with  the  zygomatic  arches  prominent.  One  of  them  bad  a  physiognomy 
of  the  true  Mongolian  ty|>e,  with  the  opening  of  the  eyes  narrow  and  obli(]uo.  In  their 
character  and  mode  of  life  they  resemble  the  Indians  on  our  western  prairies,  spending 
much  of  tlH'ir  time  on  horselmck,  engaged  in  hunting  or  warlike  exjieditions.  They  are 
the  same  haughty,  fierce,  stubborn,  taciturn,  unintellecttial  race  as,  with  some  partial 
and  local  exceptions,  all  the  tribes  of  this  continent  have  been  found  to  be.  Their  num. 
IxTs  are  necessarily  small,  as  their  means  of  subsistence  mv  limited  to  the  chase  and 
to  fishery,  ill  a  region  not  very  favorable  to  either;  but  <iii  this  |K)int  no  exact  information 
was  obtained. 

LANGUAGES. 


Of  the  tribe  called  Aiicase.i,  nothing  was  learned  further  than  that  they  lived  north  of 
the  others,  were  of  infiTior  stature,  and  ,s|Mike  a  |)eculiar  idiom. 

The  C/iiietios,  or  Chilian  Indians,  are,  without  doubt,  the  same  jicople  us  the  well- 
known  Aril  lira  1111.1.  A  few  words  of  their  siM^'cb,  which  were  obtained,  established  this 
fact.  The  Araiicano  tongue  is  well  known  through  the  works  of  Molina,  Faulkner,  and 
es|)ecially  Febres,  who,  in  his  "  Arte  i/c  In  /ruifiia  general  ile  Chili"  has  given  us  one  of 
thosi-  complete  manuals  of  the  laiiL'u.ige  liir  which  the  Jesuit  missionaries  were  distin- 
guislied.  The  only  |Miints  on  which  it  will  Ik>  of  any  use  to  touch  are  some  |)eculiarilics 
in  the  pronunciation,  which  reciuin'  to  Ih-  explained. 


652 


P  H  1  I,  O  I,  O  (i  Y. 


"  The  g,"  says  Fcbn-s,  "  hn»  n  very  »in(jiilar  proniiiu-mlinii,  nnd  is  of  such  fiT(|ucnl 
occiirreiu'o  tlinl  it  may  Ik;  con.Midrrcil  cliiiriu-U'rislic  ol'tliis  langun^c.  Il  is  proiiuiinccd  in 
tho  iiinrrinost  \mrt  oClhr  niuutli,  o|K'iiiii};  il  ii  little,  niiil  tdiidiiiij?  the  point  of  the  ton^iio 
to  the  lower  gum."  He  then  ronipnres  it  to  the  w  in  the  Latin  wonl  S(imlii.i,  nnd  in  the 
Catnlonian  liiu-h,  much.  In  the  pronuiicialion  of  the  native  at  ("arnien,  this  element 
had  the  sound  of  the  iij!  in  our  words  siniier,  htin/:,  which  is  n-presented  in  this  volume 
by  the  character  j;. 

Another  peculiar  sound  is  the  th, — so  written  by  Febres,  hccauso  his  printer  had  no 
types  of  the  letter  t  with  a  diacritical  mark.  "  This  sound,"  ho  says,  "  is  produced  by 
touching;  the  |>oint  of  the  tongue  to  the  r(K)f  of  the  mouth."  As  we  heard  it,  the  sound 
siH'itied  to  b<>  that  of/  liillowcd  by  an  r  not  trilled, nnd  so  sligbtlv  touched  as  io  Ik'  hardly 
audible  as  a  distinct  clement.  It  was  a  little  softer  than  that  uhicli  we  generally  fjive  to 
this  combination  in  the  words  /;//,  liensnn,  and  the  like. 

The  only  other  sound  which  the  Spanish  grammarian  notices  as  |>eculiar,  is  one  which 
he  designates  by  u  with  a  grave  accent  (iJ).  In  pronouncing  it  he  observes  that  "  the  lips 
are  held  a  little  o|M'n  and  without  motion."  This  we  found  to  be  the  French  rii  in  jieur, 
or,  more  exactly,  our  own  «  in  purr,  which  we  have  denoted  by  the  character  ". 

Bearing  in  mind  these  dillerences  in  orthography,  the  resemblance,  or  rather  identity, 
in  the  following  lists,  will  be  evident.  In  the  .\rnucaniaii,  the  n  and  //have  the  S|>aiiish 
pronunciation  (»//  and  /'/).  It  should  also  Ix-  noticed  that,  according  to  Febres,  the  natives 
an-  accustomed  to  interchange  certain  letters,  as  i)  and  /,  o  and  w,  v  and  /, — and  it  would 
ap|icar  that  their  enunciation  is,  in  general,  rather  indistinct. 


4tAlTCANf1. 

itntH 

cHyrii 

Hua/iten 

ctt 

ciUhnI 

hunthii 

ihmo 

chao 

huijiie 

piheh 

yw 

udn 

voro 

payum 

pel 

cHu 

cfuitiH// 

pUno/iiie 

pivi/ue 

i/uiiK 

epu 

(Hia 


cini.Km. 

titiin 

kien 

iraijilen 

ka 

kilt  rale 

hurittni 

Onrno 

tfUII 

ni/iike 
piniif 

li* 

ill 

ix'in 

font 

ImiiriiH 

jitt 

koiiv 

ti^ni)iliia 

/mntttiT 

jiiiike 

kiiiiit 

CJIU 

ke/ii 


sun 

moon 

star 

water 

lire 

man 

woman 

Ihther 

mother 

child 

eye 

nuse 

mouth 

teeth 

beard 

neck 

arm 

finger 

foot 

heart 

one 

two 

three 


P  A  T  A  (!  O  N  I  A. 


r.53 


AKAIICANO. 

mrii 

1111/11 

t/iirvliu 

rr/ulie 

jiiirii 

iiyllii 

mini 

vuiri-i/iiiiii/e 

»iiiri-ijiii 

r/iii-m<iri 

cHlii-mari 

IHilaiii 


nilLXNO. 

iiifli 

kit  f/o 

/i '/}!;' 

rrlhr 

pi/iii 

tiiliiii 

mini 

iiiiin-kini/r 

iiiiin-p/m 

rpii-miiii 

kitlit-mtin 

/iii/ii/.ii  (?) 


Idiir 

live 

si.N 

sovcn 

riylil 

niiio 

ten 

clcvni 

IWI'IVf! 

iHi'lity 

ihirly 

liiiiiili'i'il 


IM'KI,  CIIKS     r  A  M  I' A  S    AND    T  K  II  T  I  I.  I  (    II  i:  S.) 

FniilkiKT,  in  \m  nccotint  of  I'nln^nnin,  (Ifscrilics  \\v:  whole  cnuiitry  Kuiilh  of  ilii>  l.ililiiilr 
of  llio  Kit)  lie  III  PIntii,  mid  cnsl  oC  llin  ('(irilillcras,  ns  inlmhilrtl  hy  n  sini-li'  nnlioii  of 
Iniliiins,  s|>enking  onn  lniii;iiiii;c',  iiiul  known  liy  llic  >;('ncriil  nnnic  \i\'  Vi'rlihm.  DIHiTcnt 
Irilx's  iind  Ixinds  have  piirlii'iilnr  d<'sij;iiiilii>ns,  .such  ns  Ihr  Moniiliiiiiccis,  Ihi'  KiviT  |«nplc, 
&ip.,  nrrordinH  lo  their  liwiilily.  Thosi'  to  the  north  o!"  Ihi-  liiii  Colorndo  iiii'  I'oiiimoiily 
known  ns  tlio  "  I'liinp.'is  indiiiiis,"  from  the  prairirs  ovor  Hhicli  thi'V  wnndir.  'I'hosc 
south  of  this  rivrr  ari^  ti'rnicd  'JUini/Jiiis  or  Ulhui'/ilirx,  (proiKHinccd  hy  the  inhuliilnnts 
ol'CarnH-n,  Tiliiii/icliis.)  Thry  inhiihit  thf  plains  and  Ihf  tahlc-laiiii  iMtwrcn  the  Audi's 
and  till'  coast.  Thcsi'  arc  the  people  so  celehraled  lor  their  f;ii;antii-  stature,  lhon<2h  this 
ap|)ears  not  lo  )»•  a  nineral  characteristic.  Ol'  the  natives  whom  we  saw  at  the  \{m 
.Nejjro,  none  were  six  Hit  tall ;  hut  we  were  assiiivd  hy  respectahle  residents  that  aiiionj; 
the  more  southern  triln's  who  cM'cnsionally  visited  that  settlement,  it  was  not  uncommon 
to  set-  individiiiils  who  exceeded  thai  measure. 

The  lollowiiif;  words  were  ohtained  I'rom  an  Indian  of  the  Pampas  who  had  resided  at 
the  .selllement  loiii;  enoujih  lo  aci|uire  soi'ie  knowledge  of  the  Spanish  language.  The 
general  sound  ol"  the  S|«"ech  is  extremely  Inrsh  and  giilliinil.  The  other  Indians  s|Hiku 
nfit  as  very  dillicult  (111111/  Ini/mjmo)  to  acipiire.  It  alionnds  in  I'onsoiiants  ami  guttural 
sounds,  lorniing  u  strong  contrast,  in  this  res[i<'cl,  to  the  Chilciio.  'I'he  snttiiral  /  iVe- 
iiuenlly  cH-eiirs;  and  the  slhilanls  *  and  c  are  oflen  heard,  as  well  as  the  harsh  combina- 
tions ts,  f(,  sk,  ^^7l■,  //(qii.  tjiJ ?),  iic.  But  the  most  peculiar  sound  in  the  language  is  a 
very  deep  guttural,  resenihling  prohalily  the  'iiiii  ol'lhe  S<'inilic  tongues.  It  is  pronounced 
deep  in  the  throat,  with  a  contrai'lion  ol'lhe  organs  like  that  made  in  an  Inetleclual  attempt 
to  swallow.  Various  methods  of  representing  this  elenu  nt  in  Itoman  ohamcters  have 
iM-en  employed  hy  Arabic  and  Hebrew  grammarians;  one  ol"  these  is  hy  an  inverted 
comma  (')  placed  lielore  the  vowel  which  follows  the  sound, — and  this  has  Ik'cii  adopted 
in  the  present  case.* 


*  'Die  viio:ibuliiry  Iiuh  Imimi  IvH  jih  4)ri{riimlly  written ;  hut  it  Kt'cint)  prril)nl)1e  tlint  tlii!<  !U)utid  in  tlio  sainr 
as  that  for  which,  in  wrilinif  iIh-  Orc^nii  tonpncx,  three  ycnr«  nt\cr\var(lK,  the  IcUcr  7  was  aiioptrd.  It 
will  bt>  wen  that  it  is  trcfjueiiily  coinliiiied  with  tlie  k  anfl  /s, 

lli-l 


054 


I' II I  I.OI.OI;  Y. 


;! 


Alive,  ahdliiik. 

All,  kahuka. 

Arm,  irtk'np. 

Arm-pit,  kakat. 

Arrow,  ^1/. 

Rail,  koimilra  Iclnvtkntn  ('). 

licnril,  ia-iiriek' 11  $k . 

Itcnutiriil,  ii'iitttiJuiUku, 

nelly,  iat.iiitk. 

nini,  tsiypf. 

RInck,  eyiguntii. 

ninod,  ^ino. 

Bliii',  n/iUhiil. 

Holly,  a-lii/l. 

Rone,  nhit. 

How,  dr/iti  (qu.  iirro  '). 

Hrcnd,  Uihin. 

Brother,  ojfiaUum. 

Cnnoc,  atigf)rk,  a/>/t<i/. 

Cap,  or  hat,  kiihc. 

Child,  it'iUske. 

f'lothing,  ef.lupyditii. 

Cold,  kia. 

Cume,  maften. 

Cook,  mokomnk. 

Danre,  t/iiiluark. 

Dead,  akamakn. 

Dojj,  dnse. 

Drink,  frikognk. 

Duck,  tueik. 

Ear,  iaUfisk. 

Eat,  t^■igo  kfiniiku. 

Esd,  uignixk. 

Evil. spirit,  itnau-kii.ii>aH. 

Kye,  iatcUke  or  iiUi'tikf. 

Eyebrow,  iakaUki'isk. 

Far,  i-i/Cv/. 

Father,  iugunikla. 

Find,  u-'haii'okun. 

Finder,  la-gO/.. 

Fin;;<T-n(iil,  iii-pf$. 

Fire,  niiikiik. 

F'esh,  iTHiit,  j)fli-ua. 

Fool,  iitpgil  (^anie  as  le^). 

ForeliJ-nd,  iakniski'tfk. 

Go,  miltnk. 


(ind,  aniiii-kaiiUiiii 

(.iikmI  (lie  is),  iciirsiiikiim. 

4tiio!ic,  kilhii. 

<ir<Nit,  niMri. 

Had,  imil^iii. 

Hand,  iisk'np  (mine  as  arm). 

Mead  (alsii)  hair),  ttt'rtr. 

Heart,  iiitii/i.Oa, 

Hot,  '(i/i. 

House,  ti/ioikr. 

Uurrivtim;  riii-gilsii. 

Husband,  piitriukia. 

Ii'e,  snow,  iiiliiiitit. 

Iron,  iiiiriik. 

Kill,  IrikulHikam. 

King,  iiniiu-kenilfne  (see  God). 

Land,  »/»X'. 

Leaf,  <i;((i/. 

Leg,  itipgil 

Lijihinin);,  ag'Ask. 

Lip,  iapelk. 

)lan,  Xi//«',  7<a//-e  (?). 

Moon,  iipi/.uk. 

.Mother,  mamfikla. 

.Mountain,  (p/i«. 

Mouth,  iaptilk  (mx  lip). 

Much,  many,  ln/ipu. 

Near,  ka/ait^e. 

Neck,  ia-ktcal. 

No,  /xi^. 

Nose,  t'u/itV. 

Old,  «uba  (same  as  great). 

One-eyed,  akta/fka. 

Partridge,  tsngu  (se<>  bird). 

People  {genie),  iifii/  ia  kiiir. 

Pine-tnv,  /.ilsa. 

Pipe,  fliiiU. 

Rain,  ^iiignp. 

Red,  r.lisa. 

River,  iugiip  (i.  e.  water). 

Sea,  rttlita  (or  kali/a  '). 

Shoulders,  iilsllop. 

Sing,  U^iko-melimk. 

Sky,  "/«/l. 

Sleep,  tf.apy.lo. 

Small,  agi^t^. 


u 


PATAGONIA. 


6S0 


Hmokc  (».),  nflyiimuk. 
Hrnold'  (v.),  trikoiirl. 
Spring  (».),  keakanonnkn. 
'Si|iiirrL'l,  ia!it^\a. 
^tar,  tsnkaletti. 
Stone,  t^iimma. 
Summer,  isoii. 
Sun,  l^iajt.a//> /.nl. 
Thunder,  a/.ulnkn. 
Throat,  iii'it/.et. 
Tobacco,  iaujie. 
To-day,  intknm. 
To-morrow,  ka/aima. 
Tongue,  iu-tcOnuk. 


To  itli,  ia-hai. 

'I'owii,  diek  (hoc  land). 

To'c,  (iftiik. 

I'gly,  kniiml^iii  ojiinskum  (sec  bod). 

Walk,  s/iili;i/.usl^ii. 

Water,  iiit-iiji. 

White,  Ilk' din. 

Wind,  (lift. 

Winter,  kta. 

Woir,  k<ima)il(i(i-/o])iii  (qu.  /olio?). 

Woman,  iamiikhamrk. 

Yc8,  «'««•«. 

Yesterday,  kiimniifiini. 

Young,  ial>Ols. 


Nf 

MK 

It  A  1, 

s. 

ti-i 

one 

/'''i,;*-'v» 

goven 

]»''ii 

two 

jxtsa 

eight 

got 

three 

ti;ilxi 

nmo 

mala 

four 

tsuiiiiil.ska 

ten 

Uitike 

five 

, 

lsamalska-l(j;i 

eleven 

tnimdii 

six 

/siiimilikii-pftii 

twelve 

He  knew  no  word  for  twenty,  or  any  higher  ntimlior. 


8  E  N  T  E  N  r  K  »• 


He  in  n  good  man. 
She  is  a  good  woman, 
Thou  art  a  man. 
My  dog. 
Thy  dog. 
Two  dogs, 
Give  nic  meat, 
Ciive  me  water. 
Give  me  the  dog, 
I  gave  it  to  him. 
He  gave  it  to  me, 
I  know  him, 
I  love  her, 
I  love  my  lather, 
I  will  marrv  her. 


]Milre  ydtke. 

mii/i.d>U/.a  yidtpi. 

jmlraikila. 

ilnse-ki. 

linsf-kita. 

pet^i  iln.se. 

mitiiiikr  pitpia, 

mitaiike  lisiip. 

mitaiikia  dnse, 

mu/'jiii  tdkia. 

kill  tiikiii. 

kii-i/limitd  mdlkiim. 

kniapi  gitsay.lalkum. 

komiuti^e  nagiitsd/.Ud. 

t^iiikinatfdkum. 


"  Tlii-sc  sentenwR  are  given  as  tlicy  were  written  down  at  firat,  ond  sume  of  them  are  no  doubt  incor- 
rect    Tlii'y  do  not  al«iiy»  ngrtr  with  the  vocahidary. 


656 


HII  1  I,0  l,0«i  V, 


I  wto  him, 

I  struck  him, 

I  Hlrucl<  him  wilh  lh<-  IihiI, 

I  Hiruck  him  with  Ihr  hiitrhi'l, 

lie  sings  wfll, 

lie  siii){s  ill, 

III'  I'limc  iiri  fiH)!, 

Ill'  riiiiic  III!  hiirNclmck, 

III"  cMini'  hv  wiitiT, 

He  rainr  l>y  liiiiil, 

Mrliii;  inr  Ihi'  rhilil. 


kiratsiiin  liln^kti-ak. 

kinmiiiit  li/ii'kti^iik  nhailrkn'i. 

iitriitk'iiii  tilnktrok  IniiklLn ill. 

hiiiiiki;i/timu  lunil. 

ii'iiiiliimmi  Irirnl. 

yiikaiiii  (■«(•  uilkliiiii. 

kinniluiimi  in/klniii  (i|ii.  irnm  mUMi 

iiii;iijik<iiiii  inikliiliiiii, 

III' 1/^11  iriini/jiiiifni. 

kdiiiiilii'iitsa  i/im. 


T  K  H  r  I  I,  I  <•  II  K. 

A  few  words  of  till'  siinlhrni   I'lU'lohi,'  wi've  nlimimil  Irom  11  Trhuilii'lii'  Imliaii,  hIui'Ii 
ihiitt  siitiic  diflbrcnce  nl' iliiilril. 


Arm,  iiisk'o/i. 

Itennl,  in/i  Ikn. 

Hird,  kduiii. 

lioiie,  oliiitsk. 

Kgg,  fill  HI'. 

l''.yfN  iatrlk. 

Kiither  (my),  iii-ifjii'i/.i. 

Fiiiner,  iiif.'11/./i. 

I'"irr,  huKiiknk. 

(iod,  sirs. 

Head,  iitfuihu. 

Ilcnrt,  u1ltnf.11.  ■ 

Lug,  iaUk. 

Man,  kinn. 


Mother,  viiimi'ki. 
Mouth,  inpiilk. 
Nerk,  ui II /Ills. 
Nose,  iiiiiiils, 
lUiii,  lltniii;i. 
Sky,  siikiil. 
•Siiii,  a'liil'i. 
Star,  ty.altla. 
Sun,  aphifk. 
T«?th,  ia/inii. 
Twe,  iijai. 
Water,  iii^iip. 
Woman,  inmiikiiiiiki 


y  1 

M  K  U  A  1.  S. 

tfie 

line 

kiiiiiiilskii 

ten 

pfiffii 

two 

t^a-kamnlskii-lri 

eleven 

gntsk 

three 

h-n-knmnl.skii-iM'ili.i 

twelve 

mala 

tour 

jH'l^nt.in  Miitska 

twenty 

tanka 

live 

uilra.iii  mulskii 

thirty 

trnnuin  or  t-inmaii 

six 

ma/iis'i  mntskii 

forty 

kdtsipiis 

seven 

la/ikuxn  iitalskii 

lifty,  iVc 

puasa 

ei^!ht 

jiatiika  (?) 

hundred 

tfiffn 

nine 

The  last  word  is,  perhaps,  borrowed  from  the  Araurano,  hut  its  origin  in  Ixith    Ian- 
j5uag&s  is  uncertain.     In  Spanish,  it  is  the  imiiie  of  a  coin. 


S  0  U  T  II  K  R  X    A  V  W  I  C  A. 


DlKlMO  uiir  Htny  iit  Itio  J.im.'iro,  tin  o|i|Hirtiiiiily  ullrrcd  iil'oliliiliiin^  Iniiii  the  imlivcn  nf 
Afrion,  who  art!  tii  lie  round  llirrr,  viH-nliiiliirici*  oi'  mwrml  lnii);iiiigcii  siHikcn  in  Ihe 
sonllirrn  purl  of  lliiit  nmlincnl.  Sdiiii'  of  Ihrsc  wcri',  Irinn  llic  rirciinistiiiircH  niider 
whicli  llicy  wcrr  liikrn,  ncccssiirily  liricriind  iin|i«'rli'rl ;  ollicrs,  for  wliicli  we  liiicl  bcltiT 
lldvllntn^t'l<,  W(-rt'  orconxidrriilili-  Icii^tli.  It  was  iit  lirst  iiili'iidrd  li>  |>iililisli  iIicmi  cnliri'; 
IiiiMIm!  ncPf'Haity  of  cdiiipri'ssin^  our  iiintcriiils,  and  tlic  cxpcrlatinii  that  (lie  lalKnirN  nf 
tlio  niisKioniirics  who  arc  now  rstalilislii'd  in  tlial  ipiarli'r  will  sjiorlly  sii|H'rsi'du  all  oilier 
sdiin'rs  of  liifDrnialion  on  llils  siilijcct,  have  dt'liTinincil  us  In  imiil  llir  ^iralcr  portion, 
and  to  ({ivc  nii'ri'ly  a  coniparalivi-  list  of  llio  principal  wiirds,HutIicii>iil  to  show  the  general 
siniilarily  wliicli  prevails  ainonu  llic  lan^ua^cs  of  this  rcniou. 

I'roni  a  I'oinparisou  of  our  vocaliuliiri<'s  wjili  hiIiits  alri'ndy  published,  two  itillrcucrs 
may  Ik'  deduced,  one  of  wliicli  is  already  familiar  to  cllino;;raplii'rs,  while  the  second  has 
not,  so  far  as  we  are  inforinrd,  lieeii  as  yet  ihstiin'tly  staleil.  The  first  is,  that  from  the 
cijualor  lo  latitude  '.W  south,  the  conlinent  of  Africa  is  occupied  liy  a  Mingle  jK'opIn, 
s|H'akini;  dialects  of  one  jieneral  lannua(,'i'.  St-condly,  it  appears  that  this  ^'eneral  Ian- 
);ua<;i',  or  rather  liiniily  ol'  i-o;;iiate  lan^iia^es,  lias  two  distinct  sulHlivisions,  which  may 
Ik!  eiitilled  (I)  the  r'«/ij,'«-.1/(M//((,aiid  (-')  the  C'iiffri(iiiiii,riii\i  inciudinjj  under  it  Severn! 
dialects,  or  minor  divisions. 

Of  the  viH-nhiilarics  which  we  );ive,  all  hut  the  first  Im<Ioii^  to  triln's  livini;  south  of 
the  eijuator.  The  /-'//<>  or  Ad^'ii  laii)j;uaj;e  is  spoken  liy  a  numerous  [M'ople,  who  inhabit 
lli}<  coast  of  Guinea,  in  aliout  latitude  5°  north,  not  fur  from  the  m<iulh  of  iIk'  ({uorra  or 
Nij;er.  They  prolmhiy  liorder  iininediately  upon  llie  norlhi'rnmost  Iriln's  of  the  South- 
African  stock,  and  the  vocalmlary  of  their  language  is  valunhle  as  showing  the  distinct- 
ness of  the  two  rac-cs. 

Of  the  r(;nnainin);  vocaliiilaries,  all  but  one  IxMong  to  the  Coiiuo-Miikiii  branch  of  the 
fwHtth-African  family.  The  exception  is  the  JSi/iiniUitia,  which  is  a  Cnllre  dialect.  We 
proceed  to  give  some  e.xplanation  of  the  iianics  here  used. 

llndcr  the  term  C'oiigo,wv  include  all  tlie  nations  who  inhabit  what  is  sumetinies  called 

105 


6as 


II  I  I.  (I  l.iHI  Y 


J.imrr  tiiiiiiiii, — th'il  k,  iIh'  wr«liTli  rimii  iil"  Alrii'ii,  iViiin  llif  •■ijiiiilcir  In  llir  nmnlrv  ol" 
iIh'  llciliiiiliil!!.  'I'lii-  |iriii<'i|iiil  iiri', — lii'i;iiitiiMH  rrcini  llir  imrlh, — (I)  iIh'  hiimf'ini/n,  hIih 
livi-  iiiirlh  i.r  III!'  Xiiirc  iir  Chiiko  K  vi-r,  U'lwi'i'ii  llii-  t'luiiilnr  iiiiil  laliliiili'  I'  wuitlii  ('i) 
the  MiiHiljiilii,  II  miviiKi-  irilm  in  ihn  inlpriiir,  wi'il  «iC  tin'  Kiiniliinilii  i  (!•)  Ihi'  I'lDigii 
|iri>|K>r,  or  II  urrm  niiij.in  cKTiipyiim  «  <''"ieilry  wliJrh  ixlrmU  iiIhiiiI  Iwn  ImiiilriMJ  inili'x 
rniiii  iKirtli  111  •tiMilh,  Ixlmiii  ihr  Ziiirc  ninl  lliimli'  Hivrrt;  (I)  \\v  AiiitJit  nr  Ai/inw//, 
wliii  ililialiil  II  mirnm  >.lri|i  xl'liiiiil  mi  llir  riiii.<l,  IkIwci'ii  ;t '  iiiiil  It"  iil\cpnlli  liililiiili',  wlirn- 
lliiy  iiri'  niilijiv  I  til  III)'  I'lirliiyiirtr,  liiit  ill  III!'  iiilrriiir  iirr  N|ir<iiil  hut  ii  liirui"  li'rnlnry, 
ruriniii;{  nil  iiiili'iuiKlnii  iiii,|  iuiwitIiiI  |Mn|ilfj  niid  (.'i)  llir  Ihiifsiiaor  lliiiu"'/<i,  *i>" 
l>i«<c>ti  i||i>  ri.iiiilry  miiiiIi  uI"  iIh-  Aii)(iiIii,  I'xii'iiiliiix  In  llir  Hiinily  iji'wrl  mIiIcIi  iii'|mriilc» 
llii'in  rriiiii  Ih)'  llolii'iitiiU, 

Tin-  Miikiiii  iin,  111!  ihr  I'llMli'rn  i-onxl,  Hlinl  llir  ('mi;;.!  luilinii  in  on  llir  writ, — llii-  iiiiiHt 
lliinicriiiH  iiiiil  iBiwirliil  ("oplr  kiiimii  In  iih  ;  iiml  llifir  iiaiiir  lias  ilirriliirr  Nrii  iimiI,  in 
till'  xamr  iiiailiirr,  In  iji-sigiiati'  all  llir  Iriln's  s|M'al\ilit{  rn^jnali'  liill;.'iia)(rii,  tViaii  tlir 
Siiwairl  nr  Snwniili,  iirar  iIh'  ri|iiatiir,  In  llii-  Siil'iila,  in  laliliiili-  'H^  smiili.  'I'lir  |iriiiri|ial 
III  llii'«>  an'  (1)  llir  MiiKiin  |irn|M'r,  wlm  iK'nipy  an  <'Xlrn»ivi'  ri'ifinii  Im-Iwii'II  iIim  lulilinJcN 
10"  niiJ  'Jd-"  wiiiili;  {'.')  ilii'  Mh'/jii/iii,  wlin  an'  K|in'ail  n\rr  llir  inlrriiir  ol'  llir  ninlinrnl, 
to  lh«'  niirili  niiil  nortliwi'si  nrihc  Mitkim  ;  (Jl)  iIm'  Makomlr,  uImi  iiii  jnlrrior  irilip,  whnw 
rniinlry  stn'tcln-s  inwariN  llir  li-rrilnry  nl'  lIu'  Ifc-iiu'rra  mi  lliii  H<'<ili'rii  I'oasl.  Tin' 
'IhkiriDii,  MiisDiii,  anil  Siitii/ii  ilialrciN,  nrwlin  li  viHaliiilan''i(  arr  ninii,  an'  M|iciki'n  liy 
IrilK'*  nl'ilir  <tnullii'rn  Makiia,  wlm  iiilialiil  iIk'  n'^'imi  wairnil  liy  llir  ({rrat  rivrr  /ainln'/.r. 
Till'  Irriii  Ciilln'  nr  Katir  is  nl' Aniliir  ilrrivalinn,  iiicaiiiii},'  infiihl.  Il  wan  riii|ilnyi'il 
liy  thr  Ariili  wlllrrson  llir  I'aslrrn  niii«l  of  Al'rira  In  ili'si^nalr  all  tlir  [iiiKaii  uiiil  liarlui- 
mus  nolivrx.  Fnnn  llicni,  tlir  l'ortii|2iirw  iHirniUi'il  the  a|i|H'llatliiii,  wliii'li.nH  tlir  |>M|H'r 
mill  purliciilar  nnnii'M  nt°  iIk'  variniiN  iriln's  lirrnnir  kimwii,  )(raiiiiaMy  IimI  its  ^nirral 
xiunitii'atinn,  anil  is  iinw  n'strii-tnl  to  a  iliHlinrt  riass  nl'  irilicH  who  inlialiit  llie  i-oiinlry 
lii'tHrrii  llir  Makiia  mi  llir  iinrlll  iiliil  tlir  ilnllriitolN  mi  the  miiiIIi,  iiiiiI  who  ililU'r  siilli- 
rirntly  I'min  llir  nllirr  alxirii;inrs  In  ilrwrvr  a  s|H'i'ial  ili'Hiijnalinn,  Thi'y  arc  ^rnrrnliy 
•ilrnilcr  ami  wrlUniuilr,  with  liiri'M  |Nirtnkin|^'  sli^hiiy  of  iho  Moorish  rust.  Tlirir  rnlor 
is  a  yrilowish-hniwii,  Im-iwii'Ii  that  oflhr  miilattu  mid  tht^  trui*  iM'Kru.  Tim  iniiiv  im  no: 
iniirh  ilr|irrsiNil,  Ihr  lips  arr  ratlirr  tliii'k,  llir  ryr  lur);r,  hliirk,  unit  hrii^ht,  uiiil  tlir  hair 
woolly. 

Srvrrai  trilM-s  nl"  ihis  |H'o|iIi'  an'  known  lo  iin  Trnni  thr  aiToiinls  of  Iravrllrrs  atiil  mis- 
Minnaries.  Thr  mnst  nntnl  an'  thr  Mii-liiiana,  in  llir  iiitrrinr,  iinrlli  nl'ihr  lloiirntols,  anil 
thr  Koossus  or  CalFn's  prnpiT,  with  thr  Snohihs  or  Zulu,  ililiahiliiiH  tin"  I'oast  Ix.'twrrn  thr 
cohinial  si'ttlrnirnts  nnil  Iwijjna  Hay,  in  Intiluilr 'Jlf  south.  Of  thr  |i<'n|ilr  who  oi'('ii|iy  Ihr 
I'ounlry  lirtwiiii  Ihis  hay  anil  ihr  I'ortiiL'iirsr  sraport  ol"  Soralii,  »r  havr  hilhrrlo  hail  no 
(ircoiiiit.  Tli'V  arr  rallnl  .\'i/ii»iIkihii,  or,  as  ihr  I'orlii^iirsr  writr  il,  lii/uimlm/ir,  anil 
il  is  of  ^lirir  laii;{iiair<'  that  a  s|,r<iinrii  is  imw  (jivrn.  A  viK-nhiilary  ol"  srvrrai  liiiliiln><l 
words  was  nhtaitlnl, — hut,  I'nr  Ihr  rra.ons  U'liirr  iiirntionrd,  il  is  ninillrd.  Thr  Ainrriran 
inissiiKiarirs,  who  havr  ri'crntly  rniniiirni'rd  tlirir  lalxirs  in  Ihr  Zulu  rniintry,  havr 
nlnNiily  liirmrd  a  ^ranimnr  and  dirtioiiary  nl'  that  lnn^llagr,  whirh  it  is  In  Im!  Iio|x'i|  will 
b<'  |)ublishiil.  Thr  Zulu  wnnls  whirh  nn'  (jivrn  lo  show  thr  similarity  iK'twcrii  thai 
toniiur  and  thr  .Nyamhann,  arr  takm  I'nmi  a  vix'aliiilary  rompilnl  hy  thr  |{iv.  II.  J. 
Vpnablo,  and  now  in  the  possi'«.sir>     if  tlio  Missionary  Xoaril,  to  whoso  liivor  wr  owr  llir 


j.jn-iim'-j-j«.< 


H  OUT  UK  R.N    AFRICA. 


nft!) 


ii|i|xirinniiy  iil'  cint'iiltin;:  ii.  'I'll"  llirhiiiiiiii  «iiril«  iirii  |inr(ly  (Venn  the  mmr  «<iiir<'<',  Imi 
|iriiici|inllv  rniiii  lliiri'lic>ll'«  'rriivrln. 

II  Mill  Ih'  m'I'ii  iIiiiI  th<'  ('iiirniriiiii  Innuurn  iljllir  I'roin  llxixi'  ut'  thr  I 'on|{<>>Miil(iin  ilivi- 
moll,  mil  iiiily  jii  iiiiiii)  wonlo,  liiil  in  llif  ki'MitiiI  rlniriirlrr  nf  llii'  prMiiuiii'lnlinii,  Tlir 
fiiriiKT  linvi'  Hi'vcriil  hiir'<li  I'li'iiirnlH  nnil  rninliiiKitiiniK  wliic  |i  lur  iiiikiiouii  In  tlii'  liilttr. 
Amiiii^  tlic'M'  Ih  iIic  t/l,  uliirli  wi'  (irMl  Iwiinl  IVcimi  iIhwi'  niiiivi»,  niid  wliicli  wiin  iilli'r- 
wnrili  liiiiiicl  Hii  I'diiiiiinii  ill  llii'  liiiiijiiiiKi'x  cil'  NcirlliHi'ulirii  Aimru'ii. 

It  14  nut  iiii|>ri'luil>l<'  lliiit  till'  iH'i'iilliiritii'x,  Imlli  in  llii>  liiiiuiiii;;rs  iiiiil  In  tlii'  |iliyMii'iil 
clinraclrrixlirH  nl'llii'  ('iillVr  irilnH,  iii'iy  Iji-  (liii'  In  mii.n'  iiiliriiilMiiri'  v»illi  tlic  ni  inlilxiriii« 
llotlmtolit.  'I'liii  liittrr  an*  miiil  III  hnvi!  liiriiH'rly  >M'i'ii|>ii'>l  niiicli  nl' tlir  miintry  mm  in 
liiMiu'NHiiin  III'  till'  liiriniT.  UhIiiIimI  liiniilits  iiml  IiiiiiiIh  nl'  thi'ni  iiri'  slill  ((iiiiiil  liy  inivil. 
Irrt  in  lliiH  rrKiiiii.  '""I  "f  Mii|i|«iM'ii  In  Ih-  llif  ri'inniinli  mI'  ihc  iiri;!iii!il  |iii|iiiliiliiiii,  nC 
mIiii'Ii  ill)' ^ri'iiliT  (iiirl  liiii  Ih-iii  rillirr  iili^nrlN  li  i>  ilrivrii  HoiilliunriU  liv  llir  iiilvniii'in|r 
licinli'"  III  <  'all'rrH. 

III  till'  liill'mliiu  viH'iilMiliirIrN,  many  nl'  iIh'  unriU  iirr  iml  civin  in  lliiir  siinpli'  nr 
ItriHiiiil-rnnii,  lull  liiivi'  II  |iiirtirli'  jirrfixi'il.  This  ii|i|H'iirH  in  itimc  i'iiw'n  In  uliicli  llii-  Iwn 
nmnlwTH  an-  (jivin.     'I'liim  llir  |iriip<T  wnnl  liir  nir,  in  llic  ('nniiii  nnd  (iIIiit  lanuimHi'i,  is 

tu,  nlllkin^  in  lli uisiriirt  li>rin  of  llif  ninj^iilar  kulii,  iiiiil  in  llii>  plnrnl  vialii.      Ah  Ihrir 

pri-rivil  |iarliili'»  nrim  liiki'  llir  an  rnl,  Il  is,  in  many  ciim'h,  inipiiNNlliji'  In  ilislinunlsli  Ihrm 
rrniii  llii'  ro'l,  uillimit  u  iiiiiri'  arriiriilr  kliiivtli'il);i' nl' tlir  lnii;:iia);<'H  than  wr  havr  the 
iiH'iint  nl'iiri|iilrin;;.  OIiIh'  ('1111^11  anil  Annnlii  lnnt.'iii's,  (jraiiiniar'.  Iiavr  Ihi'Ii  imlilnhril 
Ity  iho  I'atliiilir  inisHiniiarirK;  Iml  tln'V  iiri'  imt  In  Iw  rmiiiil  in  iIh-  llhraricH  nriliis  rniintry. 

ami  iinr  I'liili'avnri  in  nlilain  ihrin  I'miii  Kiirii|N'  Imvi'  Imi'ii  iinsin HNfiil,     Tlii'  |Ki)isi>H»i(in 

nrihfw-  wiiiilil  linvi'  rnuhli'il  uh  tn  cnrrccl  any  I'rnirH  which  may  cxixl  in  onr  vncaliularicN 
(if  tliiwi'  lannnii)!!'*  i  Iml  llii'V  arr  iK'lirvi'il  ihil  In  Ik:  viiry  iiiimrrniiH  nr  iin|i(irtanl.  Snnio 
allnwanri'H  kIiiuiIiI  Ih'  iniiilc  liir  llii'  ilitli'rcni'rN  of  ilialrrt  whiih  iniiHt  lie  I'uuild  in  a  ru^inii 
ol'mirh  I'Xicnt  n«  that  imcii|iIi'iI  liy  iIh'w  iwn  niilliuiK. 


lino. 

aiiviiii. 

Mll<l. 

•• 

Hyc. 

iilili,<l,  nliuiiit) 

itlniiiii)  (') 

nkiim' 

•1 

Kamliinila 

iiidinhi.iimiwii 

JII 

Zulu 

iiikn/ii 

•A. 

Miinilinia 

iiilii 

nk%tn 

luiiii,  /huh 

4. 

Ciiii^n 

ziiml'i 

iiixriiy  :ulu 

i/iikit/a  ;  zuMru 

5. 

.\nijnla 

tt:iiin/n.iitiipiini:r4 

it/ii 

ilinln 

It. 

ll.iij;i'm 

,l,< 

l/u 

iiniiiir  ;  i4iuHw. 

1 . 

Makiia 

III  II  Ink  II 

miinmu 

lllll/o/lOilllil 

H. 

Mniljann 

lllllluil)>ll 

kiiiiiiDir 

Dill  u  nil 

11. 

Miiknnilo 

III  III. sit  III  II II  a  II 

ihkunii 

iiimiliinir 

111. 

'I'akwaiii 

iiiii/unffi 

11:11/11 

tiiiiMioilHii,  niiMi- 
muiia 

II 

.Masma 

iizimii  (f) 

tizimii 

mmmiiiin 

12. 

i^njiilli 

miihinu" 

It  11  III  II 

iiioiDiiiinii 

13. 

Nyaiiilmna 

jiikiffiiifn',  froiii/m 

ilt/ii,  rt'inuiHii 

U'lllltltllt 

(a.) 

Zi'ilii 

Slllllll,   llli/ll 

I'Zu/ll 

iiidinlii.,  umtu 

(1..) 

Itlcliiiana 

miiniiiii 

l)i)i;oriino,  nnuiro 

IHOHIIIIU 

660 


liyo 

Knmbindn 

Mundiolii 

Congo 

Angola 

BpngL-rn 

Makua 

Miuljana 

Mnkondc 

Tiikwnni 

Mnscna 

Solala 

Nynnibnna 

Zulu 

Bicliuana 


Eyo 

KandiinHa 

Minidjola 

Congo 

Angola 

B<'ng<ra 

Maknn 

Miidjnna 

Makondc 

T.'ikuani 

Mascna 

Sofula 


PUILOLOU  Y. 


WOMAN. 

obioie 

iikitu,  nk&nW 

miikahu 

miikftu 

mu/iflit 

ukdgi 

miitiala 

tiiiikitiifiiii 

miikongOe 

mkazi 

iikitzi 

viknri 

iiaiisate 

sckazi 

masari 


tt/a 

mama    , 

ntuiiKi 

nuiiiia,  /igrximi 

monia,  njiniii 

mtii 

iniiniti,  niiii 

itmttit 

Vlll/ll 
ni^mii 
muu 
'.".■jwa 


Cllll.l'. 

FATIIKK. 

avui-kekeri 

Imlid 

moaiHi 

tiltu 

moana 

UUti. 

moana 

Mi,  sdme 

modna 

tula,  at;  -i 

vmdne ;  mndle 

tdU 

maitia 

till 

motindt^i 

atdti 

nindtKi 

a/aIr 

modna 

IhiIxi 

miMina 

tdUi,  /mba 

moaijono 

lata,  Ixtba 

ntopwaf/dna  ardra 

umtuiina  bal>o,  uitf.lo 

nant/adnii,  ijuana       ia/.o,  luiia 


aba 


HEAD. 

oruo 


funUxntsi  lu 

miDiuo  molur 

soma,  pitDilKi-sumlHi  mii/ituc 

mi/ctie/i^i  niiiliie 

osoma  iiliic 

ohiimii-moe/ii  iiiiini 

msiviic-kiiiaiiilKi  mutni' 

mulienga  iiiii/iir 

mafumii  miisom 

mfiimu,  mdm/ju  soro  or  so/o 

grimi-ku/iiimandtn  .soro,  msolro 


Nvanibnna 

iiiatnam,  rnyin 

iliimsi 

ifloko 

Ziilii 

ma,  itii/oha,  nnenn 

iijkosi 

rkiiiita 

Biclmnna 

tna,  nia/.o 

khiisi 

ko/.n,  l/.lof.o 

HAIR. 

KVE — EVEfl. 

EAR— EAHS. 

Kyo 

Fniij 

iiilifd 

cU 

Katnlilnda 

Isiiki 

tbsil — VDSU 

kulii — miilit 

Miindjola 

Vlfll 

— milt  II 

— matijUi 

Congo 

tsiiki,  mit.\i>iL'ii 

i/.sii — mimi 

kiifu — tnatii 

Angola 

zindemlxi 

lisu — maltsu 

ihtui — matiii 

Bengera 

kisdme 

tsu — odsu 

okiiliii — oattii 

Makua 

kdrdrii  ;  milti 

Itlu — mitu 

maiit — mdru 

Mudjana 

iim/jo 

dizit — mrzii 

ilikulii 

SOUTHERN    AFRICA. 


6G1 


luia. 

r.tE— Kres. 

rAK— KARS. 

Mjikoiulc 

oliiiln 

— iiirho 

kulii — iiiiikiilii 

Takwiini 

mitlili 

di/ii — iiirtii 

— miini 

Mnsoiin 

msiiiisi,  tstsi 

dixii — muau 

— iiiiikiilii 

SolHIn 

iMsi 

diiiii — iiiiilsii 

n ;  it  lie — iiiukiiliw 

Nyninbnna 

inlsiiii 

r/i/.lii — emii/.lii 

iisi  IT — liiikivr 

Xiilii 

ifSiicli 

lino — amet/.h 

iiit/.lilic 

Bielitiaim 

miirir,  morin 

lit/Jo 

Ixr'f 

Nme. 

MnlTll. 

rEETll. 

Eyo 

OIIIUI) 

fIlUt) 

•pi 

Kainbinda 

mlmngo 

una 

HUH  II 

Mumljoln 

niai/idu 

nlfHlHlXIIU 

III  III  II 

Coiigi) 

>Niii/u/u 

HI II mill,  ome/a 

lllt'lll' 

Angola 

moziilii 

kniioa 

iiui :  II 

Bi'iigora 

ctuftnj 

omtra 

')ii-»ii/ii 

.Miikiin 

jnila 

laiio,  mnlakii 

miiiii 

Mudjnna 

hlpiila 

jHikuHoa 

ininu 

Mnkoiidc 

cmiila 

kaijirit 

menu 

Tnkwaiii 

miilii 

miiliniiii 

menu 

.Miiscnu 

mp'hitnH 

iiiidiiiiiii 

iiunii 

Sufiila 

biihuna 

nioiomo 

munii 

Xynmtjann 

iiiofo,  iiioijfi) 

'■/»»«« 

••minyii,  mutiiiu 

Zulu 

impiiDiiilo 

inoloiiin,  itiithniifi 

iziiiio 

Hicliuuna 

iinko 

iiio/oiiio,  kuaiiu 

menu,  mi  no 

TONGUI. 

BEARD. 

xrCK  OR  THROAT. 

Eyo 

iigo 

uraliii 

llllllll 

Kiunhinda 

kizH-n 

fiiiiao 

Mtiniljolii 

lilimii 

iidtlii 

iiktii 

Congo 

luka,  itdakti 

'htvii,  miuzi 

frmao 

Angola 

/iiiii,  iliiiii 

iiiiiivii,  tiiiiizi 

;iiigo 

litMigcra 

ilimi,  ekkah 

OiiMuiiie 

■isingo 

Mokua 

hmi 

'■rori 

••siko 

Mudjnna 

III  I  nut 

iideii 

liikozi 

Mnkondo 

dn-ii,  crtlii 

i;u/u 

'l\ik\vnni 

iin/iimi 

diiidilm 

■•koti 

Mast-nn 

II  hmi 

tidev'  or  iidevf 

kosiii 

.Sofala 

ilidiiiiii 

.kv' 

kozi 

Nyanitjana 

diniim 

iirdirju 

II  kit/ II 

Zi'ilu 

iiilrvii,  isilevii 

iiithimo 

Dicliuana 

tuUme 

levu 
166 

ihainn 

662 


PHI  J.  O  LOGY. 


Eyo 


IIAXD. 


tm 


Kiimbinda 

kaiiiliise 

kaht 

Mumljola 

niion!!i> 

hik, 

liilnniii 

( 'orij^o 

mo'iionito,  miionsjola 

liikakii 

omai 

Angola 

ittionfio 

kiioku 

kimiimi 

BiMigera 

oni/tiiia 

rka 

oriijmi,  oniiiialii 

Mnkua 

etuli 

iitata 

tij/aii,  iiifa,  u6 

Mudjana 

nwaoiign,  kiimtiima 

iliadsa 

liikoyi) 

Mnkonde 

tllOlliiO 

tllOIIII 

tiicilo 

Takwaiii 

oiluni 

koiiH 

m'llii 

Ma.«cna 

kntsii/t 

M;,'  (!) 

iiiuleii»r 

Sorala 

Uii/sii/f 

Irillltll 

fiimiiila 

Nyambann 

i/./iiiia,  ciii/i/nkii 

iivkn,  iiiainkiii 

vcn^e 

Zulu 

uiiilfjiinn 

esiiiil/.lii. 

inytio,  loin/no 

Bichuana 

mokiit)l/li 

iitf.lii 

loiiait 

llnnT. 

IIOKB. 

BLOOD. 

Eyo 

aija 

egu 

egV* 

Kambiiida 

MiMidjola 

makila 

Congo 

iiCti^imas  iithuiido 

tliii^i 

snnii,  me  null 

Angola 

tnii^iiiiii 

ijiij'iiii 

meiia 

Bt'iigera 

iitimu 

ekipii 

Miikiia 

tiniiiiiiii 

uikura 

pomi,  nikiimi 

Miiiijaim 

III  III}  mil 

miitzi 

Makomie 

hintllllil 

tnairofifrou 

tiiiailt 

Tnkwani 

tiliiiiii,  miidi/ii 

tiinfiiWo 

muJovu 

Mnsona 

III  lit i  Dill ,  iiioio 

Jiijiii 

molofm 

Sofala 

utiiriiiiii 

/«P« 

niolnjHi 

Nynnibnnn 

rliii^ixi 

niarambu 

ii^ati 

Zulu 

flizii' 

rill  III  pi  1 

inkiisi 

Bichuana 

julll 

/fSll/IO 

man' 

HKN. 

fjin — (uua. 

»VAKF. 

Eyo 

edi/f 

fpe 

f'lh/ii 

Kambinda 

Mundjola 

titrilhll 

In 

Congo 

tSll/tll 

ilin/i — iiuif.i 

tii/okii 

Angola 

siiii/i-iiiiikii/i 

rill — iiiiii 

m/okii 

Bungcra 

iiili — miiiidii 

Makua 

/flkii,  liliuilftkn 

/I  lit/ III — iiioli/i 

niHi 

Mudjana 

l/iilllliknlo 

iiiitziia 

(lii/okii 

SOUTHERN    AFRICA. 


fifi3 


IIKX, 

Eiiii  —  r.cifl». 

flNAKE. 

Mnkondo 

ei/iikii 

tfjiika 

Tiikn'nni 

Mascnii 

iihiikii 

tizae — nwc 

nzoka 

So  (hill 

Nyiinibana 

ihukii-yfnua 

nut  nth  a — imiiii  iitla 

iiii/oku 

Zulu 

iijknkii-kiizi 

ii/iiiilti 

iin/okn 

nicluiana 

koki< 

Isai 

tw/.a 

ox. 

TRKF.. 

■I'.N. 

liyo 

amjii 

ei/i,  ij-i 

oil  nil 

Kuinbindn 

miiiiii 

Miindjola 

mpnJui 

w/ii/ji 

mui 

Congo 

iiiiomlii 

mi'iti 

imiim/i,  kiiniln 

Angola 

iiiidnilri 

«JH/jI 

muani/a,  kumlii 

Bcngcra 

on/:onihi 

uli 

iitdiii/u 

Makua 

eijnmpi,  nari 

iiiiin 

iiSua,  fulji'Ki 

MuHjnna 

ndijali 

vMrii 

/iutra,  diiiira 

Mnkondo 

l/6mbi 

iitera 

didulm 

Takwnni 

liziia 

Masoiia 

j/OHllli 

tntili 

dziia 

Sofoln 

tiztia 

Nyombana 

timlriire,  tihtima 

dinhi,  cntji.Uiri 

amuiitii 

Zulu 

inko/ir 

imiti 

i/aiika 

Bicliunna 

koiiio 

iMka,  sel/ilara 

ktsatse 

MOON. 

STAR. 

OAV. 

Eyo 

U^u 

rras') 

orsdij,  edyii 

Knmliinda 

tigoamle 

Mundjola 

>it^-i'ii 

gKiDjHn 

knram&i 

Congo 

ns&nife,  mbrji 

tdenilriihi 

kiliimhi 

Angola 

mhji 

ttilemlkm 

kizua 

Hcngprn 

ixKii,  iitfke 

olomlmii!;iilti 

Makun 

mi(Ori 

ntoiilfxi,  ileiifri 

ohiisd,  otuiiii 

Mudjana 

miirti 

mionifmi 

mmzi,  kuntai'i 

Makonde 

nifk'/fi 

dinotigoe 

Tnkwani 

mofri 

maliilo 

Mnsona 

twxzui 

sigati 

Sofala 

mofzi 

Nyambana 

goentle 

rliaisitrdi 

et/Jikimri 

Zulu 

iiii/apka 

inkiiin/tsi 

asiiko 

nii'luinna 

ngiieri 

iinlcri 

moty^la,  iimisi 

664 


P  II  I  L  O  I.  O  G  V. 


Byo 


NIfillT.  RAIN* 


tie 


Kninbiiida 

t6tO 

Miiiuljohi 

mpulii 

mvola 

Wf» 

Congo 

taiigOfu 

mvfild,  hiild 

imiiitio 

Angoln 

itsuku 

mviila 

mdva 

Bengnru 

(>jt,  eur 

Miikua 

ohiu/tt,  ohi'i/ii 

cpfila 

eld  id 

Miidjaim 

Lira,  t^ilo 

ilia 

(lildka 

AInkondc 

tpra 

m'liigii 

p6hi 

Tnkwiini 

Imla 

vati 

Masenn 

nyctiytzui 

mviira 

mdhvii,  pdtisi 

Sofnin 

jMiisi 

NyaiiilMina 

vasikii,  mtiliii 

mfiiia,  nifii/a 

iiicsdira 

Zulu 

ubiisiikii 

imviiUi,  lieta 

eliziii,  lepitfisc 

Bichunnn 

lxisi/.o 

piila,  ana 

leliatsi 

WATKR. 

nil. 

aTONE. 

Eyo 

omi 

imoij 

okiitd 

Knml>inila 

mnzii 

tuia 

Mundjola 

nuijd 

mid 

Congo 

mdza 

tOia 

Uili 

Angola 

mfui 

fdia 

diinrc 

Bcngera 

mcimit 

nmldlu 

futce 

Makna 

imifi,  »i(iri 

mom,  tnttdnt 

mnala,  nldkii 

Mudjana 

mfsi 

motii 

rlii'dnaa 

Makondc 

mtti 

inotii 

mayanga 

Takwani 

mdsi 

mdlu 

Masena 

mddzi 

miidto,  muli/o 

hutve 

Sofa  In 

mdtsi 

nioto 

Nyambnna 

iiuili 

iizih,  iii/iro 

maribuv 

Zulu 

■imanzt 

muli/o 

'> 

Richuann 

iiir/xi 

mulrln 

leiicli  III' 

PATH. 

HOUIK. 

DKAII. 

Eyo 

litta 

•/fe 

uka 

Kambinda 

fon,/iiuli 

Mundjola 

njd 

odkda 

Congo 

iinjiUi 

md 

OdftMl 

Angola 

miim/ji/ti 

iizd,  ii/izii 

onfoa 

Bengera 

ondjila 

niifljo,  xnilio 

Makua 

iipini-mpati 

'»ij)d,  niipn 

nkwa 

Mudjana 

(liUtla 

injiim/jo 

atrile,  attire 

SOUTHERN    AFRICA. 


665 


I 


MM. 

II0U8K. 

MUD. 

Mnkoiido 

epiindi 

ndiifa 

Tukwnni 

tii/iimlia 

Maarna 

iizira 

in/fimlm 

kii/a,  iiJ'Oa 

Sofala 

nijumlm 

Nyambona 

tigflii 

i>it/.la,  ingii,  iingio 

kufa,  v/ile 

Zulu 

iiil/.Ma 

int/.la 

oftiy  liiila 

Bichuaoa 

tselu 

ontyu,  einl^la 

■shiia,  liiirlii 

TO  KAT, 

TO  DBINK. 

ost 

Eyo 

ounilidU 

Oti 

€11 11/ 

Knmbinda 

mini 

Mun<ljola 

into 

( 'lingo 

itUa 

iiioa 

itwsi 

A  ngola 

kutlia,  ki'illa 

nkoloa,  yiigoii 

Viori 

Bcngcrii 

mosi 

Mnkun 

tititnidgi 

idinpahi/a 

mnt/i/a 

Mucljann 

iukiili 

kiiijmi 

ifiiiio,  liimo 

Mnkonilu 

kulia 

numlnrv 

moi/i,  vioji 

Tnkwniii 

wmi,  tniifi 

Mnsona 

kiifh'i 

kiiina 

pnsi 

Sofnin 

fHisi 

Nyiimbnnn 

taf/ia,  Idgia 

tnnon 

fii  litre 

y.nUi 

flla 

vatd,  puza 

koeiiye 

Bichuana 

ya  or  xn 

110(1 

mangehrla,  iiioesi 

TWO. 

TllHEK. 

FOl'R. 

Eyo 

tgi 

ita 

eli 

Kambinda 

u>/i 

tutu 

tyn 

Mundjola 

bieie 

liitfdit 

Una 

Congo 

Villi 

tutu 

kirana 

Angola 

kiadi,  tali 

tutu 

iriiiia 

Flcngeru 

Villi 

tutu 

ktvntia 

Makua 

nUili,  jii/i 

viarnru 

mapfje 

Mudjana 

^'rtl■i/•^  eviri 

sntdtii 

mutyetyc 

Makondc 

ividi 

itiit.a 

ilyetye 

Takwoni 

mili,  vtri 

virarii 

vinai 

Mascna 

piri 

tiitu 

kiiia 

iSofula 

1)1  ri 

talu 

?iai 

Nyambana 

pirire 

ftiiiiiro,  tinhiiio 

giiniinc 

Zulu 

miihini 

VKiChatii  (?) 

ine,  vtani 

Bichuana 

peri 

Iitrii 
167 

ini,  niie 

666 


I'  n  1 1,  o  L  o  r.  Y. 


rivE. 

•i>. 

•ITtfC. 

Eyo 

filup 

>'"/" 

eihjf 

Kainbinda 

tliHU 

samlMtHU 

siiin/)iiiila 

Mundjola 

hituiiu 

bisieiimii 

til^iimu 

Congo 

tiiiiii 

nmsamlHttiii 

lltSlllll/uMtlli 

Angola 

til  II II 

samaiiH 

samlHMiiH 

Rongera 

taint 

piiiiilii 

]Hiiiiliiii/i 

Makua 

tnatnnu 

vuUdnii  tin  iii  tiioilya 

iiiatiiHii  nil  id  m 

Muiijnnu 

miaanu 

mzanai/i  mo  iiinli 

mziiimzimri 

Miikondo 

tihi/aiiu 

vitiinu  nil  iiinsi 

vitiinii  na  viri 

Tukuani 

vilunii 

iihi/uiiii  nil  iiioji 

nhi/iiiiii  mi  iviili 

Mnsenu 

Sllllll 

iiiiholu 

kinoiiie 

Kiilnln 

j(Ih;< 

titnlintii 

ti^inoiiii' 

Nynmhiimi 

nkiiiio 

ukiiitai/una 

nkitnntivrre 

Zulu 

t/./niiu 

isitiipn 

kiimlrini 

Kiohimna 

t/.hii),  t^anii 

yatarii 

iujxt 

ElUHT. 

NINK. 

T«.V. 

Eyo 

eili/o 

esiiy 

nrii 

Kainl>iii(Ju 

IIUIIII 

twd 

kit  mi 

Miitidjnia 

mpiio 

WMrci 

kiimi 

Congo 

iimitiu 

avoa 

kii'ni,  ktnni 

Angola 

iiiiki 

ivoa 

kiimi 

Reiigera 

kir/iiiiiii 

kirkiii 

km 

Mukiia 

miUanii  iKiiii  nuiraru  nuUiinii  iiii  ni  mni^v^e  muloka 

Mudjana 

mzanazitiUu 

tnz(iiiaiiiti/iti/e 

i/iktimi 

Mukondo 

vitaiiu  Ml  virArii 

vilaiiii  nil  vi/ini 

miikfwii 

Tukwani 

tihi/iDiii  mi  itiilii 

nhyaiiii  iiii  iti/iti/e 

kuini 

Ma.'w'na 

sire 

fimlKi 

kiimi 

Hiilula 

ifre 

ftlll/nl 

kiimi 

Nyumbanri 

iikiimUiiiaro 

nkaimmune 

ikumi 

Zulu 

/muiHifto'ia  meiiim- 

tolni  no  mont/i 

/.limr  ( ') 

Bichuana 


liina 
hem  mriioiimt  iiielicri  hira  mnnoana  tnon-   /.iimr,  ^iiiiie 
aehria 


T  II  K    EN  I). 


